Manual Servicio NCR 6634

NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT
Service Manual
B006-7315-B000
v9
NCR - CONFIDENTIAL (RESTRICTED). Solely for distribution to and use by authorized persons, pursuant to company instructions.
COPYRIGHT AND TRADEMARKS
Information to User
The product described in this book is a licensed product of NCR
This equipment must be installed and used in strict accordance Corporation.
with the manufacturer’s instructions. However, there is no
guarantee that interference to radio communications will not The software products described in this document are
occur in a particular commercial installation. If this equipment copyrighted works of NCR Corporation.
does cause interference, which can be determined by turning the
NCR, Cx, Kalpana, Authentic, and APTRA are trademarks of
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to consult an NCR
NCR Corporation.
service representative immediately.
CAUTION Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation, registered in
the United States and/or other countries.
NCR Corporation is not responsible for any radio or
television interference caused by unauthorized Android and Chrome are trademarks of Google Inc.
modifications of this equipment or the substitution or
attachment of connecting cables and equipment iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the United
other than those specified by NCR. Such States and/or other countries.
unauthorized modifications, substitutions, or IOS is a trademark of Cisco, registered in the United States
attachments may void the user’s authority to and/or other countries and is used under license.
operate the equipment. The correction of
interference caused by such unauthorized All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
modifications, substitutions, or attachments will be
the responsibility of the user. Disclaimer:
It is the policy of NCR Corporation to improve products as

technology, components, software and firmware become
available. NCR therefore reserves the right to change
specifications without prior notice.
All features, functions and operations described herein may not

be marketed by NCR in all parts of the world. In some instances,
photographs are of equipment prototypes.
Therefore, before using this document, consult with your NCR

representative or NCR office for information that is applicable
and current.
© 2020
By NCR Corporation, Atlanta, Georgia, USA.
www.ncr.com
All Rights Reserved
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual i
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Cone
t n st
1. INTRODUCTION
NCR SelfServ34 AIT Reference Document and Safety

Information 2
Reference Documents 2
Safety Information 2
Electronics Boards 2
ATM Cash Security 3
Access 3
Barcode Reader 3
Fluorescent Lamps 4
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
preventive maintenance overview 7

Introduction 7
General & Cabinetry/Facia Checks 7
With Power On 7
With Power Off 8
Barcode Reader 9
Bunch Note Acceptor 9
Bunch Recycling Module 9
Card Readers 10
Motorised 10
Cash Acceptor and Recycler 11
Cash Dispensers 11
S1 Dispenser 11
S2 Dispenser 13
Coin Dispenser 14
Cheque Processing Module 14
Envelope Depository & Dispenser (PPD) 15
Depository 15
Fluiditi 15
Monitors and Keyboards 16
Printers 16
Scalable Deposit Modules 17
SDM 17
SDM2 17
ii NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Revision 18
Security Enclosure 19
General Checks 19
Door Hinge Lubrication 19
Security Enclosure Heaters 20

Security Enclosure Heater Test 20
Pre–requisite 20
Test Frequency and Timing 20
Security Enclosure Heater Test Procedure 20
Room Heater Test 21
Room Heat Low 21
Room Heat Timed 21
Room Heat Faulty 21
Room Heat OK 21
5285 business depository preventive maintenance 22

Introduction 22
Check Opening Force 22
USB 2D Barcode Reader (UBAR) 24

Cleaning 24
Bunch Note Acceptor (UD-686 or BNA2) 25

Visual Inspection of Belts 25
Transport 25
Cleaning Materials 25
Sensors 25
Main Transport Unit 26
Recognition Unit (Area Three) 27
Recognition Unit (Area Four) 28
Reject Unit (Area Four) 29
Escrow Unit 30
Adjusting Sensors After Cleaning 33
Bunch note acceptor (BNA3) preventive maintenance 35

INTRODUCTION 35
Tools Needed 35
Device Overview 36
Important Notice 36
Cassette Sensors 36
Feed/Reject and Main Transport Sensors 42
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual iii
CONTENTS
Photo Sensors in Escrow Unit 42
Photo Sensors in Bill Validator 43
Revision 45
CArd readers preventive maintenance 46

INTRODUCTION 46
Cash Acceptor & REcycler Preventive Maintenance 47

Cleaning Tools & Materials 47
Pre-Acceptor 47
Sensor Cleaning 47
Belt Cleaning 49
Separator Stack Area 49
Roller Cleaning 50
Separator Transport 51
Belt Cleaning 51
Pre-BV Transport 52
Belt Cleaning 52
Roller Cleaning 53
Bill Validator (BV) 53
Sensor Cleaning 54
Guide Cleaning 54
Roller and Belt Cleaning 55
Calibration 57
Post-BV Transport 60
Belt Cleaning 60
Escrow 60
Sensor Cleaning 60
Belt Cleaning 62
Roller Cleaning 62
Reject Transport 63
Belt Cleaning 63
Removable Reject Bin 63
Sensor Cleaning 63
Belt Cleaning 64
Fixed Reject Bin 64
Sensor Cleaning 64
Belt Cleaning 65
Cassette Transport 65
Belt Cleaning 65
Roller Cleaning 65
Lower Transport 66
Belt Cleaning 66
Roller Cleaning 67
iv NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Cassettes 67
Exterior Cleaning 67
Roller Cleaning 67
Recycle Cassette 67
Deposit Cassette 68
Revision 69
Coin Dispenser Preventive Maintenance 70

Cleaning 70
itran 1000 check processor (CPM4) Preventive maintenance 71

Visual Inspection 71
Transports 71
Sensors 71
Stacking Bin Sensors 72
Multi Pocket Bin Sensors 72
Envelope Depository and Dispenser Preventive Maintenance73

Summary: 73
Inkjet Print Cartridge Replacement 73
Ink Pad Repositioning 75
Revision 76
Open Statement Printer 77

Media Delivery Assembly 77
Cleaning 77
Transport 77
Passbook Printer 78
SUMMARY 78
Cleaning 78
Cleaning the Ribbon Cartridge 79
Cleaning the Platen 79
Cleaning the Magnetic Head 79
Lubrication 79
Printing Unit Support Rails 80
Ribbon Feed Unit (RFU) Gear 81
Pressure Rollers Springs and Bearings 82
Magnetic Stripe (MS) Lead Screw 84
Shutter Shaft 85
Visual Check Of LEDs 86
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual v
CONTENTS
Revision 87
USB Receipt Printer 88

Transport Sensors 88
Thermal Print Head 89
Scalable Check Processing Module (SCPM) Preventive

Maintenance 90
Transport Drive Belts 90
Cleaning 90
Scalable Deposit Module 92

Summary 92
Sensors 93
Transport Drive Belts 93
Deskew/Horizontal Guide 94
Endorser Plate 94
Bill Validator 95
MICR Guide/Corner Drive 97
ERBM 99
Capture Bin Module (CBM) 101
Revision 102
Pressurisation Fan 103

Maintenance Tasks 103
Filter Cleaning 103
S1 Currency Dispenser 105

Summary checklist 105
Inspect the Pick Module 106
Single Pick Module 106
Double Pick Module 107
Pick Module Internal Timing (D Wheel Timing) 109
Pick Module to Pick Module Timing 112
Inspect the Presenter 113
S1 Front Access Sensors 113
S1 Rear Access Sensors 113
Inspect Cassettes 114
Diagnostics 115
Vacuum 115
vi NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Belt Alignment 115
Note Skew 116
Facia Alignment 116
Shutter 116
Revision 117

Summary Checklist 118
3. DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostics Overview 121

Introduction 121
System Application 121
Entering System Application 121
USB Service Key 123
Functions on System Application Main Menu 123
Transfer Interface 124
Save All 124
Shutdown 124
Exit 124
Maintenance 124
Device Diagnostics 124
Control Menu 125
Hardware Information and Recovery 125
Device Self Tests 128
Logs 128
Event Logs 129
Save Windows Info. 131
Custom Logs 131
Tallies 132
Service Tallies 132
Save Module Life Counts 133
Transaction Counters 133
Save Timestamped Tallies 133
Device Performance 134
Device Status List 134
Fault History 135
Clearing a Device State 136
Device Servicing 136
Fatal Error History 137
Self-Service Configuration 138
Display Hardware Details 139
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual vii
CONTENTS
Display Software Details 140
Set Device Configuration 140
Set Date and Time 141
Set Active Language 142
Set Active Printer 142
Set ATM Properties 142
Level 0 Diagnostics 143
Power-up Diagnostics 143
Initial Processor Diagnostics 144
System Test And Initialization 144
System Configuration Verification 144
Extended ROM BIOS Diagnostics 144
Switch Selectable Diagnostics 144
Extended Diagnostics 144
Test Tools 144
Bootable System Application 145
Revision 146
4. PRODUCT CABLING
6634 Product Cabling 149

Introduction 149
Distribution Diagrams 150
AC Distribution With UPS 150
AC Distribution Without UPS 151
DC Distribution (Fascia) 152
DC Distribution (Top Box) 153
DC Distribution (Safe) 154
USB Distribution 155
Talladega Motherboard 155
Pocono Motherboard 156
Estoril Motherboard 157
Misano Motherboard 158
Physical Layout of the Pocono PC Core USB Connections 159
Alarms 161
Alarm System Interconnection Diagrams 161
Basic Alarm System With Status 161
Enhanced Alarm System Without Status 162
Enhanced Alarm System With Status 163
Enhanced Alarm System for Medium / High Security 164
viii NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Basic Alarms Harness 165
Athena Alarms Harness 166
Enhanced Alarms Harness 167
Door Switch Harness (Ral) 168
Audio 169
Private Audio Harness Athena Cab 169
Private Audio Harness 170
Auto Supervisory Entry 171
Auto Supervisor Harness 171
Auto Supervisor Harness Without PA 172
Card Reader 174
MM Sensor Extension Cable 174
MM To Stage 1 Pcb Cable Assembly 175
Cim To Stage 1 Pcb Cable Assembly 176
Core 177
Floppy Disk Drive Cable Assembly 177
Ultra ATA Cable Assembly 178
Pivat Disk Security Harness 179
USB 2.0 4 Port Break Out Assembly 180
Serial ATA With Latched Connectors Cable Assembly 181
RIO Enable Harness 182
Reset And Tamper Harness 183
SDM 183
SDM DC Distribution Harness 183
SDM DCInterlock 184
External Cabling 185
Remote Devices Harness 185
Remote Status Monitor Enable Only 186
Currency Depository 187
UX GBNA DC Harness 187
Tilting Display 188
Motor Harness 188
Opto-Switch Harness 189
DC Hubs / Interlock Switch Harness 190
Up/Down Buttons Harness 190
Tilt with RIO Harness 191
Tilt without RIO Harness 192
Harnesses 193
Mains Switch Harness 193
AC Inlet Harness 194
AC Distribution Power Cord 194
High Power DC Distribution Harness 195
Low Power DC Distribution Harness 195
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual ix
CONTENTS
Fused DC Harness 195
Twin DC Harness 196
USB Type A to Type B High Speed (480Mbps) 197
USB Type A To Type Mini B High Speed (480Mbps) 198
VW3 / DU3 Topbox Harness (View 1 Of 2) 199
VW3 / DU3 Fascia Harness (View 1 Of 2) 201
VW3 / DU3 Fascia Harness (View 2 Of 2) 202
Video Cable Straight To 45 Degree 203
Heater Harness 203
6634 Coin Module Harness 204
Mitigation Dispenser Interlock Harness 205
S2 Retract Harness 206
Tray Harness (View 1 of 3) 207
Safe Module Harness 210
AUX MEI Contactless Harness 211
AUX MEI Biometric Harness 212
Display Port to DVI-D Cable Assembly 213
Display Port to VGA Cable Assembly 214
Printers 215
UX Serial P/T Passbook Printer Comms Harness 215
Serial P/t Passbook Printer Comms Harness 216
Parallel IEEE Compliant Cable Assembly 217
Roll Media Statement Printer Harness 218
Fan Fold Media Statement Printer Harness 219
Revision 220
6634 Interactive Teller Product Cabling 221

Introduction 221
Distribution Diagrams 222
AC Distribution With UPS 222
AC Distribution Without UPS 223
DC Distribution (Facia) 224
DC Distribution (Top Box) 225
DC Distribution (Safe) 226
Interactive Teller Distribution 227
Interactive Teller Distribution—VTM Camera (Analogue) 227
Interactive Teller Distribution—VTM Camera (USB) 228
USB Distribution 229
x NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Physical Layout of the Pocono PC Core USB Connections 233
Alarms 235
Alarm System Interconnection Diagrams 235
Basic Alarm System With Status 235
Enhanced Alarm System Without Status 236
Enhanced Alarm System With Status 237
Enhanced Alarm System for Medium / High Security 238
UX Door Switch Harness 240
Athena Alarms Harness 241
Enhanced Alarms Harness 242
Door Switch Harness (Ral) 243
Audio 244
Handset Adaptor Harness 244
Private Audio Harness Athena Cab 245
Private Audio AIT 247
Auto Supervisor Entry 248
Auto Supervisor Harness 248
Auto Supervisor Harness Without PA 249
Card Reader 250
MM Sensor Extension Cable 250
MM To Stage 1 PCB Cable Assembly 251
CIM To Stage 1 PCB Cable Assembly 252
Core 253
Floppy Disk Drive Cable Assembly 253
Ultra ATA Cable Assembly 254
Pivat Disk Security Harness 255
USB 2.0 4 Port Break Out Assembly 256
Serial ATA With Latched Connectors Cable Assembly 257
Reset And Tamper Harness 257
SDM 258
SDM DC Distribution Harness 258
SDM DC Interlock 258
External Cabling 259
Remote Devices Harness 259
Remote Status Monitor Enable Only 260
Currency Depository 261
UX GBNA DC Harness 261
Harnesses 262
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual xi
CONTENTS
Mains Switch Harness 262
AC Inlet Harness 263
AC Distribution Power Cord 263
High Power DC Distribution Harness 264
Fused DC Harness 265
Twin DC Harness 266
USB Type A to Type B High Speed (480Mbps) 267
USB Type A To Type Mini B High Speed (480Mbps) 267
USB Type A Extension High Speed (480 Mbps) 268
VW3/DU3 Facia Harness (View 1 Of 2) 271
VU3/DU3 Facia Harness (View 2 Of 2) 272
Video Cable Straight To 45 Degree 274
Heater Harness 274
6634 Coin Module Harness 275
Mitigation Dispenser Interlock Harness 276
UX1 RA/VW1P Tray Harness (View 1 of 2) 277
UX1 RA/VW1P Tray Harness (View 2 of 2) 278
Safe Module Harness 279
Ground Harness M4 Ring 280
AUX MEI Contactless Harness 280
AUX MEI Biometric Harness 281
6634 Interactive Teller Harness 282
6634 Interactive Teller Harness with Analogue Camera 282
6634 Interactive Teller Harness with USB Camera 283
6634 Handset Harness 284
Camera Power Harness 285
ID Scanner Power Harness (5V) 286
ID Scanner Power and USB Harness 287
ID Scanner Power and USB Harness (5V) 287
ID Scanner Power and USB Harness (24V) 288
Display Port to DVI-D Cable Assembly 289
Display Port to VGA Cable Assembly 290
Revision 291
5. POWER SUPPLIES
Universal 24V Power supply (600W) 293

Introduction 293
Description 294
Theory of Operation 294
xii NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Troubleshooting 294
Diagnostics 294
Power Supply Good Signal 294
Overload Protection 295
Restart after Shut-down 295
Strapping 295
Adjustment 295
Preventive Maintenance 295
Module Removal and Replacement 296
Mounting Method 296
Replacement 296
Cabling 297
Interconnections in NCR 663X ATMs 297
Connector assignment/pinouts 297
AC Connection 297
PSU AC Input Connector 298
Input Fuse 298
DC Output Connectors 298
Connector J7 299
Connector J8 299
Connectors J2, J3, J4, J5 and J6 299
Test/Adjustment Tools 299
UNINTERUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 300

Introduction 300
Description 300
XTREME Power Conversion® - Compact 1U 1K 300
Specification 300
Button Operation 300
Indicators 301
Storing the UPS 302
Eaton® - Rack Mounted with USB HID 302
Definitions 302
Specification 302
Indicators 303
Indications During Operation 303
Storing the UPS 305
Troubleshooting 305
1150VA Module 306
Diagnostics 307
Level 0 307
Level 1 307
Test 307
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual xiii
CONTENTS
Report 307
Level 3 307
S_DATA 307
Tallies 307
Strapping 307
Adjustments 308
Configuring The UPS 309
Normal Operation 309
Short Term Outage Or Voltage Variation 309
Long Term Outage Or Voltage Variation 309
Restart After Controlled Shut down 309
UPS Self Test 309
Cabling 310
Connector Assignment/Pinouts 310
6. CORE AND COMMUNICATIONS
USB 7 Port Hub 312

Introduction 312
Description 312
Power Requirement 313
Maximum Cable Lengths 313
Troubleshooting 313
Diagnostics 315
Strapping 316
Adjustments 316
Top Box Mounted Hub 316
Safe Mounted Hub 316
Cabling 316
Connector Assignment 317
Hub Board 317
ATM Interface 318
Talladega PC Core 320

Introduction 320
Identifying a Talladega PC Core 320
Description 321
Type 1 321
xiv NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Type 2 322
Motherboard 323
Motherboard Features 323
Power Requirements 324
Lithium Battery 324
ATX 12V Power Supply Unit (PSU) 324
PSU Specification 324
PIRAT Board 325
Disk Tamper 326
Reset and Tamper (RAT) Board 326
Disk Tamper 326
PCI PCCM Board 327
PCI/PCI Express Extender Card (Type 1 only) 327
Disk Drives 327
S-ATA DVD-ROM Optical Drive 328
S-ATA Hard Disk Drive 328
3.5-inch Floppy Disk Drive 328
Troubleshooting 328
BIOS Setup Utility Screens 332
PSU Remote On/Off Operation 336
Diagnostics 336
Power On Self Test 336
Beep Codes 337
Motherboard LEDs 338
Strapping 338
Motherboard Strapping 338
JP1 & JP2 339
JP3 340
JP4 - Clear Configuration (CMOS) Memory 340
Power Supply Unit Strapping 341
Adjustment 341
FRU Removal and Replacement 342
Type 1 342
Remove PC Core 342
Core Fan 343
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) 343
Power Supply Unit (PSU) 344
Floppy and Optical Disk Drives 344
Disk Security Feature 344
Installing RAM 345
Type 2 346
Remove the PC Core 346
Core Fan 346
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual xv
CONTENTS
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) 347
Floppy Disk Drive 349
Optical Disk Drive 349
Type 1 and Type 2 350
Replacing the Processor 350
Inserting and Removing Disks (Type 1 only) 351
Cabling 354
Interconnection Diagram 354
Floppy Disk Drive Cable 355
Serial ATA Cable (DVD and HDD) 356
Reset and Tamper Harness (if RAT Board Fitted) 356
USB 2.0 4 Port Breakout 357
PIRAT Talladega 358
Motherboard Connectors 359
Keyboard and Mouse Interface Connectors (K and M) 359
Serial Port 1 and 2 Connector (S1 and S2) 359
Parallel Port Connector (PAR 1) 359
Video - Analogue (VGA) 360
Video - Digital (DVI) 360
Audio Output Connector (Speaker) 361
Audio Output Connector (Line Out) 361
Microphone Input Connector (mic) 361
Network Connector (N) 362
USB 0 and 1 362
Reset/Power Good Interface (if RAT Board Fitted) 362
Reset/Power Good Interface (if PIRAT Board Fitted) 363
USB 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9 364
Optical Drive Connector 364
S-ATA DC Power Segment 364
S-ATA Signal Segment 365
PIRAT Board Connectors 365
J1 - 9 Way D Type Right Angled Connector 365
J2 - 12 Way Right Angled Connector 365
J3 - 3 Way Connector 366
RAT Board Connectors (if RAT Board Fitted) 366
J2 - 9 Way D Type 366
xvi NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Revision 368
Pocono PC Core 369

Introduction 369
Standard Casing (Pocono Q67 motherboard only) 369
Slim Casing 370
Description 370
Motherboard 370
Protection (Estoril and Misano Only) 372
Mandatory Passwords 372
SATA White List 373
ATX 12V Power Supply Unit (PSU) 374
Pocono Motherboard PSU 374
Estoril and Misano Motherboard PSU 376
Trusted Platform Module 1.2 & 2.0 (Estoril and Misano Optional) 377
PIRAT Board 377
PCI PCCM Board (Pocono only) 378
uATX Extender Card (Estoril and Misano only) 378
RS232 PCI Board (Estoril and Misano only) 379
RS232 PCIE Board (Estoril and Misano only) 379
Disk Drives 380
S-ATA DVD-RW Optical Drive 380
S-ATA Hard Disk Drive 380
Troubleshooting 380
Pocono 381
Estoril and Misano 383
PSU Remote On/Off Operation 386
BIOS Setup Utility 386
Estoril 387
Misano 410
Diagnostics 477
Power On Self Test 477
Motherboard LEDs 477
LAN Port LEDs 478
USB Connections 478
Pocono 478
4-Port USB Adapters 479
Estoril 480
Misano 481
Pocono PS2 Peripheral Connections 482
Strapping 484
Pocono Motherboard Strapping 484
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual xvii
CONTENTS
J COM 1 & 2 485
JP3 486
JP4 - Clear Configuration (CMOS) Memory 486
Display port configuration 488
Motherboard Jumpers 488
Display port configuration 491
Motherboard Jumpers 492
Power Supply Unit Strapping 493
Adjustments 494
Core Fan 495
HDD/SSD 496
Standard Casing (Pocono Only) 496
Slim Casing 498
DVD Optical Disk Drive 501
Slim DVD (Misano only) 501
Motherboard (Pocono) 501
Standard Casing (Pocono Only) 502
Slim Casing 502
Motherboard (Estoril and Misano) 503
Slim Casing 504
CPU Cooler (Pocono) 506
CPU Cooler (Estoril and Misano) 507
Removal 507
Replacement 507
Processor 508
Removal 508
Replacement 509
Memory Modules 510
Removal 511
Replacement 511
Lithium Battery 512
Trusted Platform Module (TPM) 513
Cabling 514
Pocono Interconnection Diagram 514
Estoril Interconnection Diagram 515
Misano Interconnection Diagram 516
Serial ATA Cable (DVD and HDD) 517
USB 2.0 Four Port Breakout 517
PS2 KB/MS Breakout Assembly 518
PIRAT (Pocono) 519
PIRAT (Estoril and Misano) 520
SATA Data and Power (Estoril and Misano) 521
xviii NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Pocono Motherboard Connectors 522
Serial Port Connector 522
Video - Analogue (VGA) 522
Video - Digital (DVI) 522
Display Port Connector (DSP1) 523
Audio Output Connector (Speaker) 523
Audio Output Connector (Line Out) 523
Microphone Input Connector (mic) 524
Network Connector (N) 524
USB 0 and 1 524
Reset/Power Good Interface (F_AUDIO, PANEL1, J2) 524
USB on Board (0, 1, 10, 11, 12, 13) 525
KBMS1 525
Optical Drive Connector 526
S-ATA DC Power Segment 526
Estoril Motherboard Connectors 526
Display Ports 526
DC Power 527
LCD Backlight Power 527
LVDS Header 527
Serial Port Internal Headers 527
PS/2 Header 528
SATA Power Connectors 528
Audio 528
Trusted Platform Module 530
Misano Motherboard Connectors 530
Display Port 530
DC Power 530
Serial Port Internal Headers 531
PS/2 Header 531
SATA Power Connectors 531
Audio 532
Trusted Platform Module 533
Diagnostic LED Header 534
PIRAT Header 534
Embedded Display Port (eDP) 534
PIRAT Board Connectors 535
J1 - 9 Way D Type Right Angled Connector 535
J2 - 12 Way Right Angled Connector 535
Test Adjustment 536
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual xix
CONTENTS
Revision 537
7. CARD READERS
card protection 539

Introduction 539
Description 539
Model 1 540
Functionality 540
Model 2 541
Functionality 541
Tilt and Vibration Kit (TVK) - Optional 542
Model 1 542
Model 2 543
Troubleshooting 543
CPK 543
SDK 544
Door switch 544
Diagnostics 544
Tallies 545
SDK and TVK Counter 545
Strapping 545
Adjustment 545
FRU Removal and replacement 545
cabling 545
Alarms Harness 545
USB Contactless Card Reader 547

Introduction 547
Description 547
Antenna Unit Connectors 548
Control Unit Connectors 549
Troubleshooting 550
Diagnostics 550
HW_DIAGNOSTICS Property 550
HW_SELF_TEST Property 551
HW_MAINTENANCE PROPERTY 551
HW_CONFIGURATION PROPERTY 552
Strapping 552
LEDs and MEEIs 552
xx NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Control Board 553
Adjustments 553
Cabling 553
Harnesses 553
USB Contactless Card Reader LED Control 553
USB Contactless Card Reader RF 554
Connector Assignments/Pinouts 554
+24V Power 554
USB 554
AUX 554
R.F. Out 555
LED/Buzzer 555
USB Contactless Card Reader 2 556

Introduction 556
Description 556
Antenna and control unit connectors 557
Troubleshooting 558
Diagnostics 560
Self Service Configuration 561
Strapping 562
Antenna LEDs and MEEIs 562
Control Board 563
Adjustments 563
Module removal and replacement 563
Cabling 563
USB CCR2 Antenna Cable 563
USB CCR2 Controller Cable 564
Connectors Assignment/Pinouts 564
DC 564
USB 565
RF Out 565
Miscellaneous Interface 565
LED/Buzzer 566
USB IMCRW 567

Introduction 567
USB Smart Dip Card Reader 568

Introduction 568
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual xxi
CONTENTS
Description 568
Magnetic Stripe Reading 568
Smart Card Reading 569
Security Feature 569
Troubleshooting 569
Diagnostics 570
S_DATA 570
TALLIES 571
Strapping 571
Adjustments 571
Cabling 572
USB mini‐ B connector 572
Power connector 572
USB Smart Dip Card Reader (Sankyo) 573

Introduction 573
Description 574
Operation 574
Power 574
Interface Connections 574
LED 574
Error Messages 575
Diagnostics 575
Strapping 575
Adjustments 575
FRU Removal And Replacement 575
Cabling 575
Connector Assignment/pinouts 575
USB connector (J10) 575
DC power supply connector (J6) 575
8. KEYBOARDS AND ENCRYPTORS
FDKs and Bezels 578

Introduction 578
Description 578
xxii NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Diagnostics 578
S_DATA 579
Tallies 579
PS2 Keyboard Test 579
Strapping 579
Adjustments 579
Troubleshooting 579
SelfServ 22e Only 579
All other SelfServ ATMs 580
Access 580
FDK Replacement (Rear Access) 580
FDK Replacement (Front Access) 581
FDK Keyboard Connectors 582
FDK Keyboard Harness 582
UEPP II 583
Introduction 583
Description 583
Keyboard 584
USB Mainboard 584
Removal Switches 584
USB Interface 584
Troubleshooting 584
Diagnostics 585
Key Detect Test 585
Communications Echo Test 586
Identify Command Test 586
Report Status Test 586
PC Keyboard Test 586
S_DATA 586
Tallies 587
Self Tests 587
Configuration 587
Configuration Options 587
Transfer Firmware Files 587
Display Version Number 587
Select Country Version 588
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual xxiii
CONTENTS
Delete All User Keys 588
Strapping 588
Adjustments 588
Assembly Replacement 588
Defective Assembly Disposal 589
Cabling 589
Test and Adjustment tools 589
Revision 590
QWERTY Keyboard 591

Introduction 591
Description 591
Heaters 591
troubleshooting 591
Diagnostics 592
Qwerty Detect Test 592
Identity Test 592
Qwerty Character Detect Test 592
S_DATA 592
Tallies 592
S_DATA 592
Strapping 593
Adjustments 593
Cabling 593
Connectors 593
Test Tools 593
Revision 594
China Encrypting Pin Pad (USBCPIN) 595

Introduction 595
Description 595
Keyboard 596
USB Main board 596
USB Interface 596
Mechanical Characteristics 597
Error Messages 597
xxiv NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Diagnostics 597
USBCPIN 598
Key Detect Test 598
Delete all User Keys 599
Report Status Test 599
PCI Audit Information Test 600
Authorize EPP for Removal 600
Authorize EPP for installation 600
Device Self Test 600
USBCPIN 600
USBCPIN Self Test 600
Tallies 601
Configuration 601
USBCPIN 601
Delete all User Keys 601
Strapping 602
Adjustments 602
Fru Removal And Replacement 602
Cabling 603
USB Mini B 603
Heater 603
Test/adjustment Tools 603
Universal Encrypting Pin Pad (III) and (IV) 605

Introduction 605
Description 606
Keyboard 606
USB Main board 606
USB Interface 607
Troubleshooting 607
Diagnostics 608
Level 0 diagnostics 608
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual xxv
CONTENTS
Key Detect Test 609
Report Status 609
Reset Removal Switches 610
PCI Audit Information 610
Tallies 611
Strapping 611
Adjustments 611
Transfer Firmware Files 611
Select Country Version 612
Damaged Assembly Disposal 612
Key Loading 613
Cabling 614
Revision 615
9. DISPLAYS
Standard Brightness Colour Displays 617

INTRODUCTION 617
DESCRIPTION 618
Display Illumination 618
Temperature Control 618
Displays Without a Heater - 12.1 inch and 15 inch Displays Only 618
Displays With a Heater 618
TROUBLESHOOTING 618
DIAGNOSTICS 619
Module Error Messages 619
STRAPPING 619
ADJUSTMENTS 619
Set-Up Instructions 619
xxvi NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Warm-up 620
On-Screen Display Parameters 620
Setting the Display Scaling - 15 Inch Scaleable Display Only 621
MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT 621
CABLING 621
CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS 621
12.1 Inch Display 622
Without Heater 622
With Heater 622
15 Inch Display 623
Without Heater 623
With Heater 623
15 Inch Scaleable Display 624
With Thermal Management 624
Without Thermal Management 624
Without Thermal Management - Low Cost 625
Power Connector 625
12.1 inch and 15 inch Displays 625
Data Signal Connector 625
15 inch Scaleable LCD 626
TOOLS 626
Sunlight Readable Colour Displays 627

INTRODUCTION 627
DESCRIPTION 628
12.1 and 15 Inch Displays 628
Displays Without a Heater - 12.1 Inch and 15 Inch Displays Only 628
Displays With a Heater 628
TROUBLESHOOTING 629
Diagnostics 629
STRAPPING 629
ADJUSTMENTS 630
Set-Up Instructions 630
Warm-up 630
Setting the Display Scaling - 15 Inch Scaleable Display Only 631
CABLING 632
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual xxvii
CONTENTS
Without heater 632
With heater 633
15 Inch Display 633
Without heater 633
With heater 634
Without Thermal Management Unit 634
With Thermal Management Unit 635
Power Connector 635
12.1 inch and 15 inch Displays 635
15 inch Scaleable Display 635
Data Signal Connector 635
12.1 and 15 Inch Displays 635
TOOLS 636
Revision 637
Backlight Displays 638

INTRODUCTION 638
DESCRIPTION 638
Interface Connections 638
7.0 inch Display 639
10.4 inch Display 639
ERROR MESSAGES 639
DIAGNOSTICS 639
STRAPPING 640
ADJUSTMENTS 640
FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT 640
CABLING 640
CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENTS/PINOUTS 640
LVDS Connector 640
Backlight Connector 641
LVDS Connector 641
LED Driver Connector 641
Light Bar Connector 641
TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS 642
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 642
Universal 12.1” and 15” Touchscreens 643

Introduction 643
Description 643
Interface 643
Troubleshooting 644
xxviii NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Fault Finding 644
Diagnostics 644
Self Test 644
Calibrating the Touchscreen 644
Strapping 646
Adjustments 647
Configuring and Adjusting the Touchscreen 647
Using the Keypad to Calibrate/Adjust the Touchscreen 647
Setting the User Button Behaviour 648
Click on Touch 648
Click on Release 648
Drag and Drop 649
Double Click 649
Adjusting For Cursor Offset 649
Adjusting the Screen Boundaries 650
Examining the Touchscreen Wire Values 650
Cabling 651
Access 651
Touchscreen Replacement (Rear Access) 651
Touchscreen Replacement (Front Access) 652
15 Inch Dynamo Displays 653

INTRODUCTION 653
DESCRIPTION 653
Thermal Management Module (TMM) 654
Warm-up Time 655
CONFIGURATION 655
Dynamo Display 655
ERROR MESSAGES 655
DIAGNOSTICS 655
STRAPPING 656
ADJUSTMENTS 656
Dynamo Display 656
Thermal Management Module (TMM) 656
Dynamo Display 659
Mini B USB Port 660
Type A USB Single Connector 661
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual xxix
CONTENTS
Type A USB Dual Connector 661
VGA Connector 661
DVI-I Connector 662
Temperature Sensor 1 662
Temperature Sensor 2 663
Fan Control 1 663
Fan Control 2 663
Heater 663
Power Input 663
CABLING 663
15 inch Touchscreen 665

Introduction 665
Description 665
Sensor 665
Controller 665
USB SAW Feature 665
Interface 666
Troubleshooting 666
Fault Finding 666
Diagnostics 666
Strapping 667
Adjustments 667
Configuring and Adjusting the Touchscreen 667
Controller 670
Glass 671
Cabling 671
Touchscreen Controller 672
Serial input/output and Power connector (P1) 672
Touchscreen connector (P2) 673
Test and Adjustment Tools 673
Graphical Operator Panel 674

Introduction 674
Description 674
Troubleshooting 675
Status Indicators 675
Fault Finding 675
xxx NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Diagnostics 677
Strapping 677
Adjustments 677
Calibrating the Panel 677
Graphics Card 678
GOP Assembly 678
GOP 678
uGOP 678
Cabling 679
Connections 679
GOP 679
uGOP 679
Compact Operator panel 681

Introduction 681
Description 681
Power 682
Troubleshooting 682
Fault Finding 682
Diagnostics 684
Strapping 684
Adjustments 684
Set–up Instructions 684
Warm–up 684
Calibrating the Panel 685
Working with On–Screen Display Parameters 685
Cabling 688
USB Min–B Connector 689
Digital Visual Interface (DVI–I) Connector 689
Power Connector 691
Test/Adjustment/Tools 691
Surface Wave Touchscreen 692

Description 692
Strapping 692
Adjustments 692
Touchscreen Calibration Test 693
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual xxxi
CONTENTS
Troubleshooting 695
Diagnostics 695
Diagnostic LED 695
Cabling 696
Touchscreen Connector 696
Power and Interface Connector 696
Tilting Display 698

Introduction 698
Description 698
Mechanical 699
Tilting Mechanism 699
Electronic 701
Control Boards 701
Sensor Control Board 701
Mini DC Hub 701
Electronic 702
Home Position Sensor 702
Error Messages 702
Diagnostics 702
Menu 703
Request Home Position 703
Menu 703
Device Test 703
Tallies 703
Strapping 703
Adjustments 703
Cabling 704
10. CAMERAS
CCTV 706
Introduction 706
Description 706
CCTV Camera 706
Camera Housing 707
xxxii NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Camera Connectors 708
Diagnostics 708
Strapping 708
Adjustments 709
Camera settings 709
DC Iris Level Adjustment 709
Lens Focusing 709
Lens Replacement 710
Cabling 710
NCR 6632 ATM 710
Harness - CCTV Colour Camera 710
NCR 6634 & 6638 ATMs 711
Harness - CCTV Colour Camera - Safe 711
Harness - CCTV Colour Camera - Top 711
Plug to Jack Harness 711
Colour Portrait Camera (USB) 713

INTRODUCTION 713
DESCRIPTION 713
USB Video Camera 713
TROUBLESHOOTING 713
DIAGNOSTICS 714
Self Test 714
CONFIGURATION 715
STRAPPING 715
ADJUSTMENTS 715
CABLING 716
USB Harness 716
DView Camera 717

INTRODUCTION 717
DESCRIPTION 718
Dimensions 718
Camera 718
Dual Power Board 718
Camera Specifications 719
Lens Properties 719
Lens Focus 720
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual xxxiii
CONTENTS
Temperature Requirements 721
ERROR MESSAGES 721
DIAGNOSTICS 721
STRAPPING 721
ADJUSTMENT 721
FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACeMENT 721
CABLING 722
Harness – CCTV Colour Camera – Safe 722
Harness Camera Power Top Box 722
Harness Camera PWR 12V Fascia 722
Harness 24V EXT 723
CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUT 723
Camera 723
Dual Power Board 724
Video Streaming Camera 725

Introduction 725
Description 726
Camera Specifications 726
Lens 726
Troubleshooting 727
Diagnostics 727
Tallies 729
Strapping 729
Adjustments 729
Camera Configuration 729
Cabling 731
11. PRINTERS
USB Fanfold Statement Printer 734

Introduction 734
Description 735
Dimensions 735
Transport Mechanism 735
xxxiv NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Print Engine 736
Location of Motors and Thermal Print Head 737
Location of Main Components for Bunching Operation 737
Life Expectancy 738
Environmental Requirements 738
Single Sheet Operation 738
Bunching Option Operation 738
Sensors 740
Paper Specification 741
Printable Area 742
Black Mark Position 743
Troubleshooting 744
Print Engine 744
Initial Checking 744
Troubleshooting and Repair Procedure 745
Paper Feed Problems 745
Frequent Paper Jams 746
Printer Does Not Print or Print Quality is Poor 746
Paper Is Not Cut / Cutter Home Position Is Not Detected 747
Diagnostics 748
Level 1 749
Sensor Test 749
Print Quality Test 749
Printer Alignment Test 750
Slew Test 750
Slew To Black Mark & Cut Test 750
Transport Forward Test 750
Paper Feed Motor Test 750
Knife Cut Test 750
Cut And Capture Test 750
Fascia Alignment Test 751
Level 3 751
Strapping and Switch Settings 752
Control Board 752
Cabling 754
Front Transport Harness Wiring 755
Main Control Board 755
Sub Board 759
Tools 763
Adjustments 763
Configuration in System Application 763
Transport Adjustments 764
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual xxxv
CONTENTS
Vertical Position of Transport 764
Bunch Paper Length 765
Removing the Print Engine 766
Removing the Transport 767
Removing the Hopper 768
Removing the Main Control Board 768
Removing the Sub Board 768
Revision 769
USB Journal Printer 770

Introduction 770
Description 770
Paper Roll 771
Printable Area 771
Journal Paper Low 771
Sensor Locations 772
Troubleshooting 772
LEDs Location and Meaning 772
General Checks 773
Diagnostics 774
Start-up Tests 774
LED Diagnostic Displays 775
Test Selected By Dip Switch 775
Switch and LED Locations 775
How to Enter a Test 775
Rolling ASCII Print Tests 776
“H” Print Test 776
Dot Check Pattern Test 777
Sensor Level Adjustment 777
Printer Configuration Printout 778
Sensor Test 778
Winding Motor Test 778
S_Data 778
Tallies 779
xxxvi NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Strapping 779
Switches 779
Adjustments 780
Head Assembly 780
Cabling 783
Pin Assignments 783
Revision 784
Page Turning Passbook Printer 785

Description 785
Main Components 785
Dimensions 786
Location Of Components 787
Form Handling Unit 788
Escutcheon 788
Inserter Shutter 788
Printing Unit 789
Thermal Protection of the Print Head 789
Magnetic Stripe Read/write Unit 789
Compact Image Reader (CIMR), Last Line Finder (LIF) 789
Automatic Page Turning Unit (PGU) 790
Capture Box 790
Backward Ejection Function (Capture Function) 790
Power Supply Unit 791
Power Supply Unit Voltage Outputs 791
Control Panel 791
Default Setting 793
Correction Values 793
Sensor Layout 794
Actuator Layout 795
Strapping 795
Diagnostics 795
Activating the Stand-Alone Test Mode 796
Key Function 796
Level 0 Tests 797
End of Test Command (00) 797
Magnetic Stripe Read Test 1 (01) 797
Magnetic Stripe Write Test 1 (02) 797
Printing Test (03) 797
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual xxxvii
CONTENTS
Feed and Eject Test (04) 798
Sensor Test 1 (Half Light) (05) 798
Sensor Test 2 (Standard) (06) 798
Sensor Test 3 (Dark) (07) 798
Reflection Sensor Medium Detection Value Learning (08) 798
Setting and Logging Information Output (09) 798
PIO Test (10) 799
Download Firmware 801
Report Firmware Versions 801
Establishment and Indication of Ribbon Counter Value (Alarm to Replace)
(58) 803
Magnetic Stripe Parameter Indication and Establishment (60) 804
Magnetic Stripe Parameter Indication and Establishment (6080) 804
Turn Page Test (In Order) (80) 804
Turn Page Test (Reverse Order) (82) 805
Printed Line Reference Test (Image Reader) (86) 805
Printed Line Reference (Image Reader) and Printing Test (87) 805
Printing Shade Check Test (8E) 805
Magnetic Stripe Read Data Printing Test (90) 805
Printer Information Indication and Establishment 806
Shading Test (E0) 807
Image Reader Centre Shift Correcting Test (E1) 807
Level 0 Error Codes 807
Detail of Define Dimensions Test 812
Tallies 816
S_DATA 817
M_status 817
Adjustments 817
Customization Adjustments 817
Adjustment for Passbook Width 817
Passbook Width Settings 818
Escutcheon Guide 818
Inserter Guide 819
Width Sensor 821
Automatic Page Turning Unit 821
Automatic Page Turning Unit Adjustment Procedures 822
Data Adjustments 823
Cables and Connectors 824
RS232 printer 824
USB printer 825
Removal and Replacement (RS 232 only) 826
Removing The Print Head 827
Re-installing the Print Head 829
Removing The Power Supply Unit 830
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Re-installing the Power Supply Unit 831
Troubleshooting 831
Fault Finding 832
Test Points 832
Faults on the RS232 printer 833
Faults on the USB printer 848
Revision 859

Introduction 860
Description 861
Printable area 861
Black Mark Alignment 861
Receipt Paper Low 861
Sensor Locations 862
One-sided Single Roll 862
Two-sided Single Roll 862
One-sided Dual Roll 862
Two-sided Dual Roll 863
Troubleshooting 864
LEDs Location and Meanings 864
General Checks 867
Diagnostics 868
Sensor Test 869
Print Quality Test - Front Hopper 869
Print Quality Test - Rear Hopper 869
Print Alignment Test 869
Slew Test 870
Paper Feed Motor(s) Test 870
Knife Cut Test 870
Slew To Black Mark Test 870
Service Tallies 870
Strapping 871
Fuse 871
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual xxxix
CONTENTS
Adjustments 872
Printer Configuration Printout 872
Printer Sensor Re–calibration Procedure 872
One–sided (1ST) Single Roll with or without Capture 872
One–Sided (1ST) Dual Roll with or without Capture 873
Two–Sided (2ST) Single Roll with or without Capture 874
Two–Sided (2ST) Dual Roll with or without Capture 876
Transport 879
Dual Feed Mechanism (Standard) 879
Dual Feed Assembly (Stamp) 880
Print Engine 881
One-sided 881
Two-sided 883
Fuse 884
One-sided Printer 884
Two-sided Printer 885
Front Hopper 885
Single Roll 885
Dual Roll 886
Rear Hopper 887
Hopper Low Sensor Harness 888
Logic Board 889
One Sided 889
Two Sided 890
Pin Assignments - USB connector (J6) 890
Single Roll Drive Board 891
One-sided 891
Two Sided 891
Dual Roll Control Board 892
Cabling 892
Revision 893
USB 2ST Statement/Passbook Printer 894

Introduction 894
USB Statement Printer 895

Introduction 895
Description 895
xl NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Black Mark Cut Position Offset 896
Statement Paper Low 896
Statement Paper Low 896
Sensor Locations (1ST and 2ST) 897
Troubleshooting 897
General Checks 898
Diagnostics 899
Print Test 900
Rolling ASCII Print Tests 900
“H” Print Test 900
Dot Check Pattern Test 900
Graphics Print Test 901
Adjustments 901
Sensor Test 901
Printer Alignment Test 902
Slew Test 902
Slew To Black Mark & Cut Test 902
Knife Cut Test 902
Cam Motor Test 902
Tallies 903
Strapping 904
Fuse 904
Adjustments 904
Transport 905
Print Engine 907
Hopper 907
Engine Signal Cable 907
Paper Low Sensor Cable Assembly 908
Capture Bin Full Sensor 909
Cabling 909
Logic Board 910
Board Layout 910
Pin Assignments - USB I/F connector 910
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual xli
CONTENTS
Drive Board 911
Pin Assignments - Power connector 911
Revision 913
12. SCANNERS
Barcode Scanner 915

Introduction 915
Safety Compliance 915
Description 915
UBAR 915
UBAR 2.5 916
Troubleshooting 916
Module States 916
Cleaning Viewing and Illumination Windows 917
Diagnostics 917
Reporting 917
Self Test 917
Strapping 917
Adjustments 917
Cabling 918
UBAR Illumination IR LED Driver Board (Not applicable to UBR 2.5) 918
Connector J1 918
Connector J2 (Power) 919
Connector J3 919
Connector J4 919
UBAR Interface PCB (Not applicable to UBR 2.5) 919
Connector J3 919
Connector J2 920
Document Scanner 921

Introduction 921
Description 922
Mechanical Specifications 922
Features 922
Technical Specifications 922
Machine Readable Zone (MRZ) Decoding 922
Imaging 923
Contactless Radio Frequency (RF) Scanning 923
xlii NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Electrical Specifications 923
Environmental Specifications 923
Error Messages 924
Diagnostics 924
Tallies 927
Strapping 927
Adjustments 928
Configuration Properties 928
Cabling 928
RJ45 Connector 929
ID Scanner 930
Introduction 930
Description 931
Mechanical Specifications 931
Features 931
Machine Readable Zone (MRZ) Decoding 931
Imaging 932
Electrical Specifications 932
Hardware Variants 932
Error Messages 933
Testing 934
Diagnostics 936
Lighting Indicators 936
Tallies 939
Debug 940
Strapping 940
Adjustments 941
Cabling 941
RJ45 942
DC 942
USB 942
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual xliii
CONTENTS
13. DISPENSERS
S1 Bill Alignment Dispenser 944

Introduction 944
S1 Variants 944
Pick Modules 944
Single and Dual Configuration 945
Operational Environment 945
Variants 945
Containers 946
Currency Cassettes 946
Purge Bins 946
Specifications 946
Weight 947
Dispenser Dimensions 947
Description 948
Path of Notes 948
Forming the Stack 948
Present 949
Reject 950
Purge 950
Sensors 951
Pick Module 952
Presenter Module 952
Linear Variable Displacement Transducer (LVDT) 953
Main Timing Disk 953
Bill Alignment Assembly 955
Note Clamp 957
Note Clamp Sensors 958
Presenter Transport 958
Presenter Timing Disk 960
Transport Sensors 960
Exit Sensor 962
Purge Bin Location Components 962
Purge Transport 962
Purge Sensor 963
Main Motor and Vacuum Pump 963
Voltage and Current 967
Compatibility 967
Dispensers Security Switch 967
Configuration Switches 967
Diagnostic LEDs 968
xliv NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Firmware Description 968
Troubleshooting 969
Module State Table 969
Troubleshooting Procedures 972
M_Status 3 ‐Pick Failure 972
M_Status 5 ‐Sensor Failure/Currency Jam in Main Transport 973
M_Status 12 ‐Presenter Clamp/Alignment Mechanism Failure or Jam 973
M_Status 13/14 ‐Shutter Jammed Open/Closed 973
M_Status 18 ‐Currency Jam in Presenter Transport/Sensor Failure 974
M_Status 29 ‐Timing Disk/Motor Failure 974
Diagnostics 975
Level 0 Tests and Result Codes 975
Clear 977
Set Notes 977
Stack 977
Present 978
Dispense 978
Main Motor 978
Self Test 978
Exit Shutter 978
Sensor/Switch Status 978
Presenter Bill Drive 978
Learn Bill Parameters 978
Presenter Clamp 979
Pick Valve 979
Run‐ To‐Run 979
Tamper Indication 979
Get Serial Numbers 979
Serial Number Read Sensors Status 979
Actual To Virtual Cassette Mapping 980
Example 1 980
Example 2 981
S_DATA 981
Tallies 981
Strapping 984
Currency Dispenser Control Board 984
Adjustments 985
Drive Belt Tension 985
Drive Belt Arrangement ‐Rear Access 985
Drive Belt Arrangement ‐Front Access 986
Currency Evaluation Qualification Procedure 986
Calibrating the Dispenser 986
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual xlv
CONTENTS
Establishing Singularity and Size 988
Calculation of Reject Rate 992
Error Messages 992
Dispenser Clear Transport Error 992
Change Parameter Errors 993
Learn Parameter Errors 994
Cleaning Serial Number Read Transport Cameras 995
Authorization and Authentication Procedure 996
Parts Validation 996
Authentication 996
Dispense Protection Configuration 997
Removing the Electronics Box (Rear Access) 998
Replacing the Electronics Box 1004
Removing the Control Board 1004
Removing the Main Motor 1009
Removing the LVDT 1009
Replacing the LVDT 1011
Pick Module Timing 1012
Cabling 1012
Internal Cables 1012
Dispenser Main Motor 1012
Dispenser Interconnection Diagram 1013
Front Access Presenters Cabling (Sheet 1 of 4) 1014
Front Access Presenter Cabling (Sheet 2 of 4) 1015
Rear Access Presenter Cabling (Sheet 1 of 4) 1018
Connector Assignments 1022
USB Connector 1022
Transport LEDS and Sensors 1022
Pick Modules 1023
Note Thickness Sensor/ LVDT 1023
Stepper Motors 1024
Intelligent Cassette Interface 1024
Clamp Middle Position Sensor 1024
Motor Sensors 1025
+24V Connector 1025
+24V_Interlock Connector 1025
Fascia Shutter I2C Connector 1026
TTL Shutter Connector 1026
Test Adjustment Tools 1026
xlvi NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Revision 1027
Aria Pick Module 1028

Introduction 1028
Specifications 1029
Weight 1029
Voltage And Current 1029
Function of the Pick Module 1029
Cassette Guides and Latch 1030
Cassette Identity Sensors 1030
Pick Module Keyplate 1030
Pick Action 1030
Pick Timing 1031
Pick Sensor 1031
Cassette Low Sensor 1032
Belt Transport 1032
Main Motor and Vacuum Pump 1032
Pick Interface Boards 1033
Single Pick Interface Board 1034
Double Pick Interface Board 1034
Serial Number Read 1035
Adjustments 1036
Separating the Pick Units of the Aria Double Pick Module 1037
Pick Unit Internal Timing 1038
Double Pick Module Pick Unit Relationship 1039
Presenter Timing 1040
Pick Module to Presenter Timing 1040
1 High Dispenser 1040
Test Tools 1042
Aria Single Pick Unit Harness (Sheet 1 of 2) 1043
Aria Single Pick Unit Harness (Sheet 2 of 2) 1044
Aria Double Pick Unit Harness (Sheet 1 of 2) 1045
Aria Double Pick Unit Harness (Sheet 2 of 2) 1046
Strapping 1047
Fuse FS1 1047
Connector J1 1048
Connector J2 (Single Pick) and J5 (Double Pick) 1050
Gulp Feed Detector 1052
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual xlvii
CONTENTS
Low Temperature Thermistor 1052
Connector J4 (Single Pick) And J2 (Double Pick) 1052
Connector J3 (Single Pick) and J3/J4 (Double Pick) 1053
Control Signals 1053
Sensor and Cassette Data Bus Signals 1054
Revision 1055

Introduction 1056
Description 1056
Cassette Variances 1057
1000 Rupee Wide Cassettes Distinguishing Features 1058
Standard Security Currency Cassettes 1059
Tamper Indicating Currency Cassettes 1060
Fluiditi Currency Cassettes 1061
Cassette Components 1062
Wide Plastic Cassette - Components 1063
Tamper Indicators 1063
The Cassette Body 1063
The Cassette Lid 1064
The Cassette Base 1064
Cassette Operation 1065
Pusher Operation 1066
Insertion Counter 1067
Cassette Identification Code 1067
Cassette Body to Lid Identification 1069
Troubleshooting 1070
Diagnostics 1070
Strapping 1070
Adjustments 1070
Currency Length Adjustment 1070
Segment Type Note Adjustment Spacers 1071
Fixed Size Note Adjustment Spacers 1071
Currency Width Adjustment 1072
Currency Length, Note Guide and “E” Spacer Codes 1074
Wide Currency Cassette 1074
1000 Rupee Wide Currency Cassette 1077
Currency Loading 1079
Opening The Cassette 1080
Removing Unused Currency 1082
xlviii NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Pusher Operation 1082
Currency Release 1083
Preparing Currency 1084
Resetting The Tamper Indicating Cassette 1085
Loading The Cassette 1086
Closing The Cassette 1088
Setting The Cassette Identification Code 1090
Changing Cassette Identification Code 1092
Mechanical 1093
Currency Length Adjustment 1094
Currency Width Adjustment 1103
Currency Width Spacer Codes 1109
Note Low Sensing Adjustment 1110
Cabling 1112
Tools 1112
Revision 1113
Coin Dispenser (Hopper Style) 1114

Introduction 1114
Description 1114
Weight 1115
Mounting 1115
Power 1115
Control Board 1115
Hopper Assembly 1116
Jam Rate 1116
Hopper Bin Numbering 1117
Chute Orientation 1118
Dispense Sequence 1118
Sensor 1118
Status Lights 1119
Currency Configuration 1119
Security 1119
Container Capacities 1120
Error Messages 1125
Diagnostics 1126
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual xlix
CONTENTS
S_DATA 1127
Byte 0 (Module) 1127
Byte 1-8 (Hoppers) 1128
Tallies 1128
Coin Dispenser Self Test 1128
Strapping 1129
Adjustments 1129
Default Hopper Thresholds 1129
Entering Threshold Values 1129
Hopper Configuration Menu 1130
CX Coin Dispenser 1131
Replacing the Control Board 1131
Harnessing 1133
Replacing the Rotor 1137
Hopper Cover 1138
Replacing the Complete Hopper Cover 1139
Replacing the Frame or Lid 1139
Replacing the Hopper Bin 1140
Replacing the Hopper Assembly 1142
CX25 Coin Dispenser 1144
Replacing Control Board 1144
Harnessing 1145
Replacing the Rotor 1147
Replacing the Hopper Cover 1147
Replacing the Hopper Bin 1148
Replacing the Hopper Bin Extension 1148
Replacing the Hopper Assembly 1149
Revision 1151

Introduction 1152
Description 1153
Weight 1153
Presenter Core 1154
Nose 1154
Carriage 1155
Bill Aligner Module (BAM) 1156
Single Note Transport (SNT) 1156
Main Motor and Pump Assembly 1157
l NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Currency Cassette 1159
Purge Bin 1160
Status Indicator Lights 1161
Vacuum System 1161
5/6 Hi Expansion Board 1163
Electrical System 1165
5/6 Hi Expansion Board ‐5 High 1166
Sensors 1167
Error Messages 1168
Control Board 1168
Pick Module 1169
Cassette 1171
Purge Bin 1173
Divert Area 1173
Reject Area 1173
Retract Area 1173
Carriage 1173
Single Note Transport 1177
Presenter 1179
Exit Shutter 1181
Suction Cups 1182
Media Aligner 1182
Vacuum System 1183
Carriage Alignment 1184
Carriage Motor Cover 1185
Carriage Umbilical Cable 1186
Carriage Plates Parallel When Open 1186
Carriage Movement 1188
Checks with Carriage Removed from Presenter 1188
Diagnostics 1189
Action Requests 1192
Clear 1192
Stack 1192
Present 1193
Retract 1193
Self Test 1193
Learn Measurement 1194
Set Guidance Lights 1194
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual li
CONTENTS
Prepare for Shipment 1194
Enable Stack Ready 1195
Calibrate Sensors 1195
Diagnostics Tests 1195
Pick Arm Test 1195
Pick Valve Test 1196
Shutter Test 1198
Divert Gate Test 1198
SNT Test 1199
Carriage Test 1199
Clamp Test 1199
Media Deflector Test 1200
Read Sensors Test 1200
Error Codes 1204
M_Status and M_Data 1204
Tallies 1205
Strapping 1206
Adjustments 1207
Pick Module Timing Procedure 1207
4–High Dispenser 1207
5–High Dispenser 1208
Cleaning Serial Number Read Transport Cameras 1210
S2 Carriage Offsets for Open and Latchfast Purge Bins 1210
Latchfast Bin Latch 1210
Jam Clearance 1211
How to move the Carriage to the Closed position 1212
HETS Calibration 1212
Setting Node Parameters 1213
Establishing Singularity and Width 1215
Error Messages 1217
Authorization and Authentication Procedure 1217
Parts Validation 1217
Authentication 1218
Carriage Umbilical Harness 1221
Removing the Carriage Umbilical Harness 1222
Replacing the Carriage Umbilical Harness 1222
Carriage 1224
Removing the Carriage 1224
Replacing the Carriage 1225
Nose 1227
Removing the Nose 1227
lii NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Replacing the Nose 1228
Bill Aligner Module (BAM) 1228
Removing the BAM 1229
Replacing the BAM 1231
Single Note Transport (SNT) 1232
Removing the SNT 1232
Replacing the SNT 1235
Main Motor and Pump Assembly 1235
Removing the Motor and Pump Assembly 1236
Replacing the Motor and Pump Assembly 1237
Removing the Double Pick Module Assembly 1238
Replacing the Double Pick Module Assembly 1241
Removing the Single Pick Module Assembly 1241
Replacing the Singe Pick Module Assembly 1243
Removing the Main Control Board 1244
Replacing the Main Control Board 1244
5/6 Hi Expansion Board 1244
Removing the 5/6 Hi Expansion Board 1244
Replacing the 5/6 Hi Expansion Board 1244
Pick Support Frame 1244
Removing the Pick Support Frame 1244
Replacing the Pick Support Frame 1245
Latchfast Security Plate 1245
Removing the Latchfast Security Plate 1245
Replacing the Latchfast Security Plate 1245
Presenter Core 1246
Removing the Presenter Core 1246
Replacing the Presenter Core 1249
Presenter Assembly 1250
Removing the Presenter Assembly 1251
Replacing the Presenter Assembly 1251
Cabling 1251
Presenter Harness 1251
Interface Harness 1254
S2 Double Pick Module Harness 1255
Single Pick Module Harness 1257
Carriage Position Sensor Harness 1258
Dual Cassette ID Harness 1259
Single Cassette ID Harness 1260
SNT Harness 1260
BAM CIC Harness 1262
Purge Bin LEDs Interface 1262
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual liii
CONTENTS
Purge Bin Interface Harness 1262
State of Health Harness 1263
Test and Adjustment Tools 1263
Glossary of terms 1264
Revision 1265
S2 Dispenser Cassette 1266

Introduction 1266
Tamper Indicator 1267
Cassette Identification Code 1267
Cassette Body and Lid Marking 1268
Cleaning 1268
14. DEPOSIT
Bunch Note Acceptor (UD700) 1270

Introduction 1270
Description 1271
Sensors and Actuators 1272
Escrow Unit 1272
Inlet Unit 1273
Reject and Feed Unit 1273
Main Transport Unit 1274
Bill Validator 1274
Cassette Unit 1274
Garage Unit 1275
Specification 1275
Currency 1275
Polymer Media 1275
Mechanism 1276
Communication 1276
Useful Reference Material 1276
Module Error States 1277
Device 1277
M_Status: 01 1277
M_Status: 03 1277
M_Status: 04, 11 1277
M_Status: 13 1278
M_Status: 14, 15 1278
Shutter 1278
M_Status:29 1278
M_Status: 35, 36 1278
liv NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Cash Bin 1278
M_Status: 33 1278
Transport 1279
M_Status: MS11. M_Data: 3011. 1279
M_Status: MS22. M_Data: 3202 & 3205. 1279
M_Status: MS23. M_Data: 8B52. 1283
M_Status: MS23. M_Data: 8B50. 1285
Escrow 1287
Inlet 1289
M_Status: MS26. M_Data: 3101, 0105 & 0106. 1291
Cassette 1292
M_Status: MS25. M_Data: 5201 & 5202. 1295
Picking 1296
Reject 1296
M_Status: MS27. 1296
Diagnostics 1297
BNA Diagnostics Procedure. 1299
S_DATA 1305
Tallies 1305
Strapping 1305
Adjustments 1306
Cassette 1306
Infeed Unit 1308
Infeed Unit (without clearance at rear of safe) 1309
Feed Reject Unit 1312
Recognition Unit 1316
MBV Harness Assembly 1318
Escrow 1319
Main Transport 1320
Control Board 1322
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual lv
CONTENTS
Cassette Connector (Front Access) 1324
Cassette Connector (Rear Access) 1325
MBV L Shaped PCB 1327
Door Switch Assembly (Front Access) 1328
Door Switch Assembly (Rear Access) 1330
Drawbridge Assembly 1332
Garage Unit 1334
Cabling 1334
Communication 1335
Shutter/MEI Control 1335
Revision 1336
Bunch Note Acceptor (UD-686) 1337

Introduction 1337
Description 1337
Movement of Notes 1338
Accept 1338
Reject 1339
Encash 1340
Refund 1340
Capture 1341
Sensors and Actuators 1343
Inlet Unit 1343
Reject Unit 1344
Feed Unit 1345
Transport Block and Escrow Unit 1345
Garage Inner Block 1348
Specifications 1349
Currency 1349
Dimensions 1349
Mechanism 1349
Communication 1349
Diagnostics 1352
Level 1 1352
Accept Notes 1352
Encash 1353
Force Encash 1353
Refund 1353
Force refund 1353
lvi NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Status 1353
report Definitions 1353
Synchronise 1354
Read Event Log 1354
Run to Run Sequence 1354
Shutter 1354
Retract 1354
Sort to Front Cassette 1354
Sort to Rear Cassette 1354
Force to Capture Bin 1355
List Templates 1355
List Firmware Version 1355
Download UD686 Firmware 1355
Level 3 1355
S_DATA 1355
TALLIES 1356
Strapping 1356
BV CPU Board 1357
DSP Board 1358
THR-AMP Board 1359
Power Board 1359
Motor Drive Board 1360
CPU-T Board 1361
CPU-1 Board 1362
CPU-2 Board 1362
CPU-3 Board 1363
Adjustment 1363
Alternative Bill Validator 1363
Inlet Unit 1366
Reject Unit 1368
Feed Unit 1370
Escrow Unit 1372
Bill Validator Unit 1374
BV-CPU Board, DSP Board, and THR-AMP Board 1376
Main Transport 1380
Inner Garage Block 1386
Electronics Boards 1390
Serial Power and Connector Block 1394
Template Download Board 1397
Garage Slides 1398
Bottom Left-Hand Rail 1398
Top Left-Hand Rail 1398
Base Rail 1399
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual lvii
CONTENTS
Right-Hand Rail 1400
Preventive maintenance 1400
Cabling 1400
Revision 1402
iTran 1000 ATM Cheque Processor 1403

Introduction 1403
Upper Module 1403
Variants 1404
Lower Module 1404
Description 1405
Security Shutter 1405
Infeed 1406
Thick Item Detector 1406
Early Thickness Detector (Stacking Bin Variant only) 1406
De-Skew Mechanism 1406
Sensors 1407
Track Sensors 1 and 2 (Short Infeed) 1408
Track Sensor 1 (Medium and Long Infeeds) 1408
Track Sensor 2 (Medium and Long Infeeds) 1408
Track Sensor 3 1408
Track Sensor 4 1408
Track Sensor 5 1408
Track Sensor 6 1409
Track Sensor 7 1409
Track Sensor 8 1409
Track Sensor 9 1409
Multi-Pocket Bin Track Sensors 10 1409
Multi-Pocket Bin Track Sensor 11 1409
Stacking Bin Track Sensors 10 to 14 1410
Multi-Pocket Bin Full Sensors 1410
Stacking Bin Empty and Full Sensors 1410
MICR Reader Module 1410
Front And Rear Imaging 1411
Rear Endorse Printer 1411
Single-Line Endorser 1412
Multi-Pocket Bins 1412
Stacking Bins 1413
Cheque Specification 1413
Weight 1414
lviii NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Diagnostics 1416
Level 0 1416
Phase 1 Test Results 1417
Phase 2 Test Results 1418
Level 1 1418
Enable 1418
Eject 1419
Endorse 1419
Capture Bin 1 1419
Capture Bin 2 1419
Capture Bin 3 1419
Clear 1419
Display Front Image 1420
Display Rear Image 1420
Sensors 1420
Shutter 1420
De-Skew Cycle 1420
Endorser Cycle 1420
Capture Bin Solenoid 1420
Transport Motor 1421
Integrity 1421
Run To Run 1421
Level 3 1422
S_Data 1422
Tallies 1422
Error Codes 1423
Strapping 1423
Adjustments 1423
Configuration And Calibration 1423
DFD Sensors Calibration 1423
Module Configuration 1424
Module Load File 1425
Camera Calibration 1425
Image Quality 1425
Camera Calibration Procedure 1425
MICR Reader Calibration 1426
Reader Performance 1426
Reader Calibration Procedure 1426
Mechanical Adjustments 1427
Medium and Long Infeed 1429
Bin Module 1431
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual lix
CONTENTS
CPM Transport 1433
Removal 1433
Installation and/or Replacement 1435
Multi-Pockets 1436
Removal 1436
Multi-Pockets Deflector Wire 1438
Removal 1438
Stacking Bin 1440
Removal 1440
Infeed 1441
Removal 1441
Top Guide 1444
Removal 1444
Removal 1446
Rails (Slides) 1447
Removal 1447
Cabling 1449
Shutter / MEI / Power Adapter Harness 1449
Infeed Sensors And LEDs 1450
Double Feed Detect 1451
Infeed And Horizontal Transport Motors 1452
Horizontal Guide Sensors And De-Skew 1453
MICR Pre-Amp Board 1453
Front And Rear Cameras 1454
Vertical Transport Motor And Sensors 1455
SL Endorser 1456
ML Endorser 1457
Bin Module Harness 1458
Stacking Bin Board (Sheet 1 of 4) 1459
Connector Board 1463
ATM Interface 1463
Communications Interface 1464
Power Interface 1464
lx NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
MEI and Shutter Interface 1464
Controller Board 1464
Print Head Board 1464
Multi Pocket Bin Island Board 1465
Stacking Bin Controller Board 1465
Tools 1465
Revision 1467
USB Envelope Depository and Dispenser 1468

Introduction 1468
Description 1468
Envelope Specification 1469
Nominal Size 1469
Retard Roller Shaft 1469
Troubleshooting Table 1470
Sensors 1479
Diagnostics 1480
Depository Control Board (Secondary Processor Test) 1480
Envelope Depository 1481
Envelope Dispenser 1483
Envelope Depository 1484
Envelope Dispenser 1484
Strapping 1485
Control Board Layout 1485
Long Transport Jumper 1485
Adjustments 1486
Adjusting for Envelope Length 1486
Control Board 1488
Dispenser 1488
Depository 1488
Deposit and Dispense Control Harnesses 1489
Long Infeed 1489
Mid Infeed 1489
Depository Motor 1489
Dispenser Motor 1490
Wiper Assembly 1490
Cabling 1491
Envelope Deposit Control Harness 1492
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual lxi
CONTENTS
Power Adaptor Harness 1493
Heater Adapter Harness 1494
USB Harness 1494
Deposit Bin TI Harness 1495
Envelope Dispenser Control Harness 1495
J1 - USB 1496
J2 - Envelope Dispenser Sensors 1496
J3 - Shutter 1496
J4 - Power 1497
J5 - Envelope Dispenser DC Motor 1497
J6 - PPD DC Motor 1497
J7 - Anti Fish Solenoid and Auto-Clean Solenoid 1497
J8 - Bin Present Sensor 1498
J9 - PPD Sensors 1498
J10 - Spare I/O 1498
J11 - Printhead Interface 1499
J12 - NOP 1499
J13 - Debug Interface NOP 1500
Revision 1501
iTRAN Scalable Check Processor 1502

Introduction 1502
Description 1502
Document Path 1503
Infeed - Single 1504
Infeed - Bunch 1504
De-skew Mechanism 1504
Front And Rear Cameras 1505
MICR Reader Module 1505
Sensors 1505
Escrow And Re-buncher (ERBM)(Bunch Feed variant only) 1507
Rear Endorse Printer 1507
Bin Module 1508
Specification 1508
Checks 1508
USB 1509
Weight 1509
Test Tools 1509
lxii NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Adjustments 1509
Configuration 1509
Copy Module Load Files From Removable Media 1510
Display Module Information 1510
Copy SCPM Trace Logs to Removable Media 1510
Mechanical Adjustments 1511
Infeed 1511
Transport Motor/Solenoids 1513
MICR 1513
Deskew/Feeder Harness 1513
Infeed - Short 1514
Infeed - Medium 1514
Stacking Bin Panel Mount 1515
Stacking Bin Interface 1515
Stacking Bin Flag Sensors 1515
Diagnostics 1518
First phase 1518
Second Phase 1519
Bunch Feed with Escrow Variant 1520
Single Feed 1520
Device Diagnostic Tests 1521
Enable 1521
Eject 1521
Endorse, Image and Capture 1521
Capture Bin 1 1522
Capture Bin 2 1522
Rebunch 1522
Clear 1523
Display Front Image 1523
Display Back Image 1523
Sensors * 1523
Shutter * 1523
Feeder Cycle * 1523
Deskew Cycle * 1523
Endorser Cycle * 1523
Solenoid * 1524
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual lxiii
CONTENTS
Transport Motor * 1524
Stacking Bin Integrity * 1524
Escrow/Rebunch Integrity * 1524
Device Integrity * 1524
Run to Run * 1524
LEVEL 3 DIAGNOSTICS 1525
S_Data 1525
Tallies 1525
ERROR CODES 1526
Bin Module 1527
Infeed (Bunch) 1528
Feeder 1529
ERBM 1530
Core Module 1531
Bad Actor Checklist and Alignment Instructions 1531
Introduction 1531
Reference Documents 1532
Tools Required 1532
6632 and 6634 Checklist and Alignment Instructions 1533
1. Revision Level of SCPM FRUs 1533
2. Log Book and Devlogs 1534
3. SCPM Tray 1534
4. SCPM Racking 1534
5. SCPM In-feed Transport Alignment 1534
6. SCPM In-feed Transport Engagement 1535
7. Fascia Alignment (6632 only) 1535
8. Shutter Test 1535
9. SCPM Mounting Tray Adjustment 1536
10. Media Preparation and Testing 1537
11. Run to Run Test 1537
12. Camera Test 1537
13. Completing the Adjustment Procedure 1538
Checklist Summary 1538
6638 Checklist and Alignment Instructions 1539
1. Revision Level of SCPM FRUs 1539
2. Log Book and Devlogs 1540
3. General Environment 1540
4. Inner Fascia Gasket 1540
5. Screws on LHS of SCPM 1540
6. SCPM Tray 1540
7. Outer Fascia Opening and Closing 1541
8. Sidebox Squareness Relative to the Safe 1542
9. SCPM In-feed Transport Alignment 1545
10. SCPM In-feed Transport Engagement 1545
lxiv NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
11. Shutter Test 1546
12. Media Preparation and Testing 1546
13. Run to Run Test 1546
14. Camera Test 1547
15. Completing the Adjustment Procedure 1547
Checklist Summary 1547
Revision 1549
Scalable Deposit Module (SDM) 1550

Introduction 1550
Description 1551
Infeed 1551
Core Module 1551
Bunch Feeder 1551
Double Feed Detect 1552
De-skew Mechanism 1552
Thick Item Detect 1552
MICR Reader 1552
Endorser 1552
Bill Validator (IBVM or DVM) 1553
Escrow and Re-Bunch Module (ERBM) 1554
Escrow 1554
Re-buncher 1554
Capture Bin Module (CBM) 1554
Transport System 1554
Fuse 1555
Item Paths 1556
Item Path - Accepted Items 1556
Item Path - Rejected Items 1557
Item Path - Returned Items 1558
Sensors 1559
Specification 1561
Item Criteria 1561
USB 1561
Shutter 1562
Endorser Ribbon 1562
SDM Core 1562
Infeed 1571
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual lxv
CONTENTS
Media Feeder 1573
Bill Validator: Imaging and Bill Validator (IBVM) or Deposit Validation
Module (DVM) 1575
ERBM 1577
Capture Bin 1579
Infeed Guide Moves Freely (M_Status 13/19 infeed Jam/68 Infeed
Hardware Fault/80 Transport Guide Open) 1582
Infeed Mounted Correctly (M_Status 13/19 infeed Jam/68 Infeed
Hardware Fault/80 Transport Guide Open) 1583
Endorser Platen Moves Freely (M_Status 17 Endorser Ribbon Empty/27) 1584
Endorser Ribbon Tension (M_Status 17 Endorser Ribbon Empty/27) 1585
IBVM Aligned Correctly (M_Status 21 IBVM Jam/22 IBVM Hardware
Fault) 1586
Retard Belts Move Easily (M_Status 37 Feeder Jam/38 SDM Core Jam) 1587
Deskew Idler Shafts Seated Correctly (M_Status 37 Feeder Jam/38 SDM
Core Jam) 1588
MICR Idler Shafts Seated Correctly (M_Status 37 Feeder Jam/38 SDM
Core Jam) 1589
Advance Belt Compression Springs Not Pinched (M_Status 38 SDM Core
Jam) 1590
Deskew Solenoids Connected Correctly (M_Status 38 SDM Core Jam) 1591
Deskew Solenoids Harnesses Secured (M_Status 38 SDM Core Jam) 1592
ERBM Aligned Correctly (M_Status 39 ERBM Jam) 1593
Clear Return Guide Undamaged (M_Status 39 ERBM Jam) 1595
Track Sensor Seated Correctly (M_Status 39 ERBM Jam) 1596
SDM Interlock Cover Missing (M_Status 42 - Internal Communication
Failure) 1597
Cheque Bin Belt Tracking Correctly (M_Status 53 Capture Bin Jam) 1598
Cheque Bin Diverter Moves Freely (M_Status 53 Capture Bin Jam) 1599
Bin Racking Indicated Correctly (M_Status 54 Capture Bin Fault) 1600
Retard Belts Free of Debris (M_Status 57 Double Feed Detected) 1601
Advance Belt Roller Undamaged (M_Status 57 Double Feed Detected) 1602
Advance Belt Assembly Ground Strap Routed Correctly (M_Status 57
Double Feed Detected) 1603
Drive Shafts Seated Correctly (M_Status 57 Double Feed Detected) 1604
Harness Routed Correctly 1605
Jam Clearance 1606
Infeed Jam 1607
SDM Core 1607
IBVM Jam 1608
ERBM Jam 1609
Feeder Jam 1610
Capture Bin Jam 1611
Cleaning 1613
lxvi NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Infeed 1615
Core 1618
IBVM 1622
MICR/Endorser 1626
ERBM 1629
Diagnostics 1630
Controller Board LEDs 1630
UDFD Transmit LEDs 1632
Device Diagnostic Tests 1633
S_Data 1642
Tallies 1643
Error Codes 1644
Strapping 1644
Adjustment 1644
Set Codeline Format for SysApp ENABLE 1644
Display Module Information 1645
Display Template Information 1645
Copy SDM Trace Logs To Removable Media 1645
Capture Bins 1646
Infeed 1647
Removal 1647
Replacement 1651
BILL VALIDATOR (IBVM) 1654
IBVM Removal 1654
IBVM Replacement 1655
BILL VALIDATOR (DVM) 1657
DVM Removal 1658
DVM Replacement 1658
ERBM 1661
Replacement 1667
Core Module 1668
Retard Cartridge 1668
Removal 1669
Replacement 1671
Installation Verification 1672
Cabling 1673
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual lxvii
CONTENTS
PCB to CBM - Harness 1673
PCB to Stepper Motors - Harness 1675
Arrowhead Sensor - Harness 1676
Solenoids, Endorser Motor - Harness 1677
INF/FDR Sensors/Motors - Harness 1679
Upper Guide Sensors - Harness 1683
Infeed Drain Wire - Harness 1684
Rear Guide Sensors - Harness 1685
PCB to IBVM- Harness 1686
PCB to MICR - Harness 1687
PCB to UDFD - Harness 1688
UDFD TX to RX - Harness 1689
Infeed Lower - Harness 1690
Infeed Upper - Harness 1691
Revision 1694
15. RECYCLERS

Introduction 1696
Description 1698
Currency Dimensions 1698
Currency length (long edge) 1698
Currency width (short edge) 1698
Mechanism 1699
Movement Of Notes 1699
Note Categorisation 1700
Accept (Primary Receipt of Notes) 1701
Deposit (Secondary Receipt of Notes) 1702
Refund (Cancel Deposit) 1703
Dispense (GBRU Only) 1704
Capture 1704
Dual GBNA/GBRU 1705
Sensors And Actuators 1706
Pre-Acceptor 1709
Separator 1711
Escrow / Reservoir 1712
Upper Transport 1713
BV Entry Transport 1715
Bill Validation Structure 1715
lxviii NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Lower Transport 1716
Lower Base 1716
Currency Cassette 1717
Status Indicator Lights 1718
Error Messages 1719
FRU Locations 1720
Error Tables 1721
Jam Clearance – Upper Module 1730
Pre-acceptor 1731
Separator (Stack Area) 1733
Top Module 1738
Separator Transport 1739
Post-BV Transport 1740
Pre-Bill Validator (BV) Transport 1740
Reject Transport 1741
Escrow Transport, Escrow, and Reject Reservoir 1741
Closing the Top Module 1743
Bunch Transport 1744
Cassette Transport and Fixed Reject Bin 1745
Cassette Transport and Removable Reject Bin 1747
Foreign Object Removal 1749
Pre-acceptor 1750
Separator (Stack Area) 1754
Separator Transport and Bill Validator 1756
Diagnostics 1758
Level 0 1758
Level 1 1758
Dispense Functionality 1758
Security 1758
Dispense Authorisation 1759
Clear IN 1759
Accept 1759
Encash 1760
Refund 1760
Status 1761
Status Test Output 1761
Report Definitions 1762
Deposit Run-To-Run Sequence1 1762
Deposit Run-To-Run Sequence 2 1762
Shutter Test 1763
Set Notes 1763
Stack 1763
Present 1763
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual lxix
CONTENTS
Dispense 1763
Test Cash Units 1763
Test Guide Light 1763
Dispense Run-To-Run Sequence 1763
Motor Test 1764
Save Statistics 1764
Save BV Info 1764
M_Status And M_Data 1764
Level 3 1764
S_DATA 1764
Tallies 1764
Strapping 1765
Adjustments 1766
Facia Shutter Alignment 1766
Lower Module To Upper Module 1768
Push Latch 1768
Interlock Switch 1770
Old Style 1770
New Style 1771
Belt Tension 1773
Gear Timing 1773
Bill Validator Calibration 1775
Cleaning 1775
Calibration 1779
FRU/Module Replacement 1780
FRU Locations 1781
FRUs In The Upper Module 1782
Bill Validator BV Unit - Removal 1782
Bill Validator BV Unit - Replacement 1783
BV Fan - Removal (early units only) 1785
BV Fan - Replacement (early units only) 1785
Pre-Acceptor - Removal 1786
Pre-Acceptor - Replacement 1789
Escrow and Reservoir - Removal 1791
Escrow and Reservoir - Replacement 1794
Separator PCB (Mounted on Separator) - Removal 1796
Separator PCB - Replacement 1798
Gas Strut - Removal 1798
Gas Strut - Replacement 1799
Separator - Removal 1799
Separator - Replacement 1801
Removable Reject Bin - Removal 1801
Main Upper PCB - Removal 1802
Main Upper PCB - Replacement 1803
Upper Transport - Removal 1803
lxx NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Upper Transport - Replacement 1807
BV Entry Transport - Removal 1807
BV Entry Transport - Replacement 1810
Separator to Escrow/Reservoir Timing Belts - Removal 1811
Separator to Escrow/Reservoir Timing Belts - Replacement 1813
BV Entry Transport to Upper Transport. Main Timing Belt - Removal 1813
BV Entry Transport to Upper Transport. Main Timing Belt - Replacement 1815
FRUs In The Lower Module 1815
Push Latch - Removal 1815
Push Latch - Replacement 1816
Lower PCB - Removal 1817
Lower PCB - Replacement 1819
Lower Transport - Removal 1819
Lower Transport - Replacement 1822
Currency Cassette (Deposit/GBNA, Recycler/GBRU, With/Without
Keylock) 1822
Power Supply - Removal 1822
Power Supply - Replacement 1823
Power Supply Fuses 1823
Reed Switches - Removal 1824
Reed Switches - Replacement 1825
Motor Assembly (Recycler and Deposit) - Removal 1825
Motor Assembly (Recycler and Deposit) - Replacement 1826
Harnesses 1826
Cassette Connector Harness - Removal 1826
Cassette Connector Harness - Replacement 1829
Link Harnesses 1830
GBNA/GBRU to ATM Link Cable - Removal 1830
GBNA/GBRU to ATM Link Cable - Replacement 1835
Upper to Lower Module Link Cable - Removal 1836
Upper to Lower Module Link Cable - Replacement 1840
Upper Module Link Cable - Removal 1840
Upper Module Link Cable - Replacement 1843
Cabling 1843
Interlock Switch Connections 1843
GBNA/GBRU To ATM Connectors 1844
Power Input Connector 1844
Communication 1844
PCB Connectors 1845
Tools 1849
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual lxxi
CONTENTS
Revision 1850
Cash Acceptor and Recycler Cassettes 1851

Introduction 1851
Description 1851
Cassette Variants 1851
Standard and Extended Cassettes 1852
Cassette Sizes 1852
Note Sensing 1852
Currency Sizes 1852
Currency width (short edge) 1853
Currency length (long edge) for Deposit Cassettes 1853
Currency length (long edge) for Recycler Cassettes 1853
Currency length (long edge) for Enhanced Recycle Cassettes 1853
Cassette Operation and Replenishment 1853
Opening the Cassette 1853
Stage Operation for Deposit Cassettes 1855
Stage Operation for Recycle Cassettes 1857
Latching the Note Stage 1858
Unlatching the Note Stage 1859
Closing the Cassette 1861
Replenishment 1862
Preparing Currency 1862
Loading a Cassette 1863
Unloading a Cassette 1865
Transporting and Storing Cassettes 1866
Diagnostics 1866
Strapping 1866
Adjustments 1866
Configuring the Cassette 1866
Configuring the Enhanced Recycle Cassette 1866
Using the Narrow Setting 1867
Using the Wide Setting 1867
Using the Special Narrow Setting 1869
Setting The Note Guide Clearance 1871
Media Widths 1872
Number of Guides and Spacers to Use 1872
Cutting the Note Guide Spacers 1873
Setting Identification Codes 1876
Accessing the Magnets 1876
Cassette Body To Lid Identification 1878
Colour Code Labels 1878
Indelible Ink Marking 1878
lxxii NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Fitting an Adaptor for Standard Cassettes in Extended Variant 1878
Cabling 1881
Tools 1881
Revision 1882
16. SECURITY
Alarms 1884
Introduction 1884
Location 1884
Basic Alarm System 1884
Enhanced Alarm System 1885
High Security Alarm System 1886
Description 1886
Diagnostics 1887
Level 0 1887
Level 1 1887
Level 3 1887
Strapping 1887
Adjustments 1887
Cabling 1888
Alarm Termination Panels 1888
Basic 1888
Basic and Enhanced/High Security 1889
Silent Alarm Connector, J1C 1889
Door Switch Connector, J2 1889
Alarm Output Connector, J3 1889
Vibration Sensor Connector, J4 1890
Enhanced 1890
Basic and Enhanced/High Security 1891
Silent Alarm Connector, J1 1891
Door Switch Connector, J2 1891
Alarm Output Connector, J3 1891
Composite Attack Connector, J4 1892
I/O Panel Alarm Output Connector 1892
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual lxxiii
CONTENTS
Revision 1894
Biometric Finger Print Reader (BFPR) 1895

Introduction 1895
Description 1895
BFPR 1895
Intelligent Fraud Detection (Stand Alone) 1896

Introduction 1896
Description 1896
Alert System Configurations 1897
Local Alarms (with status) 1898
Local Alarms (without status) 1898
Control Board 1898
Sensors 1899
Software 1899
Status LEDs 1899
IFD Replenishment Mode 1900
Cabling 1900
24V Power Supply Cable 1900
Replenishment Harness 1900
Replenishment Harness (SelfServ 32 RA only) 1900
IFD with Alarms Safe (F/A) Harness 1901
IFD with Alarms Top-box (F/A) Harness 1901
IFD with RIO Safe (F/A) Harness 1901
IFD with RIO Top-box (F/A) Harness 1901
IFD Alarms with RIO Board, without Status (R/A), 2.8m (SelfServ 25/32/34) 1901
IFD with Alarms, without Status (R/A), 5.3m (SelfServ 32 RA only) 1902
IFD with Alarms with Status, 3.3m (SelfServ 25 & 32 only) 1902
CONTROL BOARD CONNECTORS 1903
Sensors 1903
IFD Control board 1905
No Power 1905
Status LEDs Failed 1906
IFD Fault Finding 1906
Definitions 1906
Causes of False Alerts 1906
Additional Guidelines to Prevent False Alerts with IFD 1907
Guidelines for Proper Maintenance of ATMs with IFD 1908
Standalone IFD Test 1908
Remote Management Tool 1910
Diagnostics 1911
Strapping 1911
Test Tools 1911
lxxiv NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Adjustments 1911
Revision 1912
USB Intelligent Fraud Detection 1913

Introduction 1913
Description 1913
USB IFD Firmware 1914
USB IFD Replenishment Input 1915
USB IFD Analogue Inputs 1915
USB IFD Digital Inputs 1916
USB IFD Alarm Output 1916
IFD FAULT FINDING 1918
Introduction 1918
Definitions 1918
Causes of False Alerts 1918
Additional Guidelines to Prevent False Alerts with IFD 1919
Guidelines for Proper Maintenance of ATMs with IFD 1920
Sensor Reset for IFD XFS Component 1920
Motorized Card Reader 1921
Diagnostics 1927
S_DATA 1928
TALLIES 1929
Adjustments 1929
Cabling 1932
Control Board Connectors 1932
SelfServ Cabling 1933
SelfServ 24V Power Supply Cable 1933
SelfServ Replenishment Harness 1933
Replenishment Harness (SelfServ 32 RA only) 1933
SelfServ IFD with Alarms Safe (F/A) Harness 1933
SelfServ IFD with Alarms Top-box (F/A) Harness 1933
SelfServ IFD with RIO Safe (F/A) Harness 1934
SelfServ IFD with RIO Top-box (F/A) Harness 1934
IFD Alarms with RIO Board, without Status (R/A), 2.8m (SelfServ
25/32/34) 1934
IFD with Alarms with Status, 3.3m (SelfServ 25 & 32 only) 1934
Personas Cabling 1935
Personas 24v Power Supply Cable 1935
P77 Front Access Cabinet Open Detection Harness - Auto Supervisor 1935
P77 Front Access Cabinet Open Detection Harness - Manual Supervisor 1936
P77 Rear Access Cabinet Open Detection Harness - Auto Supervisor 1936
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual lxxv
CONTENTS
P77 Rear Access Cabinet Open Detection Harness - Manual Supervisor 1936
P70/75 Rear Access Cabinet Open Detection Harness 1936
P84/85 Cabinet Open Detection Harness 1937
P86/87 Cabinet Open Detection Harness 1937
Revision 1938
Fluiditi ATM security 1939

General Description 1939
Functional Elements 1940
Inputs 1941
Door Switches and Lock Shunt 1941
Tilt Switches 1941
Penetration Sensor 1941
Explosion Detector 1942
48 Hour Continuous Power Loss Activation 1942
Backup Battery Pack 1942
Explosion Detector Battery State 1942
Test Tools 1942
Strapping 1943
Alarm Board 1943
Adjustments 1944
Disarming The System 1944
Status Indicator LEDs 1946
Fusible Resistors 1946
Testing to Isolate the Problem 1947
Alarm Input 1947
Tilt Switches 1947
Door Switch Inputs 1947
Penetration Alarm Inputs 1948
Battery Backup 1948
Resetting the Board 1948
Clean–up After System Activation 1948
Personal Protection Equipment Contents and Guidelines 1949
Disposal Kit Contents and Guidelines 1950
Clean–Up Procedure after an Activation 1951
Internal Connections 1952
With Integrated 3 Hour Delay Function 1953
With In-line 3 Hour Delay PCB 1954
Connectors 1954
Explosion Detector - JP1 1954
Ink Injection Units Outputs - JP2 1954
lxxvi NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Switches And Spare Inputs - JP3 1955
Backup Battery Input - JP5 1955
Power And Comms - JP6 1955
Penetration Detector Input - JP7 1955
External LEDs Output - JP8 1955
Tilt Switch Input - JP9 1956
Sounder - JP11 1956
Internal LEDS Output - JP12 1956
Spare Inputs - JP13 1956
Alarm Output - JP14 1956
Spare Output - JP15 1956
Factory Programming - JP16 1957
Ink Injection Units 1957
Door Switches / Shunt / External Alarm Input 1958
Battery 1958
NCR Power & Comms 1958
Penetration Detector 1959
External LEDs 1959
Tilt Switches 1959
Alarm Sounder 1959
Internal LEDs 1960
Spare Inputs 1960
External Alarm Output 1960
Spare Outputs 1960
Product Safety Information: Marking Ink 1961
Overview 1961
What are the Health Risks? 1961
How to Handle the Marking Ink 1961
Contact with the Marking Ink 1962
Where Can I Find More Information? 1962
Material Safety Data: Encre Maculante 2BS Violet New 1962
Identification of Substance and Supplier 1962
Hazards Identification 1962
Composition/Ingredients 1963
First Aid Measures 1963
Fire Fighting Measures 1963
Accidental Release Measures 1963
Handling and Storage 1964
Exposure Controls/Personal Protection 1964
Physical and Chemical Properties 1965
Stability and Reactivity 1965
Toxicological Information 1965
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual lxxvii
CONTENTS
Ecological Information 1965
Disposal Considerations 1966
Transport Information 1966
Regulatory Information 1967
Material Safety Data: Encre Maculante 2NS Vert 1968
Material Safety Data: Mercury 1972
SECTION I - Hazardous Ingredients / Identity Information 1972
SECTION II - Physical / Chemical Characteristics 1972
SECTION III - Fire and Explosion Hazard Data 1973
SECTION IV - Reactivity Data 1973
SECTION V - Health Hazard Data 1973
SECTION VI - Precautions for Safe Handling and Use 1974
SECTION VII - Control Measures 1974
Revision 1975
Fluiditi Replenishment Security 1976

General Description 1976
Control Board And Pick Assembly 1977
Cassette Locking Latches 1978
Dispenser Bracket 1978
Inputs 1979
Door Switches and Lock Shunt 1979
Tilt Switches 1979
Penetration Sensor 1980
Spare Input 1980
Opto-Assemblies 1980
Infra-red Optics 1980
lxxviii NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Door Open Timer 1981
Illegal Cassette Withdrawal 1981
48 Hour Continuous Power Loss Activation 1981
Backup Battery Pack 1981
Explosion Detector Battery State 1982
Test Tools 1982
Strapping 1982
Alarm Board 1982
ICS Control Board 1983
Adjustments 1983
Accessing the System 1983
Normal Access Method 1984
Service Access Method 1985
Disarming the System 1985
Status Indicator LEDS 1988
TESTING TO ISOLATE THE PROBLEM 1988
Alarm Input 1988
Tilt Switches 1989
Door Switch Inputs 1989
Penetration Alarm Inputs 1989
Battery Back-up 1989
Illegal Cassette Withdrawal 1989
Fusible Resistors 1990
ICS Cassette Insertion 1990
Locking Latches 1991
Resetting the Board 1991
Clean–up After System Activation 1992
Personal Protection Equipment Contents and Guidelines 1993
Disposal Kit Contents and Guidelines 1994
Clean–Up Procedure Following an Activation 1994
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM 1997
With Integrated 3 Hour Delay Function 1997
With In-line 3 Hour Delay PCB 1998
Connectors - Alarm Board 1999
Explosion Detector - JP1 1999
Ink Injection Units Outputs - JP2 1999
Switches and Spare Inputs - JP3 1999
Control Board Comms - JP4 1999
Power and Comms - JP6 1999
Penetration Detector Input - JP7 2000
External Leds Output - JP8 2000
Tilt Switch Input - JP9 2000
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual lxxix
CONTENTS
Control Board Comms - JP10 2000
Sounder - JP11 2001
Internal LEDs Output - JP12 2001
Spare Inputs - JP13 2001
Alarm Output - JP14 2001
Spare Output - JP15 2002
Factory Programming - JP16 2002
Connectors - ICS Control Board 2002
Infra Red Optics / Servo Motor / Protractor - CONNs 1 to 4 2002
Penetration Short - CONN 5 2002
Control Board Power - CONN 6 2003
ICS Touch Memory - CONN 7 2003
Control Board Comms - CONN 8 2003
Battery - CONN 10 2003
Alarm Board 2004
Door Switches / Shunt / External Alarm Input 2004
Control Board Comms 2004
NCR Power & Comms 2005
External LEDs 2005
Tilt Switches 2005
Control Board Power 2006
Alarm Sounder 2006
Internal LEDs 2006
Spare Inputs 2006
External Alarm Output 2007
Spare Outputs 2007
ICS Control Board 2007
Ink Injection Units 2007
Control Board Power 2008
Control Board Comms 2008
Battery 2008
Product Safety Information: Marking Ink 2008
Overview 2009
What are the Health Risks? 2009
How to Handle the Marking Ink 2009
Contact with the Marking Ink 2009
Where Can I Find More Information? 2009
Material Safety Data: Encre Maculante 2BS Violet New 2010
lxxx NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Material Safety Data: Encre Maculante 2NS Vert 2015
Material Safety Data: Mercury 2019
SECTION I - Hazardous Ingredients / Identity Information 2019
SECTION II - Physical / Chemical Characteristics 2020
SECTION III - Fire and Explosion Hazard Data 2020
SECTION IV - Reactivity Data 2020
SECTION V - Health Hazard Data 2021
SECTION VI - Precautions for Safe Handling and Use 2022
SECTION VII - Control Measures 2022
Revision 2023
Skimming Protection Solution 2024

Introduction 2024
Description 2024
Capacitive Sensing 2025
Magnetic Field ‘Jammer’ 2025
Electrical 2026
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual lxxxi
CONTENTS
SPS Control PCB 2026
SPS Daughter PCB 2026
Module Error State Messages 2027
Check for Jamming 2029
Check for Detection 2029
False Jammer Alert or SPS Constantly On 2030
Diagnostics 2030
Diagnostic LEDs 2030
Post Repair Test: Run Sequence Test 1 2033
Service Tallies 2036
Configuration 2037
Strapping 2038
Adjustments 2038
SPS Bezel Moulding and Harness Assembly 2039
Drill Mat 2039
SPS Control Box 2040
Daughter PCB 2040
Interconnecting Harnessing 2043
SPS Control PCB Connectors 2044
Daughter PCB Connectors 2044
Cabling 2045
IFD2 (SPS) Control PCB to IMCRW Linker Harness (J12 SPS Control PCB) 2045
IFD2 (SPS) Harness ‐IMCRW Short Linker Harness (on IMCRW) 2046
IFD2 (SPS) Control PCB to Coil Linker Harness (J1 Daughter PCB) 2046
IFD2 (SPS) Control PCB to IMCRW Electrode Linker Harness (J9 SPS Control
PCB) 2046
Penetration Mat Harness (J4 SPS Control PCB) 2046
Short 2046
Long 2047
SS ASM (SPS) Replenishment Harness (J6 SPS Control PCB) 2047
ASM (SPS) Replenishment Harness (J6 SPS Control PCB) 2048
Revision 2049
Skimming Protection Solution (Dip Card Reader) 2050

Introduction 2050
lxxxii NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Description 2050
Error Messages 2052
Diagnostics 2053
Tallies 2056
Configuration 2056
Post Repair Test: Re-Baseline Sensor/Run Sequence Test 1 2058
Strapping 2061
Adjustments 2061
SPS Bezel and Driver Assembly 2062
Interconnecting Harnessing 2062
Drill Mat 2062
SPS Control Box 2063
Cabling 2064
SPS DIP Driver PCB to Control PCB Linker Harness 2065
USB Type A to Type Mini B High Speed Cable Assembly 2065
Penetration Mat Harnesses 2066
Short 2066
Long 2066
SS ASM (SPS) Replenishment Harness 2066
Bezel Assembly 2066
ASM Shield Ground Harness 2066
SPS Dip Bottom Electrode Harness 2067
SPS Dip Top Electrode Harness 2067
Connector Assignment and Pinouts 2067
SPS Control PCB Connectors 2067
Revision 2069
17. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT
Low Temperature Thermostat 2071

DESCRIPTION 2071
TROUBLESHOOTING 2071
DIAGNOSTICS 2071
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual lxxxiii
CONTENTS
STRAPPING 2071
ADJUSTMENTS 2071
CABLING 2072
Product Environment Heaters 2073

INTRODUCTION 2073
DESCRIPTION 2073
DIAGNOSTICS 2074
STRAPPING 2074
ADJUSTMENTS 2074
CABLING 2074
18. MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES AND INTERFACES
Miscellaneous Interface and Remote Input/Output Boards 2076

INTRODUCTION 2076
DESCRIPTION 2076
Miscellaneous Interface Board 2076
Remote Input/Output (RI/O) Board 2077
Night Safe Service 2077
Alarms Service 2077
Indicators Service 2077
Board Layouts 2078
DIAGNOSTICS 2080
Poly-Switches 2080
STRAPPING 2081
ADJUSTMENTS 2081
CABLING 2081
Interconnect Diagram 2081
Miscellaneous Interface Board Connectors 2082
+24V DC Power Connector (J5) 2082
USB Connector (J2) 2083
Audio Line I/P Connector (J1) 2083
lxxxiv NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Every Unit Item Connector (J3) 2083
Feature Connector (J4) 2084
Remote I/O Interface Connector (J7) 2085
Remote Input/Output Board Connectors 2085
+24VDC Power Connector (J1) 2085
Miscellaneous I/O Connector (J2) 2085
Alarms Status Connector (J3) 2086
Reserved I/O Connector (J4) 2086
Remote Relay and Remote Indicator Connector (J5) 2086
Enhanced, Express Banking and MFR Miscellaneous

Interfaces 2088
Introduction 2088
Description 2088
Enhanced Miscellaneous Interface Board 2088
Remote Input/Output (RIO) Board 2089
Board Layout 2089
Enhanced Miscellaneous Interface Board 2089
Remote Input/Output (RIO) Board 2089
Public and Private Audio Interface 2090
Enhanced Misc IF 2090
Express Banking and MFR Misc IF 2090
Diagnostics 2091
Diagnostics LEDs 2091
Polyswitches 2092
Strapping 2092
Adjustments 2092
Cabling 2093
Interconnect Diagram 2093
RIO/Advert Light Enable Harness 2095
Enhanced Misc IF Board Connectors 2095
USB Connector (J2) 2095
Audio Line I/P Connector (J1) 2096
Private Handset Microphone I/P Connector (J10) 2096
Private Handset Speaker O/P Connector (J11) 2096
Private Handset Hookswitch I/P Connector (J12) 2096
Microphone O/P Connector (J13) 2096
External Microphone I/P Connector (J14) 2097
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual lxxxv
CONTENTS
Every Unit Item (EUI) I/O Connector (J3) 2097
Featurised I/O Connector (J4) 2098
Remote I/O Interface Connector (J7) 2098
Remote I/O Board Connectors 2099
Miscellaneous I/F Connector (J2) 2099
Alarms Status Connector (J3) 2099
Remote Status Indicators, Remote Relay & Night Deposit Connector (J5) 2099
Reserved Input Connector (J4) 2100
Remote Status 2101

INTRODUCTION 2101
DESCRIPTION 2101
Power Supply 2101
DIAGNOSTICS 2101
Critical Indication 2102
STRAPPING 2102
ADJUSTMENTS 2102
CABLING 2102
Media Entry/Exit Indicators 2103

Introduction 2103
Description 2103
Diagnostics 2104
Strapping 2105
Adjustments 2105
Cabling 2105
USB DVD RW Slimline Drive 2106

INTRODUCTION 2106
DESCRIPTION 2107
Dimensions 2107
Mounting Orientation 2107
lxxxvi NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Disk Clamp System 2108
Tray Ejecting 2108
Manual Eject Button 2108
Emergency Eject Hole 2108
ATAPI Command 2108
Supported Disk Types 2109
Read and Write Speed 2109
ERROR MESSAGES 2110
DIAGNOSTICS 2110
STRAPPING 2110
ADJUSTMENTS 2110
CABLING 2111
USB Mini Interface 2111
DC 5 V In Connector 2111

Introduction 2112
Slim DVD SATA Super Multi Drive 2113

INTRODUCTION 2113
DESCRIPTION 2114
Dimensions 2114
Tray Ejecting 2114
Manual Eject Button 2114
Emergency Eject Hole 2114
ATAPI Command 2115
Supported Disk Types 2115
Read and Write Speed 2115
ERROR MESSAGES 2116
DIAGNOSTICS 2116
STRAPPING 2116
ADJUSTMENTS 2116
CABLING 2116
Kiosk eSATA Core Breakout 2117
Kiosk DVD eSATA + Power to Slimline SATA 2118
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual lxxxvii
CONTENTS
Signature Capture 2120

Introduction 2120
Description 2120
Functions 2120
Features 2121
Dimensions 2121
Error Messages 2122
Diagnostics 2122
Tallies 2124
Strapping 2124
Adjustments 2125
Replacing the Pen Batteries 2125
Cabling 2126
USB Interface 2126
Enhanced Audio 2127

Introduction 2127
Description 2127
Diagnostics 2127
Tests 2127
Master Volume Control 2127
Microphone Volume Control 2128
Jack Sense 2128
Self Test 2128
Waveform Audio Tests 2129
MIDI Sequence Tests 2129
Microphone Test 2129
Strapping 2129
Configuration 2130
Master Volume Configuration 2130
Microphone Volume Configuration 2130
Preserve Audio Level 2130
Public Audio Level 2130
Sound Hardware 2130
Cabling 2131
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
CONTENTS
Public/Private Audio with Volume Control 2132

Introduction 2132
Description 2132
Strapping 2132
Adjustments 2132
Test Tools 2132
Cable Information 2133
Diagnostics 2133
S_DATA 2133
19. SPECIAL PROCEDURES
Interactive Teller Troubleshooting 2136

Introduction 2136
Audio 2136
Unit Position 2137
Power 2137
ID Scanner 2138
Interactive Teller Camera 2138
Microphone 2138
Handset 2138
Coin Dispenser 2139
S1 Currency Dispenser Removal and Replacement 2140

Introduction 2140
Presenter Options 2140
Pick Modules 2140
Removal of In Service Replenishment Covers 2141
Removal of Lower Pick Module 2141
Replacing the Lower Pick Module 2142
Removing the Electronics Box (Rear Access) 2143
Replacing the Electronics Box 2149
Removing the Control Board 2150
Dispenser Control Board - Rear Access 2150
Removal of Fluiditi Security Module 2152
Dispenser Control Board - Front Access 2153
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual lxxxix
CONTENTS
Replacing the Control Board 2155
Removal of Upper Pick Module 2155
Rear Access 2155
Front Access 2157
Replacing the Upper Pick Module 2158
Removing the Presenter Module 2158
Rear Access 2158
Front Access 2158
Replacing the Presenter Module 2159
Control Board Authorisation 2159
Control Board Authentication 2161
Calibrating the Dispenser 2166
Establishing Singularity and Size 2169
Error Messages 2172
Dispenser Clear Transport Error 2172
Learn Parameter Errors 2174
Diagnostics 2175
Strapping 2175
Adjustments 2175
Drive Belt Tension 2175
Drive Belt Arrangement - Rear Access 2176
Drive Belt Arrangement - Front Access 2176
Tilting Display Removal and Replacement 2177

Introduction 2177
Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) 2177
REVISION
1 NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual
1. INTRODUCTION
NCR SelfServ34 AIT Reference Document and Safety Information 2
NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT Service Manual 2
NCR SELFSERV34 AIT REFERENCE

DOCUMENT AND SAFETY INFORMATION
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
This manual covers the devices used in the NCR SelfServ 34 ATM & Interactive Teller
(class number 6634) and should be read in conjunction with the following documentation.
l B006-6595, NCR SelfServ 34 ATM Parts Identification Manual

l B006-6594, NCR SelfServ 34 ATM Operator Overview
l B006-6586, NCR SelfServ 34 ATM Site Preparation
l B006-6590, NCR SelfServ 34 Installation Guide
l B006-7238, NCR APTRA 34 Interactive Teller Operator Overview

l B006-7239, NCR APTRA 34 Interactive Teller Installation Guide
l B006-7240, NCR APTRA 34 Drive-Up Interactive Teller Site Preparation
l B006-7241, NCR APTRA 34 Walk-Up Interactive Teller Site Preparation
SAFETY INFORMATION
Electronics Boards
This equipment uses Lithium Batteries. There is

a danger of an explosion if a battery is
incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the
same or equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries
according to local environmental guidelines.
ATM Cash Security
This system uses mercury in the tilt switches located on the back of
the currency dispenser module. Care should be taken when
handling the tilt switches to avoid a spillage.
Access
To prevent strain or injury when carrying out tasks on the inner facia
area of rear access terminals adjust your position to ensure that
your waist is at the level of the top of the security enclosure,
allowing your chest and abdomen to lie flat on the top of the security
enclosure. Your feet should be supported on a firm base.
Barcode Reader
The Barcode Reader Module uses a class 2 laser emitter that may be uncovered if the
scanner engine is interfered with in any way.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other

than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
Fluorescent Lamps
Fluorescent Lamps in display and fascia assemblies contain small

amounts of mercury. Dispose of according to applicable laws.
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
preventive maintenance overview 7
Revision 18
Security Enclosure 19
Security Enclosure Heaters 20
5285 business depository preventive maintenance 22
USB 2D Barcode Reader (UBAR) 24
Bunch Note Acceptor (UD-686 or BNA2) 25
Bunch note acceptor (BNA3) preventive maintenance 35
Revision 45
CArd readers preventive maintenance 46
Cash Acceptor & REcycler Preventive Maintenance 47
Revision 69
Coin Dispenser Preventive Maintenance 70
itran 1000 check processor (CPM4) Preventive maintenance 71
Envelope Depository and Dispenser Preventive Maintenance 73
Revision 76
Open Statement Printer 77
Passbook Printer 78
Revision 87
Scalable Check Processing Module (SCPM) Preventive

Maintenance 90
Sensors 93
Revision 102
Revision 117
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE OVERVIEW
INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides a schedule of Preventive Maintenance (P.M.) to be carried out for
each device, and also general ATM-level P.M. tasks. For detailed information on the device
tasks, refer to the appropriate device P.M. chapter.
GENERAL & CABINETRY/FACIA CHECKS

With Power On
Every visit Discuss performance of the ATM with the custodian/operator/first line maintainer and make
notes of any entries in the logbook, which require resolution. Inspect for vandalism and damage
and advise the customer or customer representative of any findings requiring repair.
Every visit Visually check for FRAUD/TAMPERING around the Keyboard, Fascia and Card Reader. Check for
foreign devices and extra wires or harnessing. Report such activities to your Territory or Service
Account Manager. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE A DEVICE, THERE MAY BE PERSONAL RISK -
PLACE THE ATM OUT OF SERVICE.
Every visit For remote sites, check for lighting around the building area. NCR is not responsible for building
lighting but does need to inform the proper persons (help desk or branch persons) of any safety
infractions or issues.
Every visit Report poor installation of Alarms/Comms cables to your territory manager. For example
excess cable loops lying in base of safe or cables interfering with moving parts etc. Where
possible tidy the installation to avoid ongoing interference with moving parts.
Every visit Remove media stored within both top-box and security enclosures (paper rolls, envelopes,
statement paper etc.) Remove currency storage bags and any rubbish lying inside the ATM.
Every visit Once the machine has been opened visually inspect the modules before you get started. Check
the cables and rails on all modules to ensure smooth operation.
Every visit Review error and tally logs either on-screen or printed and investigate any errors that may
require attention. Always print the tally logs and keep the last copy in the logbook. There may
be many Track 3 read errors on the MCRW and many communication errors; these do not
require any action.
Every visit Observe the general appearance of the ATM cabinet and clean as necessary.
Every visit Verify all fans are operating correctly and are not noisy, including the safe, LCD and power
supply fans.
Yearly Clean CD/DVD-ROM drive with cleaning disk.
Yearly Clean the display. Ensure that the dust seal is present and in good condition.
Yearly Ensure that camera facia windows are clean. If, for any reason, the camera is removed from the
terminal, the opportunity should be taken to clean the inside of the facia window and the
camera lens
Yearly Using a vacuum cleaner, remove all accumulations of dust residue from the facia jack socket.
Yearly Verify correct operation of AC interlock switches; ensure there is not excessive float on the
door when in the closed position that would allow the switch to operate intermittently.
Yearly If fitted verify correct operation of auto supervisor by opening/closing of fascia - listen for the
click etc. Verify that there is not excessive float on the fascia or cabinetry when in the home
position that would allow the switch to operate intermittently.
Yearly If the ATM is replenished by branch staff, ask them to remove all currency containers and the
currency from the currency cassettes, and return cassettes for examination. Check correct
operation of the cassette doors, brushes, spring fingers, pusher plate, and pusher plate
pressure. Check cassette note height and width guide settings are correct, check for high spots
in the settings.
Post-PM test On units that have Audio feature, ensure that the feature is working by using a head phone set.
Ensure that all Media Entry Indicators are operational.
Let the custodian/operator/first-line maintainer run a test transaction.
With Power Off

Yearly Where it is safe (incoming power to the ATM from the building supply is switched off, and there is
no danger to yourself or others from the electrical power), carefully check the tightness of the
power ground connection at the ATM.
Yearly Check the power ground (and polarity) at the wall outlet using a Circuit Tester (if available). The
outlet cover should not be removed - any issues should be escalated to the customer for
resolution. This is normally outside the scope of NCR Service Contracts, but it is important for ATM
performance.
Yearly Using a vacuum cleaner and (if necessary) air can, vacuum ALL internal surfaces of the ATM
including the PC core and fan, power supply, fans, and filters (where applicable).
Yearly Verify correct operation of the fascia and appearance door locks, verify locks are securely
fastened and locking nuts have not backed off. Ensure fascia is latching into position and door latch
plates are adjusted correctly.
Yearly Ensure all fascia mounted shutter doors are aligned and move freely, clean if necessary. Be sure
that the shutters have a covering over the circuit board portion of the shutter. Ensure shutter
assemblies are fully tightened onto the fascia.
Yearly Lubricate the safe door hinges with lubricant A (or similar low viscosity oil) as described in the
relevant section of the service manual.
Yearly Verify harnessing is not being snagged/damaged during door opening/closing operations and
ensure harnessing has been tied back properly after part replacement. Make sure all ground
straps are fitted to shutter assemblies, facias and to keyboards. Check harnessing is not being
snagged/damaged during module racking.
Yearly Ensure retract and slide assemblies are securely bolted in place.
Yearly If applicable, check condition of rain management components, ensure Mylar guides aren't torn.
BARCODE READER
Every visit Clean the viewing window on the outside of the facia with a soft cloth or lens tissue dampened
with water (or a mild detergent - water solution). If a detergent solution is used, rinse with clean
lens tissue dampened with water only
BUNCH NOTE ACCEPTOR

This table summarizes the schedule of P.M. tasks. See BNA2 or BNA3 Preventive
Maintenance chapter for detailed description of the tasks.
Every visit Clean all photo sensors are cleaned. Pay particular attention to the cleaning of the recognition unit
photo sensors and note surfaces, especially if high reject rates have been reported.
BNA2: After cleaning, reset the sensor output values by a carrying out a force refund or force
encash. Sometimes the removal of a large accumulation of dust can require the sensors to be
adjusted, so if after cleaning and a reset the sensors are still reporting as dirty, you should reset the
sensors using dip switches as described in BNA 2 P.M. chapter.
BNA3: sensors in the cassette should be cleaned using the cleaning plate provided with the device.
NCR part number 009-0024481 (set of 10 plates).
Every 3 The following items should be inspected for damage or slackness: Feed unit belts, recognition unit,
months transport belts, transport unit belts, reject unit transport, stacker belts, escrow unit tapes, cassette
stacker belts, and inlet unit transport belts. Replace at FRU level if required.
Yearly Make sure the BNA transport aligns correctly at fascia.
Yearly Check the luminous power of the UV lamp in the recognition unit.
BUNCH RECYCLING MODULE

This table summarizes the schedule of P.M. tasks. See BRM Preventive Maintenance
chapter for detailed description of the tasks.
Every visit Remove dust and debris with a lint-free cloth/canned air/electric duster.
Every visit Check and clean all sensors with a cotton bud.
Every visit Check for damage to rubber rollers and flicker in the pocket; damage or slackening of the escrow
tape; and damage or stretching of the transport belts in the upper, lower, bridge and vertical
transports.
CARD READERS
This table summarizes the schedule of P.M. tasks. See Card Readers Preventive
Motorised
Every visit Clean and inspect the read heads and smart contacts using Sys App cleaning test and cleaning card
(998-0052929), sprayed lightly with head cleaning fluid (603-8000539 or 603-9014721).
Every visit Clean rollers with soft cloth moistened with iso-propyl alcohol.
Every visit The shutter mechanism should be checked and adjusted for the shutter open and width switch
positions.
Every visit Verify MCRW transport aligns correctly at fascia.
Yearly The MCRW is to be replaced after every 383K transactions to minimize downtime and improve
reliability. This value should be reduced if the MCRW is located in a "dirty hostile environment." If
the MCRW was not swapped on the previous PM (refer to log book), swap it with one that has
been thoroughly refurbished.
Post-PM test Using the appropriate speed test card, run card reader speed test.
Ensure speed is 24 ±3%. -(not appropriate on VE or IMCRW Card Reader).
Where applicable check reading of track 1, 2 & 3 using diagnostics. - No Errors reported.
Where applicable check Smart card operation using diagnostics.
Every visit Clean dip reader with cleaning card (998-0052929) sprayed lightly with head cleaning fluid (603-
8000539).
Check that the dip debris access through the dip chassis is clear and can allow the passage of dust
and debris to clear the transport.
CASH ACCEPTOR AND RECYCLER

This table summarizes the schedule of P.M. tasks. See Cash Acceptor & Recycler
Preventive Maintenance chapter for detailed description of the tasks.
Every 3/4/6 3 months if average number of notes per day is more than 6000.
months 4 months if average number of notes per day is 2000 - 6000.
6 months if average number of notes per day is less than 2000.
l Preacceptor: clean sensors and belts.

l Separator stack: clean rollers.
l Separator transport: clean belts
l Pre-BV transport: clean belts and rollers.
l Bill validator: clean sensors, transport guide, rollers and belts. Calibrate the BV.
l Post-BV transport: clean belts.
l Escrow: clean sensors, belts and rollers.
l Reject transport: clean belts.
l Removeable reject bin: clean sensors and belts.
l Fixed reject bin: clean sensors and belts.
l Cassette transport: clean belts and rollers.
l Lower transport: clean belts and rollers.
l Cassettes: clean the exterior of the cassette and rollers.
CASH DISPENSERS
S1 Dispenser
This table summarizes the schedule of P.M. tasks. See S1 Dispenser Preventive
Every visit Use an air can or powered duster/compressor to remove dust from all areas of the dispenser.
Check for accumulations of dirt on sensors, belts and rollers.
Every visit Verify that the pick and presenter modules are correctly timed (D Wheel, Pick - Pick).
If you re-time the dispenser, check timing several times to be sure no teeth are missing on any
gears and timing stays true. As each pick module "D" lines up with the sensor, check that the half
round wheel is ready to contact the full circular wheel inside the pick module. Worn or broken
gears may warrant pick module replacement.
Every visit Inspect the pick module for wear or damage to the following, replacing as necessary:
l pick cups and pick arm assembly
l vacuum hoses, T-connectors and the filter
l gears and belts
l ribbon cables to pick interface boards
l sensors.
Every visit Inspect the cassettes and check how well cash is loaded.
Yearly Ensure that the note flicker at the purge bin is present, replace broken flickers or cable ties with a
new flicker.
Yearly Disconnect the vacuum tube from the bottom pick solenoid; replace the vacuum filter (445-
0612449). When you disturb the air filter some dust will drop down the tubing, be sure to clean
this out.
Yearly Clean the LVDT sensor wheels with cotton buds and alcohol.
Yearly Check the stacker wheels for damage and schedule module replacement if required.
Yearly Check purge bin micro switch for damage.
Yearly Ensure pick frame cassette latches operate correctly and lock cassette into position.
Yearly Check presenter to safe door cam ramp height setting.
Yearly Clean scanner in serial note read transport using compressed air or a soft thin brush or cotton bud.
A build-up of dirt can be removed using a lint free cloth moistened with soapy water or with an
alcohol free wipe. Cleaning should be more frequent in units with high note volume or which are
installed in dusty locations.
N/A Lubrication - Lubrication is only required on 66XX dispenser products when components are being
replaced.
Post-PM test Check that all interlock switches operate properly.
Perform the following Diagnostic tests: Vacuum, Belt Alignment, Note Skew, Facia Alignment and
Shutter.
Load the ATM with test currency. Test dispensers to ensure proper operation of all dispense
modules. Dispense 1 bill to the front of the ATM; ensure proper delivery and firm grip.
Post-PM test If there has been a high reject rate or complaints about ATM keeping money, dispense 40 bills to
ensure no bills are catching on (clipping) the shutter.
If clipping has occurred, verify correct operation of the shutter.
If clipping persists, then a module replacement should be scheduled and noted in the log book.
If applicable, adjust the presenter height guide within the safe or on the safe door for proper
dispensing out the ATM.
S2 Dispenser
This table summarizes the schedule of P.M. tasks. See S2 Dispenser Preventive
Every visit Remove any foreign objects, note fragments or paper clips.
Use an air can and vacuum to remove dust from all areas of the dispenser.
Remove note debris throughout the transport.
Every Visit Inspect the pick module for wear or damage or dirt build-up to:
- Pick cups and pick arm assembly
- Vacuum hoses and T-connections
- Air filter
- Gears and belts
- Sensors:
l Pick Sensors
l Width Sensor
l Stack Entry Sensor
l Divert Entry Sensor
l Carriage Bunch, Pre-Exit and Exit Sensors
l Carriage positions sensor and flags
l Purge Sensor (Reject Bin)
l Retract from Present (RFP) Entry Sensor
l Media deflector sensors
Yearly Check suction cups and replace if necessary.
Yearly Check that the pick modules are correctly timed.
If you need to re-time the dispenser, check timing several times to be sure no teeth are missing on
any gears and timing stays true.
Worn or damaged gears may require a pick module replacement.
Yearly Check the SNT Flicker Pads and SNT Note Deflector for damage or wear.
Yearly Disconnect the vacuum tube from just below the air filter to prevent dust from dropping down
into the tubing and replace the filter.
If some dust does drop down into the tubing it must be cleaned out.
Yearly Check the HETS rollers for debris build-up and clean if necessary.
Yearly Check purge bin micro switch for damage.
Yearly Check the smooth insertion of cassettes and purge bins and that latches engage easily.
Yearly Check the nose and carriage metalwork is not damaged or bent.
Yearly Check harnesses and parts that may contact the safe for damage.
Yearly Look at tallies, SOH and enhanced diagnostics telemetry to see if any FRUs are out of spec.
Yearly Run appropriate diagnostics for actions performed.
Yearly Check BAM edge register slides freely and BAM rack slides without interference.
Yearly Check carriage umbilical for wear or damage.
Yearly Clean scanner in serial note read transport using compressed air or a soft thin brush or cotton bud.
A build-up of dirt can be removed using a lint free cloth moistened with soapy water or with an
alcohol free wipe. Cleaning should be more frequent in units with high note volume or which are
installed in dusty locations.
Post-PM test Check that all interlock switches operate properly.
Perform the following Diagnostic tests: Pick Valve, Belt Alignment, Note Skew, Bunch Splay, Facia
Alignment and Shutter.
Load the ATM with test currency, test dispensers to ensure proper operation of all dispense
modules.
Dispense 1 bill to the front of the ATM; ensure proper delivery and firm grip.
Post-PM test If there have been excessive purged notes or incorrect amounts dispensed, dispense 40 bills to
ensure no bills are catching on (clipping) the shutter.
If clipping has occurred, verify correct operation of the shutter.
If clipping persists, then a module replacement should be scheduled and noted in the log book.
If applicable, adjust the presenter height guide within the safe or on the safe door for correct
dispensing.
COIN DISPENSER
This table summarizes the schedule of P.M. tasks. See Coin Dispenser Preventive
Every 3 Clean with mild detergent on a damp cloth.

months
Yearly Inspect the hopper bins and rotor for wear and damage.
Yearly Clean all sensors using compressed air can/electric duster.
CHEQUE PROCESSING MODULE

This table summarizes the schedule of P.M. tasks. See CPM4 or Preventive Maintenance
chapter for detailed description of the tasks.
Every visit Clean all sensors with a soft brush or compressed air can. Clean front and rear camera using
cleaning swabs (484-0051295). Clean all flat surfaces of transports using cleaning tissues (484-
0051501).
Every 3 Inspect the transport drive belts for damage, slackness or wandering. Replace at FRU level if
months required.
Yearly Verify CPM transport aligns correctly at fascia.
Post-PM Verify the operation of the shutter and transport, check print quality for fully formed and legible
Test characters and ensure camera images are clear.
ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY & DISPENSER (PPD)

This table summarizes the schedule of P.M. tasks. See Envelope Depository & Dispenser
Preventive Maintenance chapter for detailed description of the tasks.
Depository
Every 6 Install new inkjet print cartridge (009-0019525), usually supplied by customer. The ink jet print
months head should always be checked for end-of-shelf-life usage before insertion.
Yearly Replace the ink pad (445-0683162).
Yearly Use an air can and vacuum to remove dust from all areas of the depository.
Yearly Clean all belts and check for wear, if worn module replacement should be scheduled.
Yearly Inspect and clean all sensors.
Yearly Clean any evidence of ink droplets in the depository transport.
Yearly Clean the print head flex cable contacts. If contacts cannot be cleaned or if contaminated,
replacement should be scheduled.
Yearly Check for freedom of movement of anti-fish assemblies.
Yearly Verify PPD transport aligns correctly at fascia.
Post-PM test Perform the SOH task saying the ink jet has been replaced. You will be prompted to insert an
envelope. Verify the operation of the shutter and transport and check print quality for fully formed
and legible characters.
Every visit Verify customer is loading envelopes in alternating manner.

Yearly Use an air can and vacuum to remove dust from all areas of the envelope dispenser.
Yearly Inspect and clean all sensors.
Yearly Clean belts with a dry cloth (do not clean with a cleaning solution).
Post-PM test Verify correct operation of envelope dispenser using diagnostics.
FLUIDITI
The Yearly PM checks/tests for Fluiditi require ATM power to be both on and off. Every visit
check can be completed with the system armed however any repairs require the system to
be disarmed.
l Power on to disconnect the battery

l Power off to disarm the system
l Power on the run tests
l Power off to arm the system
l Power on to reconnect the battery.
Before completing the yearly checks/tests or any repairs, disconnect the battery and disarm the system as
described in the SAMM Fluiditi ATM Security and Fluiditi Replenishment Security documents.
Every visit Check (and repair if necessary):
Wiring harnesses.
All connectors on alarm and PDS boards to see if cables are seated properly.
Check battery voltage: under normal conditions 8.7 Volt minimum when the ATM is switched on
and minimum 11.2 when switched off. If the voltages are lower than these limits when the ATM
has been operating in normal conditions (i.e no prolonged period without power), the battery pack
should be replaced.
On ICS solutions, check the metal tangs or holding points on the cassette latches are intact.
Yearly Check switching internal to external status LED indicators, shunt switch, door timer.
Yearly Perform the following tests:
Test cassette position
Test ICS servos
Test cassette tamper position
Test battery test penetration mats
Test tilt switches
MONITORS AND KEYBOARDS

Every visit Check that the customer keyboard is centrally aligned in the aperture and no obvious damage or
leaks are present, this should be checked at installation or repair of a keyboard and on each visit.
Yearly If the face of the LCD or the vandal glass is dirty drop monitor back from the vandal glass and clean
the LCD face and the inside of the vandal glass. Ensure that the dust seal is present and in good
condition.
Post-PM test Verify touch-screen calibration accuracy within diagnostics.
Check that all keys on both the fascia and FDK keyboard assemblies are functioning properly.
PRINTERS
This table summarizes the schedule of P.M. tasks. See Passbook, Receipt, Open
Statement or Ticket printer Preventive Maintenance chapter for detailed description of the
tasks.
Every visit Ensure printer slots are free from obstruction, paint, moulding flash, burrs etc.
Every visit Ensure printer transport aligns correctly with fascia.
Every visit Ensure printer PCB covers are fitted and use air can and vacuum to remove dust / debris from
PCB. If dirt cannot be removed, replace printer.
Every visit Ticket printer - use a soft brush to clean paper dust from inside the printer and chassis area. Use a
compressed air cleaner to remove dust from the sensor optics.
Yearly Clean receipt printer thermal print head.

Yearly Use a compressed air cleaner and vacuum to remove dust from all areas of the printers.
Every 6 Page Turning Passbook - Check that every 6 months the customer cleans the ribbon cartridge,
months platen and magnetic head with cotton swabs and isopropyl alchohol. If it is obvious this is not being
done, perform these actions during the service visit, then advise the client of the importance of
the cleaning operations.
Every 6 Page Turning Passbook - lubricate printing unit support rails, ribbon feed unit gear, pressure rollers
months springs & bearings, magnetic stripe lead screw and shutter shaft.
Every 6 Ticket printer - if printed ticket has streaking, the thermal print head may need to be cleaned using
months a thermal printer cleaning card. A maximum usage of twice annually is recommended because IPA
solvents can damage rubber rollers with more frequent use. If cleaning the thermal head directly,
use an IPA solvent on a non-abrasive lint free cloth.
Post-PM test Check print quality for fully formed and legible characters and that receipts/statements are
delivered correctly, check knife operation and black dot being correctly cut. Check for correct
operation of paper low switch.
Clear fitness. Clear SOH and ensure that state of health indicates "Terminal Healthy"
SCALABLE DEPOSIT MODULES

This table summarizes the schedule of P.M. tasks. See SDM or SDM2 Preventive
SDM
Every visit Clean all sensors with a soft brush or compressed air can. Clean the plate below the ribbon
cassette. Clean the bill validator lenses.
Every 3 Inspect the transport drive belts for damage, slackness or wandering. Replace at FRU level if
months required.
Post-PM test Verify the operation of the shutter and transport, check print quality for fully formed and legible
characters and ensure camera images are clear.
SDM2
Every visit Clean the speed sensor (TS7) with compressed air can.
Clean the bill validator lenses
Every 3 Clean all sensors with a soft brush or compressed air can.
months Clean the endorser plate below the ribbon cassette.
Clean the separator rollers in the feeder.
Inspect the transport drive belts for damage, slackness or wandering. Replace at FRU level if
required.
Check the support strut and damper mechanism.
Post-PM test Verify the operation of the shutter and transport, check print quality for fully formed and legible
characters and ensure camera images are clear.
REVISION
Date Revision Description of Change
February 2018 A.1 New format
July 2019 A2 Combined schedule chapter for all devices
For problems with this publication please email:

FinancialHWL3.Support@ncr.com
For technical queries please contact your local NCR support.
SECURITY ENCLOSURE
GENERAL CHECKS
l Check the security enclosure interlock switch function by closing the security
enclosure door and running a motor test in diagnostics. Pull the security enclosure
door handle firmly while the motor is running
l If applicable, lubricate door hinges.
DOOR HINGE LUBRICATION

Lubricate the security enclosure door hinges with lubricant C, or a similar Special Purpose
Grease, at each (annual) preventive maintenance call.
Proceed as follows:
1. Open the security enclosure door.

2. Raise the door to the full height of the adjustment screw located in the hinge block.
Care must be taken when raising the door as damaged pins could fracture during
this process.
3. Clean the hinge pins. All corrosion or old lubricant should be removed from the pins.
4. Apply a small amount of grease to the hinges and wipe off the excess. Raise and
lower the door on the Allen screw to spread the lubricant over the surface of the
hinge pin.
Realign the door to the security enclosure body. Make sure that there is an equal gap
between the door and the body at both the top and bottom of the door.
SECURITY ENCLOSURE HEATERS

Terminals that are installed through the wall (TTW) into the outside world, are fitted with a
heater in the security enclosure. This heater is designed to keep the internal temperature of
the terminal above 10° Celsius or 50° Fahrenheit.
The terminal room is required to be at or above 10° Celsius, 24 hours a day, 7 days a week,
as defined by the NCR Site Preparation and Requirements.
NCR recommends that an annual check of security enclosure heaters and terminal room
heating systems is performed and reported back to the account support team.
SECURITY ENCLOSURE HEATER TEST

Pre–requisite
A Non–Flammable Freezer Aerosol propellant.
Below is a typical product, a local variant can be acquired to reduce cost.
Product Description Manufacturer Details

Ambersil, Freezer Spray—Fault Detection AMBERSIL
on Electronics Tel: +44 (0) 1278 727200
Fax: +44 (0) 1278 425644
E–mail:sales.uk@crcind.com
Web: www.ambersil.com
Test Frequency and Timing

Perform the security enclosure heater test annually, 2 months prior to the start of normal
cold temperature period.
Security Enclosure Heater Test Procedure

Perform the procedure below during a regular service visit in which the security enclosure
door is required to be opened, typically this would be on a Currency Dispenser service visit:
1. Open the security enclosure door.

2. Retract the currency dispenser module or BNA to gain access to the security
enclosure heater, typically, this is mounted on either the back wall or the floor of the
security enclosure.
3. Ensure that the AC Interlock is overridden, ensuring that the heater has mains
power applied.
4. Locate the security enclosure heater thermostat, normally close to the heater
assembly.
5. Using your hand or fingers, check the airflow above the heater to ensure the heaters
are not on.
6. Spray the freezer aerosol onto the thermostat for 10 seconds.
7. Check the airflow above the heater to ensure the heater comes on.
8. In a few minutes it should get too hot to touch.
9. Record this in the WO remarks as SECURITY ENCLOSURE HEATER TESTED
OK.
10. If the heater does not function. Does not come on or gets warm but not hot. Record
SECURITY ENCLOSURE HEATER TESTED FAIL. This action permits the
material to be ordered and a future WO set-up to investigate and correct the issue.
ROOM HEATER TEST

The air surrounding the terminal is required to be at a minimum temperature of 10° Celsius
24 hours a day, 7 days a week. Assuming the terminal operates for this same period.
Use the remarks below for an existing Work Order to indicate the site conditions to the
account team. These remarks permit the account team to address any room heater issues
with the customer.
Room Heat Low

Use this remark to describe installations that set down the room heat to 1° to 3° Celsius in
order to protect against water freezing level. This temperature is not enough to ensure that
our products operate correctly.
Room Heat Timed

Use this remark to describe installations with timed heaters to ensure Branch Staff are
warm during their working hours. This system is good and correct, but the heater switches
off at 17:00, and the temperature drops off during the evening and early morning.
Room Heat Faulty

Use this remark to describe installations where the room heater occasionally fails and the
estates management team is unaware of this.
Room Heat OK
Use this remark to describe a site where the heating system operates at 24 hours a day,
seven days a week with the temperature continuously at or above 10° Celsius.
5285 BUSINESS DEPOSITORY

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
INTRODUCTION
Check Opening Force
At least once a year check the average opening force for the 5285 Business Depository.
Note: Only applies to Fortis produced depositories, as identified by the label on the bucket
as the depository is opened.
You will need a force gauge capable of measuring a 5 lbs (22.2N) force or greater, for
example a Rapala© mechanical digital scale (see illustration below), or equivalent.
1. Secure the gauge hook centrally to the depository handle.

2. Perform at least 6 open and close actions, record the force required for each
operation.
3. Calculate the average opening force, if the average force is greater than 5 lbs
(22.2N) then replace the opening force compensator.
Opening Force Compensator
USB 2D BARCODE READER (UBAR)
CLEANING
On every service visit clean the viewing window on the outside of the facia with a soft cloth
or lens tissue dampened with water (or a mild detergent - water solution). If a detergent
solution is used, rinse with clean lens tissue dampened with water only.
CAUTION
Do not touch the imager lens. If necessary, only use compressed air
to clean the lens.
BUNCH NOTE ACCEPTOR (UD-686 OR

BNA2)
VISUAL INSPECTION OF BELTS

At intervals of three months the escrow unit tape and the belts in the following areas should
be inspected for damage, slackness, or wandering:
l Feed Unit
l Recognition Unit Transport
l Transport Unit
l Reject Unit Transport and Stacker
l Cassette Stacker
l Inlet Unit Transport
l Escrow Unit Tapes.
TRANSPORT
Clean all flat surfaces of transports (for example: Inlet and Recognition units) with wet
cleaning tissues.
CLEANING MATERIALS
The following cleaning materials are the only ones authorised for use on the BNA:
l Canned air, 10 oz. - Systemedia Stock No. 526487

l Lint free cloth moistened with soapy water
l Soft thin brush.
CAUTION
Do not use any cleaning fluid on the BNA surfaces other than that
specified above.
SENSORS
Sensors should be cleaned at every service call with a soft brush where possible or
compressed air jet for inaccessible sensors.
Pay particular attention to the sensors indicated in the following illustration:
Main Transport Unit

Area 1
1. Using the compressed air and tube attachment, insert the tube approximately 10 cm
(4 in.) into the areas shown below.
2. Apply compressed air to the four sensor lenses under the top bracket.
3. Apply compressed air to the four sensor lenses along the top surface of the lower
bracket.
Area 2
Clean four prism ends

under the top bracket Clean four lenses
on lower bracket
2. Apply compressed air to the four prism ends under the top bracket.
3. Apply compressed air to the four sensor lenses along the top surface of the lower
bracket.
Recognition Unit (Area Three)

1. Open the vertical feed transport. Lift up the green pin-latch and pull down the
transport.
Clean four lenses

under the top bracket

on lower bracket
3. Apply compressed air to the four sensor lenses under the top bracket and to the four
prism ends along the top surface of the lower bracket.
Recognition Unit (Area Four)

(4 in.) into the area shown below.

under the top bracket
Clean four lenses

on lower bracket
2. Apply compressed air to the four prism ends under the top bracket and to the four
sensor lenses along the top surface of the lower bracket.
Reject Unit (Area Four)

Push the lever that cleans the sensors in the Reject Unit a few times.
Escrow Unit
1. Remove the escrow unit.
2. If the escrow unit is the older type (pre October 2005), you will need to remove the
metal cover to access some of the sensors.
Pre Oct 2005 Post Oct 2005
3. Insert the cleaning brush through the hole in the escrow unit cover and gently clean
the two inward facing surfaces of the photointerrupter sensor PIR1.
CAUTION
The escrow tape is very thin and susceptible to damage. Take care
not to dislodge the tape from the guide or to press against the tape
with the brush.
Sensor surfaces
Escrow tape
4. Insert the cleaning brush through the hole in the escrow unit cover and gently clean
the photosensor PSR3.
Sensor surfaces
Dark portion of
escrow tape
5. Make sure that the dark portion of the escrow tape runs between the two parts of the
sensor. If the tape is clear, rotate the drum so that the dark portion is between the
transmitter and receiver.
6. If the escrow unit cover was removed, replace it.
7. Replace the escrow unit in the BNA.
8. Check that notes are processed without problems using 30 genuine notes and either
ATM commands or RAS command “0202”. Pay particular attention to the operation
of the escrow unit.
Adjusting Sensors After Cleaning

Usually the sensor output values are automatically adjusted by a carrying out a force refund
or force encash to initiate a reset after cleaning. However sometimes the removal of a large
accumulation of dust can require the sensors to be adjusted.
If after cleaning and a reset the sensors are still reporting as dirty, you should reset the
sensors as follows:
1. Remove the two screws securing the panel covering the electronics boards at the
left-hand side of the garage unit and lift off the panel.
2. Slide bit 8 of dip switch 1 to the upper (ON) position.
LCD ST key CL key
RSW1
RSW2
Dip Switch 1
3. Switch the BNA on.

4. Rotate RSW1 and RSW2 so that the LCD displays ‘FF’.
5. Press the ST key.

6. Rotate RSW1 and RSW2 so that the LCD displays ‘61’.
7. Press the ST key.
9. When the characters displayed on the LCD stop flashing, the sensor adjustment is
complete.
10. Press the CL key.
13. Press the ST key to reset the BNA.
14. Make sure that the reset has been completed then switch off the BNA.
15. Slide bit 8 of dip switch 1 to the lower (OFF) position.
16. Replace the cover.
BUNCH NOTE ACCEPTOR (BNA3)

INTRODUCTION
All the photo sensors in the BNA should be cleaning at every service call. See the next
sections for detailed instructions.
Tools Needed
Phillips No.2 screwdriver (effective length 150 mm (6 in.) or more).
Cleaning Materials
The only authorized cleaning materials for use on the BNA are:

l Soft thin brush.
l Cleaning plate (attached as one of the accessory parts), NCR part number 009-
0024481 (set of 10 plates)
CAUTION
Do not use any cleaning fluid on the surfaces of the BNA other than
that specified above.
Device Overview
Feed/Reject and Main

Transport Units
Bill Validator
Escrow Unit
Garage Unit
Locking Lever
Garage Unit Door Latch Cassette
Important Notice
Access to banknotes must be in compliance with the owning organization’s in-house
procedures.
CASSETTE SENSORS
The lcoation of the cassette sensors is shown in the illustration below:
Screwdriver in Left hand Hole Screwdriver in Right Hand Hole

Cleaning Plate Moves Leftward Cleaning Plate Moves Rightward
Screwdriver Applied to Left Hand Hole Screwdriver Applied to Right Hand Hole
CAUTION
Only use a stable working surface to work on the removed cassette.
Handle the cassette very carefully because it includes electronic
parts. Only use the provided cleaning plate to clean the photo
sensors.
1. Make sure the locking lever is in the vertical position. Pull the green latch forwards to
release the garage unit then lower the door.
Locking Lever
Garage Door Latch
Garage Door
2. Use the handle to carefully pull the cassette out of the garage unit until the top
handle is in view.
3. With the other hand grasp the handle and lift the cassette clear of the cash acceptor.
WARNING
Take care when handling the cassette because it can be heavy.
4. Remove any banknotes present in the cassette in compliance with the owning
organization’s in-house procedures.
5. Place the cassette with its doors facing upward and open the capture area door.
6. Insert a Phillips screwdriver into the hole on the side where the target sensor exists,
and gently push the link as far as it will go.
Note: Do not use a flat blade screwdriver.
Screwdriver
7. Place the cassette with its inlet facing upward and insert the cleaning plate into the
cassette.
8. Push the cleaning plate into the cassette with both hands.
9. Pull out the cleaning plate.
10. Repeat steps 8 and 9 twice.

11. Insert a Phillips screwdriver into the hole on the remaining side, and gently push
the link as far as it will go.
12. Repeat steps 8 and 9 twice
13. Replace the banknotes that were removed from the cassette, in compliance with
the owning organization’s in-house procedures.
14. Replace the cassette and check the operation of the BNA.
FEED/REJECT AND MAIN TRANSPORT SENSORS

The location of the four photos ens or sets to be cleaned are shown in the illustration below:
Feed/Reject Unit
Escrow Unit
Bill Validator
Main Transport Unit
The four sets of sensors to be cleaned are highlighted thus:
Clean photo sensors using compressed air or a soft thin brush or cotton-bud.
Photo Sensors in Escrow Unit

To remove the escrow unit see details in the chapter ‘Bunch Note Acceptor (UD700)’ in
Section 11 of this manual.
CAUTION
Take care not to damage escrow tapes.
The location of the photos ens or sets to be cleaned are shown in the illustrations below:
Access to
Photosensors
Access to
Photosensors
Clean photo sensors using compressed air or a soft thin brush or cotton bud.
Photo Sensors in Bill Validator

Do not remove the bill validator unit from the BNA module to clean the photo sensors.
Release the two green latches that allow a spring to open the BV unit.
Note: The illustrations below show the BV unit removed from the BNA so that the photos
ens or sets can be clearly seen. As stated above, removal is not necessary for cleaning
purposes.
2 Green Latches
Clean photo sensors using compressed air or a soft thin brush or cotton bud.
Note: Engrained grime can be removed using cloth moistened with soapy water.
Note: No lubrication is required on the UD700.
REVISION

CARD READERS PREVENTIVE

MAINTENANCE
INTRODUCTION
The card readers should be inspected and cleaned at every visit. The motorised card
reader shutter mechanism and transport alignment should also be checked.
See the following sections for detailed procedures.
CASH ACCEPTOR & RECYCLER

CLEANING TOOLS & MATERIALS

The preventive maintenance for the Cash Acceptor and Recycler involves the cleaning of
sensors, belts and rollers. The cleaning tools and materials required are listed below:
l Clean lint-free cloth

l Blower or soft brush
l Spatula or scraper (made of plastic, rubber or wood
PRE-ACCEPTOR
Sensor Cleaning
Use water and a lint-free cloth to wipe clean the surfaces of the sensors.
1. There are four Shutter Trigger Sensors (PS1S, PS2S, PS3S, PS4S) in the front
entry slot of the Pre-Acceptor. Clean the upper and lower surfaces of each sensor.
2. Clean the upper surface of the Clamp Trigger Sensor (PTCS).
3. Lift the clamp and clean the lower surface of the PTCS sensor.
4. Clean the upper and lower surfaces of the Accept-Stopper Sensor (PASS).
5. Clean the upper and lower surfaces of the Dispense-Stopper Sensor (PDSS).
Belt Cleaning
There are fourteen timing belts to clean in the entrance to the Pre-Acceptor.
Use water and a lint-free cloth to wipe clean the whole surface of the belts. The belts can
be moved by rotating the green knob shown below.
SEPARATOR STACK AREA

Pull up the front of the Pre-Acceptor unit using the green handle on the right-hand side until
the stay bar locks the unit in the raised position.
Roller Cleaning
There are ten rollers to clean in the Separator Stack Area.
Note: To prevent damage to the plastic levers, press the area indicated below while
cleaning the rollers.
Use water and a lint-free cloth to wipe clean the whole surface of the rollers. The rollers can
be rotated by using the green knob shown below.
Rollers
Rubber Feed Rollers
Rubber Pick Rollers
SEPARATOR TRANSPORT
Belt Cleaning
There are six flat belts to clean in the Separator Transport.
1. Use water and a lint-free cloth to wipe clean the whole surface of the belts. The belts
can be moved by rotating the green knob shown below.
Three Upper Belts
Three Lower Belts
2. Make sure that the belts are correctly aligned on the pulleys.
PRE-BV TRANSPORT
Hold the plastic sheet with one hand and remove the two screws from the cover at the front
of Pre-BV Transport. Take care not to crush the plastic sheet.
Belt Cleaning
There are three flat belts to clean in the Pre-BV Transport entrance path.
Flat Belts
Roller Cleaning
There are six rollers to clean in the Pre-BV Transport.
1. Use water and a lint-free cloth to wipe clean the whole surface of the rollers shown
below.
Rubber Rollers
Rollers
2. Close the Pre-BV Transport cover and refit the two latch locking screws
BILL VALIDATOR (BV)
Bill Validator(BV)
Upper Unit
Lower Unit
Remove the Bill Validator (BV) unit from the Cash Acceptor and Recycler.
Refer to the Cash Acceptor and Recycler chapter in the Deposit section of this manual for
removal and refitting instructions.
Sensor Cleaning
1. Use water and a lint-free cloth to wipe clean all sensor surfaces shown below.
Sensor D
Upper Unit
Lower Unit
Sensor B
Sensor A
Sensor D
Sensor C
2. Visually check that the sensor surfaces are clean.

3. Use water and a lint-free cloth to wipe clean the sensor surfaces shown below.
4. Visually check that the sensor surfaces are clean.
Guide Cleaning
1. Use water and a lint-free cloth to wipe clean the upper and lower Transportation
Guide surfaces.
2. Visually check that the guide surfaces are clean.
Roller and Belt Cleaning

1. Use water and a lint-free cloth to wipe clean the whole surface and surrounding area
of the rollers shown below. The rollers can be rotated by moving ‘Belt A’ in the
direction shown.
Rollers
Belt A
2. A spatula may be used to clean the rollers shown above. If this is required, take care
not to damage the surface of the rollers.
of the rollers and belts shown below. The rollers and belts can be rotated by moving
‘Belt A’ in the direction shown.
Belt A
of the rollers shown below while turning the rollers by hand.
5. Visually check that the rollers are clean.
6. Use water and a lint-free cloth to wipe clean the whole surface of the rubber belts
shown below while moving the belts by hand.
7. Visually check that the rollers and belts are clean.
Refit the Bill Validator (BV) unit into the Cash Acceptor and Recycler.
Calibration
After cleaning, the BV must be re-calibrated.
Note: Modules using note templates ending in 24 or less do not support re-calibration; if
after cleaning the reject rate is still too high, the BV should be replaced. To identify the
template version, use System Application (Main menu > Configuration > Display Software
Details) to determine the software version the GBNA/GBRU is using (for example
pcGBRUEU 01.14.00) then contact your local template manager.
1. Enter Diagnostics and select the “Check BV Calibration” option.
2. Enter the test note (009-0020816) when prompted, making sure that the side with
the NCR part number is facing upwards.
3. The test will report either “Successfully completed BV calibration” in which case no
further action is required, or M-data message 254F “Re-enter BV test note”.
4. Continue with the calibration by entering the test note a minimum of nine more
times, making sure it is inserted in the same orientation each time.
5. On the eighth re-insertion, the following screen (M-data 254E) will be displayed.
Run the test one more time and then the message “Successfully completed BV
calibration” will be displayed.
Other error messages which may be displayed during calibration:
Code Meaning
254F Re-enter BV test note
254E Finished calibration operation, re-enter BV test note one more time
250F Calibration failed, retry and replace BV if error re-occurs
250A BV test note error, use new test note and continue calibration
2548 BV test note soiled, used new test note and continue calibration
Other Entered media is not BV test note or BV malfunction
POST-BV TRANSPORT
Belt Cleaning
There are six flat belts to clean in the Post-BV Transport.
Use water and a lint-free cloth to wipe clean the whole surface of the belts. The belts can
be moved by rotating the green knob shown.
ESCROW
Sensor Cleaning
1. Use a cloth or cotton swab and wipe clean all eight surfaces of the ERRS and ERLS
sensors.
ERLS
ERRS
2. Use a cloth or cotton swab and wipe clean all eight surfaces of the EDRS and EDLS
sensors shown below.
3. Use a cloth or cotton swab and wipe clean both surfaces of the EECS sensor.
EECS Sensor
Belt Cleaning
There are six flat belts to clean in the Escrow
Roller Cleaning
Use water and a lint-free cloth to wipe clean the whole surface of the ten rollers. The rollers
can be rotated by using the green knob shown below.
REJECT TRANSPORT
Belt Cleaning
1. Use water and a lint-free cloth to wipe clean the whole surface of the six belts. The
belts can be moved by rotating the green knob shown below.
REMOVABLE REJECT BIN

Sensor Cleaning
Use a cloth or cotton swab and wipe clean all sensor surfaces shown above.
UEFS sensors
UERS sensors
UECS sensors
Belt Cleaning
1. Use water and a lint-free cloth to wipe clean the whole surface of the nine belts. The
FIXED REJECT BIN

Sensor Cleaning
Use a cloth or cotton swab and wipe clean all sensor surfaces shown below.
UEFS Sensors
UERS Sensors
Belt Cleaning
1. Use water and a lint-free cloth to wipe clean the whole surface of the six belts. The
CASSETTE TRANSPORT
Belt Cleaning
1. Use water and a lint-free cloth to wipe clean the whole surface of the three belts.
The belts can be moved by rotating the green knob shown below.
Roller Cleaning
Use water and a lint-free cloth to wipe clean the whole surface of the four rollers. The
rollers can be rotated by using the green knob shown below.
LOWER TRANSPORT
Belt Cleaning
There are fifteen belts to clean in the Lower Transport, nine in the front cover and six in the
rear cover.
Use water and a lint-free cloth to wipe clean the whole surface of the belts.
Front Cover above Rear Cover above

Cassettes 3 / 4 Cassettes 1 / 2
Roller Cleaning
There are eight rollers to clean in the Lower Transport, four below the front cover and four
below the rear cover. Use water and a lint-free cloth to wipe clean the whole surface of the
rollers. The rollers can be rotated by using the gear wheel shown below.
Above Cassettes 3 / 4
Above Cassettes 1 / 2
CASSETTES
Exterior Cleaning
Using a lint-free cloth dampened with isopropyl alcohol or soap and water. Do not use any
other cleaning agents or abrasives.
Remove any dust, stubborn marks or grease.
Roller Cleaning
Recycle Cassette
There are eleven rollers to clean in each Recycle Cassette.
Use water and a lint-free cloth to wipe clean the whole surface of the rollers.
Recycle Cassette Inside Cassette

(Light Grey)
Deposit Cassette
There are eight rollers to clean in each Recycle Cassette.
Use water and a lint-free cloth to wipe clean the whole surface of the rollers.
Deposit Cassette Inside Cassette

(Blue)
REVISION

COIN DISPENSER PREVENTIVE

MAINTENANCE
CLEANING
Cleaning with mild detergent on a damp cloth should be carried out at least every 3 months.
Perform the following tasks yearly:
l Inspect the hopper bins and rotor for wear and damage
l Clean all sensors during yearly inspection using compressed air can. Place the air
nozzle in the opening of the hopper base where the coin ejection sensor is located.
Spray for several seconds, then move the coin ejection mechanism to the open
position and spray again for several seconds.
ITRAN 1000 CHECK PROCESSOR (CPM4)

CLEANING MATERIALS
The following cleaning materials are the only authorized materials for use on the check
processors:

l Cleaning swab, 6 inch (length) flat plastic with felt cleaning area (pack of 10) -
Systemedia Stock No. 523396, NCR Part No. 484-0051295.
VISUAL INSPECTION
At intervals of three months, inspect the transport drive belts for damage, slackness or
wandering.
TRANSPORTS
At every service call, clean all flat surfaces of transports using the cleaning swab.
SENSORS
Clean the following sensors at every service call:
l Bin sensors - with a soft brush or compressed air jet.

l Front and rear camera lenses - using flat felt covered swabs.
Stacking Bin Sensors
Reject Bin Stacking Bin
12 13
11
10
Infeed
1 AND 2
9
Endorser Stage Area

3
8 4 Track
5 Sensors
6
Endorser MICR
Read Head
7
Rear Camera De-skew
Front Camera
Multi Pocket Bin Sensors
Bin Full
Sensor 3
2
Cheque
Bins
1
11
10
Bin Full Double Feed Infeed

Lever Detector
9
Endorser Stage Area
De-skew
Mechanism 1&2
8 3
MICR
Endorser Read Head 4
Track
5 Sensors
7 6
Front Camera
Rear Camera
ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY AND

DISPENSER PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
SUMMARY:
l Every 6 months, replace the inkjet print cartridge.
l Perform the following tasks as necessary, (likely to be required every 6 to 12 months):
l Clean all belts and check for wear.
l Clean all sensors and LEDs
l Clean any evidence of ink droplets in the depository transport
l Change ink pad if necessary (see ‘Ink Pad Repositioning’)
l Clean the print head flex cable contacts, replace is can't be cleaned
l Check for freedom of movement of anti-fishing assemblies
l Verify the transport aligns correctly at the facia.
INKJET PRINT CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT

The print cartridge must be replaced with a Hewlett-Packard inkjet print cartridge, part
number C6602A (NCR part number 009-0019525). The replacement interval is six
monthly.
CAUTION
The printhead may be fitted with a heater and cover. If fitted, take
care when handling as the cover may be hot.
1. If fitted, use the green tab to push open the printhead cover.
2. Use the tab on the print head cartridge to pull it out of its holder, then remove it from
underneath the transport.
3. Remove the protective tape from the new print head cartridge and, holding it by the
tab, place the print head cartridge into the holder. Ensure that the studs on the top of
the cartridge are located into the holes on the holder, then push the cartridge fully
home.
4. Check that the LED on the control board, visible through the top of the cover on the
side of the depository, is not lit. This indicates that the print head cartridge has been
replaced correctly. If the red LED is lit, the print head cartridge has not been
replaced correctly - carefully repeat the replenishment instructions.
LED (Red)
INK PAD REPOSITIONING

The ink pad is located in the wiper assembly on the top of the transport. Every 6 to 12
months the ink pad should be checked and repositioned to bring a fresh area of the cube
into use. If all sides of the pad are used, replace the pad (445-0683162).
REVISION
July 2019 A.2 Minor updates to synch with new P.M.
Schedule Overview

OPEN STATEMENT PRINTER
MEDIA DELIVERY ASSEMBLY

There is very little maintenance required for the Media Delivery Assembly as there are no
parts to lubricate. Perform the following tasks as needed:
l Clean the sensors.

l Clean the paper path.
Cleaning
Cleaning should be carried out during maintenance or when repairing the printer.
l Do not touch or damage the print surface of the thermal print head unit.
l Do not use a solvent such as thinner.
When cleaning use a brush or blower brush (as used to clean camera lenses) to clean
away paper dust.
Transport
Clean paper dust from the paper path and from the upper and lower components of the
transport sensors.
PASSBOOK PRINTER
SUMMARY
The preventive maintenance described here should only be carried out when a field
engineer is called out to a page turning passbook printer failure.
l Cleaning - the following areas should cleaned by the user every six months:
l the ribbon cartridge
l the platen
l the sensors
l the magnetic head.
If it is obvious that the cleaning actions are not being carried out by the user, they
should be performed by the service engineer during the service visit. The engineer
should then advise the client of the importance of the cleaning operations.
l Lubricate - the following areas should be lubricated every six months:

l the printing unit support rails
l the ribbon feed unit gear
l the pressure roller springs and bearingss
l the magnetic stripe (MS) lead screw
l the shutter shaft.
Perform a post-preventive maintenance check of the LEDs.
CLEANING
Use a brush or blower brush (as used to clean camera lenses) and a vacuum cleaner to
clean away paper dust from the following areas.
Cleaning the Ribbon Cartridge

When the ribbon cartridge becomes dirty with the ribbon ink, stains, paper fragments or
other matter, clean gently with cotton swabs and isopropyl rubbing alcohol.
Cleaning the Platen

When the platen, paper guide and ribbon cartridge arms become dirty with ribbon ink,
stains, paper fragments or other matter, clean gently with cotton swabs and isopropyl
alcohol.
Cleaning the Magnetic Head

The magnetic head should be cleaned by the user on a routine basis using a special
cleaning sheet, however, it is recommended that the magnetic head is cleaned by the
service engineer during a service call using cotton swabs and isopropyl alcohol.
LUBRICATION
The following lubrication procedures should be carried out on a six monthly basis, unless
otherwise stated.
Use oil or grease on the surfaces indicated in this section. Apply only enough to give a thin
coating on the entire bearing surface. If it is necessary to remove lubricants during
assembly, flush or wipe with Stoddard Solvent SN 6580018, and dry with compressed air.
Never lubricate unspecified sections especially print head, PCB’s, switches, timing gear,
timing belts, and so on. Do not excessively apply lubricant as it may splatter or overflow. Be
careful not to apply lubricant to the surface of the page turning pressure rollers or transport.
Ensure that the ribbon cartridge is removed before proceeding with the following
lubrication procedures.
Printing Unit Support Rails

1. Move the print head carrier to the middle of its travel using the green tab.
2. Lift the print head carrier up until it clicks into position.
3. Lift both ends of the ribbon cartridge at the same time and then remove it from the
printer.
4. Apply one drop of oil on two places of the printing unit support rail and move the print
carrier right and left in order to lubricate the support rail.
Ribbon Feed Unit (RFU) Gear

1. Remove the RFU timing belt from the RFU tension pully.
2. Insert a screwdriver into the slot in the RFU release latch.

3. Using the screw driver, release the RFU from the printer and then remove.
4. Unclip the latches on either side of the RFU and remove the top cover.
5. Apply grease to all teeth of the ribbon gear and the ribbon gear shaft and as shown.
Note: Do not over lubricate. Remove any excess grease.
6. The replacement of the RFU is the reverse of the removal procedures.
Pressure Rollers Springs and Bearings

1. Remove the two retaining screws securing the cover over shaft A and then remove
the cover.
2. Slacken the four retaining screws securing the cover over shafts B and C. Remove
the two screws securing the earth connections and then remove the cover.
3. Remove the four screws securing the cover over shaft D and lift up the cover to gain
access to the lubrication points.
4. Apply grease on the contact points between pressure roller springs and shafts on A,
B, C, D and E shafts as shown - 46 points.
Note: Before applying grease to the pressure roller springs on shaft D, move the
print head to the left-hand side and bend the plastic protective cover on the right-
hand side out of the way of the roller. Lubricate the pressure roller springs on the
right-hand side, refit the plastic protective cover, then move the print head to the
right-hand side before lubricating the pressure roller springs on the left-hand side.
5. Apply grease on the contact points between the pressure roller springs and shaft on
shaft E - 3 points, as shown.
Note: Be careful not to apply lubricant to the surface of the pressure rollers.
6. Apply oil between bearings on shafts E and F as shown.

Note: Leave covers removed until all lubrication has been completed.
Magnetic Stripe (MS) Lead Screw

printer.
4. Lift up the rear inserter transport into the open position using the levers at each side.
5. Press the MS Shutter down to the open position.
6. Apply grease to an area of the MS lead screw (approximately. 50mm [2.0 in.] wide)
located below the MS shutter.
7. Make sure that the transport surface is clean.

8. Close the rear inserter transport.
9. Press the print head carrier down.
10. Move the print head carrier to the left and right-hand side of the printing unit a few
times to spread the grease along the MS lead screw.
11. Replace the ribbon cartridge.
Shutter Shaft
1. Apply oil to the shutter shaft, as shown.
2. Open the shutter by hand and close the shutter using the solenoid linkage a few
times, then wipe off any excess around the supports.
Oil
Oil
3. Refit all covers and earth connections previously removed. Refit the print ribbon.
VISUAL CHECK OF LEDS

Switch the printer off then on and check that all LEDs on the printer control panel illuminate
for approximately two seconds.
REVISION

USB RECEIPT PRINTER

Perform the following tasks as necessary:
l Clean transport sensors

l Clean thermal print head
TRANSPORT SENSORS
Clean the two pairs of transport sensors using compressed air to remove dust from the
surface of each sensor.
CAUTION
Sensors should not be removed from chassis for cleaning. If for any
reason sensors needs to be removed, they must be re-calibrated.
THERMAL PRINT HEAD

Clean the print head by wiping the black strip five times with a cleaning pen.
Description Part Number

Thermal Head Cleaner (box of 10) 497-0472684
When the printer is loaded with stamp sheets or other adhesive media, the thermal print
head should be cleaned on a regular basis as the adhesive may cause a build up of dust on
the head.
CAUTION
Do not clean the print head or any other area inside the printer with
detergent or alcohol as this may damage the print head and
electronics.
SCALABLE CHECK PROCESSING MODULE

(SCPM) PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
TRANSPORT DRIVE BELTS

wandering. Adjust and replace as necessary.
CLEANING
Clean the following at every service call:
l All flat surfaces of transports using the cleaning swab

l Bin sensors - with a soft brush or compressed air jet
l Front and rear camera lenses - using flat felt covered swabs.
TS19 TS20 TS21
Capture Bin 1
TS18
Capture Bin 2
DC
Stacking Bin
BE2
Deskew
TS17 Mechanism
BF1
MICR DFD TS4 TS3 TB TS2 TS1

TS9 DS2 DS1
TS8 TS7 TS5

Front
Back Infeed
Endorser Camera TS6
Camera
r TS15
un che
TS10 Core Reb Feeder
ERBM TS14
TS13 Escrow
TS12 TS16
Cleaning Materials
The following cleaning materials are the only authorized materials for use on the check
processors:

l Cleaning swab, 6 inch (length) flat plastic with felt cleaning area (pack of 10) -
Systemedia Stock No. 523396, NCR Part No. 484-0051295.
SCALABLE DEPOSIT MODULE
SUMMARY
Every visit:
l Clean all sensors with a soft brush or compressed air can.

l Clean the plate below the ribbon cassette.
l Clean the bill validator lenses.
Every 3 months:
Inspect the transport drive belts for damage, slackness or wandering. Replace at FRU
level if required.
Test after all Preventive Maintenance tasks are complete: Verify the operation of the
shutter and transport, check print quality for fully formed and legible characters and ensure
camera images are clear.
Cleaning Materials
The SDM cleaning kit (part number 603-9015130) contains 20 packs of the following items:
l 1 x SDM cleaning card

l 2 x cleaning 'swisels' (swab + chisel tool)
l 3 x ATM cleaning wipes (2 small, 1 large)
l 2 x lint-free dry wipes
l 1 x ATM encoded card reader cleaning card.
Alternatively the following items can be used:
l Lint-free, cotton cloths (painters rags or other cotton rags)

l Tech Wipes (484-0051501)*
l Cleaning swab (484-0051295)
l Canned air
Note: When cleaning with tech wipe, after cleaning use dry cloth to wipe down excess
solvent or film
Only use these approved cleaning methods as use of other cleaners could damage the
module. Cleaners containing alcohol or other solvents and de-greaser (such as Fedron)
can damage the plastics used in the sensor lenses and in the belts. This results in clouding
of the sensor covers and prisms, and also degrades the belts causing them to become
sticky.
SENSORS
Sensors should be cleaned at every service call with a soft brush or compressed air jet.
Mag Front
DVM Head Camera
Ultrasonic Back TS10

Array Camera
TS11 Track Speed De-skew Feeder
Infeed
Top UDFD
IBVM Camera TS10 DS4 DS3 DS2 DS1
TS7 TS6 TS5 TS4 TS3 TS2 TS1

TS9 TS8
LED Bottom
Array Camera
TS11 TS19
TS18
CORE Re-buncher
MICR MODULE
Read TS12 ERBM
Head
Endorser
TS17
TS16
Escrow
TS13 TS14
TS15
TS20 TS24
TS22
TS21 CBM
TS23
Reject Bin 2
Reject Bin 1
Cheque Bin Cash Bin
TRANSPORT DRIVE BELTS

wandering. Replace or adjust as necessary.
When cleaning the belts (with approved cleaners only) run a test such as the feeder cycle
test (looping) to ensure even cleaning. Take care when working on the module with belts
moving.
DESKEW/HORIZONTAL GUIDE
Clean the deskew idler rollers using a damp, clean cloth or tech wipe. Dry before returning
to service. For the hardened plastic rollers, a scraper may also be effective. Use the Feeder
Cycle test in SysApp to rotate the rollers to help to with cleaning.
ENDORSER PLATE
The endorser plate below the ribbon cassette should be cleaned regularly with a cleaning
swab to avoid a build-up of debris or dust which could affect the printing quality.
1. Lift tab F. If necessary to improve access, slide and hold latch E to the left to lower
the endorser platen.
2. Insert the endorser plate cleaning tool under the plastic guide below the black print
head and wipe it backwards and forward.
3. Lower tab F back into place.
BILL VALIDATOR
The camera lens surfaces in the bill validator should be cleaned regularly using the
recommended cleaning materials.
CAUTION
Do not use harsh cleaners or other solvents/de-greasers. These can
damage the plastics in the lens and camera area. Isopropyl alcohol,
or cleaning pads containing it, are acceptable but take care not to
touch the transport rollers with them.
1. Open latch C and lift the lid.
2. Carefully wipe the top and bottom camera lenses with an appropriate cleaning
material. Take care not to touch the glass surfaces with your fingers as fingerprints
will reduce the camera’s performance.
Top lenses
Bottom lenses
DVM IBVM
3. Blow canned air onto the area to dry it and remove any dust.
4. Using a clean, damp cloth clean the drive and idler rollers within the IBVM/DVM as
dirt tends to accumulate here often. Be sure to clean around the corner as well.
5. Blow or brush out any debris found in the top corner in the IBVM.
MICR GUIDE/CORNER DRIVE

1. Clean the vertical idler and drive guide rollers with a damp, clean cloth. Dry the
rollers before returning to service.
2. Use the thin brush or another soft brush to gently clean between the MICR read
head and the platen.
3. Inspect the corner drive for debris and remove with a brush or by blowing out.
Advancing the drive using the thumb wheel will help. The divertor can be toggled by
hand.
ERBM
1. Remove the bins for better access to the ERBM. Drop down for ERBM access.
Using an air duster or brush, clean out all debris from the lower rebuncher drum. Lift
up the access flap to clean out the escrow entry guide. Close the access when
finished.
2. Take care around the escrow tape as it can be easily damaged.
3. Inspect the ERBM entry guide and remove any debris with a brush or by blowing
out.
4. Note that a common place for debris to accumulate is above where the rebuncher
and eject path meet. Remove and debris found here with a soft brush or by blowing.
CAPTURE BIN MODULE (CBM)

1. To clean out the bins it is easier to remove them. Clean any debris from the top that
may have fallen from the module.
2. Clean the entry belts using a damp, clean cloth or tech wipe. Check all bin paths for
debris and brush/blow out. Brush clear any sensor positions.
REVISION

PRESSURISATION FAN
WARNING
Ensure the ATM power is switched off before carrying out the
following tasks.
MAINTENANCE TASKS
Perform the following tasks every visit:
l Clean the filter.

l Check the filter for damage and replace if necessary.
Note: The filter should be replaced at least once a year.
FILTER CLEANING
To clean the filter, follow these steps.
1. Unlock and open the rear top box door of the terminal.
2. Release the catches on both sides of the fan housing.
3. Slide the filter assembly out of the fan housing, taking care not to disturb the dust
and debris.
4. Shake out the filter over a suitable bin or container, preferably outside, to remove the
accumulated dust.
5. Taking care not to damage the blue filter material, thoroughly vacuum the filter tray
and filter housing.
Filter
Filter Housing
Filter Tray
6. Slide the filter assembly back into the fan housing. Take care not to damage any of
the seals.
7. Close the catches on both sides of the fan housing.
8. Close and lock the rear top box door.
9. Wipe the top of the terminal with a soft cloth to remove any dust and debris.
S1 CURRENCY DISPENSER
Refer to the Preventive Maintenance Overview chapter for a schedule of P.M. tasks. This
chapter provides details of how to perform the P.M. tasks.
SUMMARY CHECKLIST
Perform the following at each service call:
1. Use an air can or powered duster/compressor to remove dust from all areas of the
dispenser.
2. Inspect the pick module for wear or damage to:
l Pick cups and pick arm assembly
l Vacuum hoses and T-connections
l Vacuum filter
l Gears and belts
l Ribbon cables to pick interface boards
l Sensors
l Reed switches.
3. Check D wheel timing within each pick module.

4. Check pick to pick timing between pick modules.
5. Inspect the presenter for wear/accumulation of dirt on:
l Sensors
l Belts
l Rollers.
6. Inspect cassettes and check how well cash is loaded.

7. Perform diagnostics to verify correct operation.
INSPECT THE PICK MODULE

Single Pick Module
Suction cups
Pick sensor
Pick arm
Keyplate
Timing disk
D wheels
Vacuum hose
Pick valve
Double Pick Module
Suction cups
Pick sensor D wheels
Pick arm
Keyplate
Timing disk
Pick valve
Vacuum hose
T connector
l Check pick vacuum hoses, replace if broken, cracked or bent.

l Measure the vacuum at each pick valve and at the filter (see Vacuum test in
Diagnostics section). It should measure >800mb (23.5 InHg) and be held for more
than 60 seconds after the motor stops.
l Check the hose T connectors for leaks, replace if damaged.
l Check the vacuum filter above the top pick module and clean out if necessary: heavy
dust contamination of the filter could reduce the vacuum and cause mis-picks.
Notes:
l When you disturb the air filter some dust will drop down the tubing to the lowest pick
module. Disconnect the tube from the lowest pick valve and clean out the dust from
the tube and valve.
l Annual replacement of the filter is recommended. When replacing the filter, a good fit
with the vacuum hose tube can be achieved by either securing the connection with a
cable tie, or by cutting approximately 8 mm (0.3 to 0.4 in.) off the end of the tube
(leaving a little of the flared end of the tube makes it easier to fit over the new filter). Do
not use heat or chemicals to soften the pipe on top of the filter in order to fit the tube
over it: this will result in leaks.
Cable tie
l Check the pick arm assembly for cracks or wear, replace if necessary.
l Check the pick suction cups. Replacement is based on the number of bills picked per
pick module: replace when SOH Replace Soon message is displayed.
The 66XX threshold is 103 000 bills.
l Check for worn or broken gears and belts on the side and rear of the pick module.
Replace if necessary. (If gears are worn, check that all circlips on the associated shaft
are in place. Circlips which may have fallen off can cause lateral movement of shafts,
accelerating gear wear).
l To prolong gear life, the pick module orientation can be swapped. i.e. on the four high
dispenser, the top and bottom modules can change places, as should the middle two
modules.
l Check for wear in the ribbon cables connecting the pick module interface boards to
each other and to the presenter control board. Replace if necessary.
l Check the alignment of the pick sensors and clean any accumulations of dirt/dust.
l Check that the cassette inserts fully and latches into place. If not, check for fouling with
pick sensor or bent keyplate.
l Check that the cassette low sensor reed switch housing on the pick arm is not
cracked. Replace if necessary, a damaged housing can lead to a Note Low condition
not being identified.
Keyplate
Reed Switch
and Pick LED
Assembly
PICK MODULE INTERNAL TIMING (D WHEEL TIMING)

To adjust a double pick module you must first isolate the gear trains of the two pick units by
removing the timing belt shown in the following figure. Retain the timing belt for refitting at
the end of the adjustment.
Timing belt
Timing disk
The relationship to be set within the pick unit is between the pick wheel and the cam driven
vacuum arm line.
Note: In a double pick unit make the adjustment on the upper pick unit first.
1. Position the teeth mesh between the drive segment and pick line so that the upper
tooth of the drive segment is above the upper tooth of the pick line.
2. Take off and retain the 26T idler gear directly below the pick line (left side of the
module looking from the currency cassette).
3. Rotate the gears of the pick module transport until the pick D wheel is free of its
mating tension wheel.
4. Rotate the drive cluster in a clockwise direction until the D timing mark on the timing
disk lines up with the timing sensor body.
5. Rotate the gears of the pick module transport until the interrupted part of the pick D
wheels is away from the pick arms. Turn the gears until a gap of 0.5 mm 0.5 mm
(0.02 in. 0.02 in.) exists between the leading edges of the pick D wheels and the
tension wheels as shown in the first figure above.
6. Replace the idler gear removed in step 2. Be careful not to dislodge the setting.
7. Carry out steps 1 to 6 on the lower pick unit in a double pick or on the next single pick
module.
8. Check the D wheel timing by inserting a note between the D wheel and drive roller
then, using finger pressure, pull on the note to test the pinch. Check both sides: if
there is a difference in the pinch is could indicate a bent frame which requires the
pick module to be replaced. If the pinch is equal but not sufficient for drive, replace
the pick line.
9. Check timing several times to be sure no teeth are missing on any gears and timing
stays true. As each pick module "D" lines up with the sensor, check that the half
round wheel is ready to contact the full circular wheel inside the pick module. Worn
or broken gears may warrant pick module replacement.
PICK MODULE TO PICK MODULE TIMING

When the internal timing of both pick units of a double pick module has been set, the pick
units have to be locked in a fixed timing relationship:
1. Rotate the gear train of the first (top) pick unit to move the timing disk in a clockwise
direction until the 1 timing mark on the drive cluster timing disk lines up with the
timing sensor body.
CAUTION
Always rotate the gear train in its normal direction of travel. The pick
timing disks should turn clockwise. Do not move the gear train
backwards and forwards.
1. Rotate the gear train of the second pick unit until the 2 timing mark on the drive
cluster timing disk lines up with the timing sensor body. Continue as necessary,
setting the timing disk to 3 on the third pick unit and to 4 on the fourth.
2. Replace the timing belt removed earlier around the pulley wheel of the lower pick
position and put it on as many teeth as possible of the pulley wheel of the upper
pick position, taking care not to dislodge the settings. Turn the upper gear train in
the normal direction of travel (see Caution above) to ride the timing belt fully on to
the pulley wheel.
Note: The S1 dispenser does not require any timing relationship to be set between the
action of the pick modules and the presenter.
INSPECT THE PRESENTER

l Check for worn or broken belts. Replace if necessary.
l Check for worn or dirty rollers. Replace or clean if necessary.
l Check the alignment of the presenter sensors and clean any accumulations of
dirt/dust using compressed air.
S1 Front Access Sensors

Exit
Transport Sensor TS4
Sensor Stack Sensor TS2
Transport Sensor TS3 & TS3A
From Pick
Modules LVDT
Purge Overfill Sensor TS1
S1 Rear Access Sensors

Transport Sensor TS4
Exit Stack Sensor TS2
Sensor Transport Sensor TS3 & TS3A Purge Overfill Sensor TS1
LVDT From Pick

Modules
INSPECT CASSETTES
l Inspect the cassettes for damage, dirt, sticky tape or residue. Replace damaged
cassettes. Clean inside and out if they are dirty, paying particular attention to the
cassette door and note height guide.
l Check that the pusher plate and the truck door sliding guides move freely.
l Check that the cassette id magnets, note width guides and cassette height spacers
are correct for the notes being dispensed.
l Inspect how well cash has been loaded. Poorly loaded or over-stuffed cassettes will
result in mis-picks and dispenser jams. The maximum stack size is indicated by the
label on the inside of the cassette.
Max. Stack
Check for obvious defects such as:
l Adhesive tape on the surface of the currency

l Staples, pins, clips or any foreign matter attached to the currency
l Torn or limp notes with pin holes or missing sections in the body of the currency
l Tears exceeding 13mm (0.5 in.) from any edge of the currency
l Damage or tears to the leading edge (direction of travel) of the note
l Two or more notes stuck together
l Corner folds more than 13mm (0.5 in.) along any edge (straighten as required)
l Folded notes
Any notes considered to be unacceptable should be removed.
l Check for bowed notes caused by elastic bands or other packaging on currency which
can cause the notes to jam in the dispenser. Notes bowed across the width have been
specifically identified as causing jams in the Personas 86 dispenser and it is
recommended that these notes should be processed through a counting machine
where possible or at least manually fanned and flattened several times. Notes should
be loaded in bundles of 100 notes, alternating the orientation of the bundles from side
to side.
20
20
Note: If the effective picking of the notes is compromised by the note design or
bowing, the bundle orientation should alternate from front to rear facing as well as
from side to side.
DIAGNOSTICS
Perform the following diagnostic tests to verify proper operation of the dispenser.
Vacuum
l Perform a Diagnostic Clear command System Application to run the main motor and
drive the vacuum pump. Measure the vacuum with a gauge at each pick valve in turn,
starting at the lowest. The vacuum should measure >800mb (23.5 InHg) and be held
for more than 60 seconds after the motor stops. If the vacuum is below this level,
measure again at connections progressively higher up the vacuum hose until the
section with the leak is isolated (it will be directly below where you first get a good
vacuum reading). Replace the damaged hose then test again.
l Perform the test again at the air filter. If it fails at the filter, the problem is either the
pump or one of the tube connections between it and the air filter.
Belt Alignment
Mark the dispenser drive belts with a straight line, run a note dispense test then check to
see if the belts are still in alignment. If not, check for dirt and clean as necessary. Check for
wear and replace as necessary.
Note Skew
Run a single dispense test from each pick module repeatedly while checking for note skew
in the stacking area. If notes are skewing, inspect the belts and roller in the pick module and
the presenter. If they are clean but the test continues to fail, the presenter needs to be
replaced.
Facia Alignment
Run a 40 bill dispense test through the facia to verify alignment of the dispenser to the safe
door opening and shutter. If the test fails, check the presenter to facia alignment.
Shutter
Run the dispenser shutter test with halt on error enabled in the control menu, looping 50
times with the facia closed to verify shutter alignment. If the test fails, replace the shutter.
REVISION

SUMMARY CHECKLIST
Perform the following at each service call, see detailed descriptions below:
Inspect the pick module for wear or damage to:

- Pick cups and pick arm assembly
- Vacuum hoses and T-connections
- Air filter
- Gears and belts
- Sensors
Check pick to pick timing between pick modules.
Inspect the SNT for wear/accumulation of dirt on sensors, belts and rollers.
Inspect the carriage for wear/accumulation of dirt on sensors, belts and rollers.
Inspect cassettes and check how well cash is loaded.
Perform diagnostics to verify correct operation.
In addition, perform the following checks annually:
Check suction cups and replace if necessary.

Check that the pick modules are correctly timed.
If you need to re-time the dispenser, check timing several times to be sure no teeth are missing on any gears and
timing stays true. Worn or damaged gears may require a pick module replacement.
Check the SNT Flicker Pads and SNT Note Deflector for damage or wear.
Disconnect the vacuum tube from just below the air filter to prevent dust from dropping down into the tubing
and replace the filter. If some dust does drop down into the tubing it must be cleaned out.
Check the HETS rollers for debris build-up and clean if necessary.
Check purge bin micro switch for damage.
Check the smooth insertion of cassettes and purge bins and that latches engage easily.
Check the nose and carriage metalwork is not damaged or bent.
Check harnesses and parts that may contact the safe for damage.
Look at tallies, SOH and enhanced diagnostics telemetry to see if any FRUs are out of spec.
Run appropriate diagnostics for actions performed.
Check BAM edge register slides freely and BAM rack slides without interference.
Check carriage umbilical for wear or damage.
Clean scanner in serial note read transport using compressed air or a soft thin brush or cotton bud. A build-up of
dirt can be removed using a lint free cloth moistened with soapy water or with an alcohol free wipe. Cleaning
should be more frequent in units with high note volume or which are installed in dusty locations.
Cleaning Materials
The following cleaning materials are the only authorized materials for use on the S2
Currency Dispenser:
l Canned air (10 oz. NCR stock number 526487), or a soft brush.
l Damp, lint‐free cloth.
module. Cleaners containing alcohol or other solvents and degreaser (such as Fedron) can
damage the plastics used in the sensor lenses and in the belts. This results in clouding of
the sensor covers and prisms, and also degrades the belts causing them to become sticky.
3. DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostics Overview 121
Revision 146
DIAGNOSTICS OVERVIEW
INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides an overview of the diagnostic aids available on terminals running
APTRA XFS software.
For terminals running APTRA Base software, refer to the APTRA Base User Guide
(B006‐7071) for ATM diagnostics.
System Application is the main route for fault finding and diagnosis.
Details of device self tests can be found in the device chapters of this manual.
For status code translation (MStatus & MData) refer to the Self-Service Financial
Terminals Diagnostic Status Code Book (B006‐6273) or the Status Code Translator at
www.sct.ncr.com.
System Application provides other functions, such as pro‐active device servicing and
configuration of the terminal and devices, which are described in detail in NCR Self Service
Support, System Application User Guide (B006‐6167).
This overview chapter covers the following areas of diagnostics:
l System Application
l Level 0 Diagnostics
l Test Tools, including Bootable System Application
SYSTEM APPLICATION
The APTRA XFS System Application provides access to the functions required to carry out
runtime configuration, diagnostics and maintenance.
Entering System Application

Access to diagnostic routines is only offered if a valid NCR USB Service Key is inserted
when System Application (Sys App) is started.
To enter diagnostics, proceed as follows:
1. Insert your NCR USB Service Key in the PC module.

2. From the Supervisor menu, select Diagnostics (or the owning organisation’s
equivalent).
3. Follow the on‐screen prompts and enter your 6‐digit PIN.
The system application main menu will appear as shown below.
The following items are available from the Main Menu:
l Device Diagnostics
l Device Self Tests
l Logs
l Tallies
l Device Status List
l Device Servicing
l Fatal Error History
l Self‐Service Configuration
On entering System Application, an entry is made in the device logs under the pseudo
device named 'SYSTEM APPLICATION'. System date and times for these entries are
logged and severity is always 1.
M-Status Description
1 System Application started, no USB Service key.
2 System Application started, USB Service Key present.
3 System Application exited.
4 System Application shutdown.
5 System Application diagnostics entry.
6 System Application diagnostics exit.
7 System Application Device Menu entry.
8 System Application Device Menu exit.
The M-Data for key entry/exit is the serial number of the USB service key, and is only
populated for M-Status values of 2, 5 and 7.
USB Service Key

Access to the various areas of System Application is determined by the level of permission
on the individual’s Service Key. For example a key could allow access to Diagnostics and
Self Tests only or could allow access to all areas of Sys App, except the ability to validate
the replacement of certain spare parts.
The functions to which a key does not provide access, will either not appear on the System
Application menus, or will appear but be unavailable.
If System Application is started without a USB key, or three unsuccessful attempts at

entering a key PIN have been made, the main menu screen will appear as shown below:
with certain options not available and the option ‘Maintenance’ in place of ‘Device
Diagnostics’.
The following items are available from the Main Menu:
l Maintenance
l Device Self Tests
l Device Status List
l Device Servicing
l Self‐Service Configuration
Functions on System Application Main Menu

The following functions on the System Application main menu are accessed through FDKs
or areas on the touchscreen.
Transfer Interface
'Transfer Interface' transfers the System Application interface between the operator panel
and the front interface on a rear access terminal.
After the transfer option has been selected at the rear, press any key at the front interface,
then at the prompt enter the password 2468 and press OK. This is to ensure that only
authorised users can access the System Application from the front interface. A password is
not required to transfer from the front to the rear interface.
Save All
'Save All' saves the Windows application, system and security Event Logs to a removable
memory device. A prompt will be displayed if more than one storage device is needed to
store this information.
Shutdown
'Shutdown' initiates the Windows operating system shutdown process. Once the system
has written unsaved data to the disk, a message appears indicating shutdown is complete.
The terminal can then be powered off.
If the user does not have the access rights to perform an operating system shutdown then a
prompt will be displayed indicating this and the Sys App main menu is re‐displayed.
Exit
'Exit' terminates System Application and returns control to the software that was running
when Sys App was started.
Maintenance
The Maintenance menu gives access to UEPP2 details, such as firmware version, and the
card reader cleaning tests.
Device Diagnostics
The Device Diagnostics menu provides access to all device diagnostic test functions via the
menu shown below. When this option is selected, an information log entry is made to
record the fact that diagnostics has been accessed.
Select the touchscreen area or numeric key for a device to access its diagnostic tests. See
the appropriate device chapter in this manual for details of the tests possible for each
device.
Control Menu
The Control Menu can be accessed from the Device Diagnostics menu or from the
individual device tests menus. It permits you to view or modify the current control settings.
The following settings are provided:
Control Description Possible Default

Option Values
Halt On Determines whether or not a test continues regardless of any error Enabled Disabled
Error returned from any action (loop mode or run-to-run only) /
Disabled
Delay Test Delays each test for a duration defined by the operator when run in 0 - 99 0
Time(s) loop or run-torun mode (the individual device tests are run seconds
sequentially as one test).
Update Used to enable/disable log and tally updating during the operation of Enabled Enabled
Logs and diagnostic tests. /
Tallies Disabled
Hardware Information and Recovery

Items in the 'Hardware Information and Recovery' menu are shown below.
The following items are available from the Hardware Information and Recovery menu:
l Replace Device (Power Devices Down)

l Reset Device (Cycle Power)
l USB Viewer
l Device Manager
Replace Device (Power Devices Down)

The 'Replace Device (Power Devices Down)' option allows all devices to be powered
down except the PC core, so that a device can be replaced without re‐booting the whole
terminal. After selecting this option, you will be prompted to confirm you wish to power
down all devices, and you can then do so either by:
l using the CE service switch (located behind a cover beside the main on/off switch) . A
narrow probe, such as the shaft of a screwdriver, is required to access the button.
l or if the unit has a 'soft' CE switch simply follow the on-screen instructions and re-
insert the USB key to power back up.
On powering the devices back on, a result screen will display which devices are still present
from before the power down, and which devices have been added.
Replacing one of the following devices will trigger a status of 'Device not authorised' on the
device status list:
l USB EPP2
l USB PPD
l USB IMCRW
l USB Smart Dip Card Reader
l USB Cash Dispenser
l USB GBRU
The ‘Device not authorised’ status can be cleared from the list as usual provided a USB
Service Key with Parts Replacement permission is present in the PC core.
Reset Device (Cycle Power)

The 'Reset Device (Cycle Power)' option powers down all devices except the PC core, and
then immediately restores power, effectively resetting all devices. When the devices are
powered back on, a results screen displays which devices are still present from before the
power down, and which devices have been recovered by the reset.
USB Viewer
The 'USB Viewer' option lists all devices with functioning USB connections, and to which
port they are attached on which hub.
Selecting a device from the list displays the detail of the connection, allowing the USB cable
to be identified and the connection to be traced from device to hub(s) to core. This option
provides an initial check whether or not the system is ‘seeing’ a device. Physical removal
and replacement of a USB connector will be reflected in USB Viewer almost immediately.
Device Manager
'Device Manager' is similar to the Microsoft Windows Device Manager, this option allows
the user to view the status of the PC devices attached to the system, such as modems,
comms ports and networks cards.
Troubleshooting Example
A device is reporting a loss of USB communications:
1. Check the USB connections at the device, the hub and the pc core. Re‐connect the
cables if they are disconnected. If they are connected correctly, go to the next step.
2. Use USB Viewer to determine if the terminal is ‘seeing’ the device, now that the
cables have been checked. If not, proceed to next step. If the terminal has found the
device but the fault is still being reported, go to the next step.
3. Use Reset Device to attempt to recover the device driver. If this does not work, go to
the next step.
4. Use Replace Device to power off all devices without re‐booting the pc core. Replace
the faulty FRU (field replaceable unit) on the device.
Device Self Tests

This option from the Sys App main menu provides access to device self tests which can be
run to check whether or not a device is operational, or to diagnose the cause of a fault.
Use either the touchscreen or keypad to select one or more test, or choose the ‘Select All’
option. Tests can be de‐selected by pressing the touchscreen area or numeric key again.
Then select ‘Run Test(s)’ to run the chosen test(s).
The self tests are run in the order in which they appear on the Device Self Tests menu.
During some self tests, prompts may be displayed requesting that an action is performed. If
these actions are not performed the test may not be completed successfully.
After the tests have been run, a screen will display the results, showing which tests failed,
passed or were incomplete.
Logs
The following items are available from the Logs menu:
l Event Logs
l Save Windows Info
l Custom Logs
Event Logs
The following items are available from the Event Logs menu:
l Software Event Logs

l Device Event Logs
l Communications Event Logs
Software Event Logs

Choosing the option ‘Filter’, allows you to display only the events for a particular device or
reason code, as appropriate.
A summary screen is displayed, listing all events in the selected log. From this screen,
detailed information can be displayed by selecting an event in the log, or the whole log can
be saved to a removable memory device.
The software events include:
l Sequence Number and Date/Time

l Source File Name
l Line Number
l Physical Process Name
l Logical Process Name
l Logical Thread Name
l String Data
Device Event Logs

The device events include:

l Service Name
l Device Name
l M_Status
l M_data
l T_code.
Note: System Application is identified in Device Event Logs as a device.
Communications Event Logs

The communications events include:

l Service Name
l Severity
l M_Status.
Save Windows Info.

Requires a USB memory stick.
Custom Logs
An example of the Custom Logs Menu is shown below.
Save To Disk
Custom logs cannot be viewed on the ATM.
If requested by Level 2 Support (or higher), custom logs can be saved to a USB memory
stick (>2GB) and sent for detailed analysis.
To save custom logs, do the following:
1. Insert a USB memory stick into an available USB port.

2. Select the required file(s) or use the 'Select All' option.
3. Select 'Save To Disk'.
4. Save the selected file(s) to the memory stick.
5. Transfer the file(s) to a PC.
6. Send the file(s) using the NCR File Transfer system (https://filetransfer.ncr.com) or
as directed by the requester.
Tallies
The following items are available from the Tallies menu:
l Service Tallies
l Save Module Life Counts
l Transaction Counters
l Save Timestamped Tallies
l Device Performance
Service Tallies
The Service Tallies displays a list of devices that have service tallies and the ability to clear
all tallies or save all tallies to a removable memory device.
Selecting a device will display the service tallies list for that device.
Save Module Life Counts

The Save Module Life Counts option saves the following module variable types to a USB
memory stick:
l Tallies with no thresholds

l Life counts with single thresholds
l Life counts with double thresholds
For each module variable, a record containing the following information is saved:
l Device Name
l Module Name
l Variable Name
l Variable Value
l Threshold 1 Value (only if variable has single or double thresholds)
l Threshold 2 Value (only if variable has a double threshold)
Transaction Counters
The transactions on certain devices (dispensers, depositories, printers) are logged every
hour. These counters can either be viewed or saved to removable memory device via this
menu option, providing data for analysis by second level support, e.g. tracking transaction
trends and service level agreements.
The information displayed includes:
l Device name and id number

l Instance ‐ how many of this device have been installed
l Module ‐ module name
l Variable ‐ what is being counted
l Current Device Value ‐ transaction count for this instance of the device
l Number of Previous Devices
l Previous Devices Value ‐ total number of transactions counted for all previous
instances of the device
Save Timestamped Tallies

Timestamped tallies are module life counts.
If requested by Level 2 Support (or higher), timestamped tallies can be saved to a USB
memory stick and sent for detailed analysis.
To save timestamped tallies, do the following:
1. Insert a USB memory stick into an available USB port.

2. Select the required file(s) or use the 'Select All' option.
3. Select 'Save To Disk'.
4. Save the selected file(s) to the memory stick.
5. Transfer the file(s) to a PC.
6. Send the file(s) using the NCR File Transfer system (https://filetransfer.ncr.com) or
as directed by the requester.
Device Performance
Depending of the ATM configuration, the following items can be listed in the Device
Performance menu:
l USB Media Dispenser

l USB Scalable Deposit Module 2
l USB BRM Standard Pocket
l USB Miscellaneous Interface
After selecting a device, a list of Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) for that device are
displayed. .Selecting a KPI will display a graph of either ratios or percentages to help in
identifying possible performance problems, changes and trends, or to show that there are
no chronic performance issues with that device. Ratio KPIs are shown in a dual line graph,
typically plotting a cumulative error count against a transaction count and percentage KPIs
are a single line graph.
The time span for the graph can be changed using three function buttons; 'Previous 14
days', 'Previous 6 weeks' or 'Previous 6 months'.
Refer to the device chapters for details.
Device Status List

This function displays a list of all device states that require attention. The list is colour
coded:
l Red = Attention required now or soon

l Yellow = Health Analysis Recommendation
l Green = Action has been taken but not yet cleared by the platform.
Selecting a device state will enable that state to be marked as 'Done' and change its colour
to green.
The following information is provided for each device state:
l Device Name ‐ the name of the device that requires attention.

l Description ‐ a short description of the problem.
l Attention ‐ whether the state requires attention 'now' or will require attention 'soon'.
l User category ‐ this specifies what type of user is able to deal with the state, a
Customer Engineer or an Operator. (A user category of 'CE may be required'
indicates that an operator can attempt to deal with the state and if the operator fails to
clear it a CE should be called).
l Self Clearing ‐ whether the device state is self‐clearing or not. A self‐clearing device
state is automatically removed from the list when the user takes the required action.
For a non‐selfclearing device state the user must indicate to System Application that
action has been taken, by clearing the state.
l Status ID ‐ the unique status id identifies the status at a system level and can be useful
when reporting and tracking faults.
Fault History
The 'Fault History' option will display a list of all the faults that have occurred.
Selecting the 'Filter' option will enable you to filter the fault history by device name.
Clearing a Device State

The user can choose to clear individual device states or to clear all the states at once. A
device state should only be cleared after the user has performed the actions required to
clear the device state.
Clearing an Individual State

1. Select the device state to be cleared.
2. If the selected device state can be cleared by more than one action, a screen will be
displayed for the user to indicate which action has been performed to clear the state.
3. If clearing a device state affects a device’s life counts then a prompt is displayed
asking the user to confirm that the action has been performed.
4. The device self test is run to check that the device is operational.
5. Select the ‘Previous’ FDK to return to the Device Status List screen.
Clear All
The Clear All option should only be used if all of the reported device states have been dealt
with.
1. Select the ‘Clear All’ FDK.

2. The device self tests are now run to check that the devices are operational.
3. Select the ‘Previous’ FDK to return to the Device Status List screen.
Device Servicing
This menu option should be used to report that a device servicing action (for example
replacing the cash handler suction cups) has been performed when the Device Status List
is not reporting that the action is required.
The user should only select an action on the menu after they have actually performed that
servicing action. Selecting an action will run a self test on the device, to check that the
action has been successfully performed and that the device is operational.
Fatal Error History

This menu option displays a list of devices that provide fatal error history information.
Selecting a device will display a list of M‐Status codes reported following a fatal error
condition for that device. The code translation and weekly totals for the previous five weeks
will also be displayed.
Selecting the M‐Status item will display a list of M‐Data sets and their weekly totals for the
previous five weeks.
Selecting an M‐Data item will display the M‐Data codes in that set. This can be used if the
previous menu does not have enough space the show all the codes.
Self-Service Configuration
The Self‐Service Configuration Menu provides a set of options that are used to configure
the terminal or display configuration information.
The following items are available from the Self‐Service Configuration Menu:
l Display Hardware Details

l Display Software Details
l Set Device Configuration
l Set Date and Time
l Set Active Language
l Set Active Printer
l Set ATM Properties.
Display Hardware Details

Select the Display Hardware Details option to display the hardware configuration.
This information includes:
l Product Class
l Serial Number
l A list of all the fitted devices fitted.
This information can be saved to a removable memory device.
Display Software Details

Select the Display Software Details option to display the software configuration. This
information includes:
1. The Operating System name, version and build numbers.

2. The Self Service software name, version and build numbers.
This information can be saved to a removable memory device.
Set Device Configuration

Select the Set Device Configuration option to configure devices. A list of devices which can
be configured is displayed. See NCR publication NCR Self Service Support, System
Application User Guide, B006‐6167 for details of the configuration of devices.
The following devices have only a basic configuration parameter:
l Alarms
l Remote Relay
l Remote Status Indicator
l Proximity Detector
l Advert light
l Fascia Light.
These basic configuration parameters can be toggled between PRESENT and NOT
PRESENT for each device. Setting the parameter to NOT PRESENT will 'hide' the
presence of a device from any software which requests details of the devices fitted to the
terminal. Setting the parameter to PRESENT will allow any software which requests
details of the devices to be made aware that this device is present. Changes to the
parameters for any of the devices require the terminal to be reset before the changes take
effect.
The following further options are available under Set Device Configuration:
Hardware Information and Recovery

'Hardware Information and Recovery' displays the following menu choices:
l Firmware Version ‐ displays device firmware versions

l Device Recovery Wait Time ‐ allows the user to configure how long Sys App waits for
devices to be seen after power is either cycled or switched off and on, using Reset
Devices or Replace Device from Hardware Information Recovery option under the
Device Diagnostics menu. Default value is 90 seconds.
l PC Information ‐ allows the user to perform PC troubleshooting by displaying PC
hardware and network information, such as details of bios, core, operating system,
disk drive, disk space remaining, communication ports.
l GBRU Power Off ‐ allows the user to specify whether or not the GBRU power supply
is included in the 24V power down or reset functions in the Hardware Information and
Recovery option under the Diagnostics menu. This option is only displayed if a GBRU
is configured in the terminal.
General Device Configuration

'General Device Configuration' allows device start‐up error logging to be enabled or
disabled. Disabling logging reduces the number of unnecessary event log entries,
however, temporarily enabling device start‐up error logging can be useful, for example to
debug a start‐up error.
Set Date and Time

Modifies the settings of the operating system date and time. The date format is
DDMMYYYY and the time format is HHMMSS.
If the user does not have Windows access rights to change the operating system date and
time, then a prompt will be displayed indicating this and the user will be returned to the Self‐
Service Configuration menu.
Set Active Language

All terminals are supplied with at least one language, used by the System Application for all
text which it displays and saves to a removable memory device. Select the Set Active
Language option to view or modify the language used.
Set Active Printer

The selected printer will be used to print data if a screen displays the 'Print' function.
Set ATM Properties

The following properties are displayed:
l Product Class
l Manufacturing Plant Code
l Serial Number
l Tracer Number
l Geographic Address
l Location of Operator Panel
LEVEL 0 DIAGNOSTICS
The Level 0 Diagnostics are contained in EPROM/ROM on most of the devices. The tests
are grouped into three types as follows:
l Power‐up diagnostics
l Switch selectable diagnostics
l Extended diagnostics.
The diagnostics tests for each device are detailed in the relevant device chapter in this
manual.
Power-up Diagnostics
The central processing unit has diagnostic routines stored in an area of on‐board ROM.
These tests run at power‐up or reset and any errors found are indicated by beeper tones
on the speaker, messages on the monitor screen, and hexadecimal codes on a bank of
LEDs. The diagnostics are completed before loading the operating system and there is no
way of changing the order of the tests or of selecting individual tests.
Power‐up diagnostics are found on:
l Processor boards
l PC Communications Module
l Dispenser Control Board
l Depository Control Board.
The tests operate in four phases:
Initial Processor Diagnostics

Initial processor diagnostics make basic checks on the timers, the system I/O port, ROM
and RAM memory, the bus logic, DMA, Interrupt Controller and Peripheral Interface ICs to
verify that the board is functioning properly.
System Test And Initialization

After the initial diagnostics, the routines determine what system hardware is installed and
test and initialize that hardware. Progress is shown by test messages.
System Configuration Verification

When initialization is complete, the routines compare actual hardware found with the
definition of expected hardware held in battery‐protected CMOS memory. If these agree
then the level 0 phase is complete. If they differ, an error message is displayed and the
SETUP message is given.
Extended ROM BIOS Diagnostics

Checks each of the boards present within the PC core to ensure that it is functional.
Switch Selectable Diagnostics

Switch selectable diagnostics can be accessed by operating a switch. This type of test is
found on the printers.
Extended Diagnostics
Extended diagnostics can be selected to run individually and the mode of operation can
also be selected by switches.
Some electronics boards are provided with an extended diagnostics test facility. ROM
resident diagnostic routines can be accessed by setting on‐board switches to select
individual tests. Test results are given in hexadecimal codes displayed on LEDs on the
boards.
TEST TOOLS
The following tools are required for diagnostic testing:
l NCR USB Service Key ‐ Product ID G531‐1004‐0000

l Bootable System Application ‐ Product ID G531‐1050‐0000
l Card reader test cards:
l Cleaning card (Sanac) ‐ 998‐0052929
l Test track 1/2/3 ‐ 009‐0003479
l Passbook.
Bootable System Application

The purpose of the Bootable System Application for APTRA is:
l To allow the diagnosis of hardware or APTRA XFS software faults, if System

Application cannot be accessed from within Supervisor or the terminal is in a
persistent restart state.
l To provide a reliable and consistent software platform to speed up analysis and issue
resolution, when it is not clear if the problem is caused by a hardware or a software
fault
l To provide diagnostics without using software on the hard disk.
REVISION
November 2018 A.2 System Application M-Status 4 to 8 added

4. PRODUCT CABLING
6634 Product Cabling 149
Revision 220
6634 Interactive Teller Product Cabling 221
Revision 291
6634 PRODUCT CABLING
INTRODUCTION
This chapter covers the Power Distribution, Interconnect Diagrams and Functional
Electrical Drawings.
DISTRIBUTION DIAGRAMS
AC Distribution With UPS
PRESSURISATION FAN
AC IN
FASCIA TOP PANEL
TOP BOX
600W PSU -MAIN
AC IN
Deposit 24V
AC DIST 24Vdc 1
24Vdc 2
PC Core AC OUT1
24Vdc 3
AC OUT2
AC OUT3 24Vdc 4
AC OUT4 24Vdc 5
Control & 5V AUX
Rocker / Fuse CE AC IN
600W PSU -CASH
MGE UPS
AC IN
AC OUT1 USB
Deposit 24V
AC OUT2
24Vdc 1
AC OUT3
24Vdc 2
AC OUT4
24Vdc 3
AC IN 24Vdc 4
24Vdc 5
Control & 5V AUX
S1 Dispenser
AC IN
SOLID STATE
RELAY (SSR) HEATER
AC Control AC OUT 1 AC IN
AC IN AC OUT 2
SAFE
SLIM HEATER HEATER
120 WATTS
AC IN
AC IN
AC IN Filter
= only present in earlier units configured with GBRU
AC Distribution Without UPS
Pressurisation Fan
AC IN
FASCIA TOP PANEL

TOP BOX
600W PSU -MAIN
AC IN
Deposit 24V
AC DIST 24Vdc 1
24Vdc 2
AC OUT1
PC Core 24Vdc 3
AC OUT2
24Vdc 4
AC OUT3
AC OUT4 24Vdc 5
Control & 5V AUX
600W PSU -CASH
AC IN
Deposit 24V
24Vdc 1
24Vdc 2
24Vdc 3
24Vdc 4
24Vdc 5
Control & 5V AUX
S1 Dispenser
AC IN
HEATER
AC IN
SAFE
HEATER
AC IN
AC IN Filter
SLIM HEATER
120 WATTS
AC IN
= optional (present in earlier units whenever configured with GBRU,

only in later units when two GBRUs configured)
DC Distribution (Fascia)
FASCIA HUB TASK LIGHT

24Vdc IN 24Vdc 1 24Vdc
24Vdc 2
24Vdc 3
24V 24Vdc 4 TASK LIGHT
12V 24Vdc 5 24Vdc
ADVERT LIGHT
24Vdc
UNIV. SHUTTERS
24Vdc
UNIV. SHUTTERS
24Vdc
UNIV. EPP / ALPHA K/B

24Vdc
COLOUR CCTV CAMERA

12Vdc
DC Distribution (Top Box)
UNIV. MISC I/F TILT MOTOR

24 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vdc
24 Vdc
MINI DC HUB MIMO PCB

600W PSU-MAIN 24Vdc IN 24 Vdc 24 Vdc
AC IN 24 Vdc 24 Vdc
Deposit 24V
USB HUB 7
24Vdc 1
24Vdc USB IN
24Vdc 2 GOP DISPLAY
24Vdc 3 USB 1 24Vdc
24Vdc 4 USB 2 GOP TOUCHSCREEN
24Vdc 5 USB 3
Control & 5V AUX USB 4
USB 5 UNIV. RCPT. PRINTER
USB 6
24Vdc
UNIV. DC HUB USB 7
24Vdc IN 24Vdc 1
UNIV. JRNL. PRINTER
24Vdc 2
24Vdc OUT 24Vdc
24Vdc 3
24Vdc 4
24Vdc 5 UNIV. IMCRW
24Vdc 6 24Vdc
24Vdc 7
24Vdc 8 CARD PROTECTION
24Vdc (CPK)
UNIV. DC HUB
CPM4
24Vdc IN 24Vdc 1
24Vdc 2 24Vdc
24Vdc OUT
24Vdc 3
24Vdc 4 CONTACTLESS
24Vdc 5 24Vdc
24Vdc 6
24Vdc 7
24Vdc 8 SCPM
24Vdc
600W PSU-CASH
IFD/SPS
AC IN
Deposit 24V 24Vdc
24Vdc 1
24Vdc 2
24Vdc 3
24Vdc 4 STATEMENT/
24Vdc 5 PTPB PRINTER
24Vdc
Control & 5V AUX
Note: If second DC hub

To GBNA / RU ( Safe) is not fitted, connect the
To S2 Dispenser ( Safe) printer to the first DC hub
To UNI. DC HUB ( Safe)
only present in earlier units configured with GBRU
DC Distribution (Safe)
USB Distribution
Talladega Motherboard
USB 1
USB 2
USB 3 GOP/COP
USB 4
USB 5 IFD/SPS
USB 6
USB 7
2nd Dip
USB KEY Coin
4 Port
USB 1 CPM
USB 2
USB 3
USB 4
USB 1 Display HUB

USB 2
USB 3 Compound
USB 4 Device
USB 5 Diagnostics
USB 6
USB 7
4 Port
USB 1 /
USB 2
USB 3
USB 4
Pocono Motherboard
USB 1
USB 2
USB 3 GOP/COP
POCONO
USB 4
USB 5 IFD/SPS
USB KEY USB 6
USB 7
USB 11
USB 10
USB 12
USB 13 4 Port
USB 1 /SDM 2
USB 5
USB 2
USB 4 USB 3
USB 9 USB 4
USB 8
USB 6
USB 7
USB 3
USB 2 USB 1 Display HUB
USB 2
USB 3 Compound
USB 4 Device
USB 5 Diagnostics
USB 6
USB 7
2nd Dip
Coin
4 Port
USB 1 CPM
USB 2
USB 3
USB 4
Estoril Motherboard
USB 1
USB 2
USB 3 GOP/COP
USB 4
ESTORIL USB 5 IFD/SPS
USB 0 CE USB Key USB 6
USB 1 Statement USB 7
USB 3.0
USB 2
USB 3
USB 4
USB 5
USB 1 Display HUB Diagnostics
USB 6
USB 2
USB 2.0
USB 7 USB 3 Compound

USB 8 USB 4 Device
USB 9 USB 5 Diagnostics

USB 6
USB 7
2nd Dip
Coin
4 Port
USB 1 CPM
USB 2
USB 3
USB 4
4 Port
USB 1 2
USB 2
USB 3
USB 4
Misano Motherboard
Physical Layout of the Pocono PC Core USB Connections

5 3
4 2
Serial Parallel LAN Audio 7 9
6 8
PS/2 VGA DVI 10 USB (2 off)
Pocono Motherboard
5 6
4 7
11
10
Audio
Serial 12 LAN
9 3
VGA 13
8 2
DVI DP
1
0
Estoril Motherboard
Misano Motherboard
ALARMS
Alarm System Interconnection Diagrams
Basic Alarm System With Status
The following diagram shows the signal paths in the basic alarm system with alarm status.
5
6
RIO BOARD
3
4
7
8
1
Fitted with turnaround plug if the silent alarm is not present
Enhanced Alarm System Without Status

The following diagram shows the signal paths in the enhanced alarm system without alarm
status.
Enhanced Alarm System With Status

The following diagram shows the signal paths in the enhanced alarm system with alarm
status.
5
6
RIO BOARD
3
4
7
8
1
Enhanced Alarm System for Medium / High Security

The following diagram shows the signal paths in the enhanced alarm system for medium /
high security.
5
6
RIO BOARD
3
4
7
8
1
Basic Alarms Harness
1 2 ALARM P4
VIBRATION
3 4 CONTACT
5 6
7 8
9 10 ALARM P4 VIBRATION CONTACT

VIB.COM
11 12 16 1
VIB
11 2
13 14
15 16
ALARM P4
BOLT_THROWN
ALARM_P2
DOOR_CLOSED
C2
BOLT COM
1
2 BOLT_THROWN
ALARM P2 BOLT N/O
4
3 C1
REED SWITCH A
1 A
REED SWITCH B DOOR_CLOSED
4
B
2
4 3
1 2
ALARM P2
Athena Alarms Harness
2 TAMPER
1
ALARM_P3
RIO BOARD
GND_1
1 13
14 25
ALARM_O/P
TAMPER
7 TAL_OUT 1
2
1
9 TAL_IN 2
3
4
1 TAL_NC 6
3 TAL_CM 18
5
6
5 TAL_NO 5
2 DAL_NO 8
7
8
4 DAL_CM 21
ALARM O/P
6 DAL_NC 9
10
9
8 SAL_NO 19
10 SAL_CM 7
12
11
12 SAL_NC 20
14 CAL_NC 23
14
13
16 CAL_CM 10
18 CAL_NO 22
ALARM P 3
16
15
25 CTST_OUT 3
27 CTST_IN 16
17
18
28 12V 12
29 12V RTN
12V RTN 25
12V RTN
20
13
19
1
30 1
23 GND_1
21
22
20 CSTS NC 1
RIO BOARD
22 DSTS NC 3
24
23
24 SSTS NC 5
26 TSTS NC 7
26
25
15 GND 2
17 GND 4
28
27
19 GND 6
21 GND 8
11
29
30
ALARMS, BASIC AND ENHANCED, WITH STATUS ASSEMBLY
Enhanced Alarms Harness
DETECTOR
2 12V 2
6 CTST_OP 9
12 CAL_OUT 14
13 TAL_OUT 11
15 TAL_IN 10
16 GND 1
8 CTST_OUT 15
10 CTST_IN
ALARM_P4 DETECTOR
W B 2 1
TEST_TRANSMITTER RESISTOR_2K37
Door Switch Harness (Ral)
DOOR LOCK
SENSOR 1
ALARM
P2
DOOR CLOSED
SENSOR 2
SEN 1
ALARM P2 (DOOR LOCKED)
REED SW-1
3 1
REED SW-2
2
1 REED SW-2
1
REED SW-1
4 2
SEN 2
4 3
(DOOR CLOSED)
1 2
ALARM P2
AUDIO
Private Audio Harness Athena Cab
SWITCH
AUDIO
H / P SOCKET
H / P SOCKET AUDIO
CIA AUDIO_LH
1 1
CIB AUDIO_RH
2 2
CIC DETECT
3 3
CI_ SHIELD
4 4
SWITCH
CID SENSE
2 5
CIE GND
1 6
6 5 4
3 2 1
AUDIO
Private Audio Harness
AUTO SUPERVISORY ENTRY

Auto Supervisor Harness
NC2 NC COM
CM2
SUPERVISOR
SUPERVISOR
3 SUPERVISOR
4 1 COM
2 SUPERVISOR
1 NC
1 NC2
1 NO
3 1 CM2
4 SUPERVISOR
2
4 3
1 2
SUPERVISOR
Auto Supervisor Harness Without PA

MISC I/F
J4
SUPERVISOR
CONTACTLESS
MISC I/F
BIOMETRIC J4
W6 24 AWG WHITE
W7 24 AWG WHITE
BIOMETRIC W8 24 AWG WHITE
CONTACTLESS
W2 24 AWG WHITE
W3 24 AWG WHITE
SUPERVISOR W4 24 AWG WHITE
W5 24 AWG WHITE
NO PINOUT NO PINOUT NO PINOUT NO PINOUT

INFORMATION INFORMATION INFORMATION INFORMATION
BIOMETRIC SUPERVISOR CONTACTLESS MISC I/F J4
CARD READER
MM Sensor Extension Cable
P1 P2
1 NC
2 NC
3 4
4 5
5 6
6 2
7 3
8 1
9 NC
1 5 2
3 1
NC
6 9
4
6
5
MM To Stage 1 Pcb Cable Assembly
STAGE 1 - P11 MM - BOX
STAGE 1 - P11 MM BOX

+ 5V
1 1
MM SENSOR
2 2
3 RESET 3
TXD RXD
4 4
5 RXD TXD 5
GND
6 6
CIM SENSOR
7 7
GND
8 8
OPEN
9 9
OPEN
10 10
+ 5V
11 11
+ 5V
12 12
GND
13 13
GND
14 14
15
16
15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
STAGE 1 - P11 MM - BOX
Cim To Stage 1 Pcb Cable Assembly
STAGE 1 - P11 CIM - BOX
STAGE 1 - P11 CIM BOX

+ 5V
1 1
2 2
3 RESET 3
TXD RXD
4 4
5 RXD TXD 5
GND
6 6
CIM SENSING
7 7
GND
8 8
B AUD 1
9 9
B AUD 2
10 10
+ 5V
11 11
+ 5V
12 12
GND
13 13
GND
14 14
15
16
15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
STAGE 1 - P11 CIM - BOX
CORE
Floppy Disk Drive Cable Assembly
P1 P2
P1 P2
34 34
33 33
32 32
31 31
30 30
29 29
28 28
27 27
26 26
25 25
24 24
2 1 23 23 2 1
22 22
21 21
20 20
19 19
18 18
17 17
16 10
15 11
14 12
13 13
12 14
11 15
10 16
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
34 33 1 1 34 33
Ultra ATA Cable Assembly
P1 P2 P3
BLACK GREY BLUE
P1 P2 P3
1 1 1
2 2 2
3 3 3
4 4 4
P1 5 5 5 P2 P3
39 40 39 40 39 40
19 19 19
21 21 21
22 22 22
23 23 23
24 24 24
25 25 25
26 26 26
27 27 27
28 28
29 29 29
30 30 30
31 31 31
32 32 32
33 33 33
34 34 34
35 35 35
36 36 36
37 37 37
38 38 38
39 39 39
1 2 40 40 40 1 2 1 2
Pivat Disk Security Harness
SWITCH
BART
1
4
SWITCH BART
PG
1 1
2 3
GND 2
4
3 2 1
USB 2.0 4 Port Break Out Assembly
P5
1 2
P1
P2 9 10
P6
P3 1 2
P4
9 10
1 RED 1
2 WHITE 3
P1 3 GREEN 5
4 BLACK 7
SHELL P5
1 RED 2
2 WHITE 4
P2 3 GREEN 6
4 BLACK 8
10 KEYED
SHELL
1 RED 1
2 WHITE 3
P3 3 GREEN 5
4 BLACK 7
SHELL P6
1 RED 2
2 WHITE 4
P4 3 GREEN 6
4 BLACK 8
10 KEYED
SHELL
Serial ATA With Latched Connectors Cable Assembly
CON 1 CON 2
PIN 1 PIN 1GND
PIN 2 PIN 2 SATA_TX+
PIN 3 PIN 3 SATA_TX-
PIN 4 PIN 4 GND
PIN 5 PIN 5 SATA RX-
PIN 6 PIN 6 SATA_RX+
PIN 7 PIN 7 GND
CON 1 CON 2 SIGNAL
RIO Enable Harness
RIO MISC_IF P7
RIO MISC_IF P7
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
2
1
2
1
5 5
6 6
3
4
3
4
7 7
8 8
5
6
5
6
9 9
10 10
7
8
7
8
11 11
10
10
9
9
12 12
13 13
12
11
12
11
14 14
14
13
15 15
14
13
16 16
16
15
15
16
17 17
18 18
17
18
17
18
19 19
20 20
20
20
19
19
RIO MISC_IF P7
Reset And Tamper Harness
RAT M - BOARD
1 RESET 1
2 RESET_RTN 2
POWER
3 3
POWER_RTN
4 4
5 SPKR 5
SPKR_RTN
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
RAT M-BOARD
Polarising Key
9 7 5 3 1 9 7 5 3 1
10 8 6 4 2 10 8 6 4 2
SDM
SDM DC Distribution Harness
2 1 1 2
DC-A DC-B
1 1
DC-A DC-B
2 2
SDM DCInterlock
SDM SW1-CM
1
SW1-NO
2
3 SW2-NO
SW2-CM
1 CM SW1
SDM 2
3 NO SW2
CM SW2
NO SW1
EXTERNAL CABLING
Remote Devices Harness
NIGHT
DEPO 1
RIO
REMOTE
STATUS
NIGHT
DEPO 2
REMOTE
RELAY
1
RIO
DEP_SOL
2
9 1
DEP_SOL RTN
10 3 NIGHT
3
BAG SWITCH DEPO 1

11 4
GND 2
4
12
5
RELAY 1 1 NIGHT
13
RELAY 2 DEPO 2
6
14 2
7
DOOR SWITCH REMOTE

8
5 2
GND RELAY
6 1
9
10
LED 0
2 2
LED 1 REMOTE
11
3 3 STATUS
LED 2
4 4
12
5V FUSED 1
1
8
13
7
14
4 4 2 2
RIO
3 3 1 1
2 2
NIGHT REMOTE
1 1 DEPO 2 RELAY
NIGHT REMOTE
DEPO 1 STATUS
Remote Status Monitor Enable Only
1 INTERVENTION
REQUIRED
BUSY OPEN
1 SERVICE SUPPLIES IN
REQUIRED REQUIRED SERVICE
E1 E2 E3 E4
1 GREEN BLACK
2 RED WHITE
3 WHITE RED
4 BLACK GREEN
CURRENCY DEPOSITORY
UX GBNA DC Harness
GBNA_DC
PSU_DEPO_P7
GBNA_DC
9
1
10
PSU_DEPO_P7
C1
2
24V
8 11
24V RTN
3 3
24V C2
9 12
24V RTN
6 4
24V C3
10 13
24V RTN
7 5
24V C4
4 14
24V RTN
1 6
24V C5
5 15
24V RTN
2 7
16
8
10 9 8 7 6 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PSU_DEPO_P7 GBNA_DC
TILTING DISPLAY
Motor Harness
MOTOR
J2 MIMO PCB
DC MIMO IN MISC IF
DC MOTOR DC MIMO
15 1
DC MOTOR
16 2
6 11
MOTOR 4 10 J2 MIMO PCB
3 7
7 1
MISC IF
5 2
1 1
DC MIMO IN DC MIMO
2 2
Opto-Switch Harness
J4 MIMO PCB OPTO-SWITCH
SENSOR IN SENSOR OUT
J3 MIMO BTN
UP DOWN
J4 MIMO PCB SENSOR IN SENSOR OUT OPTO-SWITCH

Green
1 1 1
Orange
2 2 2
Blue
5 3 3
White
6 4 4
1 6
2 5
DOWN
3 1
4 2
J3 MIMO BTN
1 8
2 7
UP
3 3
4 4
DC Hubs / Interlock Switch Harness
DC HUB MINI DC HUB
NO SUP1
COM SUP1
NO SUP2
COM SUP2
COM TLT
NO TLT
DC HUB MINI DC HUB
1 1
2 2
NO TLT COM TLT
I/L SWITCH
NO SUP1 NO SUP2
COM SUP1 COM SUP2
Up/Down Buttons Harness
Pushbutton Switch
Green LED
NO
1
NO
Pushbutton Switch 2
Green LED -
3
+
4
Tilt with RIO Harness

MISC I/F
RIO MISC I/F P7
RIO MISC I/F P7
1 1
2 2
1
3 3
19
20
4
3
4 4
5 5
18
17
6
5
6 6
15
16
7 7
7
8 8
14
13
10
9
9 9
12
11
10 10
11
12
12 12
10
9
13
14
14 14
15 15
7
16
15
16 16
5
17
6
18
17 17
19 19
20
3
4
19
19 19 2
20 20 1
ERROR
1 13
2
HOME CMD
2 11
1
MISC I/F
Tilt without RIO Harness
MISC I/F MISC I/F P7
ERROR
1 13
MISC I/F HOME CMD MISC I/F P7
2 11
19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
1 2
20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
HARNESSES
Mains Switch Harness
GR4
GR3
GR3
L 11 AC_DIST
MAINS SWITCH N 24
SW2
N 25
L 12 CORE
L 12
N 25
MAINS SWITCH
SW1 N 24
L 11
INLET / UPS
L L
(Fuse IN) (Fuse OUT)
SERVICE SWITCH
24V
25 L
+24V RTN AC_DIST
12 N
24 GR4 E
11
GR3 E
11 CORE
N
24 L
GR2 E
25 INLET / UPS
N
12 OUT IN L
MAINS SWITCH
AC Inlet Harness
MAINS FILTER
L UPS / INLET
CHASSIS_GND
L L
N N
E E
MAINS UPS / INLET

FILTER
CHASSIS
GND
AC Distribution Power Cord
PLUG RECEPTACLE
L N N L
E E
High Power DC Distribution Harness
24V
1 1
RTN
2 2
2 2
1 1
Low Power DC Distribution Harness
24V
1 1
RTN
2 2
2 2
1 1
Fused DC Harness
DC-A DC-B
1 1
DC-A DC-B
2 2
Twin DC Harness
2
1
2
1
2
1
TWIN_DC
TWIN_DC
1 1
2 2
1
2
USB Type A to Type B High Speed (480Mbps)
USB Type A To Type Mini B High Speed (480Mbps)
TYPE A
TYPE MINI B
Pos.4 Pos.1
Pos.5
Pos.1
Pin 1 VBus Pin 1

Pin 2 D- Pin 2
Type Type
A D+
Pin 3 Pin 3 Mini - B
GND
Pin 4 Pin 5
Braid + Drain Shell
On-Twisted Power Pair

Red: V BUS
Black: Power Ground
W
R B
G
Twisted Signaling Pair
White: D-
Green: D+
VW3 / DU3 Topbox Harness (View 1 Of 2)
MISC I / F P3
MEI_FASCIA
FASCIA_FDK
MEI_IMCRW TAMPER
POWERPOWER
STAT 1 STAT 2
MISC I / F P3 WATCHDOG
PWR_STAT 1
+ 5V
1 5
+ 5V RTN
2 6
FDK_CONF 1
4 1
FDK_1 TP
9 2
GND 3
10
FDK1_LW_MD
11 4
FDK_UP_MD
12 5
FDK_BT FASCIA_FDK
13 6
FDK_TP
3 7
FDK2_LW_MD
5 8
FDK2_UP_MD
6 9
FDK_CONF2
7 10
FDK2_BT
8 11
GND
14 12
31
32
MEEI6
15 1
+24V
16 2
MEEI7
27 3
+24V
28 4
MEEI1
25 5
+24V
26 6
MEEI2
19 7
+24V
20 8
MEEI3 MEI_FASCIA
17 9
+24V
18 10
MEEI4
29 11
+24V
30 12
MEEI5
21 13
+24V
22 14
LEFT OUT +
47 15
LEFT OUT -
48 16
MEI_IMCRW
MEEI8
23 2
+24V
24 1
TAMPER
WDOG_RESET
TAMPER A
1
2 TAMPER B
6 2
WDOG_RESET 5
33
GND 9 PWR_STAT1
34
POWER_SHD1 8
37
GND 4
38
POWER_STAT1 2
41
GND 1
42
PWR_STAT2
POWER_SHD2
35 8
GND 4
36
POWER_STAT2 2
39
GND 1
40
1 2 5 6 7 8
1 4 3 2 1
MISC I / F P3
MEI_IMCRW PWR_STAT1
TAMPER PWR_STAT 2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6
MEI_FASCIA FASCIA_FDK
VW3 / DU3 Fascia Harness (View 1 Of 2)
ADVERT_POWER
TASK_J2
TASK_LIGHT TASK_J1
MEEI_FASCIA
CPM_MEEI
PASSBOOK_MEEI
COIN_MEEI
DC_HUB
SHUTTER_RH
DP_MEEI
RECIEPT_MEEI
K/BOARD_USB
K/BOARD
DEPO_MEEI
SHUTTER_LH
KEYBOARD
SPEAKER
SPEAKER
USB
DISP_MEEI
MEEI_FASCIA
MEEI6
1 2
+24V DISP_MEEI
2 1
MEEI7
3 2
+24V PASSBK_MEEI
4 1
MEEI1
5 2
+24V PPD_MEI
6 1
MEEI2
7 2
+24V RECIEPT_MEEI
8 1
MEEI3
9 2
+24V CPM_MEEI
10 1
MEEI4
11 2
+24V DIP_MEEI
12 1
MEEI5
13 2
+24V COIN_MEEI
14 1
LEFT_OUT+
15 SPEAKER
LEFT_OUT-
16 SPEAKER
VW3 / DU3 Fascia Harness (View 2 Of 2)
TASK_LIGHT DRIVER J2
24V
10 1
+24V RTN SHUTTER_LH
2 2
24V 1
5
+24V RTN 2 ADVERT_PWR
1
24V
6 1
+24V TASK_LIGHT
7 2
24V
9 1
+24V RTN SHUTTER_RH
3 2
24V 1
4
+24V RTN 2 KEY_BOARD
8
TASK_LIGHT DRIVER J1
24V 1
1
+24V RTN 2 DC_HUB
2
USB_HUB
USB 2.0 1
1 USB_KEYBOARD
2 1 2 10 9 8 7 6
1 5 4 3 2 1
DIP_MEEI
DC_HUB RECIEPT_MEEI TASK_J2
TASK_LIGHT PASSBOOK_MEEI
ADVERT_PWR CPM_MEEI
TASK_J1 COIN_MEEI
SHUTTER_RH DEPO_MEEI
SHUTTER_LH DISP_MEEI
KEY_BOARD
Video Cable Straight To 45 Degree
DISPLAY CORE_VGA
6 6
1 7 11 1 7 11
2 8 12 2 8 12
3 9 13 3 9 13
4 10 14 4 10 14
5 15 5 15
Heater Harness
HEATER
AC_DIST
PWR SUP HEATER
1 2
2 5
E 3
4
1
1 2 3
4 5 6
HEATER
6634 Coin Module Harness
USB TYPE B RIGHT ANGLED
COIN DC
DC
USB_TYPE_A
DC COIN DC
2 1 1 2
1 2 2 1
USB_TYPE_A USB_TYPE_MINIB
1 1
Pos.4 Pos.1
Pos.5
Pos.1
Pin 1 VBus Pin 1

Pin 2 D- Pin 2
Type Type
A D+
GND
Pin 4 Pin 5
Braid + Drain Shell
Mitigation Dispenser Interlock Harness
SW1_NO
SW2_CM
DC_IN
SW2_CM1
AC_IN
SW2_CM2
EARTH
SW2_NO2 DC_OUT
SW2_NO1
AC_DIST
DC_IN
1 1 SW1_NO
2 1 1 SW1_CM
2
DC_OUT
L 1 SW2_CM1 1 1 SW2_NO1
N 1 SW2_CM2 2 1 SW2_NO2
E 1 EARTH 3 1 EARTH
4
AC_OUT
AC_IN
4 3 2
3 2 1 1 2 1
DC_IN AC_IN DC_OUT
S2 Retract Harness
SHUTTER
USB
MINI_B
DC 1
01
2
02 1
DC_S2 01
2
02
USB_S2
TYPE_A
SHUTTER_S2
28/22 AWG USB

USB_S2 1 1 USB
26 AWG 12C
SHUTTER_S2 1 1 SHUTTER
01 14 AWG BLACK +24V

DC_S2 1 1 DC
02 14 AWG WHITE 0V
2 2
03 18 AWG WHITE GND

GND_S2 1 1 GND
Tray Harness (View 1 of 3)
IMCRW IMCRW
RECEIPT RECEIPT
80 COL JOURNAL
IMCRW_MEI
JOURNAL
IMCRW
80 COL
RECEIPT
JOURNAL
IMCRW IMCRW
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 5
4
JOURNAL JOURNAL
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 5
4
RECEIPT RECEIPT
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
IMCRW
1 1
IMCRW
2 2
RECEIPT
1 1
RECEIPT
2 2
JOURNAL
1 1
JOURNAL
2 2
80 COL
1 1
80 COL
2 2
IMCRW_MEI
1 1
IMCRW
2 2
Safe Module Harness
DC SAFE
I2C
I2C
DC SAFE
USB TYPE MINIB
USB_TYPE_A
DC_SAFE DC_SAFE
2 1 1 2
2 2 1
1
USB _TYPE_A USB_TYPE MINI B
1 1
Pin 1 VBus Pin 1

Pin 2 D- Pin 2
Type Type
A D+
GND
Pin 4 Pin 5
Braid + Drain Shell
Pos.4 Pos.1
Pos.5
Pos.1
12C 12C
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
AUX MEI Contactless Harness
CONTACTLESS
CONTACTLESS MEI
W3 24 AWG WHITE
CONTACTLESS
CONTACTLESS MEI
NO PINOUT
INFORMATION
CONTACTLESS CONTACTLESS MEI
AUX MEI Biometric Harness
BIOMETRIC BIOMETRIC MEI
W1 24 AWG WHITE
W2 24 AWG WHITE
BIOMETRIC MEI
BIOMETRIC
NO PINOUT NO PINOUT
INFORMATION INFORMATION
BIOMETRIC BIOMETRIC MEI
Display Port to DVI-D Cable Assembly
DISPLAY
PORT
with DVI-D
Security
Latch
Latch Release
1 Lane 0 (+) TMDS Data 2- 1
2 GND TMDS Data 2+ 2
3 Lane 0 (-) GND 3
6 DVI-D
4 Lane 1 (+) SCL
5 GND SDA 7
Display Port 6 Lane 1 (-) TMDS Data 1- 9
7 Lane 2 (+) TMDS Data 1+ 10
1 11 8 24
2 8 GND GND
9 Lane 2 (-) +5V 14
19 10 Lane 3 (+) GND 15
20
11 GND Hot Plug Detect 16 1 17
12 Lane 3 (-) TMDS Data 0- 17
14 GND GND 19
15 AUX_CH (+) GND 22
16 GND TMDS Clock + 23
17 AUX_CH (-) TMDS Clock - 24
18 Hot Plug Detect
19 GND
20 DP PWR 3.3V
Display Port to VGA Cable Assembly
DISPLAY
PORT
with VGA
Security
Latch
Latch Release
1 Lane 0 (+) Red 1
2 GND Green 2
3 Lane 0 (-) Blue 3
4 Lane 1 (+) ID2/Res 4
5 GND GND 5 VGA
Display Port 6 Lane 1 (-) Red Return 6 6
7 Lane 2 (+) Green Return 7
1 8
2 8 GND Blue Return
9 Lane 2 (-) Key/Power 9 1 11
19 10 Lane 3 (+) GND 10
20 5 15
11 GND ID0/Res 11
12 Lane 3 (-) ID1/SDA 12
13 GND Hsync 13 10
14 GND Vsync 14
15 AUX_CH (+) ID3/SCL 15
16 GND
17 AUX_CH (-)
18 Hot Plug Detect
19 GND
20 DP PWR 3.3V
PRINTERS
UX Serial P/T Passbook Printer Comms Harness
P/T_PASSBOOK
P/T_PASSBOOK_CORE
P/T_PASSBOOK_CORE P/T_PASSBOOK
FRAME GND
1 1
2 RXD 2
TXD
3 3
DTR
4 6
SIGNAL GND
5 7
DSR
6 20
RTS ( ENB )
7 5
CTS ( SEL )
8 4
9 8
SHIELD C1 - SHIELD
9
10
12
5 1 13
9 6 14
P/T_PASSBOOK_CORE 15
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
1 13 24
14 25 25
P/T_PASSBOOK
Serial P/t Passbook Printer Comms Harness
P/T_PASSBOOK
P/T_PASSBOOK_CORE
P/T_PASSBOOK_CORE P/T_PASSBOOK
FRAME GND
1 1
2 RXD 2
TXD
3 3
DTR
4 6
SIGNAL GND
5 7
DSR
6 20
RTS ( ENB )
7 5
CTS ( SEL )
8 4
9 8
SHIELD C1 - SHIELD
9
10
12
5 1 13
9 6 14
P/T_PASSBOOK_CORE 15
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
1 13 24
14 25 25
P/T_PASSBOOK
Parallel IEEE Compliant Cable Assembly
CONNECTOR A CONNECTOR B
1 19 1
14
25 36
13 18
1 1
18 19
2 2
19 20
3 3
21
4 4
20 22
5 5
23
6 6
21 24
7 7
25
8 8
22 26
9 9
27
10 10
24 28
11 11
23 29
12 12
17 (NC)
13 13
15 (NC)
14 14
25 30
16 31
33 (NC)
15 32
34 (NC)
17 36
35 (NC)
SHELL SHELL
Roll Media Statement Printer Harness

P1 P2
Pos 3 Pos 4
Pos.4
Pos.1
Pos 2 Pos 1
Vbus
Pin 1 Pin 1
D-
Pin 2 Pin 2
D+
Pin 3 Pin 3
GND
Pin 4 Pin 5

Red: V Bus
Black: Power Ground
W
R B
G
White: D-
Green: D+
Fan Fold Media Statement Printer Harness
REVISION

6634 INTERACTIVE TELLER PRODUCT

CABLING
INTRODUCTION
This chapter covers the Power Distribution, Interconnect Diagrams and Functional
Electrical Drawings.
DISTRIBUTION DIAGRAMS
AC Distribution With UPS
PRESSURISATION FAN
AC IN
FASCIA TOP PANEL
TOP BOX
600W PSU -MAIN
AC IN
Deposit 24V
AC DIST 24Vdc 1
24Vdc 2
PC Core AC OUT1
24Vdc 3
AC OUT2
AC OUT3 24Vdc 4
AC OUT4 24Vdc 5
Control & 5V AUX
600W PSU -CASH
MGE UPS
AC IN
AC OUT1 USB
Deposit 24V
AC OUT2
24Vdc 1
AC OUT3
24Vdc 2
AC OUT4
24Vdc 3
AC IN 24Vdc 4
24Vdc 5
Control & 5V AUX
SOLID STATE
RELAY (SSR) HEATER
AC Control AC OUT 1 AC IN
AC IN AC OUT 2
SAFE
SLIM HEATER HEATER
120 WATTS
AC IN
AC IN
AC IN Filter
= only present in earlier units configured with GBRU
AC Distribution Without UPS
Pressurisation Fan
AC IN
FASCIA TOP PANEL

TOP BOX
600W PSU -MAIN
AC IN
Deposit 24V
AC DIST 24Vdc 1
24Vdc 2
AC OUT1
PC Core 24Vdc 3
AC OUT2
24Vdc 4
AC OUT3
AC OUT4 24Vdc 5
Control & 5V AUX
600W PSU -CASH
AC IN
Deposit 24V
24Vdc 1
24Vdc 2
24Vdc 3
24Vdc 4
24Vdc 5
Control & 5V AUX
HEATER
AC IN
SAFE
HEATER
AC IN
SLIM HEATER
120 WATTS
AC IN Filter AC IN
= optional (present in earlier units whenever configured with GBRU,

only in later units when two GBRUs configured)
DC Distribution (Facia)
FASCIA HUB UNIV. EPP/ALPHA K/B

24Vdc 2
24Vdc 3
24Vdc 4 TASK LIGHT
24Vdc 5 24Vdc
ADVERT LIGHT
24Vdc
UNIV. SHUTTERS
24Vdc
UNIV. SHUTTERS
24Vdc
DC Distribution (Top Box)

Note: For terminals with 5Vdc ID/Passport Scanner, refer to the “Interactive Teller
Distribution–VTM Camera (Analogue)” section.
UNIV. MISC I/F

24 Vdc
600W PSU-MAIN
USB HUB 7
AC IN
Deposit 24V 24Vdc USB IN
24Vdc 1 USB 1
24Vdc 2 USB 2 GOP DISPLAY
24Vdc 3 USB 3 24Vdc
24Vdc 4 USB 4 GOP TOUCHSCREEN
24Vdc 5 USB 5
Control & 5V AUX USB 6
USB 7 UNIV. RCPT. PRINTER
24Vdc
UNIV. DC HUB
24Vdc IN 24Vdc 1
24Vdc 2
24Vdc OUT 80 COL PRINTER
24Vdc 3
24Vdc 4 24Vdc
24Vdc 5
24Vdc 6
24Vdc 7 UNIV. JRNL. PRINTER
24Vdc 8
24Vdc
UNIV. IMCRW
24Vdc
MM SENSOR
DOOR FAN
24Vdc
ID/PASSPORT SCNR.
24Vdc
UNIV. DC HUB CPM4

24Vdc 2
24Vdc OUT
24Vdc 3
24Vdc 4 CPM SHUTTER
24Vdc 5 24Vdc
24Vdc 6
24Vdc 7
STATEMENT/
24Vdc 8
PTPS PRINTER
24Vdc
To UNI. DC HUB ( Safe)
DC Distribution (Safe)
From 600w PSU - MAIN ( Topbox)
SAFE
DISPLAY
24Vdc
TOUCHSCREEN
UNIV. DC HUB
24Vdc IN 24Vdc 1
COIN
24Vdc 2
24Vdc OUT 24Vdc
24Vdc 3
24Vdc 4
24Vdc 5 FASCIA HUB
24Vdc 6 24Vdc
24Vdc 7
24Vdc 8
GBNA/RU
24Vdc
UNIV. PPD
24Vdc
USB HUB 7
24Vdc USB IN
UNIV. DISPENSER
USB 1
24Vdc
USB 2
24Vdc I/L
USB 3
USB 4 ICS
USB 5
USB 6
FAN/HEATER
USB 7
24Vdc
RIO
24Vdc
UNIV. DC HUB S1 DISPENSER

24Vdc 2 24Vdc I/L
24Vdc OUT
24Vdc 3 ICS
24Vdc 4
24Vdc 5
UNIV. DIP CRD READER
24Vdc 6
24Vdc 7 24Vdc
24Vdc 8
BARCODE
ILLUMINATOR
24Vdc
Note: Dual Dispenser
calls up second safe
DC hub. SAFE FAN
24Vdc
Interactive Teller Distribution

Interactive Teller Distribution—VTM Camera (Analogue)
HANDSET
I/O SlipRing Speaker

ENHANCED Microphone
PUBLIC MIC MISC I/F
Hookswitch
Microphone J14 (blue)
J11(orange)
J10 (red)
PC CORE J12 (black)
LINE OUT (green) J1 (black)

PUBLIC AUDIO
MIC IN (pink) J13 (green)
PCI/PCIe VID IN Left Speaker
J15
Right Speaker
PRIVATE AUDIO
VTM CAMERA (ANALOGUE) J4 Headphone
VTM CAMERA I/O

CAM OUT
VTM CAMERA I/O
CAM IN MEI
USB HUB
12 Vdc VID OUT SIG CAPTURE
(TOP BOX)
USB 7 USB
MEI
ID/PASSPORT
12V REGULATOR USB 6 USB

5 Vdc
J3 J1
DC HUB
(TOP BOX)
24 Vdc 4
5V REGULATOR
24 Vdc 7 J2 J1
DOOR FAN
Interactive Teller Distribution—VTM Camera (USB)
HANDSET
I/O SlipRing Speaker

Microphone
Hookswitch
ENHANCED
PUBLIC MIC MISC I/F
Microphone J14 (blue)
J11(orange)
J10 (red)
PC CORE J12 (black)
LINE OUT (green) J1 (black)

PUBLIC AUDIO
MIC IN (pink) J13 (green)
Left Speaker
J15
Right Speaker
USB 8
PRIVATE AUDIO
J4 Headphone
VTM CAMERA (USB)
USB
MEI
DC HUB USB HUB
(TOP BOX) (TOP BOX) SIG CAPTURE
USB 7 USB
MEI
ID/PASSPORT
24 Vdc 7 USB 6 USB

24 Vdc
USB Distribution
USB 1
USB 2
USB 3 GOP/COP
USB 4
USB 5 IFD/SPS
USB 6 ID/Passport or
Contactless
USB 7 Signature
2nd Dip
USB KEY Coin
4 Port
USB 1 CPM
USB 2
USB 3
USB 4
USB 1 Display HUB

USB 2
USB 3 Compound
USB 4 Device
USB 5 Diagnostics
USB 6
USB 7
4 Port
USB 1 2
USB 2
USB 3
USB 4
Pocono Motherboard
USB 1
USB 2
USB 3 GOP/COP
USB 4
USB 5 IFD/SPS
USB 6 ID/Passport or
Contactless
POCONO USB 7 Signature
USB KEY
USB 11
4 Port
USB 10
USB 1 2
USB 12
USB 2
USB 13 USB 3
USB 5 USB 4
USB 4
USB 9
USB 8
USB 6
USB 1 Display HUB
USB 7
USB 2
USB 3 USB 3 Compound
USB 2 USB 4 Device
USB 5 Diagnostics
USB 6
USB 7
2nd Dip
Coin
4 Port
USB 1 CPM
USB 2
USB 3
USB 4
Estoril Motherboard
USB 1
USB 2
USB 3 GOP/COP
USB 4
ESTORIL USB 5 IFD/SPS
USB 0 CE USB Key USB 6 ID/Passport
USB 1 Statement USB 7 Sig Capture
USB 3.0
USB 2
USB 3
USB 4
USB 5
USB 1 Display HUB Diagnostics
USB 6 USB 2
USB 3 Compound
USB 2.0
USB 7 Device
USB 4
USB 8 USB 5 Diagnostics
USB 9 USB 6
USB 7
2nd Dip
Coin
4 Port
USB 1 CPM
USB 2
USB 3
USB 4
4 Port
USB 1 2
USB 2
USB 3
USB 4
Misano Motherboard
Physical Layout of the Pocono PC Core USB Connections

5 3
4 2
Serial Parallel LAN Audio 7 9
6 8
PS/2 VGA DVI 10 USB (2 off)
Pocono Motherboard
5 6
4 7
11
10
Audio
Serial 12 LAN
9 3
VGA 13
8 2
DVI DP
1
0
Estoril Motherboard
Misano Motherboard
ALARMS
Alarm System Interconnection Diagrams
Basic Alarm System With Status
The following diagram shows the signal paths in the basic alarm system with alarm status.
5
6
RIO BOARD
3
4
7
8
1
Enhanced Alarm System Without Status

The following diagram shows the signal paths in the enhanced alarm system without alarm
status.
Enhanced Alarm System With Status

The following diagram shows the signal paths in the enhanced alarm system with alarm
status.
5
6
RIO BOARD
3
4
7
8
1
Enhanced Alarm System for Medium / High Security

The following diagram shows the signal paths in the enhanced alarm system for medium /
high security.
5
6
RIO BOARD
3
4
7
8
1
ALARM P4 VIBRATION
CONTACT
ALARM P4 16 VIB.COM 1 VIBRATION

CONTACT
11 VIB 2
1 2
1
2
3
4
15 16 5
6
7
8
9
10
12
13
14
15
UX Door Switch Harness
BOLT_THROWN
ALARM_P2
DOOR_CLOSED
2
BOLT_THROWN 4 VIB.COM REED SWITCH A A DOOR_CLOSED
1 VIB REED SWITCH B B
3 1 4 2
ALARM P2
4 3
1 2
Athena Alarms Harness
TAMPER
ALARM_P3
RIO BOARD
GND_1
ALARM_O/P
TAMPER
7 TAL_OUT 1
9 TAL_IN 2 2
ALARM P3 1
1 TAL_NC 6
1 2
3 TAL_CM 18
5 TAL_NO 5
2 DAL_NO 8
4 DAL_CM 21
6 DAL_NC 9
8 SAL_NO 19
10 SAL_CM 7 ALARM O/P
12 SAL_NC 20
1 13
14 CAL_NC 23 14 25
15 16 16 CAM_CM 10
18 CAL_NO 22
25 CTST_OUT 3
27 CTST_IN 16
28 12V 12
29 12V RTN 12V RTN 25
13 12V RTN 1
30
23 1 GND_1
20 CSTS_NC 1
22 DSTS_NC 3
24 SSTS_NC 5
26 TSTS_NC 7 RIO BOARD
15 GND 2
17 GND 4
19 GND 6
21 GND 8
11
Enhanced Alarms Harness
DETECTOR
ALARM_P4
2 12V 2
6 CTST_OP 9
12 CAL_OUT 14
ALARM_P4 13 TAL_OUT 11 DETECTOR
15 TAL_IN 10
16 GND 1
8 CTST_OUT
10 CTST_IN 15
W B 2 1
TEST_TRANSMITTER RESISTOR_2K37
Door Switch Harness (Ral)
DOOR LOCK
SENSOR 1
ALARM
P2
DOOR CLOSED
SENSOR 2
3 REED SW-1 1 SEN 1

ALARM P2 REED SW-2 2 (DOOR LOCKED)
4 3 1
1 2 SEN 2
REED SW-2 1
(DOOR CLOSED)
4 REED SW-1 2
AUDIO
Handset Adaptor Harness
GND_1 GND_2
SLIPRING
HANDSET
DETECT
SLIPRING
1 1 (black) 1
4 2 2 2 (white) 5
3 3 (black) 2 HANDSET
3 1
4 4 (white) 6
1 5
DETECT
1-Tip
1 5 (white) 3
3-Base 4 8
2 6 (black) 7
2-Ring
GND 1 1 7 (white) 4
GND 2 1 8 (white) 8
Private Audio Harness Athena Cab
SWITCH
AUDIO
H / P SOCKET
1 CIA AUDIO_LH 1
2 CIB AUDIO_RH 2 AUDIO
H/P SOCKET
3 CIC DETECT 3 6 5 4
4 CI_SHIELD 4
3 2 1
1 CID SENSE 5
SWITCH
2 CIE GND 6
CONTACTLESS
BIOMETRIC MISC I/F

J4
AUDIO
SUPERVISOR
AUDIO 1 CI_A Audio_LH 1

4 6 2 CI_B Audio_RH 3
3 CI_C Detect (orange) 7 MISC I/F J4
4 CI_Shield_GND 2
1 3 5 CI_D Sense (red) 5
6 CI_E GND (black) 4
W1_24 AWG (white) 9

10
4 W2_24 AWG (white) 29

SUPERVISOR
33
34
6
8
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
3 21
4 22
BIOMETRIC 1 W6_24 AWG (white) 23
CONTACTLESS 1 W8_24 AWG (white) 25

2 26
27
28
Private Audio AIT
CONTACTLESS_c1
2nd_DIP_c1
BIOMETRIC_c1 MISC I/F
PASS-SIGNATURE_c1 J4
AUDIO_c1
SUPERVISOR
AUDIO_c1 1 W57_Audio_LH (white) 1

4 6 2 W58_Audio_RH (green) 3
3 W59_Detect (orange) 7 MISC_IF_J4_c1
4 W60_Shield_GND 2
1 3 5 W61_Sense (red) 5
6 W62_E GND (black) 4
W52_24 AWG (white) 9

10
4 W53_24 AWG (white) 29

3 W54_24 AWG (white) 30
SUPERVISOR_c1
2 W55_24 AWG (white) 31
1 W56_24 AWG (white) 32
3 W71 (white) 17
4 W70 (white) 18
1 W69 (white) 19
PASS-SIGN_c1 2 W68 (white) 20
3
2nd_DIP_c1 4
1 W67_24 AWG (white) 21
2 W66_24 AWG (white) 22
1 W63_24 AWG (white) 23

2 W64_24 AWG (white) 24
BIOMETRIC_c1
3
4
CONTACTLESS_c1 1 W65_24 AWG (white) 25

2 26
27
28
AUTO SUPERVISOR ENTRY

Auto Supervisor Harness
NC 2 CM 2 NC COM
SUPERVISOR
SUPERVISOR 4 3 Supervisor 1 COM
4 3 2 Supervisor 1 NC
1 2
1 NC 2
3 1 NO 1 CM 2
2 4 Supervisor
1
Auto Supervisor Harness Without PA
SUPERVISOR
MISC I/F J4
CONTACTLESS
BIOMETRIC
1
2
3 MISC I/F J4
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
4 21
BIOMETRIC 3 22

CONTACTLESS 2 26
27
28
SUPERVISOR 3 W3_24 AWG (white) 30
33
34
CARD READER
MM Sensor Extension Cable
P1
P2
1
P1 P2
2
3 4
4 5
1 5 2
5 6 3 1
6 2 NC
7 3 4
6
6 9 8 1 5
9
MM To Stage 1 PCB Cable Assembly
STAGE 1 - P 11 MM - BOX
1 +5 V 1
2 MM Sensor 2
STAGE 1 - P 11 8 GND 8 MM - BOX
3 Reset 3
15 1 4 TxD RxD 4 13 1
5 RxD TxD 5
6 GND 6
16 2 7 CIM Sensor 7 14 2
9 Open 9
10 Open 10
11 + 5V 11
12 +5V 12
13 GND 13
14 GND 14
15
16
CIM To Stage 1 PCB Cable Assembly
STAGE 1 - P 11 CIM - BOX
1 +5 V 1
2 2
STAGE 1 - P 11 3 Reset 3 CIM - BOX
4 TxD RxD 4
15 1 5 RxD TxD 5 13 1
6 GND 6
7 CIM Sensing 7
16 2 8 GND 8 14 2
9 B AUD 1 9
10 B AUD 2 10
11 + 5V 11
12 + 5V 12
13 GND 13
14 GND 14
15
16
CORE
Floppy Disk Drive Cable Assembly
P1 P2
34 34
33 33
P1 32 32 P2
31 31
2 1 30 30 2 1
29 29
28 28
27 27
26 26
25 25
24 24
23 23
22 22
21 21
20 20
34 33 19 19 34 33
18 18
17 17
16 16
15 15
14 14
13 13
12 12
11 11
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
Ultra ATA Cable Assembly
P2
GREY
P1 P3
BLACK BLUE
1 1 1
3 3 3
4 4 4
5 5 5
6 6 6
P1 7 7 7 P3
BLACK BLUE
8 8 8
39 40 9 9 9 39 40
10 10 10
11 11 11
12 12 12
13 13 13
14 14 14
15 15 15
16 16 16
17 17 17
18 18 18
21 21 21
23 23 23
25 25 25
1 2 27 27 27 1 2
28 28 28
29 29 29
31 31 31
32 32 32
33 33 33
35 35 35
36 36 36
37 37 37
38 38 38
39 39 39
34 34 34
2 2 2
19 19 19
22 22 22
24 24 24
26 26 26
30 30 30
40 40 40
1 39
2 P2 40
GREY
Pivat Disk Security Harness
SWITCH 1 BART
4
SWITCH 1 PG 1 BART
2 3
4 GND 2 3 2 1
USB 2.0 4 Port Break Out Assembly
P5
1 2
P1
P2 9 10 Keyed
P3 P6
1 2
P4
9 10 Keyed
1 Vbus (red) 1
2 Data - (white) 3
P1 Data +
3 (green) 5
Power Ground P5
4 (black) 7
1 2
1 Vbus (red) 2 9 10 Keyed

2 Data - (white) 4
P2
3 Data + (green) 6
4 Power Ground (black) 8
1 Vbus (red) 1
2 Data - (white) 3
P3 Data + (green)
3 5
4 Power Ground (black) 7 P6
1 2
1 Vbus (red) 2
2 Data - (white) 4 9 10 Keyed
P4
3 Data + (green) 6
Serial ATA With Latched Connectors Cable Assembly
CON 1 CON 2
1 GND 1
2 SATA_Tx+ 2
CON 1 3 SATA_Tx - 3 CON 2
4 GND 4
5 SATA_Rx- 5
6 SATA_Rx+ 6
7 GND 7
Reset And Tamper Harness
RAT M-BOARD
1 Reset 5
Reset_RTN 9 M-BOARD
2
RAT Polarising Key - Pin 3
4 Power_RTN
3 Power 4
9 1
9 1 5 Speaker 2
6 Speaker_RTN 10
7 1
10 2
10 2 8 3
9 6
10 7
8
SDM
SDM DC Distribution Harness
DC-A DC-B
DC-A DC-B
2 1 1 1 1 2
2 2
SDM DC Interlock
SDM SW1-CM
SW1-NO
SW2-NO
SW2-CM
SDM 1 1 SW1-CM
1
2
3 3 1 SW1-NO
1 SW2-NO
1 SW2-CM
EXTERNAL CABLING
Remote Devices Harness
NIGHT
DEPO 1
RIO
REMOTE
STATUS
NIGHT
DEPO 2
REMOTE
RELAY
NIGHT DEPO 1
9 DEP_SOL 1
10 DEP_SOL RTN 3 4
RIO 3
11 BAG SWITCH 4
2
1 12 GND 2
1
NIGHT DEPO 2
13 RELAY 1 1
2
14 RELAY 2 2
1
REMOTE RELAY
5 DOOR SWITCH 2
6 GND 1 2
14 1
REMOTE STATUS
2 LED 0 2
3 LED 1 3 4
4 LED 2 4 3
2
1 5V FUSED 1 1
8
7
Remote Status Monitor Enable Only
1 INTERVENTION
REQUIRED
BUSY OPEN
1 SERVICE SUPPLIES IN
REQUIRED REQUIRED SERVICE
E1 E2 E3 E4
1 1 (green) E1
2 (red) E2
3 (white) E3
4 4 (black) E4
CURRENCY DEPOSITORY
UX GBNA DC Harness
PSU_DEPO_P7 GBNA_DC
9
1
10
2
PSU_DEPO_P7 8 24 V 11 GBNA_DC
10 6 3 24 V RTN 3 9 16
9 24 V 12
6 24 V RTN 4
5 1 10 24 V 13 1 8
7 24 V RTN 5
4 24 V 14
1 24 V RTN 6
5 24 V 15
2 24 V RTN 7
16
8
HARNESSES
Mains Switch Harness
GR 4
GR 3
GR 2
L 1A AC_DIST
SERVICE SWITCH N 4B
SW2
N 5B
L 2A CORE
L 1A
MAINS SWITCH N 4B
SW1
N 5B
L 2A
INLET / UPS
L L
(Fuse IN) (Fuse OUT)
SERVICE SWITCH
SW2
1A L
2A 5B 4B N
2A E AC_DIST
1A 4B GR 4 1
5B
GR 3 1
E
MAINS SWITCH 4B N CORE
SW1
1A L
2A 5B GR 2 1
1A 4B E
5B N INLET/UPS
2A L
FUSE OUT L L FUSE IN
AC Inlet Harness
MAINS FILTER
L UPS / INLET
N
E
CHASSIS_GND
L L
MAINS FILTER N N UPS / INLET
E E
CHASSIS_GND
AC Distribution Power Cord
PLUG RECEPTACLE
L N N L
E E
High Power DC Distribution Harness
1 24 V (black) 1
2 RTN (white) 2
2 1 24 V (black) 1 2
1 2 RTN (white) 2 1
Fused DC Harness
DC-A DC-B
1 FUSE 1
DC-A DC-B
2 2
Twin DC Harness
TWIN_DC
TWIN_DC
2 1 1 2
1 2 2 1
1 2
2 1
USB Type A to Type B High Speed (480Mbps)
TYPE A
TYPE B
TYPE A TYPE B
1 Vbus (red) 1
2 Data - (white) 2
3 Data + (green) 3
USB Type A To Type Mini B High Speed (480Mbps)
TYPE A TYPE MINI B
TYPE A TYPE MINI B

1 Vbus (red) 1
2 Data - (white) 2
Data + (green)
1
3 3
4 Power Ground (black) 5 5
USB Type A Extension High Speed (480 Mbps)
TYPE A
TYPE A PLUG
RECEPTACLE
TYPE A PLUG TYPE A RECEPTACLE

1 Vbus (red) 1
2 Data - (white) 2
3 Data + (green) 3
4 Ground (black) 4
MISC I / F P3 MEI_FASCIA
MEI_IMCRW FASCIA_FDK
TAMPER
POWER POWER
STAT 1 STAT 2
WATCHDOG
4 FDK_CONF 1 1
9 FDK_1 TP 2
10 GND 3
11 FDK1_LW_MD 4
12 FD_UP_MD 5 FASCIA_FDK
13 FDK_BT 6 7 12
3 FDK_TP 7
5 FDK2_LW_MD 8
MISC I/F P3 6 FDK2_UP_MD 9 1 6
7 FDK_CONF2 10
1 8 FDK2_BT 11
14 GND 12
31
32
15 MEEI 6 1
16 +24 V 2
27 MEEI 7 3
MEI FASCIA
28 +24 V 4
25 MEEI 1 5
9 16
26 +24 V 6
19 MEEI 2 7
20 +24 V 8 1 8
17 MEEI 3 9
18 +24 V 10
29 MEEI 4 11
30 +24 V 12
21 MEEI 5 13
22 +24 V 14
47 LEFT OUT + 15
48 LEFT OUT - 16
MEI_IMCRW
23 MEEI 8 2
2
24 +24 V 1
1
TAMPER
33 WDOG_RESET 2
2
34 GND 1
MISC I/F P3 1
9 5 6 2 WDOG_RESET
1 +5 V 5 PWR_STAT1
2 +5 V RTN 6
37 POWER_SHD1 8 5 8
38 GND 4
41 POWER_STAT1 2
4 1
42 GND 1
35 POWER_SHD2 8 PWR_STAT2
36 GND 4 5 8
39 POWER_STAT2 2
40 GND 1
4 1
VW3/DU3 Facia Harness (View 1 Of 2)
ADVERT_POWER TASK_J2
TASK_LIGHT
TASK_J1
MEEI_FACIA
CPM_MEEI
DC_HUB
COIN_MEEI
PASSBOOK_MEEI
SHUTTER_RH
DP_MEEI
RECEIPT_MEEI
KEYBOARD_USB
KEYBOARD
KEYBOARD
DEPO_MEI
SHUTTER_LH
USB
SPEAKER
SPEAKER
DISP_MEI
DISP_MEEI
1 MEEI 6 2
2 +24 V 1
1 2
PASSBK_MEEI
3 MEEI 7 2
4 +24 V 1
1 2
PPD_MEI
2
5 MEEI 1
1
6 +24 V 1 2
RECEIPT_MEEI
MEEI_FACIA 2
7 MEEI 2
1
8 +24 V 1 2
CPM_MEEI
2
9 MEEI 3 1
10 +24 V
1 2
DIP_MEEI
2
11 MEEI 4 1
1 2
12 +24 V
COIN_MEEI
2
13 MEEI 5 1
1 2
14 +24 V
1 SPEAKER
15 LEFT_OUT +
16 LEFT_OUT - 1 SPEAKER
VU3/DU3 Facia Harness (View 2 Of 2)
SHUTTER_LH
10 24 V 1
2
2 +24 V RTN 2 1
ADVERT_PWR
5 24 V 1
2
TASK_LIGHT_DRIVER J2 1 +24 V RTN 2 1
10 6 TASK LIGHT
6 24 V 1
2
7 +24 V RTN 2 1
5 1
SHUTTER_RH
9 24 V 1
2
3 +24 V RTN 2 1
KEYBOARD
4 24 V 1
2
8 +24 V RTN 2 1
TASK_LIGHT_DRIVER J1 DC_HUB
1 24 V 1
2 2
1 2 +24 V RTN 2 1
USB_HUB 1 USB 2.0 1 USB_KEYBOARD
RIO Enable Harness
RIO MISC_IF P7
RIO 1 1 MISC_IF P7
2 2
3 3
4 4
1 2 5 5 1 2
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
19 20 11 11 19 20
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
20 20
Video Cable Straight To 45 Degree
CORE_VGA
DISPLAY
1 1
DISPLAY CORE_VGA
2 2
3 3
6 4 4 6
5 5
11 1 1 11
6 6
7 7
15 5 5 15
8 8
10 9 9
10 10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
Heater Harness
AC_DIST HEATER
PWR SUP 2 2 HEATER

1 5 1 3
E 3
4
4 6
1
6634 Coin Module Harness
USB_TYPE_A
COIN_DC
DC
USB_TYPE_MINI_B RIGHT ANGLED
DC COIN_DC
1 1
2 2
2 2
1 1
USB_TYPE_A 1 1 USB_TYPE_MINI_B
1 Vbus (red) 1
2 Data - (white) 2 1
3 Data + (green) 3 5
Mitigation Dispenser Interlock Harness
SW2_CM SW1_NO DC_IN
SW2_CM1
AC_IN
SW2_CM2
EARTH
SW2_NO2 DC_OUT
SW2_NO1
AC_DIST
DC_IN
1 1 SW1_NO
2
3 2 1 1 SW1_CM
DC_OUT
2
2 1 1
L 1 SW2_CM1
AC_OUT
N 1 SW2_CM2
E 1 EARTH
1 1 SW2_NO1
AC_IN
2 1 SW2_NO2
4 3
1 2
3 1 EARTH
UX1 RA/VW1P Tray Harness (View 1 of 2)
IMCRW IMCRW
RECEIPT RECEIPT
80 COL IMCRW_MEI JOURNAL
JOURNAL
IMCRW
80 COL
RECEIPT
JOURNAL
UX1 RA/VW1P Tray Harness (View 2 of 2)
1 1
2 2
IMCRW IMCRW
3 3
4 5
4
1 1
2 2
JOURNAL JOURNAL
3 3
4 5
4
1 1
2 2
RECEIPT RECEIPT
3 3
4 4
1 1
IMCRW IMCRW
2 2
1 1
RECEIPT 2 2 RECEIPT
1 1
JOURNAL JOURNAL
2 2
1 1
80 COL 2 2 80 COL
1 1
IMCRW_MEI IMCRW
2 2
Safe Module Harness
DC_SAFE
I2C
I2C
DC_SAFE
USB_TYPE_MINI_B
USB_TYPE_A
DC_SAFE DC_SAFE
1 1
2 2
2 2
1 1
USB_TYPE_A 1 1 USB_TYPE_MINI_B
1 Vbus (red) 1
2 Data - (white) 2 1
3 Data + (green) 3 5
1 1
2 2
I2C 3 3 I2C
4 4
5 5
6 6
Ground Harness M4 Ring
AUX MEI Contactless Harness
CONTACTLESS CONTACTLESS_MEI
1
CONTACTLESS_MEI
2
3
4 13 1
5
CONTACTLESS 1 W3_24 AWG (white) 6
2 7 14 2
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
AUX MEI Biometric Harness
BIOMETRIC BIOMETRIC_MEI

BIOMETRIC BIOMETRIC_MEI
3
4
6634 Interactive Teller Harness

6634 Interactive Teller Harness with Analogue Camera
CAM_PC
ID_MEI
SIG_MEI
MIC
MIC MISC
CAMERA
ID/SIG_MEI
ID_MEI
ID/SIG MEI 1 1 (white) 2
2 2 (white) 1 2
4 3 1
2 1 SIG_MEI
3 3 (white) 2
4 4 (white) 1 2
1
CAMERA CAM_PC
1 5 Core 1 1
1
2 Shield 2 2
2
MIC MIC MISC

1 6 (white) 1
1-Tip 2 2 1-Tip
3-Base 3 Shield 3 3-Base
2-Ring 2-Ring
6634 Interactive Teller Harness with USB Camera
CAM_PC
ID_MEI
SIG_MEI
MIC
MIC_MISC
CAMERA
ID/SIG_MEI
ID_MEI
ID/SIG MEI 1 (white) 2
2 (white) 1 2
4 3 1
2 1 SIG_MEI
3 (white) 2
4 (white) 1 2
1
CAMERA CAM_PC
USB TYPE MINI B USB TYPE A
MIC MIC MISC

1 (white) 1
1-Tip 2 2 1-Tip
3-Base 3 3 3-Base
2-Ring 2-Ring
6634 Handset Harness
HANDSET_MIC
GND
HANDSET_SPKR
HANDSET
HANDSET_DET
HANDSET_MIC
1-Tip
1 1A (black) 1
3-Base
5 1B (white) 3
2-Ring
HANDSET 1C (drain)
HANDSET_SPKR
5 1 8 2C (drain)
1-Tip
2 2A (black) 1
3-Base
6 2B (white) 3
8 4 2-Ring
HANDSET_DET
3 3 (white) 1 1-Tip
7 4 (black) 2 3-Base
2-Ring
4 5 (white) 1 GND
Camera Power Harness
CAMERA REGULATOR
CAMERA FUSE
1 1 REGULATOR
PIN 1 - CENTER CONTACT 2 2
PIN 2 - OUTER CONTACT
ID Scanner Power Harness (5V)
F1 F2
ID_SCANNER REGULATOR
F1 1 1 F2
ID_SCANNER REGULATOR
1 1 (black) 3 (black) 1
4 2 2 4
2 2 (white) 2
3 1 1 3
ID Scanner Power and USB Harness

ID Scanner Power and USB Harness (5V)
P1 - USB Type A P3 - RJ 45
P2
P1 - USB Type A
1 Vbus (red) 4
2 Data - (white) 5
1 P3 - RJ 45
3 Data + (green) 6
4 Ground
4 (black) 7
P2 1 (black) 2 10 1
(black) 3
4 3 2 (white) 9
(white) 10
2 1
ID Scanner Power and USB Harness (24V)
P1 - USB Type A P3 - RJ 45
P2
P1 - USB Type A
1 Vbus (red) 4
2 Data - (white) 5 P3 - RJ 45
1
3 Data + (green) 6
4 Ground
4 (black) 7
1 (black) 1 10 1
P2
2 (white) 9
Display Port to DVI-D Cable Assembly
DISPLAY
PORT
with DVI-D
Security
Latch
Latch Release
1 Lane 0 (+) TMDS Data 2- 1
3 Lane 0 (-) GND 3
6 DVI-D
4 Lane 1 (+) SCL
5 GND SDA 7
Display Port 6 Lane 1 (-) TMDS Data 1- 9
7 Lane 2 (+) TMDS Data 1+ 10
1 11 8 24
2 8 GND GND
9 Lane 2 (-) +5V 14
19 10 Lane 3 (+) GND 15
20
11 GND Hot Plug Detect 16 1 17
12 Lane 3 (-) TMDS Data 0- 17
14 GND GND 19
15 AUX_CH (+) GND 22
16 GND TMDS Clock + 23
17 AUX_CH (-) TMDS Clock - 24
18 Hot Plug Detect
19 GND
20 DP PWR 3.3V
Display Port to VGA Cable Assembly
DISPLAY
PORT
with VGA
Security
Latch
Latch Release
1 Lane 0 (+) Red 1
2 GND Green 2
3 Lane 0 (-) Blue 3
4 Lane 1 (+) ID2/Res 4
5 GND GND 5 VGA
Display Port 6 Lane 1 (-) Red Return 6 6
7 Lane 2 (+) Green Return 7
1 8
2 8 GND Blue Return
9 Lane 2 (-) Key/Power 9 1 11
19 10 Lane 3 (+) GND 10
20 5 15
11 GND ID0/Res 11
12 Lane 3 (-) ID1/SDA 12
13 GND Hsync 13 10
14 GND Vsync 14
15 AUX_CH (+) ID3/SCL 15
16 GND
17 AUX_CH (-)
18 Hot Plug Detect
19 GND
20 DP PWR 3.3V
REVISION

5. POWER SUPPLIES
Universal 24V Power supply (600W) 293
UNINTERUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 300
UNIVERSAL 24V POWER SUPPLY (600W)
INTRODUCTION
J6 J5 J4 J3 J2
J8 J7
Wire Clip
Fixng Lugs
This chapter describes the AC to DC switch mode +24V power supply unit (PSU) that is
the main power supply for NCR 663X ATMs and is also used to power a second
GBNA/GBRU or a second dispenser if these devices are fitted. (Note that earlier units with
GBNA/GBRU had a second power supply whenever a GBNA/GBRU was configured).
The PSU is specified at 600W with static DC load and it has a single +24V supply rail with
an additional low power auxiliary +5V standby rail. Features of the PSU include:
l UL and CSA Recognition/Certification

l Operation at supply ranges 90VAC - 136VAC and 198VAC - 264VAC without
manual configuration
l Power good signal for providing diagnostics
l Shut down control input to switch off all supply rails
l Protection circuit to prevent damage to the PSU from overvalued or short circuit
conditions
l The independent +5V auxiliary (standby) rail gives the PSU the ability to continue to
power an external controlling device, such as a universal miscellaneous interface, to
allow power reset of all modules within the ATM

l Internal cooling fan.
DESCRIPTION
Theory of Operation
The following diagram illustrates the various functions and connections within the PSU.
J2, J3, J4, J5, J6, J7

J1
L Fuse +24V DC Distribution
N Filter AC DC
Regulation and Connectors
E
J8
Shutdown Shutdown
PSU Control
Monitor
and Remote LED
Control Indicator
Power Good
+5V
Auxiliary +5V
AC DC
Regulation Auxiliary
TROUBLESHOOTING
None.
DIAGNOSTICS
Power Supply Good Signal
The PSU Good signal is generated by the power supply to indicate that the DC outputs are
present and to indicate that the line voltage is present and within its specified range. The
signal is TTL compatible; a logic low shows a failure condition and a logic high shows a
normal condition. The output providing this is the collector of a transistor connected to the
+5V standby output via a 1KΩ resistor. The signal is generated when the power supply has
been switched off for at least one second and is then switched on again without any
failures.
When the power supply has been switched off or the mains input has failed, the power
supply good signal must go low a minimum of seven milliseconds before the +24V DC
voltage falls below its normal regulated range. The seven millisecond delay is measured
with the power supply in normal operation, with maximum load and minimum line voltage.
When the PSU Good signal goes low it must stay low for a minimum of 90 milliseconds.
On power up the PSU Good signal must go high between 200 and 500 milliseconds after
the +24V DC output has reached its normal regulated voltage.
Overload Protection
The PSU will shut down to prevent itself from damage in the event of:
l Over-voltage:
l For the +5V standby output the voltage limit is 6.8V
l For the +24V output the voltage limit is 32.0V
l Over-current
l Short circuit
l Over-power
l Abnormal temperature rise.
Note: In each of the above occurrences of shutdown (except over-voltage), the 5.0V
standby output remains normal.
Restart after Shut-down

If the PSU is shutdown by its protection circuits because of over current, short circuit or
overpower, it will automatically attempt to restart. If the fault condition continues, the PSU
will go into “tick mode” where it will continue to shutdown and attempt to restart until power
is removed or the fault is removed.
If the protection circuits have shut down the PSU because of over-voltage or temperature
rise then the PSU will latch off until the input voltage is cycled.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENT
There are no field adjustments.
None.
MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

Mounting Method
The PSU is situated in different locations depending on ATM. A lug at the rear of the PSU
fits into a slot on the ATM and a bracket at the front of the PSU hooks over a threaded stud
and is secured by a single nut. The arrangement is repeated on both sides of the PSU so
that it can be suitably attached in front and rear access ATMs.
Replacement
To replace the PSU do the following:
1. Undo the wire clip then unplug the AC inlet connector on the PSU.
2. Remove the securing nuts from the PSU.
3. Pull the PSU forward to free it from the slots in the ATM.
4. Unplug the DC output connectors and lift the PSU out of the ATM.
Reverse steps above to fit new PSU.
CABLING
Interconnections in NCR 663X ATMs
Uninterruptible ATM Power Switch

Mains Power Supply
Supply (Optional)
Service Switch
PC Core
+24V +24V
Power Supply Unit Power Supply Unit
ATM (Optional)
+5V Standby
Shutdown
Miscellaneous Power Good
Interface Board Shutdown
Power Good
Power Hub Power Hub Power Hub
Facia Tray Safe

Devices Devices Devices
2nd GBNA/GBRU
Dispenser 1 or
2nd Dispenser
(See Note)
Note: Earlier units with GBNA/GBRU had a second power supply whenever a
GBNA/GBRU was configured.
CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS
AC Connection
Connection of the AC supply to the PSU is via the ATM Input Connector, the Un-
interruptible Power Supply, the Line Circuit Breaker, and the ATM Line Switch.
PSU AC Input Connector

The AC supply is connected to the PSU at AC connector J1 which is a standard chassis
mounted IEC 3-way inlet connector. The cable must be held in place using the wire clip as
shown:
The PSU input circuit incorporates a fuse and a power line filter.
Input Fuse
The PSU is protected by an internal fuse that is not a field replaceable part.
CAUTION
Do not replace the PSU internal fuse.
DC Output Connectors
J8
J6
J5
J4
J3
J2
J7
Connector J7
Connector J7 is a 10-way Molex mini fit junior connector (39-28-1103) with the following
pinout when looking on the face of the connector:
Latch
10 9 8 7 6
24V 24V 24V 24V 24V
RTN RTN
5 4 3 2 1
24V 24V 24V 24V 24V
RTN RTN
Connector J8
Connector J8 is an 8-way Molex mini fit junior connector (39-28-1083) with the following
pinout when looking on the face of the connector:
Latch
8 7 6 5
PSON LED 5 VSB 5V VSB
RT
4 3 2 1
PSON LED PG PG
RTN RTN RTN
Connectors J2, J3, J4, J5 and J6

High current connectors J2, J3, J4, J5 and J6 are Tyco connectors (643411-1) with the
following pinout when looking on the face of the connector:
Latch 1 2 Latch
24V 24V
RTN
TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS
None.
UNINTERUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes both the Eaton® and XTREME Power Conversion®
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) units, including: Operation, Setup and Storage.
The UPS monitors the mains supply and provides a stabilised supply to the ATM. If the
mains supply fails, the UPS will supply the ATM from its integral battery-backed power
supply. This supply duration is limited and is intended to provide for orderly termination of
any active transactions before the ATM shuts down.
DESCRIPTION
XTREME Power Conversion® - Compact 1U 1K
Specification
Model: UPS 230V and UPS 120V (where different):
l Nominal Frequency: 50/60 Hz auto-selecting.

l Power Level: 1000VA, 800W
l Static Regulation (Battery Mode): ±1% of nominal
Button Operation
l To turn the UPS ON, press and hold the button for at least 2 seconds
l To turn the UPS OFF, press and hold the button for at least 2 seconds. The UPS will
be in standby mode when utility power is normal or transfer to bypass mode if bypass
mode is enabled.
Indicators
The illustration and table below explain the functions of the indicators on the UPS front
panel:
LED8 LED7 LED6 LED5 LED4
L1
L2
!
POWER ON/OFF
LED9 LED3 LED2 LED1
UPS Status LED Colour On/Flashing

Line Mode LED1 Green On
LED4 to LED7 indicate load level Green On
l LED4: >75%
l LED5: 50%~75%
l LED6:25%~50%
l LED7:0%~25%
Battery Mode LED2 Yellow Flashing
LED4 to LED7 indicate battery capacity Green On
l LED4: >26V
l LED5: >24.5V
l LED6:>23V
l LED7:>21V
Low Battery LED3 and LED7 Green Flashing (1Hz)
Battery LED3 Red Flashing
replacement (0.5Hz)
Fault LED3 Red On
On/Off status of LED8: Indicates On/Off status of general output Green On
output receptacles receptacles
LED9: Indicates On/Off status of programmable outlet
Overload LED3:Indicates overload (line mode) Green On
LED3:Indicates overload (battery mode)
Storing the UPS

Before storing, charge the UPS for 5 hours. Store the UPS covered and upright in a cool,
dry location. During storage, recharge the battery in accordance with the following table:
Storage Temperature Recharge Frequency Charging Duration

-25°C -50°C Every 3 months 1-2 hours
50°C -55°C Every 2 months 1-2 hours
Eaton® - Rack Mounted with USB HID
Definitions
Line Boost Capability
Line Boost Capability is the minimum voltage deviation below nominal that must be
handled via boosting without going on battery, while maintaining the output voltage within
the required output voltage range
Boost Mode
A shift to boost mode occurs during voltage variations in the AC input power. The boost
function maintains the output voltage supplied by the UPS within close tolerances around
the rated value even if significant voltage variations occur in the AC input power. This
avoids calling on battery power.
The values defining the voltage range are preset and vary depending upon the nominal
voltage selected.
Specification
Model: UPS 230V and UPS 120V (where different):
l Nominal Frequency: 50/60 Hz auto-selecting.

l Power Level: 1150VA, 770W
l Static Regulation (Battery Mode): -10% to +7% of nominal
l Boost: maintain output within 198-273V (90-153V)
l Battery Configuration: Internal batteries provided as one assembled part.
Indicators
The illustration and table below explain the functions of the indicators on the UPS front
panel:
Item Description Specification Comments

1 On/Off button To start/stop the UPS Illuminated and locking button
Off-------------------------------> System off
Solid green--------------------> Power On
2 Load Protected LED Off-------------------------------> No output enabled
Solid> green------------------> Output enabled
3 Downgraded Operation Solid yellow-------------------> Mains failure
LED Flashing yellow --------------> Battery failure
4 Non Protected Load LED Off-------------------------------> Normal load
Solid red -----------------------> Overload
5 Programmable Outlet 1 Off-------------------------------> Plug #1 not powered
Solid green--------------------> Plug #1 powered
6 Programmable Outlet 2 Off-------------------------------> Plug #2 not powered
Solid green--------------------> Plug #2 powered
7 Percentage Load bar graph 0 - 25% (LED 1 lit) LED 1 is to the left of the display
LED 26% - 50% (LEDs 1 + 2 lit)
51% - 75% (LEDs 1 + 2 + 3 lit)
76% - 100% (All four LEDs lit)
8 Battery Charge level bar 0 - 25% (LED 1 lit) LED 1 is to the left of the display
graph 26% - 50% (LEDs 1 + 2 lit)
51% - 75% (LEDs 1 + 2 + 3 lit)
76% - 100% (All four LEDs lit)
Indications During Operation

This section describes the indications of the following UPS phases of operation:
l Start-Up
l Shift to Booster Mode
l Operation on Battery Power.
The numbers in the text refer to the front panel diagram.
Start-Up (1150VA)
Start-up commences when the ON/OFF (1) button is pressed:
l The buzzer beeps and all the LEDs come on.

l The buzzer beeps two times during the self test, then button (1) remains ON,
indicating that the outlets are supplied with power.
Either:
l AC power is present, LED (2) is ON and LED (3) is not ON, and the protected
equipment is supplied by the AC power source.
or:
l AC power is absent, LED’s (2) and (3) are ON, and the protected equipment is
supplied by the UPS operating on battery power.
l All the connected equipment is supplied with power.
If button (1) is not ON, or if LED (4) is ON, there is a fault (see “Troubleshooting”).
Note: The battery is charging as soon as the UPS is connected to the ac power source,
even if button (1) is in the OFF position.
Boost Mode
When the boost mode is in operation the LED’s do not change to indicate that the operation
is active to show that there is a significant voltage variation in the ac input power.
Operation on Battery Power

Operation on battery power takes place when AC input power has failed or is outside the
Boost range.
Transfer to Battery Power (1150VA)

While operating on battery power:
l LED (3) is illuminated

l The equipment connected to the UPS is supplied by the battery.
Threshold for the Low Battery Warning

The low battery warning threshold (Battery Low Threshold) is set via the self service
configuration menu and shows that there is very little battery backup time remaining . The
indications that the threshold has been reached are:
l The ATM application specification will close because UPS does not have automatic
shut down.
When the battery reaches the end of its backup time:
l The UPS shuts down and all the LEDs go OFF

l Equipment connected to the UPS is no longer supplied with power.
Storing the UPS

If UPS is stored for a long period, recharge them every 6 months by plugging the UPS into
a power outlet. The batteries charge to 90% in approximately 3 hours.However, it is
recommended that the batteries charge for 6 to 24 hours after long time storage.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Possible Cause Action
The mains supply is The AC input is not connected Reinsert or push the connector
normal but no LED firmly into the receptacle
indication. The AC input is connected to the UPS output Connect the AC input to the correct
receptacle
The mains supply is The internal or external battery connection is Re-connect the batteries to the
normal but Red LED is wrong. correct polarity
flashing.
LED 3 (Green) is on. UPS is overloaded Remove excess loads from the UPS
output
After repetitive overloads, the UPS is locked in Remove excess loads from the UPS
the Bypass Mode. Connected devices are fed output then shut down and restart
directly by the mains supply. the UPS.
The mains supply is The battery is not fully charged Charge the battery for at least 5
normal, but the unit is hours. If the battery is still low level
in Battery Mode. then replace the battery
The battery is defective Replace the UPS
Red LED is on. UPS fault Replace the UPS
Low Battery Check battery charge level and if Red
light persists then replace UPS

The LED numbers in the following table appear on the diagram in the “Indicators” section.
1150VA Module
Indication Meaning Action
All LED’s go ON The Remote Power Off contact has been Set the contact to normal position and restart .
and LED (3) activated to shut down the UPS.
remains ON. Preventing a restart.
LED’s (2) and (3) The percent load greater than set Check power drawn by connected devices and
are ON and LED overload or UPS capacity. disconnect non priority devices. Check the
(7) flash. overload setting.
LED (4) goes ON UPS overload. The power drawn by the If LED (4) goes on permanently, check the power
Solid Red and LED connected equipment exceeds UPS drawn by the attached devices and disconnect
(7) flashing. capacity. any non priority devices.
LED (4) ON and A battery fault was detected during the Replace the battery module.
LED (8) flashing. automatic battery test.
LED (4) goes ON. UPS internal diagnostics have detected an Replace the UPS.
internal fault. The connected devices are
no longer supplied.
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0
None
Level 1
Level 1 diagnostics tests available on the Uninterruptible Power Supply are:
Test
Selection of TEST from the UPS diagnostic test menu tests the UPS and reports its status.
Report
The REPORT test returns the present status of the UPS.
Level 3
S_DATA
The level 3 diagnostics returned for the Uninterruptible Power Supply are:
S_Data Meaning
00 Good (Operation successful)
01 Routine (Command not supported, RS232 turnaround failure)
02 Warning (Battery low)
04 Fatal (Device failure, Battery failure, Command failure, Comms error, Device
inoperative)
Tallies
The tallies recorded for the Uninterruptible Power Supply are:
Tally Mnemonic
OUTAGES Number of times the UPS reported a power outage.
MSKD Number of times that a power outage exceeded the time specified by the outage mask
OUT time.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
The Self Service Configuration Menu for the UPS enables adjustment of following UPS
parameters:
l Mode
l Voltages
l Shut down Delay
l Startup Delay
l Battery Low Threshold
l Outage Mask time
l Battery Test Day
l Battery Test Hour
A description of each parameter, together with the permitted range of inputs and the
default settings, is shown in the table below.
Parameter Description Range Default

Name Value
Mode This string identifies the mode (Control or Data) of the UPS and the device 000 “000” -
type. or Control
001 “001” -
Data
Voltages Identifies the level of the control voltages for serial control lines, in order, 000 - 111
CTS (Power Fail), DCD (Battery Low), DTR (Shut down). “0” means 111
negative voltage “1” means positive voltage Note: “Voltages” has no
effect for USB UPS.
Shut This specifies the delay time in seconds of the interval between the issue 0- 120
down of a shut down command and the shut down of the UPS. 999 seconds
Delay
Startup If mains has returned during shut down the Startup Delay is introduced 0- 15
Delay after the Shut down Delay. If mains is not present during the Shut down 999 seconds
Delay then the UPS will restart as soon as mains returns.
Battery This is the capacity remaining threshold that indicates a low battery 0- 900
Low condition. If the reported charge remaining is less than or equal to this 1000 (90%)
Threshold value then the Battery Low indicator is True. The parameter is given in
(BL) 1/10 percent units.
Outage This is the duration that the mains outage must exceed before the supply 0 - 99 15
Mask out indicator is set true. seconds
Time
Battery This specifies the day on which the weekly battery test should be 0-6 1
Test Day performed. (Monday)
Battery This specifies the hour at which the weekly battery test should be 00 - 04 (4am)
Test Hour performed. 23
Configuring The UPS

Normal Operation
Under normal operation, the UPS will supply standard mains power to the terminal. Supply
voltage deviations within the line boost will result in the UPS boosting (stepping up) of the
voltage via its internal transformer. This ensures that the voltage supply to the rest of the
product remains within the acceptable ranges of 198 - 273 V for 230 V units or 90 - 136 V
for 120 V units. If necessary, the UPS internal batteries will be charging to maintain 100%
charge.
Short Term Outage Or Voltage Variation

In the event of a short term outage or input voltage variation (lasting less than the
configured Outage Mask Time), the UPS will automatically switch to supplying the terminal
from its integral batteries. On restoration of the normal mains supply the UPS will
automatically switch back to supplying a stabilised supply to the terminal from mains power.
The internal batteries will be charged to maintain 100% capacity when mains is present.
Long Term Outage Or Voltage Variation

In the event of an outage or input voltage variation (outside the line boost and buck
capability) lasting longer than the Outage Mask Time, the UPS will automatically switch to
supplying the terminal from its integral batteries. At this point, under the control of the
application program, the terminal will take one of the following actions:
l Immediately initiate a shut down

l Go into standby mode until mains returns or until the battery capacity falls below the
Battery Low Threshold, at which point it will initiate a shut down
l Continue offering transactions until mains returns or until the battery capacity falls
below the Battery Low Threshold, at which point it will initiate a shut down.
The shut down is controlled, terminating any active transactions and leaving the terminal in
a safe and secure state. A control message is sent to the UPS to disengage.
Restart After Controlled Shut down

On restoration of the mains supply and restart of the terminal, the customer application may
either bring the terminal immediately back into service or wait until the battery capacity is
above the Battery Low Threshold before doing so.
A Low Battery condition will be displayed until the calculated battery capacity is equal to the
Battery Low Threshold
UPS Self Test

The UPS will carry out a self test on demand by selecting DEVICE SELF TEST from the
System Application Menu and UPS from the Device Self Test Menu.
If the battery is fully charged this test will verify battery health and that it is correctly
connected. If the battery capacity is less than 100% then the test will only verify the
connection.

No replaceable modules

No replaceable modules
CABLING
None.
No Information Available.
No Information Available.
6. CORE AND COMMUNICATIONS
USB 7 Port Hub 312
Talladega PC Core 320
Revision 368
Pocono PC Core 369
Revision 537
USB 7 PORT HUB
INTRODUCTION
This chapter gives the information required to service the USB 7 Port Hub fitted in NCR
SelfServ ATMs.
DESCRIPTION
The USB Hub increases the number of USB ports connected to the PC core. It provides
the following functionality:
l Operation from a single 24V power supply

l 1 upstream facing port
l 7 powered downstream facing ports
l Power management for each port
l Device connect/disconnect detection
l Bus fault detection and recovery
l High, full and low-speed device support
l Transaction translator for each port to provide full unshared bandwidth for USB1.1
devices.
Power Requirement
The Hub requires the following DC voltage and currents:
Quiescent Current Continuous Current

+24 V±10% 125 mA min. + 125 mA for each used downstream port 1.0 A max.
The +24 V supply is sourced from the ATM power supply. The current rating in the table
represents a total load which includes the current sourced for the following voltages:
l +5 V ±5% is derived from the 24 V using a Sipex SP7652 Power Blox switcher
l +3.3 V ±0.3V is derived from the 5 V using a low drop-out linear regulator
l +1.8 V ±10% is derived from the 3.3 V using a low drop-out linear regulator.
Maximum Cable Lengths

Port Speed Maximum Cable Length
Upstream All 5.0 m (16.40 ft.)
Downstream High 5.0 m (16.40 ft.)
Downstream Full 5.0 m (16.40 ft.)
Downstream Low 3.0 m (9.84 ft.)
TROUBLESHOOTING
The system has a USBViewer option which allows the user to verify which module is
allocated to which USB port and is accessed as follows:
Note: The user requires a USB Service Key to perform this function.
1. Select the DEVICE DIAGNOSTICS option from the SYSTEM APPLICATION

menu.
2. Select HARDWARE INFORMATION AND RECOVERY option.
3. Select the USBViewer option.
4. The system will then display the following screen showing the module to port
allocation for NCR modules or USB Hubs which have a working USB connection.
Note: Modules or USB Hubs are dynamically shown on the screen. If a Module or
USB Hub is removed while screen is displayed the information relating to it will also
be removed from the screen.
5. The user can select a specific module and the system will then display the following
screen showing port details.
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 1 Diagnostics
There are two LEDs for each port, which indicate the port status. The definitions of the
LEDs are shown below:
LED Colour Status

Green All OK
Amber Error condition
Off Non operational
Green (blinking On/Off) Software attention
Amber (blinking On/Off) Hardware attention
Green/Amber (blinking On/Off) Reserved
There is one LED positioned close connector J9 that indicates power on or off.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

Note: Cables should be replaced into the same port from which they were removed.
Top Box Mounted Hub

1. Remove the screws holding USB mounting tray to the module tray.
2. Note the positions of all USB cables.
3. Unplug all cables from the hub.
4. Remove the hub assembly.
5. Replace the hub assembly.
6. Refit cables into the same ports noted in step 2.
7. Refit and secure USB mounting tray.
Safe Mounted Hub

1. Note the positions of all USB cables.
2. Unplug all cables from the hub.
3. Remove the screws holding the cover to the safe.
4. Remove the hub assembly.
5. Replace the hub assembly.
6. Replace the cover.
7. Refit cables into the same ports noted in step 1.
CABLING
None.
CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT
Hub Board
The diagram below shows the Hub Board connectors.
** Indicates the two LEDs for each port.
Upstream Port J8
*
J1 *
*
*
J2
*
*
J3
*
Downstream Ports *
J4
*
*
J5
*
*
J6
*
*
J7
**
Power J9
Power LED Downstream

Port LEDs
ATM Interface
The Hub has two interfaces with the host ATM and up to seven interfaces with modules in
the ATM:
l Power
l Upstream connector
l Downstream connectors.
Power Interface
Power is obtained from the host ATM via a 2-pin right angled mini-fit junior connector (J9)
on the connector board, with the following pinout:
Pin Signal
1 +24 V
2 0V
Upstream Connector
Communication to and from the host ATM is via a 5-pin mini-B connector (J8) on the
connector board, with the following pinout:
Pin Signal
1 VCC
2 D-
3 D+
4 N.C.
5 GND
Shell SHIELD
Downstream Connectors
Communication to and from the modules is via seven 4-pin upright type A connectors (J1-
J7) on the connector board, with the following pinout:
Pin Signal
Shell SHIELD
1 VCC
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND
Shell SHIELD
None.
TALLADEGA PC CORE
INTRODUCTION
The Talladega PC Core is an industry standard ATX chassis containing a microATX
motherboard providing Intel® Core™ 2 Duo and Core™ 2 Solo technology.
Identifying a Talladega PC Core

To quickly identify a Talladega PC core from a PIVAT PC core, look at the I/O panel and
identify the differences as shown in the following illustration:
Talladega PC Core I/O Panel

Serial Parallel LAN Audio
PS/2 VGA DVI USB (2 off)
PIVAT PC Core I/O Panel

Parallel LAN Audio
PS/2 Serial VGA USB (4 off)

.
DESCRIPTION
There are two types of Talladega PC Core. The illustrations that follow show the
differences between the two types.
Type 1
Lid
Drive Bay Cover
Disk Security Door
Power Supply Unit Hard Disk Drive
Shelf
Optical Disk Drive
Core Fan
Disk Security Bracket
Floppy Disk Drive Talladega Motherboard
Type 2
Hard Disk Drive
(may be located in either position) Power Supply Unit
Floppy Disk Drive
Lid Core Fan
Optical Disk Drive
The Talladega PC Core has the following possible configurations:
l Intel Processors:
l E6400, Core 2 Duo
or
l E7400, Core 2 Duo 440
or
l Q9400, Core 2 Quad (type 2 PC core only)
l Memory:
l 512MB
l 1GB- (2 x 512MB)
l 2GB - (2 x 1GB)
l 4GB - 4 x 1 GB) DDR2 667 MHz (type 2 PC core only)
l Graphic: Dual independent display (on-board VGA connector and DVI-D connector).
Also, support for a custom ADD2 card (PCIe x4)
l Serial Ports: 2 as standard on I/O panel plus option of 2 on ESC board
l Disk Security: Type 1 only - available as an option with high security alarms feature
only
l HDD: Serial ATA hard disk drive (standard or enhanced)
l Optical Disk: Serial ATA DVD-ROM optical storage
l PCI PCCM Band 3 Comms: Available as option
l Audio: Every unit item
l Network: 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet (every unit item)
l USB Interface: 6 High Speed USB ports (2 on-board and 4 on breakout panel) with
the option to have another 4 on an additional breakout panel
l PCI Interface: 3 on-board standard PCI bus slots

l PCI Express Interface: Option to add 1 or 2 PCIe x 1 slots on extender card
Note: (extender card is available on Type 1 PC core only)
l PCI SDC: Available for Personas or SDC terminals only.

l Trusted Platform Module (TPM): Enables Microsoft BitLocker encryption software—
available with Windows 7 Ultimate and Enterprise editions only.
Motherboard
Motherboard Features
Form Factor MicroATX (244mm x 244mm (9.6 x 9.6 in.))
Processor Intel Core 2 Duo E6400, E7400 Core 2 Solo 440 processor in an LGA775 socket or Intel Core 2
Quad Q9400 in an LGA 775 socket.
Memory l Four 240-pin DDR2 SDRAM Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM) Sockets
l Support for DDR2 533/667/800
l Dual Channel Support
l Support for 2GB of system memory or 4 GB in type 2 core.
Chipset Intel Broadwater-Q965 Chipset consisting of:
l Intel Broadwater-Graphics Memory Controller Hub (GMCH)
l Intel ICH8DO I/O Controller Hub
Video Intel integrated graphics subsystem (Gen4 Core). Dual independent display available through on-
board VGA connector, on board DVI, and optionally PCIe x4 graphics slot (customized ADD2 only).
Audio Intel High Definition Audio and HD Codec. Triple stack connector provides: Line Out, Mic In and
Speaker Out (amplified).
USB Support for High Speed USB devices, support for USB port disable
Peripheral Ten High Speed USB ports (2 onboard, 2x4 on breakout panel)
Interfaces Four Serial Ports (2 onboard, 2 on internal connector)
Four Serial ATA 300 interfaces
Legacy I/O Controller - support for Parallel Port, Diskette Drive and PS/2 Mouse/Keyboard
LAN Support Intel 82566DM Nineveh 10/100/1000 with AMT
BIOS l BIOS (resident in the SPI Flash device)
l SPI Flash provides dual footprint for 8MB or 16MB device
l Support for ACPI, SMBIOS
Expansion Extender card connector allowing a custom expansion card which supports up to one PCI slot and
Capabilities one PCIe slot or, two PCIe slots
Security TPM module support to enable Microsoft BitLocker encryption software. (Talladega only)
Hardware l Two 3-pin fan connectors with tachometer support
Monitor l One 4-pin CPU fan connector with tachometer and PWM support
Support l Supports three thermal diodes (CPU die + 2 on-board locations)
l Voltage monitoring for VCC (processor), 3.3V, 5V and 12V
Power Requirements
Supply Voltage Motherboard Limits Typical
3.3V Plus or minus 3% 1A
+5 Plus or minus 5% 5A
+12 Plus or minus 5% 2.85A
-12V Plus or minus 5% 0.8A
5V Standby Plus or minus 5% 2A
Lithium Battery
WARNING
Do not use a metal or conductive implement to remove the battery.
A short circuit between the battery’s positive and negative terminals
can cause it to explode.
The lithium battery on the motherboard is used to power NVRAM and CMOS.
l Voltage = 3.0 V (nominal)

l Current = 8.4 µA
l Capacity 200 mAh
l Life (@ 20 mA) = 2.7 years (powered off).
ATX 12V Power Supply Unit (PSU)
WARNING
Disconnect power when working on the power supply unit to avoid
the risk of electric shock.
The ATX 12V Power Supply Unit (PSU) is a 250W switch mode unit with switchable ac
input producing dc output supplies for the Talladega PC Core devices.
After any input undervoltage or outage, the PSU automatically restarts and functions
normally when the input voltage returns to within its operating range.
PSU Specification
l Type - Switching mode
l AC input voltage — Switchable 115/230 Vac (manual switch - not auto ranging)
l Input frequency range — 47 to 63 Hz

l AC input current:
l 5 A rms maximum @ 115 V
l DC output voltages - +5 V, +12 V, -12 V, +3.3 V, +5 VSB Stand-By
The table below displays the DC outuput voltage ranges.
Output Voltage Min Value Nominal Max Value Unit

12 V 11.40 12.00 12.60 V
5V 4.75 5.00 5.25 V
3.3 V 3.14 3.30 3.46 V
-12 V -10.8 -12.00 -13.20 V
5 VSB 4.75 5.00 5.25 V
l Internal fan
l Power good signal — TTL compatible signal that indicates the proper operation of the
power supply (high = power good; low = power fail)
l Overvoltage protection
l Short circuit protection —shuts the PSU down if a short circuit occurs on any DC
output. The +5 VSB output remains normal.
l Over current protection — trips the output before overload currents applied to each
output rail reach or exceed 240 VA.
l AC fuse — the power supply input is protected by an internal fuse.
PIRAT Board
The PIRAT board provides:
l Access to the motherboard’s reset pins for Miscellaneous I/F Watchdog

l Access to the shutdown pins and the optional door tamper switch
l PC core power on/off push button switch
Note: When Windows XP is running, pushing the on/off button will start a soft power off/on
controlled shutdown of Windows XP and the core. Similarly, if the button is pushed and
held down, it will cut power to the core and Windows XP will not shut down safely.
PC Core Power On/Off Switch HDD Activity LED (yellow)
J1 D1
SW1
J2
J3
l HDD activity LED (yellow).
Disk Tamper
When a disk security door and tamper switch is fitted, the PIRAT board routes an electronic
signal from the tamper switch directly to the alarms board in the product harnessing (Relay
3).
Reset and Tamper (RAT) Board

Note: This board may be fitted on early models.
The reset and tamper (RAT) board provides access to the motherboard’s reset pins for
Power Good Reset. The RAT board also provides access to the shutdown pins and the
optional door tamper switch.
J1 J3
J2
Disk Tamper
When a disk security door and tamper switch is fitted, the RAT board routes an electronic
signal from the tamper switch directly to the alarms board in the product harnessing (Relay
3).
PCI PCCM Board

The PCI PC Communications Module (PCCM) board is an add-in adapter that provides a
Band 3 communications interface. The PCI PCCM board has a level 0 diagnostic LED
(green).
Green LED
J1
J3
PCI/PCI Express Extender Card (Type 1 only)

This card is connected to the Talladega motherboard chipset and is a PCI/PCI extender
card providing an additional PCI slot and a PCI Express slot.
PCI Express Slot (J1)
PCI Slot (J2)
Connector To Motherboard
Disk Drives
The Talladega PC Core contains the following disk drives:
l S-ATA DVD-ROM optical drive (connected to S-ATA channel 0)

l S-ATA hard disk drive (connected to S-ATA channel 1)
l 3.5-inch floppy disk drive.
S-ATA DVD-ROM Optical Drive

This optical storage drive is a DVD-ROM drive (16X min.) and CD-ROM drive (48X min.)
and has a Serial ATA interface supporting ATAPI commands. The drive has DVD video
and CD audio playback capability. The drive can play any standard DVD-ROM and CD-
ROM disks complying with the Ecma-267 standard.
Power Requirements
+5VDC 2.0A
+12VDC 1.0A
S-ATA Hard Disk Drive

This drive is an industry standard 3.5-inch HDD that supports the ATA interface standard
and operates on a Serial ATA interface.
Power Requirements
Input voltage requirements (including noise): 5 V plus or minus 5% and 12 V plus or minus
10%.
+5VDC 0.46A
+12VDC 0.56A
3.5-inch Floppy Disk Drive

This drive is required for certain legacy software. It is a standard 3.5-inch FDD driven by a
single 5 V supply with power consumption of 1.1 W (typical) during read/write operation.
TROUBLESHOOTING
WARNING
WARNING
Do not open or repair the Power Supply Unit. Replace if necessary.
Symptom Possible Root Cause(s) Isolation Resolution

Loss of configuration Motherboard battery The system date and time are Replace battery.
data failure excessively inaccurate.
PSU shuts down Protection circuits PSU’s LED (green) not Turn PSU input power off and
operated because of illuminated when fault has been removed
overvoltage, short turn power back on.
circuit or overpower
PSU failure 240/120 volt switch Check voltage switch setting Select correct switch setting.
incorrectly set
Fuse blown Check PSU LED Replace PSU. WARNING: DO
NOT open the PSU to replace
the internal fuse.
Internal power Check all power connectors to Reconnect or properly connect
disconnected the motherboard. cables to correct sockets
No boot up HDD failure Use BIOS Setup Utility to Reinstall
determine disk’s presence
Loose or incorrectly Check power and S-ATA cables Reconnect or properly connect
connected cabling cables to correct sockets.
Replace if worn.
System slow RAM inserted in Check DIMMs are inserted in Insert DIMMs in correct order
wrong order or correct sockets and correctly and/or make sure they are
incorrectly seated seated. correctly seated (see ‘Installing
RAM in section ‘Module Removal
and Replacement’).
RAM not configured Check all RAM is configured Configure RAM correctly in BIOS
through BIOS Setup. Setup. Replace DIMMs if not
being configured correctly, or
increase memory with RAM
upgrade.
CPU Check temperature in BIOS Replace heatsink. If symptoms
Setup Utility. persist, replace CPU.
Check heatsink is seated.
Check heatsink fan is
operational.
NOTE: Running temperature of
CPU should be about 15oC
above the ambient temperature.

System does not start Memory refresh 1 beep in POST BIOS Reset the memory, or replace
up timer error with known good modules
Parity error in base 2 beeps in POST BIOS
memory (first 64Kb
block)
Base memory 3 beeps in POST BIOS
read/write test error
Motherboard timer 4 beeps in POST BIOS Fatal error indicating a serious
not operational problem with the system. Before
replacing the motherboard
Processor error 5 beeps in POST BIOS eliminate the possibility of
interference by a malfunctioning
8042 Gate A20 test 6 beeps in POST BIOS add-in card. Remove all
error (cannot switch expansion cards except the
to protected mode) video adapter.
l If beep codes are generated
General exception 7 beeps in POST BIOS
when all other expansion
error (processor
cards are absent replace
exception interrupt
motherboard
error)
l If beep codes are not
AMIBIOS ROM 9 beeps in POST BIOS generated when all other
checksum error expansion cards are absent,
one of the add-in cards is
CMOS shutdown 10 beeps in POST BIOS causing the malfunction.
register read/write Insert the cards back into
error the system one at a time
Cache memory test 11 beeps in POST BIOS until the problem happens
failed again. this will reveal the
malfunctioning card
Display memory 8 beeps in POST BIOS If the system video adapter is an
error (system video add-in card, replace or reseat
adapter) the video adapter. If the video
adapter is an integrated part of
the system board, the board may
be faulty.er to attempt to re-
encrypt the hard drive.

Error message The TPM has been Check if TPM is fitted or properly Replace the TPM and reboot.
displays: removed. seated.
Windows BitLocker
Drive Encryption key
needed.
Insert key Storage
Media.
Error message TPM is fitted but not Check if the TPM is damaged. To verify that the TPM is faulty:
displays: working. Inform the customer that the 1. Ask the customer to
The Trusted Platform hard drive needs to be decrypt the hard drive
Module (TPM) in this decrypted to install a new TPM using their bitlocker
system has been and verify that the TPM is the recovery key.
disabled. problem. 2. Fit a new TPM to the
You must supply a motherboard.
BitLocker recovery 3. Ask the customer to
key to restart this attempt to re-encrypt the
system until TPM is hard drive.
re–enabled. Note: The re-encryption process
Enable TPM from the would also generate a new
system BIOS setup or recovery key.
from the TPM If encryption is successful, then
management the problem was the TPM.
console. If the system is still not working,
then the problem is likely to be
the customer’s software.
BIOS Setup Utility Screens

Dependent on the owning organization’s security policy the following screens can be
available to assist in troubleshooting.
Main
BIOS SETUP UTILITY
Main Advanced PCIPnP Boot Security Chipset Exit
System Overview NCR BIOS 5.2.4.1 Use [ENTER], [TAB]

or [SHIFT-TAB] to
AMIBIOS select a field.
Version :08.00.14
Build Dare :12/05/06 Use [+] or [-] to
ID :0ABKJ014 configure system Time.
Processor
Intel(R) Core(TM)2 CPU 6400 @ 2.13GHz
Speed :2133MHz
Count :1
System Memory Select Screen

Size :2032MB Select Item
Change Field
System Time [03:38:21] Tab Select Field
System Date [Tue 12/19/2006] F1 General Help
F10 Save and Exit
ESC Exit
Advanced
BIOS SETUP UTILITY
Advanced Settings Configure/monitor

the Hardware Health.
WARNING: Setting wrong values in below sections
may cause system to malfunction.
CPU Configuration
IDE Configuration
Floppy Configuration
SuperIO Configuration
Hardware Health Configuration
ACPI Configuration
AHCI Configuration
Event Log Configuration
Select Screen
Intel AMT Configuration
Select Item
PCI Express Configuration
Enter Go To Sub Screen
Remote Access Configuration
F1 General Help
USB Configuration
F10 Save and Exit
ESC Exit
Advanced/Hardware Health Configuration
BIOS SETUP UTILITY
Advanced
Hardware Health Event Monitoring Enables Hardware

Health Monitoring
H/W Health Function [Enabled] Device.
System Temperature :29°C/84°F

CPU Temperature :49°C/109°F
Power Supply Fan Speed :1493 RPM

CPU Fan Speed :2806 RPM
VcoreA :1.274 V
CPU VTT :1.209 V
+3.3Vin :3.419 V
Select Screen
+5Vin :5.160 V
Select Item
+12Vin :12.099 V
Change Option
-12Vin :-12.281 V
F1 General Help
+5VSB :5.116 V
F10 Save and Exit
VBAT :3.435 V
ESC Exit
PCIPnP
BIOS SETUP UTILITY
Advanced PCI/PnP Settings Clear NVRAM during

System Boot.
WARNING: Setting wrong values in below sections
Clear NVRAM [No]

Plug & Play O/S [No]
PCI Latency Timer [64]
Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes]
Palette Snooping [Disabled]
PCI IDE BusMaster [Disabled]
OffBoard PCI/ISA IDE Card [Auto]
Select Screen
IRQ3 [Available]
Select Item
IRQ4 [Available]
Change Option
IRQ5 [Available]
F1 General Help
IRQ7 [Available]
F10 Save and Exit
IRQ9 [Available]
ESC Exit
IRQ10 [Available]
IRQ11 [Available]
Boot
BIOS SETUP UTILITY
Boot Settings Configure Settings

during System Boot.
Boot Settings Configuration
Boot Device Priority

Hard Disk Drives
Removable Drives
CD/DVD Drives
Initiate Pre-boot Services [No]
Select Screen
Select Item
F1 General Help
F10 Save and Exit
ESC Exit
Security
BIOS SETUP UTILITY
Security Settings Install or Change the

password.
Supervisor Password :Not Installed
User Password :Not Installed
Change Supervisor Password

Change User Password
Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled]
Select Screen
Select Item
Enter Change
F1 General Help
F10 Save and Exit
ESC Exit
Chipset
BIOS SETUP UTILITY
Advanced Chipset Settings Configure North Bridge

features.
WARNING: Setting wrong value in below sections
North Bridge Configuration

South Bridge Configuration
ME Subsystem Configuration
Select Screen
Select Item
F1 General Help
F10 Save and Exit
ESC Exit
Exit
BIOS SETUP UTILITY
Exit Options Loads default values

for the Setup Options.
Save Changes and Exit
Discard Changes and Exit F9 key can be pressed
Discard Changes for this operation.
Load Setup Defaults
Select Screen
Select Item
F1 General Help
F10 Save and Exit
ESC Exit
PSU Remote On/Off Operation

When the PSON signal (pin 14, P1) is at TTL level low, or shorted to GND, the PSU will
turn on. When the PSON signal is at TTL level high, or open circuit, all outputs except
+5VSB will turn off.
DIAGNOSTICS
Power On Self Test
The BIOS used by the Talladega motherboard is AMIBIOS8. For service purposes, testing
includes standard PC Power on Self Test (POST) on the CPU, memory and hard disk.
Beep Codes
Beep codes are used by the BIOS to indicate a critical or fatal error in the PC core. Beep
codes are generated when an error occurs before the system video has been initialized.
No. of Description Action

Beeps
1 Memory refresh Reset the memory, or replace with known good modules
timer error
2 Parity error in
base memory
(first 64Kb block)
3 Base memory
read/write test
error
4 Motherboard Fatal error indicating a serious problem with the system. Before replacing
timer not the motherboard eliminate the possibility of interference by a
operational malfunctioning add-in card. Remove all expansion cards except the video
5 Processor error adapter.
If beep codes are generated when all other expansion cards are absent
6 8042 Gate A20
replace motherboard
test error (cannot
If beep codes are not generated when all other expansion cards are absent,
switch to
one of the add-in cards is causing the malfunction. Insert the cards back into
protected mode)
the system one at a time until the problem happens again. this will reveal the
7 General exception malfunctioning card.
error (processor
exception
interrupt error)
8 Display memory If the system video adapter is an add-in card, replace or reseat the video
error (system adapter. If the video adapter is an integrated part of the system board, the
video adapter) board may be faulty.
9 AMIBIOS ROM As 4 - 7 above.
checksum error
10 CMOS shutdown
register
read/write error
11 Cache memory
test failed
Motherboard LEDs
D36 D33 D34
Position on Board Signal Meaning

D33 PROCHOT CPU or voltage regulator too hot
D34 VR_FAIL CPU core voltage failed
D36 RED ATX power supply failed
GREEN Power present (S0/S1 state)
GREEN FLASH Suspend (S3 state)
STRAPPING
Motherboard Strapping
Key Description Key Description Key Descriptions
A Connector row K SATA Header 1 Serial
(optical drive - 0, primary HDD -
1, secondary HDD- 4)
B Processor L Floppy drive 2 PS/2
C Northbridge M Lithium battery 3 Parallel
D Southbridge N Front USB (2 ports) 4 VGA display output
E DDR2 DIMM Slot (4 off) O Front panel 5 DVI display output
F PCI Slot (3 off) P Internal audio header 6 LAN
G Vertical riser support (PCIe) Q Diagnostic LEDs 7 USB (2 ports)
H PCI-E (4 off) / ADD2 R Internal USB (6 ports) 8 Audio

I ATX Power S High density (2mm) Daughter
card connector (40 pin)
J ATX 12V Power T Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
Extender Card A
Contacts
T JP1 & JP2

F F F (See important
Caution in Section
“JP1 & JP2” below )
J
H
B
C
G
M Fixing holes (8 Off)
E
Channel A DIMM1
D Channel A DIMM2
Channel B DIMM1
R Channel B DIMM2
S KK KK E
N P O Q L
I
JP4 (CMOS Clear) 4 1 0
1 2 3 6 8
Line Out (Lime Green)
Speaker Out (Light Blue)
Microphone Input (Pink)
4 5 7
JP1 & JP2

Jumper on Pins Function
1 and 2 12V
2 and 3 RI (required setting on ATMs, see caution below)
CAUTION
The Talladega motherboard is used in both Financial and Retail
products. The JP1 and JP2 jumpers used in Financial products must
be positioned on pins 2 and 3 as shown below:
Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3

JP2
JP1
Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3
JP3
This is a manufacturing tool and is left open.
JP4 - Clear Configuration (CMOS) Memory
Make sure that ac is disconnected from the power supply before

moving this jumper.

1 and 2 Normal operation (default)
2 and 3 Clear CMOS memory (jumper must be returned to normal
position before power-on)
WARNING
Do not use a metal or conductive implement to remove the battery.
A short circuit between the battery’s positive and negative terminals
can cause it to explode.
Power Supply Unit Strapping
Voltage Select Switch

LED (Green)
230 AC Input
Connector
Fixing
Holes
(4 off)
The 115/230 voltage select switch next to the AC input connector on the PSU must be set
to the correct input voltage. This is accessible through a cut-out in the rear wall of the PC
box.
WARNING
The internal ac input fuse is not replaceable by the Customer
Service Engineer.
ADJUSTMENT
There are no adjustments required on the Talladega PC core.
Note: Volume control of the beep signal is done using the Graphical Operator Panel.
The only preventive maintenance required on the PC core is:
l Vacuum around the core

l Check the fans for correct operation and clean out any accumulations of dust.
FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

The major field replaceable units in the Talladega PC core are:
l Core fan
l Hard Disk Drive (HDD)
l Power supply unit (PSU)
l Disk security feature (Type 1 only and on terminals fitted with a high security alarm
system)
l Floppy and optical disk drives
l Talladega Motherboard:
l Processor
l Heatsink with fan
l DIMM
l I/O shield
l Lithium battery
l TPM
Type 1
Refer to the section ‘Description’ for an illustration showing the differences between the
two types of PC core.
Remove PC Core
To service any parts within the PC core do the following:
1. Disconnect the AC input cable from the rear of the core and the cabling from the
front of the PC core.
2. Remove the two screws from the right hand side of the core and remove the PC
core from the terminal.
3. Remove the lid of the PC box by first removing the two screws from the front of the
core then slide the lid back as far as it will go and lift it up from the front to free it from
the security tang at the back as shown:
Lid
Close
Security Tang for Close
Lock or Seal
Locating Lugs (3 Each Side of Lid)
Screws (2 off)
Open
Core Fan
To remove the core fan disassemble in the following order:
1. Disconnect the power harness.

2. Remove the two M4.8 plastite screws (positioned diagonally) from the rear of the
core box.
3. Remove the fan.
To replace the fan reverse the instructions above.
CAUTION
The correct direction of the air flow is out of the PC box. To replace
the fan in the correct position use the arrow marked on one of the
sides of the fan to make sure the air is blowing out of the PC box.
Hard Disk Drive (HDD)
To remove the hard disk drive disassemble in the following order:
1. Disconnect the power and data harnesses.

2. Remove the two screws from the back of the core box and the single screw holding
the HDD mounting bracket to the shelf.
3. Remove the four screws holding the HDD to its mounting bracket.
4. Remove the HDD.
To replace the hard disk drive reverse the instructions above.
Power Supply Unit (PSU)

WARNING

WARNING
To remove the power supply unit disassemble in the following order:
1. Remove the hard disk drive as instructed in steps 1 and 2 in section ‘Hard Disk Drive
(HDD)’ above.
2. Disconnect the power cables to the floppy disk drive, the optical disk drive, the fan
and the two connectors to the motherboard.
3. Remove the four screws from the rear of the core box.
4. Remove the power supply unit taking care not to damage components on the
motherboard.
To replace the power supply unit reverse the instructions above.
Floppy and Optical Disk Drives

To remove the floppy and optical disk drives disassemble in the following order:
1. Disconnect the power and signal cables from the drive being replaced.
2. Remove the four M3 screws from the front of the PC core box and the single M3
screw holding the mounting bracket to the shelf.
3. Turn over the mounting bracket holding the disk drives.
4. Remove the floppy disk drive by removing the four M3 x 6 screws attached to the
base of the drive. Remove the optical drive by removing the four screws attached to
the sides of the drive.
To replace the floppy and optical disk drives reverse the instructions above.
Disk Security Feature

The disk security feature consists of the following parts:
l Disk security assembly

l Disk security switch bracket
l Disk security harness.
To remove the disk security assembly (shaped like a latch) disassemble in the following
order:
1. Lift the disk security door as far as it will go.

2. Open the drive bay cover.
3. Remove the two M3 self tapping screws from inside the core box.
4. Remove the disk security assembly.
To replace the disk security assembly reverse the instructions above.
To remove the disk security bracket disassemble in the following order:
1. Remove the floppy and optical disks as detailed in steps 1 and 2 in section ‘Floppy
and Optical Disk Drives’ above.
2. Remove the two screws on the top of the bracket.
3. Disconnect from either the PIRAT or RAT board depending on which board is fitted.
4. Remove the disk security bracket.
To replace the disk security bracket reverse the instructions above.
To remove the disk security harness disassemble in the following order:
1. Disconnect the three way connector on the PIRAT or RAT board depending on
which board is fitted.
2. Remove the tamper switch by pressing the latches
3. To replace the disk security harness reverse the instructions above.
To remove the motherboard disassemble in the following order:
1. Disconnect and remove the HDD and the floppy and optical disk drives and their
mounting brackets.
2. Remove the shelf by unscrewing the two screws at the back and the two screws at
the front of the core box.
3. Disconnect and remove the reset and tamper board.
4. If fitted, remove the tamper switch.
5. Remove all plug-in cards.
6. If fitted, remove and retain the TPM.
7. Disconnect all remaining cabling from the motherboard.
8. Remove the eight M3x6 screws from the motherboard and the four screws from the
extension card (if fitted) that secure the boards to the core box.
9. Remove the motherboard.
To replace the motherboard reverse the instructions above.
Installing RAM
CAUTION
Take care in handling memory modules by only holding them at the ends. Never
hold more than one module at a time. Never bend or twist the memory modules
because this can seriously damage the contacts.
Install memory modules as follows:
1. Insert memory modules in the correct order starting at slot DIMM1 (see illustration of
motherboard in ‘Strapping’ section).
2. Flip open the plastic retention clips.
3. Orientate the module correctly by matching up the notch on the module with the
notch on the DIMM slot.
4. Insert the module without using undue pressure. Use both hands to press down on
each end of the module until the plastic retention clips snap shut (it may be
necessary to manually close the clips).
5. Dual-channel operation requires a pair of modules to be inserted. The first module
goes into the Channel A DIMM1 slot and the second module goes into the Channel
B DIMM1 slot (the DIMM slots are colour coded to assist correct installation).
Type 2
Refer to the section ‘Description’ for an illustration showing the differences between the
two types of PC core.
Remove the PC Core

1. Disconnect the AC input cable from the rear of the core and the cabling from the
front of the PC core.
2. Remove the screw from the right hand side of the core and remove the PC core
from the terminal.
3. Remove the lid of the PC box by first removing the two screws from the rear of the
core then slide the lid to free it from the security tang, lift up and remove.
Lid
Security Tang for

Locating Studs (2 Each Side of Lid) Lock or Seal
Open
Screws
Core Fan
1. Remove the Optical/HDD disk drive carrier as instructed in steps 1 and 2 in section
‘(Hard Disk Drive (HDD, Location 1)’.
2. Disconnect the power harness.
3. Remove the four M4.8 plastite screws (positioned on each corner of the fan) from
the rear of the core box.
4. Remove the fan.
Hard Disk Drive (HDD)

The hard disk drive may be fitted in either one or both of the following locations:
Location 2
Location 1
(default)
The default location for the HDD is in the tray. Population of the removable bay is feature
driven.
To remove the hard disk drive disassemble in the following order:
Location 1

2. Remove the screw securing the Optical disk/HDD mounting carrier then slide the
carrier out to release.
3. Turn the mounting carrier over and remove the four screws securing the HDD.
4. Remove the HDD.
Location 2
1. Remove the two screws from the front of the PC core.
2. Slide the HDD casing forward then lift up and remove from the PC core.
3. Remove four screws (2 each side) then remove the HDD from its casing.
WARNING
WARNING
1. Remove the hard disk drive as instructed in steps 1 and 2 in section ‘Hard Disk Drive
(HDD, Location 1).
2. Disconnect the power cables to the floppy disk drive, the optical disk drive, the hard
disk drive and the two connectors to the motherboard.
4. Remove the power supply unit taking care not to damage components on the
motherboard.
Floppy Disk Drive

To remove the floppy disk drive, disassemble in the following order:
1. Remove the one M3 screw as shown.
2. Slide the mounting carrier to one side then lift up slightly. With the other hand, grasp
and disconnect the power and data harness before removing the floppy disk drive
carrier free from the core.
3. Turn over the mounting carrier holding the disk drive.
4. Remove the floppy disk drive by removing the four M3 x 6 screws attached to the
base of the drive.
To replace the floppy disk drive reverse the instructions above.
Optical Disk Drive

To remove the optical disk drive disassemble in the following order:
1. Disconnect all associated harnesses.

2. Remove the screw securing the Optical disk/HDD mounting carrier.
3. Turn the mounting carrier over and remove the four screws securing the optical disk.
4. Remove the optical disk.
To remove the motherboard disassemble in the following order:
1. Remove the Optical disk/HDD mounting carrier as described above.

2. Remove all plug-in cards; remove the screw securing the card, then remove each
card in turn.
3. If fitted, remove and retain the TPM.

4. Remove the two screws securing the PIRAT board from the front of the PC core,
then disconnect and remove the board.
Screws
5. Disconnect all remaining cabling from the motherboard.

6. Remove the eight M3 x 6 screws from the motherboard.
7. Remove the motherboard from the box.
Type 1 and Type 2

Replacing the Processor
To replace the processor (CPU) do the following:
1. Remove the cooling unit (heatsink with fan) by first disconnecting its power cable
then unlocking the push-pins using a flat head screwdriver to turn the pins
anticlockwise one quarter turn and retract fully to unlock.
2. Remove all the grey coloured thermal interface grease from the heatsink (this is
used to make a good bond between the heatsink and the processor).
3. Unclip and raise the lever at the side of the socket.
4. Raise the metal frame.
5. Remove the existing processor.
CAUTION
Hold the processor by the edges only.
6. Identify the key on the processor near to pin 1 and match it with the socket.
7. Very carefully place the processor square on (do not place at an angle) in the socket.
8. Lower the metal frame onto the socket.
9. Lower the lever and clip back in place.
10. If re-using the processor fan, use the thermal grease syringe (006-8612565) to
apply new thermal interface grease to the cooling unit in the pattern as shown
below:
Thermal Interface
Grease (5 Places)
CAUTION
Do not use the entire contents of the syringe because too much
grease could block the airflow around the heat spreader and
processor.
11. Put the four pins of the cooling unit into the armed position by first turning them
anticlockwise and fully retracting them, then, turn the pins one quarter turn
clockwise.
12. Replace the cooling unit by pressing the push-pins home until they are locked.
Connect the cooling unit’s power cable to the motherboard connector.
CAUTION
Make sure the fan cable does not obstruct the fan blades.
Inserting and Removing Disks (Type 1 only)

The floppy disk drive and the optical disk drive are behind a drive bay cover. Insert and
remove disks as follows:
1. If a disk drive security door is fitted, unlock or remove the lock or seal supplied by the
owning organization, then pull out the popper and pull out the door as far as it will go.
Note: If the terminal has an alarm system fitted, the disk drive security door
may be alarmed. If this is the case, follow the owning organization’s
procedures for accessing an alarmed area.
2. Pull the two spring loaded pins out of their latches and pull open the drive bay cover.
3. After inserting/removing disks close the drive bay cover by pushing it firmly so that
the spring loaded pins fully locate in their latches as shown below:
CAUTION
This is an ESD (electrostatic discharge) sensitive device, therefore,
after any maintenance or service actions the drive bay cover must
be closed and fully latched home.
4. If fitted, close the disk security door then lock or seal it as required by the owning
organization.
CABLING
Interconnection Diagram
ATX Power
AC In Supply Unit
System
Fan
Serial ATA
Motherboard Hard Disk
(Talladega)
Serial ATA
DVD RW
512M/1G/
2G/4G/8G Flex Disk Drive
Memory
Disk Tamper
Switch
PIRAT
(or Reset and Eternal Reset In
Processor Tamper Board) Tamper
CPU Fan Core 2
PCI SDC SDC
PCI PCCM PCCM

ADD2 Slot Com 3
ESC
Com 4
Com 1
3 PCI Com 2
Slots Parallel
PS2 Keyboard
PS2 Mouse
VGA
DVI-D
Ethernet
TPM
Audio In/Out
USB 0
USB 1
USB 2
USB 3
USB 4
USB 5
USB 6 - 9 (Optional)
Extender Card ATX
1 PCI
1 PCIe x 1
Floppy Disk Drive Cable
P1 P2
34 34
33 33
32 32
31 31
30 30
29 29
28 28
27 27
26 26
25 25
24 24
23 23
22 22
21 21
20 20
19 19
18 18
17 17
16 10
15 11
14 12
13 13
12 14
11 15
10 16
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
Serial ATA Cable (DVD and HDD)
PIN 1 PIN 1 GND
PIN 2 PIN 2 SATA_TX+
PIN 3 PIN 3 SATA_TX-
PIN 4 PIN 4 GND
PIN 5 PIN 5 SATA RX-
PIN 6 PIN 6 SATA_RX+
PIN 7 PIN 7 GND
CON 1 CON 2 SIGNAL
Reset and Tamper Harness (if RAT Board Fitted)
1 RESET 1
2 RESET_RTN 2
POWER
3 3
POWER_RTN
4 4
5 SPKR 5
SPKR_RTN
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
RAT M-BOARD
Polarising Key
9 7 5 3 1 9 7 5 3 1
10 8 6 4 2 10 8 6 4 2
USB 2.0 4 Port Breakout
P5
1 2
P1
P2 9 10
P6
P3 1 2
P4
9 10
1 RED 1
2 WHITE 3
P1 3 GREEN 5
4 BLACK 7
SHELL P5
1 RED 2
2 WHITE 4
P2 3 GREEN 6
4 BLACK 8
10 KEYED
SHELL
1 RED 1
2 WHITE 3
P3 3 GREEN 5
4 BLACK 7
SHELL P6
1 RED 2
2 WHITE 4
P4 3 GREEN 6
4 BLACK 8
10 KEYED
SHELL
PIRAT Talladega
40 39
38 37
2 36 35
1
3 4 PIRAT Talladega Motherboard 34 33
5 6 32 31
J2 J34 30 29
7 8
9 10 28 27
11 12 26 25
Talladega Motherboard - J34
24 23
40
22 21
20 19
18 17
16 15
1 14 13
KEYED 35
PIRAT - J2 KEYED 12 11
15
KEYED
8 10 9
SPSW A
8 16
SPSW B 8 7
7 21
GND TO M/B
6 38 6 5
RESET TO M/B
5 17
DISK DRIVE LED
4 18 4 3
5V
3 37
TALLA 3V3 2 1
1 13
= Polarising Key
Motherboard Connectors
Keyboard and Mouse Interface Connectors (K and M)
The keyboard and mouse ports are standard 6 way mini-DIN connectors with the same
voltages and signals.
Pin Signal
1 DATA
2 N/C
3 GND
4 +5V
5 CLOCK
6 N/C
Serial Port 1 and 2 Connector (S1 and S2)

Standard 9 way D type male connector providing an RS232 standard serial interface.
Pin Signal
1 CD
2 RX-
3 TX-
4 DTR
5 GND
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9 RI
The default state of the jumper setting is 2-3 on the motherboard (JP1 on Port 1 and JP2 on
Port 2) pin 9 is RI (Ring Indication).
Parallel Port Connector (PAR 1)

Standard 25 way D Type female connector providing IEEE1284 compatible parallel port.
Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 STROB- 14 AUTOFDXT-
2 PD0 15 ERROR-
3 PD1 16 INIT-
4 PD2 17 SEL_IN-

5 PD3 18 GND
6 PD4 19 GND
7 PD5 20 GND
8 PD6 21 GND
9 PD7 22 GND
10 ACK- 23 GND
11 BUSY 24 GND
12 PE 25 GND
13 SELECTC
Video - Analogue (VGA)

Standard 15 way high density D type connector for standard VGA monitor.
Pin Signal
1 RED
2 GREEN
3 BLUE
4 NC
5 GND
6 R_GND
7 G_GND
8 B_GND
9 5V Supply
10 GND
11 NC
12 DDC DATA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15 DDC CLK
Video - Digital (DVI)

Connection for a standard DVI monitor.

1 TDMS DATA 2- 13 NC
2 TDMS DATA 2+ 14 +5V POWER
3 TDMS DATA 2/4 SHIELD 15 GND
4 NC 16 HOT PLUG DETECT

5 NC 17 TDMS DATA 0-
6 DDC CLOCK 18 TDMS DATA 0+
7 DDC DATA 19 TDMS DATA 0/5 SHIELD
8 NC 20 NC
9 TDMS DATA 1- 21 NC
10 TDMS DATA 1+ 22 TDMS CLOCK SHIELD
11 TDMS DATA 1/3 SHIELD 23 TDMS CLOCK+
12 NC 24 TDMS CLOCK-
C1 - No connect
C2 - No connect
C3 - No connect
C4 - No connect
C5 - No connect.
Audio Output Connector (Speaker)

3.5mm stereo jack socket - coloured light blue.
Pin Signal
1 Audio Left
2 Audio Right
3 GND
Audio Output Connector (Line Out)

3.5mm stereo jack socket - coloured lime green.
Pin Signal
1 Audio Left
2 Audio Right
3 GND
Microphone Input Connector (mic)

3.5mm stereo jack socket - coloured pink.
Pin Signal
1 Audio Left
2 Audio Right
3 GND
Network Connector (N)

Standard RJ45 Ethernet network 10/100/1000 Base-T connection.
Pin Signal
1 TD+
2 TD-
3 RD+
4 NC
5 NC
6 RD-
7 NC
8 NC
USB 0 and 1
Standard Twin USB connector stack providing a USB 2.0 compatible interface.
Pin Signal
1 +5V
2 DATA-
3 DATA+
4 GND
Reset/Power Good Interface (if RAT Board Fitted)

J35
Pin Signal
1 N/C
2 SPKR
3 N/C
4 POWER
5 RESET
6 N/C
7 N/C
8 N/C
9 RESET_RTN
10 SPKR_RTN
Reset/Power Good Interface (if PIRAT Board Fitted)

J34
Pin Signal
1 N/C
2 N/C
3 N/C
4 N/C
5 N/C
6 N/C
7 N/C
8 N/C
9 N/C
10 N/C
J35
Pin Signal
1 TALLA 3V3
2 N/C
3 Polarising Key
4 SPSW A
5 RESET TO M/B
6 DISK DRIVE LED
7 N/C
8 N/C
9 SPSW B
10 N/C
J36
Pin Signal
1 N/C
2 N/C
3 N/C
4 N/C
5 N/C
6 N/C
7 N/C
8 N/C
Pin Signal
9 N/C
10 N/C
11 N/C
12 N/C
13 5V
14 GND TO M/B
15 N/C
16 N/C
USB 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9
Pin Signal
1 +5V
2 Data-
3 Data+
4 GND
Optical Drive Connector

S-ATA DC Power Segment
DC power is supplied through a S-ATA 15 pin connector.
Pin Signal
1 3.3 V
2 3.3 V
3 3.3 V
4 GND
5 GND
6 GND
7 5V
8 5V
9 5V
10 GND
11 Reserved
12 GND
13 12 V
14 12 V
15 12 V
S-ATA Signal Segment

Signals are supplied through a S-ATA 7 pin connector.
Pin Signal
1 GND
2 A+
3 A-
4 GND
5 B-
6 B+
7 GND
PIRAT Board Connectors

J1 - 9 Way D Type Right Angled Connector
Pin Signal
1 N/C
2 TampA
3 N/C
4 SPSW-B
5 RST~
6 TampB
7 N/C
8 SPSW-A
9 RST_GND
J2 - 12 Way Right Angled Connector

Pin Signal
1 TALA_3V3
2 PIVAT_LED
3 5V
4 DISK_DRIVE_LED
5 RST to M/B
6 GND to M/B
7 SPSW_B
8 SPSW_A
9 RST_FROM_PCI_SDC
10 GND_TO_PCI_SDC
Pin Signal
11 TAMP_A
12 TAMP_B
J3 - 3 Way Connector
Pin Signal
1 TAMP_A
2 TAMP_B
3 N/C
RAT Board Connectors (if RAT Board Fitted)

Pin Signal
1 RST~
2 Gnd
3 SPSW
4 5Vdu
5 SPK
6 Vcc
7 N/C
8 N/C
9 N/C
10 N/C
J2 - 9 Way D Type
Pin Signal
1 N/C
2 TampA
3 SPK
4 SPSW
5 RST~
6 TampB
7 Vcc
8 5Vdu
9 Gnd
Pin Signal
1 TampA
2 TampB
3 N/C
There are no special test or adjustment tools required.
REVISION

POCONO PC CORE
INTRODUCTION
The Pocono PC Core is an industry standard ATX chassis. It is equipped with one of
the following motherboards:
l Pocono Q67 motherboard, an Intel® Sugar Bay platform supporting Socket

LGA1155 Intel® Processors. (Celeron G540, Core i3–2120, Core i5–2400).
l Estoril Q87 motherboard, an Intel® Haswell platform supporting Socket
LGA1150 Intel® Processors. (Celeron G1820TE, Core i3–4350T, Core i5–4590T).
l Misano Q170 motherboard, an Intel® Skylake-S desktop platform supporting
Socket LGA1151 Intel® Processors. (Core™ i3–6100TE, Core™ i5–6500TE, Core™
i7–6700TE).
l Misano Q170 motherboard, an Intel® Kabylake desktop platform supporting
Socket LGA1151 Intel® Processors. (Core™ i3–7101TE, Core™ i5–7500TE, Core™
i7–7700TE).
Standard Casing (Pocono Q67 motherboard only)

Hard Disk Drive
(may be located in either position) Power Supply Unit
Lid Core Fan

PIRAT
Board
Optical Disk Drive
Pocono
Motherboard
Slim Casing
DESCRIPTION
Motherboard
Feature Pocono Estoril
Processor l Intel® Core™ i5‐2400 l Intel® Core™ i5‐4590T
l Intel® Core™ i3-2120 l Intel® Core™ i3-4350T
l Intel® Celeron™ G540 l Intel® Celeron™ G1820TE
Memory Four 240 pin DDR3 SDRAM up to 6GB Two 204 pin DDR 3 SO–DIMMs, up to
16GB
Chipset Intel® Q67 PCH Intel® Q87
Video Video Intel® integrated graphics l LVDS LCD Header
subsystem (Gen4 Core). Dual l 2 x Dual Mode Display Ports
independent display available through supporting HDMI/DVI
on‐
board VGA connector, on‐
board DVI,
and optionally PCIe x4 graphics slot
(customized ADD2 only).
Audio Intel® High Definition Audio and HD Six 3.5mm jack sockets:
Codec. Triple stack connector provides: l Jack 1 - Stereo headphone out
Line Out, Mic In and Speaker Out l Jack 2 - Stereo speaker out
(amplified). l Jack 3 - Handset mic in
l Jack 4 - Handset hook switch in
l Jack 5 - Handset speaker out
l Jack 6 - Private Audio/ Volume
Control
PDM Digital Microphone Input (separate
connector)
USB l Six High Speed USB 2.0 ports on l Six Super Speed USB 3.0 ports on IO
rear IO
l Eight High Speed USB 2.0 on l Four High Speed USB 2.0 on two
internal headers internal headers
Peripheral l Four Serial Ports (2 on‐
board, 2 on l Two RS–232 on internal headers
Interfaces internal connector) l Support for PS2 peripherals (1 on
l Four Serial ATA II interfaces breakout
l Legacy I/O Controller ‐support for l Three Serial ATA III ports (6Gb/s)
Parallel Port. RS232 ports x 4. Note: Estoril has no Parallel Port
l Support for PS2 peripherals (1 on support. It is therefore not suitable as a
breakout — on‐
board connectors kit for older units with a parallell port
are not supported) device (e.g. printer) without also
upgrading the printer.
LAN Support Intel 82579LM GbE LAN 10/100/1000 Dual Ethernet 10/100/Gb
with AMT
Expansion l Single PCIe (X16) slot The PCIe location is non standard and
Capabilities l Single PCIe (X4) slot requires the use of a riser in the
l Dual PCI slot. application.
Note: The PCIex8 slot operates at x4
bandwidth only. It does not support
cards that are unable to operate x4 or x1
speeds
Security Trusted Platform Module (TPM) support Trusted Platform Module (TPM) support
to enable Microsoft Bitlocker encryption to enable Microsoft Bitlocker encryption
software—available with Windows 7 software—available with Windows 10,
Ultimate and Enterprise editions only Windows 7 Ultimate and Enterprise
editions and only.
AMT Supports Intel® Active Management
Technology 9.5 (processor SKU
dependent)
Features Misano (Skylake) Misano Kabylake

Processor l Intel® Core™ i3–6100TE l Intel® Core™ i3–7107TE
l Intel® Core™ i5–6500TE l Intel® Core™ i5–7500T
l Intel® Core™ i7–6700TE l Intel® Core™ i7–7700T
Memory Two 260 pin DDR4 SO–DIMMs, up to 32GB
Chipset Intel® Q170
Video l Two Dual Mode Display Ports supporting HDMI/DVI
l One eDP
Audio Six 3.5mm jack sockets:
l Jack 1 - Stereo headphone out
l Jack 2 - Stereo speaker out
l Jack 3 - Handset mic in
l Jack 4 - Handset hook switch in
l Jack 5 - Handset speaker out
l Jack 6 - Private Audio/ Volume Control
Mini DIN (5-pin) PDM digital microphone input
USB l Six Super Speed USB 3.0 ports on IO
l Four High Speed USB 2.0 on two internal header
Peripheral l Three SATA III ports (6Gb/s)
Interfaces l Two RS–232 on internal headers
Note: Misano has no Parallel Port support. It is therefore not suitable as a kit for older units with a
parallell port device (e.g. printer) without also upgrading the printer.
LAN support Ethernet 10/100/Gb
Expansion l One PCIe x8 slot (x1, x4 or x8 speeds)
Capabilities l One PCIe x4 edge finger
Security Trusted Platform Module (TPM 1.2 & 2.0) support to enable Microsoft Bitlocker encryption
software.
AMT Supports Intel® Active Management Technology 11 (processor SKU dependent)
Protection (Estoril and Misano Only)

Mandatory Passwords
The Estoril and Misano motherboard has the additional functionality and security
requirement of entering mandatory passwords for accessing the following:
l Admin - BIOS Setup Configuration Utility (SCU)

l BBS - BIOS Boot Specification
If the customer has no password management solution then use the factory set
passwords:
l Admin: ncrTEMP123
l BBS: ncrTEMP456
Note: The factory set passwords are not intended to provide any additional
security as these are commonly available. There is no restriction on distribution of
these passwords.
For non-factory set BIOS passwords please refer to the customer’s password
management solution.
SATA White List

SATA White List Devices
Estoril and Misano BIOS implements a SATA white list. This prevents the use of
SATA devices unless they have been added to the BIOS Setup Configuration Utility
(SCU) White list.
To ensure that the intended SATA device/drive is available, please follow the steps
below within the Setup Configuration Utility (SCU):
1. Press F2 during the boot process, and enter the BIOS Admin password.
2. Navigate to the “Advanced” tab and select “NCR Configuration” then “White
list management”.
3. Select "Clear White List and Add all Connected Devices" option.
4. Once this setup is complete press F10 to save changes and exit. This will
cause the PC to reboot.
Assign Boot Devices

The Estoril and Misano BIOS requires a single permanent boot device to be
selected from the BBS as part of the initial setup. When the PC reboots following
the BIOS upgrade, and after the Admin/BBS passwords have been set, it will
automatically enter the BBS menu to request that the user select the boot device.
1. Enter the BBS password then select the HDD that contains the default O/S
image for the system to boot to.
2. Selecting the boot device means that the system will automatically boot to
that device and that device only.
Note: Only a HDD/SSD can be used as a permanent boot device. In order to boot
from a USB or DVD drive the BBS menu must be used.
3. Press F8 during POST and enter the BBS password to display the BBS menu,
then select the desired boot device.
Note: The BBS menu must be used on every boot to an alternate

device, otherwise the BIOS will default to the permanent boot device.
ATX 12V Power Supply Unit (PSU)

WARNING Disconnect power when working on the power supply unit
to avoid the risk of electric shock.
Pocono Motherboard PSU

There are two different 250W switch mode unit, ATX 12V Power Supply Unit (PSU):
l with switchable ac input and

l with auto ranging ac input
producing dc output supplies for the Pocono PC Core devices.
After any input undervoltage or outage, the PSU automatically restarts and functions
normally when the input voltage returns to within its operating range.
PSU Specification
Manual Switch
l Type — Switching mode

l AC input voltage: Switchable 115/230 Vac (manual switch - not auto ranging)
l AC input current:
l DC output voltages — +5 V, +12 V, -12 V, +3.3 V, +5 VSB Stand-By

The table below lists the DC output voltage ranges.
Output Minimum Nominal Maximum Units

Voltage Value Value Value
12V 11.40 12.00 12.60 V

5V 4.75 5.00 5.25 V
3.3V 3.14 3.30 3.46 V
-12V -10.8 -12.00 -13.20 V
5VSB 4.75 5.00 5.25 V
l Internal fan
l Power good signal — TTL compatible signal that indicates the proper
operation of the power supply (high = power good; low = power fail)
l Short circuit protection — shuts the PSU down if a short circuit occurs on any
DC output. The +5 VSB output remains normal
l Over current protection — trips the output before overload currents applied
to each output rail reach or exceed 240 VA
l AC fuse — the power supply input is protected by an internal fuse.
No Switch

l AC input voltage: Auto ranging 90/264 Vac (no switch - auto ranging)
l AC input current:
l 8 A rms maximum @ 90 to 136 V
l DC output voltages — +5 V, +12 V1, +12 V2, -12 V, +3.3 V, +5 VSB Stand-By
The table below lists the DC output voltage ranges.
Output Voltage Min Value Nominal Max Value Unit

12 V1 11.40 12.00 12.60 V
12 V2 11.40 12.00 12.60 V
5V 4.75 5.00 5.25 V
3.3 V 3.14 3.30 3.46 V
-12 V -10.8 -12.00 -13.20 V
5 VSB 4.75 5.00 5.25 V
l Internal fan
l Power good signal — TTL compatible signal that indicates the proper
operation of the power supply (high = power good; low = power fail)
DC output.
l AC fuse — the power supply input is protected by a replaceable UL
recognized, CSA certified fuse.
Estoril and Misano Motherboard PSU

PSU Specification
l AC input voltage: Auto ranging 90/264 Vac (no switch - auto ranging)
l AC input current:
l DC output voltages — 24VDC

l Internal fan
DC output.
Trusted Platform Module 1.2 & 2.0 (Estoril and Misano

Optional)
This board is connected to the motherboard providing secure storage of artifacts
used to authenticate the platform. The physical board layout of versions 1.2 and
2.0 is the same. Firmware differences only.
PIRAT Board
The PIRAT board provides:
l Access to the motherboard’s reset pins for Miscellaneous I/F Watchdog

l Access to the shutdown pins and the optional door tamper switch
l PC core power on/off push button switch
Note: When Windows is running, pushing the on/off button will start a soft power
off/on controlled shutdown of Windows and the core. Similarly, if the button is pushed
and held down, it will cut power to the core and Windows will not shut down safely.
l HDD activity LED (yellow).
PCI PCCM Board (Pocono only)

The PCI PC Communications Module (PCCM) board is an add-in adapter that
provides a Band 3 communications interface. The PCI PCCM board has a level 0
diagnostic LED (green).
uATX Extender Card (Estoril and Misano only)
RS232 PCI Board (Estoril and Misano only)
RS232 PCIE Board (Estoril and Misano only)
Disk Drives
The PC Core contains the following disk drives:
l Optional S-ATA DVD-RW optical drive

l S-ATA hard disk drive.
S-ATA DVD-RW Optical Drive

This optical storage drive is a DVD-RW drive (16X min.) and CD-ROM drive (48X
min.) and has a Serial ATA interface supporting ATAPI commands. The drive has
DVD video and CD audio playback capability. The drive can play any standard DVD-
ROM and CD-ROM disks complying with the Ecma-267 standard.
Power Requirements
+5VDC 2.0A
+12VDC 1.0A
S-ATA Hard Disk Drive

This drive is an industry standard 3.5-inch HDD that supports the ATA interface
standard and operates on a Serial ATA 3.0 interface.
Power Requirements
Input voltage requirements (including noise): 5 V ± 5% and 12 V ±10%.
+5VDC 0.46A
+12VDC 0.56A
TROUBLESHOOTING
WARNING Do not open or repair the Power Supply Unit. Replace if
necessary.
Pocono
Loss of configuration data Motherboard battery The system date and time Replace battery.
failure are excessively
inaccurate.
PSU shuts down Protection circuits PSU’s LED (green) not Turn PSU input power off
operated because of illuminated and when fault has been
overvoltage, short circuit removed turn power back
or overpower on.
PSU failure 240/120 volt switch Check voltage switch Select correct switch
incorrectly set setting setting.
Fuse blown Check PSU LED Replace PSU. WARNING:
DO NOT open the PSU to
replace the internal fuse.
Internal power Check all power Reconnect or properly
disconnected connectors to the connect cables to correct
motherboard. sockets
No boot up HDD failure Use BIOS Setup Utility to Reinstall
determine disk’s presence
Loose or incorrectly Check power and SATA Reconnect or properly
connected cabling cables connect cables to correct
sockets. Replace if worn.

System slow RAM inserted in wrong Check DIMMs are inserted Insert DIMMs in correct
order or incorrectly seated in correct sockets and order and/or make sure
correctly seated. they are correctly seated
(see ‘Installing RAM in
section ‘Module Removal
and Replacement’).
RAM not configured Check all RAM is Configure RAM correctly in
configured through BIOS BIOS Setup. Replace
Setup. DIMMs if not being
configured correctly, or
increase memory with
RAM upgrade.
CPU Check temperature in Replace heatsink. If
BIOS Setup Utility. symptoms persist, replace
CPU.
Check heatsink is seated.
Check heatsink fan is

operational. Running
temperature of CPU
should be about 15oC
above the ambient
temperature

Error message displays: The TPM has been Check if TPM is fitted or Replace the TPM and
Windows BitLocker Drive removed. properly seated. reboot.
Encryption key needed.
Insert key Storage Media.
Error message displays: TPM is fitted but not Check if TPM is damaged. To verify that the TPM is
working. faulty:
The Trusted Platform Inform the customer that
Module (TPM) in this the hard drive needs to be Ask the customer to
system has been disabled. decrypted to install a new decrypt the hard drive
TPM and verify that the using their bitlocker
You must supply a TPM is the problem. recovery key.
BitLocker recovery key to
restart this system until Fit a new TPM to the
TPM is re–enabled. motherboard.
Enable TPM from the
system BIOS setup or from Ask the customer to
the TPM management attempt to re–encrypt the
console. hard drive.
Note: The re–encryption

process would also
generate a new recovery
key.
If encryption is successful,
then the problem was the
TPM. If the system is still
not working, then the
problem is likely to be the
customer’s software.
Estoril and Misano

Error Possible root causes Isolation Resolution
System does not start up Memory refresh timer Re-seat the memory, or
error replace with known good
Parity error in base modules
memory (first 64Kb block)
Base memory read/write
test error
System does not start Motherboard timer not Fatal error indicating a
up operational serious problem with
Processor error the system. Before
replacing the
8042 Gate A20 test
motherboard, eliminate
error (cannot switch to
the possibility of
protected mode)
interference by a
General exception error malfunctioning add-in
(processor exception card. Remove the
interrupt error) expansion card then
BIOS ROM checksum insert it back into the
error system. If this does not
solve the problem, the
CMOS shutdown
cause may be a
register read/write error
malfunctioning card.
Cache memory test
failed
System does not start Display memory error If the system video
up (system video adapter) adapter is an add-in card,
replace or re-seat the
video adapter. If the video
adapter is an integrated
part of the system board,
the board may be faulty
System does not start Motherboard has not Has the system fan Check that pins 1 & 2 at A_
up powered on started? ON are at power on. If
they are then check the
short circuit pins 6 - 8 on
PIRAT header for 1 second
to see if the fan starts and
the motherboard powers
up
Loss of configuration data Motherboard battery failure The system date and time Replace battery.
are excessively inaccurate.

No boot up HDD failure Use BIOS Setup Utility to Replace the HDD.
determine disk’s presence.
Loose or incorrectly Check power and S-ATA Reconnect or properly

connected cabling cables. connect cables to correct
sockets. Replace the cables if
worn.
RAM not seated correctly Check RAM Re-seat correctly.
RAM not configured Check RAM is configured

through BIOS Setup.
OEM image does not apply DVD was not seen. See 'SATA White Listed
Device' instructions.
Clear the whitelist in the
BIOS, then select install from
DVD.
HDD/SSD not White-listed BIOS will only enable SATA See 'SATA White Listed
ports that contain white- Device' instructions.
listed devices at serial If the new HDD/SSD is the
number level. planned boot drive, then
A non white-listed device will when the system reboots you
generate a "No Boot Device will need to set it as the
Found" message and the OS current boot device. See
will not boot. 'Assign Boot Device'
instructions.
Once selected the system
will automatically boot from
the selected device on every
reboot.
Windows BitLocker Drive The TPM has been Check if TPM is fitted or Replace the TPM and
Encryption key needed. removed. properly seated. reboot.
Insert key Storage Media.

The Trusted Platform TPM is fitted but not Check if TPM is damaged. To verify that the TPM is
Module (TPM) in this working. Inform the customer that faulty:
system has been disabled. the hard drive needs to be Ask the customer to
You must supply a decrypted to install a new decrypt the hard drive
BitLocker recovery key to TPM and verify that the using their bitlocker
restart this system until TPM is the problem. recovery key.
TPM is re–enabled. Enable Fit a new TPM to the
TPM from the system motherboard.
BIOS setup or from the Ask the customer to
TPM management attempt to re–encrypt the
console. hard drive.
Note: The re–encryption

process would also
generate a new recovery
key. If encryption is
successful, then the
problem was the TPM. If
the system is still not
working, then the problem
is likely to be the
customer’s software.
No display on main or No power Power source Reconnect power source
service display. disconnected
No signal to primary or No display signal from Display cable Reconnect display cable
service display. motherboard disconnected
Display dongle Latched dongle

disconnected (applies to connection may be
Estoril motherboards loose or disconnected.
only) Push fully home or
reconnect.
No service display Display(s) connected to See 'Estoril Display Correct port
wrong ports Ports' information connections
PSU Remote On/Off Operation

When the PSON signal (pin 14, P1) is at TTL level low, or shorted to GND, the PSU
will turn on. When the PSON signal is at TTL level high, or open circuit, all outputs
except +5VSB will turn off.
BIOS Setup Utility

Default values shown.
Estoril
Menus
u Main
u Advanced
u Boot
u Power
u Security
u Exit
u Secure Boot
Estoril u Main
Variable Value
System Date [12/12/2020]
System Time [12:05:00]
InsydeH2O Version Estoril.05.05.01.0037
Processor Type Intel(R) Celeron(R) CPU G1820TE @2.2GHz
System Bus Speed 100 MHz
System Memory Speed 1333 MHz
Cache RAM 256 KB
Total Memory 4096 MB
Channel A
SODIMM0: 4096 MB
SODIMM1: [Not Installed]
Channel B
Platform Configuration
CPUID: 0x306C3 (Haswell)
CPU Speed: 2200 MHz
CPU Stepping: 03 (C0 Stepping)
L1 Data Cache: 32KB
L1 Instruction Cache: 32KB
L2 Cache: 256KB
L3 Cache: 2048KB
Variable Value
Number of Processors: 2 Core(s) / 2 Thread(s)
Microcode Rev: 00000027
GT Info: GT1 [0x00]

SMX/TXT: Un-Supported
PCH rev / SKU: 05 (C2 Stepping) / Unknown
VBIOS Ver: 1039
Intel ME Version / SKU 9.1.14.3000/ 5MB
LAN PHY Revision A3
Language English
Estoril u Advanced
Advanced Menu
u NCR Configuration
u Boot Configuration
u Peripheral Configuration
u SATA Configuration
u Thermal Configuration
u Video Configuration
u USB Configuration
u Chipset Configuration
u ACPI Table/Feature Control
u Active Management Technology Support
u PCI Express Configuration
u Overclocking Performance Menu
u Extended ICC
u Intel Rapid Start Technology
u DPTF Configuration
u ISCT Configuration
u BIOS Event Log Configuration
u POST Message Setting
Estoril u Advanced u NCR Configuration
Variable Value
u White List Management
u USB Reset on Boot
u Hardware Monitor
u USB Port VID/PID
Display During POST NCR Logo
u PCIe Port Debug Mode
u Secure Erase
LVDS Panel Type VBIOS Default
USB Port Enabled
XHCI BAR Offset 80C8h Bit[11:0] 0x 0
XHCI BAR Offset 80C8h Bit[23:12] 0x a
XHCI BAR Offset 8128h 0x 753
Estoril u Advanced u NCR Configuration u White List Management
Variable Value
White List Management
Serial ATA Port 0 [ST500V7000-01DK142] Enabled
Serial ATA Port 1 [ST500V7000-01DK142] Enabled
Clear White List and Add all Connected Devices
Clear White List
Allow WhiteList via Hotkey Disabled
Estoril u Advanced u NCR Configuration u USB Reset on Boot
Variable Value
USB Reset on Boot
Reset USB Port on Cold Boot Disabled
Estoril u Advanced u NCR Configuration u Hardware Monitor
Variable Value
Hardware Monitor
Current BIOS Firmware Version Estoril 05.05.01.0037
Date/Time
BIOS Setting Change via CLI Command No Data.
Variable Value
BIOS Setup Invoked Time 2019/12/06 13:50:18
BBS Invoked Time 2019/12/06 13:50:03
Platform Information
CPU Model Intel(R) Celeron(R) CPU G1820TE @ 2.20GHz
Memory
Channel A: 1096 MB, 1333Mhz
Channel B: Not Installed
Motherboard Type Estoril
Motherboard Revision Rev 1.00
Voltage
VCORE: 1.728 V
VDDQ: 1.536 V
12V: 12.024V
5V: 5.070 V
5VSUS: 5.070 V
Fan Speed
CPU: 1809 RPM
CHA: 0 RPM
Temperature
CPU: 24.0 C / 75.2 F
PCH: 23.0 C / 73.4 F
Front Panel 23.0 C / 73.4 F
Backlight Current Not Detected.
Estoril u Advanced u NCR Configuration u USB Port VID/PID
Variable Value
PORTA: 1C4F/0026, USB Keyboard
PORTB: 046D/C063, DELL USB Laser Mouse
PORTC: Not Installed
PORTD: Not Installed
PORTE: Not Installed
PORTF: Not Installed
PORT0: Not Installed

Estoril u Advanced u NCR Configuration u PCIe Port Debug Mode
Variable Value
PCIe Port Debug Mode
PEG PCIe Port Debug Mode: Disabled
PCH PCIe Port Debug Mode: Disabled
Estoril u Advanced u NCR Configuration u Secure Erase
Variable Value
Which Drive would you like to erase?
Serial ATA Port 1: [ATAP 1 iHAS124 F)
Serial ATA Port 2: [ST500DM009-2F110A]
Estoril u Advanced u Boot Configuration
Variable Value
Boot Configuration
Numlock On
Estoril u Advanced u Peripheral Configuration
Variable Value
Peripheral Configuration
Serial PORT A Auto
Serial PORT B Auto
Azalia Enabled
Azalia Docking Support Enable Disabled
Azalia PME Enable Disabled
LAN Enabled
SLP_LAN# Low on DC Power Disabled
LAN PHY Drives GP1027 Enabled
Estoril u Advanced u SATA Configuration
Variable Value
SATA Configuration
SATA Controller Enabled
HDC Configure AS AHCI
u Software Feature Mask Configuration
Variable Value
Aggressive LPM Support Enabled
SATA Port 0 HotPlug Disabled
Port 0 Enabled
Spin-Up Device Disabled
SATA Device Type Hard Disk Drive
Port 1 Enabled
SATA Port 2HotPlug Disabled
Port 2 Enabled
Port 3 Enabled
Port 4 Enabled
Port 5 Enabled
Serial ATA Port 0 [Not Installed]
Serial ATA Port 1 [NCSC51AD240M4P]
Estoril u Advanced u SATA Configuration u Software Feature Mask

Configuration
Variable Value
Software Feature Mask Configuration
HDD Unlock Enabled
LED Locate Enabled
Estoril u Advanced u Thermal Configuration
Variable
Thermal Configuration
u Platform Thermal Configuration
u CPU Thermal Configuration
u Memory Power and Thermal Throttling
Estoril u Advanced u Thermal Configuration u Platform Thermal

Configuration
Variable Value
Platform Thermal Configuration
Automatic Thermal Reporting Enabled
Active Trip Point 0 Fan Speed 100
Active Trip Point 1 Fan Speed 75
Active Trip Point 1 55°C
Passive TC1 Value 1
Passive TC2 Value 5
Passive TSP Value 10
Active Trip Points Enabled
Passive Trip Points Disabled
Critical Trip Points Enabled
Slots with TS on DIMMs No TS on DIMM
Thermal Device Enabled
Estoril u Advanced u Thermal Configuration u CPU Thermal Configuration
Variable Value
CPU Thermal Configuration
DTS Disabled
Variable Value
Bi-Directional PROCHOT# Enabled
ACPI 3.0 T-States Disabled
Estoril u Advanced u Thermal Configuration u Memory Power and Thermal

Throttling
Variable Value
uMemory Thermal Configuration
DDR PowerDown and Idle Counter PCODE
REFRESH_2X_MODE Disabled
LPDDR Thermal Sensor Enabled
SelfRefresh Enable Enabled
Selfrefresh Idle Timer 512
Throttler CKEMin Defeature Disabled
Throttler CKEMin Timer 48
uDrain Power Meter
uMemory Thermal Reporting
uMemory Thermal RAPL

Throttling u Memory Thermal Configuration
Variable Value
Memory Thermal Configuration
Memory Thermal Management Disabled

Throttling u Drain Power Meter
Variable Value
Drain Power Meter
Use user provided power weights, scale Disabled
factor and channel power floor values
Energy Scale Factor
Energy Scale factor 4
Channel 0 DIMM 0
Idle Energy CH0, DIMM0 10
PowerDown Energy CH0, DIMM0 6
Variable Value
Activate Energy CH0, DIMM0 172
Read Energy CH0, DIMM0 212
Write Energy CH0, DIMM0 221
Channel 0 DIMM 1
Channel 1 DIMM 0
Channel 1 DIMM 1

Throttling u Memory Thermal Reporting
Variable Value
Memory Thermal Reporting
Lock Thermal Management Registers Disabled
Extern Thermal Status Disabled
Closed Loop Thermal Manage Disabled
Open Loop Thermal Manage Disabled
Thermal Threshold Settings
Warm Threshold CH0 DIMM0 255
Variable Value
Hot Threshold CH0 DIMM0 255
Thermal Threshold Budget Settings
Warm Budget CH0 DIMM0 255
Hot Budget CH0 DIMM0 255

Throttling u Memory Thermal RAPL
Variable Value
Memory Thermal RAPL
RAPL Power Floor CH0 0
RAPL Power Floor CH1 0
RAPL PL Lock Disabled
RAPL PL 1 Enable Disabled
RAPL PL 1 Power 0
RAPL PL 1 Windowx 0
RAPL PL 1 Windowy 0
RAPL PL 2 Power 222
RAPL PL 2 Windowx 1
RAPL PL 2 Windowy 10
Estoril u Advanced u Video Configuration
Variable Value
Video Configuration
Primary Display Auto
u Internal Graphics Device
u PCI Express Graphic
u SA DMI Configuration
Estoril u Advanced u Video Configuration u Internal Graphics Device
Variable Value
Internal Graphics Device
Internal Graphics Device Auto
RC6 (Render Standby) Enabled
IGD Turbo IMON Current 31
IGD - Gtt Size 2 MB
IGD - Aperture Size 128 MB
IGD - DVMT Pre-Allocated 32 MB
IGD - DVMT Size MAX
IGD - Low Power Mode Enabled
IGD - PAVP Enable Enables
IGD - PM Support Enabled
LCD Control
Panel Scaling Auto
Ambient Light Sensor (ALS) Support Disabled
Backlight Image Adaption (BIA) Auto
Spread Spectrum Clock (SSC) Chip Off
Backlight Control PWM Normal
Active LFP VBIOS Default
Panel Colour Depth 18 bit
IUER State Enable Disabled
IUER Dock Enable Enabled
IUER Button Enable Enabled
CPU Audio Device (B0:D3:f0) Enabled
CPU Audio Disable Bitmap 0
Estoril u Advanced u Video Configuration u PCI Express Graphic
Variable Value
PCI Express Graphic
PCIE Reset Delay 100 ms
ASPM Auto
PEG0 - Gen X Auto
PEG1 - Gen X Auto
PEG2 - Gen X Auto
Runtime C7 Allowed Disabled
Always Enable PEG Disabled
Estoril u Advanced u Video Configuration u SA DMI Configuration
Variable Value
SA DMI Configuration
DMI Link ASPM Control L0sL1
DMI Extended Sync Control Disabled
DMI Vc1 Control Disabled
DMI Vcp Control Enabled
DMI Vcm Control Enabled
DMI Gen 2 Enabled
Estoril u Advanced u USB Configuration
Variable Value
USB Configuration
USB BIOS Support Enabled
USB Precondition Enabled
XHCI Pre-Boot Driver Enabled
XHCI Smart Auto
XHCI Streams Enabled
EHCI 1 Enabled
EHCI 2 Enabled
Per-Port Control Disabled
USB Legacy SMI Bit Cleaner Enabled
Estoril u Advanced u Chipset Configuration
Variable Value
Chipset Configuration
Setup Warning:
Setting items on this screen to incorrect values may cause your
system to malfunction!
CRID Disabled
Port 80h Cycles LPC BUS
VT-d Enabled
CHAP Device (B0:D7:f0) Disabled
Thermal Device (B0:D4:f0) Disabled
Scrambler Enabled
Memory Frequency Auto
Rank Margin Tool Disabled
GDXC IOT and MOT Support Disabled
Me FW Image Re-Flash Disabled
Sensor Hub Type None
After G3 On S5
Board Capability SUS_PWR_DN_ACK
GPIO Lockdown Disabled
RTC Lock Enabled
IFR Update Enabled
DDR3 Voltage Mode Auto
RTD3 Support Disabled
Max TOLUD Dynamic
SATA PORT 0 Time Out (MS) 0
BIOS Lock Enabled
Serial IRQ Mode Quiet
H20 UVE Support Enabled
Modern Standby Disabled
Estoril u Advanced u ACPI Table/Features Control
Variable Value
ACPI Table/Features Control
FACP-RTC S4 Wakeup Enabled
Variable Value
APIC-IO APIC Mode Enabled
TCO WatchDog Support Enabled
WatchDog ACPI Table Enabled
PTID Support Enabled
ACPI Memory Debug Enabled
ACPI Memory Debug Address 0xDCF91018
Native PCIE Enable Enabled
Native ASPM Disabled
Power Sharing Manager Disabled
Wireless Device Disabled
PCI Delay Optimisation Disabled
Estoril u Advanced u Active Management Technology Support
Variable Value
Active Management Technology Support
Intel AMT Support Disabled
MEBx Selection Screen Disabled
Hide Un-Configure ME Confirmation Disabled
MEBx Debug Message Output Disabled
Un-Configure ME Disabled
Intel AMT Password Write Enabled
AMT CIRA Request Trig Disabled
USB Configure Enabled
PET Progress Enabled
Send PET Message Delay 500 Milliseconds
AMT CIRA Timeout 0
ASF Support Enabled
WatchDog Support Disabled
OS Timer 0
BIOS Timer 0
Estoril u Advanced u PCI Express Configuration
Variable Value
PCI Express Clock Gating Enabled
DMI Link ASPM Control Enabled
PCIE Port Assigned to LAN 7
uPCI Express Root Port 1
u PCI Express Root Port 2
Estoril u Advanced u PCI Express Configuration u PCI Express Root Port 1
Variable Value
PCI Express Root Port 1
PCI Express Root Port 1 Enabled
Automatic ASPM Auto
URR Disabled
FER Disabled
NFER Disabled
CER Disabled
CTO Default
SEFE Disabled
SENFE Disabled
SECE Disabled
PME Interrupt Disabled
PME SCI Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
PCIe Speed Auto
Variable Value
PCI Express Root Port 2 Disabled
Variable Value
Automatic ASPM Auto
URR Disabled
FER Disabled
NFER Disabled
CER Disabled
CTO Default
SEFE Disabled
SENFE Disabled
SECE Disabled
PME SCI Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
PCIe Speed Auto
Variable Value
Automatic ASPM Auto
URR Disabled
FER Disabled
NFER Disabled
CER Disabled
CTO Default
SEFE Disabled
Variable Value
SENFE Disabled
SECE Disabled
PME SCI Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
PCIe Speed Auto
Variable Value
Automatic ASPM Auto
URR Disabled
FER Disabled
NFER Disabled
CER Disabled
CTO Default
SEFE Disabled
SENFE Disabled
SECE Disabled
PME SCI Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
PCIe Speed Auto
Variable Value
Automatic ASPM Auto
URR Disabled
FER Disabled
NFER Disabled
CER Disabled
Variable Value
CTO Default
SEFE Disabled
SENFE Disabled
SECE Disabled
PME SCI Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
PCIe Speed Auto
Variable Value
Automatic ASPM Auto
URR Disabled
FER Disabled
NFER Disabled
CER Disabled
CTO Default
SEFE Disabled
SENFE Disabled
SECE Disabled
PME SCI Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
PCIe Speed Auto
Estoril u Advanced u Overclocking Performance Menu
Variable Value
Overclocking Performance Menu
Overclocking Feature Disabled
Estoril u Advanced u Extended ICC
Variable Value
Extended ICC
ICC/OC WatchDog Timer Disabled
ICC Unused Clocks Enabled
ICC Locks after EOP Default
ICC Profile 0
ICC Clocking Library 9.0.0.1262
BCLK/DMI/PEG/PCIe/PCI33/SATA/USB3 Clock settings
Default Clock settings 100.00MHz 0.5% Downspread
Frequency range Limits 100.00 - 100.00 MHz
Maximum Spread % 0.5%
Spread Mode Adjustments Change Allowed
Spread % 50
Estoril u Advanced u Intel Rapid Start Technology
Variable Value
Intel Rapid Start Technology
Advanced CPU Control
Hardware Prefetcher Enabled
Adjacent Cache Line Prefetch Enabled
DPR Memory Size (MB) 4
P-States (IST) Enabled
Active Processor Cores All Cores
HT Support Auto
BIST Disabled
Execute Disable Bit Enabled
Intel (VMX) Virtualisation Technology Enabled
Max CPUID Value Limit Disabled
Boot Performance Mode Turbo Performance
CPU Flex Ratio Override Disabled
CPU Flex Ratio Setting 22
C-States Disabled
EC Turbo Control Mode Disabled
Variable Value
ACPI 5.0 CPPC Support Disabled
Power Limit 3 Override Disabled
Estoril u Advanced u DPTF Configuration
Variable Value
DPTF Configuration
DPTF Disabled
Estoril u Advanced u ISCT Configuration
Variable Value
ISCT Configuration
ISCT Configuration Disabled
Estoril u Advanced u BIOS Event Log Configuration
Variable Value
BIOS Event Log Configuration
Log Event To BIOS
Event Log Full Option Overwrite
Event Log Viewer
Estoril u Advanced u Post Message Setting
Variable Value
Post Message Setting
POST Message Configuration Enabled
Progress Code Enabled
Error Code Enabled
Debug Code Disabled
Log POST Message Enabled
Show POST Message Enabled
Estoril u Boot
Variable Value
Boot
Boot Type Legacy Boot Type
Variable Value
Quick Boot Enabled
Quiet Boot Enabled
Boot Once Support Enabled
BBS Menu Enabled
u Bootable Device Type
PXE Boot to LAN Disabled
Power Up in Standby Support Disabled
Add Boot Options Auto
ACPI Selection ACPI5.0
EFI Device First Enabled
Timeout 0
Automatic Failover Enabled
Estoril u Boot u Bootable Device Type
Variable Value
Bootable Device Type
CD/DVD-ROM Drive Enabled
Hard Disk Drive Enabled
USB Enabled
Network Enabled
Estoril u Power
Variable Value
Power
u Advanced CPU Control
u Platform Power management
ACPI S3 Enabled
Wake on PME Enabled
Wake on Modem Ring Disabled
Auto Wake on S5 Disabled
Wake on LAN Enabled
Wake on WLAN Enable Disabled
S5 Long Run Test Disabled
Estoril u Power u Advanced CPU Control
Variable Value
Advanced CPU Control
Adjacent Cache Line Prefetch Enabled
P-States (IST) Enabled
Active Processor Cores All Cores
HT Support Auto
BIST Disabled
Execute Disable Bit Enabled
Intel (VMX) Virtualisation Technology Enabled
Max CPUID Value Limit Disabled
Boot Performance Mode Turbo Performance
CPU Flex Ratio Setting 22
C-States Disabled
ACPI 5.0 CPPC Support Disabled
Estoril u Power u Platform Power Management
Variable Value
Platform Power Management
PCI Clock Run Enabled
Estoril u Security
Variable Value
Security
Current TPM Device TPM 1.2
TPM Sate Enabled and Activated
TPM Availability Available
TPM Operation No Operation
Admin Password Not Installed
Variable Value
BBS Password Not Installed
Set Admin Password
Old Password
New Password
Confirm Password
Power on Password Disabled
User Access Level Full
Set BBSPassword
Old Password
New Password
Confirm Password
Clear Password
Estoril u Exit
Variable
Exit
Exit Saving Changes
Save Changes Without Exit
Exit Discarding Changes
Load Optimal Defaults
Load Custom Defaults
Save Custom Defaults
Discard Changes
Estoril u Secure Boot
Variable Value
Secure Boot
System Status:
Secure Boot Database Installed and Locked
Secure Boot Status Enabled
User Customisation Security NO
Options:
Select a UEFI File as trusted for execution
Enforce Secure Boot Enabled
Variable Value
Erase All Secure Boot Settings Disabled
Restore Secure Boot to Factory Settings Disabled
Misano
Menus
u Main
u Advanced
u Security
u Power
u Boot
u Exit
Misano u Main
Variable Value
System Date [12/12/2020]
System Time [12:05:00]
InsydeH2O Version Misano 05.12.09.0017
Processor Type Intel(R) Core(TM) i56500TE CPU @2.3GHz
System Bus Speed 100 MHz
System Memory Speed 2133 MHz
Cache RAM 1024 KB
Total Memory 8192 MB
Channel A
SODIMM 0: 8192 MB
Channel B
Unknown 0: [Not Installed]
CPUID: 0x506E3 (SKYLAKE DT HALO)
CPU Speed: 2300 MHz
CPU Stepping: 03 (R0/S0/N0 Stepping)
L1 Data Cache: 32 KB
L1 Instruction Cache: 32 KB
L2 Cache: 256 KB
L3 Cache: 6144 KB
Variable Value
Number of Processors: 4 Core(s) / 4 Thread(s)
Microcode Rev: 000000D6
GT Info: GT2 [0x1912]

SMX/TXT: Supported
PCH rev / SKU: 31 (D1 Stepping) / SKL PCH-h Q170
GOP Ver: 9.0.1094
Intel ME Version / SKU 11.8.70.3626/CORPORATE
LAN PHY Revision (B2 Stepping)
Language English
Misano u Advanced
Advanced Menu
u NCR Configuration
u Boot Configuration
u USB Configuration
u Chipset Configuration
u ACPI Table Features Control
u CPU Configuration
u Power & Performance
u Memory Configuration
u System Agent (SA) Configuration
u PCH-IO Configuration
u PCH-FW Configuration
u Thermal Configuration
u RTD3 Settings
u Intel ICC
u SIO NCT6776F
u BIOS Event Log Configuration
u POST Message Setting
Misano u Advanced u NCR Configuration
Variable Value
u White List Management
u USB Reset on Boot
Variable Value
u Hardware Monitor
u USB Port VID/PID
Display During POST NCR Logo
u Secure Erase
USB Port Enabled
u USB Black List Enabled
Set GPIO before PCH reset Disabled
Misano u Advanced u NCR Configuration u White List Management
Variable
White List Management
Clear White List and Add all Connected Devices

Clear White List
Misano u Advanced u NCR Configuration u USB Reset on Boot
Variable Value
USB Reset on Boot
Reset USB Port on Cold Boot Disabled
Misano u Advanced u NCR Configuration u Hardware Monitor
Variable Value
Hardware Monitor
Current BIOS Firmware Version Misano 05.12.09.0017
Date/Time
BIOS Setting Change via CLI Command No Data
BIOS Setup Invoked Time 2020/04/14 16:16:54
BBS Invoked Time No Data
Platform Information
CPU Model Intel(R) Core(TM) i56500TE CPU @2.3GHz
Memory
Channel A: 8192 MB, 2133Mhz
Channel B: Not Installed
Motherboard Type Misano
Motherboard Revision Rev 1.00
Variable Value
Voltage
VCORE: 1.728 V
VDDQ: 1.536 V
12V: 12.024V
5V: 5.070 V
5VSUS: 5.070 V
Fan Speed
CPU: 1809 RPM
CHA: 0 RPM
Temperature
CPU: 24.0 C / 75.2 F
PCH: 23.0 C / 73.4 F
Front Panel 23.0 C / 73.4 F
Misano u Advanced u NCR Configuration u USB Port VID/PID
Variable Value
PORTA: 1C4F/0026, USB Keyboard
PORTB: 046D/C063, DELL USB Laser Mouse
PORTC: Not Installed
PORTD: Not Installed
PORTE: Not Installed
PORTF: Not Installed
Misano u Advanced u NCR Configuration u Secure Erase
Variable Value
Which Drive would you like to erase?
Serial ATA Port 1: [ATAP 1 iHAS124 F)
Serial ATA Port 2: [ST500DM009-2F110A]
Misano u Advanced u NCR Configuration u USB Black List
Variable Value
USB Black List
USB Black List Enabled
Add USB devices to Black List
00 (VID_PID) 0x0404 0x0400 Enabled
01 (VID_PID) 0x077A_0x100D Enabled
02 (VID_PID) 0x1D5F_0x0100 Enabled
03 (VID_PID) 0x0ACD_0x0860 Enabled
04 (VID_PID) 0x058F_0x09520 Enabled
05 (VID_PID) 0x10AE_0x8915 Enabled
06 (VID_PID) 0x05E0_0x1200 Enabled
07 (VID_PID) 0x03EB_0x2013 Enabled
08 (VID_PID) 0x0404_0x041F Enabled
09 (VID_PID) 0x0404_0x0420 Enabled
10 (VID_PID) 0x0404_0x041C Enabled
12 (VID_PID) 0x0404_0x044F Enabled
14(VID_PID) 0x0404_0x0466 Enabled
Misano u Advanced u Boot Configuration
Variable Value
Boot Configuration
Numlock Off
Misano u Advanced u USB Configuration
Variable Value
USB Configuration
USB BIOS Support Enabled
USB Legacy SMI Bit Cleaner Enabled
Misano u Advanced u Chipset Configuration
Variable Value
Chipset Configuration
Setup Warning:
Setting items on this screen to incorrect values may cause your
system to malfunction!
H2OUVE Support Enabled
BIOS WDT Enabled
Misano u Advanced u ACPI Table/Features Control
Variable Value
ACPI Table/Features Control
u ACPI Settings
FACP-RTC S4 Wakeup Enabled
APIC-IO APIC Mode Enabled
ACPI Memory Debug Disabled
Misano u Advanced u ACPI Table/Features Control uACPI Settings
Variable Value
ACPI Settings
ACPI Version 5.0
Enable ACPI Auto Configuration Enabled
Native APM Auto
Low Power S0 Idle Capacity Disabled
Lpit Windows RS2 Workaround Enabled
Lpit Recidency Counter SLP S0
SSDT Table from File Disabled
PCI Delay Optimization Disabled
Misano u Advanced u CPU Configuration
Variable Value
CPU Configuration
Type Intel(R) Core(TM) i5-6500TE CPU @ 2.30GHz
ID 0x506E3
Speed 2300 MHz
Variable Value
L1 Data Cache 32 KB x 4
L1 Instruction Cache 32 KB x 4
L2 Cache 256 KB x 4
L3 Cache 6 MB
L4 Cache N/A
VMX Supported
SMX/TXT Supported
SW Guard Extensions (SGX) Software Controlled
Select Owner EPOCH Input Type No Change in Owner EPOCHs
PRMRR Size INVALID PRMRR
CPU Flex Ratio Settings 23
Adjacent Cache Line Prefetcher Enabled
Intel (VMX) Virtualization Technology Enabled
PECI Enabled
Active Processor Cores All
BIST Disabled
JTAG C10 Power Disabled
AP Threads Idle Manner MWAIT Loop
AES Enabled
MachineCheck Enabled
MonitorMWait Enabled
Intel Trusted Extension Technology Disabled
Alias Check Request Disabled
Reset AUX Content No
BIOS Guard Disabled
Flash Wear Out Protection Disabled
Current Debug Interface Status Disabled
Debug Interface Disabled
Debug Interface Lock Enabled
Processor Trace Memory Allocation Disabled
Variable Value
FCLK Frequency for Early Power On Normal (800MHz)
Three Strike Counter Enabled
Voltage Optimisation Auto
Misano u Advanced u Power and Performance
Variable
Power and Performance
u CPU - Power Management Control
u GT - Power Management Control
Misano u Advanced u Power and Performance u CPU - Power Management

Control
Variable Value
CPU - Power Management Control
Boot Performance Mode Max Non-Turbo Performance
Intel(R) SpeedStep(TM) Enabled
Race to Halt (RTH) Enabled
Intel(R) Speed Shift Technology Disabled
HDC Control Disabled
Turbo Mode Enabled
u View/Configure Turbo Options
u CPU VR Settings
Platform PL1 Enable Disabled
Plastform PL2 Enable Disabled
Power Limit Override Disabled
C States Disabled
Thermal Monitor Enabled
Interrupt Redirection Mode Selection PAIR with Fixed Priority
Timed MWAIT Disabled
u Custom P-State Table
Energy Performance gain Disabled
EPG DIMM Idd3N 26
EPG DIMM Idd3P 11
Variable Value
u Power Limit 3 Settings
u CPU Lock Configuration

Control u View/Configure Turbo Options
Variable Value
View/Configure Turbo Options
Current Turbo Settings
Max Turbo Power Limit 4095.875
Min Turbo Power Limit 0.0
Package TDP Limit 35.0
Power Limit 1 35.0
Power Limit 2 43.750
1 - Core Turbo Ratio 33
Energy Performance Gain Disabled
EPG DIMM Idd3N 26
EPG DIMM Idd3P 11
Energy Efficient P-State Enabled

Package Power Limit MSR Lock Disabled
Power Limit 2 Override Enabled
Power Limit 2 0
1 - Core Ratio Limit Override 0
Variable Value
Energy Efficient Turbo Auto

Control u CPU VR Settings
Variable Value
CPU VR Settings
VR Power Delivery Design Auto
PSYS Slope 0
PSYS Offset 0
PSYS PMax Power 0
u Acoustic Noise Settings
u Core/IA VR Settings
u GT-Sliced VR Settings

Control u CPU VR Settings u Acoustic Noise Settings
Variable Value
Acooustic Noise Settings
Acoustic Noise Mitigation Disabled
IA VR Domain
Disable fast PKG C State Ramp for IA Domain False
Slow Slew Rate for IA Domain Fast/2
GT VR Domain
Slow Slew Rate for GT Domain Fast/2
SA VR Domain
Slow Slew Rate for SA Domain Fast/2

Control u CPU VR Settings u Core IA/VR Settings
Variable Value
Core IA/ VR Settings
VR Config Enable Enabled
AC Loadline 0
DC Loadline 0
PS Current Threshold 1 0
PS3 Enable Enabled
PS4 Enable Enabled
IMON Slope 0
IMON Offset 0
IMON Prefix +
VR Current Limit 0
VR Voltage Limit 0
TDC Enable Enabled
TDC Current Limit 0
TDC Time Window 1 ms
TDC Lock Disabled

Control u CPU VR Settings u GT - Sliced VR Settings
Variable Value
GT - Sliced VR Settings
VR Config Enable Enabled
AC Loadline 0
DC Loadline 0
PS3 Enable Enabled
PS4 Enable Enabled
IMON Slope 0
Variable Value
IMON Offset 0
IMON Prefix +
VR Current Limit 0
VR Voltage Limit 0
TDC Enable Enabled
TDC Current Limit 0
TDC Time Window 1 ms
TDC Lock Disabled

Control u Custom P-State Table
Variable Value
Custom P-State Table
Number of P Stated 0
Max P- Stat Ratio 0
P - State Ratio 0
P - State Ratio 0
\x019A 0
\x019B 0
\x019C 0
\x019D 0
\x019E 0
\x019F 0
\x0190 0
P - State Ratio 0
P - State Ratio 0
P - State Ratio 0
P - State Ratio 0
P - State Ratio 0
P - State Ratio 0
P - State Ratio 0
P - State Ratio 0
P - State Ratio 0
P - State Ratio 0
Variable Value
P - State Ratio 0
P - State Ratio 0
P - State Ratio 0
P - State Ratio 0
P - State Ratio 0

Control u Power Limit 3 Settings
Variable Value
Power Limit 3 Settings

Control u CPU Lock Configuration
Variable Value
CPU Lock Configuration
CFG Lock Enabled
Overclocking Lock Disabled
Misano u Advanced u Power and Performance u GT - Power Management

Control
Variable Value
GT Power Management Control
RC6 (Render Standby) Enabled
Maximum GT Frequency Dafault Max Frequency
Misano u Advanced u Memory Configuration
Variable Value
Memory Configuration
u Memory Thermal Configuration
u Memory Training Algorithms
Memory RC Version 2.0.0.6
Memory Frequency 2133 MHz
Memory Timings (tCL-tRCD-tRP-tRAS) 15-15-15-36
Channel 0 Slot 0 Populated & Enabled
Variable Value
Size 8192 MB (DDR4)
Number of Ranks 2
Manufacturer Unknown
Channel 0 Slot 1 Not Populated/ Disabled
Memory ratio/reference clock options moved to
Overclock->Memory->Custom Profile Menu
MRC ULT Safe Config Disabled
Memory Test on Warm Boot Enabled
Maximum Memory Frequency Auto
HOB Buffer Size Auto
ECC Support Enabled
Max TOLUD Dynamic
SA GV Enabled
SA GV Low Freq MRC Default
Retrain on Fast Fail Enabled
Command Tristate Enabled
BER Support Enabled
Enable RH prevention Enabled
Row Hammer Solution Hardware RHP
RH Activation Probability 1/2ˆ11
Exit on Failure (MRC) Enabled
MC Lock Enabled
Probeless Trace Disabled
Enable/Disable IED (Intel Enhanced Debug) Disabled
Ch Hash Support Enabled
Ch Hash Mask 0
Ch Hash Interleaved Bit BIT8
VC1 Read Metering Enabled
VC1 RdMeter Time Window 800
VC1 RdMeter Threshold 280
Strong Weak Leaker 7
Variable Value
Memory Scrambler Enabled
Force ColdReset Disabled
Channel A DIMM Control Enable both DIMMs
Channel B DIMM Control Enable both DIMMs
Force Single Rank Disabled
Memory Remap Enabled
Time Measure Disabled
Lpddr Mem WL Set Set B
BDAT ACPI Table Support Disabled
BDAT Memory Data Schema 6B
BDAT Memory Test Type Rank Margin Tool Rank
Rank Margin Tool Loop Count 0
EV Loader Disabled
EV Loader Delay Enabled
Misano u Advanced u Memory Configuration u Memory Thermal

Configuration
Variable Value
Memory Thermal Configuration
u Memory Power and Thermal Throttling

Configuration u Memory Power and Thermal Throttling
Variable Value
Memory Power and Thermal Throttling
DDR PowerDown and Idle Counter BIOS
For LPDDR Only: BIOS
DDR PowerDown and Idle Counter
REFRESH_2X_MODE Disabled
LPDDR Thermal Sensor Enabled
Selfrefresh Enable Enabled
SelfRefresh Idle Timer 512
Variable Value
Throttler CKEMin Defeature Disabled
Throttler CKEMin Timer 48
u DRAM Power Meter
u Memory Thermal Reporting
u Memory RAPL

Configuration u Memory Power and Thermal Throttling u DRAM Power
Meter
Variable Value
DRAM Power Meter
Use user provided power weights, scale factor, Disabled
and channel power floor values
Energy Scale factor 4
Idle Energy Ch0DIMM0 10
PowerDown Energy Ch0DIMM0 6
Active Energy Ch0DIMM0 172
Read Energy Ch0DIMM0 212
Write Energy Ch0DIMM0 221

Configuration u Memory Power and Thermal Throttling u Memory Thermal
Reporting
Variable Value
Lock Thermal Management registers Enabled
Extern Term Status Disabled
Closed Loop Therm Manage Disabled
Open Loop Therm Manage Disabled
DDR4 Skip Refresh En Enabled
Thermal Threshold Settings
Warm Threshold Ch0DIMM0 255
Hot Threshold Ch0DIMM0 255
Thermal Throttle Budget Settings
Warm Budget Ch0DIMM0 255
Hot Budget Ch0DIMM0 255

Configuration u Memory Power and Thermal Throttling u Memory RAPL
Variable Value
Memory RAPL
RAPL Power Floor Ch0 0
RAPL Power Floor Ch1 0
Variable Value
RAPL PL Lock Disabled
RAPL PL 1 Power 0
RAPL PL 1 WindowX 0
RAPL PL 1 WindowY 0
RAPL PL 2 Power 0
RAPL PL 2 WindowX 0
RAPL PL 2 WindowY 0
Misano u Advanced u Memory Configuration u Memory Training Algorithms
Variable Value
Memory Training Algorithms
Early Command Training Disabled
SenseAmp Offset Training Enabled
Early ReadMPR Timing Centering 2D Enabled
Read MPR Training Enabled
Receive Enable Training Enabled
Jedec Write Leveling Enabled
Early Write Time Centering 2D Enabled
Early Write Drive Strength/Equalization Enabled
Early Read Time Centering 2D Enabled
Write Timing Centering 1D Enabled
Write Voltage Centering 1D Enabled
Read Timing Centering 1D Enabled
DIMM ODT Trainingˆ Enabled
Write Drive Strength/Equalization 2Dˆ Disabled
Write Slew Rate Trainingˆ Enabled
Read ODT Trainingˆ Enabled
Read Equalization Trainingˆ Enabled
Read AsmplifierTrainingˆ Enabled
Write Timing Centering 2D Enabled
Rear Timing Centering 2D Enabled
Command Voltage Centering Enabled
Variable Value
Write Voltage Centering 2D Enabled
Read Voltage Centering 2D Enabled
Late Command Training Enabled
Round Trip Latency Enabled
Turn Around Timing Training Enabled
Rank Margin Tool Disabled
Memory Test Disabled
DIMM SPD Alias test Disabled
Received Enable Centering 1D Enabled
Retrain Margin Check Enabled
Write Drive Strength Up/Dn Independently Disabled
CMD Slew Rate Training Enabled
CMD Drive Strength/Tx Equalization Enabled
CMD Normalization Enabled
Misano u Advanced u System Agent (SA) Configuration
Variable Value
System Agent (SA) Configuration
SA PCIe Code Version 3.7.5.0
VT-d Supported
u Graphics Configuration
u DMI/OPI Configuration
u PEG Port Configuration
Stop Grant Configuration Auto
VT-d Enabled
CHAP Device (B0:D7:F0) Disabled
Thermal Device (B0:D4:F0) Disabled
GMM Device (B0:D8:F0) Enabled
CRID Support Disabled
Above 4GB MMIO BIOS Assignment Disabled
X2APIC Opt Out Disabled
Misano u Advanced u System Agent (SA) Configuration u Graphics

Configuration
Variable Value
Graphics Configuration
Graphics Turbo IMON Current 31
Skip Scanning of External Gfx Card Disabled
Primary Display Auto
Select PCIE Card Auto
Internal Graphics Auto
GTT Size 8MB
Aperture Size 256MB
DVMTPre-Allocated 32M
DVMT Total Gfx Mem 256M
Intel Graphics Pei Display Peim Disabled
Gfx Low Power Mode Enabled
VDD Enable Enabled
PM Support Enabled
PAVP Enable Enabled
Cdynmax Clamping Enable Enabled
Cd Clock Frequency 675 Mhz
IUER Button Enable Disabled
Misano u Advanced u System Agent (SA) Configuration u DPM/OPI

Configuration
Variable Value
DPM/OPI Configuration
DMI X4 Gen3
DMI Max Link Speed Auto
DMI Gen3 Eq Phase 2 Auto
DMI Gen3 Eq Phase 3 Method Auto
DMI Vc1 Control Disabled
DMI Vcm Control Enabled
Program Static Phase 1 Eq Enabled
u Gen3 Root Port Preset Value for Each Lane
u Gen3 Endpoint Preset Value for Each Lane
Variable Value
u Gen3 Endpoint Hint Value for Each Lane
u Gen3 RxCTLE Control
DMI Link ASPM Control L1
DMI De-emphasis Control -3.5dB
DMI IOT Disabled

Configuration u Gen3 Root Port Preset Value for Each Lane
Variable Value
Gen3 Root Port Preset Value for Each Lane
Lane 0 4
Lane 1 4
Lane 2 4
Lane 3 4

Configuration u Gen3 Endpoint Preset Value for Each Lane
Variable Value
Gen3 Endpoint Preset Value for Each Lane
Lane 0 7
Lane 1 7
Lane 2 7
Lane 3 7

Configuration u Gen3 Endpoint Hint Value for Each Lane
Variable Value
Gen3 Endpoint Hint Value for Each Lane
Lane 0 2
Lane 1 2
Lane 2 2
Lane 3 2

Configuration u Gen3 RxCTLE Control
Variable Value
Gen3 RxCTLE Control
Bundle0 3
Bundle1 3
Misano u Advanced u System Agent (SA) Configuration u PEG Port

Configuration
Variable Value
PEG Port Configuration
PEG 0:1:0 Not Present
Enable Root Port Auto
Max Link Speed Auto
PEG0 Slot Power Limit Value 75
PEG0 Slot Power Limit Scale 1.0x
PEG0 Physical Slot Number 1
Max Link Speed Auto
Max Link Speed Auto
Program PCIe ASPM after OpROM Disabled
Program Static Phase1 Eq Enabled
u Gen3 Root Port Preset Value for Each Lane
u Gen3 Endpoint Preset Value for Each Lane
u Gen3 Endpoint Hint Value for Each Lane
u Gen3 RxCTLE Control
Variable Value
Gen3 Adaptive Software Equalization
Always Attempt SW EQ Disabled
Number of Presets to Test Auto
Allow PERST# GPIO Usage Enabled
SW EQ Enable VOC Auto
Jitter Dwell Time 3000
Jitter Error Target 2
VOC Dwell Time 10000
VOC Error Target 2
Generate BDAT PEG Margin Data Disabled
PCIe Rx CEM Test Mode Disabled
PCIe Spread Spectrum Clocking Enabled

Configuration u Gen3 Root Port Preset Value for Each Lane
Variable Value
Gen3 Root Port Preset Value for Each Lane
Lane 0 7
Lane 1 7
Lane 2 7
Lane 3 7
Lane 4 7
Lane 5 7
Lane 6 7
Lane 7 7
Lane 8 7
Lane 9 7
Lane 10 7
Lane 11 7
Lane 12 7
Lane 13 7
Lane 14 7
Lane 15 7

Configuration u Gen3 Endpoint Preset Value for Each Lane
Variable Value
Gen3 Endpoint Preset Value for Each Lane
Lane 0 7
Lane 1 7
Lane 2 7
Lane 3 7
Lane 4 7
Lane 5 7
Lane 6 7
Lane 7 7
Lane 8 7
Lane 9 7
Lane 10 7
Lane 11 7
Lane 12 7
Lane 13 7
Lane 14 7
Lane 15 7

Configuration u Gen3 Endpoint Hint Value for Each Lane
Variable Value
Gen3 Endpoint Hint Value for Each Lane
Lane 0 2
Lane 1 2
Lane 2 2
Lane 3 2
Lane 4 2
Lane 5 2
Lane 6 2
Lane 7 2
Lane 8 2
Lane 9 2
Variable Value
Lane 10 2
Lane 11 2
Lane 12 2
Lane 13 2
Lane 14 2
Lane 15 2

Configuration u Gen3 RxCTLE Control
Variable Value
Gen3 RxCTLE Control
Bundle0 3
Bundle1 3
Bundle2 3
Bundle3 3
Bundle4 3
Bundle5 3
Bundle6 3
Bundle7 3
RxCTLE Override Disabled
Misano u Advanced u PCH-IO Configuration
Variable Value
PCH-IO Configuration
u PCI Express Configuration
u SATA and RST Configuration
u USB Configuration
u Security Configuration
u HD Audio Configuration
u Serial IO Configuration
u ISH Configuration
u TraceHub Configuration Menu
u Pch Thermal Throttling Control
DCI Enable (HDCIEN) Disabled
Variable Value
Debug Port Selection Legacy UART
GNSS Disabled
PCH LAN Controller Enabled
Sensor Hub Type None
Wake on LAN Enable Enabled
SLP_LAN# Low on DC Power Disabled
K1 Off Enabled
Wake on WLAN and BT Enable Disabled
Disable DSX ACPRESENT PullDown Disabled
CLKRUN# Logic Enabled
Serial IRQ Mode Continuous
Port 61h Bit-4 Emulation Enabled
State After G3 S5 State
Port 80h Redirection LCP Bus
Enhance Port 80h LPC Decoding Enabled
Compatible Revision ID Disabled
PCH Cross Throttling Enabled
Disable Energy Reporting False
Enable TCO Timer Enabled
PCIe PII SSC Auto
Unlock PCH P2SB Enabled
Flash Protection Range Register (FPRR) Enabled
SPD Write Disable True
Hybrid Storage Mode Disabled
ChipsetInit HECI Message Enabled
Bypass ChipsetInit Sync Reset Disabled
Misano u Advanced u PCH-IO Configuration u PCI Express Configuration
Variable Value
PCI Express Clock Gating Enabled
Legacy IO Low Latency Disabled
DMI Link ASPM Control Enabled
PCIE Port Assigned to LAN 4
Variable Value
Port8xh Decode Disabled
Peer Memory Write Enable Disabled
Compliance Test Mode Disabled
PCI3-USB Glitch W/A Disabled
PCIe Function Swap Enabled
u PCI Express Gen3 Eq Lanes

u PCI Express Gen3 Eq Lanes
Variable Value
PCI Express Gen3 Eq lanes
PCIE1 Cm 6
PCIE1 Cp 2
PCIE2 Cm 6
Variable Value
PCIE2 Cp 2
PCIE3 Cm 6
PCIE3 Cp 2
PCIE4 Cm 6
PCIE4 Cp 2
PCIE5 Cm 6
PCIE5 Cp 2
PCIE6 Cm 6
PCIE6 Cp 2
PCIE7 Cm 6
PCIE7 Cp 2
PCIE8 Cm 6
PCIE8 Cp 2
PCIE9 Cm 6
PCIE9 Cp 2
PCIE10 Cm 6
PCIE10 Cp 2
PCIE11 Cm 6
PCIE11 Cp 2
PCIE12 Cm 6
PCIE12 Cp 2
PCIE13 Cm 6
PCIE13 Cp 2
PCIE14 Cm 6
PCIE14 Cp 2
PCIE15 Cm 6
PCIE15 Cp 2
PCIE16 Cm 6
PCIE16 Cp 2
PCIE17 Cm 6
PCIE17 Cp 2
PCIE18 Cm 6
PCIE18 Cp 2
Variable Value
PCIE19 Cm 6
PCI19 Cp 2
PCIE20 Cm 6
PCIE20 Cp 2
Override SW EQ Settings Disabled

Variable Value
PCI Express Root Port 1 Disabled

Variable Value
Topology Unknown
ASPM Auto
L1 Substates L1.1 & L1.2
Gen3 Eq Phase3 Method Software Search
UPTP 5
DPTP 7
ACS Enabled
URR Disabled
FER Disabled
NFER Disabled
CER Disabled
CTO Disabled
SEFE Disabled
SENFE Diaabled
SECE Disabled
PME SCI Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
Variable Value
Advanced Error Reporting Enabled
PCIe Speed Auto
Transmitter Half swing Disabled
Detect Timeout 0
Extra Bus Reserved 0
Reserved Memory 10
Reserved IO 4
PCH PCIe LTR Configuration
PCH PCIE2 LTR Enabled
Snoop Latency Override Auto
Non Snoop Latency Override Auto
Force KTR Override Disabled
PCIE2 LTR Lock Disabled
PCH PCIe CLKREQ# Configuration
PCIE2 CLKREQ Mapping Override Default

Variable Value
Topology x1
ASPM Auto
UPTP 5
DPTP 7
ACS Enabled
URR Disabled
FER Disabled
NFER Disabled
CER Disabled
CTO Disabled
SEFE Disabled
Variable Value
SENFE Diaabled
SECE Disabled
PME SCI Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
PCIe Speed Auto
Detect Timeout 0
Reserved Memory 10
Reserved IO 4

Variable Value
Topology Unknown
ASPM Auto
UPTP 5
DPTP 7
ACS Enabled
URR Disabled
FER Disabled
Variable Value
NFER Disabled
CER Disabled
CTO Disabled
SEFE Disabled
SENFE Diaabled
SECE Disabled
PME SCI Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
PCIe Speed Auto
Detect Timeout 0
Reserved Memory 10
Reserved IO 4

Variable Value
Topology Unknown
ASPM Auto
UPTP 5
Variable Value
DPTP 7
ACS Enabled
URR Disabled
FER Disabled
NFER Disabled
CER Disabled
CTO Disabled
SEFE Disabled
SENFE Diaabled
SECE Disabled
PME SCI Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
PCIe Speed Auto
Detect Timeout 0
Reserved Memory 10
Reserved IO 4

Variable Value
Topology Unknown
Variable Value
ASPM Auto
UPTP 5
DPTP 7
ACS Enabled
URR Disabled
FER Disabled
NFER Disabled
CER Disabled
CTO Disabled
SEFE Disabled
SENFE Diaabled
SECE Disabled
PME SCI Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
PCIe Speed Auto
Detect Timeout 0
Reserved Memory 4
Reserved IO 4

Variable Value
Topology Unknown
ASPM Auto
UPTP 5
DPTP 7
ACS Enabled
URR Disabled
FER Disabled
NFER Disabled
CER Disabled
CTO Disabled
SEFE Disabled
SENFE Diaabled
SECE Disabled
PME SCI Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
PCIe Speed Auto
Detect Timeout 0
Reserved Memory 17
Reserved IO 8
Variable Value

Variable Value
Topology M2
ASPM Auto
UPTP 5
DPTP 7
ACS Enabled
URR Disabled
FER Disabled
NFER Disabled
CER Disabled
CTO Disabled
SEFE Disabled
SENFE Diaabled
SECE Disabled
PME SCI Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
PCIe Speed Auto
Detect Timeout 0
Reserved Memory 10
Reserved IO 4
Variable Value

Variable Value
Topology Unknown
ASPM Auto
UPTP 5
DPTP 7
ACS Enabled
URR Disabled
FER Disabled
NFER Disabled
CER Disabled
CTO Disabled
SEFE Disabled
SENFE Diaabled
SECE Disabled
PME SCI Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
PCIe Speed Auto
Detect Timeout 0
Variable Value
Reserved Memory 10
Reserved IO 4

Variable Value
Topology Unknown
ASPM Auto
UPTP 5
DPTP 7
ACS Enabled
URR Disabled
FER Disabled
NFER Disabled
CER Disabled
CTO Disabled
SEFE Disabled
SENFE Diaabled
SECE Disabled
PME SCI Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
Variable Value
PCIe Speed Auto
Detect Timeout 0
Reserved Memory 10
Reserved IO 4

Variable Value
Topology Unknown
ASPM Auto
UPTP 5
DPTP 7
ACS Enabled
URR Disabled
FER Disabled
NFER Disabled
CER Disabled
CTO Disabled
SEFE Disabled
Variable Value
SENFE Diaabled
SECE Disabled
PME SCI Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
PCIe Speed Auto
Detect Timeout 0
Reserved Memory 10
Reserved IO 4

Variable Value
Topology Unknown
ASPM Auto
UPTP 5
DPTP 7
ACS Enabled
URR Disabled
FER Disabled
Variable Value
NFER Disabled
CER Disabled
CTO Disabled
SEFE Disabled
SENFE Diaabled
SECE Disabled
PME SCI Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
PCIe Speed Auto
Detect Timeout 0
Reserved Memory 10
Reserved IO 4

Variable Value
Topology Unknown
ASPM Auto
UPTP 5
Variable Value
DPTP 7
ACS Enabled
URR Disabled
FER Disabled
NFER Disabled
CER Disabled
CTO Disabled
SEFE Disabled
SENFE Diaabled
SECE Disabled
PME SCI Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
PCIe Speed Auto
Detect Timeout 0
Reserved Memory 10
Reserved IO 4

Variable Value
Topology Unknown
Variable Value
ASPM Auto
UPTP 5
DPTP 7
ACS Enabled
URR Disabled
FER Disabled
NFER Disabled
CER Disabled
CTO Disabled
SEFE Disabled
SENFE Diaabled
SECE Disabled
PME SCI Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
PCIe Speed Auto
Detect Timeout 0
Reserved Memory 10
Reserved IO 4

Variable Value
Topology Unknown
ASPM Auto
UPTP 5
DPTP 7
ACS Enabled
URR Disabled
FER Disabled
NFER Disabled
CER Disabled
CTO Disabled
SEFE Disabled
SENFE Diaabled
SECE Disabled
PME SCI Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
PCIe Speed Auto
Detect Timeout 0
Reserved Memory 10
Reserved IO 4
Variable Value

Variable Value
Topology Unknown
ASPM Auto
UPTP 5
DPTP 7
ACS Enabled
URR Disabled
FER Disabled
NFER Disabled
CER Disabled
CTO Disabled
SEFE Disabled
SENFE Diaabled
SECE Disabled
PME SCI Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
PCIe Speed Auto
Detect Timeout 0
Reserved Memory 10
Reserved IO 4
Variable Value

Variable Value
Topology Unknown
ASPM Auto
UPTP 5
DPTP 7
ACS Enabled
URR Disabled
FER Disabled
NFER Disabled
CER Disabled
CTO Disabled
SEFE Disabled
SENFE Diaabled
SECE Disabled
PME SCI Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
PCIe Speed Auto
Detect Timeout 0
Variable Value
Reserved Memory 10
Reserved IO 4

Variable Value
Topology Unknown
ASPM Auto
UPTP 5
DPTP 7
ACS Enabled
URR Disabled
FER Disabled
NFER Disabled
CER Disabled
CTO Disabled
SEFE Disabled
SENFE Diaabled
SECE Disabled
PME SCI Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
Variable Value
PCIe Speed Auto
Detect Timeout 0
Reserved Memory 10
Reserved IO 4

Variable Value
Topology Unknown
ASPM Auto
UPTP 5
DPTP 7
ACS Enabled
URR Disabled
FER Disabled
NFER Disabled
CER Disabled
CTO Disabled
SEFE Disabled
Variable Value
SENFE Diaabled
SECE Disabled
PME SCI Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
PCIe Speed Auto
Detect Timeout 0
Reserved Memory 10
Reserved IO 4

Variable Value
Topology Unknown
ASPM Auto
UPTP 5
DPTP 7
ACS Enabled
URR Disabled
FER Disabled
Variable Value
NFER Disabled
CER Disabled
CTO Disabled
SEFE Disabled
SENFE Diaabled
SECE Disabled
PME SCI Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
PCIe Speed Auto
Detect Timeout 0
Reserved Memory 10
Reserved IO 4
PCIE20CLKREQ Mapping Override Default
Misano u Advanced u PCH-IO Configuration u SATA and RST

Configuration
Variable Value
DATA and RST Configuration
SATA Controller(s) Enabled
SATA Mode Selection AHCI
SATA Test Mode Disabled
u Software Feature Mask Configuration
Aggressive LPM Support Enabled
Serial ATA Port 0 Empty
Variable Value
Software Preserve Unknown
Port 0 Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
Configured as eSATA Hot Plug Supported
Spin Up Device Disabled
Topology ISATA
SATA Port 0 DevSlp Disabled
DITO Configuration Disabled
DITO Value 625
DM Value 15
Smart Status OK
Port 1 Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
Topology ISATA
DITO Value 625
DM Value 15
Smart Status Unsupport
Port 2 Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
Topology ISATA
Variable Value
DITO Value 625
DM Value 15
Port 3 Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
Topology Unknown
DITO Value 625
DM Value 15
Port 4 Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
Topology Unknown
DITO Value 625
DM Value 15
Variable Value
Port 5 Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
Topology M2
DITO Value 625
DM Value 15
Port 6 Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
Topology Unknown
DITO Value 625
DM Value 15
Port 7 Enabled
Hot Plug Disabled
Topology Unknown
Variable Value
DITO Value 625
DM Value 15
Misano u Advanced u PCH-IO Configuration u SATA and RST

Configuration u Software Feature Mask Configuration
Variable Value
Software Feature Mask Configuration
HDD Unlock Enabled
LED Locate Enabled
Misano u Advanced u PCH-IO Configuration u USB Configuration
Variable Value
USB Configuration
XHCI Disable Compliance Mode False
xDCI Support Disabled
Misano u Advanced u PCH-IO Configuration u Security Configuration
Variable Value
Security Configuration
RTC Lock Enabled
BIOS Lock Enabled
Misano u Advanced u PCH-IO Configuration u HD Audio Configuration
Variable Value
HD Audio Configuration
HD Audio Enabled
Audio DSP Enabled
Audio DSP Compliance Mode UAA (HDA Inbox/IntelSST)
HDA-Link Codec Select Platform Onboard
PME Enable Disabled
u HD Audio Advanced Configuration
u HD Audio DSP Feature Configuration
Misano u Advanced u PCH-IO Configuration u HD Audio Configuration u

HD Audio Advanced Configuration
Variable Value
HD Audio Advanced Configuration Settings
I/O Buffer Control:
I/O Buffer Ownership HD-Audio Link
I/O Buffer Voltage Select 3.3V
Statically Switchable BCLK Clock Frequency Configuration:
HD Audio Link Frequency 24 MHz
iDisplay Link Frequency 96 MHz
Misano u Advanced u PCH-IO Configuration u HD Audio Configuration u

HD Audio SP Feature Configuration
Variable Value
HD Audio SP Feature Configuration
HD Audio Subsystem Feature Configuration (ACPI)
Audio DSP NHLT Endpoints Configuration:
DMIC 4 Mic Array
Bluetooth Disabled
I2S Disabled
Audio DSP Feature Support:
WoV (Wake on Voice) Not Enabled
Bluetooth Sideband Not Enabled
BT Intel HFP Not Enabled
BT Intel A2DP Not Enabled
Codec Based VAD Not Enabled
DSP Based Speech Pre-Processing Disabled Not Enabled
Voice Activity Detection Intel Wake on Voice
Audio DSP Pre/Post-Processing Module Support:
Waves Post-Process Not Enabled
DTS Not Enabled
IntelSST Speech Not Enabled
Dolby Not Enabled
Waves Pre-Process Not Enabled
Audyssey Not Enabled
Variable Value
Maxim Smart AMP Not Enabled
ForteMedia SAMSoft Not Enabled
Intel WoV Not Enabled
Sound Research IP Not Enabled
Conexant Pre-Process Not Enabled
Realtek Post-Process Not Enabled
Realtek Smart Amp Not Enabled
Icepower IP MFX Sub Module Not Enabled
Icepower IP EFX Sube Module Not Enabled
Icepower IP SFX Sube Module Not Enabled
Custom Module 'Alpha' Not Enabled
Custom Module 'Beta' Not Enabled
Custom Module 'Gamma' Not Enabled
Misano u Advanced u PCH-IO Configuration u Serial IO Configuration
Variable Value
Serial IO Configuration
I2C0 Controller Enabled
I2C1 Controller Enabled
I2C2 Controller Disabled
I2C3 Controller Disabled
SP10 Controller Disabled
SP11 Controller Disabled
UART0 Controller Enabled
UART1 Controller Disabled
UART2 Controller for debug only
GPIO Controller Enabled
u Serial IO I2C0 Settings
u Serial IO I2C1 Settings
u Serial IO UART0 Settings
u Serial IO GPIO Settings
WITT/MITT Test Device Disabled
UART Test Device Disabled
Additional Serial IO Devices Not Enabled
Variable Value
u Serial IO Timing Parameters
UCSI/UCMC Device Disabled
Misano u Advanced u PCH-IO Configuration u Serial IO Configuration u

Serial IO I2C0 Settings
Variable Value
I2C IO Voltage Select 3.3V
Connected Device Disabled

Variable Value
I2C IO Voltage Select 3.3V
Connected Device Disabled

Serial IO UART0 Settings
Variable Value
Serial IO UART0Settings
Bluetooth Device Disabled
Wireless Charging Mode WC Disabled
Hardware Flow Control Enabled

Serial IO GPIO Settings
Variable Value
Serial IO GPIO Settings
GPIO Configuration
GPIO IRQ Route IRQ14

Serial IO Timing Parameters
Variable Value
Serial IO Timing Parameters
Serial IO Timing Parameters Not Enabled
Misano u Advanced u PCH-IO Configuration u ISH Configuration
Variable Value
ISH Configuration
ISH Controller Enabled
PDT Unlock Message Not Enabled
ISH GPIO Assignment Configuration
SPI Not Enabled
UART0 Not Enabled
UART1 Not Enabled
I2C0 Not Enabled
I2C1 Not Enabled
I2C2 Not Enabled
GP_0 Not Enabled
GP_1 Not Enabled
GP_2 Not Enabled
GP_3 Not Enabled
GP_4 Not Enabled
GP_5 Not Enabled
GP_6 Not Enabled
GP_7 Not Enabled
Misano u Advanced u PCH-IO Configuration u TraceHub Configuration

Menu
Variable Value
TraceHub Configuration Menu
TraceHub Enable Mode Disable
MemRegion 0 Buffer Size 1MB
MemRegion 1 Buffer Size 1MB
Misano u Advanced u PCH-IO Configuration u PCH Thermal Throttling
Variable Value
PCH Thermal Throttling
Thermal Throttling Level Suggested Setting
DMI Thermal Setting Suggested Setting
SATA Thermal Setting Suggested Setting
Misano u Advanced u PCH-FW Configuration
Variable Value
PCH-FW Configuration
ME Firmware Version 11.8.70.3626
ME Firmware Mode Normal Mode
ME Firmware SKU Corporate SKU
ME File System Integrity Value 2
ME Firmware Status 1 0x90000245
ME Firmware Status 2 0x8B108306
NFC Support Disabled
ME State Enabled
Manageability Features State Enabled
Intel AMT Support Disabled
u AMT Configuration
ME Unconfig on RTC Clear State Enabled
Comms Hub Support Disabled
JHI Support Disabled
Core BIOS Done Message Enabled
u Firmware Update Configuration
u PTT Configuration
u ME Debug Configuration
Misano u Advanced u PCH-FW Configuration u AMT Configuration
Variable Value
AMT Configuration
ASF Support Enabled
USB Provisioning of AMT Disabled
Variable Value
u CIRA Configuration
u ASF Configuration
u OEM Flags Settings
u MEBx Resolution Settings
Misano uAdvanced u PCH-FW Configuration u AMT Configuration u CIRA

Configuration
Variable Value
CIRA Configuration
Activate Remote Assistance Process Not Enabled
CIRA Timeout 0
Misano u Advanced u PCH-FW Configuration u AMT Configuration u ASF

Configuration
Variable Value
ASF Configuration
PET Progress Enabled
WatchDog Disabled
OS Timer 0
BIOS Timer 0
Misano u Advanced u PCH-FW Configurationu AMT Configuration u OEM

Flags Settings
Variable Value
OEM Flags Settings
MEBx Hotkey Pressed Not Enabled
MEBx Selection Screen Not Enabled
Hide Unconfigure ME Confirmation Prompt Not Enabled
MEBx OEM Debug Menu Enable Not Enabled
Unconfigure ME Not Enabled
Misano u Advanced u PCH-FW Configuration u AMT Configuration u

MEBx Resolution Settings
Variable Value
MEBx Resolution Settings
Non-UI Mode Resolution Auto
UI Mode Resolution Auto
Graphics Mode Resolution Auto
Misano u Advanced u PCH-FW Configuration u Firmware Update

Configuration
Variable Value
Firmware Update Configuration
ME FW Image Re-Flash Disabled
Misano u Advanced u PCH-FW Configuration u PTT Configuration
Variable Value
PTT Configuration
PTT Capability / State 0/0
PTP Aware OS PTP Aware
Misano u Advanced u PCH-FW Configuration u ME Debug Configuration
Variable Value
ME Debug Configuration
HECI Timeouts Enabled
Force ME DID Init Status Disabled
CPU Replaced Polling Disable Disabled
ME DID Message Enabled
HECI Retry Disable Disabled
MBP HOB Skip Disabled
HECI2 Interface Communication Not Enabled
KT Device Enabled
IDER Device Enabled
End of Post Message Send in DXE
D013 Setting for HECI Disable Disabled
Misano u Advanced u Thermal Configuration
Variable Value
Thermal Configuration
u CPU Thermal Configuration
u Platform Thermal Configuration
u DPTF Configuration
Misano u Advanced u Thermal Configuration u CPU Thermal Configuration
Variable Value
CPU Thermal Configuration
DTS SMM Disabled
Tcc Activation Offset 0
Tcc Offset Time Window Disabled
Tcc Offset Clamp Enable Disabled
Tcc Offset lock Enable Disabled
Bi-Directional PROCHOT# Enabled
Disable PROCHOT# Output Enabled
Disable VR Thermal Alert Disabled
PROCHOT Response Disabled
PROCHOT Lock Disabled
ACPI T-States Not Enabled
PECI Reset Disabled
PECI C10 Reset Disabled
Misano u Advanced u Thermal Configuration u Platform Configuration
Variable Value
Automatic Thermal Reporting Disabled
Critical Trip Point 119 C (POR)
Active Trip Point 0 71 C
Active Trip Point 0 fan speed 100
Active Trip Point 1 55C
Active Trip Point 1 fan speed 75
Passive TC1 Value 1
Variable Value
Passive TC2 Value 5
Passive TSP Value 10
Active Trip Points Enabled
Passive Trip Points Disabled
Critical Trip Points Enabled
PCH Thermal Device Enabled in PCI mode
PCH Temp read Enabled
CPU Energy Read Enabled
CPU Temp Read Enabled
Alert Enable Lock Disabled
CPU Temp 72
CPU Fan Speed 65
Misano u Advanced u Thermal Configuration u DPTF Configuration
Variable Value
DPTF Configuration
DPTF Disabled
Misano u Advanced u RTD3 Settings
Variable Value
RTD3 Settings
RTD3 Support Enabled
VR Staggering Delay 16
VR Ramp Up Delay 16
PCIE Slot 5 Device Power-On Delay in ms 100
PCIE Slot 5 Device Power-Off Delay in ms 100
Audio Delay 200
I2C0 Controller 0
SensorHub 68
I2C1 Controller 0
TouchPad 68
TouchPanel 68
P-State Capping Disabled
USB Port 1 Disabled
Variable Value
USB Port 2 Disabled
I2C0 Sensor Hub Enabled
WWAN D0/L1.2
SATA Port 1 Disabled
SATA Port 2 Disabled
RST Raid Volumes Enabled
Misano u Advanced u Intel ICC
Variable Value
Intel ICC
ICC/OC WatchDog Timer Disabled
ICC Locks after EOP Default
ICC Profile 0
Misano u Advanced u SIO NCT6776F
Variable Value
SIO NCT6776F
Serial Port A Auto
Serial Port B Auto
u Hardware Monitor
Misano u Advanced u SIO NCT6776F u Hardware Monitor
Variable Value
Hardware Monitor
SYSFAN Mode Smart Fan IV
Boundary0 30
Boundary1 40
Boundary2 50
Boundary3 60
Boundary4 70
Boundary5 80
Output0 16
Output1 21
Output2 32
Variable Value
Output3 37
Output4 48
Output5 53
CPUFAN Mode Smart Fan IV
Boundary0 30
Boundary1 40
Boundary2 50
Boundary3 60
Boundary4 70
Boundary5 80
Output0 16
Output1 21
Output2 32
Output3 37
Output4 48
Output5 53
Misano u Advanced u BIOS Event Log Configuration
Variable Value
BIOS Event Log Configuration
Log Event To BIOS
Event Log Full Option Overwrite
Event Log Viewer
Misano u Advanced u POST Message Setting
Variable Value
POST Message Setting
POST Message Configuration Enable
Progress Code Enable
Error Code Enable
Debug Code Disabled
Log POST Message Enabled
Show POST Message Enabled
Misano u Security
Variable Value
Security
Current TPM Device Not Detected
TPM State Not Installed
Admin Password Not Installed
BBS Password Not Installed
Set Admin Password
Old Password
New Password
Confirm Password
Power on Password Disabled
User Access Level Full
Set BBS Password
Old Password
New Password
Confirm Password
Clear Password
Misano u Power
Variable Value
Power
ACPI S3 Enabled
Wake on PME Enabled
Wake on Modem Ring Disabled
Auto Wake on S5 Disabled
S5 Long Run test Disabled
Misano u Boot
Variable Value
Boot
Boot Type UEFI Boot Type
CSM on Demand Disabled
Quick Boot Enabled
Variable Value
Quiet Boot Enabled
Boot Once Support Enabled
BBS Menu Enabled
u Bootable Device Type
Network stack Disabled
PXE Boot Capability Disabled
Power Up in Standby Support Disabled
Add Boot Options Auto
ACPI Selection Acpi5.0
EFI Device First Enabled
Timeout 0
Automatic Failover Enabled
u BootOrder
Misano u Boot u Secure Boot
Variable Value
Secure Boot
System Status:
Secure Boot Database Installed and Locked
Secure Boot Status Enabled
User Customization Security No
Options:
Enforce Secure Boot Enabled
Erase All Secure Boot Settings Disabled
Restore Secure Boot to Factory Settings Disabled
Misano u Boot u Bootable Device Type
Variable Value
Bootable Device Type
CD/DVD-ROM Drive Enabled
Hard Disk Drive Enabled
USB Enabled
NETWORK Enabled
Misano u Exit
Variable
Exit Saving Changes
Save Change Without Exit
Exit Discarding Changes
Load Optimal Defaults
Load Custom Defaults
Save Custom Defaults
Discard Changes
DIAGNOSTICS
Power On Self Test
For service purposes, testing includes standard PC Power on Self Test (POST) on
the CPU, memory and hard disk.
Motherboard LEDs
There are no LEDs on the Pocono motherboard.
There are two diagnostic LEDs present on the Estoril and Misano motherboards.
LED Description
VS_POWER The motherboard has power connected

SB_POWER The motherboard has power connected and the processor is
running
Estoril Motherboard
Misano Motherboard
LAN Port LEDs
Activity Link LED Speed LED

Status Description Status Description
Off No Link Off 10Mbps connection

Orange Linked Green 100Mbps connection
Orange flashing Data Activity Orange 1Gbps connection
USB CONNECTIONS
Pocono
Existing USB maps should continue to use the ‘common’ USB ports. The quad
stack can be used for CE sticks. Permanent device attachment is only acceptable
where effective strain relief is provided.
The USB load needs to be evenly distributed over the two Enhanced Host
Controller Interfaces (EHCIs) in the motherboard to maximise the available USB
bandwidth.
To ensure even distribution of the USB load, it is important that the USB adapters
are connected to the appropriate pins of USB 1 and USB 4 headers in the
motherboard.
Rear I/O Ports
NCR Pocono D-NR6-D-021 V1.0
DSP1
COM1_2 VGA_DVI1
USB5
AUDIO1
10 9
18
U2
PCI2
PCI1
PCIE2
SYS_FAN1
3
PCIE1
SHIPPING NO.
SDVO1
2
30
BATT1
CMOS1
PCIE-EX1
TPM1
XDP_CPU1
CPU_FAN1
4
DIMM1 CPU1
DIMM2
19
DIMM3
DIMM4
H1
SHORT
OPEN
JP1 ME_UNLOCK
DISABLE
ENABLE
JP1 2
S
SATA3 SATA2 SATA1 SATA0
SB4
USB4
7 7
BIOS1
K
10
USB1
5
2
30 7 7
29
A_ON1 KBMS1
3
SYS_FAN2
2
J1
UPS1 2 10
K
K
2
2 2
25
F_AUDIO1 9 K
PANEL1 9 1 K
J2 15
LPT1 ATX24P1
4-Port USB Adapters

Two 4–port adapters may be fitted to the core.
The illustration below shows the 4–port USB first breakout headers connected to
the USB adapter headers P5 and P6.
The illustration below shows the USB adapter headers in the motherboard.
Note: P5b and P6b are headers of a second 4–port USB adapter.
Estoril
Existing USB maps should continue to use the ‘common’ USB ports. Permanent device
attachment is only acceptable where effective strain relief is provided.
Bandwidth availability should be reviewed before adding any new USB devices. PC will
provide highest bandwidth when connected directly to the PC Core.
The Estoril motherboard supports one USB 2.0 breakout cable that provides four USB
ports with port assignments shown in the illustration below.
The breakout cable is connected to the motherboard internal headers P2 and P3.
l USB breakout ports 6 and 7 are connected to the internal header P3

l USB breakout ports 8 and 9 are connected to the internal header P2
Misano
Bandwidth availability should be reviewed before adding any new USB devices. PC
will provide highest bandwidth when connected directly to the PC Core.
The Misano motherboard supports one USB 2.0 breakout cable that provides four
USB ports with port assignments shown in the illustration below.
The breakout cable is connected to the motherboard internal headers USB_HDR1 and
USB_HDR2.
l USB breakout ports 6 and 7 are connected to the internal header USB_HDR2
l USB breakout ports 8 and 9 are connected to the internal header USB_HDR1
POCONO PS2 PERIPHERAL CONNECTIONS

PS2 peripheral (Mini DIN) on-board connectors are no longer supported. To
connect a PS2 device, the PS2 KB/MS breakout assembly cable connected to the
KBMS1 header in the motherboard is used.
The illustration below displays the PS2 KB/MS breakout assembly.
STRAPPING
Pocono Motherboard Strapping
A ATX Power K CMOS1 1 Serial Port
B DDR3 DIMM Slot (4 off) L Platform Controller Hub (PCH) 2 VGA
C Processor M Front USB4 3 DVI
D RS232 JCOM 2 N Front USB1-3 (3 ports) 4 Display Port
E RS232 JCOM 1 O ESC Board 5 USB (4 ports)
F PCIe x16 Slot P A_ON1 - Auto power on between pins 2 & 3 6 LAN
G PCIe x4 Slot Q Parallel Port LPT1 7 USB (2 ports)
H PCI2 R SATA2_2, SATA2_1, SATA3_2 & SATA3_1 8 Audio
I PCI1 S KBMS1 (for PS2 peripherals)
J Lithium Battery T Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
R S Q P
A
O
N
M
B L
K
C J
G
F
D
5 6 8
1 COM 2 2
Line Out (Lime Green)
1 Speaker Out (Light Blue)

3 4
Microphone Input (Pink)
COM 1
7
J COM 1 & 2
1 and 2 RI (required setting on ATMs, see caution below)
2 and 3 12V
WARNING The Pocono motherboard is used in both Financial and Retail

products. The JP1 and JP2 jumpers used in Financial ATMs
must be positioned on pins 1 and 2 as shown below:
JP3
This is a manufacturing tool and is left open.
JP4 - Clear Configuration (CMOS) Memory

CAUTION Make sure that AC is disconnected from the power supply before
moving this jumper.

2 and 3 Clear CMOS memory (jumper must be returned to normal position before power-on)
WARNING Do not use a metal or conductive implement to remove the

battery. A short circuit between the battery’s positive and
negative terminals can cause it to explode.
Estoril Motherboard
Key Description Key Description
A A Front Panel Reset I PCI

B SATA III power J COM1 VSET 7 COM2 VSET
C SATA III (2) - DVD K DC in

SATA III (1) - 2nd Drive
SATA III (0) - Primary Drive
D A_ON L RS232 headers
E CMOS Clear M Processor

F Chassis Fan N CPU fan
G USB 2.0 breakout header O DDR3 SODIMM
H Trusted Platform Module P PS/2 header
(TPM)
Q1 LAN 2 (Blanked - Do Not Use) U2 Private Audio Headset (Line Out to MISC IF)
Q2 LAN 1 U3 Public Audio Speaker
R1 Display Port 2 U4 Handset Microphone In (MIC In from MISC IF)
R2 Display Port 1 U5 Handset Speaker Out
T2 USB 3.0 U6 Private Audio jack detect and volume button signal input
U1 Handset Hookswitch Signal Input V Public Digital MIC
CAUTION The ATM internal LAN cable MUST be connected to the LAN 1
port.
CAUTION The LAN cable(s) cannot be swapped between the two ports. Take
care if replacing the core to reconnect the ATM internal LAN cable
into the LAN 1 port. Failure to follow this guidance will result
primarily in the loss of AMT support. Secondly, as the ports have
now been switched the core Media Access Control (MAC) address
will need re-configured..
Display port configuration

l The main display will always fit to Display Port 2
l The service display (GOP/COP), when present will always be fitted to Display
Port 1.
Motherboard Jumpers
With strap in correct position, enter BIOS setup and load defaults. The default
jumper settings are as follows:
Function Default Reference Designator
Serial port power Set to RI COM1 VSET & COM2 VSET

Clear CMOS 2 and 3 CLRTC
A_ON 1 and 2 A_ON
Serial Port Power

The two headers provide the strapping options for the serial power ports.
Function Jumper on Pins Jumper on Pins
COM1 VSET COM2 VSET

5V 1 and 2 1 and 2
12V 3 and 4 3 and 4
RI (default) 5 and 6 5 and 6
CLR CMOS
CAUTION Ensure the core is powered off before moving this jumper.


A_ON Auto Power-On

The Auto Power–On jumper allows the motherboard to automatically power–on
when power is applied. The table below lists the strapping settings of the auto
power–on jumper.
1 and 2 Auto power–on enable (default)

2 and 3 Auto power–on disable
Misano Motherboard
A PIRAT I USB 2.0 breakout header2
B SATA III power J PCI
C A_ON (JP2) K COM1 VSET (J5)

COM2 VSET (J6)
D SATA III (2) - DVD L RS232 headers - COM1 - COM2
SATA III (1) - 2nd Drive
SATA III (0) - Primary Drive
E Trusted Platform Module (TPM) M Processor
F CMOS Clear (JP1) N CPU fan
G USB 2.0 breakout header1 O DDR4 SODIMM
H Chassis Fan P PS/2 header
X Diagnostic LED Header (future development)

Q1 LAN 1 U2 Private Audio Headset (Line Out to MISC IF)
Q2 LAN 2 (Blanked - Do Not Use) U3 Public Audio Speaker
R1 Display Port 1 U4 Handset Microphone In (MIC In from MISC IF)
R2 Display Port 2 U5 Handset Speaker Out
T2 USB 3.0 U6 Private Audio jack detect and volume button signal input
U1 Handset Hook Switch Signal Input V Public Digital MIC
CAUTION The ATM internal LAN cable MUST be connected to the LAN 1
port.
CAUTION The LAN cable(s) cannot be swapped between the two ports.Take
care if replacing the core to reconnect the ATM internal LAN cable
into the LAN 1 port. Failure to follow this guidance will result
primarily in the loss of AMT support. Secondly, as the ports have
now been switched the core Media Access Control (MAC) address
will need re-configured.
Display port configuration

l The main display will always fit to Display Port 2
l The service display (GOP/COP), when present will always be fitted to Display
Port 1.
Motherboard Jumpers
With strap in correct position, enter BIOS setup and load defaults. The default
jumper settings are as follows:
Function Default Reference Designator
Serial port power Set to RI COM1 VSET & COM2 VSET

Clear CMOS 2 and 3 CLRTC
A_ON 1 and 2 A_ON
Serial Port Power

The two headers provide the strapping options for the serial power ports.
Jumper on Pins Jumper on Pins
Function COM1 VSET COM2 VSET

5V 1 and 2 1 and 2
RI (default) 3 and 4 3 and 4
12V 5 and 6 5 and 6
CLR CMOS
CAUTION Ensure the core is powered off before moving this jumper.


A_ON Auto Power-On

The Auto Power–On jumper allows the motherboard to automatically power–on
when power is applied. The table below lists the strapping settings of the auto
power–on jumper.
1 and 2 Auto power–on enable (default)

2 and 3 Auto power–on disable
Power Supply Unit Strapping

Manual Switch
The 115/230 voltage select switch next to the ac input connector on the PSU must be set to
the correct input voltage. This is accessible through a cutout in the rear wall of the PC box.
No Switch
WARNING The internal AC input fuse is not replaceable by the

Customer Service Engineer.
ADJUSTMENTS
There are no adjustments required on the Pocono PC core.
Note: Volume of the beep signal can be adjusted using the Graphical Operator
Panel.

The major field replaceable units in the Pocono PC core are:
l Core fan
l Hard Disk Drive (HDD)
l DVD Optical Disk Drive
l Power supply unit (PSU)
l I/O Shield
l Motherboard
l Processor
l CPU Cooler
l Memory Modules
l Lithium battery
l Trusted Platform Module (TPM).
Note: The USB harnessing connections to the motherboard ensures that the USB load is
evenly distributed over the Enhanced Host Controller Interfaces (EHCIs). Take note of the
USB connections before attempting to remove them.
Remove the lid of the PC box by first removing the two screws from the rear of the core
then slide the lid to free it from the security tang, lift up and remove.
Standard Casing (Pocono Only)

Lid
Security Tang for

Locating Studs (2 Each Side of Lid) Lock or Seal
Open
Screws
Slim Casing
Core Fan
1. Remove the DVD/HDD disk drive carrier as instructed in steps 1 and 2 in

section ‘(Hard Disk Drive (HDD, Location 1)’.
2. Disconnect the fan power harness.
3. Remove the four M4.8 plastite screws (positioned on each corner of the fan)
from the rear of the core box.
Slim Casing
4. Remove the fan.
HDD/SSD
Location 2
Location 1
(default)
The default location for the HDD/SSD is mounted in the DVD/HDD carrier tray.
To remove the HDD/SSD disassemble in the following order:
Location 1
2. Remove the screw securing the DVD/HDD/SSD carrier tray then slide the tray
out to release.
3. Turn the carrier tray over and remove the four screws securing the
HDD/SSD.
4. Remove the HDD/SSD.
Location 2
1. Remove the two screws from the front of the PC core.
2. Slide the HDD/SSD casing forward then lift up and remove from the PC core.
3. Remove four screws (2 each side) then remove the HDD/SSD from its casing.
Slim Casing
The default location for the HDD/SSD is location 1, both locations are mounted in the
DVD/HDD /SSD carrier tray.
To remove the two HDD/SSD disassemble the following:

2. Remove the screw securing the Cable Strain Relief bracket. Remove the
bracket.
3. Remove the five screws securing the carrier tray then slide the tray out of the
core.
4. Turn the carrier tray over and remove the screws securing the HDD/SSD.
5. For Misano the HDDs and SSDs are secured with a spacer in the primary
location and an adaptor bracket in the secondary.
6. Remove the HDD/SSD.

WARNING Do not open or repair the Power Supply Unit. Replace if
necessary.
1. Remove the hard disk drive as instructed in steps 1 and 2 in section ‘Hard
Disk Drive (HDD, Location 1)’.
2. Disconnect the power cables to the DVD optical disk drive, the hard disk
drive and the two connectors to the motherboard.
4. Remove the power supply unit taking care not to damage components on
the motherboard.
DVD Optical Disk Drive

To remove and replace the optical disk drive disassemble in the following order:

2. Remove the screw securing the DVD/HDD mounting carrier tray.
3. Turn the carrier tray over and remove the four screws securing the DVD
optical disk.
4. Remove the DVD disk.
Slim DVD (Misano only)

To remove and replace the slim variant of the optical disk drive disassemble in the following
order:

2. Remove the screw securing the DVD/HDD mounting carrier tray.
3. Turn the carrier tray over and remove the four screws securing the DVD
optical disk.
4. Remove the DVD disk.
Motherboard (Pocono)
To remove and replace the motherboard disassemble in the following order:
1. Remove the DVD/HDD disk mounting carrier tray as described above.

2. Note the port connections of each harnessing.
3. Disconnect all harnessing from the motherboard.
4. If fitted, do the following:
l remove and retain the TPM
l check, remove and retain any cards inserted in the PCI/PCI-E slots
5. Remove the eight M3 x 6 screws from the motherboard.
Slim Casing
Note: Remove the USB 2.0 to remove the screw located below it.
6. Remove the motherboard from the box.
Motherboard (Estoril and Misano)

To remove and replace the motherboard disassemble in the following order:
1. Remove the DVD/HDD/SSD disk mounting carrier tray as described above.

2. Note the port connections of each harnessing.
3. Disconnect all harnessing from the motherboard.
4. If fitted, take note of the port into which the silicone LAN dust cap is fitted.
The dust cap and LAN cable must be fitted into the same ports in the
replacement motherboard. Remove and retain the LAN dust cap.
5. If fitted, do the following:

l remove and retain the TPM
l check, remove and retain any cards inserted in the PCI/PCI-E slots .
6. Remove the six M3 x 6 screws from the motherboard and uATX extension
card (if fitted).
Slim Casing
Note: Remove the USB 2.0 to remove the screw located below it.
7. Remove the motherboard from the box and disconnect the extender if
fitted.
To ensure the best ESD / EMC performance, check that the motherboard is pressed firmly
against the ESD tangs on the rear of the IO shield
CAUTION Care must be taken to ensure that the connections to the display
ports are correct after replacing the motherboard. See "Display
Port Configuration" information.
CPU Cooler (Pocono)

1. Disconnect the fan power cable.
2. Unlock the push-pins using a flat head screw driver to turn the pins
anticlockwise one quarter turn and retract fully to unlock.
3. Remove all the grey coloured thermal interface grease from the heatsink
(this is used to make a good bond between the heatsink and the processor).
4. If re-using the processor cooling unit, use the thermal grease syringe (006-
8612565) to apply new thermal interface grease to the cooling unit in the
pattern as shown below.
CAUTION Do not use the entire contents of the syringe because too
much grease could block the airflow around the heat
spreader and processor.
5. Put the four pins of the cooling unit into the armed position by first turning
them anticlockwise and fully retracting them, then turning the pins one
quarter turn clockwise.
6. Replace the cooling unit by pressing the push-pins home until they are
locked.
7. Connect the cooling unit’s power cable to the motherboard connector.
CAUTION Make sure the cooling unit cable does not obstruct the fan
blades.
CPU Cooler (Estoril and Misano)

Removal
To replace the CPU cooler, perform the steps below.
1. Loosen the four spring–loaded captive screws that secure the existing cooler
to the motherboard.
Note: Follow a sequential rotating pattern when loosening the spring–loaded
screws. Gradually loosen each screw to evenly raise the CPU cooler.
2. Remove the cooler plate from the rear of the motherboard. This is held in
place with double sided adhesive tape.
3. Remove all old thermal grease from the cooler heat sink and processor
spreader plate with a tissue or paper towel. Do not use a knife or
screwdriver as this could damage the surface of the spreader plate.
Replacement
1. Apply approximately one–half of the contents of the thermal grease syringe
to the processor spreader plate in the pattern shown below.
CAUTION Do not use the entire contents of the syringe. Too much
grease could degrade the performance of the cooler.
2. Adhere the new cooler plate to the rear of the motherboard.

3. Fit the new cooler to the mounting holes with the cooler plate on the
motherboard and secure with the spring–loaded captive screws.
4. Connect the cooler power cable to the CPU fan connector on the
motherboard.
Note: Make sure that the cooler cable does not obstruct the fan blades.
Processor
Removal
To replace the processor, perform the steps below.
1. Remove the CPU Cooler from the motherboard. (See ‘CPU Cooler’
instructions).
2. Remove all old thermal grease from the cooler heat sink and processor
spreader plate with a tissue or paper towel. Do not use a knife or
screwdriver as this could damage the surface of the spreader plate.
3. Unlatch the arm of the metal frame that secures the processor to the
motherboard.
4. Raise the metal frame and remove the processor.
Replacement
CAUTION Hold the processor by the edges only. Take care not to drop
anything into the processor socket. The pins are very delicate and
are easily damaged. If the pins are damaged, the motherboard
will have to be replaced.
1. Match the arrow on the new processor to the arrow on the motherboard
and carefully place the processor into the socket.
2. Lower the metal arm and frame onto the socket.

3. Clip the arm back into position.
4. Apply approximately one–half of the contents of the thermal grease syringe

to the processor spreader plate in the pattern shown below.
CAUTION Do not use the entire contents of the syringe. Too much
grease could degrade the performance of the cooler.
5. Fit the cooler to the mounting holes on the motherboard and cooler back
plate.
6. Secure the cooler with the spring–loaded captive screws.
Memory Modules
CAUTION Hold the processor by the edges only. Take care not to drop
anything into the processor socket. The pins are very delicate and
are easily damaged. If the pins are damaged, the motherboard
will have to be replaced.
Removal
To remove and replace the memory board, proceed as follows:
1. Flip open the plastic retention clips outwards to unlock and remove the
memory board from the SO–DIMM slot.
2. Remove the memory board from the motherboard.
Replacement
1. Match the notch on the new module with the notch on the SO–DIMM slot.
2. Insert the module without using undue pressure.
3. Use your fingers from both hands to lightly press down on each end of the
module until the plastic retention clips snap shut and lock the memory
module in place.
Note: It may be necessary to manually close the clips.
Lithium Battery
The battery location is different on the Pocono and Estoril motherboards, but the
removal process is the same.
1. Unclip the metal clip to free the existing battery.
2. Insert a new battery pushing it down until it clips in place.
Trusted Platform Module (TPM)

The TPM location is different on the Pocono, Estoril and Misano motherboards,
but the removal process is the same.
1. To remove the TPM, hold the TPM board at both sides near the connector
with your thumb and forefinger, then pull up evenly on both sides until the
TPM is removed.
2. To fit the TPM to the motherboard, hold the TPM board at both sides near
the connector with your thumb and forefinger, insert the TPM in the TPM1
header on the motherboard and carefully push down until the TPM is fitted
properly.
CABLING
Pocono Interconnection Diagram
Estoril Interconnection Diagram
Misano Interconnection Diagram
Serial ATA Cable (DVD and HDD)
USB 2.0 Four Port Breakout
PS2 KB/MS Breakout Assembly
P1 (Mini DIN) P2 (JST XHP–6 or ALEX 8821–06)

1 DAT 1 N/C
2 N/C 2 N/C
3 GND 3 CLK
4 5VSB 4 DAT
5 CLK 5 GND
6 N/C 6 5VSB
PIRAT (Pocono)
PIRAT (Estoril and Misano)
SATA Data and Power (Estoril and Misano)
Pocono Motherboard Connectors
Serial Port Connector
Standard 9 way D type male connector providing an RS232 standard serial
interface.

1 CD 6 DSR
2 RX- 7 RTS
3 TX- 8 CTS
4 DTR 9 RI
5 GND
The default state of the jumper setting is 2-3 on the motherboard (JP1 on Port 1 and JP2 on
Port 2) pin 9 is RI (Ring Indication).
Video - Analogue (VGA)

Standard 15 way high density D type connector for standard VGA monitor.
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 RED 6 R_GND 11 NC
2 GREEN 7 G_GND 12 DDC DATA
3 BLUE 8 B_GND 13 HSYNC
4 NC 9 5V Supply 14 VSYNC
5 GND 10 GND 15 DDC CLK
Video - Digital (DVI)

Connection for a standard DVI monitor.
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 TDMS DATA 2- 9 TDMS DATA 1- 17 TDMS DATA 0-
2 TDMS DATA 2+ 10 TDMS DATA 1+ 18 TDMS DATA 0+
3 TDMS DATA 2/4 SHIELD 11 TDMS DATA 1/3 SHIELD 19 TDMS DATA 0/5 SHIELD
4 NC 12 NC 20 NC
5 NC 13 NC 21 NC
6 DDC CLOCK 14 +5V POWER 22 TDMS CLOCK SHIELD
7 DDC DATA 15 GND 23 TDMS CLOCK+
8 NC 16 HOT PLUG DETECT 24 TDMS CLOCK-
C1 - Not connected.
C2 - Not connected.
C3 - Not connected.
C4 - Not connected.
C5 - Not connected.
Display Port Connector (DSP1)

1 LANE0+ 11 GND
2 GND 12 LANE3-
3 LANE0- 13 CONFIG/GND
4 LANE1+ 14 CONFIG/GND
5 GND 15 AUX+
6 LANE1- 16 GND
7 LANE2+ 17 AUX-
8 GND 18 HOT PLUG
9 LANE2- 19 GND
10 LANE3+ 20 3.3V POWER
Audio Output Connector (Speaker)

3.5mm stereo jack socket - coloured light blue.
Pin Signal
1 Audio Left
2 Audio Right
3 GND
Audio Output Connector (Line Out)

3.5mm stereo jack socket - coloured lime green.
Pin Signal
1 Audio Left
2 Audio Right
3 GND
Microphone Input Connector (mic)

3.5mm stereo jack socket - coloured pink.
Pin Signal
1 Audio Left
2 Audio Right
3 GND
Network Connector (N)

Standard RJ45 Ethernet network 10/100/1000 Base-T connection.

1 TD+ 5 NC
2 TD- 6 RD-
3 RD+ 7 NC
4 NC 8 NC
USB 0 and 1
Standard Twin USB connector stack providing a USB 2.0 compatible interface.
Pin Signal
1 +5V
2 DATA-
3 DATA+
4 GND
Reset/Power Good Interface (F_AUDIO, PANEL1, J2)

F_AUDIO1

1 SPEAKER-L 6 GND
2 GND 7 N/C
3 SPEAKER-R 8 POLARISING KEY
4 N/C 9 N/C
5 N/C 10 N/C
PANEL1

1 POCONO 3.3V 6 DISK DRIVE LED
2 N/C 7 N/C
3 POLARISING KEY 8 N/C
4 SPSW A 9 SPSW B
5 RESET TO M/B 10 N/C
J2

1 N/C 9 N/C
2 N/C 10 N/C
3 N/C 11 POLARISING KEY
4 N/C 12 N/C
5 N/C 13 5V
6 N/C 14 GND TO M/B
7 N/C 15 N/C
8 N/C 16 N/C
USB on Board (0, 1, 10, 11, 12, 13)

Pin Signal
1 +5V
2 Data-
3 Data+
4 GND
KBMS1
Pin Signal
1 N/C
2 N/C
3 CLK
4 DAT
5 GND
6 5VSB
Optical Drive Connector

S-ATA Signal Segment
Signals are supplied through a S-ATA 7 pin connector.
Pin Signal
1 GND
2 A+
3 A-
4 GND
5 B-
6 B+
7 GND
S-ATA DC Power Segment

DC power is supplied through a S-ATA 15 pin connector.

1 3.3 V 9 5 V
2 3.3 V 10 GND
3 3.3 V 11 Reserved
4 GND 12 GND
5 GND 13 12 V
6 GND 14 12 V
7 5V 15 12 V
8 5V
Estoril Motherboard Connectors

Display Ports
Reference the product cabling chapter for the supported display cabling pinouts.
CAUTION The display ports on the Estoril motherboard are latched. The
release button on top of the plug must be pressed in order to
safely disconnect.
DC Power
Pin Signal
1 GND
2 GND
3 +24v
4 +24v
LCD Backlight Power

Pin Signal
1 12V
2 GND
3 Enable
4 PWM
5 GND
LVDS Header
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 PANEL_ID0 2 PANEL_ID1 21 GND 22 GND
3 GND 4 GND 23 LVDSB_1N 24 LVDSB_2N
5 LVDSA_0N 6 LVDSA_1N 25 LVDSB_1P 26 LVDSB_2P
7 LVDSA_0P 8 LVDSA_1P 27 GND 28 GND
9 GND 10 GND 29 LVDSB_CLKN 30 LVDSB_3N
11 LVDSA_2N 12 LVDSA_0N 31 LVDSB_CLKP 32 LVDSB_3P
13 LVDSA_2P 14 LVDSA_0P 33 PANEL_ID2 34 GND
15 GND 16 GND 35 PANEL_6BIT_DET# 36 GND
17 LVDSA_3N 18 LVDSA_2N 37 PANEL_DUAL_DET# 38 VCC_LCD
19 LVDSA_3P 20 LVDSA_2P 39 LCDPWRSEL 40 VCC_LCD
Serial Port Internal Headers

1 DCD# 6 CTS#
2 DSR# 7 DTR#
3 RXD 8 RI#
4 RTS# 9 GND
5 TXD 10 GND
PS/2 Header
Pin Signal
1 DCD#
2 DSR#
3 RXD
4 RTS#
5 TXD
SATA Power Connectors

Pin Signal
1 +12V
2 GND
3 GND
4 +5V
Audio
Jack 1 - Stereo Headphone Output (lime green)
Pin Signal
1 AGND
2 HP_LINE_OUT_L
3 AGND
4 JACK_DETECT_SENSE_on_codec
5 HP_LINE_OUT_R
Jack 2 - Stereo Speaker Output (light blue)
Pin Signal
1 AGND
2 SPEAKER_OUT_L
3 AGND
5 SPEAKER_OUT_R
Jack 3 - Handset Microphone In (pink)
Pin Signal
1 AGND
2 MIC_LINE_IN_L
3 AGND
5 MIC_LINE_IN_R
Jack 4 - Handset Hook switch Input (black)
Pin Signal
1 GND
2 GND
3 GND
5 HOOKSWITCH_ACTIVE (to GPIO)
Jack 5 - Handset Speaker Out (orange)
Pin Signal
1 AGND
2 HANDSET_OUT_L
3 AGND
5 HANDSET_OUT_R
Jack 6 - ATM Headphone Signal Input (gray)
Pin Signal
1 GND
2 HP_JACK_DETECT# (to GPIO)
3 GND
5 HP_VOL_ADJUST# (to GPIO)
DMIC - PDM DMIC Input
Pin Signal
1 GND
2 VCC3
4 DMIC_CLK
5 DMIC_DATA
Trusted Platform Module

1 BIOS_VPP 2 BIOS_CS2
3 BIOS_CS1 4 3.3V
5 BIOS_MISO 6 BIOS_HOLD
7 BIOS_WP 8 BIOS_CLK
9 0V 10 BIOS_MOSI
11 12 BIOS_RST
13 TPM_SS 14 TPM_PP
15 TPM_PIRQ 16 TPM_STB
17 0V 18 TPM_RST
19 TPM_PIRQ 20 NC
Misano Motherboard Connectors

Display Port
Reference the product cabling chapter for the supported display cabling pinouts.
CAUTION The display ports on the Misano motherboard are latched. The
release button on top of the plug must be pressed in order to
safely disconnect.
DC Power
Pin Signal
1 GND
2 GND
Pin Signal
3 +24v
4 +24v
Serial Port Internal Headers

1 DCD# 6 CTS#
2 DSR# 7 DTR#
3 RXD 8 RI#
4 RTS# 9 GND
5 TXD 10 GND
PS/2 Header
Pin Signal
1 MCLK
2 MDATA
3 KCLK
4 KDATA
5 GND
6 +5V
SATA Power Connectors

Pin Signal
1 +12V
2 GND
3 GND
4 +5V
Audio
Jack 1 - Stereo Headphone Output (lime green)
Pin Signal
1 AGND
2 HP_LINE_OUT_L
3 AGND
5 HP_LINE_OUT_R
Jack 2 - Stereo Speaker Output (light blue)
Pin Signal
1 AGND
2 SPEAKER_OUT_L
3 AGND
5 SPEAKER_OUT_R
Jack 3 - Handset Microphone In (pink)
Pin Signal
1 AGND
2 MIC_LINE_IN_L
3 AGND
5 MIC_LINE_IN_R
Jack 4 - Handset Hook switch Input (black)
Pin Signal
1 GND
2 GND
3 GND
5 HOOKSWITCH_ACTIVE (to GPIO)
Jack 5 - Handset Speaker Out (orange)
Pin Signal
1 AGND
2 HANDSET_OUT_L
3 AGND
5 HANDSET_OUT_R
Jack 6 - ATM Headphone Signal Input (gray)
Pin Signal
1 GND
2 HP_JACK_DETECT# (to GPIO)
3 GND
5 HP_VOL_ADJUST# (to GPIO)
DMIC - PDM DMIC Input
Pin Signal
1 GND
2 VCC3
4 DMIC_CLK
5 DMIC_DATA
Trusted Platform Module

1 BIOS_VPP 2 BIOS_CS1
3 BIOS_CS0 4 3.3V
5 BIOS_MISO 6 BIOS_HOLD
7 BIOS_WP 8 BIOS_CLK
9 GND 10 BIOS_MOSI
11 12 BIOS_RST
13 TPM_CS2 14 TPM_PP
15 TPM_SIRQ 16 TPM_STB
17 GND 18 TPM_RST
19 TPM_PIRQ 20 NC
Diagnostic LED Header

1 LAN0_LINK_LED# 2 LAN_VCC
3 LAN1_LINK_LED# 4 LAN_VCC
5 CPU_FAN_FAULT_LED# 6 VCC5
7 SYS_FAN_FAULT_LED# 8 VCC5
9 PROC_HOT_LED# 10 VCC5
11 STAT_LED_RED 12 STAT_LED_GREEN
13 POWER_STAT_LED_AMBER 14 POWER_LED_GREEN
15 SATA_LED# 16 VCC5
PIRAT Header
1 VCC3 2 GND
3 VCC5 4 SATA_LED#
5 SYS_RST# 6 GND
7 GND 8 PWR_BTN#
9 PS_ON 10 GND
11 RECOVERY_SW# 12 GND
Embedded Display Port (eDP)

1 NC 16 LCD _GND
2 SIG_GND 17 HPD
3 LANE1_N 18 BKL_GND
4 LANE1_P 19 BKL_GND
5 SIG_GND 20 BKL_GND
6 LANE0_N 21 BKL_GND
7 LANE0_P 22 BKL_ENABLE
8 SIG_GND 23 BKL_PWM
9 AUX_CH_P 24 NC
10 AUX_CH_N 25 NC
11 SIG_GND 26 BKL_POWER_(12V)
12 LCD_VCC_(3.3V) 27 BKL_POWER_(12V)
13 LCD_VCC_(3.3V) 28 BKL_POWER_(12V)
14 NC 29 BKL_POWER_(12V)
15 LC_GND 30 NC
PIRAT Board Connectors

J1 - 9 Way D Type Right Angled Connector
Pin Signal
1 N/C
2 TampA
3 N/C
4 SPSW-B
5 RST~
6 TampB
7 N/C
8 SPSW-A
9 RST_GND
J2 - 12 Way Right Angled Connector

1 TALA_3V3 7 SPSW_B
2 PIVAT_LED 8 SPSW_A
3 5V 9 RST_FROM_PCI_SDC
4 DISK_DRIVE_LED 10 GND_TO_PCI_SDC

5 RST to M/B 11 TAMP_A
6 GND to M/B 12 TAMP_B
Pin Signal
1 TAMP_A
2 TAMP_B
3 N/C
TEST ADJUSTMENT
There are no special test or adjustment tools required.
REVISION

December 2018 A.2 Added Misano Motherboard
August 2020 A.3 Added Kabylake processor
September 2020 A.4 Added Estoril BIOS Default Values
Added Estoril BIOS Default Values

7. CARD READERS
card protection 539
USB Contactless Card Reader 547
USB Contactless Card Reader 2 556
USB IMCRW 567
USB Smart Dip Card Reader 568
USB Smart Dip Card Reader (Sankyo) 573
CARD PROTECTION
INTRODUCTION
This chapter details the Card Protection feature. The feature will be referred to as the CPK
(Card Protection Kit) throughout this chapter.
The CPK feature is designed to prevent a skimming device from capturing the data from a
card’s magnetic stripe at an ATM or Kiosk.
DESCRIPTION
The CPK is available in two models:
l Model 1 - provides the ability to render skimming devices inoperable but allows
normal operation of the card reader. Also available with optional Tilt and Vibration.
l Model 2 - provides the same function as model 1 plus it incorporates a surface detect
sensor which detects the presence of foreign objects attached to the card reader area
on the facia. Also available with optional Tilt and Vibration.
(Model 1 Without TVK) (Model 1 With TVK)
(Model 2 Without TVK) (Model 2 With TVK)
The following diagrams shows the main functional elements of the CPK feature.
Model 1
Power
Supply
(24V)
Loop
Card Reader Transmitter
Bezel
Loop TSM
Cable
CPK + 6001
Loop
Transmitter Driver Loop
Data Cable TSM Driver
Functionality
When a card is inserted into the card reader, the width switch opens and there is an
increase of power. When the CPK senses these two events, the CPK transmitter is
switched from low to high mode. The transmitted interference in high mode will render any
card skimming device inoperable.
When the card fully enters the card reader, the width switch closes and the transmitter is
set to STANDBY mode. This allows the card to be read normally by the card reader.
While the card is returned, the CPK senses the increase in power and the width switch
opens. The transmitter is then set from STANDBY mode to high mode rendering any card
skimming device inoperable.
Model 2
Power
Supply
(24V)
Card Reader Loop

Transmitter
Surface Bezel
Sensor
Detect Driver Cable
Data
Cable Loop TSM
Cable
Door Switch
Set
CPK + 6001
Loop Loop
Transmitter Driver TSM Driver
Data Cable
Alarm Board
or
Misc I/F
Functionality
When a card is inserted into the card reader, the width switch opens and there is an
increase of power. When the CPK senses these two events, the CPK transmitter is
switched from low to high mode. The transmitted interference in high mode will render any
card skimming device inoperable.
When the card fully enters the card reader, the width switch closes and the transmitter is
set to STANDBY mode. This allows the card to be read normally by the card reader.
While the card is returned, the CPK senses the increase in power and the width switch
opens. The transmitter is then set from STANDBY mode to high mode rendering any card
skimming device inoperable.
Model 2 has the additional functionality of the surface detect kit (SDK) which detects the
presence of any foreign objects attached to the facia.
Also included in model 2 is the door switch set which has two functions:
l To disable the SDK when the door is opened to allow ATM replenishment or service
operations without generating false alarms.
l If the SDK detects a foreign object, the CPK sends a signal to an alarms panel or ATM
miscellaneous board via an integrated alarms cable.
Tilt and Vibration Kit (TVK) - Optional

The tilt and vibration kit available on all models, has the additional functionality that if the
sensor detects vibration (drilling or vandalism), the CPK cuts the power to the card reader.
This will put the ATM out of service. The tilt and vibration sensor is integrated into the bezel.
l The door switch set, included with TVK (or already fitted to model 2) has two
functions:
l To disable the TVK when the door is opened to allow ATM replenishment or service
operations without generating false alarms.
If the TVK detects vibration (impacted by drilling) or tilt/movement (as in the sensor
moved), then the CPK sends a signal to an alarms panel or ATM miscellaneous board via
an integrated alarms cable.
Note: When a TVK is fitted to a model 2, the door switch will disable both the SDK and the
TVK.
Model 1
Power
Supply
(24V)
Loop
Card Reader Transmitter
Bezel
Tilt Vibration
Sensor Loop TSM
Cable Cable
Door Switch
CPK + 6001
Set
Loop Loop
Transmitter Driver TSM Driver
Data Cable
Alarm Board
or
Misc I/F
Model 2
Power
Supply
(24V)
Card Reader
Sensor Loop
Cable Transmitter
Tilt Vibration
Bezel
Surface
Detect Driver
Data
Cable
Door Switch Loop TSM
Set Cable
CPK + 6001
Loop
Loop
Transmitter Driver
TSM Driver
Data Cable
Alarm Board
or
Misc I/F
Power Requirements
The CPK requires power from the ATM power supply (+24Vdc ± 5%). This is supplied via
an adapter harness between the card reader and the ATM uni harness.
TROUBLESHOOTING
The following messages can be found on the display window on the CPK
CPK
LCD Message Status
CPK TSM.TEST Testing TSM condition.
CPK GOOD CPK self test ok.
CPK CSW.ERR Card switch error.
CPK CSW.ERR Card switch error on installation detected.
CPK TSM.dis TSM disconnected.
LCD Message Status

CPK TSM.low Low TSM signal.
CPK TSM.high High TSM current.
CPK IN SERVICE CPK waiting for transaction. No TSM signal.
Conn. TSM Mode: Rx Startup procedure for card switch description.
CPK STANDBY CPK on standby mode. MCRW in transaction. No TSM signal.
CPK RUNNING CPK on high mode.
SDK
LCD Message Status
SDKx ADJ’ing ADK x adjusting.
SDKx Stb. TEST SDKx stability test period.
SDKx Stb. OK SDKx stability test good.
SDKx S.STB.ER SDKx stability error.
SDKx Dtc. TEST SDKx detection test.
SDKx Dtc. OK SDKx detection test good.
SDKx SEN.ERR MINIK sensor faulty.
SDKx GOOD SDKx self test ok.
SDKx CLEAR No foreign object on surface
SDKx DETECTED No foreign object detected on surface
Note: ‘x’ is the assigned number to the CPK.
Door switch
LCD Message Status
ATMcover Open ATM door opened.
ATMcover Close ATM door closed.
DIAGNOSTICS
The CPK utility program which is used to detect faults and enable you to view and save log
files, can be downloaded from the following web sites:
l http://ncrwss1.ncr.com/atmlevel2/default.aspx Main page.

l http://ncrwss1.ncr.com/atmlevel2/TMDIFD%20info/Forms/AllItems.aspx TMD Utility
page.
Device Diagnostics
None
Tallies
SDK and TVK Counter
LCD Message Description
Top Line: DKcount sdk counter.
Bottom Line: 0 sdk(s) total detected value.
Top Line: TVKcount TVK counter.
Bottom Line: V0 to V- total vibration detection value, T-total tilt detection value.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENT
None.

There are no field replaceable parts in the module. The device is a complete module swap.
CABLING
Alarms Harness
Black
To CPK Red To
Control Box Alarm Panel
White
Black Common
Red Normal Open
White Normal Close
None.
CPK & Test Device: This test tool is required for testing the transmitter strength and to
check that the installation is correct.
USB CONTACTLESS CARD READER
INTRODUCTION
This chapter gives servicing information for the USB Contactless Card Reader (USB
CCR).
Antenna Unit LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4
Card
‘Landing Zone’
Antenna Overlay
DESCRIPTION
The USB CCR consists of two hardware components:
l An antenna unit (antenna, buzzer, 4 LED indicators and RF shield) housed in a plastic
case, mounted on the card orientation area of the facia (see illustration above).
Note: By default the buzzer is disabled in the software.
l A control unit (power supply, digital and RF circuits) housed in a plastic moulded case
mounted inside the ATM.
The contactless interface is based on the industry standard ISO 14443 13.56MHz RFID
protocols, and supports a wide variety of contactless payment applications such as:
l MasterCard® PayPass™
l Visa Wave
l ExpressPay from American Express®
l MIFARE®
l Discover®
l JCB.
The USB CCR can be updated and upgraded in the field to add new contactless payment
applications.
For magnetic data type applications, customers wave or tap their contactless card, key fob
or other Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) enabled device on the front of the 'landing
zone' indicated by the symbol shown below:
Both audio and visual acknowledgements can be returned to indicate to the customer that
their transaction is being authorized.
Note: Transactions requiring larger data sizes and/or transactions that require writing to
the card may require the card to be left on the 'landing zone' for longer, with audio and
visual indication specific to the application.
The USB CCR supports 24V operation and has USB 2.0 full‐speed communication
interfaces.
Antenna Unit Connectors
Control Unit Connectors
TROUBLESHOOTING
USB CCR Cable disconnected from USB CCR Check cable Reconnect cable
disconnected
USB cable disconnected from USB hub Check cable Reconnect cable
Power cable disconnected from USB Check power cable Reconnect power
CCR cable
Power cable disconnected from power Check power cable Reconnect power
supply cable
Power supply fault Check power supply actual Repair power
voltage supply
USB CCR firmwear hung Check for card reader Reset ATM
response
USB CCR faulty Check for USB CCR response Replace USB CCR
USB cable faulty Replace cable and reset Replace cable
Power cable faulty Replace power cable and Replace cable
reset
Not authorized USB CCR requires to be authorized None Authorize USB CCR
DIAGNOSTICS
HW_DIAGNOSTICS Property
The USB CCR provides multiple diagnostic test Applets.
Note: Looping is allowed on all tests.
Applet Test Description

ID
0 MENU This displays a menu of all the other Applets to allow an operator to select one.
1 Identification The following information is displayed:

1. Device Type: USB
2. Serial Number
3. Firmware Version
2 Detect Card The following sequence of tests is executed
1. Start Transaction
2. Detect Card & Display either one of the following card types:
l ISO 14443-4 Type A
l ISO 14443-4 Type B
l Mifare Type A (Standard)
l Mifare Type A (Ultralight)
l ISO 14443 Type A
l ISO 14443 Type B
3. Stop Transaction
If no card is present within 10 seconds then display “Card Not Tapped” and the test will
terminate.
HW_SELF_TEST Property
The USB CCR offers the following Applets for this property.

ID
1 Device The deivce self test.
Self Test 1. The USBCCR is activated using Start Transaction to detect a card - if this is unsuccessful
then the test is terminated and a ‘Fail’ Status returned.
2. The USBCCR is activated using Start Transaction to detect a card - if this is unsuccessful
HW_MAINTENANCE PROPERTY
The USB CCR supports two Applets for this property.
Applet ID Test Description

1. Device Type: USB
2. Serial Number
3. Firmware Version
HW_CONFIGURATION PROPERTY
This feature supports device specific configuration and therefore provides a configuration
dialogue.

ID
1 Report Device Type This Applet allows the operator to interrogate the device for what type of device is
present.
l Device Type: USB
2 Report This Applet allows the operator to interrogate the device for the Device Serial
Serial Number Number.
l Device Serial Number
3 Report Firmware This Applet allows the operator to interrogate the device for information relating
Versions to the device firmware.
l Firmware Version
l Loader Version
4 Set Device This Applet allows the operator to adjustconfiguration parameters.
Configuration
Note: If the Applet terminates due to a device fault then “Device Failure” will be displayed.
STRAPPING
LEDs and MEEIs
The 4 LEDs on the antenna unit are dual purpose and act either as MEEIs or as transaction
progress indicators. An MEEI input on the control unit allows connection to the Universal
Misc I/F board to synchronize flashing with other MEEIs on the ATM.
Software on the control unit decides whether the LEDs are controlled by transaction or by
external MEEI input. If a transaction is taking place, the external MEEI input is ignored and
the LEDs indicate transaction progress as specified by the standards of the card system
being used.
Control Board
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

There are no field replaceable parts within the device.
CABLING
Harnesses
USB Contactless Card Reader LED Control
1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 Pin Number
1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 Wire Number
USB Contactless Card Reader RF
CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENTS/PINOUTS
+24V Power
Molex 2‐way MiniFit Jnr. Pin2 MFBL.
Pin No. Signal Comment

1 +24V Vcc
2 0V 0V mates 1st
USB
USB 2.0 specification Mini‐B receptacle with through‐hole mounting tabs.

1 Vbus 5V
2 D- Data
3 D+ Data
4 ID N.C. (used for USB OTG)
5 Ground 0V
AUX
Connector providing additional control signals. Molex 87833‐1420.

1 +24V N.C. (Alternative +24V input)
2 0V N.C. (Alternative 0V)
3 +24V N.C. (Alternative +24V input)
5 N.C.
6 /MEEI_in (See Note2)
7 B DATA+in N.C. (See Note 1)
8 B DATA-in N.C. (See Note 1)

11 TX0_232 N.C.
12 RX0_232 N.C.
13 /ISP-INPUT N.C.
14 Vbus N.C. (Alternative Vbus connection)
Note: Alternative USB D+ connection only with population option ‐ not USB compliant.
Note: Input pin for MEEI. This pin is designed to be driven by a Universal Misc I/F MEEI
output. It must be pulled to 0V to illuminate the four MEEI LEDs. Otherwise, this pin must
be allowed to float. The pin contains an internal 10 k ohms pull‐up to +24V to drive the
MEEI detect circuit on the Universal Misc I/F.
R.F. Out
Molex micro fit connector providing R.F. to the antenna unit.
Note: Maximum cable length is 1.00 m (3.3 ft.).
Pin No. Signal

1 R.F.
2 Ground
LED/Buzzer
Connection between control unit and antenna unit. 8‐Way Molex milli‐grid.

1 +5V Supply from control unit
2 LED4 Logic 0 = LED on; Logic 1 = LED off
3 Buzzer Buzzer output from control unit
5 0V Supply from control unit
7 MOD_INDEX
None.
USB CONTACTLESS CARD READER 2
INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides the necessary servicing information for the USB Contactless Card
Reader 2 (USBCCR2).
DESCRIPTION
The USBCCR2 consists of two hardware components:
Note: By default the buzzer is disabled in the software.
l An antenna unit (antenna, buzzer, 4 LED indicators and an RF shield) housed in a

plastic case, mounted in the card reader area of the fascia
l A control unit (power supply, digital and RF circuits) housed in a plastic moulded case
mounted inside the ATM.
The contactless interface is based on the industry standard ISO 14443 13.56MHz RFID
protocols, and supports a wide variety of contactless payment applications such as:
l MasterCard® PayPass™
l Visa payWave
l ExpressPay from American Express®
l MIFARE®
l Discover® D-PAS
l Interac
l PBoC.
The USBCCR2 can be updated and upgraded in the field to add new contactless payment
applications. For magnetic data type applications, customers wave or tap their contactless
card, key fob or other Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) enabled device on the front of
the 'landing zone' indicated by the symbol shown below.
Both audio and visual acknowledgements can be returned to indicate to the customer that
their transaction is being authorized.
Note: Transactions requiring larger data sizes and/or transactions that require writing to
the card may require the card to be left on the 'landing zone' for longer, with audio and
visual indication specific to the application.
Antenna and control unit connectors

CONTROLLER
J8
J1 J2
Miscellaneous
Interface
(MEEI)
J5
24V DC J3
USB
LED and Coaxial

buzzer antenna
ANTENNA
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error MStatus Possible Cause Isolation Resolution
Reader 96 USB cable is disconnected Check the USB cable Reconnect the USB
Communication from the USBCCR2 connection cable
Error USB cable is disconnected Check the USB cable Reconnect the USB
from the USB hub connection cable
Power cable is disconnected Check the power cable Reconnect the
from the USBCCR2 connection power cable
Power cable is disconnected Check the DC cable connection Reconnect the
from the power supply power cable
Power supply fault Check the power supply actual Repair the power
voltage supply
USBCCR2 firmware hung Check for card reader Reset the ATM
response
USB cable fault Replace the USB cable Replace the cable
and reset the ATM
Power cable fault Replace the power cable Replace the cable
and reset the ATM
USBCCR2 faulty Check for USBCCR2 responses Replace the
USBCCR2
Not Authorised 42 Device requires to be Authorise the
authorised device
Antenna Removed 7 Reconnect the
antenna
Configuration error Check configuration setting Change
matches antenna cable used configuration
Error MStatus Possible Cause Isolation Resolution

Write or Read USB 97 USB cable is disconnected Check the USB cable Reconnect the USB
Port Failed from the USBCCR2 connection cable
USB cable is disconnected Check the USB cable Reconnect the USB
voltage supply
response
and reset the ATM
and reset the ATM
USBCCR2
Reader 98 USB cable is disconnected Check the USB cable Reconnect the USB
Disconnected or from the USBCCR2 connection cable
CRC Error USB cable is disconnected Check the USB cable Reconnect the USB
voltage supply
response
and reset the ATM
and reset the ATM
USBCCR2
DIAGNOSTICS
Device Diagnostics
The USBCCR2 provides multiple diagnostic test Applets.
Note: Looping is allowed on all tests.

ID
0 MENU This displays a menu of all the other Applets to allow an operator to select one
l Device Type: USB
l Serial Number
l Firmware Version
l Loader Version
l Device VID/PID
2 Run-2-Run The following sequence of tests is executed:
Sequence 1 l Start Transaction
l Detect Card & Display either one of the following card types:
o ISO 14443-4 Type A
o ISO 14443-4 Type B
o Mifare Type A (Standard)
o Mifare Type A (Ultralight)
o ISO 14443 Type A
o ISO 14443 Type B
o RCTIF Type A
o RCTIF Type B
o RCTIF Type B' [B' denotes B prime}
l Display ATR
l Stop Transaction
Note: If no card is present within 10 seconds then display “Card Not Tapped” and the
test will terminate
3 Antenna On Turns the antenna on
4 Antenna Off Turns the antenna off
5 LED Test Tests all the LEDS as per the sequence below:
1. Turns the LEDs on and then off one by one
2. Turns all 4 LEDs on and then off
6 Buzzer Test Turns on the buzzer with different parameters
7 Detect Card Issues a poll for token command and tries to detect card within 10 seconds. If card is
detected, then it displays the card type and the Answer to Reset (ATR)
8 Communication Checks communication status of the device
Check
Device Self Tests

The USBCCR2 offers the following Applets for this property.

ID
0 MENU This displays a menu of the all the other Applets to allow an operator to select one
1 Device The device self test:
Self 1. The USBCCR2 is activated using Start Transaction to detect a card. If this is unsuccessful then
test the test is terminated and a fail status is returned.
2. The operator is prompted to present card, and allowed 10 seconds to do so. If no card is
detected then the test fails with a not completed status, the USBCCR2 is disabled and the
test is terminated.
3. Upon card detection the card is activated.
4. The Stop Transaction command is issued. If this is unsuccessful then the test is terminated
and a fail status is returned.
5. End of test.
SELF SERVICE CONFIGURATION

This feature does support device specific configuration and therefore does provide a
configuration dialogue.

ID
0 MENU This displays a menu of all the other Applets to allow an operator to select one
l Device Type: USB
l Serial Number
l Firmware Version
l Loader Version
l Display VID/PID
2 Transfer Logs Dumps log files/traces/PD files to a USB stick (directory identified by serial number and
date time stamp).
Format:
USBCCR2_<Serial_Number>_DEBUGLOG_<dd-MM-yyyy-hh_mm_ss_nnn>
3 Transfer Dump registry settings to a USB stick (directory identified by serial number and date time
Registry stamp).
Setting Format:
USBCCR2_<Serial_Number>_REGEXPORT_<dd-MM-yyyy-hh_mm_ss_nnn>

ID
4 Transfer Dump ID TECH® configuration groups to files on a USB stick (directory identified by serial
Device number and date time stamp).
Configuration Format:
USBCCR2_<Serial_Number>_DEVCONFIG_<dd-MM-yyyy-hh_mm_ss_nnn>
5 Antenna The initial data shown is the currently cable type set on the device. It provides toggle
Cable button to select the proper cable type. Once “OK” button is pressed, the new cable type is
set on the device.
Note: There are two types of cables:
l Long cable (1000mm) Black
l Short cable (545mm) Off White/Gray
Note: If the applet terminates due to a device fault, then “Device Failure” will be displayed.
STRAPPING
Antenna LEDs and MEEIs
The four LEDs on the antenna unit are dual purpose and act either as MEEIs or as
transaction progress indicators. An MEEI input on the control unit allows connection to the
universal miscellaneous interference board to synchronize flashing with other MEEIs on
the ATM.
Software on the control unit decides whether the LEDs are controlled by transaction or by
external MEEI input. If a transaction is taking place, the external MEEI input is ignored and
the LEDs indicate transaction progress as specified by the standards of the card system
being used.
LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4
Control Board
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

There are no field replaceable parts within the device.
CABLING
USB CCR2 Antenna Cable
Controller Antenna
(RJ45 Extension) 8-Way
USB CCR2 Controller Cable

Two colour coded variants are available with different lengths:
l 1000mm (39.4 in) black

l 545mm (21.5 in) off white/gray.
Note: The SysApp should be configured to reflect the cable used in the ATM / Terminal /
Kiosk. (See Self Service Configuration - Applet ID 5).
Antenna Controller
SMB coaxial RF connector SMB coaxial RF connector
Area where colour coding is applied
Antenna Controller
(RJ45 Extension) 8-Way
CONNECTORS ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS
DC
Pin Description
1 24V
2 GND
USB
USB 2.0 Mini-B.
Pin Description
1 5V
2 D-
3 D+
4 ID
5 GND
RF Out
SubMiniature version B (SMB) coaxial.
Pin Description
1 RF
2 GND
Miscellaneous Interface
Pin Description Pin Description
1 0V 8 B_DATA- in
2 +24V in 9 0V
3 0V 10 0V
4 +24V in 11 TX1_232
5 NC 12 RX1_232
6 /MEEI_in 13 NC
7 B_DATA+ in 14 VBUS
Note: The /MEEI_in pin is designed to be driven by a universal miscellaneous interface

MEEI output. It must be pulled to 0V to illuminate the four MEEI LEDs. Otherwise, this pin
must be allowed to float. The pin contains an internal 10KΩ pull up to +24V to drive the
MEEI detect circuit on the universal miscellaneous interface.
LED/Buzzer
Pin Description
1 MOD_INDEX
2 LED 1
3 0V
4 LED 2
5 Buzzer
6 LED 3
7 VCC_LED
8 LED 4
LED pin Logic: 0 = ON; 1 = OFF.
None.
USB IMCRW
INTRODUCTION
Latchfast Standard
Card Capture Bin
Card Capture Bin
The USB Integrated Motorised Card Reader Writer (UIMCRW) is capable of supporting all
current financial card technologies, both Magnetic and Smart (excluding Watermark) and
has the flexibility to be able to interface with future card technologies.
USB SMART DIP CARD READER
INTRODUCTION
The USB Smart Dip Card Reader is capable of reading cards with ISO magnetic tracks in
compliance with ISO/IEC 7810, 7811, 7813 standards and from smart cards to the
ISO/IEC 7816‐3 I.C. card standard (Icc: 60mA mac). The card reader is also EMV
compliant.
DESCRIPTION
The functions performed by the dip card reader are:
l Detects the insertion of a card (front position microswitch)

l Detects the card when fully inserted into the card reader (rear position microswitch)
l Reads data from track 1, 2 and 3 as the card is inserted into the reader or when the
card is removed from the reader
l Reads data from the smart chip on the card when the card is fully inserted and latched
l Communicates with the PC Core through a USB port.
The card reader is located on the rear of the facia panel of ATMs.
There are no card capture, eject or power failure features fitted to the card reader.The
customer removes the card when the transaction is completed and after the card latch has
been released.
Magnetic Stripe Reading

The card is manually inserted into the card reader. During the insertion or removal the
magnetic stripe is read as it moves over the magnetic heads. If selecting either of the
diagnostic test options:
l Run to Run Sequence 1 ‐ Insert and remove card
or
l Run to Run sequence 2 ‐ Insert card and leave
then the card must be inserted fully until it is latched.
The card reader is capable of reading cards inserted at speeds between 10 cm/s and 100
cm/s (3.94 in./s and 39.4 in./s).
Note: A read failure will occur if the insertion/removal movement is stopped or jerked
during the insertion/removal action.
Smart Card Reading

The card is manually inserted into the smart dip card reader until the card is latched.
The data is read once the card is latched and power is applied to the smart card.
Security Feature
Provision is made on the Smart DIP PCB for future incorporation of a Security Access
Module (SAM) PCB.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error message Possible Root Isolation Procedure Resolution Procedure
Cause
Communications Failure USB cable Inspect USB connections at Insert USB plug.
Inspect_Now removed. hub, PC core and card reader
Card reader Inspect power connections at Switch off the power before
power cable PC core and card reader inserting power connector.
removed
Card reader Check for card reader Reset ATM
firmware hung response
Card reader fault Card reader not appearing Replace card reader
Magnetic Read Head Fault Read head is dirty. Clean the card reader heads.
Clean_Soon
Magnetic Reader Magnetic reader Replace card reader
Mechanism Failure mechanism fault
Replace_Now
Latch Mechanism Failure Magnetic reader Replace card reader
Replace_Soon mechanism fault
Smart Reader Mechanism Smart reader Replace card reader
Failure - Replace_Now mechanism fault
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0 Diagnostics
The only level 0 diagnostic self test performed at power up is on the solenoid operation of
the lock lever.
If the solenoid operation is not correct, i.e. jammed or similar, then a RED LED on the card
reader blinks 0.25s on, 0.25s off.
Level 1 Diagnostics
The following tests are provided:
Test Description
MENU This displays a menu of all the other Applets to allow an operator to select
one.
RUN TO RUN SEQUENCE 1 The following sequence of tests is executed:
ENTER CARD AND REMOVE (READ_ON_WITHDRAWAL)
READ ISO TRACK 1
READ ISO TRACK 2
READ ISO TRACK 3
RUN TO RUN SEQUENCE 2
FIRMWARE IDENTIFY The USBSDR driver revision and firmware identity numbers are read and
displayed as t-data.
CLEANING CYCLE The following sequence of tests is executed:
ENTER CARD
SMART CARD RELEASE
EJECT CARD
Level 3 Diagnostics
S_DATA
The S_DATA returned for the smart dip card reader are:
S_DATA Meaning
00 GOOD (No error).
01 ROUTINE (Minor fault)
02 WARNING (May require attention).
03 SUSPEND (Possible customer tampering)
04 FATAL (Device inoperative, USB comms error).
TALLIES
The tallies recorded for the smart dip card reader are:
Tally Description
CARDTRAN A card is fully inserted during accept.
NO DATA No data was read from the card during accept.
READ OPS Data verification is attempted.
READ ERR On read fails due to parity, or LRC.
BLANKTRK Card data has no start sentinel.
COMM_ An attempt to send a command to, or get a response from the card reader driver, is made
OPS across the USB interface.
COMM_ A USB comms retry is successful.
RTY
COMM_ A USB comms failure occurs.
ERR
NONSCDET The card present is detected not to be a smart card, during the execution of the command
to power on the smart card.
SCDETECT The card present is detected to be a smart card, during the execution of the command to
power on the smart card.
SCRESETS A smart card reset is carried out, during the execution of the command to power on the
smart card
SCRSTERR An error is found in the answer to reset, during the execution of the command to power
on the smart card.
SCCOMATT A communication is attempted between the card reader and the smart card.
SCCOMRTY A communication retry was successfully carried out, during the execution of a smart card
related command.
SCRSPTIM The card reader reports that the smart card has failed to respond within the specified
timeout period.
UDIP INI Attempts to re-initialise the device following a USB disconnect.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
There are no field adjustments.

None.
CABLING
No internal cabling.
USB mini‐B connector
Pin No. Signal Name
1 Vcc
2 D-
3 D+
4 N/C
5 Gnd
Power connector
Pin No. Signal Name
1 24V
2 0V
The following test cards are required to perform level 1 diagnostic testing on the smart dip
card reader:
l ISO test card ‐ NCR part numbers 009‐0009494 (old) and 009‐0017008 (new)
l Cleaning Card ‐ NCR part number 998‐0052929.
For the preventive maintenance schedule and details of the required tasks for the USB
Smart Dip Card Reader (Sankyo), refer to the Preventive Maintenance section of this
manual.
USB SMART DIP CARD READER (SANKYO)
INTRODUCTION
Security Access Module (SAM)
LED
The USB Smart Dip Card Reader (Sankyo) is a Sankyo ICM330-3R1395 Card Reader.
The card reader is capable of reading cards to the following standards:
Magnetic card
l ISO/IEC 7810
l ISO/IEC 7811
l ISO/IEC 7813
IC card
l ISO/IEC 7816/1-3 (Icc: 60mA max)

l EMV ‘96 Ver 3.1.1
l EMV2000 Ver 4.0
Memory card
l GPM896
l SLE4442
l SLE4428
l I2C (24C01~24C256)
The card reader is encryption supported (triple DES and single DES).
DESCRIPTION
Operation
Manual insert and pull out operation. Once inserted a card becomes latched and cannot be
removed until unlatched by the card reader.
Simultaneous read on ISO Tracks 1, 2 and 3.
Power
Power requirement:
Voltage DC 12V ±10%

Ripple <100 mVp-p
Power impedance <1 omega
Current consumption:
Waiting (LED off) <100 mA

Solenoid on <400 mA
Rush (ICC on) <700 mA within 3ms
Interface Connections
1 15
J7
1 3 4
J1 1
CN1
1 2 2 1
LED
There is a single LED located at the front of the card reader.
ERROR MESSAGES
None.
DIAGNOSTICS
For diagnostics, refer to the Diagnostics Overview section of this manual.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

None.
CABLING
None.
USB connector (J10)
Pin No. Signal Name
1 Vbus
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND (signal)
DC power supply connector (J6)

Pin No. Signal Name I/O Function
1 +12V I +12V dc (main power supply)
2 PGN O Power ground (0V)
None.
Smart Dip Card Reader (Sankyo), refer to Card Readers in the Preventive Maintenance
section of this manual.
8. KEYBOARDS AND ENCRYPTORS
FDKs and Bezels 578
UEPP II 583
Revision 590
QWERTY Keyboard 591
Revision 594
China Encrypting Pin Pad (USBCPIN) 595
Universal Encrypting Pin Pad (III) and (IV) 605
Revision 615
FDKS AND BEZELS
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the FDK’s and Bezels used in the NCR 663x and 662x ATM’s. The
FDK (Function Display Key) is defined as a moving key keyboard. The FDKs in a SelfServ
22e are not contained within a bezel, but are mounted directly onto the facia.
DESCRIPTION
The illustration below shows the 12.1” and 15” FDK’s used in the NCR 663x and 662x
products, excluding SelfServ 22e.
12” FDK Assembly 15” FDK Assembly
The Function Display Keys (FDK) keyboard is positioned over the front of the LCD screen.
The FDKs are connected to the Miscellaneous Interface board.
The FDK keyboard does not contain any replaceable parts.
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0 Diagnostics
None.
Level 3 Diagnostics
The level 3 diagnostics returned for the keyboards are:
S_DATA
The S_DATA returned for the keyboards are:
S_DATA Meaning
00 GOOD (No error).
01 ROUTINE (Minor fault).
04 FATAL (Requires immediate attention).
Tallies
None.
PS2 Keyboard Test

The PS2 keyboard test returns the message “Got Keypress Test Passed”.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.
TROUBLESHOOTING
None.

SelfServ 22e Only
Replace the FDK assembly as follows:
1. Remove the screws securing the screen (two each side). Then remove the screen
bracket.
2. Disconnect the FDK connectors then remove the five screws securing each FDK
bracket and remove the brackets.
All other SelfServ ATMs

Access
Access to the rear of the fascia is gained by removing the cabinetry side panels if the
service footprint allows sufficient clearance. If insufficient clearance is available access can
be gained from the front of the ATM after the two spring latches holding the FDK and Bezel
assembly have been released.
FDK Replacement (Rear Access)

Replace the FDK assembly as follows:
Note: Retain all removed screws and brackets for use with the replacement FDKs.
1. Remove and discard the two shipping screws if fitted.

2. Disconnect the Power and Signal cables from the LCD.
3. Disengage and lock out the two spring loaded plungers by pulling them out and
turning 90 degrees.
Retaining
Wires
Shipping Screws
Spring Loaded
Plunger
Spring Loaded
Latch
4. Remove the LCD by lifting upwards and backwards to clear the latches.
5. Activate the two spring loaded latches which will allow the FDK assembly to move
forwards. The two retaining wires will prevent the module from falling out.
6. Disconnect the FDK connectors.
7. Release the two retaining wires from the fascia and lift the FDK assembly clear of
the ATM.
FDK Replacement (Front Access)

1. From the rear of the ATM activate the two spring loaded latches which will allow the
FDK assembly to move forwards. The two retaining wires will prevent the module
from falling out.
2. From the front of the ATM remove the two shipping screws.
3. Release the LCD assembly by disengaging and locking out the two spring loaded
plungers, this is done by pulling them out and turning 90 degrees.
4. Slide the LCD clear of the FDK assembly and place it inside the ATM.
5. Disconnect the FDK connectors. The access is gained from below by pushing the
top of the module back towards the fascia and lifting the bottom of the module
upwards.
6. The FDK assembly can now be removed by releasing the retaining wires.
7. Replacement of the FDKs is the reverse of the above procedures.
FDK Keyboard Connectors
The key arrays of the FDK keyboards are brought out on separate eight-way connectors
with the following pinout:
Left FDK Right FDK

1 N/C 1 N/C
2 COMM 2 COMM
3 N/C 3 N/C
4 TOP 4 TOP
5 UP_MID 5 UP_MID
6 LOW_MID 6 LOW_MID
7 BOTT 7 BOTT
8 SENSE 8 SENSE
FDK Keyboard Harness

FASCIA FDK
FDK_CONF1 FDK1
FDK1_TP 8
1 4
2 GND 2
3 FDK1_LW_MD
6
4 FDK2_UP_MD 5
5 FDK1_BT 7
6 1
3
FDK2_TP FDK2
7 4
8 FDK2_LW_MD 6
9 FDK2_UP_MD 5
10 FDK_CONF2
FDK2_BT 8
11 7
12 GND 2
1
3
None.
UEPP II
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the USB Encrypting PIN Pad II (U-EPP II) used in the 66xx range
of terminals.
Heater Assembly
24V Power
USB Connector
The U-EPP II gives protection to the cardholder’s Personal Identification Number (PIN)
and of the keys used to verify and encrypt these PINs.
DESCRIPTION
The U-EPP II device operates as a USB 2.0 compliant full speed device attached to an
NCR PC Core and consists of the following hardware elements.
l 16 key keyboard
l Integrated USB mainboard encompassing Secure Cryptographic functions.
Note: The U-EPP II hardware does not support FDKs, or a PS/2 or USB QWERTY
keyboard.
Keyboard
The keyboard layout is configured during manufacturing and the U-EPP II mainboard is
required to store the factory configuration information.
The keyboard will typically have digits 0 to 9 and function keys for clear, cancel, enter and
delete. When hexadecimal data entry is required the PIN pad will operate as a regular
hexadecimal key pad, providing one of 0 to 9 and A to F on any one key.
USB Mainboard
The U-EPP II solution is implemented on a secure System on Chip (SoC). The board
cannot be removed from the keyboard.
Any attempt to disassemble the U-EPP II will result in loss of all data within the security
module.
Removal Switches
The U-EPP II incorporates removal switches, which detect the removal of the U-EPP II
from the parent ATM. The U-EPP II device monitors this switch, thus any security actions
can be directly invoked by the U-EPP II. The ATM is notified via a device status change.
USB Interface
The USB interface is integrated into the mainboard. It supports USB 1.1 and USB 2.0 and
acts as a USB Full Speed device. The device uses a USB Mini B connector and is capable
of driving USB cables up to a maximum of 5m.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error Possible Root Causes Isolation Resolution
Keys at end of Number of key presses detected n/a Replace U-EPP II module
life reaching end of rated life
Comms failure USB cable disconnected from U-EPP II Check USB cable Re-connect USB cable
USB cable disconnected from USB hub Check USB cable Re-connect USB cable
USB cable faulty Replace USB cable and re- Connect USB cable
test
Firmware Missing, incorrect or corrupt firmware Contact software supplier Re-load firmware files
validation failed files on hard disk
Firmware Error updating firmware due to n/a Replace U-EPP II module
update failed hardware failure
Error Possible Root Causes Isolation Resolution

Tampered U-EPP II device has detected a tamper n/a Replace U-EPP II module
condition and deleted all keys
Requires Device cleared due to firmware n/a Customer key loading
initialisation update procedure
DIAGNOSTICS
If an alpha keyboard service only is present on the system then the following level 1
diagnostic tests are available:
l Key Detect Test

l Communications Echo Test
l PC Keyboard Test.
Looping is not allowed on the following tests:
l Key Detect Test

l Delete All User Keys
l PC Keyboard Test.
All tests are available from the rear panel, even those which require front interaction. Tests
will time out in absence of front keyboard interaction.
Level 0 Diagnostics
There are no level 0 diagnostics for the U-EPP II.
Level 1 Diagnostics
The following level 1 diagnostic tests are available for the U-EPP II.
Key Detect Test

A message is displayed asking the user to press each of the 16 numeric keys in turn, the
four left FDKs from top to bottom then the four right FDKs from top to bottom.
After each key press is detected the matrix code will be displayed (in hexadecimal). This
test will terminate if no key press is detected within 7 seconds of the previous key press.
This test runs until all keys have been pressed or the test times out. The test will not
complete if no key presses have been detected. If the position codes have the correct
values then this test passes, otherwise it results in a fail.
This test can only be conducted if the variant of the installed alpha keyboard service
indicates that FDKs are present.
Communications Echo Test

This tests the physical and link level layers. Bytes of data are first sent to the U-EPP II. The
test then verifies whether the U-EPP II responds with the same data bytes. If there is no
response from the device or the bytes are not correctly verified this test will return a fail.
Identify Command Test

Returns the identity of the U-EPP II module and displays:
l Name and model

l Part number and key tip configuration
l U-EPP II serial number
l Manufacturer serial number
l U-EPP II firmware identifier and version
l Hardware version
l Security number.
This test will fail when there is no valid serial number or there is no response from the
device. Otherwise the test always results in a pass.
Report Status Test

This test displays the current status of the U-EPP II including:
l whether the U-EPP II is Good, has been Tampered or has been removed from the
fascia and requires re-activation
l reporting the current security mode only ‘Secure’ option displayed.
If the status of the U-EPP II is good then this test returns a pass, any other status returns a
fail.
PC Keyboard Test
Tests whether a PC keyboard key press can be detected.
The test will prompt for a key on the PC keyboard to be pressed. When a key press is
detected the Unicode code point will be displayed in hexadecimal, along with the character
(depending on the font used for the display). The test will terminate if no key press is
detected within 7 seconds of the previous key press.
This test will return a pass if at least one key press has been detected. If no key presses
have been detected then the test returns a fail.
Level 3 Diagnostics
S_DATA
S_DATA Meaning
00 Good (no error)
01 Routine (minor fault)
04 Fatal (requires immediate attention)
Tallies
Tally Description Tally ID Tally Mnemonic
PIN pad top key presses 0 KEYPRESS
Comms operations 1 COMM OPS
Comms retries 2 COMM RTY
Comms failures 3 REATTACH
Keys stuck 4 KEYSTUCK
Self Tests
The following tests are performed for the self test (see Level 1 Diagnostics for details of the
individual tests):
l Communications echo test

l Report status test.
l Key detect test
CONFIGURATION
The U-EPP II supports configuration via the system application. Configuration Settings are
remotely viewable by default. However, they cannot be modified.
Configuration Options
The following options are available for configuration of the U-EPP II:
Transfer Firmware Files

A memory stick/pen, flex disk or CD rom containing U-EPP II firmware files will be required
for this operation. After the memory stick/pen, flex disk or Cd rom is inserted it is checked
for U-EPP II firmware. Files found are then verified before being copied.
Once files are successfully copied, country version configuration may be required.
A shutdown and re-boot is required for the changes to take affect.
Display Version Number

Displays the following information:
l U-EPP II serial number

l MSN and the U-EPP II firmware version (repeated if multiple modules are present)
l Security Configuration data
l Top-level part number.
Select Country Version

Allows configuration of the country specific firmware versions. The system will prompt for
transfer of any required firmware files.
A shutdown and re-boot is required for the changes to take affect.
Delete All User Keys

This option will delete all user keys. This option should typically be used if the U-EPP II is
being removed from service. This option is only displayed if the Delete All User Keys pre-
configuration parameter is enabled.
A confirmation message box will be displayed indicating that all the keys will be deleted
irreversibly if the OK button is pressed. If the OK button is not pressed within 10 seconds
the operation will be cancelled.
Note: If this option is completed the U-EPP II will not function again until customer
encryption keys are reloaded.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

The U-EPP II module is not a re-workable item and has no serviceable parts therefore any
failure will require a complete replacement module.
Assembly Replacement
When unpacking a spare U-EPP II assembly check for any signs of tampering. If tampering
is suspected then do not install the assembly.
If the assembly is tamper free:
1. Check and record the serial number of the new assembly in the NCR work order
system.
2. Locate the new serial number label.
3. Install the assembly exactly according to the kit instruction.
Note: Ensure that all grounding and safety precautions are followed as per
installation instructions.
4. failure to follow the installation instructions may result in incorrect functioning of the
U-EPP II
5. Fit the new serial number label to the ATM next to the tracer plate.
Defective Assembly Disposal

Damaged or defective assemblies must be returned to the customer for them to dispose of
as per their disposal procedures.
CABLING
No internal cabling.
None.
TEST AND ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

None.
REVISION

QWERTY KEYBOARD
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the QWERTY keyboard used in Automated Teller Machines
(ATMs).
DESCRIPTION
The PS2 keyboard is an unencrypted keyboard with a modified QWERTY based layout.
The keyboard is housed in a moulded body which contains the keyboard keys, switches
and the keyboard PCB. The keyboard PCB acts as an interface for power and data to and
from the QWERTY keyboard.
Heaters
All QWERTY keyboard FRU’s are supplied with heater elements fitted but are only
connected up when fitted to a through the wall ATM.
TROUBLESHOOTING
None.
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0 Diagnostics
None.
Level 1 Diagnostics
The Device Diagnostic Menu permits you to select PS/2 Qwerty Keyboard, leading to the
tests described below:
l Qwerty Detect Test

l Identity Test
l Qwerty Character Detect Test.
Qwerty Detect Test

This test returns a Hex code when a key is pressed.
Identity Test
Depending on the number and type of keyboards attached, one of the following messages
will be displayed:
l “Multiple Keyboards”
l “HID Keyboard Device”
l “Standard 101/102-Key or Microsoft Natural PS/2 Keyboard”.
Qwerty Character Detect Test

This test returns characters associated with the character code for the key pressed.
Note: Non-character keys, such as shift, left/right arrows, are not reported.
Level 3 Diagnostics
The level 3 diagnostics returned for the keyboard are:
S_DATA
The S-DATA returned for the keyboard is:
Tallies
None.
S_DATA
Meaning
00 good (no error)
01 ROUTINE (minor fault)
04 FATAL (requires immediate attention).
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.
CABLING
None.
CONNECTORS
The keyboard is connected to the ATM via a standard PS2 connector.
TEST TOOLS
None.
REVISION

CHINA ENCRYPTING PIN PAD (USBCPIN)
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the USB China Encrypting PIN Pad (USBCPIN) used in the
terminals. The China-EPP hereinafter will be referred as USBCPIN.
The USBCPIN gives protection to the card holder’s Personal Identification Number (PIN)
and of the keys used to verify and encrypt these PINs.
Note: When a new USBCPIN is installed then CE must authorize the USBCPIN for
installation. See Authorise EPP for Installation.
If the CE wants to remove the USBCPIN then the CE must authorize the USBCPIN for
removal. See Authorise for EPP Removal.
DESCRIPTION
The USBCPIN device operates as a USB 2.0 compliant full speed device attached to an
NCR PC Core and consists of the following hardware elements.
l 16 key keyboard
l Integrated USB main board encompassing Secure Cryptographic functions.
There are four possible configurations for the USBCPIN.
l W/O heater, Hong Kong Layout

l With heater, Hong Kong Layout
l W/O heater, Taiwan Layout
l With heater, Taiwan Layout
Note: The USBCPIN hardware does not support FDKs, or a PS/2 or USB QWERTY
keyboard.
Keyboard
The keyboard layout is configured during manufacturing and the USBCPIN main board is
The keyboard will typically have digits 0 to 9 and function keys for clear, cancel, enter and
delete. When hexadecimal data entry is required the PIN pad will operate as a regular
hexadecimal key pad, providing one of 0 to 9 and A to F on any one key. Keys are made of
stainless steel with etch engraving and coloured graphics, front plate is Zinc alloy die
casting frame. All texts on the keypad is black, function keys with coloured graphics
The two different keyboard layouts available are shown below.
HONGKONG LAYOUT TAIWAN LAYOUT
USB Main board

The USBCPIN solution is implemented on a secure System on Chip (SoC). The board
cannot be removed from the keyboard.Any attempt to disassemble the USBCPIN will
result in loss of all data within the security module.
Removal Switches
The USBCPIN incorporates removal switches, which detect the removal of the USBCPIN
from the parent ATM. The USBCPIN device monitors this switch, thus any security actions
can be directly invoked by the USBCPIN. The ATM is notified via a device status change.
USB Interface
The USB interface is integrated into the main board. It supports USB 1.1 and USB 2.0 and
acts as a USB Full Speed device. The device uses a USB Mini B connector and is capable
of driving USB cables up to a maximum of 5m.
Power Requirements
l Power supply: DC +5V ±10%, max 200mA
l DC +24V 1A for Heating; Environment temperature <0 deg C, start the highest
temperature not to exceed 50 deg C in the EPP surface (Optional).
Mechanical Characteristics
l Key lifespan: > 2,000,000 times
l Key bodies are zinc alloy and Keycaps are stainless steel, 12 keys 22 x 17mm with
R8.5 corners and 4 keys 31 x 17mm with R8.5 corners, with a raised dot on the "5"
key, embossing X/0/I and raised braille on function keys for aiding visually
handicapped users
l Key activation force: 2- 3N
l Key trip: >/=0.45mm
l Shell and key body material: zinc alloy
l Static load capacity <1000N
l Keycaps material: stainless steel
l Water-proof device: a watertight gasket, silica material
ERROR MESSAGES
Keys at end Number of key presses detected reaching end of n/a Replace USBCPIN
of life rated life module
Comms USB cable disconnected from USBPIN Check USB cable Re-connect USB
failure cable
USB cable disconnected from USB hub Check USB cable Re-connect USB
cable
USB cable faulty Replace USB cable and Connect USB cable
re-test
Tampered USBCPIN device has detected a tamper condition and n/a Replace USBCPIN
deleted all keys module
Keys at end Number of key presses detected reaching end of n/a Replace FDK Fascia
of life rated life
DIAGNOSTICS
If an alpha keyboard service only is present on the system then the following device
diagnostic tests are available:
l USBCPIN
l Key Detect Test

l PC Keyboard Test
l Key Detect Test

l PC Keyboard Test
All tests are available from the rear panel, even those which require front interaction. Tests
will time out in absence of front keyboard interaction.
Level 0 Diagnostics
There are no level 0 diagnostics for the USBCPIN.
Device Diagnostics
The following level 1 diagnostic tests are available for the USBCPIN.
USBCPIN
This displays a menu of the all the other tests to allow an operator to select one.
Key Detect Test

A message is displayed asking the user to press each of the 16 numeric keys in turn, the
four left FDKs from top to bottom then the four right FDKs from top to bottom.
After each key press is detected the matrix code will be displayed (in hexadecimal). This
test will terminate if no key press is detected within 7 seconds of the previous key press.
values then this test passes, otherwise it results in a fail.
This test can only be conducted if the variant of the installed alpha keyboard service

This tests the physical and link level layers. Bytes of data are sent to the USBPIN feature
which forwards the message to the coredriver. The coredriver performs an Identify
command test in order to verify that the device is able to communicate. In that case, the
coredriver simulates the echo test response which is forwarded by the manager. Thus it
can be verified that the USBCPIN is available for communication. Additionally this test
ensures that response data is twisted and therefore misinterpreted. If there is no response
from the device or the bytes do not match what are expected this test will return a fail.

This test ascertains the identity of the USBCPIN module and displays:
l M-Status
l M-Data
l EPP Type
l Loader Version
l Manufacturer Serial Number
l USBCPIN serial number
l Application Version
l Driver Version
l Tracer Number
l Part Number
l Name\Model Number
l Hardware Version
l Firmware Version
This test will fail when there is no valid serial number or there is no response from the
device. Otherwise the test always results in a pass.
Delete all User Keys

This test deletes all user keys irreversibly, but does not affect the keyspace structure. When
this test is invoked a menu will be displayed offering Yes or No options. The No option will
return the user to the diagnostic menu. The Yes option will display a message box
indicating that all the keys will be deleted irreversibly if the message box OK button is
pressed. If the OK button is not pressed within 10 seconds the operation will be cancelled
and the user returned to the Yes/No menu.
This option should typically be used if the USBPIN is being removed from service. If this
option is selected, the USBCPIN will not function again until customer encryption keys are
reloaded.
This test is only displayed if the Delete All User Keys pre-configuration parameter is
enabled and always results in a pass, except where a timeout occurs when it is considered
not complete.
Report Status Test

This test displays the current status of the USBCPIN including:
l whether the USBCPIN is good, has been tampered or has been removed from the
fascia and requires re-activation
l reporting the current security mode either ‘Secure’ or ‘Maintenance’ option displayed
If the status of the USBCPIN is good then this test returns a pass, any other status returns
a fail.
PC Keyboard Test
Tests whether a PC keyboard key press can be detected.
The test will prompt for a key on the PC keyboard to be pressed. When a key press is
detected the Unicode code point will be displayed in hexadecimal, along with the character
(depending on the font used for the display). The test will terminate if no key press is
detected within 7 seconds of the previous key press.
This test will return a pass if at least one key press has been detected. If no key presses
have been detected then the test returns a fail.
PCI Audit Information Test

This test displays the PCI Audit Information as follow:
l Name\Model Number
l Hardware Version
l Firmware Version
l Loader Version
l Serial Number
Authorize EPP for Removal

This test prepares the EPP Device for a secure physical disassembly from an ATM. Key
commands are locked until the device is authorized for installation again. Following
authorisation removal of the USBCPIN will not result in tamper detection. On the other
hand, it is allowed to securely remove the device from the ATM without fearing to activate
tampering detection.
Authorize EPP for installation

In order to transport an USBCPIN device, key commands have to be locked (see
authorized for removal). After assembling the device on an ATM, key commands can be
reactivated by executing this test.
Device Self Test

The following device self tests are available for the USBCPIN.
USBCPIN
USBCPIN Self Test

The following tests (from the diagnostics tests) are performed for the self test:
1. A communications echo test command is sent to the ENCRYPTOR service. If this is

unsuccessful then the test is terminated and the test fails.
2. The report status test is used to identify whether there is a reason for the device to
not be fully operational. If this test fails then the test is terminated.
3. The key detect test is executed to ensure that the keyboard part of the pinpad is
operational, as the pinpad is used in the following test. The test is terminated if this
test fails.
4. The encryptor test is used to simulate a transaction, testing both the encryptor and
the overall operation of the device.
Tallies
CONFIGURATION
The USBCPIN supports configuration via the system application. Configuration Settings
are remotely viewable by default. However, they cannot be modified.
The following options are available for the configuration of USBCPIN.
USBCPIN

This test ascertains the identity of the USBCPIN module displaying:
l EPP Type
l Loader Version
l Manufacturer Serial Number
l Serial Number
l Application Version
l NAME\Model Number
l Hardware Version
l Firmware Version
l Part Number.
Delete all User Keys

This test deletes all user keys irreversibly, but does not affect the keyspace structure. When
this test is invoked a menu will be displayed offering Yes or No options. The No option will
return the user to the diagnostic menu. The Yes option will display a message box
indicating that all the keys will be deleted irreversibly if the message box OK button is
pressed. If the OK button is not pressed within 10 seconds the operation will be cancelled
and the user returned to the Yes/No menu.
This option should typically be used if the USBCPIN is being removed from service. If this
option is selected, the USBCPIN will not function again until customer encryption keys are
reloaded. This test is only displayed if the Delete All User Keys pre-configuration
parameter is enabled.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

The USBCPIN module is not a re-workable item and has no serviceable parts therefore
any failure will require a complete replacement module.
When unpacking a spare USBCPIN assembly check for any signs of tampering. If
tampering is suspected then do not install the assembly.
If the assembly is tamper free:
1. Check and record the serial number of the new assembly in the NCR work order
system.
2. Locate the new serial number label.
CAUTION
Ensure that all grounding and safety precautions are followed as per
installation instructions.
Failure to follow the installation instructions may result in incorrect
functioning of the USBCPIN module.
4. Fit the new serial number label to the ATM next to the tracer plate.

CABLING
None.
Shown below are the connection points of the USBCPIN module.
Heater
USB mini B
USB Mini B
Pin Signal
1 -5V
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND
5 SHIELD
Heater
Pin Signal
1 24V
2 0V
None.
None.
UNIVERSAL ENCRYPTING PIN PAD (III)

AND (IV)
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the USB Encrypting Pin Pads III and IV (U-EPP III and IV). Named
U-EPP here within thereafter. The U-EPP provides protection to the card holder’s
Personal Identification Number (PIN) and of the keys used to verify and encrypt these
PINs.
CAUTION
Make sure that ESD precautions are observed.
DESCRIPTION
The U–EPP operate as a USB 2.0 compliant full speed device attached to an NCR PC
Core, uses PCI 3.x firmware features, and consists of the following elements:
l 16 key keyboard
l Integrated USB main board that provides secure cryptographic functions
l Heaters (optional)
Keyboard
The keyboard layout is configured during manufacturing and the U–EPP main board is
The keyboard has digits 0 to 9 and function keys for clear, cancel, enter, and delete. When
hexadecimal entry is required the PIN pad operates as a regular hexadecimal key pad,
providing one of 0 to 9 or A to F on any one key.
USB Main board

The U-EPPsolution is implemented on a secure System on Chip (SoC). The board cannot
be removed from the keyboard.
Any attempt to disassemble the U-EPP results in loss of all data within the security module.
Removal Switches
The removal switches are used to detect removal of the U-EPP from the parent terminal.
The removal switches are normally closed when the U-EPP is fitted in the terminal. The
removal of the U-EPP from the terminal changes the state of the removal switches from
closed to open and automatically deletes the user encryption keys loaded in the U-EPP.
When the removal switches are in open state, PIN encryption operations are rejected and
PIN Entry mode is disabled.
Note: When the U-EPP has no power and is removed from the terminal, the user
encryption keys will be deleted on the next power–up.
A “Reset Removal Switches” command through the system application forces the removal
switches to change state from open to closed state. A transition of the removal switches
from open to closed state automatically activates removal switches monitoring.
USB Interface
The USB interface is integrated into the main board. It supports USB 1.1 and USB 2.0 and
acts as a USB Full Speed device.
The U-EPP uses a USB Mini B connector and is capable of driving USB cables up to
maximum of 5m.
Power Requirements
Voltage Nominal Current Max Current
U-EPP Module USB 5V 140 mA 500mA
Heater 24V 1A
TROUBLESHOOTING
The following error messages are reported by the module. Refer to the sections “Module
Replacement” and “Adjustments” for detailed instructions on FRU actions. To de-code
specific M_Status and M_Data use the Status Code Translator Tool available from
http://www.infoprod.ncr.com or refer to Diagnostic Status Code Notebook (B006-6273).

Keys at end of life Number of key presses detected reaching end N/A Replace U–EPP
of rated life module
Comms failure USB cable disconnected from U–EPP Check USB cable Reconnect USB cable
USB cable disconnected from hub Check USB cable. Reconnect USB cable

USB cable faulty Replace USB cable Connect USB cable
and re–test
Firmware Missing, incorrect or corrupt firmware files on Contact software Re–load firmware files
validation failed hard disk supplier
Firmware update Error updating firmware due to hardware N/A Replace U–EPP
failed failure module
Tampered U–EPP device has detected a tamper condition N/A Replace U–EPP
and deleted all keys module
Requires Device cleared due to firmware update N/A Customer key loading
initialisation procedure
DIAGNOSTICS
For general diagnostic information see the Diagnostics Overview chapter in the
Diagnostics Overview section. To de-code M_status and M_data use the Status Code
Translator Tool (available from http://www.infoprod.ncr.com) or refer to Diagnostic Status
Code Notebook (B006-6273).
Level 0 diagnostics
There are no level 0 diagnostic tests for the U-EPP.
Device Diagnostics
The U-EPP provides the following Device Diagnostic Tests:
l Key Detect Test

l Identify Command Test
l Report Status
l Reset Removal Switches
l PCI Audit Information
l PC Keyboard Test
If only an alpha keyboard service is present in the system, then only the following tests are
available:
l Key detect test

l PC keyboard test
l Key detect test

l Delete all user keys
l PC keyboard test
All tests are available from the rear panel, even those which require front interaction.
Tests will time out in absence of front keyboard interaction.
Key Detect Test

Asks the user to press each of the 16 numeric keys in turn, the four left FDKs from top to
bottom then the four right FDKs from top to bottom.
After each key press is detected the matrix code displays in hexadecimal format. This test
terminates if no key press is detected within 7 seconds from the previous key press.
values then this test passes, otherwise the test fails.
This test can only be performed if the variant of the installed alpha keyboard service

Tests the physical and link level layers of the U-EPP. Bytes of data are first sent to the U-
EPP. The test then verifies whether the U-EPP responds with the same data bytes.
If there is no response from the device or the bytes are not correctly verified, this test
returns a fail.

Displays the following identification information of the U-EPP module:
l Name and model

l Part number and key tip configuration
l U-EPP serial number
l Manufacturer serial number
l U-EPP firmware identifier version
l Hardware version
l Security version
This test fails when there is no valid serial number or there is no response from the device.
Otherwise, this test always results in a pass.
Report Status
Displays the current status of the U-EPP. This includes whether the U-EPP is Good has
been Tampered, or has been removed form the facia and requires re–activation
If the U-EPP is not tampered, this test attempts to report whether there are keys currently
loaded into the encryptor.
If the status for the U-EPP is good then this test returns a pass, any other status returns a
fail.
Reset Removal Switches

Forces a reset of the Removal Switches in the U-EPP.
A confirmation window displays indicating that the removal switches have been
successfully closed.
Once the switches are closed, the U-EPP now monitors the state of the removal switches.
A transition of the switches from closed to open state deletes the user encryption keys and
blocks cryptographic commands.
PCI Audit Information

Displays the following PCI Audit information:
l Name/Model Number
l Hardware Version
l Firmware Version
l Loader Version
l Serial Number

Deletes all user keys. This option is used if the U-EPP is being removed from service. This
option is only displayed if the Delete All User Keys pre–configuration parameter is enabled.
A confirmation message box displays indicating that all the keys will be deleted irreversibly
if the OK button is selected.
If the OK button is not selected within 10 seconds, the operation will be cancelled.
If this operation is completed the U-EPP will not function again until customer encryption
keys are reloaded.
This test always returns a pass, except where a timeout occurs when it is considered not
complete.
PC Keyboard Test
Tests whether a PC keyboard key press can be detected or not.
This test prompts for a key on the PC keyboard to be pressed. When a key press is
detected the Unicode code point is displayed in hexadecimal format, along with the
character (depending on the font used for the display.)
The test terminates if no key press is detected within 7 seconds of the previous key press.
This test returns a pass if at least one key press has been detected. If no key presses have
been detected then test returns a fail.
Device Self Test

The USB U-EPP Self Test performs the following Device Diagnostic tests:

l Report status test
l Key detect test
Refer to the “Device Diagnostic” section for details of the tests.
Tallies
The table below lists the tallies that the U-EPP provides.

STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
The U-EPP supports configuration through the system application. Configuration settings
are remotely viewable by default, however they cannot be modified.
The U-EPP provides the following configuration options:
l Transfer Firmware Files

l Display Version Number
l Select Country Version
Transfer Firmware Files

A memory stick/pen, flex disk or CD–Rom containing U-EPP firmware files is required for
this operation. After the memory stick/pen, flex disk or CD–Rom is inserted it is checked for
U-EPP firmware. Files found are then verified before being copied.
Once files are successfully copied, country version configuration may be required.
A system shutdown and re–boot is required for the changes to take effect.

Displays the following information:
l U-EPP serial number

l MSN and the U-EPP firmware version (repeated if multiple modules are present)
l Security Configuration data
l Top–level part number
Select Country Version

Allows configuration of the country specific firmware versions. The system will prompt for
transfer of any required firmware files.
A system shutdown and re–boot is required for the changes to take effect.

Deletes all user keys. This option is used if the U-EPP is being removed from service. This
option is only displayed if the Delete All User Keys pre–configuration parameter is enabled.
A confirmation message box displays indicating that all the keys will be deleted irreversibly
if the OK button is selected.
If the OK button is not selected within 10 seconds, the operation will be cancelled.
If this operation is completed the U-EPP will not function again until customer encryption
keys are reloaded.
This test always returns a pass, except where a time–out occurs when it is considered not
complete.

The U–EPP module is not a re–workable item and has no serviceable parts, any failure
requires a complete module replacement.
Damaged Assembly Disposal

Disassemble the faulty device removed from the terminal to activate the tamper sensors
and ensure permanent erasure of all sensitive information contained within the device.
When unpacking a spare U-EPP assembly, check for any signs of tampering. If tampering
is suspected then do not install the assembly. Report the event to NCR, follow the
escalation procedure documented in process SSPD.2.5.1_PRO1_WCS_GLOBAL.
If the assembly is tamper free, perform the following steps:
1. Check and record the following information:
l Serial number of the new device
l Serial number of the faulty device
l Confirmation and erasure of sensitive data from faulty device
l Customer Engineer ID
2. Provide the recorded information to the key custodian.
CAUTION
Make sure that the terminal is powered off during the U-EPP
installation until such time the U-EPP is fully fitted to the terminal.
Make sure that all grounding and safety precautions are followed as
per installation instructions.
Failure to follow the installation instruction may result in incorrect
functioning of the U–EPP.
4. Fit the new serial number label to the terminal next to the tracer plate.
Key Loading
Before loading user encryption keys, make sure that the key custodian verifies the
following:
l That the Customer Engineer ID is valid by checking against a list previously provided
by the customer service organisation.
l That the service call work order was scheduled and expected.
l That the U-EPP serial number of the device matches the serial number provided by
NCR.
If the key custodian cannot verify the CE ID, work order, or serial number, then the
customer keys must not be loaded and escalation procedure shall be implemented as per
the customer security policy.
After the user encryption keys are loaded, issue a Reset Removal Switches command
through System Application to ensure that the removal switches are closed and PCI 3.x
compliant firmware features are active.
CABLING
None.
The illustration below shows the connector assignments for the U-EPP.
None.
None.
REVISION
April 2018 A.2 Updated for U-EPP IV

9. DISPLAYS
Standard Brightness Colour Displays 617
Sunlight Readable Colour Displays 627
Revision 637
Backlight Displays 638
Universal 12.1” and 15” Touchscreens 643
15 inch Touchscreen 665
Graphical Operator Panel 674
Compact Operator panel 681
Surface Wave Touchscreen 692
Tilting Display 698
STANDARD BRIGHTNESS COLOUR

DISPLAYS
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the 12.1 inch, 15 inch, and 15 inch scaleable Standard Brightness
Colour Liquid Crystal Displays (LCD) modules used in the NCR ATMs.
12.1 Inch Display

15 Inch Display
15 Inch Scaleable Display
The 12.1 inch and 15 inch displays are available with or without heater. The LCD modules
are self-contained replaceable units capable of displaying computer generated graphics,
and text. LCD interface signals are provided by the core.
The 15 inch scaleable display is available with or without thermal management. This
display is capable of displaying high resolution, high colour, computer-generated text,
graphics and video images supplied through a PC-compatible RGB analogue 15 pin D-sub
interface and DVI interface. The 15 inch scaleable display allows you to switch to a 12.1”
viewing diagonal through the On-Screen Display (OSD) main menu.
DESCRIPTION
Display Illumination
Two integral cold-cathode fluorescent lamps provide back illumination of the LCD panel.
Temperature Control
Air is drawn through an external filter into the display interior by fan(s), (one in the 12.1 inch
display and two in the 15 inch and 15 inch scaleable displays). The fan(s) are controlled by
a circuit incorporating a thermistor placed at the exhaust vent at the top of the casing in the
12.1 inch and 15 inch displays. The thermistor is located at the exhaust vent at the bottom
of the 15 inch scaleable display. The speed of the fan(s) is increased to provide cooling
when the display is heated by the sun.
Displays Without a Heater - 12.1 inch and 15 inch Displays Only

The fan(s) will still provide a gentle airflow even when the display is exposed to extreme
cold.
Displays With a Heater

The display incorporates an internal heater as part of the thermal management system to
prevent the interior of the glass or touchscreen from freezing on the inner surface at
exterior temperatures from -35O C. The heater circuit is controlled by a thermistor PCB
located on a plate behind the ATM speaker on the interior of the facia. This is connected to
the external sensor connector on the back of the display. The fan(s) in the displays with a
heater will increase in speed when the heater is on.
Power Requirements
Power is supplied from the Standard Power Supply Unit via a 2-way power connect cable.
TROUBLESHOOTING
To ensure an unimpeded airflow through the display casing, clean or renew the foam air
filter at a preventive maintenance call to the ATM. On the 12.1 inch display the filter can be
removed by using a screwdriver to lever out the plastic holder until it unclips from the inner
part while on the 15 inch and 15 inch scaleable the filter retainer is held by two screws.
Vacuum or tap out the dust from the filter or fit a new filter.
DIAGNOSTICS
Module Error Messages
The following error messages are reported by the displays.
Error Mesages Display Type Corrective Action

USB 15 inch scaleable Check USB cable at the display and at the hub. Check the power cable at
Communications only the display and at the power supply. Re-connect or replace if necessary.
Failure
Video Signal 15 inch scaleable Check the VGA cable at the display. Re-connect or replace if necessary.
Fault 15 inch 12.1 inch
Scalar Running 15 inch scaleable Replace the display.
Failed only
Major Lamps 15 inch scaleable Check the lamps. Replace the display.
Fault 15 inch 12.1 inch
Major Display 15 inch scaleable Check the display. Replace the display.
Failure 15 inch 12.1 inch
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
Set-Up Instructions
These set-up instructions are provided to allow field adjustment to optimize the display
using the system board fitted to the ATM.
CAUTION
It is essential that no adjustment be made of any functions other
than Image Vertical Position, Image Horizontal Position and Image
Size - Horizontal. Alteration of settings in other functions requires
the use of a PC-based test tool at rework centres.
There are no internal adjustments that can be made. All adjustments are made through the
rear control PCB and the On Screen Display Menu.
WARNING
Do not open the display casing, there are hazardous voltages
present.
Warm-up
Allow the display to warm-up in the ATM for twenty minutes so that the temperature of the
display and system board stabilises before adjustments are attempted.
On-Screen Display Parameters

The display parameters are adjusted using the three buttons located at the rear of the
display, as shown below.
Note: NCR recommend setting the display parameters and display scaling before securing
the display in place. Attempting to adjust the three buttons whilst viewing the display can be
difficult when the display is secured in position.
MENU
-
-
-
1. Press the MENU button to display the On-Screen Display (OSD) main
menu.Various menus are available within the OSD main menu.
2. Press the + and - buttons to scroll through the main menu and sub-menu function
lists.
3. Press the MENU button to select a function from the list.
4. Press the + and - buttons to make the required adjustment.
5. Press the MENU button to save the setting.
6. Repeat the procedure for the remaining functions.

7. Press MENU button to select exit from the menu, saving the settings.
Setting the Display Scaling - 15 Inch Scaleable Display Only

The following instructions detail how to change the scaling size on the 15 inch scaleable
display.
Note: If you press the MENU button first you will activate the On-Screen Display (OSD)
and the main menu will appear.
1. Press the + and - buttons simultaneously and hold them in.

2. Press and hold in the MENU button for approximately 4 seconds. The Factory Menu
appears.
3. Release the +, - and MENU buttons.
4. Press and release the + or - buttons to cycle through the options to highlight the
Screen Size option.
5. Press the MENU button. The screen size selection sub-menu appears at the right
hand side.
6. Press the + or - buttons to highlight the appropriate screen size.
7. Press the MENU button to set the highlighted screen size. The common LCD
display module changes to the display the scaling size you set.
8. Press the + or - buttons to highlight the Exit option.
9. Press the MENU button to exit.

There are no field serviceable parts inside the display. Failed units should be returned for
repair.
CABLING
There is no field replaceable internal cabling.
The position of the connectors on the back of the display modules is shown in the following
illustrations.
12.1 Inch Display

Without Heater
Data Signal
Connector
Menu
Ground
Remote Diagnostics
Power Connector
With Heater
External Sensor
Data Signal
Connector
Menu
Remote Diagnostics
Power
15 Inch Display
Without Heater
Menu
Power
Data Signal
Connector Remote Diagnostics
Note: The LDR and RJ11 connectors are not used with the 15 inch Standard Brightness
Colour Display.
With Heater
External Sensor
Menu
Data Signal Connector
Remote Diagnostics Power

With Thermal Management
Menu Power Connector
External Sensor
Without Thermal Management
Menu
Power Connector
Without Thermal Management - Low Cost
Menu
Power Connector
Power Connector
12.1 inch and 15 inch Displays
The 2-way power connector on the 12.1 and 15 inch LCDs have the following pinout:
Pin Description
1 +24V RTN
2 +24V RTN

The data signal connector is a 15-way connector with the following pinout:
5 1
10 6
15 11
12.1 & 15 inch 15 inch Scaleable 15 inch Scaleable Low Cost

Pin Description Pin Description Pin Description
1 RED 1 RED 1 RED
2 GREEN 2 GREEN 2 GREEN
3 BLUE 3 BLUE 3 BLUE
4 NC 4 MONITOR ID BIT 2 4 MONITOR ID BIT 2
12.1 & 15 inch 15 inch Scaleable 15 inch Scaleable Low Cost

Pin Description Pin Description Pin Description
5 GND 5 GND 5 GND
6 GND 6 GND 6 GND
7 GND 7 GND 7 GND
8 GND 8 GND 8 GND
9 NC 9 NC 9 DDC +5v SUPPLY
10 GND 10 GND 9 GND
11 GND 11 GND 10 GND
12 DATA 12 DATA 11 DATA
13 H-SYNC 13 H-SYNC 12 H-SYNC
14 V-SYNC 14 V-SYNC 13 V-SYNC
15 CLOCK 15 CLOCK 14 CLOCK
15 inch Scaleable LCD

The 2-way power connector on the 15 inch scaleable LCD (viewed looking into the
connector) has the following pinout:
Pin Description
1 +24V DC
2 GND
TOOLS
Vacuum cleaner for filter cleaning (optional).
SUNLIGHT READABLE COLOUR DISPLAYS
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the 12.1 inch, 15 inch and 15 inch scaleable Sunlight Readable
Colour Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) modules used in the NCR ATMs.
12.1 Inch Display

15 Inch Display
The 12.1 inch and 15 inch displays are available with or without heater. The LCD modules
are self-contained replaceable units capable of displaying computer generated video,
graphics, and text. LCD interface signals are provided by the core.
The 15 inch scaleable displays are available with or without thermal management. This
display is capable of displaying high resolution, high colour, computer-generated text,
graphics and video images supplied through a PC-compatible RGB analogue 15 pin D-sub
interface and DVI interface. The 15 inch scaleable display allows you to switch to a 12.1”
viewing diagonal through the On-Screen Display (OSD) main menu.
DESCRIPTION
12.1 and 15 Inch Displays
A bank of U-shaped cold-cathode fluorescent lamps provide back illumination of the LCD
panel. Brightness of the lamps is automatically adjusted by a circuit connected to an LDR
resistor that senses the ambient light falling on the display. The LDR resistor for the 15 inch
display is located within the front of the display and all wiring is inside the display casing.

Standard brightness is provided by four edge lit CCF lamps. Sunlight readability is
achieved by the reflective part of the display, that is, the brighter the light shining on the
panel the brighter the screen. There is no LDR resistor on this display.
Temperature Control
Air is drawn through an external filter into the display interior by fan(s), (one in the 12.1 inch
display, three in the 15 inch display and two in the 15 inch scaleable display). The fan(s) are
controlled by a circuit incorporating a thermistor placed at the exhaust vent at the top of the
casing in the 12.1 inch and 15 inch display. The thermistor is located at the exhaust vent at
the bottom of the casing in the 15 inch scaleable display. The speed of the fan(s) is
increased to provide cooling when the display is heated by the sun.
Displays Without a Heater - 12.1 Inch and 15 Inch Displays Only

When the display is exposed to extreme cold, the fan(s) will still provide a gentle airflow
even when the display is exposed to extreme cold.
Displays With a Heater

The display incorporates an internal heater as part of the thermal management system to
prevent the interior of the glass or touchscreen from freezing on the inner bezel surface at
exterior temperatures from -35O C. The heater circuit is controlled by a thermistor PCB
located on a plate behind the ATM speaker on the interior of the facia. This is connected to
the external sensor connector on the back of the display. The fan(s) in the displays with a
heater will increase in speed when the heater is on.
Power Requirements
Power is supplied from the Standard Power Supply Unit via a 2-way power connect cable.
TROUBLESHOOTING
To ensure an unimpeded airflow through the display casing, clean or renew the foam air
filter at a preventive maintenance call to the ATM. On the 12.1 inch display the filter can be
removed by using a screwdriver to lever out the plastic holder until it unclips from the inner
part, while on the 15 inch the filter retainer is held by two screws.
Vacuum or tap out the dust from the filter or fit a new filter.
DIAGNOSTICS
The following error messages are reported by the displays. Refer to the “Module Removal
and Replacement” section for instructions on replacing the module.
Error Mesages Display Corrective Action

Type
USB 15 inch Check USB cable at the display and at the hub. Check the power cable at
Communications scaleable the display and at the power supply. Reconnect or replace if necessary.
Failure only
Video Signal 15 inch Check the VGA cable at the display. Re-connect or replace if necessary.
Fault scaleable
15 inch
12.1 inch
Scalar Running 15 inch Replace the display.
Failed scaleable
only
Major Lamps 15 inch Check the lamps. Replace the display.
Fault scaleable
15 inch
12.1 inch
Major Display 15 inch Check the display. Replace the display.
Failure scaleable
15 inch
12.1 inch
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
Set-Up Instructions
These set-up instructions are provided to allow field adjustment to optimize the display
CAUTION
It is essential that no adjustment be made of any functions other
than Image Vertical Position, Image Horizontal Position and Image
Size - Horizontal. Alteration of settings in other functions requires
the use of a PC-based test tool at rework centres.
There are no internal adjustments that can be made. All adjustments are made through the
rear control PCB and the On Screen Display Menu.
WARNING
present.
Warm-up
Allow the displays to warm-up in the ATM for twenty minutes so that the temperature of the
display and system board stabilises before adjustments are attempted.

The display parameters are adjusted using the three buttons located at the rear of the
display, as shown below.
Note: NCR recommend setting the display parameters and display scaling before securing
the display in place. Attempting to adjust the three buttons whilst viewing the display can be
difficult after the display is secured in position.
MENU
-
-
-
1. Press the MENU button to display the On-Screen Display (OSD) main
menu.Various menus are available within the OSD main menu.
2. Press the + and - buttons to scroll through the main menu and sub-menu function
lists.
3. Press the MENU button to select a function from the list.
4. Press the + and - buttons to make the required adjustment.
5. Press the MENU button to save the setting.
6. Repeat the procedure for the remaining functions.
7. Press MENU button to select exit from the menu, saving the settings.
Setting the Display Scaling - 15 Inch Scaleable Display Only

The following instructions detail how to change the scaling size on the 15 inch scaleable
display.
Note: If you press the MENU button first you will activate the On-Screen Display (OSD)
and the main menu will appear.
1. Press the + and - buttons simultaneously and hold them in.

2. Press and hold in the MENU button for approximately 4 seconds. The Factory Menu
appears.
3. Release the +, - and MENU buttons.
4. Press and release the + or - buttons to cycle through the options to highlight the
Screen Size option.
5. Press the MENU button. The screen size selection sub-menu appears at the right
hand side.
6. Press the + or - buttons to highlight the appropriate screen size.
7. Press the MENU button to set the highlighted screen size. The common LCD
display module changes to the display the scaling size you set.
8. Press the + or - buttons to highlight the Exit option.
9. Press the MENU button to exit.

There are no field serviceable parts inside the display. Failed units should be returned for
repair.
CABLING
The position of the connectors on the rear of the display modules is shown in the following
illustrations:
12.1 Inch Display

Without heater
Data Signal
Connector
Menu
Ground
Remote Diagnostics
Power Connector
With heater
External Sensor
Data Signal
Connector
Menu
Remote Diagnostics
Power
15 Inch Display
Without heater
Menu
Power
Remote Diagnostics Data Signal Connector
With heater
External Sensor
Menu
Remote Diagnostics Power

Without Thermal Management Unit
Menu
Power Connector
VGA Connector
With Thermal Management Unit
Menu
Power Connector
External Sensor
VGA Connector
Power Connector
12.1 inch and 15 inch Displays
The 2-way power connector on the 12.1 and 15 inch LCDs have the following pinout:
Pin Description
1 +24V RTN
2 +24V RTN
15 inch Scaleable Display

The 2-way power connector on the 15 inch scaleable LCD (viewed looking into the
connector) has the following pinout:
Pin Description
1 +24V DC
2 GND

12.1 and 15 Inch Displays
The data signal connector on the display is a 15-way connector with the following pinout:
12.1 & 15 inch 15 inch Scaleable

1 RED 1 RED
2 GREEN 2 GREEN
3 BLUE 3 BLUE
4 NC 4 MONITOR ID BIT 2
5 GND 5 GND
6 GND 6 GND
7 GND 7 GND
8 GND 8 GND
9 NC 9 NC
10 GND 10 GND
11 GND 11 GND
12 DATA 12 DATA
13 H-SYNC 13 H-SYNC
14 V-SYNC 14 V-SYNC
15 CLOCK 15 CLOCK
TOOLS
REVISION

BACKLIGHT DISPLAYS
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the 7.0 inch and 10.4 inch colour backlight displays. These TFT-
LCD panels are self-contained replaceable units.
DESCRIPTION
l Signal Interface: LVDS
l Power consumption (Typical): 7 inch - 3.7W, 10 inch - 4.7W
l Display Colours: 262K/16.2M (6-bit / 6-bit + FRC)
l Input Voltage VDD (Typical): 3.3V
l Operating Temperature: -30° to 85° C
l Storage Temperature: -30° to 85° C
Interface Connections
CAUTION
Disconnect the power supply before inserting or removing the LVDS
connector.
CAUTION
When inserting or removing the LVDS Connector, do not rotate or
tilt the connector.
7.0 inch Display
1 LVDS Connector
20
4
1
Backlight Connector
10.4 inch Display
LED Driver
Light Bar Connector
3
Connector
1
1 5
20
1 LVDS Connector
ERROR MESSAGES
None.
DIAGNOSTICS
For diagnostics, refer to Diagnostics Overview section of this manual.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

There are no field replaceable parts in the displays.
CABLING
7.0 Inch Display
LVDS Connector
1 VDD 11 RxIN3-
2 VDD 12 RxIN3+
3 UD 13 GND
4 LR 14 RxCLKIN-
5 RxIN1- 15 RxCLKIN+
6 RxIN1+ 16 GND
7 GND 17 SEL68
8 RxIN2- 18 NC
9 RxIN2+ 19 RxIN4-
10 GND 20 RxIN4+
Backlight Connector
Pin Signal
1 GND
2 ON/OFF (3.3V on, GND off)
3 Dimming (Analog 0-5V)
4 VDD (12V Power Input)
10.4 Inch Display

LVDS Connector
1 VDD 11 RxIN2-
2 VDD 12 RxIN2+
3 GND 13 GND
4 DPS 14 RxCLKIN-
5 RxIN0- 15 RxCLKIN+
6 RxIN0+ 16 GND
7 GND 17 RxIN3-
8 RxIN1- 18 RXIN3+
9 RxIN1+ 19 RSV
10 GND 20 SEL68
LED Driver Connector

Pin Signal
1 VCC (12V input)
2 GND
3 ON/OFF (5V on, 0V off)
4 Dimming (PWM)
5 NA
Light Bar Connector

Pin Signal
1 LED anode (red)
2 LED cathode (white)
3 LED cathode (black)
None.
None.
UNIVERSAL 12.1” AND 15”

TOUCHSCREENS
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the 12.1 inch and 15 inch touchscreens used in the NCR 663x
ATM’s.
The projected capacitive technology used in these touchscreens permits them to be used
for accurate touch detection in exterior TTW situations as well as the in-lobby and vestibule
environment.
The touchscreens are suitable for use with displays with a viewing area of 12.1 inches
(307mm) diagonal and 15 inches (381 mm) diagonal respectively.
The touchscreens have anti-glare, toughened glass on the front viewing face and a
projected capacitive touch sensor. They are available in privacy and non-privacy variants.
DESCRIPTION
The touchscreen controller, contained within the unit bezel, effectively divides the screen
into sensing cells to a resolution of 1 mm2, or less which are formed using microfine wire.
The wires are connected to the touchscreen controller and an oscillating frequency signal is
applied.
Touching the glass causes a change in the frequency of the signal at the point touched. The
co-ordinates of the point are then calculated by the controller.
Since the toughened glass in front of the touchscreen sensor is non-conductive, it does not
prevent the position of a conductive object (finger, or even gloved finger) being detected
and calculated.
Interface
The output from the touchscreen controller is terminated in a USB mini B connector socket.
A USB cable connects the touchscreen to one of the USB hubs in the PC Core or separate
USB hub.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Fault Finding
There are no serviceable parts within the touchscreen. If the unit fails to operate, check
connections from the touchscreen to the PC Core and replace the touchscreen if
necessary. Alternatively, the fault could be in the PC Core motherboard or in the USB
harness.
DIAGNOSTICS
Self Test
A simple self test of the touchscreen sensors can be carried out on demand, by selecting
TOUCHSCREEN from the Device Self Test Menu. When the RUN TEST button is
selected either individually or in conjunction with other Self Tests, the screen prompts the
user to touch anywhere. On completion of the self test, the result is displayed on a
summary report, together with any other simultaneous tests.
Calibrating the Touchscreen

Selecting SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION from the SELF SERVICE
CONFIGURATION menu and selecting TOUCHSCREEN will display the touchscreen
window shown below.
The bottom right of the window confirms that the USB data connection is OK.
The following calibration procedures should be undertaken when:
l The terminal is initially installed.

l The touchscreen is replaced or moved.
l The touch area on the screen does not line up with the corresponding image.
l The monitor position is adjusted.
Note: Ensure that all modules are fully racked in and operating normally before calibrating
the touchscreen.
Touch the “Calibrate” button on the right-hand side of the window.
A screen is displayed with a red target at the top left and the words “Please place your
finger firmly on the target”, as shown above. Hold your finger in the centre of the target until
one bleep is heard and “Please remove your finger from the target” is displayed.
Note: When calibrating the touchscreen, extend one finger, preferably the index finger,
such that the pad of the fingertip is in contact with the glass. Take care not to let the other
fingers, thumb or rest of the hand approach the touchscreen ahead of the extended finger:
The target then moves to a position top right of the screen (as shown in the following
illustration), then bottom right of the screen. Repeat the touch procedure for each target
position.
On completion of the calibration, the display will return to the touchscreen window. Touch
“Exit with Saving” to save the calibration and close the touchscreen window or the
“Calibrate” button to conduct another calibration.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
Configuring and Adjusting the Touchscreen
The touchscreen window lets you set or adjust the operation of the touchscreen. Any
settings or adjustments made can be saved and the touchscreen window closed by
touching the “Exit With Saving” button on the right-hand side of the window. Alternatively,
touching the “Exit Without Saving” button will close the window without implementing any
changes made.
Using the Keypad to Calibrate/Adjust the Touchscreen

The user keypad can be used as an alternative to touching the screen in the event of a
touchscreen error, as follows:
Note: The “Exit Without Save” button is the active area by default. Pressing the user
ENTER key at any time while the Calibration window is displayed will close the window
without changing the existing calibration or settings of the touchscreen.
In the event of the touchscreen being inoperable for any reason, you can use the Tab key
and navigation keys on an external keyboard connected to the PC core, in the same way as
a standard Windows interface, to select the “Calibrate” or “Exit With Saving” buttons, or to
select other tab or screen options.
Setting the User Button Behaviour
The User Actions window is displayed automatically when you first enter the touchscreen
window. If one of the other configuration options is required, touch the relevant tab at the
top of the window and refer to the appropriate procedure
The User Actions function allows you to emulate the actions of a mouse but using a finger
on the touchscreen. Under normal ATM operating conditions, the User Button Behaviour is
set to ‘Click on touch’. However, you can set the behaviour to any one of the following
options, by touching the appropriate radio button.
l Click on Touch
l Click on Release
l Drag and Drop
l Double Click.
Note: When you select the “Calibrate” button, the User Button Behaviour is “Click on
touch” irrespective of the option selected.
Click on Touch
This is the default action and is equivalent to pointing the screen cursor and clicking a
mouse button. When this option is selected, touching the front glass will immediately
activate the response equivalent to the point touched.
Click on Release
This option activates the response equivalent to the point touched only when the finger is
removed from the point.
Drag and Drop

This option allows you to point to a movable object on the screen and to move it by dragging
your finger in any direction within the screen area, then removing your finger.
Double Click
This option allows you to emulate the action of a double mouse click by touching the front
glass twice within 500 milliseconds. However, since it is unlikely that exactly the same pixel
on the screen can be touched twice in succession, a factor of error (Proximity) is set
(Default 20 pixels). Touching the screen twice within 500 milliseconds and within the set
proximity of the first touch will activate the double click response equivalent to the touched
point. You can increase, or decrease the Proximity using the “+” or “-” buttons on the
Double Click area of the window. The double click time of 500 milliseconds is not
adjustable.
Adjusting For Cursor Offset

This following description is provided for information only, since the cursor offset is unlikely
to require adjustment during normal operating conditions.
The “Offset” function allows you to correct any horizontal or vertical offset between the
screen cursor and the touch point.
Adjust the cursor offset using the Cursor Up, Down, Left and Right buttons on the Modifiers
area of the window. The amount of offset applied is shown on the scale on the right of the
area. (Blue - Vertical, Red - Horizontal). The default value is 0.
Adjusting the Screen Boundaries

Note: The function represented by the “Advanced” window is unlikely to be required for
normal field adjustments of the touchscreen.
The “Advanced” function allows you to adjust the horizontal and vertical boundaries of the
touchscreen. The operation of the dotted lines and “+” and “-” buttons is explained on the
“Advanced” window.
Examining the Touchscreen Wire Values

The “Wire Values” function allows you to examine the signal values on each of the
horizontal and vertical sensing wires of the touchscreen and is used as a diagnostic tool
when investigating problems with the touchscreen.
The “Wire Values” function is activated by firstly connecting either a PS2 or USB keyboard
into the ATM and then pressing the Shift and F10 keys to activate the wire values menu
screen. The menu option is deactivated by pressing the Shift and F10 keys.
Touch any non-active area of the screen to display the signal strength at the point touched,
as shown below.
The top scale (red) shows the signal strengths on the horizontal sensor wires and the
bottom scale (blue) shows the signal strengths on the vertical sensor wires.
It is normal to see signal activity at a much lower level on wires other than the area touched.
However, the peak value (vertical and horizontal) represents the signal levels at the
touched point.
CABLING
None.
None.
None.

Access
Access to the rear of the fascia is gained by removing the cabinetry side panels if the
service footprint allows sufficient clearance. If insufficient clearance is available access can
be gained from the front of the ATM after the two spring latches holding the Touchscreen
Bezel and Display assembly have been released.
Touchscreen Replacement (Rear Access)

Replace the Touchscreen assembly as follows:
Note: Retain all removed screws and brackets for use with the replacement Touchscreen.
1. Remove and discard the two shipping screws if fitted.

2. Disconnect the Power and Signal cables from the LCD.
3. Disengage and lock out the two spring loaded plungers by pulling them out and
turning 90 degrees.
Retaining
Wires
Shipping Screws
Spring Loaded
Plunger
Spring Loaded
Latch
4. Remove the LCD by lifting upwards and backwards clear the latches.
5. Activate the two spring loaded catches which will allow the Touchscreen assembly
to move forwards. The two retaining wires will prevent the module from falling out.
6. Disconnect the Touchscreen USB connector.
7. Release the two retaining wires from the fascia and lift the Touchscreen assembly
clear of the ATM.
Touchscreen Replacement (Front Access)

1. From the rear of the ATM activate the two spring loaded latches which will allow the
Touchscreen/LCD assembly to move forwards. The two retaining wires will prevent
the module from falling out.
2. From the front of the ATM remove the two shipping screws.
3. Release the LCD assembly by disengaging and locking out the two spring loaded
plungers, this is done by pulling them out and turning 90 degrees.
4. Slide the LCD clear of the Touchscreen assembly and place inside ATM.
5. Disconnect the Touchscreen USB connector. The access is gained from below by
pushing the top of the module back towards the fascia and lifting the bottom of the
module upwards.
6. The Touchscreen assembly can now be removed by releasing the retaining wires.
7. Replacement of the Touchscreen is the reverse of the above procedures.
15 INCH DYNAMO DISPLAYS
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the 15 inch Dynamo Displays (Standard Bright and Sunlight
Readable) and Thermal Management Module (TMM).
DESCRIPTION
15 Inch Dynamo Displays
Dynamo 15 inch Standard Bright and Sunlight Readable displays will display at least
262,144 colours (6 bit colour) and will automatically scale VGA, SVGA and XGA formats to
fill the entire viewable area of the display.
The key functional elements of displays are listed below.
l Video Controller Board - The video board includes a digital interface for DVI and an
analog interface for VGA. The scaling processor supports VGA, SVGA, XGA, and
SXGA resolutions from the PC Core. It also consists of LVDS and Back Light
interfaces for the LCD panel.
l OSD Button Board - This is where the OSD controls can be accessed. The OSD
buttons are SWB1(Menu), SWB2(Select), SWB3(Up) and SWB4(Down).
l FSD Personality Board - The FSD personality board includes thermal management
control, 4-port USB Hub(3 ports for external use and 1port for microcontroller), DC-
DC power management system and also contains flash based C8051F387
microcontroller.
l Dynamo Display Chassis - The chassis supports the Back Light LCD Panel, Video
Controller Board, OSD Button Board and FSD personality Board. On the Sunlight
Readable display it also supports the Internal temperature sensor board.
l DC/AC Inverter Board - Sunlight Readable display only. This device is a DC-AC
Inverter unit for four CCFL lamps. It has brightness function, a sensing function for
running out of lamp (alarm output) and shutdown function.
Thermal Management Module (TMM)

The TMM is used along with Dynamo Displays to allow forced air cooling of the LCD panel
when under thermal load. The TMM firmware functionality is intended to maintain display
panel temperature within the range of 10°C to 40°C. TMM is physically 'module swap'
compatible with the existing products that use Dynamo or GDS displays. Also TMM is
specific to Dynamo or GDS displays and not compatible with each other.
When the panel is heated by the sun, air is pulled through the filter situated at the rear of the
cabinet by the fans mounted internally. The flow of air is directed over the top of the display
and then down the face of the LCD panel across the full width of the viewing area,
eventually exhausting from the bottom of the Display/TMM module when assembled in a
Product with an exterior Touchscreen or FDK bezel assembly. When the panel is cooled by
low temperature, the heater ensures the panel is kept within correct operating conditions.
Temperature values acquired from the heater, internal, & external temperature sensors
are used to trigger the heater ON/OFF for maintaining bezel within the desired temperature
limits. If internal temperature sensor fails, external temperature sensor is used to control
the heater and vice versa. If all the temperature sensors fail, the heater should never switch
ON. The temperature sensors are listed below.
l Front Sensor
l Heater Sensor
l External Sensor (present only on specific products)
Power Requirements
The Dynamo Display receives power from the external +24V DC supply with parameters
+24V ±10% tolerance, and 4.0 A current maximum. It then supplies power for the TMM
and the external USB devices.
Warm-up Time
The Dynamo Displays and TMM units shall warm up and achieve full operating
specification within twenty (20) minutes of power being applied to the unit under normal
operating conditions. This time shall apply even in the event of momentary loss of power.
CONFIGURATION
Dynamo Display
The Dynamo 15 inch display interfaces to the PC Core via two cables: a USB cable for
USB upstream, and a DVI or VGA cable for video communications. The Displays will
support the configuration below:
PC Core 15in Dynamo
USB Mini-B USB
VGA Port VGA
DVI Port DVI
+24V
+24V DC Supply
ERROR MESSAGES
None.
DIAGNOSTICS
None.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
Dynamo Display
The unit is equipped with controls to allow adjustment of the picture set-up. These controls
are located on the rear of the unit and will allow the following adjustments:
l Contrast
l Phase
l Vertical Image Position
l Horizontal Image Position
l Clock

The Dynamo Displays and Thermal Management Module are "module-swap" units. These
modules are not re-workable and have no serviceable parts, therefore, any failure will
require a complete replacement module.
Thermal Management Module (TMM)

To replace TMM assembly from the Display unit which is already removed from the
product.
1. Identify the 6 mounting screws securing the TMM to the Display and remove them
as appropriate.
2. Identify and remove the Internal Sensor cable connector from the Display.
Internal Sensor Cable
3. Remove the nut on the Display mounting bracket and then take out the sensor
bracket.
Display Mounting Bracket
Sensor Bracket
4. Lift the TMM assembly and then detach the Fan and Heater conectors from Display
assembly.
Heater
Fan
Fan
5. Replace the TMM assembly and put back all the connectors and fasteners.
Display
TMM
Display Mounting
Bracket

Damaged or defective assemblies must be returned to the customer for disposal according
to their disposal procedures.
Dynamo Display
l USB ports - The 15 inch Dynamo Display has four USB 2.0 ports. The mini USB port
is reserved for the C8051F387 microcontroller and the other three are for external
USB ports each with a capability of supplying up to 500mA.
l VGA Connector - The Video Graphics Array (VGA) connector is a three-row 15-pin
DE-15 connector.
l DVI Connector - The Digital Video Interface (DVI) connector for the video board is
the DVI-I (integrated - digital and analog) connector.
l Sensor Connector - Front/Heater Sensor cable or the External Sensor cable can be
attached here.
Sensor Connector
Sensor Connector
mini B USB Type A

DVI-I Dual USB
VGA Power Type A USB
l Heater Connector - This connects the heater element from TMM to Display.
l Fan Connectors - This connects the two fans in TMM to the Display.
Heater
Fan
Fan
Mini B USB Port

Pin Name Description
1 VBUS +5V
2 D- Data-
3 D+ Data+
4 ID None
5 GND Signal Ground
Type A USB Single Connector

1 USBPWR +5V
2 USBD- Data-
3 USBD+ Data+
4 USBGND Signal Ground
Type A USB Dual Connector

1 USB1PWR +5V
2 USB1- Data1-
3 USB1+ Data1+
4 USB1GND Signal Ground
5 USB2PWR +5V
6 USB2- Data2-
7 USB2+ Data2+
8 USB2GND Signal Ground
VGA Connector
1 Red Analog signal input
2 Green Analog signal input
3 Blue Analog signal input
4 Reserved NC
5 GND Ground
6 Red return Ground
7 Green return Ground
8 Blue return Ground
9 5v Supply Supply
10 GND Ground
11 Reserved NC
12 DDC DATA VGA DDC DATA

13 HS Horizontal Sync
14 VS Vertical Sync
15 DDC CLK VGA DDC CLOCK
DVI-I Connector
Pin Name Description Pin Name Description
1 CH2- ½ of Channel 2 differential pair 16 LVHPDET Hot Plug Detect
2 CH2+ ½ of Channel 2 differential pair 17 CH0- ½ of Channel 0 differential pair
3 GND TMDS Data 2/R Shield Ground 18 CH0+ ½ of Channel 0 differential pair
4 NC Unused 2nd DVI Link 19 GND TMDS Data 0/5 Shield Ground
5 NC Unused 2nd DVI Link 20 NC Unused 2nd DVI Link
6 DDC_CLK DVI DDC Clock 21 NC Unused 2nd DVI Link
7 DDC_Data DVI DDC Data 22 GND TMDS Clock Shield Ground
8 VS Vertical Sync / nc 23 CLOCK+ ½ of Clock differential pair
9 CH1- ½ of Channel 1 differential pair 24 CLOCK- ½ of Clock differential pair
10 CH1+ ½ of Channel 1 differential pair 25 Red Red / nc
11 GND TMDS Data 1/3 Shield Ground 26 Green Green / nc
12 NC Unused 2nd DVI Link 27 Blue Blue / nc
13 NC Unused 2nd DVI Link 28 HS Horizontal Sync /nc
14 +5V Power for DDC EEPROM 29 GND Ground
15 GND Ground 30 GND Ground
Temperature Sensor 1
1 +V +5V
2 GND Signal Ground
3 SCL1 I2C Clock
4 SDA1 I2C Data
Temperature Sensor 2
1 +V +5V
2 GND Signal Ground
3 SCL1 I2C Clock
4 SDA1 I2C Data
Fan Control 1
1 +24V +24V Power
2 Fan Fan Speed
Fan Control 2
1 +24V +24V Power
2 Fan Fan Speed
Heater
1 +24V +24V Power
2 Out Heater Out
Power Input
1 +24V +24V Supply
2 GND Power Ground
CABLING
None.
None.
15 INCH TOUCHSCREEN
INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides information on the 15 inch touchscreen.
The touchscreen uses the IntelliTouch(R) CTR-270100-IT-RSU-00R SAW Touchscreen

controller and Surface Acoustic Wave (SAW) technology which permits accurate touch
detection in exterior TTW situations as well as the in-lobby and vestibule environment.
The touchscreen is suitable for displays with a viewing area of 15 inches (381 mm)
diagonal.
DESCRIPTION
Sensor
The sensor is a glass panel with transducers attached to the front surface of the glass. The
cable exits from the left side and is terminated by a 2 x 6, 0.635 mm (0.025 in) square post
receptacle.
Controller
The touchscreen uses the IntelliTouch(R) CTR-270100-IT-RSU-00R SAW Touchscreen
controller which provides a high speed touch input system with high resolution and positive
contact control.
The table below lists the dimensions of the touchscreen controller.
Dimensions Measurement in millimetres

(not including connectors)
Width 53.3
Length 83.8
Height 10.0
USB SAW Feature

The touchscreen uses the USB SAW feature which is a component of the NCR APTRA
XFS Open Software Platform.
SAW technology uses ultrasonic waves that pass through the surface of the screen for
sensing.
The touchscreen controller generates and transmits a high frequency signal to transmitting
transducers. The transmitting transducers convert the electric signal to ultrasonic waves
and transmit them throughout the screen surface.
A finger touching the screen absorbs a small part of the waves and causes a change in the
pattern of the ultrasonic waves. Receiving transducers detect the change and the
touchscreen controller calculates the coordinates of the point where the change occurs.
Interface
A USB mini B interface terminates the output from the touchscreen controller. A USB cable
connects the touchscreen controller to one of the USB ports in the PC Core or separate
USB hub.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Fault Finding
1. If the unit fails to operate, check the following components and their connections:
l USB cable
l Touchscreen controller
l Sensors
2. Replace the components that are found to be faulty or damaged.

3. Check and make sure that the correct drivers for the touchscreen are installed.
DIAGNOSTICS
For general diagnostic information see the “Diagnostics Overview” chapter in the
“Diagnostics Overview” section.
Level 0 Diagnostics
None.
Device Diagnostics
Display Touch Coordinates
Access the System Application menu and select Display Touch Co-ordinates test.
This test displays the last touched point on the screen as a dot with the X and Y pixel
coordinates to verify the correct calibration of the touchscreen.
To complete this test, touch the Cancel area. The test then terminates and returns a pass
or fail condition of 1 (Pass).
If the screen is not touched for 30 seconds, the test terminates and returns a pass or fail
condition of 2 (Not Completed).
Device Self Test

To launch the device self test for the touchscreen, perform the following procedure:
1. Access the System Application menu.

2. Select Device Self Test.
3. Select USB Touch Screen.
This test prompts to touch the screen. If the screen is touched within 5 seconds, the test
completes and returns a pass or fail condition of 1 (Pass).
If a touch is not detected within 5 seconds, the test times out. The test then terminates and
returns a pass or fail condition of 2 (Not Completed).
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
Configuring and Adjusting the Touchscreen
1. Access the System Application menu.
2. Select Set Device Configuration.
3. Select USB Touch Screen to launch the calibration application EloVa.exe.
Note: If the calibration tool file cannot be found, the error is recorded and
configuration is terminated.
4. A series of touchscreen calibration screens displays and prompts the operator to

touch a circular target on three areas of the screen:
5. Top left side of the screen
6. Bottom right side of the screen
7. Top right side of the screen
8. The application waits for a touch on the circular target. If no touch is detected after
30 seconds, the application times out.
9. On completion of the three circular targets, a fourth screen prompts the operator to
touch different areas on the screen.
Touch different areas on the screen to ensure the cursor jumps to where the
fingertip touched.
Note: If the cursor does not jump to the areas the fingertip touched and the
Continue button is pressed, the touch screen is left in an uncalibrated state!
10. Perform either of the following procedures:

Press the Continue (Tick) button to complete the calibration procedure.
or
Press the Retry (Back Arrow) button to repeat the calibration procedure.
The application waits for 30 seconds until the screen is touched, or until the
Continue or Retry button is pressed.
The calibration routine returns a pass or fail condition of 11 (Configuration
Immediate), whether or not the touch screen was successfully calibrated.

There are two field replaceable units for the touchscreen:
l Controller
l Glass
Controller
To remove and replace the controller, perform the procedure below.
1. Disconnect the touchscreen cable from the controller.

2. Remove the four screws securing the controller to its mounting.
Mounting Points
Glass
To remove and replace the glass, perform the following procedure:
1. Disconnect the touchscreen cable from the controller.

2. Remove the glass and replace with a new one.
Note: When handling the glass sensor, hold it at the sides and lift up. Make sure that the
glass does not come into contact with abrasive and rough surfaces.
CABLING
None.
Touchscreen Controller
The illustration below shows the connector assignment of the touchscreen controller.
Serial input/output and

Power Connector
Touchscreen connector
Serial input/output and Power connector (P1)

This connector is a MOLEX 53505-2090, 1.25 mm pitch 20 pin, top contact style
connector.
The table below lists the pin assignments for the P1 connector.
Pin Signal Function Pin Signal Function

1 VBus USB Power 2 GND Ground
3 D- USB D- 4 D+ USB D+
5 Vcc +5V Power 6 GND Ground
7 SDA I2C Data 8 MON_OK Monitor Ok
9 LEDN LED Out 10 RSTN Reset Input
11 DCD Serial Port 12 DSR Serial Port
13 RxD Serial Port 14 RTS Serial Port
15 TxD Serial Port 16 CTS Serial Port
17 DTR Serial Port 18 SCL I2C Clock
19 GND Ground 20 N/C Not connected
Touchscreen connector (P2)

This connector is a 2 x 6, 0.635 mm [0.025 in] square post friction lock header used to
connect the sensor to the controller.
The table below lists the pin assignments of the P2 connector.
2 4 6 8 10 12
1 3 5 7 9 11

1 shield 7 ground
2 Key (N/C) 8 transmit (-)
3 Y receive (+) 9 X receive (-)
4 Y transmit (+) 10 X transmit (+)
5 Y receive (-) 11 receive (+)
6 transmit (-) 12 Key (N/C)

None.
GRAPHICAL OPERATOR PANEL
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the graphical operator panel (GOP) and provides configuration and
maintenance information.
DESCRIPTION
The graphical operator panel is a high-resolution LCD with an integral resistive
touchscreen. It displays 262,144 colours (6 bits/colour) and will automatically scale SVGA
and XGA formats to fill the entire viewable area. The panel is capable of displaying text,
graphics and full motion video, supplied via a DVI-D input. The operator panel allows users
to access System Application and other applications such as Self Service Assistant, which
provides replenishment instructions via text and video leadthrough. Typical tasks
performed using the panel are system configuration, error reporting, fault diagnosis and
replenishment.
The two types of graphical operator panel variants are GOP and uGOP. Shown below are
the images for GOP and uGOP.
GOP uGOP
l The position of the LED indicator for GOP is on the right of the GOP and for uGOP, it
is on the left.
l The position of the OSD buttons are different for both GOP and uGOP. In GOP it is
present in the rear of the panel and in uGOP it is present in the top of the panel.
l The connectors are changed for USB and DC. uGOP has a mini-USB connector
compared to GOP which has a type B USB connector. uGOP has a two pin DC
connector.
l GOP uses USB cable (type A to type B) whereas uGOP uses USB cable (type A to
type mini B).
TROUBLESHOOTING
The graphical operator panel has no power switch or user-accessible reset switch, so
assuming there is power to the panel and all other connections (USB/DVI) are made, the
display should operate.
Status Indicators
The following table explains the status of the panel indicated by the bi-colour Video LED
visible on the graphical operator panel front housing and the ‘Searching Digital’ icon
displayed on the LCD
Video ‘Searching Meaning

Indicator Digital’
Green Displayed DVI video to the panel has ceased. The GOP will enter sleep mode in
approximately one minute if DVI is not restored.
Amber Displayed GOP has been powered up and no DVI signals are present. GOP will enter sleep
mode in approximately one minute if DVI is not found
Green -- DVI video detected. LCD display should be active.
Amber -- DVI video is not detected. LCD may be inactive or displaying a ‘Searching Digital’
message.
Fault Finding
Symptom(s) Possible Cause Action
No display image and video LED not lit. No power. Verify 24V available to the
GOP.
Cable connector not Verify cable housing fully
seated correctly. seated into connector on
GOP.
Internal fuse blown. Replace graphics card.
No display image but video LED is green. Inverter cable or Replace GOP assembly.
backlight inverter cable
faulty.
Display backlight faulty. Inspect cabling and LCD
display. Replace faulty item.
No display image but video LED is amber. No DVI video present to Check DVI cable and PC.
Cycling GOP power displays ‘Searching Digital’. GOP.

No display image but video LED is amber. Image processor Replace graphics card.
Cycling GOP power restores image. crashed.
Non-uniform or dim display image Defective LCD display. Replace GOP assembly.
Display image distorted or mis-framed. PC display properties Reset PC colour pallet and
settings resolution.
Faulty LCD display. Replace GOP assembly.
Faulty video processor Replace graphics card.
board.
Partial or malfunctioning columns or rows. Faulty LCD display. Replace GOP assembly.
Display image is ‘noisy’ but ‘Searching Digital’ Cable connector not Reseat or replace DVI video
image is clean. seated correctly. cable.
PC video card damaged. Repair or replace PC.
Display image and ‘Searching Digital’ image LCD cable or display Replace GOP assembly.
are ‘noisy’. faulty.
Video processor board Replace graphics card.
faulty.
Display shows ‘Out of Range’ error message. PC video resolution set Reset video resolution to
too high. XGA or lower.
Video LED dark but display image OK. Faulty video LED. Replace graphics card.
White screen. LCD cable or display Replace GOP assembly.
faulty.
Video processor board Replace graphics card.
faulty.
No response. Faulty host PC. Inspect, repair or replace PC.
USB cable not Connect or replace USB
connected or faulty. cable.
Faulty touchscreen Replace graphics card.
controller.
Faulty touchscreen. Replace GOP assembly.
Intermittent operation. USB cable not Connect or replace USB
connected or faulty. cable.
controller.
Faulty USB port on PC. Repair or replace PC.
Can’t move cursor to edges of screen. Calibration not set. Run touchscreen calibration.

Cursor movement doesn’t match direction of Faulty touchscreen or Replace GOP assembly.
input. touchscreen cable.
controller.
DIAGNOSTICS
None.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
Calibrating the Panel
1. From the System Application Main Menu select the option Self-Service
Configuration.
3. Select USBGOP to perform the calibration test.
4. A touchscreen target will appear four times. Press the target each time, then repeat
the test when prompted to confirm the calibration.
The test can be carried out on the graphical operator interface or with the application
transferred to the front interface. You will have 90 seconds to perform the test on the rear
panel and 300 seconds to perform the test on the front of the ATM.

The display parameters can be adjusted using 4 push buttons or 3 push buttons (on the
newer style panel).
In GOP the buttons are recessed on the rear of the panel and only accessible using a small
diameter screwdriver or similar implement. In uGOP the buttons are present on the top of
the panel and protrude avoiding the need of a screw driver to access. The buttons are, from
left to right when viewed from the rear of the panel: Down, Up, Select and Menu (4 button
panel), or Down, Up, Select/Menu (3 button panel).
Press the Menu button to display the OSD (on-screen display) menu. Use the Up (+) and
Down (-) buttons to navigate within the menu, and the Select (4 button panel) or
Select/Menu (3 button panel) button to choose from the options. The + and - buttons also
modify selected values, such as the brightness. Press the Menu button again to exit from
menus.

The procedures in this section describe the removal and replacement of Field Replaceable
Units of the Graphical Operator Panels (GOP and uGOP). uGOP includes the Universal
DC & USB connectors. This will require new cables to be fitted as part of the field
replacement. The cable set (DC and USB) will be included in the service kit.
The replacement procedures for GOP and uGOP are:
l Removal and replacement of the graphics card.

l Removal and replacement of the GOP assembly.
Graphics Card
The graphics card is a slot-in card, located in the PC core as indicated by the DVI-D cable
in the following illustration.
GOP Assembly
GOP
1. Disconnect the power, DVI and USB cables from the top rear of the panel
(accessible via the gap in the rear of the panel mounting bracket).
2. Identify the mounting screws and remove as appropriate.
uGOP
1. Disconnect the power, DVI and USB cables from the top rear of the panel
(accessible via the gap in the rear of the panel mounting bracket).
2. Identify the mounting screws and remove as appropriate.
3. The existing DC and USB cables will have to be replaced.
4. Remove the cables from the product taking careful note of routing and any tie points.
5. Replace with the new cable set and ensure the same connection points are made.
CABLING
None.
Connections
GOP
The GOP is powered via the ATM power supply and is also connected to the PC core by a
USB cable (type B to type A port), and by a DVI-D cable for video input.
Shown below are the cable connections point of the GOP on the top rear of the panel
(viewed from above), and the DVI-D cable at the PC Core.
DVI-D
Power USB
uGOP
The uGOP is powered via ATM power supply and uses the same DVI-D cable for video as
GOP but uses the Universal USB cable (type A to type mini B) and DC (2 pin).
Shown below are the cable connections point of the uGOP on the top rear of the panel
(viewed from above), and the DVI-D cable at the PC Core.
DVI-D
mini USB Power
None.
COMPACT OPERATOR PANEL
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the 7–inch Compact Operator Panel (COP) and provides
configuration and maintenance information. The display unit has high-resolution, colour
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) with an integral resistive touchscreen for use within various
NCR terminals.
DESCRIPTION
The compact operator panel is a high–resolution LCD with an integral resistive
touchscreen. It displays 262,144 colours (6 bits/colour) and will automatically scale Wide–
VGA (800 x 480) formats to fill the entire viewable area. The panel is capable of displaying
text, graphics and full motion video, supplied through a DVI–I input.
The operator panel permits users to access the System Application. Typical tasks
performed using the panel are system configuration, error reporting, fault diagnosis and
replenishment.
A LED unit provides backlight illumination to the LCD panel.
Power
The COP is powered by +24 Vdc from the main unit.
Voltage Current
Minimum 10.8 Vdc 0.15 A
Maximum 26.4 Vdc 1A
The COP has no power switch or user–accessible reset switch, so assuming there is power
to the panel, the display should operate.
TROUBLESHOOTING
The following error messages are reported by the module. Refer to the sections “FRU
Removal and Replacement” and “Adjustments” for detailed instructions on FRU actions.
To de–code specific M_Status and M_Data refer to Diagnostic Status Code Notebook
(B006-6273).
Status Indicators
The following table explains the status of the panel indicated by the bi–colour Video LED
visible on the COP front housing.
Video Indicator Meaning

Green DVI video detected. LCD display is active.
Amber DVI video is not detected. LCD is inactive.
Flashing Green DVI video detected. Panel is in sleep mode.
Fault Finding
Symptom(s) Possible Cause(s) Action
No display image and video LED No Power. Verify the 24V available to the COP
not lit. Cable connector not Verify if cable housing is fully seated
properly connected. into COP connector.
Faulty COP Replace COP assembly.
No display image but video LED is Black screen present on DVI Test with replacement COP
green. output. assembly.
Display backlight faulty. Replace COP assembly.
LCD Faulty. Replace COP assembly.
No display image but video LED is No DVI video present to Check DVI cable and PC.
amber. COP.
Symptom(s) Possible Cause(s) Action

Non–uniform or dim display image Defective LCD display. Replace COP assembly.
Display image distorted/ Cable connector not Reconnect DVI connector properly.
noisy/flickering or misframed. properly connected.
Faulty DVI cable or faulty LCD Replace DVI cable or replace COP
display. assembly.
Motherboard Faulty. Check motherboard DVI out.
Replace motherboard.
Partial or malfunctioning columns Faulty LCD display. Replace COP assembly.
or rows.
Video LED unlit but display image Faulty video LED. Replace COP assembly.
OK.
White Screen. Software fault. Check software. Test with a
replacement COP assembly.
DVI cable or display faulty Replace COP assembly.
Motherboard faulty. Replace motherboard.
No touch response. USB cable not connected or Connect or replace USB cable.
faulty.
Software issue. Re–calibrate. Re–install software.
Faulty touchscreen Replace COP assembly.
controller.
Faulty touchscreen. Replace COP assembly.
Faulty host PC. Inspect, repair, or replace PC.
Intermittent touch operation. USB cable not connected or Connect or replace USB cable.
faulty.
Faulty touchscreen Replace COP assembly.
controller.
Faulty USB port on PC. Repair or replace PC. Try another
USB port.
Can’t move cursor to edges of Calibration not set. Run touchscreen calibration.
screen.
Cursor movement doesn’t match Calibration not set. Re–calibrate screen.
direction of input. Faulty touchscreen or Replace COP assembly.
touchscreen controller.
DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostics Overview section. To de–code M_status and M_data or refer to Diagnostic
Status Code Notebook (B006–6273).
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
Set–up Instructions
The set–up instructions are provided to permit field adjustment and optimize the display
CAUTION
It is important that no adjustments be made to any functions other
than Image Vertical Position, Image Horizontal Position, and Image
Size–Horizontal. Alteration of settings in other functions requires the
use of a PC–based test tool at rework centres.
There are no internal adjustments that can be made. All
adjustments are made through the rear control and the On–Screen
Display (OSD) Menu.
WARNING
present.
Warm–up
The display needs 20 minutes of applied power under normal conditions to warm–up and
achieve full operating specifications, and before making any adjustments in the display.
This time also applies in the event of momentary power loss.
Calibrating the Panel

To calibrate the panel, do the following:
1. From the System Application Main Menu select the option Self–Service
Configuration.
3. Select USBUOP to perform the calibration test.
4. A sequence of five touchscreen targets appear. These must be pressed as
requested by the calibration application.
5. A verification test is then run which requests the user to press four buttons in
sequence.
The test can be initiated on the COP at the rear, or with the application transferred to the
front interface.
If initiated from the front interface, you will have 300 seconds to commence the calibration
test (i.e. move to the rear of the ATM and press a target).
If intiated from the rear, then you will have 90 seconds to touch the first target before the
calibration application terminates.
Working with On–Screen Display Parameters

The display parameters are adjusted using the four buttons located at the rear of the
display, as shown below:
-
+
Select
Menu
Note: NCR recommends setting the display parameters and display scaling before
securing the display in place. Adjusting the four buttons while viewing the display can be
difficult when the display is already in a secured position.
To adjust the OSD parameters, follow these steps:
1. Press Menu to display the On–Screen Display (OSD) Main Menu.
2. Press + or – to scroll through the main menu list.
3. Press Select to enter a function from the list. In the example below, Picture is
selected.
4. Press + or – to choose an option form the list.
5. Press Select. In the example below, the brightness option is selected.
6. Press + or – to make the necessary adjustment. The new adjustment setting occurs
automatically.
7. To exit and go back to the options list, press Menu.
8. To adjust the remaining functions, repeat the procedures.
Note: If no button is pressed for five minutes, the menu automatically disappears from the
screen. The time lapse needed for the OSD to disappear may also be adjusted from the
OSD Main Menu (OSD timeout option).

The display has no Field Replaceable Units and should be swapped with a working display
unit in the event of critical failures.
CABLING
There is no field replaceable internal cabling on the display. However, the COP comes with
a removable DC power harness cable adapter.
The COP has the following connectors:
USB Mini-B
Connector
DVI-I Connector
DC Power Harness
Cable Adapter
Power Connector
USB Min–B Connector

The USB Mini–B connector has the following pinout:
1 Vbus +5V
2 D- Data- 5 4 3 2 1
3 D+ Data+
4 ID Not connected or ground
5 GND Signal Ground
Digital Visual Interface (DVI–I) Connector

The DVI–I Connector used in the COP has the following pinout:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C1 C2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
C3 C4
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
C5
Pin Name/Symbol Description

1 CH 2– 1/2 of channel 2 differential pair
2 CH 2+ 1/2 of channel 2 differential pair
3 GND TMDS Data 2/R shield ground
4 TMDS Data 4- Digital green - (N/C)
5 TMDS Data 4+ Digital green + (N/C)
6 DDC_CLK DVI DDC Clock
7 DDC_Data DVI DDC Data
8 VS Vertical Sync
11 GND TMDS Data 1/3 Shield ground
12 TMDS Data 3– Digital blue - (N/C)
13 TMDS Data 3+ Digital blue + (N/C)
14 + 5V Power for DDC EEPROM
15 GND Ground
16 LVHPDET Hot plug detect
19 GND MDS Data 0/5 Shield
20 TMDS Data 5– Digital red - (N/C)
21 TMDS Data 5+ Digital red + (N/C)
22 GND TMDS Data clock Shield
23 Clock+ 1/2 of Clock differential pair
24 Clock– 1/2 of Clock differential pair
25 (C1) Red Analogue red
26 (C2) Green Analogue green
27 (C3) Blue Analogue blue
28 (C4) HS Analogue Horizontal Sync
29 (C5) GND Ground
Power Connector
The power connector used in the COP has the following pinout:
2 Ground
1 +24V DC
TEST/ADJUSTMENT/TOOLS
None.
SURFACE WAVE TOUCHSCREEN
DESCRIPTION
The touchscreen assembly consists of a sensor, a clear solid glass touchscreen panel, and
a controller board. The touchscreen panel uses surface acoustic waves to sense a touch.
Mounted on the touch panel are two pairs of piezo-electric transducers which, in
conjunction with reflectors on the borders of the panel, send ultrasonic waves across the
surface of the panel to develop a digital map of the touchscreen surface. Touching the
screen absorbs a portion of the wave travelling across it and this change is used by the
controller to calculate the X and Y touch co-ordinates.
The following diagram shows the position of the jumpers and connectors on the controller
board.
P4
J2-2 NVRAM
J2-1 Boot_N
D1
D2
P2 J1
P3 Self Vbus P1
STRAPPING
The controller can run in either RS232 or USB mode. For USB mode, the jumper is placed
over the pins in the right most position at J1. Power will then be received via the Vbus
drawn from the USB cable.
ADJUSTMENTS
The following information describes the test procedures that will confirm whether the
touchscreen is operating properly.
The touchscreen is calibrated using the Calibrate option, accessed through the
Configuration menu in the Utilities program in the System Application (SysApp) Main
Menu.
Calibrate should be run when:
l The terminal is initially installed

l The touchscreen is replaced or moved
l The display is adjusted internally
l The touch area on the screen does not line up with the corresponding image.
Within SysApp, select the following:
Self-Service Configuration > Set Device configuration > USB Acoustic Wave Touch
Screen
Touchscreen Calibration Test

The touchscreen calibration test executes as follows:
1. A screen similar to the following illustration is displayed with a red marker at the top
left hand side of the screen, and the words ‘Touch the targets from a position of
normal use’ is displayed in the centre of the screen.
2. When the red marker is touched and released, the touch co-ordinates are stored,
and the red marker moves to the bottom right hand side of the screen.
3. Touch the red marker again, the touch co-ordinates are stored, and the red marker
moves to the top right hand side of the screen.
4. When the red marker is touched again, the red marker disappears and, ‘Touch the
screen. Does the cursor follow your finger?’ is displayed in the centre of the screen.
5. Touch different areas of the screen, check that the cursor appears exactly where
you touched the screen, confirm the test by touching the Tick icon.
6. If the cursor does not move to the different areas of the screen you have touched,
then, using a mouse, touch the back icon to repeat the touchscreen calibration
procedure.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Device disconnected USB cable disconnected Check USB cable Reconnect cable
DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostics Overview section.
Diagnostic LED
The controller board has two green LED status indicators.
l D2 is the status LED and will blink slowly, about once per second, to indicate normal
operation. A fast blink, about four times per second, means an error has been
detected.
During start-up, an irregular blinking is normal and shows the controller is
automatically adjusting the screen size.
When the USB power is connected, the LED will be constantly on until USB
enumeration is complete.
l D1 is the touch detection indicator and will be constantly on during touch.

There are no field replaceable parts in the surface wave touchscreen.
CABLING
None.
Touchscreen Connector
The touchscreen connector is P2 on the controller board. This cable has a moulded
connector which is keyed.
Note: P3 is an unused, alternative touchscreen connector. P4 is an unused JTAG

connector.
The connection to the touchscreen sensor mates directly with the surface wave
touchscreen sensor interconnecting harness. The header will include polarising features to
ensure proper interconnnection with the mating part as illustrated below.
2 4 6 8 10 12
1 3 5 7 9 11

1 shield 7 ground
2 Key (N/C) 8 X transmit (-)
3 Y receive (+) 9 X receive (-)
4 Y transmit (+) 10 X transmit (+)
5 Y receive (-) 11 X receive (+)
6 Y transmit (-) 12 Key (N/C)
Power and Interface Connector

The power/interface connector, (P1) is a top contact style connector, intended to be used
with single wired pins in a 20 pin header. The pins are numbered as shown in the table
below:
Pin Signal Function Pin Signal Function

1 VBus USB Power 2 GND Ground
3 D- USB D- 4 D+ USB D+
5 Vcc +5V Power 6 GND Ground
7 - Reserved 8 - Reserved
9 LEDN LED Out 10 RSTN Reset Input
11 DCD Serial Port 12 DSR Serial Port
13 RxD Serial Port 14 RTS Serial Port
15 TxD Serial Port 16 CTS Serial Port
17 DTR Serial Port 18 - Reserved
19 GND Ground 20 N/C Not connected
None.
TILTING DISPLAY
INTRODUCTION
The Tilting Display is a motorised tilting screen for drive-up ATMs.
Two buttons on the display bezel enable the user to tilt the display forward and back.
CAUTION
DESCRIPTION
The Tilting Display includes the following assemblies:
l Motor Assembly
l Display Assembly
l Core DC Hub
l Mini DC Hub
l Control PCB Assembly
The display is a standard 15 inch exterior sunlight readable display. Refer to the 15 Inch
Dynamo Display chapter in this manual for information on the display.
An interlock switch removes power from the Tilting Display when the module tray is racked
out on front access ATMs, or the rear access door is opened on rear access ATMs.
Drive Link Bracket Drive Link Pin
Rain Gutter Drive Link

Pivot Bracket
Leadscrew
Motor
Core DC Hub
Display
Mounting Bracket
Home Position Sensor & Flag
(Fascia mounting bracket not shown)
Outer Bezel
Motor Pivot Bracket
Control PCB Assembly
Mechanism Cover
Tilt Buttons
Inner Bezel Hood
15 inch Sunlight Readable Display
Mechanical
Tilting Mechanism
Two buttons on the display bezel enable the user to control the amount of tilt from 20
degrees forward to 5 degrees back, relative to the ‘home’ position which is parallel to the
outer bezel.
The display moves to the home position when the ATM is powered up.
+20 degrees
Maximum Forward Position
Home Position Sensor
Home Position
-5 degrees
Maximum Back Position
Electronic
Control Boards
Sensor Control Board
Located within the Control PCB Assembly
J3 J4
J2 J1
Number Harness
J1 Motor Harness (DC)
J2 Motor Harness (Motor)
J3 Motor Harness or Opto-Switch/Buttons Harness - depending on product
J4 Opto-Switch Harness or Opto-Switch/Buttons Harness - depending on product
Mini DC Hub
Located within the Core DC Hub
J1 J3 J5
J2 J4 J6
Number Harness
Jx DC Hubs/IL Switch Harness
Jx Motor Harness (Motor)
Jx Motor Harness (MIMO)
Electronic
Miscellaneous Interface
A
Core DC Hub Control PCB Assembly

E
A Mini DC Hub
Sensor Control Board A
Back
J3
J2
Forward
J4
J1
D
A C A
B
Stepper Motor
Interlock Switch
&
DC Hub
Harnesses
A. Tilt Motor Harness

B. Opto-Switch Harness (might be combined with A - depending on product)
C. DC Hubs/IL Switch Harness (with or without Supervisor)
D & E. Button Harness
F. Miscellaneous Interface Harness (with or without Remote I/O)

The Home Position Sensor is a flag sensor that detects when the display is in the home
position which is parallel to the outer bezel.
ERROR MESSAGES
None.
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0 Diagnostics
There are no start-up tests.
Device Diagnostics
Menu
Displays a menu of all the Applets, allowing an operator to select one.
Request Home Position

A request to return the tilting screen to the ‘Home’ position is issued. The test does not wait
for an unsolicited pass/fail event. The test is a quick method of performing the home
request.
Device Self Tests

Menu
Displays a menu of all the Applets, allowing an operator to select one.
Device Test
This is a dummy test to facilitate the fault clearing activity. The test always returns a pass.
Tallies
None.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
Refer to the 15 Inch Dynamo Display chapter in this manual for display adjustments. If you
can not have sufficiently access to the back of the display due to the display mounting
bracket, do the following:
1. Refer to the Tilting Display Removal and Replacement chapter in section 19 of this
manual and remove the Motor Assembly.
2. Loosen the four M4 nuts securing the Display Mounting Bracket to the Display and
remove the bracket.

Refer to the Tilting Display Removal and Replacement chapter of this manual for FRU
Removal and Replacement instructions.
CABLING
Refer to the product cabling chapters in this manual for cabling information.
None.
For the preventive maintenance schedule and details of the required tasks for the Tilting
Display, refer to the Preventive Maintenance section of this manual.
10. CAMERAS
CCTV 706
Colour Portrait Camera (USB) 713
DView Camera 717
Video Streaming Camera 725
CCTV
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the Pelco CCTV Camera, Lens, Power Supply Harness and Video
Harness.
DESCRIPTION
CCTV Camera
Camera
Lens Harnes Lens
Camera Housing
The illustrations below show the Camera Housing.
Camera Screw
Housing
Camera Harness Camera Housing
CCTV Power Harness Camera
Camera Connectors
The illustration below shows the Camera Connectors.
Camera
CCTV Power Connector Camera Connector
DIAGNOSTICS
None.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
Camera settings
CAUTION
Do not reset the camera settings, as this will cause the camera to
default back to the vendor camera settings and not the settings for
NCR.
Note: Should the camera be replaced, any changes to the cameras default settings should
be noted and replicated in the replacement camera.
In the event the camera settings are reset the NCR function settings are as follows:
l AGC- Low
l ESC - Off
l BLC - On
l White balance - Auto
l Gamma - 60%
l Flickerless - Off
l Sharpness - Sharp
l Iris Control - + 6
l Eclipser - Off
l Line Sync - Auto
DC Iris Level Adjustment

1. Focus the camera (refer to Lens Focusing).
2. Aim the camera at a bright, flickless scene.
3. Select DC IRIS LEVEL value and set to + 6.
4. Press the center of the button to save the value.
5. Exit the MAIN MENU.
Lens Focusing
1. Cover the auto iris lens with a suitable neutral density (ND) filter. This opens the iris
fully. For best results, use an ND3 filter.
2. If Automatic Gain Control (AGC) is set to OFF, set it to LOW on the FUNCTION
SETTINGS menu. AGC is set to LOW by default.
3. Display the FUNCTION SETTINGS menu.
4. Change AGC to LOW.
5. Select EXIT to save the AGC setting.
6. Aim the camera at the farthest object in the field of view. Make sure it is at least 6.5 ft
(2m) away.
7. Adjust the DC Iris level for the best picture quality. The largest aperture gives the
best light sensitivity; the smallest aperture gives the greatest depth field.
Note: When tightening the lens locking screws, do not over tighten or force any
screw.
8. Tighten all lens locking screws with a 1.5mm allen key.

This section details the field replaceable units within the device.
Lens Replacement
Replace the lens as follows:
Note: Retain all removed screws, bracket and camera for use with the replacement lens.
Note: Before disconnecting power plug ensure security system will not react to this action.
1. Remove supply power by disconnecting power plug from I/O panel in the safe.
2. Remove the camera from the terminal and housing.
3. Unplug lens harness and unscrew lens from camera.
4. Make sure the replacement lens will not touch the camera imager when installed.
5. Use clean, compressed air or a clean, dry lens cloth to make sure there is no dust or
other foreign matter between the lens and the camera imager.
6. Screw the lens onto the lens mount.
7. Connect the lens harness to the side of the camera.
8. Perform the lens focusing procedure before using the lens (refer to Adjustments).
9. Replace the camera in the terminal
10. Reconnect power plug to I/O panel in the safe.
CABLING
NCR 6632 ATM
Harness - CCTV Colour Camera
I/O_CAMERA CAMERA
I/O_POWER CCTV_POWER
NCR 6634 & 6638 ATMs

Harness - CCTV Colour Camera - Safe
I/O_CAMERA SAFE_CAMERA
I/O_POWER SAFE_POWER
Harness - CCTV Colour Camera - Top
CCTV_POWER
TOP_POWER
Plug to Jack Harness
BNC JACK
None.
1. Viewing screen/monitor
2. 1.5 mm Allen Key
3. Cross-head screwdriver
COLOUR PORTRAIT CAMERA (USB)
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the removal and installation of the Colour Portrait Camera (USB)
and Harness.
DESCRIPTION
USB Video Camera
USB Harness Colour Portrait Camera (USB)
TROUBLESHOOTING
PC Video Camera Comms USB cable disconnected from Check USB cable Re-connect USB
Error camera cable
USB cable disconnected from USB Check USB cable Re-connect USB
hub cable
Camera requires RESET Run Self Test Run Self Test
USB cable faulty Replace USB cable and Replace USB cable
retest
Camera faulty Replace camera and Replace camera
retest
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 1 Diagnostics
Note: Looping is not allowed for any of the diagnostic tests and therefore the loop on/off
button will not be presented on the diagnostic screens.
Note: If the camera is not connected when applets 1-3 below are selected then a pop up
error message is displayed.
The following diagnostic functions are provided:

ID
0 Menu This displays a menu of all the other applets to allow an operator to select one
1 Capture A prompt is displayed for 3 seconds informing the user that a video camera output is to be
Frame displayed and that the user should press a key to capture the required frame.
The output from the video camera is then displayed in a centred window. This output will be
orientated according to the currently configured selection.
When the user presses a key the current video frame is captured and saved to disk.
2 Display Displays the current captured frame in a centred window
Capture
Frame
3 Preview A prompt is displayed for 3 seconds asking the user to verify the video camera output.
The output from the video camera is the displayed in a centered window for 7 seconds, then
the screen is cleared. This output will be orientated according to the currently configured
selection.
Self Test
Note: If the camera is not connected when applet 1 below are selected then a pop up error
message is displayed.
This feature provides the following Applets:

ID
0 Menu This displays a menu of all the other applets to allow an operator to select one
1 Device Self A prompt is displayed for 3 seconds asking the user to verify the video camera
Test output.
The output from the video camera is then diplayed in a centered window for 7
seconds, then the screen is cleared.
This output will be orientated according to the currently configured selection.
CONFIGURATION
Note: The driver is expected to maintain the configuration settings and not the generic
feature.
Note: If the camera is not connected when applet 1 below are selected then a pop up error
message is displayed.
Note: The orientation functionality is only available to applications using the TakePicture
command. Any application using the device directly through Video For Windows or other
API must perform any necessary image processing themselves.

ID
0 Menu This displays a menu of all the other applets to allow an operator to select one.
1 Configuration Invokes the driver specification option configuration window for the Video Camera
installed. The exact appearance and function of this window is vendor dependent.
2 Orientation Allows the operator to select the desired orientation of the captured image by choosing
the appropriate rotation from the available options of 0, 90, 180 and 270 degrees of
clockwise rotation.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.
None.
None.
CABLING
USB Harness
USB_CAMERA CAMERA_CNIM
1
5
DVIEW CAMERA
INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides service information on the DView camera.
The DView camera provides security and surveillance functionality. The DView camera
captures images with 690 HTVL–E resolution through Wide Dynamic Range (WDR)
capability in NTSC or PAL standards. The camera captures images regardless of lighting
condition or application, and automatically eliminates image–compromising visual noise.
The Dual Power Board enables the camera to safely operate at 24 Vac or 12 Vdc input
voltage.
CAUTION
DESCRIPTION
Dimensions
Camera
The illustrations below display the physical dimensions and measurements of the DView
camera.
49 mm
(1.93 in.)
42.2 mm
46 mm (1.66 in.)
(1.81 in.) 4.8 mm
(0.18 in.)
22 mm
(0.87 in.)
44 mm
(1.73 in.)
Dual Power Board

The illustrations below display the physical dimensions and measurements of the Dual
Power Board.
68 mm
2.67 in.
60 mm
2.36 in.
22 mm
0.87 in.
44 mm
1.73 in.
Camera Specifications
The table below lists the functional and video specifications of the DView camera.
Functional Specifications Image Sensor 1/3 in. WDR Image Sensor

Effective Picture Element 758(H)x540(V) approximately 409K pixels
Scanning Frequency NTSC 2:1 Interlace/ H: 1575 Hz, V: 59.94 Hz
PAL 2:1 Interlace/ H: 1562 Hz, V: 50 Hz
Video Output BNC 75 Ohm unbalanced
Wide Dynamic Range 120 dB/17 bit (102 dB typical)
Wide Dynamic Range Area Fully Adjustable
Slow Shutter YES up to 32x
Electronic Shutter WDR Control (Auto)
Software Day/Night ON, OFF, AUTO
White Balance ATW, AWB, Manual
Auto White Balance Range 2000k ~ 11000k
Sync System Internal/Line Lock
AGC Boost Yes
AES 1/25-1/30, 720
Noise Reduction 3D Motion Adaptive
Privacy Zones Four (4)
Image Flip Yes
Video Specifications Resolution 690 HTVL Effective
Video Standards PAL, NTSC
Minimum Illumination 0.1 lux at F1.2
AGC Up to 50 dB
S/N Ratio Up to 53 dB
Digital PTZ Pan, Tilt, Zoom (1x-8x)
Lens Properties
The table below lists the lens specifications of the DView camera.
Property Measurement
Focal Length 2.5 mm
F–No. F2.0
Iris Range Fixed Range
Angle of View
Property Measurement
Diagonal 122.1°
Horizontal 96.6°
Vertical 71.9°
Lens Focus
CAUTION
The lens focus is pre–set in the factory. Do not adjust the focus
factory settings.
The lens focus is set to capture images within an object distance of 300 mm and 1000 mm
from the lens.
White lines on the body and lens are aligned to determine that the focus is correctly set.
Power Requirements
The following table lists the power requirements for the DView camera.
Parameter Value
Power Operating Range 24VAC ±20%
12VDC ±10%
Power Consumption 4.2 W max.
Temperature Requirements
The table below lists the temperature requirements of the DView camera.
Parameter Value
Operating Temperature -10°C to 50°C (14°F to 122°F)
Storage Temperature -30°C to 60°C (-22°F to 140°F)
ERROR MESSAGES
Device disconnected USB cable disconnected from camera Check USB cable Reconnect cable
USB cable disconnected from hub Check USB cable Reconnect cable
DIAGNOSTICS
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENT
None.

There are no field replaceable parts in the DView camera.
CABLING
Harness – CCTV Colour Camera – Safe
I/O_CAMERA SAFE_CAMERA
I/O_POWER SAFE_POWER
Harness Camera Power Top Box
CAMERA SAFE_POWER
Harness Camera PWR 12V Fascia
I/O_POWER FASCIA_HUB_P3
Harness 24V EXT
FASCIA_HUB_P2 DC_IN
DC_I/O
CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUT
Camera
The illustration below displays the connector assignments of the camera.
Camera Lead
Connector
Dual Power Board

The illustration below displays the connector assignments of the dual power board.
Video Output
24 VAC/12 VDC
Camera Lead Connector
None.
For the preventive maintenance schedule and details of the required tasks for the Dview
Camera, refer to the Preventive Maintenance section of this manual.
VIDEO STREAMING CAMERA
INTRODUCTION
The USB video streaming camera provides a Wide Dynamic Range (WDR) performance
and an output resolution of 640x480 in either NTSC or PAL video format.
The USB Camera System feature supports and classifies the USB video streaming
camera as a Streaming Camera.
CAUTION
DESCRIPTION
Camera Specifications
The table below lists the general, functional, and video specifications of the camera.
General Specifications
Interface USB 2.0
Resolution 640x480
Aspect Ratio 4:3
Full Stream Video Reduced frame rate: PAL - 12.5 fps NTSC - 15 fps
Lens fixed 2.9 mm
Functional Specifications
Wide Dynamic Range 120 db (max), 102db (typical)
Automatic White Balance (AWB) On (default)
AWB Range 2000K~11000K (K is colour temperature)
Software Day/Night Auto, off, on
Automatic Gain Control (AGC) On (default)
Video Specifications
AGC up to 50 dB
Sensitivity 0.1 Lux @colour/0.01 Lux @ black and white
Signal to Noise Ration >50dB
Lens
CAUTION
The camera lens focus is pre-set in the factory.
Do not adjust the focus factory settings.
The lens focus is set to capture images within a distance of 300 mm–1000 mm
(11.81 in.–39.37 in.) from the lens.
Power Requirements
Voltage Supply +5 Vdc through USB bus
Power Consumption < 1.45W
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error Message M Possible root causes Isolation Resolution
Status
Module 1Camera 3 USB cable Check USB cable Reconnect USB
Not Working disconnected connection cable
USB cable faulty Replace USB cable
Module 1 Not 2 Camera not Check camera Configure Camera
Configured configured module
configuration
Module 2 Camera 3 USB cable Check USB cable Reconnect USB
Module 2 Not 2 Camera not Check camera Configure Camera
Configured configured module
configuration
Module 3 Not 2 Camera not configured Check camera Configure Camera
Configured module
configuration
Module 4 Not 2 Camera not configured Check camera Configure Camera
Configured module
configuration
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0 Diagnostics
There are no level 0 diagnostics for the USB Video Camera.
Device Diagnostics
Looping is allowed on all the camera device diagnostic tests listed in the table below.

ID
0 MENU Displays a menu of all the other tests.
1 IDENTIFICATION Displays the following information:
l Module ID
l Vendor ID
l Product ID
l Camera Serial Number
l Camera Category
l Camera Class (either Pinhole, Portrait, Streaming)
l Image Format (either PAL or NTSC)
2 VIEW CAMERA Displays camera views. The test provides the following sub-menu to select
which camera view to display:
l CAM01
l CAM02
l CAM03
l CAM04
l ALL CAMERA
If image capture fails from a specific camera, an error message displays

instead of the camera view.
Press Esc to exit from the selected camera view.
Device Self Test

1 DEVICE SELF TEST Displays the views from all cameras.
Tallies
Tally ID Tally Mnemonic Tally Description
0 DEV_REM Total count of USB cable disconnections
1 DEV_ARR Total count of USB cable connections
2 ALL_PIC Total number of pictures taken by all cameras
3 EXIT_PIC Total number of pictures taken by Exit Slot Cameras
4 PERS_PIC Total number of pictures taken by Person Cameras
5 ROOM_PIC Total number of pictures taken by Room Cameras
Note: Streaming cameras do not affect the “number of picture” counters.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
Camera Configuration
Camera configuration is done through the USB Camera System option in the System
Application Device Configuration Menu.
Configuring the camera includes the following tasks using the CAMERA ALLOCATION
test:
1. Assigning the camera a module ID in the USB Camera System. The system can
support a maximum of four cameras divided into four modules.
Module Name Module ID (MID)

CAM01 1
CAM02 2
CAM03 3
CAM04 4
2. Categorizing each camera based on their mounting location and purpose. The
system currently supports up to four cameras of the same category.
Category Camera Category Mounting location and purpose

Name
Person Person0X looking at the cardholder’s face
where X is from
1 to 4
Exit Slot Exit Slot0X looking at the physical interface between the cash dispenser and
where X is from cardholder’s hand
1 to 4
Room Room0X looking at the external environment around the terminal
where X is from
1 to 4
The table below lists all the configuration tests that the USB camera system provides in
SysApp.

ID
1 IDENTIFICATION Displays the following information:
l Module ID
l Vendor ID
l Product ID
l Camera Serial Number
l Camera Category (either Personal, Room or Exit Slot)
l Camera Class (either Pinhole, Portrait, Streaming)
l Image Format (either PAL or NTSC)
2 CAMERA Displays camera views from the four cameras in one screen and allows the
ALLOCATION operator to configure or de-configure the module ID and category of a
camera.
Each camera view displays the module name at the bottom center of the
image and a number (either 1, 2, 3, or 4) at the top.
If a module doesn’t have an associated camera, then a “Not Configured” text is

displayed at the bottom center of a blank image and number (either 1, 2, 3, or
4) at the top.
To configure a camera and assign it as a module in the USB camera system,

select the number displayed on the top of the blank image with a “Not
Configured” text.
To de-configure a camera and remove it from the USB camera system, select
the
number displayed on the top of the camera view that needs to be de-
configured.

There are no field replaceable parts in the device.
CABLING
None.
There is a USB Mini–B connector on the rear of the camera.
None.
None.
11. PRINTERS
USB Fanfold Statement Printer 734
Revision 769
USB Journal Printer 770
Revision 784
Page Turning Passbook Printer 785
Revision 859
Revision 893
USB 2ST Statement/Passbook Printer 894
USB Statement Printer 895
Revision 913
USB FANFOLD STATEMENT PRINTER
INTRODUCTION
The printer has the following features:
l Line Thermal Print head

l Quiet operation
l High speed
l High quality text and graphics printing
l Rotary paper cutter
l Paper 148 mm to 216 mm (5.8 in. to 8.5 in.) wide
l Capture area.
The printer options are:
l Single sheet printing

l Bunch printing - up to ten statements can be bunched before presentation.
DESCRIPTION
The printer comprises a transport assembly, print engine and a hopper assembly. Covers
are used to protect the control board at the hopper assembly and the gears on the side of
the transport assembly.
Sub board
Print engine
Front transport
Main control board
Hopper assembly
Dimensions
Width 309 mm (12.2in) approx.
Height 213 mm (8.6 in.) approx.
Length 730 mm (28.75 in.) approx.
Weight 12.5 kg (27.6 lb.) max. (Bunch)
11.5 kg (25.4 lb.) max. (Single sheet)
Transport Mechanism
The delivery transport in the printer forms part of the print engine. It has a presenting and a
capture transport, driven by the same bi-directional motor.
Print Head Assembly Area
Paper Knife Area
Front Transport Area
Capture Transport
The modes of operation for the single sheet and the bunching options are different. These
are described in the following sections.
Print Engine
The print engine has the main circuit board as a controller and the print head, feed motor
and cutter motor as driving units. It is also equipped with five sensors for detecting the open
or closed state of the pinch frame unit, the presence or absence of paper, and so on. The
locations of these components are shown in the following diagrams.
See sections ‘Cabling’ and ‘Strapping and Switch Settings’ for more details of the
connectors and switches on the boards.
Location of Motors and Thermal Print Head
Thermal Print Head
Feed Motor
Sub Card
Cutter Motor
Location of Main Components for Bunching Operation

Pinch open sensor
Pinch closed sensor
Long media adjustment

mechanism
Pinch motor
Life Expectancy
l Print Head: The print head does not need to be replaced during the life of the printer.
l Paper Knife: The paper knife has a life expectancy of 1,000,000 cuts.
Environmental Requirements
Temperature Humidity
Operating 10°C to 50°C 20% to 80% relative humidity
Extreme power-on 0°C to 55°C 5% to 95% relative humidity
Storage temperature -10°C to 50°C 10% to 90% relative humidity
Operating the printer in either of the extreme temperature or humidity ranges may cause
the quality of the print to degrade and may cause the firmware to disable printing. However,
the printer will not be damaged.
Single Sheet Operation

Paper is taken into the print engine. After printing it is cut into a sheet, then fed to the
presenting transport. If the user does not take the statement, the direction of the drive of the
presenting transport may be reversed under application software control, and the
statement is delivered to the capture area. The capture transport ensures one-way delivery
of the statement to the capture area.
Print Engine
Presenting Transport Hopper
Paper
Capture Transport
Capture Area
Bunching Option Operation

Paper is taken into the print engine. After printing it is cut into sheets, and fed to the delivery
transport, one sheet at a time.
Print Engine
Presenting Transport Hopper
Paper
Stack Area
Capture Transport
Capture Area
The delivery transport takes the cut off sheets (statements) from the print engine down to
the presenting transport.
In this mode of operation, the lower sets of belts that make up the presenting transport are
held apart from the upper set so that the sheet falls onto a stack area.
Once the stack is formed, the lower belts are raised by the action of a cam mechanism and
the stack is delivered to the user.
The bunch variant of the transport can be adjusted for different sized statements (101.6
mm (4.0 in.) or 105.8 mm (4.166 in.)) by sliding the long media adjustment mechanism
backwards or forwards.
If the user does not take the stack of statements, the direction of the drive of the transport is
reversed under application software control, and the stack is delivered to the capture area.
Power Requirements
The printer takes power from the ATM as follows:
Voltage Current
+24V dc ±10% 10 Amps max.
Sensors
Head close sensor Paper set sensor
(ES2) (ES6)
Stack entry sensor
(S6) Centre
black mark sensor
(ES4)
Side W
black mark sensor
(ES5)
Cutter sensor
(ES1)
Paper exit sensor
(S1) Stage sensor
(S2)
Pinch open &

closed sensors Stack entry Capture area Paper low
Stage sensor (S3 & S4) sensor (S6) sensor (S8) sensor (S11)
(S2) (Bunch option)
Paper exit sensor

(S1)
Bottom View
ES5
ES2 ES6
ES4
S1 S2
S6
ES1
S3 S4
S11
S8
Sensor identifier Sensor name Sensor identifier Sensor name
S1 Exit sensor S11 Paper low sensor

S2 Stage sensor ES1 Cutter sensor (print engine)
Sensor identifier Sensor name Sensor identifier Sensor name
S3 Pinch open sensor ES2 Head close sensor

(bunch option only) (print engine)
S4 Pinch closed sensor ES4 Centre black mark sensor
(bunch option only) (print engine)
S6 Stack entry sensor ES5 Side-W black mark sensor
(print engine)
S8 Capture area sensor ES6 Paper set sensor (print engine)
Paper Specification
The paper used in your printer must conform to the following specifications. Also refer to
Consumable Items for Self Service (B006-4992).
Paper width 148 mm (5.8 in.) to 216 mm (8.5 in.)

Paper length Non-bunch: 101.6 mm (4.0 in.) to 297 mm (11.7 in.)
Bunch: 101.6 mm (4.0 in.) or 105.8 mm (4.166 in.)
Paper weight 70 - 120 g/m2
Smoothness 350 +/- 150 sec.
Printable Area
Letter (8.5 in.) A4 (8.27 in.) 6.12 in. 5.83 in.

A, 6.35 ±2.5 mm (0.25 ±0.1 3.4 ±2.5 mm (0.13 ±0.1 6.2 ±2.5 mm (0.24 ±0.1 3.4 ±2.5 mm (0.13 ±0.1
C in.) in.) in.) in.)
B 203.2 mm (8.0 in.) 203.2 mm (8.0 in.) 143.2 mm (5.64 in.) 141.2 mm (5.56 in.)
D, F 2.0 - 5.0 mm (0.08 - 0.20 in.)
E 101.6 mm (4.0 in.) - 297.0 mm (11.7 in.)
G 216 mm (8.5 in.) 210 mm (8.27 in.) 155 mm (6.12 in.) 148 mm (5.83 in.)
Black Mark Position

Side W Black Mark
Fanfold
10 mm +/- 0.5
4 mm +/- 0.5
8 mm
+/- 0.5
10 mm 14 mm
+/- 0.5 +/- 0.5
Binding holes
No print area for

black mark sensing
Paper feed direction
Centre Black Mark
Fanfold
23.5 mm +/- 0.3
5 mm +/- 0.1
20 mm
25.4 mm
No print area for

Paper feed direction black mark sensing
TROUBLESHOOTING
Print Engine
CAUTION
Be careful not to drop components such as screws, into the Print
Engine.
Ensure that cables do not obstruct any moving parts.
Always use an earthed wrist band when accessing PCBs.
Ensure that power has been turned off.
Initial Checking
Before starting troubleshooting, check the following:
l Cables are properly connected on the control board and sub board
l Ambient temperature and humidity are suitable
l Paper conforms to specification and is dry
l Components inside the printer are clean

l Sensors are not blocked or dirty (remove dust with compressed air).
Troubleshooting and Repair Procedure

No operation when power is turned on or head open error cannot be cleared.
No. Check Item(s) Result Corrective Action

1 Is the power cable from the sub card properly connected to the No Re-connect the power
main control board? cable.
2 Is the fuse on the main circuit board blown? Yes Replace the board.
3 Is the pinch frame unit securely closed and locked by the left and NO Close the pinch frame
right arms ? unit and lock it
securely with the left
and right lock arms.
4 Is the cover open sensor cable properly connected to J19 on the sub NO Re-connect the cover
card ? open sensor unit.
5 Check the continuity between the pins 1-2 of the cover open sensor NO Replace the sub
unit cable using a multimeter while the cover open sensor unit is board.
connected to J19 on the sub board. Is there continuity when the
cover open sensor unit is closed?
Possibly defective parts:
l Sub board
l Print engine.
Paper Feed Problems

1 Does the feed motor rotate? No Go to no. 4
2 Is there any foreign matter on the gears feeding the Yes Clean or replace the print
paper? Or are the gears damaged? engine.
3 Is there any foreign matter on the rubber part of the Yes Clean the feed roller unit.
feed roller unit?
4 Is the feed motor cable properly connected to J3 on No Re-connect the feed motor.
the sub board?
5 Are the fuses on the sub board blown? Yes Replace the sub board
6 Is the paper low sensor cable properly connected to No Re-connect the paper low
J10 on the main board? sensor cable.
Yes
Replace the print engine.
7 Is the capture bin sensor cable properly connected to No Re-connect the paper low /
J3 on the main board? capture bin sensor cable.
Yes Replace the hopper assembly
l Sub board
l Print engine
l Hopper assembly.
Frequent Paper Jams

1 Does a paper jam occur in the cutter assembly? Yes Go to no. 2.
No Go to no. 3.
2 Is the cutter assembly properly installed? Yes Replace the cutter
No assembly.
Re-install the cutter
assembly.
3 Is there any foreign matter in the paper path in the print Yes Clean the paper guides.
engine?
4 Is there any foreign matter on the rubber part of the feed Yes Clean the feed roller unit.
roller unit?
5 Is the black mark sensors cable properly connected J4 on the No Re-connect the paper end
sub board? Yes sensor.
6 Is the side-w black mark sensor cable properly connected to No Re-connect the black dot
J7 on the sub board? sensor cable.
Yes
7 Is there any foreign matter in the paper path in the transport Yes Clean the divert gate.
assembly (divert gate)? No Replace the transport
assembly.
8 Is there any foreign matter in the paper path in the transport Yes Clean the loop guide.
assembly (loop guide)? No Replace the transport
assembly.
l Cutter assembly
l Sub board
l Print engine
l Transport assembly.
Printer Does Not Print or Print Quality is Poor

1 Is the signal cable from the Control Board properly connected to No Re-connect the signal
J27 on the sub board? cable.
2 Is the DIP switch set to on-line (all bits in the OFF position). No Set the DIP switch to the
correct setting (OFF).

3 Is the black mark sensors cable properly connected to J4 on the No Re-connect the black
sub board? dot sensor cable.
Yes
Replace the print
engine.
4 Does the printer print any text or graphics? Yes Go to no. 6.
5 Is the contrast setting correct for the paper being used? Refer to Yes Corrected.
“Adjustments” section.
6 Clean the print surface of the thermal print head unit using a soft Yes Corrected.
cloth moistened with alcohol. Is the problem corrected?
7 Is the thermal print head cable properly connected to the thermal No Re-connect the thermal
head unit and J6 on the sub board? print head cable.
8 Is the thermal print head cable damaged? Yes Replace the print
engine.
l Sub board
l Print engine.
Paper Is Not Cut / Cutter Home Position Is Not Detected

No. Check Item(s) Result Corrective
Action
1 Is the cutter home position detected? Yes Go to no. 2
Note: when the cutter is already in the home position, the operation to
detect the home position cannot be observed. Therefore, move the cutter No Go to no. 5.
out of the home position before you check.
2 Replace the cutter assembly with a new part. Is the problem corrected? Yes The cutter
assembly was
defective.
3 Is the signal level of the centre black mark correct? Yes Replace the
print engine.
4 Are the black mark sensor cables properly connected to J4 (centre black No Re-connect
mark) and J7 (side-w black mark) on the sub board? the sensor
Yes unit cables.
Replace the
print engine.
5 Does the cutter motor rotate? Yes Go to no. 6.
No Go to no. 8.
6 Is there any foreign matter on the cut paper gears? Or are the gears Yes Clean or
damaged? replace the
print engine.
No. Check Item(s) Result Corrective

Action
7 Is the cutter sensor cable properly connected to J12 on the sub board. No Re-connect
the cutter
Yes sensor cable.
Replace the
print engine.
8 Is the cutter motor cable properly connected to J5 on the sub board? No Re-connect
the cutter
sensor cable.
9 Is the fuse on the control board blown? Yes Replace the
control
board.
l Cutter assembly
l Sub board
l Print engine.
DIAGNOSTICS
The red and green LEDs on the main control board indicate the following conditions:
Summary:
Green LED Red LED

ON = Online mode OFF = No error or warning
Fast blink = IPL mode ON = Paper jam
OFF = error Slow blink = error
Slow blink = Warning, but possible to print Fast blink = serious error
Detailed:
LED1 (Green) LED2 (Red)

Fast blink OFF IPL mode
ON OFF On-line
OFF Fast blink Paper Empty
Slow blink OFF Paper Low
OFF ON Paper Jam Capture Jam
OFF ON Transport
OFF ON TOF Sensor
OFF ON Print Engine Paper Jam
OFF Fast blink Error H/W (ROM, EEPROM, TH Temp)

OFF Fast blink Cover Open
OFF Slow blink Black mark
OFF Fast blink CAM Motor Jam
OFF Fast blink Cutter Jam
OFF Fast blink Unable to load paper
Slow blink OFF Capture bin full or 24V anomaly
Slow blink Slow blink Sensor Adjustment complete
OFF OFF Power off
Level 1
The diagnostics tests menus offered for the printer will depend on the variant:
l Statement printer
l Statement printer with buncher
Looping is allowed on all tests with variable delay option. Halt on error can be enabled or
disabled (default is disabled).
Any test involving paper handling will attempt a reset of the printer if the printer was
previously off line because of a fault condition. This reset, if successful, will produce a blank
form prior to the selected test being performed.
Note: During a fault condition, a diagnostic test may take several minutes to complete. Do
not interrupt the test, allow the printer to return a response before fault finding (opening
transport covers).
Sensor Test
The Sensor test reports, in M_DATA, status and sensor information. There should be no
movement of the printhead during this test.
Print Quality Test

The Print Quality test is an NCR Logo graphic, followed by a printout of vertical boxes and a
solid black rectangle. This is followed by a “Check Solid Box For White Lines” statement as
shown in the following illustration.
Printer Alignment Test

This test prints a sheet of paper with several vertical lines across the paper width, then cuts.
The lines allow confirmation that the paper is not skewed.
Slew Test
The Slew Test prints “START” on the first line, slews 9 lines, and then prints “FINISH” and
cuts.
Slew To Black Mark & Cut Test

This test prints “Slews To Black Mark And Cuts” and slews to the next black mark and cuts
the paper.
Note: This test is only offered on printers configured for black mark paper.
Transport Forward Test

The test drives the transport forward for 5 seconds. Paper must be removed from the
printer for this test to run.
Paper Feed Motor Test

The test drives the paper feed motor and print head motor for 5 seconds. Paper must be
removed from the printer for this test to run.
Knife Cut Test

The cut test causes the knife to be activated. Paper must be removed from the printer for
this test to run.
Cut And Capture Test

The printer slews to the next black mark and cuts the paper, then captures the receipt or
statement.
Note: This test is only offered on printers configured for black mark and with a capture bin.
Fascia Alignment Test

The test prints a graphic to allow the Field Engineer to determine whether the
fascia/statement printer alignment should be adjusted.
Level 3
The Tallies returned for the statement printer are:
Tally Description
STATMNTS Statement Issued
CAPTURE Statement Captured
MARK ERR Black Mark Errors
KNIF JAM Knife Jams
EXIT JAM Exit Jams
TRAN JAM Transport Jams
CAPT JAM Capture Jams
HOURS ON Hours On
ERR RECO Error Recoveries
OVR HEAT Printer Over Heated
CAM JAM CAM Jams
ILGL SEQ Illegal Sequences
FLSH CYC Flash Cycles
HEAD OPN Head Opened
SUP VOLT Supply Voltage Anomaly
USB COM USB Communications Fault
Tally Description
PAP LEN Paper Length
KNIF CUT Knife Cuts
BUNCHJAM Buncher Jams
BFLSHCYC Buncher Flash Cycles
BFCOVOPN Feeder Cover Open Errors
BPAPJAMS Buncher Paper Jams
BSTOPJAM Buncher Paper Stopper Jams
BSHUTERR Buncher Shutter Home Position Errors
BPOS1 HP Buncher Position 1 Home Position Errors
BCAPFLAP Buncher Capture Flapper Errors
BCOVOPEN Buncher Cover Opened
BPRNLNBK Print Lines Back
STRAPPING AND SWITCH SETTINGS

Control Board
Dip switch LED
USB
Power
The dip switch on the main control board can be used to perform off line diagnostics as
follows:
bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 Mode Comment

0 0 0 Normal mode On line
0 0 1 Sensor adjustment mode Off line
0 1 0 IPL mode On line
0 1 1 Self test - document length mode Off line
1 0 0 Self test - black mark mode Off line
CABLING
Print engine Sub board
Front transport
Main control board
Hopper assembly
J6 Feed switch
J10 Paper low

24V power input J11 SW1 Reset
USB J2 Main Card
DSW1 Dip switch
Cap bin 1 Front Transport
J3 Transport motor
Bunch sensor1, Bunch Exit
J7
J4 J23 sensor2 , Bunch motor
Jam 1 & jam 2
24V power to Signal line

sub card
Print Engine
J2 J27
Cutter sensor J12
Cutter motor J5
Sub Card
Feed motor J3
Cover open J19
J4 J8 J7 J6
Side-W PE Centre Thermal

black mark black mark head
Front Transport Harness Wiring

J3
JAM1
LED
Jam 1 & 2
JAM1
TRNS
JAM2
13
LED
14
JAM2
15
TRNS
16
EXIT
Main Control Board
LED
Exit
EXIT
TRNS
CAPB1 LED Anode

17
Capture
18 CAPB1 LED Cathode

Bin
CAPB1 TRNS
19
GND
20
Transport
25
Motor
26
27
28
BUNCH ID
31 Transport
GND ID Jumper
32
Main Control Board
J3 - Jam1, Jam2, Exit, Capture Bin,
Transport Motor, Transport ID
1 Jam1 LED Anode
2 Jam1 LED Cathode
3 Jam1 Sens
4 GND
J3 - Jam1, Jam2, Exit, Capture Bin,

Transport Motor, Transport ID
5 Exit LED Anode
6 Exit LED Cathode
7 Exit sens
8 GND
9 GND
10 GND
11 GND
12 GND
13 Jam2 LED Anode
14 Jam2 LED Cathode
15 Jam2 Sens
16 GND
17 Cap B1 LED Anode
18 Cap B1 LED Cathode
19 GND
20 Cap B2 Sens
21 Cap B2 LED Anode
22 Cap B2 LED Cathode
23 GND
24 Cap B2 Sens
25 Transport Motor PHA
26 Transport Motor PH/A
27 Transport Motor PH/B
28 Transport Motor PHB
29 Transport ID1
30 Transport ID2
31 Transport ID3
32 GND
J23 - Signal line to sub board

1 3.3V
2 3.3V
3 5V

4 INT_FATAL
5 GND
6 GND
7 Centre BM
8 Side-W BM
9 CUTHP
10 PE
11 TOF
12 VM_on
13 CSI_DO
14 CSI_CLK_SUB
15 MT1_EN_SUB
16 MT1_DIR_SUB
17 CUTM_CLK
18 SENS_EN1_SUB
19 CSI_PO
20 MT0_EN_SUB
21 MT0_DIR_SUB
22 MODE1_FM
23 MODE0_FM
24 FM_CLK
25 HD1_ON
26 C_OPEN
27 VH_1
28 CUTHP_AMB_SENS
29 THRM1
30 IDLE_MODE_CTRL
31 RESET_SUB_N1
32 GND
33 GND
34 GND
35 GND
36 HD1_DI1_SUB

37 GND
38 HD1_DI2_SUB
39 GND
40 HD1_DI3_SUB
41 GND
42 HD1_DI4_SUB
43 GND
44 HD1_CLK_SUB
45 GND
46 HD1_LAT_SUB
47 HD1_STB1_SUB
48 HD1_STB2_SUB
49 HD1_STB3_SUB
50 HD1_STB4_SUB
J4 - 24V Power to Sub Board

1 24V
2 24V
3 GND
4 GND
J6 - Feed Switch
1 FEED F
2 GND
3 FEED R
J7 Bunch
1 Bunch LED 1 Anode
2 GND
3 Bunch Sensor 1
4 Bunch LED 2 Anode
5 GND
6 Bunch Sensor 2
7 Bunch Motor +
8 Bunch Motor -
J10 Paper Low

1 Paper Low LED Anode
2 Paper Low LED Cathode
3 Paper Low sensor
4 GND
J11 24V Power

1 24V
2 GND
Sub Board
J2 - 24V Input from Main Board
1 24V
2 24V
3 GND
4 GND
J3 - Feed Motor
1 FM PHB
2 FM PHA
3 FM PH/B
4 FM PH/A
J4 - Top of Form (TOF)

and Centre Black Mark (BD1
1 TOF LED
2 GND
3 TOF SENS
4 BD1 LED
5 GND
6 BD1 SENS
J5 - Cutter Motor
1 CUT M PHB
2 CUT M PHA
3 CUT M PH/B
4 CUT M PH/A
5 N/C
J6 - Thermal Head
1 24V
2 24V
3 24V
4 24V
5 24V
6 24V
7 24V
8 24V
9 STB3
10 24V
11 TM
12 STB4
13 GND
14 GND
15 GND
16 DI1
17 DI2
18 GND
19 5V
20 CLK
21 DI3
22 GND
23 GND
24 DI4
25 GND
26 GND
27 GND
28 LAT
29 STB2
30 STB1
J7 - Side-W Black Mark (BD2)

1 BD2 LED
2 GND
3 BD2 SENS
4 N/C
5 N/C
J8 - Print Engine (PE)

1 PE LED
2 GND
3 PE SENS
J12 - Cutter Sensor

1 CUTHP LED Anode
2 CUTHP LED Cathode
3 GND
4 CUTHP SENS
J19 - Cover Open

1 C_Open
2 GND
J23 - Signal Line to Main Control Board

1 3.3V
2 3.3V
3 5V
4 INT_FATAL
5 GND
6 GND
7 BD1
8 BD2
9 CUTHP
10 PE
11 TOF
12 VM_on
13 CSI_DO

14 CSI_CLK_SUB
15 MT1_EN_SUB
16 MT1_DIR_SUB
17 CUTM_CLK
18 SENS_EN1_SUB
19 CSI_PO
20 MT0_EN_SUB
21 MT0_DIR_SUB
22 MODE1_FM
23 MODE0_FM
24 FM_CLK
25 HD1_ON
26 C_OPEN
27 VH_1
28 CUTHP_AMB_SENS
29 THRM1
30 IDLE_MODE_CTRL
31 RESET_SUB_N1
32 GND
33 GND
34 GND
35 GND
36 HD1_DI1_SUB
37 GND
38 HD1_DI2_SUB
39 GND
40 HD1_DI3_SUB
41 GND
42 HD1_DI4_SUB
43 GND
44 HD1_CLK_SUB
45 GND
46 HD1_LAT_SUB

47 HD1_STB1_SUB
48 HD1_STB2_SUB
49 HD1_STB3_SUB
50 HD1_STB4_SUB
TOOLS
The following test tools are required for the printer:
l A digital voltmeter with an accuracy of 0.001 V

l Calibration test media (NCR Part No. 009-0010057)
l A Phillips screwdriver.
ADJUSTMENTS
Configuration in System Application
The Configuration menu in System Application (Sys App) displays the following options for
the statement printer:
Menu Description
Form Feed Sets the printer to cut at either:
l Black mark - no length setting is required
l Fixed length - 77 mm (3.0 in.) to 297 mm (11.5 in.) including top margin
l Variable length - 1 to 297.
Printer contrast Sets the printer contrast in the range 0 (lightest) to 30 (darkest). Default value is 15.
Black mark cut Sets the cut position from the last black mark.
position Minimum value is 0 and maximum value 75. Default value is 28.
adjustment
Side 1 Left Sets the position of the left margin.
margin Minimum value is 0, maximum value 30. Default value is 0.
Adjustments are in steps of 0.125 mm (0.005 in) within the range of min. -1.875 mm (-
0.075in.) to max +1.875 mm (+0.075in).
Present Sets the position of the first line of print. Minimum value is 0, maximum value 30.
position Default value is 15.
adjustment
Menu Description
Paper width Sets paper width of paper being used:
l Paper width 155.6 mm (6.125 inch)
l Paper width A4 210 mm (8.27 inch)
l Paper width Letter 215.9 mm (8.5 inch)
l Paper width Head width A4 210 mm (8.27 inch) is used but the left margin is not
considered.
Black Mark Sets which black mark sensor position is used. The first three settings force the black
Position and mark cut position to a fixed position while the second three allow the user to define
Cut Adjustment the position.
l Centre - cut position = 23 mm (0.9 in.)
l Side - cut position = 10 mm (0.4 in.)
l Kinetics - cut position = 10 mm (0.4 in.)
l Centre_Custom - cut position < 30 mm (1.2 in)
l Side_Custom - cut position < 30 mm (1.2 in)
l Kinetics_Custom - cut position < 30 mm (1.2 in)
Diagnostics Sets the number of statements that will be printed during the Diagnostics Buncher
Buncher Test. The range is from 2 to 10.
Quantity
Max Print Set the maximum print speed, measured in inches per second (ips). Max is 5 ips, duty
Speed cycle permitting. Limiting the printer to 3 or 4 ips will improve print quality.
Side 1 Line 1 Sets position of the first line from the top of the page.
Position Level 1 menu - position in millimetres. Min is 2 mm, max is 152 mm, default is 5 mm.
Level 2 menu - position in 10th of millimetres. Min is 0, max is 9, default is 0.
Auto Paper Sets automatic paper loading as Yes or No. Determines whether or not the paper loads
Feed automatically once it is detected.
Print Head Sets print head control to either standard (no head control) or special. The special
Control setting allows the customer to apply overburn to the print head control, which can
improve print readability for certain documents.
Exit Position Sets where the paper pinch (or ‘bite’) is located when paper is presented, determining
how much of the statement is presented through the exit slot.
l Rear - paper is held at trailing edge of the paper (default)
l Middle - paper is held in the middle of the sheet
l Front - paper is held at the leading edge of the paper.
Transport Adjustments
Vertical Position of Transport
The vertical alignment of transport to the ATM facia can be adjusted using the screw on
each side of the transport.
The default position of the screw maintains a gap of 5mm as shown, which gives a height
from the base of the printer to the lower edge of the transport exit of approximately 86.5
mm. The height can be adjusted from approximately 71 mm to 121 mm.
5 mm
Bunch Paper Length

The bunch variant of the printer can handle statements 101.6 mm (4.0 in.) or 105.8 mm
(4.166 in.) long. The printer is factory-set for the length required, but can be adjusted in the
field by moving the metal plate on the underside of the transports forwards or backwards.

The service strategy for the printer is entire-module swap, that is if a critical failure occurs
the entire printer should be replaced and returned for repair. However in some cases, sub-
modules can be used to avoid having to swap the entire printer. Therefore the following
field replaceable units are described:
l Print engine (including sub control board and cutter)

l Transport
l Hopper
l Main control board
l Sub board.
CAUTION
Turn off the ATM before plugging or unplugging the printer power to
avoid damaging the printer. Turn off the ATM before disassembling
any part of the printer. Electrostatic discharge may damage the
PCB. Wear a grounded wrist strap and use a static mat or other
ESD protected work surface whenever you work on the PCB.
Removing the Print Engine
1. Remove the screws securing the main control board cover.
2. Remove the PCB cover.
3. Disconnect the power cable (J4) and signal cable (J23) from the board.
4. Disconnect the earth strap on each side of the print engine.
5. Unscrew and remove the four screws holding the print engine to the hopper
assembly.
6. Lift the print engine out of the printer assembly.
Removing the Transport

1. Disconnect the earth straps at each side of the transport.
2. Disconnect the harnessing and cable ties.
3. Remove the circlip from the shaft on the right-hand side of the transport (when
viewed from the front of the printer).
4. Slide the shaft out of the transport to separate it from the rest of the printer.
Removing the Hopper

Remove the print engine and transport as described above, this leaves the hopper FRU.
Removing the Main Control Board

1. Remove the screws securing the main control board cover.
2. Remove the PCB cover.
3. Disconnect all harnessing to the board.
4. Remove the three screws securing the board and remove the board from the printer
hopper.
Removing the Sub Board

1. Unscrew and remove the four screws holding the print engine to the hopper
assembly.
2. Lift the print engine out of the printer assembly, the sub board is on the underside.
3. Disconnect all harnessing to the board.
4. Remove the four screws securing the board and remove the board from the print
engine.
REVISION

USB JOURNAL PRINTER
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the USB journal printer, which uses a line thermal head to perform
high quality, high speed, quiet printing of characters and graphics.
DESCRIPTION
The USB journal printer has the following features:
l Supports maximum paper roll diameter of 83mm (3.2 ins)

l Resolution 203 dpi
l Downloadable firmware
l Remote diagnostics.
Power Requirements
The printer requires power from the ATM power supply (+24V DC ± 10%) and power
consumption is up to 6.0 A.
Operating the printer at either extreme of its temperature or humidity ranges may degrade
the print quality and may cause the firmware to disable printing. However, the printer itself
will not be damaged.
Condition Temperature Humidity Max Temp Change

Operating 5°C - 50°C (41°F - 122°F) 20 - 80% 10°C (50F)/hour
Idle 0°C - 55°C (32°F - 131°F) 10 - 95% 10°C (50F)/hour
Extreme power-on 0°C - 55°C (32°F - 131°F) 10 - 95% 15°C (59F)/hour
Storage -5°C - 55°C (23°F - 131°F) 10 - 90% 15°C (59F)/hour
Dew point 26°C (78.8°F) maximum
Paper Specification
Paper Roll
l Width: 80.0 mm (3.15 in.)
l Length: 83 m (272 ft.) max
l Diameter: 83 mm (3.26 in.) or less
l Paper core inner diameter: 12 mm (0.47 in.)
Printable Area
80 mm
(3.15 in.)
2.50 mm * 75.25 mm 2.25 mm
(0.10 in.) (2.96 in.) (0.09 in.)
6.9 mm (0.27 in.)

Minimum
22 mm (0.87 in.)
Typical
5 mm (0.20 in.)
Typical
* Left Margin Adjustable area ±1.875 mm (0.0738 in.)
Journal Paper Low

The paper low signal indicates when 5.8 m (19 ft.) ±40% remains on the supply roll.
Sensor Locations
Winding Wheel Thermal Head
PE Sensor
Cover Open Sensor
Paper Roll Feed

Winding Jam Sensor
Motor
Winding
Motor
Paper Low Sensor
Sensor Description
Paper Low Detects paper low.
Cover Open Detects cover open, halts operation.
PE Detects presence of paper for controlling feed motor.
Winding Jam Detects winding wheel movement and controls winding.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Faults can be diagnosed using the LEDs on the control board, and by using the ATM error
reporting system.
LEDs Location and Meaning

Two pairs of LEDs are located one each side of the control board and are also visible
through holes at the bottom of the side frames. The LEDs can be used to diagnose the
conditions shown in the following table.
Green Red Meaning

On Off On-line
Fast blink Off IPL mode (firmware ready to download)
Off Fast blink Paper out
Slow blink Off Paper low
Off On Winding jam
Slow blink Off Paper not wound
Green Red Meaning

Off Fast blink Cover open / Unable to load paper
Off Off Power off

The following error messages are reported by the journal printer. Refer to the 'Module
Removal and Replacement' section for detailed instructions on replacing modules, and
'Diagnostics' for details of running diagnostic tests
Error Message Corrective Action

Printer Check USB cable at the printer and at the hub. Check the power cable at the printer
Disconnected and at the power supply. Re-connect or replace if necessary.
The printer may need to be re-set. Run self test.
PCB Hardware Replace printer.
Error
Printer Under ATM power harnessing may be faulty - test power from module to distribution board
Voltage to ATM power supply. Replace harnessing if necessary.
ATM power supply may be faulty. Check and replace if necessary.
Print Head Life Replace printer.
Low/Out
Printer Over Check operating conditions against Environmental Requirements. If necessary,
Temperature replace printer if constantly over temperature.
Printer Open If open, close print mechanism.
If closed, printer open sensor or sensor cable may be faulty - run HW_DIAG Sensor
Test, if this reports printer open, replace printer.
Paper Not Re-load the paper if it was incorrectly loaded, or clear jam.
Loaded
Printer Not Re-load paper, ensuring is correctly fed into take-up spindle.
Winding Check winding motor cable is securely connected (J4).
Print Clear jam and re-load paper.
Mechanism Winding motor may be faulty - unload paper, run HW_DIAG Winding Motor test.
Jam Motor and gears should turn. If not, replace printer.
Paper feed motor may be faulty - unload paper, run HW_DIAG Paper Feed Motor
test. Motor and gears should turn. If not, replace printer.
Paper Re-load paper.
Low/Out Run HW_DIAG Sensor test. Cover and uncover the sensor. If necessary, replace
printer.
General Checks
The following general checks should determine the cause of the majority of errors with the
journal printer:
l Check that the power cable is connected securely at both ends.

l Check that the interface cable from the PC core is connected securely at both ends.
l Check that the interface cable for the module reporting a problem is connected
securely:
Problem Check Cable

Paper low not detected / Frequent paper empty messages Paper low sensor cable (J1)
Frequent “Unable to load paper” messages. Paper end sensor cable (J1)
Paper not feeding correctly / frequent jam messages Feed motor cable (J6)
Paper not winding correctly Winding motor cable (J4)
Poor printing or none at all Thermal head cable (J5)
Printer open message cannot be cleared Open sensor cable (J2)
l Check that the sensors are not obscured by foreign objects/paper dust.
l Check that the operating temperature complies with the specifications given in section
‘Environmental Requirements’.
l Check that thermal paper is being used.
l Check that the paper is not damp, dirty or dusty.
l Check for foreign objects in the feed path or stuck to the reel guides, take-up core,
drive gears or platen.
l Clean thermal elements in print head with alcohol (IPA), using a cotton bud.
l If an EEPROM error is detected, switch the printer off and on again to confirm the
diagnostic result. If there is no change, replace the printer.
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0 Diagnostics
Level 0 diagnostic tests run on start-up and reset or on entering self test mode via dip
switch DSW1.
Start-up Tests
The following tests run at start-up:
l Flash ROM CRC check

l Internal RAM check
l EEPROM test
l Microprocessor test.
In the event of an error in one of the tests the LEDs will indicate the error type. The error
state will be maintained until power is cycled or reset.
LED Diagnostic Displays

The following table shows the codes displayed by the LEDs in the event of an error.
Green Red Meaning

On Off On-line
Fast blink Off IPL mode (firmware ready to download )
Off Fast blink Paper empty
Off On Winding jam
Off Fast blink Unable to load paper
Slow blink Off Paper not wound
Off Off Power off
Test Selected By Dip Switch

The level 0 diagnostic tests that can be set by the logic board dip switch DSW1 are:
l Rolling ASCII print test

l ‘H’ print test
l Dot check pattern print test
l Sensor level adjustment.
Switch and LED Locations

Dip switch DSW1 on the control board is used to select the diagnostic tests. The LEDs
indicate the test selected. Switch SW1 is the reset button.
LED1 LED3 J5
J3
Fuse F3
CN2
J4
DSW1
CN1 SW1
J2
LED2 LED4 J1
How to Enter a Test

1. Ensure the printer is powered off.
2. Set bits 1 and 2 of DSW1 to ON and bit 3 to OFF.
3. Power up the printer.
4. The two LEDs should be off, indicating test mode.

5. Select the required self test by pressing the feed button briefly as follows. The LEDs
will indicate the test selected
Feed LED Test

Button
Presses
Green Red
x0 OFF OFF Rolling ASCII print test (continuous printing)
Mono or 2-colour options.
x1 ON OFF ‘H’ print test (continuous printing)
x2 OFF ON Dot check pattern print test
x3 ON ON Sensor level adjustment
6. Once the test is selected, push and hold the feed button and the test will be
performed.
Note: For the ASCII test to start, you have to briefly press the feed button then press
and hold the feed button again to start the test.
7. After the test is complete, reset the dip switch settings to OFF then either power off
or press the reset button (SW1) to reboot the printer.
Rolling ASCII Print Tests

These tests invoke the printer to continuously print the resident character set, in standard
pitch for 23 lines, then feed 2 lines. The page count is not stored in EEPROM. After the test
is complete, reset the dip switch settings to OFF then either power off or press the reset
button (SW1) to reboot the printer.
00000012
!”#$%&’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFG
!”#$%&’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGH
”#$%&’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHI
#$%&’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJ
00000013
$%&’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJK
%&’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL
&’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLM
’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMN
00000014
()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO
)*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQ
+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR
“H” Print Test

This test causes the printer to continuously print “H” characters in the standard pitch. for 23
lines, then feed 2 lines. The page count is not stored in EEPROM. After the test is
complete, reset the dip switch settings to OFF then either power off or press the reset
button (SW1) to reboot the printer.
00000314
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
00000315
00000316
Dot Check Pattern Test

This test causes the printer to print a dot check pattern. The 12.5% slant line dot pattern is
created using character code 05H. After the test is complete, reset the dip switch settings
to OFF then either power off or press the reset button (SW1) to reboot the printer.
Sensor Level Adjustment

The following sensors can be adjusted:
l Paper low sensor

l Winding sensor.
To adjust the sensors proceed as follows:
1. Ensure there is no paper in the transport.

2. Set dip switch bits 1 and 2 to ON, then power up the printer.
3. The firmware measures the sensors levels.
4. Place a paper roll in the hopper. and feed paper to the print mechanism entry slot,
then press the feed button.
5. The paper is fed through the print mechanism. Sensor adjustment is performed
automatically during this operation. The printer stores the adjustment value into
EEPROM and can be printed on the configuration printout.
6. After the test is complete, reset the dip switch settings to OFF then either power off
or press the reset button (SW1) to reboot the printer.
Printer Configuration Printout

This is not a test as such but a printout of several of the current settings and functions. To
perform the test, press and hold the feed button and press the reset button. After the test is
complete, reset the dip switch settings to OFF then either power off or press the reset
button (SW1) to reboot the printer. The printout can also be peformed in online mode.
Level 1 Diagnostics
All the Level 1 diagnostic tests that involve printing initialize the journal printer in the
following manner:
l Margins are set to 0 and 40

l Line spacing is set to 2.6 mm (1/9 in.)
The settings set on entry into diagnostics are restored on exit. Looping is allowed on all
tests. Tests that require paper out do not run if paper is left in, however, they still return a
good response.
Sensor Test
Print Quality Test

The Print Quality test prints a line of LDTX in double wide then a line in single wide,
followed by graphics. This is followed by a solid black rectangle.
Winding Motor Test

The Winding Motor test drives the winding motor for 5 seconds. Paper must be removed
from the printer for this test to run.

The Paper Feed Motor test drives the paper feed motor for 5 seconds. Paper must be
LEVEL 3 DIAGNOSTICS
The level 3 diagnostics returned for the journal printer are:
S_Data
S_DATA Meaning
00 GOOD (No error).
S_DATA Meaning
03 SUSPEND (Possible customer tampering).
Tallies
Tally Description
WIND JAM The number of winding jams.
MECH JAM The number of print mechanism jams.
HOU ON The number of hours the printer has been switched on.
PAP LEN The number of millimeters of paper that have passed under the printhead.
ERR RECO The number of error recoveries.
OVER HEA The number of times the printer has over-heated.
FLAS CYC The number of flash cycles.
HEAD OPN The number of times the head has been opened.
SUP VOLT The number of supply voltage anomalies.
USB COMM The number of USB communications faults.
STRAPPING
Switches
The following switches are found on the control board and are also accessible through
gaps in the printer frame.
l Switch SW1 is the reset switch.

l The 2-pin dip switch (DSW1) on the control board is used to enter self test mode.
bit 0 bit 1 Contents

0 0 Online mode
1 0 Self test mode
0 1 Flash download mode
1 1 Sensor adjustment mode
The following tests can be accessed in self-test mode:

l ‘H’ print test
A pair of LEDs on each side of the board indicate the tests selected as well as indicating
errors.
ADJUSTMENTS
The Configuration menu in System Application (Sys App) displays the following menu
option for the journal printer:
Menu Description
Printer Contrast Sets the printer contrast in the range 1 (lightest) to 30 (darkest). Default is 15.
Adjust Left Sets the position of the left margin. Adjustments are in steps of 0.125mm (0.005 in.)
Margin within the range of min -1.875mm (-0.075 in.) to max +1.875mm (-+.075 in.).
Minimum value is 0, maximum is 30. Default value is 15.

This section describes the removal and replacement of the head assembly. The assembly
is not advocated as a Field Replaceable Unit, but is available as a spare part.
Head Assembly
1. Remove and retain the four screws securing the rear cover. Remove the cover.
2 on each side
2. Remove the thermal head’s black earth harness from the connector on one side of
the frame.
3. Remove and retain the two screws securing the bottom cover. Remove the cover.
Cable Clamp
X2
4. Lift the cable clamp securing the harness. Lift harness slightly and slide the cover off.
5. Disconnect the thermal head connector from J5 on the board.
6. Remove and retain the two screws securing the print head.
1 on each side
7. Loosen the stop screw on the side of the printer until the head drops. Remove the
head assembly.
8. Disconnect the harnesses from the head assembly.
CABLING
None.
LED1 LED3 J5
J3
Fuse F3
CN2
J4
DSW1
CN1 SW1
J2
LED2 LED4 J1
CN1 USB J3 Feed motor

CN2 Power J4 Winding motor
J1 Winding jam, paper low, paper end sensors J5 Thermal head
J2 Cover open sensor SW1 Reset switch
Pin Assignments
USB Connector (CN1)
Desc Pin
VBUS 1
D- 2
D+ 3
GND 4
Shield Shell
REVISION

PAGE TURNING PASSBOOK PRINTER
DESCRIPTION
There are two variants of the page turning passbook printer: USB and RS232. The
variants are broadly similar and are treated as the same printer in this manual, except when
differences need to be highlighted, notably power supply (RS232 only), differences in
control board and sensor layouts.
The printer provides the following features:
l Process horizontally or vertically stitched passbooks

(horizontal only in SelfServ 54 ATM)
l A 24-wire impact dot matrix print head
l Loading mechanism with an inserter slot
l Magnetic stripe (MS) reader/writer
l Backward ejection function for capturing print media
l Inserter shutter to prevent foreign matter from being inserted
l Page mark (bar code) reader
l Optical last printed line finder
l Automatic forward/reverse page turner
l Media capture tray
l Escutcheon
l Double-byte character generator
l Extensive level 0 diagnostic tests
l Electronic configuration procedures.
Main Components
The passbook printer consists of the following major components:
l Printing unit
l Ribbon feed unit
l Form handling unit
l Magnetic stripe read/write unit
l Inserter shutter unit
l Compact image reader
l Control board
l Power supply (RS232 only)
l Automatic page turning unit
l Capture box unit.
Dimensions
Width Height Length Weight
RS-232 printer: 342 mm(13.4 in.) 255 mm (10.03 in.) 750 mm (29.52 in.) 23 kg (50.7 lb.) max.
USB printer: 340 mm (13.38 in.) 277 mm (10.90 in.) 790 mm (31.10 in.)* See note. 20 kg (44.1 lb.) max.
Note: In SelfServ 54 ATM the printer is 730 mm (28.75 in.) in length.
Power Requirements
The USB printer takes power from the ATMs as follows:
RS232 USB
Voltage Voltage
100 - 120V ac DC + 24 V ±10%
200 - 240V ac Current
Frequency In operation:
50/60 Hz ± 1Hz + 4 A (Average)
Power consumption + 6 A (Pulse width: 1 second)
Operating: 150 Va + 12 A (Pulse width: 0.1 millisecond)
Standby: 60 Va On standby: + 1 A
RS-232 printer Temperature Humidity
Storage 0°C to 40°C 10% to 90% relative humidity
USB Printer Temperature Humidity

Storage -10°C to 55°C 5% to 95% relative humidity
Note 1: Temperature change should not exceed 5 degrees centigrade within 30 minutes
with no dew condensation.
Note 2: Accuracy of printing, reliability of operation and frequency of parts replacement

may be affected if the printer is operated outside the above parameters.
Location Of Components
Page Turning Assy

Compact Image Reader
Printing Assy Capture Box
Print Head
Escutcheon*
Power Supply
Form Handling Assy Chassis

Inserter Shutter Control
Solenoid Panel
*Note: Not on SelfServ 54 ATM.
Description Major Components

Printing Unit Print Head, Print Head Carrier, Support Rail, Timing Belt, Stepping Motor,
Printing Unit Frame.
Ribbon Feed Unit Ribbon Feed Box, Gears, Timing Belt, One-way Clutch.
Form Handling Unit Side Frames, Paper Pans, Drive and Pressure Rollers, Platen Unit, Stepping
Motor.
Magnetic Stripe Magnetic Stripe Head and Head Carrier, Lead Screw, Stepping Motor,
Read/Write Unit Shutter, Solenoid.
Inserter Shutter Unit Inserter Shutter, Solenoid.
Printed Circuit Boards Logic Control Circuit, Drive Circuit, Interface Circuit, ROM, RAM.
Power Supply (RS232 Power Supply, Noise Filter.
only)
Compact Image Reader Optical Sensor, Control Circuit Board.
Automatic Page Turning Page Turning Rollers, Side Frames, Paper Pans, Stepping Motor, Page
Unit Turning Shutter.
Capture Box Capture Box, Empty Sensor.
Form Handling Unit
The inserter shutter unit loads and ejects passbooks which are inserted into the inserter
slot. Depending upon application software the feed amount is automatically adjusted to
match the individual positioning.
Escutcheon
This unit is located at the inserter slot that guides the passbook insertion/ejection. A guide is
provided to set up the end stop according to passbook width (not present on printers in the
SelfServ 54 ATM).
Inserter Shutter
The inserter shutter prevents incorrect media from being inserted into the inserter slot, and
prevents another passbook from being inserted while a passbook is being processed.
When the correct type of media is detected at the inserter by optical sensors, and the
appropriate command is received the inserter shutter opens automatically.
Printing Unit
Depending upon application software, the printing unit selects the print pitch, character
mode, and other print attributes, then prints data.
Thermal Protection of the Print Head

The printer has a print head thermal sensor to protect the print head from overheating
during continuous, heavy-duty operation. If the sensor detects high temperature of the print
head, the printer automatically inserts a three second pause between lines.
Magnetic Stripe Read/write Unit

The Magnetic Stripe (MS) read write unit is located below the inserter. The purpose of the
MS read write unit is to read and write data on the horizontal positioned magnetic stripe on
the underside of the cover on the exterior of the passbook.
Compact Image Reader (CIMR), Last Line Finder (LIF)

The CIMR unit optically senses the number of printed lines in a page of a passbook.
Automatic Page Turning Unit (PGU)
This automatic page turning unit is located at the rear of the printer in front of the capture
bin. Depending upon application software the automatic page turning unit automatically
turns a page of a horizontally-stitched passbook forward and backward.
The USB version of the printer has a page turn wheel and a transport wheel on the left-
hand side of the printer only (viewed from the front).
Note: Wider passbooks may require an additional page turning roller to be added to the
page turning mechanism. Refer to Adjustments Procedures for details.
Capture Box
The capture box is located at the end of the paper path at the rear of the passbook printer
for capturing the left passbooks. The capture box can hold a maximum of five passbooks.
Backward Ejection Function (Capture Function)

The purpose of the backward ejection function is to capture a passbook that is left in the
printer into the capture bin at the rear of the printer.
Power Supply Unit
The power supply is located at the rear of the RS232 variant printer only, below the
automatic page turning unit.
Power Supply Unit Voltage Outputs

The voltage outputs from the power supply unit to the RX315 board are as follows:
l +3.3V
l +5 V
l +12 V
l +16 V
l +42 V.
Control Panel
The control panel has keys and LEDs as illustrated below:
LED 1
LEDs
LED 2
D Key
C Key
B Key
A Key
Part Function
LED (1) Stays on while power is applied. (Note 1).
LED (2) Stays on while the Enhanced passbook printer is ready. Flashes continuously to warn the
operator of an error.
A LED Stays on during the serial interface data transmission.
A key Used to invoke the test and maintenance program (standalone diagnostic tests). Used to
execute the test and maintenance programs (standalone diagnostic tests) (advances the
cursor position).
B LED Flashes continuously to tell the operator to insert a print medium into the inserter when the
Enhanced passbook printer is in a state to wait for a print medium to be inserted, or to
remove a print medium already printed. Lights when a print medium is properly clamped in
the inserter.
B key Used to execute the test and maintenance programs (standalone diagnostic tests) (increases
the number in the cursor position).
C key Used to execute the test and maintenance programs (standalone diagnostic tests) (executes
the current test code).
D key Used to execute the test and maintenance programs (standalone diagnostic tests) (breaks the
test being executed and clears all the digits).
7- Displays the status or error conditions. Displays the test item or test results in the test and
segment maintenance program mode.
LEDs
Note 1: Applying power to the passbook printer automatically initiates a lamp test, lighting
all LEDs up for about one second.
Note 2: (RS232 variant only) Switching the power on while pressing A and D keys starts
the firmware downloading mode through the RS232-C line, and pressing A and B keys
through the memory board.
Note 3: Pressing the A key three times consecutively within 5 seconds, starts the test and
maintenance program mode. Refer to Diagnostics section of this manual for further details.
Default Setting
The default values are selected when the power is first applied to the printer or the reset
command from the host initializes the printer.
The initializing process reconfigures the printer for the default values given below when
shipped from the factory, that is, it is functionally equivalent to the powering-up sequence.
Therefore, the print head and MS read/write head return to their home positions, and the
inserter comes to a halt after an ejection cycle.
Function Default settings

Line feed pitch 1/5 inch
Inserter condition Empty
Character Pitch 12 CPI
Printing speed 120 CPS (NLQ)
Character attribute Normal
Control panel LED (1) (power): ON
LED (2) (ready): ON
A LED: OFF
B LED: OFF
C LED: OFF (not used?)
D LED: OFF (not used?)
7-segment LEDs: OFF
"No. of printable characters per line" command 61 characters/line
Note: When the printer is adjusted for a new passbook width, the initializing process
reconfigures the printer for the new default values.
Correction Values
The following items can be compensated by the correction values in the test and
maintenance program mode (standalone diagnostic test mode). The correction values are
stored in the flash memory on the main control board. Refer to Chapter 4.2.13: Level 0
Diagnostics Printers.
l Forward/backward printing position compensation

l Line feed pitch
l Top print margin
l Left print margin
l MS data centre position
l Last line finding slice level

l Last line finder scan centre position.
Sensor Layout
S25 S12 S21
S30
S26
S7
S6
S3
S2
S24
S10
S29
S4
S5
S2 - Media withdrawal sensor S12 - Capture detection sensor

S3 - Media detection sensor S21 - Capture tray empty sensor
S4 - Top-end detection sensor S24 - Inserter shutter sensor
(central on USB printer)
S5 - Media width sensor S26 - Page turn detection sensor 2
S6 - Magnetic head home position sensor S25 - Page turn detection sensor 1
S7 - Print head home position sensor S29 - CIMR (compact image reader) start
S10 - Page turn roller home position S30 - Last line finder. (located centrally on SelfServ 54
sensor printer)
Actuator Layout
M4
M1
P5
M3
M2
P4 P1
P1 - Shutter Solenoid P4 - Magnetic stripe shutter solenoid

M2 - Media feed motor P5 - Platen release solenoid
M3 - Magnetic head carrier drive motor M1 - Print head carrier drive motor
M4 - Page turning motor
STRAPPING
None.
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0 Diagnostics
Level 0 diagnostics on the enhanced page-turning passbook printer runs in Start-Up and
Selected Test modes.
The control panel on the side of the printer is used to select, start and stop stand-alone test
functions. The LCD display indicates a specific test code and diagnostic commands
entered from the control keys. The test result information, including the current status
during a test, is also displayed.
(Status Indicator)
(Power Lamp) b1 b2 b3 b4
(Ready Lamp)
(A key) (B key) (C key) (D key)
Activating the Stand-Alone Test Mode

The stand-alone test mode is initiated when the A key is pressed three times in succession
within five seconds.
The stand-alone test mode allows access to each diagnostic function using test codes.
Keys A through D are used to control the status indicator and specify test codes.
Key Function
Key A - The A key is used to specify the display field containing a target value. The display
flashes the value currently accessible.
à à à à Flashing cycle through the four

display fields with each keystroke.
Key B - Pressing the B key displays the next value in the field selected by the A key.
Flashing
Key C - Pressing the C key initiates a diagnostic function indicated by the current test code.
The number remains displayed

while testing is in progress
Key D - The D key functions as a cancel key if pressed while testing is in progress.
Pressing this key when testing is not in progress clears the display.
Level 0 Tests
The procedure to select tests is as follows:
If the printer is installed in an ATM, put the ATM into Supervisor mode and make sure that
there are no tests running on the printer.
The selectable level 0 tests are put into the following groups:
End of Test Command (00)

Ends the stand-alone testing.
Magnetic Stripe Read Test 1 (01)

Inserting a passbook into the inserter triggers this diagnostic function. The printer feeds the
passbook and reads the magnetic stripe data (- and + direction) 20 times. Testing ends
when the standard iteration count expires, causing the passbook to automatically eject.
Pressing D key in midstream cancels testing, causing the status indicator to report any
errors encountered so far. If any error is encountered, D key must be pressed again to
force the passbook to eject.
Magnetic Stripe Write Test 1 (02)

passbook, writes specific data onto the magnetic stripe and then reads back the data for a
comparison check. The printer repeats this process 20 times.
The passbook is ejected automatically unless any error has occurred. On error detection or
pressing D key, testing stops, followed by a diagnostic report; D key must be pressed again
to force the passbook to eject.
Printing Test (03)

passbook, then starts printing out in the 12 and 15 character per inch standard test
patterns. When all patterns are printed, testing ends with automatic passbook ejection, and
the printer waits for a new test code to be set.
Pressing D key in the midstream cancels testing, causing the printer to finish the current
printing pattern and to eject the passbook.
Feed and Eject Test (04)

passbook to the first printing line and then to the last printing line. The printer then prints 10
space characters twice and feeds back to the first printing line.
Pressing D key cancels testing, causing the printer to eject the passbook.
Sensor Test 1 (Half Light) (05)

Displays the sensor on/off status on the status indicator. Sensor response is verified using
the information from the emitter output at the half light level.
Pressing D key cancels testing.
Sensor Test 2 (Standard) (06)

the information from the emitter output at the standard level.
Sensor Test 3 (Dark) (07)

the information from the emitter output at the dark level.
Reflection Sensor Medium Detection Value Learning (08)

This test must be done when the control board or any reflection sensors are replaced.
passbook to the place where the applicable sensor must detect the medium, then decides
the detection value, and writes the data into FEPROM.
If the test ends normally, "0End" appears in status indicator. Press D key to eject the
passbook and end testing.
Setting and Logging Information Output (09)

Inserting a passbook into the inserter triggers this diagnostic function. The printer prints out
the firmware version, correction value, and so on.
x x
Where,
00 = Firmware module name and version
01 = Logical circuit version of control board (IPL version)
02 = Correction value
03 = Sensor information
04 = Counter and logging information
06 = Dip switch setting
07 = Magnetic stripe parameter setting.
Sensor Analogue to Digital Value Read and Indicate (0E)
Indicates the present analogue to digital value of concerned sensor. Press D key to eject
the passbook and end testing.
x x
Where,
XX = Selection of sensor
00 = Withdrawal sensor 01: (reserved)
02 = Medium detection sensor
06 = Capture empty sensor
07 = Page turning sensor 1
08 = Page turning sensor 2
0A = Top-end sensor
0B = Capture detection sensor
0C = Width sensor.
Prism Sensor Medium Detection Value Learning (0F)
This test must be done when the control board or any prism sensors are replaced.
When this test is complete, the printer automatically learns the medium detection values of
the prism sensors implemented.
If the test ends normally, "0End" appears in status indicator. Press D key to eject the
passbook and end testing.
PIO Test (10)

Perform the platen test.
When this test is carried out, the printer indicates the item selection. Press B key to input
the item number, and press C key to carry out the each PIO test.
Press D key to end the test.
x x
Where,
00 = All PIO off
01 = Platen retraction on
02 = Platen retraction off
05 = Inserter shutter close (solenoid pull on)
06 = Inserter shutter open (solenoid release).
Platen Test (13)
Perform the PIO test.
When this test is carried out, the printer indicates the item selection. Press B key to input
the item number, and press C key to carry out the each PIO test.
x x
Where,
00 = Platen retraction off
01 = Platen retraction on.
External Loop Test (16)
Remove the interface cable and install a looping jig (maintenance tool) before conducting
an external loop test.
The external loop test performs an interface loop test, using a data feedback circuit formed
by a looping jig and indicates the test result.
Press C or D key to end the test.
Test results example:
0000 = Normal end
1000 = Data compare error
2000 = Faulty LSI status in transmitting device
30NN = Receiving data error
10 = With framing error
20 = With parity error
40 = With over run
4000 = Timeout error in transmission
5000 = Timeout error in receive operation
6000 = DSR inactive when DTS is active
7000 = DSR still active when DTR is off.
Download Firmware
This allows the user to select a firmware module to download to the enhanced passbook
printer. The actual firmware module data must be in the correct format and it must reside
on the CD ROM drive of the ATM.
Report Firmware Versions

This test interrogates the enhanced Passbook printer and returns the revision details of all
of the currently installed firmware modules and is displayed as shown in the diagram and
table below:
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Where,
[1]-[4]: Version and name of firmware (indication is changed as 1-7 by pressing A key)
1. Version (character 1-2, "." is indicated at [4])

3. Version (character 5-6, "." is indicated at [3] and [4])
4. Name (character 1-2, "." is indicated at [2])
5. Name (character 3-4, "." is indicated at [2] and [4])
7. Name (character 7-8, "." is indicated at [2], [3] and [4])
Test Test Function

code
Firmware 40 Indicates the name and version of IPL on status indicator as ASCII code. The version consists
version of 6 characters and the name consists of 8 characters. Pressing A key changes item
indication indications in order, and pressing D key ends this test.
(IPL) 1. Version (character 1-2, "." is indicated at [4])
3. Version (character 5-6, "." is indicated at [3] and [4])
4. Name (character 1-2, "." is indicated at [2])
7. Name (character 7-8, "." is indicated at [2], [3] and [4])
Firmware 41 Indicates the name and version of SUB on status indicator as ASCII code. The procedure is
version the same as test "4000".
indication
(SUB)
Firmware 42 Indicates the name and version of BAS on status indicator as ASCII code. The procedure is
version the same as test "4000"
indication
(BAS)
Firmware 43 Indicates the name and version of FNC on status indicator as ASCII code. The procedure is
indication
(FNC)
Firmware 44 Indicates the name and version of EMU 0 on status indicator as ASCII code. The procedure
version is the same as test "4000".
indication
(EMU 0)
indication
(EMU 1)
indication
(EMU 2)
indication
(EMU 3)
Test Test Function

code
Firmware 48 Indicates the name and version of OPT 0 on status indicator as ASCII code. The procedure is
indication
(OPT 0)
Firmware 49 Indicates the name and version of OPT 1 on status indicator as ASCII code. The procedure is
indication
(OIPT 1)
Firmware 4A Indicates the name and version of OPT 2 on status indicator as ASCII code. The procedure is
indication
(OPT 2)
Firmware 4B Indicates the name and version of OPT 3 on status indicator as ASCII code. The procedure is
indication
(OPT 3)
Firmware 4C Indicates the name and version of ACG on status indicator as ASCII code. The procedure is
indication
(ACG)
Firmware 4D Indicates the name and version of KCG 0 on status indicator as ASCII code. The procedure is
indication
(KCG 0)
Firmware 4E Indicates the name and version of KCG 1 on status indicator as ASCII code. The procedure is
indication
(KCG 1)
Establishment and Indication of Ribbon Counter Value (Alarm to

Replace) (58)
When this test is carried out, the printer indicates the ribbon counter value (five digits:
without sign).
Press A key to change the position ("." is indicated each of [1] - [4]).
Press B key to renew the indication (upper 2 digits: 00 - 99).
Press C key to register the indication.
Magnetic Stripe Parameter Indication and Establishment (60)

When this test is carried out, the printer indicates the magnetic stripe parameter value (four
digits [first decimal place]: without sign).
Press A key to change the position (indicated each of [1] - [4]).
Press B key to renew the indication (000.0 - 999.9).
Magnetic Stripe Parameter Indication and Establishment (6080)

This is for the setting parameter value for passbook width.
Example - The following is an example of how to determine a new value for passbook
width of 142 mm:
It is necessary to convert the metric measurement to an imperial measurement.
1. Passbook width: 142 mm (5.59 in.).

2. Multiply 5.59 by 100, so the figure becomes to 559.
3. Then change the figure to 0559, 0 for first digit, 5 for second digit, 5 for third digit, and
9 for the fourth digit.
Note 1: The figure 0559 must now replace the current value for passbook width.
Note 2: When the new value has been entered the printer calculates the figures designated
in decimal into Hex and stores it automatically.
4. When the new value for passbook width has been established select test code 6080
using the control keys on the LCD display.
5. Enter the new passbook value (0559 in this example) using the control keys on the
LCD display.
6. Re-boot the ATM.
7. Check that the printer has stored the new position value for the MS parameter by
accessing the stand-alone test mode on the printer:
l Press the A key is three times in succession within five seconds.

l Enter the test code 6080.
The display should indicate the new value (0559 in this example) of the book width as
previously calculated.
Turn Page Test (In Order) (80)

passbook, turns page (right direction) then ejects the passbook automatically.
Turn Page Test (Reverse Order) (82)

passbook, turns page (reverse direction) then ejects the passbook automatically.
Printed Line Reference Test (Image Reader) (86)

passbook and then searches the printed line (image reader).
The printer then ejects the passbook automatically and indicates the searching information.
Press A key to change the indication of searching information.
Press D key to stop/end the test.
Printed Line Reference (Image Reader) and Printing Test (87)

passbook, searches the printed line (image reader) and indicates the searching
information. The printer then prints the '00-00-00' on the next line to the printed line
detected and ejects the passbook automatically.
Searching, indicating and printing are repeated for the specified numbers.
Printing Shade Check Test (8E)

passbook, checks the printing shade (image reader). Then ejects passbook automatically
and indicates the checking information.
Magnetic Stripe Read Data Printing Test (90)

passbook and then prints the magnetic stripe read data. The printer then ejects the
passbook automatically.
Printer Information Indication and Establishment

Test Test Function
code
Line transfer rate C0 When this test is carried out, the printer indicates the printer information (one digit:
without sign).
Press A key to change the position ("." is indicated each of [1] - [4]).
Press B key to renew the indication (0 - 9).
Parity C1 When this test is carried out, the printer indicates the printer information (one digit:
without sign). The procedure is the same as Test Code C0.
ACK time out C2 When this test is carried out, the printer indicates the printer information (one digit:
Magnetic stripe C3 When this test is carried out, the printer indicates the printer information (one digit:
support without sign). The procedure is the same as Test Code C0.
Skew adjustment C4 When this test is carried out, the printer indicates the printer information (one digit:
BCR support C5 When this test is carried out, the printer indicates the printer information (one digit:
Image reader C6 When this test is carried out, the printer indicates the printer information (one digit:
With/without page C7 When this test is carried out, the printer indicates the printer information (one digit:
changing system without sign). The procedure is the same as Test Code C0.
Magnetic Stripe C8 When this test is carried out, the printer indicates the printer information (one digit:
read type without sign). The procedure is the same as Test Code C0.
specification
Magnetic stripe C9 When this test is carried out, the printer indicates the printer information (one digit:
write type without sign). The procedure is the same as Test Code C0.
specification
With/without CA When this test is carried out, the printer indicates the printer information (one digit:
collecting system without sign). The procedure is the same as Test Code C0.
At the reset, select CB When this test is carried out, the printer indicates the printer information (one digit:
and eject direction without sign). The procedure is the same as Test Code C0. Front, Back, not carried out
(0,1,2).
Circuit time out CC When this test is carried out, the printer indicates the printer information (two digits:
monitor timer without sign). The procedure is the same as Test Code C0.
EMU/OPT D0 When this test is carried out, the printer indicates the printer information (one digit:
changing without sign). The procedure is the same as Test Code C0.
Printing speed D1 When this test is carried out, the printer indicates the printer information (one digit:
initial value without sign). The procedure is the same as Test Code C0.
Test Test Function

code
Reserved D2 When this test is carried out, the printer indicates the printer information (one digit:
OPT information D3 When this test is carried out, the printer indicates the printer information (one digit:
changing without sign). The procedure is the same as Test Code C0.
Reserved D4 When this test is carried out, the printer indicates the printer information (three digits:
Reserved D8 Unsupported.
Reserved DF Unsupported.
Shading Test (E0)

passbook, shades (image reader) and then ejects the passbook automatically.
Press D key to stop/end the test and eject passbook.
Image Reader Centre Shift Correcting Test (E1)

passbook and then searches the printed line (image reader). The printer then ejects the
passbook automatically and indicates the centre shift correcting value information.
Press D key to stop/end the test
Level 0 Error Codes

The table below lists the error codes which can occur during diagnostic testing. Other level
0 codes which occur during normal running of the printer are also returned in M-data and
are listed in the section “M-Data, Printer Firmware Error Codes” in Refer toNCR
56XX/PERSONAS/662X/663X SELF-SERVICE FINANCIAL TERMINAL DIAGNOSTIC
STATUS CODE NOTEBOOK (B006-6273).
Device Diagnostics
Error Code Meaning
1 T008 Reflecting sensor medium selection value.
T00F Prism sensor medium selection value.
T018 Correcting value clear.
T019 Sensor medium selection value clear.
T01A Printer information clear.
T01B Ribbon counter clear.
T01C Logging counter clear.
T01D All area clear.
T01E Correcting value and sensor medium selection value clear.
T01F Magnetic Stripe parameter clear.
T02E Extension FEPROM all clear.
T02F Low speed FEPROM clear.
58- Ribbon counter establishment.
5B
60 Magnetic stripe parameter establishment.
A0- Correcting value/printer information establishment.
DF
2 T108 Establishment of sensor outside inserter (S5) medium selection value became error after inserting
a passbook into the inserter at reflecting sensor medium selection value. Sensor is dark (without
passbook).
3 T20F Establishment of sensor outside inserter (S2, S3) medium selection value and medium selection
value margin became error after inserting a passbook into the inserter at prism sensor medium
selection value. Sensor is dark (with passbook). Analogue to Digital value (dark) is below 215.
T30F Light axis slip check of sensor outside inserter (S2, S3) became error after inserting a passbook into
the inserter at prism sensor medium selection value. Medium selection value margin is above
Analogue to Digital value (normal) and Analogue to Digital value (half light) is above 8. Medium
selection value margin is above Analogue to Digital value (normal) and Analogue to Digital value
(half light) is below 8. Analogue to Digital value (dark) -
Analogue to Digital value (normal) is above 112.
The following diagnostic tests for the passbook printer are accessed via Device
Diagnostics on the System Application Main Menu. Looping is allowed on all tests.
Diagnostics section of this service manual.
Test Description
ACCEPT BOOK Enable the printer to accept a passbook.
If the accpet fails, the rest of the test is skipped.
Test times out if no passbook is entered within 5 seconds.
If the test times out, the printer is disabled and a check is made for a late event
READ TRACK 2 Reads and displays the contents of track 2 ( up to any detected error).
(IBM)
READ TRACK 3 Reads and displays the contents of track 3( up to any detected error).
(ISO/DIN)
DEFINE Allows user to set the end sentinel used in read/write operations.
MAGNETIC Maximum is 2 digits, default is 3F (hex).
END SENTINEL
DEFINE Allows the user to set the magnetic recording position used in magnetic track read/write
VERTICAL operations. A four digit number must be entered to specify the magnetic recording position, a
MAGNETIC four digit number of the form “wxyz” is interpreted as wxy.z millimetres. Note that all 4 digits
POSITION must be entered. If invalid data is entered then the current value is unchanged and the user is
prompted to re-enter the number.
WRITE TRACK Performs a read of the track and, if successful, performs a write of two different patterns of the
2 (IBM) maximum number of allowed characters.
If the original track image read and both writes were successful then a write with the original
track data is performed to restore the track.
If a read or write error occurs during these tests, the track on the passbook may be left
corrupted. Rewrite of the original data is not attempted if the test write fails. The first test write
pattern is ASCII zeros and the second pattern is “0123456789” repeated until the track
maximum is reached.
If the original track image read is blank then the test continues and a single character “0” is
written back to the track at the end of the test instead of re-writing the original data.
Max characters = 37.
WRITE TRACK As above but max. characters = 105 (ISO) or 45 (DIN).
3 (ISO/DIN)
EJECT BOOK Returns the passbook to the exit position and allows it to be removed.
PRINT LINE The user is requested to input a one or two digit number specifying the line to print on. If no
input is given the default of line one is used. A line of single wide “LDTX” characters is then
printed on the chosen, or default, line. Printing takes into account the current document
definition.
PRINT Prints a line of “LDTX” double wide, followed by a line of “LDTX” single wide, followed by a full
QUALITY character set single wide. Printing takes into account the current document definition in order
to print the maximum no. of characters possible.
PAGE Displays the current page number of the passbook in the printer. If this is the first test after a
NUMBER book has been accepted, the book will not be moved the first time this test is run.
Test Description
PAGE Prompts the user for the number of pages to turn forward in the range 1 to 9 inclusive and then
FORWARD issues a command to turn the number of pages requested. Note that use of the PAGE NUMBER
command will be required to validate this printer function.
PAGE BACK Prompts the user for the number of pages to turn backward in the range 1 to 9 inclusive and
then issues a command to turn the number of pages requested. Note that use of the PAGE
NUMBER command will be required to validate this printer function.
BOOK Captures any passbooks present in the printer.
CAPTURE
EXERCISE Displays a sub-menu of 8 passbook motors. Selecting one of these menu options allows the user
MOTORS to test the motor specified. Those menu options marked “VERIFY” require the user to visually
the correct operation of the motor. Menu options given are as follows:
MAIN FEED - VERIFY
PRINT HEAD
PLATEN HEAD UP/DOWN - VERIFY
PLATEN SHUTTER OPEN/CLOSE
PAGE ROLLER DRIVE - VERIFY
TURN PAGE SWING MECH
INK RIBBON FEED - VERIFY
HORIZONTAL MAG. STRIPE
All tests will fail if a passbook is present.
EXERCISE Displays a two-page sub-menu of the 9 passbook solenoids. Selecting one of these menu options
SOLENOIDS allows the user to test the solenoid specified. All tests require visual verification. Menu options
are as follows:
FRONT TRANSPORT PINCH
INSERTION GATE ROUTE
SHUTTER FOR HORIZ. MAG
MEDIA HOME POSITION
MID TRANSPORT PINCH
PUSH PAGE LINE FIND GRIP
REAR TRANSPORT PINCH
TURN PAGE BOOK GUIDE
CAPTURE ROUTE GATE
DEFINE Allows the user to define the dimensions of the passbook to be used. The user is prompted for
DIMENSIONS the following fields, with the default being the current value :
See next Type, Pitch, Feed, Left, Right, Length, Top, Bottom, Fold 1, Fold 2, P1, Pc1, Pc2, Sc1, Sc2, Scan1,
section for Scan2
details See next section for details
DISPLAY Allows the user to define the dimensions of the passbook to be used. The user is prompted for
DIMENSIONS the following fields, with the default being the current value:
Type, Pitch, Feed, Left, Right, Length, Top, Bottom, Fold 1, Fold 2, P1, Pc1, Pc2, Sc1, Sc2, Scan1,
Scan2
LINE SCAN Displays the number of the next blank line on the passbook as t-data.
Test Description
CHECK LINE The user is requested to input a one or two digit number specifying the line to be examined for
any printed characters. If no line number is entered a default of line one is used. The chosen, or
default, line of the passbook is then scanned for any printed characters, with the displayed t-data
indicating if any were detected.
DEFINE Allows the user to define the default track type: ISO, IBM or DIN.
MAGNETIC
FORMAT
DEFINE PAGE Allows the user to configure the driver firmware for vertical scan support. The user is prompted
SCAN for the Barcode type (IBM or FUJITSU) and the total number of pages in the passbook, with the
default value of 7 being used if no value is entered. For both page turning variants of the
Passbook Printer the user will not be offered the NCR barcode type.
DISPLAY PAGE Displays the current scan configuration (see Define Scan test).
SCAN
RS232 Performs an RS-232 turnaround test. A turnaround plug is required.
TURNAROUND
(RS232 printer
only)
RUN TO RUN Performs the following sequence of tests :-
ACCEPT
READ (track)
WRITE (track)
PAGE NUMBER
PRINT QUALITY
EJECT
CAPTURE
Note 1 : READ(track) and WRITE(track) are only performed if magnetic read/write heads are
configured.
Note 2 : In a run-to-run test, if no passbook is detected on an ACCEPT or no passbook is present
on a CAPTURE (with or without looping), then the RUN TO RUN test is terminated.
DEFINE Allows the user to set the start sentinel used in read/write operations. Default depends on
MAGNETIC currently selected track (hex). Hitachi variant only.
START
SENTINEL
MAGNETIC Allows the user to set the start number of magnetic bits per inch used in reading and writing
BITS PER INCH magnetic stripe of the passbook.
DEFINE Allows the user to set the horizontal magnetic recording position used in magnetic track
HORIZONTAL read/write operations. A four digit number must be entered to specify the magnetic recording
MAGNETIC position, a four digit number of the form “wxyz” is interpreted as wxy.z millimetres. Note that all
POSITION 4 digits must be entered. If invalid data is entered then the current value is unchanged and the
user is prompted to re-enter the number.
Test Description
DEFINE Allows the user to set the number of times the printer will automatically retry a failed read or
MAGNETIC write operation. Default is 3.
RETRY COUNT
SENSOR Returns the current status of the printer sensors.
DIAGNOSTIC
TEST
REPORT Returns the revision details of all the currently installed firmware modules.
FIRMWARE
REVISIONS
(RS232 printer
only)
DOWNLOAD Allows the user to select a firmware module to download to the printer. The actual firmware
FIRMWARE data must be in the correct Hitachi format and it must reside on the disk drive of the ATM.
(RS232 printer
only)
Detail of Define Dimensions Test

You are prompted for the following fields, with the default being the current value. For the
definitions to be correct, the book being defined must be symmetrical.
Type
This should be set to 1 for a Horizontally stitched book or 2 for a Vertically stitched book.
Feed
For 6 lpi, Feed should be set to 40. For 5 lpi, Feed should be set to 48.
Width Left
1. Measure the width of the total printable area of the book, taking into account space
for left and right margins.
2. Multiply Width (in inches) by the number of characters per inch used.
For example, if Pitch is 12 cpi, then multiply Width by 12. This gives the number of
characters per printable line.
3. To get the Width Left subtract the total number of characters calculated from the
Width Right value (see below).
For example, for a book with Width = 4.75", total number of characters is
4.75 x 12 = 57
Therefore Width Left = Width Right - 57
= 96 - 57
= 39
Width Right
Character Size (cpi) Width Right

10 80
12 96
12.9 103
13.1 104
13.3 106
13.8 110
14 112
15 120
16.4 131
17.14 137
18 144
For example, if Pitch is 10 cpi, then Width Right should be set to 80.
If Pitch is 17.14 cpi, then Width Right should be set to 137.
Length
Length does not have to be defined for a Horizontally stitched book.
For a Vertically stitched book the Length value is set to the number of printable lines. For
example, for the Vertical book diagram shown under ‘Vertically Stitched Book’, Length
would be set to 18.
Top Margin
For the top value, take the measurement, in inches, from the top of the book to the bottom
of the first print line.
Multiply the Top value by 240.
If Top is equal to 1 inch then the top value is 240.
If Top is equal to 0.8 inch then the top value is 192.
A default value of 240 is initially set.
Bottom Margin
This does not have to be set. A default value of 4 is initially set.
Fold 1 and Fold 2

Horizontally Stitched Book
Define the line number at the start of the non-printing zone and line number at the end non-
printing zone for horizontally stitched books, as shown in the following examples:
20
1
19
2
18
3
17
4
16
5
15
6
Fold 1 Fold 1 7
14
(11)
13
8
(13) 9
12
11
10
10
11
9
12
8
13
Fold 2
7
14
Fold 2 15
6
(14) (12) 16
5
4
17
3
18
2
19
1
20
Vertically Stitched Book
Subtract the Width Left from the Width Right and divide by 2. Add this value to the Width
Left value. This will give a value that is roughly at the centre of the book.
Fold 1 Fold 2
1
18
2
17
3
16
4
15
5
14
6
13
7
12
8
11
9
10
10
9
11
8
12
7
13
6
14
5
15
4
16
3
17
2
18
1
For Fold 1 subtract, for example 2, from this value.
For Fold 2, add, for example 2 to this value.
This +/- calculation may require fine-tuning as the value of 2 is only given as a starting point.
For example, for a book with Width Left of 38 and Width Right of 96, Fold 1 would be set at
65 and Fold 2 set at 69.
P1, PC1, PC2, SC1 AND SC2

These are provided for compatibility with RMX products and do not have to be altered.
Default values are 1, 1, 9, 1 and 9 respectively.
Scan 1
This is defined as the number of the first printable line. In the examples shown under
‘Horizontally Stitched Book’, this would be 1.
Scan 2
This is defined as the number of the last printable line. In the examples shown under
‘Horizontally Stitched Book’, this would be 24 (left-hand example) and 20 (right-hand
example).
Device Self Test

Accessed via Device Self Tests on the System Application Main Menu, the page turn
passbook printer device self test is as follows:
1. The passbook printer is enabled to accept a passbook. A message is displayed for

10 seconds prompting the operator to enter a passbook. If a passbook is not
detected within the 10 seconds the test fails and jumps to step 9. If a passbook is
entered but cannot be successfully staged by the printer the test fails and jumps to
step 9. If a passbook is already present in the reader at the start of the accept
command then it is captured, and the test is restarted. If capture operation fails the
test jumps to step 9.
2. The current page number for the passbook is read.

3. An attempt is made to read track 3 as DIN format, if the read operation returns a
“read error” response, then the test attempts to read track 3 as ISO Format,
however if the read operation returns a “blank track” response, the test will then
attempt to read track 2 as IBM format. If all read attempts fail then no write test will
be performed and the self-test will jump to step 5.
4. A write track test is performed. The method by which the data is written onto the
track depends on the result of the previous read test. If the data was read
successfully as DIN or ISO format then a write track 3 is performed. If the data was
successfully read as IBM format then the a write track 2 is performed.
5. A print quality test is performed.
6. The passbook pages are turned one page forward followed by one page
backwards.
7. The passbook is ejected. The operator is prompted to remove the passbook and
given 10 seconds to do so. If the passbook is removed then the operator is prompted
to validate the print quality, the book will not be captured and the test jumps to step 9.
If the eject fails then there will be no attempt to capture the book and the test jumps
to step 9.
8. The passbook is captured
9. The passbook printer is disabled to prohibit the entry of any further passbooks.
Tallies
Tally Description
BOOKTRAN A passbook enters the transport.
READ_OPS A read is attempted for the first time.
READ_ERR A track cannot be read correctly after a full set of retries (three).
READ_RTY A track is read following a retry.
BLANKTRK A blank track is detected.
WRTE_OPS A write is attempted for the first time.
WRTE_ERR A read after write check fails after a full set of retries (three).
WRTE_RTY A read after write check is successful following a retry.
COM_OPS A communication between driver and printer, commands and status.
COM_FAIL Printer operation failed due to a comms failure.
EJCT_OPS An eject is attempted for the first time.
EJCT_JAM An eject attempt fails, for example, book jam.
EJCT_RTY An eject is successful following a retry.
JAM A jam is detected.
JAM_RTY A jam is cleared following a retry.
PRINTLIN A line is printed.
SHTR_JAM A shutter jam is detected.
SHTR_SEN A sensor failure is detected.
CAPT_OPS A capture is attempted for the first time.
CAPT_RTY A capture is successful following a retry.
CAPT_ERR A capture attempt failed.
CAPTURED A passbook is captured.
REMOVED A passbook is removed following an eject. (If another command is received before the passbook is
taken, the tally will not be incremented).
TURN_OPS A Page Turn Backward/Forward command is successful
Note: The tally counts the number of pages sent by the command.
TURN_RTY Retry count for Page Turn Backward/Forward commands.
TRN_FAIL Unsuccessful Page Turn commands.
S_DATA
S_DATA Meaning
00 GOOD (No error).
Note: Diagnostic testing severity will either be good or routine.
M_status
Refer to NCR 56xx/personas/662x/663x Self-service Financial Terminal Diagnostic Status
ADJUSTMENTS
This section describes the adjustments on the passbook printer. These are grouped into
the sections:
l Customization Adjustments - The mechanical adjustments to customize the printer to

accept passbooks of a particular size.
l Data Adjustments - Adjustments made, with power on the printer, by entering data
under Level 0 Diagnostics Selected Test No. 60.
Customization Adjustments
Adjustment for Passbook Width
Note: Not applicable on printers in SelfServ 54 ATMs.
When shipped from the factory the printer is set for passbook width 136 mm (5.35 in.). If the
passbooks to be used are outside this measurement proceed as follows:
For passbooks between 120 mm (4.72 in.) and 142 mm (5.59 in.) wide inclusive it is
necessary to adjust the following parts:
l Escutcheon guide (outer guide)

l Inserter guide (inner guide)
l Width sensor
For passbooks between 147 (5.78 in.) mm and 165 mm (6.49 in.) wide inclusive it is
necessary to adjust the same parts as above and to add an extra page turning roller.
Note 1: Do not secure the width sensor in a position that is more than 15 mm less than the
passbook width as it is used for checking the passbook width.
Note 2: Making W1 and W2 too wide will cause passbook skew. Refer to the following
figure.
Note 3: Making W1 and W2 too narrow will cause transport errors. Refer to the following
figure.
Passbook Width Settings

W3
Sensor Assembly
Front
Transport
W2
Inserter Guide
Paper Tray
W1
Escutcheon Guide
Escutcheon
Wp
Passbook
(Horizontal / Vertical)
Item Value Setting

Escutcheon W1 W1 = W p Maximum + 1.0 mm
Inserter Guide W2 W2 = W p Maximum + 0.5 mm
Width Sensor W3 W3 less than Wp (10-15 mm)
Escutcheon Guide
1. Unscrew and remove the three screws securing the escutcheon plate and foam in
position.
2. Unscrew and remove the four screws securing the escutcheon guide to the
escutcheon.
3. Position a passbook in the printer entry slot so that the left-hand side of the
passbook is against the left-hand reference edge. Position the escutcheon guide, on
the passbook entry shelf, so that the angled side is just touching the right-hand side
of the passbook. Mark the rib on the escutcheon guide which is nearest to the inside
right-hand edge of the printer entry slot.
4. Using a hacksaw, cut the escutcheon guide at the marked rib and discard the
unwanted piece of the escutcheon guide.
5. Secure the escutcheon guide in position with the screws removed in step 2.
6. Replace the escutcheon plate and foam and then secure in position with the screws
removed in step 1.
Foam sheet
Cover plate
Escutcheon
Guide
Inserter Guide
1. Move the print head assembly to the mid position then lift up.
2. Remove the ribbon cartridge.

3. Lift up the rear inserter transport into the open position using the levers at each side.
Lever
Rear Inserter
Transport
Screws
Lever
4. Unscrew and remove the two screws at each side of the front inserter transport.
5. Carefully remove the front inserter transport from the paper tray.
6. Unscrew and remove the two screws securing the inserter guide to the paper tray.
7. Unscrew and remove the two screws securing the inserter stopper to the paper tray.
8. Move the inserter guide and inserter stopper to match the passbook width and then
secure in position with the screws removed in steps 6 and 7.
Paper Tray
Screws
Inner
Inserter Guide
9. Replace the front inserter transport and secure in position using the screws
removed in step 4.
10. Close the rear inserter transport.
11. Replace the ribbon cartridge then push the print head assembly down.
12. Turn the ribbon feed knob clockwise to remove ribbon slack.
13. Move the print head carrier fully to the left and right several times and check that the
ribbon does not come out of the ribbon guide.
Width Sensor
Width Sensor
Screw
1. Unscrew and remove the screw securing the width sensor assembly to the bracket.
2. Move the width sensor assembly 10 - 15 mm (0.39 in. - 0.59 in.) less than the
passbook width and then secure in position with the screw removed in the previous
step.
Note 1: Do not secure the width sensor in a position that is more than 15 mm (0.59 in.) less
than the passbook width as it is used for checking the passbook width.
Automatic Page Turning Unit

The following diagram shows the factory default setting for the passbook width.
Automatic Page Turning Unit Adjustment Procedures

The following diagram shows the setting for passbooks between 147 mm and 165 mm
wide inclusive.
1. Remove the snap-off section on both forward and backward shutters.

2. Unscrew and remove the two screws securing the PG shutter guide to the side
frame.
3. Re-position the PG shutter guide against the side frame and secure in position with
the screws removed in the previous step.
4. Ensure that the PG shutter guide is in a central position in relation to the
forward/backward shutters.
5. Open and close the forward and backward shutters using the gear wheel on the
right-hand side of the printer and ensure that the PG shutter guide is clear.
6. Unscrew and remove the screw securing the gear cover in position. Remove the
gear cover from the printer.
Roller Cap
Screw
Spare PG
Roller
Spring Spring
Screw
PG Roller
PG Roller
PG Shutter Shaft
Stop
Gear Cover
Screw
7. Unscrew and remove the screw securing the spare PG roller in the storage position.
Remove the spare PG roller.
8. Unclip the cap and then secure the spare PG roller to the PG roller shaft with the
screw that secured it in the storage position. Insert the cap into the spare PG roller.
9. Unscrew and remove the PG shaft spring screw.
10. Move the spring along the guide shaft to the PG roller 4 position.
11. Unclip the PG shutter stop from the PG shaft.
12. Re-install the PG shutter stop in the PG roller 4 position.
13. Re-attach the spring and replace the PG shaft spring screw.
Data Adjustments
After the mechanical adjustments are made, fine adjustments to the printer are made by
setting data into memory using level 0 diagnostics MS Parameter Set Up (60). See
Diagnostics section.
CABLES AND CONNECTORS

RS232 printer
The following diagram shows the main logic areas of the printed circuit boards of the page
turning passbook printer and the locations of the internal connectors.
MS Head H4B H4A

RX316 PCB
B0 RX315 PCB
H4
B1
B3
RX301 PCB
G0
Control Panel B1 K1
RX304 PCB
J10 J30 CIMR

CIMR PCB J50 Sensor Head
CN3 Inlet 100-240V AC in

CN1
CN2 Power Supply PCB
USB printer
Control board (RX906) layout and connector assignments are shown below.
Control panel
MS Head USB
CIMR sensor head
Connector Pins Description

S1 1-3 Media withdrawal sensor (S2)
4-6 Media Detection sensor (S3)
7-9 Media width sensor (S5)
11-13 Magnetic head home position sensor (S6)
14-16 Print head home position sensor (S7)
17-19 Inserter shutter sensor (S24)
S2 4-6 CIMR sensor (S29/S30)
7-9 Page turn roller home position sensor (S10)
10-12 Top end sensor (S4)
Connector Pins Description

13-16 Page turn detection sensor 1 (S25)
17-20 Page turn detection sensor 2 (S26)
21-23 Capture detection sensor (S12)
24-27 Capture box empty sensor (S21/S22)
SOLO 1-2 Platen solenoid
4-6 Inserter shutter solenoid
7-9 Shutter solenoid
M1 PR head carrier motor
M2 Form handling motor
M3 MS driving motor
M4 Page turning motor
PH1 and PH2 Printhead
MH Magnetic head
X2 CIMR sensor head
GO Control Board
PO Power
USB USB
REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (RS 232 ONLY)
CAUTION
Remove power to the ATM before plugging or unplugging the printer
power to avoid damaging the printer.
Remove power to the ATM before disassembling any part of the
printer.
Electrostatic Discharge may damage the printed circuit boards.
Wear a grounded wrist strap and use a static mat or other ESD
protected work surface whenever you work on the printed circuit
boards.
Removing The Print Head

printer.
Ribbon Cartridge
4. Press the print head carrier down.

5. Move the printing head to the right-hand side of the printing unit and then lift it until it
clicks into position.
6. Unscrew and remove the screws securing the printing unit top frame to the printing
unit side frame.
7. Loosen the screws securing the printing unit top frame to the page turning unit side
frame.
8. Lift the printing unit top frame up to gain access to the print head cable.
9. Unclip the plastic cover and print head cable from the print head carrier.
10. Remove the bar code reader from the print head carrier.
11. Disconnect the ribbon connector from the print head connector.
12. Unscrew and remove the two screws securing the print head to the print head
carrier.
13. Carefully thread the print connector and ribbon cable through the carrier and
remove the print head.
Re-installing the Print Head

1. Ensure that the earth spring is in position inside the print head carrier.
2. The replacement of the print head is the reverse of the removal procedures.
Removing The Power Supply Unit

Unscrew and remove the two screws securing the gear cover in position. Remove the
cover.
3. Disconnect the A0 fan connector from the RX315 board.

4. Disconnect the B0 connector from the RX315 board.
5. Thread the B0 connector and harness through the PRU motor cover.
6. Unscrew and remove the screw securing the earth wire to the bottom chassis.
7. Unscrew and remove the four screws securing the power supply unit in position.
8. Remove the power supply unit from the printer in the direction indicated on the
illustration.
Power Supply RX315

Unit PCB Board
B0 Connector
PRU Motor Cover
Screws
Gear Cover
Power Supply
Unit
Earth
Wire
Screws
RX315 A0 Connector
PCB Board
Re-installing the Power Supply Unit

The replacement of the power supply unit is the reverse of the removal procedures.
TROUBLESHOOTING
USB USB or power cable disconnected Check cable Re-connect cable
communications from printer or core
error Application hang CEN-XFS reset and reset
SOH. Or hard reset of
ATM.
USB or power cable faulty Replace and retest Replace cable.
Control board Device faulty Replace printer.
failure
Too many Magnetic head is dirty Check for dirt/debris Clean with isopropyl
consecutive read alcohol
errors Fault with connection to magnetic Check cable Re-connect cable
head
Magnetic head faulty Check using test passbook If not faulty, replace
printer.
Too many Magnetic head is dirty Check head for Clean with isopropyl
consecutive write dirt/debris alcohol
errors Fault with connection to magnetic Check cable Re-connect cable
head
Magnetic head faulty Check using test passbook If not faulty, replace
printer.
Too many Foreign media blocking transport or Check transport and Use test passbook to
consecutive paper path paper path for debris verify transport is clear.
passbook jams Passbook width sensor set incorrectly Check passbook width Adjust passbook width
sensor against passbook sensor
width
Passbook escutcheon guide set Check escutcheon guide Adjust escutcheon guide
incorrectly against passbook width
Passbook inserter guide set Check inserter guide Adjust inserter guide
Passbook printer height set Check printer height Adjust printer height
incorrectly with respect to facia
insert moulding

Passbook throat Passbook jam Check transport and Clear jam and use test
jam paper path passbook to verify
Dirty or blocked sensor Check sensor for Clean sensor/remove
dirt/debris debris
Passbook width sensor set incorrectly Check passbook width Adjust passbook width
sensor against passbook sensor
width
Passbook escutcheon guide set Check escutcheon guide Adjust escutcheon guide
Passbook inserter guide set Check inserter guide Adjust inserter guide
Passbook printer height set Check printer height Adjust printer height
incorrectly with respect to facia
insert moulding
Passbook capture Passbook jam Check transport Clear jam and use test
jam passbook to verify
Capture bin full Check bin Empty bin
Dirty or blocked sensor Check sensor for Clean sensor/remove
dirt/debris debris
Page turning Passbook jam Check page turn mech Clear jam and use test
mechanism jam passbook to verify
Print head needs Print head near end of life Replace print head
replaced soon /
now
Ribbon needs Ribbon near end of life Replace ribbon
replaced
soon/now
Capture bin Bin full Empty bin
full/nearly full Capture bin sensor dirty or blocked Check sensor for Clean sensor/remove
dirt/debris debris
Fault Finding
The following section on troubleshooting provides information to help in determining the
cause of passbook printer malfunctions.
Test Points
Test points are located on the control pcb and can be used to diagnose sensor and power
failures.
Note: Voltages should be measured under actual load conditions, so ensure that all the
connectors are properly connected before measuring the voltage levels. Make sure that the
meter probe does not contact the bottom chassis when checking voltages.
RS232 printer - The test points are accessed by removing the cover located at the front
bottom right-hand side of the printer:
Cover
RX315 PCB
+5V +16V GND

+3.3V +12V +42V
USB printer - The test points are accessed by removing the cover located on the side of the
printer:
Faults on the RS232 printer

1. The printer will not operate when the power switch is turned on.
Preconditions:
l The power is properly applied

l The operation panel connecting G0 connector on the RX315 is correctly
connected.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 All lamps on the operation Check that the B0 connector on the RX315 and CN2, CN3
panel do not come on when connectors on Power Supply is correctly connected.
the power switch is turned Check +42V output voltage using the DC output on the
on. RX315. If the voltage is out of range, replace Power Supply.
2 An error code is displayed on Check +5V output voltage using the DC output connector on
the status indicator. the RX301. If the voltage are out of range, replace the
RX315. Troubleshoot according to the indicated error code.
3 The power lamp comes on, Check +3.3V output voltages using the DC output connector
but the printer is not on the RX301. If the voltage are out of range, replace the
initialized. RX301.
Replace the operator panel assembly.
2. Status indication (2320). An undefined passbook detected.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 More that one media is inserted during a transaction. Remove the passbooks from PBM.
Check shutter solenoid, Readjust.
2 The shutter does not move correctly. Replace the shutter solenoid.
3. Status indication (3101,3102). Transistor short mode check error (3103,3104).
No. Symptom Remedy

1 All the status Check that the H1 connector on the RX301 and the H1
connector on the RX315 is correctly connected
Check that the FFC connecting the H2 connector on the
RX301 and the H2 on the RX315 is correctly connected
(Connector should locked correctly)
Replace the RX315
Replace the RX301
Replace the Power Supply
4. Status indication (32xx,340x) Print head driver echo check error.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 The A8 connector on the Plug in the A8 connector on the RX315. (Connector should
RX315 is unplugged. be locked correctly).
Inspect the A8 connector pins for foreign materials and
Clean them. (Connector should be locked correctly).
2 The printer operates Replace the print head FFC.
normally if the A8 Replace the print head.
connector on the RX315 is Replace the Power Supply when +42V source is no Output
detached once and then (Measure the resistance between +42V and SG(FG)).
plugged in again. Check that H1 connector on the RX301 and the H1
3 Each pin of the A8 connector on the RX315 is correctly connected.
connector on the RX315 is Check that the FFC connecting the H2 connector on the
shorted with the frame RX301 and H2 on the RX315 is correctly connected
ground. (Connector should locked correctly).
Replace the RX315.
4 Other states.
Replace the RX301.
Replace the Power Supply.
5. Status indication (330x) Solenoid driver transistor open mode check error.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 All the status. Check that the H1 connector on the RX301 and the H1
connector on the RX315 is correctly connected.
(Connector should locked correctly).
Replace the RX315.
Replace the RX301.
6. Status indication (3501,3503). Shutter solenoid driver transistor open mode check
error.
Preconditions: The E3 connector on the RX315 is correctly connected.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 The printer operates Inspect the connector pins for foreign materials and clean
normally if the E3 them.
connector on the RX315 is Replace Shutter solenoid. (Magnet disconnection or
detached once and then defective) (Cable disconnection) (Defective staking of the
plugged in again. connector).
2 No conductivity between Check that the H1 connector on the RX301 and the H1
the two input lines of the connector on RX315 is correctly connected.
E3 connector. (Measure Check that the FFC connecting the H2 connector on the
the resistance between RX301 and the H2 on the RX315 is correctly connected
them.) (Connector should locked correctly).
Replace the RX315.
3 Other status. Replace the RX301.
7. Status indication (3502,3504) MS shutter solenoid driver transistor open mode

check error.
No. Symptom Remedy

connector on the RX315 is Replace Shutter solenoid. (Magnet disconnection or
the two input lines of the connector on RX315 is correctly connected.
them.). (Connector should locked correctly).
Replace the RX315.
8. Status indication (3505) Platen solenoid echo check error.

No. Symptom Remedy

connector on the RX315 is Replace Platen solenoid. (Magnet disconnection or
the two input lines of the connector on the RX315 is correctly connected.
them). (Connector should locked correctly).
Replace the RX315.
9. Status indication (3601) FHU step motor echo check error.

No. Symptom Remedy

connector on the RX315 is Replace the FHU step motor. (Motor disconnection or
Check that the H1 connector on the RX301 and the H1
2 Other status. (Connector should locked correctly).
Replace the RX315.
Replace the RX301.
10. Status indication (3701) Print head dot alarm.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 All the Check that the H1 connector on the RX301 and the H1 connector on the RX315
status. is correctly connected.
Check that the FFC connecting the H2 connector on the RX301 and the H2 on
the RX315 is correctly connected (Connector should locked correctly).
Replace the RX301.
Replace the RX315.
11. Status indication (41xx). Sensor dark check error.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 All the Check that the H1 connector on the RX301 and the H1 connector on the RX315
status. is correctly connected.
Replace the RX301.
Replace the RX315.
Replace the sensor.
12. Status indication (4200,4400) Sensor failure during MSU read/write operation.
Preconditions: The B8 connector and the E4 connector on the RX315 is correctly
connected.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 The printer wrongly Extract the B8 connector on the RX315 once and then
continues to detect the connect it again.
magnetic head, although Inspect the B8 connector pins for foreign materials.
the magnetic head has Clean the magnetic head home position sensor.
moved out of its home Replace the magnetic head home position sensor.
position in the T/M Check the cause of the roughness of the MS head carrier.
program (Sensor test.). Replace the lead screw, MS head carrier, screw nut, etc., if
2 The printer fails to detect necessary.(LC4)
the magnetic head, Replace the MSU pulse motor.
although the magnetic Check that the B8 connector is correctly connected.
head stays at its home Check that the E4 connector on the RX315 is correctly
position in the T/M connected.
program (Sensor test.). Check that the H1 connector on the RX301 and the H1
3 The MS head carrier does Check that the FFC connecting the H2 connector on the
not move smoothly right RX301 and the H2 on the RX315 is correctly connected
and left by hand. (Connector should locked correctly).
Replace the RX315.
13. Status indication (4210) Print head carrier motor home position error. (Bxxx) Print
head carrier motor operation time out.
Preconditions:
l This error occurs during the carrier operation.

l The A6 connector and the A7 connector on the RX315 is correctly connected.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 An excessive load is on the Remove paper jam.
carrier moved horizontally Check that the print head carrier home position sensor
by hand after the power correctly attached.
switch is turned off. Check for no damage on the support rail.
Readjust the carrier belt tension.
Check and readjust parallelism of the support rail.
Check that the A6 connector on the RX315 is correctly
2 This error is caused by connected.
paper jam at the carrier. Clean the print head home position sensor.
Replace the print head home position sensor.
Check that the A7 connector on the RX315 is correctly
3 An error is detected in the connected. Replace the pulse motor.
print head carrier home Check that the H1 connector on the RX301 and the H1
position sensor when connector on the RX315 is correctly connected.
checking by the T/M test Check that the FFC connecting the H2 connector on the
(Sensor test.). RX301 and the H2 on the RX315 is correctly connected
Replace the RX301.
14. Status indication:

l (6xxx) Forms ejection error
l (7xxx) Forms retraction error
l (8xxx) Paper or foreign subject detection error during powering up
l (9xxx). FHU pulse motor time out (feeding)
l (Axxx) FHU pulse motor time out (ejection).
No. Symptom Remedy

1 Paper is jamming. Extract the E1 connector on the RX315 once and then connect it
again.
Inspect the E1 connector pins for foreign materials.
Remove any paper jam. Check the printing, line feed, and ejecting
2 The form has operations in the T/M program (Print test.). If paper jam occurs also in
been ejected the test, check the paper path with the following steps:
correctly. a. If the MS shutter remains open, see symptom (21).
b. If paper is skewed, see sympton (25).
c. Feed forms by hand and check if the form becomes entangled. If
any trouble, readjust the corresponding section.According to
symptom (26) find the defective sensor. Readjust the paper path and
3 The form has the belt tension.
been shunted Replace the FHU pulse motor.
correctly.. Check that the H1 connector on the RX301 and the H1 connector on
the RX315 is correctly connected.
Check that the FFC connecting the H2 connector on the RX301 and the
H2 on the RX315 is correctly connected (Connector should locked
4 Other status. correctly).
Replace the RX315.
Replace the RX301.
15. Status indication (Cxxx) MSU pulse motor time out.

Preconditions:
l This error occurs during the magnetic head read/write operation.

l The B8 connector and the E4 connector on the RX315 is correctly connected.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 The printer wrongly Extract the B8 connector on the RX315 once and then
continues to detect the connect it again.
magnetic head, although Inspect the B8 connector pins for foreign materials.
the magnetic head has Clean the magnetic head home position sensor.
moved out of its home Replace the magnetic head home position sensor.
position in the T/M Check the cause of the roughness of the MS head carrier.
program (Sensor test.). Replace the lead screw, MS head carrier, screw nut, etc., if
2 The printer fails to detect necessary.
the magnetic head, Replace the MSU pulse motor.
although the magnetic Check that the B8 connector is correctly connected.
head stays at its home Check that the E4 connector on the RX315 is correctly
position in the T/M connected.
program (Sensor test.). Check that the H1 connector on the RX301 and the H1
3 The MS head carrier does Check that the FFC connecting the H2 connector on the
not move smoothly right RX301 and the H2 on the RX315 is correctly connected
and left by hand. (Connector should locked correctly).
Replace the RX315.
16. Status indication (Cxxx) Page turning pulse motor time out.
Preconditions:
l This error occurs during the page turning operation.

l The B7 connector and the A3 connector on the RX315 is correctly connected.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 Paper Extract the B7 connector on the RX315once and then connect it again.
jamming. Inspect the B7 connector pins for foreign materials.
Clean the magnetic head home position sensor.
Check that the A3 connector on the RX315 is correctly connected.
Remove any paper jams. the printing, line feed, and ejecting operations in the
T/M program (print test). If paper jam occurs also in the test, check the paper
path with the following steps:
a. If paper is skewed, see symptom (25).
b. Feed forms by hand and check if the form becomes entangled. If any
trouble, readjust the corresponding section. Readjust the paper path and the
2 Other belt tension.
status. Replace the page turning home position sensor.
Replace the page turning step motor.
Check that the H1 connector on the RX301 and the H1 connector on the RX315
is correctly connected.
Replace the RX315.
Replace the RX301.
17. Status indication (E800,E9xx,Fxxx) Magnetic stripe read/write error.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 Magnetic head read/write Insert the proper medium in the correct direction and
operation is performed operate the machine again.
with no magnetic stripe on Connect the H4 connector on the RX315. (The connector
the medium. (reverse should be locked correctly.)
insertion of passbook, Extract the H4 connector once and plug in again.
improper media.). Check the correction values for paper feeding. (Correction
2 The H4 connector on the value for the roller diameter.)
RX315 is detached. Perform the T/M program (sensor test) to check the
detection sensor.If any trouble is found, clean or replace the
sensor.
Clean the magnetic head.
3 The magnetic stripe Replace the magnetic head assembly.
read/write position is Check that the H1 connector on the RX301 and the H1
wrong. connector on the RX315 is correctly connected.
Replace the RX301.
18. Status indication (E001) The turning-over height error.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 The code is repeated Replace page turning rollers.
whenever a the page Adjust page turning roller gap.
turning executed. Page Adjust page turning position.
turning rollers are worn Clean page turning rollers.
out. Passbook problem. (out of specification).
2 Page turning roller gap If the sensors' connections are wrong, connect correctly.
adjustment is out of spec. If the sensors are wrong themselves, replace them.
Replace the RX301.
3 Correction value of page Replace the RX315.
turning position is out of Check (25).
spec. Replace the page turning unit.
4 Passbook skew is large.
Page turning height
sensors 1,2 can not detect
media.
5 Other status.
19. Memory check error.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 Status indication (OE x) Turn power off once and on again.
appears. Load the program once and on again.
2 Status indication (AE x) Check that the H1 connector on the RX301 and the H1
appears. connector on the RX315 is correctly connected.
3 Status indication (AEEx) RX301 and the H2 on the RX315 is correctly connected
appears. (Connector should locked correctly).
Replace the RX301.
NOTE: "x" means memory Replace the RX315.
address.
20. On-line data error.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 An error occurs in the T/M Check that the FFC connecting the B3 connector on the
program. (External loop RX315 and the B1 on the RX304 is correctly connected
test.) (Connector should locked correctly).
Extract the interface connector and plug in again. (Check if
the terminator is connected.).
2 No error occurs in the T/M RX301 and the H2 on the RX315 is correctly connected
program. (External loop (Connector should be locked correctly).
test.). Check if instruction data from the host computer is correct.
(Print data in the receive buffer and gather data by the T/M
program.).
Replace the RX301.
Replace the RX315.
Replace the RX304.
21. MS shutter malfunction.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 The MS shutter does not Reset the MS shutter to the paper guide.
work. Check that the MS shutter does not come in contact with
2 The MS shutter is not other parts by moving the MS shutter by hand.
attached to the paper Check MS shutter spring.
guide. (MS shutter does Replace Ms shutter solenoid assembly.
not close completely, so Replace MS shutter.
there is a crevice between
MS shutter and the paper
guide.).
22. Ribbon feed error.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 The ribbon does not Replace the ribbon cartridge.
advance at all. Readjust the print head gap.
Check the ribbon feed mechanism.
a. If ribbon feed belt is damaged, replace it.
2 The ribbon advances, but b. Check that all gears are properly engaged. If not, readjust
feed rate is too slow. and lubricate them.
c. If the ribbon feed pulley does not work, replace it.
23. Forms setting failure.

Preconditions: Paper more than 70mm length is set in the chute.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 FHU pulse motor does not Check if the left-end sensor, detection sensor, and
operate when initializing. withdrawal sensor operate properly in the T/M program
(Sensor test). If anything wrong,
a. Clean the corresponding sensor.
b. Check connection of the corresponding sensor, and
extract the connector once and connect it again.
c. Extract the B4 connector on the RX315 once and connect
2 Although a form is set, the
it again.
chute fails to draw in
d. Replace the corresponding sensor.
paper.
Check if there is a hole on the form at the sensing position of
the left-end sensor or the withdrawal sensor.
Check that the E1 connector on the RX315 is correctly
connected.
3 Forms are fed into the connector on the RX315 is correctly connected.
chute, but soon ejected Check that the FFC connecting the H2 connector on the
without normal operation. RX301 and the H2 on the RX315 is correctly connected
Replace the FHU pulse motor.
Replace the RX315.
Replace the RX301.
24. Printing problems
No. Symptom Remedy

1 The printed characters are Check if the ribbon advances properly. If not, take measures
blurred. in symptom (22).
2 Dot missing. Replace the ink ribbon.
Check if the platen is clamped during printing operation.
3 The printed characters are Readjust the print head gap.
inclined. Relocate the print head.
4 The printed characters are Readjust the belt tension for print head carrier.
condensed. Readjust the correction values for paper feeding. (Roller
5 Character missing. diameter and backlash.
Readjust the belt tension for the form feed rollers.
6 When vertically-enlarged Replace the print head.
characters are printed, the Replace the print head carrier motor.
upper half and lower half Check that the FFC connecting the H2 connector on the
overlap each other at the RX301 and the H2 on theRX315 is correctly connected
partition line. (Connector should locked correctly).
7 When vertically-enlarged Check if instruction data from the host computer is correct.
characters are printed, the (Print data in the receive buffer and gather data by the T/M
upper half and lower half program.).
separate at the partition Replace the RX315.
line. Replace the RX301.
25. Paper skewing.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 Even if forms are properly Check if the MS shutter opens and closes properly. If not,
set along the left paper take measures in symptom (21).
guide, they are skewed Check for no gap between the feed roller and the pressure
over the print rollers.
specifications. Check if there are any bits of paper particles left in the paper
2 The printed lines are path.
inclining gradually from the Replace the pressure rollers, drive rollers.
first print line to the last
print line.
26. Wrong sensor information relevant to forms eject/shunt.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 The form is properly Clean the corresponding sensor.
ejected. However, the b. Extract the B4 connector on the RX315 once and connect
sensor information tells usit again.
that paper is present at the
Replace the corresponding sensor.
detection sensor. Check that the FFC connecting the H2 connector on the
2 Abnormal sensor RX301 and the H2 on the RX315 is correctly connected
operation is found when (Connector should locked correctly).
form sensor located in the Check if instruction data from the host computer is correct.
paper path are checked in (Print data in the receive buffer and gather data by the T/M
the T/M program (Sensor program.).
test). Replace the RX315.
Replace the RX301.
3 Other status.
Faults on the USB printer

1. The printer will not operate when the power switch is turned on.
Preconditions:
l The power is properly applied.

l The control panel connector P0 on the control board is correctly connected.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 All lamps on the Check that connector P0 on the control board is correctly
operation panel do connected.
not come on when Check +12V output voltage using the DC output on the control
the power switch is board.. If the voltage is out of range, replace the printer. Check
turned on. +5V output voltage using the DC output connector on the control
2 An error code is board. If the voltage are out of range, replace the printer.
displayed on the Troubleshoot according to the indicated error code.
status indicator. Check +3.3V output voltages using the DC output connector on
the control board. If the voltage are out of range, replace the
3 The power lamp printer.
comes on, but the
printer is not
initialized.
2. Status indication (2320). An undefined passbook detected.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 More that one media is inserted during a Remove the passbooks from printer.
transaction.
2 The shutter does not move correctly. Check shutter solenoid, readjust.
Replace the printer.
3. Status indication (3101,3102). Transistor short mode check error (3103,3104).
No. Symptom Remedy

1 All the status. Faulty control board - replace the printer.
Faulty power cable - replace the printer.
4. Status indication (32xx,340x) Print head driver echo check error.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 The P0 connector on the control board. is Plug in the PH1 connector on the control
unplugged. board. (Connector should be locked
2 The printer operates normally if the PH1 correctly).
connector on the control board is detached Inspect the PH2 connector pins for foreign
and then plugged in again. materials and clean them. (Connector should
be locked correctly).
3 Each pin of the PH2 connector on the Replace the control board when +24V
control board is shorted with the frame source is no Output (Measure the resistance
ground. between +24V and SG(FG)).
4 Other states. Faulty print head - replace the printer.
5. Status indication (330x) Solenoid driver transistor open mode check error.
No. Symptom Remedy

6. Status indication (3501,3503). Shutter solenoid driver transistor open mode check
error.
Preconditions: Connector SL0 on the control board is correctly connected.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 The printer operates normally if the SL0 connector on Inspect the connector pins for
the control board is detached and then plugged in again. foreign materials and clean
them.
Faulty shutter solenoid - replace
2 No conductivity between the two input lines of the SL0
the printer.
connector. (Measure the resistance between them.)
Faulty control board - replace
the printer.
3 Other status. Faulty power cable - replace the
printer.
7. Status indication (3502,3504) MS shutter solenoid driver transistor open mode

check error.
Preconditions: The SL0 connector on the control board is correctly connected.
No. Symptom Remedy

them.
Faulty shutter solenoid - replace
the printer.
connector. (Measure the resistance between them.)
the printer.
printer.
8. Status indication (3505) Platen solenoid echo check error.

Preconditions: The SL0 connector on the control board is correctly connected.
No. Symptom Remedy

them.
Faulty platen solenoid - replace
the printer.
connector. (Measure the resistance between them.).
the printer.
printer.
9. Status indication (3601) FHU step motor echo check error.

Preconditions: The M2 connector on the control board is correctly connected.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 The printer operates normally if the M2 Inspect the connector pins for foreign
connector on the control board is detached materials and clean. Faulty control board -
and then plugged in again. replace the printer.
2 Other status. Faulty power cable - replace the printer.
10. Status indication (3701) Print head dot alarm.
No. Symptom Remedy

11. Status indication (41xx). Sensor dark check error.
No. Symptom Remedy

Faulty sensor - replace the printer.
12. Status indication (4200,4400) Sensor failure during MSU read/write operation.
Preconditions: The M3 connector on the control board is correctly connected.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 The printer wrongly continues to detect the Unplug connector M3 on the control
magnetic head, although the magnetic head has board and then re-connect it.
moved out of its home position in the T/M Inspect pins on connector M3 for foreign
program (Sensor test.). materials.
2 The printer fails to detect the magnetic head, Clean the magnetic head home position
although the magnetic head stays at its home sensor.
position in the T/M program (Sensor test.). Check the cause of the roughness of the
MS head carrier. Replace the lead screw,
MS head carrier, screw nut, etc., if
necessary.(LC4)
3 The MS head carrier does not move smoothly Check that the M3connector is correctly
right and left by hand. connected.
Faulty control board - replace the
printer.
4 Other status. Faulty power cable - replace the printer.
Faulty magnetic head home position
sensor - replace the printer.
13. Status indication (4210) Print head carrier motor home position error. (Bxxx) Print
head carrier motor operation time out.
Preconditions:
l This error occurs during the carrier operation.

l The M1 connector on the control board is correctly connected.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 An excessive load is on the carrier moved horizontally Remove paper jam.
by hand after the power switch is turned off. Check that the print head carrier
home position sensor correctly
attached.
Check for no damage on the
support rail.
2 This error is caused by paper jam at the carrier.
Readjust the carrier belt tension.
Check and readjust parallelism of
the support rail.
Check that the M1 connector on
3 An error is detected in the print head carrier home the control board is correctly
position sensor when checking by the T/M test connected.
(Sensor test.). Clean the print head home position
sensor.
printer.
Faulty power cable - replace the
4 Other status. printer.
Faulty magnetic head home
position sensor - replace the
printer.
14. Status indication:

l (6xxx) Forms ejection error
l (7xxx) Forms retraction error
l (8xxx) Paper or foreign subject detection error during powering up
l (9xxx). FHU pulse motor time out (feeding)
l (Axxx) FHU pulse motor time out (ejection).
Preconditions: The connectors S1 and S2 on the control board are correctly

connected.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 Paper is Unplug connectors S1 and S2 on the control board and then re-connect them.
jamming.
2 The form Inspect the S1/S2 connector pins for foreign materials. Remove any paper
has been jam. Check the printing, line feed, and ejecting operations in the T/M program
ejected (Print test.). If paper jam occurs also in the test, check the paper path with the
correctly. following steps:
a. If the MS shutter remains open, see symptom (21).
3 The form b. If paper is skewed, see sympton (25).
has been c. Feed forms by hand and check if the form becomes entangled. If any
shunted trouble, readjust the corresponding section. According to symptom (26) find
correctly. the defective sensor. Readjust the paper path and the belt tension.
4 Other Faulty control board - replace the printer.
status. Faulty power cable - replace the printer.
15. Status indication (Cxxx) MSU pulse motor time out.

Preconditions:
l This error occurs during the magnetic head read/write operation.

l The M3 connector on the control board is correctly connected.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 The printer wrongly continues to detect the Unplug connector M3 on the control
magnetic head, although the magnetic head has board and then reconnect it.
moved out of its home position in the T/M Inspect the M3 connector pins for
program (Sensor test.). foreign materials.
2 The printer fails to detect the magnetic head, Clean the magnetic head home position
although the magnetic head stays at its home sensor.
position in the T/M program (Sensor test.). Replace the magnetic head home
position sensor.
Check the cause of the roughness of the
3 The MS head carrier does not move smoothly MS head carrier. Replace the lead
right and left by hand. screw, MS head carrier, screw nut, etc.,
if necessary.
4 Other status. printer.
Faulty power cable - replace the
printer.
16. Status indication (Cxxx) Page turning pulse motor time out.
Preconditions:
l This error occurs during the page turning operation.

l Connector M4 on the control board is correctly connected.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 Paper Unplug connector M4 on the control board and then reconnect.
jamming. Inspect the pins of connector M4 for foreign materials.
Clean the magnetic head home position sensor.
Remove any paper jams. Check the printing, line feed, and ejecting operations in
the T/M program (print test). If paper jam occurs also in the test, check the
paper path with the following steps:
a. If paper is skewed, see symptom (25).
b. Feed forms by hand and check if the form becomes entangled. If any trouble,
2 Other readjust the corresponding section. Readjust the paper path and the belt
status. tension.
Replace the page turning home position sensor.
Check that the H1 connector on the RX301 and the H1 connector on the RX315
is correctly connected.
Faulty control board - replace the printer.
17. Status indication (E800,E9xx,Fxxx) Magnetic stripe read/write error.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 Magnetic head read/write operation is Insert the proper medium in the correct
performed with no magnetic stripe on the direction and operate the machine again.
medium. (reverse insertion of passbook,
improper media.). Connect the MH connector on the
control board. (The connector should be
locked correctly.)
2 The MH connector on the contrrol board is Unplug connector H4 and plug in again.
detached. Check the correction values for paper
feeding. (Correction value for the roller
diameter.)
Perform the T/M program (sensor test)
3 The magnetic stripe read/write position is to check the detection sensor.If any
wrong. trouble is found, clean or replace the
sensor.
Clean the magnetic head.
4 Other status. Faulty control board - replace the
printer.
18. Status indication (E001) The page turning-over height error.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 The code is repeated whenever a the page turning Adjust page turning roller gap.
executed. Page turning rollers are worn out. Adjust page turning position.
2 Page turning roller gap adjustment is out of spec. Clean page turning rollers. Passbook
problem. (out of specification).
3 Correction value of page turning position is out of If the sensors' connections are wrong,
spec. connect correctly.
4 Passbook skew is large. Page turning height sensors If the sensors are wrong themselves,
1,2 can not detect media. replace them. Replace the printer.
5 Other status.
19. Memory check error.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 Status indication (OE x) appears. Turn power off and on again.
2 Status indication (AE x) appears. Reload the program.
Faulty control board - replace printer.
3 Status indication (AEEx) appears.
NOTE: "x" means memory address.
20. On-line data error.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 An error occurs in the T/M Check that the USB connector on the control board is
program. (External loop correctly connected.
test.) Unplug the interface connector and plug in again. (Check if the
terminator is connected.).
Check if instruction data from the host computer is correct.
2 No error occurs in the T/M (Print data in the receive buffer and gather data by the T/M
program. (External loop program.).
test.). Faulty control board - replace printer.
Faulty interface cable assembly - replace printer.
21. MS shutter malfunction.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 The MS shutter does not work. Reset the MS shutter to the paper
guide.
Check that the MS shutter does not
come in contact with other parts by
2 The MS shutter is not attached to the paper guide. moving the MS shutter by hand.
(MS shutter does not close completely, so there is a Check MS shutter spring.
crevice between MS shutter and the paper guide.). Faulty Ms shutter solenoid assembly
- replace printer.
Faulty MS shutter - replace printer.
22. Ribbon feed error.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 The ribbon does not advance at Replace the ribbon cartridge.
all. Readjust the print head gap.
Check the ribbon feed mechanism.
a. Check that all gears are properly engaged. If not,
2 The ribbon advances, but feed readjust and lubricate them.
rate is too slow. b. If ribbon feed belt or pulley is damaged, replace
printer.
23. Forms setting failure.

Preconditions: Paper more than 70mm length is set in the chute.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 FHU pulse motor does not Check if the left-end sensor, detection sensor, and
operate when initializing. withdrawal sensor operate properly in the T/M program
(Sensor test). If anything wrong,
a. Clean the corresponding sensor.
b. Check connection of the corresponding sensor, and
2 Although a form is set, the extract the connector once and connect it again.
chute fails to draw in paper. c. Unplug the S1 connector on the control board and re-
connect it.
d. Replace the corresponding sensor.
Check if there is a hole on the form at the sensing position
3 Forms are fed into the chute,
of the left-end sensor or the withdrawal sensor.
but soon ejected without
Check that the S2 connector on the control board is
normal operation.
correctly connected.
Faulty FHU pulse motor - replace printer.
Faulty control board - replace the printer.
24. Printing problems.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 The printed characters are blurred. Check if the ribbon advances
properly. If not, take measures in
2 Dot missing. symptom (22).
Replace the ink ribbon.
Check if the platen is clamped during
3 The printed characters are inclined. printing operation. Readjust the print
head gap.
4 The printed characters are condensed. Relocate the print head.
Readjust the belt tension for print
5 Character missing. head carrier.
Readjust the correction values for
paper feeding. (Roller diameter and
6 When vertically-enlarged characters are printed, backlash.
the upper half and lower half overlap each other at Readjust the belt tension for the
the partition line. form feed rollers.
7 When vertically-enlarged characters are printed, Faulty print head - replace printer.
the upper half and lower half separate at the Faulty print head carrier motor -
partition line. replace printer.
25. Paper skewing.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 Even if forms are properly set along the left Check if the MS shutter opens and closes
paper guide, they are skewed over the print properly. If not, take measures in
specifications. symptom (21).
Check for no gap between the feed roller
and the pressure rollers.
2 The printed lines are inclining gradually from Check if there are any bits of paper
the first print line to the last print line. particles left in the paper path.
Faulty pressure rollers and/or drive
rollers - replace printer.
26. Wrong sensor information relevant to forms eject/shunt.
No. Symptom Remedy

1 The form is properly Clean the corresponding sensor. Unplug connector B4 on the
ejected. However, the control board then re-connect it. Replace the corresponding
sensor information tells us sensor. Check if instruction data from the host computer is
that paper is present at correct. (Print data in the receive buffer and gather data by the
the detection sensor. T/M program.). Faulty control board - replace printer.
2 Abnormal sensor
operation is found when
form sensor located in the
paper path are checked in
the T/M program (Sensor
test).
3 Other status.
REVISION

USB RECEIPT PRINTER
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the USB receipt printer of which there are the following variants:
l Single roll
l One-sided
l Two-sided
l Dual roll
l One-sided
l Two-sided
l Value Added Media (stamp).
Each variant is available with or without a capture bin, except the stamp variant.
The printers are fitted with line thermal print heads which print on either one or both sides of
the receipt, and on one side of valuable media such as stamps. The dual feed transport
mechanism on the dual roll variants has two infeeds fitted on the print engine to allow
printing from two hoppers, either for increased capacity or for a second media such as
stamps.
4
3
2
1
Item Description Item Description

1 Transport 5 Rear paper hopper
2 Print engine 6 Front paper hopper
3 Dual feed mechanism 7 Capture bin
4 Value Added Media dual feed mechanism
DESCRIPTION
The USB receipt printer has the following features:
l Optional two sided printing

l Optional capture area (not on stamp variant)
l Optional dual feed
l Resolution 203 dpi
l Supports maximum receipt paper roll diameter of 228.6 mm (9 in.) for dual roll and
254mm (10in.) for single roll
l Thermal printing
l Optional value added media printing, such as stamps.
Power Requirements
The printer requires power from the ATM power supply (+24V DC ±10%) and power
Paper Specification
The paper used in your printer must conform to the specifications given in NCR publication
Consumable Items for Self Service (B006-4992). The publication also provides ordering
details of the ATM consumables which should be purchased from NCR Systemedia.
Printable area
Black Mark Alignment
The printer will cut within the black mark according to adjustment parameters. Registration
will be automatically restored if lost.
Receipt Paper Low

Paper low is sensed when the paper roll outer diameter reaches 39 mm (1.53 in) and after
a further 10 receipts are printed, the paper low condition is reported. When a set length of
paper (default is 5000 mm) has passed through the printer after paper low is reported, the
printer will report paper out if a jam condition occurs after this point or if the printer is dual
roll with hopper usage set as single supply.
Sensor Locations
See the table on the following page for a description of sensors.
One-sided Single Roll

Print Engine
Hopper
Cutter Transport
Motor
Transport
LF Motor Motor
HP
TJ Exit
Paper Low
PE
BD
CBF
CB
Two-sided Single Roll

Print Engine
Hopper
Cover Open Cutter Transport
Motor
Transport
Cutter HP Motor
Paper Low 2ST
PE
BD 1ST ENG Ex Exit
2ND TJ
TOF
LF Motor
CBF
CB
One-sided Dual Roll

Hopper Dual Feeder
DF_2a Print Engine
DF2 Motor
Cutter Transport
DF_2b Motor
Paper Low2 Transport
DF_1a
Motor
LF Motor HP
Paper Low1 Eng Ex TJ Exit
DF_1b
PE
BD
DF1 Motor
CBF
CB
Two-sided Dual Roll

Hopper Dual Feeder
DF_2a DF2 Motor

Print Engine
Paper Low 2 DF_2b Cutter

DF_1a Cover OPN
Motor
Transport
Paper Low 1 HP
DF_1b Transport
2ST Motor
TOF 1ST Eng
DF1 Motor PE BD EX TJ Exit
LF Motor
CBF
CB
Sensor ID Sensor Name Location Function

Paper Low Paper Low 1 Hopper Detects paper low.
1
Paper Low Paper Low 2 Hopper Detects paper low.
2
DF_1a Dual Feed Dual Feed Detects which feeder is in use, acts as Paper End during reverse feed.
Unit
DF_2a Dual Feed Dual Feed Detects which feeder is in use, acts as Paper End during reverse feed.
Unit
DF_1b Dual Feed Dual Feed Detects which feeder is in use, acts as Paper Edge during reverse feed.
Unit
DF_2b Dual Feed Dual Feed Detects which feeder is in use, acts as Paper Edge during reverse feed.
Unit
Cover Cover Open Engine Detects cover open. Stops all actions except cutter.
Open
PE Paper End Engine Detects paper end, but not used for paper positioning.
BD Black Dot Engine Black dot (mark) registration.
HP Home Engine Detects cutter home position.
Position
TJ Transport Transport Detects jam in transport.
Jam
Exit Exit Transport Detects paper presented to customer at exit. Activates capture if
paper not taken.
Sensor ID Sensor Name Location Function

CB Capture Bin Transport Detects paper in capture bin.
CBF Capture Bin Transport Detects capture bin full and suspends capture function.
Full
Paper Low Paper Low Hopper Detects paper low.
TOF Top of Form Engine Detects top of form.
2ST 2 Sided Engine Detects 2ST paper.
Paper
Engine Engine Exit Engine Detects paper at exit.
Exit
TROUBLESHOOTING
Faults can be diagnosed using the LEDs on the logic board, and by using the ATM error
reporting system.
LEDs Location and Meanings

Two LEDs, one red and one green, are located on the logic board on single roll printers and
on the dual feed pcb in the hopper on dual roll printers. The LEDs can be used to diagnose
the conditions shown in the following table..
Single roll Dual roll
Red LED Red LED
Green LED Green LED
Green Red Meaning

On Off On-line
Fast blink Off IPL mode (firmware ready to download)
Off Fast blink Paper empty (standard or dual feeder bins empty)
Slow blink Off Paper low (standard or dual feeder bins near empty)
Off On Dual Feed jam
Off On Capture jam
Off On Transport jam
Off Fast blink Cutter jam, cover open or firmware error (ROM/RAM/EPROM)
Off Slow blink Black mark error
Slow blink Off Capture bin full
Off Off Power off

The following error messages are reported by the receipt printer. Refer to the “Module
Replacement” section for detailed instructions on replacing modules, and “Diagnostics” for
details of running diagnostic tests.
Error Messages Corrective Actions

Comms Error Check USB cable at the printer and at the hub. Check the power cable at the printer and at
the power supply. Re-connect or replace if necessary.
The printer may need to be re-set. Run self test.
Control Board Replace print engine.
Hardware Error
Under Voltage ATM power harnessing may be faulty - test power from module to distribution board to ATM
power supply. Replace harnessing if necessary.
ATM power supply may be faulty. Check and replace if necessary.
Knife Life Replace print engine.
Low/Out
Knife Jam Clear jam and reload paper. Run self test. If no jam:
l May be faulty sensor or connector. Check knife sensor and connector J9, run knife test.
Clean sensor/re-connect connector. If necessary replace knife or print engine.
l May be faulty knife motors - run knife test and observe motor and gears. If necessary
replace knife or print engine.
Print Head Life Replace print engine.
Low/Out
Over Check operating conditions and if necessary, replace print engine if printer is constantly over
Temperature temperature.

Black Mark Error Check that black mark paper is being used, the black marks are complete and the paper is
loaded correctly (i.e. black marks facing down).
Check black dot sensor is clean and unobstructed. Run Slew to Black Mark test.
Check the sensor connector (J7) is securely attached.
If necessary, replace print engine.
Print Unit Open If open, close cover. Run self test.
If closed, printer open sensor or sensor cable may be faulty - run Sensor Test, if this reports
printer open, replace printer.
Paper Not Re-load paper if paper was incorrectly loaded, or clear jam.
Loaded/
Front Hopper Not
Loaded/
Rear Hopper Not
Loaded
Transport Jam on Clear jam from transport, at transport sensor.
Eject/on Capture If not jammed:
l May be a motor/gear or belt failure: run Print Quality test, observe motor/gears and belt
(may be slipping). Replace transport if necessary.
l May be PCB or sensor fault: run looped Sensor test. Cover and uncover the sensor.
Replace print engine if necessary.
Exit Jam on Clear jam from transport, at exit sensor. Also check facia.
Eject/on Capture If not jammed:
l May be a motor/gear or belt failure: run Print Quality test, observe motor/gears and belt
(may be slipping). Replace transport if necessary.
l May be PCB or sensor fault: run looped Sensor test. Cover and uncover the sensor.
Replace print engine if necessary.
Capture Bin Full Empty capture bin. Check for paper blocking the capture bin full sensor.
If empty, may be a PCB or sensor failure: run looped Sensor test, cover and uncover the
sensor. Replace transport if failed sensor or print engine if failed PCB.
Paper Low/Out Load paper. If not empty, may be a PCB or sensor failure: run looped Sensor test, cover and
Front Hopper uncover the sensor. Replace hopper if failed sensor or print engine if failed PCB.
Low/Out
Rear Hopper
Low/Out

Transport Not Unload paper. Check transport harness and reconnect if necessary. Run Transport Forward
Connected test.
May be a connector failure: run looped Sensor test. Connect and disconnect connector. If
necessary, replace transport.
May be faulty PCB. Run looped Sensor test, cover and uncover the sensor. Replace transport
if necessary.
Dual Feed Clear jam from dual feed.
Mechanism Jam Check transport harness. Run Paper Feed Motor Test to check motor and gears turn.
May be a sensor failure: run looped Sensor test. Connect and disconnect connector. If
necessary, replace dual feed.
May be faulty PCB. Run looped Sensor test, cover and uncover the sensor. If necessary,
replace dual feed.
General Checks
l Check that the interface cables between the printer, the USB hub and the PC core
are connected securely.
l Check that the cable between the logic board (J3) to the drive board (J8) is connected
securely at both ends for 1ST printers.
l Check the cable between the logic board (J6) to the drive board (J15) is connected
securely at both ends for 2ST printers.
l Check the joint harness of the cutter motor is connected correctly.
l Check that the transport feed motor connector is correctly connected to the joint
harness underneath the dual roll engine block.
l Check that the interface cable for the module reporting a problem is connected
securely:
Problem Check cable
Frequent knife jams Cutter motor cable (J9)

Paper low not detected/ Frequent paper empty messages Paper low sensor cable (J2)
Frequent black mark errors Black mark sensor (J7)
Frequent capture jams CB sensor cable (J7)
Frequent transport jams Feed motor cable (J6)
Paper not feeding correctly Feed motor cable (J6)
Poor printing or none at all Thermal head cable (J3)
Printer open message can’t be cleared Open sensor cable (J4)
l Check if the fuse on the logic board has blown

l Check the 24V power supply to the control board.
l Check that correct type of thermal paper is being used (one or two sided), and that it is
not damp, dirty or dusty.
l Check for foreign objects in the feed path / stuck to the paper feed rollers or paper
guides. Clean the areas carefully.
l Clean thermal elements in print head with alcohol if there are print quality problems.
l Clean the transport belts with alcohol if there are frequent jams.
l Clean the transport sensors using compressed air without removing them from the
printer chassis. If for any reason sensors are removed, they must be recalibrated.
Refer to the "Recalibration" section for detailed instructions.
l Check for wear or lack of tension in the transport belts, replace transport assembly if
necessary.
l If an EEPROM error is detected, switch the printer off and on again to confirm the
diagnostic result. If there is no change, replace the print engine.
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0 Diagnostics
Level 0 diagnostic tests run on start-up and reset.

Green Red Meaning

On Off On-line
Fast Blink Off IPL mode (firmware ready to download)
Off Fast blink Paper empty: single hopper or both dual feed hoppers
Slow Blink Slow Blink Paper empty: one of dual feed hoppers
Slow Blink Off Paper low: any hopper
Off On Paper jam
Off Fast Blink Firmware error (ROM, RAM or EPROM) or cover open or knife jam
Off Off Power off
Device Diagnostics
All the Sys App device diagnostic tests that involve printing initialize the receipt printer in the
following manner:
l Top and bottom margins are set to 0 and 40

l Line spacing is set to 2.6 mm (1/9 in.)
l Top line position 25.4 mm (1 in.).
All the settings set on entry into diagnostics are restored on exit. Looping is allowed on all
tests. Tests that require paper out do not run if paper is left in, however, they still return a
good response.
Note that all tests will be printed on the paper loaded into the print engine, so if there is
valuable media loaded in the rear hopper, it is advisable to unload it from the print engine
prior to running diagnostics tests.
Sensor Test
Print Quality Test

Available on single feed printers only. The test produces a produces a receipt with:
l the NCR logo

l a full character set printout, single wide
l a solid black rectangle
l a “Check Solid Box For White Lines” statement.
If a 2ST printer is loaded with 1ST paper, the following statement will also be printed
l “Single-sided Paper on 2ST Printer”.
On 2ST printers the reverse side will have:
l the 2ST logo

l a solid black rectangle
l a “Check Solid Box For White Lines” statement.
Print Quality Test - Front Hopper

Available on dual feed printers only. This test produces a receipt from the front hopper with
the same information as for Print Quality Test and also the statement “Printed from Front
Hopper”.
Print Quality Test - Rear Hopper

Available on dual feed printers only. This test produces a test print from the rear hopper
with the same information as for Print Quality Test and also the statement “Printed from
Rear Hopper”.
Print Alignment Test

Slew Test
The Slew Test prints “START” on the first line, slews nine lines, and then prints “FINISH”
and cuts.

The test drives the transport for 5 seconds and then switches it off. Paper must be removed
from the printer for this test to run.
Paper Feed Motor(s) Test

The test drives the paper feed motor and the print head motor for 5 seconds. Paper must
be removed from the printer for this test to run.
Knife Cut Test

The cut test causes the knife to be actioned. There should be no paper in the printer for this
test.

The test prints a graphic to allow the Field Engineer to determine whether the fascia/receipt
printer alignment should be adjusted.
Slew To Black Mark Test

This test slews to the next black mark and cuts the paper.

The printer slews to the next black mark and cuts the paper, then captures the receipt.
Note: This test is only offered on printers configured for black mark paper and with a
capture bin.
Important note: all test receipts should be removed from the printer prior to putting the ATM
back into service.
Service Tallies
The tallies returned for the receipt printer are:
Tally Description
RECEIPTS The number of receipts issued. Incremented following a cut function.
CAPTURE The number of receipts captured.
MARK The number of times the device controller failed to detect the index mark on preprinted
ERR paper while performing a form feed to black mark.
KNIF JAM The number of knife jams.
Tally Description
EXIT JAM The number of exit jams (exit jam on capture/exit jam on eject).
TRAN The number of transport jams (transport jam on capture/transport jam on eject)
JAM
CAPT The number of capture jams (transport jam on capture/exit jam on capture)
JAM
HOURS The number of hours the printer has been switched on.
ON
PAP LEN The number of millimeters of paper that have passed under the printhead.
ERR The number of error recoveries.
RECO
OVER The number of times the printer has over-heated.
HEAT
FLSH CYC The number of flash cycles.
HEAD The number of times the head has been opened.
OPN
SUP The number of supply voltage anomalies.
VOLT
USB The number of USB communications faults.
COM
ILLEG The number of times an illegal sequence warning has occurred.
SEQ
KNIFE The number of knife cuts
CUT
DFEED The number of time a dual feed mechanism jam has occurred
JAM
STRAPPING
Fuse
There is a 10A fuse on the logic board (F3 - one sided printer) or (F1 - two sided printer).
ADJUSTMENTS
the receipt printer:
Menu Description
Form Feed Sets the printer to feed to either:
Form Feed (front l Black mark
hopper) l Fixed length (min. value 1, max value 500).
Form Feed (rear l Variable length, that is the length of printed date plus a margin (minimum
hopper) value for bottom margin is 77,
maximum value 500).
Printer Contrast Sets the printer contrast in the range:
0 (lightest) to 14 (darkest). Default value is 2.
Black Mark Cut Sets where within the black mark the form is cut.
Position Adjustment Minimum value is 0, maximum is 14. Default is 2.
Adjust Left Margin Sets the position of the left margin.
Adjustments are in steps of 0.125mm (0.005 in.) within the range of minimum -
1.875mm (-0.075 in.) to maximum +1.875mm (±075 in.)
Minimum value is 0, maximum is 30. Default value is 15.
Present Position Sets the position of the first line of print relative to the top of the page.
Adjustment Minimum value is 1, maximum is 30. Default is 15.
Colour Sets the printer to use 2-colour paper.
Printer Configuration Printout

To print out the current settings and functions, press and hold the feed button and press the
reset button. After the test is complete, reset the dip switch settings to OFF then either
power off or press the reset button (SW1) to reboot the printer.
The printout can also be performed in on-line mode.
Printer Sensor Re–calibration Procedure

Sensors re-calibration process is required when sensors are replaced.
One–sided (1ST) Single Roll with or without Capture

Perform the following steps to re–calibrate the sensors:
1. Remove all the paper from the transport or capture, and paper roll from the hopper.
2. Power–up the printer with DIP switches under 1 and 2 to ON, and 3 to OFF
condition.
3. If the printer detects this status, two LEDs are off.
4. Briefly press the Feed button three times to select sensor adjustment.
Two LEDs indicate the status of the self test. The table below lists and displays the
status of the LEDs during the self test.
Press Feed button LED Status LED Display

Red Green Red Green
0 (power–up state) Off Off
1 time Off On
2 times On Off
3 times On On
5.Press and hold the Feed button.

6.The firmware measures the level of sensors.
7.Load a BM paper roll into the hopper.
8.Press the Feed button.
9.The paper is loaded, cut, and presented. If a capture bin present, the paper is then
captured. The Sensor adjustment is performed during feeding.
10. If both LEDs are blinking, sensor adjustment is successful. If red LED is ON, sensor
adjustment is unsuccessful.
11. After re-calibration, set all DIP switches OFF, and power the printer off and on.
Note: Black mark mode executes this procedure.
One–Sided (1ST) Dual Roll with or without Capture

1. Remove all paper from the transport or capture, feeders, and paper roll from both
hoppers.
condition.
3. If the printer detects this status, two LEDs are off.
5. Two LEDs indicate the status of the self test. The table below lists and displays the
status of the LEDs during the self test.
Press Feed button LED Status LED Display

Red Green Red Green
0 (power–up state) Off Off
1 time Off On
2 times On Off
3 times On On
6. Press and hold the Feed button.

7. The firmware measures the level of sensors.
8. Load BM paper rolls into both front and rear hoppers.
9. Feed the BM paper from front hopper to lower feeder and press the Feed button.
10. The paper is loaded, cut, and presented. If a capture bin is fitted, the paper is then
12. After re-calibration, set all DIP switches off, and power the printer off and on.
Note: Black mark mode executes this procedure.
Two–Sided (2ST) Single Roll with or without Capture

Selecting Single Side Test Mode or Double Side Test mode
Perform the procedure below to select Single Side (1ST) test mode or Double Side (2ST )
test mode.
Set DIP Switch 1 and

2 ON, and 3 OFF
LEDs
Power-up Double side test mode
Briefly press the Feed

button Single side test mode

Double side test mode
button
Repeated pushing
alternates between 1ST
test and 2ST test
Press and hold the

To select 1ST or 2ST Feed button when Both LEDs are out
desired test is selected.
Sensor Re–calibration Procedure

1. Remove all paper from the transport or capture, and paper roll from the hopper.
condition.
3. Select 1ST or 2ST mode.
LED status during the self test.
Push Feed button LED Status LED Display

Red Green Red Green
1 time Off On
2 times On Off
3 times On On
5. Push and hold the Feed button.

7. Set a BM paper roll in the hopper.
8. Press the Feed button.
The paper is loaded, cut and presented. If a capture bin is present the paper is then
9. Remove all the paper roll from the printer, and replace with 2ST paper roll.
10. Press the Feed button.
The paper is loaded, cut and presented. And then it is captured if capture bin
present.
The 2ST sensor adjustment is performed during feeding.
11. If both LED is blinking, sensor adjustment is successful. If red LED is ON, sensor
12. After re-calibration, set all DIP switches OFF, and power the printer off and on.
Two–Sided (2ST) Dual Roll with or without Capture

Selecting Single Side Test Mode or Double Side Test mode
Perform the procedure below to select Single Side (1ST) test mode or Double Side (2ST )
test mode.
Set DIP Switch 1 and

2 ON, and 3 OFF
LEDs
Power-up Double side test mode

button Single side test mode

Double side test mode
button
Repeated pushing
alternates between 1ST
test and 2ST test
Press and hold the

To select 1ST or 2ST Feed button when Both LEDs are out
desired test is selected.
Sensor Re–calibration Procedure

1. Remove all the paper from the transport or capture, and paper roll from the hopper.
2. Power–up the printer with DIP switch under 1 and 2 to ON, and 3 to OFF condition.
3. Select 1ST or 2ST mode.
LED status during the self test.
Push Feed button LED Status LED Display

Red Green Red Green
1 time Off On
2 times On Off
3 times On On
5. Press and hold the Feed button.

7. Set BM paper rolls in the front and rear hoppers.
8. Feed the BM paper from front hopper to lower feeder, and press the Feed button.
The paper is loaded, cut, and presented. If a capture bin is fitted, the paper is then
9. Remove all BM paper rolls from the printer, and replace with 2ST paper roll into the
front hopper only.
10. Feed the 2ST paper from front hopper to lower feeder, and press the Feed button.
The paper is loaded, cut and presented. If capture bin present, the paper is then
captured. The 2ST sensor adjustment is performed during feeding.
adjustment unsuccessful.
12. After re-calibration, set all DIP switches off, and power the printer off and on.

The procedures in this section describe the removal and replacement of the following field
replaceable units:
l Transport
l Dual feed mechanism
l Print engine
l Hopper
l Paper low sensor.
Transport
1. Disconnect the two harnesses (three on a capture bin variant).
2. Remove and retain the single screw on each side.
3. Loosen the two screws underneath the transport. On the capture bin variant, a long
blade screwdriver will be required to reach through the frame.
4. Remove the transport.
Dual Feed Mechanism (Standard)

The dual feed mechanism is supplied with the dual roll pcb and interconnection harness.
1. Remove the cable ties securing all harnessing from the dual feed mechanism back
to the dual feed PCB in the hopper.
2. Remove the two screws (one each side) that secure the front hopper lifting bar and
the two fixing screws securing the pcb cover. Remove the cover then disconnect all
the harnessing from the PCB.
3. Remove the screws securing the pcb to its mounting.
4. a) For single-sided printers: Remove the retain the four screws (two each side)
securing the dual in-feed mechanism to the print engine.
Remove Screw (2 off)
Cable Comnnector
Remove Screw (2 off)
b) For two-sided printers: Remove and retain the two screws securing the dual feed
mechanism to the rear of the print engine. Loosen the screw on each side of the print
engine.
Loosen Screw (2 off)

Remove Screws
5. Lift the in-feed mechanism clear of the print engine.
Dual Feed Assembly (Stamp)

The dual feed mechanism is supplied with the dual roll pcb and interconnection harness.
1. Remove the cable ties securing all harnessing from the dual feed mechanism back
to the dual feed PCB in the hopper.
2. Remove the screw securing the PCB cover to the underside of the printer, and
remove the cover.
3. Disconnect the 40-pin connector and all other harnessing from the PCB.
4. Remove the two spacer screws from the base of the dual feed assembly and tilt the
assembly over towards the hopper to remove it.
Print Engine
One-sided
1. Dual feed variants only: remove the dual feed mechanism as described in previous
section.
2. Disconnect the earth straps on each side of the print engine, and disconnect the
harness as shown below.
3. Remove and retain the two screws (one on each side), securing the print engine to
the frame.
Earth Strap x2
Harness
Screw x2
4. Disconnect the main sensor harness connector from the PCB.
Sensor Harness
5. Slide the engine lugs clear of the frame, and lift it up.
Two-sided
1. Dual feed variants only: remove the dual in-feed mechanism as described in
previous section.
2. Disconnect the earth straps on the rear of the print engine, then two screws (one on
each side), securing the print engine to the frame then slide the engine lugs clear of
the frame, and lift it off.
Remove screw x2
3. Remove the screw securing the control board cover beneath the print engine.
Remove screw
4. Disconnect the hopper low sensor harness from the PCB.
hopper low sensor harness
Fuse
One-sided Printer
The fuse on the control board is accessible from the underside of the printer, or for better
access, first remove the print engine as described above, then:
1. Remove the two screws on top and the single screw on the side securing the control
boards cover.
Control Board Cover Screw (2 off)
Control Board Cover Screw
2. The fuse is visible from the underside of the print engine.
Two-sided Printer
The fuse on the control board is accessible from the underside of the printer, as shown
below. On dual feed variants, the control board cover must first be removed.
Front Hopper
Single Roll
1. First remove the print engine and in-feed mechanism as described in earlier
sections.
2. Cut the cable tie holding the paper low sensor harness to the hopper, then
disconnect the connector located below the print engine tray.
3. Remove the two screws securing the earth straps then the two screws securing the
hopper assembly to the print engine.
Remove Earth Strap

x2
Remove screws x2
Disconnect Harness
Dual Roll
1. Remove the two screws securing the yellow lifting handle in the front hopper. Then
remove the two screws securing the dual feed PCB cover.
Control Board Cover
Fixing Screw Fixing Screw
2. Disconnect the rear hopper low sensor harness from the dual PCB and remove all
harnessing from the front hopper.
3. Remove the four screws (two each side) securing the PCB to the hopper and
remove the PCB.
4. Disconnect the paper low sensor harness connector located below the print engine
tray and remove the lower two screws securing the earth straps to the hopper
assembly and print engine.
Disconnect harness
Remove screw x2
Remove earth strap x2
5. Remove the upper two screws securing the hopper assembly to the print engine and
remove the hopper.
Rear Hopper
1. Remove the four screws (two each side) that secure the two joining brackets
between the front and rear hoppers.
Hopper
Fixing Screws
Hopper
2. Remove the two screws securing the yellow lifting handle in the front hopper. Then
remove the two screws securing the dual feed PCB cover.
Control Board Cover
Fixing Screw Fixing Screw
3. Disconnect the rear hopper sensor low harness from the PCB and remove the rear
hopper.
Hopper Low Sensor Harness

1. Release the harness from the cable ties.
2. Push out the two sensor pcb securing studs.

3. Disconnnect the harness from the control board.
Logic Board
One Sided
Top Side
J3
F3 J2
LED2 DSW1 SW1

LED1
J6
J8
Bottom Side J1
J4
J1 Not used J6 USB (Straight, type B)

J2 DRV Signal J8 Power
J3 Board to board connector
Two Sided
Top Side
J6
F3
LED2 DSW1 SW1

LED1
J5
J3
Bottom Side J2

J2 DIN power - 3 pins (RSD)
J3 Power - 2 pin (FSD)
J5 USB (Straight, type B)
Pin Assignments - USB connector (J6)

(One and Two Sided Printers)
VBUS 1
D- 2
D+ 3
GND 4
Shield Shell
Single Roll Drive Board

One-sided
J8
J3
J5 J1
J14
J4 J7 J6 J9 J2
J1 Not used J6 Feed motor

J2 Paper low & capture sensors J7 Black dot (mark) sensor
J3 Thermal head J8 Board to board connector
J4 Cover open sensor J9 Knife motor
J5 Paper end sensor J14 Logic signal
Two Sided
J15
J7
J6
J13 J11
J5 J10 J5
J4
J8 J2 J9 J1 J3
J1 Cutter motor J8 Exit sensor

J2 Combine Sensors J9 Feed Motor
J3 Transport/Hopper/Motor/Paper low sensor J10 TOF sensor
J4 PE Sensor J11 TOF LED

J5 RS232 J13 2ST PDET sensor
J6-7 Thermal Heads J15 Board to board connector
Dual Roll Control Board
J2
J4 J1
J8
J6
J5
J9 J7
J3
J1 Paper low (2nd Bin) J6 Control Signal

J2 Sensor LED (1st Bin) J7 Motor (1st Bin)
J3 Sensor (1st Bin) J8 Motor (2nd Bin)
J4 Sensor LED (2nd Bin) J9 Feed Switch
J5 Sensor (2nd Bin)
CABLING
The dual roll printer has a ribbon cable signal harness which goes from the control board to
print engine.
None.
Receipt Printer, refer to the Preventive Maintenance section of this manual.
REVISION

USB 2ST STATEMENT/PASSBOOK

PRINTER
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes a USB 2ST Statement/Passbook printer which can print
statements or receipts on either one or two sides of the paper as well as accept passbooks
for updating.
The printer is fitted with a thermal print engine containing two print heads for two sided
statement printing as well as a dot matrix print engine for passbook printing.
1
4
Callout Description
1 Transport mechanism
2 Passbook printer mechanism
3 Statement printer mechanism
4 Paper hopper
5 Base
USB STATEMENT PRINTER
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes a USB Statement printer, for thermal paper, which can print either
statements or receipts.
The statement printer is configurable with a print engine containing either a single print
head or two print heads for two sided printing.
Print engine
Transport
Paper hopper
DESCRIPTION
The Statement printer has the following features:
l Capture area
l Remote diagnostics
l Thermal printhead(s)
l Semi-automatic paper loading
Power Requirements
The printer requires power from the ATM power supply (+24V DC ±10%) and power
Paper Specification
The paper used in your printer must conform to the specifications given in NCR publication
Consumable Items for Self Service (B006-4992). The publication also provides ordering
details of the ATM consumables which should be purchased from NCR Systemedia.
Black Mark Cut Position Offset

The cut position is “y” mm ahead of the black mark, where the default “y” dimension is
27.94mm. The “y” dimension is adjustable and can be set using the Pre-Configuration and
Hardware Configuration (SysApp) commands. The range of the “y” dimension is between
0 and 69 mm (2.72 inches).
Print Direction
Y
Cut Position
Max. 0.5 in.
Statement Paper Low

The paper low signal activates when the paper roll outer diameter reaches 68 mm ±2.2
mm (2.68 in. ±0.08 in). The number of receipts/statements remaining will depend on the
thickness of the paper being used.
Statement Paper Low

The paper low signal activates when the paper roll outer diameter reaches 68 mm ±2.2
mm (2.68 in. ±0.08 in). The number of receipts/statements remaining will depend on the
thickness of the paper being used.
Sensor Locations (1ST and 2ST)
Hopper Print Engine
CHP EE Transport
TJ TE
TOF
PL BD 2ST
PE CP TP MTR
FD MTR CT MTR
CBF
CB
Sensor Location Function

Paper Low (PL) Hopper Detects paper low.
(PE) Print Engine Detects paper exhaust or paper out
Feed Motor (FD MTR) Print Engine Detects feed motor
Cover Open (CP) Print Engine Detects cover open/closed
Black Dot (BD) Print Engine Detects black dot/mark
Top of Form (TOF) Print Engine Detects top of form
2 Sided Paper (2ST) Print Engine Detects 2ST paper (2ST model only)
Cutter Motor (CT MTR) Print Engine Detects cutter motor
Cutter Home (CHP) Print Engine Detects cutter home position
Engine Exit (EE) Print Engine Detects paper exit from engine
Transport Jam (TJ) Transport Detects transport paper jam
Transport Motor (TP MTR) Transport Detects transport motor
Transport Exit (TE) Transport Detects transport paper exit
Capture Bin Full (CBF) Transport Detects capture bin full and stops capture function
TROUBLESHOOTING
Faults can be diagnosed using the LEDs on the logic board, and by using the ATM error
reporting system.

The following error messages are reported by the statement printer. Refer to the “Module
Replacement” section for detailed instructions on replacing modules, and “Diagnostics
section” for details of running diagnostics tests.

Comms Error Check USB cable at the printer and hub. Check the power cable at the printer and
power supply. Re-connect or replace if necessary
Printer PCB Error Replace print engine
Knife Low/Out Replace print engine
Knife Jam Clear jam and reload paper. Run self test
Head Life Low/out Replace print engine
Print Head Over Replace print engine
Temperature
Black Mark Error Check that black mark paper is being used, the black marks are complete and the
paper is loaded correctly
Printer Head If open close print unit
Open
Paper Not Loaded Load paper
Transport Jam on Clear Transport jam at exit
Eject
Transport Jam on Clear capture jam at transport sensor
Capture
Exit Jam on Eject Clear eject jam at exit sensor
Exit Jam on Clear jam at exit sensor
Capture
Transport Not Re-connect transport
Connected
Capture Bin Full Empty capture bin
Paper Low Load paper
Paper Out Load paper
General Checks
l Check that the interface cables between the printer, the USB hub and the PC core
are connected securely.
l Check that the cable between the logic board and the drive board is connected
securely at both ends.
l Check that the Transport and Motor connector cables are connected securely.
l Check if the fuse on the drive board has blown.

l Check that the 24V power supply to the drive board is connected.
l Check that the operating temperature.
l Check that the correct type of thermal paper is being used and that it is not damp, dirty
or dusty.
l Check for foreign objects in the feed path/stuck to the paper feed belts.
l Clean the transport belts with alcohol if there are frequent jams.
l If a Firmware/Memory error is detected, switch the printer off and on again to confirm
the diagnostic result. If there is no change, replace the print engine.
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0 Diagnostics
Level 0 diagnostic tests run on start-up and reset.

Green Red Meaning

On Off On-line
Fast blink Off IPL mode (firmware download)
Off Fast blink Paper empty
Off On Capture jam
Off On Transport jam
Off On Top of Form Sensor
Off Fast blink Cutter jam, cover open or firmware error (ROM/RAM/EPROM)
Off Fast blink Cam motor jam
Off Fast blink Cutter Jam
Slow blink Off 24V anomaly
Slow blink Slow blink Sensor adjustment complete
Off Off Power off
Level 1 Diagnostics
The Level 1 diagnostic performs the following tests.
Print Test
The print tests are able to print out via commands or Off-line Diagnostic mode.

l “H” print test
l Graphics 25/50/100%.
Rolling ASCII Print Tests

The following illustration shows a sample print out which is printed on both sides.
Page Number 00000001 3 in.

!”$%&’()*+,-./01234................................. 6 in.
9 in.
!”$%&’()*+,-./01234................................. 5 lpi or 12.5 in.
Dependent on a paper width setting
“H” Print Test


HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH 6 in.
9 in.
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH 5 lpi or 12.5 in.
Dot Check Pattern Test


6 in.
12.5% slant 9 in.
line pattern or 12.5 in.
Graphics Print Test


6 in.
12.5% slant 9 in.
line pattern or 12.5 in.
Adjustments
There are six functions which can be adjusted by commands.
l Sensor Adjustment (Off-line diagnostic mode only)

l Top margin adjustment
l Black form cut position adjustment
l Present position adjustment
l Print density adjustment
Sensor Test
Print Quality Test

The Print Quality test is an NCR Logo graphic, followed by a printout of vertical boxes and a
solid black rectangle. This is followed by a “Check Solid Box For White Lines” statement as
shown in the following illustration.
The Print quality test print for a 2ST Statement is a NCR Logo graphic, followed by a full
character set printout single wide, and a solid black rectangle on one side and a 2ST logo
printed on the second side of the statement.
Printer Alignment Test

Slew Test
The Slew Test prints “START” on the first line, slews 9 lines, and then prints “FINISH” and
cuts.
Slew To Black Mark & Cut Test

This test prints “Slews To Black Mark And Cuts” and slews to the next black mark and cuts
the paper.

The test drives the transport forward for 5 seconds. Paper must be removed from the
printer for this test to run.

The test drives the paper feed motor and print head motor for 5 seconds. Paper must be
Knife Cut Test

The cut test causes the knife to be activated. Paper must be removed from the printer for
this test to run.

The printer slews to the next black mark and cuts the paper, then captures the receipt or
statement.
Note: This test is only offered on printers configured for black mark and with a capture bin.
Cam Motor Test

The test drives the cam motor for 5 seconds. Paper must be removed from the printer prior
to the test.

The test prints a graphic to allow the Field Engineer to determine whether the
fascia/statement printer alignment should be adjusted as shown in the following illustration.
Check Fascia Alignment
Level 3 Diagnostics
The level 3 diagnostics returned for the statement printer are:
Tallies
Tally Description
KNIFE CUTS The number of times a knife cut has occurred.
STATEMENTS ISSUED The number of times a statement has been issued.
STATEMENTS CAPTURED The number of times a statement has been captured.
BLACK MARK ERRORS The number of times a black mark error has been detected.
KNIFE JAMS The number of times a knife jam has occurred.
EXIT JAMS The number of times an exit jam has occurred.
TRANSPORT JAMS The number of times a transport jam has occurred.
CAPTURE JAMS The number of times a capture jam has occurred.
PAPER LENGTH The number of metres of paper that have passed the printhead.
ERROR RECOVERIES The number of error recoveries.
PRINTER OVER HEATED The number of times the printer has over-heated.
CAM JAMS The number of times a cam jam has occurred.
ILLEGAL SEQUENCES The number of times an illegal sequence warning has occurred.
Tally Description
FLASH CYCLES The number of times the device memory has been flashed.
HEAD OPENINGS The number of times the head has been opened.
HOURS ON The number of hours powered on.
SUPPLY VOLTAGE ANOMALY The number of times the voltage has dropped below 65% of required
voltage.
USB COMMUNICATIONS FAILURE The number of times driver communications has been lost.
ATM STATEMENT TRANSACTION The number of times a statement has been issued.
COUNTER
FAILED ATM STATEMENT The number of knife jams + black mark errors + exit jams + transport
TRANSACTION COUNTER jams + cam jams occurred.
STATEMENT PERFORMANCE The difference between good knife cuts and transport jams.
STRAPPING
Fuse
There is a fuse 10A fuse on the drive board.
ADJUSTMENTS
the statement printer:
Menu Description
Paper type Sets the printer to use either Black mark or Non black mark
Printer contrast Sets the printer contrast in the range 0 (lightest) to 30 (darkest). Default value is
15.
Black mark cut Sets where within the black mark the form is cut.
position adjustment Minimum value is 0 and maximum value 30.
Default value is 3.
Adjust left margin Sets the position of the left margin.
Adjustments are in steps of 0.125 mm (0.005 in) within the range of Min. -1.875
mm (±0.075in.) to max +1.875 mm (±0.075in).
Minimum value is 0, maximum value 30. Default value is 0.
Present position Sets the position of the first line of print. Minimum value is 0, maximum value
adjustment 30. Default value is 15.
Paper width Sets paper width of paper being used.
Paper width 155.6 mm (6.125 inch)
Paper width A4 210 mm (8.27 inch)
Paper width Letter 215.9 mm (8.5 inch).

The procedures in this section describe the removal and replacement of the:
l Transport (including capture bin)

l Print engine
l Hopper
l Engine signal cable
l Paper low sensor cable assembly
l Capture bin full sensor.
Transport
1. Disconnect the capture bin full and engine signal harnesses from the transport
control board.
2. Ease the harnesses back through the slot in the transport frame and release the
cable tie holding the harness to the frame.
Capture Bin Full Harness
Transport Control Board
Engine Signal Harness
3. Remove two circlips (one each side) of the transport support pin and withdraw the
support pin while supporting the assembly. Lift the transport clear of the printer.
Circlip
Support Shaft
Print Engine
1. Remove and retain the four screws (two on each side), securing the print engine to
the frame.
2. Disconnect the paper low sensor harness.
3. Lift the print engine and disconnect the ribbon harness from the print engine control
board.
4. Slide the engine clear of the frame and lift it up.
Print Engine Fixing Screws Paper Low Sensor Harness
Hopper
To remove the hopper, remove the print engine and transport, as described previously.
Engine Signal Cable

1. Remove the print engine as described previously. Release the ribbon cable from the
print engine control board.
2. Disconnect the capture bin full and engine signal harnesses from the transport
control board.
cable tie holding it to the frame.
4. Release the cable from the transport control board and withdraw the cable through
the transport frame.
Paper Low Sensor Cable Assembly

1. Disconnect the sensor cable at the connector shown below.
2. Remove the screw fixing the sensor assembly to the hopper.
Cable Connector Sensor Cable Fixing Screw
Capture Bin Full Sensor

1. Disconnect the capture bin full harness from the transport control board.
cable tie holding it to the frame.
3. Remove the print engine as previously described.

4. Locate and release the capture bin full sensor and remove.
CABLING
None.
Logic Board
Board Layout
J5
J3
J4

J5 Operator panel harness
Pin Assignments - USB I/F connector

Pin Desc
1 VBUS
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND
Shell Shield
Drive Board
J1
J7
J4
J3
J16
J2
J12
J10 J6
J5
J13
J8 J15
J1 Cutter motor J7 Thermal harness

J2 Cam motor J8 Sensor harness
J3 Motor connector J10 Board to wire connector
J4 Thermal harness J13 Sensor harness connector
J5 Sensor harness J15 Board to Board
J6 Power
Pin Assignments - Power connector

Pin Description
1 Power Ground
2 Power Ground
3 +24V DC
4 Power Ground
5 +24V DC
6 Power Ground
7 +24V DC
8 +24V DC
Shell Frame Ground
None.
REVISION

12. SCANNERS
Barcode Scanner 915
Document Scanner 921
ID Scanner 930
BARCODE SCANNER
INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides servicing information for the Universal Barcode Reader (UBAR) and
the replacement UBAR 2.5.
Safety Compliance
The UBAR meets the requirements of paragraph 1.1 of IEC 60825-1, and therefore no
safety labels are required.
DESCRIPTION
UBAR
The USB 2D barcode reader (UBAR) can be fitted to ATMs to extend banking services by
automating bill payment and merchant deposit transactions otherwise handled by front
office tellers. The UBAR has a USB 1.1 interface and can decode linear (such as Code
39), stacked linear (such as PDF 417) and matrix (such as Maxicode) barcode standards.
On exterior products only, illumination is provided by two IR LED PCB’s which are
triggered via illumination controller board when the barcode reader is activated.
The hardware consists of an imager, interface board and two UBAR IR LED PCB
assemblies.
Interface PCB
IR LED PCB
Imager
IR LED PCB
The LEDs are controlled by the UBAR illumination IR LED driver board, shown below.
The UBAR interface board provides the USB interface between the barcode imager and
the PC core and also supplies dc power to the barcode imager. The UBAR interface board
provides the trigger signal to the UBAR illumination driver board.
The UBAR illumination driver board supplies the power and controls the firing of the UBAR
IR LED PCBs.
UBAR 2.5
TROUBLESHOOTING
Module States
Condition SOH Message Action
Device disconnected INSPECT_NOW Check connections
30 consecutive read errors INSPECT_SOON Clean viewing window as described below
75 consecutive read errors INSPECT_NOW Replace barcode reader
Cleaning Viewing and Illumination Windows

If the UBAR is not successfully reading codes make sure the viewing and illumination
windows on the outside of the facia is scrupulously clean and also free from scratches or
abrasions. If a window is scratched a new moulding with window will have to be fitted.
DIAGNOSTICS
Reporting
The UBAR is a GO/NO GO device and either works or fails, therefore there are no
extensive diagnostics.
Self Test
Selecting DEVICE SELF TEST from the System Application Main Menu and selecting
barcode reader from the Device Self Test Menu will display a screen prompt to “Scan a
Barcode”. If a test barcode has been successfully scanned within a 10 second period, the
display will show that the self test was successful. If no barcode has been scanned within
10 seconds, the display will show that the test is incomplete.
Level 3 Diagnostics
M_CODE Meaning
00H GOOD
02H ERROR
M_STAT Meaning
00 Operation successful
01 barcode type not supported or data error
02 barcode read error
04 Device inoperative
05 USB communications error
06 Format error
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.
Note: The UBAR is factory configured to recognize all barcode symbologies.

There are no serviceable parts within the UBAR.
CABLING
None.
This section includes pinouts of the connectors on the UBAR Illumination IR LED Driver
board shown below.
UBAR Illumination IR LED Driver Board (Not applicable to

UBR 2.5)
J1 J3
J4
J2
Connector J1
The connector (J1) carries the trigger signal from the UBAR interface board to the
Illumination IR LED Driver board. The connector is a 2-way right-angled header, S-ROW
microfit with the following pinout:
Pin Desc
1 TRIGGER
2 GND
Connector J2 (Power)
The connector (J2) supplies the 24V power to the Illumination IR LED Driver board. The
connector is a 2-way right-angled header, mini-fit jnr with the following pinout:
Pin Desc
1 +24V
2 GND
Connector J3
The connector (J3) carries the signals from the UBAR Illumination driver board to the IR
LED board. The connector is a 4-way right-angled header, microfit with the following
pinout:
Desc Pin Pin Desc

GND 3 1 DIODE CONTROL (D1)
Connector J4
The connector (J4) carries the signals from the UBAR Illumination driver board to the IR
LED board. The connector is a 4-way right-angled header, microfit with the following
pinout:
Desc Pin Pin Desc

UBAR Interface PCB (Not applicable to UBR 2.5)

Connector J3
The connector (J3) carries the trigger signal from the UBAR interface board to the
Illumination IR LED Driver board. The connector is a Molex Microfit type with the following
pinout:
Pin Desc
1 TRIGGER
2 GND
Connector J2
The connector (J2) is the USB connector which carries the signals from the PC Core to the
UBAR interface board. The connector is a Molex PTH Mini-B USB type with the following
pinout:
Pin Desc
1 VCC
2 D-
3 D+
4 ID
5 GND
6 S1
The Barcode Reader Test Document (NCR Part No. 009-0017470).
DOCUMENT SCANNER
INTRODUCTION
The AccessIS OCR640 is a USB electronic document scanner that scans the Machine
Readable Zone (MRZ) data and captures a high quality digital image of documents. It is
used on Machine Readable Passports, Visas, and other travel documents.
Scanning Window
CAUTION
DESCRIPTION
Mechanical Specifications
Parameter Specification
External dimensions Length: 158 mm (6.22 in.)
Width: 127 mm (5.00 in.)
Height: 142 mm (5.59 in.)
Body Colour: Dark grey
Material: Acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (ABS)
Glass 4 mm (0.16 in.) Toughened white soda lime,
BS EN60068-2-75 & IEC 62262:2002 compliant,
Rated to 5J impact
Glass safety Meets EN60950 requirements
Features
The following are the features of the document scanner device:
l Simultaneously decodes the MRZ data and captures a full–page bitmap image of the
passport, including the image of the passport owner
l Compensates for out–of–position MRZ areas
l Automatically detects when a document with MRZ data is inserted
l Uses ultraviolet (UV), infrared (IR), and visible lighting and imaging
Technical Specifications
Machine Readable Zone (MRZ) Decoding
Feature Description
Standard OCR fonts supported OCR-B
Machine Readable Passports (MRP) supported 2 lines of 44 characters
Characters compliant to ICAO 9303
Machine Readable Visas (MRV) supported 2 lines of 44 characters
2 lines of 36 characters
Characters compliant to ICAO 9303
Machine Readable Travel documents (MRTD) 2 lines of 36 characters
3 lines of 30 characters
Imaging
Feature Description
Light Sources IR, white LED, and UV
Image Resolution 400 DPI
Contactless Radio Frequency (RF) Scanning

Feature Description
Interoperability Passport booklets & ID cards that conform to the global standards for
conformance interoperability by the
ICAO 9303 2005
RF operating frequency 13.56MHz
Contactless protocols ISO 14443 type A & B (includes auto–detection, and secure and high–
supported speed data transmission)
Mifare memory card support
(Mifare ultralight, 1K, 4K cards)
Application programming PC/SC compliant device
interface
Electrical Specifications
Voltage required at barrel connector 5V ±0.25mV from external power adapter
Current consumption on barrel connector 1.5A
Overvoltage protection on barrel connector 18V maximum
Voltage at the end of USB connector 4.75 to 5.25V
Current consumed from USB connector Less than 5mA
USB device classification Hi–speed device (480Mbps)
Environmental Specifications
Operating temperature 0 to 50°C
Storage temperature 0 to 60°C
Humidity 0 to 95% non–condensing
ERROR MESSAGES
Error Possible root Isolation Resolution
causes
USB The USB cable Check the USB cable connection at the Reconnect the USB
communication is disconnected document scanner device cable
failure Check the USB cable connection at the PC core Reconnect the USB
cable
Check the USB cable connection at the powered Reconnect the USB
hub cable
The USB cable If above step fails Replace the USB
is faulty cable
The document If above step fails Replace the
scanner is document scanner
faulty
Control The document – Disconnect and
Electronics scanner is reconnect the
Fault faulty document scanner
Firmware USB Use Sysapp Diagnostics Identify command to Reboot the system
Download communication check FPGA and camera firmware versions on and check if the
Failure failure the device versus the latest versions firmware is
downloaded. If the loaded version differs from correctly
the current version, the respective firmware downloaded
(FPGA or Camera) download fails.
One of the If above step fails Replace the FPGA
firmware files or camera
(cam_ firmware file with
<ver>.hex or another known
fpag_ good firmware file.
<ver>.bin) Reboot the system.
invalid
scanner is document scanner
faulty device
DIAGNOSTICS
Device Diagnostics
Note: Looping is allowed on all tests, except on Applet ID 3.

ID
0 Menu This displays a menu of all the other Applets to allow an operator to select one.
1 Identification The test displays the following information:
l Device Name
l Device Variant
l Current Camera Firmware Version
l Last Camera Firmware Downloaded
l Current FPGA Firmware Version
l Last FPGA Firmware Version Downloaded
l VideoOCR Version
l Core driver Version
2 Scanner Test This test initializes the document scanner and executes a getImage command,
which writes the bitmap file to the disk. The test result is displayed at the end.
The test succeeds if no error occurs.
3 Transfer This test is available on the terminal only if the “Allow Transfer Logs Diagnostic
Logs Applet” configuration is set to TRUE. This can be configured through the Property
Page. Some banks that remotely collect logs from the terminal prefer to set the
option to FALSE.
If the configuration is set to TRUE, then the test performs the following
operations in sequence:
l Displays the menu, which contains all the removable media that is detected
on the system
l Copies the logs into the root directory of the selected drive
l Prompts the user about the success or failure of the activity
This applet copies the log files to the removable media even if the document
scanner is not in a good state. During the process, this applet does not
communicate with the document scanner device; therefore, no device–related
Mstatus or error code is expected. After the applet successfully copies the log
files to the removable media, the logs are not deleted from the disk and can be
transferred again from the terminal to another removal media.
Note: Load the removable media before executing this applet. If the media is
inserted after executing this applet, the media is not reflected in the media
selection menu.
Device Self Test

ID
1 Device Self The device self test executes the following commands in sequence:
Test l Scanner Test (initialize, getImage, and store the scanned bitmap file). No
user interaction is needed.
l End of test
Tallies
Tally Description
Mnemonic
SCNSTART Number of scans started
SCN_STOP Number of scans cancelled without processing a document
SCN_GOOD Number of documents processed without bad MRZ decoding or image processing
errors
SCNERROR Number of documents processed with MRZ decoding or image processing errors
MRZDGOOD Number of MRZ decodings with valid MRZ
MRZD_BAD Number of MRZ decodings with invalid MRZ
IMG_CAPT Number of image scans using any illumination type (IR, white LED, or UV)
MRZ_CAPT Number of MRZ scans
RFIDCAPT Number of RFID scans
COMM_OPS Number of USB communications
COMMFAIL Number of USB communication failures
USB_ARRV Number of device removals (disconnects)
USB_REMV Number of device arrivals (connects)
STRAPPING
None
ADJUSTMENTS
Configuration Properties
Note: By default, the configuration settings can be remotely viewed but cannot be modified.

ID
0 Menu This displays a menu of all the other Applets to allow an operator to select
one.
1 Device The test displays the following information:
Information l Device Name
l Device Variant
l VideoOCR Version

There are no field replaceable parts in this device.
CABLING
None
RJ45 Connector
RJ 45
Connector
Pin 1
Pin Signal
1 (Not used)
2 (Not used)
3 DC 5V
4 USB VCC
5 D-
6 D+
7 USB GND
8 (Not used)
9 DC GND
10 (Not used)
There are no test and adjustment tools required for this device.
None.
ID SCANNER
INTRODUCTION
The Identity Document Scanner is an USB Electronic Document Scanner that scans the
Machine Readable Zone (MRZ) data and captures a high quality digital image of
documents. It is used with Machine Readable Passports (MRP), Machine Readable Visas
(MRV), and other travel/identity documents.
This chapter covers the following device variants:
l Variant 0 - AccessIS OCR640 MK II (5V)

l Variant 1 - AccessIS OCR640 Mk III (24V)
l Variant 2 - AccessIS ADR100
ADR100 OCR640 Mk II/III
CAUTION
DESCRIPTION
Mechanical Specifications
Parameter AccessIS OCR640 MK II/III AccessIS ADR100
External Length: 120.8 mm (4.76in.) Length: 85.6 mm (3.37 in.)
dimensions Width: 142.9 mm (5.63 in.) Width: 106.4 mm (4.19 in.)
Height: 94.4 mm (3.72 in.) Height: 78.5 mm (3.09 in.)
Body Colour: Black Colour: Black
Material: Acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (ABS) Material: Acrylonitrile butadiene styrene
(ABS)
Glass 4 mm (0.16 in.) Toughened white soda lime, BS 4 mm (0.16 in.) Toughened Platen, BS
EN60068-2-75 & IEC 62262:2002 compliant, EN60068-2-75 & IEC 62262:2002
Rated to 6.375J impact compliant, Rated to 5J impact
Glass safety Meets EN60950 requirements Meets EN60950 requirements
Features
The following are the features of the document scanner device:
Functionality Supported OCR640 MK II OCR640 MK III ADR100

Capturing Images - Colour Yes Yes Yes
Capturing Images - Infrared Yes Yes No
Capturing Images - Ultra-Violet Yes Yes Yes
MRZ Data Processing Yes Yes No
RFID Data Processing Yes No No
Compensation for out of position MRZ areas Yes Yes No
Auto detect MRZ data document insertion Yes Yes No
Machine Readable Zone (MRZ) Decoding
Feature Description
Standard OCR fonts supported OCR-B
Machine Readable Passports (MRP) supported l 2 lines of 44 characters
l Characters compliant to ICAO
9303
Feature Description
Machine Readable Visas (MRV) supported l 2 lines of 44 characters
l Characters compliant to ICAO
9303
Machine Readable Travel documents (MRTD) l 2 lines of 33 characters
l 3 lines of 30 characters
Imaging
Feature OCR640 MK II/III ADR100
Light Sources InfraRed (IR), white, red and UV InfraRed (IR)
Image Resolution 3.1 Mega Pixel - 400 DPI 3.1 Mega Pixel - 600 DPI
Electrical Specifications
Parameter OCR640 Mk II OCR640 MK III ADR100
Voltage required at barrel 5V from external 24V from external 24V from external
connector power adapter power adapter power adapter
Current consumption on 1.5A 1A 1.5A
barrel connector
Over voltage protection on 18V 30V 30V
barrel connector
Voltage at the end of USB 4.75 to 5.25V 4.75 to 5.25V 4.75 to 5.25V
connector
Current consumed from USB < 5mA < 5mA < 5mA
connector
USB device classification Hi–speed device Hi–speed device Hi–speed device
(480Mbps) (480Mbps) (480Mbps)
Hardware Variants
HW Description USB VID/PID Minimum Driver Recommended Driver
Variant Version Version
- AccessIS OCR640 MK I N/A N/A N/A
(5V)
0 AccessIS OCR640 MK II HID\Vid_0DB5h&Pid_ 1.00.00 1.02.01
(5V) 0138h&
HID\Vid_0DB5h&
Pid_2003h
HW Description USB VID/PID Minimum Driver Recommended Driver

Variant Version Version
1 AccessIS OCR640 MK III HID\Vid_0DB5h& 1.01.00 1.02.01
(24V) Pid_2003h
2 AccessIS ADR100 (24V) HID\Vid_0DB5h TBA TBA
&Pid_2005h
ERROR MESSAGES
Error Possible root Isolation Resolution
causes
USB The USB cable Check the USB cable connection at the document Reconnect
communication is disconnected scanner device the USB
failure cable
Check the USB cable connection at the PC core Reconnect
the USB
cable
Check the USB cable connection at the powered hub Reconnect
the USB
cable
The USB cable If above step fails Replace the
is faulty USB cable
scanner is document
faulty scanner
Control The document - Disconnect
Electronics scanner is and
Fault faulty reconnect
the
document
scanner
Firmware USB Use Sysapp Diagnostics Identify Reboot the
Download communication command to check FPGA and camera firmware system and
Failure failure versions on the device versus the latest versions check if the
downloaded. If the loaded version differs from the firmware is
current version, the respective firmware (FPGA or correctly
Camera) download fails. downloaded
scanner is document
faulty scanner
device
TESTING
The most obvious and thorough method of testing the ID Scanner would be though a teller
transaction, but for reasons of staging, communications, business demand etc. that may
not always be an option. As a result there are diagnostic options available for all four
hardware generations, but the locations and methodology differ.
The Mk1 scanner uses a non-XFS driver that cannot be tested via the SYSAPP interface.
Use the ‘Interactive Teller Diagnostics’ from the supervisor menu.
The other scanners have testing options present in SYSAPP so long as the correct
minimum driver version is installed in the ITM. Earlier versions of the AIT software may also
present the scanner tests in the ‘Interactive Teller Diagnostics’ menu from the supervisor
interface. These can be used, but will have the same limitations imposed above for the Mk1
scanner, and should not be relied on.
In the case where the device fails to test, times out, isn’t listed as an option, or provides a
poor quality image a manufacturer provided utility can be used to test the ID Scanner
outside of our financial software.
To access this utility you will need to access the desktop and navigate to the utility
manually. Follow the normal channels for support if you require assistance in this process.
The utility is found in the C:\Program Files\Access VideoOCR\ directory, and named
‘MFCDemo.exe’. Launch the utility, click the radio button next to the ‘1’ in the lower left
corner, place an ID on the scanner and press the ‘Snapshot’ button.
All three (IR/UV/Colour) images of the ID should appear in the empty space in the upper
right side of the screen. This utility is useful for identifying if the poor scanning or other
issues are Hardware (HW) or Software (SW) related. If the scans are bright and legible in
this interface, then the Software would be suspect, and should be escalated appropriately.
DIAGNOSTICS
Lighting Indicators
The following illustration describes the definition of the indicator lighting when lit, (ADR100
only).
Document has been read

Problem with document
Document is being read
Device is ready to scan
Device Diagnostics
Note: Looping is allowed on all tests, except on Applet ID 3.

ID
l Device Name
l Device Variant
l Video OCR Version
l Core Driver Version
2 Scanner Test This test initializes the document scanner and executes a getImage command,
which writes the bitmap file to the disk. The test result is displayed at the end.
The test succeeds if no error occurs.
Note: In case of the device variant 2 (ADR100) only colour and ultraviolet images
are captured.
Logs Applet” configuration is set to TRUE. This can be configured through the Property
Page. Some banks that remotely collect logs from the terminal prefer to set the
option to FALSE.
l Displays the menu, which contains all the removable media that is detected
on the system
l Copies the logs into the root directory of the selected drive
l Prompts the user about the success or failure of the activity
This applet copies the log files to the removable media even if the document
scanner is not in a good state. During the process, this applet does not
communicate with the document scanner device; therefore, no device–related
Note: Load the removable media before executing this applet. If the media is
selection menu.
Device Self Test

ID
Menu This displays a menu of all the other Applets to allow an operator to select one.
Device Self The device self test executes the following commands in sequence:
Test l Scanner Test (initialize, getImage, and store the scanned bitmap file). No
user interaction is needed.
l End of test
Note: In case of the device variant 2 (ADR100) only colour and ultraviolet images
are captured.
Tallies
Tally ID Tally Description
Mnemonic
0 SCNSTART Number of scans started
1 SCN_STOP Number of scans cancelled without processing a document
2 SCN_GOOD Number of documents processed without bad MRZ decoding or image
processing errors
3 SCNERROR Number of documents processed with MRZ decoding or image processing errors
4 MRZDGOOD Number of MRZ decodings with valid MRZ
5 MRZD_BAD Number of MRZ decodings with invalid MRZ
6 IMG_CAPT Number of image scans using any illumination type (IR, white LED, or UV)
7 MRZ_CAPT Number of MRZ scans
8 RFIDCAPT Number of RFID scans
9 COMM_ Number of USB communications
OPS
10 COMMFAIL Number of USB communication failures
11 USB_ARRV Number of device removals (disconnects)
12 USB_REMV Number of device arrivals (connects)
DEBUG
Symptom Diagnosis Action
5V Mk2 scanner Supply voltage low Ensure that the regulator output is at least
connects and (Observed at 4.7Vdc and below) 5Vdc
disconnects
repeatedly
(May occur in
normal, supervisor
mode, or both)
Scanner not listed Device and driver mismatch Identify if the scanner was recently replaced.
in SYSAPP If it was, then ensure that the correct version
diagnostics, but was installed. The Mk1 and Mk2 use the same
present in the USB harnessing but require different drivers and
viewer. are not interchangeable.
Ensure the software present matches the type
of ID scanner installed. Use USB viewer to
determine which variant is installed.
Mk1 cannot be tested in SYSAPP and requires
a non-XFS driver. test via the “Interactive
Teller Diagnostics” menu in supervisor mode
Attempt to test the ID scanner using the
MFCDemo utility from the desktop.
Customer reports Different variants of devices used Identify if all devices are of the same variant
one ATM has across multiple ITM’s on the ATM’s.
brighter, or This is normal, as the Mk3 is Note: Upgrading from Mk2 to Mk3 is
dimmer, scans known to produce a brighter currently not supported.
compared to other image. This may cause the
machines customer to believe their other
ATM’s are not behaving to
specification.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
Applet ID Test Description

Information l Device Name
l Device Variant
l Video OCR Version

CABLING
None.
OCR640 MK II/III ADR100
DC USB
RJ45
Connector
RJ45
Pin Signal Signal
OCR640 MK II OCR640 MK III
1 (Not used) (Not used)
3 DC 5V DC 24V
4 USB VCC V
5 D- D-
6 D+ D+
7 USB GND USB GND
9 DC GND DC GND
DC
Pin Signal
1 +24V
2 GND
USB
Pin Signal
1 VCC
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND
None.
13. DISPENSERS
S1 Bill Alignment Dispenser 944
Revision 1027
Aria Pick Module 1028
Revision 1055
Revision 1113
Coin Dispenser (Hopper Style) 1114
Revision 1151
Revision 1265
S2 Dispenser Cassette 1266
S1 BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSER
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the Front and Rear Access S1 currency dispensers which form bill
stacks using the bill alignment mechanism.
As this type of dispenser has been developed and manufactured post EU RoHS
compliance guidelines it can only be serviced using appropriate RoHS compliant parts.
S1 Variants
The major area variants of the S1 Bill Alignment dispensers are:
l Mechanical:
l Rear Access (short transport)
l Rear Access (mid transport)
l Rear Access (long transport)
l Front Access.
l Electrical:
l The dispenser is available in 115 V and 230 V main motor variants
l The dispenser control board has USB connectivity.
l Software:
l Microsoft Windows XP and Aptra XFS 4.5 onwards.
Pick Modules
The Dispenser can use the Aria or the 56XX enhanced single and double pick modules.
The Aria pick modules are described in the Aria pick module chapter in the dispense
section of this manual. The description of the 56XX type is in chapter 17.6 of the Service
Aids Mini‐Manual (FM‐0547‐A).
Note: Where there is a mixture of Aria and 56XX enhanced pick modules, then the Aria
type must always be used in the lower positions.
Single and Dual Configuration

The ATM is available in either single or dual cash configuration. Each dispenser can be
configured to recognise up to seven denominations, but is limited to dispensing up to four
due to the maximum number of cassettes it can hold. In an ATM configured with dual
dispensers the total number of denominations can be 14 of which a maximum of 8 can be
dispensed at any one time.
WARNING
It is recommended that currency denominations in a dual dispenser
are consistently mapped to the same cassette types in both
dispensers. This will ensure that the correct denomination is
inserted into the correct dispenser.
Operational Environment
The dispenser operates as an intelligent module under the control of its own on‐board
microprocessor. It communicates with the ATM central processing unit using the USB
Interface. Dispenser device control firmware resident in the dispenser memory interfaces
with the ATM transaction control and diagnostic programs.
Variants
The S1 dispenser is available in the following variants:
l Front Access
l Rear Access
l Short Transport
l Mid Transport
l Long Transport.
The following options are available on all variants.
l 1, 2, 3 or 4 Standard width cassettes

l Standard Security
l Tamper Indicating Security
l Cash Security (Fluiditi/Axytrans)

l Open or latchfast purge bin
l 115 V version
l 230 V version
Containers
The dispenser is capable of using the wide currency cassettes developed to replace the
obsolete standard width cassette. A full description of the currency cassettes is given in the
Currency Cassette chapter of the Dispense section of this manual.
Note: Standard width currency cassette Type H8015‐STD‐01/02‐08 are obsolete and are
not recommended for use with this dispenser.
Currency Cassettes
l Latch Fast security (Standard). The security method takes the form of a cable tie or
similar through the door latch.
l Tamper Indicating security (TI). The cassette has a mechanical indicator to signal any
tampering via colour change to the indicator. In addition the catch can be fitted with a
seal.
l Fluiditi/Axytrans ATM security. The system protects currency cassettes when
installed in the ATM by injecting marking ink into the cassette upon the ATM being
attacked. It is important that correct handling procedures are observed when handling
this type of cassette.
l Fluiditi/Axytrans Replenishment security. The system protects the cassette while in
transit as well as when installed in the ATM by injecting marking ink into the cassette.
It is important that correct handling procedures are observed when handling this type
of cassette.
Purge Bins
l Open bin.
l Latch fast bin. The security method takes the form of a cable tie or similar through the
purge bin latch.
Note: An indicator is not available on the purge bin. A dispenser ordered with mechanical
TI is supplied with a latch fast purge bin.
Specifications
Power Requirements
The power requirement for the Control board is:
l Direct current:
l +24 V ± 10% 0.35 A
l +24 V Interlock.
l Alternating current:
l 115 Vac, 5.5 A r.m.s., 20.0 A surge
or
l 230 Vac, 3.0 A r.m.s., 10.0 A surge.
The S1 Control board supplies the following power:
l Direct current:
l +3.3 V ± 10% 0.5 A
l +5 V ± 10% 0.75 A
l +12 V ± 10% 0.5 A.
Weight
The weights of the component parts of the S1 dispenser are:
l Front Access Dispenser:

l Basic unit (2 double pick modules + presenter) = 38.9 kg (85.75 lb.)
l Presenter unit =20.9 kg (46.07 lb.)
l Rear Access Dispenser:

l Short unit (2 double pick modules + presenter) = 36.30 kg (80.02 lb.)
l Mid unit (2 double pick modules + presenter) = 36.90 kg (81.34 lb.)
l Long unit (2 double pick modules + presenter) = 39.10 kg (86.19 lb.)
l Presenter unit (Short) = 18.3 kg (40.34 lb.)
l Presenter unit (Mid) = 18.9 kg (41.66 lb.)
l Presenter unit (Long) = 21.1 kg (46.51 lb.)
l Single pick module = 6.3 kg (13.9 lb.)

l Double pick module = 9 kg (19.84 lb.)
l Currency cassette (Plastic) empty = 2.16 kg (4.76 lb.)
l Currency cassette (Plastic) full = 6.62 kg (14.60 lb.)
l Currency cassette (Metal) empty = 3.48 kg (7.67 lb.)
l Currency cassette (Metal) full = 8.21 kg (18.10 lb.)
l Open purge bin empty = 0.28 kg (0.62 lb.)
l Open purge bin full = 0.42 kg (0.92 lb.)
l Latch fast purge bin empty = 0.82 kg (1.81 lb.)
l Latch fast purge bin full = 0.96 kg (2.12 lb.)
Dispenser Dimensions
The dimensions of the S1 dispenser with four pick modules (excluding ATM interface
requirements) are:
l Front Access Dispenser:

l Width = 300 mm (11.81 in.)
l Height = 768 mm (30.24 in.)
l Depth = 750 mm (29.52 in.)
l Rear Access Dispenser:

l Width = 300 mm (11.81 in.)
l Height = 700mm (27.35 in.)
l Depth Short Nose = 726 mm (28.58 in.)
l Depth Mid Nose = 846 mm (33.30 in.)
l Depth Long Nose = 960 mm (37.79 in.)
DESCRIPTION
Bill alignment dispensers present a bunch of up to 40 bills/notes (50 bills for special China
version) in up to four denominations of currency to the cardholder. A detect and purge
system controls the movement of currency along the transport. Misfed or damaged
currency is bunched and driven into a purge bin. The option is available, via application
commands, to retract currency presented to the cardholder but not taken, to the purge bin.
The following sections describe the operation of the dispenser’s mechanical, electrical/
electronic, and firmware components.
Path of Notes
The dispensers are built with two, three, or four pick modules suspended below the
presenter module.
The path of notes through the presenter is shown in the following diagrams:
Forming the Stack

Notes enter the presenter from the pick modules, pass the LVDT and are projected against
the bill stop gate of the bill alignment mechanism by the flicker shaft fingers. They then fall
on to the top of the note clamp transport where they form a stack.
S1 Front Access Stack
Bill Alignment Assembly

(Down)
Stack Sensor
From Pick
Note Stack Flicker Shaft
Modules
Stack Sensor
S1 Rear Access Stack
Stack Sensor Bill Alignment Assembly

(Down)
From Pick
Modules Note Stack
Flicker Shaft
Present
The note clamp transport is lifted up so that the note stack is held against the underside of
the top set of presenter transport belts. The belts are driven and the stack of notes is moved
to the facia exit slot where it is held for the cardholder.
S1 Front Access Present
Present Position of Stack Note Path Bill Alignment Assembly

(Down)
Cam
Note Clamp Note Stack
S1 Rear Access Present

Present Position of Stack Note Path (Down)
Note Clamp Cam
Note Stack
Reject
If the stack is not taken by the cardholder, or a mispick has been detected, then the
presenter transport is driven in reverse and the notes are moved into the purge bin.
S1 Front Access Reject
Bill Alignment Assembly (Up)
Purge Bin
Note Stack
S1 Rear Access Reject
Purge Bin
Note Stack
Purge
If the stack is not presented after the stacking process or a mispick is detected, then the
presenter transport is driven in reverse and the notes are moved into the purge bin.
S1 Front Access Purge
Purge Bin
Note Stack
S1 Rear Access Purge
Purge Bin
Note Stack
Sensors
The position of the sensors that detect the movement of notes is shown in the diagrams
below:
S1 Front Access Sensors
Transport Sensors TS4A & B*

Exit Sensors TS5A & B Stack SensorsTS2A & B
From Pick
Modules LVDT
Purge Overfill Sensors TS1A & B
* second TS4 and TS5 sensors in dual sensor systems only (polymer notes)
S1 Rear Access Sensors

Transport Sensors TS3A & B* Stack Sensors TS2A & TS2B
Exit Sensors TS5A & B
Purge Overfill Sensors TS1A & B
LVDT From Pick

Modules
Pick Module
The dispensers may be configured with two, three, or four pick modules hanging vertically
below the presenter module.
There are two types of pick module: the single pick module holds one currency cassette,
and the double pick module holds two cassettes, one above the other. The single and
double pick modules used are the Aria type 3 as described in Aria Pick Module chapter in
the Dispense section of this manual.
Pick positions are numbered 1 to 4, with number one immediately below the presenter.
Note: If a mixture of Aria and 56XX enhanced pick modules are used, then the Aria type 3
pick module is always in the lower position.
Presenter Module
The presenter module has the following functions:
l stack up to 40 bills/notes (50 bills for special China version) and present the stack to
the cardholder
l detect when the stack of bills is taken
l control the exit shutter behind the ATM facia
l provide a housing for the purge bin
l drive damaged, mispicked, or not‐taken currency into the purge bin
l detect when the purge bin is full
l drive, through gearing, all the pick modules
l detect the movement of bills through the transport
l create the timing signal for the measurement of bill singularity
l supply the pick vacuum to all the pick modules.
The components of the presenter which achieve these functions are:
l linear variable displacement transducer (LVDT)

l main timing disk
l flicker shaft, anti‐static brush, and deflectors
l bill alignment assembly and bill stop gate
l note clamp, note clamp sensors
l presenter transport and motor
l presenter timing disk
l transport sensors
l exit sensor
l shutter assembly (fascia mounted)
l purge bin location components
l purge transport
l purge sensor
l main motor and vacuum pump
l motor and sensing control circuits.
The following sections describe these components.
Linear Variable Displacement Transducer (LVDT)
Ferrite Cores
Sensing Coils
Protective Cover
Bills passed up from the pick modules enter the presenter via the LVDT transport. This
short transport is the only one in the presenter that is driven by the main motor and is linked
via a gear train to the first pick module transport.
Note: Care should be taken with regards to the sensing coils and ferrite cores as these can
be damaged by inappropriate handling.
The LVDT is a sensing device, situated in the transport just before the flicker shaft, which
gives an electrical output proportional to the displacement of two movable roller assemblies
caused by bills passing between them and fixed reference rollers. The rollers are attached
to ferrite cores which project through sensing coils printed on a pcb. The output from the
coils is digitized, integrated, and is compared to the expected value (held in memory) for the
currency being dispensed. In this way torn, folded, or multiple bills are detected.
Note: There is no Pre‐LVDT sensor on the bill alignment presenters. The timing of the
calculation is carried out by the LVDT itself.
Main Timing Disk

The main timing disk pulley is driven by a toothed belt from the main motor. Thirty‐six holes
around the periphery of the timing disk create the timing pulses from an optoelectronic
sensor. The output of the sensor is used to measure the movement of the bills as far as the
flicker shaft and as a reference in the measurement of bill width. The interval between the
interrupts represents a distance travelled by the bill of approximately 1 mm.
Main Timing Disk ‐ Rear Access
Main Timing Disk
Main Timing Disk ‐ Front Access
Flicker Shaft, Anti‐Static Brush, and Deflectors
The plastic fingers on the flicker shaft impart an extra impetus to the notes as they leave the
LVDT transport so that they are projected against the bill stop gate of the bill alignment
assembly. This action is augmented by a second flicker shaft assembly with short flicker
fingers. The longer flicker fingers also drag the notes into the stack against plastic guides
attached to the LVDT transport.
Just as the notes leave the LVDT transport they pass through an anti‐static brush to
remove any electric charge that would hinder them forming into a stack. Above the
antistatic brush two plastic note deflectors are clipped between tie bars so that they brush
across the upper surface of the note and provide a light downward pressure to keep the
trailing edge of the notes down and aid the action of the flicker fingers.

The bill stop gate of the bill alignment assembly hangs down into the path of the notes as
they are flicked out of the LVDT transport. Notes strike the gate, bounce back from it, and
fall down on to the top of the note clamp transport where they are dragged into a stack by
the action of the flicker fingers.
The neat formation of the stack of notes depends upon the bounce given to the notes by the
gate which, in turn, depends on the position of the gate. The gate hangs from a belt
transport driven by a stepper motor controlled by the dispenser firmware. The position for
the width of notes being dispensed is calculated by the firmware from the note width stored
in the dispenser bill configuration procedure. During a transaction, if the width of notes to
be dispensed varies, the gate is moved to the new position before the next size is
dispensed. The recommended method of forming the stack is from the smallest bills first,
getting progressively larger, so that the bill alignment mechanism moves out to
accommodate each larger size. The zero reference position of the bill alignment
mechanism is sensed by the stack sensor which is interrupted by a flag on the bill stop gate
when the mechanism has been driven fully forward. This is done at the start of every
dispense and the gate is driven from there to its calculated position.
When the stack of notes is completed, the gate is driven back slightly towards the rear of
the dispenser to clear the stack and the note clamp transport is then raised. If the stack has
been formed successfully, the notes will be driven forwards by the presenter transport belts
to be taken by the cardholder. If, however, a fault has been detected, the notes will be
driven to the purge bin. To achieve this, the presenter transport drives the stack forward
until its trailing edge just passes the stack sensor, then the bill alignment mechanism is
driven towards the rear of the dispenser. This action causes the bill stop gate to be lifted out
of the presenter belt transport by the action of passing over ramps attached to the side
frames of the presenter. The mechanism is sensed fully back and up by a second flag on
the bill stop gate interrupting the beam of the rear bill alignment sensor. The bill alignment
mechanism remains in this position during the purge cycle. The presenter transport is then
driven rearward to deliver the stack to the purge bin.
Bill Alignment Assembly ‐ Front Access
Bill Stop Gate Stack Sensor Bill Align Up Sensor
Bill Alignment Assembly ‐ Rear Access

Stack Sensor
Bill Align
Up Sensor
Bill Stop Gate
Note Clamp
The note clamp transport is a tray assembly that is raised and lowered by a semicircular
cam driven by a stepper motor via a gear train. The transport consists of a set of three belts
held between two shafts at either end of the metal tray. One of the shafts is driven by the
presenter transport stepper motor via a toothed belt and the other shaft is an idler. The
transport belts run on crown pulleys on the shafts.
Also fixed to the clamp tray is the plastic stack tray. When the note clamp transport is in the
down position this stack tray is higher than the transport belts so that the notes can stack on
its top surface. As the transport is lifted by the action of the cam the idler shaft lifts in
elongated holes in the stack tray so that the belts are lifted up above the surface of the stack
tray and lift the stack of notes from it. In this way, when the notes are driven by the
presenter transport they are not impeded by rubbing across the stack tray. Part of the stack
tray is shaped to project beyond the drive shaft to provide a support for notes when being
purged into the purge bin.
In its down position, the note clamp transport sits within a metal bracket, attached between
the presenter side frames, that has vertical plates to prevent notes from falling off the sides
of the note clamp transport. Fingers on the bill stop gate hang down through the slots in the
stack tray to prevent any notes from falling off the rear of the note clamp transport.
Note Clamp Sensors

The note clamp transport is sensed in its up and down position by two sensors that are
interrupted by a flag on the shaft attached to the clamp lifting cam. The stack of notes is
sensed by the same sensor that detects the forward position of the note, looking down
through a hole in the tray of the clamp transport to an LED attached to the metal bracket
that provides the vertical side plates.
Clamp Up and Down Sensors
Bill Alignment Stepper Motor ClampCam Clamp Stepper Motor
Presenter Transport
The presenter transport consists of an upper set of three belts bearing against a lower set
of three belts, both sets driven by a stepper motor via toothed belts at the left hand side of
the dispenser. The transport belts pass across crown pulleys on the drive and tension
shafts. The lower set of belts runs from the exit of the dispenser to just above the LVDT
transport and the upper set runs from the exit and extends over the note clamp transport.
Just after the note alignment mechanism backs away from the stack of notes, the note
clamp transport is raised by the rotation of the semicircular cam. The clamp is lifted so that
its belts press against the underside of the top set of presenter transport belts and the note
stack is held between both sets of belts. The stepper motor then drives the presenter
transport (and also through a gearwheel the belts on the note clamp transport) so that the
stack of notes is moved to the exit held between the upper and lower presenter transport
belts. The toggle shaft at the exit compensates for different thicknesses of stack and
permits the stack to be pulled from the dispenser by the cardholder.
Presenter ‐ Front Access
Presenter ‐ Rear Access
Presenter Timing Disk

An opto‐electronic sensor controls the time that the presenter stepper motor has to be
powered to drive the transport and stop it with the bills projecting from the exit slot. The
sensor beam is chopped by the segments on a timing disk attached to the presenter
transport drive shaft to produce interrupts equivalent to travel of the stack of 1.6 mm.
Timing Disk
Transport Sensors
The progress of the notes through the presenter transport is monitored by a number of
infra‐red sensors as shown in the illustrations below and also diagrams in the section “Path
of Notes”.
The illustration of the Front and Rear access dispensers show the sensors T3 and T3A
arranged across the width of the transport. These sensors and their respective LEDs are
wired in series to improve detection of certain currencies that have a transparent section as
part of the bill design.
Transport Sensors ‐ Front Access
Transport Sensor TS3A & B*
Transport Sensor TS4A & B*
Exit Sensor TS5A & B
Transport Sensors ‐ Rear Access
Transport Sensors TS3A & B
Exit Sensor TS5A & B*
Exit Sensor
The last sensor on the transport is the exit sensor T5 which sees the stack in the present
position and detects it being taken by the cardholder. There is an optional second exit
sensor (TS5B) for dual sensor systems (for polymer notes).
Purge Bin Location Components

The purge bin is held in the presenter so that it is accessible from the same position as the
currency cassettes. It is supported by guide rails and is locked in position by a latch. A
microswitch is operated by the inserted purge bin to inform the electronics system that the
bin is in place.
When a latchfast purge bin is installed, a keyplate enters holes in the top front of a latchfast
purge bin and pushes the truck door up into the top. The rear door of the latchfast purge bin
is secured by a sealable latch.
Keyplate Foam Rollers Purge Overfill Sensor Foam Rollers
LED
Bin Present Microswitch
Purge Transport
The purge transport consists upper and lower foam roller shafts driven via toothed gears
from the presenter transport and upper and lower plastic guides. The extended portion of
the note stack tray forms the lower note support guides and an upper set of plastic guides is
attached between the drive shaft of the upper presenter transport belts and the upper foam
roller shaft.
On a purge, either due to a mispick being detected or the stack of notes not being taken by
the cardholder, the direction of the stepper motor driving the presenter transport is
reversed, (the bill alignment mechanism having been previously driven to its rearmost and
up position), thus moving the stack into the note guides which direct the notes from the
belts in between upper and lower foam roll shafts. A friction clutch arrangement makes
sure that the foam roll shafts only drive when the presenter motor is reversed and the notes
are driven in the direction of the purge bin. The foam rollers complete the task of pushing
notes into the bin.
Purge Sensor
The movement of the currency notes into the purge bin is detected by a sensor and LED
that look across the path of the notes at the foam rollers. This sensor also detects a bin
overfill condition.
Main Motor and Vacuum Pump

The main motor drives the LVDT transport and all pick modules via toothed timing belts. It
also drives the vacuum pump to provide a vacuum to the pick line via 6 mm bore tubing. A
vacuum reservoir is located near the pump to improve the system vacuum, and an air filter
in the tubing above the first pick module protects the pump from damage caused by ingress
of grit particles. In both front and rear dispensers the power is supplied in 115V and 230V
options.
Rear Access
The dispenser the motor and pump assemblies for rear access dispensers is located in a
separate electronic box assembly that also houses the dispenser control board. This box is
attached below the exit transport nose of the dispenser.
Dispenser Motor
(In Electronics Box)
Dispenser Control
Board
Electronics Box
Front Access
The dispenser motor and vacuum pump assembly for front access dispensers is located at
the rear of the presenter next to the LVDT transport. The dispenser control board is
attached to the upper pick module.
Currency Dispenser Control Board
The following illustration shows the Currency Dispenser Control Board.
J11 J9
Intelligent Cassette Security LVDT
L
Diagnostic
LEDs
Diagnostic
Swtiches
J13
Stepper
Motors
SW2 J2
USB Connector
J21 J20
J18 TTL Shutter 2
+24V Fascia I C
Connector
Interlock
The Control Board controls the operation of the currency dispenser. It is a Coldfire
Processor based control board, responsible for collating all sensor information and
operating the individual pick modules, the presenter, the ac motor and stepper motors, bill
alignment and clamp motors and also communicating commands and responses to the
ATM core processor.
The Control Board is a mixed technology pcb employing both Surface Mount Technology
(SMT) and Plated Through Hole (PTH) components.
The functions of the Control Board can be summarised as follows:
1. To co‐ordinate operation of the currency dispenser transport hardware including all

motors, sensors, and actuators.
2. To process instructions from and provide responses to the ATM core electronics via
a USB interface.
3. To provide a power and logic interface to the associated single and double pick
modules.
Voltage and Current

The power requirement for the S1 (USB) Control board is:
l Direct current:
l +24 V ± 10% 0.35 A
l +24 V Interlock.
The S1 (USB) Control board supplies the following power:
l Direct current:
l +3.3 V ± 10% 0.5 A
l +5 V ± 10% 0.75 A
l +12 V ± 10% 0.5 A.
The S1 Control Board is fitted with a 32V Slow Blow 3 A surge protection fuse to protect
the 24V supply to the pick module control boards. In the event of the fuse failing new
Control Board has to be fitted and the Control Board Authentication procedure in this
chapter has to be carried out.
Compatibility
The USB Currency Dispenser Control Board is designed for operation in the NCR S1
Currency Dispenser.
Dispensers Security Switch

Switch SW3 on the Control Board is used in the authentication process as required and to
authorize running level 1 diagnostic tests: STACK, PRESENT, and DISPENSE. Refer to
Level 1 Diagnostic Tests.
Configuration Switches
Eight configuration switches provided for configuration use and Extended Level 0
Diagnostics.
Diagnostic LEDs
A bank of Eight LEDs are provided to display Operating System LED configurations. A
second bank of Four LEDs are show the Extended Level 0 Diagnostics information during
start‐up.
The illustration shown below shows the positions of Dispenser Security switch,
Configuration switch and the Diagnostic LEDs.
Operating
System
LEDs
Diagnostic
Swtiches
Dispenser
Security
Switch
Reset
Switch Level 0 Diagnostic
LEDs
Firmware Description
The Currency Dispenser Device Firmware provides device control, including full error
recovery procedures in the USB peripheral environment.
The firmware interface provides dispensing of up to four different currency denominations

with a single dispenser and up to eight denominations with dual dispensers. It accepts,
executes, and returns status information in response to device control commands from the
next level process.
The firmware operates under control of the VxWorks real time kernel by soliciting
commands from the USB Secondary software and sending solicited and unsolicited
responses to the USB secondary for transmission to the host system.
The Currency Dispenser firmware will operate as a dual implementation module and is
programmable. New versions of firmware is downloadable via the USB Loader Service.
The Currency Dispenser firmware can be configured for up to eight cassettes in the
operational environment. The purpose of this is to allow up to eight cassettes to be present
in a self‐service terminal.
The USB dispenser has some new T_CODE, M_STATUS, SOH modules or message
IDs. Some additional M_DATA values have been added to indicate faults within new
dispenser mechanisms.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Module State Table
Error M_ Possible root causes Isolation Resolution
Status
Note jam at pick sensor 5 Poor quality media. Check media Remove debris.
Poorly loaded cassettes. path for debris. Fill cassette.
Check cassette See also
Invalid pick sensor for poorly Troubleshooting
interrupt loaded bills. Procedures
section.
Cassette removed N/A Cassette 1/2/3/4 out Push cassette Insert cassette
fully home and
ensure latched
No magnets present Check magnets
present and in
correct order
Cassette empty 4 Cassette 1/2/3/4 empty Check cassette is Fill cassette
empty
Poor stack Check media Fill cassette
stack
Cassette parameters not 40 Media length and singularity values not Set media length Set parameters
configured set and singularity
values for each
cassette

Status
Too many rejects 2 Poor quality media Check purge bin Check cassette
for damaged or
folded media
Unable to learn Poorly loaded media in cassette Check cassette Check cassette
to ensure media
loaded neatly
Too many pick failures 3 Poor quality media Check purge bin Check cassette.
for damaged or See also
folded media Troubleshooting
Procedures
section.
Poor stack Check media Check cassette
loaded in
cassette
Purge bin removed 7 Purge bin removed Check purge bin Insert purge bin
present
Purge bin nearly full N/A Purge bin nearly full Clear software Check purge bin
count
Poor quality media Check purge bin Check cassette
for damaged or
folded media
loaded in
cassette
Purge bin full 8 Purge bin full Check purge bin Emptying purge
for damaged or bin
folded media
Poor quality media Check purge bin Check cassette
for damaged or
folded media
loaded in
cassette
Note jam in main 5 Media jam or debris Clear jam Check jam
transport at LVDT cleared.
See also
Troubleshooting
Procedures
section

Status
Note jam between the 5 Poor quality media causing jam Clear Jam Clear jam.
pick module and the See also
LVDT Troubleshooting
Procedures
section.
loaded in
cassette
Main transport timing disk 16 Timing sensor dirty Clean sensor Clean sensor
failed
Presenter timing wheel 29 Dirty sensor Clean sensor Clean sensor
failed Worn down gear Replace worn See
down gear Troubleshooting
Procedures
section
Note jam or transport 18 Media jam or debris Clear jam See
sensor failure Troubleshooting
Dirt on rollers or belts Clean Procedures
section
Interlock open 35 Interlock switch not made Check switch Make contact by
operation pushing
dispenser fully
home
Shutter jam open 13 Media jammed in shutter Check for Clear jammed
jammed media media
Shutter jam closed 14 Media jammed in shutter Check for Clear jammed
jammed media media
Pick module 41 A START/END EXCHANGE must be Disable MANIP in
deconfigured (when performed when manipulating the the service
performing a start cassettes to avoid a ‘deconfigured’ state, provider
exchange during resulting in the inability to learn bill registry.
manipulation of cassettes) parameters. Or
A START/END
exchange must
be incorporated
into the
application.
SNR transport open 64 SNR transport open Remove top Close transport
cassette check
SNR

Status
USB serial number too - Build up of dirt on SNR - Clean SNR
many invalid characters camera.
See Adjustments
section.
USB serial number too - Build up of dirt on SNR - Clean SNR
many invalid serial camera.
numbers See Adjustments
section.
Communications failure 64 Communications connection to SNR Check comms Re-connect
to SNR board disconnected connections to comms or repair
SNR board on cable
pick module
USB serial number reader 64 Control board failure - Replace pick
control board failure module
USB serial number reader 64 Fixed guide flex circuit not connected. Check flex circuit Re-connect flex
fixed guide camera Faulty camera or control board connection at circuit. Replace
failure (top CIS) fixed guide and pick module if
at control board. necessary.
USB serial number reader 64 oving guide flex circuit not connected. Check flex circuit Re-connect flex
moving guide camera Faulty camera or control board connection at circuit. Replace
failure (bottom CIS) moving guide pick module if
and at control necessary.
board.
Troubleshooting Procedures
Additional troubleshooting procedures for the following M_Status codes:
M_Status 3 ‐ Pick Failure

l Inspect cassette ‐ check how well the cassette is loaded (no bands/clips, cash is ATM‐
fit and neatly stacked) then remove the cash and check that the cassette is clean, that
the garage door is undamaged and that the cassette is set to the correct height/width
for the currency. Check that the cassette can be inserted fully into the dispenser and
that the latch is operational.
l Inspect pick module ‐ check the pick arm assembly, filter and suction cups for wear or
damage. Replace if necessary. Check for white dust or noisy operation indicating
worn gears. Check for black dust indicating worn belts.
l Check the pick line vacuum ‐ attach a vacuum gauge to the solenoid on the lowest
tube and perform a Clear diagnostic test. Check the vacuum reaches 800mBar (23.5
IN HG) and is held for 1 minute after the motor stops. If the test fails, then re‐check at
the air filter, if the test passes at the air filter, replace all vacuum tubes and T‐pieces. If
the test fails at the air filter replace the motor pump assembly (rear access) or the
presenter (front access).
l Check the ‘D wheel’ timing within each pick module ‐ the timing disk on the outside of
the pick module should be set to ‘D’ with the ‘D wheels’ inside the pick module set with
a 0.5mm gap before touching the drive roller. Use the D‐wheel setting gauge to re‐
time if needed. Refer to the Aria Pick Module chapter or the Preventive Maintenance
chapter for more detail on timings.
l Check pick‐to‐pick module timing ‐ the first pick unit on the upper pick module should
be set to 1 on the timing disk and the second pick unit should be set to 2. The first pick
unit on the lower pick module should be set to 3 and the second pick unit should be set
to 4. Refer to the Aria Pick Module chapter or the Preventive Maintenance chapter for
more detail on timings.
l Check the pick interface PCB ‐ make sure that the cassette id pick interface PCB is
fully located against the side frame and is secure. Check that the pick interface
connections are fully home.
M_Status 5 ‐ Sensor Failure/Currency Jam in Main Transport

l All the procedures for M_Status 3 (above) also apply to M_Status 5, and in addition:
l Check for bill skew ‐ inspect the cassettes to ensure that bills are not skewing when
exiting through the garage door. If the bills are skewing, check for poorly loaded cash
or incorrect cassette configuration. Run a single bill dispense test from each pick
module multiple times while observing for bill skew when entering the stacking area of
the presenter. If bills are skewed, inspect the belts and rollers in the pick module and
the presenter, clean or replace as necessary. If the bills continue to skew on exiting
the pick module, replace the pick module; if they skew after entering the presenter,
replace the presenter.
M_Status 12 ‐ Presenter Clamp/Alignment Mechanism Failure

or Jam
l Clean and inspect the presenter clamping mechanism (bill alignment mechanism).
Check for binding in the mechanism. Run a dispense diagnostic test first with one bill
then with 40 bills to verify proper operation. If the test fails, replace the presenter.
M_Status 13/14 ‐ Shutter Jammed Open/Closed

l Check for signs of damage to the shutter which could indicate fraudulent activity.
l Run the dispenser shutter diagnostic test with halt on error enabled and looping 50
times (facia should be in normal operational position). If the test fails, remove the
shutter to clean it and inspect it for binding when operated manually. Re‐fit the shutter
and re‐run the test. If the test continues to fail replace the shutter assembly.
M_Status 18 ‐ Currency Jam in Presenter Transport/Sensor

Failure
l Check for bills jammed in the presenter transport and for damaged or unfit bills in the
purge bin.
l Check belt alignment: mark the presenter belts with a straight line then run a belt drive
diagnostic test, observe if the belts are still in line after the test. If they are out of
alignment, clean the belts and rollers then re‐run the test. If they are still out of
alignment replace the presenter.
l Check for bill skew: run a single bill dispense test from each pick unit multiple times
while observing for bill skew or delay on entering the stacking area of the presenter. If
bills are skewed or damaged during the dispense, inspect the belts and rollers in the
pick module and the presenter, clean or replace as necessary.
l If the bills are skewed during the stack part of the dispense operation, check for
problems in the LVDT area such as damage to belts, flickers, deflectors or

badly located ESD brushes. Also check for skewed bills coming from the pick
module into the LDVT area ‐ use the troubleshooting procedures for M_Status
3 and 5.
l If the bills are skewed during the present part of the dispense operation, there
may be an issue with the stack table. Check the error log for M_Status 12
errors in the last 30 days, if there are none try fitting shims to the stacking table
or replace the presenter.
l If the bills are skewed after they have cleared the stack table, check the
transport belts for dirt.
M_Status 29 ‐ Timing Disk/Motor Failure

l Check the Hardware Device Error Logs for M_Status 29 events. These may be of
varying severity and frequency and will typically be found as M_Data 06 34 XX,
although other M_Data may also be found in association with this problem.
l Check for worn gears:
l Check for white powder around the area of the gears on the Presenter side
frame.
l Hold the gear in position and see if there is excessive movement or “play.”
l Replace worn gears. Before refitting a gear to a shaft, clean the shaft using a
clean cloth. Remove any existing gear wear white powder from around the
Presenter side frame. Some of the shafts will have a pin that drives the gear
(Item 1 in the illustration below). Ensure that the pin does not fall out. Start at
the topmost gear (Item 1) and progress down the gear train, replacing one gear
shaft at a time. Gear 4 (Item 4) must be removed first to replace the right hand
gear 3 (Item 3). Refit in reverse order.
DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostic tests on the dispenser when installed in an NCR ATM are described in the
following sections:
Level 0 Diagnostics
This chapter describes the Level 0 Diagnostic which are performed to verify the basic
elements of the control board fitted to the S1 Currency Dispenser module.
The tests are carried out after a power‐up or hard reset. The device specific function
sysGpioInit is called up by the start‐up code before any diagnostic tests are started.
Note: These tests are not performed after a soft reset.
Level 0 Tests and Result Codes

When the level 0 diagnostic tests are being performed the test ID is displayed on the bank
of 4 programmable LED’s. If a failure occurs the result will be displayed on the LED’s for
one second followed by the test ID again for one second after the test has been completed.
This action will continue until the board is reset. If no failure is detected the system performs
the next in the sequence until the entire start up sequence is complete at which time the
LED’s are cleared.
Once the Level 0 Diagnostics have been completed, any usage of the LED’s is now entirely
device specific.
Note: There are no switch selectable or run to run tests available.
Test 1 ‐ Flash sum check

This is a checksum test to verify the contents of the Flash ROM. The USB bootloader is
checked and the Device Realtime Software (if present). If the USB bootloader checksum
test fails an error code is displayed and the board fails to boot up. If the Device Realtime
Software sum check fails the application_loaded flag is cleared and a forced download of
new software is performed.
Test 1 Results
LED Code Status

0x0D Bootloader checksum fail
Test 2 ‐ SRAM test

This test is to ensure that the SRAM is available and the following steps are performed:
l The data bus is initially tested by performing a walking 1’s test at address 0.
l The wiring for the bus is tested by performing a walking 1’s test on the address bit to
check for aliasing. The test will diagnose a single‐bit address such as stuck‐high,
stuck‐low, as well as shorted pins.
l The physical memory integrity is tested by performing an increment/decrement test
over the entire region. Every storage bit in the device is tested as a zero and a one
during the process.
Test 2 Results
LED Code Status

0x08 Data bus error
0x09 Address bus error
0x0A Internal data error
Test 3 ‐ EEPROM test

This test is performed after the level 0 diagnostics have been completed. The test performs
a basic check on the EEPROM device (NVRAM#1). The test performs the following steps:
l The system attempts to read a known header in the top 4 bytes of the device. The
location of a header is defined as a pass for this test.
l If the system does not locate a header the test will the try to write and read back a
header. If this fails, the system indicates a faulty device.
Test 3 Results
LED Code Status

0x08 EEPROM write/read error
Level 1 Diagnostics
This section describes the level 1 diagnostics for the S1 currency dispenser, including the
tamper indicating variant which are accessed via the System Application menu.
The M_STATUS codes and M_DATA returned for currency handling modules are listed in
the NCR publication, B006‐6273‐A000 56xx/Personas Self‐Service Financial Terminals
Diagnostic Status Code Notebook and in the Status Code Translator ‐ an application for
PC or Blackberry ‐ available from www.infoprod.ncr.com
Tests on the Currency Dispenser Diagnostic menu are:
l Clear
l Set Notes
l Stack
l Present
l Dispense
l Main Motor
l Self Test
l Exit Shutter
l Sensor/Switch Status
l Presenter Bill Drive
l Learn Bill Parameters
l Presenter Clamp
l Pick Valve
l Run To Run
l Tamper Indication
l Get Serial Numbers
l Serial Number Read Sensors Status.
Looping is allowed on certain tests.
Clear
The Clear test drives any bills left in the transport into the purge bin.
Set Notes
The Set Notes test allows you to set the number of notes to be picked, from each cassette
type present. If the combined maximum number of notes is greater than 40 (50 bills for
special China version), the test fails and displays “Invalid number of notes”. You are then
prompted to “Set notes for cassette X”.
A default of five notes is picked from each cassette type if no number is entered.
Stack
The Stack test picks a number of bills, from each cassette type, and stacks them for
presentation.
A default of five bills is picked, from each cassette type, unless changed using the “Set
Notes” option.
Note: This test is not offered unless there has been a change of state of the dispenser
security switch after entry to diagnostics, and the “Cash Enable” option on the control menu
is set ON.
Present
The Present test moves previously stacked bills to the exit slot for removal.
security switch after entry to diagnostics.
Dispense
The Dispense test performs the Stack and Present tests in a single operation.
A default of five bills is picked, from each cassette type, unless changed using the “Set
Notes” option.
security switch after entry to diagnostics, and the “Cash Enable” option on the control menu
is set ON.
Main Motor
The Main Motor test tests the vertical transport drive motor.
Self Test
The Self Test test picks one bill from each pick module with a cassette installed, moves the
bills into the purge bin and then activates/exercises the exit shutter.
Exit Shutter
The Exit Shutter test checks the exit shutter sensors while the shutter is energized (open)
and again when it is de‐energized (shut).
Sensor/Switch Status
The Sensor/Switch Status test determines the state of all sensors and switches and
reports them as M_DATA. The sensor reading is taken with the LEDs on.
Presenter Bill Drive

The Presenter Bill Drive test activates the presenter bill drive at two speeds, fast and slow,
in both the forward and reverse directions.
Learn Bill Parameters

The Learn Bill Parameters test instructs the firmware to learn the bill parameters. The test
is only offered for configured cassettes. 5 bills are picked from a selected cassette,
inspected for width and singularity, and then deposited in the purge bin.
The bill width and singularity is returned as T_DATA.
Presenter Clamp
The Presenter Clamp test exercises and monitors the presenter clamp and the bill
alignment mechanism. Before the clamp test is performed the bill alignment mechanism
will be moved to the home position if required. The outcome of the test is returned as M_
DATA.
The clamp test initially checks the position of the presenter clamp. If it is not in the home
position, it is driven until it reaches home. When it is home it is driven to the present position
and then driven back to home. Failure in any of these operations is reported.
The bill alignment test initially checks the position of the bill alignment mechanism. If it is not
at home, the mechanism is driven until it reaches home. When it is in the home position it is
driven to the smallest bill position and then driven back to home. Failure in any of these
operations is reported.
Pick Valve
The Pick Valve test energizes the main motor and the pick valve of the pick module, inthe
selected position, for a period of 10 seconds.
Note: No feedback is provided for this test. You have to manually confirm the operation of
the valve.
Note: All currency cassettes must be removed from the dispenser for this test to run.
Run‐To‐Run
The Run‐To‐Run test automatically performs, in sequence, the following tests:
l Clear
l Sensor/Switch Status
l Presenter Clamp
l Self Test
l Exit Shutter
l Dispense (only if the security switch has been operated, refer to “Dispense Test”)
l Clear.
Tamper Indication
The Tamper Indication test displays the status of the dispenser tamper indicator as M_
DATA.
Get Serial Numbers

If Serial Number Read hardware is present in the pick module, then all serial number,
denominations and images will be displayed for the notes picked from the prior Dispense,
Stack or Self Test command.
Serial Number Read Sensors Status

If Serial Number Read hardware is present in the pick module, this test returns the status of
the Serial Number Read image and SNR transport sensors.
Actual To Virtual Cassette Mapping

Error codes returned by a Self Test or Dispense test are mapped to the virtual type (VT) of
the cassette. This section enables you to determine which cassette type has returned
which code.
The following algorithm is used:
l Map codes returned by physical cassette types 1 to 4, into the corresponding virtual
type.
l Map physical extended types 5 to 7 into the unused virtual type entries in ascending
order.
l Set any unused virtual type slots to their physical types.
The following examples explain how the error codes can be traced to the correct cassette
position in the dispenser.
Example 1
Step 1 Byte 0 1 2 3
VT 1 2 3 4
Physical 1 2
Position Type
1 5
2 1
3 2
4 1
Note: In this example two cassettes are

Type 1. To achieve a code for each
Type 1 run the test with one removed
in turn.
Step 2 Byte 0 1 2 3
VT 1 2 3 4
Physical 1 2 5
Position Type
1 5
2 1
3 2
4 1
Step 3 Byte 0 1 2 3
VT 1 2 3 4
Physical 1 2 5 4
Position Type
1 5
2 1
3 2
4 1
Example 2
Step 1 Byte 0 1 2 3
VT 1 2 3 4
Physical 3 4
Position Type
1 3
2 4
3 6
4 7
Step 2 Byte 0 1 2 3
VT 1 2 3 4
Physical 6 7 3 4
Position Type
1 3
2 4
3 6
4 7
Step 3 - No further mapping required. All fields by steps 1 and 2.
Level 3 Diagnostics
The level 3 diagnostics returned for the S1 currency dispenser are:
S_DATA
The S_DATA returned for the currency dispenser are:
S_DATA Meaning
00 GOOD (No error).
Tallies
The mnemonics for these tallies are accessed via the REPORT_TALLY_MNEMONICS
command and are not part of the TMS Interface Support Area NVRAM.
Tally Description
PKFAIL 1 Pick attempt failure. A dispense attempt reported a pick failure on virtual cassette number
1. This tally is not incremented if the cassette low media sensor is activated.
PKFAIL 2 As PKFAIL 1 for virtual cassette number 2.
Tally Description
SIZEERR1 Bill size errors. A dispense attempt was not successful because at least one undersize,
oversize or extra bill was detected from virtual cassette number 1.
SIZEERR2 As SIZEERR1 for virtual cassette number 2.
DOUBLE1 Double bill errors. A dispense attempt was not successful because at least one double bill
was detected from virtual cassette number 1.
DOUBLE2 As DOUBLE1 for virtual cassette number 2.
REJECT1 Bills picked from virtual cassette number 1 and purged due to bill verification errors. This
count does not include good bills picked and purged during dispense by position.
REJECT2 As REJECT1 for virtual cassette number 2.
PICKED 1 Bills picked and successfully stacked from virtual cassette number 1 or successfully
diverted during dispense by position.
PICKED 2 As PICKED 1 for virtual cassette number 2.
DISP OPS Dispense, dispense by position or clear main transport operations attempted.
TRANSEN Dispenser transport sensor fault or transport jam. A dispense or zero dispense attempt
was not successful because a fault was detected on one of the dispenser transport
sensors:
The fault may have occurred for a number of reasons:
l Sensor blocked initially (jam or sensor fault).
l Bill not seen under sensor at correct time (jam or sensor fault)
l Bill did not clear sensor at correct time (jam or sensor fault)
l Main motor timing disk failure (jam or sensor fault).
COMMINIT Reserved
COMMRET Reserved
COMMFAIL Reserved
RES 5070 Reserved for H-8010-5070-XX-08 currency dispenser.
Tally Description
EXITSHUT Exit shutter faults detected. The conditions causing this tally to be incremented are:
l Exit shutter sensors indicate that shutter failed to open during a present operation.
l Exit shutter sensors indicate that shutter is not closed on initiation of a dispense,
dispense by position, clear dispense, purge, or present operation.
l EXIT_SHUTTER_TEST or DIAG_SHUTTER_TEST failed.
PRES OPS Present operations attempted.
PRSTROPS Other presenter operations attempted, for example, clamp or purge.
PRSTRJAM Presenter mechanism was not in the correct position or jammed during a dispense,
dispense by position, clear dispense, purge or present operation.
PRES_ERR Reserved
EXITSENS Reserved
PRESDISK Presenter timing disk failed to operate correctly.
PRESJAM Presenter bill jam was detected:
l Presenter transport sensors failed to block/clear while tracking bills
l Sensors failed static on/off test
l Sensors blocked initially on present or at end of purge.
SER READ Number of serial number scan operations.
INVNOTES Number of invalid notes scanned.
SERCHARS Number of serial number read characters.
INVCHARS Number of invalid characters.
SNROPERR Number of serial number read (SNR) transport open errors.
The Tally record types listed are defined in the Module Management Subsystem FS with
the remaining Tallies being part of the TMS Interface Support Area NVRAM.
The tally mnemonics listed are not reported by the firmware in any response message, but
are included for maintainability purposes due to them being used in the source code when
operating with tally values.
STRAPPING
Currency Dispenser Control Board
D1
Diagnostic
LEDs
D8
SW1
Diagnostic
Swtiches Dispenser
Security
SW8 Switch
Level 0 Diagnostic
LEDs
The strapping associated with the Currency Dispenser Control board has the following
default position:
l First Dispenser command switch pack (SW1) - set switches 1 to 8 to OFF for normal
operation.
l Second Dispenser command switch pack (SW1) - set switch 1 to ON and switches 2
to 8 to OFF for normal operation.
l EPS2 functionality:
l Switch pack SW1, switch 4 down (ON) - EPS 2 Full Enable feature enabled.
This feature activates full EPS2 functionality, including ‘fatal on detection’ and
‘auto present’, following attack detection.
l Switch pack SW1, switch 5 down (ON) - EPS 2 Auto-Purge feature enabled.
This feature provides EPS 2 full functionality with the exception of ‘auto-
present’.
The Auto-Purge feature may be ordered in combination with EPS2 Full Enable
feature.
l Switch pack SW1, switch 6 down (ON) - EPS 2.2 enabled.
ADJUSTMENTS
Drive Belt Tension
Proceed as follows to adjust the tension of the drive belt from the main motor to the
intermediate pulley. Refer to the illustrations following the procedure for each type of
dispenser.
l Check for a deflection of 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) when a force of 1.0 N (0.21 lb.) is applied to
the mid span of the drive belt.
l If the tension is wrong, loosen the four motor mounting screws.
l Move the main motor to adjust the belt tension.
l Tighten the screws and check the tension again.
l Repeat the adjustment until the correct tension is achieved.
Drive Belt Arrangement ‐ Rear Access
1.0 N (0.21 lb)
Motor Mounting Screws

(4 places)
Drive Belt Arrangement ‐ Front Access
Motor Mounting
Screws
(4 Places)
1.0 N (0.21lb)
Currency Evaluation Qualification Procedure

Note: The S1 Currency Dispenser is calibrated in the same way as the other dispensers in
the 58XX and 56XX ranges of ATMs and singularity values previously calculated for these
are valid.
When the first dispenser is received in each country the local Field Engineering
organization must establish the singularity values for each type of currency to be
dispensed. These singularity values must then be entered to every ATM dispensing that
currency, upon initial installation or whenever the dispenser control board or the LVDT has
been changed or repaired.
The currency evaluation qualification procedure can only be performed on a calibrated

dispenser. Attempting the procedure on an uncalibrated or incorrectly calibrated dispenser
will give incorrect results.
Calibrating the Dispenser

Note: Dispensers are shipped pre‐calibrated by the manufacturing plant. Calibration is
required if the LVDT or control board are replaced or NVRAM is corrupted or a new
version of firmware is download.
The dispenser maintains an internal compensation factor in NVRAM on the dispenser

control board. This compensation factor allows for differences that exist between the
singularities calculated by different LVDT assemblies because of mechanical tolerances.
The dispenser adjusts the LVDT compensation factor automatically as bills of a known
singularity value are dispensed. While bills are dispensed the actual average of good single
bill singularities is measured over 255 bills. This average is compared to the singularity
figure typed in at installation time and the compensation factor is adjusted accordingly.
Initially the compensation factor is set to 80H (equivalent to 1.00) and this is changed
automatically by the dispenser and updated every 255 bills.
To achieve dispenser calibration at least 255 bills of a known singularity must be dispensed
after a power reset. This may be local currency or test media.
The following procedure describes how to calibrate a dispenser on a terminal running on

the XP platform using SYSTEM APPLICATION. For details of System Application, refer to
NCR Self Service Support, System Application User Guide (B006‐6167).
Level 1 diagnostic tests are required to dispense cash and for this reason you need to insert
the field engineer’s Service Key.
The procedure is as follows:
1. For each cassette type, adjust the cassette guides if necessary to accept the test
currency, and set the cassette magnets for the required cassette type. Refer to
currency cassette chapter in the dispense section of this manual for details.
2. Load the test currency into the cassette.
3. Insert the cassette into the dispenser.
4. Put the ATM into supervisor mode.
5. Select the SELF‐SERVICE CONFIGURATION option from the SUPERVISOR
menu.
6. Then select the SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION option.
7. Then choose the USB CASH HANDLER option. The system will then instruct the
CE to wait while the Dispenser Transport is cleared.
8. The system with display the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu.
9. Then choose the SET option.
10. The system will then display the NOTE CONFIGURATION set up menu as shown
below.
The menu is spread over two pages which is navigated using page up and page
down options.
11. To start changing the note configuration activate the Reset option.
12. Enter Note Size for Type 1. This is repeated for Types 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7.
13. Enter the Singularity for Type 1. This is repeated for Types 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7.
14. To accept all the changes made select OK.
15. The system will redisplay the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu shown below.
16. To finally confirm the changes activate the Toggle option to change the NO option to
YES.
17. Return to the SYSTEM APPLICATION main Menu and select the DEVICE
DIAGNOSTIC option.
18. Select the CASH HANDLER option from the DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC menu.
19. Operate the dispenser security switch.
20. Select SET NOTES option from the CASH HANDLER menu. The number of notes
to be picked is 40 (50 for special China version) from cassette type 1
21. Change the Loop Off option to Loop On.
22. Select the DISPENSE option and allow the loop count to reach at least 7 before
stopping the command.
The dispenser is now calibrated and you can evaluate the currency to be dispensed as
described in the next section.
Establishing Singularity and Size

In this procedure you have to cause the ATM to calculate the singularity and size of 40 (50
bills for special China version) dispensed bills five times for each currency you wish to
evaluate. Due to the nature of the currency the singularity calculated may vary for each
attempt. Add the five figures shown in the Parameters Option and take the average (divide
by five and round to the nearest whole number) and the answers are the singularity and
size values you enter to the ATM and to all ATMs using the same currency.
To achieve a good singularity figure the currency loaded for this procedure should
comprise of new bills. Load the currency so that the same side of each bill is facing the truck
door of the cassette. Put the bills into the cassette in 50 bill bunches, alternately right way
up and upside down (see the following illustration). This makes sure that variations in inking
are allowed for.
The singularity procedure is as follows:
1. Prepare cassettes to accept the denominations of currency you will normally be

dispensing from the ATMs. Refer to currency cassette chapter in the dispense
section of this manual for the method of adjusting cassettes to currency size.
2. Set the cassette magnets to indicate cassette types 1, 2, 3 and 4 as required. Refer
to currency cassette chapter in the dispense section of this manual for this setting.
3. Load at least 200 bills of each denomination of the currency into the cassettes and
insert the cassettes into the dispenser.
5. Select the SYSTEM APPLICATION option from the ATM opening menu.
6. Select the SELF‐SERVICE CONFIGURATION option.
7. Then choose the SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION option.
8. Then choose the CASH HANDLER option. The system will display the following
screen.
9. Then choose the LEARN option.
10. Select the SET NOTES option to change the number of bills to be dispensed during
the LEARN process.
11. The system will display the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu showing the cassette
types available (only those present in the ATM) as shown below.
12. Select Type 1 from the menu shown below and the system will display the menu
below which allows you to change the number of bill to be dispensed.
13. Return to NOTE CONFIGURATION menu and activate Type 1.
14. The system will perform a test and return the message shown below.
15. The system will return to the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu.

16. Make a note of the singularity and size figures on the screen against the cassette
and type selected or all cassette types if applicable. The figures are obtained
through the Parameters Option
17. Empty the purge bin as necessary.
18. Repeat steps 11 to 18 until you have five readings of singularity and size for each
cassette type loaded.
19. Add each set of five figures and divide the total by five to obtain an average
singularity and size for each cassette type.
20. Select the PARAMETER option from the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu
21. Modify as appropriate the parameters you require to change.
22. To accept all the changes made select OK and the changes will be accepted.
YES.
25. Return the system to the SYSTEM APPLICATION MAIN menu.
The procedure is now complete. From the UTILITIES menu you can now enter level 1
diagnostics and dispense notes to test the validity of the singularity values. A minimum of
one cassette full of used notes and one cassette full of new notes of each denomination
should be dispensed. New notes must be loaded with alternate packs right way up and
then upside down. Bowed notes must be loaded with the bow towards the note pusher.
A reject rate less than 1.5% must be achieved when dispensing an average of 2.5 bills per
transaction. If the reject rate is greater than this the singularity and size values should be
recalculated.
Calculation of Reject Rate

The reject rate is calculated using the following formula. The numbers for rejected bills and
total bills picked are taken from tallies.
Total Number of Rejected Bills

Reject Rate = × 100%
Total Bills Picked + Total Number of Rejected Bills
Error Messages
Errors occurring during bill configuration procedures result in the error messages
described below.
Dispenser Clear Transport Error

When the DISPENSER BILL CONFIG option is selected from the CONFIGURATION
menu a CLEAR command is sent to clear the transport of any bills. If the clear operation
fails then the following error screens shown below are displayed. Each screen is displayed
for five seconds before the next one is displayed. You return to the CASH HANDLER
menu via the SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION menu.
Change Parameter Errors

The currency parameters are checked for errors as they are entered. If an error is detected
then the error message shown below is displayed. The incorrect entry is highlighted and
you can re‐enter a correct value in the error position.
The message is shown for five seconds and then you are prompted to enter the new
parameter value again. Once all the parameter values have been changed and checked,
the main dispenser screen reappears with the new parameter values. If a mistake
becomes apparent at this point then the user can select CHANGE again.
The dispenser parameter error messages are as follows:
l ERROR ‐ VALID RANGE XX ‐ XXX ‐ Parameter value is outside the permissible

range. This applies to bill sizes and singularity values
l DUPLICATE VALUE IN SEQUENCE ‐ A duplicate value has been entered in the
presentation order
l ERROR ‐ INVALID SEQUENCE ‐ The user has input fewer than four values for the
presentation order.
Learn Parameter Errors

Cassette Errors During Learn - If an attempt to learn the parameters from a particular
cassette type fails then, providing the error is not fatal, the operation will be tried repeatedly
until successful, or a fatal error occurs. Should a fatal error occur then the error screen
shown below appears, and after five seconds, you are returned to the NOTE
CONFIGURATION menu.
Dispenser Error During Learn - The following screen appears if a fatal dispenser error
occurs while learning parameters from the dispenser. Any changes made up to this point
can not be written to the dispenser therefore you are returned to the CASH HANDLER
Dispenser Read/Write Errors - If, while communicating with the dispenser, an error
occurs which is not fatal, then the operation is tried repeatedly until it is successful or until a
fatal error occurs. When a fatal error is encountered then a DISPENSER COMMS
ERROR screen showing one of the following messages is displayed. The CONFIG MENU
activator on the screen returns you to the configuration menu.
Unable To Read Parameters ‐ A fatal error has occurred while reading data from the
dispenser. Unable to read the currently configured dispenser parameters so can not
continue with configuration.
Configuration Not Completed ‐ Fatal error while writing data to the dispenser. The
configuration data is written to the dispenser NVRAM using three separate dispenser calls.
One sets the new bill sizes, one sets the new singularity values and the third sets the new
presentation order. Because the data is split into three parts, if this type of error occurs then
the dispenser configuration is incomplete.
Cleaning Serial Number Read Transport Cameras

The upper and lower SNR transport cameras should be cleaned as part of regular
preventive maintenance, especially in dusty environments. Cleaning will also be required to
clear the states of health ‘USB serial number read too many invalid characters’ or ‘USB
serial number read too many invalid serial numbers’ which are triggered when the number
of invalid characters or invalid serial numbers read reaches the configured thresholds
(default 10% and 5% respectively).
Clean the cameras using compressed air or a soft thin brush or cotton bud. Ingrained grime
can be removed using a lint free cloth moistened with soapy water or an alcohol free wipe.
SNR camera
on fixed guide
SNR camera
on moving guide
SNR transport at rear of first pick
AUTHORIZATION AND AUTHENTICATION PROCEDURE

Parts Validation
Parts Validation is a security protection mechanism that prevents unauthorized users
replacing certain critical parts on NCR ATMs.
The following procedure may need to be carried out if the control board is replaced as an
FRU item or as part of a presenter swap.
1. Insert the USB Service Key. There may be a short delay while the key is
recognized.
2. Open the System Application menu.
3. Select the Device Status List.
4. Select the Cash Dispenser status reporting Authorization Required.
5. Select the part requiring authorization:
l Authorize control board
l Authorize device
6. The USB Cash Dispenser test is performed.

7. If the USB Cash Dispenser test is successful, the part is authorized and the Device
Status List is displayed.
8. If the test fails, the part is not authorized and a summary report is displayed.
Do the following:
1. Check the USB Service Key is correctly inserted.
2. Check the key has the appropriate authorization security level.
3. Repeat steps 2 to 6.
Authentication
Authentication is a security protection mechanism that prevents fraudulent activity. The
following procedure may need to be carried out if the control board is replaced as an FRU
item or as part of a presenter swap.
Dispense Protection Levels:
l USB - No action required. Authentication is automatic.

l Logical
l Physical
The following procedure must be carried out if the Dispense Protection Level of the ATM is
Logical or Physical.
1. Insert the USB Service Key (required for Logical Dispense Protection Level)
3. Select Self-Service Configuration.
5. Select USB Cash Dispenser.
6. Select Authenticate.
If the protection level is Logical, no further action is required.
If the protection level is Physical, complete one of the following actions within one
minute:
l Toggle the dispenser security switch.
l If not occupied, insert a cassette in the bottom configured position of the
dispenser.
l Remove the cassette from the bottom occupied position of the dispenser and re-
insert within 5 seconds.

7. The result of the authentication function is displayed.
8. Select OK to return to the USB Cash Dispenser menu.
9. If authentication was not successful, repeat steps 6 and 7.
Dispense Protection Configuration

The Dispense Protection Level is set by the ATM system, not by a single component -
changing the dispenser control board will not change the protection level. The highest level
set in the ATM system will always be retained.
Dispense Protection Levels from low to high:
l USB
l Logical
l Physical
At the request of the ATM owner, the dispense protection level can be changed by doing
the following:
1. Insert the USB Service Key.

5. Select USB Cash Dispenser.
6. Select Device Parameter Configuration.
7. Use the screen toggle button to select the required protection level.
8. Select OK.
9. Configure New Parameter
10. Select Yes using the toggle function.
11. Select OK.
12. If the level is being raised, complete one of the following actions within one minute:
l Toggle the dispenser security switch.
l Insert a cassette in the bottom configured position of the dispenser.
l Remove and insert the cassette from the bottom occupied position of the
dispenser.
13. If the level change was not successful, select OK and repeat steps 6 to 12.
If it was successful, proceed with the Currency Evaluation Qualification if required.

Removing the Electronics Box (Rear Access)
On the Rear Access Currency Dispenser the electronics box contains the main motor and
pump assembly, solid state relay, and motor run capacitor. It also provides a mounting
place for the dispenser control board. Its removal gives access to these components and
also to the LVDT assembly.
Dispenser Motor
Dispenser Control
Board
Electronics Box
1. Disconnect the cable at the bottom left‐hand side of the control board.
Screw
Harness
Control Board
Cover
Screw
Cable
2. Push out the cable ties holding the harness to the top and left‐hand side of the
control board cover.
3. Loosen the two screws on the left‐hand side of the control board cover.
4. Unscrew and remove the screw at the bottom right‐hand side of the control board
cover.
Dispenser
Harness
Cables
Screw
5. Remove the control board cover from the electronics box.

6. Push out the cable ties holding the dispenser harness on to the electronics box.
7. Disconnect the cables from the lower right‐hand side of the electronics box.
8. Disconnect the remaining cables from the control board. Check that each connector
is labelled with its control board connector number.
9. Unscrew and remove the two screws securing the green turning wheel in position.
10. Remove the green turning wheel from the presenter drive wheel and then ease off
the timing belt.
11. Remove the two plastic rivets securing the timing disk sensor in position by pushing
the rivet centre on the timing disk side of sensor. Move the sensor clear of the timing
disk.
Plastic Timing Disk

Rivets Sensor
12. Loosen the four main motor mounting screws and ease the timing belt off the rear of
the timing disk gear towards the presenter side frame.
Timing Belt
Screws
(4 off)
13. Lift the timing belt over the timing disk.
Screw
Earth
Strap
14. At the upper left‐hand side of the electronics box remove the screw attaching the
earth strap to the presenter.
15. Remove the air hose from the pump.
Air Hose
16. Remove the two top screws (1 each side) holding the electronics box to the
presenter.
17. Remove the two bottom screws (1 each side) holding the electronics box to the
Upper Pick Module.
18. Lift the electronics box to release its hooks from the presenter tie shaft, and lift it
clear of the dispenser.
Replacing the Electronics Box

Fitting the replacement electronics box is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Removing the Control Board

Before removing the control board to resolve a dispenser performance issue (when Stack
or Present command are not working for example), perform the following to make sure that
the board is in fact the root cause:
1. Check the connections to the board are all seated correctly.

2. Check that the connectors are undamaged.
3. Set switches 3 and 8 to ON, then perform a reset to re‐boot the system.
4. Re‐calibrate the dispenser in System Application (Self Service Configuration
menu), to set the note configuration and parameters.
5. Authorise and authenticate the control board.
6. Use Device Diagnostics to issue a Stack command with one note. Observe the
note’s movement: it should exit the stack table smoothly and should not hesitate at
the interface between the stack table and the presenter.
7. Use Device Diagnostics to issue a Present command with one note. Observe the
note’s movement as it moves to the exit.
8. Use Device Diagnostics to issue a Clear (retract) command with one note. Observe
the note’s movement as it moves to the purge bin.
9. Repeat the Stack, Present and Clear commands for a 40 note stack.
10. Repeat the sequence of commands for a one note stack and then a 40 note stack a
further two times each.
11. During the tests, there should be no present errors such as skewing or splaying; no
pick failures (M_Status 3); no purges except for the ones under the Clear command;
no sensor failures or jams in the main transport (M_Status 5) or presenter transport
(M_Status 18); or presenter clamp/alignment mechanism problems (M_Status 12).
12. If after this process, the original error is still evident, proceed with removing and
replacing the control board.
Dispenser Control Board ‐ Rear Access
Screw
Harness
Control Board
Cover
Screw
Cable
Remove the control board as follows:
1. Loosen the two screws on the left‐hand side of the control board cover.
2. Disconnect the cable at the bottom left‐hand side of the control board.
Dispenser
Harness
Cables
Screw
3. Unscrew and remove the screw on the bottom right‐hand side securing the control
board cover to the electronics box.
6. Disconnect the remaining cables from the control board. The strain relief fixing for
the USB cable must be released prior to removal.
7. Unscrew and remove the screws securing the heat sink to the left‐hand side of the
electronics box.
8. Unscrew and remove the four screws securing the control board to the electronics
box and then remove the control board.
Replacing the Control Board

Fitting the replacement Control Board is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Dispenser Control Board ‐ Front Access

On the Front Access Dispenser the control board is attached to its mounting plate by four
M4 Pozidrive screws into stand‐offs and a further two M3 screws through the heat sinks, as
shown in the illustration below.
The control board mounting plate is hung in slots in the presenter side frames and fastened
by a screw at each side in the positions indicated in the illustration below:
Slot
(Both Sides)
Screw
(Both Sides)
Removing the Main Motor

For the Rear Access Presenter procedure, see the section “Removing the Electronics
Box”.
Front Access
Proceed as follows to remove the main motor from the front access:
SSR
Assembly
Cable
Guard
Main Motor
Screws Timing
(4 Places) Disk
Timing Disk
Sensor
Handwheel
1. Remove the cable guard (3 screws) at the left‐hand side of the dispenser and let it
hang free.
2. Remove two connectors from the SSR assembly and then the 4 screws (two at
each side) and remove the assembly.
3. Remove the green handwheel (2 screws).
4. Remove the circlip and retaining washer and slip off the timing belt between the
handwheel and main motor shaft.
5. Remove the plastic rivets holding the timing disk sensor and move the sensor clear
of the timing disk.
6. Slacken the four screws holding the main motor to the side frame.
7. Ease the timing belt off the timing disk gear towards the presenter side frame.
8. Remove the timing disk from its shaft and lift the timing belt off the main motor pulley.
9. Remove four motor screws, slackened in step 6, and lift the motor out of the slot in
the side frame.
10. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the pump.
Removing the LVDT

Dispenser LVDT ‐ Rear Access
In the Rear Access dispenser the LVDT assembly is attached between the side frames of
the presenter by two screws at either side. To remove the LVDT proceed as follows:
Note: There is no field adjustment on this LVDT version.
1. Make sure you have access to both sides of the dispenser.

2. Remove the electronics box as described in the previous procedure.
3. Remove the four screws attaching the LVDT assembly to the presenter side frames
two at either end.
Screws
Screws
4. Slide the LVDT forward and out via the space vacated by the electronics box, taking
care not to trap any wires.
Dispenser LVDT ‐ Front Access

Remove the LVDT assembly from the Front Access dispenser as follows:
LVDT Shield Screws

(2 at each side)
LVDT Assembly Screws

(2 at each side)
LVDT Transport
Drive Shaft
1. Remove the main motor, refer to section “Removing the Main Motor”.
2. Remove the LVDT shield (2 screws in presenter side frames at both sides).
3. Remove the circlips inside and outside of the right‐hand side frame, on the drive
shaft of the LVDT upper belt transport.
4. Slide the shaft out of the presenter right‐hand side frame so that the tension is
removed from the transport belts.
5. Remove the screws from the LVDT assembly (2 screws in the presenter side
frames at both sides).
6. Ease the LVDT assembly out between the belts.
Replacing the LVDT

Fitting the replacement LVDT is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Electronic Verification of LVDT

The LVDT should be verified by following the Calibrating the Dispenser procedure section
of this chapter.
The only additional action required is to check that the LVDT calibration ratio returned in
the last byte of M_DATA is 80H ± 12.5%, that is between the following limits:
l Minimum: 50H
l Mean: 80H
l Maximum: B0H
Note: Values outside the range given above indicate that further investigation of the LVDT
may be necessary, but values less than 60H and greater than A0H should be investigated.
Pick Module Timing

The S1 dispenser does not require any timing relationship to be set between the action of
the pick modules and the presenter. The pick module to pick module relationship does,
however, still require to be set. The adjustment procedures are described in Aria pick
module chapter of the dispense section of this manual.
CABLING
Internal Cables
The diagrams in this section are the schematics of the internal cables of the Currency
Dispenser. Refer to the Aria pick module section of the Dispense Chapter of this manual
Aria pick module internal cables.
Dispenser Main Motor

DISP AC
Motor
J18 Jumper
P1 J1
Main Motor
1 LIVE 3 3 4 2 1
Filter*
2 NEUTRAL 1 1 3 1 1 SSR SSR 2 2
3 GROUND 2 2
Jumper 3
1 2
Frame
Motor Run
Ground 1
Capacitor
SSR J1
1 3 SSR
2 4 SSR
* The filter is present only on OEM dispenser models
Dispenser Interconnection Diagram
AC Interlock Main
SSR
Motor
External S1 Devices
Sensors: Exit, Transport Sensors 3, 3A, 4,

5, Purge Overfill, Stack.
UNI
DC J1 J8 LEDs: Exit, Transport LEDs 3, 3A, 4,
M1 5, Purge Overfill, Stack.
Clamp Motor
USB J2 J13 Align Motor
Interface
Present Motor
Timing Disks - Main, Present, Clamp Sensors,

J6
Dispenser Control Board
Up, Down, Align Home
J9 Note Thickness Sensor/LVDT

Pick Sensor
Double Pick LED
J4 J1 J5 Solenoid Valve
Pick
Interface Pick Arm Timing
Disk
To Lower Pick
J4
Module I/F (P1)
J18 +24V Interlock
J5 Clamp Mid Sensor and LED
External S1 Devices
Exterior Shutter Motor
J5
2
Interior Shutter Motor
J20 J3 Fascia Shutter I C J1
To Power Supply
J4
J21 TTL Shutter (For Non S1 Dispensers)
J11 Fluiditi ATM Security
J17 +24V Power Supply
Front Access Presenters Cabling (Sheet 1 of 4)

J8 P1
1 AC MOT ON (White) 1
SSR
2 +5V 2
3 TSEN1 (Green) G T1
5 TSEN1 + (White) W Sensor
4 T1LED + (Red) R
T1 LED
6 T1LED (Black) B
8 T2LED + (Red) R
T2 LED
10 T2LED (Black) B
13 W Sensor
LINK1 (Green) G T3A
TSEN3+ (White) W Sensor
12 T3LED + (Red) R
T3 LED
14 B
LINK2 (Black) R
T3A LED
T3LED (Black) B
16 TLED4 + (Red) R
T4 LED
18 TLED4 (Black) B
19 T5SEN (Green) G T5
21 T5SEN + (White) W Sensor
20 T5LED + (Red) R
T5 LED
22 T5LED (Black) B
23 GND C Purge Bin
24 PURGE INb NO Microswitch
Front Access Presenter Cabling (Sheet 2 of 4)
J13
7 PRES A+ 4
8 PRES C+ 3 Presenter
1 PRES B+ 2 Motor
2 PRES D+ 1
9 CLAMP A+ 1
10 CLAMP C+ 2 Clamp
3 CLAMP B+ 3 Motor
4 CLAMP D+ 4
11 ALIGN A+ 1
12 ALIGN C+ 2 Align
5 ALIGN B+ 3 Motor
6 ALIGN D+ 4
J20
1 GND 1
2 GND 2
Fascia
3 12C_SDA_BUF 3
Shutter
4 GND 4 PCB
4 12C_SCL_BUF 5
5 GND 6
External S1 Device

J6
1 Clamp Up LED (Red) R
Clamp
3 GND (Black) B
Up
5 +5V (White) W
Sensor
7 Clamp Up (Green) G
9 Clamp Down LED (Red) R
Clamp
11 GND (Black) B
Down
13 +5V (White) W
Sensor
15 Clamp Down (Green) G
2 Align LED (Red) R
Align
4 GND (Black) B
Home
6 +5V (White) W
8 Align Home (Green) G
10 Pres TDisk (Red) R
12 GND (Black) B Timing
Disk
14 +5V (White) W
16 Pres TDisk (Green) G
18 Main TD LED (Red) R
Main
20 GND (Black) B
Timing
22 +5V (White) W
Disk
24 Main TDisk (Green) G
19
17
23 Config1
21
J4 J1
1 CAS ID1b - 40
2 GND 39
3 CAS ID2b - 38
4 GND 37
5 CAS ID3b - 36
6 GND 35
7 CAS ID4b - 34
8 GND 33
9 CAS TEMPb - 32
10 GND 31
11 CASLOWb - 30
12 GND 29
13 N/C 28
14 LEDON_PICK 27
15 GND 26
16 GND 25
Pick Interface Board

17 S0 24
18 S1 23
19 DISABLEb 22
20 COILENb 21
21 PICK 20
22 PSEN1 19
23 PSEN2 18
24 PSEN3 17
25 PSEN4 16
26 PICKTXD 15
27 PICK RXD 14
28 GND 13
29 GND 12
30 +12V 11
31 +5V 10
32 +5V 9
33 GND 8
34 GND 7
35 GND 6
36 GND 5
37 +24V 4
38 +24V 3
39 +24V 2
40 +24V 1
Rear Access Presenter Cabling (Sheet 1 of 4)

J8 P1
1 AC MOT ON (White) 2
SSR
2 +5V (Black) 1
4 T1LED + (Red) R
T1 LED
6 T1LED (Black) B
8 T2LED + (Red) R
T2 LED
10 T2LED (Black) B
13 W Sensor
LINK1 (Green) G T3A
TSEN3+ (White) W Sensor
12 T3LED + (Red) R
T3 LED
14 B
LINK2 (Black) R
T3A LED
T3LED (Black) B
16 TLED4 + (Red) R
T4 LED
18 TLED4 (Black) B
19 T5SEN (Green) G T5
21 T5SEN + (White) W Sensor
20 T5LED + (Red) R
T5 LED
22 T5LED (Black) B
23 GND C Purge Bin
24 PURGE INb NO Microswitch
J13
7 PRES A+ 4
8 PRES C+ 3 Presenter
1 PRES B+ 2 Motor
2 PRES D+ 1
9 CLAMP A+ 1
10 CLAMP C+ 2 Clamp
3 CLAMP B+ 3 Motor
4 CLAMP D+ 4
11 ALIGN A+ 1
12 ALIGN C+ 2 Align
5 ALIGN B+ 3 Motor
6 ALIGN D+ 4
J5
CLAMP_MID_LED (RED) 3
GND (Black) 4
CLAMP_MID
+5V (White) 1
CLAMP_MID (Green) 2
J20
1 GND 1
2 GND 2
Fascia
3 12C_SDA_BUF 3
Shutter
4 GND 4 PCB
4 2
1 C_SCL_BUF 5
5 GND 6
External S1 Device

J6
1 Clamp Up LED (Red) R
Clamp
3 GND (Black) B
Up
5 +5V (White) W
Sensor
7 Clamp Up (Green) G
9 Clamp Down (Red) R
Clamp
11 GND (Black) B
Down
13 +5V (White) W
Sensor
15 Clamp Down (Green) G
2 Align LED (Red) R
Align
4 GND (Black) B
Home
6 +5V (White) W
8 Align Home (Green) G
10 Pres TDisk (Red) R
12 GND (Black) B Timing
Disk
14 +5V (White) W
16 Pres TDisk (Green) G
18 Main TD LED (Red) R
Main
20 GND (Black) B
Timing
22 +5V (White) W
Disk
24 Main TDisk (Green) G
19 Config 1a P87_J1 P87_P1
17 Config 1b
23 Config 2a MUD_J1 MUD_P1

21 Config 2b Link Open = P86
Link Closed = P87
J4 J1
1 CAS ID1b 40
2 GND 39
3 CAS ID2b 38
4 GND 37
5 CAS ID3b 36
6 GND 35
7 CAS ID4b 34
8 GND 33
9 CAS TEMPb 32
10 GND 31
11 CASLOWb 30
12 GND 29
13 N/C 28
14 LEDON_PICK 27
15 GND 26
16 GND 25

17 S0 24
18 S1 23
19 DISABLEb 22
20 COILENb 21
21 PICK 20
22 PSEN1 19
23 PSEN2 18
24 PSEN3 17
25 PSEN4 16
26 PICKTXD 15
27 PICK RXD 14
28 GND 13
29 GND 12
30 +12V 11
31 +5V 10
32 +5V 9
33 GND 8
34 GND 7
35 GND 6
36 GND 5
37 +24V 4
38 +24V 3
39 +24V 2
40 +24V 1
CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENTS
This section includes pinouts of the connectors on the Currency Dispenser Control Board.
USB Connector
The USB Interface connector (J2) provides the USB interface to the USB dispenser
control board. The connector is a standard right‐angled USB Type‐B connector with the
following pinout.
Pin Desc
1 BUS_PWR
2 USB_D-
3 USB_D+
4 NC
5 GND
Transport LEDS and Sensors

The connector (J8) carries the signals to the currency dispenser transport LEDs and
sensors 1 to 5, and also provides interfaces to the purge bin and ac motor. This connector
is a 24‐way right‐angle header with the following pinout:
Description Pin Pin Description

AC_MOTOR_ONb 1 2 +5 V
TSEN1 3 4 T1LED_POS
TSEN1_POS 5 6 T1LED
TSEN2 7 8 T2LED_POS
TSEN2_POS 9 10 T2_5LED
TSEN3 11 12 T3LED_POS1
TSEN3_POS 13 14 T3LED
TSEN4 15 16 T4LED_POS
TSEN4_POS 17 18 T4LED
TSEN5 19 20 T5LED_POS
TSEN5_POS 21 22 T2_5LED
GND 23 24 PURGE_INb
Pick Modules
The connector J4 provides the interface to the currency dispenser pick modules. It is a 40‐
way right‐angle latched header connector with the following pinout:

CAS_ID1b 1 2 GND
CAS_ID2b 3 4 GND
CAS_ID3b 5 6 GND
CAS_ID4b 7 8 GND
CAS_TEMPb 9 10 GND
CASLOWb 11 12 GND
N/C 13 14 LEDON_PICK
GND 15 16 GND
S0 17 18 S1
DISABLEb 19 20 COILENb
PICK 21 22 PSEN1
PSEN2 23 24 PSEN3
PSEN4 25 26 PICK_TXD
PICK_RXD 27 28 GND
GND 29 30 +12 V
+5 V 31 32 +5 V
GND 33 34 GND
GND 35 36 GND
+24 V 37 38 +24 V
+24 V 39 40 +24 V
Note Thickness Sensor/ LVDT

The connector (J9) provides the interface to the Note Thickness sensor (LVDT). This is a
10‐way right angled latch header connector with the following pinout:

+5 V 1 2 GND
STRAIN_REF 3 4 NTS1
NTS2 5 6 NULL_NTS
NULL_OK 7 8 N/C
LVDT_GAIN_SELb 9 10 N/C
Stepper Motors
The connector J13 provides the interface to the three stepper motors used in the currency
dispenser. This is a 12‐way right‐angled header with the following pinout:

PRES_A_POS 7 1 PRES_B_POS
RES_C_POS 8 2 PRES_D_POS
CLAMP_A_POS 9 3 CLAMP_B_POS
CLAMP_C_POS 10 4 CLAMP_D_POS
ALIGN_A_POS 11 5 ALIGN_B_POS
ALIGN_C_POS 12 6 ALIGN_D_POS
Intelligent Cassette Interface

The connector (J11) provides the interface from the USB dispenser control board to the
ICS module. This is a 10‐way right‐angle header with the following pinout:

+24 V 1 2 +24 V
GND 3 4 GND
+5 V 5 6 GND
ICS_TXD 7 8 ICS_RXD
GND 9 10 N/C
Clamp Middle Position Sensor

The connector (J5) provides the interface to the Clamp Tray Mid‐Position sensor. The
connector is a 4‐way right‐angle header with the following pinout:
Pin Description
1 CLAMP_MID_LED
2 GND
3 +5V_MID-SEN
4 CLAMP_MID
Motor Sensors
The connector (J6) provides the interface to the stepper motor sensors. The connector is a
24‐way right‐angle header with the following pinout:

CLAMP_UP_LED 1 2 ALIGN_LED
GND 3 4 GND
+5V_CLAMP_UP 5 6 +5V_ALIGN_HOME
CLAMP_UP 7 8 ALIGN_HOME
CLAMP_DOWN_LED 9 10 PRES_TD_LED
GND 11 12 GND
+5V_CLAMP_DOWN 13 14 +5V_PRES_TDISK
CLAMP_DOWN 15 16 PRES_TDISK
CONF1 17 18 MAIN_TD_LED
GND 19 20 GND
CONF2 21 22 +5V_MAIN_TDISK
GND 23 24 MAIN_TDISK
+24V Connector
The connector (J17) provides the +24v power supply to the onboard regulators which
generate +12v, +5V and +3.3V. The connector is a 2 way right angled header with the
following pinout:
Desc Pin
+24V 1
GND 2
+24V_Interlock Connector
The connector (J18) provides the +24v interlock power supply to the motor drive and
solenoid drive. The connector is a 3 way right angled header with the following pinout:
Desc Pin
+24V_INT 1
GND 2
+24V _INT 3
Fascia Shutter I 2C Connector

The connector (J20) provides the I2C interface to the fascia shutter. The connector is a 6
way right angled header with the following pinout:
Desc Pin
GND 1
GND 2
I2C_SDA_BUF 3
GND 4
I2C_SCL_BUF 5
GND 6
TTL Shutter Connector

The connector (J21) provides the interface to the TTL shutter. The connector is a 4 way
right angled header with the following pinout:
Pin Description
1 SHUT_OPEN
2 GND
3 SHUT_ONb
4 Shut_LOCK
TEST ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

l Vacuum gauge and adaptor.
l Test notes.
For the preventive maintenance schedule and details of the required tasks for the S1
dispenser, refer to the Preventive Maintenance section of this manual.
REVISION

ARIA PICK MODULE
INTRODUCTION
There are two types of Aria pick module; the single pick module holds one currency
cassette, and the double pick module holds two cassettes, one above the other. The term
Pick Unit is also used in this chapter to mean a cassette position, that is, there is one pick
unit provided by a single pick module and two pick units in a double pick module.
The Aria single pick module is shown in the illustration below.
The Aria double pick module is shown in the following two illustrations:
SPECIFICATIONS
Weight
The weights of the pick module and cassettes are:
l Single pick module = 6.3 kg (13.9 lb.)

l Double pick module = 9.7 kg (21.38 lb.)
l Currency cassette empty = 3.2 kg (7.05 lb.)
l Currency cassette full = 6.0 kg (13.2 lb.)
Voltage And Current

The Pick Interface Board circuits require the following voltages at the currents shown:
l +5 V 0.25 V at 0.2 A (maximum)

l +12 V 1.20 V at 0.1 A (maximum)
l +24 V 2.40 V at 0.5 A (maximum).
Function of the Pick Module

The functions performed by pick modules are to:
l provide support for currency cassettes

l identify the inserted cassettes
l open the front of the inserted cassettes
l lift (pick) bills one by one from the cassettes
l detect when currency is running lowv
l transport the bills to the pick module above or to the presenter.
The components of the pick modules and presenter to achieve the above functions are:
l cassette guides and latch

l cassette identity sensors
l pick module keyplate
l pick action:
l pick arms
l vacuum cups
l pick timing:
l timing disk
l pick solenoid
l pick sensor
l cassette low sensor
l belt transport
l main motor and vacuum pump
l pick interface boards
l serial number read.
Cassette Guides and Latch

The currency cassette rests on rails on the side frames of the pick module. Upper plastic
guides on the side frames and the spring loaded catch hold the cassette firmly in position.
Cassette Identity Sensors

A printed circuit board on the side of the pick module carries two sets of four encapsulated
reed switches. Each set of switches is in close proximity to an inserted currency cassette
and is influenced by the magnetic fields of small permanent magnets in a housing on the
side of the cassette.
The magnets can be moved within the housing or left out so that certain combinations of
reed switches SW1, SW2, SW3, SW4, are operated. This achieves a binary code which is
used to identify the cassette as type 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7. When the currency cassette is
inserted into a pick module in any position in the dispenser, it signals its identity via the reed
switches. The firmware identifies each cassette and so is able to select the proper one for
dispensing bills of a specific denomination.
Pick Module Keyplate

When the cassette is inserted into the dispenser the prongs of the pick module keyplate
enter the holes in its base. The cassette door is pushed into the cassette base, leaving the
front open to permit the currency to be picked and dispensed.
Pick Action
The stack is formed by the action of the bill alignment mechanism, so the S1 dispenser
does not require the accurate presenter/pick module timing relationship that the 56xx
stacker wheel type of presenter does, however, the Aria pick module timing should still be
set to ensure clean delivery of the bills from the cassette into the pick module transport.
Pick Timing
The pick shaft gets its oscillating motion from the gear segment attached to a crank which is
driven by a cam follower riding in a track in the cluster drive cam. The cluster drive is driven
from the transport through an idler gear. The pick arms move continuously between a
position where the pick vacuum cups are above the D wheels to where the vacuum cups
are pushing the currency back into the cassette.
Attached to the cluster drive cam is a plastic disk printed with timing marks. A cut out
section of the disk forms a timing arc which is detected by an optical switch and is used
(ANDed with a signal from the currency dispenser control board) to produce the electrical
pulses that energize and de-energize the pick solenoid valve. The solenoid valve is
energized following a transition through sensor clear to sensor blocked and it remains
energized while the segment on the disk is obscuring the optical sensor. This time
corresponds to the time when the pick arms are just reversing away from the currency in
the cassette until they are above the D wheels.
When the solenoid valve is de-energized it closes off the pump section of tubing. The tubing
to the pick arm vents to atmosphere via backflow through the de-energized solenoid. The
note drops off the suction cups and is gripped by the D wheels and pinch rolls.
The letter D and numbers 1, 2, 3, and 4 printed on the timing disk are used to set and check
the timing of individual pick modules and this adjustment is described in the “Adjustments”
section of this chapter.
Pick Sensor
The pick sensor consists of two assemblies hard wired to the pick harness. A photo-
transistor is on one assembly and an infra-red light emitting diode is on the other. The light
emitting diode is in the same assembly as the cassette low sensor (see next section). The
pick sensor and the LED are attached so that they “look” across the path of the notes
between the pick mechanism and the transport. When a note blocks the light path, it is
detected. The pick sensor output is converted into note width by monitoring the number of
interrupts while the sensor is blocked with the interrupts generated by the main transport
timing disk on the presenter. A difference of plus 3 or minus 5 timing wheel ticks in width
from the known width of the currency (stored in NVRAM) will cause the note to be rejected
to the purge bin and the pick to be attempted three more times.
Cassette Low Sensor
Keyplate
Reed Switch
and Pick LED
Assembly
The cassette low sensor consists of a reed switch attached to the pick module keyplate.
The assembly also houses the pick LED. The reed switch is held on a bracket which
projects into the open door of the cassette. It operates when a permanent magnet attached
to the cassette currency pusher mechanism approaches the front of the cassette as the
currency is dispensed. In the plastic cassette, the position of this magnet can be set in two
positions to actuate the switch when 75 50 or 200 50 notes are left in the cassette.
Belt Transport
In the pick module transport the D-Wheel shaft and the pinch wheel shaft are driven
through a gear train. The gear train of the top pick module meshes with the gear train of the
presenter. In the Aria double pick module, the gear train of the second pick position is
driven by a toothed belt from the top module.
Notes are driven from the D-Wheel/pinch wheel shafts into plastic note guides that deflect
them into the vertical transport. The vertical transport consists of three belts stretched
between an upper (driven) shaft and a lower idler shaft. These belts press the notes
against smooth plastic skid plates while driving them upwards into, either the transport of a
higher pick module or the presenter transport. The top shaft of the pick module vertical
transport is driven by a toothed belt from a pulley wheel fixed to the D-Wheel shaft.
Main Motor and Vacuum Pump

The dispenser main motor drives the LVDT transport and all pick modules via toothed
timing belts. It also drives the vacuum pump to provide a vacuum to the pick line via 6 mm
bore tubing. A vacuum reservoir is located near the pump to improve the system vacuum,
and an air filter in the tubing above the first pick module protects the pump from damage
caused by ingress of grit particles.
The motor control circuits are located on the dispenser control board.
Pick Interface Boards

The boards act as an interface between the actuators and sensors in the currency
dispenser pick module and the currency dispenser control board.
The interface boards use mixed technology, with both Surface Mount Technology (SMT)
and Plated Through Hole (PTH) components. A ribbon cable harness connects the boards
to cascaded pick interface boards in two, three, or four cassette dispensers. All the control
lines from the dispenser control board, and the sensor information returning to that board,
are routed via a parallel bus interface. Signals between cascaded pick interface boards are
boosted where necessary.
The following diagrams show a Single Pick Interface plus a Double Pick Interface board
and two Double Pick Interface Boards connected to the Currency Dispenser Control
Board.
Single Pick Interface Board

The following illustration shows the layout of the components on the front and rear of the
single pick interface board.
Double Pick Interface Board

The following illustration shows the layout of the components on the front and rear of the
double pick interface board.
Serial Number Read

The serial number read (SNR) transport is an optional anti-fraud feature in the double pick
module, primarily for the China market. A pair of scanners reads the denomination and
serial number of every note as it passes from the pick to the presenter, and also takes an
image.
Top SNR camera
Bottom SNR camera
There is an SNR control board mounted on the side of the pick module.
CN2 CN3 CN4

CN1 Input CIS Head CIS Head
(not used) (SNR open sensor) (Moving guide) (Fixed guide)
CN5 CN6
DC Power Input USB HS
(to dispenser board) (to USB hub)
Note: The scanners are calibrated by the manufacturer and matched to a specific control
board by serial numbers, so boards and scanners must not be swapped out individually.
The Field Replaceable Unit for the Serial Number Read function is the entire pick module.
ADJUSTMENTS
Pick Module Timing
S1 dispensers use a bill alignment mechanism to form the note stack and do not require
any timing relationship to be set between the action of the pick modules and the presenter.
The pick module to pick module relationship does, however, still require to be set. The
adjustment procedures in this section are described for single and double pick modules.
The aim of these procedures is to attach correctly timed pick modules below the presenter
with the timing disks of the pick units aligned to the timing marks 1, 2, 3, and 4, reading from
the topmost pick module to the bottom.
1 High Dispenser 2 High Dispenser 3 High Dispenser 4 High Dispenser

Presenter Presenter Presenter Presenter
P1 Timing Disk = 1 P2 Timing Disk = 1 P2 Timing Disk = 1 P2 Timing Disk = 1
Timing Disk = 2 Timing Disk = 2 Timing Disk = 2
P1 Timing Disk = 3 P2 Timing Disk = 3
Timing Disk = 4
P1 = Single Pick Module

P2 = Double Pick Module
Note: Where there is a mixture of Aria and 56XX type pick modules, then the Aria type
must always be the bottom pick module.
You must carry out the procedures in the order given:
l Separating the Pick Units of the Double Pick Module

l Pick Unit Internal Timing
l Double Pick Module Pick Unit Relationship
l Pick Module to Presenter Timing
l 1 High Dispenser
l 2 High Dispenser
l 3 High Dispenser
l 4 High Dispenser.
Separating the Pick Units of the Aria Double Pick Module

To adjust a double pick module you must first isolate the gear trains of the two pick units by
removing the timing belt shown in the following figure.
Retain the timing belt until required to reinstall it in the procedure “Joining the Pick Units of
the Double Pick Module”.
Pick Unit Internal Timing

The only relationship to be set in the pick unit is between the pick wheel and the cam driven
vacuum arm line.
Note: In a double pick unit make the adjustment on the upper pick unit first
The method of setting is as follows:
1. Position the teeth mesh between the drive segment and pick line so that the upper
tooth of the drive segment is above the upper tooth of the pick line.
2. Take off and retain the 26T idler gear directly below the pick line (left side of the
module looking from the currency cassette).
3. Rotate the gears of the pick module transport until the pick D wheel is free of its
mating tension wheel.
4. Rotate the drive cluster in a clockwise direction until the D timing mark on the timing
5. Rotate the gears of the pick module transport until the interrupted part of the pick D
wheels is away from the pick arms. Turn the gears until a gap of from 0.5 mm 0.5
mm (0.02 in. 0.02 in.) exists between the leading edges of the pick D wheels and the
tension wheels as shown in the first figure above.
6. Replace the idler gear removed in step 2. Be careful not to dislodge the setting.
7. Carry out steps 1 to 6 on the lower pick unit.
Double Pick Module Pick Unit Relationship

When the internal timing of both pick units of the double pick module has been set, the pick
units have to be locked in a fixed timing relationship. Proceed as follows:
1. Rotate the gear train of the upper pick unit to move the timing disk in a clockwise
timing sensor body.
CAUTION
Always rotate the gear train in its normal direction of
travel. The pick timing disks should turn clockwise. Do not
move the gear train backwards and forwards.
2. Rotate the gear train of the lower pick unit until the 2 timing mark on the drive cluster
timing disk lines up with the timing sensor body.
3. Place the timing belt (removed in the procedure “Separating the Pick Units of the
Double Pick Module”) around the pulley wheel of the lower pick position and put it on
as many teeth as possible of the pulley wheel of the upper pick position, taking care
not to dislodge the settings. Turn the upper gear train in the normal direction of travel
(see Caution above) to ride the timing belt fully on to the pulley wheel.
Presenter Timing
The S1 bill alignment dispenser does not require any timing relationship to be set between
the action of the pick modules and the presenter.
Pick Module to Presenter Timing

Once the pick modules have been prepared, as in the previous procedures, the pick
modules can be assembled with a presenter to produce the complete currency dispenser.
There are no timing adjustments to the presenter.
CAUTION
The dispenser is heavy. Get help to lift it.
1 High Dispenser
1. Rotate the gear train of the single pick module to move the timing disk in a clockwise
timing sensor body (see above illustration).
CAUTION
travel. The pick timing disk should turn clockwise. Do not
2. Attach the pick module to the presenter.
3. Check that the 1 timing mark is in line with the timing sensor body.
2 High Dispenser
1. Rotate the gear train of the double pick module to move the timing disks in a
clockwise direction until the 1 timing mark on the upper drive cluster timing disk lines
up with the timing sensor body.
CAUTION
2. Check that the 2 timing mark on the lower drive cluster timing disk lines up with the
timing sensor body.
3. Attach the double pick module to the presenter.
4. Check that all the timing marks are aligned. Timing marks 1 and 2 should be in line
with their respective timing sensor bodies.
3 High Dispenser
1. Rotate the gear train of the double pick module (observe the caution below) to move
the timing disks in a clockwise direction until the 1 timing mark on the upper drive
cluster timing disk lines up with the timing sensor body.
CAUTION
travel. The pick timing disk should turn clockwise. Do not
timing sensor body.
3. Attach the pick module to the presenter.
4. Rotate the gear train of the single pick module (observe the caution above) to move
the timing disks in a clockwise direction until the 3 timing mark on the cluster timing
5. Attach the single pick module to the bottom pick module of the double pick module.
6. Check that all the timing marks are aligned. Timing marks 1, 2, and 3 should be in
line with their respective timing sensor bodies and a presenter timing arrow should
be next to the timing stud.
4 High Dispenser
1. Rotate the gear train of the first double pick module to move the timing disks in a
clockwise direction until the 1 timing mark on the upper drive cluster timing disk lines
up with the timing sensor body.
CAUTION
timing sensor body.
3. Attach the double pick module to the presenter.
4. Rotate the gear train of the lower double pick module (observe the caution above) to
move the timing disks in a clockwise direction until the 3 timing mark on the upper
drive cluster timing disk lines up with the timing sensor body.
timing sensor body.
6. Attach the double pick module to the bottom of the first double pick module.
7. Check that all the timing marks are aligned. Timing marks 1, 2, 3, and 4 should be in
line with their respective timing sensor bodies.
Note: For dispenser assembly the procedure can be carried out by building from pick unit 4
upwards with the presenter added last.
Note: Re-configuration is required when downgrading from four to three or three to two
pick modules. The NVRAM must be cleared to de-configure the removed pick modules.
TEST TOOLS
None.
INTERNAL CABLES
The diagrams in this section are the schematics of the internal cables of the Aria single and
double pick modules.
Aria Single Pick Unit Harness (Sheet 1 of 2)

J2
1 Sen1 - (Green) G
Pick_Sen1
Single Pick Interface Board 2 Sen1 + (White) W
3 TEMP1 Loop (White)
6 LED GND (Black) B
Cassette
5 LED Pick1 + (Red) R
Low &
7 CasLow1 - (White) 1
LED_1
10 GND (White) 2
11 LED PickArm1 - (White) 3
Timing
12 LED PickArm1 + (Black) 2
Disk 1
13 PickArm1 (White) 1
15 VLV1 ON - (TP White) Valve_1-2
16 +24V (TP Black) Valve_1-1
Aria Single Pick Unit Harness (Sheet 2 of 2)

J4 J1
1 CAS ID1 - 40
2 GND 39
3 CAS ID2 - 38
4 GND 37
5 CAS ID3 - 36
6 GND 35
7 CAS ID4 - 34
8 GND 33
9 CAS TEMP - 32
10 GND 31
11 CASLOW - 30
12 GND 29
13 GULP - 28
14 LEDON_PICK 27
15 GND 26
16 25
Single Pick Interface Board
GND

17 S0 24
18 S1 23
19 DISABLE - 22
20 COILEN - 21
21 PICK 20
22 PSEN1 19
23 PSEN2 18
24 PSEN3 17
25 PSEN4 16
26 PICKTXD 15
27 PICK RXD 14
28 GND 13
29 GND 12
30 +12V 11
31 +5V 10
32 +5V 9
33 GND 8
34 GND 7
35 GND 6
36 GND 5
37 +24V 4
38 +24V 3
39 +24V 2
40 +24V 1
Aria Double Pick Unit Harness (Sheet 1 of 2)

J5
1 Sen1 - (Green) G
Pick_Sen1
2 Sen1 + (White) W
Cassette
Low &
3 Loop1 (White) GND (Black) B
LED_1
5 GND (White) GND (White) 2
Splice 1
9 LED PickArm1 - (Black) B
Timing
10 LED PickArm1 + (Red) R
Disk 1
11 PickArm1 (Green) G
14 +24V Valve_1-2
13 VLV1 ON- Valve_1-1
17 Sen2 - (Green) G
Pick_Sen2
18 Sen2 + (White) W
Cassette
Low &
19 Loop2 (White) GND (Black) B
LED_2
21 GND (White) GND (White) 2
Splice 2
25 LED PickArm2 - (Black) B
Timing
26 LED PickArm2 + (Red) R
Disk 2
27 PickArm2 (Green) G
30 +24V Valve_2-2
29 VLV2 ON- Valve_2-1
Aria Double Pick Unit Harness (Sheet 2 of 2)

J1 J2
1 CAS ID1 - 40
2 GND 39
3 CAS ID2 - 38
4 GND 37
5 CAS ID3 - 36
6 GND 35
7 CAS ID4 - 34
8 GND 33
9 CAS TEMP - 32
10 GND 31
11 CASLOW - 30
12 GND 29
13 GULP - 28
14 LEDON_PICK 27
15 GND 26
16 GND 25

17 S0 24
18 S1 23
19 DISABLE - 22
20 COILEN - 21
21 PICK 20
22 PSEN1 19
23 PSEN2 18
24 PSEN3 17
25 PSEN4 16
26 PICKTXD 15
27 PICK RXD 14
28 GND 13
29 GND 12
30 +12V 11
31 +5V 10
32 +5V 9
33 GND 8
34 GND 7
35 GND 6
36 GND 5
37 +24V 4
38 +24V 3
39 +24V 2
40 +24V 1
STRAPPING
Fuse FS1
Fuse FS1 is in the 24 V dc line to the pick solenoid on each Single Pick Interface board.
There is one fuse on the double pick interface board, protecting the line to both pick unit
solenoids. refer to the following diagrams for location of the fuse.
The fuse is a 125 V, 1.0 A pigtail fuse, part number 007-9830118.
This section shows the pinouts of the connectors on the Single and Double Pick Interface
boards and explains the function of the signals.
Connector J1
Connector J1 on the Pick Interface Board provides an interface to the Currency Dispenser
Control Board and also to cascaded Pick Interface boards. The interface consists of power
lines from the Currency Dispenser Control Board or cascaded Pick Interface Board,
control lines from the Currency Dispenser Control Board, and sensor information and
Cassette Data Bus signals to the Currency Dispenser Control Board. Provision is also
made for an Intelligent Cassette interface.
J1 is a dual 20-way connector with the following pinout:

CAS_ID1_OUT 1 2 Ground
TEMP_OUT 9 10 Ground
CASLOW_OUT 11 12 Ground
GULP- 13 14 LEDON
P0 15 16 P1
S0 17 18 S1
DISABLE- 19 20 COILEN
PICK 21 22 PSEN1
PSEN2 23 24 PSEN3
PSEN4 25 26 TXD
RXD 27 28 Ground
Ground 29 30 +12 V
+5 V 31 32 +5 V
Ground 33 34 Ground
Ground 35 36 Ground
+24 V 37 38 +24 V
+24 V 39 40 +24 V
The function of the signals on connector J1 are described in the following table:
Signal Name Function

Control lines from the Dispenser Control Board:
DISABLE- LO = disables the operation of the pick valve solenoid
P0, P1, S0, S1 Decoded on the pick interface board to select the appropriate pick unit to pick
from.
PICK HI = enables the pick valve solenoid driver
LEDON HI = enables all LEDs associated with the pick sensors.
CAS_IDX_OUT- LO = magnet is next to ID reed switch X in selected cassette.
CASLOW_OUT- LO = currency is low in selected cassette.
COILEN, TXD, RXD Reserved for use with intelligent cassette interface
PSENX Analogue signal from bill picked sensor on Pick Module X.
TEMP_OUT- Pick module temperature low (below 10 deg.C) - See Note.
Note: Aria pick modules do not have the low temperature sensing thermistor that is fitted to
56XX pick modules. The harness attached to connector J2 of the Single Pick Interface or
J5 of the Double Pick Interface, loops the TEMP1 signal to ground so that a logic 1 is
produced by the circuit, representing “temperature good”.
Connector J2 (Single Pick) and J5 (Double Pick)

Connector J2 (Single Pick I/F Board) or J5 (Double Pick I/F Board) provides the interface
to the sensors and actuators of the pick units.
Connector J2 has the following pinout:

SEN1- 1 2 SEN1+
TEMP1 3 4 N/C
LED_PICK1+ 5 6 Ground
CASLOW1- 7 8 N/C
GULP_FEED (Not Used) 9 10 Ground
GROUND_REF 11 12 PICKARM_1+
PICKARM_1 13 14 N/C
VLV1_ON- 15 16 +24V_FUSED
Connector J5 has the following pinout:

SEN1- 1 2 SEN1+
TEMP1 3 4 N/C
Ground 5 6 LED_PICK1+
CASLOW1- 7 8 N/C
Ground 9 10 LED_PICKARM1+
PICKARM_1 11 12 PICKARM_1+
GULP_FEED (Not Used) 15 16 Ground
SEN2- 17 18 SEN2+
TEMP2 19 20 N/C
Ground 21 22 LED_PICK2+
CASLOW2- 23 24 N/C
Ground 25 26 LED_PICKARM2+
PICKARM_2 27 28 PICKARM_2+
The function of the signals on connector J2/J5 are described in the following table:
Signal Name Function

Sensors and Actuators
PICKARM1+ Provides voltage to optotransmissive switch transistor and LED.
PICKARM_1 Connects optotransmissive switch emitter to comparator to detect when switch blocked
or clear and enable the pick valve solenoid logic.
LED_ Provides voltage to LED anode of the cassette low sensor. The LED return is connected to
PICK1+ ground at connector J2.
CASLOWX- Signals a cassette currency low state.
SEN1+, Connection to the pick sensor optical transistor.
SEN1-
VLV1 ON- Switches the pick solenoid valve.
GULP_ Not used - see text below.
FEED
TEMPX Connected to ground by harness - see text below.
Gulp Feed Detector

The Aria pick modules do not have a gulp feed detector. If Aria and 56XX pick modules are
mixed and a gulp feed occurs on the 56XX type, then the GULP_FEED signal is still
passed via the Aria modules to the Currency Dispenser Control Board where it will
immediately stop the dispenser main motor.
Low Temperature Thermistor

The Aria pick modules do not have a low temperature thermistor. The pick harness
provides a short to ground of signal TEMPX to pin 6 of connector J2 or to pins 5 and 21 of
connector J5 so that the TEMP_OUT- signal to the Control Board always indicates high
(above 10 deg. C) temperatures.
Connector J4 (Single Pick) And J2 (Double Pick)

J4 (Single Pick I/F Board) or J2 (Double Pick I/F Board) is a dual 20-way connector which
carries the bus input lines to a cascaded Single Pick Interface board or Double Pick
Interface board. It has the following pinout:

+24 V 1 2 +24 V
+24 V 3 4 +24 V
Ground 5 6 Ground

Ground 7 8 Ground
+5 V 9 10 +5 V
+12 V 11 12 Ground
Ground 13 14 RXD
TXD 15 16 N/C
SEN4_IN 17 18 SEN3_IN
SEN2_IN 19 20 PICK_OUT
COILEN 21 22 DISABLE_OUT-
S1_OUT 23 24 S0_OUT
P1_OUT 25 26 P0_OUT
LED_ON_OUT 27 28 GULP-
Ground 29 30 CASLOW_IN-
Ground 31 32 TEMP_IN-
Ground 33 34 CAS_ID4_IN-
Ground 35 36 CAS_ID3_IN-
+24 V 37 38 CAS_ID2_IN-
+24 V 39 40 CAS_ID1_IN-
Connector J3 (Single Pick) and J3/J4 (Double Pick)

Connector J3 on the Single and Double Pick Interface Boards is provided for the intelligent
cassette interface. It has the following pinout:

+24 V 1 2 +24 V
Ground 3 4 Ground
+5 V 5 6 Ground
TXD1_OUT 7 8 RXD1_IN
INT1_PRES- 9 10 COILEN1
The Double Pick Interface Board has an additional identical connector (J4) for the
intelligent cassette interface for Pick Unit 2. The signal names are TXD2_OUT, RXD2_IN,
INT2_PRES-, and COILEN2.
Control Signals
Control signals from the Dispenser Control board are output on connector J4/J2 via open
collector drivers to maintain signal levels. The table below lists the input signal alongside
the equivalent output to the cascaded board.
Signal from Control Board Signal to Cascaded Board

PICK PICK_OUT
LEDON LED_ON_OUT
S0 S0_OUT
S1 S1_OUT
DISABLE DISABLE_OUT
Sensor and Cassette Data Bus Signals

The signals from the transport sensors are buffered by unity gain operational amplifiers.
The cassette bus interface signals from the cascaded Pick Interface board are buffered on
entry to higher position Pick Interface boards. The table below lists the names of the
incoming signals against those sent to the Control board.
Signal from Cascaded Pick Interface Signal to Control Board

CAS_ID1_IN- CAS_ID1_OUT-
TEMP_IN- TEMP_OUT-
CASLOW_IN- CASLOW_OUT-
SEN2_IN PSEN2
SEN3_IN PSEN3
SEN4_IN PSEN4
The signals GULP-, RXD, TXD, and COILEN- are directly connected between the bus
output and the bus input connectors (J1 and J4/J2).
REVISION

CURRENCY CASSETTES
INTRODUCTION
NCR Currency Cassettes are portable containers, moulded in high impact polycarbonate,
that are designed to store and release currency under the control of the parent currency
dispenser sub‐system.
DESCRIPTION
The following versions of the currency cassette are available for use in ATMs:
l Wide currency cassette:

l standard security variant
l tamper indicating variant
l Fluiditi Replenishment Security variant
l Fluiditi ATM Security variant.
l 1000 Rupee wide cassette

l standard security variant
l tamper indicating variant
All variants of the cassettes can be mechanically adjusted to hold currency of different
lengths and widths and electro‐mechanically adjusted to provide a currency denomination
code.
The mechanical adjustments allow the cassette to be set to accept a world wide range of
currencies. The dimensions of the currency which can be used in the cassette vary
depending on whether the cassette is to be used in a 50xx, 56xx or Personas terminal.
Wide currency cassettes accept currency of the following dimensions:
l Minimum width and length 62 mm × 120 mm (2.44 in. × 4.72 in.)

l Maximum width and length 95 mm × 172 mm (3.74 in. × 6.77 in.)
1000 Rupee Wide Currency Cassette variant:
l Minimum width and length 62 mm × 120 mm (2.44 in. × 4.72 in.)

l Maximum width and length 95 mm × 177 mm (3.74 in. × 6.97 in.)
The electro‐mechanical adjustments enable a cassette to be given a cassette identification

code. Up to seven codes are possible, with each code allowing a different currency
denomination to be loaded into a cassette. See “Cassette Identification Code” in this
chapter.
Cassette Variances
Fluiditi currency cassettes use the small magnet housing but the side of the cassette is
marked to accept the longer housing, indicating that the cassette is the wide type.
Wide Currency
Cassette
1
3 2
5 4
7 6
A
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
NC
R G
Location Moulding For

Long Magnet Housing
Fluiditi
Currency Cassette
1
3 2
5 4
7 6
A
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Location Moulding For
Long magnet Housing
1000 Rupee Wide Cassettes Distinguishing Features

The distinguishing features that enable you to tell wide cassettes from 1000 Rupee wide
cassettes are listed below:
No. 1000 Rupee Wide Cassette Wide Cassette

1 Warning Label N/A
2 Label N/A
3 Door shutter rib is cut off Standard shutter
4 Lid bracket N/A
5 Shutter guide (Colour-Gray) Standard shutter guide (Colour-Brown)
6 The head of clip magnet holder is Standard clip magnet holder
cut off
7 Note runner (Colour-Gray) N/A
Refer to the following illustrations:
Standard Security Currency Cassettes
5
7 6
1
2 F
G
3
A Seal Can Be 4
Attached To The 5
Hasp Of The Latch
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
The standard security cassettes are containers which offer the capability to seal the access
lid. When the cassette is inserted into the dispenser, a mechanism opens a door in the
cassette to allow the currency to be picked from the cassette and fed through the currency
dispenser sub‐system.
When the cassette is removed from the dispenser the door is automatically closed and
latched. To gain access to the cassettes interior, the optional seal is broken and the access
lid opened and removed.
Tamper Indicating Currency Cassettes
1
3 2
5 4
7 6
A
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
NC
R
G
Insertion Counter
Window
The tamper indicating currency cassettes differ from the standard security cassettes in that
they provide evidence of unauthorized attempts to open the container or that the cassette
has been removed from the ATM and re‐inserted.
The cassette contains a mechanism and a coloured indicator in addition to the provision for
sealing the access lid.
When the cassette is being prepared for insertion into the ATM, the mechanism is primed,
with the indicator showing that it is primed (colour green), the currency is loaded into the
cassette and then the access lid is closed and the seal fitted.
When the container is inserted into the ATM, then subsequently removed, a door is opened
and closed in the same way as for the standard cassette, however the mechanism causes
the coloured indicator to advance to show that the cassette has been inserted (colour
white).
Should it be necessary to remove the cassette between replenishment operations, for

example to clear a jam, this can be done up to six times before the container needs to be
reset (primed) again. The indicator shows the insertions as 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6.
When the container is returned for replenishment it should be inspected according to local
practice and the indicator checked that a single insertion/removal has occurred. If the
indicator shows that more than one insertion/removal has occurred the circumstances
must be investigated and verified. The access seal can then be broken to gain access for
emptying and refilling.
Fluiditi Currency Cassettes
Fluiditi
Currency Cassette
1
3 2
5 4
7 6
A
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Ink Injection Block
There are two types of Fluiditi currency cassettes: the Fluiditi ATM Security cassette and
the Fluiditi Replenishment Security cassette. Both are designed to fit into a security system
that injects a marking ink onto the currency within the cassette if the ATM is attacked. The
currency is permanently stained and therefore no longer of any use. Because of this, it is
very important that the correct procedures be observed when handling this type of
cassette.
The Fluiditi ATM Security cassette looks exactly the same as a wide cassette, except for a
small black plastic block on the right hand side. This block allows the ink to be fed into the
cassette from the ink injection tank mounted on the side of the dispenser module.
Inside the cassette lid is a spray bar with a series of small holes, through which the ink is
sprayed onto the currency.
Spray Bar
(Fluiditi Only)
The Fluiditi ATM Replenishment cassette is the same as the ATM Security cassette except
that is doesn’t have a green carry handle. Instead, it has holes on the front of the cassette to
accept the pins on the Carrisafe hood that is used to remove and carry the cassette.
1
3 2
5 4
7 6
A
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
NC
R G
Once a cassette has had the security marking ink released into it, the cassette can no
longer be used and should be disposed of in accordance with the appropriate instructions
provided in Chapters “Fluiditi ATM Security” and “Fluiditi Replenishment Security”.
NCR recommends that only the service engineer should handle activated cassettes or
clean spillages inside the ATM. Care must be taken when handling activated cassettes, as
the ink is corrosive and stains permanently.
Cassette Components
The following illustrations show the open cassette (wide and standard types) looking from
the rear (handle) end towards the front (truck door) end.
Cassettes are moulded in high impact polycarbonate in three major parts: the body, the lid,
and the base.
Wide Plastic Cassette - Components

The illustration below shows the components of the tamper indicating wide plastic cassette.
Cassette Lid
Currency Width
Note Guide Lid Spacers
Spray Bar
(Fluiditi Variants)
Note Low
Spring Finger Block
Currency Length Spacers

Note Guide
Cassette
Body
1
2 Door
3
4
Shutter
5
6 Pusher
7 A
B
C
D Pusher
E
F
Pawl
NC NC
R GR
Ink Injection Block
(Fluiditi Variants)
Cassette Base
Spring Plunger Cassette ID Code
Magnet Housing
Insertion Counter Window (TI)
Tamper Indicators
All cassettes have the following features to indicate tampering:
l Door shutters have a notched section that breaks off when stressed
l Plastic roller door has a deformable strip.
The Cassette Body

The cassette body holds the currency. It contains a spring‐loaded pusher mechanism that
moves along a slot in the bottom of the body, to push the currency stack to the front of the
cassette into the pick position. The currency stack is held between the left and righthand
note guides. These adjust to suit currency of different lengths. The front ends of the note
guides have spring fingers that help to separate the notes as they are picked from the
stack.
Incorporated in the pusher is a note low block magnet to operate a reed switch in the pick
module. This magnet can be set in either of two positions. A housing on one side of the
cassette body contains up to four magnets which again operate reed switches on the pick
module to signal the cassette identification code.
Also in the body compartment are the left and right spring‐loaded door shutters, the
currency separator brushes and fingers, and the anti‐reset plunger. On the outside of the
body are the lid latch and cassette carrying handle, the projecting lug which is used to latch
the cassette into the pick module, and the embossed cassette identification code label.
The Cassette Lid

The lid hooks into locating slots at the front of the body and is latched at the rear. It holds
note guides and spacers which adjust to suit currency width. A spring plunger in the body
compartment of tamper indicating cassettes (refer to the illustration of the wide plastic
cassette) is pushed down by the lid into the insertion counter mechanism (see the section
“Insertion Counter”). An internal baffle at the latch end of the lid gives additional protection
against an attempt to prise up the lid and fish for currency.
The lid is shaped so that it will not close properly if the pusher is not released or the cassette
is overfilled.
The Cassette Base

The illustration below shows the components inside the tamper indicating cassette base.
Door Link Lockout Lever Index Pawl Link Index Pawl
Reset Lever
Rubber Bumper
Truck Door Rachet Slide Rachet Lever Door Lockout Lever
The base of the cassette holds the truck door and its retraction mechanism, the pusher
ratchet slide and lever, and the insertion counter and window (TI cassettes). The shape of
the base forms rails which slide into the cassette guides in the pick module.
Cassette Operation
Keyplate
Cassette
Retaining
Catch
Currency Low
Reed Switch
Cassette
Stop
Cassette
Present and
ID Reed Switches
The above illustration shows the components of the dispenser pick module which mate
with the cassette. When the cassette is inserted into the dispenser the prongs of the pick
module keyplate enter the holes in the base of the cassette and push against locking pawls
on the truck door. The door is pushed into the cassette base, leaving the front open to
permit the currency to be picked from the cassette and dispensed.
Several other actions happen as the truck door is opened:
l The door shutters are disengaged from the door and are pushed back by the pick line
l The fingers next to the currency separator brushes drop down clear of the currency
stack. The function of these fingers is to prevent notes at the front of the stack being
dragged down by the opening door
l The ratchet slide attached to the door lowers the ratchet lever so that it disengages
from the pusher pawl
l On TI cassettes the insertion counter is advanced one place (see the section
“Insertion Counter”).
As the currency is dispensed the pusher moves forward under spring pressure to keep the
stack of currency in position. The pick line has an eccentric motion which tends to push the
currency stack back into the cassette against the action of the pusher. It is to permit this to
and fro motion that the ratchet lever disengages from the pusher when the cassette is in the
dispenser. When the pusher moves close to the front of the cassette the magnet in its base
comes alongside metal plates under the floor of the currency compartment. These plates
strengthen the magnetic field and transfer it to operate a reed switch on the pick module
keyplate. This switch signals that the currency in the cassette is running low.
Removal of the cassette from the dispenser automatically closes and latches the front door
and the interior of the cassette can only be reached by opening the top access lid. The
ratchet is raised by the action of the door closing and is again in a position where it will
engage with the pusher pawl. In this way the pusher is locked close to the currency stack so
that the currency is held in place while the cassette is being carried.
When the pusher is in its locked position the cassette lid can not be closed.
Pusher Operation
To load currency into the cassette the pusher is manually moved fully to the rear and locked
until the currency is put in. It is then released against the back of the currency stack to keep
it under pressure. Failure to release the pusher from its locked position will prevent the
cassette lid from closing. You move the pusher by lifting the pusher pawl arms, sliding it to
the rear, and then holding it in that position while lowering the arms so that the pusher pawl
engages with the ratchet. There is one locking detent on the extreme rear end of the
ratchet.
CAUTION
Lift the pusher pawl arms - do not squeeze.
LIFT - DO NOT SQUEEZE
Pusher
Insertion Counter
Door Link Cam Lockout Spring Index Pawl Link Index Pawl
Pawl Spring
Door Lockout Lever Reset Lever
When the tamper indicating cassette is being prepared for insertion into the ATM, the
mechanism is primed by pressing the reset lever to the side and releasing it until the
indicator shows green. The currency is loaded into the cassette and then the access lid is
closed and the seal fitted.
When the container is inserted into the dispenser, then subsequently removed, the front
truck door is opened and closed in the same way as the standard cassette. The door also
pushes a link which turns a cam linked to the index pawl engaged with the counter wheel.
Each time the door is opened the wheel is advanced by the index pawl one fourteenth of a
revolution. The wheel is marked on the edge and top with two sets of indications which
show through two windows, one at the back of the cassette and one in the bottom of the
currency compartment. The indications count the insertions as Green (cassette primed),
White (first insertion), 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
On the sixth insertion a spring‐loaded follower, pressing against the edge of the counter
wheel, moves into a detent in the wheel and locks it. This movement permits the
springloaded door lockout lever to move in front of the door link when the cassette is pulled
out of the pick module preventing the cassette from being used in the dispenser again until
the insertion counter is reset. The anti reset plunger stops any movement of the reset lever
while the cassette lid is closed. When the lid is opened the plunger spring lifts it clear of the
lever mechanism and the counter wheel can be reset.
Further security is provided by the lockout lever which is driven out through the side of the
cassette base by the action of the door link when the door is opening. This lever engages
with a stop on the side frame of the pick module and prevents the cassette being pulled out
of the pick module with the truck door open.
Cassette Identification Code

Each currency cassette shipped with an ATM is set with a code that can be read by the
ATM software so that the cassette can be identified regardless of its position in the
dispenser. The software matches the cassette code to a specific denomination of currency.
Cassettes with the same code will be loaded with notes of the same value. Normally four
cassette codes are recognized but up to seven codes are possible where extended
cassette IDs have been selected in software (see the section “Setting the Cassette
Identification Code”). Cassettes should be marked to show which code is set.
The identification code of a cassette is set by up to four magnets contained in a plastic

housing attached to the cassette side by a clip as shown in the illustration below of the
Standard Width and Fluiditi currency cassette.
The Wide Currency Cassette has space in the plastic housing for six magnets (positions A,
B, 1, 2, 3 and 4) as shown below, but only four (positions 1, 2, 3 and 4) are currently used.
Clips
The four magnets interact with four reed switches located on a printed circuit board
attached to the frame of the dispenser pick module associated with the cassette location in
the dispenser subsystem. Depending on whether a magnet is installed, or not, and the
orientation of the magnet in positions 1, 2, 3 and 4, all four of the reed switches provide a
code representing the cassette identification number.
When the currency cassette is inserted into a pick module in any position in the dispenser, it
signals its identity via the reed switches. The firmware identifies each cassette and so is
able to select the proper one for dispensing bills of a specific denomination.
Cassette Body to Lid Identification

The cassettes provided with an NCR four position dispenser could each be set to a
different code, say Code 1, Code 2, Code 3 and Code 4, to dispense four different
denominations or these could be changed so that, for example, the dispenser will dispense
two different denomination notes from the four cassettes, that is with two cassettes set to
Code 1 and two to Code 2. Because, also, the cassette has to be adjusted internally to
accept a specific denomination of currency, lids and bodies of cassettes should be marked
so that they can be kept together.
The currency cassette can be identified by writing the currency denomination on the inside
or outside of both the body and lid, using an indelible ink pen.
The H‐8015‐STD1‐01/02‐08 Standard Plastic Cassette (shown below) has embossed

numbers 1 to 5 on the body that can be used to identify cassette codes.
The letters H and L marked against positions 1 and 2 do not apply to ATMs. The wide
plastic cassette has embossing on the body and lid as shown in the following figure
and identification may be made as follows:
l A: Colour coded stick‐on labels 10 mm × 15 mm (0.4 in. × 0.6 in.) approx.

l B: Numerics for denoting cassette identification type
l C: Recessed areas for either marking with indelible ink pens or for attaching adhesive
labels to denote currency denomination, etc. at the discretion of the financial institution
l D: Alphas for denoting additional cassette identification types or, for same use as B
B 3 2
1
5 4
7 6
A
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Power Requirements
None.
TROUBLESHOOTING
No information available.
DIAGNOSTICS
None.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
Currency Length Adjustment
The currency length adjustment, which is, in effect, across the width of the cassette, is
made by repositioning two note guides and four spacers located in the base of the cassette.
Adjustment is provided to allow the cassette to accommodate currency of lengths from 120
mm (4.72 in.) to 177 mm (6.97 in.).
There are two types of spacers available for currency length adjustment; segment and
fixed size.
Segment Type Note Adjustment Spacers

The note guides in the body of the cassette bear against spacer blocks known as E
spacers. These blocks have to be cut to certain lengths so that the note guides are
supported the correct distance apart corresponding to the length of the currency being
dispensed.
A sharp knife and a medium size cross‐head screwdriver are required to make these
adjustments.
Fixed Size Note Adjustment Spacers

There are four fixed size spacers, also known as E spacers, which provide the same
function as the Segment Type spacers described above. The fixed size spacers must be
changed to suit the currency being dispensed, they can not be cut to size.
X
Spacer
Code
Note Low Sensing - In addition to the currency length and width adjustments, provision is
also made to change the note low sensing in a cassette. Two note low sensing conditions
are available:
l 75 notes ± 50
l 200 notes ± 50.
Note Low Sensing Block
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
NC G
R
Currency Width Adjustment

The currency lid holds note guides and spacers which adjust to suit currency width, which
is, in effect, the internal height of the cassette. There are two types of spacers available for
currency width adjustment; segment and fixed size.

The currency width adjustment is made by cutting the eight spacers between the upper
note guides and the lid. Four of these spacers are the same as the currency length E
spacers and four are known as yellow spacers (shown below).
2
3
4 11
5 1 0
6 9
7 8
8 7
9
6
0
1 5
11 4
12 3
2
1
A sharp knife and a medium size cross‐head screwdriver are required to make these
adjustments.

There are eight fixed spacers which provide the same function as the Segment Type
spacers described above. Four of these spacers are the same as the currency length E
spacers and four are known as yellow spacers (shown above). The fixed size spacers must
be changed to suit the currency being dispensed, they can not be cut to size.
Spacer Code
Currency Length, Note Guide and “E” Spacer Codes

Wide Currency Cassette
A B
Note Guide
Left Hand
Side Right Hand
Side
E-Spacer
(4 off)
Truck Door End
Currency Length Note Guide E. Spacer

(mm/in.) L.H. R.H. L.H. R.H.
Note Guide B to left, A to right:
Note Guide Note Guide

B A
120 (4.72) B3 A2 E9 E10

121 (4.76) B3 A2 E9 E10
122 (4.80) B3 A3 E9 E9
123 (4.84) B3 A3 E9 E9
124 (4.88) B3 A3 E9 E9
125 (4.92) B4 A3 E8 E9
126 (4.96) B4 A3 E8 E9
127 (5.00) B4 A4 E8 E8
128 (5.04) B4 A4 E8 E8
129 (5.08) B4 A4 E8 E8
130 (5.12) B5 A4 E7 E8
131 (5.16) B5 A4 E7 E8
132 (5.20) B5 A5 E7 E7
133 (5.24) B5 A5 E7 E7
134 (5.28) B5 A5 E7 E7
135 (5.32) B6 A5 E6 E7
136 (5.36) B6 A5 E6 E7
137 (5.40) B6 A6 E6 E6
138 (5.44) B6 A6 E6 E6
139 (5.48) B6 A6 E6 E6
140 (5.52) B7 A6 N/R E6
141 (5.56) B7 A6 N/R E6
Note Guide A to left, B to right:

A B
142 (5.60) A5 B5 E5 E5
143 (5.64) A5 B5 E5 E5
144 (5.68) A5 B5 E5 E5
145 (5.72) A5 B5 E5 E5
146 (5.76) A6 B5 E4 E5
147 (5.80) A6 B5 E4 E5
148 (5.83) A6 B6 E4 E4
149 (5.87) A6 B6 E4 E4
150 (5.90) A6 B6 E4 E4
151 (5.94) A7 B6 E3 E4
152 (5.98) A7 B6 E3 E4
153 (6.02) A7 B7 E3 E3
154 (6.06) A7 B7 E3 E3
155 (6.10) A7 B7 E3 E3
156 (6.14) A8 B7 E2 E3
157 (6.18) A8 B7 E2 E3
158 (6.22) A8 B8 E2 E2
159 (6.26) A8 B8 E2 E2
160 (6.30) A8 B8 E2 E2
161 (6.34) A9 B8 E1 E2
162 (6.38) A9 B8 E1 E2
163 (6.42) A9 B9 E1 E1
164 (6.46) A9 B9 E1 E1
165 (6.50) A9 B9 E1 E1
166 (6.54) A10 B9 E E1
167 (6.58) A10 B9 E E1
168 (6.62) A10 B10 E E
169 (6.66) A10 B10 E E
170 (6.70) A10 B10 E E
171 (6.74) A11 B10 N/R E
172 (6.78) A11 B10 N/R E
(N/R - No E spacer required)
1000 Rupee Wide Currency Cassette
A B
Note Guide
Left Hand
Side Right Hand
Side
E-Spacer
(4 off)
Truck Door End
Currency Length Note Guide E. Spacer

(mm/in.) L.H. R.H. L.H. R.H.
Note Guide B to left, A to right:

B A
120 (4.72) B3 A3 E9 E9
121 (4.76) B3 A3 E9 E9
122 (4.80) B3 A3 E9 E9
123 (4.84) B4 A3 E8 E9
124 (4.88) B4 A3 E8 E9
125 (4.92) B4 A4 E8 E8
126 (4.96) B4 A4 E8 E8
127 (5.00) B4 A4 E8 E8
128 (5.04) B5 A4 E7 E8
129 (5.08) B5 A4 E7 E8
130 (5.12) B5 A5 E7 E7
131 (5.16) B5 A5 E7 E7
132 (5.20) B5 A5 E7 E7
133 (5.24) B6 A5 E6 E7
134 (5.28) B6 A5 E6 E7
135 (5.32) B6 A6 E6 E6
136 (5.36) B6 A6 E6 E6
137 (5.40) B6 A6 E6 E6
138 (5.44) B6 A6 E6 E6
Note Guide A to left, B to right:

A B
139 (5.48) A5 B5 E5 E5
140 (5.52) A5 B5 E5 E5
141 (5.52) A5 B5 E5 E5
142 (5.60) A5 B5 E5 E5
143 (5.64) A5 B5 E5 E5
144 (5.68) A6 B5 E4 E5
145 (5.72) A6 B5 E4 E5
146 (5.76) A6 B6 E4 E4
147 (5.80) A6 B6 E4 E4
148 (5.83) A6 B6 E4 E4
149 (5.87) A7 B6 E3 E4
150 (5.90) A7 B6 E3 E4
151 (5.94) A7 B6 E3 E4
152 (5.98) A7 B7 E3 E3
153 (6.02) A7 B7 E3 E3
154 (6.06) A8 B7 E2 E3
155 (6.10) A8 B7 E2 E3
156 (6.14) A8 B8 E2 E2
157 (6.18) A8 B8 E2 E2
158 (6.22) A8 B8 E2 E2
159 (6.26) A9 B8 E1 E2
160 (6.30) A9 B8 E1 E2
161 (6.34) A9 B9 E1 E1
162 (6.38) A9 B9 E1 E1
163 (6.42) A9 B9 E1 E1
164 (6.46) A10 B9 E E1

165 (6.50) A10 B9 E E1
166 (6.54) A10 B10 E E
167 (6.58) A10 B10 E E
168 (6.62) A10 B10 E E
169 (6.66) A11 B10 N/R E
170 (6.70) A11 B10 N/R E
171 (6.74) A11 B11 N/R N/R
172 (6.77) A11 B11 N/R N/R
173 (6.81) A11 B11 N/R N/R
174 (6.85) A11 B11 N/R N/R
175 (6.89) A11 B11 N/R N/R
176 (6.93) A11 B11 N/R N/R
177 (6.97) A11 B11 N/R N/R
(N/R - No E spacer required)

Currency Loading
This section describes the procedures that should be followed when replenishing a
currency cassette. Included are the procedures to:
l Open the cassette

l Remove any currency left in the cassette
l Prepare the new currency for loading into the cassette
l Reset the tamper indicating cassette
l Load the currency into the cassette
l Identify the cassette body to the cassette lid
l Close the cassette.
The procedures assume that the cassette has been removed from the dispenser and that
Fluiditi cassettes have also been removed from their secure transport hoods and sleeves.
CAUTION
Once a Fluiditi cassette has had the security marking ink released
into it, the cassette can no longer be used and should be disposed of
in accordance with the instructions provided in s66720 “Fluiditi ATM
Security” and s66721 “Fluiditi Replenishment Security”.
Note: NCR recommends that only a service engineer should handle activated cassettes or
clean spillages inside the ATM.
Opening The Cassette
WARNING
Wear protective clothing when handling Fluiditi cassettes that have
had the marking ink released into them.
To open a currency cassette perform the following procedure:
1. Place the cassette on a flat table.

2. If the cassette is a tamper indicating variant, perform the recommended security
procedures of the financial organization’s control documentation.
3. Remove the latch seal.
4. Press the lower latch hasp down then pull the bottom of the latch towards you.
1
3 2
6 5 4
7
A
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
NC G
R
5. Lift the latch up a small amount. Pull the top of the latch towards you then hinge it
down.
2 1
5 4 3
7 6
A
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
NC
R G
6. Raise the lid and, applying slight pressure at the front of the lid to help disengage the
tags, remove the lid completely from the cassette base.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
NC
R G
Removing Unused Currency
WARNING
Wear protective clothing when handling Fluiditi cassettes which
have had the marking ink released into them.
If the cassette is fitted with pusher arms as shown in the following illustration, lift the
pusher arms: DO NOT SQUEEZE.The following procedures show the new pusher
arm assembly.
Pusher Operation
The currency cassette may be fitted with either of the following types of pusher arm
assemblies.
LIFT - DO NOT SQUEEZE
Pusher
Currency Release
To remove any unused currency remaining in the cassette, place the handle end of the
cassette against a suitable stop,such as a wall, then perform the following procedure:
1. Lift the pusher arms then move the pusher to the rearmost position by pushing with
the right hand against the pusher.
2. Latch the pusher in the rear position by applying gentle pressure near the base of
the pusher, then releasing the pusher arms.
3. Remove the remaining currency and balance the transaction in accordance with the
financial institution’s procedures.
Preparing Currency
Before loading the currency into a cassette it must be prepared correctly as follows:
Used currency should be prepared by holding a bundle of approximately 100 notes in one
hand and separating out with the other. While separating out, the currency should be
checked for obvious defects such as:
l Adhesive tape on the surface of the currency

l Staples, pins, clips or any foreign matter attached to the currency
l Torn or limp notes with pin holes or missing sections in the body of the currency
l Tears exceeding 13mm (0.5 in.) from any edge of the currency
l Damage or tears to the leading edge (direction of travel) of the note
l Two or more notes stuck together
l Corner folds more than 13mm (0.5 in.) along any edge (straighten as required)
l Folded notes
New or uncirculated currency should be separated (fanned) out several times before
loading into the cassette. Any notes considered to be unacceptable should be removed.
The packaging of new currency can cause it to be set into a bow shape. This bow shape
may be either across the length or the width of the notes and can cause the notes to jam in
the dispenser. Notes bowed across the width have been specifically identified as causing
jams in the Personas 86 dispenser and it is recommended that these notes should be
processed through a counting machine where possible. If this is not possible then the notes
should be manually fanned and flattened several times. If the bow persists follow the
instructions that are given in the section “Loading The Cassette” for notes that are
deformed in this way. Notes that are bowed by 3mm (0.125 in.) or more should be
removed.
Note: Good currency preparation will enhance the performance of the currency dispenser.
Resetting The Tamper Indicating Cassette

The tamper indicating version of the cassette has a mechanical device which, on insertion
of the cassette into the currency dispenser, moves the insertion counter and opens the
currency exit door. On withdrawal of the cassette from the dispenser the exit door is locked
but the counter is not moved.
The indication on the counter depends on the number of times the cassette has been
inserted into and removed from the dispenser, that is White (one insertion and removal) 2,
3, 4, 5 and 6.
Before loading the cassette the mechanism must be reset to give the number of insertions
required (up to six).
Operate the reset control by moving it to the right then releasing it the appropriate number
of times until the insertion counter indicates Green.
Loading The Cassette

When loading a cassette with currency, care must be taken to ensure that notes of the
correct denomination are loaded in accordance with the cassette identification code on the
label attached to the cassette.
CAUTION
Once a Fluiditi cassette has had the security marking ink released
into it, the cassette can no longer be used and should be disposed of
in accordance with the instructions provided in Chapters “Fluiditi
ATM Security” and “Fluiditi Replenishment Security”.
To load a cassette with currency observe the “Pusher Operation” procedure given under
the heading ‘Removing Unused Currency’ in this Chapter and proceed as follows:
1. Lift the pusher arms then pull the pusher to the rear of the cassette and lock in
position.
2. Align the edges of the notes in both planes by holding a bundle loosely between the
fingers and thumbs of both hands and tapping lightly on a flat surface, then tapping
the note ends.
3. It is recommended that the cassette be placed at an angle so that each note stack
can be loaded without it falling over. For example, stand the cassette at an angle,
with the handle end at the bottom, and against a wall as shown.
4. Align the first bundle of 100 notes by tapping it on both the long and short edges.
Then place it at the bottom of the cassette, between the plastic side guides.
Continue to align and stack the bundles in the cassette, alternating the orientation of
the bundles from side to side.
20
20
Note: If the effective picking of the notes is compromised by the note design or
bowing, the bundle orientation should alternate from front to rear facing as well as
from side to side.
5. Continue loading until the required amount is loaded, or a 295 mm (11.6 in.) stack is
loaded. This maximum stack size is indicated by the maximum load point label on the
inside of the cassette.
Max. Stack
6. Lift the pusher arms and push the pusher and the note stack upwards until the
currency stack touches the front support, then release the pusher arms.
The currency should now remain between the front support and the pusher in an upright
position, neatly stacked between the cassette guides.
Closing The Cassette

Having loaded and, where required, reset the cassette, it should be closed as follows:
Note: Make sure that the pusher is not locked in the rear position before closing the
cassette. The lid can not be closed if the the pusher has not been released or the cassette
has been overfilled.
1. Insert the tongues on the cassette lid into the slots in the cassette base then lower
the lid on to the cassette base.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
NC
R G
2. Lift the latch up and forward until it hooks on to the lid latch block.
1
3 2
6 5 4
7
A
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
NC
R G
3. Pull the latch down and forward until it clicks into the locked position.
1
3 2
6 5 4
7
A
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
NC
R
G
4. Check that the insertion counter indicates green (tamper indicating versions only).
5. Seal the latch, if required, and complete the third party documentation.
The cassette is now ready for transportation to the ATM.
Setting The Cassette Identification Code

Note: When the denomination of the currency held in a cassette is to be changed the
identification code for the cassette may also have to be changed. It is also important to
determine the opacity or singularity value of the new currency and, if necessary,
reconfigure the parent system with this value.
It is essential that the magnets are pointing in the correct direction. Therefore, each magnet
has a marked end, a painted dot, to indicate which way round it should be installed in the
housing.
Painted Dot
Note: Early versions of the magnet are of square section, later versions are of round
section.
The following table shows the location and orientation of the four magnets to produce the
seven cassette identification codes.
Magnet Positions
Code A (wide cassette only) B (wide cassette only) 1 2 3 4
1 (High*) not used not used X X 0 0
2 (Low*) not used not used X 0 0 X
3 not used not used X 0 X 0
4 not used not used X X X X
5 not used not used 0 X X 0
6 not used not used 0 X 0 X
7 not used not used 0 0 X X
Note: High* and Low* apply to the M80‐05 Currency Dispenser. X indicates a magnet
inserted in the housing, 0 indicates magnet not present in the housing. The bar above or
below the X indicates if the magnet should be placed in the housing with the marked end up
or down.
Note: Codes 5, 6, and 7 are recognized only in ATMs where extended cassette IDs have
been enabled in software. The following illustration shows magnets in place for code.
No
Magnet
No
Magnet O
X
O
X
Painted Dot
Changing Cassette Identification Code

When it is required to change the identification code of a cassette, say as in this example, to
change the setup of a cassette from code 1 to code 2, so that two cassettes can dispense
notes of the same denomination, perform the following procedure:
1. Open and remove the cassette lid.

2. Release the clip(s) holding the plastic housing to the cassette side frame and
remove the plastic housing complete with the magnets from the cassette.
1
3 2
5 4
7 6
A
Clips
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
G
3. Remove the magnet from positions 2.

4. Replace the magnets in the housing so that they are positioned and orientated for
the code required as shown. For example, to set the cassette to Code 2 a magnet
should be inserted in position 1 with the dot end up. Another magnet should be
inserted in position 4 with the dot end down. No magnets should be inserted in
positions 2 and 3.
5. Attach the housing complete with the magnets to the cassette frame using the clip(s)
released in step 1. The housing should be inserted with the longer of the two legs
towards the handle end of the cassette.
6. Close the cassette lid.

7. Mark the cassette body and lid with the currency code according to local practice.
Mechanical
The standard security, Fluiditi, and tamper indicating variants of the currency cassette can
be adjusted to hold currencies of different lengths and widths and to change the note low
sensing facility.
Note: The terms “left” and “right” in the following adjustments and setting tables apply to
the cassette when looked at from the front (truck door) end.
gth
Len
ncy
rre
Cu
Right Hand Side

Currency
Width
$
Left Hand Side
l The length adjustment is made by changing the position of two note guides located in
the base of the cassette.
l The width adjustment is made by changing the height of the spacers located between
two more note guides and the cassette lid.
l The note low sensing adjustment is made by changing the note low block position in
the base of the cassette.
The locations of the note guides, spacers and the note low block are shown in the
illustration below.
Lid Spacers
Currency Width
Note Guide
Note Low Block
Spacers
Currency Length
Note Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Currency Length Adjustment

The currency length adjustment is made by first establishing the length of the currency to
be loaded into the cassette then using this measurement to determine the position of two
note guides in the base of the cassette.
Adjustment is provided to allow the cassette to accommodate currency of lengths from 120
mm (4.72 in.) to 177 mm (6.97 in.).
Once the length of the currency is known, this is used to determine a guide code and the
length of a spacer, which together, are used to determine the position of two note guides
located along the floor of the cassette compartment.
The two note guides are installed along the left‐hand and right‐hand sides of the cassette,
as viewed from the front (that is, the truck door end) of the cassette. A triangular pointer on
the front of the guide and a triangular mark at the rear line up with numbers embossed on
the floor of the cassette compartment. This number is part of the guide code.
The other part of the guide code is a letter, A or B, which is embossed on the note guides, A
on one note guide and B on the other. The A or B note guides can be installed along either
the right or left hand side of the cassette floor (as shown) depending on the guide code but
must always be installed with the spring finger end of the guide pointing to the number
embossed at the front end of the cassette.
Note Guide Note Guide Note Guide Note Guide

A B B A
OR
Cassette Floor

The segment type spacer is embossed on one side with the letter E and the numbers 1 to
15 and is known as the E spacer. The E spacer is designed to snap into position without the
use of tools.
The following example shows how to adjust a cassette for currency of length 120 mm (4.72
in.).
1. Determine the length of the new currency (in this case 120 mm (4.72 in.)).
2. Use the table given under the heading “Currency Length, Note Guide and “E”
Spacer Codes for the Wide Currency Cassette” at the end of this section to
determine the guide code and the E spacer setting for the currency. For this
example the left hand guide (L.H.) will have a guide code of B3 and the right hand
guide (R.H.) a code of A3. The spacers will have a setting of E9 for both the left hand
guide and the right hand guide.
Note: The letters A and B in the tables indicate which note guide should be placed to
the left and which to the right. Remember that right and left are considered when
looking on the front of the cassette (the end with the truck door). The number 1 to 12,
after the letter, corresponds to the numbers embossed on the floor of the currency
cassette. The triangular pointer at the front of the note guide and the triangular mark
at the rear should line up with the same number as given in the table.
3. Remove the two note guides from the cassette base as follows:
l Unscrew and remove the screws and flat washers securing the note guides to the
cassette base as shown.
l The note guides may be secured in position with green plastic clamps. If these are
fitted, unscrew and remove them as shown.
l Slide the pusher back to reveal the front edge of the guides.
l Remove each note guide by pushing the guide towards the rear of the cassette
and, at the same time, raising the rear end of the guide then lifting it out of the
cassette as shown. Take care not to damage or bend the spring fingers.
l Unclip and remove the four E spacers from the base of the cassette as shown.
Note: The two E spacers located near the handle end of the cassette should be
turned through 90 degrees before pulling upwards.
4. Prior to fitting in the cassette, set four new E spacers to the spacer code for the new
currency for example, E9 for the left hand guide and E9 for the right hand guide as
follows:
l Hold the spacer so the letter E and the numbers 1 to 15 can be read.
l Using a strong sharp knife, cut the spacer just above the number, for this example
9. You should be left with a spacer, similar to that in the following illustration, that
has the letter E and the number 9 on it.
l Remove any burrs left after cutting.
5. Snap-in the four new E spacers into the slots in the cassette base.
6. Insert the note guides back into the cassette so that the pointers at either end of the
guide are pointing at the code numbers for the new currency. For this example the
left hand guide (B) should be inserted with the triangular pointer pointing at the
number 3 and the right hand guide (A) pointer pointing at the number 3. The
following illustration shows an example of the left hand guide. To lock the guide in
place, press down on the guide and slide it towards the front of the cassette.
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
7. Replace the flat washers and screws in the base of the cassette or screw in the
green plastic clamps if these are fitted.

The spacer is embossed on one side with the letter E and a number from 1 to 15 (E1, E2,
E3 etc.) and is known as the E spacer. The E spacer is designed to snap‐in to position
without the use of tools.
X
Spacer
Code
Note: The following is an example of how to adjust a cassette for currency of length 120
mm (4.72 in.).
1. Determine the length of the new currency (in this case 120 mm (4.72 in.)).
2. Use the tables given under the heading “Currency Length, Note Guide and “E”
Spacer Codes for the Wide Currency Cassette” at the end of this section to
determine the guide code and the E spacer setting for the currency. For this
example the left hand guide (L.H.) will have a guide code of B3 and the right hand
guide (R.H.) a code of A3. The spacers will have a setting of E9 for both the left hand
guide and the right hand guide.
Note: The letters A and B in the tables indicate which note guide should be placed to the
left and which to the right. Remember that right and left are considered when looking on
the front of the cassette (the end with the truck door). The number 1 to 12, after the
letter, corresponds to the numbers embossed on the floor of the currency cassette. The
triangular pointer at the front of the note guide and the triangular mark at the rear should
line up with the same number as given in the table.
3. Remove the two note guides from the cassette base as follows:
l Unscrew and remove the screws and flat washers securing the note guides to the
cassette base as shown.
l The note guides may be secured in position with green plastic clamps. If these are
fitted, unscrew and remove them as shown.
l Slide the pusher back to reveal the front edge of the guides.
l Remove each note guide by pushing the guide towards the rear of the cassette
and, at the same time, raising the rear end of the guide then lifting it out of the
cassette as shown. Take care not to damage or bend the spring fingers.
l Unclip and remove the four E spacers from the base of the cassette as shown.
Note: The two E spacers located near the handle end of the cassette should be
turned through 90 degrees before pulling upwards.
4. Snap-in the four new E spacers in to the slots in the cassette base.
5. Insert the note guides back into the cassette so that the pointers at either end of the
guide are pointing at the code numbers for the new currency. For this example the
left hand guide (B) should be inserted with the triangular pointer pointing at the
number 3 and the right hand guide (A) pointer pointing at the number 3. The
following illustration shows an example of the left hand guide. To lock the guide in
place, press down on the guide and slide it towards the front of the cassette.
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
6. Replace the flat washers and screws in the base of the cassette or screw in the
green plastic clamps if these are fitted.
Currency Width Adjustment

The currency width adjustment is made by first establishing the width of the currency that
the cassette is to hold then using this measurement to determine the setting of spacers
located between two note guides and the cassette lid. The setting of the spacers can be
adjusted to accommodate currency of varying widths:
l Minimum width 62 mm (2.44 in.)

l Maximum width 95 mm (3.74 in.).
As with the length adjustment there are two types of spacers:
l Segment type
l Fixed size.

Cassette Lid - E and Yellow Spacer Locations - Depending upon the type of cassette,
the lid will be fitted with two yellow spacers and either three or two E spacers. Newer lids
are designed to accept the spray bar of the Fluiditi system and this occupies the position
formerly taken by a central E spacer. Both types of lids are shown in the following
illustrations.
Spacer Screws
(10 off )
Note Guide Welding Peg

( Non TI Lid -
see text )
"E" Spacers (6 off )
Yellow
Spacers
(4 off )
Note Guide
Cut-Outs
To Outside
Note Guide
Yellow Spacers
‘E’ Spacer
‘E’ Spacer
Note Guide
Cut-outs
To Outside
The E spacers are the same as the E spacers used when adjusting the currency length.
Each E spacer is attached to the lid note guides by a cross‐headed screw.
The other four spacers are known as Yellow spacers (shown below), and are designed to
clip into the cassette lid. Each Yellow spacer is also attached to the lid note guides by a
cross headed screw.
2
3
4 11
5 1 0
6 9
7 8
8 7
9
6
0
1 5
11 4
12 3
2
1
The following example shows how to adjust the cassette for currency of width 67 mm (2.64
in.) on a lid with two E spacers and two yellow spacers.
Proceed as follows:
1. Open the cassette and remove the lid.

2. Using a cross‐head screwdriver, remove the two note guides from the lid by undoing
the cross‐head screws from the two Yellow spacers then use the same screwdriver
to remove the E spacers from the note guides.
3. Remove the Yellow spacers from the lid by pressing in the two spring legs of each
spacer then pushing them out of the lid.
4. Determine the width of the new currency (in this case 67 mm (2.64 in.)).
5. Use the table given under the heading “Currency Width Spacer Codes” at the end of
this section to determine the spacer code for the currency:
6. Set the four new Yellow and four (or six) new E spacers to their spacer codes. For
this example the Yellow spacers should be set to C8 and the E spacers to E10. The
procedure to set the E spacer is the same as that when adjusting for currency
length, that is, cut the spacer above segment 10. The procedure to set a Yellow
spacer to its spacer code is as follows:
l The Yellow spacers are embossed on one side. Looking at this side, you see two
sets of numbers 1 to 12 reading in opposite directions. One end has the letter C
on it and the other has the letter D.
l The Yellow spacer code is C8 so count from the C end to segment 8 and, using a
sharp knife, cut the spacer just above the number 8 so that you are left with a
spacer that has C and segments 1 to 8, refer to following illustration.
l Fit a locking wedge into the first gap in the cut Yellow spacer as shown. Remove
any burrs left after cutting.
5
6
7 8
8 7
9 6
10 5
11 4
12 3
2
1
C
7. Install the four new Yellow spacers in the cassette lid by pressing the legs of the
spacer together and pushing them into the apertures in the cassette lid. The legs of
the spacers should be pointing towards the centre of the cassette lid as shown in the
following illustration.
8. Using the cross‐head screwdriver, attach the new E spacers to the lid note guides.
9. Using the cross‐head screwdriver, attach the lid note guides to the cassette lid.
Make sure the cut outs on the note guides are facing towards the outside edges of
the cassette lid as shown in the following illustration.
Note Guide
Yellow Spacers
‘E’ Spacer
‘E’ Spacer
Note Guide
Cut-outs
To Outside

Cassette Lid ‐ E and Yellow Spacer Locations
Depending upon the type of cassette, the lid will be fitted with two yellow spacers and either
three or two E spacers. Newer lids are designed to accept the spray bar of the Fluiditi
system and this occupies the position formerly taken by a central E spacer.
In this section the example shows how to adjust the cassette for currency width on a lid with
two E spacers and two yellow spacers. Older cassettes will require another E spacer to fit
in the central position of each note guide.
The fixed size E spacers are the same as those used when adjusting the currency length.
Each E spacer is clipped in to the lid note guides ‐ see the following illustration.
Note Guide
Yellow Spacers
‘E’ Spacer
‘E’ Spacer
Note Guide
Cut-outs
To Outside
The other four spacers are known as Yellow spacers, and are designed to clip into the
cassette lid. Each Yellow spacer is also clipped in to the lid note guides ‐ see the following
illustration.
Spacer Code
The following example explains how to adjust a cassette for a currency of width 67 mm
(2.64 in.).
Proceed as follows:

2. Unclip and remove the two note guides from the lid then remove the E spacers from
the note guides.
3. Remove the Yellow spacers from the lid by pressing in the two spring legs of each
spacer then pushing them out of the lid.
4. Determine the width of the new currency (in this case 67 mm (2.64 in.)).
5. Use the table given under the heading “Currency Width Spacer Codes” at the end of
this section to determine the spacer code for the currency.
6. Select four new Yellow and four new E spacers by their spacer codes. For this
example the Yellow spacers should be C8 and the E spacers E10.
Spacer Code
Spacer Code
X
X
7. Install the four new Yellow spacers in the cassette lid by pressing the legs of the
spacer together and pushing them into the apertures in the cassette lid. The legs of
the spacers should be pointing towards the centre of the cassette lid as shown in the
following illustration.
8. Clip the four new E spacers to the lid note guides.
9. Clip the lid note guides to the cassette lid. Make sure the cut outs on the note guides
are facing towards the outside edges of the cassette lid as shown in the following
illustration.
Note Guide
Yellow Spacers
‘E’ Spacer
‘E’ Spacer
Note Guide
Cut-outs
To Outside
Currency Width Spacer Codes

Currency Width Yellow Spacer E Spacer Code Currency Width Yellow Spacer E Spacer Code
mm (in.) Code mm (in.) Code
62 (2.44) C9 E11 79 (3.11) D3 E4
63 (2.48) D8 E10 80 (3.15) C3 E4
64 (2.52) D8 E10 81 (3.19) C3 E4
65 (2.56) C8 E10 82 (3.23) D2 E3
66 (2.60) C8 E10 83 (3.27) C2 E3
67 (2.64) D7 E9 84 (3.31) C2 E3
68 (2.68) C7 E9 85 (3.35) D1 E2
69 (2.72) C7 E9 86 (3.39) C1 E1
70 (2.76) D6 E8 87 (3.43) C1 E1
71 (2.80) C6 E7 88 (3.46) D E1
72 (2.83) C6 E7 89 (3.50) C N/R
73 (2.87) D5 E7 90 (3.54) C N/R
74 (2.91) C5 E6 91 (3.58) C N/R
75 (2.95) C5 E6 92 (3.62) N/R N/R
76 (2.99) D4 E6 93 (3.66) N/R N/R
77 (3.03) C4 E5 94 (3.70) N/R N/R
78 (3.07) C4 E5 95 (3.74) N/R N/R
(N/R - Spacer or guide not required)
Note: On H‐8015‐STD1‐01/02‐08 non‐tamper indicating lids, when the yellow spacer is

set to C or D, cut off the two welding pegs at both sides of the lid at the opposite end to the
latch. (Refer to the following illustration). This permits the note guides to sit level.
Spacer Screws
(10 off )
Note Guide Welding Peg

( Non TI Lid -
see text )
"E" Spacers (6 off )
Yellow
Spacers
(4 off )
Note Guide
Cut-Outs
To Outside
There are no welding pegs on Wide Plastic cassettes.
Note Low Sensing Adjustment

The cassette contains a note low block that provides the parent ATM with an indication of a
note low condition. The block can be set to give two note low settings:
l 75 ± 50 notes
l 200 ± 50 notes.
The settings are indicated by spherical pips on the block such that if the pips are towards
the truck door end of the cassette, it is set for the 75 note setting. If the pips are set to the
rear of the cassette then it is set for the 200 setting. Refer to the following illustration for the
location of the pips.
Spherical Pips
To change the note low setting proceed as follows:

2. Press the flaps of the note low block together and then pull the block upwards and
out of the pusher body.
3. Turn the block around so that the pips face the opposite way then insert the block
back into the pusher.
4. Press down firmly until the block clicks into place.
CABLING
None.
None.
TOOLS
l A sharp knife,
l A medium size cross‐head screwdriver.
REVISION

COIN DISPENSER (HOPPER STYLE)
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the Coin Dispenser (Hopper Style) design. Each of its hoppers
have sensors to indicate that the hopper needs to be replenished.
There are three types of hopper–style coin dispenser, each with an in–line configuration of 4
hoppers:
l CX (also known as CoinXpress™)

l CX25
l CX25 with extended hoppers
DESCRIPTION
Each hopper bin dispenses a single denomination to provide the required dispense value
dependant on the application. The coins are dispensed down a chute to a coin bowl on the
ATM facia.
The coin dispenser is capable of:
l Dispensing coins on demand from selected coin hoppers

l Reading and clearing counts of coins dispensed
l Reporting a low coin condition in each hopper
l Reporting a no coin condition in each hopper.
Hopper Cover
and Lid
Hopper Bin
Hopper Base
CX
CX25
CX25 extended
24VDC Power Jack Status Lights
ON/OFF Switch RJ45 Port

USB Port
Weight
The weight of the Coin Dispenser is described below:
Description Weight
Without coins 6.0 kg ±0.2 kg
With full–load of coins (depending on the currency type) 19 kg (approximate)
Mounting
The Coin Dispenser is mounted on its base plate using four screw–in hexagonal standoffs.
Length 1/2 in.

AF 1/4 in.
Thread 8/32
Power
The Coin Dispenser device operates with the power supply described in the following
table.
Supply Voltage 24 Vdc ±10%

Supply Current 1.7 A maximum
Control Board
J1
Cable
Dummy Connectors J2
Connectors
J3 J4
CX CX25
Hopper Assembly
The coin dispenser consists of four hopper assemblies attached to mechanisms on a base
mounting.
Bin
Rotor
Base
CX
CX25 CX25 extended
Jam Rate
For each certified coin denomination, the coin jam rate is better than 1 jam per 100,000
coins. This excludes bent coins, debris, and wrong coin type in the hopper, and so forth.
Hopper Bin Numbering

The following image describes the hopper bin numbering of the Coin Dispenser.
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 1 Bin 3
Bin 2 CX Bin 4
Bin 3
Bin 4
CX25
CX25 extended
Chute Orientation
The Coin Dispenser chute can be located on either the left–hand or right–hand side,
depending on which terminal the device is used.
The following image displays the two possible chute orientation of the dispenser. On the
actual terminal, only one chute is used.
Bin 1 Bin 4
Coin Chute
Coin Chute
Dispense Sequence
The desired amount is dispensed starting with coins from the hopper bin nearest to the
ramp exit, and continues the sequence to the coins farthest from the ramp exit. The
dispense sequence is generally intended to dispense the heaviest coins first and the lighter
coins later.
Sensor
Each hopper of the Coin Dispenser has a Coin Low Sensor to indicate that the hopper
needs to be replenished.
Status Lights
GREEN power LED Reports when the device is on and ready.
(constant)
RED (single warning LED Reports a machine error on the firmware.
flash)
RED (constant) warning LED There are one or more bins with low coin.
YELLOW communication Flashes briefly when valid USB communications are passed to or
LED from the host.
Note: NCR system software may not detect the red status light as a hopper low condition
at this point in time. If the condition persists, subsequent dispenses will result in a ‘Hopper
Low’ being detected and reported.
Currency Configuration
The table below describes the sample currency/denomination configuration.
Country Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4

Mexico 5 Peso 2 1 0.5
USA 0.25 0.05 0.05 0.01
Turkey 1 YTL 25 YKr 5 YKr 1 YKr
Euro 1 0.2 0.05 0.01
Peru 5 Nuevos Soles 2 Nuevos Soles 1 Nuevos Soles 0.10 Nuevos Soles
Note: It is also possible to dispense coinage of other countries. Contact the local NCR
representative for more details.
CAUTION
It is recommended that no more than 3 kg of coins is lifted and
loaded into the hoppers in a single action.
Security
Security of the currency can be provided either by a locking bar which fits across and over
the hopper lids, or by locating the dispenser behind a locked door in the top‐box of the
terminal.
Container Capacities
Note: Capacities can vary ± 10% depending on fill method
Country Currency Denomination CX25 Short Bowl CX25 Short Bowl with Extension
Albania Lek 10.00 753 1529
20.00 583 1183
50.00 419 849
100.00 891 1809
Argentina Peso 0.25 452 917
0.50 417 845
1.00 437 887
2.00 350 709
Australia Dollar 0.05 860 1746
0.20 251 508
1.00 285 578
2.00 392 795
Azerbaijan Qapik 0.01 949 1926
0.05 495 1005
0.20 386 783
0.50 321 652
Bolivia Boliviano 1.00 573 1163
5.00 511 1038
Bosnia KM 0.50 499 1012
1.00 587 989
2.00 390 791
5.00 250 507
Bulgaria BGN 0.01 1271 2579
0.05 723 1467
0.20 655 1329
1.00 372 755
Canada Dollar 0.01 902 1831
0.05 599 1216
0.10 1166 2367
0.25 520 1055
1.00 340 691
2.00 319 647
Chile Peso 1.00* 995 2019
10.00 677 1375
50.00 390 791
100.00 378 766
500.00 414 841
China Yuan 0.05 461 935
0.50 682 1384
1.00 402 815
Colombia Peso 10.00 875 1775
20.00 735 1491
50.00 1216 2468
100.00 719 1458
200.00 556 1129
500.00 358 726
Ethiopia Birr 1.00 332 673
Europe Euro 0.01 1039 2108
0.02 811 1646
0.05 631 1281
0.10 633 1284
0.20 449 912
0.50 343 696
1.00 378 767
2.00 342 694
Hungary Forint 5.00 655 1329
20.00 385 782
50.00 360 730
200.00 302 613
Jordan Piastres, JD 0.05 489 992
0.10 306 620
0.25 576 1168
0.50 797 1617
Mexico Peso 0.10 1057 2145
0.20 1066 2164
0.50 818 1660
1.00 640 1299
2.00 480 975
5.00 352 715
10.00 264 537
Morocco Dirham 0.20 645 1309
1.00 444 901
5.00 383 777
New Zealand Dollar 0.10 717 1455
0.20 645 1310
0.50 457 928
1.00 329 667
2.00 255 517
Peru Nuevo Soles 0.05 980 1988
0.10 849 1723
0.50 639 1297
1.00 365 740
2.00 467 947
5.00 320 650
Poland Zlotych (PLN) 0.01 1500 3044
0.10 1090 2213
0.50 662 1343
2.00 505 1024
Romania Bani 0.01 1125 2283
0.05 912 1850
0.10 628 1275
0.50 445 902
Russia Rouble 0.10 1273 2584
0.50 871 1769
1.00 779 1581
2.00 479 973
5.00 418 848
10.00 447 908
Serbia Dinar 1.00 606 1230
2.00 476 966
5.00 459 932
10.00 338 687
South Africa Rand 0.10 1242 2520
0.50 481 976
1.00 658 1336
2.00 474 961
Switzerland Franc 0.10 903 1832
0.20 652 1323
0.50 1250 2537
1.00 570 1156
2.00 300 608
Taiwan Dollar 1.00 721 1463
10.00 400 811
50.00 252 510
Thailand Baht 0.25 1368 2776
1.00 846 1717
5.00 347 704
10.00 311 631
Tunisia Dinar 0.10 779 1581
0.50 342 693
1.00 353 717
5.00 342 693
Turkey Lira 0.01 1227 2491
0.05 942 1912
0.25 687 1394
1.00 342 695
UAE Dirham 0.25 704 1430
0.50 619 1257
1.00 394 799
UK Pound 0.01 665 1349
0.02 348 705
0.05 817 1657
0.10 436 885
0.20 586 1189
0.50 235 478
1.00 341 692
2.00 236 479
Uruguay Peso 1.00 713 1447
2.00 549 1114
5.00 428 868
10.00 238 482
USA Dollar 0.01 821 1666
0.05 560 1137
0.10 1057 2145
0.25 464 941
ERROR MESSAGES
Error Possible Root Cause(s) Isolation Resolution
Dispense jam. Coin jammed in rotor Empty coins from hopper. Check for incorrect size of Clear jam.
coins.
Agitator spring is Check coin agitator spring. Replace
damaged. hopper.
Coin rotor is worn. Check coin rotor. Replace rotor.
Wrong coin rotor Check coin rotor is correct part. Replace rotor
fitted. with correct
part.
Coin eject Coin jammed on eject Observe coin jammed on exit sensor. Clear jam.
sensor fail. pin.
Coin eject sensor dirty. Ensure sensor is clean. Clean sensor.
Cable disconnected Check cable. Re-connect
from hopper. cable.
Cable disconnected Check cable. Re-connect
from control board. cable.
Mechanism cable Replace mechanism cable. Replace
faulty. mechanism
cable.
Coin eject pin stuck Visually inspect mechanism. Clear debris.
(due to debris).
Coin eject pin stuck Ensure coin eject pin is free to move and Replace
(due to automatically returns to rest position. mechanism.
misalignment/damage).
Coin eject sensor Check coin eject pin is at rest position Replace
blocked. mechanism.
Hoppers (1 - 4) Coin low sensor Place known conducting object across sensor Replace
low. contacts contaminated. contacts and perform a Get-Status command. Bit hopper.
0/1/2/3 of M_Data byte 1 should be ‘0’
Note: Bit 0 = Hopper 1.
PCB faulty. Replace PCB and re-test. Replace PCB.
Coin low sensor Check coin low sensor connections. Re-connect
disconnected. coin low
sensor
connections.

Hoppers (1 - 4) Coin low sensor Place known conducting object across sensor Replace
empty. contacts contaminated. contacts and perform a Get_Status command. Bit hopper.
0/1/2/3 of M_Data byte 1 should be ‘0’. Note: Bit 0 =
Hopper 1.
PCB faulty. Replace PCB and re-test. Replace PCB.
Coin low sensor Check coin low sensor connections. Re-connect
disconnected. coin low
sensor
connections.
Hopper & rotor Hopper & rotor life Replace
(1 - 4) need counter out. hopper and
replaced rotor. Reset
life-counter.
Communications USB cable Check USB cable. Re-connect
failure disconnected from USB cable.
coin dispenser.
USB cable Check USB cable. Re-connect
disconnected from USB USB cable.
hub.
Power cable Check power cable. Re-connect
disconnected from power cable.
coin dispenser.
Power cable Check power cable. Re-connect
disconnected from power cable.
power supply.
USB cable faulty. Replace USB cable and retest. Replace USB
cable.
Power cable faulty. Replace power cable and retest. Replace power
cable.
Device PCB failure. Replace PCB. Replace PCB.
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0 Diagnostics
None.
Level 1 Diagnostics
The following table shows level 1 diagnostic tests which are available on the coin
dispenser.
Note: M_DATA and M_STATUS codes returned by the level 1 diagnostic tests are listed in
the NCR publication number B006‐6273, 56XX/Personas/662x/663x Self‐Service
Financial Terminal Diagnostic Status Code Notebook.
Test Description
MENU Displays a menu of all the other tests to allow the user to select.
CLEAR Selecting CLEAR clears all counters and flags related to previously detected malfunctions.
This is required by the Dispense_By_Position command and returns a “Not Cleared” status.
DISPENSE Selecting DISPENSE prompts the user for the number of coins to be dispensed from each
hopper. Valid values are 0 to 25 for each hopper. An error prompt is displayed if a value is
entered which is greater than 25, and the user is returned to the value entry screen. When
a valid value has been entered for each hopper the coin dispenser attempts to dispense the
entered number of coins from each hopper.
GET Selecting GET STATUS will display the current status of the Coin Dispenser.
STATUS
Level 3 Diagnostics
Level 3 diagnostics provides an interface to the tallies, stored in on‐module and system
NVRAM, and error logs for the units.
S_DATA
The 9 bytes of S_DATA returned for the Coin Dispenser are as follows:
Byte 0 (Module)
S_ Meaning
DATA
00 GOOD - No error, continue to use device.
01 ROUTINE - An error has occurred while performing a diagnostic function. Operator intervention
required.
04 FATAL - Do not use this device again until there has been operator intervention (Comms Failure,
Sensor Fail, Download Error, Device Inoperative).
Byte 1-8 (Hoppers)

S_ Meaning
DATA
00 GOOD - No error, continue to use this hopper-mechanism or hopper-mechanism not present.
01 ROUTINE - An error has occurred while performing a diagnostic function. Operator intervention
required.
04 FATAL - Do not use the hopper-mechanism again until there has been operator intervention
(Hopper Empty, Hopper Jam, Sensor Fail).
Tallies
The tallies recorded for the Coin Dispenser are:
Tally Mnemonic Meaning

HOP1_OPS Hopper 1 Dispense Operations
HOP1_JAM Hopper 1 Dispense Jams
HOP2 _JAM Hopper 2 Dispense Jams
COMMSOPS Hundreds of Communications Operations
COMMSRET Communications Retries
COMMFAIL Communications Failures
Coin Dispenser Self Test

The Coin Dispenser Module will carry out a self test on demand by selecting Device Self
Test from the System Application Menu and Coin Dispenser from the Device Self Test
Menu. When the Run Tests button is selected, either individually or in conjunction with
other Self Tests, the Coin Dispenser Module will dispense one coin from each of the four
coin hoppers.
On completion of the self test, the result is displayed on a summary report.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
Default Hopper Thresholds
The Self Service Configuration Menu for the coin dispenser module enables adjustment of
the Empty threshold, MaxCoinsPerDispense and the CoinsLowDebounce threshold. The
default values are shown in the following table:
Hoppers Name Description Maximum Default

Value Value
1,2,3 HopperEmptyThreshold The number of coins remaining in a particular 255 20
or 4 hopper once the low sensor is active.
ALL MaxCoinsPerDispense The maximum number of coins permitted to be 255 25
dispensed in a single transaction.
ALL CoinsLow The minimum number of coins dispensed from a 255 5
Debounce hopper for which the replenishment sensor
Threshold should indicate low before the State of Health
(SOH) is changed from OK to LOW.
Entering Threshold Values

The threshold entry menus are reached from the coin dispenser menu:
1. Set the ATM to “Supervisor” mode.

2. Select SELF‐SERVICE CONFIGURATION to display the Self Service
configuration menu.
3. Select SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION to display the Set Device Configuration
menu.
4. Select COIN DISPENSER to display the Coin Dispenser menu.
Hopper Configuration Menu

Selecting the Hopper Configuration option displays a screen similar to the following:
Enter the hopper threshold values as follows:
1. Use the TAB key to select a hopper and set the Empty Threshold value for the
currency.
2. Select PAGE DOWN to set Maximum Coins Per Dispense and Coin Low De‐
Bounce Threshold.
3. When all threshold values have been set, press OK to start the validation process
and return to the Coin Dispenser menu.
Note: If any parameters do not contain valid values, a prompt is displayed indicating
the valid range of values. Each invalid parameter is marked with an ‘X’.
4. Return the ATM to Normal mode.

The following are replaceable parts on the coin dispenser for both CX and CX25
dispensers:
l Control Board
l Harnessing
l Rotor
l Hopper cover
l Hopper bin ‐ includes denomination label
l Hopper assembly ‐ includes hopper base, but not the cover or lid.
Note: The coin guide is not a replaceable part and should not be removed or the direction in
which it is seated, changed in any way. If a change is required, a completely new hopper
assembly will have to be ordered.
CX Coin Dispenser
To replace the control board on the CX coin dispenser, follow these steps:
1. Tilt the hopper bins backwards, placing them into the ‘coin dump’ position as shown
below.
2. Remove and retain the two screws on either side of the securing bar, then remove
the bar.
3. Remove and retain the two screws securing the metal cover plate and then remove
the plate.
Screws
4. Carefully disconnect the cable connectors and dummy connectors from the control
board by using your thumb and first finger to grasp each connector on the sides,
then with your thumb applying pressure to the locking tab, gently lift the connector to
unplug it.
Cable Connectors
Dummy
Connectors
5. Remove and retain the two screws securing the control board to the metalwork
casing, then remove the board.
Screws
6. Replacement of the control board is the reversal of the above procedure.

Note: When replacing the securing bar, make sure the cables are routed beneath
the bar.
Harnessing
The harnessing on the CX coin dispenser consists of a main harness connected to bins 1 to
3, and a single harness connected to bin 4.
The procedure for replacing either harness is the same. Follow these steps:
1. Disconnect the two low coin terminals. If replacing the main harness, disconnect the
terminals on bins 1 to 3.
2. Unplug the harness connector from the rear of the hopper base. If replacing the
main harness unplug all three harness connectors.
Connector
below.
4. Remove and retain the two screws on either side of the securing bar, then remove
the bar.
the plate.
Screws
6. Cut all cable ties securing the harness to the rear of the base, then carefully pull the
harness free from the hopper assembly. If replacing the main harness, pull all three
sections of the harness free from the hopper assembly.
7. Carefully disconnect the cable connectors and dummy connectors from the control
board by using your thumb and first finger to grasp each connector on the sides,
then with your thumb applying pressure to the locking tab, gently lift the connector to
unplug it.
Main Harness Single Harness

Connectors Connector
8. Replace the harness, reversing the above procedure and ensuring the connectors
are firmly pushed home.
Replacing the Rotor

To replace a rotor on the CX coin dispenser, follow these steps:
1. Disconnect the two low coin terminals on the back of the hopper bin.
Low Coin
Terminals
2. Facing the coin ejection side of the hopper, grasp the base of the hopper with one
hand and rotate the bin (counter–clockwise) with the other hand to remove the bin.
3. Pull the rotor straight up to remove from the base. Place the new rotor over the
hopper centre pin.
Rotor
4. Replace the hopper bin as shown. Align the tangs on the bin with the grooves on the
hopper base, then rotate the bin clockwise until it seats into position.
5. Re‐attach the two low coin terminals.
Hopper Cover
The hopper cover consists of two parts, the frame and the lid. The frame, lid or the
complete hopper cover can be replaced.
Replacing the Complete Hopper Cover

To replace the hopper cover, follow these steps:
1. Squeeze the tabs on either side of the frame to release the cover, then remove from
the bin.
2. Refit the new hopper cover. Insert one side of the frame through the hole in the bin,
while, at the same time, gently prise open the opposite side of the bin. Snap the
hopper cover onto the bin.
Replacing the Frame or Lid

To replace the frame of lid, follow these steps:
1. Squeeze the tabs on either side of the frame to release the cover, then remove from
the bin.
2. Separate frame and lid by gently pulling apart at the hinge.
3. Take the new frame or lid and fit together again.

5. If the cover was replaced, attach the new currency label onto the cover label recess.
Replacing the Hopper Bin

To replace the hopper bin on the CX coin dispenser, follow these steps:
Low Coin
Terminals
2. Facing the coin ejection side of the hopper, grasp the base of the hopper with one
hand and rotate the bin (counter–clockwise) with the other hand to remove the bin.
3. Squeeze the tabs on either side of the frame to release the cover, then remove it
from the bin.
5. Replace the hopper bin. Align the tangs on the bin with the grooves on the hopper
base, then rotate the bin clockwise until it seats into position.
6. Attach the new currency label onto the new bin.
Replacing the Hopper Assembly

To replace the hopper assembly, follow these steps:
Low Coin
Terminals
2. Disconnect the harness from the rear of the hopper base.
Connector
3. Cut and remove the cable ties securing the harness to the hopper base. Pull the
harness cable free from the hopper base.
4. Loosen the three screws on the hopper base then slide the hopper assembly out of
the module.
5. Replace the hopper assembly reversing the procedure to remove it.

Note: Make sure the screw washers are located between the screw head and the
base plate.
CX25 Coin Dispenser

Replacing Control Board
To replace the control board on the CX25 coin dispenser, follow these steps:
below.
Screws
Securing Bar
Cover Plate
2. Remove and retain the flexible plastic securing bar.

the plate.
4. Carefully disconnect the cable four connectors from the control board by using your
thumb and first finger to grasp each connector on the sides, then with your thumb
applying pressure to the locking tab, gently lift the connector to unplug it.
5. Remove and retain the two screws securing the control board to the metalwork
casing, then remove the board.
6. Replacement of the control board is the reversal of the above procedure.
Note: When replacing the securing bar, make sure the cables are routed beneath
the bar.
Harnessing
The harnessing on the CX25 coin dispenser consists of four harnesses, each connecting a
single bin to the control board.
The procedure for replacing each harness is the same. Follow these steps:
below.
Screws
Securing Bar
Cover Plate
2. Remove and retain the flexible plastic securing bar.

the plate.
4. Unplug the harness connector from the hopper base.
5. Carefully pull the harness free from the hopper assembly.
6. Carefully disconnect the cable connector from the control board by using your thumb
and first finger to grasp each connector on the sides, then with your thumb applying
pressure to the locking tab, gently lift the connector to unplug it.
7. Replace the harness, reversing the above procedure and ensuring the connectors
are firmly pushed home.
Replacing the Rotor

To replace a rotor on a CX25 hopper, follow these steps:
1. Press in the two latches on either side of the hopper base and lift the bin away from
the base.
Cover
Bin
Latch
Base
2. Pull the rotor straight up to remove from the base. Place the new rotor over the
centre pin.
3. Refit the bin.
Replacing the Hopper Cover

To replace the hopper cover, follow these steps:
1. Carefully release the two tabs securing the cover to the bin, then remove the cover.
2. Carefully fit the new cover.
3. If the cover was replaced, attach the new currency label onto the cover label recess.
Replacing the Hopper Bin

To replace the CX25 hopper bin, follow these steps:
1. Press in the two latches on either side of the base and lift the bin away from the
base.
Cover
Bin
Latch
Base
2. Carefully release the two tabs securing the cover to the bin, then remove the cover.
3. Re‐fit the cover onto the replacement bin.
4. Fit the bin onto the base.
5. Attach the new currency label onto the new bin.
Replacing the Hopper Bin Extension

To replace the CX25 hopper bin extension, follow the steps:
1. Carefully release the two tabs securing the bin extension to the bin, then remove the
bin extension.
Cover
Bin Extension
Bin
Base
2. Carefully release the two tabs securing the cover to the bin extension, then remove
the cover.
3. Fit the new bin extension onto the bin.
4. Re‐fit the cover onto the replacement bin extension.
Replacing the Hopper Assembly

To replace a CX25 hopper assembly, follow these steps:
1. Select the single hopper assembly and tilt it into the ‘coin dump’ position.
Hopper Base
Hinge
2. Disconnect the harness from the hopper base and release the harness from the
clips securing it to the base.
3. Remove one screw from the end of the hinge.
4. Slide the hinge pin far enough to release the hopper assembly.
5. Replace the hopper assembly.

6. Assemble the hinge and reconnect the harness.
None.
For the preventive maintenance schedule and details of the required tasks for the Coin
Dispenser (Hopper Style), refer to Coin Dispenser in the Preventive Maintenance section
of this manual.
REVISION

CAUTION
INTRODUCTION
The S2 Currency Dispenser is also referred to as the USB Media Dispenser.
Carriage Single Note Transport

Carriage
Umbilical (SNT)
Presenter Core
Nose
Bill Aligner Module
(BAM)
Main Motor & Pump

Assembly
Purge Bin
Status Indicator
Lights
Currency Cassettes
4–High Pick Support Frame
Single Pick Module
Double Pick Module

5–High Pick Support Frame
DESCRIPTION
The dispenser, upon command from the ATM processor, selects bills from the cassettes;
tests for singularity and irregularities, stacks them into a single bunch then presents the
bunch to the customer. The presented bunch will remain in the present position until
removed by the customer or retracted under application control.
S2 Dispenser modules and cassettes are not interchangeable with earlier designs of
dispenser.
The dispenser is an assembly of the following:
l Presenter Core ‐ front or rear access

l Nose
l Carriage ‐ front or rear access
l Bill Aligner Module (BAM)
l Single Note Transport (SNT)
l Main Motor and Pump Assembly
l Double Pick Module(s)
l Pick Support Frame
l Currency Cassettes
l Purge Bin ‐ open, latchfast, lockable latchfast
l Status Indicator Lights
l Main Control Board
l 5/6 Hi Expansion Board (optional)
l Single Pick Module (optional)
l Serial Number Read (optional)
Weight
The weight of the basic 4‐high unit with empty currency cassettes is 61.5 kg (136 lb).
Presenter Core
Carriage Cam
(Primary)
Carriage Umbilical Flex
Purge Bin
Sensors
Cam Motor
Vacuum
Sensor
Vacuum
Reservior
Module Latch
Sensor
24VDC
Interlock
Switch
Purge Bin
Carriage Position CIC
Switch
Cam CIC Sensor
Carriage Cam
Purge Bin (Secondary)
LED Interface
Purge Bin Latch

Sensor
Nose
Carriage Present Flag
Variants:
l 144.5 mm Front Access

l 154.0 mm Front Access
l 172.0 mm Rear Access

Carriage
Chassis Cover
CIC Sensor Target
Front Access Rear Access

Closed Closed
Lower Plate
Carriage Position
Sensor Front Access
Open
Exit/Pre-Exit & Bunch
Sensors
Rear Access
Open
Pre-Exit Sensor Bunch Sensor
Exit Sensor
Timing Disk
Belt Motor
Carriage with chassis cover removed
Bill Aligner Module (BAM)
Finger Rack
Edge Register
Motor
Sensor
Single Note Transport (SNT)

Media Deflector Sensors
Divert Gate
Media Deflector
Fingers
Stack Entry Sensor

(PurgeSen)
Flickers
Divert Entry Sensor
Divert Gate
Sensor
Width Sensor
Line 2 Timing Sensor Hall Effect Thickness Sensor

(TimeDiscSen) (HETS)
Main Motor and Pump Assembly

Main Motor
Vacuum Pump
Double Pick Module
Suction
Cup
Note Low
Sensor Pick Sensor
LED Pick Sensor(s)*
* Second pick sensor in dual sensor systems only
(polymer notes)
Pick Arm
Motor
Quad CIC Board
Key Plate
Pick Arm D Wheel Shaft
Position Sensors Position Sensors
Solenoid Valve
Vacuum Hose
Single Pick Module
Suction
Cup
Note Low
Sensor Pick Sensor
LED
Pick Sensor(s)*
* Second pick sensor in dual sensor systems only
Key Plate (polymer notes)
Pick Arm
Motor
Dual CIC Board
Pick Arm
Position Sensor
D Wheel Shaft
Position Sensor
Solenoid Valve
Vacuum Hose
Currency Cassette
Refer to the NCR S2 Dispenser Cassettes Operator Guide (B006‐6966) and the S2
Currency Cassette chapter in this service manual.
Purge Bin
Open Purge Bin
Latchfast Purge Bin
Lockable Latchfast Purge Bin
Retract Reject
Divert
Purge Bin Areas
Height Width Length

Open Purge Bin 142 mm (5.6 in.) 218 mm (8.6 in.) 361 mm (141.2 in.)
Latchfast Purge Bin 140 mm (5.5 in.) 237 mm (9.3 in.) 361 mm (141.2 in.)
Lockable Latchfast Purge Bin 140 mm (5.5 in.) 237 mm (9.3 in.) 368 mm (141.5 in.)
Status Indicator Lights

The status indicator lights can be configured by the owning authority.
The default configuration is:
Indicator Light Possible Root Cause

Solid Red Dispenser in service.
Action is required before dispenser can be racked in.
Flashing Red Dispenser out of service.
Action required before dispenser can be brought into service.
Solid Amber Dispenser in service.
Action required to repair dispenser.
Flashing Amber Dispenser in service.
Action required to replenish dispenser.
Solid Green Dispenser in service.
No action required.
Vacuum System
Vacuum Sensor
Vacuum Pump
Vacuum Reservoir Main Motor
Air Filter
Pick Arm Motor
T Connector
Suction Cup
Pick Line Solenoid Valve
Main Control Board
J16 J1 J2 J3 J4 J5
J15
J6
J7
J8
J9
J14 J25
J18
J13 J12 J19 J11 J10
Number Harness Number Harness

J1 Presenter Harness J11 Lower Pick Module Harness
J2 Presenter Harness J12 Lower Dual cassette ID Harness
J3 SNT Harness J13 SOH Harness
J4 SNT Harness J14 Upper Dual cassette ID Harness
J5 Main Motor J15 SOH Harness
J6 USB Mini Cable J16 RJ45 Cable to shutter PCB
J7 +24VDC Power J18 Interface Harness
J8 Upper Pick Module Harness J19 Interface Harness
J9 Upper Pick Module Harness J25 BAM Harness
J10 Lower Pick Module Harness
5/6 Hi Expansion Board
J1 J2
J3
J6
J7
Number Harness
J1 Interface Harness
J2 Interface Harness
J3 Single or Double Pick Module Harness (Motor and Vacuum Solenoid)
J6 Single or Double Pick Module Harness (PA/DW PCB Sensor)
J7 Single or Dual Cassette ID Harness
Serial Number Read

The serial number read (SNR) transport is an optional anti‐fraud feature mounted in pick 1
of the upper double pick module, primarily for the China market. A pair of scanners reads
the denomination and serial number of every note as it passes from the pick to the
presenter, and also takes an image.
SNR Camera on
fixed guide
SNR Camera on
moving guide
There is an SNR control board mounted on the side of the pick module.
CN 3 CN 4
CN 1 CN 2 CIS Head CIS Head
(not used) (not used) (Moving guide) (Fixed guide)
CN 5 CN 6
DC Power Input USB HS
(to dispenser board) (to USB hub)
Note: The scanners are calibrated by the manufacturer and matched to a specific control
board by serial numbers, so boards and scanners must not be swapped out individually.
The Field Replaceable Unit for the Serial Number Read function is the entire pick module.
Electrical System
K
Media Deflector Motor
Carriage Sensor A J
B Purge Bin Sensors
Presenter Carriage PCB Vacuum

Timing Disc J1 Sensor Purge Bin LEDs Interface
J5 HETS
Sensor J2 J4 J3 Carriage Position
Sensor 24VDC Presenter
J2 Interlock CIC
J3 J1 Switch
Presenter Relay PCB Carriage
Purge Bin
Motor Motor Width Sensor
Switch
F/A Flex Interface R/A Cam Purge Bin Latch Sensor Divert Gate
C Motor Solenoid
J3
J2
J1
Module Latch Sensor
BAM Motor
J4
Shutter PCB SNT Sensor Board

E
Status Indicator
J16 J1 J2 J3 J4 J5
D Main Motor
(optional) (Exit/Entry)
J15 USB Hub Divert/Transport Sensor
J6
H
+24VDC Main PSU
J7
Divert Gate Flag Sensor
BAM CIC
J8 Pick1 Motor
Timing Disc Sensor

J9
J14
J25 J18
G Quad CIC
F Pick2 Motor
J13 J12 J19 J11 J10
Pick1 Sensor Pick1
Dual Cass ID CIC Solenoid Value
for Cassettes 1 & 2 G L
Pick1 LED
F
Dual Cass ID CIC Pick Module Pick2 Sensor

for Cassettes 3 & 4 for Cassettes 3 & 4 Pick2
Pick2 LED Solenoid Value
L
J1 J2
A Umbilical Flex Harness E SNT Harness J Purge Bin Interface Harness

B Carriage Position Sensor Harness F Dual Cassette ID Harness K Purge Bin Interconnect Harness
C Presenter Harness G Double Pick Module Harness L Interface Harness
D State of Health Harness H BAM CIC Harnes
5/6 Hi Expansion Board ‐ 5 High

Main Control Board
J19 J18
L L
J1 J2
J3
Motor Dual CIC
M
J7 J6
Sensor
N Solenoid Value
5/6 Hi Expansion LED
Board
Single Cass ID CIC
L Interface Harness
M Single Cassette ID Harness
N Single Pick Module Harness
Sensors
Front Access Carriage
Carriage Open Carriage Closed
Presenter Timing Disc

Sensor Carriage Flag
Rear Access Carriage Carriage Position
Sensor
Bunch Pre-Exit Exit
Purge Bin Sensors

Carriage CIC
Nose Media Deflector Sensors Nose
(Front Access) Stack Entry Sensor (Rear Access)
BAM CIC
Purge Bin
Latch Sensor Clamp Cam
Purge Bin CIC
Present Sensor Divert Entry Sensor Width Sensor
Vacuum Sensor
Pick Sensor
HETS
Cassette Latch Sensor

Pick 1
Cassette ID Sensor
Note Low Sensor
Pick Sensor LED
Pick 2
Double Pick Module
(typical)
Pick Line Pick Line

Position Sensor Position Sensor
D Wheel Shaft
D Wheel Shaft
Position Sensor
Position Sensor
Quad CIC Board
Dual CIC Board
Single Pick Module Pick Sensor
Cassette Latch Sensor

Pick 5
Cassette ID Sensor
Note Low Sensor
Pick Sensor LED
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error Messages
The following error messages are reported by the module. Refer to the sections 'Module
Replacement' and 'Adjustments' for detailed instructions on FRU actions. To de‐code
specific M_Status and M_Data use the Status Code Translator Tool available from
http://www.infoprod.ncr.com or refer to Diagnostic Status Code Notebook Volume 1
(B006‐6273).
Control Board
Module ID: 1
Error M Possible Root Causes Isolation Resolution

Status
NVRAM access failure 1 NV RAM corrupt Inspect control Replace control
Faulty control pcb board board
USB comms failure 2 Check USB connections Inspect harness Push connector
home
Faulty USB harness Replace USB
harness
No power to device Push connector
home
Faulty control PCB Replace PCB
I2C comms failure 3 Faulty I2C connections Inspect harness Inspect harness
connections connections
Faulty I2C harness Inspect harness Replace harness
No power to device Inspect power Inspect power
harness harness
Faulty shutter Run SysApp Replace shutter
diagnostic test
Instance ID not configured 6 Dual dispense instance not configured N/A Configure
instance in
SysApp
Non authorised dispenser 8 Non authorised dispenser control board Authorise device
control board fitted fitted in SysApp
Device not authenticated 9 Device not authenticated at installation
or control pcb replacement

Status
All cassettes empty or N/A Cassettes empty or removed Inspect cassettes All cassettes
removed replenished
All cassettes empty, N/A Cassettes empty, removed or badly Inspect cassettes All cassettes
removed or badly loaded loaded replenished
Pick Module
Module ID: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7

Status
ICS activated – replace 4 ICS activated Confirm ICS Replace affected modules
all affected parts triggered
Pick sensor failed 25 Jam under pick sensor Inspect pick Clear jam
(p1) sensor
26 Faulty harness / PCB Run SysApp Replace pick module
(p2) diagnostic test
27 Pick sensor not calibrated Configure pick module
(p3) Faulty control PCB Replace control PCB
Pick arm sensor fault 28 Faulty harness / PCB Run SysApp Replace pick module
29 Faulty pick module Replace pick module
(p5) Incorrectly fitted pick PCB Inspect pick PCB Re-seat pick PCB
30 Faulty control PCB Run SysApp Replace control PCB
D-wheel sensor fault Faulty harness / PCB Run SysApp Replace pick module
Faulty pick module diagnostic test
Incorrectly fitted pick PCB Inspect pick PCB Re-seat pick PCB
Faulty control PCB Run SysApp Replace control PCB
diagnostic test
Pick arm motor fault 45 Poor cassette loading Check cassette Re-load cassette and run
(p1) loading multiple test notes
46
(p2)
47 Faulty pick arm motor Run SysApp Replace pick module
48
(p4)
49 Faulty control PCB Run multiple test Replace control PCB
(p5) notes
50
(p6)

Status
Bill jam at pick sensor 64 Poor media quality/ cassette Inspect pick clear jam/reload
(p1) loading or foreign object present module and cassette/remove foreign
65 cassette object
(p2) Faulty pick transport Inspect pick Replace pick module
66 module
(p3)
67
(p4) Faulty cassette Inspect cassette Replace cassette
68
(p5) Faulty pick sensor Run SysApp Replace pick module
69 diagnostic test
(p6)
Media detected at pick 74 Foreign object at pick sensor Inspect pick Clear foreign object
sensor at wrong time (p1)
75
Poor cassette loading Check cassette Re-load cassette
(p2)
loading
76
(p3)
77 Faulty pick sensor Run SysApp Replace pick module
78
(p5)
79 Faulty cassette Inspect cassette Replace cassette
(p6)
Pick sensor dirty N/A Sensor dirty Inspect sensor Clean sensor
Pick unit missing Faulty harness Inspect harness Replace harness
Faulty CIC sensor Run SysApp Replace pick module
diagnostic test
Pick unit tamper N/A
Pick unit not configured Faulty CIC sensor Run SysApp Replace pick module
diagnostic test
Cassette
Module ID: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13

Status
Cassette not latched 6 Cassette not latched correctly Inspect cassette Rack cassette into device
correctly latch
Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace pick frame
diagnostic test
Faulty cassette latch Inspect latch
Cassette parameters 7 Cassette parameters not N/A Configure cassette in
not configured configured SysApp
Cassette ID sensor 25 Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace pick module
fault (p1) diagnostic test
26 Missing CIC target Inspect cassette CIC Replace cassette
(p2) target location
27
(P3) Faulty CIC target Run SysApp Replace cassette
28 Faulty control PCB diagnostic test Replace control PCB
Cassette latch sensor (p4) Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace pick frame
fault 29 diagnostic test
(p5)
30 Faulty cassette latch Inspect latch
Cassette low sensor (p6) Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace pick module
fault Faulty cassette diagnostic test Replace cassette
Pusher Plate Stalled 81 Poor cassette loading Inspect cassette Re-load cassette
82 contents
83
84
85 Faulty cassette Inspect cassette Replace cassette
86

Status
Cassette empty 81 Cassette empty Inspect cassette Replenish cassette
Too many bad media (p1) Incorrect or poor quality or poorly contents Re-load media / Replenish
items picked 82 loaded media in cassette with correct media
(p2)
83 Incorrect cassette configuration Check note Set note configuration i
(p3) configuration in SysApp
84 SysApp
(p4) HETs not calibrated Confirm correct Configure singularity in
85 singularity SysApp
(p5) Faulty SNT Run SysApp Replace SNT
86 diagnostic test
(p6)
Unable to learn Incorrect or poor quality or poorly Inspect cassette Re-load media / Replenish
media parameters loaded media in cassette contents with correct media
Faulty SNT Run SysApp Replace SNT
diagnostic test
Too many Incorrect or poor quality or poorly Inspect cassette Re-load media / Replenish
consecutive mis- loaded media in cassette contents with correct media
picks Faulty / worn suction cups Inspect suctions Replace suction cups
cups
Vacuum filter blocked Run SysApp Replace vacuum filter
Vacuum system fault diagnostic test Replace motor / pump
module
Faulty pick module Replace pick module
Faulty pressure sensor Replace presenter
Cassette removed N/A Cassette removed Inspect cassette Insert cassette
location
Cassette low Cassette low Inspect cassette Replenish cassette
contents
Cassette not N/A
configured
Purge Bin
Module ID: 14
Error M Status Possible Root Causes Isolation Resolution

Bin removed 6 Bin removed Inspect bin location Insert bin
Faulty bin present switch Run SysApp diagnostic test Replace presenter
Bin not latched correctly Bin not inserted fully Inspect bin latch Rack bin into device
Faulty bin latch Run SysApp diagnostic test Replace presenter
Faulty bin latch sensor
Divert Area
Module ID: 15

Bin full 91 Bin compartment full Inspect bin compartment Empty bin (all compartments)
Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp diagnostic test Replace SNT
Bin nearly full N/A Bin compartment full Inspect bin compartment Empty bin (all compartments)
Reject Area
Module ID: 16

Bin full 92 Bin compartment full Inspect bin compartment Empty bin (all compartments)
Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp diagnostic test Replace SNT
Bin nearly full N/A Bin compartment full Inspect bin compartment Empty bin (all compartments)
Retract Area
Module ID: 17

Status
Bin retract operations limit 6 Bin compartment Inspect bin Empty bin (all
exceeded full compartment compartments)
Bin full 93 Bin compartment Inspect bin Empty bin (all
full compartment compartments)
Faulty harness / Run SysApp diagnostic Replace SNT
sensor test
Bin nearly full N/A Bin compartment Inspect bin Empty bin (all
full compartment compartments)
Carriage
Module ID: 18
See also ‘Troubleshooting Procedures’ for detailed guidance on diagnosing the cause of
faults in the carriage.

Status
Carriage bunch sensor fail 22 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’
Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp diagnostic Replace carriage
test
Jam in carriage Inspect carriage Clear jam
Foreign object in Clear foreign object
carriage
Faulty carriage Run SysApp diagnostic Replace carriage
Faulty umbilical test Replace umbilical
Carriage pre-exit sensor fail 22 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’
test
carriage
Carriage exit sensor fail 22 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’
test
carriage
Carriage position sensor fail 22 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’
test
Foreign object in Inspect carriage Clear foreign object
carriage
Faulty umbilical Run SysApp diagnostic Replace umbilical
test

Status
Carriage home position 22 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’
sensor fail Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp diagnostic Replace presenter
test
Missing target Inspect carriage target Replace carriage
location
Faulty target Run SysApp diagnostic
Faulty control PCB test Replace control PCB
Carriage belt timing disk fail 22 Broken timing disk Run SysApp diagnostic Replace carriage
test
Carriage drive motor fail 42 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’
Faulty motor / harness test
Faulty presenter tracks Inspect tracks Replace presenter

Foreign object in Inspect presenter Clear foreign object
presenter
test
Carriage belt motor fail 42 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’
Faulty motor / harness Run SysApp diagnostic Replace carriage
test
Faulty carriage timing Inspect timing disk
disk
test
Carriage Jammed 42 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’
Faulty motor / harness test
Faulty presenter tracks Inspect tracks Replace presenter or

nose
Foreign object in Inspect presenter Remove foreign object
presenter
test

Status
Media jam at the bunch 62 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’
sensor Jam or foreign object in Inspect carriage Clear jam or remove
carriage foreign object
Media jam at the pre-exit 62 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’
sensor Jam or foreign object in Inspect carriage Clear jam or remove
Media jam at the exit sensor 62 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’
Jam or foreign object in Inspect carriage Clear jam or remove
Bunch sensor is dirty N/A Sensor dirty Run SysApp diagnostic Clean sensor
Pre-exit sensor is dirty test
Exit sensor is dirty

Carriage tamper N/A
Too many consecutive splays N/A Poor quality currency Inspect cassette Replenish cassette
in carriage contents
Splay threshold set Check splay threshold Set splay threshold
incorrectly
Foreign object in Inspect carriage Remove foreign object
carriage
test
Single Note Transport

Module ID: 19

Status
HETS sensor fail 21 Faulty harness / Run SysApp Replace SNT
sensor diagnostic test
Faulty control PCB
Width sensor fail Jam in SNT Inspect SNT Clear jam
Sensor dirty Inspect sensor Clean sensor
Sensor not Run SysApp Calibrate device
calibrated diagnostic test
ulty harness / Replace SNT
sensor
Main timing disk sensor fail Jam in SNT Inspect SNT Clear jam
Faulty harness / Run SysApp Replace SNT
Faulty SNT timing Inspect SNT
disk
Stacker entry sensor failed Jam in SNT Inspect SNT Clear jam
SNT
Divert bin entry sensor failed Jam in SNT Inspect SNT Clear jam
SNT

Status
Media deflector home sensor failed 21 Jam in SNT Inspect SNT Clear jam
SNT
Faulty SNT
Media deflector extended sensor failed 21 Jam in SNT Inspect SNT Clear jam
SNT
Faulty SNT
Divert gate fail / divert gate sensor fault 21, Jam in SNT Inspect SNT Clear jam
41 Faulty harness / Run SysApp Replace SNT
Faulty SNT solenoid
Media deflector failed 41 Jam in SNT Inspect SNT Clear jam
SNT
Faulty SNT
Divert Gate Jam at Divert Jam in SNT Inspect SNT Clear jam
SNT
Faulty SNT

Status
Unrecoverable media jam in the SNT 61 Jam in SNT Inspect SNT Clear jam
Misaligned belts Re-seat belts
Damaged belts Replace SNT
Unrecoverable media jam between pick Jam in vertical Inspect vertical Clear jam
modules and SNT transport transport
Misaligned belts Inspect SNT and Re-seat belts
Damaged belts Pick Replace SNT / Pick
Media detected at HETS sensor at wrong 70 Poor cassette Inspect cassette Re-load cassette
time loading contents
Foreign object in Inspect SNT / Pick Remove foreign
SNT / Pick object
Media detected at width sensor at wrong Poor cassette Inspect cassette
time loading contents
Foreign object in Inspect SNT / Pick Clear jam
SNT / Pick
HETS calibration out with acceptable N/A Wrong media Inspect cassette Replenish cassette
range loaded contents
Wrong singularity Confirm correct Configure singularity
configured singularity in SysApp
Faulty HETs sensor Run SysApp Replace SNT
diagnostic test
Stacker entry sensor is dirty Sensor dirty Inspect sensor Clean sensor
Divert bin entry sensor is dirty
Width sensor is dirty
HETS sensor is dirty
SNT tamper N/A N/A N/A
Presenter
Module ID: 20

Status
Interlock 5 Device not fully racked into safe Inspect device Rack device into safe
disconnected Faulty interlock switch Run SysApp Replace presenter
diagnostic test
Faulty module rack Inspect module Replace module rack
rack

Status
Presenter 7 Presenter learn routine N/A Run learn hardware in
configuration required SysApp
unknown
Clamp sensor failed 8 Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace presenter
diagnostic test
Missing CIC target Inspect Replace cassette
cassette CIC
target location
Faulty CIC target Run SysApp
Faulty motor / harness diagnostic test Replace presenter
Faulty carriage Inspect Replace carriage
carriage
Purge entry sensor 8 Bin full Inspect bin Empty bin (all
fail compartments)
Foreign object over sensor Inspect sensor Clear foreign object
Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace presenter
diagnostic test
Purge entry sensor 8 Bin full Inspect bin Empty bin (all
fail compartments)
diagnostic test
Retract entry sensor 8 Bin full Inspect bin Empty bin (all
fail compartments)
diagnostic test
Module unlatched 8 Device not fully racked into safe Inspect device Rack device into safe
Faulty interlock switch Run SysApp Replace presenter
diagnostic test
Faulty module rack Inspect module Replace module rack
rack

Status
Clamp motor failed 9 Faulty motor / harness Run SysApp Replace presenter
diagnostic test
Faulty carriage Inspect Replace carriage
carriage
Faulty clamp sensor Run SysApp Replace presenter
diagnostic test
Main motor failed 9 Faulty motor / harness Run SysApp Replace presenter
diagnostic test
Faulty SNT timing disk Inspect SNT Replace SNT
Faulty presenter Inspect Replace presenter
presenter
Purge entry sensor is N/A Sensor dirty Inspect sensor Clean sensor
dirty
Retract entry sensor Sensor dirty Inspect sensor Clean sensor
is dirty
Presenter tamper N/A N/A N/A
Exit Shutter
Module ID: 21

Status
I2C communications 3 Check I2C connections Inspect harness Re-plug harness
fault connections
Faulty I2C harness Inspect harness Replace I2C harness
Faulty shutter Run SysApp Replace Shutter
diagnostic test
No power to device Inspect power Replace power harness
harness
Shutter jam – open 44 Shutter jam Inspect shutter Clear jam
Shutter jam – closed
Shutter tamper N/A N/A
Suction Cups
Module ID: 22

Status
Suction cups on pick N/A Suction cups damaged / worn Inspect suction Replace Suction cups
module 1 must be cups and check
replaced soon pick counter
Suction cups on pick
module 2 must be
replaced soon
module 3 must be
replaced soon
module 4 must be
replaced soon
module 5 must be
replaced soon
module 6 must be
replaced soon
Media Aligner
Module ID: 23

Status
Media Aligner sensor 31 Jam in carriage Inspect Clear jam
fail Foreign object in carriage carriage Clear foreign object
Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace Media Aligner
Faulty motor / harness diagnostic test
Faulty carriage Replace carriage

Media Aligner motor 51 Jam in carriage Inspect Clear jam
fail Foreign object in carriage carriage Clear foreign object
Faulty carriage Run SysApp Replace carriage
Faulty motor / harness diagnostic test Replace Media Aligner
Vacuum System
Module ID: 24

Status
Vacuum sensor fault 32 Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace presenter core or
diagnostic test main PCB.
Vacuum system fail 52 Faulty vacuum pipe work Replace presenter or
pneumatic tubing or equal
T connector or 90 degree
vacuum connector or air
filter.
Vacuum system N/A Faulty vacuum pipe work Replace presenter or
failing pneumatic tubing or equal
T connector or 90 degree
vacuum connector or air
filter.
Faulty vacuum pump Replace motor and pump
assembly.
Serial Number Read

Module ID: 25

Status
SNR Transport open N/A SNR Transport not latched Inspect SNR Close SNR Transport
Transport
USB Serial Number Build up of dirt on SNR Inspect SNR Clean SNR Camera
too many invalid Camera
characters
USB Serial Number
too many invalid
serial numbers
USB Serial Number N/A
reader de-
configured

Status
Communication 96 Communications connection to Check comms Reconnect comms or
failure to SNR device SNR board disconnected connections to repair cable
SNR board on
pick module
USB Serial Number Control board failure Replace SNR device
Reader control
board failure
USB Serial Number Fixed guide flex circuit not Check flex Reconnect flex circuit.
Reader fixed guide connected. Faulty camera or circuit Replace pick module if
camera failure (top control board. connection at necessary.
CIS) fixed guide and
at control
board
USB Serial Number Moving guide flex circuit not Check flex
Reader moving guide connected. Faulty camera or circuit
camera failure control board. connection at
(bottom CIS) moving guide
and at control
board
Too many Build up of dirt on SNR Camera Inspect SNR Clean SNR Camera
consecutive count Camera
mismatches
Additional troubleshooting checks and resolutions for carriage errors (M_STATUS 22, 42,
43 or 62).
Carriage Alignment
Incorrect alignment can be indicated by carriage drive motor failures (M_STATUS 42),
carriage jams (M_STATUS 62) and presenter clamp jams (M_STATUS 43).
l Delivery failures may also occur due to carriage not being correctly positioned in the
present position.
l Check that the carriage tie bar is parallel to the dispenser nose. Anything more than
2mm deviation when the tie bar is level with the dispenser nose is not parallel. If not,
remove and re‐insert the carriage, referring to ‘FRU Module Removal and
Replacement’ section. While the carriage is removed, carry out the checks listed in
section ‘Checks with Carriage Removed from Presenter’.
Carriage Motor Cover

An incorrectly fitted or missing motor cover can be indicated by carriage jams between park
and present (M_STATUS 42, Byte 3 0A).
l Check that the motor cover does not collide with the presenter nose.
l Ensure that the cover is snapped into place around all the edges and that the screws
are fitted.
Carriage Umbilical Cable

A damaged or incorrectly fitting umbilical in the carriage will be indicated by carriage motor
failures (M_STATUS 42) or carriage sensor failures (M_STATUS 22).
l Check for damage to the umbilical, replace if necessary.
l Check that the umbilical is fitted correctly in the connectors in the presenter and in the
carriage. Also check that it is fitted into the correct connector in the carriage.
Front access connector Rear access connector
Carriage Plates Parallel When Open

Incorrect carriage plate opening can be indicated by presenter clamp jams (M_STATUS
43).
l Check that the front edge of the lower carriage plate is parallel to the upper plate
when the carriage opens. Use the ‘Clamp (with Carriage at Home Position)’
diagnostic test and observe the movement. The lower plate should not be more than
20mm from parallel with upper plate.
l If it does not open evenly, carry out the following checks:

l Is the carriage aligned correctly? ‐ see Carriage Alignment in this section.
l Are the carriage magnets configured correctly? Re‐configure them if possible,
o replace the carriage is magnets are missing.
Closed cam
(driven) side
Open cam
(non-driven)
side
If the carriage still does not open evenly following the above checks, remove the carriage
from the presenter ‐ refer to ‘Removing the Carriage’ in the FRU Removal and
Replacement section ‐ and follow the instructions in section ‘Checks with Carriage
Removed from Presenter’.
Carriage Movement
Problems with the movement of the carriage can be indicated by carriage jam (M_
STATUS 42).
l Slowly move the carriage manually along the full length of the presenter track in both
directions. Check that the carriage runs smoothly along the track and does not collide
with any components. Remove any obstructions.
l Check that the carriage is aligned correctly ‐ refer to ‘Carriage Alignment’ in this
section.
l Ensure that the Single Note Transport is fitted correctly and that all three mounting
screws are tightened to prevent the carriage colliding with the SNT. Refer to
‘Replacing the SNT’ in the FRU Removal and Replacement section.
If the carriage still does not move smoothly following the above checks, remove the
carriage ‐ refer to ‘Removing the Carriage’ in the FRU Removal and Replacement section ‐
and then follow the instructions in section ‘Checks with Carriage Removed from Presenter’
Checks with Carriage Removed from Presenter

l Are there any damaged or dislocated links or arms on the carriage? If so, replace the
carriage.
l Is there any damage on the lower link mount? If so, replace it (part number 445‐
0757100 ‘service assy ‐ lower linkage mount with carriage lower linkage’).
l Are there any loose, damaged or missing screws in the lower plate shaft? Replace
any missing screws (check none have fallen into the carriage). Tighten screws to 0.45
Nm.
l Rotate the green thumbwheel to check that all the belts on both the upper and lower
plate rotate. If they do not, check that the carriage belt drive shafts and pulleys are all
in place and are not damaged. Replace any damaged components if possible, or the
carriage.
UPPER PLATE LOWER PLATE
Pulley
Belts Belts
Pulley and drive

shafts
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0 Diagnostics
The Control Board LEDs are not used for diagnostics.
There are no switches on the Control Board.
Level 1 Diagnostics
Test Description
MENU This displays a menu of the all the other Applets to allow the user to select one.
CLEAR Performs the default Clear operation.
CLEAR TO Performs a Clear operation with the destination set to Retract area.
RETRACT AREA
SET NOTES Allows the user to set the number of bills to be picked from each cassette. Only prompts for
configured cassettes. If the total number of bills exceeds the currently configured maximum
the command fails. A default of 5 bills for each configured and present cassette is used if no
number is entered
STACK Performs a Stack of the bills configured via Set Notes (above).
PRESENT Performs a Present of bills previously stacked.
DISPENSE Performs Stack and Present operations consecutively. The number of bills picked is
configured via Set Notes.
LEARN NOTE Performs a Learn Measurements operation for the specified cassette type. (Only configured
PARAMETERS cassettes are offered for selection). 40 bills are picked and the parameters measured, with
the new and existing parameters being returned in T_DATA.
SINGLE NOTE Performs the SNT Diagnostic test.
TRANSPORT
SELF TEST Performs a Self Test operation. Menus are displayed to allow the destination to be selected
and which pick units to pick from. The shutter is then operated if requested.
SHUTTER The Shutter Diagnostic test is performed.
SENSOR/SWITCH A Read Sensors Diagnostic test for all sensors is performed. The following options are offered:
STATUS Normal reading with LEDs on
A/D reading of sensors in the on state
A/D blocked threshold values
CARRIAGE The Carriage Diagnostic test is performed.
GUIDANCE This test enables the various LED states / configurations to be exercised via Set Guidance Light
LIGHTS commands. Menus are provided to allow LED and flash rates to be selected.
CLAMP The Clamp Diagnostic test is performed. The following options are offered:
Clamp test with carriage at home
Clamp test with carriage in safe position
PICK VALVE The Pick Valve Diagnostic test is performed for the selected pick unit.
PICK ARM The Pick Arm Diagnostic test is performed for the selected pick unit.
DIVERT GATE The Divert Gate Diagnostic test is performed.
MEDIA The Media Deflector Diagnostic test is performed.
DEFLECTOR
Test Description
PREPARE FOR The Prepare for shipment command is executed.
SHIPMENT
RUN TO RUN Performs the following sequence of tests:
l Clear (not performed when looping)
l Sensor / Switch Status (default operation)
l Carriage
l Self Test
l Dispense
l Clear
RUN TO RUN 2 Performs the following sequence of tests:
l Clamp Test
l Carriage Test
RUN TO RUN 3 Performs the following sequence of tests:
l Clamp Test
l Stack
l Present
l Half Retract (when looping on does Present/Half Retract 100 times)
l Retract
PERFORMANCE Offers a menu with the following options:
l FRU Performance
l Device Performance.
On selecting FRU Performance the following are displayed for each FRU:
l Media Dispensed
l Fatal Errors
l Routine Errors
l Media per Fatal Error
l Media per Routine Error
On selecting Device Performance the following are displayed for the overall device:
l Media Dispensed
l Fatal Errors
l Routine Errors
l Media per Fatal Error
l Media per Routine Error
NOTE IMAGES If SNR hardware is present then all serial numbers, denominations and images will be
displayed for the notes picked from the prior Dispense, Stack or SelfTest command.
RUN TO RUN 4 Performs a clamp diagnostic test followed by a carriage diagnostic test. When in looping
mode, every 50th test also tests the carriage belts.
The Stack, Present, Retract and Dispense tests are not offered unless the lowest cassette
has been removed and re‐inserted (after The Menu Applet, AppletId=0, has been
displayed). This also applies to the Dispense test on a Run to Run test, which is by‐passed
unless these conditions have been met.
Action Requests
This section describes the mechanism sequence following an action request (command)
during normal dispenser operation.
The action requests are:
l Clear
l Stack
l Present
l Retract
l Self Test
l Learn Measurement
l Set Guidance Lights
l Prepare Shipment
l Enable Stack ready
Clear
This causes the device to be cleared of any media which may have been left in the
transport.
The media is transported to the destination requested in the operation, or to the default
location if no destination is provided. Possible destinations are:
l Reject compartment in the purge bin (default)

l Retract compartment in the purge bin
l Present position
Media detected in the single note transport prior to the divert gate will be stacked before
being moved to the required destination.
Media detected in the divert transport path, will be transported to the divert compartment.
If media has been delivered to the purge bin, the carriage will return to its idle position,
ready for the next operation.
If media has been delivered to the present position, the carriage will return to its idle
position once the media has been taken and the Media Taken event sent.
Stack
This causes the number of media items requested to be picked and stacked in the device
ready for presentation to the card holder.
Media which are to be rejected during the operation will be diverted from the main path via
the divert gate and transported to the divert bin. This is done on an individual basis with
good media remaining in the main transport until they reach the stack area.
If Pre‐Present is enabled, after a good stack, the media is clamped in the carriage and
moved to the pre‐present position in readiness for the next operation.
If Pre‐Present is disabled, after a good stack, the media will be left in the stack position to
allow subsequent stack operations to add media to the bundle.
Present
This causes the media which have been previously stacked in the carriage to be moved to a
position where the customer can remove them.
With the exit shutter closed the carriage is driven forward until it reaches the present
position, where it is stopped and the shutter opened. If this is successful the media is driven
forward to be taken by the customer.
When the bundle has been taken, the carriage is returned to its idle position and the shutter
closed.
If a fault occurs which stops the media from reaching the customer, an attempt is made to
clear the media to the reject bin.
Note: The present command may be issued when media is in the half retract position
having previously been retracted there.
Retract
This will cause the media to be drawn back into the carriage and the carriage driven to the
location specified.
The location can be one of the following:
l Retract compartment in the purge bin

l Reject compartment in the purge bin
l Half retract position, if enabled
If media is retracted to the purge bin, the carriage will return to the idle position in
preparation for the next operation.
If media is retracted to the half retract position, the carriage will remain there until a
subsequent present or clear request is invoked.
If no media is detected by the carriage sensors, the carriage will return to the idle position in
preparation for the next operation.
Self Test
The test starts with the carriage in the home position. If it is not in the home position, the
carriage will move to the home position before proceeding.
The following mechanisms are exercised:
l Divert gate
l Pick arms of any pick units not involved in the picking operation
l Pick valve test
l Clamp test if no items are requested from any pick unit
l Carriage diagnostic test
l Shutter, if requested (Shutter is always requested in diagnostics).
l Single Note Transport if no items are requested from any pick unit
l Media deflector test if no items are requested from any pick unit (Items are always
requested in diagnostics).
Any requested media is picked and stacked.
If a bad item is detected, it is diverted by the divert gate to the divert bin and the pick
operation is retried.
The media destination can be either:
l Retract compartment
l Reject compartment
l Half retract position, if enabled
l Present position
l Divert compartment
If media destination is set to Divert, all items (good and bad) will be diverted by the divert
gate to the divert bin. Otherwise they will be stacked and the carriage will be closed and
driven to the media destination.
The carriage will then return to the idle position in preparation for the next stack request.
Learn Measurement
This allows the software to learn the values of the widths and singularities of media at a
specified position.
Media will be picked and transported to the stacker before being transported to the location
specified by the destination attribute.
Refer to the section Currency Evaluation and Qualification Procedure for details of the
procedure.
Set Guidance Lights

There is a red, amber and green status LED that can be individually set to off, on solid or
flashing. This request allows the state of the individual status LEDs to be set.
If the ‘Enable Default Lights’ device setting is set, the command is not performed and the
default LED signalling is performed.
Prepare for Shipment

This request prepares the dispenser hardware for shipment.
The following steps are taken:
l All pick arms are moved to a suitable angle for shipment

l The carriage is moved away from home
l The clamp cam is moved to its shipping position
l The carriage is moved back to home
On the next operation which attempts to open the clamp (e.g. clear), the carriage will be
moved off home and the cam returned to the normal present position, to allow the clamp to
be opened.
Enable Stack Ready

This will enable the dispenser hardware for a stack command.
The following steps are taken when enabling stack ready:
l Move carriage to home position

l Open clamp
The command can also be used to cancel the enable stack ready request.
The following steps are taken when cancelling:
l Close clamp
l Return to idle position
Calibrate Sensors
This will re‐calibrate sensors when an Field Replacement Unit (FRU) has been replaced.
As the actual readings of the sensors are used to calibrate, the device must be clear of
media.
Diagnostics Tests
This section describes all the diagnostic tests that can be used to exercise different
components of the dispenser.
The tests are:
l Pick Arm
l Pick Valve
l Shutter
l Divert Gate
l SNT
l Carriage
l Clamp
l Media Deflector
l Read Sensors
Pick Arm Test

Tests the pick arm operation for the specified pick unit.
The test is performed by moving the pick arm through a complete cycle, determined by the
current pick profile, and measuring its position via its CIC sensor. The pick arm is moved at
the same speed as it is moved during a real pick cycle.
The 5 phases of the pick cycle are:
l Move to initial home position

l Move to each of the 4 positions (finishing at home)
The CIC sensor reading and Pick Arm position in degrees are reported for each phase in
the resulting event.
Cassettes do not need to be removed to perform this test.
Pick Valve Test
This will test for leaks and faulty parts in the vacuum system.
During the test, the dispenser interlock must be in the override position; cassettes can
remain in the dispenser.
First check the presenter zone:
1. Disconnecting the tubing just below the filter and seal the opening in the filter
assembly with your finger. Make sure no dust from the filter falls down into the
tubing.
2. In the test menu, select First Pick Module, then Test pressure ‐ pick arm away from
media, and run the test.
3. The following results will indicate a leak in the presenter zone:
l Either the Closed Running Result or the Closed Static Result is 1.
l The Closed Running Result and the Closed Static Result are both 0, but the
Closed Running Pressure is above 75% of the Local Atmospheric Pressure.
l The difference between the Closed Static Pressure and the Closed Running
Pressure is more than 100.
If a leak in the presenter zone is detected, replace the motor and pump assembly.
4. The following results will indicate an electronics fault that will require a replacement
of the presenter or main control board:
l There is no difference between the local atmospheric pressure reading and the
closed running pressure reading, but there is suction detected at the filter.
l After running the same test again, there is variation in the local atmospheric
pressure readings.
If there are no issues with the presenter zone, reconnect the hose to the filter and check for
leaks in the upstream zone:
1. In the test menu, select First Pick Module, then Test pressure ‐ pick arm away from
media, and run the test.
2. The following results will indicate a leak in the upstream zone:
l Either the Closed Running Result or the Closed Static Result is 1.
l Both the Closed Running Result and the Closed Static Result are 0, but the
Closed Running Pressure is above 75% of the Local Atmospheric Pressure.

l The difference between the Closed Static Pressure and the Closed Running
Pressure is more than 100.

3. If a leak in the upstream zone is detected, it can be isolated by disconnecting the
tubing at each pick valve in turn, starting at the lowest point, and seal the end of the
tubing with your finger. Then re‐run the test for that pick valve.
4. The following results will indicate a leak in the upstream zone:
l If the Closed Running Result and the Closed Static Result are both 0 and the
difference between the Closed Static Pressure and Closed Running Pressure is
less than 100, the location of the leak has been found. Replace the damaged
hose and re‐run the test.
If there are no issues with the upstream zone, reconnect all hoses and check for leaks in
the downstream zone:
1. Place a very good quality note in the cassette so that the suction cups will seal
against it during the test.
2. In the test menu, select the pick line and then Test pressure ‐ pick arm in contact with
media.
3. After running the test, if either the Open Valve Result is 0 or the Open Valve Result
is 1 but the difference between Open Valve Pressure and Closed Static Pressure
more than 300, there is a leak in the downstream zone between the pick valve and
the media.
Either, re‐seat suction cups, replace suction cups or replace pick module FRU.
Pick Valve Test Results
Value Description
Local Local Atmospheric Pressure (mbar).
Atmospheric
Pressure
Closed Running 0 = Base pressure reached
Result 1 = Base pressure not reached
Closed Running Time (ms) to reach Closed Running Pressure in milliseconds
Time
Closed Running Base pressure (mbar) or lowest pressure reached. Base pressure is the point at which the
Pressure rate of change in pressure has not fallen for 200 ms.
Closed Static 0 = Vacuum retained
Result 1 = Vacuum leaked, reached local atmospheric pressure.
Closed Static Time (ms) to reach Closed Static Pressure with all valves closed, motor and pump stopped.
Time
Closed Static Pressure (mbar) reached during Closed Static Time.
Pressure
Open Valve 0 = Vacuum leaked, reached local atmospheric pressure
Result 1 = Vacuum retained
Open Valve Time Time (ms) to reach Open Valve Pressure with selected valve open and all other valves
closed, motor and pump stopped.
Open Valve Pressure reached during Open Valve Time with selected valve open and all other valves
Pressure closed, motor and pump stopped.
Shutter Test
This tests the shutter hardware operation by driving it to both open and closed positions.
The initial state for the shutter is the closed position, so an attempt will be made to put the
shutter into its initial state prior to test start.
The test is performed by driving the shutter in the open direction, measuring the length of
time taken to move between closed and open; the shutter position sensors are then read
and verified in this position. After a two second delay the shutter is driven in the close
direction, measuring the length of time taken to move, and the position sensors again read
and verified.
Divert Gate Test

This test verifies the divert gate operation.
The test is performed by driving the divert gate to the divert position, measuring the length
of time taken to move between stack and divert. The divert gate position sensor is then
read and verified in this position. After a two second delay the divert gate is allowed to
return to the stack position, measuring the length of time taken to move, and the position
sensor is again read and verified.
SNT Test
This test verifies the operation of the SNT. The motor is driven in normal operating direction
only.
The test is performed by measuring the number of timing disk and D‐Wheel interrupts over
a 2 second period. The transport speed is stabilised by running it up to speed for an initial
period of 2 seconds before the measurement starts.
If the observed number of interrupts is outwith the expected by more than ± 1, the test will
fail.
Carriage Test
This test verifies the operation of the carriage for diagnostic purposes. It tests the carriage
movement to different locations, records flag opacity and on‐board sensors at each, and
tests the carriage belt drive motor.
It is recommended that the test only be performed when there is no media in the carriage,
as it will not be managed appropriately.
When the request is received, the carriage and clamp cam will be driven accordingly to set
the carriage in the home position with clamp closed in preparation for the test to begin.
The test is performed by driving the carriage from the HOME to PRESENT, then to RFP,
then to REJECT positions at normal operating speed, coming to rest momentarily at each
location. The time taken to move between positions, the opacity of the flag and the onboard
sensors values are measured at each location.
At each of PRESENT, RFP and PURGE positions, the carriage belt drive motor can be
enabled in one of the following ways, by changing the Command Data:
l No belt drive
l Full Belt Drive Test – at a slow speed for 2 seconds in each direction and repeated at a
fast speed, counting the number of timing disk interrupts for each phase (default).
l Min Belt Drive Test – at a slow speed for 2 seconds in the reverse direction only,
counting the number of timing disk interrupts
There will be 3 carriage diagnostic events as a result of sending this request, one for each
phase of the test.
At the end of the test, the carriage will be returned to its HOME position, in readiness for the
next operation.
Clamp Test
This test verifies the operation of the clamp. The clamp mechanism consists of:
l Carriage
l Cam, stepper motor and CIC sensor,
l Media Aligner, stepper motor and CIC sensor.
The Clamp open operation consists of:
l Retract the Media Deflector

l Retract the Media Aligner to its home position and verify via its CIC sensor.
l Drive the Cam to its open position and verify via its CIC sensor.
l Drive the Media Aligner to its extended position and verify via its CIC sensor.
This Clamp close operation consists of:
l Retract the Media Deflector

l Retract the Media Aligner to its home position and verify via its CIC sensor.
l Drive the Cam to its closed position and verify via its CIC sensor.
The test can be performed as described in the following sections.
Default Clamp Test

The default test is performed with the carriage at the HOME position. The carriage will be
moved automatically to this position if it is not already there.
The clamp is closed, opened and closed again. Each stage of the operation is verified via
the CIC sensors.
Without carriage at home

This test operates the clamp in the same manner as the default test, but does not require
the carriage at the HOME position. It does not verify the operation of the lower carriage
plate. It does not exercise the BAM.
The carriage will be moved automatically out of the way before the test is started if
necessary. The carriage is not returned to HOME at the end of this test to allow the test to
be looped.
No Media Aligner Test

This test operates the clamp in the same manner as the default test, but does not exercise
the Media Aligner except for retracting it to home if necessary at the start of the test.
Media Deflector Test

This test verifies the media deflector operation for diagnostic purposes.
The test is performed by driving the deflector to the extended position, measuring the
length of time taken to move between the home and extended positions. The media
deflector position sensor is then read and verified in this position. After a two second delay
the deflector is driven to the home position, measuring the length of time taken to move,
and the position sensor is again read and verified.
Read Sensors Test

This command reads the state of all sensors and switches on the dispenser.
Sensors can be read as follows:
l normally – with LEDs switched on

l following a sensor reset and a delay of 250 ms
l when the LEDs have been switched on for a short time then off
l the A/D sensor reading can be returned
l the A/D blocked threshold or PWM drive level
The reset operation will recalibrate the sensors to obtain the blocked threshold regardless
of the current threshold level.
Sensor Can be reset Can be Switched on/off

Pick sensors Yes Yes
Main motor timing disk sensor No Yes
Stack entry sensor Yes Yes
Single note divert entry sensor Yes Yes
Width measurement sensors Yes Yes
Deflector sensors No Yes
Carriage sensors Yes No
Purge and RFP entry sensors Yes No
Diver gate position sensor Yes No
The sensors can be reported in individual groups as specified in the sensor group attribute
or all groups reported. On receipt of this request the sensors are read by the software, then
the event for an individual group is (or events for each group are) sent. See T_Data below
for details of responses to sensor requests.
In the case of the A/D blocked threshold or PWM drive level operation, some sensors have
a fixed threshold with variable PWM LED drive. For these sensors, the PWM LED drive
level is reported. These sensors are:
l Pick Sensors
l Stack entry sensor
l Single note divert entry sensor
l Width measurement sensors
In this case the Carriage position sensor will report the threshold value which is the upper
limit of the sensor clear state. The other thresholds for this sensor are constant in the
firmware and cannot be read.
Note: The Read Sensors request is provided for diagnostic purposes only and should not
be used during a transaction to determine status. The status of the device is determined by
issuing a Get Information request
T_Data
Single Note Transport Sensors
Byte Sensor Value

0-1 HETS left A/D value from left-hand thickness sensor. Range 0 - 1023.
2-3 HETS right A/D value from right-hand thickness sensor. Range 0 - 1023.
4- HETS compensation factor Internal HETS compensation factor per cassette type, left then right.
27 Range 0 to 255.
28 Note width sensor left Range 0 to 255.
29 Note width sensor right Range 0 to 255.
30 Stack entry Range 0 to 255.
31 Divert bin entry Range 0 to 255.
32 Main timing disk Range 0 to 255.
33 Divert gate position Divert gate position CO sensor:
0 = stack position
1 = divert position
2 = neither position.
34 Media deflector home Value of deflector home position sensor:
position 0 = at home position
1 = not at home position.
35 Media deflector extended Value of deflector extended position sensor:
position 0 = at extended position
1 = not at extended position.
36 5 volt supply to SNT Voltage supply to SNT (fused) in units of 0.1 V. Range 0 to 255.
Presenter Sensors
Byte Sensor Value

0 Purge bin latch 0 = latch open
1 = latch closed.
1 Purge bin present 0 = bin removed
1 = bin present
2 - Purge bin entry Value of sensor at entry to purge bin. The four bytes contain the value of each
5 sensor of the four physical sensors. Range 0 to 255.
6 - Clamp position Clamp CIC sensor position in degrees:
7 sensor 270 = closed/at present position
235 = open/at stack position
170 = at parked position.
Any other values indicate in -between positions.
Byte Sensor Value

8 - Clamp position Clamp CIC sensor amplitude. Range 0 to 65535.
9 sensor
10 - Media Aligner Media Aligner CIC sensor position in millimetres. This is a (signed) INT16
11 position sensor value. Range 0 to 65535.
12 - Media Aligner Media Aligner CIC sensor amplitude. Range 0 to 65535.
13 position sensor
Carriage Sensor Values Event
Byte Sensor Value

0 Carriage belts 0 = clear
timing disk 1 = blocked.
1 Carriage position 1 = at purge position
sensor 2 = at present position
3 = at retract position
4 = between flags (clear).
2 - Carriage home Carriage home CIC sensor position in millimetres. This is a (signed) INT16
3 sensor value. Range 0 to 65535.
4 - Carriage home Carriage home CIC sensor amplitude.
5 sensor
6 Bunch 0 = clear
1= blocked.
7 Pre-exit 0 = clear
1= blocked.
8 Exit sensor 0 = clear
1= blocked.
Peripheral Sensors
Byte Sensor Value

0 Interlock status 0 = interlock closed
1 = interlock open.
1 Module latched status 0 = module latched
1 = module unlatched.
2 ICS status 0 - ICS ok
1 = ICS fired.
3 Shutter open sensor Status of shutter open sensor.
4 Shutter closed sensor Status of shutter closed sensor.
Byte Sensor Value

5 Pick module supply Status of 5V supply to pick uinits (fused) in units of 0.1V. Range 0 to 128.
voltage
6 Board ID Board hardware revision identifier. Range 0 to 15.
7 Ambient temperature Value of ambient temperature sensor on control board in degree Celsius.
Range o to 255.
8 Power supply Status of 24V supply (fused). Value 0 to 1.
9 - Vacuum level Value of vacuum sensor in mbar. Range 0 to 255.
10
11 Presenter Type of nose fitted to presenter chassis:
configuration 01 = R/A 411 mm
02 = R/A 297 mm
03 = RA 179 mm
11 = F/A 162 mm
12 = F/A 144 mm.
12 Carriage configuration Type of carriage fitted in presenter:
1 = front access
2 = rear access.
Pick Unit Sensors
Byte Sensor Value

0 Pick unit position Position of pick unit reported. 1 = top.
1 Pick sensor Pick sensor reading. Range 0 to 255.
2-3 Pick arm position sensor Pick arm CIC position reading in degrees.
4-5 Pick arm position sensor Pick arm CIC amplitude reading.
6-7 D wheel position sensor D wheel CIC position reading in degrees.
8-9 D wheel position sensor D wheel CIC amplitude reading.
10 - 11 Cassette ID sensor 0 = not present
1 to 12 = valid cassette id.
12 - 13 Cassette ID sensor Cassette ID CIC sensor amplitude.
14 Cassette low sensor 1 = low.
15 Cassette latch sensor 1 = latched.
Error Codes
M_Status and M_Data
To de‐code the data use the Status Code Translator Tool (available from
www.infoprod.ncr.com) or refer to Diagnostic Status Code Notebook (B006‐6273).
Tallies
Tally Description
PICKED 1 Number of items successfully picked from pick position 1.
PKATMPT1 Number of times a pick attempt failed from pick position 1.
PKFAIL 1 Number of times a pick fail occurred from pick position 1.
SIZEERR1 Number of times an item of media was rejected because a size error was detected from pick
position 1.
position 2.
position 3.
position 4.
position 5.
position 6.
DOUBLE 1 Number of times a double was detected and rejected from pick position 1.
Tally Description
REJECT 1 Total number of items picked and rejected from pick position 1.
STACKOPS Total number of stack operations attempted including stacks as part of self test and learn
measurements operations.
PRESENTS Total number of present operations attempted.
RETRACTS Total number of retract operations attempted.
CLEAROPS Total number of clear operations attempted.
CAR OPS Total number of carriage operations attempted.
CAR FAIL Total number of times carriage failed to reach desired position.
BELT OPS Total number of carriage belt operations attempted.
BELTFAIL Total number of failed carriage belt operations.
CAM OPS Total number of CAM operations (lower, raise, rotate).
CAM FAIL Total number of failed CAM operations.
SHUT OPS Total number of shutter operations attempted.
SHUTFAIL Number of times a shutter fault has been detected.
COMM TRY Number of communications attempts between the core driver and the device.
COMM RTR Number of communication attempts which required a retry before succeeding.
COMMFAIL Number of communications attempts which failed after retries were exhausted.
SER READ Number of Serial Numbers Scan Operations
INVNOTES Number of Invalid Notes Scanned
SERCHARS Number of Serial Number Read Characters
INVCHARS Number of Invalid Characters
STRAPPING
There are no strapping or DIP switches on this device.
ADJUSTMENTS
Pick Module Timing Procedure
4–High Dispenser
Place the upper double pick module on the pick support frame and close the two latches
securing the module to the presenter core.
1. Move the top timing gear to the number 1 position. This will align the lower timing
gear to the number 2 position as shown below.
2. Place the lower double pick module on the pick support frame.
3. Hang the lower double pick module from the upper module without closing the two
latches.
4. On the lower double pick module, move the top timing gear to the number 3 position.
This will align the lower timing gear to the number 4 position.
5. Make sure the four timing gears are correctly aligned from top to bottom (1, 2, 3, 4).
6. Close the two latches securing the lower double pick module to the upper double
pick module.
pick module.
5–High Dispenser
1. Follow steps 1 to 5 of the Pick Module Timing Procedure for 4–High Dispenser.
2. Place the single pick module on the pick support frame.
3. Hang the single pick module from the lower double pick module without closing the
two latches.
4. Make sure the five timing gears are correctly aligned from top to bottom (1, 2, 3, 4,
5).
pick module.
6. Close the two latches securing the single pick module to the lower double pick
module.
Cleaning Serial Number Read Transport Cameras

If SNR is fitted, the SNR transport cameras mounted on the fixed guide and on the moving
guide should be cleaned as part of regular preventive maintenance, especially in dusty
environments. Cleaning will also be required to clear the states of health ‘USB serial
number read too many invalid characters’ or ‘USB serial number read too many invalid
serial numbers’ which are triggered when the number of invalid characters or invalid serial
numbers read reaches the configured thresholds (default 10% and 5% respectively).
Clean the cameras using compressed air or a soft thin brush or cotton bud. Ingrained grime
can be removed using a lint free cloth moistened with soapy water or an alcohol free wipe.
S2 Carriage Offsets for Open and Latchfast Purge Bins

USB Media Dispenser 02.01.00 or above.
The following DWORD registry settings have been defined for the carriage offsets.
Registry location - HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/SOFTWARE/NCR/APTRA Self Service
(NCR Features)/USBMediaDispenser/Operational Parameters.
Registry Setting Open Bin Latchfast Bin

Purge Offset Reject Front 0 35
Purge Offset Retract Front 0 40
Purge Offset Reject Rear 0 29
Purge Offset Retract Rear 0 10
l All registry values in decimal.

l Carriage offsets may be dependent on the size/material of the currency and may need
to be adjusted from those in the table above as required based on local testing. Every
increase or decrease of 1 in value corresponds approximately to 1 mm of travel of the
carriage.
l Maximum Media Size:

No RFP Divider With RFP Divider No RFP Divider With RFP Divider
Reject (PFS) -
85 x 177 85 x 177 85 x 177 85 x 177
Maximum Size
Retract (RFP) -
N/A 85 x 160 N/A 85 x 160
Maximum Size
Latchfast Bin Latch

The bin latch should be adjusted to ensure minimum movement in the bin's position which
will ensure correct latching and minimise jams at the divert entry.
Loosen the two screws securing the bin latchplate as shown below and adjust the
latchplate to reduce the gap shown as much as possible. Hand-tighten the screws then
remove and reinsert the bin to test that the latch still drops easily into position. Increase the
gap slightly if necessary and test again. When the optimum position is achieved, secure the
screws.
JAM CLEARANCE
Refer to the NCR S2 Dispenser Operator Guide (B006‐6889) for jam clearance of the pick
module, SNT, carriage and shutter.
CAUTION
Do not move the carriage while it is in the open (stack) position.
How to move the Carriage to the Closed position

1. Remove the purge bin from the dispenser.
2. From inside the purge bin space, manually retract the BAM.
Media Deflector Fingers

retract position
BAM
retract position
3. Manually retract the Media Deflector Fingers on the SNT.

4. Manually move the primary cam wheel clockwise to the CLOSED position.
CL
O N
SE PE
D OPEN CLOSED O
OPEN Position CLOSED Position
HETS CALIBRATION
Note: Dispensers are shipped pre‐calibrated by the manufacturing plant and are
selfcalibrating on an ongoing basis.
The dispenser maintains an internal compensation factor in NVRAM on the main control
board. This compensation factor allows for differences that exist between the singularities
calculated by different HETS assemblies due to mechanical tolerances.
The dispenser adjusts the HETS compensation factor automatically as bills of a known
singularity value are dispensed. While bills are dispensed, the average of good single bill
singularities is measured over 50 bills. This average is compared to the singularity figure
typed in at installation time and the compensation factor is adjusted accordingly. Initially the
compensation factor is set to 80H (equivalent to 1.00) and this is changed automatically by
the dispenser and updated every 50 bills.
Dispensers will only be calibrated correctly if the correct width and singularity for each type
of currency being dispensed has been entered as described in the Setting Note
Parameters section.
SETTING NODE PARAMETERS

Each currency type being dispensed has a specific width and singularity value that must be
entered in to every ATM dispensing that currency. This applies to initial installation or
whenever the main control board has been changed. The local Professional Services
organisation will provide values for new and existing currencies.
1. Select Self‐Service Configuration option from the Supervisor menu.

2. Select Set Device Configuration option.
3. Select USB Media Dispenser option.
4. Select Note Configuration option.
5. Select SET option.
6. The system will then display the Note Configuration set up menu shown below. The
menu is spread over multiple pages which is navigated using page up and page
down options.
7. The system will then display the Note Configuration set up menu shown below. The
menu is spread over multiple pages which is navigated using page up and page
down options.
8. Enter Note Widths for all Types.
9. To accept all the changes made select OK.
10. The system will display the menu shown below.
To finally confirm the changes, select the ‘Toggle’ side tab to change the NO option to YES
and then select ‘OK’.

The currency parameters are checked for errors as they are entered. If an error is
detected, the error message is shown.
Possible error messages:
l ‘Invalid Size: Valid Range 54‐85’ ‐ Width is outside the permissible range
l ‘Invalid Singularity: Valid Range 0‐254’ ‐ Singularity is outside the permissible range
After five seconds the error message is replaced by the Note Configuration screen,
allowing a valid value to be entered.
CURRENCY EVALUATION QUALIFICATION

PROCEDURE
Note: The currency width and singularity values previously calculated for the S1 Dispenser
are valid for the S2 Dispenser.
The local Professional Services organization must establish the width and singularity
values for each type of currency to be dispensed. The currency evaluation qualification
procedure should only be performed on a calibrated dispenser. Attempting the procedure
on an un‐calibrated dispenser will give incorrect results.
To ensure a dispenser is calibrated, at least 50 bills of a known width and singularity must
be successfully dispensed. These bills may be local currency or test media.
Establishing Singularity and Width

In this procedure you have to cause the ATM to calculate the singularity and width of 40
dispensed bills five times for each currency you wish to evaluate. Due to the nature of the
currency the singularity calculated may vary for each attempt. Add the five figures shown in
the Parameters Option and take the average (divide by five and round to the nearest whole
number) and the answers are the singularity and width values you enter to the ATM and to
all ATMs using the same currency.
To achieve a good singularity figure, the currency loaded for this procedure should
up and upside down (see the following illustration). This allows for the variations in inking.

dispensing from the ATMs. Refer to the S2 Currency Cassette chapter in the
Dispense section of this manual for the method of adjusting cassettes to currency
size.
2. Load at least 200 bills of each denomination of the currency into the cassettes.
3. Insert the cassettes into the dispenser.

5. From the ATM opening menu, select System Application > Self‐Service
Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB Media Dispenser > Note
Configuration.
6. The system will display the following message:
Clearing Dispenser Transport. Please Wait.
7. Select Learn option.
8. The system will display the Note Configuration menu showing the types available as
shown below.
Note: The menus only show the cassette types present in the ATM.
9. There is the option to select each single type in turn, or select All Types.
10. Select Type 1 or All Types.
11. The system will perform the test and display the message:
Learning Cassette Type 1. Please Wait.
If All Types was selected, a message for each type will be displayed.
12. Select Learn.
13. Select Parameters.
14. The system will return to the Note Configuration menu.
15. Record the singularity and width figures for the cassette and type selected or all
cassette types if applicable.
16. Select Cancel to return to the Note Configuration screen.
18. If you selected an single type, repeat steps 11 to 21 until you have five readings of
singularity and width for each cassette type loaded.
19. Add each set of figures and divide the total by the number of cassettes to obtain an
average singularity and width for each cassette type.
20. Select the Set option from the Note Configuration menu
21. Modify as appropriate using the average singularity and width figures obtained in
step 23.
22. To accept all the changes made, select OK.
23. The system will display the Note Configuration menu.
24. To finally confirm the changes, select the Toggle side tab to change the NO option to
YES and then select OK.
25. Select OK to return to the System Application Main menu.
The procedure is now complete. From the Utilities menu you can now enter level 1
A reject rate less than 1.5% must be achieved when dispensing an average of 2.5 bills per
transaction. If the reject rate is greater than this, the singularity and width values should be
recalculated.

The reject rate is calculated using the following formula.

Reject Rate = X 100%
The numbers for rejected bills and total bills picked are taken from tallies. Take a note of the
tallies current values before starting and use the difference, before and after, in the
calculations. There are different tallies for each Pick/cassette.
Error Messages
Any fatal error messages will need to be cleared in the normal manner.
AUTHORIZATION AND AUTHENTICATION PROCEDURE

Parts Validation
Parts Validation is a security protection mechanism that prevents unauthorized users
replacing certain critical parts on NCR ATMs.
The following procedure may need to be carried out if the control board is replaced as an
FRU item or as part of a presenter swap.
1. Insert the USB Service Key. There may be a short delay while the key is
recognized.
3. Select the Device Status List.
4. Select the Cash Dispenser status reporting Authorization Required.
5. Select the part requiring authorization:
l Authorize control board
l Authorize device
6. The USB Cash Dispenser test is performed.

7. If the USB Cash Dispenser test is successful, the part is authorized and the Device
Status List is displayed.
8. If the test fails, the part is not authorized and a summary report is displayed.
Do the following:
1. Check the USB Service Key is correctly inserted.
2. Check the key has the appropriate authorization security level.
3. Repeat steps 2 to 6.
Authentication
Authentication is a security protection mechanism that prevents fraudulent activity. The
following procedure may need to be carried out if the control board is replaced as an FRU
item or as part of a presenter swap.
Dispense Protection Levels:
l USB - No action required. Authentication is automatic.

l Logical
l Physical
The following procedure must be carried out if the Dispense Protection Level of the ATM is
Logical or Physical.
1. Insert the USB Service Key (required for Logical Dispense Protection Level)
5. Select USB Media Dispenser.
6. Select Authenticate.
If the protection level is Logical, no further action is required.
If the protection level is Physical, complete one of the following actions within one
minute:
dispenser.
l Remove the cassette from the bottom occupied position of the dispenser and re-
insert within 5 seconds.

7. The result of the authentication function is displayed.
8. Select OK to return to the USB Cash Dispenser menu.
9. If authentication was not successful, repeat steps 6 and 7.

The Dispense Protection Level is set by the ATM system, not by a single component -
changing the dispenser control board will not change the protection level. The highest level
set in the ATM system will always be retained.
Dispense Protection Levels from low to high:
l USB
l Logical
l Physical
At the request of the ATM owner, the dispense protection level can be changed by doing
the following:
1. Insert the USB Service Key.

5. Select USB Media Dispenser.
6. Select Device Parameter Configuration.
7. Use the screen toggle button to select the required protection level.
8. Select OK.
9. Configure New Parameter
10. Select Yes using the toggle function.
11. Select OK.
12. If the level is being raised, complete one of the following actions within one minute:
dispenser.
l Remove and insert the cassette from the bottom occupied position of the
dispenser.
13. If the level change was not successful, select OK and repeat steps 6 to 12.
If it was successful, proceed with the Currency Evaluation Qualification if required.

Motor & Pump
Assembly
Carriage Single Note Transport
(SNT)
Carriage Umbilical
Harness
Nose
Bill Aligner Module

(BAM)
Presenter
Core
Double Pick Module
Main Control Board

Pick Support Frame
Single Pick Module

Field Replaceable Units (FRU)
l Carriage Umbilical Harness (front access or rear access)

l Carriage (front access or rear access)
l Nose (including nose, tracks, purge and present flags)
l Motor and Pump Assembly
l Double Pick Module
l Single Pick Module
l Main Control Board
l 5/6 Hi Expansion Board
l Pick Support Frame
l Latchfast Security Plate
l Presenter Core
l Presenter Assembly (front access or rear access)
If replacing the entire dispenser, follow the instructions to remove the pick modules then the
presenter assembly.
Tools:
l Long magnetised #2 pozidrive screwdriver

l Spring hook (603‐9000063)
Note: Throughout these FRU removal and replacement procedures make sure that all
connectors are replaced securely and harnesses are routed correctly and neatly. Replace
and make good all cable ties, check for fouling conditions and replace all cable identification
labels damaged or lost during servicing.
CAUTION
Do not use the dispenser nose to rack, lift or move the dispenser.
WARNING
Remove power from the dispenser before carrying out any of the
FRU removal and replacement procedures.
Carriage Umbilical Harness
CAUTION
Take care not to damage the carriage umbilical harness during the
removal and replacement procedure.
Removing the Carriage Umbilical Harness

1. Fully rack out the dispenser.
2. Release the carriage umbilical harness from the side track by gently pushing the
white latch towards the harness.
3. Unscrew and retain the two screws securing the carriage chassis cover.
Securing Screws
Chassis Cover
4. Remove and retain the carriage chassis cover.

5. Release the carriage umbilical harness from the carriage by gently pushing the
white latch towards the cable, while supporting the PCB with your other hand.
Replacing the Carriage Umbilical Harness

The procedure for replacing the carriage umbilical harness is the reverse of the removal
procedure.
Check that the replacement harness is undamaged before using it.
Be sure to fit the replacement harness to the correct connector and to fit it securely in the
connector: check that the white screened lines on either end are vertical and in line with the
latch.
CAUTION
Check the umbilical harness has enough clearance as the carriage
moves along the track.
Carriage
CAUTION
Take care not to damage the carriage umbilical cable during the
removal and replacement procedure.
Removing the Carriage
2. Release the carriage umbilical cable by gently pushing the latch towards the cable.
3. On front access units, remove the nose, as described later in this section.
4. Remove and retain the two screws securing the tie bar, then remove and retain the
tie bar.
5. Move the carriage to the end of the presenter and lift the carriage clear of the
dispenser.
6. If the carriage is to be shipped with the presenter frame, use two cable ties to secure
the carriage to the sides of the presenter frame.
Replacing the Carriage

Before fitting the new carriage, check that:
l there is no damage or cracks on the carriage lower link mount or the links and arms.
l the carriage lower plate shaft screws are correctly fitted and undamaged.
l all carriage belt rotate and the belt drive shafts and pulleys are in place and are
undamaged.
UPPER PLATE LOWER PLATE
Pulley
Belts Belts
Pulley and drive

shafts
1. Insert the carriage into the end of the presenter.

Note: Make sure the carriage is aligned correctly and all four gearwheels are
engaged in the tracks.
2. Replace the tie bar and secure with two screws.
3. Make sure gearwheels are correctly positioned on the tracks by checking that the
rear of the carriage is parallel with the tie bar.
4. Push the carriage chassis towards the presenter tracks at the point shown below to
assist with correct alignment of the carriage.
5. Insert the carriage umbilical cable into the zero insertion force connector. Gently
pushing the latch away from the cable to engage the connector. Check the cable is
not damaged and is securely fitted in the correct connector: check that the white
screened lines on the end are vertical and in line with the latch.
6. Check that:
l the carriage is correctly aligned in the presenter
l the carriage moves freely along the presenter tracks
l the carriage lower plate is level when opened
l the carriage magnets are correctly configured
l the carriage motor cover is fitted correctly.
See ‘Troubleshooting Procedures’ section for details on these checks.

7. In SysApp, select Self‐Service Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB
Media Dispenser > Carriage Replaced.
This will reset all the carriage variables and recalibrate the carriage sensors.
8. Dispense at least 50 notes to ensure the dispenser is calibrated.
Nose
Removing the Nose
2. If fitted, remove and discard the two screws (or plastic plugs on later units) that join
the track segments together (one on each side).
3. Remove and retain four screws on each side (two on later units) that fix the nose to
the presenter core.
CAUTION
Take care not to dislodge the flags located along the inner track.
4. Slide the nose out of the side frame.
5. Remove and retain the nose.
Replacing the Nose

Note: This procedure is used when replacing a nose with one of the same length. If the
replacement nose is of a different length, after replacement use SysApp to force the
firmware to re‐learn the new hardware configuration by selecting Self‐Service
Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB Media Dispenser > Presenter Replaced.
When replacing the nose, take care not to snag any cables.
1. Align the nose and presenter track segments.

2. Do not refit the two screws that joined the geared track segments together.
3. Fit the eight screws securing the nose to the presenter.
Bill Aligner Module (BAM)

Special tool: Spring hook.
Removing the BAM

2. If the carriage is obstructing access to the BAM and the primary cam is in the ‘OPEN’
position, go to the Jam Clearance section and follow the procedure for moving the
carriage to the ‘CLOSED’ position.
3. Remove the purge bin from the dispenser.
4. Gently move the carriage away from the BAM.
5. Use a spring hook to unhook the two edge register extension springs from the base
of the BAM. Make sure the springs remain attached to the edge register.
6. Remove and retain the BAM cantilever and securing screw.
7. Slide the edge register along about one inch, then turn the edge register slightly
clockwise to disengage it from the slots in the base of the BAM.
8. Remove the Edge Register from the dispenser.

9. Remove and retain the two screws (M4 Pozidriv) securing the BAM mounting to the
presenter frame.
10. Disconnect the BAM motor harness at the flex interface (J4).
11. Remove any cable ties securing the BAM CIC harness to the inside of the presenter.
12. Disconnect the BAM CIC harness at the connector on the side of the presenter.
13. Four lugs locate the BAM mounting base to the presenter framework. Move the
base slightly away from the SNT to clear the lugs and lift the base out of the
dispenser.
Replacing the BAM

The procedure for replacing the BAM is the reverse of the removal procedure.
In SysApp, select Self‐Service Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB Media
Dispenser > Media Aligner Replaced.
This will reset all the BAM (Media Aligner) variables.
Single Note Transport (SNT)
The SNT can be removed with the Bill Aligner Module (BAM) in place.
The SNT FRU includes the SNT interface harness.
Removing the SNT

2. Remove the purge bin.
3. Three M4 x 10 combi screws (captive screws on later units) secure the SNT to the
presenter framework. Move the divert skid plate slightly away from the SNT to allow
access to the first screw. Using a long magnetised #2 pozidrive screwdriver, remove
SNT mounting screw from the location shown below.
4. Now remove second SNT mounting screw from the location shown below. Access
to this screw is blocked by a drive‐belt. A second screwdriver can be used to gently
move the belt to one side while removing the screw.
5. Remove and retain the third screw from the location shown below.
6. Disconnect the SNT harness from the main control board at J3 and J4.
7. Release the SNT harness from the two cable clamps securing the harness to the
side of the outside of the presenter.
8. Guide the SNT harness through the hole in the side of the presenter framework as
you lift the SNT out of the dispenser.
Replacing the SNT

The procedure for replacing the SNT is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Note: There are four potential SNT mounting points, but only three are used. The three
locations are shown below and the screws should be refitted in the order shown.
3
1
In SysApp, select Self‐Service Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB Media
Dispenser > SNT/HETS Replaced.
This will reset the HETS variables and recalibrate the HETS sensors.
Dispense at least 50 notes to ensure the dispenser is calibrated.
Main Motor and Pump Assembly

Note: If the dispenser is a rear access variant with a short or medium length nose, the
whole dispenser will need to be removed from the ATM as the safe door will block access.
Removing the Motor and Pump Assembly

2. Complete the SNT removal procedure before removing the pump motor assembly.
3. Disconnect the power cord at J5 on the main control board.
4. If not already done, disconnect the SNT harness at J3 and J4 on the main control
board.
5. Unscrew and retain the three screws securing the hand wheel.
6. Remove and retain the hand wheel.
CAUTION
Take care not to damage the vacuum sensor connector located on
the outside of the presenter.
7. Disconnect the vacuum tube at the junction shown below.
8. Remove and retain the three screws and three nuts securing the pump motor
assembly to the presenter framework.
9. Remove the pump motor assembly from the dispenser.
Replacing the Motor and Pump Assembly

The procedure for replacing the Pump Motor Assembly is the reverse of the removal
procedure.
Take care not to overtighten the plastite screws that secure the green hand wheel.
There is no torque requirement for the motor securing screws.
Replace the motor in the correct orientation.
When refitting the vacuum hose at the Y junction, make sure the hose is fully inserted.
Double Pick Module

The pick module assembly includes the pick module harness.
CAUTION
The pick module assembly must be carried by the base plate and/or
the upper tie bar.
Note: This procedure is used when replacing a double pick module. If the number of pick
modules in the dispenser is changed, use SysApp to force the firmware to re‐learn the new
count by selecting Self‐Service Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB Media
Dispenser > Pick Units Added/Removed. This will prompt a reboot. Calibrate each Pick
Module by running 50 notes.
Removing the Double Pick Module Assembly

2. Remove all currency cassettes from the dispenser.
3. Disconnect the two upper and two lower pick module cables from the main control
board.
4. If serial number read (SNR) is fitted, disconnect the power and USB harness from
the SNR board located on the side of the pick module.
5. Disconnect the vacuum tubing at the four pick valves shown below. This can be
done by pushing the ring fully home, then pulling the tube out of the valve.
6. Remove the two screws securing the vertical Tamper Indication plate, if fitted, then
remove and retain the cover to be re-fitted to the replacement pick module.
Dual Pick
Vertical Tamper
Indication Plate
7. If the dispenser is configured with two double pick modules, unlatch and lower the
lower pick module.
8. Unlatch the top pick module from the presenter core.
9. Lift the top pick module off the pick support frame and clear of the dispenser.
10. If you need to remove the lower pick module, lift the lower pick module off the pick
support frame and clear of the dispenser.
11. Remove the two screws securing the horizontal Tamper Indication plate, if fitted,
then remove and retain the cover to be re-fitted to the replacement pick module.
Horizontal Tamper
Indication Plate
12. If a clear plastic cover is fitted to the pick gears, remove the single screw securing
it then remove and retain the cover to be re-fitted to the replacement pick
module.
Replacing the Double Pick Module Assembly

The procedure for replacing the Pick Module Assemblies is the reverse of the removal
procedure. Remember to fit any retained parts (gear covers or tamper indication plates) to
the replacement pick module. The horizontal plate must be fitted before the pick module is
fitted to the dispenser.
Media Dispenser > Pick Units Replacement Menu.
2. Select the appropriate pick unit from the list. This will reset the pick unit variables and
recalibrate the pick unit sensor.
3. Calibrate the Pick Module by running 50 notes.
Single Pick Module

Removing the Single Pick Module Assembly
2. Remove all currency cassettes from the dispenser.
3. Disconnect the two single pick module cables from the 5/6 hi expansion board.
4. Disconnect the vacuum tubing at the pick valve. This can be done by pushing the
ring fully home, then pulling the tube out of the valve.
5. Remove the two screws securing the vertical Tamper Indication plate, if fitted, then
Single Pick
Vertical Tamper
Indication Plate
6. Unlatch and lift the single pick module off the pick support frame and clear of the
dispenser.
7. If a metal cover is fitted to the pick gears, remove the single screw securing it then
Replacing the Singe Pick Module Assembly

The procedure for replacing the Pick Module Assemblies is the reverse of the removal
procedure. Remember to fit any retained parts (gear covers or tamper indication plates) to
the replacement pick module.
Media Dispenser > Pick Units Replacement Menu.
2. Select the appropriate pick unit from the list. This will reset the pick unit variables and
recalibrate the pick unit sensor.
3. Calibrate the Pick Module by running 50 notes.
Main Control Board

Removing the Main Control Board
2. Disconnect all harnesses from the Main Control Board.
3. Unscrew and retain the four screws securing the Main Control Board cover, then
remove the cover.
4. Unscrew and retain the five outer screws that secure the Main Control Board.
5. Unscrew and retain the last central screw that secures the Main Control Board.
6. Remove the Main Control Board from the dispenser.
Replacing the Main Control Board

The procedure for replacing the Main Control Board is the reverse of the removal
procedure.
Note: The note parameters for all currency types must be re‐entered after replacing the
main control board. Dispense at least 50 notes to ensure the dispenser is calibrated.

Removing the 5/6 Hi Expansion Board
2. Disconnect all harnesses from the 5/6 Hi Expansion Board.
3. Unscrew and retain the two screws securing the 5/6 Hi Expansion Board cover,
then remove the cover.
4. Unscrew and retain the four outer screws that secure the 5/6 Hi Expansion Board.
5. Remove the 5/6 Hi Expansion Board from the dispenser.
Replacing the 5/6 Hi Expansion Board

The procedure for replacing the 5/6 Hi Expansion Board is the reverse of the removal
procedure.
Pick Support Frame

Removing the Pick Support Frame
1. Remove the cash cassettes from the dispenser.
2. Remove the Double Pick Modules as described previously.
3. Disconnect the vacuum tube at the vacuum filter.
4. Remove the Main Control Board as described previously.

5. Remove the Pick Support Frame.
Replacing the Pick Support Frame

The procedure for replacing the Pick Support Frame is the reverse of the removal
procedure.
Latchfast Security Plate

Removing the Latchfast Security Plate
1. Remove the four M4 countersunk screws securing the security plate to the
presenter.
2. Remove the Latchfast Security Plate.
Replacing the Latchfast Security Plate

The procedure for replacing the latchfast Security Plate is the reverse of the removal
procedure.
Presenter Core
Removing the Presenter Core
1. Remove the Latchfast Security Plate (if fitted) as described previously.
2. Remove the Carriage as described previously.
3. Remove the Single Note Transport (SNT).
4. Remove the Double Pick Modules as described previously.
5. Remove the Pick Support Frame as described previously.
6. Remove the IGUS chain bracket from the side of the presenter frame. The type of
bracket will vary, depending on the ATM.
7. Remove the Presenter Nose as described previously.

8. A temporary yellow lifting handle is attached to the frame of new Presenter Core.
Remove the lifting handle from the new core and attach it to the top of the core that is
still attached to the dispenser rails. This handle will be used to lift the core off the
rails.
9. Remove the four screws securing the Presenter Core to the dispenser rails (two
each side).
10. Move the end of the rails to the mid‐point of their travel. Using a marker pen, make a
mark on top of the rails to align with a suitable detail on the top of the presenter
frame. This will indicate if the rail ends have moved during lifting of the Presenter
Core.
11. Standing on one side of the presenter and hold the presenter by the two yellow lifting
points. Lift up the side of the presenter furthest away from you and free it from the
far‐side rail ‐ at the same time use your fingers to push the far‐side rail away from the
presenter.
12. Retract the far‐side rail inwards and clear of the presenter.
13. Make sure the near‐side rail has not moved and the marker is in the correct position.
14. Lift and free the near‐side of the presenter from the near‐side rail and remove the
presenter core from the ATM.
15. If fitted, remove the clear plastic presenter gears cover by first removing the green
handle secured with three screws and then the cover secured with one screw. Re-fit
the green handle and retain the cover to be re-fitted to the replacement presenter.
16. If fitted, remove the two black plastic latchfast bin actuators (one on left and one on
right-hand side) from the ceiling of the latchfast bin position in the presenter. Retain
them to be re-fitted to the replacement presenter.
17. If fitted, remove the metal divert key plate from the floor of the latchfast bin position in
the presenter. Note in initial units the plate is secured with two screws from above, in
later units it will be secured from below. Retain the plate to be re-fitted to the
replacement presenter.
Replacing the Presenter Core

Replacing the Presenter Core is the reverse of the removal procedure. Remember to re-fit
any retained parts (gear cover, security plates, divert key plate) to the replacement
presenter.
When attaching the Presenter Core to the dispenser rails, use the following table to select
the correct dispenser rail ‘T’ lug position for your ATM.
Dispenser Rail ‘T’ Lug

Presenter Core
A B
Product Access Location

2012 Front A
Rear B
6622 Front or Rear B
6625 Rear A
6626 Rear A
6628 Front A
6632 Front A
Rear B
6634 Rear A
6637 and 6638 Front A
642 Front A
Remove the temporary lifting handle from the old Presenter Core frame and re‐fit it to the
new replacement Presenter Core. After the new replacement Presenter Core is attached
to the dispenser rails, the lifting handle must be removed and re‐fitted to the old Presenter
Core for returning to the rework centre.
After the dispenser has been fully re‐assembled, use SysApp to force the firmware to
relearn the new hardware configuration.
Select Self‐Service Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB Media Dispenser >
Presenter Replaced.
The presenter variables will be reset and the presenter sensors recalibrated.
Dispense at least 50 notes to ensure the dispenser is calibrated.
Presenter Assembly
The Presenter Assembly includes the following:
l Presenter Core
l Carriage
l Motor and Pump Assembly
Removing the Presenter Assembly

1. Remove the Latchfast Security Plate (if fitted).
2. Secure the carriage to the presenter frame using two cable ties.
3. Follow the ‘Remove the Nose’ instructions as described in the ‘Nose’ section.
4. Follow the ‘Remove the Presenter Core’ instructions (steps 3 to 13) as described in
the ‘Presenter Core’ section.
Replacing the Presenter Assembly

1. Follow the ‘Replacing the Presenter Core’ instructions as described in the
‘Presenter Core’ section.
2. Follow the ‘Replacing the Nose’ instructions as described in the ‘Nose’ section.
3. After the dispenser has been fully assembled, remove the two cable ties securing
the carriage to the presenter frame.
4. Replace the Latchfast Security Plate (if fitted).
Media Dispenser > Presenter Assembly Replaced.
This will force the firmware to re‐learn the new hardware configuration. The
presenter variables will be reset and the presenter sensors recalibrated. This will
also reset the HETS variables and recalibrate the HETS sensors, reset all the
carriage variables and recalibrate the carriage sensors, and reset all the Media
Aligner (BAM) variables.
6. Dispense at least 50 notes to ensure the dispenser is calibrated.
CABLING
Presenter Harness
Presenter CIC 24VDC
Interlock Switch
Purge Bin Interface Purge Bin

Switch
P1
Cam Motor
Purge Bin Latch Sensor

P2
Carriage Flex Interface Module Latch Sensor
Main Control Board V acuum Sensor
1 PURGE_BIN1_LED+ (white) 1
2 LED_RTN_1 (white) 2 Purge Bin Interface
3 PURGE_BIN1_SEN+ (white) 3 (P_BIN)
4 PURGE_BIN1_SEN (white) 4
5 PURGE_BIN2_LED+ (white) 5
7 PURGE_BIN2_SEN+ (white) 8
8 PURGE_BIN2_SEN (white) 6 1
(white) 7
24VDC Interlock Switch

GND_5
(Interlock_GND)
13 PURGE_BIN_PRESb (white)
Purge Bin Switch
(PB_Pres1 &
14 GND_4 (white) PB_Pes2)
P1
1 21
15 Module_LED (red)
Module Latch
2 22 16 Module_LED_RTD (black)
Sensor
17 Module_SEN+ (white)
(Module_Latch)
18 Module_SEN (green)
9 PBLATCH_SEN+ (white)
Purge Bin Latch
10 PBLATCH_SEN (green)
Sensor
11 PBLATCH_LED+ (red)
(PB_Latch)
12 PBLATCH_(GND_1) (black)
(white) Cam Motor

22 CAM_PHASE_1B 1
(CAM_Phase)
20 PA_PHASE_1A (white) 3
21 CAM_PHASE_2B (white) 4
19 PA_PHASE_2A (white) 6
1
Vacuum Sensor
1 5V 1 (Vac_Sen)
3 Vacuum Level 3
4 GND_1 4
1
24VDC Interlock Switch

5 NO
(Interlock)
Purge Bin Interface

6 GND_2 7 (P_BIN)
Presenter CIC
15 SIN_CAM 1
(Pre_CIC)
13 COIL_BIAS 2
11 COS_CAM 3
9 EXPREF_CAM 4
7 EX_PRES_1 5 1 2 345
P2 Carriage Position CIC

12 COS_CARPOS 1
1 31 (CAR_POS)
14 COIL BIAS 2
16 SIN_CARPOS 3
2 32 10 EXPREF_CARPOS 4
8 EX_PRES_2 5
1
17 LED_RTN 1
18 8V 2
19 CAR_TD_SEL0 3
20 CAR_TD_SEL1 4
21 CAR_TD_SEL4b 5 Carriage Flex Interface
22 CAR_SENSORS 6 (CAR_interface)
23 CAR_MOTOR_SEL0 7
1 15
24 CAR_TIMING_DISC 8
25 CAR_MOTOR_SEL1 9
26 24V 10 2 16
27 CAR_TYPE 11
28 GND_3 12
29 CAR_PHASE_2A 13
30 CAR_PHASE_2B 14
31 CAR_PHASE_1A 15
32 CAR_PHASE_1B 16
Interface Harness
J18 J2
J19 J1
Main Control Board 5/6 Hi Expansion Board
1 +24V 1
2 GROUND 2
3 SPII_MOSI 3
4 SPII_SCK 4
5 CIC2_SPII_CSB 5
6 RESET_CIC2 6
7 CIC2_MISO 7
8 RSTb 8
9 SDA 9
10 SCL 10
J19 11 OPEN_ALL_VALVES 11 J1
1 27 12 5TO6_PA_FLAG 12 1 27
13 5TO6_DW_FLAG 13
14 5TO6_FLAGI 14
2 28 2 28
15 CASSLATCHED5 15
16 CASSLATCHED6 16
17 CASSLOW_AMR5B 17
18 CASSLOW_AMR6B 18
19 PICKSEN5_RTN 19
20 PICKSEN6_RTN 20
21 VALVE_ON 21
22 ENABLE_LEDSb 22
23 ID_SEL0 23
24 ID_SEL1 24
25 ID_5TO6_SELB 25
26 PA_DW_SEL0 26
27 PA_DW_SEL1 27
28 PA_DW_5TO6_SELB 28
1 24V_RLY 1
2 PICK_MOTOR_5B 2
3 PICK_MOTOR_6B 3
J18 4 GROUND 4 J2
1 11 5 PA_PHASE_1A 5 1 11
6 PA_PHASE_1A 6
7 PA_PHASE_1B 7
2 12 8 PA_PHASE_1B 8 2 12
9 PA_PHASE_2A 9
10 PA_PHASE_2A 10
11 PA_PHASE_2B 11
12 PA_PHASE_2B 12
S2 Double Pick Module Harness

The first (upper) double pick module harness is illustrated below, other double pick module
harnesses are similar.
Pick2 Sensor Pick1 LED
Pick2 LED
Pick1 Motor
Pick1 Sensor
Pick2
Solenoid Value
J8 or J10 Pick2 Motor
J9 or J11 Pick1
Solenoid Value
Main Control Board
Quad CIC
1 PA_PHASE2.A 1
2 PA_2_PHASE2B 3 Pick2 Motor
3 PA_PHASE1.A 4 (PA_2)
4 PA2_PHASE1B 6
5 PA_PHASE2A 1
J8 or J10 6 PA1_PHASE2B 3 Pick1 Motor
7 PA_PHASE1A 4 (PA_1)
8 PA1_PHASE1B 6
1 Pick 2
9 VACSOL2b Solenoid Value
(Val_2.1)
10 24V_2 (Val_2.0)
Pick 1
(Val_1.0)
12 24V_1 (Val_1.1)
1 EX_DW (white) 1
2 SIN_PA1 (white) 2
3 EXREF_DW_1 (white) 3
4 COIL_BIAS (white) 4
5 COS_DW1 (white) 5
6 COS_PA1 (white) 6
7 COIL BIAS (white) 7
8 EXREF_PA_1 (white) 8
9 SIN_DW1 (white) 9 Quad CIC
10 EX_PA (white) 10 (Quad_CIC)
11 EX DW (white) 11 1 19
12 SIN_PA2 (white) 12
13 EXREF_DW_2 (white) 13
2 20
14 COIL__BIAS (white) 14
15 COS_DW2 (white) 15
16 COS_PA2 (white) 16
17 COIL___BIAS (white) 17
J9 or J11
18 EXREF_PA_2 (white) 18
1 31 19 SIN_DW2 (white) 19
20 EX__PA (white) 20
2 32
Pick 1 LED
23 CASSLOW_AMR1B (white) 1 (PLED_1)
24 GROUND (white) 2
21 5V_SUPPLY_PICK_1 (white) 3
22 PICKLED1_RTD (white) 4
1
25 PICKSEN1+ (white) Pick 1 Sensor

26 PICKSEN1_RTD (green) (PSEN_1)
29 CASSLOW_AMR2B (white) 1 Pick 2 LED

30 GND (white) 2 (PLED_2)
28 PICKLED2_RTD (white) 4
1

32 PICKSEN2_RTD (green) (PSEN_2)
Single Pick Module Harness

Pick5 Sensor
Dual Cass ID CIC
Pick5 LED
J3
J6 Pick5
Solenoid Value
Pick5 Motor
1
2
3
4
5 PA_PHASE2A 1
J3
6 PA5_PHASE2B 3 Pick5 Motor
7 PA_PHASE1A 4 (PA_5)
8 PA5_PHASE1B 6
1
9
10
Pick 5
(Val_5.0)
12 24V_5 (Val_5.1)
1 EX_DW (white) 1
2 SIN_PA5 (white) 2
3 EXREF_DW_5 (white) 3 Dual Cass CIC
4 COIL_BIAS (white) 4
5 COS_DW5 (white) 5 1 9
6 COS_PA5 (white) 6
7 COIL BIAS (white) 7
8 EXREF_PA_5 (white) 8 2 10
9 SIN_DW5 (white) 9
10 EX_PA (white) 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
J6 17
18
1 31 19
20
2 32
Pick 5 LED
23 CASSLOW_AMR5B (white) 1 (PLED_5)
24 GROUND (white) 2
22 PICKLED5_RTN (white) 4
1

26 PICKSEN5_RTN (green) (PSEN_5)
29
30
27
28
31
32
Carriage Position Sensor Harness

J1
Carriage Position Sensor
Carriage PCB
1 White
J1 2 Green Carriage Position Sensor
(J_CPS) 3 Red (CPS)
4 Black
Dual Cassette ID Harness
J12 or J14 Dual Cassette ID
Main Control Board
1 COIL_BIAS1 1
2 SIN_ID1 2
3 COS_ID1 3
4 CASSLED_RTD 4
5 EXREF_ID1 5
Dual Cassette ID
J12 or J14 6 LATCHLED1+ 6 (Cass_ID)
1 15 7 EXID1 7
8 CASSLATCH1 8 1 15
9 SIN_ID2 9
2 16 10 CASSLATCH2 10 2 16
11 COIL_BIAS2 11
12 LATCHLED2+ 12
13 COS_ID2 13
14 CASSLED2_RTD 14
15 EXREF_ID2 15
16 EX_ID2 16
Single Cassette ID Harness

J7
Single Cassette ID
1 COIL_BIAS 1
J7
2 SIN_ID5 2
1 7 3 COS_ID5 3
4 CASSLED5_RTN 4
5 EXREF_ID5 5 Single Cassette ID
2 8 6 LATCHLED5+ 6 (Cass_ID)
7 EX_ID 7
1 15
8 CASSLATCH5 8
9
10 2 16
11
12
13
14
15
16
SNT Harness
Divert Gate Flag Sensor Timing Disc

Sensor
Divert Gate Width Sensor

Media Deflector Motor
Solenoid
Divert/Transport Sensor
J4
HETS
J3
SNT Sensor Board
Main Control Board
1 BOARD1+ 1
2 BOARD1_LED_RTN 3
J4 3 BOARD1_SEN 2 SNT Sensor Board
4 BOARD2+ 4 (BoardSen)
1 9
5 BOARD2_LED_RTN 6
6 BOARD2_SEN 5
2 10 7 SNT_LED_SUPPLY 7
8 SNT_STACK_LED_RTD 10
9 SNT_STACK_SEN+ 8 1
10 SNT_STACK_SEN 9
1 5V Ref (white) 1
2 NTS_A (white) 2 HETS
3 NTS_GND1 (white) 3 (HETS)
4 NTS_B (white) 4 1 7
5 NTS_GND2 (white) 5
6 24V (white) 6
2 8
7 WIDTH_SENA (white) 7
8 WIDTH_SENB (white) 8
Width Sensor
(WidthSen)
9 WIDTH_LEDB_RTN (white) 3
10 WIDTH_LEDA_RTN (white) 2
1 2 3
11 SNT_LED_SUPPLY (white) 1
12 SNT_LED_SUPPLY (white) 1 Purge Sensor

13 SNT_PURGE_LED_RTN (white) 2 (PurgeSen)
14 SNT_PURGE_SEN+ (white) 3
J3
15 SNT_PURGE_SEN (white) 4
1 29 1
16 DIVERT_GATE_LED+ (red)
2 30
17 DIVERT_GATE_LED_RTN (black) Divert Sensor
18 DIVERT_GATE_SEN+ (white) (DivertSen)
19 DIVERT_GATE_SEN (green)
20 TIM_DISC_SEN (green)
Timing Disc
21 TIM_DISC_SEN+ (white)
Sensor
22 TIM_DISC_LED+ (red) (TimeDiscSen)
23 TIME_DISC_LED_RTN (black)
Divert Gate
24 DIV_A_DRV (white) 1 Solenoid
25 DIV_COMON (white) 2
26 DIV_B_DRV (white) 3
1
27 BM_PHASE1A (white) 1
28 BM_PHASE1B (white) 3 Motor
29 BM_PHASE2A (white) 4 (Board_Mot)
30 BM_PHASE2B (white) 6
BAM CIC Harness
J25 BAM CIC
Main Control Board
J25 1 EX_PRES 1 1 EX_PRES 5 BAM CIC

1 9 3 EXREF_BAM 2 2 EXREF_BAM 4 (JBAM)
5 SIN_BAM 4 4 SIN_BAM 1
7 COIL_BIAS 5 5 COIL_BIAS 2
2 10 9 COS_BAM 6 6 COS_BAM 3 1
JBAM-1 PBAM-1
Purge Bin LEDs Interface
J1 J3
Purge Bin LEDs Interface Purge Bin Sensors
1 5V 1
2 SEN1 2
J1 3 SEN2 3 J3
4 SEN3 4
5 SEN4 5
Purge Bin Interface Harness
J2 J4
Presenter Harness Purge Bin LEDs Interface
1 GND 1
2 GND 2
3 PURGE BIN2 SEN 3
4 PURGE BIN2 LED 4
J2 J4
5 PURGE BIN1 SEN 5
6 PURGE BIN1 SEN+ 6
7 LED RTN 1 7
8 PURGE BIN1 LED+ 8
State of Health Harness
J15 Status Indicator
Main Control Board
1 Red 1
J15 2 Amber 2 Status Indicator
(Con_SOH) 3 Green 3 (J_SOH)
4 5V 4

Test media:
US Dollar Size Example

Part number Denomination
009-0030295 1
009-0030296 5
009-0030297 10
009-0030298 20
009-0030299 50
009-0030300 100
Euro Size Example

009-0030302 20
009-0030303 50
009-0030304 100
009-0030305 5
Double Test Example

009-0030376 double
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
A/D Analogue to Digital converter
BAM Bill Aligner Module
CIC CambridgeIC - developer of non-contact position sensing technology
HETS Hall Effect Thickness Sensor – used to count thickness of bills in SNT
RFP Retract from present. Retraction of presented media back into the dispenser
Singularity Calculation of number of bills passing through the HETS
SNR Serial Number Read
SNT Single Note Transport - part of transport which transports single bills (not bundles)
SOH State of Health
REVISION
November 2019 A.2 Change to illustration for Pick Valve Test in Diagnostics

S2 DISPENSER CASSETTE
INTRODUCTION
NCR cassettes are portable containers, moulded in high impact polycarbonate, that are
designed to store currency and other media such as postage stamps in the dispenser.
The cassette can be configured to hold currency of different lengths and widths, and to
indicate a code for the denomination it contains.
Currency length range: 120 to 177 mm (4.7 to 7.0 in.)

Currency width range: 62 to 85 mm (2.4 to 3.4 in.).
The following variants of cassette are available:
l Standard security cassettes: the lid is secured with a latch and an optional seal, such
as a cable tie.
l Lockable cassettes: the lid is secured with a keylock in addition to the latch.
l Tamper indicating cassettes: tracks the number of times that a cassette has been
inserted and removed from the dispenser, to detect unauthorised activity. After six
insertions, the cassette is ‘locked out’ and needs to be reset. Both standard and
lockable cassettes can have the tamper indicator.
Tamper Indicator
The counter on tamper indicating cassettes is initially green, and moves to white on the first
insertion of the cassette into the ATM, then moves to show numbers 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 for
subsequent insertions. After six insertions the cassette will no longer be accepted into the
dispenser until the counter has been reset.
Each time the cassette is removed for routine replenishment, the counter should be reset
by repeatedly sliding the stud then releasing it until the indicator shows green.
Reset stud
Internal insertion counter
External insertion counter
Cassette Identification Code

Each cassette has a identification code which is read by the ATM software so that
regardless of its position in the dispenser, the cassette can be identified and selected to
dispense notes of a specific denomination. The code can be changed for different
currencies and denominations.
Clip
Window
To change the cassette identification code, first remove the yellow clip inside the cassette,
then take off the cassette identification casing from the side of the cassette. Remove the
indicator wheel from the casing and reposition it so that the required number is aligned with
the window. Refit the casing and secure with the clip.
Cassette Body and Lid Marking

Once the cassette has been configured to a particular currency, it is advisable that the body
and lid are visually identified to avoid a mismatch of bodies and lids configured for different
currencies.
There are two recommended methods:
l Indelible ink marking: mark the currency denomination on the inside or outside of both
the body and lid, using an indelible ink pen
l Colour coded labels: assign a different colour for each currency denomination and
use matching labels on the body and lid.
Other identification methods may be employed, and can make use of the panels of
numbers and letters moulded into the cassette body and lid.
A: Recessed areas for either marking with indelible ink pens or for adhesive labels
B and C: Numbered panels.
Cleaning
Clean the cassettes with a cloth dampened with water. For stubborn marks and grease try
a clean cloth dampened with isopropyl alcohol. Do not use any other cleaning agents or
abrasives.
14. DEPOSIT
Bunch Note Acceptor (UD700) 1270
Revision 1336
Bunch Note Acceptor (UD-686) 1337
Revision 1402
iTran 1000 ATM Cheque Processor 1403
Revision 1467
USB Envelope Depository and Dispenser 1468
Revision 1501
iTRAN Scalable Check Processor 1502
Revision 1549
Scalable Deposit Module (SDM) 1550
Revision 1694
BUNCH NOTE ACCEPTOR (UD700)
INTRODUCTION
The Bunch Note Acceptor (also referred to as UD700 or BNA3) will accept a bunch of
notes presented by the customer. The module will transport this bunch of notes to the feed
unit module where it will strip the notes off one at a time. The notes will pass through a
recognition unit, which will verify the authenticity of the deposited media. Notes that are not
recognised or exceed the maximum escrow capacity will be returned to the customer, while
notes that are recognised will be placed into an escrow unit. When the customer completes
the transaction the notes will be deposited into one of the two storage bins.
If the customer chooses to cancel their transaction the notes will be returned from the
escrow unit to the reject unit and transported as a bunch back to the customer by the same
interface used in the deposit operation.
The BNA3 is similar to the previous BNA with the following differences:
l Maximum 50 bill deposit per transaction

l Single bunch return
l Single modular cassette
l No keylock on cassettes
l Cassette replenishment technique is configurable to either fully remove or rack, you
can also override this setting manually and it will reset to previous setting
l The escrow position and jam clearance technique in both location and operation
l Fewer PC boards on BNA 3.
DESCRIPTION
1 Short Transport 6 Main Transport

2 Angled Transport 7 Garage Unit Door
3 Long Transport 8 Cash Cassette and Capture Bin
4 Mid Transport 9 Bill Validator Unit
5 Reject/Feed Unit 10 Escrow Unit
Note: The cash acceptor will have long, mid, short or angled infeed transports depending
on the ATM in which it is installed.
The functional components of the BNA3 are shown in the above illustration.
Notes from the escrow unit are stored in the banknote storage cassette in a stack, after the
cardholder has agreed to the counted value to complete the deposit transaction. If the
cardholder cancels the transaction then the notes in the escrow unit are returned to the
fascia.
SENSORS AND ACTUATORS

The diagram below shows the position of the sensors and actuators throughout the BNA.
Escrow Unit
Symbol Function
PSF1 Banknote tracking sensor
PIF1 Tape end position detection photo interrupter
PIF2 Tape start position detection photo interrupter
MF1 Tape driving motor
Inlet Unit
Symbol Function
PSA1 Insert banknote detection sensor
PSA2 Banknote tracking sensor
PSA3 Remaining banknote detection sensor (Not applicable to Short Inlet Unit)
PIA1 Banknote removal detection sensor
PIA2 Bundle thickness detection sensor
PIA3 Passage cover opened condition detection photo interrupter (Applicable only to Long Inlet
Unit)
SDA1 Entry open/close solenoid
SDA2 Transport lever solenoid
Reject and Feed Unit

Symbol Function
PSB1 Remaining banknote detection sensor
PSB2 Banknote tracking sensor
PIB1 Reject block motor rotation detection photo interrupter
PIB2 Feed block motor rotation detection photo interrupter
PIB3 Stage upper position detection photo interrupter
PIB4 Stage upper position detection photo interrupter
MB1 Reject/Inlet block driving motor
MB2 Feed block driving motor
MB3 Stage driving motor
SDB1 Banknote aligning stopper solenoid
SDB2 (Reserved)
SDB3 Transport lever solenoid
SDB4 Transport lever solenoid
SDB5 Banknote presser driving solenoid
Main Transport Unit

Symbol Function
PSC1 Banknote tracking sensor
PIC1 Transport unit motor rotation detection photo interrupter
PIC2 Escrow unit set detection photo interrupter
MC1 Transport unit driving motor
SDC1 Diverter solenoid
SDC2 Lever solenoid
SDC3 Diverter solenoid
Bill Validator
Symbol Function
PSBV Banknote tracking sensor
(MR1) Magnetic sensor
(TH1) Security thread sensor
(IM1) Image sensor
(FL1) Fluorescent sensor
(UV1) UV sensor
(TD1) Thickness detection sensor
(LD1) LED Array for Image sensor
(IR1) Infrared refraction sensor
(COL1) Colour sensor-L(Blue/IR)
(COL2) Colour sensor-R(Red/IR)
Cassette Unit
Symbol Function
PSG1 Banknote tracking sensor (Front)
PSG2 Banknote tracking sensor (Rear)
PSG3 Banknote upper end detection sensor (Front)
PSG4 Remaining banknote detection sensor (Front)
Symbol Function
PSG5 Banknote upper end detection sensor (Rear)
PSG6 Remaining banknote detection sensor (Rear)
PSG7 Remaining banknote detection sensor (Capture Bin)
PIG1 Stage upper limit position detection sensor (Front)
PIG2 Stage nearly-full condition detection sensor (Front)
PIG3 Stage lower limit position detection sensor (Front)
PIG4 Stage upper limit position detection sensor (Rear)
PIG5 Stage nearly-full condition detection sensor (Rear)
PIG6 Stage lower limit position detection sensor (Rear)
MG1 Stage driving motor (Front)
MG2 Stage driving motor (Rear)
SDG1 Diverter solenoid (Front)
SDG2 Diverter solenoid (Rear)
Garage Unit
Symbol Function
SWJ1 Cassette set detection microswitch
SPECIFICATION
Currency
The BNA can accept banknotes with the following characteristics:
l Material of bank notes - paper (including cotton paper) and polymer

l Banknote size:
l Width, 60 mm (2.36 in.) - 85 mm (3.35 in.)
l Length, 120 mm (4.72 in.) - 170 mm (6.69 in.)
l Thickness, 0.076 mm (0.003 in.) - 0.12 mm (0.005 in.).
Polymer Media
The module will accept polymer media that falls into the specification below.
Note: The number of acceptable clear windows allowed in the notes is generally limited to
one.
EFFECTIVE AREA WHERE A
2mm (0.08 in)

CLEAR WINDOW CAN BE LOCATED
Width
Clear
Window
Length
2mm (0.08 in) 2mm (0.08 in)
Mechanism
Banknotes are handled by the BNA as follows:
l Feed method - Placed in a bundle less than 5 mm (0.2 in.) thick

l Feed direction - Short-end first
l Feed block - 50 banknotes maximum
l Feed speed - 5 banknotes per second (approximately)
l Escrow function - built in
l Escrow unit - 50 banknotes maximum
l Disposition of abnormal banknotes - Unrecognizable and unspecified banknotes are
returned from the inlet.
l Returning method - Returned in a bundle
l Reject block - 50 banknotes maximum
l Banknote speed - 1600 mm/second (62.99 in./second) (approximately).
Communication
The BNA is controlled by the host ATM as follows:
l Form - USB
l Spec - Full speed USB-IF (USB 1.1).
USEFUL REFERENCE MATERIAL

The following NCR documentation is available for further reference:
l BNA Service Aids

l M-Status and M-Data codes (BNA2), (BNA3)
l BNA error codes (M-Data bytes 1 and 2) (BNA2), (BNA3).
CLEANING MATERIALS
The only authorised cleaning material for use on the BNA are:
l Canned air, 10 oz. - Systemedia Stock No.526487

l Cleaning plate, NCR part number 009-0024481 (set of 10 plates)
l Exxon Mobil Actorel 1130L or paraffin type fluid equivalent. (ONLY TO BE USED ON
ROLLERS).
Note: ONLY TO BE USED ON ROLLERS
TROUBLESHOOTING
This section contains error messages and their corrective actions.
Module Error States

The following error messages are reported by the module. To de-code specific M_Status
and M_Data use the Status Code Translator Tool
(http://www.infoprod.ncr.com/hardware/diagnostics.php) or refer to the Diagnostic Status
Device
M_Status: 01
Description: Device error.
1. Look at the M_Data Byte Zero to verify the direction the media was going at the time
of the fault.
2. Look at the M_Data Byte One and Two (Glory error codes that define the area of the
fault.
3. Visually inspect and clean the area or module where the fault is indicated.
4. If the pattern of errors persist, then replace the failing module.
M_Status: 03
Description: Notes in device.
Look at the M_Data Byte One and Two (Glory error codes that define the area of the fault.
l If notes are found in the module, perform operation to remove them.

l If no notes are found and the error persists, then replace the module.
M_Status: 04, 11
Description: Cash Bin full.
1. Check to see if cash bin is full.

l If full, notify the CIT or branch personnel to have a deposit pull performed.
l If the cash bin is not full, check and clean the cash bin.
2. If the error persists, then replace the cash bin.
M_Status: 13
Description: Capture Bin full.
Check to see if capture bin is full.
l If full, notify the CIT or branch personnel to have a deposit pull performed.
l If the cash bin is not full and the error persists, then replace the BNA Main Transport.
M_Status: 14, 15
Description: Escrow empty / Escrow full.
Routine message, no action needed.
Shutter
M_Status:29
Description: Shutter device error.
1. Inspect and clean the shutter assembly.

2. Verify the cables are seated properly and not damaged. Replace the cables if
damaged.
3. If the pattern of errors persist, then replace the failing module.
M_Status: 35, 36
Description: Shutter jammed.
1. Items jammed against the shutter - Inspect the shutter for obvious obstructions
preventing the shutter movement.
2. Shutter sensor blocked - Inspect the shutter open and closed sensors to ensure that
they are not blocked by debris or obstructions. Remove any debris or obstructions
found.
3. Shutter interface - Inspect the shutter alignment with the fascia or damaged parts.
Adjust the alignment of the shutter and fix or replace any damaged parts found.
4. Shutter faulty - If the pattern of errors persist, then replace the shutter.
Cash Bin
M_Status: 33
Description: Cash Bin door open.
1. Inspect the cash bin door and door switch. Repair or replace if damaged.
2. Replace the Garage Unit if unable to repair the cash bin door or door switch.
Transport
M_Status: MS11. M_Data: 3011.
Description: Transport Motor MC1 motion failure.
Residue or debris in the media transport pathway - Inspect the media pathway shown.
Remove any residue or debris found. Further inspect the pathway by advancing the flat
belts manually by turning the green thumb wheel.
M_Status: MS22. M_Data: 3202 & 3205.

Description: Jam between sensors PSC3 and PSF1.
1. Residue or debris in the media transport pathway - Inspect the media pathway
shown. Remove any residue or debris found. Further inspect the pathway by
advancing the flat belts manually by turning the green thumb wheel.
2. Flat belt(s) dislodged - Inspect the flat belts along the pathway shown above. Re-
seat where required.
3. Dirty PSC3 sensor - Clean if required.
Note: Clean photo sensors using compressed air, soft brush or cotton bud.
Ingrained grime can be removed using a moistened cloth.
4. Dirty PSF1 sensor - Clean if required.

Description: Jam between sensors PSC3 and PSC2.
1. Flat belt(s) dislodged - Inspect the flat belts along the pathway shown. Re-seat
where required.

Description: Jam between sensors PSC3 and PSB6.
1. Media blocked before the diverter - Inspect the media pathway shown. Use the
green thumb wheel to advance the belts to inspect further. Remove any jammed
media.
2. Debris present on the rollers - Inspect the two diverter rollers for any build up of
residue. Remove and clean any residue found.

Description: Unexpected block at sensors PSC3.
1. Potential hole in the media - Verify that there are no holes present within the media
in transport.

2. Flat belt(s) dislodged - Inspect the flat belts along the pathway shown above. Re-
seat where required.
Bill Validator (BV)

M_Status: MS23. M_Data: 8B52.
Description: Sensor failure of the BV tape detection.
1. Ink debris accumulation on the thickness rollers - Inspect the BV thickness rollers
and remove any build up. (See ‘Cleaning Materials’).
2. Thickness roller scrapers worn or have debris accumulation - Clean any debris on
the scrapers. Verify that the scrapers are not worn.
3. Thickness detection sensor is faulty - Replace the thickness detect sensor.
M_Status: MS23. M_Data: 8B50.

Description: BV security thread sensor or Infrared Refraction (IR) sensor failure.
1. Debris accumulation on the security thread sensor - Inspect the security thread
sensor and remove any debris.
2. Security thread sensor pressing guide malfunction - Inspect the guide for free
movement and any damage.
3. Debris accumulation on the IR sensor - Inspect the IR sensor and remove any
debris.
4. Magnetic sensor pressing guide malfunction - Inspect the guide for free movement
and any damage.

1. Security thread sensor pressing guide malfunction - Inspect the guide for free
movement and any damage.
2. Magnetic sensor pressing guide malfunction - Inspect the guide for free movement
and any damage.
3. BV pre-entry guide is damaged - Inspect the guide for damage.
Escrow
Description: Sensor PIF2 volume lower limit failure.
1. Debris present on the escrow tape - Remove any debris present on the escrow
tape.
2. Debris sticking on the interrupter for the position detect sensor of the escrow tape -
Remove any debris from around the sensor.
3. Calibration fault with the escrow tape position detect sensor - If cleaning as
described above fails to provide corrective action then re-calibrate. Replace the
escrow tape and the interrupter. Refer to the Field Services Bulletin (FSB-1214B)
for more details.

Description: Unexpected PSF1 sensor block.
1. Potential hole in the media - Verify that there are no holes present within the media
in transport.
2. Debris present on the escrow PSF1 sensors - Remove any debris present around
the sensors. Clean if required.

Description: Jam in Escrow.
Escrow tape deteriorated - Verify that the escrow tape has not worn and degraded.
Inlet
Description: MB1 motion failure.
1. Unsuccessful bunch transport - Inspect the inlet transport for broken pieces of media
or foreign object and remove.
2. Unsuccessful bunch transport - Inspect the Reject and Feeder bins for broken
pieces of media or foreign object and remove.
3. Transport motor (MB1) malfunction - Check motor and cable are connected.
4. Transport motor rotation detect sensor (PIF2) malfunction - Clean the sensor if
necessary.
M_Status: MS26. M_Data: 3101, 0105 & 0106.

Description: Blocked PSA1 sensor.
1. Residue in the inlet - inspect the inlet for foreign object and broken media pieces and
remove.
2. Dirty PSA1 sensor - Clean the sensors if necessary.

3. Misalignment with the ATM - Verify that there is correct alignment between the BNA
and the ATM shutter guides.
4. Flat belt dislodged - Verify that both the upper and lower inlet transport flat belts are
positioned correctly.
Cassette
Description: Jam between PSC2 and PSG1.
1. Damaged cassette transport guide - Inspect the guides inside the cassette for
potential media catch points and defects, such as sticky residue, scratches and
gouges.
2. Flicker wheel malfunction - Verify that each arm of the flicker wheel is present and
not damaged.
3. Tilted pusher plate - Verify that the cassette pusher plate is not tilted and that the
screw is not loose or missing.
4. Damaged drive gear - Inspect the drive gear for debris and broken or damaged
teeth.
5. Damaged rubber roller - Inspect the cassette rubber roller for damage.
6. Dirty PSC2 sensor - Clean the sensors if necessary.
7. Dirty PSG1 sensor - Clean the sensors with the cleaning plate if necessary. (See
‘Cleaning Materials’).
M_Status: MS25. M_Data: 5201 & 5202.

Description: Discrepancy in front/rear cassette(s).
Residue in the stacking area of the cassette - Verify that there are no broken media or other
foreign objects in the stacking areas of the cassettes.
Picking
Description: Jam between PSB5 and PSC1.
Flat belt dislodged - Verify that the flat belts are in the correct position. Adjust if necessary.
Reject
M_Status: MS27.
Description: Reject device error.
1. Remove, clean and inspect the reject assembly.

2. Re-install the reject assembly.
DIAGNOSTICS
Error Possible Root Causes isolation Resolution
Contoller Intermittent Reset and retest with a Force Encash Power cycle ATM and retest
error Electronic Fault
Hard Electronic Reset and retest did not work Replace control board
failure
Software issue Requires PS or customer investigation Escalate to level 2
No Note Template Check for correct entries as per local Re-run Template Download
Definitions Download Failed template list Utility
Validator Failure Confirm by exchanging with known good Replace
Validator - Reload template
USB Comms Disconnected USB Inspect USB cable at device, hub and core Reconnect securely
Failure cable
Damaged Cable Inspect or test with known good cable Replace the damaged cable
Faulty Hub Replace hub Replace the hub
CPU-T fault Confirm by exchanging with known good Replace
control board
Interlock open Interlock open Make interlock and test Rack BNA fully home
No Power to Inspect interlock - confirm 24 interlocked Re-establish power to interlock
Interlock supply is available when interlock closed
Transport Jam Bill Jam or sensor Inspect for what could be blocking a sensor Clear any debris and remove
blocked or causing transport to fail to move all bills except those in the
escrow
Transport Problem remains after eliminating Replace Transport FRU
Hardware Fault previous root cause
Validator Jam Bill Jam or sensor Inspect for what could be blocking a sensor Clear any debris and remove
blocked or causing validator transport to fail to all bills except those in the
move escrow
Hardware fault Problem remains after eliminating Replace Validator FRU and
previous root cause reload templates
Escrow Jam Bill Jam or sensor Inspect for what could be blocking a sensor Clear any debris and remove
blocked or causing escrow transport to fail to move all bills except those in the
escrow
Hardware fault Problem remains after eliminating Replace escrow FRU
previous root cause

Escrow Escrow not Inspect Ensure Escrow is fully home
Removed inserted
Escrow Present Inspect Replace Main Transport
detection failed
Note Bin Jam Bill Jam or sensor Inspect for what could be blocking sensor Clear any debris and remove
blocked or causing the note bin to report a jam all bills except those in the
escrow
Hardware fault Problem remains after eliminating Replace note bin FRU
with note bin previous root cause
Note Bin Full Bin Full Inspect Empty bin
Bin fault Problem remains after eliminating Replace BIN FRU
previous root cause
Note Bin Bin Missing Inspect Replace Bin & Inspect
Removed Bin fault Problem remains after eliminating Replace BIN FRU
previous root cause
Note Bin Full Bin Nearly full Inspect Empty bin & Inspect
Soon
Inlet Unit Jam Bill Jam or sensor Inspect for what could be blocking sensor Clear any debris and remove
blocked or causing feed unit transport to fail to all bills except those in the
move escrow
Hardware fault Problem remains after eliminating Replace Inlet unit FRU
with inlet unit previous root cause
Reject/Feed Bill Jam or sensor Inspect for what could be blocking sensor Clear any debris and remove
Unit Jam blocked or causing reject unit transport to fail to all bills except those in the
move escrow
Hardware fault Problem remains after eliminating Replace reject / feed unit FRU
with reject unit previous root cause
Capture Bin Bin Full Inspect Empty Bin
Full
Capture Bin Bin Nearly Full Inspect Empty Bin
Full Soon

Shutter Error Shutter Fouling on Inspect shutter for fouling Clear Fouling condition
fascia
6676 only - harness Inspect and Test Replace harness
damaged
Athena - I2C Inspect and Test, substituting known good Replace faulty part
comms issue/ electronics and cable
shutter failed
Shutter damaged Inspect and Test, substituting known good Replace Shutter
part
Transport Sensors dirty Inspect Perform Preventative
Sensors Dirty Maintenance
Escrow Sensors dirty Inspect Perform Preventative
Cash Bin Sensors dirty Inspect Perform Preventative
Inlet Sensors Sensors dirty Inspect Perform Preventative
Dirty Maintenance
Reject/Feed Sensors dirty Inspect Perform Preventative
Unit Sensors Maintenance
Dirty
Capture Bin Sensors dirty Inspect Perform Preventative
Cash Bin2 Sensors dirty Inspect Perform Preventative
BNA Diagnostics Procedure.

1. Use the device log analyser to analyse the Event Logs.
2. Look for the date and time that the call was created.
3. Sort on the “S Data” field and look for the severity 2 error right before the call came
in. This is the initial error that has caused the fault.
4. Then look at:
l M_Data Byte Zero ‐ Command at the time of the fault
l M_Data Byte One and Two ‐ are the Glory error codes that define the area of the
jam.
5. Then look for repeated faults or a pattern. (Repeated faults will indicate a higher
probability of a hardware failure. Single faults could be caused by the quality of the
media.)
6. Visually inspect and clean the area or module targeted by step 4.
7. Perform diagnostics using the 6 point checklist.
8. If the pattern of errors persist, then replace the failing module. (Document the M_
Status and M‐Data causing the fault and send it back along with the module to be
reworked.)
Level 1 Diagnostics
The level 1 diagnostics for the BNA are:
Applet Test Description Looping

Id
0 MENU This displays a menu of all the other Applets to allow an operator to select one. No
1 ACCEPT The BNA is enabled to accept a bunch of notes. On receipt of the hardware’s Yes
NOTES response to the enable, the returned MSTATUS and MDATA fields are displayed.
If the M_CODE from the response is not GOOD PENDING the test will terminate
with a Fail status. Otherwise, the user is prompted to enter a bunch of notes with
message PLEASE ENTER BANKNOTES. if no bank notes are entered within 30
seconds, the test times out. The BNA is then disabled and the test terminates with
a Test Incomplete status.
If any (or all) of the notes are subsequently rejected as bad, the bad notes are
presented at the refund slot. If the notes in the refund slot are not removed
within 30 seconds the test terminates with Test Incomplete status.
If all notes have been accepted, or the bad notes have been removed from the
refund slot, a NOTES PROCESSED message is displayed along with the total
number of each denomination of note accepted/rejected.
2 ENCASH A warning that money is about to be moved into a non-refundable storage bin is No
displayed and the user is asked to confirm or cancel the operation through an
OK/cancel screen.
If the cancel button is selected, the command is canceled and any notes in the
escrow will remain there and a NO NOTES ENCASHED message is displayed.
When the OK button is clicked, the BNA is enabled to encash any notes currently
held in the escrow. When the command response is received, the returned
MSTATUS and MDATA fields are displayed.
The BNA will attempt to move any notes currently held in the escrow to the note
bin. A NOTES ENCASHED message is displayed if the command succeeds;
otherwise a NO NOTES ENCASHED message is displayed.
3 FORCE BNA1: This test performs the same function as the previously described Encash No
ENCASH test, but with one additional element - running this test will move all notes found
in the transport (i.e. in the device but NOT in the escrow) to refund slot.
BNA2 and BNA3: This test performs the same function as the previously
described Encash test, but with one additional element - running this test will
move all notes found in the transport (that is in the device but Not in the escrow)
to the capture bin.

Id
4 REFUND The BNA is enabled to refund any notes currently held in the escrow. When the No
command response is received, the returned MSTATUS and MDATA fields are
output.
The BNA moves any notes currently held in the escrow to the refund slot and
displays a PLEASE REMOVE NOTES prompt. A NO NOTES REFUNDED message is
displayed if there was no notes in the escrow to refund.
5 FORCE This test is identical to the previously described Refund test, but with one No
REFUND additional element - running this test will refund all notes found anywhere in the
device (other than the storage bins).
6 STATUS The status of the BNA is interrogated. When the command response is received, Yes
the reported M_STATUS and M_DATA fields are displayed.
The total number of each active denomination of active currency currently held
in the device’s escrow is then displayed.
7 REPORT A Reported Definitions command is sent to the BNA. When the command Yes
DEFINITIONS response is received, the returned MSTATUS and MDATA fields are output.
If the command succeeds, a table of the currently programmed note definitions is
output.
8 SYNCHRONISE This test will set the date and time on the BNA to match that of the parent ATM. Yes
On receipt of the hardware’s response to the synchronise command, the
returned MSTATUS and MDATA fields will be displayed to indicate the success or
otherwise of the test.

Id
9 READ EVENT A Read Event Log command is sent to the BNA. When the command response is No
LOG received, the report M_STATUS and MDATA fields are displayed.
If the M_CODE from the response is not GOOD PENDING the test will terminate
with a Fail Status. Otherwise a prompt, with an option to cancel, indicating that
the event log is being read is displayed. The process of reading the event log is
quite time consuming (approximately 20 minutes for UD10 & 40; 60 minutes for
UB-50, 80 minutes for UD686 and X (TBD, less than BNA2) minutes for UD- 700).
During this time the prompt is updated regularly to indicate activity.
If the user selects ‘Cancel’ then a Disable command is sent to the BNA and the test
terminates with a Not Complete Status.
When the EVENT_LOG_WRITTEN unsolicited response is received the reported
M_STATUS and M_DATA fields are displayed.
If the BNA event log file has been created in the same directory as the core driver
then the user is prompted to copy this to a floppy disk if the event log file cannot
be found the test exits with a Fail status.
If the user elects to save to flex then an attempt is made to save the event log to
the flex disk in the file ‘BNAELOG.TXT’ If this file is present it will be overwritten. If
this operation fails then a prompt requiring the user to insert a disk in the flex
drive and reselect this option is displayed. If the data is successfully written to file
then a prompt indicating that the data has been successfully written to file is
displayed. In either case the prompt is removed after 3 seconds and the user is
returned to viewing the test results.
10 RUN TO RUN The following sequence of tests is executed:- Yes
SEQUENCE STATUS, ACCEPT, REFUND
11 SHUTTER TEST This test is for UD686 and UD700. It opens the shutter, leaves it open for Yes
approximately 3 seconds and then closes the shutter. Appropriate ‘Shutter Open’
and ‘Shutter Closed’ messages are displayed. If at any point the shutter should fail,
an error message is displayed showing the M-status.
12 RETRACT This test is for UD686 and UD700. A prerequisite is that there is money in the No
escrow by running test Applet Id 1 (Accept Notes). Notes will be refunded to the
inlet of the infeed, remain for up to 10 seconds and then retracted and stored in
the capture bin. A ‘Notes Retracted’ message is displayed on successful
conclusion. If an error occurs, the appropriate M-status is displayed.
13 SORT TO This applet will configure a UD50, UD686 or UD700 device such that on No
FRONT conducting test applet 2 (Encash), notes will be stored to the front cassette. This
CASSETTE configuration applet can only be used successfully when the device is in the idle
state (no money entered). If, for any reason the configuration is not successful,
the appropriate M-status will be displayed. If it is successful, a ‘Destination
Configured’ message will be displayed. When ECB Article 6 has been set by an
application, only category 4 notes (genuine) will be stored to the front cassette.

Id
14 SORT TO This applet will configure a UD50, UD686 or UD700 in the same way as applet 13 No
REAR with one major exception - notes will be stored to the rear cassette when test
CASSETTE applet 2 is run (Encash).
15 FORCE TO This test is for UD686 and UD700. This test performs the same function as the No
CAPTURE BIN previously described Encash test, but running this test will move all notes found in
the transport AND in the escrow to the capture bin.
16 LIST A List Templates command is sent to the BNA. When the command response is No
TEMPLATES received, the returned MSTATUS and MDATA fields are output.
If the command succeeds, the DSP Firmware Version and a table of the currently
loaded templates is output. The user is prompted to save this output to a flex disk.
If the user elects to save to external storage device then an attempt is made to
save the event log to the flex disk in the file ‘Template.txt’. If this file is present it
will be overwritten. If this operation fails then a prompt requiring the user to
insert a disk in the flex drive and reselect this option is displayed. If the Data is
successfully written to file then a prompt indicating that the data has been
successfully written to file is displayed. In either case the prompt is removed after
3 seconds and the user is returned to viewing the test results.
17 LIST A List Firmware Version command is sent to the BNA. When the command No
FIRMWARE response is received, the returned MSTATUS and MDATA fields are output.
VERSION If the command succeeds, the current Firmware Version is output.

Id
18 Download This test is for UD686 or UD700. A search is made for a valid download file and No
UD686 the user prompted as to whether to download it or not. If yes, a Download
Firmware or Firmware command is sent to the BNA, passing the filename. When the
Download command response is received, the returned MSTATUS and MDATA fields are
UD700 output. If it is not a UD686 or UD700 the MSTATUS is Command not Acceptable.
Firmware If the M_CODE from the response is not GOOD PENDING the test will terminate
with a Fail Status. Otherwise a message indicating that the firmware is being
downloaded is displayed. The process of downloading is displayed. The process of
downloading is quite time consuming, up to 40 minutes for UD686, 4minutes for
UD700, so the display is updated regularly to indicate activity.
The download cannot be canceled.
When the FIRMWARE_DOWNLOAD unsolicited response is received the
reported M_STATUS and M_DATA fields are displayed.
The download process will create a log file, “FDownLog.TXT” and the user is
prompted to copy this to a flex disk. If the log file cannot be found the test exits
with a Fail status.
If the user elects to save to flex then an attempt is made to copy the log to the
flex disk. If this file is present it will be overwritten. If this operation fails then a
prompt requiring the user to insert a disk in the flex drive and reselect this option
is displayed. If the data is successfully written to file then a prompt indicating that
the data has been successfully written to file is displayed. In either case the
prompt is removed after 3 seconds and the user is returned to viewing the test
results.
19 Read Partial A Read Partial Event Log command is sent to the BNA. When the command No
UD686 Log or response is received, the reported M_STATUS and MDATA fields are displayed.
Read Partial If the M_CODE from the response is not GOOD PENDING the test will terminate
UD700 Log with a Fail Status. Otherwise a prompt, with an option to cancel, indicating that
the event log is being read is displayed. The process of reading the partial event
log should be approximately 4 minutes. During this time the prompt is updated
regularly to indicate activity.
If the user selects ‘Cancel’ then a disable command is sent to the BNA and the test
terminates with a Not Complete Status.
When the EVENT_LOG_WRITTEN unsolicited response is received the reported
M_STATUS and M_DATA fields are displayed.
If the BNA event log file has been created in the same directory as the core driver
then the user is prompted to copy this to a floppy disk. if the event log file cannot
be found the test exits with a Fail status.
If the user elects to save to flex then an attempt is made to save the event log to
the flex disk in the file ‘BNAPLOG.TXT’. If this file is present it will be overwritten.
If this operation fails then a prompt requiring the user to insert a disk in the flex
drive and reselect this option is displayed. If the data is successfully written to file
then a prompt indicating that the data has been successfully written to file is
displayed. In either case the prompt is removed after 3 seconds and the user is
returned to viewing the test results.
Level 3 Diagnostics
The level 3 diagnostics for the BNA are:
S_DATA
The S_DATA returned for the BNA are:
S_DATA Meaning
00 GOOD (No error, continue to use)
01 ROUTINE (Continue to use but log error information in maintenance fields)
02 WARNING (Continue to use, log error information, warn operator if possible)
03 SUSPEND (Do not use this device for the defined time period)
04 FATAL (Do not use device again until there has been operator intervention)
Tallies
The tallies recorded for the BNA are listed below.
Tally Description
ACCEPTED Notes accepted into escrow from the input slot
REJECTED Notes returned to refund slot from the input slot
ENCASHED Notes transferred into cash bin from the escrow
REFUNDED Notes returned to refund slot from the escrow
CAPTURED Notes transferred to the capture bin
CONTOLLER ERRORS Number of jams and device errors associated with the controller module
TRANSPORT ERRORS Number of jams and device errors associated with the transport module
VALIDATOR ERRORS Number of jams and device errors associated with the validator module
ESCROW ERRORS Number of jams and device errors associated with the escrow module
CASH BIN ERRORS Number of jams and device errors associated with the cash bin
IN FEED ERRORS Number of jams and device errors associated with the in feed module
REJECT ERRORS Number of jams and device errors associated with the reject module
CAPTURE BIN ERRORS Number of jams and device errors associated with the capture bin module
SHUTTER ERRORS Number of jams and device errors associated with the shutter module
TRANSACTIONS Number of transactions processed
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

Units (FRUs) of the BNA.
Cassette
Remove cassette as follows:
The cassette containing the note bins and the capture bin can be accessed by two different
methods depending on configuration. It can remain on slides attached to the cash acceptor
(mode 1) or it can be completely removed from the cash acceptor (mode 2). This will be
determined by the position of the locking lever:
l Mode 1 - the locking lever is set in the tilted position.

l Mode 2 - the locking lever is set in the vertical position.
1. Access the module as described in the appropriate ATM Operator Overview

manual. Enter supervisor mode.
2. Pull the green latch forwards to release the garage unit door then lower the door.
3. Mode 1 - Use the handle on the cassette to carefully pull it out of the garage unit until
its slides are fully extended.
4. Mode 2 - Use the handle to carefully pull the cassette out of the garage unit until the
top handle is in view. With the other hand, grasp the handle and lift the cassette clear
of the cash acceptor.
TAKE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE CASSETTE AS IT CAN BE HEAVY.
Infeed Unit
Remove infeed unit as follows:
1. Remove power from the ATM.

2. Unplug connector from under the infeed unit.
3. Remove screw A from the top of the infeed unit and the 2 screws B from the right-
hand side.
B
n
Con
4. Lift infeed unit away from the BNA and remove.
Replace infeed unit as follows:
Replacement of the infeed unit is the reverse of the above procedure.
Infeed Unit (without clearance at rear of safe)

In cases where the infeed unit does not clear the rear wall of the safe, when the module is
retracted remove the infeed unit as follows:

2. Release the harness feeding down from the rear of the feed-reject unit by unclipping
the 3 cable ties.
3. Remove 2 screws A securing feed reject unit in position.
4. Remove 2 screws B securing feed reject unit in position.
5. Unplug connector from under the infeed unit.
B
n
Con
6. Remove screw A from the top of the infeed unit and the 2 screws B from the right-
hand side.
7. Taking care not to catch the harnessing on the corner of the main transport lift the
rear of the feed reject unit up.
8. Lift infeed unit away from the BNA and remove.
Replace infeed unit as follows:
Replacement of the infeed unit is the reverse of the above procedure.
Feed Reject Unit

Remove feed reject unit as follows:

2. Remove 2 screws securing cover plate to feed reject unit and remove cover plate.
Screw
3. Remove 4 screws securing cover plate to garage unit and remove cover plate.
Screw
4. Undo 8 cable clips and unplug connector from position CN 9 on control board.
CN 3 CN 2
CN 1
CN 9
5. Undo 8 cable clips and unplug 3 connectors from positions CN 1, CN 2 and CN 3 on

control board.
6. Remove 2 screws A securing feed reject unit in position.
7. Remove 2 screws B securing feed reject unit in position.
8. Check all harness are free from obstruction and remove feed reject unit.
Replace feed reject unit as follows:
Replacement of the feed reject unit is the reverse of the above procedure.
Recognition Unit
Remove the recognition unit as follows:

2. Undo 2 cable clips and unplug 2 connectors from recognition unit.
Connectors
USB
Screws
3. Remove 2 screws securing recognition unit in position.

4. From the opposite side of the unit remove the screw and spring.
Spring
Screw
5. Remove recognition unit by lifting up and sliding out.
Replace recognition unit as follows:
Replacement of the recognition unit is the reverse of the above procedure.
MBV Harness Assembly

Remove MBV harness assembly as follows:

Screw
3. Undo cable clip and unplug 2 connectors from recognition unit.
Connectors
CN 6
4. Undo 2 cable clips and unplug connector from position CN6 on control board.
5. Remove MBV harness assembly.
Replace MBV harness assembly as follows:
Replacement of the MBV harness assembly is the reverse of the above procedure.
Escrow
Remove escrow as follows:

2. Remove the stabilizer strut.
3. Remove screw allowing bracket to swing down.
Bracket
Screw
4. Undo cable clip and unplug connector.
Connector
Clip
5. Remove escrow by sliding out.
Replace escrow as follows:
Replacement of the escrow is the reverse of the above procedure.
Main Transport
Remove main transport as follows:

2. Remove the feed reject unit, escrow and recognition unit as detailed in the previous
procedures.
3. Unplug 3 connectors from positions CN 4, CN 5, CN 8 and undo cable clips.
CN 4
CN 5
CN 8
4. Pull the 3 harnesses through the holes.

5. Remove 2 screws A securing main transport in position.
Screw A
6. Remove 2 screws B securing main transport in position and rear screw (if fitted).
Screw B
7. Lift main transport from garage unit.
Replace main transport as follows:
Replacement of the main transport is the reverse of the above procedure.
Control Board
Remove control board as follows:

Screw
3. Remove all connectors from control board.

4. Remove 7 screws securing control board to garage unit and remove control board.
Screw
Screw
Replace control board as follows:
Replacement of the control board is the reverse of the above procedure.
Cassette Connector (Front Access)

Remove cassette connector as follows:

2. Remove the cassette as detailed in the previous procedure.
3. Undo 6 cable clips and unplug connector from position CN 10 on control board.
Ground Wire
CN 10
4. Remove screw securing ground wire to garage.
5. Remove 2 screws securing cassette connector to garage.
Cassette
Screws Connector
6. Remove cassette connector from garage
Replace cassette connector as follows:
Replacement of the cassette connector is the reverse of the above procedure.
Cassette Connector (Rear Access)

Remove cassette connector as follows:

3. Unplug connector from position CN 10 on control board.
CN 10
4. Remove 2 screws securing cassette connector to garage unit.
Cassette
Connector
Screws
5. Remove cassette connector from garage unit.
Replace cassette connector as follows:
Replacement of the cassette connector is the reverse of the above procedure.
MBV L Shaped PCB

Remove the MBV L Shaped PCB as follows:

2. Unplug all connectors from PCB.
3. Remove screw securing bracket to garage unit.
MBV ‘L’ shaped PCB
Screw
4. Remove PCB from bracket by removing 3 screws.
MBV ‘L’ Shaped PCB
Screws
Bracket
Replace MBV L Shaped PCB as follows:
Replacement of the MBV L Shaped PCB is the reverse of the above procedure.
Door Switch Assembly (Front Access)

Remove the door switch assembly as follows:

CN 11
Note: A long screwdriver can be used via access holes on the opposite side of the
garage.
4. Remove 2 screws securing door switch assembly to garage unit and remove door
switch assembly.
Screws
Replace door switch assembly as follows:
Replacement of the door switch assembly is the reverse of the above procedure.
Door Switch Assembly (Rear Access)

Remove the door switch assembly as follows:

CN 11
4. Remove 2 screws securing door switch assembly to garage unit and remove door
switch assembly.
Screws
Replace door switch assembly as follows:
Replacement of the door switch assembly is the reverse of the above procedure.
Drawbridge Assembly
Remove the drawbridge assembly as follows:

3. Remove the 3 circlips as shown in the following three illustrations.
Circlip
Circlip
Circlip
4. Remove shaft from drawbridge.
Drawbridge
Shaft
5. Remove assembly from studs.
Stud
Stud
6. Remove 2 screws from stud assembly and remove stud assembly.
Screws
Replace drawbridge assembly as follows:
Replacement of the drawbridge assembly is the reverse of the above procedure.
Garage Unit
Remove the garage unit as follows:

3. Remove feed reject unit as detailed in the previous procedure.
4. Remove the recognition unit as detailed in the previous procedure.
5. Remove escrow as detailed in the previous procedure.
6. Remove main transport as detailed in the previous procedure.
7. Remove garage unit.
Replace garage unit as follows:
Replacement of the garage unit is the reverse of the above procedure.
CABLING
None.
Communication
Shutter/MEI Control
The BNA can control the ATM’s fascia shutter and MEIs as follows:
l Level - TTL
l Connector - Molex 2 x 4 header
Pin Desc Pin Desc

1 DISP LOCK 2 GND
3 DISP OPEN 4 DISP SOL
5 NC 6 +12V
7 MEI A 8 MEI B
None.
REVISION

BUNCH NOTE ACCEPTOR (UD-686)
INTRODUCTION
The Bunch Note Acceptor (UD-686) accepts a 9.8 mm thick bunch of banknotes inserted
into a slot in the ATM fascia, transports the bunch into the safe, and carries out recognition
and validation tasks on the notes. Depending upon the application, valid notes are
transported to a cassette or returned to the fascia at the card holder’s request. Notes that
haven’t been successfully identified will be returned to the cardholder.
The UD-686 Bunch Note Acceptor will have a short, medium or long inlet depending on the
product it is installed in.
The variant of the UD686 that uses the Alternate Bill Validator (ABV) instead of the
standard bill validator is available in three types, corresponding to the length of the inlet
units: UD-686 A3 for long inlet, UD-686 M3 for medium and UD-686 F3 for short. The ABV
can be easily identified as it has two clips instead of the standard one clip to close the unit.
The name Bunch Note Acceptor (UD-686) is used in engineering documentation and
publications (for example, this manual and the PIM). Publications and sales literature for
NCR customers will refer to the module as the Cash Acceptor Module and you may also
come across the term Cash Deposit Module.
DESCRIPTION
Inlet
Unit
Reject Unit
Feed Unit
CPM Support
Frame
Vertical Feed
Transport Unit Transport
Door
Escrow Unit
Recognition Unit Garage Unit

Door
Cassette
The functional components of the BNA are shown in the above illustration.
The BNA is capable of taking in 9.8 mm thick bunches of notes and transporting them from
the fascia, via the inlet unit, into the safe. In the feed unit the notes are stripped off the
bunch one at a time and are fed through a series of sensors in the recognition unit to check
their validity. Magnetic stripe, fluorescence, and magnetic character recognition are used in
the checks and, depending upon the results, the notes are sent to the escrow unit or the
reject unit. Notes in the reject unit are returned in a bunch via the inlet unit to the same slot
on the fascia at which the deposit was made.
Notes from the escrow unit are stored in the banknote storage cassette in a stack, after the
card holder has agreed to the counted value, to complete the deposit transaction. If the
card holder cancels the transaction then the notes in the escrow unit are returned to the
fascia in up to two bunches. The smallest bunch (total number of notes minus 50) is
returned first and then a bunch of 50 is returned. Notes left at the fascia after a cancel
operation can be retracted into a capture bin. If power is lost when notes are in the
transport then, dependent upon application control, these notes will be transported to the
capture bin on power up.
Once notes have been deposited and the transaction is finalised by the card holder, there is
no way of returning the deposited notes.
Movement of Notes
Notes are transported through the BNA either gripped between upper and lower belts or
driven over smooth surfaces by upper belts. Solenoid operated gates select the note path.
The following diagrams show the five note paths possible during a transaction, namely:
l accept
l reject
l encash
l refund
l capture.
Accept
The bunch of notes is moved to the feed unit where the notes are stripped off one by one,
passed down the vertical transport and diverted through the recognition unit. Good notes
are driven to the escrow and stored. Up to 100 notes can be held in the escrow.
Reject
Notes not validated by the recognition unit are driven up to the reject unit where they form a
bunch on top of the lowered transport platform. The bunch is driven back to the card holder
when the transport is raised and the belt drive reversed.
Notes in excess of 100 are also sent to the reject unit. If 110 good notes are deposited then
100 will go to the escrow and 10 to the reject unit.
Platform
Down
Encash
Following a successful Accept operation the details of the validated notes are displayed on
the ATM monitor and a warning is given that the money is about to be moved into non-
refundable storage. If the card holder is satisfied with the details of the notes displayed on
the ATM monitor and selects to complete the deposit transaction, the notes are driven from
the escrow down to the inner garage unit where they are diverted to one of the cassettes.
DIVERTED TO EITHER CASSETTE
Refund
If, after a successful accept operation, the card holder asks for the notes to be returned, the
notes are driven from the escrow up to the reject unit. The platform that forms the lower
part of the transport in the reject unit has been lowered to permit the notes to build up in a
bunch. The platform is then raised and the belt drive is reversed so that the bunch of notes
is driven out via the inlet unit to the fascia slot.
The maximum number of notes in a bunch being returned to the fascia is restricted to 50 so
that, if more than 50 notes have been deposited, the notes are returned in two bunches.
The first bunch returned contains total number of notes minus 50, and the second bunch
contains 50 notes.
Platform
Down
Capture
If the card holder does not take the bunch of refunded notes within a preset time-out, then it
is retracted to the feed unit, where the single notes are stripped off the bunch and the
process of validation is repeated. Good notes are stored in the escrow and rejected notes
are bunched in the reject unit.
Depending upon the application the notes from the escrow will then be sent either, to one
of the cassettes, or to the capture bin between the cassettes. Notes in the reject unit will
then be transported to the capture bin by the path passing under the recognition unit as
shown in the following figure. The same path, but including the inlet unit, is used on error
recovery to flush the areas, other than the escrow, of notes.
Sensors and Actuators

The diagram below shows the position of the sensors and actuators throughout the BNA.
The sections that follow name the sensors and actuators in each functional unit and briefly
describe their function.
Inlet Unit
Symbol Function
PSF1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Banknote tracking sensors
PIF1 Banknote removal detection photointerrupter
PIF2 Bunch thickness detection photointerrupter
PIF3 Passage cover opened condition detection photointerrupter
SDF1 Entry open/close solenoid
SDF2 Delivery portion open/close solenoid
The diagram above shows the full set of sensors for the long inlet unit. The medium and
short inlet units have fewer sensors fitted as shown in the following table.
Type Long Inlet Medium Inlet Short Inlet

PSF1 Fitted Fitted Fitted
PSF2 Fitted Fitted No
PSF3 Fitted No No
PSF4 Fitted Fitted Fitted
PSF5 (Skew Detection) Fitted Fitted Fitted
Reject Unit
Symbol Function
PSK1 (L/R) Banknote tracking sensor
PSK2, 3, 4 (L/R) Remaining banknote detection sensors
PSK5 Banknote tracking sensor
PIK1, 2 Stage home position detection photointerrupters
MK1 Transport motor
MK2 Stage driving motor
SDK1 Stopper driving solenoid
SDK2 Diverter solenoid
CLK1 Low speed transport change clutch
CLK2 Inlet drive on/off clutch
Feed Unit
Symbol Function
PSM1 (L/R) Banknote tracking sensor
PSM2, 3, 4 (L/R) Remaining banknote detection sensors
PSM5 Banknote tracking sensor
MM1 Transport motor
MM2 Reverse roller driving motor
MM3 Take in transport motor
SDM1 Banknote pressing plate driving solenoid
SDM2 Take in roller driving solenoid
SDM3 Feed block entry solenoid
Transport Block and Escrow Unit
Symbol Function
Transport Block
PS1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8 (L/R) Banknote tracking sensors
PSK5, 6, 7 (LL/LR/RL/RR) Banknote tracking sensors
Symbol Function
M1, M2 Transport motors
SD1, 2, 3, 4 Diverter solenoids
CL1 Recognition unit drive on/off clutch
MSW1, 2, 3 Unit set detection microswitches
Escrow Unit
PSR1 (L/R) Banknote count sensor
PSR3 Tape start position detection sensor
PIR1 Tape end position detection sensor
MR1 Transport motor
Recognition Unit
The sensors of the Recognition Unit are contained in the Bill Validator Unit.
Standard Bill Validator:
Alternate Bill Validator (ABV):
TAPE
Sensor
PS BV
LED IMAGE
ARRAY Sensor
THREAD
Sensor
FLU
UV Sensor
Sensor
MR
Sensor
Symbol Function
PSBV (L/R) Colour sensor
IR SENSOR Infra-red reflection sensor
MR SENSOR Magnetic sensor
THREAD SENSOR Security thread sensor
IMAGE SENSOR Image sensor
UV SENSOR UV sensor
Garage Inner Block
Symbol Function
PSG1(LL/LR/RL/RR) Banknote tracking sensor
PSG2 Banknote presence detection sensor
SDG1, 2 Diverter solenoids
MG1 Transport motor
Front Cassette
PSC3 (L/R) Banknote tracking sensor
PSC4 (L/R) Banknote upper end detection sensor
PSC6 Banknote presence detection sensor
PIC4 Stage driving bracket upper position detection sensor
PIC5 Nearly full condition detection sensor
PIC6 Stage driving bracket lower position detection sensor
MC2 Stage driving motor
Rear Cassette
PSC1 (L/R) Banknote tracking sensor
PSC2 (L/R) Banknote upper end detection sensor
PSC5 Banknote presence detection sensor
PIC1 Stage driving bracket upper position detection sensor
PIC2 Nearly full condition detection sensor
PIC3 Stage driving bracket lower position detection sensor
MC1 Stage driving motor
Specifications
Currency
The BNA can accept banknotes with the following characteristics:
l Material - paper, including cotton paper and polymer
Dimensions
l Width, 60 mm - 85 mm
l Length, 120 mm - 170 mm
Mechanism
Banknotes are handled by the BNA as follows:
l Feed method - Placed in bundle of notes up to 9.8 mm thick.

l Feed direction - Width of notes presented to inlet.
l Inlet Unit - 9.8 mm bunch of banknotes maximum.
l Feed Block - 100 banknotes maximum.
l Feed speed - 5 banknotes per second (approximately).
l Escrow function - built in.
l Escrow Unit - 100 banknotes maximum.
l Disposition of abnormal banknotes - Unrecognisable and unspecified banknotes are
returned from the inlet
l Method of return - Returned in a bundle of maximum 50 notes.
l Reject Block - 100 banknotes maximum on input, 50 notes on return.
l Banknote speed - 1,600 mm/sec.
Communication
Control of the BNA -
The BNA is controlled by the host ATM as follows:
l Level - RS-232
l Speed - 9,600 bps
l Format - 8 data bits; 1 stop bit, 1 start bit, 1 parity bit (even parity)
l Connector - 9 pin Type D male plug
l Pin 1 - frame ground
l Pin 2 - TXD (BNA to host)
l Pin 3 - RXD (Host to BNA)
l Pin 5 - signal ground.
Template Download -
Currency templates are downloaded to the BNA as follows:
l Level - RS-232
l Speed - 9,600 bps
l Format - 8 data bits; 1 stop bit, 1 parity bit (even parity)
l Connector - 9 pin Type D male plug.
Shutter/MEI Control -
The BNA can control the ATM’s fascia shutter and MEIs as follows:
l Level - TTL
l Connector - Molex 2x4 header.
Firmware Download -
Rewriting the BNA firmware is possible by a flash card method.
Power Requirement
The power requirement of the BNA is as follows:
l Input voltage = +24 Vdc and +24 Vdc (interlocked)

l Power Consumption:
l Standby = 2 A typical
l In operation = 12 A typical, 15 A peak
l Connector - Molex 2x2 header.
The power supply requires an overvoltage/over current protection feature.
Specification of Principal Units

The table below gives the specification of the principal functional units of the BNA:
Sub-Unit Function Measure

FEED/REJECT UNIT
Feed Height of feeding portion 30mm (dimension between upper and lower guides)
Block Width of feeding portion 88mm
Feeding speed Approx 5 banknotes per second
Number of banknotes to be 100 banknotes max.
taken in at one time
Detection of remaining Built in (some folded banknotes may not be detected).
banknotes.
Shutter control Built in
Tray Not built in
Other MEI controller
Reject Number of banknotes to be 100 banknotes (The maximum number of rejected banknotes
Block returned at one time is 50).
Divided returning Built-in, returns banknotes by divided numbers according to
the fed number).

Detection of remaining Built-in. (Some folded banknotes like the illustration below,
banknotes may not be detected)
Short Edge
Inlet Width 88mm

Height 14mm (dimension between upper and lower guides).
Banknote length detection Built-in. (Banknotes that are approx. 180mm long, or more,
are returned).
Taking-in speed Approx. 200mm per second
Input capacity 9.8 mm bunch of banknotes maximum
Return capacity 50 banknotes maximum
ESCROW UNIT
Capacity 100 banknotes maximum
GARAGE UNIT
Garage Number of cassettes 2
Capture bin Built-in
Capture Banknotes to be stored Forgotten (left) banknotes, banknotes to be stored according

Bin to ECB Article 6.
Capacity 50 banknotes (full condition may be detected before reaching
50, depending upon bank-note condition).
“Full condition” detection Built-in (number of banknotes is counted).
Sealing mechanism Built-in
Cassette Capacity Approx. 1,500 banknotes for brand new US dollar.

Lock Built-in
Sealing mechanism Built-in
Detection of remaining
banknotes:
Nearly full Built-in

Full Built-in. 300 banknotes after “nearly full” Number of
banknotes is counted.
Other Detachable from garage.
Dimensions Height = 535mm, width = 123mm, Depth = 245mm.
Weight 4kg approx.
TROUBLESHOOTING
None.
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 1
Tests on the BNA2 are:
1. ACCEPT NOTES*
2. ENCASH
3. FORCE ENCASH
4. REFUND
5. FORCE REFUND
6. STATUS*
7. REPORT DEFINITIONS*
8. SYNCHRONISE*
9. READ EVENT LOG
10. RUN TO RUN SEQUENCE*
11. SHUTTER*
12. RETRACT
13. SORT TO FRONT CASSETTE
14. SORT TO REAR CASSETTE
15. FORCE TO CAPTURE BIN
16. LIST TEMPLATES
17. LIST FIRMWARE VERSION
18. DOWNLOAD UD686 FIRMWARE.
NOTE: Looping is available on the tests marked (*) above.
Accept Notes
The ACCEPT NOTES test enables the BNA to accept a bunch of notes.
You are prompted to insert a bunch of notes. If the bunch is not inserted within 30 seconds
the test times out and the BNA is disabled. A NO NOTES ENTERED message is
displayed and the test terminates with a NOT COMPLETE status. If notes are inserted, a
PROCESSING NOTES message is displayed while the money is being validated.
If any (or all) of the notes are subsequently rejected as bad, the bad notes are presented at
the refund slot and a PLEASE REMOVE NOTES message is displayed. If the refunded
notes are not removed within 30 seconds, a NOTES NOT REMOVED message is
displayed and the test terminates with a NOT COMPLETE status. If all notes have been
accepted, or the bad notes have been removed from the refund slot, a NOTES
PROCESSED message is displayed along with the total number of each denomination of
note accepted/rejected.
Encash
The ENCASH test displays a warning that money is about to be moved into a non-
refundable storage bin and asks you to confirm or cancel the operation through an
OK/CANCEL screen. If the CANCEL button is selected, the command is cancelled and
any notes in the escrow remain there while a NO NOTES ENCASHED message is
displayed.
When the OK button is selected the BNA is enabled to encash any notes currently held in
the escrow. The BNA will attempt to move any notes currently held in the escrow to the
cash bin (cassette). A NOTES ENCASHED message is displayed if the command
succeeds, otherwise, a NO NOTES ENCASHED message is displayed.
Force Encash
The FORCE ENCASH test performs the same function as the ENCASH test with one
additional element - running this test moves all notes found in the transport (in the device
but not in the escrow) to the capture bin.
Refund
The REFUND test enables the BNA to refund any notes currently held in the escrow.
The BNA moves any notes currently held in the escrow to the fascia slot and displays a
PLEASE REMOVE NOTES prompt. A NO NOTES REFUNDED message is displayed if
there were no notes in the escrow to refund.
Force refund
The FORCE REFUND test is identical to the REFUND test except that all notes, found
anywhere in the device (other than the storage bins), are refunded.
Status
The STATUS test interrogates the status of the BNA and displays the total number of each
denomination of currency held in the escrow.
report Definitions
The REPORT DEFINITIONS test outputs a table of the note definitions held on the ATM.
The definitions that have been made active at start of day (downloaded to the BNA) are
marked with a hash (#) and those that are inactive are marked with an exclamation mark
(!).
Synchronise
The SYNCHRONISE test sets the date and time on the BNA to match that of the parent
ATM.
Read Event Log

The READ EVENT LOG test displays a prompt, with an option to cancel, indicating that the
event log is being read. The process of reading the event log is time consuming
(approximately 80 minutes for UD-686). During this time the prompt is updated regularly to
indicate activity. If you select CANCEL the test terminates with a NOT COMPLETE status.
When the BNA event log file has been created you are prompted to copy the file to a floppy
disk. If you decide to save to floppy disk, an attempt is made to save the file as
BNAELOG.TXT. If there is a file of this name on the floppy then it will be overwritten. After
the write, you are returned to the test results view.
Run to Run Sequence

In the RUN TO RUN SEQUENCE the following tests are carried out:
l STATUS
l ACCEPT NOTES
l REFUND.
Shutter
The SHUTTER test opens the BNA shutter, leaves it open for approximately 3 seconds,
and then closes it.
Note: The MEI does not operate during the shutter test.
Retract
The RETRACT test requires the ACCEPT NOTES test to be run first so that there are
notes in the escrow. The test refunds notes to the fascia slot, keeps them there for up to 10
seconds, then retracts them to the capture bin. A NOTES RETRACTED message is
displayed when the test is successful or the appropriate M_STATUS is displayed on an
error.
Sort to Front Cassette

The SORT TO FRONT CASSETTE test configures a UD-686 so that, when an ENCASH
test is run, notes are stored to the front cassette. This test can only be run when the device
is in the idle state (no money entered). A DESTINATION CONFIGURED message is
displayed when the test is successful, otherwise the appropriate M_STATUS is displayed.
Sort to Rear Cassette

The SORT TO REAR CASSETTE test configures a UD-686 so that, when an ENCASH
test is run, notes are stored to the rear cassette. This test can only be run when the device
is in the idle state (no money entered). A DESTINATION CONFIGURED message is
displayed when the test is successful, otherwise the appropriate M_STATUS is displayed.
Force to Capture Bin

The FORCE TO CAPTURE BIN test performs the same function as the ENCASH test, but
running this test will move all notes found in the transport and in the escrow, to the capture
bin.
List Templates
The LIST TEMPLATES test outputs the DSP firmware version and a table of the currently
loaded templates on the BNA. You will be prompted to save this output to a flex disk. The
file created will be named ‘TEMPLATE.TXT’. If the file already exists, it will be overwritten.
If the operation fails, a prompt to insert a flex disk will appear You will be informed by a
prompt when the data has been successfully written to file. The prompts will appear for 3
seconds and then you will be returned to the test results screen.
List Firmware Version

The LIST FIRMWARE VERSION test outputs the current firmware version on the BNA.
Download UD686 Firmware

The DOWNLOAD UD686 FIRMWARE test searches for a valid download file. You will be
prompted whether to download it or not. If you choose to download, a message is
displayed indicating that the firmware is downloading. The download can take up to 40
minutes, so the display is updated regularly to indicate activity.
Note: The download cannot be cancelled.
The download will create a log file named ‘FDownLog.TXT’. You will be prompted to copy
this to flex disk. If the file already exists, it is overwritten. If the operation fails, a prompt to
insert a flex disk will appear. You will be informed by a prompt when the data has been
successfully written to file. The prompts will appear for 3 seconds and then you will be
returned to the test results screen.
Level 3
S_DATA
The S_DATA returned for the BNA are:
S_DATA Meaning
00 NO ERROR (Good)
02 WARNING (May require attention)
04 FATAL (Requires immediate attention)
TALLIES
The tallies are incremented by one (1) when the appropriate condition occurs during
diagnostic and normal use. The BNA tallies are as follows:
Tally Description
ACCEPTED Notes accepted into the escrow from the input slot.
REJECTED Notes returned to the refund slot from the input slot.
ENCASHED Notes transferred into cash bin from the escrow.
REFUNDED Notes returned to refund slot from the escrow.
CAPTURED Notes transferred to the capture bin.
CONTROLLER ERRORS Number of jams and device errors associated with the controller module.
TRANSPORT ERRORS Number of jams and device errors associated with the transport module.
VALIDATOR ERRORS Number of jams and device errors associated with the validator module.
ESCROW ERRORS Number of jams and device errors associated with the escrow module.
CASH BIN ERRORS Number of jams and device errors associated with the cash bin module.
IN FEED ERRORS Number of jams and device errors associated with the in feed module.
REJECT ERRORS Number of jams and device errors associated with the reject module.
CAPTURE BIN ERRORS Number of jams and device errors associated with the capture bin module.
SHUTTER ERRORS Number of jams and device errors associated with the shutter module.
TRANSACTIONS Number of transactions processed.
STRAPPING
This section shows the position of all links and fuses on the electronic boards of the BNA.
BV CPU Board
CNB1
CNB2
DSW1 DSW2
CND2
LD2
LD1
DSW1
CNB6
CNB5
CNB4 CNB3 J2
J1
Jumpers on the BV-CPU board should be placed as follows:
l Jumper J1 = hard wired on board.

l Jumper J2 = Link across pins 1 and 2.
Switches on the BV-CPU board should be set as follows:
l DSW1 = Switches 1, 3, 4, 5 and 6 OFF (set to right), 2, 7, and 8 ON (set to left)

l DSW2 = Switches all OFF (set to right)
l DSW3 = Switches all OFF (set to right).
DSP Board
CND2 CND1
CND3
JP3
JP4
DSW1
SW1 SW2
RSW1 RSW2
CND4
CND7
CND5
JP2
CND6 JP1
Jumpers on the DSP board should be placed as follows:
l Jumpers JP1 and JP2 = hard wired on board

l Jumper JP3 = Link across pins 1 and 2
l Jumper JP4 = Link on NOR (see below).
Edge of Board
JP4
Switches on the DSP board should be set according to template download report, or the
same as the board removed.
THR-AMP Board
Switches on the THR-AMP board should be set as follows:
l SW1:
l Set switches 1 and 3 to ON (down)
l Set switches 2 and 4 to OFF (up).
Power Board
l Jumper JP1 on the Power Board = Link across pins 1 and 2 as shown below:
JP1
1 2 3
l Fuse values on the Power Board are as follows:

l Fuse F1 = 250V, 4A
l Fuses F2, F3, F4, F5 = 250V, 5A
Motor Drive Board
l Fuse F1 on the Motor Drive Board = 250V, 15A
CPU-T Board
Jumpers on the CPU-T Board should be placed as follows:
l Jumpers JP1, JP2, JP3 = Link across pins 1 and 2 (see below)
l Jumper JP4 = Link across pins 2 and 3 (see below).
3
JP4
2
JP1, JP2, JP3
1 1 2 3
Switches on the CPU-T board should be set as follows:
l DSW1 = Switches all OFF (down)

l DSW4 = Switches all OFF (down).
CPU-1 Board
The CPU-1 Board is located on the reject unit.
l All switches on switch pack DSW1 should be set to set to OFF (down).
CPU-2 Board
The CPU-2 Board is located in the Garage Unit.
l All switches on switch pack SW1 should be set to OFF.
CPU-3 Board
The CPU3 Board is located on escrow unit.
l All switches on switch pack SW1 should be set to off.
ADJUSTMENT
Alternative Bill Validator
Template download on the alternate bill validator requires the following procedure to be
carried out:
1. Ensure power is off and no card is present in the SmartMedia slot on the BV-CPU
board. Refer to diagram.
CNSMC
(Smart Media)
CNB10
LED4
LED3
LED2
LED1
21 21
OFF
ON
JS1 SW1 BSW ASW
CNB50
USB
2. Set bit number 1 of dip switch SW1 to ‘ON’.

Note: Take care not to change the setting of switch JS1.
3. Set rotary switch ASW to ‘D’.

4. Set rotary switch BSW to ‘F’.
F 0 1 2 F 0 1 2
E E
B C D
B C D
3 4 5 6
3 4 5 6
7 8 9 A 7 8 9 A
BSW ASW
5. Switch the ATM on again.

6. Look for LED3 being lit. (LED4 being lit indicates an error condition. If an error
occurs re-start the procedure from the beginning).
7. Now set rotary switch BSW to ‘8’. This set the operation status to ‘waiting for
insertion of SmartMedia’.
8. Look for LEDs 3 and 4 being lit up after a short time.
9. Now insert the memory card into the SmartMedia slot with the edge with the
notched corner first and the contact points facing downwards, as shown below.
CNSMC
(Smart Media)
10. The data on the card will now be checked. If the data is correct, LEDs 2, 3 and 4 will
light up. If not, there is an error, and the procedure should be re-started from the
beginning.
11. If the data is correct, set rotary switch BSW to ‘0’.
12. The LEDs will be extinguished, then data downloading will start after approximately
15 seconds.
13. The LEDs flash to indicate the progress of the download, until all four are lit. It will
normally take 2 or 3 minutes until the download is complete.
14. If a fault occurs during downloading, the LEDs will stop flashing, and an error
condition will be indicated by a combination of LEDs being lit constantly, (which
LEDs are lit will depend on the error condition). If this happens, re-start the
procedure from the beginning.
15. When download is complete, switch ATM power off and then remove the memory
card from the SmartMedia slot.
16. Set rotary switch ASW to ‘0’.
17. Set bit number 1 of dip switch SW1 to ‘OFF’.
18. Power the ATM back up.

The procedures in this section describe the replacement of Field Replaceable Units of the
BNA.
Note: The words front, rear, left, and right, in the following procedures are considered to be
when looking on the inlet unit of a rear access unit, as shown in the diagram below.
Inlet Unit
Remove the Inlet Unit as follows:
1. Unplug connector CNK8 at the left-hand side of the reject unit.
2. Remove screw A from the top of the inlet unit and the two screws B from the right-
hand side.
3. Pull the inlet unit slowly forwards away from the BNA and observe how the white
plastic note guides locate in the reject unit before they separate from it.
Replacement
Replacement of the inlet unit is the reverse of the above procedure. Take care to locate the
white plastic guides so that the axle of first wheel of the belt transport of the reject unit
enters the forks of the guides as shown below.
Reject Unit
Remove the Reject Unit as follows:
1. Unscrew the reject unit retaining screw until it does not project through the top unit
frame.
2. Release the catch on the right-hand side of the feed unit and use the indented grip
area to slide the reject unit forward away from the feed unit.
3. Lift the reject unit out of the keyhole locating slots.
Replacement -
Replacement of the reject unit is the reverse of the above procedure.
Feed Unit
Remove the Feed Unit as follows:
1. Lift the catch on the vertical transport and lower the transport to its fully open
position.
2. Remove the two screws through the base of the feed unit.
3. Press the latch on the right hand side of the feed unit and slide the unit towards the
rear of the BNA and lift it out of the keyhole locating slots.
Replacement -
Replacement of the feed unit is the reverse of the above procedure.
Escrow Unit
Remove the Escrow Unit as follows:
1. Lift the catch on the vertical transport and lower the transport to its fully open
position.
2. Pull out the escrow unit by its handle along the lowered vertical transport until it
stops. Turn the escrow unit towards the right (your left) and support it with your other
hand as it comes clear of the BNA.
Replacement -
Replacement of the escrow unit is the reverse of the above procedure. Make sure that the
escrow unit is pushed fully home and the vertical transport clicks into place.
Recognition Unit
The recognition unit consists of the following matched parts that must all be replaced at the
same time:
l Bill Validator Unit (BVU) - the part that contains the sensors and forms part of the
BNA transport. The BVU is referred to elsewhere in this chapter, and in customer
publications, as the recognition unit.

l BV-CPU Board
l DSP Board
l THR-AMP Board.
Bill Validator Unit

Remove the Bill Validator Unit as follows:
1. Remove the Cheque Processing Module if fitted.

2. Remove the escrow unit.
3. Remove the single screw securing the bill validator unit at the right-hand side of the
BNA.
4. Loosen the four screws that hold the note guides.
5. At the left-hand side of the BNA, loosen the four BVU note guide screws.
6. Push the guides away from the BVU, towards the vertical transport
7. Unplug the connectors from the rear of the BVU. (There are three on the standard
unit and one on the ABV).
8. Remove the two M4 hex-headed screws securing the BVU at the left-hand side of
the BNA.
9. Lift the BVU out of the right-hand side of the BNA.
10. Fit the new BVU by reversing the steps 9 to 1 above. Push the note guide screws
fully in towards the BVU before tightening them at the right and left-hand sides.
BV-CPU Board, DSP Board, and THR-AMP Board

Remove the electronics boards of the recognition unit as follows:
2. Lift off the cover and identify the boards of the recognition unit shown in the
illustration below.
3. Remove the four screws securing the BV-CPU board and lower the board. Unplug
connectors CNA1, CNB1, CNB2, CND2, and CNB4 from the board and remove
the board.
4. Check the strapping on the new BV-CPU board against the board just removed or
refer to “Strapping” in this chapter.
5. Plug the connectors on to the new board and fit the new board in place with the four
screws removed in step 3.
6. Remove the four screws securing the DSP board, unplug the connectors CND1,
CND2, CND3, and CND4 and remove the board.
7. Check the strapping on the new DSP board against the board just removed or refer
to “Strapping” in this chapter. Ensure that the switch settings on the replacement
board are the same as those on the board removed.
8. Plug the connectors on to the new board and fit the new board in place with the four
screws removed in step 6.
9. Transfer the memory card from the old board to the new board.
10. Remove the two screws securing the metal cable support across the THR-AMP
board, unplug connectors CNC1, CNC2, and CNC3, and remove the board.
11. Check the strapping on the new THR-AMP board against the board just removed or
refer to “Strapping” in this chapter.
12. Plug the connectors on to the new board and fit the new board and cable support in
place with the two screws removed in step 10.
13. Refit the electronics cover panel removed in step 1.
Main Transport
1. Remove the CPM unit if fitted.
2. Remove the inlet, reject, escrow, and BVU as described in the previous procedures.
3. Remove the nut securing the front cross tie on the BNA support assembly. Unhook
the cross tie and remove it.
4. Remove the nut securing the rear cross tie on the BNA support assembly. Unhook
the cross tie and remove it.
5. If the CPM support frame is fitted:
l Remove the hex-head screw holding the frame at the rear.
l Remove the hex-head screw holding the CPM support frame at the front
and also the screw through the long slot of the support frame retainer.
l Lower the CPM support frame.
6. Disconnect the three harness connectors at the left-hand rear of the main transport.
7. Unscrew the two screws on the small cable cover on the rear of the BNA and
remove the cover.
8. Unclip the harnesses from the plastic clips on the rear of the BNA.
CAUTION
Unplug the four connectors at the three connector points on top of
the garage unit and unclip the cables from the retaining clips as
necessary.
CAUTION
Take care not to pull apart the in-line connectors A and B when
disconnecting or reconnecting the four garage unit connectors.
9. Remove the four screws attaching the transport unit to the garage unit (two at the
right-hand side and two at the left-hand side as shown below).
10. Lift off the upper unit.
Replacement -
Replacement of the main transport (upper unit) is the reverse of the above procedure.
Inner Garage Block

Remove the inner garage block as follows:
1. Rack out the inner garage block fully on its rails and lift out the front and rear
cassettes.
2. Remove the three screws attaching the right-hand rail to the platform and push the
rail back into the garage.
3. Unscrew the four screws from the slide rail bracket and remove the bracket.
4. Remove the four screws from the lower left-hand rail. Push the rail in as necessary
so that screws become visible through the access holes in the rail.
5. BNA Modules up to Serial No. 1015:

l Rack the inner block out until it is stopped by the catch in the top rail and use a flat
blade screwdriver to release the catch.
l Pull inner block out further until the the top rail separates.
l Rotate the inner block clockwise slightly so that the lower slide rail bracket
disengages and lower the block to the floor.
l Remove the inner channel of the top rail (two screws) from the block and retain
with the BNA.
6. BNA Modules Serial No. 1016 and up:

l Rack the inner block out until it is stopped by the catch in the top rail and remove
the screws fastening the rail to the block.
l Lift the inner block off the rails and lower it to the floor.
Replacement -
Replacement of the inner garage block is the reverse of the above procedure. Make sure
that the pin on the base of the inner unit is located properly in the plate on the garage floor
(except for UD686 front access short inlet variant where the rail and pin have been
removed).
Electronics Boards
Replace the electronics boards of the BNA as follows:
2. Identify the electronics boards as shown below:
BV-CPU, DSP, and THR-AMP Boards

Replace the BV-CPU, DSP, and THR-AMP boards along with the bill validator unit as
described in the section “Module Replacement - Recognition Unit”.
Motor Drive Board

1. Remove the four screws securing the motor drive board, lower the board and
unplug connectors CNM, CNS, and CNY.
2. Connect connectors CNS, CNM and CNY to the new motor driver board and screw
in the retaining screws.
CPU-T Board
1. Unplug connector CN15 from the CPU-T board and remove the two screws
securing the board.
2. Lower the CPU-T board until you can reach and unplug the connectors at the top of
the board.
3. Transfer all the connectors on to the new CPU-T Board.
4. Press the new CPU-T Board firmly inwards so that its stand-offs are against the
back wall of the electronics cavity. Move the board upwards, while still pressing, until
the retaining screws can be inserted. Check that the board has entered the plastic
rail that secures it at the top.
Power Board
1. Remove the three screws along the top edge of the Power Board. Lift the board,
unplug all connectors and connect to the new board.
2. Lower the new board into position and replace the retaining screws.
Checks On Boards
1. Check the strapping of new boards against that of the old boards or with the
“Strapping” section of this chapter.
2. Put on the cover panel.
Serial Power and Connector Block

Replace the serial and power connector block as follows:
2. Unscrew the two screws retaining the serial and power connector block.
3. Disconnect the harnesses attached to the connector block at CNP1 on the Power
Board, CN13 on the CPU-T Board and at the in-line connector in the harness to the
PC I/F.
Replacement -
Replacement of the serial and power connector block is the reverse of the above
procedure.
Template Download Board
Template
Download
Connector
RS232
Connector
Bracket
* Retaining
Screw
Cover
Shutter
Control
+24V DC Connector
Connector
Note: * On BNA Modules up to Serial No. 1065 the template download board and bracket
assembly is held in place simply by being plugged into the PC I/F and Maintenance
connectors. From BNA module Serial No. 1066 and up the retaining screw is fitted.
Replace the template download board as follows:
1. Disconnect communications/RS232 cable, template download cable, shutter control

cable and +24V DC cable.
2. Remove and retain the M3 x 6m screw (if fitted) securing the template download
board assembly to the cover.
3. Remove BNA template download board and bracket assembly by pulling it away
from the BNA module.
Replacement -
Replacement of the template download board assembly is the reverse of the above
procedure.
Garage Slides
Remove the garage slides as follows:
1. Remove the inner garage block as described in the section “Inner Garage Block”.
2. Identify the rails shown in the following illustration.
Bottom Left-Hand Rail

1. Remove the bottom left-hand side rail by removing the four securing screws. Rack
the rail in and out to move the holes in the inner slide over the screw heads as
necessary.
2. Remove the rail.
Top Left-Hand Rail

1. Slacken the two grub screws A from the retaining rings and remove screws B from
the rail. Keep these parts to be fitted to the new rail.
2. Remove the top left-hand side rail by removing the four securing screws C. Rack the
rail in and out to move the holes in the inner slide over the screw heads as
necessary.
3. Remove the rail.
Base Rail
Access holes to the heads of the retaining screws of the base rail are at the bottom of the
electronic boards enclosure. You will need to move certain electronic modules to see these
holes.
Remove the base rail as follows:
1. Remove the THR-AMP Board as described in the section “Recognition Unit”.

2. Remove the Power Board as described as described in the section “Electronics
Boards”.
3. Remove the Serial and Power Connector Block as described in the section “Serial
and Power Connector Block”.
4. Remove the four base rail securing screws. Rack the rail in and out to move the
holes in the inner slide over the screw heads as necessary.
5. Remove the rail.
Right-Hand Rail
Remove the right-hand rail as follows:
1. Remove the three screws A holding the right hand rail and remove the rail.
2. Remove the three screws B from the inner block attaching bracket on the right-hand
rail and keep the bracket and screws to be fitted to the new rail.
Replacement -
Replacement of the garage rails is the reverse of the above procedures.
Refer to the Preventive Maintenance Chapter in this manual.
CABLING
None.
None.
None.
REVISION

ITRAN 1000 ATM CHEQUE PROCESSOR
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the iTRAN 1000 Check Processor Type 4 (CPM4) used in NCR
66XX ATMs.
The name Cheque Processing Module (CPM4) is used in engineering documentation, (for
example, in signal names on schematic diagrams), and for that reason the abbreviation
CPM4 or CPM is used in this chapter.
The name iTRAN applies to a range of products that perform image-based, item
processing functions.
The CPM4 consists of two separable modules, one mounted above the other.
Upper Module
The upper module consists of a vertical transport mechanism that drives the cheques into
storage bins.
Multi-pocket Bin
Out-feed
Variant
Storage Bins
In-feed
Actuator Wire
Access Door
Stacking Bin
Endorser Storage Bins Variant
MICR Reader
Endorser
Track Guide
Camera Unit
Corner Belt
Assembly
Out-feed
Reject Bin
Access Door
Variants
l Multi-pocket bin, or
l Stacking bin.
The multi-pocket bin variant has three horizontal storage bins, any of which can be
designed as a reject bin via the software application, while the stacking bin variant has a
reject bin and either one or two vertical storage bins.
Note: Any items flushed from the transport using the CLEAR command will be sent to the
reject bin.
Lower Module
The lower module consists of a transport and camera system that permits cheques to be
accepted, imaged and either returned to the user or transported to the storage bins. A wide
range of cheque types with different layouts and data formats can be handled. The CPM4
is also capable of reading the Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR) code-line of a
cheque and of endorsing the back of the cheque. Cheque images are available for user
lead-through, transmission to a remote host, or for local printing and, additionally, the
images may be used by software utilities to read and process cheque information such as
code-line data, printed data, and handwritten amounts.
Infeed Guide
Top Guide
Endorser
Track Guide
Corner Belt
Assembly
DESCRIPTION
The CPM4 is attached to the ATM by two rails (one at either side) that permit the whole
module to be racked out of the ATM.
The CPM4 communicates with the host ATM via a USB interface.
The CPM4 can be considered to have the following functional areas:
l Security shutter
l Infeed
l De-skew mechanism
l Transport mechanism
l Sensors
l MICR reader module
l Front and rear imaging
l Rear endorse printer
l Multi-pocket bins, or stacking bins.
Security Shutter
The security shutter is attached to the fascia in front of the CPM infeed transport to prevent
unauthorised access to the module. The shutter is controlled from the CPM Control Board.
Sensors indicate whether the shutter is fully opened or fully closed.
The fascia mounted Media Entry Indicators are also controlled from the CPM Control
Board.
Infeed
The infeed module consists of a driven single belt with four shaft mounted idler rollers on
the long infeed transport (two on the short and medium length infeeds) and two sprung
pressure rollers bearing down on the belt to grip the cheques and transport. One pressure
roller is located at the start of the transport and creates a grip on the document when it has
been inserted about 50 mm (1.97 in.) into the module. It also grips a document that has
been returned to the fascia slot until it is taken by the user. The second pressure roller
ensures that cheques are positively driven into the de-skew mechanism.
There are three sensors along the length of the infeed.
Thick Item Detector

The thick item detector is located on the main transport near the infeed. Three optical
sensors detect thick items or multiple cheques. Its purpose is to detect and prevent thick
items from entering the CPM transport.
Note: The name Double Feed Detector (DFD) is used in engineering documentation, error
codes and statuses, (for example, in signal names on schematic diagrams), and for that
reason either Double Feed Detector or DFD is used in this chapter.
Early Thickness Detector (Stacking Bin Variant only)

Using existing track sensor hardware, a controlware algorithm has been introduced to
dynamically toggle between document present and paper thickness sensing. Using this
technique it is possible to detect one or more items with a thickness that may lead to a fatal
jam if allowed to fully enter the module. As soon as an item that is too thick is detected, the
transport is stopped and an “Item Too Thick” error status is returned by the CPM device to
the CPM driver software. The driver returns an M_Status 51 (Thick Document) to the
controlling application. The application can issue an Eject command to return the item to
the customer.
When a short in-feed is installed, the first two track sensors form an entry line. In this case,
both sensors are incorporated into this new functional behaviour. The medium and long
length infeeds each use a single sensor to monitor the document entry line.
De-Skew Mechanism
The cheque is moved into the de-skew position by driven lower rollers and a rack of upper
idler rollers that bears down upon them. The rack of upper rollers is lifted by a solenoid to
remove the grip on the cheque. A second solenoid is de-energized to permit a single wheel
to rise under spring pressure to drive the cheque at right angles to its previous direction of
travel until it butts against a reference surface. This makes sure that the cheque is in the
correct position for subsequent imaging and MICR read operations when the forward
motion is returned by lowering the rack of rollers again.
Sensors are used to detect that the cheque has been correctly de-skewed.
Transport Mechanism
The transport can move cheques to and from the processing modules and into the storage
bins. Cheques that have not reached the storage bins can be returned to the customer.
Sensors detect the position and direction of movement of the cheque and identify if a jam
has occurred and its location.
Sensors
The following diagram shows the CPM4 track layout, giving the locations of the processing
devices, the track sensors, and the bin full sensors.
The de-skew mechanism and the endorser stage are the two primary locations where a
cheque may rest between processing operations.
The diagram below shows the layout of the short infeed variant of the CPM4.
MULTI-POCKET
Bin Full
Sensor 3
2 Cheque
Bins
1
11
10
Endorser Stage Area
Bin Full Double Feed Infeed

9 Lever Detector
De-skew
8 Mechanism 1&2
MICR 3
5 Track
7 Front Camera 6 Sensors
Rear Camera
STACKING BIN
Reject Bin Stacking Bin 1 Stacking Bin 2

12 13 14
11
10
Infeed
9 De-skew 1&2
8 Mechanism Track
3 Sensors
MICR
5
7 Rear Camera 6
Front Camera
The purpose of each of the sensors is described in the following text.
Track Sensors 1 and 2 (Short Infeed)

Track Sensors 1 and 2 are located between the shutter and first drive shaft of the infeed,
one on each side of the centre drive roller. The two sensors act as one and have the
following functions:
l provides the signals for the infeed transport to start

l combines with Track Sensor 5 to detect when the cheque has fully entered the
transport allowing the shutter to be closed
l used to perform early thickness detection (stacking bin only).
Track Sensor 1 (Medium and Long Infeeds)

Track Sensor 1 is located between the shutter and first drive shaft of the infeed. It has the
following functions:
l provides the signal for the infeed transport to start

l combines with Track Sensor 3 to detect when the cheque has fully entered the
transport allowing the shutter to be closed
l used to perform early thickness detection (stacking bin only).
Track Sensor 2 (Medium and Long Infeeds)

Track Sensor 2 is a pair of sensors straddling the infeed belt that act as a single sensor. It
has the following function:
l detects cheque jams in the infeed.
Track Sensor 3
Track Sensor 3 is centred in the track and is one of an array of sensors making up the
Double Feed Detector. It has the following functions:
l sets an item present flag, if covered when sensors 1 and 2 become clear
l combines with track sensors 1 and 2 to check document length
l combines with at least two other sensors to detect items that are too thick
l detects the trailing edge of the cheque for staging in the de-skew section.
Track Sensor 4
Track Sensor 4 is located in the de-skew area 2.25 mm (0.09 in.) above the reference
surface. It has the following function:
l detects that the cheque has been successfully de-skewed.
Track Sensor 5
Track Sensor 5 is located in the de-skew area 61 mm (2.40 in.) above the reference
height. It has the following functions:
l checks for documents that are too narrow (after the de-skew operation)
l checks initial document length (short infeed only).
Track Sensor 6
Track Sensor 6 is located just over 30 mm (1.18 in.) upstream of the MICR read head. Its
functions are as follows:
l locates lead edge for downstream devices

l measures the exact cheque length for use during MICR read, image, and endorse
operations
l staging a cheque for endorsement.
Track Sensor 7
Track Sensor 7 is located in the vertical track section around the corner from the front
camera. Its function is as follows:
l detects jams in reader and camera areas after the cheque passes sensor 6.
Track Sensor 8
Track Sensor 8 is located in the endorser staging area just upstream from the print head. It
has the following functions:
l detects jams at the endorser, either during endorsement or as the cheque passes
through.
Track Sensor 9
Track Sensor 9 is located just before entry into the bin module. It has the following
functions:
l monitors cheque passing from the core processing module into the storage bin
module
l synchronise the bin 1 deflector gate with the position of the cheque
l detects jams at the module interface and while the cheque is moving past or into bin 1.
Multi-Pocket Bin Track Sensors 10

Track Sensor 10 (multi-pocket bin only) is located upstream of the deflector gate for bin 2.
Its functions are as follows:
l synchronise the bin 2 deflector gate with the position of the cheque
l watches for unexpected items arriving because of a bin selector failure
l detects jams while the cheque is moving past or into the associated bin selector.
Multi-Pocket Bin Track Sensor 11

Track Sensor 11 (multi-pocket bin only) is located upstream from the curved track leading
into bin 3. Its functions are as follows:
l watches for unexpected items arriving because of a bin selector failure

l monitors cheques on the way to bin 3 and detects any jams.
Stacking Bin Track Sensors 10 to 14

Track Sensors 10 to 14 will be reported by the CPM4 module but they are under the control
of the stacking bin controller board. Cheque jam and recovery within the bin module is
managed by the stacking bin control firmware.
Multi-Pocket Bin Full Sensors

There is one Bin Full Sensor located in each storage bin. A wire lever is lifted up by the
growing stack of cheques until it pushes against a plastic plate clipped into the top of the
bin. The plate is lifted until it interrupts the sensor beam. This signals a “bin nearly full”
status which changes to “bin full” when three more cheques have been deposited in that
bin.
Stacking Bin Empty and Full Sensors

The stacking bins have a switch that is closed when the bin is empty. It remains closed until
five or six cheques have been captured into the bin. Once the bin reaches maximum
capacity and the plunger is fully extended, the plate on which the cheques rest will block an
optical sensor. The stacking bin controller monitors both the bin empty and the bin full
sensor and passes the state information to the CPM4 device through serial
communications. Bin 2 does not support empty or full sensing.
MICR Reader Module

The MICR Reader module is located immediately after the de-skew module. It is capable of
recognizing either E-13B or CMC-7 character fonts. The cheque is driven past the low
speed MICR head at full transport speed with its MICR band in contact with the head. This
produces an analogue magnetic signature which is sampled and digitized using an 8-bit
ADC at rates of 1233 and 1606 samples per inch for E-13B and CMC-7 respectively. The
captured data is sent to the host ATM, as it is being captured, via a dedicated USB stream
pipe. MICR recognition is performed during processing by software in the ATM’s PC core
and includes:
l E-13B or CMC7 character recognition

l An ASCII output string.
The ASCII data string includes all the encode line characters such as inter-character
blanks.
The MICR read head is placed so that its 12.7 mm (0.50 in.) scan band will capture
characters printed within the ANSI specified 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) print band. The MICR read
scan position is shown in the diagram below:
Document
12.7 mm
MICR Band
1.57 mm
Front And Rear Imaging

After passing under the MICR read head the cheques pass between two cameras; one
that scans the front and one that scans the rear of the cheque. The cameras use line scan
imaging sensors across an image scan height of
104 mm (4.09 in.) to capture 8-bit, grey scale (256 levels) images. The capture resolution
is 200 pixels per inch in both the vertical and horizontal directions. The image data is stored
in its raw state in local RAM to await transmission to the host ATM. Pixel data is sent in the
order in which it was captured with the first byte being for the lead edge pixel located
closest to the track bottom. An optical sensor mounted in the track detects the leading and
trailing edge of the document (see 'Track Sensor 6').
The image registration tolerances can be summarised as follows:
l Capture resolution = 200 ±5 pixels per inch

l Lead and trail edge registration = ±4 pixels
l Bottom edge registration = ±14 pixels
l Image height = ±2.5 mm
l Image skew = maximum 1.0 degrees.
Rear Endorse Printer

Beyond the cameras the transport turns vertically upwards and the rear of the cheque
passes the rear endorse printer.
The endorser font is based on one used for passbook printing and is installed using a
download message to allow for future expansion. There are 73 printable ASCII characters,
the carriage return code and two control codes (7BH and 7DH) for switching between
standard (4.5 characters per cm) and compressed (6 characters per cm) print formats.
The printable character set is shown below:
€ !”#$%&’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?
@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_£
ASCII codes for lower case alphabet characters will be accepted by the endorser but will
be printed as upper case characters. Any other ASCII character code, either not shown in
the above character set or not a valid control code, will be printed as an open square
bracket “[“.
Single-Line Endorser
The single-line endorser prints along the length of the document at 30 mm (1.18 in.) from
the document lower edge. The length of the line depends upon the length of the document
with the limitation that no print should be located within 5 mm (0.20 in.) of the document
edges. The default start position is approximately 5 mm (0.20 in.) from the trailing edge of
the document. Trailing space characters are used to shift the first printable character
further from the trailing edge. Characters that would print beyond the last
5 mm (0.20 in.) of the document will be truncated. This results in lines with the following
character count:
l Shortest documents (150 mm (5.91 in.)):

l 63 standard characters
l 84 compressed characters
l Longest document (225 mm (8.86 in.)):

l 101 standard characters
l 135 compressed characters.
Single Line Endorsement
30 mm
5 mm 5 mm
Multi-Pocket Bins
The multi-pocket bins are located in the separate bin module, above the CPM4 core unit,
and complete the cheque path. Solenoid operated gates deflect the cheques into the lower
two bins. If these gates are not operated, the normal path of the cheque is into the highest
bin. Each bin contains a bin full sensor (see the section “Sensors”).
The bins have the following sizes and typical capacities:
l Bin 3 (top bin) - 150 flat items, 38 mm (1.5 in.) storage height
l Bin 2 (middle bin) - 150 flat items, 38 mm (1.5 in.) storage height
l Bin 1 (lowest bin) - 600 flat items, 102 mm (4.0 in.) storage height.
Stacking Bins
The stacking bins are located in the separate bin module above the CPM4 core unit and
complete the cheque path. They consist of 1 or two high capacity storage bins and a
smaller reject bin. Following a successful transaction, cheques are stored in bin 1. If
another bin is fitted (bin 3), when this becomes full, bin 1 is used. If a cheque has been
captured and not returned to the card holder, it is stored in the reject bin (bin 2). Each bin
contains a bin full sensor (see the section “Sensors”).
The bins have the following sizes and typical capacities:
l Bin 1 (capture bin) - 750 flat items

l Bin 2 (reject bin) - 50 flat items
l Bin 3 (optional bin) - 750 flat items.
Cheque Specification
The CPM4 is capable of handling cheques that meet the following criteria:
l Length = 150 mm (5.91 in.) to 225 mm (8.86 in.)

l Width = 63.5 mm (2.5 in.) to 108 mm (4.25 in.)
l Thickness = 0.076 mm (0.003 in.) to 0.12 mm (0.005 in.)
2 2
l Weight = 75 g/m (20 lb.*) to 105 g/m (28 lb.*).
Note: * Paper weights are based on ANSI X9.100-10 (previously X9.18) Paper
Specification for Checks.
Power Requirement
The CPM4 controller board, motors, solenoids, sensors, and peripheral devices require the
following dc voltage and currents:
Quiescent Current Peak Continuous Current

+24V - constant 500 mA 5.0 A
The +24V supply is sourced from the ATM power supply. The current rating in the table
represents a total load which includes the current sourced for the following voltages
derived from the constant +24V:
l +5V is derived using a dc to dc converter mounted on the CPM4 Controller Board.

l +12V to drive the endorser is derived using a fixed regulator
l +15V to MICR is derived using a fixed regulator.
Weight
The weight of the CPM4 is as follows:
l SLE core module (without infeed) = 14.0 kg (30.9 lbs)

l Infeed (short) = 0.8 kg (1.8 lbs)
l Infeed (medium) = 1.3 kg (2.9 lbs)
l Infeed (long) = 2.0 kg (4.4 lbs)
l Multi-pocket bin module = 11.0 kg (24.3 lbs)
l carrier plate = 1.4 kg (3.1 lbs)
l Stacking bin module

l single bin = 14.1 kg (31.0 lbs)
l dual bins = 16.8 kg (37.0 lbs)
l carrier plate = 3.6 kg (8.0 lbs).
TROUBLESHOOTING
Module Error States
The following error messages are reported by the module. Refer to the sections 'Module
Replacement' and 'Adjustments' for detailed instructions on FRU actions.
Error SOH Corrective Action

Message Action/Type
Control Inspect_ Check for damage on control boards and repair.
Electronics Now/Repair Otherwise, replace the CPM module.
Fault
Too Many Inspect_ Remove any documents present.Inspect power connectors and data cables.It may be
Comm Now/Repair necessary to reset the ATM to recover this type of error.
Failures
Too Many Inspect_ Inspect the shutter mechanism.Remove any documents present.Inspect electrical
Entry Now/Repair connectors and cables.
Failures Otherwise, replace shutter.
Shutter Inspect_ Inspect the shutter mechanism.Remove any documents present.Inspect electrical
Jammed Now/Repair connectors and cables.
Open Otherwise, replace shutter.
Shutter Inspect_ Inspect the shutter mechanism.Remove any documents present.Inspect electrical
Jammed Now/Repair connectors and cables.
Shut Otherwise, replace shutter.
In-feed Inspect_ Inspect the infeed and repair loose electrical connections. Otherwise, replace infeed.
Fault Now/Repair
Top Guide Inspect_ Inspect the top-guide/de-skew mechanism and repair loose electrical
Fault Now/Repair connections.Release mechanical jams.
Otherwise, replace top-guide.

Message Action/Type
Endorser Replace_ Replace endorser ribbon.
Ribbon Soon/Replace
Low
Endorser Replace_ Replace endorser ribbon.
Ribbon Now/Replace
Empty
Endorser Inspect_ Refer to byte 1 of M_DATA for endorser diagnostic error code then refer to the error
Fault Now/Repair code reference section.
Out-feed Inspect_ Inspect the outfeed and repair loose electrical connections. Otherwise, replace
Fault Now/Repair outfeed.
Transport Inspect_ Remove foreign object, debris or jammed cheque.
Jam At In- Now/Repair
feed
Jam At De- Now/Repair
skew
Jam At Now/Repair
MICR
Jam At Now/Repair
Camera
Jam At Now/Repair
Endorser
Jam At Now/Repair
Out-feed
Jam Now/Repair
Capture Full_ Empty bin 1.
Bin 1 Full Soon/Empty
Soon
Capture Full/Empty Empty bin 1.
Bin 1 Full
Capture Inspect_ Stacking Bin only - Inspect the module and remove any foreign object, debris, or
Bin 1 Fault Now/Repair jammed cheque.
Bin 1 Jam Now/Repair jammed cheque.

Message Action/Type
Soon
Bin 2 Full
Soon
Bin 3 Full
Bin 3 Fault Now/Repair jammed cheque.
NOTE: After this error state has been resolved the cheques diverted to capture bin 1
should be moved to capture bin 3 in order to maximize the overall storage capacity.
Bin 3 Jam Now/Repair jammed cheque.
NOTE: After this error state has been resolved the cheques diverted to capture bin 1
should be moved to capture bin 3 in order to maximize the overall storage capacity.
Interlock Inspect_ Push CPM fully back into ATM.Inspect switch or harness for damage.Inspect power
Open Now/Repair supply for damage.Check for damage on control boards and repair. Otherwise,
replace the CPM module.
Load file Inspect_ Download a valid EEPROM image.Eliminate ESD or electrical noise.Inspect USB cable
validation Soon/Repair for damage.
failure
Load file Inspect_ Download EEPROM image again.Eliminate ESD or electrical noise.Inspect USB cable
download Soon/Repair for damage.Check for damage on control boards and repair. Otherwise, replace the
failure CPM module.
Fatal Inspect_ Try communications response again.Eliminate ESD or electrical noise.Inspect USB
Comms Now/Repair cable for damage.Check for damage on control boards and repair. Otherwise, replace
Failure the CPM module.
Too Many Inspect_ Inspect USB cable for damage.Check for damage on control boards and repair.
USB Reset Now/Repair Otherwise, replace the CPM module.
Sensor Inspect_ Inspect sensors and remove debris or clean dust build up with a dry, lint-free
Failure Now/Repair cloth.Inspect sensors and LEDs for damage. If damaged, replace FRUInspect sensor
harness for damage.Check for damage on control boards and repair.Otherwise,
replace the CPM module.
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0
Two sets of level 0 diagnostic tests are performed during CPM startup:
l Kernel diagnostics held with the core firmware in protected EEPROM - phase 1 of
startup
l Module integrity diagnostics held with the main module controlware in writeable
EEPROM - phase 2 of startup.
The result of each phase of tests is indicated on four green LEDs located on the CPM Main
Controller Board visible through the opening in the white plastic cover as shown in the
following illustration:
D1 R14
Diagnostic LEDs D2 D5
(Green)
D3 D6
Edge of Board D4 R15
R1 R16
Phase 1 Test Results

The table below shows the status LED patterns that display to show the outcome of the first
phase of the startup process:
LED Pattern Fault

D1 D2 D3 D4
ON ON ON ON Fatal failure.
OFF OFF OFF ON CPU internal RAM test.
OFF OFF ON OFF CPU XRAM test.
OFF OFF ON ON CPU code execution RAM test.
OFF ON OFF OFF Core EEPROM checksum test.
OFF ON OFF ON Main controlware EEPROM checksum test.
OFF ON ON OFF FPGA EEPROM checksum test.
OFF ON ON ON FPGA configuration.
ON OFF OFF OFF Endorser controlware FLASH checksum test.
ON OFF OFF ON Endorser font FLASH checksum test.
ON OFF ON ON Stacking bin checksum test.
ON OFF ON OFF Waiting for USB connection.
OFF OFF OFF OFF Successful startup - all OK.
Note: LEDs that are ON show a steady light in the above patterns.
Phase 2 Test Results

The table below shows the LED patterns that can result from second phase startup:
LED Pattern Fault

D1 D2 D3 D4
OFF OFF OFF OFF All OK.
OFF OFF OFF ON No interlocked +24V.
OFF OFF ON OFF Track sensor fault detected.
OFF OFF ON ON Item present in the track.
OFF ON OFF OFF Shutter fault detected.
OFF ON OFF ON Infeed fault detected.
OFF ON ON OFF Reserved.
OFF ON ON ON Transport entry step motor failure.
ON OFF OFF OFF Transport exit step motor failure.
ON OFF OFF ON MICR fault detected.
ON OFF ON OFF Imaging system fault detected.
ON OFF ON ON Endorsement printer fault detected.
Note: LEDS that are ON show a flashing light in the above patterns.
Level 1
Tests on the Cheque Processing Module (CPM) are:
l Enable
l Eject
l Endorse
l Capture Bin 1
l Capture Bin 2
l Capture Bin 3
l Clear
l Display Front Image
l Display Rear Image
l Sensors *
l Shutter *
l De-skew Cycle *
l Endorse Cycle *
l Capture Bin Solenoid *
l Transport Motor *
l Run To Run *
l Integrity *
Looping is available on the tests marked *.
Enable
The ENABLE test enables the CPM to accept a document.
You are prompted to insert a document and, if this is not done within 15 seconds, the CPM
is disabled, a message saying, No Document Entered is displayed, and a Not Complete
status is returned. A document inserted within the time is scanned and staged in the CPM
and a Complete status is returned.
If there is a document present in the transport when the CPM is enabled, it is rescanned
and a Complete status is returned.
Eject
The EJECT test moves the current document to the front transport and displays a prompt
asking for the document to be removed. If the document is not taken within 15 seconds, the
prompt is removed and the document is retracted back into the CPM, Document Not Taken
is displayed and a Not Complete status is returned. If the document is taken, the prompt is
removed, Document Taken is displayed and a Complete status is returned.
If there is no document in the transport when the Eject is selected, No Document Present is
displayed and a Not Complete status is returned.
Endorse
The PRINT test prints the test string:
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
on the rear of the current document and returns a Complete status.
If there is no document present in the transport, No Document Present is displayed and a

Not Complete status is returned.
Capture Bin 1
The CAPTURE BIN 1 test moves the document into Bin 1 and returns a Complete status.
If there is no document present in the transport, No Document Present is displayed and a

If the document jams during capture, Unable To Capture is displayed and a Not Complete
status is returned.
Capture Bin 2
As Bin 1 for Bin 2.
Capture Bin 3
As Bin 1 for Bin 3.
Note: The ascadeStackingBins registry variable is ignored for this level of testing.
Clear
The CLEAR test runs the transport to make sure that it is clear of documents.
After the transport has been run, if all sensors are clear, a Device Clear message is
displayed and a Complete status is returned.
If a sensor is blocked a Device Jammed message is displayed and a Not Complete status is
returned.
Display Front Image

The DISPLAY FRONT IMAGE test opens a window displaying the front image of the most
recent document entered. A key press terminates the test. If no front image has been lifted,
a No Image To Display message is displayed.
Display Rear Image

As Front Image test for rear image.
Sensors
The SENSOR test displays the current sensor status of the shutter, track and bin sensors
in M_DATA format.
Shutter
The SHUTTER test flashes the media entry indicator on and off twice and the shutter is
opened and closed once.
De-Skew Cycle
The DE-SKEW CYCLE test activates the DC motor then, after one second, both
solenoids. After one more second, the motor and both solenoids are deactivated.
Note: This test allows service personnel to observe the operating mechanism. It does not
diagnose problems or report errors.
Endorser Cycle
The ENDORSE CYCLE test runs the ribbon motor continuously during the three second
test cycle. After the first second, the platen solenoid is activated for one second and is then
deactivated.
Note: This test allows service personnel to observe mechanism cycling. It does not
diagnose problems or report errors.
Capture Bin Solenoid

The CAPTURE BIN SOLENOID test sequentially activates and deactivates each of the
solenoids associated with the capture bin.
Note: This test provides a visual aid only. It does not diagnose problems or report errors.
Note: This test is for the multi-pocket bin variant only and has no effect on the stacking bin
variant.
Transport Motor
The TRANSPORT MOTOR test activates the cycle of the transport motors. The motors
run in one direction for two seconds, stop for one second and run in the opposite direction
for two seconds. The motors that are activated are:
l Infeed
l Entry step
l Exit step
l Bin step.
The capture bin solenoids are activated and deactivated as part of this cycle. When the
cycle is completed, all motors and solenoids are deactivated.
Note: This test provides a visual aid only. It does not diagnose problems or report errors.
Integrity
The INTEGRITY test causes the CPM4 to perform an integrity diagnosis. This will include
a full plunge cycle on the stacking bin variant. If there are two bins configured, both bins will
cycle at the same time.
Note: This test does not perform a test transaction, therefore no cheque will be entered.
Run To Run
The RUN TO RUN test executes the following sequence of tests:
l ENABLE
l EJECT.
If the test item is not removed within five seconds after being rejected, the following
commands are executed:
l RETRACT
l ENDORSE
l CAPTURE BIN 2.
Level 3
S_Data
The S_DATA returned for the CPM are:
S_DATA Meaning
01 ROUTINE (Minor fault, continue to use and log error information)
02 WARNING (May require attention, continue to use and log error information)
03 SUSPEND (Do not use device for application-defined time period)
Tallies
diagnostic and normal use. The CPM tallies are as follows:
Tally Description
NUM_DOCS Number of documents entered.
TRAN_JAM Number of transport jams.
FRNT_IMG Number of front image document requests.
REAR_IMG Number of rear image document requests.
ENDORSED Number of document endorses.
TAKEN Number of documents ejected and taken.
BIN1 Number of documents captured to bin 1.
SHUT_OPS Number of shutter operations.
EN_CHARS Number of endorser characters printed.
TRANSACT Number of completed transactions.
DFDFAIL Number of double feed detect failures.
DSKWFAIL Number of de-skew failures.
MICRFAIL Number of MICR failures.
TJ_INFD Number of jams at infeed.
TJ_DSKEW Number of jams at deskew.
TJ_CAM Number of jams at camera.
TJ_ENDRS Number of jams at endorser.
TJ_OUTFD Number of jams at outfeed.
TJ_MICR Number of document jams at MICR.
FATALJAM Number of fatal jams.
Tally Description
COMMSERR Number of comms errors.
USBRESET Number of USB resets.
COMSTOUT Number of comms timeouts.
SHUTJAMO Number of shutter open jams.
SHUTJAMC Number of shutter closed jams.
MICRREAD Number of code lines read.
TJ_SBIN Number of jams at stacking bin
SBN1FAIL Number of stacking bin - 1 failures
SBN3FAIL Number of stacking bin - 3 failures
Error Codes
M_STATUS and M_DATA
Refer to the NCR publication B006-6273, 56XX/Personas Self-Service Diagnostic Status
Code Notebook - Volume 2 for information on M_STATUS and M_DATA codes.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
Configuration And Calibration
After replacing the electronics boards a full calibration procedure must be performed on the
CPM using the calibration documents supplied for the MICR, Camera, and DFD Sensors.
Note: DFD sensors should be calibrated first so that test documents can be entered
successfully into the CPM.
To carry out configuration and calibration tasks on the CPM, proceed as follows:
1. From the System Application Main Menu select the option Self-Service
Configuration.
3. Select Cheque Processing Module 4 to reach the Cheque Processing Module menu
where the selections permit configuration and calibration tasks to be performed as
follows:
DFD Sensors Calibration

Selection of DFD Sensors Calibration allows the DFD sensors to be calibrated.
A warning prompt tells you that the correct calibration document must be used. Select OK
to close the prompt.
A further menu is displayed asking, “Continue with calibration?: No” - with “No” being the
default selection. Three options are also displayed: Toggle, OK, and Cancel. Toggle
changes between Yes and No. Cancel, or OK with No selected returns you to the main
configuration menu without performing the calibration.
Select Yes and press OK to perform the calibration. If a document is detected, the
calibration procedure exits and the message “Document found in transport” is displayed.
Otherwise, you are prompted to enter a DFD calibration document and the device is
enabled. If the document is not entered within 15 seconds, “No document entered” is
displayed and the procedure exits.
When the document is entered in time, the DFD sensor calibration is performed. On
successful calibration the device’s EEPROM is updated and a message is displayed. The
calibration document is ejected and you are prompted to remove it.
Module Configuration
On selection of Module Configuration a command is sent to the CPM to clear the transport
mechanism of any documents and an information message is displayed. If the clear fails,
an information message is displayed.
The main configuration menu is then displayed containing the configuration values for:
l Number of Capture Bins

l MICR Reader Type
l Endorse Printer Type
l CPM Device Type.
The initial values displayed are those read from the CPM when the menu selection was
made. Changes may be made to the CPM Device Type and MICR Reader Type
parameters by entering the required values into the data entry items.
Note: The CPM Device Type is initially set from the firmware installed on the CPM
controller board. If the contoller board is replaced at the same time as the Platform is re-
installed, it is possible for the wrong device type to be detected. The CPM Device Type
option provides the ability to correct the device type.
There are also four options displayed on the configuration menu for the functions: Tab,
Reset, OK, and Cancel.
1. Tab allows you to tab through each data entry field in turn.
2. Reset changes the currently highlighted parameter back to its original value.
3. OK and Cancel are used to accept or reject changed parameters, as follows:
l If OK is pressed and no changes have been made or if Cancel is pressed then the
program returns to the main configuration menu.
l If OK is pressed and changes have been made, then a further menu is displayed
asking “Configure New Parameters?: No” - with “No” being the default selection.
Three options are also displayed for Toggle, OK, and Cancel. Pressing the
Toggle option toggles the selection between Yes and No. If Cancel is pressed or if
OK is pressed with No selected then all changes are abandoned and the program
returns to the main configuration menu. If OK is pressed and Yes is selected then
the parameters are verified and, if acceptable, are stored in the registry. If any of
the parameters are not acceptable, then an error prompt will be displayed and the
parameters in error will be highlighted with an “X”.
Module Load File

When Module Load File is selected you are prompted to enter a flex disk containing CPM
firmware load files. The load files on the disk are verified before being copied to the
component’s install directory. A message is then displayed indicating that a shutdown and
reboot is required for the changes to take effect.

Selection of Display Version Number displays the version numbers of the Main Control
Board, PcCpm4 Feature Component, Stacking Bin Controller Board, Connector/Driver
Board and Core Firmware, plus the version numbers of the currently downloaded Main
Firmware, FPGA Configuration, Endorser Firmware, Stacking Bin Firmware and Endorser
Font Bitmap load files.
Camera Calibration
Image Quality
The CPM4 imaging cameras meet the image quality requirements of ANSI X9 (X9.37) and
truncation under Check 21.
NCR test document 484-0050375 is used to evaluate image quality.
Camera Calibration Procedure

The selection Camera Calibration allows the CPM cameras to be calibrated.
Select Yes and press OK to perform the calibration. If a document is detected the
Otherwise, you are prompted to enter a camera calibration document and the device is
enabled. If the document is not entered within 15 seconds, “No document entered” is
displayed and the procedure exits.
When the document is entered in time, an “In progress” message is displayed and the
camera calibration is performed. On completion, the message disappears, the calibration
document is ejected and you are prompted to remove it.
MICR Reader Calibration

Reader Performance
The performance of the MICR reader is specified in terms of speed and accuracy. For
accuracy, there are two criteria, rejected and misread characters. A reject is a character
that is considered unreadable by the reader and is identified using a special “reject” code. A
misread is the substitution, by the reader, of an incorrect character other than the
designated reject code.
Reject and misread performance rates are as follows:
Font Per Character rate Per Document Rate

Reject Misread reject Misread
E-13B nominal 1:4,000 1:800,000 1:100 1:20,000

E-13B critical 1:2,000 1:80,000 1:50 1:2,000
CMC-7 nominal 1:4,000 1:800,000 1:100 1:20,000

CMC-7 critical 1:2,000 1:160,000 1:50 1:4,000
Note: The “Per Document Rate” is based on 40 characters per document. Nominal
rates are based on print being within the guidelines or at the extreme limits of ANSI (E-
13B) or ECMA (CMC-7) print specifications. The MICR test documents (484-0046074 and
484-0046075) represent the range of these specifications. Reader performance at or
below the critical rate, on printing that conforms to the applicable specifications, indicates
that reader maintenance or repair is necessary.
Reader Calibration Procedure

Selection of “MICR Reader Calibration” allows the MICR reader to be calibrated.
Select Yes and press OK to perform the calibration. If a document is detected the
Otherwise, you are prompted to enter the signal level printed on the MICR calibration
document. The valid range is 90 to 111. If an invalid value is entered an error prompt is
displayed and you are allowed to re-enter the value.
You are then prompted to enter the MICR calibration document and the device is enabled.
If the document is not entered within 15 seconds, “No document entered” is displayed and
the procedure exits.
When the document is entered in time, an “In progress” message is displayed and the
MICR calibration is performed. On completion, the message disappears, the calibration
document is ejected and you are prompted to remove it.
Mechanical Adjustments
The single-line endorser must be adjusted horizontally to give a gap of 0.005 in. to 0.007 in.
between the print head and the platen.
Adjust as follows:
1. Loosen the three SLE mounting screws.
Mounting Screws Platen Solenoid
Single-line Endorser Printhead Platen
2. Hold the platen solenoid in its energized position.

3. Place a 0.006 in. feeler gauge between the print head and the platen.
4. Move the SLE horizontally until the feeler gauge lightly touches both the print head
and the platen.
Platen Solenoid
Printhead
0.005 in - 0.007 in.
5. Tighten the SLE mounting screws.

6. Check the gap.
7. Readjust if necessary.
Medium and Long Infeed

Nodding Nose - The nodding features of both the medium and long infeeds require vertical
adjustment to ensure that the infeed automatically aligns with the opening in the ATM
fascia. This adjustment positions the infeed guide shaft correctly in relation to the ATM
alignment bracket.
Make the adjustment as follows:
1. Screw the spring plunger all the way up into the nodding adjustment block.
2. Screw the spring plunger down until its tip just contacts the nodding adapter bracket.
Spring Plunger
Nodding Adjustment
Block
Nodding Adapter
Bracket
Spring Plunger Tip
3. Continue to move the spring plunger down until the infeed entry is moved up into the
position shown in the figure below.
Spring Plunger
3 mm (0.12 in.) 7.80 mm

+/- 1 mm (0.04 in.) (0.31 in.)
Infeed Stud Nodding Adapter
Bracket
4. Check that there is still enough stroke left in the spring plunger to permit the infeed to
move down 2 mm (0.08 in.) at the entry end.
Bin Module
The module must be aligned vertically with the CPM transport to ensure that cheques pass
between the two modules without jamming.
1. Loosen the screws (2 if multi-pocket configured or 3 if stacking bin configured)

securing the bin module to the carrier plate.
2. Slide the module left or right until the inside walls of the guide fingers are vertically
aligned with each other.
Multi-pocket
Bin Guide
Finger
Transport Guide
Finger
Stacking Bin
Bin Guide
Finger
Transport
Guide Finger
Bin Guide Bin Guide

Finger Finger
Transport Transport
Guide Finger Guide Finger
3. Tighten the screws.

Units of the CPM4.
The replacement procedures are:
l CPM Transport
l Multi-Pocket Bins
l Multi-Pockets Deflector Wire
l Stacking Bins
l Infeed
l Top Guide
l Single-Line Endorser
l Multi-Line Endorser
l Rails (slides).
CPM Transport
Removal
Remove the CPM transport as follows:
1. Disconnect the Shutter and USB cables from the CPM electronics boards, and
unscrew the screws securing the harness bracket to the CPM.
Note: Front access ATMs will have two screws securing the harness bracket to the
ATM; rear access ATMs will have four screws.
Cables
Screws
2. Disconnect the lower connector from the bin island board and the connectors from
interlock switch.
Connectors
3. Disconnect the connector from underneath the transport and remove the cable ties.
Cable Ties Connector
4. Unscrew the three screws securing the CPM transport to the carrier plate.
Lugs
Screws
5. Unscrew the two screws securing the multi-pocket module to the carrier plate.
Screw
Screw
6. Slide the multi-pocket module to the right, using the yellow handles.
7. Slide the transport to the left, using the yellow handles, until the keyhole slots can be
lifted over the lugs.
8. Tilt the transport towards you and support it against your body.
9. Lift the transport away from the ATM.
Installation and/or Replacement

Replacement of the CPM transport is the reverse of the above procedure. The following
should be noted:
1. Take care not to trap any cables when placing the transport back on its supporting
lugs.
2. Transfer the nodding adapter bracket (for the long infeed) from the old CPM
transport to the replacement (see the following illustration).
3. Ensure the multi-pocket module is aligned correctly (see “Adjustments” in this
chapter).
4. Carry out a transport sensors calibration procedure (see “Adjustments” in this
chapter).
Note: The following illustration shows the nodding adapter bracket for the long
infeed.
Nodding Adapter
Bracket
Retaining Screws
Multi-Pockets
Removal
Remove the multi-pocket module as follows:
1. Disconnect the lower connector from the bin island board.
Connector
2. Unscrew the two screws securing the multi-pocket module to the carrier plate.
Screw Lug
Screw
Lug
Screws
4. Slide the transport to the left, using the yellow handles.

5. Slide the multi-pocket module to the right and up, using the yellow handles, until the
keyhole slots can pass over the heads of the lugs and lift the module away from the
ATM.

Replacement of the multi-pocket module is the reverse of the above procedure. The
following should be noted:
l Ensure the multi-pocket module is aligned correctly (see 'Mechanical Adjustments' in

this chapter).
Multi-Pockets Deflector Wire

Removal
Remove the multi-pocket deflector wire as follows:
1. Lift the spring metal retainer and lift the pocket wire shaft out from its location.
2. Feed the deflector wire and pocket wire shaft into the pocket below and remove
from the CPM.
3. Remove the pocket wire shaft from the pocket wire and retain the shaft.

Replacement of the pocket wire is the reverse of the above procedure. Take care not to
dislodge the white plastic plates.
Stacking Bin
Removal
Remove the stacking bin module as follows:
1. Disconnect the lower connector from the extension harness attached to the bin
island board.
2. Unscrew the three screws securing the stacking bin module to the carrier plate.
Screws
Screws
4. Slide the transport to the left, using the yellow handles.

5. Slide the stacking bin module to the right and up, using the yellow handles, until the
keyhole slots can pass over the heads of the lugs and lift the module away from the
ATM.

Replacement of the stacking bin module is the reverse of the above procedure. The
following should be noted:
l Ensure the stacking module is aligned correctly. (See 'Bin Module' alignment
instructions).
Infeed
Removal
Remove the short, medium, or long infeed transports as follows:
1. Disconnect the ground wire.
2. Remove and retain the screw and spacer at both sides of the infeed.
3. Disconnect the infeed harness.
4. Lift the infeed away from the CPM.

Replacement of the infeed unit is the reverse of the above procedure with the addition that
the track sensors will have to be calibrated and the pin plungers on either side of the
medium and long infeeds may have to be adjusted to achieve the correct nodding function
with the new unit. (See 'Mechanical Adjustments' instructions).
Top Guide
Removal
Remove the top guide as follows:
1. Push the latch to open the top guide. Disconnect the connector and unhook the
spring from its shaft.
Connector
Spring
2. Remove the two screws securing the top guide to the pivot shafts.
Screws
3. Remove the two screws securing the top guide to the top pivot shaft and DFD guide.
Screws
4. Slide the top guide off the pivot shafts and lift it away from the CPM.

Replacement of the top guide is the reverse of the above procedure. You will need to carry
out the track sensor calibration. (See 'Configuration and Calibration' instructions).
Removal
Remove the single-line endorser as follows:
1. Disconnect all harness connectors from the endorser board.
Harness Connectors
M4 Screws
2. Unscrew the two M4 screws securing the endorsor assembly and lift out the
assembly.
3. Unscrew the two M3 screws securing the endorsor board cover and remove the
cover from the endorsor assembly.
4. Unscrew the four M3 screws securing the endorsor board and remove the board
from the endorsor assembly.
5. Remove the ribbon cassette.
6. Unscrew the three M4 screws securing the SLE module and remove the SLE
module from the main plate.

Replacement of the Single-Line Endorser is the reverse of the above procedure. You must
check the print head gap and adjust if necessary. (See ' Mechanical Adjustments'
instructions).
Rails (Slides)
Removal
Remove the rails (slides) as follows:
1. Remove the CPM transport.

2. Remove the multi-pocket module.
3. Unscrew the two screws securing the carrier plate to each rail.
Screws
4. Slide the carrier plate until it is released from the tangs on each rail and lift the carrier
plate away from the rails.
5. Unscrew the two screws securing each rail to the ATM. To gain access to the
nearest screw, extend the rail fully then push the plastic button on the centre rail to
release the rail. Push the whole rail into the ATM until the ball-bearing race of the
inner rail and centre rail are aligned as shown in the photograph below. The screw is
then accessible through the hole in the centre rail, behind the inner rail, as shown in
the photograph.
Race Alignment
6. Extend each rail fully and pull the rail until it is released from the tangs on the side of
the ATM. Lift each rail away from the ATM.
If the rail cannot be pulled easily from the ATM, you may need to use a mallet or hammer to
gently dislodge the rail from the tangs

Replacement of the rails is the reverse of the above procedure. Make sure that the rails
function properly.
Note: There are no CE adjustments for the rails.
CABLING
The schematics in this section show the pin-to-pin connections of the internal cables of the
CPM4.
Shutter / MEI / Power Adapter Harness

SURGE
LIMIT PWR
CPM PWR J3
+24 V I/L
Surge Limiter Board
1 1
+24 V I/L RTN
2 2
+24 V
Connector Board
3 3
+24 V RTN PWR
4 4
J1
5 N/C J2
I/L SWITCH +24 V
6 1
N/C +24 V SW
CPM I/L SW COM 1 +24 RTN
2
+24 V
CPM I/L SW NO 2
CPM I/L SW
Infeed Sensors And LEDs
Short Infeed
J7-B
SEN LED+
1 1 1 +
SEN COM C LED1
2 2 2 -
SEN 1E
3 3 3 +
INFEED TYPE BIT 1 LED2
4 4 4 -
SEN LED-
201 5 5 +
INFEED TYPE BIT 0 SEN1
202 6 6 -
SEN 2E
203 7 7 +
204 8 8 -
Connector Board
INFEED Medium and Long Infeed

J7-B
SEN LED+
1 1 1 +
SEN COM C LED1
2 2 2 -
SEN 1E
3 3 3 +
INFEED TYPE BIT 1 LED2A
4 4 4 * -
SEN LED-
201 5 5 +
INFEED TYPE BIT 0 * SEN2B
202 6 6 -
SEN 2E
203 7 7 +
204 8 8 -
INFEED +
SEN2A
-
* Pin 2 is connected to pin 4
on Long Infeed Transport and
+
to pin 6 on Medium Infeed. SEN2B
-
Double Feed Detect
J4
210 205
209 204
208 203
207 202
DFD LEDs
206 201
10 5
9 4
8 3
Connector Board
7 N/C KEY 2
6 1
205 205
204 204
203 203
202 202 DFD Sensors
201 201
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 KEY KEY 2
1 1
Infeed And Horizontal Transport Motors
J1-A
24V White
1
Infeed
2 KEY
Motor
24V RTN Black
201
202 N/C
J1-B
Orange
1
White
2 Infeed
Green Sensor
201
Connector Board
Blue
202
J6-A
24V Red
203
24V Black
202
24V Yellow
201 Entry
24V Blue Step
3 Motor
24V White
2
24V Orange
1
J7-F
24V Blue
202
24V Green Entry
201 Motor
24V White
2 Sensor
24V Orange
1
Horizontal Guide Sensors And De-Skew
+ LED4 Moving Guide

J8-E -
LED+ + LED5
1 EXT -
LED-
201 1 1
+ LED6
J7-D 2 2 -
+24V
1 3 3 SOL1
24V RTN (De-skew)
2 4 4
J8-C Fixed Guide

SEN6- -
203
+ SEN6
202
SEN5- -
Connector Board
+ SEN5
201
3
SEN4- -
SEN COM C + SEN4
2
1
J7-A
202 N/C
24V RTN Black
201
De-skew
2 KEY
Motor
24V White
1
J7-E
24V RTN White De-skew
2
24V White Drive
1 Solenoid
MICR Pre-Amp Board
J2
GROUND
1 1
+15V
2 2
ADC CLOCK
3 3
MICR Preamp Board
POT_CS
Connector Board
4 4
GROUND
5 5
CONVERT START
201 201
202 KEY KEY 202
ADC_DATA
203 203
POT_DATA
204 204
GROUND
205 205
Front And Rear Cameras
CAMERA CONN
J10 J1 VIDEO
1 1
2 N/C
. . GND
3 2
. . +5V
34-Way 4 3
. Ribbon . GREEN LED-
Cable 5 4
. .
R_Camera
GND
. . 6 5
SP
7 6
GND
8 7
J11 J2 CP
9 8
RED LED-
10 9
. . LED+
Connector Board
11 10
Controller Board
. .
34-Way 12 N/C
. Ribbon .
Cable
. . VIDEO
. . 201 1
202 KEY
GND
203 2
+5V
204 3
GREEN LED-
205 4 F_Camera
GND
206 5
SP
207 6
GND
208 7
CP
209 8
RED LED-
120 9
LED+
211 10
212 N/C
Vertical Transport Motor And Sensors
J6-B
24V Orange
203
24V White
202
24V Blue Transport
201
Exit
24V Yellow
3 Step
24V Black Motor
2
24V Red
1
J7-G
Connector Board
24V Blue
202
24V Green Transport
201
24V White Motor
2 Sensor
24V Orange
1
J8-A
SEN8E -
203
+ SEN8
202
201
SEN9E -
+ SEN9
3
2 KEY
SEN7E -
SEN COM C + SEN7
1
-
J8-B
LED-
+ LED8
201
LED+ -
1
+ LED7
J8-D
-
202 + LED9
SL Endorser
J3-END J2 SLE PTR
. . . .
. . . .
34-Way Ribbon
Printhead
. Ribbon . . Cable .
Cable
. . . .
. . . .
CPM Endorser Board RMTR-J3

Connector Board
201 N/C
24V RTN Black
SLE Motor
202
24V White
1
2 KEY
SLE-SOL J1
28V RTN White
202
SLE Solenoid
201 N/C
2 KEY
28V White
1
ML Endorser
J3-END J2 MLE PTR
. . . .
. . . .
34-Way Ribbon
Printhead
. Ribbon . . Cable .
Cable
. . . .
. . . .
CPM Endorser Board

Connector Board
J1
201 N/C
MLE Shutter
24V RTN Black
202
Motor
24V White
1
2 KEY
J3
201 N/C
MLE Motor
24V RTN Black
Dual Shaft
202
24V White
1
2 KEY
J4
201 N/C
MLE Motor
24V RTN Black

202
24V White
1
2 KEY
Bin Module Harness
J8-D J2 J1-A
Orange
203 213 203
White
202 See Sheet 8 202
Blue Bin
201 201
Step
Yellow
3 13 3 Motor
Black
2 12 2
Red
1 1
J9-POCKETS J2 J1-G
Blue
211 202
Green Bin
210 210 201
White Motor
209 209 2 Sensor
Orange
208 208 1
207 207 J1-B/C
206 206 +28V White Bin
Connector Board
Bin Island Board
2 Selector
205 205 +28V RTN Black Solenoid
1
204 204 J1-D/E/F
203 N/C -
202 Bin Full
202 203 + Sensor
201
201 201 -
2 Bin Full
10 10 + LED
1
9 9
J1-I Bin Fixed Guide
8 8
-
7 7 202
+ SEN10
6 11 201
-
6 2
+ SEN11
5 5 1
4 4 J1-H Bin Movable Guide

-
3 KEY 201
+ LED10
2 3 1
-
1 1
+ LED11
Stacking Bin Board (Sheet 1 of 4)

J1-to Breakout Board
J2 See Next Page
J3-SURGE J7
1 Jumper
Fitted
1 3 2 To
Pins
2 6 3
2&3
3
J3
4 1 White
1
End Sensor
Black
2
White
5
Black
6
J1-CPM-PWR
White
3 Plunger
1 4 Black Up
4 Switch
2 7
3 9 White Plunger
7
4 12 Black Down
CPM Stacking Bin Board
8 Switch
5 N/C
6 N/C
J4
White
J5-CPM 1 Bin
Black Empty
4 Switch
1 N/C
2 Orange
KEY 2
3 White Bin
2 3
Green Full
4 11 5 Sensor
Blue
201 N/C 6
202
203 N/C
204 5
Continued Next Page
Breakout
J1 * J3
Second
Board * White
Bin
1
1 * 1 2
Black
End
2 2 White Sensor
5
3 3 Black
6
4 4 White
3 Plunger
5 5 Black Up
4
6 Switch
6
7 7 White
7 Plunger
8 8 Black Down
8
Switch
9 9 J4
10 10 * White
CPM Stacking Bin
1 Bin
11 11 Black Empty
4
12 12 Switch
Orange
13 13 2
White
3 Bin
Green Full
201 201 5 Sensor
Blue
6
202 202
J5
203 203
* White
204 204 4
Black
205 205 5 Entry
White Sensor
206 206 9
Black
207 207 10
1 N/C
208 208
6 N/C
209 209 N/C
7 Motor-FB
210 210 White White
2 1 1 Vcc
211 211 Black Black
3 2 2 Gnd
212 212 Black Black
Transport Motor
8 3 3 Out
213 213 J6
1
* White
+
Black
2 -
White Plunger
3
Continued Next Page Black Motor
4
* Only Present with Second bin
J5
White
4
Black Entry
5
White Sensor
9
Black
10
1 N/C
6 N/C
7 N/C Motor-FB
White White
2 1 1 Vcc
Black Black
3 2 2 Gnd
Black Black
8 3 3 Out
Transport Motor
J6
White
1 +
Black
2 -
White
3 Plunger
Black Motor
4
J8
White -
1 Track
+ LED
2 Key
10
Black - Track
201
Black + LED
202 11
J9
White -
1 Track
+ Sensor
2 Key
10
Black - Track
201
Black + Sensor
202 11
Continued Next Page
J10
White
1
Solenoid
2 Key
Black
201
202 N/C
J12
White
Transport Motor
1 +
Black -
201
2 KEY
202 N/C
4 N/C
White
3 Vcc
Black Gnd
203
Black Out
204
Connector Board
The diagram below names the connectors of the CPM Connector Board and provides a
diagram of the CPM drive belts of the bottom module.
J1-B
J1-A
J4 J3 J2
INFD MTR
INFD SEN
DBLE FD END MICR J5-B
STKBIN
J5-A
J6-B MTR’B’
J1 SLE SOL
J6-A MTR’A’
J7-G MTR SEN’B’

J7-F MTR SEN’A’
J7-E DSKW DRV SOL
J7-D DSKW IDLER SOL
J7-C NOT USED
J2 END
J7-B INFD SEN
J7-A DSKW MTR
J8-F CNR SWITCH
SLE ONLY J8-E ENTRY OPN GDE
J8-D PKT FIX GDE
J8-C ENTRY FIX GDE
J8-B END OPN GDE
J8-A END FIX GDE
BELT LAYOUT
P1
POWER
J9 PKTS
P2
MEI SHUTTER J11 J10
CONTROLLER CONTROLLER
ATM Interface
The CPM4 has three interfaces with the host ATM:
l Communications
l Power
l MEI and shutter.
Communications Interface
The CPM4 interfaces to the ATM processor via a USB compliant interface. The USB
connector is mounted on the CPM4 Control Board.
Power Interface
Power is obtained from the host ATM via a 2-pin right angled Molex mini-junior connector
(NCR part number 009-00006461) on the connector board, with the following pinout:
Pin Description
1 +24V
2 +24V Return
MEI and Shutter Interface

The CPM4 module control board drives the shutter and MEI mounted on the ATM fascia.
The harness plugs into an 8-pin right-angled Molex mini-junior connector (NCR part
number 009-0006464) on the connector board, with the following pinout:

1 Shutter Lock Sense 5 N/C
2 Shutter Ground 6 +12V
3 Shutter Open Sense 7 CPM-MEI A
4 Shutter Solenoid On 8 CPM-MEI B
Controller Board
The Controller Board carries two ribbon cable connections to the Connector Board, the
USB interface to the ATM processor and the connection to the camera. Refer to the
schematics in the “Internal Cables” section.
Print Head Board

The Print Head Board is fitted to the CPM4 with the single-line endorser. The following
diagram identifies the connectors on the board.
SLE PTR
END J2
NOT USED J4
SLE MTR J3
SLE SOL J1
Multi Pocket Bin Island Board

The Bin Island Board is located beneath the bottom cheque acceptor bin. It serves as a
distribution point for the cables to the sensors, motor, and selector solenoids in the bin
module. The diagram below identifies the connectors on the board. Refer also to 'Bin
Module Harness' schematic in this chapter.
NOT USED
FIX GD SEN J1-I
MOV GD SEN J1-H
ISLAND BOARD
MTR SEN J1-G
J1-F J2
BINS J1-E
J1-D
SEL 1 J1-C
SEL 2 J1-B
MTR J1-A
Stacking Bin Controller Board

The Stacking Bin Controller Board is located beside the stacking bin cheque receiving bin.
It serves as a distribution point for the cables to the sensors, motor, and selector solenoids
in the stacking bin module. The diagram below identifies the connectors on the board.
Refer also to 'Stacking Bin Board' schematics in this chapter.
SECOND BIN
J1
TRK/PLNG J3
FULL/EMPTY J4 J2
1
2
LED/FB/SEN 3
J5
CPM2 = 1 - 2
CPM3 = 2 - 3
MOTORS J6 CPM4 = 2 - 3
CPM_I/F J7
J12 J11 J10 J9 J8
MTR/FB FULL SOLN SENS LEDS
TOOLS
The following test documents are available to test the CPM:
l MICR test documents 484-0046074 and 484-0046075

l Image quality document 484-0050375
l Test Check packet 484-0050345
l Calibration document set 484-0092469.
l Mallet or hammer.
REVISION

USB ENVELOPE DEPOSITORY AND

DISPENSER
INTRODUCTION
This chapter gives servicing information for the USB envelope depository and dispenser
which can be configured in two ways: depository only or depository with envelope
dispenser.
DESCRIPTION
The USB envelope depository and dispenser presents an envelope to the card holder who
can then deposit the envelope using the same access slot in the fascia. There are three bin
variants:
Dispenser Hopper
Transport
Bin
Open Bin Open Bin with Access Door Latchfast Bin
TROUBLESHOOTING
Envelope Specification
Nominal Size
The sizes of envelope that can be used in the USB envelope depository and dispenser are
as follows:
l Length
l Minimum: 203 mm (8.0 in.)
l Maximum: 254 mm (10.0 in.)
l Width
l Minimum: 99 mm (3.90 in.)
l Maximum: 111 mm (4.37 in.).
Retard Roller Shaft

At each service call check that the retard roller shaft is seated correctly in its location in the
envelope dispenser side frames.
Note: If the shaft is dislodged during clearance of an envelope jam it will cause subsequent
jams owing to several envelopes being fed into the transport together.
Also check that no damage has occurred to the blue rollers as a result of envelope
construction not being to specification.
Retard Roller
Troubleshooting Table
Device Device racked out None Restore interlocked
disconnected voltage by racking device
into operating position
Mechanical damage to Check that interlock switch is Replace interlock switch
interlock switch assembly activated by the racking mechanism assembly
Interlock switch malfunction Check that interlock switch is Replace interlock switch
activated by the racking mechanism assembly
Harness terminal contacts not Check that terminal contacts are Connect terminal
fitted correctly to switch fitted correctly and securely contacts correctly and
securely
Harness damaged Check that harness is not damaged Replace harness
Shutter jammed Foreign object preventing Inspect shutter for foreign object Remove foreign object
open shutter movement
Damaged shutter Inspect shutter for physical damage Replace shutter
Shutter can not move Check that the shutter can be Ensure shutter is clear of
moved manually debris and located firmly
in correct position
Shutter faulty or harness Check that shutter is free to move Inspect shutter
loose or damaged manually but does not move under harnessing/replace
diagnostic control shutter
Envelope depository control Check that shutter is free to move Inspect and replace
board faulty manually but does not move under control board
diagnostic control
Shutter jammed Envelope preventing shutter Inspect shutter for envelope Remove jammed
closed movement envelope
Vandalised shutter Inspect shutter for physical damage Replace shutter
Shutter can not move Check that the shutter can move Make sure shutter is
manually clear of debris and
located firmly in correct
position
Shutter faulty or harness Check that shutter is free to move Inspect shutter
loose or damaged manually but does not move under harnessing/replace
diagnostic control shutter
Envelope depository control Check that shutter is free to move Inspect and replace
board faulty manually but does not move under control board
diagnostic control

Envelope jam in Envelope jammed in Inspect transport for envelope Remove any jammed
transport at transport envelope
entry sensor Foreign media jammed in Inspect transport for foreign media Remove any foreign
transport, for example coins media
or credit cards
Envelope depository Check that the actuator is out of the Clear transport sensor
transport sensor dirty sensor path when the transport
sensor is reading blocked
Envelope depository Check that the transport sensor Inspect and repair or
transport sensor wiring reports the same regardless of the replace sensor and/or
broken or disconnected position of the actuator harness
Envelope depository control Check that the transport sensor Inspect and replace
board faulty reports the same regardless of the control board
position of the actuator
Mechanical actuator assembly Examine mechanical actuator Repair or replace
broken or stuck due to dirt assembly mechanical actuator
assembly
Sensor not fitted correctly Check that the sensor is lined up Line up the sensor with
correctly with the mechanical the mechanical actuator
actuator assembly assembly
transport at anti- transport envelope
fish sensor Foreign media jammed in Inspect transport for foreign media Remove any foreign
transport for example coins media
or credit cards
Envelope depository Check that the actuator is out of the Clean transport sensor
broken or disconnected position of the actuator harness
assembly

transport at exit transport envelope
sensor Envelope depository Examine sensor for dirt Clean transport sensor
transport sensor dirty
transport sensor wiring reports the same whether or not a replace sensor and/or
broken or disconnected document is covering the sensor harness
board faulty reports the same whether or not a control board
document is covering the sensor
Sensor not housed in home Check that sensor is lying flush on Fit sensor correctly
position in metal guide the metal
Sensor positioned wrong way Check that sensor is facing track Fit sensor correctly
around
Suspected Envelope jammed in Inspect transport for envelope Remove any jammed
tampering on transport envelope
main transport Foreign media jammed in Inspect transport for foreign media Remove any foreign
transport for example coins media
or credit cards
Envelope depository Check that the actuator is not in the Clean transport sensor
broken or discontinued position of the actuator harness
assembly

Depository Envelope depository timing Check that the disk is not in the Clean timing disk sensor
transport timing disk sensor dirty sensor path when the sensor is
disk has failed reading blocked
Envelope depository timing Check that the sensor reports the Repair or replace sensor
disk sensor reporting a fixed same regardless of the position of and/or motor assembly
state (either blocked or clear) the timing disk
Envelope depository timing Check that the sensor reports the Repair or replace sensor
disk sensor wiring broken or same regardless of the position of and/or motor assembly
disconnected the timing disk
Envelope depository control Check that the sensor reports the Inspect and replace the
board faulty same regardless of the position of control board
the timing disk
Faulty motor or damaged Check motor turns or disk is not Repair or replace sensor
timing disk damaged and/or motor assembly
Printhead ink Printhead nearly empty None Re-fit old printhead to
low or near end see if it works
of life Printhead cartridge has None Re-fit old printhead to
reached the end of its defined see if it works
life
Printhead nearly empty None Fit new printhead
Print cartridge has reached None Fit new printhead
the end of its defined life
Printhead Printhead has been removed Check that a print cartridge is Fit a printhead in the
incorrectly fitted present in the printhead assembly printhead assembly
or not fitted Printhead not fitted properly Check that a print cartridge is Fit a printhead in the
correctly fitted in the printhead printhead assembly
assembly
Printhead carriage assembly Inspect printhead assembly for Replace printhead
faulty physical damage or faulty wiring assembly
Envelope depository control Check that removing and then Inspect and replace
board faulty refitting a printhead is detected control board
A printhead with an unknown None Re-fit old printhead to
(remaining) life has been see if it works or fit new
fitted printhead

Bin full Envelope bin full None Empty bin
Envelope jammed in Inspect transport for envelope Remove jammed
transport envelope
transport sensor wiring reports the same whether or not a replace sensor and/or
broken or disconnected document is covering the sensor harness
board faulty reports the same whether or not a control board
document is covering the sensor
Sensor not housed in home Check that sensor is lying flush to Fit sensor correctly
position in metal guide metal
Sensor positioned wrong way Check that sensor is facing track Fit sensor correctly
around
Bin removed Envelope bin missing or not Check that bin is present and Fit bin correctly
latched securely in place
Envelope depository Check that the sensor reports the Inspect and repair or
transport sensor wiring same whether or not the bin is replace sensor and/or
broken or disconnected fitted harness
Envelope depository control Check that the sensor reports the Inspect and replace
board faulty same whether or not the bin is control board
fitted
Sensor not housed in home Check that sensor is lying flush to Fit sensor correctly
position in metal guide metal
Sensor positioned wrong way Check that sensor is facing bin Fit sensor correctly
around
Depository Depository transport motor None Replace depository
transport motor has reached end of life transport motor
nearing end of assembly
life

Anti-fish solenoid Anti-fish sensor is dirty Check that the actuator is out of the Clean anti-fish sensor
nearing end of sensor path when the anti-fish
life sensor is reading blocked
Anti-fish sensor wiring broken Check that the anti-fish sensor Inspect and repair or
or disconnected reports the same whether or not replace sensor and/or
the actuator is clear of the sensor harness
Envelope depository control Check that the anti-fish sensor Inspect and replace
board faulty reports the same whether or not control board
the actuator is clear of the sensor
Anti-fish solenoid wiring Check that the solenoid fires Inspect and repair or
broken or disconnected replace solenoid and/or
harness
Anti-fish solenoid has failed Check that the solenoid fires Inspect and repair or
replace solenoid and/or
harness
Wiper solenoid Wiper solenoid has failed Check that the solenoid fires Inspect and repair or
nearing end of replace solenoid and/or
life harness
Envelope depository control Check that the solenoid fires Inspect and repair or
board faulty replace solenoid and or
harness
Depository entry Envelope depository entry Transport sensor reads the same Inspect and repair or
sensor failed sensor failed regardless of position of actuator replace sensor and/or
harness
Envelope depository control Transport sensor reads the same Inspect and replace
board faulty regardless of the position of the control board
actuator

the dispenser transport envelope
transport Envelope dispenser transport Check that there is no obstruction Clean transport sensor
sensor dirty of the sensor path when the
transport sensor is reading blocked
Envelope dispenser transport Check that the transport sensor Inspect and repair or
sensor wiring broken or reports the same regardless of replace sensor and/or
disconnected whether or not the transport is harness
blocked
Envelope depository control Check that the transport sensor Repair or replace control
board faulty reports the same regardless of board
whether or not the transport is
blocked
Sensor not housed in home Check that sensor and LED are lined Switch orientation of
position within mounting up opposite each other sensor or LED
bracket
Envelope Envelope dispenser timing Check that the disk is not in the Clean timing disk sensor
dispenser disk sensor dirty sensor path when the sensor is
transport timing reading blocked
disk has failed Envelope dispenser timing Check that the sensor reports the Repair or replace sensor
disk sensor reporting a fixed same regardless of the position of and/or motor assembly
state (either blocked or clear) the timing disk
Envelope dispenser timing Check that the sensor reports the Repair or replace sensor
disk sensor wiring broken or same regardless of the position of and/or motor assembly
disconnected the timing disk
Envelope depository control Check that the sensor reports the Inspect and replace
board faulty same regardless of the position of control board
the timing disk
Faulty motor or damaged Check motor turns or disk is not Repair or replace sensor
timing disk damaged and/or motor assembly
Envelope hopper Envelope hopper empty Check hopper for envelopes Fit hopper
almost empty Envelope hopper sensor Check that the sensor reports the Repair or replace sensor
wiring broken or same regardless of the presence or
disconnected otherwise of envelopes
Envelope depository control Check that the sensor reports the Repair or replace sensor
board faulty same regardless of the presence or
otherwise of envelopes

Envelope hopper Envelope hopper empty Check hopper for envelopes Fill hopper
is empty Envelope hopper sensor Check that the sensor reports the Repair or replace sensor
Envelope hopper sensor Check that the sensor reports the Repair or replace sensor
Envelope depository control Check that the sensor reports the Repair or replace sensor
board faulty same regardless of the presence or
otherwise of envelopes
Envelope Envelope transport motor has None Replace envelope
transport motor reached end of life transport motor
nearing the end assembly
of life
Envelope track Envelope dispenser transport Transport sensor reads the same Inspect and repair or
sensor(s) failed sensor failed regardless of position of actuator replace sensor and/or
harness
board faulty regardless of position of actuator control board
USB USB communications cable Check that USB communications Connect cable to both
communications disconnected from either cable is connected to both device device and core
failed device or core and core
Device not powered on after Check device is powered on Switch power on
maintenance
Faulty cable None Replace cable
New electronics New control electronics fitted None Confirm new control
found board has been fitted
New device found None Confirm new device has
been fitted
New device On recovery from a comms None Reboot ATM
found (reboot error, incompatible hardware
required)
Depository life Life count exceeded None Replace depository
count exceeded

Depository anti- Envelope depository anti-fish Transport sensor reads the same Inspect and repair or
fish sensor failed sensor failed regardless of position of actuator replace sensor and/or
harness
Depository exit Envelope depository exit Transport sensor reads the same Inspect and repair or
sensor failed sensor failed regardless of position of actuator replace sensor and/or
harness
Dispenser life Life count exceeded None Replace envelope
count exceeded dispenser
Sensors
The depository control board monitors five sensors on the depository. If the depository
uses a tamper indicating latchfast bin, an additional optical reflective sensor is fitted. In
addition, the depository control board monitors two sensors on the fascia shutter and three
sensors on the envelope dispenser (if fitted).
Anti-fish Finger
Second Sensor
(combined anti-fish)
Anti Fish Solenoid Sensor
Anti Fish Solenoid
Entry Sensor
Timing Disk
Second Sensor
(Depository)
(combined anti-fish)
Hopper Low Sensor Anti Fish Solenoid Sensor
Tamper Indicating Sensor

Timing Disk Exit Sensor (option on latchfast bin only)
(Dispenser) Transport Sensor (rear access location)
Sensor Name Description

Envelope Entry Detects envelopes entering the transport during deposits and
Depository being presented when dispensed.
Second (combined anti-fish) This sensor is used to:
l Track the movement of envelopes and trigger printing
during a deposit
l Trigger tampering of anti-fish finger.
Exit Detects envelopes clearing the transport into the depository
bin.
Timing Disk Monitors rotation of the depository transport drive shafts.
Tamper Indicating (TI) (option on Detects the presence of a depository bin.
latchfast bin only)
Anti Fish Solenoid Senses that solenoid has fired.
Envelope Transport Detects envelopes within the dispenser transport.
Dispenser Timing Disk Monitors rotation of the dispenser transport drive shafts.
Hopper Low Monitors the approximate level of envelopes remaining in the
hopper.
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0 Diagnostics
Depository Control Board (Secondary Processor Test)
When the depository control board is powered on or receives a reset, the level 0
diagnostics are executed. Test results are displayed on a bank of four LEDs.
LED Interface
Control Board
D1
D2
4 Green
D3 LEDs
D4
The on-board LEDs are used to display the number of the test being run and the error code
if a test fails. The LEDs display the codes as binary numbers:
LED 1 2 3 4
least ------- significant bit ------- mostxx
Decimal Value: 1 2 4 8
A successful test result is always number 0H, that is, all LEDs off. Shortly after completion
of level 0 tests the LEDs will cycle one on at a time showing that the board has successfully
completed level 0 tests and is now monitoring the hardware.
Level 1 Diagnostics
Note: M_DATA and M_STATUS codes returned by level 1 diagnostic tests are listed in the
NCR publication number B006-6273, 56XX/Personas Self-Service Financial Terminal
Diagnostic Status Code Notebook.
Envelope Depository
The tests available on the envelope depository diagnostic menu are:
l Menu
l Deposit and Print Data
l Deposit/Print Serial
l Clean Print Head
l Print and Return
l Clear to Bin
l Clear to Entry
l Shutter Status
l Sensor Status
l Run to Run
l Tamper Indication.
Note: Looping is allowed on all tests except “Clean Print Head”.
Menu
This displays a menu of all the other Applets to allow an operator to select one.
Deposit and Print Data

This test prompts you to insert an envelope. The test opens the shutter to allow an
envelope to be deposited.
Note: The envelope must be entered within 10 seconds of selecting the test.
If an envelope is deposited the ASCII characters LDTX are printed on it 20 times before it is
transported to the bin. The serial number is not incremented.
At the end of the test you are prompted to verify acceptability of print position and quality.
Deposit/Print Serial
When an envelope is entered it has the current four digit serial number printed on it ten
times, before being driven into the bin. The serial number is incremented by 1.
Clean Print Head

This test exercises the depository’s print head cleaning mechanism.
Print and Return

When an envelope is entered it has the ASCII characters “TEST PRINT” printed on it
before being driven back to the entry slot. If the present was successful you are prompted
to take the envelope and check the quality of the text printed on it. The prompt is displayed
for 10 seconds before an error message is displayed.
Clear to Bin
If the transport sensors indicate a blockage, the shutter is opened and the transport driven
for 10 seconds in the direction of the bin, in an attempt to clear it. If the transport sensors do
not indicate a blockage, the shutter is not opened but the transport is still driven.
Clear to Entry
If the transport sensors indicate a blockage, the shutter is opened and the transport driven
for 10 seconds in the direction of the front of the module (towards the user) in an attempt to
clear it. If the transport sensors do not indicate a blockage the shutter is not opened but the
transport is still driven.
If an envelope is successfully driven to the entry/exit slot you are prompted to remove the
envelope. If the document is not taken within 10 seconds the envelope is retracted and
deposited in the bin.
Shutter Status
The depository shutter is opened and then closed.
Sensor Status
Reports the current state (index, value, threshold and state) of each of the devices’
sensors.
Run to Run
Performs the following sequence of tests:
l Clear to Bin
l Shutter Status
l Deposit/Print Serial.
Tamper Indication
The status of the envelope depository tamper indicator (if fitted) is displayed as M_DATA.
Envelope Dispenser
Tests on the envelope dispenser diagnostic menu are:
l Menu
l Present
l Retract
l Sensor Status
l Anti-Fish Solenoid
l Run To Run.
Note: Looping is allowed on all tests except Retract.
Menu
This displays a menu of all the other Applets to allow an operator to select one.
Present
The present test presents an envelope at the fascia slot for removal. The result of the
present test is displayed as M_Data. If the envelope is not taken within 10 seconds, a
message “Envelope Not Taken” is displayed.
Retract
The retract test retracts an envelope from the fascia slot until it clears the exit sensor.
Note: A GOOD status is returned if there is no envelope in the fascia slot.
Sensor Status
The sensor status test returns, as M_DATA, the current status of the bin low, exit and
timing disk sensors.
Anti-Fish Solenoid
This test fires the device’s anti-fish solenoid.
Run To Run
The run to run test automatically performs, in sequence, the following tests:
l Sensor Status
l Present
l Retract.
Level 3 Diagnostics
Level 3 diagnostics provides an interface to the tallies, stored in on-module and system
NVRAM, and error logs for the units.
Envelope Depository
S_DATA
The S_DATA returned for the envelope depository are:
S_DATA Meaning
00 GOOD (No error)
Tallies
The tallies recorded for the envelope depository are:
Tally Description
DRVTRANS Times the transport is driven
DEPOSJAM Jams detected in the transport
SENSFAIL Sensor failures
SHUTOPER Shutter operations
SHUTTJAM Shutter jams
ENABDEPO Depository is enabled
DEPNTDON Deposit is not done
DEPOSON Deposits done
BINOVFL Bin overfill detected
Envelope Dispenser
The level 3 diagnostics returned for the envelope dispenser are:
S_DATA
The S_DATA returned for the envelope dispenser are:
S_DATA Meaning
00 GOOD (No error)
S_DATA Meaning
Tallies
The tallies recorded for the envelope dispenser transport are:
Tally Description
DRVTOTAL Number of times the motor is activated/driven
FRTTOTAL Number of times a font edge of an envelope is detected
TKNTOTAL Number of times an envelope is taken by a card holder
NOTFOUND Number of times an envelope does not pass from the bin/cassette to over the
exit/envelope transport sensor (bin/cassette empty or envelope jam before sensor)
STRAPPING
Control Board Layout
Print Head State of Health LED (Red)
J12
J11
J10
4 off Level 0 Diagnostics
LEDs (Green)
J9
J1
J8
J7 J13
J6
J2
J3
J4
J5
Long Transport Jumper

When a long transport is configured this requires a jumper (see illustration below) to be
connected to the transport length connector on the main deposit control harness:
Insulated Wire (White)
ADJUSTMENTS
Adjusting for Envelope Length
The plastic spacers attached between the envelope hopper frame and the envelope rail
should be cut with a sharp knife or small steel saw to accommodate the length of envelope
used by the owning organization. Segments should be removed from the spacers so that
the envelopes fit into the hopper with, ideally, 1 or 2 mm (0.04 or 0.08 in.) to spare (but no
more than 3 mm (0.12 in.) - 1 segment). Remove any burrs left on the legs of the spacers
with a smooth file. The spacers are secured to the dispenser hopper and envelope rail
using eight screws as shown below:
Spacer
Envelope Rail
If an envelope is in a certain size (239-245 mm), the legs attached to the spacer must be
removed and attached to the dispenser hopper. The spacer secures the dispenser hopper
and envelope rail as shown in the image below:
Spacer
Envelope Rail
Measured Length of Envelope

Millimetres Inches No. of Segments to Remove
203-205 mm 7.99-8.07 inches 1
206-208 mm 8.11-8.19 inches 2
209-211 mm 8.23-8.31 inches 3
212-214 mm 8.35-8.42 inches 4
215-217 mm 8.46-8.54 inches 5
218-220 mm 8.58-8.66 inches 6
221-223 mm 8.70-8.78 inches 7
224-226 mm 8.82-8.90 inches 8
227-229 mm 8.94-9.02 inches 9
230-232mm 9.05-9.13 inches 10
233-235 mm 9.17-9.25 inches 11
236-238 mm 9.29-9.37 inches 12 (all segments)
239-245 mm 9.41-9.65 inches Remove spacer
246-254 mm 9.69-10.00 inches Remove spacer and rail

Servicing is by major sub-module swap. The USB envelope depository and dispenser is
fault tolerant from S/W controlled power downs. The major sub-modules that are to be
repaired at rework centres are:
l Control board
l Dispenser
l Depository
l Deposit and dispense control harnesses.
Additionally, the following parts can be removed and replaced:
l Long and mid infeed

l Depository motor
l Dispenser motor
l Wiper assembly.
Control Board
The procedure for removal and replacement of the control board is as follows:
1. Remove the depository control board cover by unscrewing and retaining the single
M4 screw located at the base of the cover. Unclip the cover from the depository.
2. Disconnect all cables from the control board. Before disconnecting the USB cable,
undo the strain relief clip. Take note of the routing of the cables and the positions of
the connectors.
3. Remove the control board by unscrewing and retaining the four M4 combi screws.
4. To replace the control board reverse the steps above using the retained screws.
Note: When reconnecting the ink ribbon cable, the contacts must face inward to the control
board.
Dispenser
The procedure for removal and replacement of the envelope dispenser is as follows:
1. Remove the three M4 screws holding the dispenser and the orange coloured handle
to the module tray. Retain the screws and the handle.
2. Disconnect the motor cable and the sensors cable.
3. Lift the dispenser out of the location stand-offs and remove from the module tray.
4. To replace the dispenser reverse the steps above using the retained screws and
orange coloured handle.
Depository
Note: It is recommended to remove the dispenser (if fitted), or move it back on the module
tray, to aid removal of the depository.
The procedure for removal and replacement of the depository is as follows:
1. Remove the control board cover if the TI cable is fitted.

2. Disconnect the USB, power and shutter (RJ11) cables and the TI cable (if fitted).
3. Remove the two M4 screws holding the depository to the module tray.
4. Lift out the depository and remove from the module tray.
5. To replace the depository reverse the steps above using the retained screws.
Deposit and Dispense Control Harnesses

The procedure for removal and replacement of the deposit uni-harness and the dispense
uni-harness is as follows:
1. Use the NCR 6634 ATM Parts Identification Manual to identify the envelope deposit
control harness and the envelope dispenser control harness.
2. Disconnect the cables as required, taking note of the routing and positions of the
connectors.
3. Replace the cables using the same routing and connector positions as noted in step
2.
Long Infeed
The procedure for removal and replacement of the long infeed is as follows:
1. Hold the tie bar then unscrew (but do not remove) the two screws (one at each
side).
2. Remove and retain the two nuts (one at each side).
3. Remove and retain the two nuts holding the sensor bracket.
4. Remove the sensor bracket and cut any cable ties attached to the long infeed.
5. Remove the long infeed by carefully lifting up and pulling away (to disengage gears)
from the transport.
6. To replace the long infeed reverse the steps above using the retained nuts and
screws and using new cable ties.
Mid Infeed
The procedure for removal and replacement of the mid infeed is as follows:
1. Hold the tie bar then unscrew (but do not remove) the two screws (one at each
side).
2. Remove and retain the two nuts (one at each side).
3. Remove the mid infeed by carefully lifting up and pulling away from the transport.
4. To replace the mid infeed reverse the steps above using the retained nuts and
screws.
Depository Motor
The procedure for removal and replacement of the depository motor is as follows:
1. Remove and retain the hand-wheel by removing the circlip and pin.
2. Unclip and retain the timing disk cover.
3. Remove and retain the two M4 screws.
4. Disengage the drive belt.
5. Disconnect the power cable (J6) and remove the depository motor.
6. To replace the depository motor reverse the steps above using the retained parts.
Dispenser Motor
The procedure for removal and replacement of the dispenser motor is as follows:
1. Remove and retain the gear cover by removing one screw and unclipping the cover.
2. Remove and retain the three M3 screws.
3. Disconnect the harness from connector J5 on control board and remove motor.
4. To replace the dispenser motor reverse the steps above using the retained parts.
Wiper Assembly
The procedure for removal and replacement of the wiper assembly is as follows:
1. Disconnect solenoid connector.

2. Unclip wiper assembly from the shaft.
3. To replace the wiper assembly reverse the steps above.
CABLING
USB Envelope Depository

and Dispenser Control Board
Print
J11
Head
J6 Depository
Motor
Dispenser
J5 Motor
Shutter
Shutter Motor
J3 Control Open
Board Locked Shutter
Sensors
Depository
(DEP_SEN_P1) J9 Timing Disk
Transport Length
Entry
Depository
Second/Anti-Fish
Transport
Exit (Bin Full)
(CONTROL_BOARD_P11) J8 Latch Fast Bin (Optional)

Bin-In
Envelope Present
(ENV_DISP_SEN_P6) J2
Hopper Low Dispenser
Envelope Exit Transport
Dispenser
Timing Disk
Continuous +24V
(PWR_P8) J4 DC Distribution
I/L +24V Board
USB Comms
J1 USB Hub
Anti-Fish
(PPD_SOL_P) J7
Solenoid
Wipe
Solenoid
Envelope Deposit Control Harness
FISH_SEN
SOLENOID_SEN WIPE_SOL
DEP_PCB_P9
ENTRY_SENSOR
FISH_SOL
PPD_PCB_P7
TRANSPORT_LENGTH
TIM DISK
PPD_BIN_FULL_SEN
RED
1 PPD_ENTRY_LED (RED) BLK ENTRY
2 PPD_ENTRY_LED_RTN (BLK) WHT SENSOR
3 PPD_ENTRY_SEN (WHT) GRN
4 PPD_ENTRY_SEN_RTN (GRN)
5 RED
PPD_FISH_LED (RED)
6 BLK FISH
PPD_FISH_LED_RTN (BLK)
7 WHT SENSOR
PPD_FISH_SEN (WHT)
8 GRN
PPD_FISH_SEN_RTN (GRN) RED
9 PPD_SOL_LED (RED) BLK
DEP_PCB_P9
10 PPD_SOL_LED_RTN (BLK) SOLENOID

11 WHT
PPD_SOL_SEN (WHT) SENSOR
GRN
12 PPD_SOL_SEN_RTN (GRN)
13 ORG
+5V
14 WHT PPD_BIN
15 VIO FULL_SEN
PPD_BIN_OVER_SEN (WHT)
16 GND RED
17 PPD_TIM_LED (RED) BLK TIMING
18 PPD_TIM_LED_RTN (BLK) WHT DISK
19 PPD_TIM_SEN (WHT) GRN
20 PPD_TIM_SEN_RTN (GRN)
21 TRANS_LONG 1 TRANSPORT
22 TRANS_LONG_RTN 2 LENGTH
23
24
PPD_PCB_P7
4 AUTO_CLEAN_SOL_RTN 1 WIPE
3 AUTO_CLEAN_SOL_ON 2 SOL
2 FISH_SOL_RTN 1 FISH
1 FISH_SOL_ON 2 SOL
Power Adaptor Harness

PPD_PCB_P4 POWER_ADAPTOR
I/L NO I/L CM
PPD_PCB_P4 PWR_ADPTR
4 +24V RTN 2
3 +24V RTN
2 +24V I/L
1 +24V 1
+24V
NO CM
IL_SW_NO IL_SW_CM
Heater Adapter Harness
Power Adapter
P4
PPD_PCB_P4
Heater
24V
1 24V VL 1 Power Adapter
2 2
PPD_PCB_P4 24V RTN 3 P4
3 24V RTN
4 4
5 +24V RTN 3 +24V VL
Heater
USB Harness
Pos.4 Pos.1
Pos.5
Pos.1
L
Pin 1 VBus Pin 1
D- Pin 2 Type
Type Pin 2
A Pin 3 D+
Pin 3 Mini - B
GND
Pin 4 Pin 5
Braid + Drain Shell

Red: VBUS
Black: Power Ground
W
R B
G
White: D-
Green: D+
Deposit Bin TI Harness

TI_REFLECTIVE_SENSOR PPD_PCB_P8
TI_REFLECTIVE_SENSOR PPD_PCB_P8
ORG
+5V 1
WHT
SENSOR 2
VIO
GND 3
Envelope Dispenser Control Harness
SEN
TIM DISC
PPD_PCB_P2
HOPPER LOW
LED
PPD_PCB_P2 ENV_EXIT_LED
1 RED
ENV EXIT LED (RED)
ENV_EXIT_SEN
2 ENV EXIT LED RTN (BLK) BLK
3 ENV EXIT SEN (GRN) GRN

4 ENV EXIT SEN RTN (WHT) WHT
5 S SSS- ENV_TIM_LED BLK
TIM_DISC
ENV_TIM_LED
6 ENV_TIM_LED_RTN S1 S S S1 - ENV_TIM_LED_RTN BRN
7 ENV_TIM_SEN S2 S S S2 - ENV_TIM_SEN ORG

HOPPER_LOW
8 ENV_TIM_SEN_RTN S3 S S S3 - ENV_TIM_SEN_RTN RED
9 ENV_HOPPER_LOW 1
10 ENV_HOPPER_LOW_RTN 2
11
12 ENV_DISP_PRES
13
14
J1 - USB
Pin Desc
1 Vol
2 D-
3 D+
4 N/C
5 GND
J2 - Envelope Dispenser Sensors

Pin Desc Pin Desc
1 ENV_EXIT_LED 2 GND
3 ENV_EXIT_SEN 4 +5V
5 ENV_TIM_LED 6 GND
7 ENV_TIM_SEN 8 GND
9 ENV_HOPPER_LOWb 10 GND
11 ENV_DISP_PRESb 12 GND
13 N/C 14 N/C
J3 - Shutter
Pin Desc
1 GND
2 GND
3 I2C_SDA
4 GND
5 I2C_SCL
6 GND
J4 - Power
Pin Desc
1 +24V
2 24V_INT
3 GND
4 GND
J5 - Envelope Dispenser DC Motor

Pin Desc
1 ENV_DISP_OUTA
2 ENV_DISP_OUTB
J6 - PPD DC Motor
Pin Desc
1 PPD_OUTA
2 PPD_OUTB
J7 - Anti Fish Solenoid and Auto-Clean Solenoid

Pin Desc
1 PPD_OUTA
2 24V_INT
3 AUTO_CLEAN_SOLb
4 24V_INT
J8 - Bin Present Sensor

Mechanical Switch or Optical Sensor.
Pin Desc
1 PPD_OUTA
2 BIN_PRESb
3 GND
J9 - PPD Sensors
Pin Desc Pin Desc
1 PPD_ENTRY_LED 2 GND
3 PPD_ENTRY_SEN 4 GND
5 PPD_FISH_LED 6 GND
7 PPD_FISH_SEN 8 GND
9 PPD_FISH_SOL_LED 10 GND
11 PPD_FISH_SOL_SEN 12 GND
13 +5V 14 N/C
15 PPD_BIN_OVER_SENb 16 GND
17 PPD_TIM_LED 18 GND
19 PPD_TIM_SEN 20 GND
21 TRANS_LONGb 22 GND
23 N/C 24 N/C
J10 - Spare I/O

Pin Desc Pin Desc
1 PC (4) 2 PA (13)
3 PC (9) 4 PA (14)
5 PC (10) 6 N/C
7 N/C 8 N/C
9 GND 10 GND
J11 - Printhead Interface

Pin Desc Pin Desc
1 HEADVOLT 2 IJET6b
3 IJET5b 4 IJET8b
5 IJET3b 6 IJET4b
7 IJET1b 8 IJET2b
9 IJET11b 10 IJET12b
11 IJET7b 12 IJET10b
13 IJET9b 14 HEADVOLT
15 N/C 16 N/C
J12 - NOP
Pin Desc Pin Desc
1 GND 2 URT0_RTSb
3 URT0_TXD 4 +3.3V
5 URT0CTSb 6 URT0_RXD
7 RESET_SWITCHb 8 +3.3V
9 SCOPE 10 QSPI_DOUT
11 QSPI_CLK 12 +3.3V
13 QSPI_DIN 14 QSPI_CS1b
15 CPU_RSTOb 16 +3.3V
17 CRS 18 ECOL
19 TXD3 20 GND
21 TXD2 22 TXD1
23 TXD0 24 GND
25 TXEN 26 TXERR
27 TXCLK 28 GND
29 RXERR 30 RXCLK
31 RXDV 32 GND
33 RX0 34 RX1
35 RX2 36 GND
37 RX3 38 MDC
39 MDIO 40 GND
J13 - Debug Interface NOP

Pin Desc Pin Desc
1 N/C 2 BKPT
3 GND 4 DSCLK
5 GND 6 N/C
7 CPU_RSTIb 8 DSI
9 +3.3V 10 DSO
11 GND 12 PST3
13 PST2 14 PST1
15 PST0 16 DDATA3
17 DDATA2 18 DDATA1
19 DDATA0 20 BDM_CONNECTb
21 N/C 22 N/C
23 GND 24 PSTCLK
25 +3.3V 26 TEAb
None.
None.
REVISION

ITRAN SCALABLE CHECK PROCESSOR
INTRODUCTION
The iTRAN Scalable Check Processor, also known as the Scalable CPM (SCPM),
contains a transport and camera system that permits checks to be accepted, imaged and
either returned to the user or transported to the storage bins. The SCPM reads the
Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR) code-line of a check and endorses the back of
the check.
There are two variants of the check processor: Single Feed and Bunch Feed. The Single
Feed variant does not contain the escrow and re-buncher.
Stacking Bin
Reject Bin
Horizontal
Bin Transport
Infeed
Vertical
Bin Transport Feeder Transport
Horizontal Re-buncher Transport

Core Transport
Vertical Escrow
Core Transport
Re-buncher
MICR reader
Endorser and Cameras
DESCRIPTION
The SCPM consists of the following functional areas:
l Infeed
Shutter
l
Infeed transport
l
l Feeder
l Core Module
l De-skew mechanism
l Front and rear cameras
l MICR reader
l Endorser
l Escrow and Re-bunch module (ERBM) - bunch feed variant only

l Escrow
l Re-buncher
l Bin module
l Transport
l Reject bin
l Stacking bin
Document Path
Accepted documents travel through the modules of the SCPM in the following order:
1. Infeed
2. Feeder
3. Deskew
4. Cameras
5. MICR
6. Escrow (bunch feed variant only)
7. Endorser
8. Stacking bin.
The path of returned documents is as follows:
1. Infeed
2. Feeder
3. Deskew
4. Cameras
5. MICR
6. Escrow (bunch feed variant only)
7. Re-buncher (bunch feed variant only)
8. Feeder
9. Infeed
10. If not taken by, customer, sent to reject bin.
Security Shutter
A security shutter, mounted on the infeed, prevents access to the module transport. The
shutter is controlled and driven by the SCPM control board. Sensors indicate whether or
not the shutter is open or closed. The facia mounted Media Entry Indicators are also
controlled from the SCPM control board.
Infeed - Single
The in-feed transports the document from the shutter to the de-skew area in the core
module. There are three lengths available: short, medium and long in-feed depending on
the ATM.
There are document entry sensors located between the shutter and the start of the infeed
transport, a document crossing these sensors will trigger the infeed transport motor. The
sensors are also utilized in conjunction with an ultrasonic sensor to conduct an over
thickness detection and double document detection on documents prior to them being
taken into the transport. Documents detected this way are returned to the customer.
Infeed - Bunch
The infeed accepts either single checks or a bundle of up to 30 checks, depending on the
variant, transports them from the shutter to the separation rollers in the feeder. Once the
checks are at the separation rollers they are fed individually to the deskew area for
alignment and further processing within the SCPM.
A double detect sensor is located immediately after the separation rollers. Multiple items
are reversed back through the rollers to be re-fed as single checks. If separation fails, the
documents are returned to the customer. Over thickness sensing ensures items prone to
jamming will be returned prior to processing.
The bunch in-feed unit can return any un-separated checks back to the customer if the
transaction is cancelled or a feed jam occurs. It also has the capability of accepting a bunch
of checks from the re-bunch module to be returned to the customer from the main
transport. The returned bunch of checks will be held with adequate pressure to ensure they
are retained properly until removed by the customer.
The interlock is located beneath a square, metal cover, beside the escrow transport
release catch.
De-skew Mechanism
Checks are inserted into the unit leading edge first with the aligning edge (MICR line) on
the right hand side. The de-skew mechanism aligns the bottom edge of the document with
a reference surface, using rollers, so that the total skew or rotation does not exceed 1°.
This ensures that the item is adequately de-skewed for subsequent imaging and MICR
read operations.
Front And Rear Cameras

The cameras scan the front and back of a document. The image scan height is 108mm.
The cameras use line scan imaging sensors to take full colour images as the document
passes the front and rear cameras at full track speed.
MICR Reader Module

The MICR Reader module is located immediately after the de-skew module. The check is
driven past the MICR head with its MICR band in contact with the head. The captured data
is sent to the host ATM, as it is being captured, via a dedicated USB stream pipe. MICR
recognition is performed during processing by software in the ATM’s PC core.
The MICR read scan position is shown in the diagram below:
Document
12.7 mm
1.57 mm
MICR Band
Transport Mechanism
The transport moves checks to and from the processing modules and into the storage bins.
Sensors detect the position and direction of movement of the check and identify if a jam has
occurred and its location. Checks that have not reached the storage bins can be returned to
the customer.
On configurations without an escrow, a check is held in the vertical bin transport after being
read, while waiting for the command to process or return the check.
Sensors
The following diagram shows the SCPM track layout, giving the locations of the processing
devices, the track sensors, and the bin full sensors.
TS19 TS20 TS21
Capture Bin 1
TS18
Capture Bin 2
DC
Stacking Bin
BE2
Deskew
TS17 Mechanism
BF1
MICR DFD TS4 TS3 TB TS2 TS1

TS9 DS2 DS1
TS8 TS7 TS5

Front
Back Infeed
Endorser Camera TS6
Camera
er TS15
u nch
TS10 Core Reb Feeder
ERBM TS14
TS13 Escrow
TS12 TS16
Sensor Description Location

TS1 Track sensor 1 In-feed
TB Thick bunch In-feed (single variant)
TS4 Track sensor 4 In-feed (single variant)
Feeder (bunch variant)
TS5 Track sensor 5 In-feed (single variant)
Feeder (bunch variant)
DFD Double feed detect Feeder (bunch variant)
TS6 Track sensor 6 Feeder (bunch variant)
DS1 Deskew sensor Core Module
DS2 Deskew sensor 2 Core Module
TS7 Track sensor 7 Core Module
TS10 Track sensor 10 Core Module (bunch
feed variant)
TS12 Track sensor 12 ERBM (bunch feed
variant)
variant)

variant)
variant)
variant)
TS17 Track sensor 17 Stacking bin vertical
transport
TS18 Track sensor 18 Stacking bin vertical
transport
TS19 Track sensor 19 Stacking bin horizontal
transport
transport
transport
DC Check bin door open Stacking bin
BF1 Capture bin 1 full (document plate pushed fully down or sensor Stacking bin
reading blocked during last 5 plunges)
BE2 Capture bin 2 media present (reject bin) Reject bin
Escrow And Re-buncher (ERBM)(Bunch Feed variant only)

The escrow unit consists of a tape type escrow capable of accepting and holding at least 30
maximum size and thickness, conditioned checks. The escrow accept checks in sequential
order and holds them until the SCPM core module, as directed by the application, issues a
command to send the checks either to the SCPM module for further processing or to the
re-bunch unit for return to the customer. At this point the escrow will feed the checks in
reverse sequential order, one at a time as directed by the core module.
The re-bunch unit will accept a minimum of 15 maximum length and thickness conditioned
checks. Checks will be transported to the re-bunch unit either directly from the SCPM core
module or from the escrow unit. The re-bunch unit will accept individual checks, align them
at their leading edges and then when directed, transport the entire bunch back to the core
module for return to the customer.
Rear Endorse Printer

The rear endorse printer is a single line printer utilizing a dot matrix print head mounted in a
fixed position.
To allow for the future extension of the character set based on existing passbook fonts, the
endorser font is installed using a download message. A total of 72 printable ASCII
characters and the carriage return (CR) code are supported, as shown below:
??????? !"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?
@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`
The ASCII codes for lowercase alphabet characters are accepted by the endorser but will
be printed as uppercase characters. Any other ASCII character code, either not shown in
the above character set or not a valid control code, are printed as an open square bracket "
[".
Print is oriented along the length of the document at a fixed height of 30mm from the
document lower edge. The length of the endorse line is dependent upon the length of the
document with the only limitation being that no print should be located within 5mm of the
document edges. On the shortest document, 150mm, it is possible to print up to 63
standard characters. For the longest document, 225mm, the maximum character count is
101.
The default print start position is approximately 5mm from the trailing edge of the
document. Trailing space characters can be used to shift the first printable character further
from the trailing edge
Bin Module
The bin module, consisting of a stacking-type storage bin, reject bin and transport, is
located either below the main transport (P90e), at the rear of the main transport, outside
the security enclosure (P86) or above the main transport (6676)above the main transport.
It contains an independent drive system, driven and controlled from the main SCPM
module. The storage bin has a bin full sensor, whereas reject bin does not.
The storage bin can contain at least 1000 items and will maintain document orientation and
sequence, except for poor condition documents. The reject bin is a smaller gravity type bin
with a capacity of around 30. Its capacity is less if it contains severely conditioned curled or
folded documents.
Specification
Checks
The SCPM is capable of handling checks that meet the following criteria:
Length 127mm (5”) to 225 mm (8.86”)

Height 63.5mm (2.5”) to 108mm (4.25”)
Thickness 0.076mm (0.003”) to 0.12mm (0.0047”)
Weight 75 g/m2 (20lb) to 105 g/m2 (28lb)
Power Requirement
The SCPM controller board, motors, solenoids, sensors, and peripheral devices require
the following dc voltage and currents:
Quiescent Current Peak Continuous Current

+24 V - constant 750 mA 8.0 A
The +24 V supply is sourced from the ATM power supply.
USB
The SCPM USB requirement is USB 2.0.
Weight
Module Weight (kg) Weight (lbs)
Core Module 6.5 14
Short Infeed (bunch) 0.6 1.0
Feed (bunch) 2.1 4.5
ERBM 7.1 15.5
Stacking bin module 10.3 22.5
SCPM without bin module 16.3 36.0
Total SCPM (bunch feed) 26.6 59.0
Total SCPM (single feed) 19.5 43.5
TEST TOOLS
The following test documents are available to test the SCPM:
l MICR test document 484-0046074 and 484-0046075

l Test Check packet 484-0050345.
ADJUSTMENTS
Configuration
The divert gate on the vertical transport controls the direction of movement of checks from
the core module into the bin. The gate lever can be set to CPM2, CPM3 or CPM4
configuration for Personas 86, Personas 90 and 66xx ATMs respectively by fixing it in one
of three holes in the frame. The correct position for 66xx ATMs is shown below.
Diverter
Correct Diverter
Lock Position
From the System Application Main Menu, select the option Self-Service Configuration,
then select Set Device Configuration and choose Scalable Cheque Processing Module.
The following configuration options will be displayed:
Copy Module Load Files From Removable Media

User is prompted to enter a removable memory device containing CPM download files.
Any recognized download files are copied into the SCPM firmware directory, after which
an check is made to determine whether a firmware download is necessary.

Displays the SCPM version number, the Main Control Board revision number and the
version numbers of the currently downloaded Core Firmware, Main Firmware, FPGA
Configuration, Endorser Firmware, UDFD Firmware and Stacking Bin Firmware load files.
If an Escrow/Re-Bunch Module (ERBM) is present, then the ERBM Firmware version
number will also be displayed.
Display Module Information

Displays the part number and serial number (or equivalent) for each of SCPM module that
has this information available. Only the ERBM has an actual serial number, the NCR built
modules use a tracer number and build date to uniquely identify them.
Copy SCPM Trace Logs to Removable Media

Allows copying of the low-level SCPM trace log files onto a removable memory device for
return to level-2 support for problem analysis. Starting with the ScpmTrace.log file, the
applet will copy any files found in the SCPM log folder: C:\Program Files\NCR
APTRA\USB Scalable Cheque Processing Module\Logs.
Mechanical Adjustments
Infeed
The nodding nose of the infeed can be adjusted to ensure correct alignment of the feeder
and infeed track guides. Correct alignment is when the infeed and feeder track guides are
level when viewed from the side.
To make an adjustment:
1. Loosen the lock nut located on the underside of the feeder.
2. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, turn the threaded shaft in to raise the infeed or out
to lower it.
3. Tighten the lock nut to secure the shaft in the required position.
Main Control Board
Connector Module Connector Module

J1 Endorser J13 Transport solenoids/motors
J2 Stepper J14 Upper camera
J4 Stacking bin J15 Feeder solenoids/motors
J5 MICR J16 UDFD (Ultra Sonic Double Feed Detect)
J6 ERBM J17 Advance motor
J7 MEI J18 Outfeed motor
J8 Transport sensor P1 Interlock
J10 Feeder/infeed sensor P2 Power
J12 Lower camera P3 USB
INTERNAL CABLES
The schematics in this section show the pin-to-pin connections of the main internal cables
of the SCPM.
Transport Motor/Solenoids
UPR SOL
ENDMTR
J18-OUTFEEDER
TRANS SOL / MTR OUTFD MTR
LOW SOL
MICR
J5 SCPM MICR J1 MICR BOARD
Deskew/Feeder Harness
DSKVERT DSKWHOR
J15 DSK-FD J10-INFEED

FEEDMTR DSKWMTR SOL/MTR SENINFEEDSEN
J-17 ADVMTR
INFEED
FEEDSEN
Infeed - Short
SHUT CLSD SHUT OPEN TS1
INFEED
SHUT SOL
INFDSOL
JUMPERS
PRESENT
TS2a TS3a
TS2b TS3b
THCKBNCH
Infeed - Medium
SHUT CLSD SHUT OPEN TS1
INFEED
SHUT SOL
INFDSOL
JUMPER
PRESENT
ONLY
TS2a TS3a
TS2b TS3b
THCKBNCH
Stacking Bin Panel Mount

J4 - STKBIN STKBIN MNT
Stacking Bin Interface

STKBIN MNT J6-CPM_I/F
Stacking Bin Flag Sensors

EMPTY DOWN UP
J3-BIN_SENS BIN DOOR
SEN 5
TROUBLESHOOTING
Module Error States

Replacement” and “Adjustments” for detailed instructions on FRU actions.
Module State Corrective Actions

Interlock Open Push SCPM fully back into ATM.
Inspect switch or harness for damage. Switch located behind square cover beside
escrow transport release catch.
Inspect power supply for damage.
Check for damage on control boards and repair.
Otherwise, replace the SCPM.
USB Check USB connections at SCPM, hub and PC core.
Disconnected Replace cable and retest.
Control board or USB port may be faulty. Replace FRU.
Firmware Download EEPROM image again.
Download Eliminate ESD or electrical noise.
Failure Inspect USB cable for damage.
Device Try communications response again.
Communication Eliminate ESD or electrical noise.
Failure Inspect USB cable for damage.
UDFD Identify and resolve connection problem or noise source affecting serial
Communication communication.
Failure If necessary, replace main module.
Endorser Identify and resolve connection problem or noise source affecting serial
ERBM Identify and resolve connection problem or noise source affecting serial
Stacking Bin Identify and resolve connection problem or noise source affecting serial
Failure If necessary, replace storage module.

Core Module Remove foreign object, debris or jammed check from transport.
Jam
Core Module Inspect sensors and remove debris or clean dust with a dry, lint-free cloth.
Track Sensor Use Sensors diagnostic test and/or visual check to identify faulty sensor or sensor
Fault harness. If damaged, repair if possible.
Otherwise, replace the FRU.
Core Module Inspect harnessing and moving parts to identify problem.
Electro-
Mechanical
Fault
Shutter Jam Inspect the shutter mechanism.
Remove any documents present.
Inspect electrical connectors and cables.
Otherwise, replace infeed.
Infeed Jam Remove foreign object, debris or jammed check from infeed.
Infeed Track Remove debris or clean dust from infeed track senors (TS1-TS3 on bunch and TS1-
Sensor Fault TS5 on single) with a dry, lint-free cloth.
Use Sensors diagnostic test and/or visual check to identify faulty sensor or sensor
harness. If damaged repair if possible.
Otherwise, replace the infeed.
Infeed Electro- Inspect harnessing and moving parts in infeed to identify problem. Repair or replace
Mechanical infeed.
Fault
Feeder Jam Remove foreign object, debris or jammed check from the feeder.
Feeder Track Remove debris or clean dust from feeder sensors (TS4 - TS6) with a dry, lint-free
Sensor Fault cloth.
harness. If damaged, repair if possible.
Check for damage on control boards and repair if possible. Otherwise, replace the
main module.
Feeder Electro- Inspect harnessing and moving parts in the feeder to identify problem.
Mechanical Repair, or replace main module.
Fault
Endorser Replace endorser ribbon.
Ribbon
Empty/Empty
Soon

ERBM Jam Remove foreign object, debris or jammed check from re-buncher. If jam is in escrow,
remove checks using ‘Enable’ diagnostic test.
ERBM Track Remove debris or clean dust from ERBM sensors (TS12 - TS15) with a dry, lint-free
Sensor Fault cloth. Use Sensors diagnostic test and/or visual check to identify faulty sensor or
sensor harness. Repair if possible. Check for damage on control boards and repair if
possible. Otherwise, replace the bunch feed module.
ERBM Electro- Inspect harnessing and moving parts in re-buncher to identify problem. Repair, or
Mechanical replace the bunch feed module.
Fault
ERBM Off-line Inspect ERBM to locate and remove jammed check. Clean sensors and repair fault.
Check Bin Jam Remove foreign object, debris or jammed check from storage module transport.
Check Bin Track Remove debris or clean dust from storage module sensors (TS17 - TS21) with a dry,
Sensor Fault lint-free cloth.
harness . If damaged repair, or replace storage module.
Check for damage on control boards and repair/replace FRU.
Check Bin Inspect harnessing and moving parts in storage module to identify problem. Repair, or
Electo- replace the storage module.
Mechanical
Fault
Check Bin Door Close bin door. Inspect mechanism for damage. Remove debris or clean dust from
Open door closed sensor. Inspect sensor and sensor harness for damage. If damaged repair,
or replace storage module.
Capture Bin 1 Empty capture bin. If erroneous error message, clean bin full sensor, inspect sensor
Full/Full Soon and sensor harness for damage. If damaged repair, or replace storage module.
Capture Bin 2 Empty reject bin.
Full/Full Soon
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0 Diagnostics
A complete module startup is carried out in two phases, performed by two completely
separate pieces of firmware. The first phase is kernel diagnostics, FPGA configuration and
USB enumeration, then the second phase is a set of diagnostic tests which initialize the
hardware and perform a number of integrity tests to ensure module readiness.
Four LEDs mounted on the main control board indicate the success or failure of the SCPM
start-up tests, as follows:
First phase
● = LED lit
○ = LED not lit

LED Pattern Fault Description
1 2 3 4
○ ○ ○ ○ Successful start-up
1 1 1 1 Failed initialization
○ ○ ○ 1 CPU internal RAM test
○ ○ 1 ○ CPU XRAM test
○ ○ 1 1 CPU CODE execution RAM test
○ 1 ○ ○ Core EEPROM checksum test
○ 1 ○ 1 Main controlware EERPOM checksum test
○ 1 1 ○ FPGA EEPROM checksum test
○ 1 1 1 FPGA configuration
1 ○ ○ ○ Endorser controlware FLASH checksum test
1 ○ ○ 1 Stacking bin FLASH checksum test
1 ○ ○ 1 UDFD FLASH checksum test
1 ○ 1 1 ERBM communications test
1 1 ○ ○ Reserved
1 1 ○ 1 Reserved
1 1 1 ○ Waiting for USB connection
Second Phase
? = LED flashing
○ = LED not lit

1 2 3 4
○ ○ ○ ○ All tests successful
○ ○ ○ ? No interlocked +24 V
○ ○ ? ○ Track sensor fault detected
○ ○ ? ? Item present in track
○ ? ○ ○ Shutter fault detected
○ ? ○ ? Infeed fault detected
○ ? ? ○ Transport step motor failure
○ ? ? ? MICR fault detected
? ○ ○ ○ Image system fault detected

1 2 3 4
? ○ ○ ? EPM fault detected (endorser)
? ○ ? ○ ERBM fault detected
? ○ ? ? UDFD fault detected (ultrasonic double feed detect)
? ? ○ ○ SBM fault detected (stacking bin)
? ? ○ ? SCPM fault detected (core module)
Device Self Test

The SCPM device self test can be accessed via Device Self Tests on the System
Application Main Menu.
Bunch Feed with Escrow Variant

1. Clears the device and performs an integrity check. If this is unsuccessful, returns
status of ‘Fail’.
2. Prompts the user to insert a minimum of 4 items to test all document paths, and a
maximum of 30. If no media is detected within the 15 second time limit, disables the
device and terminates the test with status of ‘Not Completed’.
3. Scans all media and moves it to the escrow.
4. Displays the front image and MICR codeline of each item scanned for 1 second.
5. Ejects the last item entered back to the user.
6. Empties the escrow by moving each item in turn as follows:
l move one item to rebunch mechanism
l endorse next item with test pattern, re-image and move to stacking bin
l display endorsed back image of last item and endorse next item and move to reject
bin.
l repeat steps until escrow is empty.
7. Returns items that were moved to rebuncher to the user.

8. Displays a summary screen for 2 seconds indicating how many items were ejected,
captured in each bin or bunch returned.
Single Feed
2. Prompts the user to enter an item. If no media is detected with the 15 second time
limit, the disables the device and terminates the test with status of ‘Not Completed’.
3. Displays the front image and MICR code line for 5 seconds. When run on an EOP
only the MICR code line is displayed.
4. Displays the rear image for 5 seconds. When run on an EOP, this step is not
performed.
5. The rear of the item is endorsed with a test pattern.
6. Issues an Eject command and prompts the user to take the item. If the item is not
taken within the 15 second time limit, cancels the Eject command and captures the
document in the stacking bin.
Device Diagnostic Tests

The following diagnostics tests for the SCPM can be accessed via Device Diagnostics on
the System Application Main Menu.
Note: Tests that can be looped are indicated by an asterisk (*).
Enable
The behaviour of the test depends on the SCPM hardware configuration:
Bunch Feed
The user is prompted to insert a bunch of up to 30 items. If media is entered within 15
seconds, all items entered are MICR read, imaged and moved into escrow. If no is media
entered within the time limit, the device is disabled, the message ‘No media entered’ is
Single Feed
The user is prompted to insert a single item. If media is entered within 15 seconds, it is
scanned and staged within the module. If no is media entered within the time limit, the
device is disabled, the message ‘No media entered’ is displayed and a Not Complete status
is returned.
For all configurations

If the media is successfully placed in escrow or staged then a Complete status is returned.
If an item jams, the message ‘Unable To Enable’ is displayed and a Not Complete status is
returned.
Eject
Any items in the feeder, core module or rebunch mechanism are returned to the user, in
that order. As each item or bunch reaches the shutter opening a prompt is displayed
indicating where the media came from and asking the user to remove it. If the media is
taken, the prompt is removed and a ‘Media Taken’ message is displayed. This media
present and take cycle continues until all media has been returned to the user. Once all
media is ejected and removed a Complete status is returned.
If the media is not taken within 15 seconds, the prompt is removed and the document is
retracted far enough into the infeed, to allow the shutter to close. The message ‘Media Not
Taken’ is displayed and a Not Complete status is returned.
If at the start of the test there is no document present in the transport, a message is
displayed indicating ‘No document present’ and a Not Complete status is returned.
Endorse, Image and Capture

A test string (alphabet in capitals) is printed on the rear of the current document. The item
will then be imaged and then moved into Capture Bin 1.
For an SCPM without escrow, the current item will be staged in the track. If there is an
escrow then the current item will be the next item moved out of escrow.
If the item is successfully placed into the bin then a Complete status is returned.
If the document jams during the capture, the message ‘Unable To Capture’ is displayed
and a Not Complete status is returned.
If there is no document present the message ‘No document present’ is displayed and a Not
Complete status is returned.
Capture Bin 1
The current item is moved into Capture Bin 1 (stacking bin). For an SCPM without escrow,
the current item will be staged in the track. If there is an escrow then the current item will be
the next item moved out of escrow.
If the document jams during the capture, a message is displayed indicating ‘Unable To
Capture’ and a Not Complete status is returned.
If there is no document present a message is displayed indicating ‘No Document Present’

Capture Bin 2
The current item is moved into Capture Bin 2 (reject bin). For an SCPM without escrow,
the current item will be staged in the track. If there is an escrow then the current item will be
the next item moved out of escrow.
If the document jams during the capture, the message ‘Unable To Capture’ is displayed
If there is no document present the message ‘No Document Present’ is displayed and a
Rebunch
This test is only available on the bunch variant.
One item is transported from escrow to the rebunch mechanism. If the item is successfully
placed into the rebunch mechanism then a Complete status is returned.
If the item jams, the message ‘Unable To Rebunch’ is displayed and a Not Complete status
is returned.
If there is no media in escrow the message ‘No Document Present’ is displayed and a Not
Clear
Runs the transport to make sure it is clear of documents. Any items found in the transport
are moved to Capture Bin 2 if it is configured, otherwise items are moved to Capture Bin 1.
After the transport has been run, if all sensors are clear, the message ‘Device Clear’ is
displayed and a Complete status is returned. Otherwise the message ‘Device Jammed’ is
If the SCPM is configured with an ERBM the completion message will include the status of
Escrow and the Rebunch mechanism. Each will be reported as either Empty or Not Empty.
Display Front Image

Opens a window displaying the most recent front image taken. A key press terminates the
test. If no front image has been taken the message “No Image To Display” message is
displayed.
Display Back Image

Opens a window displaying the most recent front image taken. A key press terminates the
test. If no front image has been taken the message “No Image To Display” message is
displayed.
Sensors *
Displays the current state of the shutter and all track sensors.
Shutter *
Causes the shutter to open and close once.
Feeder Cycle *
This test is only on the bunch feed variant.
If no checks are detected in the transport, sensors are calibrated and all motors are
exercised. Any errors detected during the test will be reported.
Deskew Cycle *
This test exercises the de-skew to allow observation of the mechanism in operation, it does
not diagnose problems or report errors.
First the DC motor is activated, then after 1 second both solenoids are activated. After
another second the motor is turned off and both solenoids are deactivated.
Endorser Cycle *
This test exercises the endorser motors to allow observation of the mechanism in
operation, it does not diagnose problems or report errors.
The endorser ribbon motor will be run continuously during the 3-second test cycle.
Solenoid *
This test exercises the solenoid to allow observation of the mechanism in operation, it does
This test will sequentially activate and deactivate any solenoids within the SCPM device.
Transport Motor *
This test exercises the transport to allow observation of the mechanism in operation, it does
This test causes all the motors associated with the infeed, feeder and main transport to
cycle on and off in alternating directions. The motors will run in one direction for 2 seconds
stop for 1 second and the run in the opposite direction for 2 seconds. When the cycle is
completed all motors and solenoids are powered off.
Stacking Bin Integrity *

This test calibrates sensors, exercises the transport and performs a full bin plunge cycle.
Any errors detected during the test will be reported.
Escrow/Rebunch Integrity *
This test is only available on the bunch variant.
The test calibrates sensors and exercises all motors. Any errors detected during the test
will be reported.
Device Integrity *
This test performs a full integrity test of all modules in the SCPM, including a full plunge
cycle on the stacking bin. It does not perform a test transaction and no check will be
entered. Any errors detected during the test will be reported.
Run to Run *
The command sequence included in the Run to Run test depends on the SCPM hardware
configuration.
Multi-Cheque with Escrow:

l Enable (a bunch of up to 30 items can be entered)
l Repeat
l Endorse, Image and Capture
l Display Back Image
until the escrow is empty.
Single Cheque:
l Enable
l Display Back Image

l Endorse, Image and Capture
LEVEL 3 DIAGNOSTICS
S_Data
The S_DATA returned for the SCPM are:
S_DATA Meaning
02 WARNING (May require attention, continue to use and log error information)
03 SUSPEND (Do not use device for application-defined time period)
Tallies
diagnostic and normal use. The SCPM tallies are as follows:
NUM DOCS Number of checks entered (Enable count) 0

TRANFAIL Number of inconvenience faults 1
TRANSACT Number of checks processed successfully 2
INVMEDIA Number of invalid media detections 3
DBL FEED Number of double feed detections 4
TRAN CLR Number of checks cleared from transport to a bin (using Clear command) 5
TAKEN Number of checks returned (Taken count) 6
BIN 1 Number of checks captured to bin 1 7
SHUT OPS Number of shutter operations 10
EN CHARS Number of endorser characters printed 11
PRN FAIL Number of endorsement printer faults 12
IMG FAIL Number of image processing failures 13
DSKWFAIL Number of de-skew failures 14
MICRFAIL Number of MICR reader failures 15
TJ INFD Number of jams at in-feed 16
TJ DSKEW Number of jams at de-skew 17

TJ CAM Number of jams at camera 18
TJ ENDRS Number of jams at endorser 19
TJ NOSEN Number of jams with no track sensors blocked 20
TJ OUTFD Number of jams at out-feed 21
TJ MICR Number of jams at MICR 22
FATALSOH Number of out-of-service faults 23
COMMSERR Number of comms errors 24
USBRESET Number of USB resets 25
COMSTOUT Number of comms timeouts 26
SHUTJAMO Number of shutter open jams 27
SHUTJAMC Number of shutter closed jams 28
STRTDATE Start date for tally counts 29
TJ SBIN Number of jams at stacking bin 30
SBN1FAIL Number of stacking bin-1 failures 31
SBN3FAIL Number of stacking bin-3 failures 32
ERROR CODES
M_Status and M_Data
Refer to the NCR publication B006-6273, 56XX/Personas Self-Service Diagnostic Status
Code Notebook - Volume 2 for information on M_STATUS and M_DATA codes.

Units of the SCPM.
The FRUs are:
l Bin module
l Infeed
l Feeder
l ERBM
l Core module.
To remove any FRU apart from the bin module, the SCPM must first be removed from the
ATM. Remove the bin module to reduce the weight of the SCPM prior to removing it from
the ATM.
Once out of the ATM, lay the SCPM on its side, so that the belts and gears are underneath
and the jam clearance access points are facing upwards.
When removing and replacing the SCPM in a 6632 with restricted side or rear access, a
10mm socket with at least 30 mm reach will be required to access the rear mounting tray
screw.
Bin Module
To remove the bin module from the SCPM:
1. Disconnect the stacking bin harness (STK BIN MNT) from the connector on the rear
of the SCPM.
Note: Once disconnected, the harness should be tucked inside the plastic cover on
the back of the bin, to avoid trapping and damaging the harness when the bin
assembly is re-fitted to the SCPM.
2. Remove the two M6 screws and one M4 screw securing the bin module to the
baseplate, then remove the bin.
When re-fitting the bin, check that it is aligned to the core module correctly: it should mesh
with the transport track guide alignment fingers.
Infeed (Bunch)
To remove the infeed from the SCPM:
1. Disconnect the infeed harnessing on the right-hand side of the infeed.
2. Open feeder top guide.

3. Tilt infeed up from the front until the keyhole on the left-hand side lines up with the
pin.
4. Slide the infeed off the pin.
When re-fitting the in-feed, check that it is aligned to the feeder correctly: the infeed and the
feeder track guides should be level when viewed from the side.
Feeder
To remove the feeder from the SCPM:
1. Remove the infeed and ERBM as described in this section.

2. Disconnect the feeder harnessing from the right-hand side of the feeder.
3. Remove the two M6 screws securing the feeder to the baseplate and remove the
feeder.
ERBM
To remove the ERBM from the SCPM:
1. Disconnect the ERBM harnessing from the board.
2. Remove the two M6 screws securing the ERBM to the baseplate.
3. Remove the slotted ERBM support post, then remove the ERBM from the
baseplate.
Core Module
The core module is what remains, including the baseplate, when all the other FRUs have
been removed.
BAD ACTOR CHECKLIST AND ALIGNMENT

INSTRUCTIONS
Introduction
These checklists cover areas that are known to give problems with SCPM in 6632, 6634,
and 6638 units. These checklists also describe the recommended resolution and must be
read in sequence.
Note: Power down the ATM before removing or replacing any FRU. Restore power to the
ATM at a suitable point.
Reference Documents
Bulletin 2009-0021: 6 Point Checklist for SCPM and BNA Shutter Alignment
B006-6589-C000: NCR SelfServ 32 Installation Guide
B006-6585-C000: NCR SelfServ 32 ATM Site Preparation
B006-6584-B000: NCR SelfServ 34 Installation Guide
B006-6586-C000: NCR SelfServ 34 ATM Site Preparation
B006-6609-E000: NCR SelfServ 38 Installation Guide
B006-6592-D000: NCR SelfServ 38 ATM Site Preparation
Tools Required
l USB Keyboard
l 7 mm Nut Driver
l 10 mm Nut Driver
l 10mm open ended spanner
l 10mm socket and racket wrench (250mm long)
l #2 Flat blade screwdriver
l #2 Posidrive screwdriver
l Flashlight
l Service USB Dongle to enter System Application (Diagnostics)
l 484-0050345 PACKET-TEST CHECK 1 PACKET=560
l 484-9000989 DECK-TEST
l Set square with at least a 300 mm (12 in.) length blade and a maximum handle length
of 190 mm (7.5 in.) - for the 6638 only
6632 and 6634 Checklist and Alignment Instructions

The following procedures apply to SCPMs fitted to 6632 and 6634 units. Perform the
following to determine the areas that give problems in SCPM for the 6632 and 6634.
1. Revision Level of SCPM FRUs

Check the 10 digit number on each of the SCPM FRUs to determine if FRO activity is
carried out.
If the FRU part numbers do not correspond to items in the table below, continue with the
adjustments as described in this document. Order the correct FRUs and retain this
document for reference when installing them. The part numbers should be as listed below
in the table or a higher part number
6632 FRU Part Numbers:
Assembly - SCPM Core Module 484-0100184

Assembly - SCPM Bunch Feed Module 484-0100185
Assembly - SCPM Short Infeed 484-0100083

Assembly - SCPM Mid Infeed 484-0100084
Assembly - SCPM LongInfeed 484-0100085
Location of Part Numbers:
Bunch Feeder Infeed
Transport
2. Log Book and Devlogs

If there is a log book at the ATM, check its history for guidance regarding any SCPM faults
that have occurred.
Pull the hardware devlogs and provide them to the RTSS or call initiator.
3. SCPM Tray
Check that the correct version of SCPM tray is fitted. This can be identified by the bright
orange handle.
4. SCPM Racking
Make sure the SCPM racks in and out smoothly with no jamming. If this is not the case,
identify the cause and correct it.
5. SCPM In-feed Transport Alignment

Check that the in-feed transport on the SCPM is horizontal to the main SCPM device with
the device racked out of the product. If required, adjust the in-feed transport until it is
horizontal to the main SCPM device.
The nodding nose of the in-feed can be adjusted to ensure correct alignment of the feeder
and in-feed track guides. Correct alignment is achieved when the in-feed and feeder track
guides are level when viewed from the side.
To make an adjustment, follow these steps:

2. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, turn the threaded shaft in or out as required.
6. SCPM In-feed Transport Engagement

Check that when the SCPM is racked home or fascia closed that the pin on the in-feed is
correctly picked up by the alignment bracket. If this is not the case, re-align the in-feed
transport as described in the previous section. The image below shows the pin correctly
located.
7. Fascia Alignment (6632 only)

Check that the fascia closes properly. Look closely at the way the fascia closes onto the
shutter area. If the fascia applies pressure to the infeed shutter area this might cause
shutter jam/alignment problems.
8. Shutter Test
Perform the tests as detailed in the '6 Point Checklist for SCPM and BNA Shutter
Alignment - Bulletin 2009-0021' with emphasis on those listed below.
1. With the SCPM racked out, override the SCPM interlock.

2. Turn on the SCPM shutter test by selecting Page Down (9), Loop On then Shutter
(5). Ensure that the shutter opens and closes. The clicking as the shutter opens and
closes will be clearly audible. Stop the test after 5 cycles.
3. Rack home the SCPM and close the fascia. Make sure the fascia is properly locked.
closes will be clearly audible.
5. Stop the this test after 5 cycles, rack the SCPM fully out and then rack it home and
carryout the above shutter test again for 5 cycles. If all is well move to next section.
6. If the shutter should fail this test, then adjust the SCPM mounting away from the
fascia in 0.5 mm increments until the shutter test passes (refer to SCPM Mounting
Adjustment section).
9. SCPM Mounting Tray Adjustment

If required in the shutter test, the position of the SCPM mounting tray can be adjusted.
Four hex headed screws are used to secure the SCPM mounting tray to the top of the safe.
Two are located at the rear of the mounting tray and two are located at the front.
To access the screws, follow these steps:
1. Remove the side panel nearest to the SCPM.

2. If the side panel cannot be removed, the furthest securing screws can be reached
using a 1/2in drive socket wrench with a reach of 10 inches or more.
3. For rear access units, release from the rear and remove the display and bezel from
the front of the unit.
Adjustment Procedure
1. Using a pen, mark the top of the safe with the current position of the tray.
2. Partially rack out the SCPM module and slacken the furthest two securing screws.
3. Fully rack the SCPM back into the unit and make sure it is latched. Slacken the
nearest two securing screws.
CAUTION
Do not remove the screws.
Removing the screws will allow the SCPM module to drop to the floor, causing injury or
damage to the module.
1. For a rear access unit, move the tray back 0.5 mm relative to the line made in step
one. For a front access unit, move the tray in 0.5 mm relative to the line made in step
one.
2. Tighten the nearest two securing screws (without unlatching the SCPM). Partially
rack out the SCPM and tighten the furthest securing screws.
3. Rack the SCPM home, make sure it is latched and continue with the shutter test.
Completing the Adjustment Procedure

1. After the shutter test is complete, make sure all the screws are tightened.
2. Re-mark the position of the tray on top of the safe. This will serve as reference in
future to confirm that the device has not changed position.
3. Replace any parts removed from the unit.
Post Adjustment Testing

As verification of the above procedure the following conditioned media tests should be
carried out.
10. Media Preparation and Testing

Carry out a Conditioned Media Test as described in the bulletin '6 Point Checklist for
SCPM and BNA Shutter Alignment - Bulletin 2009-0021'.
If any of the tests should fail, adjust the SCPM mounting away from the fascia in 0.5mm
increments until the test passes.
11. Run to Run Test

Carry out a Multiple Check Test as described in the bulletin '6 Point Checklist for SCPM
and BNA Shutter Alignment - Bulletin 2009-0021'.
12. Camera Test

Test Procedure. Use SYSApp diagnostics to verify the cameras are working properly.
Ensure the images are verified by running the display front and display rear images from
the customer display. Other than cleaning any dust off of the camera lens and verifying the
cables are properly seated, there are no adjustments for camera quality or functionality. If a
good image can not be obtained, the SCPM Core Module must be replaced.
Note: The only approved cleaning materials for the SCPM camera are the following:
l Canned air, 10 oz.

Systemedia Stock No. 526487
l Cleaning swab, 6 inch flat plastic with felt cleaning area.

Systemedia Stock No. 523396, NCR Part No. 484-051295
Transfer control back and return to the ATM.
13. Completing the Adjustment Procedure

1. Ensure that all screws are tightened.
2. Replace any part removed from the unit.
3. Clear all errors. Using the CE USB Diagnostic Dongle, access SysApp.
4. Select Device Status (5) and verify any errors.
5. If there are errors select the option "clear all" For each device that had errors the
device self test will be performed.
6. For the SCPM is there were errors the self test will ask for 4 documents to be
entered and then 2 will be binned and 2 will be returned.
7. If this passes successfully the errors will no longer be reported in the device status
list.
8. Exit SysApp.
9. As appropriate, follow the Bank's procedure for verifying operation before returning
to normal use. ( such as resetting the "Check-In" retract count and reset to "0" )
10. Fill out the reporting form in the next section and submit.
Checklist Summary
Once checks have been carried out, complete the following checklist and return to RTSS,
FSM or whoever initiated this call. Tick box if check completed satisfactorily or cross if
check not completed with reasons or issues experienced.
Checklist Check or Cross

1. Revision levels of SCPM FRUs confirmed as meeting those of FRO
2. Log book history checked
3. SCPM tray version checked
4. SCPM racking checked
5. SCPM in-feed transport alignment checked and adjusted as necessary
6. SCPM in-feed transport engagement checked and adjusted as necessary
7. Fascia alignment checked and adjusted as necessary (6632 only)
8. Shutter test successfully completed
9. Conditioned media test successfully completed
10. Run to run test completed successfully
11. Camera tested successfully
12. Completing the adjustment procedure
6638 Checklist and Alignment Instructions

The following procedures apply to SCPMs fitted to 6638 units. Perform the following to
determine the areas that give problems in SCPM for the 6638.
1. Revision Level of SCPM FRUs

Check the 10 digit number on each of the SCPM FRUs to determine if FRO activity is
carried out.
If the FRU part numbers do not correspond to items in the table below, continue with the
adjustments as described in this document. Order the correct FRUs and retain this
document for reference when installing them. The part numbers should be as listed below
in the table or a higher part number

Location of Part Numbers:
Bunch Feeder Infeed
Transport
2. Log Book and Devlogs

If there is a log book at the ATM, check its history for guidance regarding any SCPM faults
that have occurred.
Pull the hardware devlogs and provide them to the RTSS or call initiator.
3. General Environment
Inspect and confirm that all power, communication and alarm cables do not interfere with
the operation or racking of the SCPM module. If they do, then correct in accordance with
the revised 'NCR SelfServ 38 Installation Guide' - B006-6609-E000. (Rev C or later)
Make sure any swarf or residue from the installation process has been removed from the
safe enclosure and sidebox.
4. Inner Fascia Gasket

Make sure the gasket around the inner fascia, which the outer fascia closes against, is
present. The gasket must be fitted with the join at the top to prevent moisture ingress. If it
isn't, remove the gasket and re-fit correctly.
5. Screws on LHS of SCPM

Make sure the metalwork on the LHS of the SCPM does not foul on the inner fascia gasket
when racking. If the combi-head screws are fouling, then change the screws to
countersunk head.
6. SCPM Tray
Check that the correct version of SCPM tray is fitted. This can be identified by the bright
orange handle, as shown below.
7. Outer Fascia Opening and Closing

The outer fascia should close and latch at both sides by applying pressure in the centre of
the fascia, near the lock.
1. Check the inner fascia sits correctly within the aperture in the outer fascia. As the
outer fascia is closed it should not overly "pull" on the rubber gasket. If required,
adjust the height of the inner fascia by loosening the M6 nuts retaining the tray to its
slides and fit a spacer (445-0720240) to the front slide stud on both sides.
(Underside of Tray)
2. Make sure the rubber fascia "bump stops" on the lower edge of the fascia are set
properly to achieve:
l Fascia closing securely with minimum force.
l Clearance of SCPM shutter when the fascia is closed.
Screw the "bump stops" inwards so that the outer fascia closes correctly with minimal
force. Then adjust the three "bump stops" outwards until any excessive gap between inner
and outer fascia is removed. A small gap is permissible as long as the gasket is being
compressed. You should not be able to easily force a credit card into gap between inner
and outer fascia along bottom edge.
3. Check the position and operation of the latch mechanism on the left and right side of
the fascia. If required, loosen the 2 x M6 bolts securing the fascia latches and adjust
the position downwards, away from the fascia. Re-tighten the M6 bolts and re-check
the fascia closing operation.
4. Check the BNA engages properly with fascia insert and alignment bracket. If the
bracket is bent or damaged, replace the bracket with part 445-0712898 or later.
8. Sidebox Squareness Relative to the Safe

1. Before commencing any measurements of the ATM, check that the installation
guidelines have been adhered to with regard to levelling of the safe, with load
bearing shims only under the safe if required.
Also, ensure that the channel which forms the base of the sidebox on the side of the
safe has been secured to the plinth with the appropriate fixings. If they are not
present then obtain and fit them as detailed in the Installation Guidelines.
2. Position the set square as shown below. You will find that due to the bend radius of
the channel that you are unable to position the set square in the optimum manner.
Ensure that the left hand side of it is not sitting on the bend; also check that the
handle is sitting flush on the base of the sidebox and tight against the front of it.
(Ensure no debris is between set square and base of the sidebox).
It will help you if the set square handle is secured in place using Blue-Tack, or
similar, while you take the dimensions.
It may also help if the set square is left in position while the levelling of the ATM is
carried out to give a guide as to when a level state has been achieved.
Note: On more recent units the set square will need to be positioned on top of the
front edge rather than the base of the sidebox due to engineering changes.
3. Using the ruler, measure the distance from the safe wall to the top edge of the set
square blade as shown below and take a note of this dimension.
4. Take another measurement from the safe wall to the bottom of the set square blade
as shown below and take a note of this dimension.
5. If the dimensions taken in steps 3 & 4 are identical, then the ATM has been installed
correctly and you should proceed to section 4 (SCPM In-feed Transport Alignment),
otherwise continue with steps 6 to 11.
6. Prior to carrying out the following adjustments, the resident securing bolts must be
released sufficiently enough to allow the adjustments to be made without causing
any further damage to the ATM.
If you require a crowbar to aid the insertion of the shims, take care when using it on
the sidebox side of the ATM.
7. If the dimensions taken in steps 3 & 4 vary in the following manner, then take the
appropriate remedial action required.
l The top dimension is greater than the bottom dimension.
This indicates that, whilst the safe may be level, the sidebox is leaning away from the
safe - especially if it is bolted down hard. The right hand side of the sidebox probably
requires raising with shims to make the two measurements identical. Refer to the
Installation Guide for assistance.
l The top dimension is less than the base dimension.
This may indicate that the appropriate shims were not installed in the correct position
(the right hand corners of the ATM safe). Refer to the Installation Guide for
assistance.
8. After making the appropriate adjustment, use the set square to verify that any
adjustments made have eliminated the problem.
9. Re-tighten the security bolts loosened prior to the adjustments, taking care that the
bolts located in the channel are not over tightened.
10. Re-check that the sidebox is still in the correct position.
11. Make sure that any of the sealant that was removed to assist the insertion of the
shims is repaired.
9. SCPM In-feed Transport Alignment

Check that the in-feed transport on the SCPM is horizontal to the main SCPM device with
the device racked out of the product. If required, adjust the in-feed transport until it is
horizontal to the main SCPM device.
The nodding nose of the in-feed can be adjusted to ensure correct alignment of the feeder
and in-feed track guides. Correct alignment is achieved when the in-feed and feeder track
guides are level when viewed from the side.
To make an adjustment, follow these steps:

2. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, turn the threaded shaft in or out as required.
10. SCPM In-feed Transport Engagement

Check that when the SCPM is racked home or fascia closed that the pin on the in-feed is
correctly picked up by the alignment bracket. If this is not the case, re-align the in-feed
transport as described in the previous section. The image below shows the pin correctly
located.
11. Shutter Test

Perform the tests as detailed in the '6 Point Checklist for SCPM and BNA Shutter
Alignment - Bulletin 2009-0021' with emphasis on those listed below.
1. With the SCPM racked out, override the SCPM interlock.

closes will be clearly audible. Stop the test after 5 cycles.
3. Rack home the SCPM and close the fascia. Make sure the fascia is properly locked.
closes will be clearly audible.
5. Stop the this test after 5 cycles, rack the SCPM fully out and then rack it home and
carryout the above shutter test again for 5 cycles. If all is well move to next section.
6. If the shutter should fail this test, then adjust the SCPM mounting away from the
fascia in 0.5 mm increments until the shutter test passes (refer to SCPM Mounting
Tray Adjustment section in the 6632 and 6634 Checklist).
Post Adjustment Testing

As verification of the above procedure the following conditioned media tests should be
carried out.
12. Media Preparation and Testing

Carry out a Conditioned Media Test as described in the bulletin '6 Point Checklist for
SCPM and BNA Shutter Alignment - Bulletin 2009-0021'.
If any of the tests should fail, adjust the SCPM mounting away from the fascia in 0.5mm
increments until the test passes.
13. Run to Run Test

Carry out a Multiple Check Test as described in the bulletin '6 Point Checklist for SCPM
and BNA Shutter Alignment - Bulletin 2009-0021'.
14. Camera Test

Test Procedure. Use SYSApp diagnostics to verify the cameras are working properly.
Ensure the images are verified by running the display front and display rear images from
the customer display. Other than cleaning any dust off of the camera lens and verifying the
cables are properly seated, there are no adjustments for camera quality or functionality. If
good image can not be obtained, the SCPM Core Module must be replaced.
Note: The only approved cleaning materials for the SCPM camera are the following:
l Canned air, 10 oz.

Systemedia Stock No. 526487
l Cleaning swab, 6 inch flat plastic with felt cleaning area.
Systemedia Stock No. 523396, NCR Part No. 484-051295
Transfer control back and return to the ATM.
15. Completing the Adjustment Procedure

1. Ensure that all screws are tightened.
2. Replace any part removed from the unit.
3. Clear all errors. Using the CE USB Diagnostic Dongle, access SysApp.
4. Select Device Status (5) and verify any errors.
5. If there are errors select the option "clear all" For each device that had errors the
device self test will be performed.
6. For the SCPM is there were errors the self test will ask for 4 documents to be
entered and then 2 will be binned and 2 will be returned.
7. If this passes successfully the errors will no longer be reported in the device status
list.
8. Exit SysApp.
9. As appropriate, follow the Bank's procedure for verifying operation before returning
to normal use. ( such as resetting the "Check-In" retract count and reset to "0" )
10. Fill out the reporting form in the next section and submit.
Checklist Summary
Once checks have been carried out, complete the following checklist and return to RTSS,
FSM or whoever initiated this call. Tick box if check completed satisfactorily or cross if
check not completed with reasons or issues experienced.

1. Revision levels of SCPM FRUs confirmed as meeting those of FRO
2. Log book history checked
3. General environment checked
4. Inner fascia gasket checked and re-fitted if necessary
5. SCPM side screws checked and replaced if necessary
6. SCPM tray checked

7. Outer fascia opening and closing checked
8. Sidebox squareness checked and adjusted as necessary
9. SCPM in-feed transport alignment checked and adjusted as necessary
10. SCPM in-feed transport engagement checked and adjusted as necessary
11. Shutter test successfully completed
12. Conditioned media test successfully completed
13. Run to run test completed successfully
14. Camera tested successfully
15. Completing the adjustment procedure
REVISION

SCALABLE DEPOSIT MODULE (SDM)
INTRODUCTION
The Scalable Deposit Module (SDM) is a transport and camera system that allows cash
and check items to be accepted, imaged for purposes of cash recognition or check image
exchange and held in escrow for application validation.
The SDM will accept bunches of up to fifty mixed cash and check items. It includes an
Escrow and Re-bunch Module (ERBM) capable of storing and returning all inserted items
in a single bunch.
Note: The bunch maximum of fifty items can be reduced via the customer application.
The SDM reads the Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR) code-line of a check and
endorses the back of the check.
B A
IBVM C
or DVM I
Infeed
Feeder
D
Ink
ribbon
ERBM
Core
module
L
Cheque
bin Cash Bin
CBM
= Fault Indicator Light

Flashing = jam or bin full
Constant = latch open
DESCRIPTION
The SDM consists of the following functional areas:
l Security Shutter
l Infeed
l Core Module
l Bunch Feeder
l Double Feed Detect
l De-skew Mechanism
l Thick Item Detect
l MICR Reader
l Endorser
l Bill Validator Module:

l Imaging and Bill Validation Module (IBVM) or
l Deposit Validation Module (DVM)
l Escrow and Re-bunch Module ( ERBM)

l Capture Bin module (CBM)
l Transport System
l Fuse
l Status Indicators
Security Shutter
The security shutter is attached to the ATM and is directly controlled and driven by the
SDM. Sensors indicate whether the shutter is open or closed. The shutter will close after all
items have been transported inside the device.
Infeed
The infeed accepts a bundle of up to fifty mixed cash or check items then transports it, as a
bunch, from the security opening of the ATM to the bunch feeder.
There are four different infeed lengths depending on ATM.
l Short infeed - 6632 Rear Access

l Mid-short infeed - 6632 Front Access, 6638
l Mid-long infeed - 6634 Short Sleeve
l Long infeed - 6634 Long Sleeve
Core Module
Bunch Feeder
The bunch feeder takes the items from the infeed and separates them via the separation
rollers. Items are then individually fed to the de-skew mechanism for alignment. If the
transaction is cancelled, or a feed jam occurs, the bunch feeder will return any un-
separated media back to the customer through the security opening.
Double Feed Detect

An ultrasonic double feed detect (UDFD) sensor is located immediately after the
separation rollers. Double items are reversed back through the separation rollers and an
attempt made to separate again. If separation fails the items are returned to the customer.
De-skew Mechanism
The de-skew mechanism aligns the bottom edge of the item with a reference surface to
ensure that the total skew does not exceed the requirements for correct MICR reading and
cash and check recognition.
Thick Item Detect

An optical track sensor, downstream of the UDFD sensor, detects excessively thick items
that could jam in the transport. If a thick item is detected it is returned to the customer under
application control. If false item too thick errors are being reported and the cheques have a
carbonized band which is aligned with the sensor, try rotating the cheque 180o then re-
inserting.
MICR Reader
The MICR Reader is located immediately after the de-skew mechanism. The item is driven
past the MICR head with its MICR band in contact with the head. The captured data is sent
to the host ATM, as it is being captured, via a dedicated USB stream pipe. MICR
recognition is performed during processing by software in the ATM’s PC core.
The MICR read scan position is shown in the diagram below:
Document
14.27 mm
1.57 mm
MICR Band
Endorser
The endorser is a single line printer utilizing a dot matrix print head mounted in a fixed
position. To allow for the future extension of the character set the endorser font is installed
using a download message. A total of 72 printable ASCII characters and the carriage
return (CR) code are supported, as shown below:
??????? !"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?
@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`
The ASCII codes for lower case alphabet characters are accepted by the endorser but will
be printed as upper case characters. Any other ASCII character code, either not shown in
the above character set or not a valid control code, are printed as an open square bracket "
[".
Print is oriented along the length of the item at a fixed height of 28 mm from the item lower
edge. The length of the endorse line is dependent upon the length of the item with the only
limitation being that no print should be located within 5 mm of the item edges. On the
shortest item, 150 mm, it is possible to print up to 63 standard characters. For the longest
item, 225 mm, the maximum character count is 101.
The default print start position is approximately 5 mm from the trailing edge of the item.
Trailing space characters can be used to shift the first printable character further from the
trailing edge
Bill Validator (IBVM or DVM)

The bill validator scans the front and back of an item to categorize items as non-cash,
counterfeit, suspect or genuine. Data captured is compared to templates installed on the
device to verify the validity of the item. The template data supports note definitions covering
currencies and note denominations for multiple countries (up to 128 note definitions on the
IBVM and 255 on the DVM).
Later SDMs may have the DVM (deposit validation module) variant of bill validator but
IBVM is also used as a general term for bill validator. The DVM variant has a different
sensor layout but otherwise performs the same functions and is opened and removed in
the same way as the original IBVM.
IBVM XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX DVM
Escrow and Re-Bunch Module (ERBM)

Escrow
The escrow unit consists of a tape type escrow capable of accepting and holding at least 50
maximum size and thickness, conditioned checks or currency notes. Items are accepted in
sequential order and held until the core module, as directed by the application, issues a
command to either send the items for further processing, or to the re-buncher for return to
the customer. At this point the escrow will feed the items in reverse sequential order, one at
a time as directed by the core module.
Re-buncher
Items will be transported to the re-buncher either directly from the core module or from the
escrow unit. The re-buncher will accept individual items, align them at their leading edges
and then when directed, transport the entire bunch back to the core module for return to the
customer.
Capture Bin Module (CBM)

The Capture Bin Module (CBM) module is located below the core module. It contains an
independent drive system, driven and controlled from the core module. There is one large
capacity bin for checks and one for cash. In addition there are two smaller reject bins.
The large capacity check bin holds at least 1600 items and maintains item orientation and
sequence. The large capacity cash bin holds at least 2000 items and will maintain item
orientation and sequence, except for poor condition items. Check and Cash bins each have
a bin full sensor.
The reject bins are used for either cash or check. The reject bins are smaller gravity type
bins with a capacity of around 100 items. Capacity is less if items are in poor condition,
severely curled or folded. Reject bins have an item present sensor but no bin full sensor.
Transport System
The transport is a bi-directional system, which transports items both to, and from, the
processing modules and into the reject or capture bins. The transport system can also
return items to the customer, prior to being sent to the storage bins.
The ERBM part of the transport system can retain all items after imaging and recognition,
including MICR reading, while the transaction is being approved or rejected by the
application/customer.
Upon acceptance, or rejection, of the transaction items are transported back to the core
module transport for further processing and storage or return to the customer. Items being
returned from escrow are collected in the re-buncher and returned to the customer as a
single bunch. A maximum of 50 items can be returned in a single bunch.
Fuse
The SDM High to Low Power cable has an in-line 5A Slo Blo fuse. Refer to the Product
Cabling section of this manual for specific ATM harness details.
Status Indicators
The panel of status indicator LEDs fitted to the SDM shows the overall status of the module
as follows:
l Green light - normal operation

l Yellow light - bin nearly full or endorser ribbon low
l Green and yellow lights flashing alternately - bill validator template download in
progress. This can take several minutes to complete.
CAUTION
Do not reset or power down the ATM until the download is
complete.
l Red light - jam or bin full. The exact location of the jam will also be indicated by the
individual status indicators located in each area of the SDM.
Item Paths
Item Path - Accepted Items
De-skew Feeder
Infeed
IBVM
Cameras
CORE Re-buncher
MICR MODULE ERBM
Read
Head Endorser
Escrow
CBM
Reject Bin 2
Reject Bin 1
Cheque Bin Cash Bin
Accepted items travel through the modules of the SDM in the following order:
1. Shutter
2. Infeed
3. Core Module - Feeder, De-skew
4. IBVM - Cameras
5. Core Module - MICR, Endorser
6. ERBM - Escrow
7. Capture Bin Module - cheque or cash bin depending on item.
Item Path - Rejected Items
De-skew Feeder
Infeed
IBVM
Cameras
CORE Re-buncher
MICR MODULE ERBM
Read
Head Endorser
Escrow
CBM
Reject Bin 2
Reject Bin 1
Cheque Bin Cash Bin
The path of returned items is as follows:
1. Shutter
2. Infeed
4. IBVM - Cameras
6. ERBM - Escrow
7. Capture Bin Module - reject bins.
Item Path - Returned Items
De-skew Feeder
Infeed
IBVM
Cameras
CORE Re-buncher
MICR MODULE ERBM
Read
Head Endorser
Escrow
CBM
Reject Bin 2
Reject Bin 1
Cheque Bin Cash Bin
The path of returned items is as follows:
1. Infeed
3. IBVM - Cameras
5. ERBM - Escrow, Re-buncher
6. Core Module - Feeder
7. Infeed
8. Shutter
If not taken by customer, sent to appropriate reject bin.
Sensors
The following diagram shows the SDM track layout, giving the locations of the processing
devices and the track sensors.
Mag Front
DVM Head Camera
Ultrasonic Back TS10

Array Camera
TS11 Track Speed De-skew Feeder
Infeed
Front UDFD
IBVM Camera TS10 DS4 DS3 DS2 DS1
TS7 TS6 TS5 TS4 TS3 TS2 TS1

TS9 TS8
LED Back
Array Camera
TS11 TS19
TS18
CORE Re-buncher
MICR MODULE
Read TS12 ERBM
Head
Endorser
TS17
TS16
Escrow
TS13 TS14
TS15
TS20 TS24
TS22
TS21 CBM
TS23
Reject Bin 2
Reject Bin 1
Cheque Bin Cash Bin

TS1 Track sensor 1 Infeed
TS5 Track sensor 5 Core Module - Feeder

UDFD Ultrasonic Double Feed Detect Feeder
TS6 Track sensor 6 (Thick Item Detect) Feeder
TS10 Track sensor 10 IBVM
TS11 Track sensor 11 IBVM
TS14 Track sensor 14 ERBM
TS19 Track sensor 19 Feeder
TS20 Track sensor 20 CBM
TS21 Track sensor 21 CBM Retract 1
TS23 Track sensor 23 CBM Retract 2
Note: The retract bins do not have bin full sensors. Bin count is reset to zero whenever the
sensor reads an empty bin, and is incremented when documents are sent to the bin.
For the Cash and Cheque bins, there is a sensor on the paddle measuring how far down it
is. When the paddle fails to rise above a certain distance after capturing a document, then
the "Nearly Full" flag is set. When the paddle fails to rise above an even lower point, the
"Full" flag is set.
Specification
Item Criteria
The SDM is capable of handling items that meet the following criteria:
Length 120mm (4.75") to 225mm (8.86”)
Height 60mm (2.36") to 108mm (4.25”)
Thickness 0.076mm (0.003”) to 0.12mm (0.0047”)
Weight 75 g/m 2 (20lb) to 105 g/m 2 (28lb)
Power Requirement
The SDM controller board, motors, solenoids, sensors, and peripheral devices require the
following dc voltage and currents sourced from the ATM power supply:
l +24 V power supply sized to handle 6A current or greater

l protected by LittleFuse model 0230.005 (5.0A slo-blow), or UL listed equivalent.
USB
The SDM USB requirement is USB 2.0.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Module Error States

Replacement” and “Adjustments” for detailed instructions on FRU actions. To de-code
specific M_Status and M_Data use the Status Code Translator Tool
(http://www.infoprod.ncr.com) or refer to the Diagnostic Status Code Notebook (B006-
6273).
Controller Board
Module State M_Status Root Cause Corrective Action (s)
Unauthorized 83 SDM Control Board l Authorize Control Board. (This functionality is
Control Board not authorized currently not implemented in the platform.)
Detected
Shutter
Shutter Jammed 35, 36 Items jammed l Inspect the shutter for obvious obstructions
against shutter preventing shutter movement.
l Remove any obstructions.
Shutter sensors l Inspect shutter open and closed sensors to ensure
blocked they are not blocked by debris or obstruction.
l Remove debris or obstruction from shutter
sensors.
Shutter interference l Inspect the shutter for alignment issues with the
fascia or damaged parts.
l Adjust alignment and fix or replace any damaged
parts.
Shutter faulty l Rule out obstructions, damage, sensors or
alignment issues.
l Replace the SDM Shutter. If replacing the shutter,
document fault information and include with
module being returned for repair.
Endorser Ribbon
Endorser Ribbon 47 Ribbon nearing end l Perform endorser ribbon replenishment
Empty Soon of life
Endorser Ribbon 17 Ribbon has reached l Perform endorser ribbon replenishment.
Empty end of life l See also ‘Troubleshooting Procedures’ potential
causes and fixes.
SDM Core
Unauthorized SDM 82 SDM Core module l Authenticate SDM Core module. (This functionality
Core Module has not been is currently not implemented in the platform.)
Detected authorized

Firmware Download 81 Incompatible l The firmware available for download is not
Failure Firmware compatible with the hardware present.
l Escalate to next level of support.

Interlock Open 30 SDM device not l Inspect the SDM to see if anything is preventing it
fully racked in from being racked in fully.
l Clear any obstruction to racking and ensure that
the device is fully racked in.
Switch not aligned l Inspect alignment between interlock switch and
with actuator switch actuator.
l Use SysApp to loop on SDM sensors test to view
interlock status.
l If necessary adjust alignment and fix or replace any
damaged parts.
l Use sensor test to monitor interlock state.
Harness damaged l Inspect harnessing and connectors associated with
or disconnected interlock switch.
l Ensure interlock connector seated correctly. If
possible, repair any damaged harnessing.
l If fault remains, replace faulty harness or replace
SDM Core Module.
l If replacing the SDM Core Module, document fault
information and include with module being
returned for repair.
Connector l Inspect connectors associated with interlock
Damaged switch for damage.
l Repair connector if possible else replace SDM
Core Module.

Transport Guide 80 Transport guide has l Using the error lights identify which guide is
Open been left open reporting open.
l If no error lights are on inspect all transport guides
to determine which one is reporting open.
l Close all transport guides.
Transport guide l Using the error lights identify which guide is
switch not aligned reporting open.
with actuator l If no error lights are on inspect all transport guides
l Inspect transport guide switch to verify that the
switch is aligned with the actuator.
l Repair switch or replace SDM Core Module.
Harness damaged or l Using the error lights identify which guide is
disconnected. reporting open.
l Inspect switch harness' for damage or
disconnection. Reconnect harness, repair harness
or replace SDM Core Module.
Connector damaged. l Using the error lights identify which guide is
reporting open.
l Inspect switch harness connectors for damage.
Repair connector or replace SDM Core Module.
See also ‘Troubleshooting Procedures’ potential causes and fixes..

USB Disconnected 43 USB harness l Inspect USB cable and connections at both ends of
damaged or the cable. If no visible problems, bypass installed
disconnected harness using an external USB cable.
l Replace faulty harness
USB connector l Inspect USB cable connector for damage. Repair
damaged connector or replace SDM.
l If replacing the SDM, document fault information
and include with module being returned for
repair.
SDM device ground l Inspect all SDM device grounding straps and
fault screws.
l Replace any missing or disconnected ground straps
and tighten any loose grounding screws.
Faulty DC motor l Use SysApp to run all DC motors to see if USB
inducing noise errors can be induced.
l Inspect motor harnesses and mounting screws.
l If possible, repair harness damage. Tighten any
loose motor screws.
Main controller l Having eliminated all previous root causes, assume
board faulty this one to be true. Replace the SDM Core Module.

Device 44 Unreliable USB l Inspect USB cable and connections at both ends of
Communication connection the cable. If no visible problems, bypass installed
Failure harness using an external USB cable.
l Replace faulty harness.
SDM device ground l Inspect all SDM device grounding straps and
fault screws.
l Replace any missing or disconnected ground straps
and tighten any loose grounding screws.
Faulty DC motor l Use SysApp to run all DC motors to see if USB
inducing noise errors can be induced. Inspect motor harnesses
and mounting screws.
l If possible, repair harness damage. Tighten any
loose motor screws.
Main controller l Having eliminated all previous root causes, assume
board faulty this one to be true.
l Replace the SDM Core Module. If replacing the
SDM Core Module, document fault information
repair.
Internal 42 Electro-Static l If the device recovers on its own, it indicates that
Communication Discharge the comms fault was generated by excessive static
Failure discharge to the module.
l Verify that all grounding and all ESD shielding is
properly installed.
Internal 42 ERBM l If the device does not recover on its own and the
Communication harness/connector device reports 0x02, 0x6C in MDATA[1], MDATA
Failure faulty [2]. This indicates a comms fault with the ERBM.
(continued) l Inspect the ERBM communications harness /
connector for connections problems or damage.
l Reconnect ERBM harness or repair ERBM
connector or replace ERBM.
l If replacing the ERBM, document fault information
repair.

SDM Core Jam 38 Media blocking track l Using the indicator LEDs as a guide, inspect the
sensor or jammed transport for jammed documents. See ‘Jam
between sensors Clearance’.
l Clear media and debris from track. Inspect
transport for any obstacles damage that could have
been the source of the jam. Clean dust away from
track sensors. (Refer to Cleaning section).
l Perform media tests to ensure module is working
correctly:
l Run Enable test, with at least 5 items. Once
media are in Escrow, select Capture to Cash
Bin. Then repeat test selecting in turn: Capture
to Cheque Bin, Capture to Reject Bin 1 and
Capture to Reject Bin 2.
l Run Enable test, inserting at least 30 items of
mixed size and orientation. Once items are in
Escrow, select Clear to User.
Misaligned module Inspect interfaces between the core module and the
interfaces ERBM, CBM and Infeed. Check for bent or misaligned
parts. If necessary adjust alignment and fix or replace
any damaged parts.
SDM Core module Determine that this has been a chronic problem and
faulty rule out track obstruction or sensor problem. Replace
the SDM Core module. If replacing the SDM Core
Module, document fault information and include with
See also ‘Troubleshooting Procedures’ potential causes and fixes.

SDM Core Hardware 70 Component fault l Check M-Status and M-Data[1], M-Data[2] values to
Fault detected establish specific fault codes. Using reported fault
information, return to list of possible root causes.
Endorser Ribbon l Inspect ribbon motor for damage. Verify that the
Motor Fault endorser ribbon is not snagged on anything.
l Unsnag the ribbon, repair the motor, replace the
SDM.
Endorser Protection l Print test document and check for horizontal gaps
Circuit Fault through characters.
l Replace the SDM Core module.
Solenoid Fault l Inspect solenoids for damage. Repair damaged
solenoid, replace SDM Core Module
Motor Fault l Inspect motor feedback sensor assemblies for dust
or debris, bent sensor brackets or loose timing
disks.
l Clean dirty sensors (refer to Cleaning section),
ensure sensor close enough to timing disk and that
timing disk screw is tight.
l Verify fix using SysApp integrity test.
Solenoid l Inspect harnessing and connectors associated with
harness/connector solenoid.
faulty l Repair or replace damaged harness.Re-seat
connectors.
FPGA Configuration l Determine if the issue is chronic by power cycling
Fault the SDM module If the issue is chronic, replace the
SDM Core Module.
Motor l Inspect harnessing and connectors associated with
harness/connector transport motors.
faulty l Repair or replace damaged harness. Re-seat
connectors.

SDM Core Hardware UDFD board faulty l No LED activity on UDFD board and
Fault harness/connector adjustments are ineffective.
(continued) l Replace SDM Core Module.
70 SDM Core module l Unable to isolate a repairable root cause. Inspect
faulty and clean the core module. (Refer to Cleaning
section). Run Enable diagnostic tests (see SDM
Core Jam, above).

Too Many Entry 7 Worn retard l Check the retard cartridge for wear on the belts
Failures cartridge and on any part of the drive mechanism.
l Check that belts are of even height when viewed
across the cartridge.
l Replace if worn (see Module Removal and
Replacement section).
Infeed misaligned l Inspect the infeed alignment with the fascia.
with fascia l Repair the alignment between the fascia and the
SDM.
Obstacle between l Inspect the transport for obstacles that would
track sensors cause jams.
l Clear obstacles from transport. Clean dust away
from track sensors (refer to Cleaning section).
Invalid media l Use SysApp to perform SDM device self test
inserted repeatedly transactions Rule out any physical problem by
performing several self test operations without
error.
Thick media detector l Use SysApp to observe thick media sensor
faulty changing state as infeed solenoid is manually
moved.
l Clear dust or debris blocking sensor else replace
Infeed module.
l If replacing the infeed, document fault information
repair.

Too Many Entry 7 Transport rollers not l Inspect driver rollers for jammed debris or guide
Failures turning interference. Inspect motor harness, connections
(continued) and transport drive belts.
l Observe transport while running SDM transport
motor test.
l Clear any drive roller interference, fix damaged
harness, seat any loose connectors and correct any
belt issues.
Infeed is faulty l Remove infeed mechanism and advance drive
system by hand. Inspect harnessing and connector.
l Check interfaces at both the fascia and SDM Core
transport.
l If unable to get transport drive to move freely or
unable to repair interfaces or connector damage,
replace the infeed mechanism.
repair.
IBVM is faulty l Use SysApp to perform SDM device self test and
inspect both front and rear images.
l Check for black images and any black horizontal
streaks or lines.
l Replace the IBVM module.
l If replacing the IBVM, document fault information
repair.
ERBM is faulty l Inspect ERBM module and use SysApp Run to Run
tests to show chronic ERBM faults being reported.
l Replace ERBM module.
repair.
SDM Core module l Check to see if there is a chronic fault with the
faulty module.
l Replace the SDM Core Module.
Infeed
Infeed Jam 19 Media blocking track l Using the indicator LEDs as a guide, inspect the
transport for any obstacles damage that could have
been the source of the jam.
l Clean dust away from track sensors. (Refer to
Cleaning section)
Misaligned module l Inspect interfaces between the core module and
interfaces the ERBM, CBM and indeed. Check for bent or
misaligned parts.
damaged parts.
Infeed module faulty l Determine that this has been a chronic problem
and rule out track obstruction or sensor problem.
Replace the infeed module.
repair.
SDM Core module l Determine that this has been a chronic problem
faulty and rule out track obstruction or sensor problem.
repair.

Infeed Hardware 68 Component fault l Check M-Status and M-Data[1], M-Data[2] values to
Infeed Solenoid l Inspect harnessing and connectors associated with
harness/connector the infeed solenoid.
connectors.
Infeed Motor l Inspect harnessing and connectors associated with
harness/connector infeed motors
connectors.
Infeed Solenoid Fault l Inspect infeed solenoid for damage. Repair
damaged solenoid, replace infeed module.
repair.
Infeed Motor Fault l Inspect motor feedback sensor assemblies for dust
or debris, bent sensor brackets or loose timing
disks.
timing disk screw is tight.
Infeed module faulty l Unable to isolate a repairable root cause.
l Replace the Infeed module.
repair.
Media Feeder
Too Many Feed 61 SDM feeder sensor l Verify that the feeder sensor wheel is free and
Errors wheel not engaging clear of obstruction and that it is turning during a
media. transaction.
l Free the sensor wheel of obstruction or align
sensor to properly engage document.
SDM Core module l Unable to isolate a repairable root cause.
faulty l Replace the SDM Core module.

Feeder Jam 37 Media blocking track l Using the indicator LEDs as a guide, inspect the
between sensors Clearance’. Clear media and debris from track.
l Inspect transport for any obstacles damage that
could have been the source of the jam. Clean dust
away from track sensors. (Refer to Cleaning
section).
correctly.
misaligned parts.
damaged parts.
faulty and rule out track obstruction or sensor problem
l . Replace the SDM Core Module.

Feeder Hardware 69 Component fault l Check M-Status and M-Data[1], M-Data[2] values to
Feeder Motor l Inspect harnessing and connectors associated with
harness/connector feeder motors
connectors.
Feeder Motor Fault l Inspect feeder motor feedback sensor assemblies
for dust or debris, bent sensor brackets or loose
timing disks.
timing disk screw is tight
SDM Core module l Unable to isolate a repairable root cause.
faulty l Replace the SDM Core module.
Bill Validator: Imaging and Bill Validator (IBVM) or Deposit

Validation Module (DVM)
Unauthorized IBVM 84 IBVM module not l This functionality is currently not implemented in
Detected authorized the platform.

IBVM No Active 6 IBVM Templates not l Software installation was done without templates
Currency downloaded Download IBVM Templates and confirm success
via configuration applet.

IBVM Jam 21 Media blocking track l Using the indicator LEDs as a guide, inspect the
between sensors Clearance’. Clear media and debris from track.
l Inspect transport for any obstacles damage that
could have been the source of the jam. Clean dust
away from track sensors. (Refer to Cleaning
section)
misaligned parts.
damaged parts.
IBVM module faulty l Determine that this has been a chronic problem
l Replace IBVM module.
repair.
repair.

IBVM Hardware Fault 22 Camera or sensor l Check for foreign objects such as staples, paper
dirty or blocked clips.
l Clean all the sensors in the bill validator with either
a soft brush or compressed air. (Refer to Cleaning
section)
l Clean the cameras with a soft cloth (wrung out)
and water or soapy water.
l Dry after cleaning with a soft cloth.
Component fault l Check M-Status and M-Data[1], M-Data[2] values to
detected establish specific fault codes. Using reported fault
IBVM imaging fault l Power cycle the SDM to verify that this is a chronic
problem.
l If the problem is chronic replace the IBVM
module.
repair.
IBVM module faulty l Fatal error continues to be reported for no
apparent reason.
l Replace IBVM module.
repair.
ERBM
ERBM Hardware 71 Component fault l Check M-Status and M-Data[1], M-Data[2] values to
ERBM l Inspect harnessing and connectors associated with
harness/connector ERBM module.
connectors.
ERBM motor fault l Inspect motors for debris preventing motor from
turning.
l Clear any debris found interfering with motor
operation.
ERBM solenoid fault l Inspect solenoids for debris preventing correct
operation. Clear debris.
ERBM module faulty l Fatal error continues to be reported for no
apparent reason.
l Replace ERBM module.
repair.

ERBM Jam 38 Media blocking track l Using the indicator LEDs as a guide, inspect the
transport for any obstacles or damage that could
have been the source of the jam. Clean dust away
from track sensors. (Refer to Cleaning section)
correctly:
l Run Enable test, with at least 5 items. Once
media are in Escrow, select Capture to Cash
Bin. Then repeat test selecting in turn: Capture
to Cheque Bin, Capture to Reject Bin 1 and
Capture to Reject Bin 2.
l Run Enable test, inserting at least 30 items of
mixed size and orientation. Once items are in
Escrow, select Clear to User.
interfaces the ERBM, CBM and Infeed. Check for bent or
misaligned parts. If necessary adjust alignment and
fix or replace any damaged parts.
ERBM module faulty l Determine that this has been a chronic problem
Replace the ERBM. If replacing the ERBM,
document fault information and include with
Capture Bin
Capture Bin Jam 53 Media blocking track l Using the indicator LEDs as a guide, inspect the
l Clear media and debris from track using canned
air. Inspect transport for any obstacles or damage
that could have been the source of the jam. Clean
dust away from track sensors.
correctly.
interfaces the ERBM, CBM and Infeed. Check for bent or
misaligned parts.
damaged parts.
CBM module faulty l Determine that this has been a chronic problem
l Replace the CBM.
l If replacing, document fault information and
include with module being returned for repair.
SDM core module l Determine that this has been a chronic problem
l If replacing, document the fault information and

Capture Bin 54 Component fault l Check M-Status and M-Data[1], M-Data[2] values to
Hardware Fault detected establish specific fault codes. Using reported fault
CBM l Inspect harnessing and connectors associated with
harness/connector CBM.
connectors.
CBM motor fault l Inspect motors for debris preventing motor from
turning.
l Clear any debris found interfering with motor
operation.
CBM solenoid fault l Inspect solenoids for debris preventing correct
operation.
l Clear debris.
CBM module faulty l Fatal error continues to be reported for no
apparent reason.
l Replace CBM module.
l If replacing, document the fault information and
Additional troubleshooting procedures for the following M_Status codes:
INFEED: M_Status 13/19/68/80 - check that:
l the infeed guide moves freely

l the infeed is mounted correctly
ENDORSER: M_Status 17/27 - check that:
l the endorser platen moves freely

l the endorser ribbon tension is correct
IBVM: M_Status 21/22 - check that:
l the IBVM is aligned
FEEDER: M_Status 37 - check that:
l the retard belt moves freely

l the deskew idler shafts are seated correctly
l the MICR idler shafts are seated correctly
CORE: M_Status 38 - check that:
l the retard belt moves freely

l the deskew idler shafts are seated correctly
l the MICR idler shafts are seated correctly
l the advance belt compression springs are not pinched
l the deskew solenoids are connected correctly
l the deskew solenoid harnesses are secured
ERBM: M_Status 39 - check that:
l the ERBM is aligned

l the return guide is undamaged
l the track sensor is seated correctly
INTERLOCK: M_Status 42 - check that:
l the SDM interlock cover is present
CAPTURE BINS: M_Status 53/54 - check that:
l the check bin belt is tracking correctly

l the check bin diverter moves correctly
l bin racking is indicated correctly
DOUBLE FEED DETECT: M_Status 57 - check that:
l the retard belts are free of debris

l the advance belt roller is undamaged
l the advance belt ground strap is routed correctly
l the drive shafts are seated correctly
The following tools are needed for SDM Troubleshooting:
l 10 mm Nut driver
l 10 mm Open ended spanner
l Small flat blade screwdriver
l #2 Flat blade screwdriver
l #3 Pozidrive screwdriver
l #2 Pozidrive screwdriver
l Flashlight
l Service USB Dongle to enter System Application (Diagnostics)
l 484-0050345 PACKET–TEST CHECK 1 PACKET=560
l 484-9000989 DECK–TEST A
Infeed Guide Moves Freely

(M_Status 13/19 infeed Jam/68 Infeed Hardware Fault/80
Transport Guide Open)
Description:
With the SDM module racked out, lift the green latch and open the guide. Then close the
guide and ensure the green latch engages. There should be no resistance and the guide
should not be able to hold itself open.
Action:
If there is binding preventing the guide opening and closing smoothly, the infeed must be
replaced.
Infeed Mounted Correctly

(M_Status 13/19 infeed Jam/68 Infeed Hardware Fault/80
Transport Guide Open)
Description:
Make sure that the yellow discs are secured correctly with the opening facing directly
downward.
Make sure the yellow flap (bunch return divertor) is sitting loosely between the pressure
plate and the infeed and that it moves easily with the infeed guide.
Action:
Remount or replace the infeed if necessary.
Endorser Platen Moves Freely

(M_Status 17 Endorser Ribbon Empty/27)
Description:
Check that the endorser platen roller moves normally and no debris is present. Open the
spring loaded guide to check underneath the endorser head. Clean out any debris.
Action:
If adequate print cannot be obtained, replace the core.
Endorser Ribbon Tension

(M_Status 17 Endorser Ribbon Empty/27)
Description:
Check that the endorser ribbon is correctly routed under the print head, above the metal
shield. Advance the ribbon to a fresh section to re–tension the ribbon.
Action:
Remount or replace the ribbon if necessary.
IBVM Aligned Correctly

(M_Status 21 IBVM Jam/22 IBVM Hardware Fault)
Description:
Check if the wavy guide fingers on the IBVM mesh correctly with the SDM transport. Check
both the deskew area and the MICR area.
Action:
Remount the IBVM if necessary. If parts are damaged, replace as required.
Retard Belts Move Easily
(M_Status 37 Feeder Jam/38 SDM Core Jam)
Description:
Open the top guide of the transport, there are three retard belts located inside, near the
front of the black horizontal guide.
Reach in with your hand and move the belts forward and backward with your finger. The
belts should not move freely, but only a minor effort should be required to move them. They
should be connected to motor movement which can be felt.
Verify that:
1. Retard belt drives under feeder cycle test.

2. Advance belt contacts Retard cartridge, moves under pressure.
Action:
If the retard belt is not driven, unmount and remount the retard cartridge, ground the
bracket installation and check the retard cartridge height.
Deskew Idler Shafts Seated Correctly

Description:
The three deskew idler shafts should be secured at the latch side under a clear plastic
arrow snap. Make sure each shaft is seated correctly. Also make sure the deskew rollers
(angled) are seated correctly and rock back and forth under spring pressure.
Action:
Reseat the shafts if they are loose, or replace the core if parts are damaged.
MICR Idler Shafts Seated Correctly

Description:
Make sure the idler shafts located in the MICR guide are seated correctly.
Action:
Fix the shafts if loose or replace the core if parts are damaged.
Advance Belt Compression Springs Not Pinched

(M_Status 38 SDM Core Jam)
Description:
Check that the advance belt compression springs are not pinched under the ground
bracket. At a low angle, look at the area where the advance belt compression springs
contact the ejector bracket.
Action:
If pinching is found, remove and replace the advance ground bracket and the springs.
Ensure that the steel spacers are in place inside the spring.
Deskew Solenoids Connected Correctly

Description:
Check that all the connections of the deskew mechanism are routed and seated correctly.
Verify the linkage operates and moves as expected during the 'solenoid test' in Sysapp
Device Diagnostics.
Action:
If operation is not correct, disconnect the plugs and connect the harnesses to the solenoids
correctly.
Deskew Solenoids Harnesses Secured

Description:
Check that the harness is secured to the solenoid with a cable tie, to keep the harness
away from the drive toggle.
Action:
Fit a cable tie to secure the harness to the solenoid, ensuring that the harness does not
touch the drive toggle.
ERBM Aligned Correctly

(M_Status 39 ERBM Jam)
Description:
Incorrect alignment of the ERBM to the return guide interface can cause excessive return
faults. The black plastic semi-circle on the return guide should be centred in the semi-
circular cut-out on the ERBM.
Action:
Re-align the ERBM:
1. Remove SDM from the tray and lay it on its back.

2. Loosen the retaining post and two retaining screws.
3. Align the cut-out and the semi-circle. Perfect alignment may not be possible due to
limitations in movement and tolerances of some mounting parts. If, after aligning as
best as possible without excessive force, the cut-out and semi-circle are still not in
place, open guide I on the feeder transport, and look down the guide path towards
the ERBM - the guides should flush along the top with no protruding edges.
4. Tighten the screws and post.

5. Test alignment by running a bunch of 30-50 items, then perform a ‘clear to user’ test
and check that no items get stuck in the eject path.
6. Reinstall the SDM in the tray.
Clear Return Guide Undamaged

Description:
Check the front of the clear return guide above the aluminium front piece and open the
guide to check the inside. Check for cracks or breakages on the guide, especially on the
bearing clip.
Action:
If the guide is cracked, replace the transport.
Track Sensor Seated Correctly

Description:
An incorrectly seated track sensor (TS-19) can cause excessive ERBM faults. The track
sensor is located beneath a clear cover below the clear return guide towards the baseplate.
Carefully reach in and using one finger, push up on the cover and try to move it around.
Some movement is acceptable but if it moves a lot, especially up and down, it is likely that
the sensor is unseated.
Action:
If the sensor is unseated:
1. Remove the SDM from the tray and remove the ERBM to give enough room to push
the sensor back into a position where it is held firmly.
2. Reinstall the SDM in the tray.
3. Once it has been confirmed that the sensor is securely in position, perform a looped
sensor test in SysApp in device diagnostics.
Open the clear return guide and you should see the bits on the screen change state. Close
the guide and they should change back. If the bits on the screen do not change when you
open and close the guide, try to reseat the sensor again. Repeat this process until the bits
change state.
SDM Interlock Cover Missing

(M_Status 42 - Internal Communication Failure)
Description:
The primary path for the SDM ground is through the Interlock Cover and Ground Spring.
Action:
Ensure the SDM interlock cover is in place and the ground spring makes contact with the
cover.
Cheque Bin Belt Tracking Correctly

(M_Status 53 Capture Bin Jam)
Description:
Incorrectly tracking bin belt can cause excessive item jams in the bin. Remove the cheque
bin and using a flashlight, look down the input slot of the bin. Check that there is a flat belt
on the pulley in the centre of the slot.
Action:
If the flat belt is off the pulley, replace the cheque bin.
Cheque Bin Diverter Moves Freely

(M_Status 53 Capture Bin Jam)
Description:
Push on the bin diverter near the MICR guide and endorser area to make sure it moves
correctly and springs back to the correct position.
Action:
If the diverter is damaged, replace the core.
Bin Racking Indicated Correctly

(M_Status 54 Capture Bin Fault)
Description:
Check that the LED indicates green when the bins are racked in.
1. Remove both bins from the tray, then replace both bins. The indicator should go
green (ensure interlock switch is closed).
2. Repeat this five times.
3. Check that the deposit bin bracket is not bent and the bin connector is not cracked or
broken, both of which could cause poor connection of the bins.
Action:
l If the stoplight stayed red on one or more attempt, the tray needs to be replaced.
l If it stayed red all five times, try moving the bins side to side and back and forth in an
effort to make it go green. If it still does not, this indicates you may not have the
interlock switch closed. Recheck the interlock, and then repeat the test.
l Check the angle of the bracket at the back. The bracket should be perpendicular.
Repeated rough closing can move the bracket out of position resulting in loss of
connectivity. Later versions use countersunk screws to prevent movement of the
bracket.
l Replace the bracket if required.
l Replace the bin harness if damaged.
Retard Belts Free of Debris

(M_Status 57 Double Feed Detected)
Description:
A build-up of debris on the retard belts can cause excessive double feeds or failure to feed.
Move the belts forward and backward while shining a flashlight in the retard belt area to see
the teeth of the belt.
Action:
l Remove an debris from the bottom side of the belt.
Note: If there is excessive debris built up inside the teeth, which cannot be cleaned, replace
the retard cartridge.
Advance Belt Roller Undamaged

Description:
Damage to the advance belt roller can cause excessive double feeding/failure to feed.
Hold the top guide open and shine a flashlight inside the advance belt while rotating the
advance belt to check for cracks or breaks.
Action:
If there are cracks on the roller or it is broken, replace the transport.
Note: This check is only required if the roller with a ball bearing insert (pictured above) is
installed.
Advance Belt Assembly Ground Strap Routed Correctly

Description:
Incorrect routing of the ground strap can cause excessive double feeds.
1. Look at the advance belt assembly on top of the top guide.

2. Check that the ground wire is routed over the top of the white harness track.
Action:
Re-route the ground wire:
1. Remove the screw securing the ground wire to the advance assembly.
2. Remove the two screws securing the white wire harness track.
Note: These screws also hold down a circuit board underneath, so use caution.
3. Pull the ground wire out from underneath the white wire harness track, and route it
over the top.
4. Reinstall the two screws securing the circuit board and the white wire harness track.
Be very careful not to cross thread the hole, by turning the screw backwards until
you feel the threads fall into place before tightening.
5. Reinstall the screw securing the ground wire.
Drive Shafts Seated Correctly

Description:
Incorrectly seated drive shafts can cause excessive SDM faults, jams or double feeds.
There are three drive shafts (two with yellow rollers, one with black) in the black horizontal
guide. Ensure that they are all seated correctly, as shown below.
1. Open the top guide. All rollers for each shaft should stick through the black horizontal
guide by the same amount. If the roller closest to you is barely above the guide or
even below it, the drive shaft is not seated correctly.

2. Look underneath the guide. The first two (with the yellow rollers) should not be
touching the black harness track. If they are, the drive shafts are not seated
correctly. The image below shows an incorrectly seated drive shaft, causing a roller
to touch the track:
Action:
Re-seat any affected drive shafts using a small flathead screwdriver to push upwards on
the shaft until it clicks into place. Be sure not to damage the drive shaft as it is being
reseated.
Harness Routed Correctly
Description:
Look at the back of the module for any harnesses that look out of place. This includes wires
that are stretched too tightly or snagged on metalwork.
Action:
Check to that the wire insulation is still intact, if not replace the transport. If the insulation is
in good condition, re-route the wires correctly.
Jam Clearance
A jam in the SDM will be indicated by one of the following error messages, displayed by the
ATM’s error reporting system:
l Infeed Jam
l SDM Core Jam
l IBVM Jam
l ERBM Jam
l Feeder Jam
l Capture Bin Jam
The indicators will also display warnings to clear jams:
l Main indicator panel: red light flashing

l Individual indicators on SDM: flashing at location of jam(s).
If more than one indicator is flashing, clear the jams in alphabetical order, according to the
lettered areas.
Infeed Jam
1. Open latch A. Carefully remove any jammed items from the transport.
2. Close the latch, making sure it clicks firmly into place.
SDM Core
1. Open latch B. Carefully remove any jammed items from the transport.
3. Open latch D. Carefully remove any jammed items.

If necessary, turn wheel 1 to move the jam backwards or forwards to make it more
accessible.

5. Lift tab F and slide tab E to the left. Carefully remove any jammed items.
If necessary, turn wheel 1 to move the jam backwards or forwards to make it more
accessible.
6. If the jammed item was torn, use the cleaning tool stored above latch B to sweep out
any pieces of paper or dust. Do not blow air into the transport.
IBVM Jam
1. Open latch C and lift the bill validator lid. Carefully remove any jammed items, trying
not to touch the glass-covered lenses of the sensors. To help remove the jammed
items:
l turn wheel 1 to move the jam backwards or forwards

l press the green tab (if the bill validator has one) to the side to make access
between the rollers easier.
2. Close the lid and lock it with the latch.
ERBM Jam
1. Remove both bins.
2. Slide and hold latch G to the left to release the transport. Carefully remove any jams
from the ERBM transport, also checking the underside of the SDM.
Do not use force to remove jammed items, as this could cause damage to the
ERBM. If necessary, turn wheel 2 counter-clockwiseonly and wheel 3 in either
direction to move the jam to make it more accessible.
CAUTION
Before turning wheel 3, the transport must be opened by holding
latch G to the left. Do not turn wheel 3 too many times.
H
3
2
G
3. Lift tab H and check underneath it for jammed items. Do not attempt to remove items
from this area or items which have entered the escrow drum, instead run a device
self test. Check if the items have been cleared into the transport, from where they
can be removed as described in the previous step.
4. Push the transport back up into place, ensuring it is firmly latched.

5. Slide both the bins back into the SDM until they latch into place. Tug on the handle to
ensure they are firmly latched.
Feeder Jam
1. Open latch I. Carefully remove any jammed items. If necessary, turn wheel 4
clockwise only to move the jam to make it more accessible.
Capture Bin Jam

Cheque Bin Jam
1. Open the cheque bin. Lower the pusher plate and remove deposited cheques. Then
look for cheques jammed at the top of the bin. If necessary, turn wheel 6 to move the
jam to make it more accessible.
2. Remove cheques from the retract area. Look for cheques jammed at the top of the
retract area. If necessary, turn wheel 5 to move the jam to make it more accessible.
3. Press down on latch L to open the bin transport. Remove any jammed cheques. If
necessary, turn wheel 5 to move the jam to make it more accessible.
L
5
Cash Bin Jam

1. Open the cash bin. Lower the cash bin pusher plate and remove deposited cash.
Look for jammed bills at the top of the bin. If necessary, turn wheel 8 to move the jam
to make it more accessible.
2. Remove bills from the retract area. Look for jammed bills at the top of the retract
area.
If necessary, turn wheel 7 to move the jam to make it more accessible.
3. Open latch J and open the cheque bin door. Press down on the green tab to open
the bin transport. Remove any jammed bills. If necessary, turn wheel 7 to move the
jam to make it more accessible.
4. Close the bin doors and make sure that they latch shut properly. There is no need to
push the plate back to the top of the bin.
CLEANING
The SDM cleaning kit (part number 603-9015130) contains 20 packs of the following items:
l 1 x SDM cleaning card

l 2 x cleaning 'swisels' (swab + chisel tool)
l 3 x ATM cleaning wipes (2 small, 1 large)
l 2 x dry lint-free wipes
l 1 x ATM encoded card reader cleaning card.
Alternatively the following items can be used:
l Lint-free, cotton cloths (painters rags or other cotton rags)

l Tech Wipes (484-0051501)*
l Cleaning swab (484-0051295)
l Canned air
Note: After cleaning with tech wipes, use a dry cloth to wipe down excess
solvent or film
module. Cleaners containing alcohol or other solvents and de-greaser (such as Fedron)
can damage the plastics used in the sensor lenses and in the belts. This results in clouding
of the sensor covers and prisms, and also degrades the belts causing them to become
sticky.
Cleaning should be carried out on the appropriate area(s) of the SDM after every service
call to confirm good operation before returning the ATM to service.
l Infeed:
l pressure plate
l track surfaces
l drive belts
l drive roller
l sensors
l Core
l retard cartridge
l track surfaces
l pressure plate
l drive belts
l feeder belt
l drive rollers
l idle rollers
l sensors
l IBVM
l track surfaces
l metal rollers
l plastic rollers
l rubber rollers
l scanning tracks
l sensors
l MICR/Endorser
l White rollers
l Yellow rollers
l Bearings
Flat belts
l
Sensor
l
l ERBM
l Entry and exit slots
Infeed
Note: Always clean each module area from top to bottom, outward to inward and never
blow air into the module. This prevents moving the dirt into an adjacent module.
1. Run the cleaning card through the SDM five times by using Sys App > Device
Diagnostics > SDM > Run to Run. The test will loop automatically until the card is
removed.
2. If during the Run to Run test the card jams two or more times follow the additional
cleaning steps below.
3. Vacuum the top and bottom internal surfaces of the infeed.
4. Press down on the pressure plate (it should move approximately 1 inch) and remove
any debris from between the belts and rollers and also from between the infeed and
the transport mounting points. Use a vacuum or needle nose pliers.
Pressure plate
5. Ensure the pressure plate returns correctly to position parallel with lower infeed
surface.
6. Clean first the upper and then the lower track surface using dry lint-free wipes or a
brush to remove debris from between each drive belt and roller.
Track surfaces
Track surfaces
7. Run a continuous Feeder cycle (SysApp > Device Diagnostics > SDM > Loop On >
Feeder Cycle.) With the test running, use dry lint-free wipes to clean first the upper
then the lower infeed belts and then the drive roller. Apply light pressure and
periodically adjust the position of the wipes until no more dirt accumulates on them.
Use a flashlight to verify that the belts are clean.
CAUTION
Excessive pressure on the belts and rollers while
cleaning can cause the motor to overheat or the gears to
slip.
Drive belts
Drive belts
Drive roller
8. Press 'Esc' on keyboard or 'Previous' on screen to end the Feeder Cycle test once
complete. Close SysApp.
9. Use cleaning swabs or a brush to clean first the top then the bottom sensors (8
total). Apply light pressure and periodically adjust the position of the swabs until no
more dirt accumulates on them. Use a flashlight to verify that the lenses are clean.
CAUTION
Excessive pressure can cause the sensor lens to become
loose.
Do not use wet wipes to clean sensors - they are
attached directly to unprotected circuit boards.
10. Complete the cleaning process by vacuuming the surface between each drive belt
and roller on first the top and then the bottom internal surfaces.
Core
1. Remove the screw on the ejector bracket on the core module. Use a flat-headed
screwdriver to pry the ejector bracket out slightly
2. Open the transport latch and press on the pressure plate then remove the retard
cartridge. (See retard cartridge in FRU Removal section for details and tips).
Note: If the drive coupler on cartridge is damaged, replace the

cartridge.
Drive coupler
3. Clean the belts on the retard cartridge using a clean damp cloth or techwipe, then
dry them using a dry lint-free cloth. Note that the foam cells of the belt material will
hold a little ink and dirt so they will not return to the same colour as a new cartridge.
4. Clean first the upper and then the lower track surface using the dry lint-free wipes to
remove debris from between each drive belt and roller.
5. Vacuum the top and bottom internal surfaces of the core transport.
6. Push down on the pressure plate to its fullest extent and remove debris between the
infeed and transport mounting points using a vacuum or needle nose pliers.
7. Release the pressure plate and ensure it returns correctly to position parallel with
lower transport surface.
8. Enter SysApp and run a looped Transport Motor test (Device Diagnostics > SDM >
Loop On > Transport Motor Test.)
With the test running, use dry lint-free wipes to clean first the upper then the lower
transport belts. Apply light pressure and periodically adjust the position of the wipes
until no more dirt accumulates on them. Use a flashlight to verify that the belts are
clean.
CAUTION
Excessive pressure on the belts and rollers
while cleaning can cause the motor to
overheat or the gears to slip.
9. With the motor test cycle still running, clean the feeder/advance belt on top of the
core transport using a small tech wipe. Apply light pressure and periodically adjust
the position of the wipe until belt is white and no more dirt accumulates on the wipe.
10. With the motor test cycle still running, clean the four drive rollers inside the core
transport using a small tech wipe. Apply light pressure and periodically adjust the
position of the wipe until no more dirt accumulates on the wipe.
CAUTION
Excessive pressure on the belts and rollers
while cleaning can cause the motor to
overheat or the gears to slip.
2 pairs of drive rollers
11. Stop the looped motor test and then run the Feeder Cycle test while cleaning the 12
idle rive rollers inside the core transport using a small tech wipe or swab/chisel tool,
depending on the level of dirt. Apply light pressure and periodically adjust the
position of the wipe until no more dirt accumulates on the wipe. Rollers are best
cleaned by wiping across the direction of media flow.
3 sets of 4 idle rollers
12. Stop the feeder test and then re-install the retard cartridge, push in the ejector
bracket and secure it with the screw.
13. Use cleaning swabs or a brush to clean first the two sensors in the top and then the
14 sensors in the bottom of the transport. Apply light pressure and periodically adjust
the position of the swabs until no more dirt accumulates on them. Use a flashlight to
verify that the lenses are clean.
CAUTION
Excessive pressure can cause the sensor lens
to become loose. Do not use wet wipes to
clean sensors - they are attached directly to
unprotected circuit boards.
IBVM
1. Power the unit then remove the BV by disconnecting the harness and removing the
three screws from underneath. (See IBVM FRU removal instructions for full details).
2. Open the BV and clean first the upper then the lower surfaces using a drylint-free
wipe or brush to wipe between the rollers and sensors.
3. Clean the ten metal rollers using a cleaning swab/chisel tool held at a 45 degree
angle to the surface of the rollers while turning the rollers. Periodically discard the
dirt build-up from the tool, continue until the roller is clean and then vacuum under
the roller to prevent debris travelling through the device.
4. Clean the eight white plastic rollers (will look dark when dirty) using the swab/chisel
tool held at a 45 degree angle to the surface of the rollers while turning the rollers.
Periodically discard the dirt build-up from the tool until roller is clean then wipe the
roller across the direction of travel with a small tech wipe. Finally vacuum under the
roller to prevent debris travelling through the device.
5. Clean the fourteen rubber coated rollers: use a dry lint-free wipe to rub across the
direction of travel until the roller is clean then vacuum under the roller to prevent
debris travelling through the device.
6. Carefully clean the three scanning tracks using dry lint-free wipes to gently remove
debris from the surfaces without scratching. Press lightly and use only new wipes.
7. Clean the eight sensors with a cleaning swab/chisel tool, starting with horizontal
sensors then the vertical sensors which are located at the vertical transition point as
shown (push the green tab to gain access). Use a flashlight to check that the
sensors are clean.
CAUTION
Excessive pressure can cause the lens to
become loose. Do not use wet wipes to clean
sensors - they are attached directly to
unprotected circuit boards.
MICR/Endorser
CAUTION
Take care to not disturb the sensors while cleaning the rollers.
1. Clean the four white rollers using a large tech wipe held at a 45 degree angle to the
surface of the roller while slowly turning wheel 1. Periodically adjust the position of
the wipe until no more dirt accumulates on it and then vacuum under the roller to
prevent debris travelling through the device.
Note: use a pin or swab tool to pull any rolled pieces of document jammed between
the ribs on the wheels.
2. Clean the three yellow rollers using the swab/chisel tool held at a 45 degree angle to
the surface of the roller. Periodically discard the dirt build-up from the tool, continue
until the roller is clean and then vacuum under the roller to prevent debris travelling
through the device.
3. Clean the three bearings using the swab/chisel tool held at a 45 degree angle to the
surface. Periodically discard the dirt build-up from the tool, continue until the bearing
is clean and then vacuum under the bearing to prevent debris travelling through the
device.
4. Clean the three flat belts using dry lint-free wipes . Apply light pressure and
periodically adjust the position of the wipes until no more dirt accumulates on them.
Use a flashlight to verify that the belts are clean.
CAUTION
Excessive pressure on the belts and rollers while
cleaning can cause the motor to overheat or the gears to
slip.
5. Clean the sensor mirror using the swab/chisel tool. Apply light pressure and use a
flashlight to check that the sensor is clean with no debris or fogging present.
CAUTION
Excessive pressure can cause the sensor lens to become
loose. Do not use wet wipes to clean sensors - they are
attached directly to unprotected circuit boards.
6. Complete the cleaning process by vacuuming first the outer side of the MICR and
then the inside and bottom including the entrance to the endorser.
ERBM
1. Power down the unit then remove the escrow by disconnecting the harness and
removing the three securing screws. (See ERBM FRU removal instructions for full
details).
2. Important: Turn the ERBM over before cleaning to avoid debris falling into the unit.
3. Block the entry/exit slots to prevent debris entering while cleaning. Use a
swab/chisel tool to first chisel off the sticky debris off the slots and then wipe with the
swab to moisten any remaining traces. Then use a dry lint-free wipe to lift off the
residue until no more accumulates on the wipe.
4. Wipe over the rest of the unit with a dry lint-free wipe until no more dirt accumulates
on the wipe.
5. Vacuum the top surface (while still upside down) then vacuum the bottom surface,
finally turn the unit right way up and vacuum it again.
6. Re-install the ERBM and ensure it is correctly aligned with the transport path. (See
ERBM FRU replacement instructions for full details.)
7. Run the cleaning card through the SDM five times by using Sys App > Device
Diagnostics > SDM > Run to Run. The test will loop automatically until the card is
removed.
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0 Diagnostics
Controller Board LEDs
There are four LEDs mounted on the main controller board that indicate the success or
failure of the SDM start–up tests.
LED 4
LED 3
LED 2
LED 1
l = LED lit
¡ = LED not lit
4 3 2 1
¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ Successful start-up
¡ ¡ ¡ l Internal RAM failure
¡ ¡ l ¡ External RAM failure
¡ ¡ l l Code RAM failure
¡ l ¡ ¡ Core firmware checksum failure
¡ l ¡ l FPGA bitstream checksum failure
¡ l l ¡ Controlware firmware checksum failure
¡ l l l Sensor controller checksum failure
l ¡ ¡ ¡ Motor controller firmware checksum failure

l ¡ ¡ l Endorser firmware checksum failure
l ¡ l ¡ Ultrasonic double feed detect firmware checksum
failure
l ¡ l l Bin communications failure
l l ¡ ¡ ERBM communications failure
l l ¡ l IBVM communications failure
l l l ¡ USB enumeration failure
l l l l Failed during bootstrap of firmware
UDFD Transmit LEDs

There are two LEDs situated on the top of the device on the UDFD transmit board.
LED 1
l On - when the SDM is running.
l Off - SDM not running.
LED 2
l Off - SDM not running
l Slow flash - nothing in the transport
l Quick flash - single item in the transport
l On - multiple items in the transport; i.e. a bunch.
LED 1 LED 2
Level 1 Diagnostics
Device Self Test
The SDM device self test can be accessed via Device Self Tests on the System Application
Main Menu.
This test will return all items and will not capture to a bin even if presented media is not
taken. If media is retracted a subsequent Clear, Capture or Eject command must be issued
to dispatch or dispose of the media.
2. Prompts the user to insert at least two items - 1 note and 1 check. If no media is
detected within 15 seconds the device is disabled and the test is terminated with a
'Incomplete' status
3. Scans the two media items and moves them into the escrow.
4. If more than two items were inserted the excess is presented back to the user with a
prompt indicating the media is to be taken. If the media is not taken within 30
seconds it is retracted back into the infeed of the module far enough to allow the
shutter to close. The test terminates and a 'Fail' status is displayed.
5. For each check the front image and MICR codeline of each item scanned for 1
second.
6. For each note, the denomination information will be displayed.
7. A check will be moved into re-bunch after applying the endorsement string:
8. All other media in escrow will be moved directly into re-bunch. The media is then
presented as a bunch back to the user.
9. If the media is not taken within 30 seconds it is retracted back into the infeed of the
module far enough to allow the shutter to close. The test terminates and a 'Fail'
status is displayed.
Note: For SDMs with the DVM variant of the bill validator, device self test uses the built-in
test template which recognizes the NCR Dummy 10 note, an NCR DVM Sensor Test Note
and the USD $1 note. To perform DVM testing using the installed customer currency
template refer to the menu options under ‘Device Diagnostic Tests’, below.
Device Diagnostic Tests

The following diagnostics tests for the SDM can be accessed via Device Diagnostics on the
System Application Main Menu.
Note: Tests that can be looped are indicated by an asterisk (*) in the heading.
Deposit Bunch
Accepts a bunch of media then processes all items and send them to escrow. After all items
are processed the front and rear image of the last cheque processed are displayed for 5
seconds each. All notes are then captured to the cash bin and all cheques are captured to
the cheque bin. The rest of the items are returned. The following command sequence is
executed:
Enable
- a bunch of up to 50 items can be entered
- note denomination information displayed
- MICR line displayed for cheques
Display Front Image
- most recent front cheque image lifted
Display Back Image
Capture (to Cheque Bin)
- valid cheque items are captured to cheque bin for non-BSA
Capture (to Cash Bin)
- valid cash items are captured to cash bin for non-BSA
Capture (to Rebunch)
- rest of the items in the escrow moved to rebunch
Eject
- items are returned from rebunch
- media creeps out until taken or falls to ground.
Accept to Rebunch and Return *

Tests the main path of the device from infeed to transport to ERBM and finally back to
infeed. The following command sequence is executed:
Enable
- all media is moved to rebunch
- note denomination information displayed
Eject
- items are returned from rebunch
- media creeps out until taken or falls to ground.
Accept to Escrow and Send to All Bins *

Capture items to each bin to find out whether they are functional or not. The following
command sequence is executed:
Enable
- prompted for at least enough media to capture one item to each bin
- all media is moved to escrow
Capture (to cascade)
- items captured in cascading manner to cash bin, storage bin 2, retract bin 1, retract bin 2
and retract bin 3 if present.
Accept to Escrow, Endorse and Return *

Provides a full function test without capturing any media to a bin. Items are processed, last
item is displayed, then endorsed and returned to the tester. Any items still in escrow
captured to the rebunch and returned. The following command sequence is executed:
Enable
- a single item can be entered
- media is moved to escrow
Display Front Image
Display Back Image
Eject (test)
- last item processed is ejected from escrow and a test string is printed:
- endorsed item is presented back to the tester
Capture (to Rebunch)
- this step occurs only if media is in escrow
Eject
- any items in rebunch are returned to tester
- media creeps out until taken or falls to ground
Prompt for initial insertion advises tester not to insert cash to avoid printing on it. When
media is ejected, a prompt is displayed asking the user to remove it. Media will creep out
until taken or until if falls to the ground after which a ‘Media Taken’ message is displayed.
Clear to User
Runs the transport to make sure it is clear of items. Items found in the transport or escrow
are moved to re-bunch and presented as a bunch to the user.
If the items are not taken within 15 seconds, the prompt is removed and the items are
retracted back into the infeed and the shutter is closed. The message 'Media Not Taken' is
displayed and a Not Complete status is returned. If the items are taken, the prompt is
removed and a 'Media Taken' message is displayed.
Otherwise a 'Device Jammed' message is displayed and a Not Complete status is returned
Clear to Bin
Runs the transport to make sure it is clear of items. Items found in the transport or ERBM
are moved to Retract Bin 1.
Once all items are moved to the bin, if all sensors are clear a 'Device Clear' message is
displayed and a Complete status is returned. Otherwise a 'Device Jammed' message is
Sensor States *
Displays the current state of the shutter, interlock, non-track sensors and all track sensors.
The state of track sensors and guide latch sensors are shown using a series of ‘-‘(dash)
and ‘*’ (star) characters to signify states.
For track sensors dash= unblocked and star=blocked.
For guide latches dash=latched and star=unlatched.
For all other non-track sensors text strings are used to describe the state. For example,
possible shutter states are “Fully Closed” and “Fully Open” while the Interlock 24 volts can
be “Open” or “Closed”.
If looping is on then most sensors are updated at a rate of about once per second. The
Cheque Bin and the Cash Bin states are only updated following an integrity test. It is
recommended that either the interlock be opened and closed or the cash bin module
(CBM) be racked out and then back in. Either action will cause the driver to issue a
command to perform a CBM integrity test.
The display format will be similar to the following example:
Sensor Thresholds
Displays the current state of the deskew and track sensors followed by a listing of all track
sensor voltage A/D readings, LED current DAC settings and the maximum allowable LED
current setting when the device is tested in an ATM at the factory. Any sensors that have
eroded more that 50% of the margin available when new are flagged as “** CLEAN” to
signify that cleaning may be required. Any sensors that are unable to meet the target
sensor voltage output (≥200) at the maximum LED current setting (255) are flagged as “**
FAILED”.
The display format will be like the following example:
Accept & Return Cleaning Assistant

Runs a cleaning document through the main path of the device from infeed to transport to
ERBM and finally back to infeed. The cleaning document will be moved through this path 3
times before being returned to the user. The following command sequence is executed:
Enable
- a single cleaning document can be entered
- the item is moved to escrow
Capture
- the item is captured to rebunch
Eject
- item is returned from rebunch
Retract
- item is immediately retracted back to infeed
Enable (retracted)
- the item is again moved to escrow
Capture
- the item is captured to rebunch
Eject
- item is returned from rebunch
Repeats the above Retract to Eject sequence once.
If the media is not taken after 3 iterations of the test, the eject operation will continue to
creep it out until it falls to the ground.
Cash Bin Cleaning Assistant

The following command sequence is executed:
Processes a cleaning document and captures to the cash bin.
Enable (new)
- prompted for insertion of cleaning document
- item is moved to escrow
Capture
- items captured to cash bin
Check Bin Cleaning Assistant

Captures items to each bin to find out whether they are functional or not. The following
command sequence is executed:
Enable
- prompted for at least enough media to capture one item to each bin
- all media is moved to escrow
Capture
- items captured to cheque bin
Infeed/Feeder Cleaning Assistant

Runs infeed and feeder motors to support cleaning of belts and rollers using stationary
cleaning cards. The motors go through a sequence cycle that roughly simulates a media
feed operation. The test repeatedly cycles the advance drive, the retard drive and the
infeed clutch for a period of 1.5 minutes.
Transport Cleaning Assistant

This applet supports the cleaning of drive rollers, idlers and belts in the deskew and the
horizontal section of the bill validator transport path using a stationary cleaning card. The
test will run the core module transport motors – deskew stepper and image stepper. The
direction is out of the module as if an item is being moved from escrow back to the infeed.
The transport runs for a period of 1.5 minutes.
The Cancel FDK can be used to abort the 1.5-minute test period and stop all motors.
MICR Transport Cleaning Assistant

This applet supports the cleaning of drive rollers, idlers and belts in the vertical section of
the bill validator and MICR reader transport path using stationary cleaning cards. The test
will run the core module transport motors – deskew stepper and image stepper. The
direction is into the module as if an item is being moved from infeed to escrow. The
transport runs for a period of 1.5 minutes.
The Cancel FDK can be used to abort the 1.5-minute test period and stop all motors.
Display Front Image

Opens a window displaying the most recent set of front images lifted. Each image type
(red, green, blue, IR and colour) is displayed for 5 seconds or until a key is pressed. If no
front image has been lifted a "No Image To Display" message is displayed.
Display Back Image

Opens a window displaying the most recent set of back images lifted. Each image type
(red, green, blue, IR and colour) is displayed for 5 seconds or until a key is pressed. If no
back image has been lifted a "No Image To Display" message is displayed.
Device Integrity Test *

Performs a full integrity diagnostic of all modules including IBVM, ERBM and CBM. If no
checks are detected in the transport, sensors are calibrated. Any errors detected during
this test will be reported.
Note: This test does not perform a test transaction and no check will be entered.
IBVM/DVM Integrity Test *

Sensors are calibrated and cameras are checked to make sure all available illumination
sources are working. Any errors detected during this test will be reported.
Escrow/Re-bunch Integrity Test *

exercised. Any errors detected during this test will be reported.
Capture Bin Integrity Test *

exercised. Any errors detected during this test will be reported.
Shutter Test *
Cause the shutter to open and close.
Feeder Cycle Test (looping)

If a Feeder module is not present, then this test will not be displayed.
exercised. The test exercises the module but does not diagnose problems or report errors.
Endorser Cycle Test (looping)

The endorser ribbon motor will be run continuously during a 3 second test cycle.
This test exercises the endorser motors to allow observation of the mechanism cycling. It
does not diagnose problems or report errors.
Solenoid Test (looping)

This test will sequentially activate and deactivate any solenoids within the SDM device.
This test exercises the solenoid to provide a visual aid only. It does not diagnose problems
or report errors.
Transport Motor Test (looping)

Causes the all motors associated with the infeed, feeder and SDM Core transport to cycle
on and off in alternating directions. The motors will run in one direction for 2 seconds, stop
for 1 second, and then run in the opposite direction for 2 seconds.
When the cycle is completed all motors and solenoids are powered off.
This test exercises the transport to provide a visual aid only. It does not diagnose problems
or report errors.
Enable
Includes a range of selections to allow testing of four different codeline fonts (E13B, CMC7,
OCRA, OCRB). On SDMs with the DVM variant of the bill validator there's also the option
'Enable using DVM Test Template' to use the built-in test template instead of the customer
currency template .
The user is prompted to insert a bunch of up to 50 items. If there are no items found within
15 seconds the device is disabled, a message saying 'No media entered' is displayed and a
If any notes are detected the denomination and count information is displayed for 5
seconds, or until a key is pressed. For each non-cash item, the front and back red, green,
blue, IR and colour images are saved in 'bmp' format. The codeline on any inserted
cheques will be read using the currently active MICR font and reported.
If an item jams, a message is displayed indicating 'Unable To Enable' and a Not Complete
status is returned.
Once all media is successfully placed in escrow a Complete status is returned.
Rebunch All
This test requires at least one item in escrow. If there is no media in escrow a message is
displayed indicating ‘No Document Present’ and a Not Complete status is returned.
All items are transported from escrow to the rebunch mechanism.

If an item jams, a message is displayed indicating ‘Unable To Rebunch’ and a Not
If the items are successfully placed into the rebunch mechanism then a Complete status is
returned.
Eject
If there is no document present in the transport a message is displayed indicating ‘No
document present’ and a Not Complete status is returned.
Otherwise, any items in the feeder, SDM Core or rebunch mechanism are returned to the
user. Media is returned from each possible location in the following order:
1. IFM (in-feed module)

2. SCM (SDM Core module)
3. ERBM – Rebunch
As each item or bunch reaches the shutter opening a prompt is displayed indicating where
the media came from and asking the user to remove it. If the media is not taken within 15
seconds, the prompt is removed and the document is retracted back into the infeed of the
module far enough to allow the shutter to close. A message is displayed indicating ‘Media
Not Taken’ and a Not Complete status is returned. If the media is taken, the prompt is
removed and a ‘Media Taken’ message is displayed.
This media present and taken cycle continues until all media has been returned to the user.
Once all media is ejected and removed a Complete status is returned.
Capture to Cheque Bin

This test requires at least one item in escrow. If there is no item available a message is
A single item is moved into Cheque Bin. If the document jams during the capture, a
message is displayed indicating ‘Unable To Capture’ and a Not Complete status is
returned. If the item is successfully placed into the bin then a Complete status is returned.
Capture to Cash Bin

A single item is moved into Cash Bin. If the document jams during the capture, a message
is displayed indicating ‘Unable To Capture’ and a Not Complete status is returned. If the
item is successfully placed into the bin then a Complete status is returned.
Capture to Retract Bin 1

A single item is moved into Retract Bin 1. If the document jams during the capture, a
Capture to Retract Bin 2

A single item is moved into Retract Bin 2. If the document jams during the capture, a
Run To Run *
Enable
- all media is moved to the escrow
- note denomination information is displayed
- SDMs with a DVM variant of the bill validator will use the built-in test template to recognize
US$1, NCR test 10 note and a special sensor test note.
Display Front Image
- most recent front check image lifted is displayed
Display Back Image
- most recent back check image lifted is displayed~
Re-bunch
- repeated until the escrow is empty
Eject
- items are ejected.
Note Data Collection

Supports IBVM data collection and will only be used by certified NCR template managers.
For this test it is expected that RS-232 communication with the IBVM will be disconnected
from the SDM and connected to a laptop computer running the IBVM data collection utility.
Enable
- a bunch of up to 50 notes can be entered
- all notes are moved to escrow
Rebunch
- repeated until escrow empty
Eject
- items are ejected.
Level 3 Diagnostics
S_Data
The S_DATA returned for the SDM are:
S_ Meaning
DATA
02 WARNING (May require attention, continue to use and log error information, warn operator if
possible)
03 SUSPEND (Do not use the device for the application-defined time period)
04 FATAL (Do not use this device again, requires immediate attention)
Tallies
diagnostic and normal use. The SDM tallies are as follows:
Mnemonic Tally Description ID

PROC_CNT Number of items read and imaged (Feed count). 0
ENTRIES Number of items or bunches entered (Enable count). 1
SINGLES Number of single item entries. 2
NUM_DOCS Number of items processed successfully. 3
TAKEN Number of items returned (Taken count). 4
TRANFAIL Number of inconvenience faults. 5
FATALSOH Number of out-of-service faults. 6
TRAN_CLR Number of items cleared to a bin (using Clear command) 7
USBDSCON Number of USB disconnections or resets. 8
COMSTOUT Number of communications timeouts. 9
DBL_FEED Number of double feed detections. 10
TOOTHICK Number of items found to be too thick to transport. 11
TOOSHORT Number of items found to be too short to transport. 12
TOO_LONG Number of items entered that were longer than 240mm. 13
TONARROW Number of items entered that were less than 63mm wide. 14
DSKWFAIL Number of de-skew failures. 15
MICRFAIL Number of MICR reader failures. 16
IMG_FAIL Number of image processing failures. 17
CORE_JAM Number of jams in SDM Core transport. 18
CORE_ERR Number of SDM Core sensor or electro-mechanical faults. 19
NOTECAT2 Number of ECB6 category 2 notes (counterfeits). 20
NOTECAT3 Number of ECB6 category 2 notes (suspect). 21
NOTECAT4 Number of ECB6 category 2 notes (genuine). 22
SHUT_OPS Number of shutter operations. 23
SHUTJAMO Number of shutter open jams. 24
SHUTJAMC Number of shutter closed jams. 25
INFD_JAM Number of jams detected in the infeed transport 26
INFD_ERR Number of infeed sensor or electro-mechanical faults. 27
FEED_JAM Number of jams in feeder mechanism/transport. 28
FEED_ERR Number of feeder module sensor or electro-mechanical faults. 29
IBVM_JAM Number of jams in image and bill validator module transport. 30
IBVM_ERR Number of IBVM sensor or electro-mechanical faults. 31
EN_CHARS Number of endorsement characters printed. 32
Mnemonic Tally Description ID

ESCROW Number of items sent to escrow. 33
REBUNCH Number of items moved into the re-bunch mechanism 34
ERBM_JAM Number of jams in ERBM transport. 35
ERBM_ERR Number of ERBM sensor or electro-mechanical faults. 36
CBIN_JAM Number of jams detected in the capture bin module 37
CBIN_ERR Number of capture bin module sensor or electro-mechanical faults. 38
CHCK_BIN Number of items captured to the check bin. 39
CASH_BIN Number of items captured to the cash bin. 40
RET_BIN1 Number of items captured to retract bin 1. 41
RET_BIN2 Number of items captured to retract bin 2 (Counterfeit Bin) 42
Error Codes
M_Status and M_Data
To de-code the data use the Status Code Translator Tool (available from
http://www.infoprod.ncr.com) or refer to Diagnostic Status Code Notebook (B006-6273).
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENT
From the System Application Main Menu, select the option Self-Service Configuration,
then select Set Device Configuration and choose Scalable Deposit Module. The following
configuration options will be displayed:
Set Codeline Format for SysApp ENABLE

Displays the CodelineFormat parameter that will be used for ENABLE commands issue
through SysApp – Diagnose ENABLE and SelfTest. The displayed value reflects the
setting of Operational Parameter ‘SysAppCodelineFormat’. Four possible codeline types
are E13B, CMC7, OCRA and OCRB.
If the CodelineFormat is changed then the SDM Feature registry key

SysAppCodelineFormat will be updated with the selected value. After confirming the
change the user will be informed that change will take immediate affect with no need for an
ATM re-boot.

Displays the SDM version number, the Main Controller Board revision number and the
version numbers of the currently downloaded firmware.
When IBVM is present the template file name is shown and when DVM is present the USB
and install information is shown.
Display Module Information

Displays the part number and serial number (or equivalent) for each SDM module that has
this information available. Only the ERBM has an actual serial number, the NCR built
modules use a tracer number and build date to uniquely identify them.
Display Template Information

Displays bill validation template information and details version information for the bill
validator firmware, FPGA data, PLD data, parameter data and template data.
Copy SDM Trace Logs To Removable Media

Allows copying of the low-level SDM trace log files onto a onto a removable memory device
for return to level-2 support for problem analysis. First a folder is created named "SDM Log
Files". Starting with the SdmTrace.log file any files found in the SDM log folder
“C:\Program Files\NCR APTRA\USB Scalable Deposit Module\Logs” will be copied.
For the preventive maintenance schedule and details of the required tasks for the SDM,
refer to the Preventive Maintenance section of this manual.

Units (FRUs) of the SDM.
The FRUs are:
l Capture Bin Module (CBM)

l Infeeds
l Short infeed
l Mid-short infeed
l Mid-long infeed
l Long infeed
l Bill Validator Module (IBVM or DVM)

l Escrow and Re-bunch Module (ERBM)
l Core module including the controller board
l Retard cartridge.
Note: The controller board is not an FRU and cannot be removed separately.
Throughout these procedures, left and right hand sides are defined regarding the device
not the ATM. The infeed is defined as the front of the device.
CAUTION
Use a magnetised screwdriver when removing and replacing
screws. Any screws dropped inside the SDM must be found and
removed to avoid damage to the device.
Capture Bins
CAUTION
Take care when handling the CBM as it is heavy when full.
1. Remove the first bin by sliding the latch to the right (front access ATMs) or the left
(rear access ATMs). Use the handle on the end of the bin to pull it out of the SDM
until you can reach the handle on the top. Lift the bin out of the SDM.
1
1
2 2
Rear Access xxFront Access
2. Slide the latch again and using the recessed handle on the side, carefully pull out the
second bin until you can reach the handle on the top. Lift the bin out of the SDM.
1
1
2 2
spacing
Rear Access xxxxFront Access
Infeed
CAUTION
Do not lean on the infeed - this will damage it.
Removal
1. Loosen the cover retaining screw.
Cover
Retaining
Screw
2. Raise the cover.
Cover
3. Disconnect the infeed harness.
In-feed Harness
4. Loosen the left hand disc retaining screws half a turn.
Disc Retaining
Screw
Slot
Locking
Disc
Disc Retaining
Screw
5. Insert a flat blade screwdriver into the slot and rotate the yellow disk clockwise until it
aligns with the infeed hinge, as shown. If the yellow disk is difficult to rotate then
push inwards on the front of the infeed to relieve the pressure on the disk and allow it
to rotate more easily.
Slot
Locking
Disc
6. Loosen the right hand disc retaining screws half a turn.
Disc Retaining
Screw
First Slot
Locking
Disc
Disc Retaining
Screw
Note: covers removed for clarity.
7. Insert a flat blade screwdriver into the first slot and rotate the yellow disk anti-
clockwise until the second slot is visible. If the yellow disk is difficult to rotate then
push inwards on the front of the infeed to relieve the pressure on the disk and allow it
to rotate more easily.
8. Insert the screwdriver into the second slot and rotate once more until the disk aligns
with the infeed hinge, as shown.
Second Slot
Locking
Disc
9. Take hold of the infeed and pull it straight back off the nose of the SDM. Do not move
the infeed side to side while pulling as this may damage it.
Note: When removing the infeed from the SDM take care not to hit it off the safe or
other parts of the ATM.
Replacement
1. Make sure that the infeed locking disks are aligned as shown.1
2. Offer up the infeed to the front of the SDM.
3. Align the yellow flap with the infeed. The flap should be on top of the lower transport
belts.
Flap
In-feed
4. Firmly push the infeed onto the nose of the SDM. It will clip into place.
5. On the left hand side of the infeed, insert a flat blade screwdriver into the slot and
rotate the yellow disk anti-clockwise as far as it will go to lock the infeed into place. If
the yellow disk is difficult to rotate then push inwards on the front of the infeed to
relieve the pressure on the disk and allow it to rotate more easily. Tighten the two
locking disc retaining screws.
Disc Retaining
Screw
Slot
Locking
Disc
Disc Retaining
Screw
6. On the right hand side of the infeed, insert a flat blade screwdriver into the slot and
rotate the yellow disk clockwise as far as it will go to lock the infeed into place. If the
yellow disk is difficult to rotate then push inwards on the front of the infeed to relieve
the pressure on the disk and allow it to rotate more easily. Tighten the two locking
disc retaining screws.
Disc Retaining
Screw
First Slot
Locking
Disc
Disc Retaining
Screw
7. Re-connect the infeed and earth harnesses.

8. Close the cover and tighten the cover retaining screw.
BILL VALIDATOR (IBVM)

IBVM Removal
1. Disconnect the two harnesses at top right of the module.
2. Loosen the two sprung screws under the bill validator.
Retaining Screws
3. Remove and retain the retaining screw.
Retaining
Screw
4. Lift the bill validator up and back, then away from the SDM.
IBVM Replacement
1. Offer up the bill validator to the SDM.
2. Make sure that the fingers interface together, there should be approximately 1 mm
(0.03 in.) clearance when the module is correctly aligned.
Interface
Fingers
Interface
Fingers
3. When replacing the module make sure the plastic cover is not trapped by the belts.
Trapped
Cover
4. Once the module fingers are correctly interfaced replace and tighten the retaining
screw.
5. Tighten the sprung screws under the bill validator.
6. Re-connect the harnesses.
BILL VALIDATOR (DVM)
DVM Removal
1. Disconnect the two harnesses at top right of the module. You may need to loosen
the clamp.
2. Remove and retain the three screws under the bill validator.
3. Lift the bill validator up and back, then away from the SDM.
DVM Replacement
1. If the DVM being fitted is replacing an IBVM, first remove the plastic belt cover and
carefully trim it to the dimensions shown.
2. Place the DVM into position on the SDM.
3. Make sure that the fingers interface together: there should be approximately 1 mm
(0.03 in.) clearance when the module is correctly aligned.
4. Once the module fingers are correctly aligned, replace and tighten the three
retaining screws.
5. Re-connect the harnesses to the DVM and adjust the clamp if necessary.
6. If the DVM being fitted replaces an IBVM, replace the belt cover. Ensure that the
reworked cover has clearance and is not trapped by any belts or gears.
7. A new template for the DVM will need to be downloaded to replace the IBVM
template.
ERBM
Before the ERBM can be removed the SDM must be removed from the ATM.
You will need to lay the SDM on the floor to remove the ERBM. If space is limited, remove
the infeed before starting this procedure (See "Infeed" instructions).
1. Dis-connect the comms cable. Undo the clip and remove the USB cable.
USB USB Comms

Cable Clip Connector Connector
2. Remove the four connectors from the other side of the controller board.
Control
Board
Connectors
3. Remove and retain the two dowels at the front of the device and the two screws at
the rear.
Dowels
Screws
4. Lift the SDM out of the cradle and carefully lay it down on the side with the cover and
metal side support.
Note: Be careful not to damage the infeed if it is still fitted.
Note: Avoid laying the SDM on its bottom as this can damage it.
Cover Side Support
5. Remove and retain the two ERBM retaining screws.
ERBM Retaining Screw
ERBM Retaining Screw
6. Remove the ERBM retaining shaft.
ERBM Retaining Shaft
7. Move the ERBM over until you can see the ERBM harness - pull the harness
through the hole in the frame.
ERBM Harness
8. Lift away the ERBM.
9. Check that the ERBM harness is routed under the bracketry as indicated by the
arrow in the illustration below. If not then disconnect and re-route.
Replacement
1. Push the ERBM harness back through the hole in the frame.
2. Loosely replace the ERBM retaining shaft.
3. Rotate the ERBM into position until it clicks into place.
4. Replace the two ERBM retaining screws.
5. Tighten the ERBM retaining shaft.
6. Place the SDM back in the cradle taking care not to trap any harnesses.
7. Make sure the SDM is aligned with both the front and rear mounting holes.
8. Replace the rear mounting screws.
9. Replace the front dowels.
10. Replace the four controller board connectors.
11. Replace the comms cable and USB cables. Close the USB cable clip.
12. Check that no harnesses have been trapped.
13. Check that the ERBM is correctly aligned with the SDM core eject path. See
guidance for M_Status 39 in ‘Troubleshooting Procedures’
14. Replace the infeed if previously removed.
Core Module
The core module is what remains when all the other FRUs have been removed.
Retard Cartridge
Note that the newer type of cartridge is shown on the right above, the following images
show the older type but the instructions apply to both.
Replace the cartridge if:
l documents are damaged during processing

l Too Many Entry Failures error message is reported (M_Status 7)
l the belts in the cartridge are of uneven height, as if running at different tensions
l the belts in the cartridge are worn: thinning, smooth surface, possibly even with
reinforcing cords showing (red/orange colour)
Removal
1. Remove and retain the screw securing the ejector bracket on the core module.
2. Use a flat-headed screwdriver to pry the ejector bracket out slightly. This releases
the retard cartridge. You may need to slide the screwdriver or something similar
behind the bracket to hold it out while you remove the cartridge.
3. Lift the green latch (‘B’) on the core module and press down the pressure plate in
front of the retard cartridge.
4. Gently lever the front of the cartridge upwards by hand to dislodge it. A flat-headed
screwdriver could also be used. Do not use excessive force. If you have difficulty
removing the cartridge make sure the ejector bracket is fully out, then re-seat the
cartridge and roll the cartridge belts back and forth by hand before trying again to
remove it.
5. When the cartridge is removed from the core module, inspect the drive shaft and
ejector bracket. The bracket should have at least 0.5 mm clearance around the
entire shaft. If the bracket out of place or is rubbing on the shaft (as shown below)
then it may be necessary to replace the core module.
Replacement
Note: Be sure to run the Installation Verification test once done with the replacement.
1. Lift the large green latch (‘B’) on the core module and press down the pressure
plate.
2. Place the cartridge in the correct orientation over the opening in the long fixed guide,
then press the spring-loaded drive coupler on the rear of the cartridge fully in and
gently press the cartridge down into place.
3. Release the drive coupler and while holding the cartridge in place, push the ejector
bracket back in on side of the fixed guide, then secure the bracket with the retained
screw.
4. Check the installation of the cartridge:

a. Manually rotate the retard cartridge belts. If it is connected correctly to the drive
train, it should require firm handling to rotate the roller and will click when the
shaft has engaged with the coupler on the cartridge.
b. Press down on the cartridge near the sensor opening: the cartridge should not
move up or down easily (that is, should not feel spongy or springy), although
some horizontal motion is acceptable. If the cartridge moves excessively,
reinstall it, if this does not solve the problem replace the core module.
5. When the installation is complete and has been checked, test the operation of the
SDM by running a number of documents through to the escrow and then eject them
back out to the infeed.
Installation Verification
When installation is complete, verify the correct running of the retard cartridge by looping
the feeder cycle test and observing the cartridge running with the deskew guide open. The
feeder cycle test is test #8 on page 2 of the Sysapp menu.
Also verify the correct running of the transport by running a mix of 10 notes and 5 cheques
from the capture bin through the run to run test in Sysapp (test #8, page 3). Run them 3
times. If a jam occurs, attempt to eject it. If it cannot be ejected or more than 2 jams occur in
the SDM core, replace the core in addition to the cartridge.
Test Bunch Passes Total On Failure Pass/Fail Pass/Fail

Size Docs Inconvenience Unrecoverable
Faults Faults
For a TSS during a Detailed Field Investigation
Run to Run - 10 Currency / 5 15 20 300 Eject/Clear to <6 <= 1 across all
Cheques User/Clear to tests
Bin
Test Bunch Passes Total On Failure Pass/Fail Pass/Fail

Size Docs Inconvenience Unrecoverable
Faults Faults
Enable E13B/Capture to Cash Bin - 15 20 300 Eject/Clear to <6 <= 1 across all
10 Currency / 5 Cheques User/Clear to tests
Bin
Cheques Position in Infeed - Centre User/Clear to tests
Bin
For a CE
Cheques User/Clear to tests
Bin
Enable E13B/Capture to Cash Bin - 15 3 45 Eject/Clear to <2 <= 1 across all
10 Currency / 5 Cheques User/Clear to tests
Bin
CABLING
PCB to CBM - Harness
J22-STKBIN
2 1
4,10 11,12 2 1
4 3
2 4 4 3
6 5
13,14 23 6 5
8 7
1 3 8 7
10 9
10 9
5 12 11
6 12 12 11
9 14 13
5 11 14 13
8 3 16 15
4 10 16 15
2 1 18 17
3 9 18 17
6 7 20 19
2 8 20 19
22 21
1 7 SENSOR 22 21
SIGNAL NAME START FINISH

Reset~ J22-STKBIN - 1 P2 – PANEL - 9
Mod_Ready J22-STKBIN - 2 P2 – PANEL - 3
Device_Sel~ J22-STKBIN - 3 P2 – PANEL - 10

+24V J22-STKBIN - 4 P1 – PANEL - 2
GND J22-STKBIN - 5 P2 – PANEL - 12
RxD J22-STKBIN - 6 P2 – PANEL - 2
TxD J22-STKBIN - 7 P2 – PANEL - 8
Sdata J22-STKBIN - 8 P2 – PANEL - 4
Sclk J22-STKBIN - 9 P2 – PANEL - 11
+24V J22-STKBIN - 10 P1 – PANEL - 2
GND J22-STKBIN - 11 P1– PANEL - 4
GND J22-STKBIN - 12 P1 – PANEL - 4
+24V I/L J22-STKBIN - 13 P1 – PANEL - 1
+24V I/L J22-STKBIN - 14 P1 – PANEL - 1
CbmLatch-LED+ J22-STKBIN - 15 SENSOR
CbmLatch-LED+ J22-STKBIN - 16 SENSOR
CbmLatch-SEN_C J22-STKBIN - 17 SENSOR
CbmLatch-SEN_E J22-STKBIN - 18 SENSOR
Mst-AmbLedEn~ J22-STKBIN - 19 MST_LED - 1
+5V_Ftr1 J22-STKBIN - 20 MST_LED - 4
Mst-GnLedEn~ J22-STKBIN - 21 MST_LED - 3
Mst-RedLedEn~ J22-STKBIN - 22 MST_LED - 2
Chassis Ground P1 – PANEL - 3 RING
PCB to Stepper Motors - Harness

REAR
J21 - STEP MOTORS
1
6 1 9
6 1 2
7 2
7 2 3
8 3 8
8 3 4
9 4 3
9 4 5
10 5
10 5 6
4
LED
DESKEW
6 6 7 2 1
5 4 3 2 1

DskOUT2A J21–STEP MOTORS - 1 DESKEW - 1
DskOUT2B J21–STEP MOTORS - 2 DESKEW - 3
RearOUT1B J21–STEP MOTORS - 3 REAR - 4
RearOUT1A J21–STEP MOTORS - 4 REAR - 6
+5V J21–STEP MOTORS - 5 LED-ANODE
DskOUT1A J21–STEP MOTORS - 6 DESKEW - 6
DskOUT1B J21–STEP MOTORS - 7 DESKEW - 4
RearOUT2B J21–STEP MOTORS - 8 REAR - 3
RearOUT2A J21–STEP MOTORS - 9 REAR - 1
WhiteLedEn~ J21–STEP MOTORS - 10 LED-CATHODE
Arrowhead Sensor - Harness

SENSOR
P1
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1

ANODE P1 - 1 SENSOR - 1
CATHODE P1 - 2 SENSOR - 2
EMITTER P1 - 3 SENSOR - 3
COLLECTOR P1 - 4 SENSOR - 4
LOOP SENSOR - 1 SENSOR - 4
Solenoids, Endorser Motor - Harness

2 1
2 1
DSKW_HARD_2_3
DSKW_SOFT
1
3
2
4
14
14
13
13
12
11 J18-SOLEN OIDS_MTR DSKW_HARD_1

10
10
6
9
2
9
5
8
1
8
7 8
7 2
6 7
6 1
5
5
4 DVRT_SOL
4
3
3
2
2
1 CLUTCH
1
ENDRSR_MTR
1 2 14 15 15 14
9 10 5 4 3 2 1

DskwHard23_SOL_DRV J18-SOLENOIDS_MTR - 1 DSKW_HARD_2_3 - 1
+24V_SOL J18-SOLENOIDS_MTR - 2 DSKW_HARD_2_3 - 2
DskwSoft1_SOL_DRV J18-SOLENOIDS_MTR - 3 DSKW_SOFT - 1
+24V_SOL J18-SOLENOIDS_MTR - 4 DSKW_SOFT - 2
DskwHard1_SOL_DRV J18-SOLENOIDS_MTR - 5 DSKW_HARD_1 - 1
+24V_SOL J18-SOLENOIDS_MTR - 6 DSKW_HARD_1 - 2
Dvrt_SOL_DRV J18-SOLENOIDS_MTR - 7 DVRT_SOL - 1
+24V_SOL J18-SOLENOIDS_MTR - 8 DVRT_SOL - 2
Clutch_DRV J18-SOLENOIDS_MTR - 9 CLUTCH - 1
+24V_SOL J18-SOLENOIDS_MTR - 10 CLUTCH - 2

Endrsr_SOL_DRV
+24V_SOL
Endrsr_Mtr_RTN J18-SOLENOIDS_MTR - 13 ENDRSR_MTR - 5
+24V_IL J18-SOLENOIDS_MTR - 14 ENDRSR_MTR - 1
LOOP ENDRSR_MTR - 2 ENDRSR_MTR - 4
INF/FDR Sensors/Motors - Harness
20 40
20 40
19 39
19 39
18 38
18 38
17 37
17 37
16 36
16 36
15 35
15 35
14 34
14 34 ADV_MTR 5
13 33 44
13 33 4
12 32 30
12 32 3
11 31 33 TS5_A 1
11 31 2 53
10 30 11 2
10 30 1 25
9 29 J2-INFD_SENS 50 3
9 29 6
8 28 4
8 28 54
27
7 27
6
6 26
5 25
5 25 BNCH_MTR TS5_B
4 24 TS19
4 24
3 23
3 23
2 22 53 18 38 1 47 10 13 29 41 55 7 25 54
2 22 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
1 21
1 21
15 1
21 2
16 2
22 3
17 3
23 4
18 4
24 5
19 5
34 14
20 6
35 15
21 7
55 39
22 8
FDR_ACT_SEN INFEED 40 20
23 9
27 8
7 1 24 10
47 41 INF_ACT_MTR 1 28 9
8 2 43 25 11
48 42 2
9 3 56 26 12
49 43 3
10 4 27 13
50 44 4
11 5 LOOP 56 28 14
45 5
12 6 49
46 J13-DC_MTRS
FDR_ACT_MTR RET_MTR
51 57 51 45 48 12 32 31 42
5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1

+3.3V_TSFilter J2-INFD_SENS - 1 TS19 - 1
LedTS1 J2-INFD_SENS - 2 INFEED - 1
LedTS5a J2-INFD_SENS - 6 TS5_A - 3
LedTS5b J2-INFD_SENS - 7 TS5_B - 3
GND(Infeed -id) J2-INFD_SENS - 8 INFEED - 9
GND(Infeed -id) J2-INFD_SENS - 9 INFEED - 10
+5V(Infeed -HE) J2-INFD_SENS - 10 BNCH_MTR - 4
+5V(Adv-HE) J2-INFD_SENS - 11 ADV_MTR - 2
+5V(Retard -HE) J2-INFD_SENS - 12 RET_MTR - 4
GND(Infeed -HE) J2-INFD_SENS - 13 BNCH_MTR - 3
Inf-Act-LED+ J2-INFD_SENS - 14 INFEED - 5
Inf-Act-LED- J2-INFD_SENS - 15 INFEED - 6
Fdr-Act-LED+ J2-INFD_SENS - 16 DR_ACT_SEN
Fdr-Act-LED- J2-INFD_SENS - 17 DR_ACT_SEN
LedTS19 J2-INFD_SENS - 18 TS19 - 3
Spare J2-INFD_SENS - 19
LatchInf-LedEn~ J2-INFD_SENS - 20 INFEED - 8
SenTS1 J2-INFD_SENS - 21 INFEED - 15
SenTS5a J2-INFD_SENS - 25 TS5_A - 2
SenTS5b J2-INFD_SENS - 26 TS5_B - 2
InFeed-Type0 J2-INFD_SENS - 27 INFEED - 23
InFeed-Type1 J2-INFD_SENS - 28 INFEED - 24
InFeed-HE-Sen J2-INFD_SENS - 29 BNCH_MTR - 2
Adv-HE-Sen J2-INFD_SENS - 30 ADV_MTR - 4
Retard-HE-Sen J2-INFD_SENS - 31 RET_MTR - 2
GND(Retard -HE) J2-INFD_SENS - 32 RET_MTR - 3
GND(Adv-HE) J2-INFD_SENS - 33 ADV_MTR - 3
Inf-Act-SEN_C J2-INFD_SENS - 34 INFEED - 19
Inf-Act-SEN_E J2-INFD_SENS - 35 INFEED - 20
Fdr-Act-SEN_C J2-INFD_SENS - 36 FDR_ACT_SEN

Fdr-Act-SEN_E J2-INFD_SENS - 37 FDR_ACT_SEN
SenTS19 J2-INFD_SENS - 38 TS19 - 2
+5V_Ftr1 J2-INFD_SENS - 39 INFEED - 7
LatchInf-SW J2-INFD_SENS - 40 INFEED - 22
InfeedMot+ J13-DC_MTRS - 1 BNCH_MTR - 1
RetardMot+ J13-DC_MTRS - 2 RET_MTR - 1
Inf-ActMot+ J13-DC_MTRS - 3 INF_ACT_MTR - 1
AdvMot+ J13-DC_MTRS - 4 ADV_MTR - 5
Fdr-ActMot+ J13-DC_MTRS - 5 FDR_ACT_MTR - 1
SpareMot+ J13-DC_MTRS - 6
InfeedMot- J13-DC_MTRS - 7 BNCH_MTR - 5
RetardMot- J13-DC_MTRS - 8 RET_MTR - 5
Inf-ActMot- J13-DC_MTRS - 9 INF_ACT_MTR - 5
AdvMot- J13-DC_MTRS - 10 ADV_MTR - 1
Fdr-ActMot- J13-DC_MTRS - 11 FDR_ACT_MTR - 5
SpareMot- J13-DC_MTRS - 12
+3.3V_TSFilter TS19 - 4 TS5_A - 1
+3.3V_TSFilter TS5_A - 4 TS5_B - 1
+3.3V_TSFilter TS5_B - 4 INFEED - 21
LOOP INF_ACT_MTR - 2 INF_ACT_MTR - 4
LOOP FDR_ACT_MTR - 2 FDR_ACT_MTR - 4
Upper Guide Sensors - Harness

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
32 22 10 31 25 13 2 25 27 14 3 28 23 11 32 28 15 4 29
UPR1_LTCH TS7 TS8 TS9
5
21 UPR2_LTCH
J10-UPPER_SENS 4
12
3
24
2
12 24 31
12 24 1
11 23 BNCH_LTCH
11 23
10 22
10 22
21 DS4 1
9 21 30
8 2
8 20 19
7 19 3
7 19 8
6 18 4
6 18
5 17
5 17
4 16
4 16
3 15
3 15
2 14 DS1
2 14
13
1 13
25 5 16 1
4 3 2 1
DS2 DS3
27 6 17 26 30 7 18 29
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1

+3.3V_TSFilter J10-UPPER_SENS - 1 DS1 - 1
LedTS7 J10-UPPER_SENS - 2 TS7 - 3
LedDS1 J10-UPPER_SENS - 5 DS1 - 3
LedSpare3 J10-UPPER_SENS - 9
LatchUpper1_LedEn~ J10-UPPER_SENS - 10 UPR1_LTCH - 3
LatchUpper2_LedEn~ J10-UPPER_SENS - 11 UPR2_LTCH - 3
BunchRtn_LedEn~ J10-UPPER_SENS - 12 BNCH_LTCH - 3
SenTS7 J10-UPPER_SENS - 13 TS7 - 2
SenDS1 J10-UPPER_SENS - 16 DS1 - 2

SenSpare3 J10-UPPER_SENS - 20
+5V_Ftr2 J10-UPPER_SENS - 21 BNCH_LTCH - 4
LatchUpper1_SW J10-UPPER_SENS - 22 UPR1_LTCH - 2
LatchUpper2_SW J10-UPPER_SENS - 23 UPR2_LTCH - 2
BunchRtn_SW J10-UPPER_SENS - 24 BNCH_LTCH - 2
+3.3V_TSFilter DS1 - 4 TS7 - 1
+3.3V_TSFilter TS7 - 4 DS2 - 1
+3.3V_TSFilter DS2 - 4 TS8 - 1
+3.3V_TSFilter TS8 - 4 TS9 - 1
+3.3V_TSFilter TS9 - 4 DS3 - 1
+3.3V_TSFilter DS3 - 4 DS4 - 1
+5V_Ftr2 BNCH_LTCH - 1 UPR1_LTCH - 4
+5V_Ftr2 UPR1_LTCH - 1 UPR2_LTCH - 4
Infeed Drain Wire - Harness
FASTON RING

Chassis Ground FASTON RING
Rear Guide Sensors - Harness

1 2 3 4
1 8 2 15
TS12 1 2 3 4
15 9 3
TS13
J11 - REAR GUIDE

7 14
7 14
6 13
6 13
5 12
5 12
4 11
4 11
3 10 LED
3 10
2 9
2 9
1 8
1 8
REAR_LTCH

+3.3V_TSFilter J11-REAR GUIDE - 1 TS12 - 1
LedTS12 J11-REAR GUIDE - 2 TS12 - 3
LedTS13 J11-REAR GUIDE - 3 TS13 - 3
LedSpare2 J11-REAR GUIDE - 4
LatchRear_LedEn~ J11-REAR GUIDE - 5 REAR_LTCH - 3
Endorser_LedEn~ J11-REAR GUIDE - 6 LED - CATHODE
Spare J11-REAR GUIDE - 7
SenTS12 J11-REAR GUIDE - 8 TS12 - 2
SenTS13 J11-REAR GUIDE - 9 TS13 - 2
SenSpare2 J11-REAR GUIDE - 10
+5V_Ftr2 J11-REAR GUIDE - 11 REAR_LTCH - 4
LatchRear_SW J11-REAR GUIDE - 12 REAR_LTCH - 2
LatchEndorser_SW J1 J11-REAR GUIDE - 13
Spare J11-REAR GUIDE - 14
+3.3V_TSFilter TS12 - 4 TS13 - 1
+5V_Ftr2 REAR_LTCH - 1 LED - ANODE
PCB to IBVM- Harness

1
1
2
2
3
IBVM_MOD 3
7 4
7 14 4
6 13 J20 - IBVM 5
6 13 5
5 12 6
5 12 6
4 11 7
4 11 7
3 10 8
3 10 8
2 9 9
2 9 9
1 8 10
1 8 10
11
11
12
12
13
13

GND J20-IBVM - 1 IBVM_MOD - 1
+24V_BVM J20-IBVM - 2 IBVM_MOD - 2
BVM_RESETn J20-IBVM - 6 IBVM_MOD - 6
BVM_RDYIN J20-IBVM - 7 IBVM_MOD - 7
BVM_DEVSELn J20-IBVM - 8 IBVM_MOD - 8
BVM_RxD_IN J20-IBVM - 10 IBVM_MOD - 10
BVM_TxD_OUT J20-IBVM - 11 IBVM_MOD - 11
BVM_SDATA J20-IBVM - 12 IBVM_MOD - 12
BVM_SCLK J20-IBVM - 13 IBVM_MOD - 13
Spare J20-IBVM - 14
PCB to MICR - Harness

2 1 2 1
201 1 201 1
4 3 4 3
202 2 202 2
6 5 6 5
203 3 203 3
8 7 8 7
204 4 204 4
10 9 10 9
205 5 205 5
JP2-SDM MICR J1-MICR BRD

GND JP2-SDM MICR-1 J1-MICR BRD-1
MICR_STB JP2-SDM MICR-201 J1-MICR BRD-201
+15V JP2-SDM MICR-2 J1-MICR BRD-2
Key JP2-SDM MICR-202 J1-MICR BRD-202
MICR_CLK JP2-SDM MICR-3 J1-MICR BRD-3
MICR_DAT JP2-SDM MICR-203 J1-MICR BRD-203
POT_CS JP2-SDM MICR-4 J1-MICR BRD-4
POT_DATA JP2-SDM MICR-204 J1-MICR BRD-204
PCB to UDFD - Harness

1 14
1 14
2 13
2 13
3 12
3 J1-UDFD J2-TRANSMIT BRD 12
4 11
4 11
5 10
5 10
6 9
6 9
7 8
7 8
8 7
8 7
9 6
9 6
10 5
10 5
11 4
11 4
12 3
12 3
13 2
13 2
14 1
14 1

+15V_UDFD J1-UDFD-1 J2-TRANSMIT BRD -1
GND J1-UDFD-2 J2-TRANSMIT BRD -2
+5V_UDFD J1-UDFD-3 J2-TRANSMIT BRD -3
LedTS6 J1-UDFD-4 J2-TRANSMIT BRD -4
SenTS6 J1-UDFD-5 J2-TRANSMIT BRD -5
UDFD1_DETECTn J1-UDFD-6 J2-TRANSMIT BRD -6
UDFD_C2Dcon J1-UDFD-7 J2-TRANSMIT BRD -7
UDFD_C2CKcon J1-UDFD-8 J2-TRANSMIT BRD -8
SingleDoc1con_n J1-UDFD-9 J2-TRANSMIT BRD -9
SerialTxD0_out J1-UDFD-10 J2-TRANSMIT BRD -10
SerialRxD0_in J1-UDFD-11 J2-TRANSMIT BRD -11
SpeedDetectedcon_n J1-UDFD-12 J2-TRANSMIT BRD -12
UDFD2_DETECTcon_n J1-UDFD-13 J2-TRANSMIT BRD -13
UDFD_Spare_in J1-UDFD-14 J2-TRANSMIT BRD -14
UDFD TX to RX - Harness
12
1 12
2 11
2 11
3 J1-TRANSMIT BRD J1-RECEIVE BRD 10
3 10
4 9
4 9
5 8
5 8
6 7
6 7
7 6
7 6
8 5
8 5
9 4
9 4
10 3
10 3
11 2
11 2
12 1
12 1

+5V J1-TRANSMIT BRD-1 J1-RECEIVE BRD-1
TRK_IRSEN J1-TRANSMIT BRD-2 J1-RECEIVE BRD-2
PEAK_RESET J1-TRANSMIT BRD-3 J1-RECEIVE BRD-3
UDFD2_PeakValue J1-TRANSMIT BRD-4 J1-RECEIVE BRD-4
UDFD2_Stage1 J1-TRANSMIT BRD-5 J1-RECEIVE BRD-5
UDFD1a_PeakValue J1-TRANSMIT BRD-6 J1-RECEIVE BRD-6
UDFD1b_PeakValue J1-TRANSMIT BRD-7 J1-RECEIVE BRD-7
UDFD1a_Stage1 J1-TRANSMIT BRD-8 J1-RECEIVE BRD-8
UDFD1b_Stage1 J1-TRANSMIT BRD-9 J1-RECEIVE BRD-9
GND J1-TRANSMIT BRD-10 J1-RECEIVE BRD-10
Spare J1-TRANSMIT BRD-11 J1-RECEIVE BRD-11
Spare J1-TRANSMIT BRD-12 J1-RECEIVE BRD-12
Infeed Lower - Harness
INF_ACT_SEN
8 18
14 28
7 17
13 27
6 16
12 26 TRANSPORT
5 15
11 25
4 14
10 24 INF_LTCH
3 13 1
9 23
2 12 2
8 22 11
1 11 3
7 21 1
10 10 4
6 20 2
9 9 5
5 19 TS3-4_BOT
1
4 18 19
2
3 17 15
3
2 16 6
4
1 15 20
UPPER
TS1-2_BOT
7 18 5 16 20 19 8 17 12
5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1

LatchInf-LedEn~ TRANSPORT - 7 INF_LTCH - 3
+5V_Ftr2 TRANSPORT - 8 INF_LTCH - 4
Inf-Act-LED- TRANSPORT - 9 INF_ACT_SEN
Inf-Act-LED+ TRANSPORT - 10 INF_ACT_SEN
LedTS4 TRANSPORT - 11 UPPER - 3
LedTS3 TRANSPORT - 12 TS3-4_BOT - 3
LedTS2 TRANSPORT - 13 UPPER - 5
LedTS1 TRANSPORT - 14 TS1-2_BOT - 3
InFeed-Type1 TRANSPORT - 19 TRANSPORT - 5
InFeed-Type0 TRANSPORT - 20 TRANSPORT - 6
LatchInf-SW TRANSPORT - 21 INF_LTCH - 2
+3.3V_TSFilter TRANSPORT - 22 TS1-2_BOT - 1
Inf-Act-SEN_E TRANSPORT - 23 INF_ACT_SEN
Inf-Act-SEN_C TRANSPORT - 24 INF_ACT_SEN
SenTS4 TRANSPORT - 25 TS3-4_BOT - 2
SenTS3 TRANSPORT - 26 UPPER - 2
SenTS2 TRANSPORT - 27 TS1-2_BOT - 2

SenTS1 TRANSPORT - 28 UPPER - 4
+3.3V_TSFilter TS1-2_BOT - 4 TS3-4_BOT - 1
+3.3V_TSFilter TS3-4_BOT - 4 UPPER - 1
Infeed Upper - Harness

5
5 LOWER TS1-2_TOP 1
4 6
4 2
3 2
3 3
2 1
2 4
1
1
TS3-4_TOP
6 3 4 5
4 3 2 1

LedTS2 LOWER - 1 TS1-2_TOP - 3
SenTS1 LOWER - 2 TS1-2_TOP - 2
LedTS4 LOWER - 3 TS3-4_TOP - 3
SenTS3 LOWER - 4 TS3-4_TOP - 2
+3.3V_TSFilter LOWER - 5 TS3-4_TOP - 1
+3.3V_TSFilter TS3-4_TOP - 4 TS1-2_TOP - 1
Controller Board
J10 J11 J13

J18
J1
J2
J21
J4
JP1
P1
P3
P2
J22
J23
J17
JP2
J20

J1 UDFD (Ultra sonic double feed detect) JP1 Endorser
J2 Infeed Sensor JP2 MICR
J4 Shutter P1 USB
J10 Upper Guide Sensors P2 Power
J11 Rear Guide Sensors P3 Interlock Switch
J13 DC Motors
J17 Camera
J18 Solenoids - Endorser Motor
J20 IBVM
J21 Stepper Motors

J22 Stack Bin
J23 ERBM
The following test documents are available to test the SDM:
l MICR test document 484-0046074 and 484-0046075

l Test Check packet 484-0050345
l Test Deck A 484-9000989
l Test Deck C/SCPM, SDM Maximum Size 004-9002285
REVISION

15. RECYCLERS
Revision 1850
Cash Acceptor and Recycler Cassettes 1851
Revision 1882
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the Global Bunch Recycle Unit (GBRU) and the Global Bunch Note
Acceptor (GBNA). Both devices can transport a bunch of banknotes from the facia entry
slot to a separator and then perform recognition and validation processes on these notes.
Notes not recognized as banknotes may be returned to the entry slot, or captured,
depending upon the mode of operation of the device. Additionally the GBRU can dispense
notes from the currency cassettes to the entry slot.
The GBNA/GBRU is available as a standard variant or as an extended variant which can

accommodate larger cassettes.
The GBNA/GBRU is also available as a type ‘A’ or type ‘B’ variant. Type ‘B’ variants have a
narrower guide path and can be identified by coloured labels on the Pre-acceptor,
Separator and Escrow FRUs, as shown below.
CAUTION
Risk of explosion if BV battery* is replaced by an incorrect type.
Dispose of used batteries in accordance with local regulations.
* BV battery is not an NCR field replaceable item. This caution is
required for UL certification.
DESCRIPTION
The diagram below names the units in the GBNA/GBRU.
Reject Bin
Pre-Acceptor
Counterfeit
Separator
Reservoir
& Reject
Escrow
Capture
BV
Cassette
4 3 2 1
Note: In this description and throughout the chapter the terms “left” and “right” are
regarded as when looking directly on the pre-acceptor of the GBNA/GBRU. The Pre-
acceptor is regarded as the “front”.
Currency Dimensions
The GBRU and GBNA can accept banknotes of the following dimensions:
Currency length (long edge)

Type A Type B
Deposit 120 mm (4.72 in.) to 120 mm (4.72 in.) to
182 mm (7.17 in.) 166 mm (6.54 in.)
Recycle 127 mm (5.00 in.) to 127 mm (5.00 in.) to
182 mm (7.17 in.) 166 mm (6.54 in.)
Extended Recycle 150 mm (5.91 in.) to 138 mm (5.43 in.) to
182 mm (7.17 in.) 166 mm (6.54 in.)
Currency width (short edge)

60 mm (2.36 in.) to 86 mm (3.39 in.)
Mechanism
Banknotes are handled by the GBRU and GBNA as follows:
l Feed method - Placed in a bunch of notes up to 25 mm thick (200 flat notes)

l Feed direction - Long edge of notes presented to inlet
l Dispensable notes - Dispensed in a bunch up to 25 mm thick (200 flat notes)
l Feed speed - 7 banknotes per second
l Speed of transport:
l Main transport - 1200 mm/sec.
l Pre-acceptor/bunch - 160 mm/sec.
l Top transport/bunch - 140 mm/sec.
l Number of cassettes: Configured for 2 or 4 cassettes

l Capacity of cassettes:
l Standard Deposit Cassette - 1700 - 2300 notes
l Extended Deposit Cassette - 2800 - 4400 notes
l Standard Recycler Cassette - 1400 - 2000 notes
l Extended Recycler Cassette - 2600 - 4100 notes
l Capacity of removable reject bin:

l Counterfeit compartment - 10 notes
l Capture compartment - 200 notes
l Reject compartment - 200 notes
l Capacity of fixed reject bin (GBNA):

l Counterfeit compartment - 10 notes
l Capture compartment - 200 notes
l Capacity of escrow - 25 mm bunch (200 flat notes)

l Recycling capability (GBRU) - Up to 4 denominations
Movement Of Notes
The movement of notes through the GBRU and GBNA is considered under the following
headings:
l Note Categorization
l Accept
l Deposit
l Reject
l Dispense (GBRU Only)
l Capture
Note Categorisation
For notes in general circulation four categories of condition have been defined. The way in
which banknotes are handled by the GBNA/GBRU is controlled by the mode of operation
of the device (termed the Categorization Mode, 0 to 3). The following table briefly describes
the action taken by the device for the four defined categories of notes against the four
Categorization Modes.
Note Category
Categorisation 1 - Not recognized as 2 - Elements 3 - Elements not clearly 4 - Banknotes
Mode banknote because of identified as authenticated. Suspect fully
wrong image or counterfeit. Image banknotes. Image format and authenticated
format, transport and format authentication features (IR, UV, as genuine. All
error, large dog-eared recognized but one magnetism, security thread) authentication
or missing sections, or more recognized, but tolerance checks
hand written notes, authentication and/or quality deviations. In delivered
separating cards, etc., features (IR, UV, most cases unfit or soiled positive results.
or wrong currency. magnetism, security banknotes. Not to be recycled. May be used
thread) missing or for recycling.
out of tolerance.
0 - Non-ECB Return to cardholder. Return to cardholder Return to cardholder. Accept for
processing.
Return on
cancel.
1 - ECB Return to cardholder. Capture. No return. Accept for processing. No Accept for
Special return on cancel. processing.
(Germany) Return on
cancel.
2 - (China) Return to cardholder. Capture. No return. Return to cardholder. Accept for
Processing.
Return on
Cancel.
3 - ECB Return to cardholder. Capture. No return. Accept for processing. Return Accept for
Standard on cancel. processing.
Return on
cancel.
Note: 1. ECB = European Central Bank
Note: 2. ECB6 = Suspected counterfeit note retention (in BNAs). Named after article 6 European
Central Bank Council Regulation 1338/2001.
Accept (Primary Receipt of Notes)

Reject Reject
ECB6
Suspect
Cassette
On an Accept the GBNA/GBRU transfers a bunch of notes (maximum 25mm height) from
the facia to the Separator via the Pre-acceptor.
The Separator takes notes from the bunch and transfers them to the BV consecutively,
where their characteristics are checked by an optical line sensor, a magnetic sensor, a UV
sensor and a thickness sensor. Depending upon the check results, notes are transferred to
the Escrow if genuine, or to a Reservoir if rejected. Notes in the Reservoir are bunched up
and returned to the facia slot.
In the ECB6 mode, if a note is identified as counterfeit, it is transferred to the counterfeit

area of the Reject Bin. Depending upon the settings, suspect notes can be distributed to a
Suspect Cassette, Escrow, or a Reservoir.
The following table summarizes the flow of notes for an Accept.
Categorization Mode/Destination
Source Category of Notes Non-ECB6 Mode ECB6 Mode
Pre-acceptor All Separator Separator
Separator Cat. 4 Genuine Escrow Escrow

Damaged Escrow Escrow
Cat. 3 Suspect Not applicable Germany: Suspect cassette
China: Reservoir Standard:
Escrow (by parameter)
Cat. 2 Counterfeit Not applicable Counterfeit area
Cat. 1 Not recognized Reservoir Reservoir
Overflow of Escrow Reservoir Reservoir
Deposit (Secondary Receipt of Notes)
ECB 6
Suspect
Cassette
During the Deposit the bunch of notes in Escrow is lifted up and transferred to the
Separator.
The Separator takes each note from the bunch and transfers it to the BV unit consecutively,
where its characteristics are checked by the Optical line sensor, Magnetic sensor, UV
sensor and Thickness sensor. Depending upon the check results, each note is transferred
by denomination to a corresponding cassette, or to the reject area in Reject Box if
damaged. If identified as counterfeit, the note is transferred to the counterfeit area of the
Reject Bin.
The following table summarizes the flow of notes for a Deposit.
Escrow All Separator Separator
Separator Cat. 4 Genuine Storage cassettes Storage cassettes
Damaged Reject area Suspect cassette
Cat. 3 Suspect Not applicable Germany: Suspect cassette
China: Reject area
Standard: Suspect cassette
(by parameter)
Cat. 1 Not recognized Reject area Reject area
Overflow of Deposit or Configured Cassette or Configured Cassette or
recycle storage cassette Reject area Reject area
Refund (Cancel Deposit)
During a Refund (cancelled deposit) the bunch of notes in the Escrow is lifted up and
returned to the facia slot via the Pre-acceptor.
The following table summarizes the flow of notes for the Refund.
Source Category of Notes Destination

Escrow All Pre-acceptor
Dispense (GBRU Only)
ECB6
Suspect
Cassette
The Dispense function is available on the GBRU only.
Notes from a cassette are checked at Bill Validation unit and transferred to the Escrow.
The following table summarizes the flow of notes for a Dispense.
Storage Cat. 4 Genuine Escrow Escrow
cassette Damaged Reject area Reject area
Cat. 3 Suspect Not applicable Reject area (default) Escrow
or Suspect cassette
(configurable)
Cat. 1 Not recognized Reject area Reject area
Overfeed from storage cassette Reject area Reject area
Capture
On a Capture any notes left behind by a cardholder are taken back to the Separator, and
those left in the Escrow are also taken back to the Separator. The Separator takes notes
from the bunch and transfers them to the BV consecutively, where their characteristics are
checked by the Optical line sensor, Magnetic sensor, UV sensor and Thickness sensor. All
the notes are transferred to a specified location which may be, the Reject Area, the
Capture Area, or Bill Cassettes.
ECB 6
Suspect
Cassette
The following table summarizes the flow of notes for a Capture.
Pre- Cat. 4 Genuine Reject or Capture area or Reject or Capture area or
acceptor Damaged optionally to configured optionally to configured
/Escrow / cassettes cassettes
Reservoir Cat. 3 Suspect Not applicable Reject or Capture area or
optionally to configured
cassettes
Cat. 1 Not recognized Captured area or optional Captured area or optional
retract to reject area retract to reject area.
Dual GBNA/GBRU
Dual GBNA/GBRU allows two devices to be deployed in the one ATM, allowing maximum
capacity and availability. The second device is identified by a label marked as 2, adjacent to
the racking out handle.
In addition on the second device, a connector is installed to the SHT position on the Lower
PCB, as shown below.
Connector
Power Requirement
The power requirement for the GBNA/GBRU is as follows:
l Input voltage = +24 Vdc and +24 Vdc interlocked

l Internally generated supplies +12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, and +5 Vdc
l Peak current measured at GBNA/GBRU input connector = 30 A
There are three fuses in the module power supply:
l Fuse 1 = 250 V 10 A (Littelfuse)

l Fuse 2 and Fuse 3 = 250 V 30 A (Littelfuse)
Sensors And Actuators

The diagram below shows the positions of sensors and actuators throughout the
GBNA/GBRU. The sections that follow name the sensors and actuators in each functional
unit and briefly describe their functions.
The drawing below represents older models of GBNA/GBRU:
Pre - Acceptor Separator Escrow / Reservoir Upper Transport

Unit Unit Unit Unit
Reject Bin
BV Unit
Lower
Transport
Unit
Currency
Cassette
Pre - Acceptor Separator Escrow / Reservoir Upper Transport

Unit Unit Unit Unit
Reject Bin
BV Unit
Lower
Transport
Unit
Currency
Cassette
Pre-Acceptor
Symbol GBRU GBNA Class Function

PABM X X Stepper Motor Belt drive
PATM X X Stepper Motor Tray drive
PACM X X Stepper Motor Clamp drive
PAMG X X Linear Solenoid Accept Stopper drive
PDMG X X Linear Solenoid Dispense Stopper drive
PHMG X X Linear Solenoid Hook drive
PTHC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Upper Transport home
position
POLC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect overload
PDPC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect tray delivery position
PRPC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect tray release hook position
PCEC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect carrier end position
PDAC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect D-stopper arrive position
PHPC X X Photo-Interrupter Monitor the status of PHMG
PHBC X X Photo-Interrupter Monitor the status of PABM
PLPC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect length check position
PTPC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect tray pulse
PBPC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect belt transfer pulse
PS1S X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Trigger for Shutter 1

PTCS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Trigger for Clamp
PASS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Trigger for Accept-Stopper
PDSS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Trigger for Dispense-Stopper
The drawing below represents the latest model of GBNA/GBRU:
FRU Memory
PDAC PAMG
POLC
PTHC
PCEC
PRPC
PS1S PTCS PHPC PDSS
PS2S
PS3S
PTPC
PS4S
PATM
PACM PHBC
PABM PBPC
PHMG

PABM X X Stepper Motor Belt drive
PATM X X Stepper Motor Tray drive
PACM X X Stepper Motor Clamp drive
PAMG X X Linear Solenoid Hook drive
PHMG X X Linear Solenoid D-stopper drive
PTHC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Upper Transport home
position
POLC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect overload
PDPC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect tray delivery position
PRPC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect tray release hook position
PCEC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect carrier end position
PDAC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect D-stopper arrive position
PHPC X X Photo-Interrupter Monitor the status of PHMG
PHBC X X Photo-Interrupter Monitor the status of PABM
PTPC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect tray pulse
PBPC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect belt transfer pulse

PTCS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Trigger for Clamp
PDSS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Trigger for Dispense-Stopper
FRU X X Memory FRU Memory for Pre-Acceptor
Memory
Separator
SRMG
SPUC
SESM
SPBC SFOC SFIC
SEFM
SSUC
SSEC SEPM SSRS

SPPC SSLS
SSLC SFPC SSOS
SPCC
SDOS LSDOS SDIS LSDIS
Back:SCDC
Front:SHDC
SBLC SEDM

SEPM X X Stepper Motor Pusher drive
SESM X X Stepper Motor Stage drive
SEFM X X Stepper Motor Pick drive
SEDM X X Stepper Motor Deskew drive
SRMG X X Linear Solenoid Return Roller drive
SPUC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Pusher upper position
SSUC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Stage upper position
SSLC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Stage lower position
SPPC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Pusher press position
SPBC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Pusher bridge position
SSEC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Separator empty
SFPC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Feed Roller phase
SCDC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect the centre of the Deskew lever

SHDC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect the home position of the Deskew
lever
SFOC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect the width of note in left position
SFIC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect the width of note in right position
SPCC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Pusher pulse check
SBLC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect BV Entry Unit lock state
SSLS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Pre-check skew - left
SSRS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Pre-check skew - right
SSOS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Pre-check skew - Outside
SDIS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Detect Deskew - in position
SDOS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Detect Deskew - out position
Escrow / Reservoir
EELS ESCM
EERS ECRC
EERC ECHC
ECPC ECCC ERUC
ERLS
ERRS
ERSM ERRC
FRU
Memory
EDLS
EDRS
ETLS
ERLC ETRS EBMG
ESPC EESM EEUC
ESMG EELC
EECS

EESM X X Stepper Motor Escrow Stage drive
ERSM X X Stepper Motor Reservoir Stage drive
ESCM X X Stepper Motor Carrier drive
EBMG X X Rotary Solenoid ESC-B Gate drive
ESMG X X Rotary Solenoid Escrow Stopper drive
ECHC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Carrier home position
ECCC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Carrier clear position
ECPC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Carrier push-back position
ERUC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Reservoir stage upper position
ERRC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Reservoir Stage release position
ERLC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Reservoir Stage lower position

EERC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Escrow Stage release position
EEUC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Escrow Stage upper position
EELC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Escrow Stage lower position
ESPC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Escrow Stopper position
ECRC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Carrier Reservoir position
EELS X X Infrared Sensor/LED-L Detect Escrow empty - left
EECS X X Infrared Sensor/LED-L Detect Escrow empty - centre
EERS X X Infrared Sensor/LED-L Detect Escrow empty - right
ETLS X X Infrared Sensor/LED-L Detect top of stacked notes - left
ETRS X X Infrared Sensor/LED-L Detect top of stacked notes - right
ERLS X X Infrared Sensor / LED- Detect notes that pass in doorway of Reservoir area
S - left
ERRS X X Infrared Sensor / LED- Detect notes that pass in doorway of Reservoir area
S - right
EDLS X X Infrared Sensor / LED- Detect notes that pass in doorway of Escrow area -
S left
EDRS X X Infrared Sensor / LED- Detect notes that pass in doorway of Escrow area -
S right
FRU X X Memory FRU Memory for Escrow
Memory (Latest model of GBNA/GBRU only)
Upper Transport
UULC UEFS
UFFC
UEMG
UERS
UDMG URFC
UECS
UTMM
UCFC
URLC
UGDS
UGLC
UGAS
URHS
UAMG UCMG ULPC

UTMM X X DC Brushless Motor Main Transport drive
UAMG X X Rotary Solenoid UB-A Gate drive
UCMG X X Rotary Solenoid UB-C Gate drive (Reject Bin gate)
UDMG X X Rotary Solenoid UB-D Gate drive (Captured area gate)
UEMG X X Rotary Solenoid UB-E Gate drive (Reject area gate)
UULC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Upper-Lock state
URLC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Reject-Lock state
UCFC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Capture area full
UFFC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Forgery area full
URFC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Reject area full
ULPC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Lower Base position state
UGLC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Guide Lock state
UGAS X X Infrared Sensor / LED- Trigger for (UA-UC) Gate
S
UGDS X X Infrared Sensor / LED- Trigger for (UD-UE) Gate
S
URHS X X Infrared Sensor / LED- Detect notes remaining at rear hole
S
UECS X X Infrared Sensor / LED- Detect notes that pass through the entrance of the
S Capture area
UEFS X X Infrared Sensor / LED- Detect notes that pass through the entrance of the
S Forgery area
UERS X X Infrared Sensor / LED- Detect notes that pass through the entrance of the
S Reject area
BV Entry Transport
UFHS

UFHS X N/A Infrared Sensor / Detect notes remaining at front entry
LED-S slot
Bill Validation Structure

The arrangement of sensors in the Bill Validation Unit is as shown below:
Optical Line Sensor Magnetic Sensor Thickness Sensor
Optical Line Sensor UV Sensor*

(Optional)
* In the GBVE version of the bill validator, the UV sensor is included in the Optical Line
Sensor and is not a separate UV spot sensor.
Lower Transport
LFHS LRHS
LT3S BLLC
L4MG L3MG L2MG L1MG

L(1-4) MG X (X) Rotary Solenoid Cassette gate drive
BLLC X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Lower Transport Lock state
LT3S X N/A Infrared Sensor / LED-S Trigger for L3/L4 Gate
LFHS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Detect notes remaining at entry
LRHS X X Infrared Sensor / LED-S Detect notes remaining at exit
Lower Base
BS4M BF4M BS3M BF3M BS2M BF2M BS1M BF1M
D4C D3C D2C D1C

BS (1-4)M X X Stepper Motor Cassette Stage drive
BF (1-4)M X N/A Stepper Motor Cassette Pick drive
D (1-4) (0-4)C X X Custom Magnetic Switch Detect Cassette denominations (4 bit)
Currency Cassette
CL[1-4]S CP[1-4]C
CR[1-4]S
CE[1-4]C
CS[1-4]C
C[1-4]MG
CV[1-4]C
CT[1-4]S
NE[1-4]C CO[1-4]C
NF[1-4]C
CF[1-4]C

C(1-4)MG X X Linear Solenoid Cassette Feed Roller Lock drive
CF(1-4)C X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Cassette full
CE(1-4)C X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Cassette empty
CP(1-4)C X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Stage press position
CS(1-4)C X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Feed Roller status
CV(1-4)C X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Vaned Wheel phase
CO(1-4)C X X Photo-Interrupter Detect Feed Roller Lock state
CL(1-4)S X X Infrared Sensor/LED-S Detect notes that pass through doorway - left
CR(1-4)S X X Infrared Sensor/LED-S Detect notes that pass through doorway - right
CT(1-4)S X X Infrared Sensor/LED-L Detect the top of stacked notes
NE(1-4)C X - Photo-Interrupter Detect Cassette nearly empty
NF(1-4)C X - Photo-Interrupter Detect Cassette nearly full
TROUBLESHOOTING
Status Indicator Lights
An optional status indicator panel is located on the front of the module. The panel has a
map of the GBNA/GBRU with 28 status indicator LEDs to pinpoint any problems in each
area..
Rear Access Front Access
The lights indicate status as follows:
Status Indicator Light Colour State Description

Upper Module Status Indicator Red OFF Upper Module has no problem to report.
Lights ON SOLID At least one latch in the Upper Module is not closed.
FLASHING Upper Module is reporting a jam or fault condition.
Amber ON SOLID Nearly full
Green OFF Upper Module is ‘Not Ready to Use’.
ON SOLID Upper Module is ‘Ready to Use’.
Lower Module Status Indicator Red OFF Lower Module has no problem to report.
Lights Cassettes removed
ON SOLID At least one latch in the Lower Module is not closed.
FLASHING Lower Module is reporting a jam or fault condition.
Amber ON SOLID Full, Nearly full, Low or Empty of cassettes
Green OFF Lower Module is ‘Not Ready to Use’.
Cassettes removed
ON SOLID Lower Module is ‘Ready to Use’
Separator front door (No. 9) N/A OFF No power.
Escrow Top cover (No. 15)
Top transport latch (No. 20) Red ON SOLID The latch is open or not properly secured.
Under RJ door (No. 22)
Lower transport latch (No. 25) Green ON SOLID The latch is closed with no attention required.
Lower Module latch (No. 29)
Reject Bin Status Indicator N/A OFF Removed
Light (No. 19) Red ON SOLID Full
Amber ON SOLID Nearly full
Green ON SOLID OK
Cassette Position 1 N/A OFF Removed
Cassette Position 2 Red ON SOLID Attention required: cassette not correctly loaded or
Cassette Position 3 full
Cassette Position 4
Amber ON SOLID Full, Nearly full, Low or Empty
Green ON SOLID OK
Shutter Status Indicator Light Red FLASHING Shutter error
Green ON SOLID OK
Error Messages
The tables in this section provide recommended corrective actions for the error messages
listed. All of the sensors in the device are self-cleaning under normal operating conditions.
However, if any sensors do become dirty as a result of, for example, misuse, NCR
recommends cleaning these with a soft, dry, lint-free cloth.
1. Refer to the NCR publications B006-6273 Diagnostic Status Code Notebook and
B006-6524 GBNA/GBRU Error Code Specification for details of the GBNA/GBRU
M-status and device error codes mapped to FRU locations.
2. Refer to B006-6622-A000 GBRU/GBNA Circuit Diagrams for details of all circuits.
FRU Locations
The following illustrations identify the locations of each of the FRUs referenced in this
section. The top illustration is viewed from the left-hand side of the device, the bottom is
viewed from the right-hand side.
Separator Separator to Escrow/Reservoir

Pre-acceptor Escrow/Reservoir
Timing Belts
Upper Transport
Removable
Reject Bin
BV Entry
Transport
Bill Validator
Gas Strut
(BV) and Fan
Lower Transport
4 3 2 1
Currency
Cassettes
Separator to
Escrow/Reservoir
Main Upper Upper Transport Timing Belt Pre-acceptor
PCB
Separator PCB
Main Timing Upper Module

Belt Link Cable
BV Entry
Transport
Push Latch
(Rear Access)
Lower
Transport
Deposit Motor
Recycler Motor
Lower PCB
Power Supply (Reed Switches
PCB behind)
Error Tables
Shutter
Error Message M_ SOH Corrective Action

Status Action/Type
Unable to determine 26 Inspect_ The shutter is attached to the rear side of the ATM facia.
Shutter position Now/Repair Check for damage or jam condition.
Remove foreign object, debris or jammed notes.
Refer to Foreign Object Removal (page 52) and Jam Clearance
– Upper Module (page 33).
Check for misalignment. Refer to Adjustments (page 68).
Pre-acceptor

Status Action/Type
Pre- 27 Inspect_ Also see potential causes and fixes for this M_Status in the Standard Work
Acceptor Now/Repair Instructions http://www.infoprod.ncr.com/html/swi/
Mechanism Replace FRU. Refer to FRU Replacement (page 81).
Failure
Pre- 0 Clean_ Self-cleaning. Visually inspect sensors. If dirty, clean with a dry, lint-free
Acceptor Soon/Repair cloth. If damaged, replace FRU. Refer to FRU Replacement (page 81).
Sensor Dirty
Other Pre- 4 Inspect_ Check for damage or jam condition. Remove foreign object, debris or
Acceptor Now/Repair jammed notes. Refer to Foreign Object Removal (page 52) and Jam
Failure Clearance – Upper Module (page 33). Otherwise, replace FRU. Refer to FRU
Pre- 28 Replacement (page 81).
Acceptor
Transport
Sensor
Failure
Other Pre- 28
Acceptor
Transport
Failure
Separator
Error Message M_Status SOH Corrective Action

Action/Type
Separator Pusher 29 Inspect_ Check for damage or jam condition.
Jammed Up Now/Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed notes. Refer to
Separator Pusher 29 Foreign Object Removal (page 52) and Jam Clearance – Upper
Jammed Down Module (page 33).
Otherwise, replace FRU. Refer to FRU Replacement (page 81).
Separator Stage 29
Jammed Up
Separator Stage 29
Jammed Down

Action/Type
Other Separator 29 Inspect_ Check for damage or jam condition.
Failure Now/Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed notes. Refer to
Foreign Object Removal (page 52) and Jam Clearance – Upper
Module (page 33).
Otherwise, replace FRU. Refer to FRU Replacement (page 81).
Also see potential causes and fixes for this M_Status in the Standard Work Instructions
http://www.infoprod.ncr.com/html/swi/
Separator's feed & 0 Replace_ Replace FRU. Refer to FRU Replacement (page 81).
pick roller rubber Soon/Replace
worn
Separator Sensor 0 Clean_ Self-cleaning.
Dirty Soon/Repair Visually inspect sensors. If dirty, clean with a dry, lint-free
cloth. If damaged, replace FRU. Refer to FRU Replacement
(page 81).
Separator Transport

Status Action/Type
Separator 30 Inspect_ Check for damage or jam condition.
Transport Sensor Now/Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed notes. Refer to Foreign
Failure Object Removal (page 52) and Jam Clearance – Upper Module (page
Other Separator 30 33).
Transport Failure Otherwise, replace FRU. Refer to FRU Replacement (page 81).
Pre Bill Validator (BV Entry Transport)

Action/Type
Pre-Bill Validator 31 Inspect_ Check for damage or jam condition.
Transport Sensor Now/Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed notes. Refer to
Failure Foreign Object Removal (page 52) and Jam Clearance – Upper
Other Pre-Bill 31 Module (page 33).
Validator Otherwise, replace FRU. Refer to FRU Replacement (page 81).
Transport Failure
Pre-Bill Validator 0 Clean_ Self-cleaning.
Transport Sensor Soon/Repair Visually inspect sensors. If dirty, clean with a dry, lint-free
Dirty cloth. If damaged, replace FRU. Refer to FRU Replacement
(page 81).
Bill Validator

Action/Type
Bill Validator 0 Inspect_ Replace FRU. Refer to FRU Replacement (page 81).
Fan Slow Soon/Repair
Bill Validator 19 Inspect_ Check for damage or jam condition. Remove foreign object, debris or
Failure Now/Repair jammed notes. Refer to Foreign Object Removal (page 52) and Jam
Clearance – Upper Module (page 33). Otherwise, replace FRU. Refer
to FRU Replacement (page 81).
Bill Validator 0 Clean_ Self-cleaning. Visually inspect sensors. If dirty, clean with a dry, lint-
Sensor Dirty Soon/Repair free cloth. If damaged, replace FRU. Refer to FRU Replacement (page
81).
Bill Validator 24 Replace_ Replace FRU. Refer to FRU Replacement (page 81).
Battery Low Soon/Replace
Bill Validator Replace_
Battery Out Now/Replace
Post Bill Validator (BV Exit Transport)

Status Action/Type
Post-Bill Validator 33 Inspect_ Check for damage or jam condition.
Transport Sensor Now/Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed notes. Refer to Foreign
Failure Object Removal (page 52) and Jam Clearance – Upper Module (page
Other Post-Bill 33 33).
Validator Transport Otherwise, replace FRU. Refer to FRU Replacement (page 81).
Failure
Post-Bill Validator 0 Clean_ Self-cleaning.
Transport Sensor Soon/Repair Visually inspect sensors. If dirty, clean with a dry, lint-free cloth. If
Dirty damaged, replace FRU. Refer to FRU Replacement (page 81).
Escrow

Action/Type
Escrow 34 Inspect_ Check for damage or jam condition.
Transport Now/Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed notes. Refer to Foreign
Sensor Failure Object Removal (page 52) and Jam Clearance – Upper Module
Other Escrow 34 (page 33).
Transport Otherwise, replace FRU. Refer to FRU Replacement (page 81).
Failure
Escrow 0 Clean_ Self-cleaning.
Transport Soon/Repair Visually inspect sensors. If dirty, clean with a dry, lint-free cloth. If
Sensor Dirty damaged, replace FRU. Refer to FRU Replacement (page 81).

Action/Type
Escrow 35 Inspect_ Check for damage or jam condition.
Jammed Up Now/Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed notes. Refer to Foreign
Escrow 35 Object Removal (page 52) and Jam Clearance – Upper Module
Jammed (page 33).
Down Otherwise, replace FRU. Refer to FRU Replacement (page 81).
Escrow 35
Sensor Failure
Escrow Jam 35
Other Escrow 35
Failure
Escrow 0 Clean_ Self-cleaning.
Sensor Dirty Soon/Repair Visually inspect sensors. If dirty, clean with a dry, lint-free cloth. If
damaged, replace FRU. Refer to FRU Replacement (page 81).
Reservoir

Action/Type
Reject 36 Inspect_ Check for damage or jam condition.
Reservoir Now/Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed notes. Refer to Foreign
jammed up Object Removal (page 52) and Jam Clearance – Upper Module
Reject 36 (page 33).
Reservoir Otherwise, replace FRU. Refer to FRU Replacement (page 81).
jammed
down
Other Reject 36
Reservoir
Failure
Bunch (Top) Transport

Action/Type
Bunch 37 Inspect_ Check for damage or jam condition.
Other Bunch 37 (page 33).
Failure
Reject Transport

Action/Type
Reject 38 Inspect_ Check for damage or jam condition.
Other Reject 38 (page 33).
Failure
Reject 0 Clean_ Self-cleaning.
Transport Soon/Repair Visually inspect sensors. If dirty, clean with a dry, lint-free cloth. If
Sensor Dirty damaged, replace FRU. Refer to FRU Replacement (page 81).
Reject Bin Area and Cassette Transport

Action/Type
Captured Area 41 Not_ No action.
Not Present Configured
Cassette 0 Inspect_ Check for damage or jam condition.
Transport Sensor Now/Repair Remove foreign object, debris or jammed notes. Refer to
Failure Foreign Object Removal (page 52) and Jam Clearance – Upper
Cassette 42 Module (page 33).
Transport Motor Otherwise, replace FRU. Refer to FRU Replacement (page 81).
Rotate trouble
Other Cassette 42
Transport Failure
Cassette 0 Clean_ Self-cleaning. Visually inspect sensors. If dirty, clean with a dry,
Transport Sensor Soon/Repair lint-free cloth. If damaged, replace FRU. Refer to FRU
Dirty Replacement (page 81).
Lower Transport

Action/Type
Lower 43 Inspect_ Check for damage or jam condition.
Other Lower 43 (page 33).
Failure
Cassettes
Error M_Status SOH Corrective Action

Message Action/Type
Cassette 44 Inspect_ Check for damage or jam condition. Remove foreign object, debris or
Stage Now/Repair jammed notes. Refer to Foreign Object Removal (page 52) and Jam
Jammed Clearance – Upper Module (page 33). Otherwise, replace FRU. Refer to
Up FRU Replacement (page 81).
Cassette 44
Stage
Jammed
Down
Cassette 44
Sensor
Failure
Cassette 44
Pick Fail
Other 44
Cassette
Failure
Error M_Status SOH Corrective Action

Message Action/Type
Cassette 0 Clean_ Self-cleaning. Visually inspect sensors. If dirty, clean with a dry, lint-free
Sensor Soon/Repair cloth. If damaged, replace FRU. Refer to FRU Replacement (page 81).
Dirty
Miscellaneous
Error Message M_ SOH Action/Type Corrective Action

Status
Hardware Failure 48 Inspect_ Upper control board failure. Inspect and replace or
Now/Repair repair.
Download failure 2 Inspect_ Re-install BV software or reboot.
Now/Repair
Communications 1 Inspect_ Check cables (USB etc) and reboot.
failure Now/Repair
Jam Clearance – Upper Module

Notes can become jammed in any of the sub-modules and/or transports. The upper and
lower modules comprise the following sub-modules and transports:
Top Module
Bunch Transport Reject Reservoir
Pre-acceptor
and Escrow
Reject Transport
Separator Reject Bin

(Stack Area)
Separator Transport Cassette
Transport
Pre-BV Transport
Bill Validator (BV) Post BV Transport
Lower Transport
4 3 2 1 ( Front & Rear Covers )
Lower Transport
Exits
Cassettes
Note that the following procedures have different instructions depending on whether the
pre-acceptor will completely clear the security enclosure when the cash acceptor and
recycler is pulled out.
Pre-acceptor
A. Pre-acceptor does not clear the Security Enclosure
For older GBNA/GBRU models:
1. If the jammed notes are located near the front entry slot, turn the green knob on the
right-hand side of the pre-acceptor counter-clockwise to rotate the belt and move
the notes to the front of the pre-acceptor.
2. When the notes are accessible, carefully remove them from the pre-acceptor unit.
3. If the jammed notes are located near the rear of the front entry slot, turn the green
knob clockwise to move the pusher fully down. Turn the green knob on the right-
hand side of the pre-acceptor clockwise to rotate the belt and move the notes into
the stack area.
4. Remove the notes from the stack area and return the pusher back to the original
position.
For the latest GBNA/GBRU model:
5. If the jammed notes are located near the front entry slot, hold the clamp up to access
the jammed notes.
7. If the jammed notes are located near the rear of the front entry slot, turn the green
knob clockwise to move the pusher fully down. Turn the green knob on the right-
hand side of the pre-acceptor clockwise to rotate the belt and move the notes into
the stack area.
8. Remove the notes from the stack area and return the pusher back to the original
position.
B. Pre-acceptor does clear the Security Enclosure
For older GBNA/GBRU models only:
9. Raise and hold up the pre-acceptor clamp with one hand.
10. With the other hand, pull out any notes jammed at the front entry slot.
11. If the jammed notes are not in an accessible position, turn the green knob on the
right-hand side of the pre-acceptor to rotate the belt and move the notes.
Separator (Stack Area)

1. Pull up the top module using the green handle, until the gas strut is fully extended.
Push down on the top module to make sure the lock/release lever has locked open -
the top module should not move down.
2. Pull up the pre-acceptor unit using the green handle until the stay bar locks it into the
highest position.
3. Pull down the panel to view and access the separator tray.
4. The parts in the separator stack area can be moved by turning knobs 6, 7 and 8
clockwise and counter-clockwise.
Turn the green knob (8) clockwise to move the stage fully down.
Turn the green knob (7) clockwise to move the pusher fully down.
Turn the green knob (6) counter-clockwise to turn the note-pick wheel to move any
notes into the stack area.
Pusher
Note-picker
Stage
5. Remove any jammed notes from the separator tray.
WARNING
Push only the front part of the pre-acceptor stay bar.
Do not grip the stay bar when lowering the pre-acceptor.
6. To close the pre-acceptor, slightly lift and hold it up using the green handle. While
holding up the pre-acceptor, push the stay bar slightly backwards to release the stay
bar. Carefully lower the pre-acceptor.
7. Pull up the pre-acceptor unit using the green handle until the stay bar locks it into the
highest position.
9. The parts in the separator stack area can be moved by turning knobs 6, 7 and 8
clockwise and counter-clockwise.
Turn the green knob (8) clockwise to move the stage fully down.
Turn the green knob (7) clockwise to move the pusher fully down.
Turn the green knob (6) counter-clockwise to turn the note-pick wheel to move any
notes into the stack area.
Pusher
Note-picker
Stage
Note: The stage and pusher may be located at different places within the
separator area than illustrated here.
10. Now, turn the green knob (8) counter-clockwise to move the stage back up. When
notes are accessible, lower the separator flap (10) and carefully remove them from
the stack area.
WARNING
Push only the front part of the pre-acceptor stay bar. Do not grip the
stay bar when lowering the pre-acceptor.
11. To close the pre-acceptor, slightly lift and hold it up using the green handle. While
holding up the pre-acceptor, push the stay bar slightly backwards to release the stay
bar. Carefully lower the pre-acceptor.
Top Module
The following modules can be accessed by opening the top module:
l Separator Transport
l Bill Validator
l Post-Bill Validator (BV) Transport
l Escrow Transport
l Escrow
l Reject Reservoir
l Reject Transport
l and for clearing Pre-Bill Validator jams
To open the top module, proceed as follows:
Push down on the top module to make sure the lock/release lever has locked open —
Note: Notes can be located in any of the areas listed above. Therefore it is
recommended that all of the areas are checked and any notes removed before
closing the top module.
WARNING
Handle with care - the top module is heavy.
Separator Transport
1. If the notes are not immediately accessible, turn the green wheel counter-clockwise
on the side of the upper module to move the notes through the main transport.
2. When the notes are accessible, carefully remove them from the separator transport.
Bill Validator (BV)

1. Pull up the latch on the BV lid to open the BV unit.
2. Push up and hold open the BV lid, carefully remove any notes from inside the BV
unit. Take care not to scratch or damage the BV sensors.
3. Close the BV cover ensuring the latch clicks into the home position.
Post-BV Transport
1. If the notes are not immediately accessible, turn the large green knob on the side of
the upper module counter-clockwise to move the notes through the main transport.
When the notes are accessible, carefully remove them from the transport.
Pre-Bill Validator (BV) Transport

To clear jams in the pre-BV transport, first remove any notes from the BV and the post-BV
transport. Proceed as follows:
1. With the top module closed, turn the green knob clockwise to reverse the transport.
This action can reverse any notes jammed in the pre-BV transport and move them
back into the separator transport, from where they can be removed.
2. Open the top module. The separator transport opens slightly when the top module is
opened. Remove any accessible notes. If notes are not accessible, turn the large
green knob on the side of the upper module to move the notes further through the
main transport. When notes are accessible, carefully remove them from the
separator transport.
Reject Transport
1. Pull forward the green tab to open the reject transport.
2. Turn the large green knob on the side of the upper module to move the notes to an
accessible position in the transport.
3. Hold open the reject transport, and remove any notes from inside the transport.
4. Release the reject transport before closing the top module. It does not latch but
should fall back into its home position.
Escrow Transport, Escrow, and Reject Reservoir

1. Pull back the green tab to open the escrow transport. The escrow and reject
reservoir are located behind the transport.
2. Turn the green knob on the far side of the escrow transport to move the transport
forwards or backwards.
3. When the notes are accessible, carefully remove them from the escrow transport.
4. Turn the green knob on the side of the upper module to move the reject reservoir
stage up and down. Turn the green knob on the top of the upper module to move the
escrow stage down and up.
Reject Reservoir
Stage
Escrow
Stage
5. When the notes are accessible, carefully remove them from the escrow and reject
reservoir.
6. Close the escrow transport ensuring the latch clicks into the home position.
Closing the Top Module
WARNING
Be careful not to pinch your fingers between the gas strut and top
module when closing the top module.
1. To close the top module, the gas strut must first be released. To do this, slightly push
up the top module and then push forward the gas strut lock/release lever using the
green tab.
2. Hold the gas strut in the released position and, using the top module handle, partially
close the top module. Release the strut.
3. Press down firmly on the green panel until the module is as far as it will go back into
the home position. Then, press down firmly on the top module handle to lock the
module into place.
Bunch Transport
1. Push in the latch on the transport cover and pull up the cover to approximately 45o.
The bunch transport containing the note carrier and escrow stage is located under
the cover.
Note: Depending on the progress of the transaction when the jam occurred, the
note carrier and escrow stage (underneath) may be located at different places than
illustrated below.
2. Turn the green knob to move the note carrier backwards and forwards, to access
the jammed notes.
3. When the notes are accessible, carefully remove them from the bunch transport
area.
4. Push down on the edge of the transport cover near the green latch to close the
cover, ensuring the latch clicks into the home position.
CAUTION
Do not apply pressure to the yellow/black area on the top of the
transport cover.
Note: If the transport is not closed properly, an error message will be displayed (replace
the bunch transport). To clear this error, open the transport, check for any obstructions
and then close the transport correctly.
Cassette Transport and Fixed Reject Bin

To clear jams located in the cassette transport on a device with a fixed reject bin, proceed
as follows:
1. Remove the reject bin door seal (if fitted). Open the reject bin door.
2. Check for jammed notes in each pocket and remove them carefully.
Counterfeit
Reject
3. Close the reject bin door and replace the seal (if fitted).
Note: If the bin is not closed properly, an error message will be displayed
(replace the counterfeit/reject/captured area - fixed reject
bin). To clear this error, open the door, check for any obstructions and then
close the door correctly.
4. The cassette transport is situated under the reject bin. To open the transport, pull up
the transport latch.
5. If notes are not immediately accessible, turn the large green knob to move notes
through the transport. Carefully remove any jammed notes from the transport.
6. To close the cassette transport, push down on the transport ensuring it returns to its
home position.
Note: If the transport is not closed properly, an error message will be displayed
(replace the cassette transport - fixed reject bin). To clear this
error, open the transport, check for any obstructions and then close the
transport correctly.
Cassette Transport and Removable Reject Bin

To clear jams located in the cassette transport on a device with a removable reject bin,
proceed as follows:
1. Press the green release button to eject the bin.
2. Using the green handle, carefully remove the reject bin by pulling up.
3. Check the entry slots on the back of the bin and remove any jammed notes carefully.
4. Unlock the key lock (if fitted) on the reject bin door.
5. Remove the bin latch seal (if fitted). Open the bin door.
6. Check for jammed notes in each pocket and remove them carefully.
Counterfeit
Reject
Capture
7. Close the bin door and replace the latch.

8. Replace the latch seal (if fitted) and lock the key lock (if fitted).
9. The cassette transport is situated under the reject bin. To open the transport, pull up
the transport latch.
10. If notes are not immediately accessible, turn the large green knob to move notes
through the transport. Carefully remove any jammed notes from the transport.
11. To close the cassette transport, push down on the transport ensuring it returns to its
home position.
Note: If the transport is not closed properly, an error message will be displayed
(replace the cassette transport - removable reject bin). To clear this error, open the
transport, check for any obstructions and then close the transport correctly.
CAUTION
Make sure the cassette transport is properly closed
before replacing the reject bin to avoid damage to the
unit.
12. Replace the bin into the cash acceptor and recycler and push it in. Make sure the bin
is pushed fully home.
Note: If the bin is not closed properly, an error message will be displayed (replace the
counterfeit/reject/captured area - removable reject bin). To clear this error,
remove the bin, check for any obstructions and then replace the bin correctly.
Foreign Object Removal

Foreign objects or media other than notes can be captured or released in the following
areas:
l Pre-acceptor
l Separator (Stack Area)
l Separator Transport and Bill Validator
Inspect the device and remove these on a regular basis.
The following procedures have different instructions depending on whether the pre-
acceptor will completely clear the security enclosure when the cash acceptor and recycler
is pulled out.
Pre-acceptor
1. Pull up the pre-acceptor.
l Pull up the top module using the green handle, until the gas strut is fully extended.
Push down on the top module to make sure the lock/release lever has locked
open — the top module should not move down.
l Pull up the pre-acceptor unit using the green handle until the stay bar locks it into
the highest position.
l Pull up the pre-acceptor unit using the green handle until the stay bar locks it into
the highest position.
2. Remove any foreign objects remaining in the pre-acceptor:

l For older GBNA/GBRU models
Inspect the four holes and remove any foreign objects remaining in the pre-acceptor.
l For the latest GBNA/GBRU model

Inspect the lower frame hole and remove any foreign objects remaining in the Pre-
acceptor.
3. Whilst the pre-acceptor is up, lift the pre-acceptor clamp to release any foreign
objects which may be lodged in the transport. These should fall onto the separator
pusher or stage.
4. Inspect the top of the separator pusher and stage and remove any foreign objects
which have fallen through the pre-acceptor.
5. Inspect the following areas to check if any foreign objects have dropped down from
these four holes:
l Under the pre-acceptor
l On the base of the security enclosure
l On the floor outside the security enclosure
6. Carefully remove any objects found.
7. Close the pre-acceptor.
WARNING
Push only the front part of the pre-acceptor stay bar. Do not grip the
stay bar when lowering the pre-acceptor.
l Slightly lift and hold it up using the green handle. While holding up the pre-acceptor,
push the stay bar slightly backwards to release the stay bar. Carefully lower the pre-
acceptor.
l Close the top module.
l Slightly lift and hold it up using the green handle. While holding up the pre-acceptor,
push the stay bar slightly backwards to release the stay bar. Carefully lower the pre-
acceptor.
Separator (Stack Area)

1. Access the stack area by pulling up the pre-acceptor.
3. Turn the green knob (8) to move the stage fully up.
Turn the green knob (7) to move the pusher fully up.
Note: The stage and pusher may be located at different places within the separator
area than illustrated here.
4. Inspect the full width of the separator tray and the surrounding area and carefully
remove any foreign objects which have dropped down.
5. Return the separator panel to its vertical position.
6. Close the pre-acceptor.
WARNING
Push only the front part of the pre-acceptor stay bar. Do
not grip the stay bar when lowering the pre-acceptor.
Separator Transport and Bill Validator

1. Look through the curved hole to the left side of the gas strut to check if any foreign
objects have become stuck in this area.
Push down on the top module to make sure the lock/release lever has locked open —
3. Inspect the separator transport and the top surface of the bill validator. Carefully
remove any foreign objects which have dropped down.
Separator Transport
Bill Validator
4. Close the top module.
WARNING
Be careful not to pinch your fingers between the gas strut and top
module when closing the top module.
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0
None.
Level 1
Level 1 tests for the GBNA/GBRU are:
1. Clear In*
2. Accept
3. Encash
4. Refund
5. Status *
6. Report Definitions
7. Deposit Run-To-Run Sequence 1 *
8. Deposit Run-To-Run Sequence 2 *
9. Shutter Test
10. Set Notes
11. Stack
12. Present
13. Dispense *
14. Test Cash Units *
15. Test Guide Light
16. Dispense Run-To-Run Sequence *
17. Motor Test *
18. Save Statistics
19. Save BV Info
Note: Looping is available on the tests marked (*) above.
Dispense Functionality
The following tests will only be available when the GBRU supports dispense operations:
l Set Notes
l Stack
l Present
l Dispense
l Test Cash Units
l Dispense Run-To-Run sequence.
Security
The following tests are not offered unless access to the safe has been identified (see
“Dispense Authorisation” below):
l Stack
l Present
l Dispense
l Test Cash Units
l Encash
l Deposit Run-To-Run Sequence 2.
Dispense Authorisation
To authorize diagnostic dispense tests on the GBRU proceed as follows:
1. Enter GBRU/GBNA diagnostics.

2. Press and hold down switch ST on the Main Upper PCB.
3. Wait for the seven segment LED displays to change from 0 0 to ≡ ≡ and release the
switch.
4. Wait for diagnostics to reload with the secure options added.
Clear IN
The CLEAR IN test causes a mechanical reset of the device to be attempted. If successful,
any notes found in the device (other than in the cassette areas) will be cleared into the
reject area.
If the device is successfully cleared, a DEVICE CLEARED message is displayed. If not, a

DEVICE NOT CLEARED message is displayed along with the appropriate M_STATUS
and M_DATA.
Accept
The ACCEPT test enables the GBNA/GBRU to accept a bunch of notes. On receipt of the
hardware's response to the enable, the returned M_STATUS and M_DATA fields are
displayed.
If the M_CODE from the response is not GOOD PENDING the test will terminate with a
Fail status. Otherwise, you are prompted to enter a bunch of notes. If no notes are entered
within 15 seconds, the test times out; the GBRU is disabled, a NO NOTES ENTERED
message is displayed and the test terminates.
If notes were entered a PROCESSING NOTES message is displayed while the notes are
being validated.
If any (or all) of the notes are subsequently rejected as invalid, the invalid notes are
presented at the exit slot and a PLEASE REMOVE NOTES message is displayed. If the
notes in the slot are not removed within 15 seconds, they will be retracted to the reject area
and a NOTES RETRACTED message displayed.
If all notes have been accepted or once the invalid notes have been removed from the exit
slot (either manually within the required timeframe or by the Retract operation completing),
a NOTES PROCESSED message is displayed along with the total number of each
denomination of notes accepted. If ECB Article 6 is applied, each denomination will be
reported per category.
Encash
The ENCASH test displays a warning that money is about to be moved into non-
refundable storage bins and you are asked to confirm the operation through an OK button.
If you do not confirm within 10s, the test automatically cancels.
If the test cancels, any notes in the Escrow will remain there and a NO NOTES
ENCASHED message is displayed.
When the OK button is clicked, the GBRU stores notes from the Escrow to the cassettes
according to the sorting defined. When the test response is received, the returned M_
STATUS and M_DATA fields are displayed.
A NOTES ENCASHED message is displayed if the command succeeds; otherwise a NO

NOTES ENCASHED message is displayed.
Note: If the last live deposit transaction specified using the recycle units the deposited
notes will be sent to the recycle cassettes. If the last live deposit transaction did not specify
using the recycle units (the default setting after a reboot) then the deposited notes will be
sent to the ‘ALL IN’ cassette.
Refund
The REFUND test attempts to refund any notes currently held in the Escrow back to the
facia. When the test response is received, the returned M_STATUS and M_DATA fields
are displayed.
The GBRU moves any notes currently held in the Escrow to the exit slot and displays a
PLEASE REMOVE NOTES prompt. A NO NOTES REFUNDED message is displayed if
there were no notes in the escrow to refund.
If the notes are not removed within 15s, they are retracted to the Retract area and a
NOTES RETRACTED message is displayed. Completion of the Retract operation or
manual removal of the notes from the exit slot terminates the test.
Note: If ECB Article 6 is applied, then it is possible that some notes (in Cat. 2 and possibly
Cat. 3) will be retained in the device on issuance of the refund according to the ECB rules
applied.
Status
The STATUS test interrogates the GBRU status. When the test response is received, the
reported M_STATUS and M_DATA fields are displayed. Sensor data is also displayed
using 64 bytes of data, one bit for each sensor. This can be used as a sensor test when
looping is selected.
Status Test Output

The following table describes the data returned from the STATUS test. It comprises 64
bytes of data which reflect the state of the sensors in the device - one bit for each sensor.
Use this data with the previous illustrations.
Byte Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 PCEC PBPC PRPC PTPC PDPC POLC PTHC
2 PHPC ERLC ERRC ERUC ECPC ECCC ECHC
3 PLPC ETLC ESPC EERC EELC EEUC
(Older
models
only)
4 PDAC SSEC SSLC SSUC SPBC SPPC SPUC
5 SBLC SHDC SCDC SFPC SPCC SFOC SFIC
6 UGLC ULPC URFC UFFC UCFC URLC UULC
7 ETRS PDSS PASS PTCS PS4S PS3S PS2S PS1S
(Older
models
only)
8 ETLS EECS EERS EELS
9
10 FLD FLT LOCK ST SW2 SW1
11 SHOC SHCC ILOF BLLC
12
13 C1SET D13C D12C D11C D10C
17 CE1C C1NR CT1S NE1C NF1C CF1C
18 CV1C CO1C CS1C CP1C
Byte Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
25 UERS UEFS UECS UFHS URHS UGDS UGAS
26 SDOS SDIS SSOS SSLS SSRS
27 EDRS EDLS ERRS ERLS
28
29 LFHS LT3S
30 CR4S CL4S CR3S CL3S CR2S CL2S CR1S CL1S
31- BLANK
56
57 FL5VES4 FL5VSE4 FL5VRV FL5VES2 FL5VUB FL5VSE2 FL5VPA
58 FL24VRV FL24VES FL24VUB FL24VSE
59 FL5VCS4 FL5VCS3 FL5VCS2 FL5VCS1 FL5VRV FL5VEX FL5VSH FL5VLT
60 FL5VCS5 FL24VSH FL24VEX FL24VCS FL24VLT FL24VLB2 FL24LB1
61- BLANK
64
Report Definitions
The response to the REPORT DEFINITIONS test outputs M_STATUS and M_DATA
fields. If the command succeeds, a table of currently programmed note definitions is
displayed.
Deposit Run-To-Run Sequence1

The DEPOSIT RUN-TO-RUN SEQUENCE 1 executes the following sequence of tests:
l Status
l Accept
l Refund.
Deposit Run-To-Run Sequence 2

The DEPOSIT RUN-TO-RUN SEQUENCE 2 executes the following sequence of tests:
l Status
l Accept
l Encash.
Shutter Test
The SHUTTER test opens the shutter, leaves it open for approximately 3s and then closes
the shutter. Appropriate SHUTTER OPEN and SHUTTER CLOSED messages are
displayed. If at any point the shutter should fail, an error message is displayed showing the
M_STATUS.
Set Notes
The SET NOTES test allows you to set the number of bills to be picked from each cassette
on a DISPENSE test. Only prompts for configured cassettes are displayed. If the total
number of bills exceeds 200 the command fails. A default of 5 bills for each configured
cassette is used if no number is entered.
Stack
The STACK test picks a number of bills and moves them to the escrow, ready for
presentation. The default value is 5 from each configured cassette type but this can be
changed by the SET NOTES option.
Present
The PRESENT test moves bills that have been previously stacked to a position where you
can remove them.
If you do not remove the notes within 15s they are retracted to the Retract area and a
NOTES RETRACTED message is displayed. Completion of the Retract operation or
manual removal of the notes will terminate the test.
Dispense
The DISPENSE test performs the STACK and PRESENT functions in a single operation.
The default value for the number of bills picked from each configured cassette type is 5 but
this can be changed by the SET NOTES option.
Test Cash Units

The TEST CASH UNITS test picks one note from each physical cassette, transports it to
the back of the shutter, and then places it back into the cassette.
Test Guide Light

The TEST GUIDE LIGHT test flashes the guide light on and off until the CANCEL button is
selected.
Dispense Run-To-Run Sequence

The DISPENSE RUN-TO-RUN SEQUENCE performs the following sequence of tests:
l Clear
l Status
l Test Cash Units
l Shutter Test
l Dispense
l Clear.
Motor Test
The MOTOR test attempts a mechanical reset of the device to check mechanical operation
and initialize mechanical parts. On receipt of the device's response, the returned M_
STATUS and M_DATA fields will be displayed to indicate the success or otherwise of the
test.
Save Statistics
The SAVE STATISTICS function saves device statistics to the GBRU component folder.
An option is provided to copy the file to floppy disk.
Save BV Info
This SAVE BV INFO function saves Bill Validation information to the GBRU component
folder. An option is provided to copy the file to floppy disk.
M_Status And M_Data

The M_STATUS codes and M_DATA returned for the GBNA/GBRU are listed in NCR
publication B006-6273, NCR 56XX/Personas Self-Service Financial Terminal, Diagnostic
Status Code Notebook (Volume 2).
Note: M_Data contains the error codes returned by the GBNA/GBRU error code system.
Level 3
S_DATA
The S_DATA returned for the GBNA/GBRU are:
S_DATA Meaning
00H GOOD - No error, continue to use.
01H ROUTINE - Continue to use but log error information in maintenance fields.
02H WARNING - Continue to use, log error information, warn operator if possible.
03H SUSPEND - Do not use this device for the defined time period.
04H FATAL - Do not use this device again until there has been operator intervention.
Tallies
diagnostic and normal use. The GBNA/GBRU tallies are as follows:
Tally Description
FEED SEP Notes fed from separator.
FEED 1 Notes fed from Cassette Position 1.
Tally Description
STOR ESC Notes stored to Escrow.
STOR RES Notes stored to Reservoir.
STOR 1 Notes stored to Cassette Position 1.
STOR CFT Notes stored to Counterfeit area.
STOR REJ Notes stored to Reject area.
STOR CAP Notes stored to Capture area.
GENUINE Genuine notes categorized.
DAMAGED Damaged notes categorized.
NOT REC Unrecognized notes categorized.
SUSPECTS Suspect notes categorized.
CNTFEIT Counterfeit notes categorized.
DOUBLES Double notes detected.
LONGS Long notes detected.
SKEWED Skewed notes detected.
TOOCLOSE “Notes Too Close” detected.
DEP OPS Deposit Transactions (Operations).
DISP OPS Dispense transactions.
SHUTFAIL Shutter faults detected.
BILLJAMS Bill Jams detected.
MECH ERR Mechanical errors detected.
SHUTOPEN Shutter jammed open errors detected.
SHUTCLOS Shutter jammed closed errors detected.
COMMSERR Communications errors.
BNCH RET Number of bunches returned without validation.
Note: For a second device the service name is ‘GBRU2’.
STRAPPING
ADJUSTMENTS
The following adjustments are described in this section:
l Facia shutter alignment

l Lower module to upper module
l Push latch
l Interlock switch
l Belt tension
l Gear timing
l Bill Validator calibration.
For adjustments to the cassette, including fitting an adaptor plate for standard cassettes in
an extended GBNA/GBRU, refer to the Cash Acceptor and Recycler Cassettes chapter in
this manual.
Note: In the following adjustments the terms “left” and “right” are regarded as when looking
directly on the pre-acceptor of the GBNA/GBRU. The Pre-acceptor is regarded as the
“front”.
Facia Shutter Alignment

It may be necessary to adjust the GBNA/GBRU module position with respect to the facia
shutter if, after replacement of the module, one of the following conditions exists:
l With the facia locked, the gap between the shutter and the front edge of the pre-
acceptor is not even across the width of the shutter
l The gap between the shutter and pre-acceptor is excessive or the shutter is fouled by
the pre-acceptor
l The GBNA/GBRU does not latch.
Make the adjustment as follows:
1. Rack out the GBNA/GBRU.

2. Slacken off the interlock switch. Refer to “Interlock Switch” on page 70 for
instructions.
3. Slacken the six screws (three per slide) that secure the upper module to the slides
and move the module in the elongated holes in the rails, either forward towards the
facia, or back into the safe, to achieve the necessary adjustment.
Note: The screws used to fix the slides onto the module should be M4 x 10 long
machine thread setscrews (part number 009-0006593). If taptite screws are
fitted they must be replaced. A taptite screw can be identified by the fact that it
is tapered at the leading end and when looking into the thread diameter a
triangular end section can be seen - if in doubt, replace the screws.
4. Check that the upper module is resting on the top surface of each of the mushroom
studs in the slides (two per slide).
5. Check that the upper module is parallel with the slides.
6. Tighten the six screws in the rails, rack in the GBNA/GBRU so that it latches, and
check the alignment of the pre-acceptor to facia.
Check for even gap between shutter and pre-acceptor
7. Proceed to adjust the lower module to the upper module.
Lower Module To Upper Module

The lower module is attached to its slides by mushroom studs and screws in the same way
as the upper module. The lower module should be adjusted with respect to the upper
module to make sure that the upper and lower transports are properly aligned.
Proceed as follows:
1. Rack out the lower module.

2. Slacken the screws securing the lower module to its slides (three per slide) and
move the module in the elongated holes in the rails, either forward or back, so that
the screws are in the same relative position as the screws in the upper module rails.
3. Check that the lower module is resting on the top surface of each of the mushroom
studs in the slides (two per slide).
4. Check that the lower module is parallel with the slides.
5. Tighten the six screws in the rails.
6. Proceed to adjust the Push Latch.
Push Latch
The push latch latches the lower module to the upper. It is located on the lower module at
the left-hand side in front access ATMs and at the right-hand side in rear access ATMs.
Adjust the lower module latch as follows:
1. Rack out the lower module

2. Loosen the two screws or allen screws attaching the latch bracket and move the
bracket forward on the screws. Screw in the two screws but do not fully tighten.
3. Rack in the lower module and push it in firmly against the rubber stoppers at the
rear.
4. Maintain the pressure against the stoppers and check that the distance from the end
of the lower unit rail inward to the face of the lower unit is 5mm - 5.5mm.
5. Maintain the pressure against the stoppers and, with a flat blade screwdriver, push
the latch bracket inwards until the tongue of the latch springs into the square hole in
the upper module.
6. Tighten the two screws securing the latch bracket.
7. Check that the measurement obtained in step 4 is maintained when the lower
module is held by the latch alone.
8. Rack the lower module out and in several times to check the action of the latch.
9. Proceed to adjust the interlock switch.
Interlock Switch
There are two styles of interlock switch. Older style interlock switches have a separate
cover that must be removed before adjustments can be made. Newer switches have an
integral cover.
Old Style
Adjust the interlock switch as follows:

2. Remove the interlock switch cover and slacken the two screws that secure the
interlock switch.
3. Move the switch fully back on its screws (towards the rear of the safe).
4. Screw in the two screws but do not fully tighten.

5. Check that the interlock switch actuator will strike the centre of the switch plunger
and adjust the actuator if necessary.
6. Push in and latch the GBNA/GBRU module.

7. Move the interlock switch forward until is actuated (middle of plunger movement).
8. Rack out the GBNA/GBRU module and tighten the two screws that secure the
interlock switch.
9. Rack in the GBNA/GBRU module and check the actuation of the switch. The
actuator should push in the switch between 4 mm and 6 mm.
10. Rack out the GBNA/GBRU module and replace the interlock switch cover.
11. Rack in the GBNA/GBRU module and check that the actuator enters the interlock
switch cover.
New Style
Adjust the interlock switch as follows:

2. Slacken the two screws that secure the interlock switch.
3. Move the switch fully back on its screws (towards the rear of the safe).
4. Screw in the two screws but do not fully tighten.
5. Check that the interlock switch actuator will strike the centre of the switch plunger
and adjust the actuator if necessary.
6. Push in and latch the GBNA/GBRU module.

7. Move the interlock switch forward until is actuated (middle of plunger movement).
8. Rack out the GBNA/GBRU module and tighten the two screws that secure the
interlock switch.
9. Rack in the GBNA/GBRU module and check the actuation of the switch. The
actuator should push in the switch between 4 mm and 6 mm.
Belt Tension
Screw Tension Bracket Assembly
L1 (=147)
L2 (=75)
P D
P = 500 +_ 50g D = 3mm

(5.1 +_ 0.5N)
Adjust the main drive belt tension as follows:
1. Check for a deflection of 3 mm when load P is applied at position L2.

2. Slacken the Tension Bracket securing screw and move the bracket to achieve the
deflection.
3. Tighten the bracket securing screw.
Gear Timing
Transport gears are linked by the separator drive belts. A separator belt adjustment tool is
provided to ensure that both parts of the transport are correctly in phase after the belts
have been removed and replaced during a service call. The adjustment is required on both
sides of the Separator.
Proceed as follows:
1. Take off the separator belt adjustment tool from the rear right side of the escrow.
Separator Belt
Adjustment Tool
2. Remove the right-hand side separator belt cover.

3. Fit the separator belt adjustment tools into the slots in both gears.
4. Put the belt on to the gears.

5. Repeat the adjustment on the left-hand side of the separator.
6. Remove the tool from the gears and return it to its mounting on the escrow.
7. Replace the gear covers.
Bill Validator Calibration

The bill validator should be cleaned and re-calibrated if the GBNA/GBRU has a high
number of rejected notes or mis-categorisations (Euro zone).
Note: Modules using note templates ending in 24 or less do not support re-calibration; if
after cleaning the reject rate is still too high, the BV should be replaced. To identify the
template version, use System Application (Main menu > Configuration > Display Software
Details) to determine the software version the GBNA/GBRU is using (for example
pcGBRUEU 01.14.00) then contact your local template manager.
Cleaning
1. Pull up the front of the Pre-Acceptor unit using the green handle on the right-hand
side until the stay bar locks the unit in the raised position.
2. Press the area indicated below when cleaning the rollers, to prevent damage.
3. Use water and a lint-free cloth to wipe clean the whole surface of the rollers. The
rollers can be rotated by using the green knob shown below.
Rollers
Rubber Feed Rollers
Rubber Pick Rollers
4. Remove and open the bill validator unit.

5. Use water and a lint-free cloth to wipe clean the following areas:
6. The upper and lower surfaces of the BV unit.
7. All sensor surfaces shown below.
Sensor D
Sensor B
Sensor A
Sensor C
8. The surface and surrounding area of the rollers shown below. The rollers can be
rotated by moving ‘Belt A’ in the direction shown.
A spatula may be used to clean the rollers. If this is required, take care not to
damage the surface of the rollers.
Rollers
Belt A
9. The surface and surrounding area of the rollers and belts shown below. The rollers
and belts can be rotated by moving ‘Belt A’ in the direction shown.
Belt A
10. the surface and surrounding area of the red rollers and black belts shown below
while turning them by hand.
11. Refit the bill validator unit.
Calibration
Once the bill validator has been thoroughly cleaned:
1. Enter Diagnostics and select the “Check BV Calibration” option.
2. Enter the test note (009-0020816) when prompted, making sure that the side with
the NCR part number is facing upwards.
3. The test will report either “Successfully completed BV calibration” in which case no
further action is required, or M-data message 254F “Re-enter BV test note”.
4. Continue with the calibration by entering the test note a minimum of nine more
times, making sure it is inserted in the same orientation each time.
5. On the eighth re-insertion, the following screen (M-data 254E) will be displayed.
Run the test one more time and then the message “Successfully completed BV
calibration” will be displayed.
6. Other error messages which may be displayed during calibration:
Code Meaning
254 F Re-enter BV test note
254E Finished calibration operation, re-enter BV test note one more time
250F Calibration failed, retry and replace BV if error re-occurs
250A BV test note error, use new test note and continue calibration
2548 BV test note soiled, used new test note and continue calibration
Other Entered media is not BV test note or BV malfunction

FRU/Module Replacement
Note 1: The illustrations in this section are from a mix of front and rear access ATMs and
may not look identical to the GBNA/GBRU you are repairing. They should, however,
enable you to identify the components referred to.
Note 2: Throughout these FRU replacement procedures make sure that all connectors are
replaced securely and harnesses are routed correctly and neatly. Replace and make good
all cable ties, check for fouling conditions and replace all cable identification labels
damaged or lost during servicing.
Note 3: Throughout these procedures each of the references to right-hand side, left-hand
side, front and rear is based on the following illustration.
Note 4: The GBNA/GBRU is also available as a type ‘A’ or type ‘B’ variants. Type ‘B’
variants have a narrower guide path and can be identified by coloured labels on the Pre-
acceptor, Separator and Escrow FRUs. Type A & Type B FRUs can not be mixed on the
same GBNA/GBRU.
Front
Top
Right Side
Rear
FRU Locations
The FRUs referenced in this section are identified in the following two illustrations.
The illustration below shows the GBRU viewed from the right-hand side.
Separator Separator to Escrow/Reservoir

Pre-acceptor Escrow/Reservoir
Timing Belts
Upper Transport
Removable
Reject Bin
BV Entry
Transport
Bill Validator
Gas Strut
(BV) and Fan
Lower Transport
4 3 2 1
Currency
Cassettes
The illustration below shows the GBRU viewed from the left-hand side.
Separator to
Escrow/Reservoir
Main Upper Upper Transport Timing Belt Pre-acceptor
PCB
Separator PCB
Main Timing Upper Module

Belt Link Cable
BV Entry
Transport
Push Latch
(Rear Access)
Lower
Transport
Deposit Motor
Recycler Motor
Lower PCB
Power Supply (Reed Switches
PCB behind)
FRUs In The Upper Module

Bill Validator BV Unit - Removal
1. Pull up the top module until the gas strut is fully extended
2. On the left-hand side:
Disconnect the connector labelled BPWR and the blue LAN cable from the BV unit.
Connectors
3. On the right-hand side:

Remove the screw from the base of the gas strut. Hold up the top module slightly
while moving the bottom of the strut backwards to change the pivot position.
4. On the right side of the BV entry transport, loosen one screw and push up the gear
bracket to disengage. Tighten the screw again to hold the gear in place.
Gear Securing Screw
5. Remove one screw securing the BV unit to the upper module base.
6. Pull out the BV unit to the right to remove (including the covers on the side).
Bill Validator BV Unit - Replacement

To replace the BV unit:
1. Push the BV unit into the module, making sure that the bottom of the unit is flat on
the base of the top module.
2. Check that the exit guides are between the transport entry guides and not hooked
over the top.
Wrong Right
3. Replace one screw to secure the BV unit to the upper module base.
4. On the right hand side of the BV entry transport, again loosen the gear retaining
screw. Engage the gear and press to keep engaged whilst tightening the screw to
hold it in place.
5. Turn the green wheel marked 18 to check that the gears will rotate and are correctly
engaged.
6. Hold up the top module slightly while moving the bottom of the strut backwards to
change the pivot position. Replace the screw from the base of the gas strut.
7. Re-connect the connector labelled BPWR and the blue LAN cable to the BV unit.
BV Fan - Removal (early units only)

1. Remove the BV unit as described in above procedure.
2. Remove one screw from the front edge of the BV unit cover and remove the top
cover.
Screw
3. Disconnect the connector from the board and pull up the fan to remove.
Fan Connector
BV Fan - Replacement (early units only)

To replace the BV fan, reverse the above procedure.
Pre-Acceptor - Removal
All lengths of pre-acceptor are removed and attached by using the following procedure:
1. On the left-hand side of the upper module remove the separator PCB covers.
l Early units have two side covers. Remove four screws from the upper cover first
and then four screws from the lower cover.
Screw
(4 Places)
Screws
l On later units remove the timing belt cover and then the one piece side cover.
Loosen the screws “L” and remove screws “R” shown in the following
photographs.
L L
L L
R R R
2. Make a note of the cable routing before disconnecting connectors.

3. Cut the cable tie and disconnect the connectors labelled as follows:
l Separator PCB: PA1, SE7
l In-line: PA3, SE7 and RV2PH.
On Board Connectors Cable Tie In - Line Connectors
4. Pull up the front of the pre-acceptor unit using the green handle on the right-hand
side until the stay bar locks the unit in a raised position.

Loosen one screw on the pre-acceptor securing bracket (located above the stay
bar), and push down to disengage the bracket.
Screw
6. Pull up the pre-acceptor unit until it is fully vertical and lift off to remove.
l Pre-acceptor unit on older GBNA/GBRU models.
l Pre-acceptor unit on latest GBNA/GBRU models.
Pre-Acceptor - Replacement
To replace the pre-acceptor, reverse the above procedure paying special attention to the
following:
l Lower the pre-acceptor onto the mounting studs before attaching the securing
bracket and tightening the screw.
Securing Bracket Mounting Stud
l Make sure all connectors are replaced securely and that all harnesses are routed
correctly and neatly.
When a pre-acceptor is being fitted to a GBRU with separator assembly 009-0019425 or

009-0020242 the following rework is necessary to the separator pusher while the pre-
acceptor is removed:
1. Move the pusher to the top of its travel and identify the tabs on the pusher.
2. Use an engineer’s rule and scribe to mark a line across both tabs in line with the
edge of the pusher.
3. Cut off the tabs using a small hacksaw or side cutters while holding the pusher firmly
to prevent displacement of timing belts. Place a piece of paper to catch debris.
4. Use a file to smooth the cut sections and check that no part projects beyond 0.5 mm
out from the edges of the pusher.
5. Wind the pusher to the bottom of its travel.
6. Put the new pre-acceptor on its mounting but do not connect the cables.
7. Manually wind the pusher up and down and check that it does not contact the pre-
acceptor guides at either side.
8. If you are satisfied that the pusher is not obstructed, complete the replacement of the
pre-acceptor.
9. Return the pusher to its top position.
Escrow and Reservoir - Removal
Before the escrow and reservoir can be removed, the pre-acceptor must be removed.
1. Pull up the top module until the gas strut is fully extended.
Remove the two escrow belt covers (one screw and three screws).
3. Remove one screw and washer (above the locating stud) securing the escrow to the
separator.
4. Remove the forward belt between the escrow and the separator.
Loosen two screws from the escrow belt cover (old type) and pull the cover up to
remove.
or,
On the new type belt cover loosen two screws (L) and remove the top screw (R) and
pull the cover up to remove.
L L
6. Remove one screw and washer (above the locating stud) securing the escrow to the
separator.
8. Disconnect the connectors joined to the escrow, labelled as follows:
l From separator PCB: ES1, ES2, ES3

l In line: ES4, ES5 and ESCM.
9. Lift up the lower part of the escrow and the reservoir to detach it from the separator
lower locating studs and then slowly lift up the entire FRU to detach it from the
mounting studs. Make sure all the cables are disconnected when removing the
FRU.
Escrow and Reservoir - Replacement

To replace the escrow and reservoir, reverse the above procedure paying special attention
to the following:
1. Hold the escrow/reservoir at an angle of approximately 45° and lower it onto the
mounting studs on each side of the separator.
Mounting Stud
2. Lower the escrow onto the locating stud on each side of the separator. Make sure
there is no gap at the joints on each side before replacing the securing screws.
3. When replacing the belts on the escrow/reservoir, set the belt timing (on each side)
by using the tool attached to the escrow. Refer to ‘Adjustments’ for more details.
4. Make sure all connectors are replaced securely and that all harnesses are routed
Separator PCB (Mounted on Separator) - Removal

1. On the left-hand side of the upper module remove the separator pcb covers as
described in “Pre-Acceptor - Removal” in this chapter.
2. Make a note of cable routing in the area of the separator pcb before disconnecting
the connectors and removing the pcb.
3. Cut the cable tie and disconnect three connectors labelled PA1/2/3.
On Board Connectors Cable Tie Routing Bracket In - Line Connectors
4. Carefully cut the cable ties from the front of the cable routing bracket.
5. Disconnect all connecters from the separator pcb. Make a note of all connectors
removed.
l Separator pcb unit on older GBNA/GBRU models
l Separator pcb unit on the latest GBNA/GBRU model
6. Remove four screws securing the pcb to the mounting bracket.
7. Remove the Separator PCB from the bracket.
Separator PCB - Replacement

To replace the separator pcb, reverse the above procedure.
Gas Strut - Removal

Remove the screw at the top of the gas strut.
WARNING
Support the separator unit while detaching the gas strut.
2. Remove the bush and detach the gas strut from the separator.
3. Remove one screw from the base of the gas strut and detach the strut.
Screw
Gas Strut - Replacement

To replace the gas strut, reverse the above procedure paying special attention to the
following:
l Observe the disposal instructions labelled on the gas strut.
Separator - Removal
Before the separator can be removed, the pre-acceptor, escrow and reservoir, and the
separator pcb must be removed.

Remove the screw at the top of the gas strut.
WARNING
Support the separator unit while detaching the gas strut.
2. Remove the bush and detach the gas strut from the separator.
3. From the right-hand side:

Unhook the harness from behind the separator pcb.
Harness Clamp
4. Loosen the screw on the cam lever mounted on each side of the BV entry
transport, and release each cam lever by pushing down.
l Cam lever on older GBNA/GBRU models
l Cam lever on the latest GBNA/GBRU model
5. Carefully remove the separator by lifting slightly forwards, observing the notch
direction on the cam levers .
Separator - Replacement
To replace the separator, reverse the above procedure paying special attention to the
following:
l Present the separator at an angle of 45° observing the notch direction on the cam
levers.
Removable Reject Bin - Removal
1. Push the button at rear left-hand side to eject the reject bin.
2. Using the green handle, pull the bin up (front access ATMs) or backwards (rear
access ATMs) remove the bin.
Main Upper PCB - Removal

The main upper pcb is mounted on the upper transport and is removed as follows:

Remove three screws and loosen one screw from the main upper pcb cover. Pull up
the cover to remove.
Loosen
2. Carefully cut any restraining cable ties and disconnect all connectors from the main
upper pcb. Make a note of all connectors removed.
3. Remove four screws from the main upper pcb. Detach the pcb from the mounting
bracket.
Main Upper PCB - Replacement

To replace the main upper pcb, reverse the above procedure paying special attention to the
following:
l Before securing the board, observe the correct cable routing at the lower left corner of
the pcb.
Upper Transport - Removal
The removable reject bin and main upper pcb must be removed before the upper transport
can be removed.
1. On the left-hand side of the module, at the rear:

Loosen one screw from the rear end of the link cable cover. Slide the cover
backwards to detach it from the tang at the front. Remove the cover.
2. Remove the two screws from the upper transport base; one at each side of the
transport (viewed from above).
3. Remove the two screws from the rear transport base at the rear end beneath the
reject bin area:
l Fixed type reject bin:
l Removable type reject bin:

Detach the belt from under the tension roller.
5. At the rear end of the main tension belt:

Remove the remaining screw from the belt cover near the base of the upper
transport. Remove the cover and detach the belt from the gear.
Gear Belt Cover Screw Belt
6. Carefully lift up and detach the upper transport from the upper module base.
Upper Transport - Replacement

To replace the upper transport, reverse the above procedure paying special attention to the
following:
1. Replace and secure the upper transport first. Make sure the reference holes on the
transport are placed exactly on the reference bosses on the upper base before
securing with the screws removed in steps 2 and 3.
2. Attach the main belt to the upper transport gear and replace the belt cover, as
removed in step 5.
3. Replace the middle part of the main belt under the tension roller, as removed in step
4.
4. Refer to the Adjustments section to check the main belt tension. Check the belt does
not foul other cables and connectors in the area before replacing the link cable
cover.
5. Present the link cable cover slightly to the rear of the cable bracket. Slide the cover
towards the front to engage the remaining screws at the rear end and the tang at the
front. Make sure all cables are securely and neatly contained before replacing the
cover screws.
Tang
BV Entry Transport - Removal

The pre-acceptor, escrow, reservoir and link cable bracket must be removed, and the
tension roller belt detached, before removing the BV entry transport.
On older GBNA/GBRU models:

Remove one screw from the gear bracket on the side of the BV entry transport and
move the bracket fully up, to access more screws under the bracket.
Screw (4 Places) Gear Bracket
2. On each side:
Remove two screws securing the BV entry transport to the upper module base.
At the front of the link cable assembly, disconnect the connector (UFHS) attached to
the BV entry transport.
4. Pull up the BV entry transport to remove, making sure the main tension belt is fully
detached.
Reference Hole
On the latest GBNA/GBRU model:

Move the bracket fully up, to access more screws under the bracket.
6. On each side:
Remove two screws securing the BV entry transport to the upper module base..

At the front of the link cable assembly, disconnect the connector (UFHS) attached to
the BV entry transport.
8. Pull up the BV entry transport to remove, making sure the main tension belt is fully
detached.
BV Entry Transport - Replacement

Replacement of the BV entry transport is the reverse of the above procedure paying
special attention to the following:
1. When replacing the BV entry transport, make sure the reference holes of the
transport are placed exactly on the reference bosses of the upper base.
2. Refer to the “Adjustments” section to check the main belt tension. Check that the
belt does not foul other cables and connectors in the area before replacing the link
cable cover.
Separator to Escrow/Reservoir Timing Belts - Removal

Remove one screw from the small belt cover and remove the cover.
l Loosen two screws from the escrow belt cover (old type) and pull the cover up to
remove.
l OR, on the new type belt cover loosen two screws (L) and remove the top screw (R)
and pull the cover up to remove.
L L
Separator to Escrow/Reservoir Timing Belts - Replacement

When replacing the belts on the escrow/reservoir, set the belt timing (on each side) by
using the tool attached to the escrow.
BV Entry Transport to Upper Transport. Main Timing Belt -

Removal
1. Open up the top module using the green handle until the gas strut is fully extended.
2. On the left-hand side of the main upper transport:
Remove three screws and loosen one screw from the main upper pcb cover. Pull up
the cover to remove.
Loosen
3. Loosen one screw from the rear end of the link cable cover. Slide the cover
backwards to detach it from the tang at the front. Remove the cover.
4. Pull out the main timing belt from under the tension roller.
5. At the rear end of the main tension belt:

Remove the remaining screw from the belt cover near the base of the upper
transport. Remove the cover and detach the belt from the gear.
Gear Belt Cover Screw Belt
6. Feed the belt through towards the front of the module, past the tension roller bracket
and then detach the belt from the BV entry transport at the front of the module.
Belt
BV Entry Transport to Upper Transport. Main Timing Belt -

Replacement
To replace the main tension belt, reverse the above procedure paying special attention to
the following:
1. Attach the belt to the BV entry transport first.

2. Feed the belt through the tension roller bracket but leave loose.
3. Attach the main belt to the upper transport gear and replace the belt cover, as
removed in step 5.
4. Replace the belt under the tension roller, as removed in step 4. Refer to
‘Adjustments’ to check the main belt tension. Check the belt does not foul other
cables and connectors in the area before replacing the link cable cover.
5. Present the link cable cover slightly to the rear of the cable bracket. Slide the cover
towards the front to engage the remaining screws at the rear end and the tang at the
front. Make sure all cables are securely and neatly contained before replacing the
cover screws.
FRUs In The Lower Module

Push Latch - Removal
1. Rack out the lower module.
2. On the left-hand side (front or rear depending on variant):
Remove two screws or allen screws securing the push latch to the left-hand side of
the lower module (rear access illustration shown).
3. Remove the latch assembly.
Push Latch - Replacement

To assemble the replacement push latch, proceed as follows:
1. Attach the latch and spacer to the bracket using four screws provided.
2. Rear access units: secure the latch to left bracket holes, and the spacer to right
bracket holes (as illustrated below).
3. Front access units: secure the latch to right bracket holes, and the spacer to left
bracket holes (opposite of illustration below).
Spacer
Bracket
Latch
4. Secure the push latch assembly to the lower module using two screws provided.
Attach screws in diagonally opposite holes.
5. After replacing the push latch, refer to ‘Adjustments’ for more details of how to check
the facia, upper module and lower module alignment.
Lower PCB - Removal

There are two variants of the lower pcb; GBRU4/GBNA4, and GBNA2. Remove the lower
pcb as follows:

Remove one screw and the cable retaining clip from the cable entry hole.
Disconnect the USB and SHT/MEI connectors at the front of the lower module.
USB
SHT/MEI
2. Remove four screws securing the pcb cover to the lower transport. Detach the
cover.
3. Remove two screws on the cable cover under the slide channel at the base of the
lower module.
4. Disconnect two or four connectors labelled CS1/2/3/4.
Connectors
5. Disconnect all connecters from the lower pcb. Make a note of all connectors
removed.
6. Remove four screws securing the lower pcb to the lower module and detach the
cover.
7. Detach the pcb and the Mylar sheet fitted behind.
Lower PCB - Replacement

To replace the lower pcb, reverse the above procedure.
Note: Make sure all connectors are replaced securely and that all harnesses are
routed correctly and neatly.
Lower Transport - Removal
1. At the front left corner of the lower module:

Press the tab on the rivet-tie to detach it from the motor assembly.
2. With the lower transport open, on the inside of the cassette housing:
Remove three screws from the cable cover.
3. Feed the cable through to the inside of the cassette housing.
4. Loosen two screws on the hinge spring bracket at the rear end of the lower
transport. Push the bracket forward to loosen.
5. Close the lower transport.

6. Loosen a screw on the stopper bracket at the front end of the lower transport. Pull
up the bracket to release the stopper.
7. With the lower transport almost fully open, carefully slide the transport forward and
detach it from the hinges.
8. Remove the washer at the front hinge.
Lower Transport - Replacement

To replace the lower transport, reverse the above procedure, paying special attention to
the following:
1. Make sure a washer is replaced at the front hinge.

2. Observe the D-cut shape of the rear hinge spring bracket.
3. Check the belt for fouling after replacing the cable cover inside the cassette housing.
Currency Cassette (Deposit/GBNA, Recycler/GBRU,

With/Without Keylock)
For details of how to configure the cassettes, refer to document “s66710 - Cash Acceptor
and Recycler Cassettes”.
Power Supply - Removal
1. On the left-hand side of the module:

Disconnect one connector labelled PWR and remove four screws securing the
power supply cover to the lower module. Detach the cover.
2. Remove the rivet-tie from the cover.

3. Disconnect all connecters from the pcb. Make a note of all connectors removed.
4. Remove four screws securing the pcb to the lower module.
5. Detach the power supply pcb and Mylar sheet fitted behind.
Power Supply - Replacement

To replace the power supply pcb, reverse the above procedure.
Power Supply Fuses
1. Access the power supply pcb as described above.

2. Remove and replace the fuses as required using only those that meet the
specifications.
10 Amp 30 Amp
Reed Switches - Removal

1. Open the lower transport and remove the cassettes.
2. Viewed from the right-hand side of the module:
Remove two screws securing the cassette guide to the inside left wall of the cassette
housing. Detach the guide.
3. From inside the cassette housing, remove two screws securing the pcb to the lower
base. Pull out the pcb slightly.
4. Disconnect one connector (labelled D1C, D2C, D3C or D4C) from the back of the
reed switch pcb.
Reed Switches - Replacement

To replace the reed switch, reverse the above procedure.
Motor Assembly (Recycler and Deposit) - Removal

Note: The recycler motor is the larger of the two motors. The deposit motor is the smaller of
the two. On BNA variants, only deposit motors are fitted. On recycler variants, both recycler
and deposit motors are fitted.

Disconnect all the connectors from the motor(s) you wish to remove:
2. On recycler motors: Two connectors labelled: BF1M and BS1M
3. On deposit motors: One connector labelled BS1M.
4. To remove the recycler motor, remove two screws securing the motor to the
assembly bracket.
5. To remove the deposit motor, remove three screws securing the motor assembly to
the lower base. Detach the recycler motor, if one is fitted, as described above.
Motor Assembly (Recycler and Deposit) - Replacement

To replace the motor assembly, reverse the above procedure.
Harnesses
Cassette Connector Harness - Removal
The cassette connector harness is connected to the bottom edge of the lower pcb and is
routed through to the base of each cassette housing.

Remove two screws securing the cable cover to the lower base unit under the slide
channel.
2. Disconnect two or four connectors labelled CS1/2/3/4.
Connectors
3. On the base of the cassette housing, remove two screws from the cable cover and
remove the cover from the base.
4. On the outside left of the lower module, feed the CS cable through the cable clamp
under the slide rail and pull up the cable clamp to the inside of the cassette housing.
5. Remove three screws securing the connector assembly bracket to the base of the
cassette. Detach the connector assembly bracket.
6. Remove two screws securing the connector to the assembly bracket and detach the
connector. Detach one ground screw/cable.
Cassette Connector Harness - Replacement

To replace the cassette connector and assembly bracket, reverse the above procedure
paying special attention to the following:
l Neatly fold and tape the length of each cable according to its position in the lower
module.
Link Harnesses
For the purposes of these procedures the following link harnesses are defined:
l GBNA/GBRU to ATM Link

l Upper to Lower Module Link
l Upper Module Link.
Each of the link harnesses consists of separately orderable cable assemblies. If a single
cable assembly is to be replaced then the old cable should be stripped out from the link
harness and its replacement should be tied in and routed in the same way. The procedures
also assume replacement of the articulated cable guard. If this is not necessary the existing
guard should be left in place and opened up to remove and replace the cable.
GBNA/GBRU to ATM Link Cable - Removal

The GBNA/GBRU to ATM link cable is routed in an articulated cable guard along one of the
module support rails and up to the GBNA/GBRU interlock switch and tied into a channel
along the side of the module cradle. The cable has three components parts:
l Cable Assembly (ATM Power) - 24Vdc supply lines from the ATM to the
GBNA/GBRU
l Cable Assembly (Shutter/MEEI) - MEEI and facia shutter power and control lines
from the GBNA/GBRU to the ATM
l USB Cable Assembly - USB communications signals between GBNA/GBRU and the
ATM PC Core.
The dc, MEI, and shutter lines are terminated in plugs that connect into Molex Mini-fit Jnr
receptacles at the end of the cradle channel. The USB cable is routed past these
receptacles, up the side wall of the safe, and into a socket on the 7-port USB hub.
Note: The length of cable runs varies between front and rear access ATMs. As you strip
out the damaged cable, take note of anchor points and how the excess length is tied in.
Remove the GBNA/GBRU to ATM link cable as follows:

2. Unplug the USB communications cable from the USB Hub and cut the cable ties to
free it from the harness.
3. Unplug the dc power, MEI, and shutter cables from the sockets at the inboard end of
the cradle channel.
4. Rack in the GBNA/GBRU and then rack out only the lower module.
5. Cut the cable ties that fasten the harness to the cable channel.
6. Old style interlock switch - remove the interlock switch cover.
New style interlock switch - remove the interlock switch.
7. Unplug the spade connectors from the interlock switch.
8. Unscrew the ground connector next to the interlock switch. Retain the screw.
9. Unscrew the single screw attaching the articulated cable guard to the cradle. Retain
the screw.
Note: Push the walls of the cable guard apart so that a few of the retaining bars can
be taken out allowing the cable to be held back and the head of the screw to be
reached.
10. Unscrew the two M4x8 screws attaching the cable guard to the side of the lower
module.
11. Unscrew the screws attaching the two plastic securing rings. Retain the screws and
rings. Unscrew the ground connector. Retain the screw.
Note: At this point the harness splits and enters the cassette compartment via two
openings. The USB, MEI, and shutter cables are routed towards the Lower PCB
and the power lines are routed to the power supply unit.
12. Open the lower module and remove the cassettes.

13. In cassette position 1 take off the bright metal covers on the side wall and base that
cover the dc power harness (two screws in each cover).
14. In cassette position 2 take off the bright metal cover on the side wall that covers the
USB and MEI/shutter harness (2 screws).
15. In cassette position 3 free the USB and MEI/shutter harness from the retaining
tangs.
16. On the base of cassette position 4 take off the Y-shaped bright metal cover over the
USB and MEI/shutter harness.
17. Unplug the power harness from the power supply unit PWR connector.
18. Take off the power supply cover (4 screws) and press out the cable tie securing the
power input cable to the cover.
19. Push the grommet out of the hole in the GBNA/GBRU base and unclip the grommet
from the dc power harness. Retain the grommet.
20. Unscrew and retain the ground connector screw.

21. Feed the dc power harness back into cassette position 1.
22. Take off the USB retaining bracket from the Lower PCB cover.
23. Unplug the USB cable and MEI/shutter harness from the USB and SHT connectors
on the Lower PCB.
24. Push the grommet out of the hole in the GBNA/GBRU base and unclip the grommet
from the USB cable and MEI/shutter harnesses. Retain the grommet.
25. Unclip and retain the ferrite cores from both harnesses. Take note of the exact
position of the cores (distance from connectors) on the cables.
26. Feed the harnesses back into cassette position 4.

27. Lift the harness assembly away from the GBNA/GBRU.
GBNA/GBRU to ATM Link Cable - Replacement

Replacement of the GBNA/GBRU to ATM link cable is the reverse of the above procedure,
taking care with the following:
l Clip all the retaining bars into the new cable guard.
l Replace all cable ties, retainers, and grommets.
l Ensure ground connections are securely made.
l Put the ferrite cores on the new cables in the previously noted positions.
l Connect the interlock switch as shown in the following illustration.
l Refit all removed covers.
COM 2
NO 2
NO 1
COM 1
Note: The illustration above shows an old style interlock switch in a front access ATM.
In a rear access ATM COM1 is at the top of the switch. New style interlock switch
connections are in the same orientation.
Upper to Lower Module Link Cable - Removal

The upper to lower module link cable is routed in an articulated cable guard attached to the
side of the lower module and to the underside of the upper module. The cable consists of:
the following component parts:
l Cable Assembly (Lower to Upper Power) - DC power lines to the bill validator unit
and the main upper pcb
l 100 Base-T Cable (BV LAN) - LAN cable between lower pcb and the bill validator unit
l Cable assembly (BV Power)
l Cable Assembly (Lower to Upper, Signal) - Data cable between the lower pcb and
the main upper pcb.
Note: The length of cable runs varies between front and rear access ATMs. As you strip
out the damaged cable, take note of anchor points and how the excess length is tied in.
Remove the upper to lower module link cable as follows:
1. Rack out the lower module of the GBNA/GBRU.

2. Unplug the BPWR and UPWR connectors from the power supply unit and the LAN
connector (blue cable) and UPCN connector from the lower pcb.
3. Take off the harness loop cover (3 screws).

4. Unclip the grommet from the harness and retain the grommet.
Note: Take note of how the harness is looped you will require to loop the
replacement harness in the same way.
Grommet
5. Open the lower module and remove the cassette from position 2.
6. Take off the bright metal panel on the side wall of the cassette housing covering the
upper to lower link cable.
7. Feed the cable up from the power supply area, through the cassette housing and out
of the access hole next to the cable guard.
8. Close the lower module.

9. Unscrew the 2 screws holding the cable guard to the side of the lower module.
Note: Push the side walls of the cable guard apart and unclip two or three cable
retaining bars from the cable guard to allow the cable to be held back away from the
heads of the screws.
10. Remove the single screw (M3x6) attaching the cable guard to the underside of the
upper module.
11. Remove the bracket from the cable guard (1 screw) and retain the bracket and
screw.
12. Rack in the lower module until it is latched and then rack out the whole
GBNA/GBRU.
13. Open the reservoir /escrow unit until it is supported on the gas strut.
14. Take off the cover from the main upper pcb (4 screws).
Loosen
15. Remove the screw from the long cable cover, slide the cover to the left out of its
locating tang, and lift it off.
16. Unplug the cable from the UPWR and UPCN connectors on the Main Upper PCB.
Note: The UPCN connector is the second from bottom at the left-hand side of the
board.
17. Unplug the cables from the BPWR and LAN connectors on the BV unit.
18. Free the cables from any retaining cable ties and lift the harness assembly away
from the GBNA/GBRU.
Upper to Lower Module Link Cable - Replacement

Replacement of the upper to lower module link cable is the reverse of the above procedure,
taking care with the following:
l Clip all the retaining bars into the new cable guard.
l Fit the cable guard bracket to the new cable guard.
l Replace all cable ties and grommets.
l Loop the new harness in the same way as the old.
Upper Module Link Cable - Removal

The upper module link cable is made up of two cable assemblies:
l Cable Assembly (Sep to Upper)

l Cable Assembly (Sep to Upper, URCN)
These cables carry the following signal and supply lines from the main upper pcb:
l Separator pcb: power and communications

l Separator: infra-red sensors and detectors, pulse motor
l Escrow: infra-red sensors and detectors, pulse motor.
Note: It is important that the cable routing is followed exactly. As you strip out the damaged
cable, take note of anchor points and how the cable is tied in.
Remove the upper module link cable as follows:
1. Take off the main upper pcb cover (4 screws).
Loosen
2. Take off the covers over the separator pcb as described in the section “Pre-Acceptor
- Removal”.
3. Open the top transport until it is supported by the gas strut.
4. Remove the screw from the long cable cover, slide the cover to the left out of its
locating tang, and lift it off.
5. From the main upper pcb unplug the cables from the following connectors: SPWR,
URCN, SE1, SE2, SE4, RV2S.
6. Ease the cables away from the board and out of the long channel cutting cable ties
as necessary.
7. Cut cable ties securing the cable where it turns up out of the long channel.
8. From the separator pcb unplug the cables from the SPWR and URCN connectors.
l Separator pcb on older GBNA/GBRU models
l Separator pcb on the latest GBNA/GBRU model
9. Separate the in-line connectors, SE1, RV2PH, PA3, SEFM, ESCM, ES5 and ES4.
10. Lift the upper module link cable away from the GBNA/GBRU cutting restraining
cable ties as necessary.
Upper Module Link Cable - Replacement

Replacement of the upper module link cable is the reverse of the above procedure, taking
care with the following:
l Replace all cable ties and grommets.

l Loop the new harness in the same way as the old.
CABLING
Interlock Switch Connections
Connection between the Power Input Connector and the PWR Connector on the
GBNA/GBRU Power Supply Unit is via an interlock switch wired as shown in the following
diagram.
GBNA/GBRU To ATM Connectors
Electrical connection between the GBNA/GBRU and the ATM consists of:
l 24Vdc supply lines from the ATM to the GBNA/GBRU

l MEEI control lines from the GBNA/GBRU to the ATM
l Facia shutter power and control lines from the GBNA/GBRU to the ATM
l USB communications signals between GBNA/GBRU and the ATM PC Core.
The D/C, MEEI, and shutter lines are terminated in plugs that connect into Molex Mini-fit
Jnr receptacles at the end of the cradle channel. The USB cable is routed past these
receptacles and plugged into a socket on the 7-port USB hub.
Power Input Connector

The power input connector is a 16-way Minifit Jr. dual row receptacle with the following
pinout:
N/C 1 9 N/C
N/C 2 10 N/C
+24V_RTN 3 11 +24V
+24V_RTN 4 12 +24V
+24V_RTN 5 13 +24V
+24V_RTN 6 14 +24V
N/C 7 15 +24V
N/C 8 16 N/C
Communication
The GBNA/GBRU communicates with the host ATM via a USB connection between the
module control board and the ATM PC Core. On some ATMs this may be via a USB hub.
l Interface type - USB1.1

l Speed - 12 Mbit/sec.
l Connector - USB Type A (plug)
Shutter / MEEI Control

The GBNA/GBRU controls the ATM’s facia shutter and MEEIs as follows:
Shutter - The shutter is connected to an 8-way Minifit Jr. dual row receptacle with the
following pinout:
+5VRTN 1 5 +5 V
+24VRTN 2 6 +24V
+24VRTN 3 7 SOL
LOCK 4 8 OPEN
Where,
l The D/C voltages are output power line voltages and returns.
l SOL is a TTL output signal, HI = Close, LO = Open
l LOCK (Shutter Closed) is a TTL input signal, High active.
l OPEN (Shutter Open) is a TTL input signal, High active.
MEEI - The MEEIs are connected to a 4-way Minifit Jr. dual row receptacle with the
following pinout:
MEI_A 1 3 +12 V
MEI_B 2 4 N/C
Where,
l The +12 V is an output power line voltage.

l MEI_A is a TTL, open collector output signal, Low active
l MEI_B is a TTL, open collector output signal, Low active
PCB Connectors
This section identifies the board connectors on GBNA/GBRU PCBs.
Power Supply Unit

The connections on the PSU are as follows:
BPWR
UPWR
PWR
LPWR
l PWR - +24V dc supply from ATM via interlock switch.

l BPWR - +12V, -12V, and +5V output to BV Unit.
l UPWR - +24V and +5V output to Main Upper PCB.

l LPWR - +5V and +24V output to Lower PCB.
There are three fuses in the module power supply:
l Fuse 1 = 250 V 10 A (Littelfuse)

l Fuse 2 and Fuse 3 = 250 V 30 A (Littelfuse)
Main Upper PCB
UB2 RV2S UB3
RV2PH
SE1
UB1
RV2MG
SE2 JTAG
SE4
URCN
UPCN UPWR
SPWR
DCMP/
DCMS
Connectors on the Main Upper PCB are as follows:

l UB2 - Upper transport photo-interrupters, and IR sensors.
l RV2S - Escrow IR sensors.
l UB3 - Upper transport solenoids.
l RV2PH - Pre-acceptor photo interrupters.
l UB1 - Upper transport photo- interrupters, and IR sensors.
l RV2MG - Not used
l JTAG - Not used
l UPWR - +24V and +5V from PSU.
l DCMP/DCMS - Upper transport dc motor.
l SPWR - +24V and +5V to Separator PCB
l UPCN - Logic lines to Lower PCB.
l URCN - Logic lines to Separator PCB
l SE4 - Separator and Escrow pulse motors.
l SE2 - Escrow IR sensors,

l SE1 - Separator IR sensors, Pre-acceptor T-sensors and IR sensors.
Separator PCB
Separator pcb on older GBNA/GBRU models
SE6 SE5 JTAG SE7 PA1
ES3
ES1
SPWR
ES2
URCN
Connectors on the Separator PCB are as follows:
l SE6 - Separator pulse motors and solenoid.

l SE5 - Separator photo-interrupters.
l JTAG - Not used
l SE7 - Separator and Pre-acceptor photo-interrupters (12 pin on type A modules, 6
pin on type B modules)
l PA1 - Pre-acceptor solenoids and pulse motors.
l SPWR - +24V and +5V in from Main Upper PCB.
l URCN - Logic lines from Main Upper PCB.
l ES2 - Escrow pulse motors and solenoids.
l ES1 - Escrow photo-interrupters.
l ES3 - Escrow photo-interrupters.
Separator pcb on the latest GBNA/GBRU model
MCU mounted to E-SPCB
1. E-SPCB
MEMCN
MCUPWR TERM
l MEMCN - FRU Memory +3.3V and Logic to MEM PCB

l MCUPWR - FRU Memory +5V/+3.3V and Logic to MCU PCB
l TERM - FRU Memory Logic Line from Lower PCB
2. MCU
MCUPWR
CPU
l MCUPWR - FRU Memory +5V?+3.3V and Logic from Separator PCB

l CPU - Not used
3. FRU Memory
MEMCN
l MEMCN - FRU Memory +3.3V and Logic Line from Separator PCB
Lower PCB
RV1PH
RSVS LB1 LB2 LB3 LB4 TERM
LT1
LPWR
UPCN SHT2
BV SHT
ICS
USB
CS1 CS2 CS3 CS4
Connectors on the Lower PCB are as follows:
l RSVS - Not used.

l RV1PH - Not used.
l LB1 - Lower base pulse motors 1 and 2.
l LB2 - Lower base reed switches 1 and 2.
l LB3 - Lower base pulse motors 3 and reed switch 3.
l LB4 - Lower base pulse motors 4 and reed switch 4.
l TERM - Factory debug facility.
l LT1 - IR sensors, solenoids, and photo-interrupter.
l SHT2 - Shutter and MEEI lines to ATM.
l SHT - Shutter and MEEI lines to ATM.
l USB - USB connection from ATM.
l CS4 - Recycle cassette position 4.
l ICS - Future development.
l BV - LAN connection to BV unit.
l UPCN - Logic connection to Main Upper PCB.
l LPWR - +24V and +5V power from PSU.
TOOLS
l The Separator Belt Adjustment Tool - this is supplied with the GBNA/GBRU and is
attached to the rear right side of the Escrow. (refer to the section, “Gear Timing”)
l An engineer’s rule and scribe
l A small hacksaw or side cutters
l A 3 mm allen key
l A file.
REVISION


CASSETTES
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the cassettes used in the NCR Cash Acceptor and Recycler when
installed in NCR ATMs. It provides operation, configuration and maintenance information
and is intended for use by personnel who unload, load and configure these cassettes.
DESCRIPTION
The NCR cash acceptor and recycler cassettes are portable containers moulded in high
impact polycarbonate. They are designed to store and, under the control of the parent sub-
system, release currency.
Cassette Variants
The following are the cassette variants according to functionality:
l Deposit (has blue front)

l Recycle (has grey front).
The cassette may also be categorised according to currency dimensions:

l Type A (has a green handle)—for currencies with wide notes
l Type B (has a blue handle)—for currencies with narrow notes
l Enhanced (has a blue handle)—used for recycle only.
The enhanced recycler cassette may be configured into the following settings:
l Narrow setting (default)
l Wide setting
l Special narrow setting.
Type ‘A’ cassettes must be used with type ‘A’ cash acceptor/cash recycler modules, and
type ‘B’ cassettes must be used with type ‘B’ cash acceptor/cash recycler modules.
Enhanced Recycle cassettes may be used in either module because their width is
configurable.
Therefore, a cassette may be identified as any of the following:
l Type A–Deposit
l Type B–Deposit
l Type A–Recycle
l Type B–Recycle
l Enhanced Recycle.
Type A Deposit Cassette Type A Recycle Cassette Type B Deposit Cassette Type B Recycle Cassette Enhanced Recycle Cassette
(Blue front with (Light Grey front with (Blue front with (Light Grey front with (Light gray front with
green handle) green handle) blue handle) blue handle) blue handle)
Standard and Extended Cassettes

The cassettes may also be categorised according to their capacity. All cassettes (except for
the Enhanced recycle) are available in either of the following:
l Standard Capacity
l Extended Capacity.
Adaptor plates can be fitted to the cassette positions in the extended cash acceptor and
recycler to allow standard cassettes to be used.
Cassette Sizes
Cassette sizes are as follows:
Cassette Type Size Note Capacity

Standard Capacity Deposit 253 mm (9.96 in.) 1700–2300 notes
Extended Capacity Deposit 488 mm (19.21 in.) 2800–4400 notes
Standard Capacity Recycler 220 mm (8.66 in.) 1400–2000 notes
Extended Capacity Recycler 455 mm (17.91 in.) 2600–4100 notes
Note Sensing
Both types of cassette have note sensing and will indicate full and empty conditions to the
parent system as appropriate.
Currency Sizes
The cassettes can be mechanically adjusted to hold currency of the sizes indicated below.
In addition, electro–mechanical adjustment provides up to sixteen different cassette
identification codes.
Currency width (short edge)

60 mm (2.36 in.) to 86 mm (3.39 in.)
Currency length (long edge) for Deposit Cassettes

Type A Type B
Deposit 120 mm (4.72 in.) to 182 mm (7.17 in.) 120 mm (4.72 in.) to166 mm (6.54 in.)
Currency length (long edge) for Recycler Cassettes

Type A Type B
Recycle 127 mm (5.00 in.) to 182 mm (7.17 in.) 127 mm (5.00 in.) to166 mm (6.54 in.)
Extended 150 mm (5.91 in.) to 182 mm (7.17 in.) 138 mm (5.43 in.) to 166 mm (6.54 in.)
Recycle
Currency length (long edge) for Enhanced Recycle Cassettes

Length
Narrow 166 mm (6.54 in.) or less
Wide greater than 166 mm (6.54 in.)
Special 144 mm (5.67in.) or less (when used for dispensing only)
Narrow
Power Requirements
None.
CASSETTE OPERATION AND REPLENISHMENT

Opening the Cassette
Open the cassette as follows:
1. Place the cassette on a flat surface.

2. Remove the latch seal (if fitted) according to your in house procedures.
3. Unlock the key lock (if fitted) on the cassette lid.
Note: The key cannot be removed while the cassette is unlocked.
4. Pull the bottom of the lid latch away from the body of the cassette.
5. Lift the latch up a small amount then pull the top of the latch away from the cassette.
6. Hinge the latch down to free the cassette lid.
7. Raise the lid past the vertical position then unhook it from the metal hinge lugs at the
front of the cassette body. Remove the lid completely from the cassette body.
Stage Operation for Deposit Cassettes

The note stage on the deposit cassettes does not have a latch. The stage must be pulled
back to the rear of the cassette and held in place while removing currency from the
cassette.
CAUTION
Make sure that the stage is firmly held in the rear position while
removing currency from the cassette.
1. Place the cassette on a suitable flat surface. Firmly support the rear of the cassette
with one hand.
2. Placing your fingers into the stage as shown below, pull it all the way to the rear of
the cassette.
3. Hold the stage at the rear of the cassette whilst removing the currency.
4. When all currency has been removed gently allow the stage to return to the home
position at the front of the cassette.
Stage Operation for Recycle Cassettes

Recycler cassettes have a latch to keep the stage at the rear of the cassette during
replenishment.
Note Stage
Note Stage Latch Release
Some early models of the cash acceptor and recycler have recycler cassettes that do not
have the stage latch. If your recycler cassette is of this type then operate the stage as
defined in Recyclers.
Latching the Note Stage

1. Place the cassette on a suitable flat surface. Firmly support the rear of the cassette
with one hand.
2. Placing your fingers into the stage as shown below, pull it all the way to the rear of
the cassette until the stage latch clicks.
Note: Do not press the stage latch release situated in the stage as this will
prevent the stage from latching correctly.
3. Make sure the latch clicks and the stage is held in the rear position before removing
your hand.
Unlatching the Note Stage

1. Firmly support the rear of the cassette with one hand.
2. Place the thumb of your free hand on the outside rear of the cassette and take hold
of the note stage, placing your fingers into the stage as shown below.
Squeeze slightly to relieve the spring tension on the note stage. Take care not to
press the note stage latch release before you have a firm grip on the stage.
3. While maintaining the hold on the stage press the green stage latch release with
your middle finger.
4. Gently allow the stage to slide to the front of the cassette. If there is currency in the
cassette ensure that it has not been trapped under the stage.
Closing the Cassette

Note: Make sure that the note stage is returned to the home position before closing the
cassette.
1. Holding the lid in a vertical position, hook the front of the lid onto the metal hinge lugs
on the front of the cassette body then close the lid.
2. Lift the latch up and forward toward the cassette.
3. Hook the latch over the lid latch block.
4. Pull the latch down and then press towards the cassette body until it clicks into the
locked position.
5. Replace the latch seal (if fitted) according to your in house procedures.
6. Lock the key lock (if fitted) on the cassette lid and remove the key.
Note: The key can only be removed when the cassette is locked.
Replenishment
Preparing Currency
Before loading the currency into a recycler cassette it must be prepared as described in the
following sections.
Used Currency
Used currency should be prepared by holding a bundle of approximately 100 notes in one
hand and separating out with the other. While separating out, the currency should be
checked for obvious defects such as:
l Adhesive tape on the surface of the currency.

l Staples, pins or any foreign matter attached to the currency.
l Torn or limp notes with pin holes.
l Two or more notes stuck to each other.
l Corner folds (straighten as required).
l Folded notes.
New Currency
New, or un-circulated, currency should be separated (fanned) out several times before
loading into the cassette. Any notes considered to be unacceptable should be removed.
The packaging of new currency can cause it to be set into a bow shape. This bow shape
may be either across the length or the width of the notes and may cause the notes to jam in
the module.
It is recommended that these notes should be processed through a counting machine

where possible. If this is not possible then the notes should be manually fanned and
flattened several times. If the bow persists follow the instructions given in the section
Loading A Cassette for notes that are deformed in this way.
Note: Bad currency preparation may impair the performance of the module.
Loading a Cassette
Load a cassette as follows:
1. Open the cassette.

2. Slide the note stage all the way to the rear of the cassette until it latches.
3. Align the edges of the notes in both planes by holding a bundle loosely between the
fingers and thumbs of both hands and tapping lightly on a flat surface, then tapping
the note ends.
4. Flatten out any bowed notes before loading them into the cassette.
5. Raise the front of the cassette to ease loading. For example, stand the cassette at
an angle against a wall.
CAUTION
Do not overload the cassette. There are two green
markers that indicate the maximum fill level. Do not fill
beyond the green section of the markers.
6. Load the cassette with notes in bundles of 50. Align the first bundle of notes against
the left or right hand side. Continue to stack the bundles in the cassette, alternating
the orientation of each bundle and also which side of the cassette the bundles are
lined up against. Leave a space of approximately 5mm between the guide and each
bundle, as shown below:
Approx. 5 mm Approx. 5 mm
Note: When loading a narrow guide cassette with notes 150mm or more in
length or when loading a wide guide cassette with notes 164mm or more in
length, you should align all bundles of notes in the middle of the cassette, do not
alternate sides, as shown below:
7. Continue until the required amount is loaded.

8. Release the stage and allow it and the note stack to slide upwards until the currency
stack touches the front support.
9. Lay the cassette back flat on its base. The currency should now remain between the
front support and the stage in an upright position.
10. Close the cassette.
Unloading a Cassette
Unloading a cassette is a reversal of the loading procedure. Refer to Basic Operations for
details of cassette opening, closing and note stage operation.
Transporting and Storing Cassettes

Always carry a cassette by its handle when transporting individually (for example,
transporting to the ATM from a cash in transit (CIT) armoured van).
When transporting the cassette from location to location (for example, in a CIT armoured
van):
l Place the cassette so that it lies with the longest dimension flat - i.e., 90 degrees
rotated from it's normal vertical operating (lid in up position)
l Restrict the movement of the cassette during transportation. To prevent any damage
during transportation, it is also advisable to ensure that any cassette edge, or sides,
are separated from one another by a foam or air cushion material.
l Do not stack more than six cassettes on top of each other.
When storing cassettes:
l Ensure that each cassette is stored so that it lies with the longest dimension flat - i.e.,
90 degrees rotated from it's normal vertical operating (lid in up position)
l Do not stack more than six cassettes on top of each other.
TROUBLESHOOTING
None.
DIAGNOSTICS
None.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
Configuring the Cassette
This section covers the following topics:
l Configuring the enhanced recycle cassette.

l Setting the note guide clearance.
l Setting identification codes.
l Cassette body to lid identification.
Configuring the Enhanced Recycle Cassette

The Enhanced Recycler may be configured into the following:
l Narrow (default)
l Wide
l Special Narrow.
Using the Narrow Setting

The narrow setting is the default type, the maximum length of long edge is 166 mm (6.54
in). There is no configuration change required in the cassette to use this setting.
Using the Wide Setting

The wide setting permits length of notes longer than 166 mm (6.54 in.). This setting type
does not require the side guide.
1. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the four screws indicated below:
Side Guides
2. Remove the side guides.
3. Remove the stage guides by pressing the top and bottom pawls toward the centre.
4. Install the stage guides on the outside slots provided.
5. The completed wide type setting appears like the following image:
Using the Special Narrow Setting

The size of the long edge is 144 mm (5.67 in) or less when used for dispensing only. This
setting type does not require the stage guide.
1. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the four screws indicated below:
Side Guides
2. Remove the side guides.

3. Remove the stage guides by pressing the top and bottom pawls toward the centre.
Side Guides
4. Install side guides on the inside slots using the four screws.
The completed special narrow type setting appears like the following image:
Setting The Note Guide Clearance

The currency width adjustment is made by first establishing the width of the currency that
the cassette is to hold. This measurement is then used to determine the thickness of
spacers located between the note guides and the cassette lid.
Currency Length
$
Currency
Width
The note guides are not installed when the cassette leaves the factory and will be packed
separately. Have the following parts to hand before starting to configure the note guide
clearance of the cassette.
Narrow Note
Left Hand Wide Guide (1)
Note Guide (1)
Spacer (9)
Screw Plate (9)
Screw (9)
Right Hand Wide

Note Guide (1)
Note: For the key lock (if fitted), the keys are packaged with the ATM.
The note guides are set using segmented note guide spacers which must be cut to the
correct size. As shown below, the segments are numbered, and the ends of the spacers
are marked A and B.
A
7
1
2
6
5
3
4
4
5
3
2
6
1
7
B
Depending on the thickness required either the end marked A or marked B is removed.
Media Widths
The note guides should be set to accommodate the widest media that is to be used.
Spacers can be cut for media widths of 60 mm to 86 mm. All the spacers for a cassette
should be cut to the same size.
Number of Guides and Spacers to Use

All three note guides are fitted for media widths 60 mm to 82 mm, requiring nine spacers
(three for each note guide) in the standard cassette and fifteen spacers (five for each note
guide) in the extended cassette.
For media widths 83 mm to 86 mm the narrow note guide is not fitted, therefore only six
spacers are required in the standard cassette and ten spacers in the extended cassette.
Cutting the Note Guide Spacers

1. First measure the width of the widest media that the cassette will contain.
2. Decide how many spacers are required (nine or fifteen for media widths 60 mm to
82 mm,six or ten for media widths 83 mm to 86 mm).
3. Refer to the following table to determine where to cut the spacers for the correct
thickness.
4. Cut each spacer at the required segment using a small hacksaw. Remove any burrs
after cutting.
Media Size Spacer Spacer after cutting Media Size Spacer Spacer after cutting
(mm) Position Remove end A, use end B (mm) Position Remove end B, use end A
(using (using parts)
parts)
60 No cut
A
61 B7 B
64 A7
1
7
62
7
1 2
6
2
6
3
5
63 3
5
4
4
4
4
5
3
5
3
6
2
6
2 1
7
7
1
65 B6 B
67 A6 A
1
7
66
7
1
2
6
2
6
3
5
3
5
4
4
4
4
5
3
5
3
6
2
6
2
A
68 B5 B
70 A5
1
7
69 1
7
2
6
2
6
3
5
3
5
4
4
4
4
5
3
5
3
71 B4 B 73 A4 A
1
7
72 1
7
2
6
2
6
3
5
3
5
4
4
4
4
74 B3 B 76 A3 A
1
7
1
75
7
2
6
2
6
3
5
3
5
Media Size Spacer Spacer after cutting Media Size Spacer Spacer after cutting
(mm) Position Remove end A, use end B (mm) Position Remove end B, use end A
(using (using parts)
parts)
77 B2 B 79 A2 A
1
7
1
7
78 2
6 2
6
80 B1 B
82 A1 A
1
7
81 1
7
Note: do not fit the narrow note guide with the following spacer cuts:
83 B0 B 85 A0 A
84 86
5. Clip each of the required spacers into the cassette lid by pressing the legs of the
spacer together and pushing them into the apertures in the cassette lid. Make sure
that each spacer is correctly inserted, as shown below.
6. Insert a screw plate between the top two divisions of each of the spacers. Make sure
each screw plate is fully inserted and the screw holes line up.
7. Using a cross-head screwdriver and a screw for each spacer, screw the note guides
to the spacers as shown below. Make sure that the ridged ends of the guides are at
the front of the cassette lid (the end with the hinge lugs) and the spring guides are
set centrally.
Left Hand Wide Note Guide

Right Hand Wide Note Guide
Narrow Note Guide
Note: The illustration shows all three note guides fitted. For media widths of
83mm to 86 mm do not fit the narrow note guide.
8. The note guide clearance is now set.
Setting Identification Codes

The identification code of a cassette is set by up to four magnets in the side of the cassette.
The positions of the magnets determine the identification code of the cassette. The code
allows the module to know which cassette is in which position and use the correct one for
deposit and recycling.
Accessing the Magnets

Access the magnets as follows:
1. Place the cassette on its side as shown below.

2. Release the magnet cover by pressing the two tags from within the cassette.
Magnet Cover
Cover Release Clips
3. Remove the magnet cover. The four magnets and seven magnet posts are now
visible. Counting from the rear of the cassette, the first four posts are used for setting
the code. The last three posts are used for storing the spare magnets and are not
active. Typically a new cassette will be factory configured as shown below with the
code set to one.
Active Posts Storage Posts
4. The magnets should be placed with the white side facing away from the cassette.
The white end should be facing towards the top of the cassette.
To set the ID code, place the magnets in the posts as detailed in the following table.
Cassette Post 1 Post 2 Post 3 Post 4

ID Code
0
1 X
2 X
3 X X
4 X
5 X X
6 X X
7 X X X
8 X
9 X X
10 X X
11 X X X
12 X X
13 X X X
14 X X X
15 X X X X
5. Once the cassette is configured replace the magnet cover. The top of the magnets
should be visible between the magnet cover and the side of the cassette.
Cassette Body To Lid Identification

Once the cassette has been configured, it is advisable that the body and lid are visually
identified to avoid a mismatch of bodies and lids.
The following methods are recommendations only. You may however use other methods
according to in-house procedures.
Colour Code Labels

Each configuration is allotted a colour code. By attaching a label of that colour to both body
and lid, the matching body and lid can be identified.
Indelible Ink Marking

The cassette can be identified by writing the configuration on the inside or outside of both
the body and lid, using an indelible ink pen.
Fitting an Adaptor for Standard Cassettes in Extended Variant

To allow a standard cassette to be used in an extended variant cash acceptor and recycler,
an adaptor must be fitted to the cassette position. To fit the adaptor, proceed as follows:
1. Open the security enclosure.

2. Push the latch to release the lower module and pull out the lower module using the
green handle, as shown below.
3. Remove the lower transport seal if fitted.
4. Pull up the green handle on the lower transport and use it to lift up the transport.
5. Lift the cassette up and out of the lower module using the green cassette handle.
6. Remove the two screws securing the black plastic cassette guide inside the cassette
position. Retain the guide and the screws.
Cassette guide
7. Slide the adaptor into position within the lower module.
Adaptor
8. Fit the black plastic cassette guide removed earlier onto the adaptor cover plate.
9. Slot the cover plate into position and attach it to the adaptor using four screws and
four washers.
Screw & Washer Cover Plate
10. Install the standard cassette in the lower module taking care not to hit the underside
of the lower transport. Make sure the cassette is pushed fully home.
Note: If the cassette is not pushed fully home, an error message will be
displayed (replace cassette 1/2/3/4). To clear this error, remove the cassette
and adaptor plate, check for any obstructions and replace the adaptor plate
and cassette correctly.
11. Repeat the above steps for all cassette positions to be adapted.
12. Close the lower transport ensuring it is fully home when the latch clicks.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the device, the lower transport must
be pushed fully home before pushing the lower module
back into the main device.
13. Replace the lower transport seal if fitted.
14. Push the lower module back into the device ensuring the lower module latch clicks
into the home position. Then close and lock the security enclosure.
The standard cassette adaptor can be removed from the extended cash acceptor and
recycler to allow an extended cassette to be used by following the reverse of the above
procedure.

Not applicable.
CABLING
None.
None.
TOOLS
l Cross–head Screwdriver
l Small Hacksaw.
REVISION

16. SECURITY
Alarms 1884
Revision 1894
Biometric Finger Print Reader (BFPR) 1895
Intelligent Fraud Detection (Stand Alone) 1896
Revision 1912
USB Intelligent Fraud Detection 1913
Revision 1938
Fluiditi ATM security 1939
Revision 1975
Fluiditi Replenishment Security 1976
Revision 2023
Skimming Protection Solution 2024
Revision 2049
Skimming Protection Solution (Dip Card Reader) 2050
Revision 2069
ALARMS
INTRODUCTION
The alarm system provides an interface between a series of alarm sensors and an external
environment, such as a bank’s existing alarm scheme. There are three types of alarm
systems:
l Basic
l Enhanced
l High security.
Location
The following diagrams show the locations of the installations within the safe:
Basic Alarm System
PRIMARY LOCK
SECONDARY
LOCK
Enhanced Alarm System
PRIMARY LOCK
SECONDARY
LOCK
High Security Alarm System
SECONDARY
PRIMARY LOCK
LOCK
DESCRIPTION
All Alarm Systems offer status reporting. This feature reports the status of the alarm signals
to the ATM application program.
A silent alarm, operated by a special combination lock, is an option.
TROUBLESHOOTING
None.
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0
None.
Level 1
Alarms
The test Offered on the Alarms Diagnostic menu is the Determine Sensor Status test.
Determine Sensor Status
Reports the status of the safe’s six sensors.
Level 3
None.
STRAPPING
If the silent alarm is not fitted, the following turnaround plug (NCR part no. 445‐0591539)
will be installed in connector J1 on the alarm termination panel:
l 1 x 009‐0006439, connector 2 x 3 plug

l 2 x 009‐0006427, terminal #18 (female)
l 50 mm x 006‐5830020, wire #18 white.
6 5 4
3 2 1
ADJUSTMENTS
The vibration detector will normally be adjusted for optimum performance by the
representative of the alarm company responsible for connecting the ATM to a local alarm
system (they have the expertise and local knowledge to adjust the unit for a particular site).
For test purposes, however, NCR presets the unit to an initial adjustment as follows:
l Using a spring gauge, centred level with the contact in the direction of the arrow,
adjust the screw until the force necessary to open the contact is approximately 5 g.
Recommended range is 5 g minimum to 25 g maximum.
l If a gauge is not available an approximate adjustment can be made as follows:
l Loosen the adjustment screw until the contact is open
l Tighten the screw until the contact is just closed
l Tighten the screw a further one eighth (1/8) of a turn. (This is the equivalent of the 5 g
setting.)

CABLING
None.
Alarm Termination Panels
Basic
C7 R5
R20
R21
R6 U1 R12
R23 Q2 D5
R4 VR1
D3 R30
C4
J3
SW1
J1 RLY1 RLY2 RLY4
C5
J2 R28 C6
D1 D2 R16 R25
J4
R18
Basic and Enhanced/High Security
Silent Alarm Connector, J1C

Desc Pin Pin Desc
N/C 4 1 N/C
+12V 5 2 N/C
N/C 6 3 SREL
Door Switch Connector, J2

Desc Pin Pin Desc
+12v 3 1 N/C
DREL 4 2 N/C
Alarm Output Connector, J3

Desc Pin Pin Desc
TAL_NC 1 2 DAL_NO
TAL_CM 3 4 DAL_CM
N/C 5 6 DAL_NC
N/C 7 8 SAL_NO
N/C 9 10 SAL_CM
N/C 11 12 SAL_NC
N/C 13 14 CAL_NC
CSTS_CM 15 16 CAL_CM
DSTS_CM 17 18 CAL_NO
SSTS_CM 19 20 CSTS_N/C
Desc Pin Pin Desc

TSTS_CM 21 22 DSTS_NC
N/C 23 24 SSTS_NC
N/C 25 26 TSTS_NC
N/C 27 28 +12V
GND 29 30 N/C
Vibration Sensor Connector, J4

Desc Pin Pin Desc
N/C 1 2 N/C
N/C 3 4 N/C
N/C 5 6 N/C
N/C 7 8 N/C
N/C 9 10 N/C
VIB 11 12 N/C
N/C 13 14 N/C
N/C 15 16 GND
Enhanced
Basic and Enhanced/High Security
Silent Alarm Connector, J1

Desc Pin Pin Desc
N/C 4 1 N/C
+12V 5 2 N/C
N/C 6 3 SREL
Door Switch Connector, J2

Desc Pin Pin Desc
+12V 3 1 N/C
DREL 4 2 N/C
Alarm Output Connector, J3

Desc Pin Pin Desc
TAL_NC 1 2 DAL_NO
TAL_CM 3 4 DAL_CM
TAL_NO 5 6 DAL_NC
TAL_OUT 7 8 SAL_NO
TAL_IN 9 10 SAL_CM
N/C 11 12 SAL_NC
N/C 13 14 CAL_NC
CSTS_CM 15 16 CAL_CM
DSTS_CM 17 18 CAL_NO
SSTS_CM 19 20 CSTS_N/C
Desc Pin Pin Desc

TSTS_CM 21 22 DSTS_NC
CTST_OP 23 24 SSTS_NC
CTST_OUT 25 26 TSTS_NC
CTST_IN 27 28 +12V
GND 29 30 N/C
Composite Attack Connector, J4

Desc Pin Pin Desc
N/C 1 2 +12V
N/C 3 4 N/C
N/C 5 6 CTST_OP
N/C 7 8 CTST_OUT
N/C 9 10 CTST_IN
VIB 11 12 CAL_OUT
TAL_OUT 13 14 N/C
GND 15 16 GND
I/O Panel Alarm Output Connector

The alarm output connector, located on the ATM I/O connector panel, has the following
arrangement of pins which are allocated for basic and enhanced systems as shown in the
diagram:
A spring gauge (optional).
REVISION

BIOMETRIC FINGER PRINT READER

(BFPR)
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the replacement of the Biometric Finger Print Reader (BFPR), MEI
Harness and Harness Auto Supervisor without Private Audio.
DESCRIPTION
BFPR
The BFPR is a fingerprint sensor package. It is a combination of fingerprint sensor

technology, advanced image processing techniques and a proprietary finger positioning
system. The BFPR also has embedded ESD protection.
The sensor looks past the easily obscured outer layer of the skin to the living layer below
where the unique ridge and valley patterns of the fingerprints originate, to form an
accurate, undistorted image of the fingerprint. The fingerprint detection surface, contained
in a CMOS integrated circuit is protected by an ultra-hard transparent ceramic coating to
resist everyday use, abrasion and wear, and is capable of withstanding greater than 1
million touches.
INTELLIGENT FRAUD DETECTION (STAND

ALONE)
INTRODUCTION
This chapter details the Stand Alone Intelligent Fraud Detection (IFD) feature. The feature
will be referred to as IFD throughout this chapter.
The IFD feature uses sensors to detect and create an alert whenever fraudulent devices,
such as card skimmers are fitted to the exterior of the ATM fascia.
Alerts can be delivered by one or all of the following three ways:
l As SMS messages via optional modem (suitable for pilots, but not for full roll-out)
l Via the miscellaneous interface board to provide communication to a host
l To local alarms via the NCR Alarm Board, if fitted.
The IFD device is capable of being configured to know the difference between genuine
additions and fraudulent additions to the fascia.
DESCRIPTION
IFD consists of the following elements:
l Control board
l From one to six sensors.
The following diagram shows an overview of the IFD feature. Dashed lines indicate
optional components.
Note: Configuration is performed using a lap-top loaded with the Remote Configuration
Tool.
Power
Supply
(24V) Auto
Supervisor
PC for (if fitted)
configuration
RF
Detect
Security Enclosure
Door Switch
Top Box Switch(es)

USB
replenishment
receive
IFD
Control transmit
Board
transmit
Status
LEDs transmit
Sensors (up to 6)
To Alert System Penetration Mat(s)

(see below)
Alert System Configurations

There are several configurations that can be used to receive alerts from the IFD board
which are shown in the following diagrams. The actual IFD alert system used is normally
determined by the existing alarm configuration.
Note: IFD uses the same miscellaneous interface channel as the silent alarms. This
channel can only be used for silent alarm or IFD, not both at the same time.
Local Alarms (with status)
IFD
Control
Board
NCR
MISC
Alarm
I/F
Board
Host
To
Local
Alarms
Local Alarms (without status)
IFD
Control
Board
NCR
Alarm
Board
To
Local
Alarms
Control Board
The control board is the heart of the system and provides the following connections:
l 1 x USB 2.0 I/O port (Mini USB)

l 3 x Molex 70555 series Transmit connectors (6 transmit channels)
l 1 x Molex 70555 series Receive connectors (2 receive channels)
l 1 x UZB3615 open collector optical sensor input
l 1 x 1 SPI Bus for future additional sensor
l 1 x Molex 70555 series connector for connecting to the door switches
l 1 x logic level output (not used)
l 1 x relay alarm which is de-energised to indicate alert status (also indicates alert
condition if disconnected, powered off or broken)
l 1 x serial bus connection (not used).
The board also provides eight diagnostic LEDs for installations without access to status
information via the terminal.
Sensors
A sensor consists of a two-ended electrode, with one end for transmit and the other for
receive.
Each sensor is fastened to the inside surface of the fascia of the terminal. The sensors are
connected to the control board using 50 ohm terminated coaxial cable.
Software
Software is downloaded into the IFD control board and is maintained in Flash PROM
memory. Downloads are carried out via modem or a PC connected to the USB port of the
control board.
IFD is a stand-alone device installed in the terminal. This means that there are no software
dependencies. However alerts can be monitored via channel three of the Miscellaneous
Interface Board.
Status LEDs
The IFD control board is fitted with eight alarm status LEDs which display the status of the
sensors. Once the system has stabilised then the LEDs will remain steady. If a sensor
registers a change then the corresponding LED will flash. If the change is registered for
more than 126 seconds then an alert will be triggered. The LED will then go steady again
and LED D1 will light for 60 seconds.
Note: 126 seconds is the default time before an alert is triggered. The actual time may be
different depending on customer requirements. If the default time has been changed from
the default then Professional Services will have already advised the appropriate customer
services support team of the new settings.
If a sensor is configured to be not present, then the LED will remain unlit. LED to sensor
correspondence will depend on the configuration of IFD when installed. The diagram
below shows how the LEDS map to each of the six transmit channels.
Channel 6 - D203
Channel 5 - D202
Channel 4 - D201
Channel 3 - D200
Channel 2 - D207
Channel 1 - D208
IR Detect - D206
(not used)
Control PCB
Alert LED (D1)
IFD Replenishment Mode

If the ATM is fitted with the auto supervisor feature then replenishment mode is triggered by
the auto supervisor switches. If the ATM is not equipped with the auto supervisor feature
then door switches for the top box and the security enclosure will be fitted at time of
installation. These are then used to trigger IFD replenishment mode.
When in replenishment mode the status LEDs will light in a repeating sequence. This
sequence is outer pairs followed by inner three. The pattern will repeat until closure of a
replenishment switch. After closure of a replenishment switch, the LEDs take up to 126
seconds to return to normal configuration status.
CABLING
24V Power Supply Cable
24V DC
Distribution HSFD J301
PCB
Replenishment Harness
SW1_NC SW1_male_NC
Black
22
HSFD_RACK
SW1_CM_(IFD) 3
White
Replenishment Harness (SelfServ 32 RA only)

Rear Switch Front Switch
SW1_Male_NC
Female_NO
IFD with Alarms Safe (F/A) Harness
IFD with Alarms Top-box (F/A) Harness
IFD with RIO Safe (F/A) Harness
IFD_J204
IFD with RIO Top-box (F/A) Harness
IFD Alarms with RIO Board, without Status (R/A), 2.8m

(SelfServ 25/32/34)
IFD with Alarms, without Status (R/A), 5.3m (SelfServ 32 RA

only)
IFD with Alarms with Status, 3.3m (SelfServ 25 & 32 only)
CONTROL BOARD CONNECTORS

Relay Alarm (J204) RF Serial (J200)
Penetration Mat (J205) USB (J208) Cabinet Open
& Penetration Mat (J206)
24V In (J301) Extension SPI Slot (J300)
J205 J204 J208 J206

J301 J200
Remote LED
J209
Connector (J209)
J210 J213 J300
J103
Power LED
J102
J211 J212 J101

J101
J203
J104
Status LEDs
Alert LED (D1)
Transmit Channel 5
J103
Transmit Channel 4
Transmit Channel 3
J102
Transmit Channel 2
J101 Transmit Channel 1

Transmit Channel 0
Logic Level alarm
J203 (not used)
J104 Receive Channel 0

Receive Channel 1
TROUBLESHOOTING
Sensors
Check that all cables between the IFD control board and the sensors are correctly
connected with their corresponding colour code as indicated in table below. Ensure that all
connectors are fully home.
Class PCB Connectors Colour Code Cable Colour Code

6628 J101 Red 445-0716092 Red
6628 J104 Blue 445-0716090 Blue
6632 J101 Red 445-0716091 Red
6632 J104 Blue 445-0716089 Blue
6638 J101 Red 445-0716092 Red
6638 J104 Blue 445-0716090 Blue
6622 J101 Red 445-0716092 Red
6622 J104 Blue 445-0716090 Blue
6626 J101 Red 445-0716092 Red
6626 J104 Blue 445-0716090 Blue
6625 J101 Red 445-0716091 Red
6625 J104 Blue 445-0716089 Blue
6634 J101 Red 445-0716091 Red
6634 J104 Blue 445-0716089 Blue
The diagram below shows the card reader sensor connections. The electrodes can be any
shape and so those shown are for illustration purposes only.
HSFD Control Board
Transmit Electrode
J101
Pins 3/4
J104
Pins 1/2
Receive Electrode
Test the sensors according to the following procedure. Note that there are different
procedures for front and rear access units.
Note: The control board LEDs should flash within approximately 10 seconds and in any
case within 30 seconds.
Rear Access
1. Open the cabinet top box which will activate replenishment mode.
2. Pull out the auto supervisor/replenishment switch to override replenishment mode.
3. Let the control board LEDs settle until D208 is lit and steady.
4. Rack out the card reader.
5. Wait and observe the control board LEDs. If D208 flashes then the electrode is
operating normally. If the LED does not flash then test the appropriate cables and
replace as necessary. If the cables are functioning correctly then replace the
electrode and check again.
Note: Customers using the ATM at this juncture may also cause LED’s to
flash.
6. If the problem persists then check the control board.

7. Rack in the card reader.
8. Close the cabinet top box.
Front Access
1. Open the fascia which will activate replenishment mode.
2. Pull out the auto supervisor/replenishment switch to override replenishment mode.
3. Let the control board LEDs settle until D208 is lit and steady.
4. Place a hand over the card reader sensor.
5. Observe the control board LEDs. If D208 flashes then the sensor is operating
normally. If the LED does not flash then test the appropriate cables and replace as
necessary. If the cables are functioning correctly then replace the sensor and check
again.
Note: Customers using the ATM at this juncture may also cause LED’s to
flash.
6. If the problem persists then check the control board.

7. Remove the hand from the card reader sensor.
8. Close the cabinet top box.
IFD Control board

If the status LEDs do not light there may be no power supply to the control board or the
board may be faulty.
Note: The IFD control board has a built in poly fuse that will automatically re-set when the
fault condition is corrected. The fuse requires a few seconds to cool. Allow 20 secs to be
certain.
No Power
Check that the control board power LED is on.
If the LED is off then there is no power to the control board. Ensure that the power cable
from the 24V power supply is connected and functioning correctly. Replace the cable if
required.
If the cable is functioning correctly then check the power supply and replace if necessary.
If both the power supply and power cable are functioning correctly then replace the IFD
control board.
Status LEDs Failed

If the status LEDs do not light and there is power to the board then the board is faulty.
Replace the IFD control board.
IFD Fault Finding

This section provides guidelines on determining and preventing causes of numerous
generated Fraud Alerts.
Definitions
Replenishment Switch—this switch informs the IFD that the ATM door is open. This is
implemented as a dedicated switch. If the customer has the auto–supervisor feature, the
same switch is used for both the auto–supervisor and the ATM door, with parallel wiring.
Replenishment Harness—this harness connects the IFD control board to the

replenishment switch.
Electrode Harness—this harness connects the IFD electrodes to the IFD control board.
This harness is implemented as black co–axial screened cables.
IMCRW Card Reader—this is an Integrated Magnetic Card Reader Module identified by a

green card throat.
VE Card Reader—this is an older style motorized reader identified by a black card throat.
Causes of False Alerts

The following list enumerates the common causes of alerts that the IFD generates:
l Replenishment or servicing
l Card holder or customer actions
l Customized ATM modifications
l Skimmer application
Replenishment or Servicing
Be aware that ATM operators can cause IFD alerts when one or more of the following
instances occur:
l The ATM servicing time exceeds 30 minutes.
Older versions of firmware activate an alarm every 30 minutes when the ATM door is open.
This is disabled in the latest version of IFD firmware and is configurable in the IFD XFS
software.
l The ATM hood is left open after servicing or replenishment.
IFD is disabled when the hood is open. Older versions of firmware activate an alarm every
30 minutes when the ATM door is open. The alarm is disabled in the latest version of IFD
firmware and is configurable in the IFD XFS software.
l The ATM hood is quickly opened and closed.
The night safe keys may be stored inside the ATM hood. The quick open and close of the
ATM hood to access or replace the night safe keys results in an IFD re–baseline without the
ATM going out of service. Customer interaction at the time of re–baselining causes an
incorrect baseline to be set and results in a false alert.
Note: This action is not an issue when the IFD XFS component is used.
l The ATM hood is opened for servicing or replenishment with auto–supervisor

switch pulled out.
In this mode, IFD does not suppress alerts. Replenishment actions that cause movement in
the card reader generate alerts.
Note: The IFD kit includes an “auto–supervisor” switch. If the IFD version does not support
auto–supervisor, the switch is fitted but does not implement auto–supervisor functionality as
the harnessing only connects it to IFD.
Card Holder or Customer Actions

l A large bag on the ATM shelf that encroaches the card reader area for longer than 2
minutes
l Vandalism that causes the fascia to shift, moving the IFD sensors relative to the card
reader—for example, hitting the DIP cowl with excessive force
l A person that leans against fascia for longer than the transaction timer (typically 2
mins)—a human body is detected if it leans on the card reader area.
Customized ATM Modifications

Customization of ATM parts or its surroundings may cause fascia movement through
thermal expansion. This results in IFD alerts. Ensure that any modifications in the card
reader area does not affect the stability of the fascia.
Skimmer Application
A genuine skimmer leaves no trace of its presence. Ensure that a genuine skimmer is not
categorized as a false alert. It may be that a skimmer is being tested for fit on the fascia
before it is actually used.
Additional Guidelines to Prevent False Alerts with IFD

l Ensure that the collar is in a fixed position.
l The fascia should not move when the fascia shelf at each side or at the four corners of
the fascia are pressed. Ensure that it does not rock.
l Ensure that the sleeve is correctly fastened with all its screws and bolts.
l Ensure that the top hood of the ATM is closed and latched so that the replenishment
switch works correctly.
l Check if DIP card reader fan does not generate excessive noise or movement.
l Ensure that the cooling fan in the LCD panel is free running and stable. The cooling
fan may vibrate and cause IFD alerts.
l Check for small holes in the fascia or panels indicative of a genuine skimming attack.
PIN holes are typically found in areas that can view down onto the PIN pad. Examples
of these areas are the light panel, the cash slot, fascia protrusions, and so on.
l Similar to PIN holes, check for false panels on the fascia which may house a spy
camera. These are generally painted to match the fascia which makes it hard to
identify. Horizontal surfaces above the display are popular locations for such panels.
Guidelines for Proper Maintenance of ATMs with IFD

l Train branch staff on proper procedures when handling ATMs with IFD.
Example: Inspecting ATMs daily for skimming and PIN capture devices or signs of a recent
attack.
l Inspect the ATM fascia for skimmers after the ATM top box has been opened and
closed after servicing or replenishment.
l Train branch staff to take a photo of each ATM and use it as a reference when
inspecting for fraudulent devices.
Note: If a fraudulent device is found, take the ATM out of service.
l Refrain from leaning on the card reader when racked out, as this causes
misalignment and false alerts.
l If a fraudulent device is found on the fascia, do not remove it. Take a photo and call
security. Fraudsters attack anyone who attempts to remove the device.
l Refrain from modifying the ATM at local customer request.
Example: Unplugging Auto-Supervisor switch, as this upsets IFD threshold levels.
Standalone IFD Test

This test is applicable to Stand Alone systems only. This does not apply to systems enabled
with XFS software.
Note: Ensure that all previously removed modules are replaced before the following test is
performed.
In addition, the system reacts to any movement of card reader and cash dispenser. Avoid
moving or interfering with any modules while the following test procedures are performed.
1. Disconnect the USB harness from IFD PCB (at either end, IFD PCB, or PC Core).
2. Power cycle IFD and disable auto–supervisor switches.
3. Leave the IFD untouched to run for approximately 2 minutes until test board LEDs
stop flashing with all module racking in place. Refer to the IFD Control Board LEDs
diagram below.
Channel 6 - D203
Channel 5 - D202
Channel 4 - D201
Channel 3 - D200
Channel 2 - D207
Channel 1 - D208
IR Detect - D206
(not used)
Control PCB
Alert LED (D1)
4. Get into a position that the status LEDs on the IFD control board is seen. Only
LEDs—D201, D200, and D208 lights up and does not flash. These stationary lit
LEDs demonstrate that the system is operating correctly (no activity around card
reader electrode area).
5. Rack back the card reader and printer tray unit fully —LED D208 starts to flash,
indicating that the card reader electrodes are detecting a change of state in this
area.
6. Wait until LED D208 stops flashing at approximately 3 minutes.
Note: At the end of 3 minutes, the D1 ALERT! LED may also light up. This action
indicates a successful alert caused by the card reader. Do not worry if the D1
ALERT! LED does not light, there may be other factors why the alert was not
successful. As long as LED D208 flashes when the Card reader is racked, then all is
well.
7. Push the card reader unit back into position. The LED D208 flashes again. Wait 3
minutes until it stops flashing.
Note: At the end of 3 minutes, the D1 ALERT! LED may also light up. This action
indicates a successful alert caused by the card reader. Do not worry if the D1
ALERT! LED does not light, there may be other factors why the alert was not
successful. As long as LED D208 flashes when Card reader racked, then all is well.
If customers try to use the ATM during this test period, the flashing may not stop. In
this case, the flashing LEDs are a good indication that the system is working
correctly.
8. To complete the test, reconnect the USB Cable and power cycle the IFD.
Note: If the test operation does not cause the LEDs to flash in the way described,
check all cabling, connections, electrodes, and IFD board for damage or incorrect
installation.
Remote Management Tool

This diagnostic tool obtains log data from standalone systems. It is not required for systems
enabled with XFS software.
The kits include a USB cable with an A connector on one end and a mini–B connector on
the other end.
Remote Management Tool Installation

1. Contact your NCR Support Representative to obtain the following tools and user
guide:
l IFDControl.exe
l IFD CONFIGFILE WITH DRILL_MAT V0:
l RMT usage guide MAY 2010.doc
2. Connect the laptop to the IFD board using the USB cable.
3. XP recognizes IFD as a Human Interface Device, configure it, and report any
failures encountered.
4. Power cycle the ATM to reset the IFD board, and reboot the laptop.
Note: If performing multiple IFD PCB configurations from one configuration
laptop, the laptop needs only to be rebooted once.Thereafter, the laptop sees
every IFD installation when attempting to connect.
5. Start the Remote Configuration Tool and import the Default Configuration File.
6. At the bottom of the screen, select via USB (default) as the connection method and
select Connect to establish a connection to the IFD board.
7. Refer to the IFD Remote Configuration Tool document for any of the following
configurations needed:
l Config file changes
l Data uploads
l Firmware downloads
8. Once all entries are made, select Resync All to write the updated configuration to
the IFD board.
9. Observe the LEDs on the IFD board to verify that IFD works correctly.
l In the steady state (no activity around ATM or card reader), three LEDs, that is
D208, D200 and D201, light up and no LEDs flash.

l When a skimmer is attached or the card reader is racked back, D208 starts to
flash. After two minutes (more precisely 126 seconds), the LED stops flashing
and D1 ALERT! LED lights up for 60 seconds. The same behaviour should be
observed when the skimmer is removed or the card reader is racked in.
10. If the LEDs flash in a rhythmic fashion (four outer LEDs and then three inner LEDs),
IFD is in replenishment mode. Close the top box or override the replenishment
switches to revert the IFD back into active mode.
Note: In replenishment mode, no alerts are generated after 30 minutes except the
replenishment warning alert in data.
DIAGNOSTICS
None.
STRAPPING
None.
TEST TOOLS
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.
REVISION

USB INTELLIGENT FRAUD DETECTION
INTRODUCTION
The USB Intelligent Fraud Detection (USB IFD) provides skimming device detection and
fraud reporting capabilities for the ATM. USB IFD detects these attacks and reports the
presence of skimming devices to the ATM transaction application and device management
software channels.
The USB IFD re‐uses the IFD (Standalone) Control Board by downloading different
firmware and analysing data sourced from that new firmware & hardware combination, so
the following are pre‐requisites for USB IFD:
l IFD (Standalone) Control Board and associated harnessing.

l USB cable from IFD (Standalone) Control Board connected to the PC Core or
downstream NCR Hub.
l A version of APTRA XFS Platform that supports USB IFD (from Aptra XFS 5.1).
DESCRIPTION
The types of inputs supported are:
l Analogue – for inputs associated with detecting proximity attacks.

l Digital – for inputs associated with detecting penetration attacks.
These inputs are sampled by the Control Board firmware and the resultant sampled data
packets are passed, via USB, to the PC Core. There, the USB IFD driver software will
analyse the packets and if necessary report an attack.
The following illustration shows the main functional elements of the USB IFD.
Power
Supply
(24V) Auto
USB Supervisor
(if fitted)
Security Enclosure
Door Switch
Top Box Switch
replenishment
receive
Control
Board transmit
transmit
Status
LEDs transmit
Sensors (up to 6)
NCR
MISC
Alarm
I/F
Board
Host
To
Local
Alarms
USB IFD Firmware

USB IFD Control Boards are shipped with the latest IFD (Standalone) firmware and will
operate in that mode until a USB cable is attached and a version NCR APTRA XFS
Platform that supports USB Fraud Detection is activated.
Once USB enumeration has completed the USBIFD Firmware will await polling from the
PC Core based USB Fraud Detection driver, that is resident with the NCR APTRA XFS
Platform.
The USB IFD Firmware is only operational following its download, over USB, by the NCR
APTRA XFS Platform. This download and subsequent initialisation occurs during NCR
APTRA XFS Platform start-up.
LED (D1) marked with “ALERT!” is provided on the PCB and will exhibit the following
functionality:
LED State Description

Off Firmware not running
Slow Flashing Firmware running, no USB connection
Steady on Firmware running and USB port successfully enumerated
Fast Flashing Firmware running, USB connection OK; the ALARM signal is active
Note: The remaining LEDs are for use by the customers application and are off by default.
The LED behaviour is different from IFD in stand-alone mode.
l Channel 6 - D203
l Channel 3 - D200
l Channel 5 - D202
l Channel 2 - D207
l Channel 4 - D201
l Channel 1 - D208
l Channel 0 - D206
Following subsequent power cycles the USBIFD Firmware will await USB enumeration
(i.e. presence of a PC Core connected USB cable). During this period the firmware will
emulate the behaviour of the IFD (Standalone) Firmware. Activation of the USBIFD
Firmware will occur following NCR APTRA XFS platform start-up.
USB IFD Replenishment Input

The USB IFD Firmware will monitor a digital input associated with the following:
l Auto-Supervisor
l Top Box Enclosure Door Open/Closed Switch
l Security Enclosure Door Open/Closed Switch
This input indicates to the USB IFD that a replenishment cycle is ongoing. The customer
can optionally configure this event as an alarm with a pre-defined timeout that determines
alarm activation.
The customer can pre-configure this input i.e. it can be enabled or disabled.
USB IFD Analogue Inputs

The USB IFD Firmware will monitor the various analogue inputs. For example, a capacitive
input (receiver and transmitter) can be arrayed around the card reader slot, thereby
sensing that area for the proximity of skimming devices.
USB IFD Digital Inputs

The USB IFD Firmware will monitor the various digital inputs. For example, a penetration
input can be arrayed behind the fascia at sensitive locations. This input is used to monitor
that area for the attachment of a skimming device or an attempt to cut into the fascia to
attack the internal environment around the card reader.
USB IFD Alarm Output

The USB IFD firmware can be commanded by the PC Core based USB Fraud Detection
driver to set an alarm output. This alarm output can be attached to the Miscellaneous
Interface.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Communication Module USB cable disconnected Check USB cable Reconnect the USB cable.
Failure connection.
USB cable faulty. Replace USB cable.
Windows HID driver issue. Issue Reset USB port. Reset USB port.
Device firmware hung. 24V power cycle. Power cycle the device.
IFD control board faulty. Replace device.
Electronics Module Fault Device firmware hung 24V power cycle. Power cycle the device.
Windows HID driver issue Issue Reset USB port Reset USB port
Device faulty If above steps are failed Replace device
Device Not Authorized New or non-approved device Requires Authorization.
connected.
Incompatible Firmware The existing hardware is Restart the ATM.
swapped with the hardware Firmware will be
which is loaded with user downloaded.
firmware 3.5 or earlier.
The firmware download has Restart the ATM.
failed Firmware will be
downloaded. If it fails
again then replace the
hardware.

Inputs Disabled for Device Fascia is opened for Close the fascia door.
Servicing replenishment and other
maintenance activities.
Input cable is disconnected Check input cable Reconnect input cable.
while servicing. connections.
Input cable faulty. Check input cable. Replace input cable.
Input is faulty. Check input. Replace the input.
Media In OR Media Out OR Input cable is disconnected Check input cable Reconnect input cable.
Card Holder OR Service OR while servicing. connections.
Environment Input Fraud Input is blocked. Inspect the area around Remove the unknown
Detected On the input for the blockage object found
Single Input and remove any
unknown object found
Unknown hardware is Unknown hardware Remove the hardware
located near the input. found
New hardware is located New hardware installed. Update the machine
near the input. configuration. Reset IFD
input.
Input cable faulty Check input cable. Replace input cable
Input sensor faulty. Replace the input sensor.
Existing hardware has moved Ensure existing hardware
is in intended location.
Media In OR Media Out OR Input cable is disconnected Check input cable Reconnect input cable
Card Holder OR Service OR while servicing connections
Environment Detected On Input is blocked Inspect the area around Remove the unknown
Multiple Inputs the input for the blockage object found
and remove any
Unknown hardware is Unknown hardware Remove the hardware
located near the input. found
New hardware is located New hardware installed. Update the machine
near the input. configuration. Reset IFD
input.
Input cable faulty. Check input cable. Replace input cable
Input sensor faulty. Replace the input.
Existing hardware has Ensure existing hardware
moved. is in intended location.

Input Configuration Failed Access door is opened for Close the access door
replenishment.
Input is blocked Inspect the area around Remove the unknown
the input for the blockage object found.
and remove any
IFD FAULT FINDING

Introduction
This section provides guidelines on determining and preventing causes of numerous
generated Fraud Alerts.
Definitions
Replenishment Switch—this switch informs the IFD that the ATM door is open. This is
implemented as a dedicated switch. If the customer has the auto–supervisor feature, the
same switch is used for both the auto–supervisor and the ATM door, with parallel wiring.
Replenishment Harness—this harness connects the IFD control board to the

replenishment switch.
Electrode Harness—this harness connects the IFD electrodes to the IFD control board.
This harness is implemented as black co–axial screened cables.
IMCRW Card Reader—this is an Integrated Magnetic Card Reader Module identified by a

green card throat.
VE Card Reader—this is an older style motorized reader identified by a black card throat.
Causes of False Alerts

The following list enumerates the common causes of false alerts that the IFD generates:
l Replenishment or servicing
l Card holder or customer actions
l Customized ATM modifications
l Skimmer Application
Replenishment or Servicing
Be aware that ATM operators can cause IFD alerts when one or more of the following
instances occur:
l The ATM servicing time exceeds 30 minutes.
Older versions of firmware activate an alarm every 30 minutes when the ATM door is open.
This is disabled in the latest version of IFD firmware and is configurable in the IFD XFS
software.
l The ATM hood is left open after servicing or replenishment.
IFD is disabled when the hood is open. Older versions of firmware activate an alarm every
30 minutes when the ATM door is open. The alarm is disabled in the latest version of IFD
firmware and is configurable in the IFD XFS software.
l The ATM hood is quickly opened and closed.
The night safe keys may be stored inside the ATM hood. The quick open and close of the
ATM hood to access or replace the night safe keys results in an IFD re–baseline without the
ATM going out of service. Customer interaction at the time of re–baselining causes an
incorrect baseline to be set and results in a false alert.
Note: This action is not an issue when the IFD XFS component is used.
l The ATM hood is opened for servicing or replenishment with auto–supervisor switch
pulled out.
In this mode, IFD does not suppress alerts. Replenishment actions that cause movement in
the card reader generate alerts.
Note: The IFD kit includes an “auto–supervisor” switch. If the IFD version does not support
auto–supervisor, the switch is fitted but does not implement auto–supervisor functionality as
the harnessing only connects it to IFD.
Card holder or Customer Actions

l A large bag on the ATM shelf that encroaches the card reader area for longer than 2
minutes
l Vandalism that causes the fascia to shift, moving the IFD sensors relative to the card
reader—for example, hitting the DIP cowl with excessive force
l A person that leans against fascia for longer than the transaction timer (typically 2
mins)—a human body is detected if it leans on the card reader area.
Customized ATM Modifications

Customization of ATM parts or its surroundings may cause fascia movement through
thermal expansion. This results in IFD alerts. Ensure that any modifications in the card
reader area do not affect the stability of the fascia.
Skimmer Application
A genuine skimmer leaves no trace of its presence. Ensure that a genuine skimmer is not
categorized as a false alert. It may be that a skimmer is being tested for fit on the fascia
before it is actually used.
Additional Guidelines to Prevent False Alerts with IFD

l Ensure that the collar is in a fixed position.
l The fascia should not move when the fascia shelf at each side or at the four corners of
the fascia are pressed. Ensure that it does not rock.
l Ensure that the sleeve is correctly fastened with all its screws and bolts.
l Ensure that the top hood of the ATM is closed and latched so that the replenishment
switch works correctly.
l Check if DIP card reader fan does not generate excessive noise or movement.
l Ensure that the cooling fan in the LCD panel is free running and stable. The cooling
fan may vibrate and cause IFD alerts.
l Check for small holes in the fascia or panels indicative of a genuine skimming attack.
PIN holes are typically found in areas that can view down onto the PIN pad. Examples
of these areas are the light panel, the cash slot, fascia protrusions, and so on.
l Similar to PIN holes, check for false panels on the fascia which may house a spy
camera. These are generally painted to match the fascia which makes it hard to
identify. Horizontal surfaces above the display are popular locations for such panels.
Guidelines for Proper Maintenance of ATMs with IFD

l Train branch staff on proper procedures when handling ATMs with IFD.
Example: Inspecting ATMs daily for skimming and PIN capture devices or signs of a recent
attack.
l Inspect the ATM fascia for skimmers after the ATM top box has been opened and
closed after servicing or replenishment.
l Train branch staff to take a photo of each ATM and use it as a reference when
inspecting for fraudulent devices.
Note: If a fraudulent device is found, take the ATM out of service.
l Refrain from leaning on the card reader when racked out, as this causes
misalignment and false alerts.
l If a fraudulent device is found on the fascia, do not remove it. Take a photo and call
security. Fraudsters attack anyone who attempts to remove the device.
l Refrain from modifying the ATM at local customer request.
Example: Unplugging auto-supervisor switch, as this upsets IFD threshold levels.
Sensor Reset for IFD XFS Component

l Reset or re–baseline the IFD sensors when the following service tasks are performed:
l Removal or repair of the card reader (Motorized or DIP).
l Removal or replacement of any of the IFD component parts.
l Removal or replacement of the MCRW or DIP mounting hardware or covers.
l Securing of loose screws or nuts that retain brackets in close proximity to the card
reader.
The following list enumerates examples of brackets in close proximity to the card reader:
l camera bracket
l fascia collar
l sleeve
l DIP cowl
l FDI
l Fan or ECRS parts
A reset or re–baseline is not needed when the following service tasks are performed:
l In and out rack of the card reader. Always reposition the card reader where it was
prior to the initial retraction.
l Card jam clear from within the card reader that does not involve removal or
mechanical adjustment of the card reader itself.
l Cleaning of the card reader with a magnetic cleaning card, coated with alcohol.
l Cleaning of the card reader with an aerosol air can.
Guidelines for IFD Sensor Levels Reset

l Always perform this task as the second last service task before the CE returns this
unit to service. Checking and clearing the dispensers other devices is needed before
resetting the IFD sensors
l The last task is to exit L2 Diagnostics and permit the ATM to enter Supervisor, then
Go in Service. Re-enter the branch to do this from the Rear Operator Panel (EOP or
GOP).
l Close the top box and lock the auto–supervisor switch in the Go In Service position.
l Perform the reset from the front customer position.
Note: While the reset sensors command is in progress, stay away from the card reader
area and do not lean against the ATM. The sensors reset in a few seconds.
l Check for skimmers or foreign objects close to or at the card reader, or other sensor
locations before resetting the sensors.
l Report any skimmers who follow bank security personnel.
l If a fraudulent device is found, do not remove it. Take a photo and call security—
fraudsters may attack anyone who attempts to remove their device.
Motorized Card Reader

Troubleshooting Check list for Motorized and DIP Card Readers
Areas for Examination
l Metal ESD strip on IMCRW
l Formed tab does not activate replenishment switch
l Broken module tray latch
l Card reader shutter can not freely move
l Card reader support bracket pushes the card reader up
l Card reader front to back alignment
l No Rubber bumpers (009-0019709) on rear door
l Fouled or not fouled IFD harnesses
l Push pull test
Metal ESD strip on IMCRW

Remove the metal ESD strip on the IMCRW and replace with the plastic version of the
ESD strip.
Formed Tab does not activate Replenishment Switch

Ensure that the formed tab activates the replenishment switch when the back door is
closed.
Note: Do not run the replenishment harness beside the display VGA harness.
Broken Module T ray Latch

Push the module tray fully home, ensuring the module tray latch is locked in place as shown
below.
Card Reader Shutter can not Freely Move

Ensure that the card reader shutter (inhibitor)—the red coloured moulding, is free to move
vertically within its location.
Note: Remove the ATM side panel to gain easier access to this area.
If the card reader shutter can not move freely, follow the procedures below to clean it:
1. Loosen the two screws and spring, and remove the shutter from the fascia.
2. Clean the moulding.
3. Remove any burrs and rough edges.
4. Apply Molykote (white grease) to any sliding areas (slot plus sides).
5. Refit the shutter.
6. Check for free movement.
Card Reader Support Bracket Pushes the Card Reader Up

The card reader support bracket may push the card reader too high during racking. This
results in a conflict between the card reader support moulding features and the bracket.
Observe if the card reader lifts upward when it is racked to the fascia. If the card reader lifts
upward, bend the card reader support bracket to the approximate angle shown below. This
correction ensures that the card reader racks straight home without lifting upward.
Note: Ensure that the support bracket still has contact and provides support to the card
reader after adjustment.
FDI to Card Reader Front to Back Alignment

Adjust the whole tray assembly using the two screws shown below.
1. Loosen the screw.
2. Push the card reader forward and keep it parallel to its mounting tray.
3. Re tighten screw.
4. Ensure that the card reader tray is parallel to the main tray, and the card reader
aligns correctly with the fascia and FDI.
The following illustrations compare parallel and unparallel FDI and card reader alignment:
Rubber Bumpers (009-0019709) on Rear door

If there are no rubber bumpers on the rear door, fit rubber bumpers (009-0019709) in the
following position:
IFD Harness
l Check that the card reader in and out movements have not fouled the harness from
the Main Control PCB which is mounted under the PC CORE.
l Ensure that connector terminations are secure.
l Ensure that the IFD electrode harnesses at the FDI are secure and the gold RF
connectors on the electrode PCBs are not broken.
l Ensure that card reader racks in and out without disturbing any IFD harnesses.
Push and Pull Test

Perform the push and pull test, and forward the result to NCR Dundee for analysis.
The test is to push and pull the main card reader tray, with the tray latched home. Hence
movement will be small, a few mm either way.
1. Push card reader tray in, hold it for 20 seconds, and get a reading.
2. Unlatch and rack out the card reader tray fully, then rack back in, and latch.
3. Wait 60 seconds to permit the IFD to settle.
4. Pull card reader tray out, but do not unlatch card reader tray.
5. Wait 60 seconds to a permit the IFD to settle.
6. Repeat the test.
Note: Test tools upload data from IFD via USB.
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0 Diagnostics
There are no Level 0 Diagnostics
Device Diagnostics
The following table shows the Level 1 Diagnostic Tests available on the USB IFD.
Note: Note:
Test results (contained in M_STATUS, M_DATA, and T_DATA) are given in the NCR
publication (B006-6273-A000), Self Service Financial Terminals Diagnostic Status Code
Notebook).
Test Description
Identification Performs an identification command and displays the following information e.g. Device Type,
Device Serial Number, Device Variant, Device Firmware Version & Device Name.
Display Performs an analysis of Device Status in terms of the classification of input. The Display Status sub-
Status menu allows user to select all classifications of input or specify the classification e.g.
Classification Descriptions
All Modules Display all inputs.
Card holder Input Display input associated with the card reader
proximity.
Environment Input Display input associated with the ATM external skin
e.g. Fascia. A typical input is digital penetration
circuit.
The status of each configured input is displayed
Transfer Performs a transfer of USBIFD logs from hard disk to removable media e.g. USB Memory Stick.
Logs Each log contains 24 hours of data.
S_DATA
The S_DATA returned for the USBIFD are:
S_DATA Meaning
00 Good (No error).
03 SUSPEND (Possible tampering).
04 FATAL (Device inoperative).
TALLIES
The tallies recorded for the USBIFD are:
Tally Description
ATTEMPTS Total communication operations done on device.
COM_FAIL Total communication failures reported by the device.
FAIL_ATT Total communication retries done on communication failures.
DEV_REM Total count of USB cable disconnection.
DEV_ARR Total count of USB cable connection.
DEV_FRAUD Total device fraud attempts detected.
MEDIA_IN Total “Media In” input errors detected.
MEDIA_OUT Total “Media Out” input errors detected.
CARD_HLD Total “Card holder” input errors detected.
SERVICE Total “Service” input errors detected.
ENVIRON_ Total “Environment” input errors detected.
ADJUSTMENTS
The following configuration options are available via System Application.
Test Description
Device Performs an identification command and displays the following information e.g.
Information Device Type, Device Serial Number, Device Variant, Device Firmware Version &
Device Name.
Device Performs a capabilities command and displays the Device Variant, Input Count and
Capabilities for each input: Input ID, Input Type, Input State and Input Driver Configuration.There
are optionally 9 inputs – 6 analogue and 3 digital. The state of each input can be
ACTIVE i.e. the input has been enabled within the firmware and is sampled or
INACTIVE. Each input can be configured within the PC Core USBIFD driver i.e. if not
assigned a input class then it is not configured and no alarm will be raised. If it is
assigned a input class then is configured and can raise an alarm.
Test Description
Update Driver This applet allows the operator to change the IFD driver configuration. This is
Configuration required if the customer wants to enable or disable an input that is currently wired
to the USBIFD Control Board.
The following steps will be performed on selection of this applet.
1. Insert a removable media into the PC Core.
2. Execute the Applet and a separate menu will be displayed to select the
removable media path (root directory).
3. Select the removable media where the configuration file is stored. On selection
the driver configuration will be updated.
*For update, the configuration file must be present on to the root directory of
removable media.
*The test will look for “ifddrcfg.bin” file. You will be provided with this file by the
customer or NCR Professional Services.
*The System must be restarted to implement the new driver configuration settings.
*This applet will be visible when the user entered the SysApp through USB Dongle
Key.
Update Device This applet allows the operator to change the IFD device configuration. This is
Configuration required if an additional input is wired to the IFD.
The following steps will be performed on selection of this applet.:
1. The following two choices will be provided:
l “Update from Registry”
l “Update from configuration file”
2. If from registry is selected, the values will be read from the operational
parameters and updated into the device’s F-ROM.
3. If from configuration file is selected then the user will be asked to select the
removable media where the configuration file is stored. On selection of files
the device’s F-ROM will be updated with the file settings.
removable media.
*The test will look for “ifddvcfg.bin”. You will be provided with this file by NCR
Engineering.
*The System must be restarted to implement the new device configuration settings.
Key.
Test Description
Update Sampler This applet allows the operator to change the IFD sampler configuration. This is required if an
additional input is wired to the IFD.
Configuration
The following steps will be performed on selection of this applet:
1. The following two choices will be provided
l “Update from Registry”
l “Update from configuration file”
2. If from registry is selected, the values will be read from the operational
parameters and updated into the device’s F-ROM.
3. If from configuration file is selected then the user will be asked to select the
removable media where the configuration file is stored. On selection of files
the device’s F-ROM will be updated with the file settings.
removable media.
*The test will look for “ifdspcfg.bin”. You will be provided with this file by NCR
Engineering.
*The System must be restarted to implement the new sampler configuration
settings.
Key
Reset IFD Sensor This applet allows the user to reset the IFD device firmware and clears all error
counts and flags. The Clear command will cause the IFD hardware to be reset to a
new Environment level for all inputs. The current environment level is the baseline
for the inputs. This allows the IFD to be zeroed after authorized changes have been
made to the fascia of the ATM or other changes that may affect the IFD input
readings.
The test will perform in the below sequence:
1. Execute Reset IFD input command to set the new Environment level.
2. Display input information after this test.
The ATM should be reset after this test.
*This applet will be visible when the user enters SysApp using the USB Dongle Key.
The following maintenance options are available via System Application.
Test Description
Device Performs an identification command and displays the following information e.g. Device Type, Device
Information Serial Number, Device Variant, Device Firmware Version & Device Name.
CABLING
Control Board Connectors
Relay Alarm (J204) RF Serial (J200)
Penetration Mat (J205) USB (J208) Cabinet Open
& Penetration Mat (J206)
24V In (J301) Extension SPI Slot (J300)
J205 J204 J208 J206

J301 J200
Remote LED
J209
Connector (J209)
J210 J213 J300
J103
Power LED
J102
J211 J212 J101

J101
J203
J104
Status LEDs
Alert LED (D1)
Transmit Channel 5
J103
Transmit Channel 4
Transmit Channel 3
J102
Transmit Channel 2
J101 Transmit Channel 1

Transmit Channel 0
Logic Level alarm
J203 (not used)
J104 Receive Channel 0

Receive Channel 1
SelfServ Cabling
SelfServ 24V Power Supply Cable
24V DC Distribution PCB HSFD J301
SelfServ Replenishment Harness
SW1_NC SW1_male_NC
Black
22
HSFD_RACK
3
White
SW1_CM_(IFD)
Replenishment Harness (SelfServ 32 RA only)

Rear Switch Front Switch
SW1_Male_NC
Female_NO
SelfServ IFD with Alarms Safe (F/A) Harness
SelfServ IFD with Alarms Top-box (F/A) Harness
SelfServ IFD with RIO Safe (F/A) Harness
IFD_J204
SelfServ IFD with RIO Top-box (F/A) Harness
IFD Alarms with RIO Board, without Status (R/A), 2.8m

(SelfServ 25/32/34)
IFD with Alarms with Status, 3.3m (SelfServ 25 & 32 only)
Personas Cabling
Personas 24v Power Supply Cable
AUX_POWER_EXT
J9
HSFD J301
AUX_POWER
J9
P77 Front Access Cabinet Open Detection Harness - Auto

Supervisor
AUTO_SUP_EN
1
2 SW3_NC
3
HSFD_RACK
P77 Front Access Cabinet Open Detection Harness - Manual

Supervisor
AUTO_SUP_EN
SW1_NO
1
2 SW1_NC
3
SW1_CM
4
HSDF_RACK
P77 Rear Access Cabinet Open Detection Harness - Auto

Supervisor
SW1_MALE_NC SW1_NC
HSFD_RACK
P77 Rear Access Cabinet Open Detection Harness - Manual

Supervisor
SW1_NO
SW1_MALE_NC
SW1_NC
SW1_MALE_CM
SW1_CM
HSDF_RACK
P70/75 Rear Access Cabinet Open Detection Harness
SW2_MALE_NC_R SW2_MALE_NC_F
SW2_CM_R SW2_CM_F
SW2_NC_R SW2_NC_F
SW2_MALE_CM_R SW2_MALE_CM_F
P84/85 Cabinet Open Detection Harness

HSFD_RACK
SW2_MALE_NC
SW2_MALE_CM
SW2_NC
SW2_CM
P86/87 Cabinet Open Detection Harness

HSFD_RACK
SW2_MALE_NC
SW2_MALE_CM
SW2_NC
SW2_CM
REVISION

FLUIDITI ATM SECURITY
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The Fluiditi ATM Security system is one element of the Fluiditi Replenishment Security
system, and can also be a stand-alone product.
Note: The products may also be known by their previous names: ATM Cash Security and
Intelligent Cash Security, or ICS.
The Fluiditi ATM security system is designed to stain currency and render it valueless in the
event of the ATM being attacked. A marking ink is injected into all cash cassettes when an
attack is detected. The ink injection system and alarm board are attached to the currency
dispenser module.
The cash security system provides the following functions:
l Door forcing detection

l Tilt detection
l Explosion detection (optional)
l Penetration detection (optional)
l 48 hour continuous power loss activation (optional)
l Internal and external indicators.
Spare inputs are provided for system expansion.
The system comprises:
l Alarm board
l Alarm sounder
l Battery backup
l Ink injection units
l Cassette
l Containment mat or tray.
FUNCTIONAL ELEMENTS
The functional elements of the security system are shown in the following figures:
Alarm
Sounder
Explosion
Detector
Battery
Backup
Alarm
Board
Tilt Switches
Ink Injection Units

(4 off)
Containment Mat or Tray
Note: On older systems the tilt switches may be located above the alarm sounder and are
connected to the alarm board via the cash security harness at connector JP9.
Internal LEDs
Inputs
All the inputs are in pairs - if one input of the pair is triggered a fault condition is reported, if
both are triggered, the system is activated.
Door Switches and Lock Shunt

Two single pole changeover door switches and a controlling lock shunt provide a signal
short circuit when the door is closed.
When the door is closed and locked, if either door signal is disconnected from JP3 on the
alarm board while the lock shunt is still connected, a fault condition will be indicated. If both
door signals are disconnected while the lock shunt is still connected, a system activation will
occur.
Tilt Switches
The two tilt switches mounted on the alarm board are set to open when the ATM is tilted
20° in any direction. The board has an electronic damping circuit that monitors both tilt
switch signals. If both switches are open continuously for more than 2.5 seconds a system
activation will occur.
Penetration Sensor
An optional penetration sensor in the form of mats, can be attached to the sides of the
security enclosure. Through the wall and vestibule ATMs have 2 mats - one on each side of
the enclosure, and lobby ATMs have a third mat on the rear wall of the enclosure.
If a penetration sensor is not fitted, then, on systems with in-line 3 hour delay PCBs, loom
security short (NCR part no. 445-0644832) must be fitted to JP7 on the alarm board. For
systems with an integrated 3 hour delay PCB, links L2 and L3 should be open and fitted
with a turnaround plug. See “Internal Connections” section later in this chapter for more
details of the different alarm board layouts.
Explosion Detector
The explosion detector is a proprietary component with its own internal battery and
connecting lead. The sensor switch is normally open circuit.
48 Hour Continuous Power Loss Activation

The optional 48 hour continuous power loss activation is operational if link 1 is closed on the
alarm board. If power is lost for more than 48 hours continuously, the alarm sounder will
pulse on and off at one second intervals for thirty seconds, after which the system is
activated. If power is restored during this thirty second countdown, the sounder will stop
and the counter will stop, but not re-set for a further thirty seconds. If the power fails again
within the thirty second counter reset period, the counter will continue to count down and
the alarm will sound as before. If power is maintained for more than thirty seconds the
counter will be reset and the main 48 hour countdown will re-start if power is lost again.
Backup Battery Pack

The battery pack is designed to provide back-up power for at least 48 hours should a power
failure occur. It is a rechargeable unit. If the ATM power has been off for more than 6 hours,
the voltage of the battery pack should be tested at pins 1 and 2 of JP5. (Refer to the
“Internal Connections” section of this chapter).
The battery pack must be replaced after it’s expected life of 5 years or if the battery voltage
has dropped below 8.0V otherwise the security system will be temporarily inoperable until
the batteries have been recharged.
Battery backup must be removed before the ATM is powered down and reconnected after
ATM power is restored.
Explosion Detector Battery State

The voltage of the battery internal to the explosion detector module must be checked
periodically, by testing at pins 1 and 2 of JP1. (Refer to the “Internal Connections” section
of this chapter.) The battery voltage must be >8.7V. The module should be replaced if the
battery voltage is below this value. The module can be disconnected and reconnected
whilst the ATM is still powered. The expected battery life is 2 years.
TEST TOOLS
None.
STRAPPING
Alarm Board
The default position of the jumpers on the alarm board is shown in the following table.
These jumpers must be configured before power up. Also see 'Interconnection Diagram'
later in this chapter.
Link Position Meaning

L1 Closed (default) 48 hour activation enabled
Open 48 hour activation disabled
L2 Closed Penetration sensor short
L4 Closed Factory set. If open, an activation condition can not be reported to the
ATM
L5 Open Factory set
L6 Open (at Safe mode: Fusible resistors disabled
manufacture)
Closed (once Live mode: Fusible resistors enabled
installed)
L7 Closed Tilt program
L8 Open Factory set
L9 Open Factory set
L10 Open Factory set
For installation and testing purposes, link L6 is factory set in the open (safe) position,
meaning that the fusible resistors will not blow when an activation is simulated. L6 must be
set to the closed (live) once the correct installation procedure has been completed, so that
the fusible resistors can indicate the cause of any true activation. The following table shows
resistor identification:
Resistor Identification Function

R42 - Door Door forcing detection
R45 - AA Penetration detection (anti-axe)
R48 - Tilt Ram raid detection
R51 - Spare Spare input detection
ADJUSTMENTS
WARNING
Before carrying out any servicing or adjustments on the Fluiditi ATM
Security system, the system must be fully disarmed.
Disarming The System

Legitimate opening of the security enclosure will disarm the system. This allows access for
activities such as clearing jams on modules inside the security enclosure. However, before
any servicing activity can be undertaken on the cash security system, the battery backup
must be disconnected.
To disarm the system:
1. Rack out the dispenser and remove the cash security cover from the rear of the
dispenser module by removing the two M3 screws, see following diagram.
Screws Cover
Ink
Injection
Tanks
Harness
Protection
Metalwork
M3 Screws
2. Disconnect the battery harness from the battery backup to cut off backup power.
3. Power down the ATM.
4. Remove and retain link L6 from the alarm board. This allows system testing without
blowing the fusible resistors.
5. As a further precaution, also disconnect the ink injection harness from the ink
injection units.
6. Restore main ATM power so that status LEDs can be used for diagnostics.
The system is now disarmed and servicing can begin.
Once diagnosis or repairs are complete the following procedure should be carried out to re-
arm the system:

2. Refit link L6 on the alarm board.
3. Re-connect the ink injection harness to the ink injection units.
4. Restore power to the ATM.
5. Re-connect the battery harness to the battery backup.
TROUBLESHOOTING
WARNING
Before carrying out any fault finding or repairs the system must be
fully disarmed, as described in the section “Disarming the Security
System”.
Preventive Maintenance
The following general checks should be made when servicing a cash security system:
l Check all wiring harnesses. Repair or replace as necessary.

l Check all connections and power supplies to the alarm board. Repair or replace as
necessary.
l Check battery voltages.
l Check Replace–By labels on the ink tanks and back–up batteries.
Status Indicator LEDs

Two pairs of LEDs indicate the status of the Fluiditi ATM Security system. One set is
mounted on the front of the cash dispenser pick module and one is inside the ATM top-box:
above the CRT on front access units, and above the rear operator panel on rear access
units.
The LEDs indicate system status as shown in the table below.
LED Indication Status

Green Flashing System functioning correctly
Red Flashing Attack detected - system activated
Both Extinguished Fault detected
Both Flashing System activated but now safe to open security enclosure door.
Fusible Resistors
If a false activation has occurred (that is, the system has activated but no attack or
attempted theft was made on the ATM), check the resistors on the alarm board to see
which detection device triggered the system. The resistors are assigned to devices as
follows:

Then check the relevant device for a fault which may have caused the false activation.
Testing to Isolate the Problem

If the status LEDs report a fault or a false activation condition, or a legitimate activation
failed to occur, the detection inputs need to be checked. Perform the following checks to
isolate the problem, ensuring the system has first been disarmed:
Alarm Input
1. Enable the alarm, if there is one connected to JP3 on the alarm board. Check that
the sounder operates, indicating an activation condition has occurred. Check that
the green LED indicator is off and the red LED is flashing.
2. Disable the alarm. The sounder and the LEDs should remain the same.
3. Unlock and open the safe door. The sounder should stop, but the red LED should
continue to flash.
4. Close and lock the safe door to reset the system. The red LED should stop flashing
and the green LED should now flash.
5. Repeat these checks for any spare alarm inputs connected to JP13.
Tilt Switches
1. Make sure that the ink injection harness has been disconnected from ink injection
units.
2. Disconnect one end of the alarm board from its mounting, and tilt the board to an
angle greater than 20 to 25 degrees from the vertical.
Note: On systems with the tilt switches mounted separately to the alarm
board, disconnect the tilt switch mounting assembly only.
3. Check that after 2.5 seconds an activation condition is indicated by the flashing red
LED.
4. Re-position the alarm board assembly.
Door Switch Inputs

1. Unlock and open the safe door.
2. Close the safe door and verify that the external green LED starts to flash.
Penetration Alarm Inputs

1. Remove alarm board links L2 and L3 one link at a time and check that a fault
condition is reported each time (no LEDs flashing).
2. With the safe door closed, remove both links L2 and L3. Check that an activation
condition is indicated (red LED flashing).
Battery Backup
1. Power off the ATM. With the battery back-up disconnected, all LEDs should be out.
2. Power on the ATM. The green LED should flash.
3. Re-connect the battery to the battery backup.
4. Power off the ATM and check that the green LED is still flashing.
Resetting the Board

After an activation has been simulated, all signal latches and status LED indicators will be
held in their activation condition until the board which triggered the activation has been
reset.
To reset the alarm board, either:
l Remove battery backup power and then main power. Then restore main power,
or
l Open the lock shunt and both door switch signals (if they are not already open), and
then close all four signals. This allows for lock combination changes without having to
hold the door signals closed.
The status indicators will only be reset by disconnecting and re-connecting power.
Clean–up After System Activation
WARNING
Any maintenance and clean–up activities should ONLY be carried
out by approved Engineers, who are fully trained in Fluiditi
functionality and appropriate handling of Fluiditi ink and
components. It is required that all Engineers have successfully
completed NCR’s Standard Engineer ATM Course and Introduction
to ATM Cash Security Systems Course (course number 19079).
WARNING
Always wear protective clothing when working on an ATM after a
system activation, as the ink is corrosive and stains permanently.
WARNING
Exclude sources of ignition and ventilate the area if possible. Avoid
breathing in the vapours. The vapours are heavier than air, and may
spread along floors. See 'Safety Information' at the end of this
chapter for first aid measures.
WARNING
Do not open the security enclosure until both the green and red
status indicators are flashing. This will be at least 3 hours after
activation has occurred, to protect you from the possibility of
airborne particles from the ink.
Protective clothing and disposal materials should be available at all times to be worn by
personnel handling contaminated parts. These items are available in the following kits:
l Personal Protection Equipment Kit (009–0028164)

l Personal Protection Equipment XXL Kit (009–0028166)
l Disposal Equipment Kit (009–0028165)
Note: The contents in kits 009–0028164 and 009–0028166 differ only in respect to the sizing
of the Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) provided.
Clean–up instructions must be performed as directed and all items of PPE must be worn as
advised.
These instructions should be read and used in conjunction with NCR’s own Customer
Engineering Guide on recommended handling procedures, available from NCR University,
Course #19079—”Introduction to ATM Cash Security Systems”.
Personal Protection Equipment Contents and Guidelines

The following Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) kits differ only in respect to the sizing
of the protective clothing provided:
l Personal Protection Equipment (009–0028164)

l Personal Protection Equipment XXL (009–0028166)
The kits contain:
l 1 x pair of protective gloves (recommended example: ANSELL BARRIER™)—

referred to in these instructions as the outer gloves
l 1 x pair of protective gloves to be worn inside of main gloves (recommended example:
ANSELL TOUCH & TUFF 92–670)—referred to in these instructions as the inner
gloves
l 1 x chemical resistant overall (recommended example: DuPont Tychem F)
l 1 x pair of safety goggles (recommended example: Sperian LG20 (indirect vent),
product reference 1005509)
l 1 x roll of masking tape, 2 inches wide.
Before Starting Clean–Up Process

l Make sure that all items of PPE kit are present and are in good condition.
l Read these instructions thoroughly, paying particular attention to the points where
specific items of the PPE kit should be worn or removed.
l Make sure all items of the PPE are a comfortable fit, particularly that the cuffs of the
overall and the gloves cover the wrists when the arms are extended. It is
recommended to use the masking tape included to secure the outer protective gloves
to the overall.
l If you wear prescription spectacles, make sure that the goggles in the kit can be
comfortably and securely worn over them.
During the Clean–Up Process

l Wear all items of the PPE kits as directed in the instructions.
Note: The overall is splash–proof only and the wearer should not kneel in or
otherwise continually contact the ink.
l Tie back long hair during the clean–up operation in case of contamination.
After the Clean–Up Process

l Take care when removing the PPE to prevent skin or clothing coming into contact with
any ink on the protective clothing or equipment.
l All items of PPE kit (gloves, overalls, goggles, and so on) are for one–time use only
and should therefore be disposed of after use.
Disposal Kit Contents and Guidelines

The Disposal Equipment (009–0028165) kit contains:
l 6 x absorbent sheets
l 1 x roll—tissue paper
l 2 x floor protection sheets
l 8 x chemical resistant bags
l 8 x cable ties
l 8 x toxic warning labels
Before starting the clean–up process

Make sure that all items of the disposal kit are present and are in good condition.
Clean–Up Procedure after an Activation

1. Lay out all the items in the PPE and disposal kits, and prepare them for use.
2. Make sure that power to the ATM is off.
3. Place the floor protection sheet and then the absorbent sheets from the disposal kit
on the ground in front of the ATM, as necessary to fully cover the area required for
clean–up when the dispenser is racked out of the ATM.
4. Put on the overall, goggles, and inner gloves.
5. Once the PPE items are comfortably and securely fitted, open the safe door.
6. Put on the outer gloves and seal them to the overall cuffs with the masking tape from
the PPE kit.
7. Fold over the sides of a chemical resistant bag (to prevent ink coming into contact
with the outside of the bag), and place the bag on top of the floor protection and
absorbent sheets.
8. Carefully remove the first cash cassette from the dispenser, taking care to not cause
uncontrolled spillage, and place it in the chemical resistant bag.
9. Repeat for each cassette. Depending on the amount of notes present in the
cassettes, a bag for each cassette may be needed. Place each full bag to the side
until all contaminated parts have been dealt with.
10. When all the cassettes have been removed, rack out the dispenser to its fullest
extent, making sure that it is positioned above the floor protection and absorbent
sheets.
11. Fold over the sides of a chemical resistant bag and place the bag underneath the
dispenser pick modules, on top of the floor protection and absorbent sheets.
12. Following the procedures in NCR’s Standard Engineer ATM and Introduction to
ATM Cash Security Systems (Course #19079) training courses, remove and place
the pick modules into chemical resistant bags. Deal with each pick module in turn
and place each full bag to one side until all contaminated parts have been dealt with.
It may also be necessary to disconnect or remove any interfering or contaminated
harnessing.
13. Place the floor protection and absorbent sheets, plus any absorbent sheets that may
have been previously been used in the safe, into one of the chemical resistant bags.
14. Clean any uncontrolled spillages in and around the safe using the supplied roll of
tissue paper, and then place it into one of the bags.
15. Once all contaminated parts have been dealt with, remove the adhesive tape around
the cuffs of the outer gloves and remove the outer gloves only, by progressively
withdrawing alternate hands and dropping the gloves into one of the bags.
16. Unzip the overall and remove it, taking care that skin or clothing does not come into
contact with the outer surface of the overall. Turning the overall inside–out during
removal will help to prevent further cross contamination. Then dispose of the overall
in one of the bags.
17. All bags should now be closed by unfurling each bag from the outside.
18. Remove the inner gloves by turning them inside–out from the cuff. Dispose off them
in one of the bags.
19. All bags should be sealed using the cable ties provided. Before the last bag is
sealed, remove the safety goggles and dispose of them in the bag.
20. Fix the supplied Toxic warning labels to each bag containing contaminated
materials.
21. Close and lock the safe door.
22. Dispose of all contaminated material in accordance with local regulations.
INTERNAL CONNECTIONS
Note: The Picoflex Extraction Tool (NCR part number 603-9014873) is the recommended
tool for removal of connectors from the Fluiditi ATM and Replenishment Security Control
Module PCBs. Care should be taken when removing these connectors from the PCB. This
tool is suitable for all connector sizes.
Place one leg of the tool at either side of the connector, hold firmly, and lift the connector
from the PCB.
With Integrated 3 Hour Delay Function
Power/Comms Penetration detector
(dispenser control board) (optional)
Alarm Output Sounder Back-up battery Explosion detector

N/C
(optional)
JP15 JP14 JP11 JP5 JP6 JP7 JP1
Shunt/door switches/
JP3 JP16 N/C
alarm inputs
L4
L2 L3
Spare input JP13

Alarm Board
R42 R45 R48 R51
L1
Internal LEDs
JP12
output
L6
External LEDs JP8

output (optional)
JP2 JP10 JP4
L7
L12
Ink injection N/C N/C

units (1-4)
JP13, JP14 and JP15 are for system expansion and JP16, the factory programming port, is
not connected.
With In-line 3 Hour Delay PCB

Note: The in-line or ‘piggy-back’ 3 hour delay PCB is only present on a small number of
older systems.


N/C
(optional)
JP3 JP16 N/C
alarm inputs
N/C CON 1
J1
Alarm Board L2 L3
Spare input JP13

R42 R45 R48 R51
3 hour delay PCB
Internal LEDs
JP12 output
J4 J2
External LEDs
J5 J3 output (optional)
L5
JP8
JP2 JP10 JP4 L4
L6
Ink injection N/C N/C

units (1-4)
not connected.
Connectors
Explosion Detector - JP1
1 Battery + 3 Switch
2 Battery - 4 Switch
Ink Injection Units Outputs - JP2

1 Pos 1 5 Pos 3
2 12V 6 12V
3 Pos 2 7 Pos 4
4 12V 8 12V
Switches And Spare Inputs - JP3

1 Mas Hamilton (shunt) 6 External Alarm
2 Mas Hamilton (shunt) 7 Door Switch 1
3 External Alarm 8 Door Switch 1 5V
4 External Alarm 9 Door Switch 2
Backup Battery Input - JP5

1 AA1 5V 3 AA2 5V
2 AA1 4 AA2
1 Battery + 3 N/C
2 Battery - 4 N/C
Power And Comms - JP6

1 +24V 6 GND
2 N/C 7 SPIN RX
3 GND 8 SPIN TX
4 N/C 9 N/C
5 GND 10 N/C
Penetration Detector Input - JP7

1 AA1 5V 3 AA2 5V
2 AA1 4 AA2
External LEDs Output - JP8

1 Green K 3 Red K
2 Green A 4 Red A
Tilt Switch Input - JP9

1 Tilt 1 3 Tilt 2
2 Tilt 1 5V 4 Tilt 2 5V
Note: This connector is only used on a small number of the older systems, with an in-line 3
hour delay PCB.
Sounder - JP11
1 12V 3 N/C
2 SOUNDER 4 N/C
Internal LEDS Output - JP12

1 Green K 3 Red K
2 Green A 4 Red A
Spare Inputs - JP13

1 SIG 3 SIG
2 GND 4 GND
Alarm Output - JP14

1 NC* 3 GND
2 NC* 4 GND
* NC = normally closed relay contact
Spare Output - JP15

1 12V 3 5V
2 GND 4 OC*
* OC = open collector transistor
Factory Programming - JP16

1 TCK 6 5V
2 VPP 7 TDO
3 TMS 8 GND
4 GND 9 DATA
5 TDI 10 CLK
INTERNAL CABLES
Explosion Detector
Ink Injection Units
Door Switches / Shunt / External Alarm Input
Battery
NCR Power & Comms
Penetration Detector
External LEDs
Tilt Switches
Note: This connector is only used on a small number of older systems with an in-line 3 hour
delay PCB.
Alarm Sounder
Internal LEDs
Spare Inputs
External Alarm Output
Spare Outputs
SAFETY INFORMATION
This section contains important safety information on the marking inks used in the Fluiditi
ATM Security system and on the mercury which may be contained in the tilt switches.
General information on the use of the marking inks is contained in “Product Safety
Information”, followed by detailed hazard information in “Material Safety Data”. There are
two types of ink which can be used in the system: a purple ink is called Encre Maculante
2BS Violet or a green ink called Encre Maculante 2NS Vert.
There is also Material Safety Data on the mercury which may be contained in the system’s
tilt switches.
Product Safety Information: Marking Ink

This section explains how to safely use the marking inks used in the Fluiditi ATM Security
system. It also covers the possible hazards associated with the ink.
Detailed material safety data providing specialist chemical safety information also follows.
Overview
The ink consists of a mixture of dyes dissolved in an organic solvent. The products are of
low toxicity, but could be harmful if used negligently. Please read this information carefully,
and follow the advice it contains. If you have any questions about the ink, contact your
supplier.
What are the Health Risks?

The dyes, and also the solvents in which the dyes are dissolved, are believed to present
little hazard to health. The stain is probably about as hazardous as common household
chemicals, such as paint stripper or bleach. However you should be aware that it can
irritate the eyes and may stain the skin. Like most industrial chemicals, the product is
harmful if swallowed.
How to Handle the Marking Ink

You should take the following precautions when handling the ink, or notes marked by it:
l Wear protective clothing provided in the PPE kits (see previous section 'Clean-up
After System Activation'). As the purpose of the product is to stain bank notes, you
can expect that it will also stain the skin. If you do get a stain on your skin, it should not
damage your health, but may take some time to disappear. If there is a possibility that
the product might splash onto your face, you should also wear face protection.
l Each of the chemicals in the formulation irritates the eyes. You should therefore wear
eye protection.
l If you need to work in a confined space, such as the interior of an ATM, you should
ensure that there is adequate ventilation. The solvents in the product evaporate only
slowly at room temperature, and it is unlikely that a harmful concentration would build
up in the air, but if ventilation is restricted, some form of forced ventilation, such as a
fan, is recommended.
Contact with the Marking Ink

The product may leave a mark on your skin if you come into direct contact with it. Wash the
affected area immediately with soap and warm water to minimize staining. There should be
no long-term effects if this product is splashed onto the skin, but if you are concerned, seek
medical attention, taking this safety information with you.
If the product is splashed into your eyes, immediately flush them with copious amounts of
water. As a precaution, seek medical attention, taking this safety information with you.
If you swallow some of the product, drink some water to dilute it, then go immediately to the
nearest Accident and Emergency department, taking this safety information with you.
Where Can I Find More Information?

Detailed information about the chemicals contained in the inks is contained in the material
safety data that follows.
Material Safety Data: Encre Maculante 2BS Violet New

Identification of Substance and Supplier
Name: Encre Maculante 2BS Violet New
Code: 348923N
Intended use: Products for professional printers. Product for staining banknotes.
Supplier: SICPA SA, Case Postale CH-100, Lausanne 16. Tel +41 021-627.55.55
Contact name: Dr W. Lesueur. Product Regulatory Affairs. william.lesueur@sicpa.com
Hazards Identification
Symbols: T TOXIC
R43 May cause sensitisation by skin contact.

R36/37/38 Irritating to eyes, respiratory system and skin.
R61 May cause harm to the unborn child.
R52/53 Harmful to aquatic organisms, may cause long-term adverse effects in the aquatic
environment.
Composition/Ingredients
Substances presenting a health hazard within the meaning of dangerous substances of the
table 3.2 of Annex VI of the Regulation (EC) Nr 1272/2008 known as CLP.
Name EEC No/EINECS Concentration Symbol Risk Phrase

N-Methyl-2-pyrrolidone 606-021-00-7 >50% R61, R36, R37, R38
T
1-dodecyl-2-pyrrolidone 613-099-00-6 1-5% R34, R43, R50, R53
C N
Acetylenic diol 204-809-1 1-5% R36, R52, R53
XI
Amine salt of Anthraquinone derivative 016-091-00-5 0, 1-1% R41, R50, R53
XI N
First Aid Measures

General - In all cases of doubt, when symptoms persist, seek medical attention. Never
give anything by mouth to an unconscious person.
Inhalation - Remove to fresh air, keep patient warm and at rest. If unconscious, place in
recovery position and seek medical advice.
Eye contact - Irrigate copiously with clean, fresh water for at least 10 minutes, holding the
eyelids apart and seek medical advice.
Skin contact - Remove contaminated clothing. Wash skin thoroughly with soap and water
or use recognised skin cleaner. DO NOT USE SOLVENTS OR THINNERS.
Ingestion - If accidentally swallowed obtain immediate medical attention. Keep at rest. DO

NOT INDUCE VOMITING.
Fire Fighting Measures

Extinguishing Media -
Recommended: Alcohol resistant foam, CO2, powders, water spray.
Not to be used: Waterjet.
Recommendations - Fire may produce dense smoke. Exposure to decomposition

products may cause a health hazard. Appropriate breathing apparatus may be required.
Cool closed containers exposed to fire with water. Do not allow run off from fire fighting to
enter drains or watercourses.
Accidental Release Measures

Personal Precautionary Measures - Exclude sources of ignition and ventilate the area.
Avoid breathing vapours or mists. See the production measures mentioned in sections
‘Handling and Storage’ and ‘ Exposure Controls/Personal Protection’.
Spillage Control - Contain and collect spillage with non-combustible absorbent materials
(e.g. sand, earth, vermiculite) and place in a container for disposal according to local
regulations. Do not allow to enter drains or watercourses. Clean preferably with a
detergent; avoid use of solvent.
Environment Protection - If the product contaminates lakes, rivers or sewage, inform

appropriate authorities in accordance with local regulations.
Handling and Storage

Handling - Before any handling see sections ‘Composition/Ingredients’, ‘ Exposure
Controls/Personal Protection’ and ‘Toxicology Information’.
l Avoid skin and eye contact.

l Avoid inhalation of vapour or mist.
l Smoking, eating and drinking should be prohibited in application area.
l Never use pressure to empty: container is not a pressure vessel.
l Always keep in containers of same materials as the original one.
l Comply with health and safety at work laws.
Storage -
l Observe eventual label precautions.

l Store secured from frost in a dry, well ventilated place away from sources of heat and
direct sunlight.
l Keep away from sources of ignition.
l No smoking.
l Containers which are opened must be carefully resealed and kept upright to prevent
leakage.
Exposure Controls/Personal Protection

Engineering Measures - Provide adequate ventilation. Where reasonably practicable this
should be achieved by the use of local exhaust ventilation and good general extraction. If
these are not sufficient to maintain concentrations of solvent vapour below the occupational
exposure limits, suitable respiratory protection must be worn.
Exposure Limits - N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone VME: 20PPM VLE: 40PPM MAK: 19PPM
Personal Protection -
l Respiratory protection - When workers are facing concentrations above the exposure
limits they must use appropriate certified respirators.
l Hand protection - Chemical protection gloves are suitable, which are tested according
to EN 374. For short term contact (e.g. splash protection) as well as long term contact
(e.g. cleaning activities) with the constituents of inks and usual cleaning agents an
LLDPE glove of 0.06 mm thickness is recommended. According to information by the
manufacturer the average breakthrough times for usual constituents exceed 480 min.
We recommend to set up a hand protection plan, which is adapted to the needs of the
local business. Further information is provided in the publications of Bundesverband
Handschutz (nos. 6 and 9) and BG Druck und Papierverarbeitung (528.1, 528.2,
531.1-7) .
For prolonged or repeated handling, use gloves: Latex or rubber. In any case,
instructions and information provided by the gloves manufacturers on their use, the
storage conditions, maintenance and replacement have to be followed.
531.1-7) .
l Eye protection - Use safety eye wear designed to protect against splash of liquids.
l Other : Wear appropriate work clothing.
Physical and Chemical Properties

Physical state: Liquid Solubility in water: Miscible
Colour: Violet Solubility in other solvents: Not determined
Odour: Mild pH (undiluted product): Not applicable
Apparent density: Not determined Relative density: 1.1
Fluidity Fluid at 35°C Viscosity (at 25°C) 15 S.DIN4
Initial distillation temperature: 202°C Flash point: 91°C
Autoignition temperature: >200°C Melting point: Not applicable
Lower explosion limit: 1.3% Upper explosion limit: 9.5%
Stability and Reactivity

Stable under recommended storage and handling conditions (see ‘Handling and Storage‘
section . In case of fire may produce hazardous decomposition products such as carbon
monoxide and dioxide, smoke, oxides of nitrogen.
Toxicological Information
No data available on the mixture itself.
Exposure to component solvents vapours concentration in excess of the stated

occupational exposure limit may result in adverse health effects such as mucous
membrane and respiratory system irritation and adverse effects on kidney, liver and central
nervous system. Symptoms and signs include head- ache, dizziness, fatigue, muscular
weakness, drowsiness and in extreme cases loss of consciousness.
Repeated or prolonged contact with the preparation may cause removal of natural fat from
the skin resulting in non-allergic contact dermatitis and absorption through the skin.
The liquid splashed in the eyes may cause irritation and reversible damage.
Ecological Information
The product should not be allowed to enter drains or watercourses.
Disposal Considerations
Do not empty into drains or watercourses. Waste and emptied containers must be
disposed in accordance with local regulations. According to Directive 2000/532/EEC the
ink wastes are classified as follows:
08 03 07 aqueous sludges containing ink

08 03 08 aqueous liquid waste containing ink
08 03 12* waste ink containing dangerous substances
08 03 13 waste ink other than those mentioned in 08 03 12
08 03 14* ink sludges containing dangerous substances
08 03 15 ink sludges other than those mentioned in 08 03 14
08 03 16* waste etching solutions
08 03 17* waste printing toner containing dangerous substances
08 03 18 waste printing toner other than those mentioned in 08 03 17
08 03 19* disperse oil
08 03 99 wastes not otherwise specified
Beware that ink wastes have to be considered as special waste and require a particular
attention. Ink wastes have to be eliminated by authorized companies according to the local
prescriptions.
Transport Information
The mixture must be transported according to the following regulations:
Train/Road: RID/ADR Sea: IMDG Air: IATA

UN No. 2810 2810 2810
Classe: 6.1 6.1 6.1
Special disposition: 274, 614 - -
Transport category: 2 - -
Danger identification: 60 - -
Tunnel: E - -
Subsidiary risk: - P -
Special provision: - 223, 274
Packaging group III III III
- Special disposition: - - -
- Limited quantity 5L 5L -
- Maximum quantity - - 60L - 220L
- Instruction P001, IBC03, LP01, R001 P001, LP01 655-663

- Provisions - - -
EMS: - F-A, S-A -
PSN: Toxic liquid, Organic, N.O.S (N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone).
Regulatory Information
According to Directive 1999/45/EC, the mixture is regulated as follows:
Symbol: T TOXIC
Contains: N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, 1-dodecyl-2- pyrrolidone
R-Phrases :
R43 May cause sensitisation by skin contact
R36/37/38 Irritating to eyes, respiratory system and skin
R61 May cause harm to the unborn child
environment
Phrases S :
S24 Avoid contact with skin
S26 In case of contact with eyes, rinse immediately with plenty of water and seek medical advice.
S37 Wear suitable gloves
S53 Avoid exposure - obtain special instructions before use
Volatile organic compounds according to Swiss Decree (OCOV): 92.96%

Volatile organic compounds (according to 1999/13/EC): 92.96%
Material Safety Data: Encre Maculante 2NS Vert

Name: Encre Maculante 2NS Vert.
Code: 2NS55999
Symbols: XN HARMFUL
R22 - Harmful if swallowed
R36 - Irritating to eyes.
Y-butyrolactone 202-509-5 >50% R22 R36
X N
Triethyl phosphate 015-013-00-7 20-50% X N R22
First Aid Measures








Storage -

direct sunlight.
l No smoking.
leakage.

should be achieved by the use of local exhaust ventilation and good general extraction.
Exposure Limits - Not applicable.
l Respiratory protection - no particular measures.

531.1-7) .

Colour: Green Solubility in other solvents: Not determined
Odour: Mild pH (undliuted product): Not applicable
Lower explosion limit: 1.2% Upper explosion limit: 16%

No data available on the mixture itself. The components of the preparation present some
known toxicological risks. For the precise description of these risks, see sections ‘Hazards
Identification’ and ‘Regulatory Information’.

prescriptions.
Not applicable.
Symbol: XN HARMFUL
Contains : Y-butyrolactone
R-Phrases:
R22 Harmful if swallowed.
R36 Irritating to eyes.
Phrases S:
S51 Use only in well-ventilated areas.
Volatile organic compounds according to Swiss Decree (OCOV): 67.50 %

Volatile organic compounds (according to 1999/13/EC): 67.50 %
Material Safety Data: Mercury

SECTION I - Hazardous Ingredients / Identity Information
Trade Names/Synonyms l Metallic
l Mercury
l Colloidal
l Mercury
l Inorganic
l Mercury
l Quick Silver
l Hydrargyrum.
Chemical Family Inorganic metal
CERCLA rating (scale 0-3)
Health - 3
Fire - 0
Reactivity - 0
Persistence - 0
Chemical Formula Hg
CAS Number 7439-97-6
Molecular Weight 200.59
NERA rating (Scale 0-4)
Health - 0
Fire - 0
Reactivity - 0
DOT Hazard Class ORM-B
DOT Identification Number NA 2809
SECTION II - Physical / Chemical Characteristics

Boiling Point 674°F (356.7°C)
Specific Gravity (H20 = 1), 13.9
Vapour Pressure 0.0012mmHG @ 20°C
Melting Point -38.9°F
Vapour Density (Air = 1), 7.0
Solubility in Water Insoluble
Appearance and Colour Silver/White liquid metal. Odourless.
SECTION III - Fire and Explosion Hazard Data

Flash Point Non Flammable
Extinguishing Small Fires: dry chemical , carbon dioxide, water spray or foam.
Method Large Fires: water spray or foam.
Special Fire Fighting Move containers from fire area if possible, cool containers exposed to flames with water
Procedures from outside until well after the fire is out. Keep up-wind.
Unusual Fire and Slight fire and explosion hazard when exposed to heat or flames.
Explosion Hazards
SECTION IV - Reactivity Data

Stability Stable under normal temperatures and pressures.
Conditions to avoid Elevated temperatures and open flames.
Incompatible Materials l Acetylinic compounds
l Ammonia
l Boron
l Diiodophosphide
l Ethylene Oxide
l MethylAzide
l Methylsilane
l Metals - Aluminium, Potassium, Lithium, Sodium, Rubidium.
l Oxidants - Bromine, Peroxyformic acid, Chlorine Dioxide, Nitric acid.
l Tetracarbonylnickel
l Nitromethane
l Silver Perchlorate
Hazardous Decomposition N/A
or By-products
Hazardous Polymerisation None known.
SECTION V - Health Hazard Data

Health hazards are described under skin contact, ingestion, and eye contact.
Skin Contact
Acute exposure - may cause redness and irritation. Sensitisation dermatitis may occur in
previously exposed workers. Substance may be absorbed through the skin causing anuria.
Chronic exposure - may result in psychic disturbances, peripheral neuropathy and kidney
damage as in chronic inhalation.
First Aid - Remove contaminated clothing immediately. Wash affected area with soap or
mild detergent and large amounts of water until no evidence of substance remains (approx.
15 - 20 minutes). Seek immediate medical attention.
Ingestion
Acute exposure - Metallic mercury generally shows no effect. However in exceptional
cases, existing internal sores may allow mercury to accumulate with serious or even fatal
results. Also aspiration into the lungs is a remote possibility and this would cause a
permanent hazard.
First Aid - If victim is conscious and not convulsive, immediately give two to four glasses of
water and induce vomiting by touching finger to back of throat. From sitting position, head
must be lower than hips to prevent aspiration. Keep patient warm and at rest. Seek
immediate medical attention.
Eye Contact
Acute exposure - Contact may cause irritation.
Chronic exposure - Mercury may be deposited in the lens of the eye, causing visual
disturbances.
First Aid - Wash eyes immediately with large amounts of water, occasionally lifting upper
and lower lids, until no evidence of substance remains (approx. 15 - 20 minutes). Seek
SECTION VI - Precautions for Safe Handling and Use

Spillage - Isolate the area of the leak or spill. Wearing appropriate protective equipment,
attempt to stop the leak. For small spills, take up with sand or other absorbent material and
place into containers for later reclamation or disposal. For large spills, dam far ahead of spill
for later reclamation or disposal. Keep unnecessary people away. Isolate hazard area and
deny entry.
Disposal - Mercury tilt switches must be disposed of as hazardous waste. Disposal should
be in accordance with local and national waste regulations.
SECTION VII - Control Measures

This section describes respiratory protection measures.
Respiratory Protection
Below 1mg/m³ - Use respirator fitted with mercury vapour absorbing cartridges and
excess use indicator.
The tilt switches on the control board each contain 0.68 grams of mercury, which equates
to much less than 1mg/m³.
1mg/m³ - Use supplied air respirator or self contained breathing apparatus.
5mg/m³ - Use supplied air respirator with a full face piece, helmet or hood or self contained
breathing apparatus with a full centrepiece.
28mg/m³ - Use Type C supplied air respirator with a full centrepiece, operated in pressure
demand or other positive pressure mode or with full centrepiece, helmet or hood operated
in continuous flow mode.
REVISION

FLUIDITI REPLENISHMENT SECURITY
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The Fluiditi Replenishment Security system is designed to stain currency and render it
valueless in the event of the ATM being attacked. A marking ink is injected into all cash
cassettes when an attack is detected. The ink injection system and alarm board are
attached to the currency dispenser module.
There are two aspects of the system: one protecting cash inside the ATM from external
attack, and one protecting the cassette during delivery and replenishment. These two
aspects are integrated in Fluiditi Replenishment Security, but can also be separate
products, called Fluiditi ATM Security and Fluiditi Access Security respectively. ATM
Security is described in a chapter of this manual. Access Security is designed for cash-in-
transit companies.
Note: The products may also be known by their previous names: Intelligent Cash Security,
or ICS; ATM Cash Security and Access Control.
The integrated system provides the following functions:
l Door forcing detection

l Tilt (ram-raid) detection
l Explosion detection (optional)
l Penetration detection (optional)
l 48 hour continuous power loss activation (optional)
l Internal and external indicators.
l Servo-motor operated latches to lock cassettes in place in the dispenser
l Secure delivery of cassettes by means of the Fluiditi Carrisafe™ hood, containing an
ink injection system and protective sleeve.
l Secure insertion and removal of cassettes by means of the
Carrisafe hood and programmable ‘tags’
l Service personnel access (optional)
l Door open timer activation
l Illegal cassette removal activation.
Spare inputs are provided for system expansion, such as for external alarms.
The system comprises:
l Alarm board
l ICS Control board
l Alarm sounder
l Battery backup
l Ink injection units
l ICS Cassette
l Carrisafe hood (for use by cash-in-transit replenishers)
l Containment mat or tray
l Servo operated motors

l Locking latches
l Mas-Hamilton touch port
l System status indicators
l Infra red sensors.
Functional Elements
The functional elements of the system are shown below:
Control Board And Pick Assembly
Alarm
Servo Motors Sounder
(4 off)
Explosion
Detector
Battery
Backup
Alarm
Board
Tilt Switches
ICS
Control Board
Ink Injection Units

(4 off)
Containment Mat or Tray
Note: On a small number of older systems, the tilt switches may be located above the alarm
sounder.
Cassette Locking Latches
Dispenser Bracket
IR Optics
Status Indicator
LEDs
IR Optics
Service Access
Touch Port
Note: Service Access is an optional feature.
Inputs
All the detection inputs are in pairs - if one input is triggered a fault condition is reported, if
both are triggered, the system is activated. If the system is activated, the dispenser will be
disabled.
Door Switches and Lock Shunt

Two single pole changeover door switches and a controlling lock shunt provide a signal
short circuit when the door is closed.
When the door is closed and locked, if either door signal is disconnected from JP3 on the
alarm board while the lock shunt is still connected, a fault condition will be indicated. If both
door signals are disconnected while the lock shunt is still connected, a system activation will
occur.
Tilt Switches
The two tilt switches mounted on the alarm board are set to open when the ATM is tilted
20° in any direction. The board has an electronic damping circuit that monitors both tilt
switch signals. If both switches are open continuously for more than 2.5 seconds A system
activation will occur.
Explosion Detector
The explosion detector is a proprietary component with its own internal battery and
connecting lead. Two contacts (normally open) are set at 90° to each other to detect shock
waves from an explosion coming from different directions.
The explosion detector has its own internal battery which will provide sufficient power for a
system activation even if main power and normal battery back-up power have been lost.
Penetration Sensor
An optional penetration sensor in the form of mats, can be attached to the sides of the
security enclosure. Through the wall and vestibule ATMs have 2 mats - one on each side of
the enclosure, and lobby ATMs have a third mat on the rear wall of the enclosure.
There are two pairs of penetration signal inputs, one on the alarm board and the other on
the control board.
If a penetration sensor is not fitted, then, on systems with in-line 3 hour delay PCBs, loom
security short (NCR part no. 445-0644832) must be fitted to JP7 on the alarm board and
CONN 5 on the control board. For systems with an integrated 3 hour delay function, links
L2 and L3 on the alarm board should be open and fitted with a turnaround plug, and links
L1 and L2 on the ICS control board should be fitted. See 'Internal Connections' section
later in this chapter for more details of the different alarm board layouts.
Spare Input
A spare input allows the financial institution to connect the cash security system to its own
alarm system.
Opto-Assemblies
Each ink injection assembly is fitted with a male coupling (protractor) with an opto-
assembly. When an ICS cassette is pushed into the dispenser, the control board
connected to the opto-assembly will detect the cassette, and whether it is in the correct
position.
Infra-red Optics
The infra-red optics on the front of the dispenser control the operation of the servo motors
for the locking latches. Infra-red signals are transmitted to the optics by the Carrisafe hood
used to insert and remove the cassettes. The cassettes will only be released if the correct
signal is transmitted to the optics at the correct cassette position.
Door Open Timer

A door open timer operates whenever the security enclosure door is opened. It is set to a
default of 90 seconds, but may be factory-set to between 2 seconds and 18 minutes. Once
the timer period is exceeded, the alarm will sound for 30 seconds before the system is
activated, if the door is not closed within that time. Closing the door will re-set the timer to
zero.
The timer can be disabled by either legitimately removing or unlatching all the cassettes,
closing the door switches or throwing the lock. This allows for lengthier operations at the
ATM, such as jam clearance or changing the lock combination. Remember that when a
latch is unlocked to release a cassette, there is an eight second delay before any other latch
can operate.
Illegal Cassette Withdrawal

An attempt to remove the cassette from the dispenser by force will be detected by the
system. The cassette locking latch has two holding points. The first is sacrificial and will
break when a force greater than 250 Newtons is applied to the cassette. The second
holding point can withstand a force of 630 Newtons before breaking. The 10mm movement
of the cassette between the two holding points is detected by the system and causes the
sounder to activate for 8 seconds to warn of an activation. Closing the security enclosure
door will prevent an activation but the alarm will continue to the end of the 8 second period
and restart when the door is opened. Pushing the cassette fully back into the dispenser will
clear the activation condition.
48 Hour Continuous Power Loss Activation

The optional 48 hour continuous power loss activation is operational if link 1 is closed on the
alarm board. If power is lost for more than 48 hours continuously, the alarm sounder will
pulse on and off at one second intervals for thirty seconds, after which the system is
activated. If power is restored during this thirty second countdown, the sounder will stop
and the counter will stop, but not re-set for a further thirty seconds. If the power fails again
within the thirty second counter reset period, the counter will continue to count down and
the alarm will sound as before. If power is maintained for more than thirty seconds the
counter will be reset and the main 48 hour countdown will re-start if power is lost again.
Backup Battery Pack

The battery pack is designed to provide back-up power for at least 48 hours should a power
failure occur. It is a rechargeable unit. If the ATM power has been off for more than 6 hours,
the voltage of the battery pack should be tested at pins 1 and 2 of CONN 10 on the
PDS250 board. (Refer to the “Internal Connections” section of this chapter).
The battery pack must be replaced after it’s expected life of

5 years or if the battery voltage has dropped below 8.0 V otherwise the security system will
be temporarily inoperable until the batteries have been recharged.
Battery backup must be removed before the ATM is powered down and reconnected after
ATM power is restored.
Explosion Detector Battery State

The voltage of the battery internal to the explosion detector module must be checked
periodically, by testing at pins 1 and 2 of JP1. (Refer to the 'Internal Connections' section of
this chapter.) The battery voltage must be >8.7V. The module should be replaced if the
battery voltage is below this value. The module can be disconnected and reconnected
whilst the ATM is still powered. The expected battery life is 2 years.
TEST TOOLS
None.
STRAPPING
Alarm Board
The default positions of the jumpers on the alarm board are shown in the following table.
These jumpers must be configured before power up. Also see “Interconnection Diagram”
later in this chapter.

L1 Closed (default) 48 hour activation enabled
Open 48 hour activation disabled
L4 Closed Factory set. If open, an activation condition can not be reported to the
ATM
L5 Closed Factory set
L6 Open (at Safe mode: Fusible resistors disabled
manufacture)
Closed (once installed) Live mode: Fusible resistors enabled
L8 Open Factory set
L9 Open Factory set
For installation and testing purposes, link L6 is factory set in the open (safe) position,
meaning that the fusible resistors will not blow when an activation is simulated. L6 must be
set to the closed (live) once the correct installation procedure has been completed, so that
the fusible resistors can indicate the cause of any true activation. The following table shows
resistor identification:

ICS Control Board

The default position of the jumpers on the ICS control board is indicated in the following
table:

L1 Open Penetration sensor fitted
Closed (default) Penetration sensor short
L2 Open Penetration sensor fitted
Closed (default) Penetration sensor short
L3 Closed (default) Service access or normal access method enabled
Open Normal access method only
ADJUSTMENTS
WARNING
Before carrying out any servicing or adjustments on the Fluiditi
Replenishment Security system, the system must be fully disarmed.
Accessing the System

There are two methods of accessing the system, determined by the fitting or the removal of
link 3 on the ICS control board. If the link is fitted, and has never been removed, the system
can be accessed by either the ‘service access method’ or by the ‘normal access method’. If
the link has been removed, (this is the default) the system can only be accessed by the
normal access method, and the service access method cannot be used unless the board is
re-programmed.
The method used will be defined by the owning institution’s service policy, as the normal
method requires the presence of replenishment personnel with a Carrisafe hood.
Normal Access Method

Access under the normal access method is as follows:
l On opening the safe door, all cassettes present must be removed with a Carrisafe
hood. Once all cassettes are removed, the door timer and the system’s ability to
activate are both disabled.
Note: There is an eight second delay after a latch is unlocked before any other
latch can operate.
l The cassettes can now be re-inserted by hand, without the system re-arming, to allow
for problem diagnosis and testing.
l A Mas-Hamilton service engineer tag can be presented to the touch port on the
dispenser to release cassettes inserted by hand. (See diagram).
IR Optics
Status Indicator
LEDs
IR Optics
Service Access
Touch Port
l To re-arm the system and reset the door open timer, the cassettes must be returned
to the dispenser with the Carrisafe hood. Closing the door at any time with a cassette
locked in will also re-arm the system and reset the timer.
Once you have gained access to the system, if you need to work on problem isolation on
the security system itself, or the pick module needs to be replaced, you must follow the
instructions in the next section on further disarming the system. Otherwise, for non-security
system work inside the safe (for example a note jam), legitimate opening of the safe and
removal of all the cassettes disables the system to allow servicing to be carried out. If the
released cassettes are an obstruction, they can simply be pushed back into place. The
system will only be re-armed when the safe door is closed.
Note: Replenishment Security system protects the cassettes when the door is closed &
open, and requires legitimate removal of the cassettes before it becomes passive. Every
time the safe door is opened a 90 second door timer is initiated. After 90 seconds, an
audible alarm sounds for a further 30 seconds and the door must be closed within this
period, otherwise the system will activate.
Service Access Method

Access under the service access method is as follows:
l On opening the safe door, cassettes may be removed either with a Carrisafe hood or
with a Mas-Hamilton service engineer tag applied to the touch port on the dispenser
(see previous diagram).
Note: There is an eight second delay after a latch is unlocked before any other
latch can operate.
l If the hood is used:

l The system is disabled once all the cassettes are removed.
l A service engineer tag will not be accepted until either the ATM has been
emptied, when it can be used to release cassettes inserted by hand for testing
purposes, or until the safe door is closed to re-arm the system.
l Returning the cassettes to the dispenser with the hood will re-arm the system
and reset the door open timer. Closing the door at any time with a cassette
locked in will also re-arm the system and reset the timer.
l If the service engineer tag is used:
l Applying the tag to the touch port on the dispenser will switch off the door open
timer, disarm the system and then release the cassettes.

l Cassettes can then be re-inserted into the dispenser by hand to allow for
diagnosis and testing.

l Cassettes can be released by re-applying the tag to the dispenser port.
l The system will not re-arm until the safe door is closed or a cassette is returned
by a Carrisafe hood.
Once you have gained access to the system, if you need to work on problem isolation on
the security system itself, or the pick module needs to be replaced, you must follow the
instructions in the next section on further disarming the system. Otherwise, for non-security
system work inside the safe (for example a note jam), legitimate opening of the safe and
removal of all the cassettes disarms the system to allow servicing to be carried out. If the
released cassettes are an obstruction, they can simply be pushed back into place. The
system will only be re-armed when the safe door is closed.
Note: Replenishment Security system protects the cassettes when the door is closed &
open, and requires legitimate removal of the cassettes before it becomes passive. Every
time the safe door is opened a 90 second door timer is initiated. After 90 seconds, an
audible alarm sounds for a further 30 seconds and the door must be closed within this
period, otherwise the system will activate.
Disarming the System

Legitimate access to the security enclosure as described in the previous section will disarm
the security system for work on the ATM. However, before any servicing activity can be
undertaken on the security system itself, the battery backup must be disconnected as
follows:
1. Rack out the dispenser and remove the security system cover from the rear by
removing the two M3 screws at the base of the cover.
Screws Cover
Ink
Injection
Tanks
Harness
Protection
Metalwork
M3 Screws
2. Disconnect the battery harness from the battery backup to cut off backup power.
4. Remove and retain link L6 from the alarm board. This allows system testing without
blowing the fusible resistors.
5. Disconnect the ink injection harness from the ink injection units.
6. Restore main ATM power, so that status indicator LEDs can be used for
diagnostics.
Note: The door open timer will continue to be operational without battery back-up power,
although it will not be able to trigger an activation. When working in the safe, to prevent the
alarm sounding at the end of the door open period (default is 90 seconds), you should
ensure that all cassettes are removed or released from the latches.
Once diagnosis or repairs are complete the following procedure should be carried out to re-
arm the system:

2. Refit link L6 on the alarm board.
3. Re-connect the ink injection harness to the ink injection units.
4. Restore power to the ATM.
5. Re-connect battery harness to the battery backup.
TROUBLESHOOTING
WARNING
Before carrying out any fault finding or repairs the system must be
fully disarmed, as described in the section 'Disarming the Security
System'.
Preventive Maintenance
The following general checks should be made when servicing a cash security system:
l Check all wiring harnesses. Repair or replace as necessary.

l Check that each of the metal tangs, or holding points, on the cassette locking latches
are intact. If any are bent or broken the ICS cassette can move forward, causing an
activation condition.
l Check all connections and power supplies to the alarm board and ICS control board if
fitted. Repair or replace as required.
l Check battery voltages.
l Check Replace–By labels on the ink tanks and back–up batteries.
Status Indicator LEDS

Pairs of LEDs indicate the status of the security system. An external pair is inside the ATM
top-box: above the CRT on front access units, and above the rear operator panel on rear
access units. Internal pairs are located on a bracket on the front of the cash dispenser pick
module: one pair for each cassette position.
IR Optics
Status Indicator
LEDs
IR Optics
Service Access
Touch Port
The LEDs indicate system status as shown in the table below.
LED Indication Status

Green LED Flashing System functioning correctly
Red LED Flashing Attack detected - system activated. Dispenser disabled.
Both LEDs Extinguished Fault detected. Dispenser still operational.
Both LEDs Flashing System activated, but now safe to open security enclosure door.
Note: If an activation condition occurs while the security enclosure door is open, a fault will
be indicated. If the door is closed with this condition still active, the fault indication will
remain on and an activation will not occur.
TESTING TO ISOLATE THE PROBLEM

If the status LEDs report a fault or a false activation condition, or a legitimate activation
failed to occur, the detection inputs need to be checked. Perform the following checks to
isolate the problem, ensuring the system has first been disarmed:
Alarm Input
1. Enable the alarm, if there is one connected to JP3 on the alarm board. Check that
the sounder operates, indicating an activation condition has occurred. Check that
the green LED indicator is off and the red LED is flashing.
2. Disable the alarm. The sounder and the LEDs should remain the same.
3. Unlock and open the safe door. The sounder should stop, but the red LED should
continue to flash.
5. Repeat these checks for any spare alarm inputs connected to JP13.
Tilt Switches
1. Make sure that the ink injection harness has been disconnected from the ink
injection units.
2. Disconnect one end of the alarm board from its mounting, and tilt the board to an
angle greater than 25° from the vertical.
Note: On systems with the tilt switches mounted separately to the alarm
board, disconnect the tilt switch mounting assembly only.
3. Check that after 2.5 seconds an activation condition is indicated by the flashing red
LED.
4. Re-position the alarm board assembly.
Door Switch Inputs

1. Unlock and open the safe door. The door open timer should start to count-down
after 90 seconds.
2. Close the safe door and verify that the external green LED starts to flash.
3. Verify that the timer has re-set, that is, it does not expire with the door closed,
causing an activation condition to be indicated (red LED flashing).
Penetration Alarm Inputs

1. Remove alarm board links L2 and L3 one link at a time and check that a fault
condition is reported each time (no LEDs flashing).
2. With the safe door closed, remove both links L2 and L3. Check that an activation
condition is indicated (red LED flashing).
Battery Back-up
1. Power off the ATM. With the battery backup disconnected, all LEDs should be out.
2. Power on the ATM. The green LED should flash.
3. Re-connect the battery harness to the battery backup.
4. Power off the ATM and check that the green LED is still flashing.
Illegal Cassette Withdrawal

Repeat these checks for each cassette position:
1. Using thumb and forefinger, slide back the injector nozzle sleeve to its fullest extent
to simulate the insertion of a cassette. The cassette latches should move to the
horizontal, locked position (take care to avoid fingers being pinched.)
2. Slowly allow the sleeve on the injection nozzle to move forwards approximately
10mm to simulate an attempted illegal withdrawal of the cassette. The alarm should
sound for 8 seconds before the red LED starts to flash and the sounder operates.
3. Release the nozzle sleeve. Switch off power to the ATM for 5 seconds and then
power up again. The red LED should no longer be flashing, the sounder should have
stopped, the green LED should be flashing and the cassette locking latch should be
it its open position to accept a cassette.
4. Ensure that the holding points on the cassette locking latches have not been bent or
broken during these checks, as this may cause a false activation.
Fusible Resistors
If a false activation has occurred (that is, the system has activated but no attack or
attempted theft was made on the ATM), check the resistors on the alarm board to see
which detection device triggered the system. The resistors are assigned to devices as
follows:

Then check the relevant device for a fault which may have caused the false activation.
ICS Cassette Insertion

If problems are experienced when inserting ICS cassettes, perform the following checks to
isolate the problem:
1. Ensure that the cassette locking latch is in the uppermost position, to accept the
cassette.
2. Ensure that the keyplate forks are not bent and that they locate correctly into the
front of the cassette.
3. Ensure that the injector nozzle sleeve moves freely backwards and forwards, by
sliding it gently with thumb and forefinger. Slide it back to its fullest extent to simulate
insertion of a cassette. The latch should move to its horizontal locked position. Take
care that the latch does not pinch the fingers during this procedure.
4. Ensure that the female housing on the side of the cassette, into which the metal
injector nozzle locates when the cassette is inserted, is correctly located and
fastened.
5. Ensure that there are no loose wires or connectors in the path of the cassette.
Note: After testing the cassettes ensure that all cassettes are pushed fully home, because
if a cassette moves forward into the activate position while the safe door is closed, there will
be no indication until the door is opened. Then, the sounder will operate and the system will
activate after 8 seconds if the cassettes are not pushed in or the safe door closed. The 8
second timer will restart from zero when the door is opened again if the cassettes are not
pushed in.
Locking Latches
If the locking latches, fail to operate wait at least 8 seconds before attempting to remove a
cassette as this is the length of delay between cassette removal operations.
If the latches fail to operate correctly, perform the following checks:
l If a latch fails to lift, swap the faulty position’s retention loom (Conns 1 to 4 on the ICS
control board) with a known good position. If the faulty position’s latch now lifts, the
fault is on the board. If it still doesn’t lift then the fault lies in the retention loom or the
servo.
l Check the wiring between the IR sensors, servo and the PDS 250 board. Repair or
replace as necessary.
l Check that the sensors are visible in the bracket and are in their correct location: dark
lens in the upper position, clear lens in the lower position.
l If the latch fails to move to the horizontal position, check that the cassette is inserted
fully and that the injector nozzle sleeve moves freely backwards and forwards. (See
“ICS Cassette Insertion”).
l If a cassette becomes jammed in the dispenser and the latch cannot be lifted, first
remove all the other cassettes. With power disconnected, use a long thin tool (such as
a screwdriver) to force the servo wheel around to the 12 o’clock position. The cassette
can now be removed. Replace the servo, power up the ATM (do not re-connect the
battery back-up) and test the cassette position.
Resetting the Board

After an activation has occurred, all signal latches and status LED indicators will be held in
their activation condition until the board which triggered the activation has been reset.
To reset the alarm board, either:
l Remove battery backup power and then main power. Then restore main power.
or
l Open the lock shunt and both door switch signals (if they are not already open), and
then close all four signals. This allows for lock combination changes without having to
hold the door signals closed.
The status indicators will only be reset by disconnecting and re-connecting power.
Clean–up After System Activation
WARNING
Any maintenance and clean–up activities should ONLY be carried
out by approved Engineers, who are fully trained in Fluiditi
functionality and appropriate handling of Fluiditi ink and
components. It is required that all Engineers have successfully
completed NCR’s Standard Engineer ATM Course and Introduction
to ATM Cash Security Systems Course (course number 19079).
WARNING
Always wear protective clothing when working on an ATM after a
system activation, as the ink is corrosive and stains permanently.
WARNING
Exclude sources of ignition and ventilate the area if possible. Avoid
breathing in the vapours. The vapours are heavier than air, and may
spread along floors. See “Safety Information” at the end of this
chapter for first aid measures.
WARNING
Do not open the security enclosure until both the green and red
status indicators are flashing. This will be at least 3 hours after
activation has occurred, to protect you from the possibility of
airborne particles from the ink.
Protective clothing and disposal materials should be available at all times to be worn by
personnel handling contaminated parts. These items are available in the following kits:
l Protective Protection Equipment (009–0028164)

l Protective Protection Equipment XXL (009–0028166)
l Disposal Equipment (009–0028165)
Note: The contents in kits 009–0028164 and 009–0028166 differ only in respect to the sizing
of the Protective Protection Equipment (PPE) provided.
Clean–up instructions must be performed as directed and all items of PPE must be worn as
advised.
The following instructions should be read and used in conjunction with NCR’s own
Customer Engineering Guide on recommended handling procedures, available from NCR
University, Course #19079—”Introduction to ATM Cash Security Systems”.
Personal Protection Equipment Contents and Guidelines

The following Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) kits differ only in respect to the sizing
of the protective clothing provided:
l Personal Protective Equipment (009–0028164)

l Personal Protective Equipment XXL (009–0028166)
The kits contain:
l 1 pair of protective gloves (recommended example: ANSELL BARRIER™)—referred

to in these instructions as the outer gloves
l 1 pair of protective gloves to be worn inside of main gloves (recommended example:
ANSELL TOUCH & TUFF 92–670)—referred to in these instructions as the inner
gloves
l 1 chemical resistant overall (recommended example: DuPont Tychem F)
l 1 pair of safety goggles (recommended example: Sperian LG20 (indirect vent),
product reference 1005509)
l 1 roll of masking tape, 2 inches wide.
Before Starting Clean–Up Process

l Make sure that all items of PPE kit are present and are in good condition.
l Read these instructions thoroughly, paying particular attention to the points where
specific items of the PPE kit should be worn or removed.
l Make sure all items of the PPE are a comfortable fit, particularly that the cuffs of the
overall and the gloves cover the wrists when the arms are extended. It is
recommended to use the masking tape included to secure the outer protective gloves
to the overall.
l If you wear prescription spectacles, make sure that the goggles in the kit can be
comfortably and securely worn over them.
During the Clean–Up Process

l Wear all items of the PPE kits as directed in the instructions.
Note: The overall is splash–proof only and the wearer should not kneel in or
otherwise continually contact the ink.
l Tie back long hair during the clean–up operation in case of contamination.
After the Clean–up Process

l Take care when removing the PPE to prevent skin or clothing coming into contact with
any ink on the protective clothing or equipment.
l All items of PPE kit (gloves, overalls, goggles, and so on) are for one–time use only
and should therefore be disposed of after use.
Disposal Kit Contents and Guidelines

The Disposal Equipment (009-0028165) kit contains:
l 6 x absorbent sheets
l 1 x roll—tissue paper
l 2 x floor protection sheets
l 8 x chemical resistant bags
l 8 x cable ties
l 8 x toxic warning labels
Before starting the clean–up process

Make sure that all items of the disposal kit are present and are in good condition.
Clean–Up Procedure Following an Activation

1. Lay out all the items in the PPE and disposal kits, and prepare them for use.
2. Make sure that power to the ATM is off.
3. Place the floor protection sheet and then the absorbent sheets from the disposal kit
on the ground in front of the ATM, as necessary to fully cover the area required for
clean–up when the dispenser is racked out of the ATM.
4. Put on the overall, goggles, and inner gloves.
5. Once the PPE items are comfortably and securely fitted, open the safe door.
6. Put on the outer gloves and seal them to the overall cuffs with the masking tape from
the PPE kit.
7. Fold over the sides of a chemical resistant bag (to prevent ink coming into contact
with the outside of the bag), and place the bag on top of the floor protection and
absorbent sheets.
8. Carefully remove the first cash cassette from the dispenser, taking care to not cause
uncontrolled spillage, and place it in the chemical resistant bag.
9. Repeat for each cassette. Depending on the amount of notes present in the
cassettes, a bag for each cassette may be needed. Place each full bag to the side
until all contaminated parts have been dealt with.
10. When all the cassettes have been removed, rack out the dispenser to its fullest
extent, making sure that it is positioned above the floor protection and absorbent
sheets.
11. Fold over the sides of a chemical resistant bag and place the bag underneath the
dispenser pick modules, on top of the floor protection and absorbent sheets.
12. Following the procedures in NCR’s Standard Engineer ATM and Introduction to
ATM Cash Security Systems (Course #19079) training courses, remove and place
the pick modules into chemical resistant bags. Deal with each pick module in turn
and place each full bag to one side until all contaminated parts have been dealt with.
It may also be necessary to disconnect or remove any interfering or contaminated
harnessing.
13. Place the floor protection and absorbent sheets, plus any absorbent sheets that may
have been previously been used in the safe, into one of the chemical resistant bags.
14. Clean any uncontrolled spillages in and around the safe using the supplied roll of
tissue paper, and then place it into one of the bags.
15. Once all contaminated parts have been dealt with, remove the adhesive tape around
the cuffs of the outer gloves and remove the outer gloves only, by progressively
withdrawing alternate hands and dropping the gloves into one of the bags.
16. Unzip the overall and remove it, taking care that skin or clothing does not come into
contact with the outer surface of the overall. Turning the overall inside–out during
removal will help to prevent further cross contamination. Then dispose of the overall
in one of the bags.
17. All bags should now be closed by unfurling each bag from the outside.
18. Remove the inner gloves by turning them inside–out from the cuff. Dispose off them
in one of the bags.
19. All bags should be sealed using the cable ties provided. Before the last bag is
sealed, remove the safety goggles and dispose of them in the bag.
20. Fix the supplied Toxic warning labels to each bag containing contaminated
materials.
21. Close and lock the safe door.
22. Dispose of all contaminated material in accordance with local regulations.
INTERNAL CONNECTIONS
Note: The Picoflex Extraction Tool (NCR part number 603-9014873) is the recommended
tool for removal of connectors from the Fluiditi ATM and Replenishment Security Control
Module PCBs. Care should be taken when removing these connectors from the PCB. This
tool is suitable for all connector sizes.
Place one leg of the tool at either side of the connector, hold firmly, and lift the connector
from the PCB.
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
With Integrated 3 Hour Delay Function


N/C
(optional)
JP3 JP16 N/C
alarm inputs
L4
L2 L3
Spare input JP13

Alarm Board
L1 (Halo Board) R42 R45 R48 R51
Internal LEDs
JP12
output
L6
External LEDs JP8

output (optional)
JP2 JP10 JP4
L7
L12
Comms
Power
N/C Battery back-up

ICS touch memory Penetration short
Conn 1 Conn 7 Conn 6 Conn 8 Conn 10 Conn 5

Infra-red optics/Servo motors/protractors
L1 L2
Conn 2
ICS Control Board
Conn 3
(PDS250) N/C
Conn 9
Conn 4
L3
not connected. Any unused positions on the ICS control board must have a loom fitted.
With In-line 3 Hour Delay PCB

Note: The in-line or ‘piggy-back’ 3 hour delay PCB is only present on a small number of
older systems.
Penetration detector
Power/Comms (optional)
(dispenser control board)
Explosion detector
N/C Tilt switches Alarm output Sounder (optional)
JP3 JP16 N/C
alarm inputs
N/C CON 1
J1
Alarm Board L2 L3
Spare input JP13

3 hour delay PCB
Internal LEDs
JP12 output
J4 J2
External LEDs
J5 J3 output (optional)
L5
JP8
JP2 JP10 JP4 L4
L6
Comms
Power
N/C Battery back-up

Penetration short
Conn 1 Conn 6 Conn 8 Conn 10 Conn 5

Infra-red optics/Servo motors/protractors
L1 L2
Conn 2
Conn 3 ICS Control Board N/C
Conn 9
Conn 4
L3
not connected. Any unused positions on the ICS control board must have a loom fitted.
Connectors - Alarm Board

Explosion Detector - JP1
Pin Description
1 Battery +
2 Battery -
3 Switch
4 Switch
Ink Injection Units Outputs - JP2

1 Pos 1 5 Pos 3
2 12V 6 12V
3 Pos 2 7 Pos 4
4 12V 8 12V
Switches and Spare Inputs - JP3

1 Mas Hamilton (shunt) 6 External Alarm
2 Mas Hamilton (shunt) 7 Door Switch 1
4 External Alarm 9 Door Switch 2
Control Board Comms - JP4

1 GND 4 BIT 2
2 GND 5 BIT 1
3 BIT 3 6 BIT 0
Power and Comms - JP6

1 +24V 6 GND
2 N/C 7 SPIN RX

3 GND 8 SPIN TX
4 N/C 9 N/C
5 N/C 10 N/C
N/C = No connection
Penetration Detector Input - JP7

Pin Description
1 AA1 5V
2 AA1
3 AA2 5V
4 AA2
External Leds Output - JP8

Pin Description
1 Green K
2 Green A
3 Red K
4 Red A
Tilt Switch Input - JP9

Pin Description
1 Tilt 1
2 Tilt 1 5V
3 Tilt 2
4 Tilt 2 5V
Note: This connector is only used on a small number of older systems with in-line 3 hour
delay PCBs.
Control Board Comms - JP10

1 24V 6 GND
2 BATT 7 SPIN Rx
3 GND 8 SPIN Tx

4 N/C 9 N/C
5 N/C 10 N/C
Sounder - JP11
Pin Description
1 12V
2 SOUNDER
3 N/C
4 N/C
N/C = No connection
Internal LEDs Output - JP12

Pin Description
1 Green K
2 Green A
3 Red K
4 Red A
Spare Inputs - JP13

Pin Description
1 SIG
2 GND
3 SIG
4 GND
Pin Description
1 NC*
2 NC*
3 GND
4 GND
Alarm Output - JP14

* NC = normally closed relay contact
Spare Output - JP15

Pin Description
1 12V
2 GND
3 5V
4 OC*
* OC = open collector transistor
Factory Programming - JP16

1 TCK 6 5V
2 VPP 7 TDO
3 TMS 8 GND
4 GND 9 DATA
5 TDI 10 CLK
Connectors - ICS Control Board

Infra Red Optics / Servo Motor / Protractor - CONNs 1 to 4
1 Cassette Opto TX Rear 7 Protractor
2 Cassette Opto TX Front 8 GND
3 Cassette Opto RX 9 IR RX
4 GND 10 GND
5 Servo Power 11 IR TX
6 Servo Signal 12 GND
Penetration Short - CONN 5

Pin Description
1 AA1 -1
2 AA1-2
3 AA2-1
4 AA2-2
Control Board Power - CONN 6

1 24V 6 GND
2 BATT 7 NCR COMMS D
3 GND 8 NCR COMMS CK
4 N/C 9 N/C
5 N/C 10 N/C
N/C = No connection
ICS Touch Memory - CONN 7

Pin Description
1 Spare
2 GND
3 External TM
4 GND
Control Board Comms - CONN 8

1 GND 4 Bit 2
2 GND 5 Bit 1
3 Bit 3 6 Bit 0
Battery - CONN 10
Pin Description
1 BATT
2 GND
3 N/C
4 N/C
N/C = No connection
INTERNAL CABLES
Alarm Board
Explosion Detector
Door Switches / Shunt / External Alarm Input
Control Board Comms
NCR Power & Comms
External LEDs
Tilt Switches
Note: This connector is only used on a small number of older systems.
Control Board Power
Alarm Sounder
Internal LEDs
Spare Inputs
External Alarm Output
Spare Outputs
ICS Control Board

Ink Injection Units
Control Board Power

CONN 6 - see Internal Cabling - Alarm Board.
Control Board Comms

CONN 8 - see Internal Cabling - Alarm Board.
Battery
SAFETY INFORMATION
This section contains important safety information on the marking inks used in the Fluiditi
Replenishment Security system and on the mercury which may be contained in the tilt
switches.
General information on the use of the marking inks is contained in “Product Safety
Information”, followed by detailed hazard information in “Material Safety Data”. There are
two types of ink which can be used in the system: a purple ink is called Encre Maculante
2BS Violet or a green ink called Encre Maculante 2NS Vert.
There is also Material Safety Data on the mercury which may be contained in the security
system’s tilt switches.
Product Safety Information: Marking Ink

This section explains how to safely use the marking inks used in the Fluiditi Replenishment
Security system. It also covers the possible hazards associated with the inks.
Detailed material safety data providing specialist chemical safety information also follows.
Overview
The ink consists of a mixture of dyes dissolved in an organic solvent. The product is of low
toxicity, but could be harmful if used negligently. Please read this information carefully, and
follow the advice it contains. If you have any questions about this product, contact your
supplier.
What are the Health Risks?

The dyes, and also the solvents in which the dyes are dissolved, are believed to present
little hazard to health. The stain is probably about as hazardous as common household
chemicals, such as paint stripper or bleach. However you should be aware that it can
irritate the eyes and may stain the skin. Like most industrial chemicals, the product is
harmful if swallowed.
How to Handle the Marking Ink

You should take the following precautions when handling the ink, or notes marked by it:
l Wear protective clothing provided in the PPE kits (see previous section 'Clean-up
After System Activation'). As the purpose of the product is to stain bank notes, you
can expect that it will also stain the skin. If you do get a stain on your skin, it should not
damage your health, but may take some time to disappear. If there is a possibility that
the product might splash onto your face, you should also wear face protection.
l Each of the chemicals in the formulation irritates the eyes. You should therefore wear
eye protection.
l If you need to work in a confined space, such as the interior of an ATM, you should
ensure that there is adequate ventilation. The solvents in the product evaporate only
slowly at room temperature, and it is unlikely that a harmful concentration would build
up in the air, but if ventilation is restricted, some form of forced ventilation, such as a
fan, is recommended.
Contact with the Marking Ink

The product may leave a mark on your skin if you come into direct contact with it. Wash the
affected area immediately with soap and warm water to minimize staining. There should be
no long-term effects if this product is splashed onto the skin, but if you are concerned, seek
medical attention, taking this safety information with you.
If the product is splashed into your eyes, immediately flush them with copious amounts of
water. As a precaution, seek medical attention, taking this safety information with you.
If you swallow some of the product, drink some water to dilute it, then go immediately to the
nearest Accident and Emergency department, taking this safety information with you.
Where Can I Find More Information?

Detailed information about the chemicals contained in the inks is contained in the material
safety data that follows.
Material Safety Data: Encre Maculante 2BS Violet New

Name: Encre Maculante 2BS Violet New
Code: 348923N
Symbols: T TOXIC
R43 May cause sensitisation by skin contact.

R36/37/38 Irritating to eyes, respiratory system and skin.
R61 May cause harm to the unborn child.
environment.
Substances presenting a health hazard within the meaning of dangerous substances of the
table 3.2 of Annex VI of the Regulation (EC) Nr 1272/2008 known as CLP.

N-Methyl-2-pyrrolidone 606-021-00-7 >50% R61, R36, R37, R38
T
1-dodecyl-2-pyrrolidone 613-099-00-6 1-5% R34, R43, R50, R53
C N
Acetylenic diol 204-809-1 1-5% R36, R52, R53
XI
Amine salt of Anthraquinone derivative 016-091-00-5 0, 1-1% R41, R50, R53
XI N
First Aid Measures








Storage -

direct sunlight.
l No smoking.
leakage.

should be achieved by the use of local exhaust ventilation and good general extraction. If
these are not sufficient to maintain concentrations of solvent vapour below the occupational
exposure limits, suitable respiratory protection must be worn.
Exposure Limits - N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone VME: 20PPM VLE: 40PPM MAK: 19PPM
l Respiratory protection - When workers are facing concentrations above the exposure
limits they must use appropriate certified respirators.
531.1-7) .
531.1-7) .
l Eye protection - UUse safety eye wear designed to protect against splash of liquids.

Colour: Violet Solubility in other solvents: Not determined
Odour: Mild pH (undiluted product): Not applicable

Lower explosion limit: 1.3% Upper explosion limit: 9.5%

Exposure to component solvents vapours concentration in excess of the stated

occupational exposure limit may result in adverse health effects such as mucous
membrane and respiratory system irritation and adverse effects on kidney, liver and central
nervous system. Symptoms and signs include head- ache, dizziness, fatigue, muscular
weakness, drowsiness and in extreme cases loss of consciousness.
Repeated or prolonged contact with the preparation may cause removal of natural fat from
the skin resulting in non-allergic contact dermatitis and absorption through the skin.
The liquid splashed in the eyes may cause irritation and reversible damage.
The product should not be allowed to enter drains or watercourses.


prescriptions.
The mixture must be transported according to the following regulations:

UN No. 2810 2810 2810
Classe: 6.1 6.1 6.1
Special disposition: 274, 614 - -
Transport category: 2 - -
Danger identification: 60 - -
Tunnel: E - -
Subsidiary risk: - P -
Special provision: - 223, 274
Packaging group III III III
- Special disposition: - - -
- Limited quantity 5L 5L -
- Maximum quantity - - 60L - 220L
- Instruction P001, IBC03, LP01, R001 P001, LP01 655-663
- Provisions - - -
EMS: - F-A, S-A -
PSN: Toxic liquid, Organic, N.O.S (N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone).
Symbol: T TOXIC
Contains: N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, 1-dodecyl-2- pyrrolidone
R-Phrases :
R43 May cause sensitisation by skin contact
R36/37/38 Irritating to eyes, respiratory system and skin
R61 May cause harm to the unborn child
environment
Phrases S :
S24 Avoid contact with skin
S37 Wear suitable gloves
S53 Avoid exposure - obtain special instructions before use
Volatile organic compounds according to Swiss Decree (OCOV): 92.96%

Volatile organic compounds (according to 1999/13/EC): 92.96%
Material Safety Data: Encre Maculante 2NS Vert

Name: Encre Maculante 2NS Vert.
Code: 2NS55999
Symbols: XN HARMFUL
R22 - Harmful if swallowed
R36 - Irritating to eyes.
Y-butyrolactone 202-509-5 >50% R22 R36
X N
Triethyl phosphate 015-013-00-7 20-50% X N R22
First Aid Measures








Storage -

direct sunlight.
l No smoking.
leakage.

should be achieved by the use of local exhaust ventilation and good general extraction.
Exposure Limits - Not applicable.
l Respiratory protection - no particular measures.

531.1-7) .

Colour: Green Solubility in other solvents: Not determined
Odour: Mild pH (undliuted product): Not applicable
Lower explosion limit: 1.2% Upper explosion limit: 16%


prescriptions.
Not applicable.
Symbol: XN HARMFUL
Contains : Y-butyrolactone
R-Phrases:
R22 Harmful if swallowed.
R36 Irritating to eyes.
Phrases S:
S51 Use only in well-ventilated areas.
Volatile organic compounds according to Swiss Decree (OCOV): 67.50 %

Volatile organic compounds (according to 1999/13/EC): 67.50 %
Material Safety Data: Mercury

SECTION I - Hazardous Ingredients / Identity Information
Trade Names/Synonyms l Metallic
l Mercury
l Colloidal
l Mercury
l Inorganic
l Mercury
l Quick Silver
l Hydrargyrum.
Chemical Family Inorganic metal
CERCLA rating (scale 0-3)
Health - 3
Fire - 0
Reactivity - 0
Persistence - 0
Chemical Formula Hg
CAS Number 7439-97-6
Molecular Weight 200.59

NERA rating (Scale 0-4)
Health - 0
Fire - 0
Reactivity - 0
DOT Hazard Class ORM-B
DOT Identification Number NA 2809
SECTION II - Physical / Chemical Characteristics

Boiling Point 674°F (356.7°C)
Specific Gravity (H20 = 1), 13.9
Vapour Pressure 0.0012mmHG @ 20°C
Melting Point -38.9°F
Vapour Density (Air = 1), 7.0
Solubility in Water Insoluble
Appearance and Colour Silver/White liquid metal. Odourless.
SECTION III - Fire and Explosion Hazard Data

Flash Point Non Flammable
Extinguishing Small Fires: dry chemical , carbon dioxide, water spray or foam.
Method Large Fires: water spray or foam.
Special Fire Move containers from fire area if possible, cool containers exposed to flames
Fighting with water from outside until well after the fire is out. Keep up-wind.
Procedures
Unusual Fire and Slight fire and explosion hazard when exposed to heat or flames.
Explosion Hazards
SECTION IV - Reactivity Data

Stability Stable under normal temperatures and pressures.
Conditions to avoid Elevated temperatures and open flames.
Incompatible Materials l Acetylinic compounds

l Ammonia
l Boron
l Diiodophosphide
l Ethylene Oxide
l MethylAzide
l Methylsilane
l Metals - Aluminium, Potassium, Lithium, Sodium, Rubidium.
l Oxidants - Bromine, Peroxyformic acid, Chlorine Dioxide, Nitric acid.
l Tetracarbonylnickel
l Nitromethane
l Silver Perchlorate
Hazardous Decomposition N/A
or By-products
Hazardous Polymerisation None known.
SECTION V - Health Hazard Data

Health hazards are described under skin contact, ingestion, and eye contact.
Skin Contact
Acute exposure - may cause redness and irritation. Sensitisation dermatitis may occur in
previously exposed workers. Substance may be absorbed through the skin causing anuria.
Chronic exposure - may result in psychic disturbances, peripheral neuropathy and kidney
damage as in chronic inhalation.
First Aid - Remove contaminated clothing immediately. Wash affected area with soap or
mild detergent and large amounts of water until no evidence of substance remains (approx.
15 - 20 minutes). Seek immediate medical attention.
Ingestion
Acute exposure - Metallic mercury generally shows no effect. However in exceptional
cases, existing internal sores may allow mercury to accumulate with serious or even fatal
results. Also aspiration into the lungs is a remote possibility and this would cause a
permanent hazard.
First Aid - If victim is conscious and not convulsive, immediately give two to four glasses of
water and induce vomiting by touching finger to back of throat. From sitting position, head
must be lower than hips to prevent aspiration. Keep patient warm and at rest. Seek
Eye Contact
Acute exposure - Contact may cause irritation.
Chronic exposure - Mercury may be deposited in the lens of the eye, causing visual
disturbances.
First Aid - Wash eyes immediately with large amounts of water, occasionally lifting upper
and lower lids, until no evidence of substance remains (approx. 15 - 20 minutes). Seek
SECTION VI - Precautions for Safe Handling and Use

Spillage - Isolate the area of the leak or spill. Wearing appropriate protective equipment,
attempt to stop the leak. For small spills, take up with sand or other absorbent material and
place into containers for later reclamation or disposal. For large spills, dam far ahead of spill
for later reclamation or disposal. Keep unnecessary people away. Isolate hazard area and
deny entry.
Disposal - Mercury tilt switches must be disposed of as hazardous waste. Disposal should
be in accordance with local and national waste regulations.
SECTION VII - Control Measures

This section describes respiratory protection measures.
Respiratory Protection
Below 1mg/m³ - Use respirator fitted with mercury vapour absorbing cartridges and
excess use indicator.
The tilt switches on the control board each contain 0.68 grams of mercury, which equates
to much less than 1mg/m³.
1mg/m³ - Use supplied air respirator or self contained breathing apparatus.
5mg/m³ - Use supplied air respirator with a full face piece, helmet or hood or self contained
breathing apparatus with a full centrepiece.
28mg/m³ - Use Type C supplied air respirator with a full centrepiece, operated in pressure
demand or other positive pressure mode or with full centrepiece, helmet or hood operated
in continuous flow mode.
REVISION

SKIMMING PROTECTION SOLUTION 2024
SKIMMING PROTECTION SOLUTION
INTRODUCTION
This chapter details the Skimming Protection Solution (SPS), also known as Anti
Skimming Module (ASM), or Intelligent Fraud Detection 2 (IFD2). Note that some
components such as harnessing use ASM or IFD2 in their names, these have been
preserved in this manual for easier identification for re‐ordering and replacement.
The SPS feature uses sensors to detect and create an alert whenever fraudulent devices,
such as card skimmers are fitted to the exterior of the card path or MCRW bezel.
CAUTION
DESCRIPTION
The SPS consists of the following elements:
l Control box containing the SPS control PCB (ASM control board) and SPS daughter
PCB (ASM control daughter board).
l SPS IMCRW bezel moulding assembly with integrated sensors and connecting
harnessing.
l Drill mat, if fitted ‐ also known as the penetration mat.
l Interconnecting harnessing.
2025 SKIMMING PROTECTION SOLUTION
The diagram below shows the functional elements of the SPS feature.
Door Switch
SPS Replenishment Drill Mat
Harness (If fitted)
Door Status - J6
SPS Daughter PCB

(ASM Control
Daughter Board)
Sensor
PCB Assembly
SPS Control PCB
(ASM Control Board)
UIMCRW or
IMCRW Card Reader - Width
and Shutter Switches
The base functionality of the SPS is to:
l Disrupt the magnetic read capability of card skimming technology

l Detect card skimming technology
l Detect attacks on the disruption and detection technology
l Report an entry into the ATM.
SPS uses the following technologies to prevent a skimming device from capturing data
from a card’s magnetic stripe at an ATM or Kiosk.
Capacitive Sensing
The capacitive sensing device is integrated into the IMCRW bezel. Its function is to detect
and create an alert whenever a fraudulent device such as a card skimmer is fitted to the
exterior of the card path or MCRW bezel.
Magnetic Field ‘Jammer’

The magnetic field jammer which disrupts card skimmers is located in the IMCRW bezel
moulding. Its function is to render the data obtained by a skimmer useless by disrupting the
magnetic card data being read by the skimmer. It does not raise an alert at the presence of
a skimmer, but blocks it from reading a card successfully during each transaction.
Note that the jammer in the bezel is not a jamming transmitter.
Electrical
Power Requirements
SPS Control PCB power requirements:
l 24V ±10%: 3A maximum
SPS Control PCB to the Daughter PCB requirements:
l 24V ±10%: 1.5A maximum

l 5V ±10%: 50mA maximum.
Power supplied to the SPS PCB peripherals:
l 5V ±5%: 250mA maximum

l ‐5V ±5%: 250mA maximum.
SPS Control PCB
SPS Daughter PCB

The SPS Daughter PCB which attaches directly to the SPS control PCB, provides a
stepdown power supply and can support two inductor coils.
Daughter PCB
Connectors
SPS Control
PCB
TROUBLESHOOTING
Module Error State Messages
The following error messages are reported by the device.
Module Error M- Possible Root Cause Corrective Action

State Status
USB 1 USB cable has been Check cable connection at the SPS, PC Core or at the powered
Communication disconnected or is HUB.
Failure faulty. Reconnect the USB cable or replace if faulty.
SPS firmware is
faulty.
SPS is faulty.
USBASM 2 SPS is faulty. Check LED D2 is on. Power cycle the SPS.
Control
Check no LEDs are on. Power cycle the SPS.
Electronics
Fault If above steps fail, replace the device.
Device not 3 Different SPS Requires authorisation.
authorised connected. No more test required.
Download 4 Firmware file on the Restart the ATM and allow the firmware loader service to
candidate disk is corrupted. download the compatible device firmware.
firmware
checksum
invalid

State Status
Resident 5 Firmware file on the Restart the ATM and allow the firmware loader service to
firmware device is corrupted. download the compatible device firmware. If it fails again, then
checksum replace the hardware.
invalid
Not found 6 SPS not attached Connect device and restart the ATM.
during start up before service start.
USB cable is Check USB cable connection at the SPS, PC Core, or at the
disconnected. powered HUB. Reconnect the USB cable.
USB cable is faulty. Replace the USB cable.
SPS firmware is not Check LED D1 is off. Power cycle the SPS.
running.
SPS is faulty. Check LED D2 is on. Replace SPS.
I2C 7 Harnesses Check LED D2 is flashing. Reconnect cable(s).
Communication disconnected Note: see Cabling section
Fault between the primary
card reader bezel
sensor and the SPS.
Faulty I2C cable.
Out of range 9 Primary card reader Check around the primary card reader bezel sensor for any
temperature bezel sensors have foreign objects of a suspicious nature.
been sprayed with Do NOT remove any suspicious object, but instead, inform the
freezer spray. necessary authorities i.e. bank security.
Possible skimming
attack.
Primary card 10 Primary card reader Do NOT remove the hardware or suspicious object.
reader bezel bezel capacitive
capacitive sensors have been
sensor moved away from
displaced the card reader slot.
Possible skimming
attack.
Width-Shutter 11 Width-Shutter switch Reconnect the Width-Shutter switch harness.
switch harness harness has been
displaced disconnected.
Unusual object 12 Additional material in Inspect the area around the sensor for any suspicious object.
detected proximity to the Do NOT remove the hardware or any suspicious object.
capacitive sensor.
Possible skimming
attack.

State Status
FPGA weak 13 Faulty primary card Replace the primary card reader bezel.
signal reader bezel jammer
FPGA strong 15 Additional material in Inspect the area around the primary card reader bezel jammer
signal proximity to the for any additional material.
primary card reader Do NOT remove any additional material.
bezel jammer.
Possible skimming
attack.
Penetration 16 Drill mat has been Carefully replace the drill mat. See FRU removal section.
detected penetrated or
removed.
Door open 17 Door opened. Close the door.
Device in 21 USB cable Check USB cable connection at the SPS, PC Core, or at the
bootloader disconnected during powered HUB. Reconnect or replace the USB cable.
mode firmware download, Check LED D1 is off. Power cycle the SPS. Check LED D2 is on.
or is faulty. USBASM Replace SPS.
firmware is not
running or is faulty.
FPGA 23 Jammer is not Use the Test Device Tool - Place the tool in the bezel and with
programming configured properly. SysApp open, view Jammer On State - Use the key disk to loop
fault the test and to view the jammer toggle.Restart the ATM and
allow the firmware loader service to download the FPGA
firmware. If it fails again, then check if the FPGA candidate
firmware file is current or replace the hardware.
Jammer signal 26 Non-NCR primary Replace the primary card reader bezel.
long range card reader bezel
invalid jammer attached.
Note: After any repair activity ‐ not just on SPS ‐ and after re‐baselining carry out a Post
Repair Test, see instructions in the Diagnostic section.
Check for Jamming
The ‘jamming’ signal is triggered by any movement in the card reader bezel, such as a card
being inserted. The signal can be detected by a quiet electronic noise.
Check for Detection

While running Device Diagnostics test ‘Display Cap Status’ with looping, place an object
anywhere on the card reader bezel and within 30 to 120 seconds the Cap Sensor will show
an alert. The alert will clear around 15‐20 seconds after the object is removed.
False Jammer Alert or SPS Constantly On

Perform a Rebaseline Sensor test from the System Application Configuration Menu.
Check that the cables are connected correctly: red to lower switch and black to upper
switch, as shown.
It is vital that the bezel assembly ground wires are all properly grounded to ensure that the
SPS is reliable.
DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostic LEDs
LED’s are an indication of the general operation of the device. They do not report detailed
faults. Refer to the System Application Menu for detailed fault reporting.
Condition LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4

USB CONNECTED ON - - -
USB DISCONNECTED RAPID FLASH FAST FLASH - -
HEALTHY ON - FAST FLASH -
DISRUPTOR ON - ON - -
DISRUPTOR OFF - OFF - -
SENSOR(S) OR - - SLOW FLASH -
DISRUPTOR COILS DISCONNECTED
LED flash rates are defined as:
RAPID = on and off for 50 milliseconds

FAST = on and off for 150 milliseconds
SLOW = on and off for 1 second.
Note: Jammer has a duty cycle when the USB is disconnected. LED 2 follows the Jammer
ON/OFF condition.
Led’s
1
2
3
4
In boot loader mode LED 1 only will be on to indicate the device is in bootloader mode and
will flash to indicate firmware is being downloaded.
Device Diagnostics
In System Application the SPS feature is called USB Anti‐Skimming Module and the
disruptor is referred to as the jammer.
Note: Looping is allowed on all tests except on Transfer Logs.
Test Description
Menu Displays a menu of all the other tests to allow the user to select one.
Identification Performs an identification command and displays the following:
l Device Variant
l Main Firmware Version
l FPGA Firmware Version
l Device Name.
Test Description
Display The test will display the current sensors status and tries to check and clear the jammer weak or
Status strong signal error. When all sensors are healthy, then the status will be displayed in the following
format:
Sensor State
Primary Card Reader Bezel Capacitive No Alert
Primary Card Reader Jammer No Alert - Jammer ON/OFF
Drill Mat No Alert
Door State Closed
When the drill mat or sensor is affected and the door is opened, then the status will be displayed
as:
Sensor State
Drill Mat Alert
Door State Open
Transfer This test is available on the ATM only if ‘Allow Transfer Logs Diagnostic Applet’ is set to TRUE
Logs (configurable via Property Page).
Note: Some banks collect logs from the ATM remotely.
If the configuration is set to TRUE, then the test will perform the operations below in sequence:
1. The test will first display the menu which will contain all the removable media detected on
the system for user selection.
2. Create a directory under the root directory if not present and name it using the ATM serial
number and Site I.D. e.g. 12345678_XXXXXXXX where 12345678 is the ATM serial number
and xxxxxxxx is the actual Bank ATM ID.
3. The logs will be copied into newly created directory.
4. The user will be prompted about the success or failure of the activity.
This applet will copy the log files to the removable media. The user must not expect any device
related MStatus or error code on the execution of the applet.
l This applet copies the device logs to the removable media and during this process it does not
communicate with the device.
l The removable media must be loaded before executing this applet. If the media is inserted
later on, then, it will not be reflected in the media selection menu.
l The logs will not be deleted from the disk after the successful execution of this applet
because we may need to transfer the logs again from the ATM later.
Test Description
Display Cap The test will display the current sensors status. When all sensors are healthy, then the status will
Status be displayed in the following format:
Sensor State
Drill Mat No Alert
Door State Closed
When the drill mat or sensor is affected and the door is opened, then the status will be displayed
as:
Sensor State
Drill Mat Alert
Door State Open
Run This test should be carried out after every repair on the ATM. It verifies the operation of the
Sequence Capacitive Sensor, FPGA status (strong or weak signal). Part of the test involves re-baselining the
Test 1 sensors. See detailed description below.
Post Repair Test: Run Sequence Test 1

This test should be carried out after every repair, not just on SPS, using the trigger insert
tool:
l part number 445‐0738402 for ATMs with wider card slot (e.g. 6625, 32/4/8)
l part number 445‐0749196 for ATMs with narrower card slot (e.g. 6623/7, 6683/7 and
6691).
The tool has 3 numbered test surfaces and must inserted into the card entry slot when
prompted, so that the number of the surface required is visible to the user when fully
inserted.
Note: You must transfer the interface to the front of the ATM in order to carry out this test.
1. Choose ‘Run Sequence Test 1’ from Device Diagnostics menu.

2. The status of the device will be displayed for information.
3. Follow the on‐screen instructions. When prompted to ‘place insert 1’ insert the
trigger tool so that surface number 1 is visible when the tool is fully inserted into the
card entry slot.
4. A screen will be displayed to show the result of insert 1.
5. Then follow the instructions when prompted to remove insert 1 and place insert 2 i
the card entry slot. Make sure you insert the tool so that surface number 2 is visible
when the tool is fully inserted.
6. A screen will be displayed to show the result of insert 2. Follow the on‐screen
instructions when prompted to remove insert 2.
7. When prompted to ‘place insert 3’ insert the trigger tool so that surface number 3 is
visible when the tool is fully inserted into the card entry slot.
8. A screen will be displayed to show the result of insert 3. Follow the on‐screen
instructions when prompted to remove insert 3.
9. A final screen will display the test status.
10. Remove the trigger tool at the end of the test.
Service Tallies
Tally Description
ATTEMPTS The total number of communication operations done on the device.
COM_FAIL The total number of communication failures reported by the device.
FAIL_ATT The total number of communication retries done on communication failures.
DEV_REM The total number of USB cable disconnections.
DEV_ARR The total number of USB cable connections.
CAP_COMM The total number of card reader interface capacitive sensor communication failures.
CAP_OBJ The total number of card reader interface capacitive sensor unusual object detected.
JAMMER_ON The total number of card reader interface Jammer ON.
JAMMROFF The total number of card reader interface Jammer OFF.
DRIL_PEN The total number of drill mat sensor penetrations detected.
DOOROPEN The total number of door state sensor open.
DOOR_CLS The total number of door state sensor close.
Device Self Test

The following options are available via System Application.
Test Description
Device Self Test The device self test will execute the following command:
l This test executes the Determine state command.
l End of test.
CONFIGURATION
Configuration options are available via the System Application.
Test Description
Device The test will display the following:
Information l Device Variant
l Device Name
Display Status The test will display the current sensors status and tries to check and clear the
jammer weak or strong signal error. When all sensors are healthy, then the status
will be displayed in the following format:
Sensor State
Drill Mat No Alert
Door State Closed
When the drill mat or sensor is affected and the door is opened, then the status
will be displayed as:
Sensor State
Drill Mat Alert
Door State Open
Test Description
Re-Baseline This applet allows the user to reset the SPS device and clear all error counts and
Sensor flags. The ‘Re-baseline Sensor’ command will cause the SPS hardware to be reset
to a new environment level for all sensors. The environment level is the baseline
for the sensors. The test will be performed in the below sequence:
1. Perform a check of the SPS system sensors and confirm there are no foreign
objects present before executing the ‘Re-Baseline Sensor’ command.
2. Execute the ‘Re-Baseline Sensor’ command to reset the new environment
level.
3. Display sensor information after this test.
Note: This applet will be visible when the user entered SysApp through the USB
dongle key.
Note: Rebaseline must be performed from the front of the unit.
SPS Device Setting This applet allows the user to set the jammer settings:
1. Signal Drift for Jammer Activation. The acceptable range is 50 to 1000. The
default is 50.
2. Jammer Activation Timeout. Acceptable range is 1 to 10. The default is 1.
Drill Mat Status This test will display the status of the drill mat: either configured or not. If
configured, it will display any sensor alerts.
Configure Drill Mat This test will configure the drill mat, after which the ATM must be re-booted.
Deconfigure Drill This test will de- configure the drill mat, after which the ATM must be re-booted.
Mat
Rain This test will display the status of rain compensation:whether it is enabled or
Compensation disabled.
Status
Enable Rain This test is used to enable rain compensation, after which the ATM must be
Compensation rebooted. It can be enabled if problems are seen as a result of rain causing
excessive amounts of false alerts.
Disable Rain This test is used to disable rain compensation, after which the ATM must be
Compensation rebooted.
Note: Configuration settings will be remotely viewable by default. They cannot be modified.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

l SPS IMCRW bezel moulding assembly (containing coil, capacitive sensor driver and
electrode PCBs inside the bezel) plus harness assembly containing shield, shield
ground harness, sensor and coil assembly plus associated harnesses.
l SPS control box
l Control PCB
l Daughter PCB
l Drill mat assembly (for ATMs with card orientation windows only)
l Interconnecting harnesses
l IFD2 (SPS) control PCB to IMCRW linker harness
l SPS replenishment harness
l IFD2 (SPS) short linker harness
l IFD2 (SPS) control PCB to coil linker harness
l IFD2 (SPS) control PCB to IMCRW electrode linker harness
l Penetration mat harness.
SPS Bezel Moulding and Harness Assembly

There are no field replaceable parts within the bezel moulding assembly. If faulty, replace
the bezel moulding assembly ‐ example shown below.
Drill Mat
The drill mat assembly comprising the drill mat and bracket is mandatory where the ATM
supports this functionality. There are different drill mat assemblies for different ATMs: the
one shown below is for illustration only
CAUTION
Take care when replacing the drill mat assembly as the micro‐
switch is easily damaged.
1. Remove and retain the four screws (three on the SelfServ 34) securing the drill mat
assembly. Remove the defective mat.
2. Carefully position the replacement drill mat assembly, taking care not to damage the
delicate micro‐switch.
Tip: if a spare protective strip is not available, use a piece of sticky tape to protect the
switch during installation, with a folded end to make it easy to remove afterwards.
3. Secure the assembly with the retained screws.
4. Carefully remove the protective Mylar strip over the micro‐switch.
SPS Control Box

Daughter PCB
1. Loosen the M4 nut and remove the control box cover plate from the SPS control
box.
2. Disconnect the IFD (SPS) Coil Linker harness from the daughter PCB.
3. Remove and retain the M3 x 20 M/C comb screw securing the daughter PCB to the
SPS control PCB.
4. Remove the spacer between the daughter PCB and the SPS control PCB.
M3 x 20
Screw
Spacer
5. Squeeze the end of the plastic stand‐off together to free the PCB from the stand‐off.
6. Carefully remove it by gently prizing it from the control board connectors.

Note: When removing the daughter PCB, ensure it is kept parallel with the main
SPS control PCB to prevent damage to the connectors.
SPS Control PCB

1. Disconnect the USB cable and any other cable connections from the SPS control
PCB.
2. Remove and retain the plastic snap‐on stand‐off.
Stand-off
3. Remove the three M3 x 6 screws securing the control PCB to the metal frame.
4. Remove the control PCB.
Interconnecting Harnessing
There are no serviceable parts on the harnessing. If faulty, replace the harness.
SPS Control PCB Connectors
Penetration Mat Replenishment USB
Low Power DC (J4) (J6) (J7) IMCRW Electrode Linker
(J1) (J9)
IMCRW Linker
(J12)
Daughter PCB Connectors
IMCRW Coil Linker

Harness
CABLING
The following diagram shows the harness connections on the SPS.
Penetration Mat Drill

* MISCIF Switch Set Harness Mat
MINI MISC SPS Replenishment Long Short J1
MIDI MISC Harness
Note: Linkage to the MISCIF only when Auto-Supervisor is fitted.
Door Status - J6 Drill Mat In - J4
SPS Bezel IFD2 Control PCB Low Power

Jammer - PCB Jammer - J1 24V In - J1
to Coil Linker DC Dist.
SPS Daughter PCB USB - J7 USB Type A

to Mini-B
Capacitive Sensor - PCB IFD2 Control - IMCRW Cap Sensor - J9

Electrode Linker (12C cable)
Shield
IFD2 Control PCB
IMCRW - IN - J12
- IMCRW Linker
Earth Wire Harness
SPS Control PCB
IFD2 Harness
Short Linker
IMCRW
IFD2 (SPS) Control PCB to IMCRW Linker Harness (J12

SPS Control PCB)
To IFD Control PCB To FDI Jammer Harness
IFD2 (SPS) Harness ‐ IMCRW Short Linker Harness (on

IMCRW)
Card Reader Power Header To MCRW Linker Long Harness
Shutter_SW
Width_SW
Card Reader Power Harness
IFD2 (SPS) Control PCB to Coil Linker Harness (J1 Daughter

PCB)
IFD2 (SPS) Control PCB to IMCRW Electrode Linker

Harness (J9 SPS Control PCB)
ATM Facia J9 Control PCB
Penetration Mat Harness (J4 SPS Control PCB)

Short
DMAT_J1 DRILL_FEMALE
Long
IFD_J4
Drill_MALE
DMAT_M
SS ASM (SPS) Replenishment Harness (J6 SPS Control

PCB)
Note: The type of replenishment harnesses used will depend on the ATM model.
To IFD PCB
To MISC Board Supervisor To Supervisor Harness
ASM (SPS) Replenishment Harness (J6 SPS Control PCB)

DMAT_F
SW1-NO_M
SW1-NO_F
To IFD PCB J6 SW1-CM_F
SW1-CM_M
The trigger insert tool must be used to perform repair exit tests at the conclusion of any
repair activity, not just on SPS and after re‐baselining:
SPS SelfServ MCRW Trigger, NCR part number 445‐0738402 (wide card slot) or 445‐
0749196 (narrow card slot).
2049 REVISION
REVISION

SKIMMING PROTECTION SOLUTION (DIP CARD READER) 2050
SKIMMING PROTECTION SOLUTION (DIP

CARD READER)
INTRODUCTION
This chapter details the Skimming Protection Solution (SPS), also known as Anti
Skimming Module (ASM) for DIP Card Readers.
The SPS feature uses sensors to detect and create an alert whenever fraudulent devices
such as card skimmers are fitted to the exterior of the card path or Dip Card Reader bezel.
CAUTION
DESCRIPTION
The SPS consists of the following elements:
l Control box containing the SPS control PCB (ASM control board).
l SPS dip card bezel assembly with integrated sensors and connecting harnesses.
l Drill mat, (if fitted) - also known as the penetration mat.
l Interconnecting harnesses.
Functional Elements
The diagram below shows the functional elements of the SPS feature.
Door Switch Drill Mat

SPS Replenishment
Harness (If fitted)
Door Status - J6
SPS Control PCB

(ASM Control Board)
Sensor
PCB Assembly
2051 SKIMMING PROTECTION SOLUTION (DIP CARD READER)
The base functionality of the SPS is to:
l Detect card skimming technology

l Detect attacks on the detection technology
l Report an entry into the ATM.
SPS uses capacitive sensing to detect a skimming device. The capacitive sensing device is
integrated into the Dip card reader bezel. Its function is to detect and create an alert
whenever a fraudulent device such as a card skimmer is fitted to the exterior of the card
path or Dip card reader bezel.
Power Requirements
SPS Control PCB power requirements: 24V ±10%: 3A maximum
Power supplied to the SPS PCB peripherals:
l 5V ±5%: 250mA maximum

l -5V ±5%: 250mA maximum.
SPS Control PCB
ERROR MESSAGES
Module Error M_ Possible Root Cause(s) Isolation Resolution
State Status
USB 1 USB cable has been Check cable connection Reconnect the USB cable or replace if
Communication disconnected or is at the SPS, PC Core or at faulty.
Failure faulty. the powered HUB.
SPS firmware is
faulty.
SPS is faulty.
USBASM 2 SPS is faulty. Check LED D2 is on. Power cycle the SPS.
Control
Check no LEDs are on. Power cycle the SPS.
Electronics
Fault If above steps fail, replace the device.
Device not 3 Different SPS Requires authorisation.
authorised connected. No more test required.
Download 4 Firmware file on the - Restart the ATM and allow the
candidate disk is corrupted. firmware loader service
firmware to download the compatible device
checksum firmware.
invalid
Resident 5 Firmware file on the - Restart the ATM and allow the
firmware device is corrupted. firmware loader service to download
checksum the compatible device firmware. If it
invalid fails again, then replace the hardware.
Not found 6 SPS not attached SPS not attached before Connect device and restart the ATM.
during start up before service start. service start.
USB cable is Check USB cable Reconnect the USB cable.
disconnected. connection at the SPS, PC
Core, or at the powered
HUB.
USB cable is faulty. - Replace the USB cable.
SPS firmware is not Check LED D1 is off. Power cycle the SPS.
running.
SPS is faulty. Check LED D2 is on. Replace SPS.
Module Error M_ Possible Root Cause(s) Isolation Resolution

State Status
I2C 7 I2C cable Check LED D2 is flashing. Reconnect I2C cable.
Communication disconnected Note: see Cabling section
Fault between the primary
card reader bezel
sensor and the SPS.
Faulty I2C cable.
Out of range 9 Primary card reader Check around the Do NOT remove any suspicious
temperature bezel sensors have primary card reader object, but instead, inform the
been sprayed with bezel sensor for any necessary authorities i.e.bank
freezer spray. foreign objects of a security.
Possible skimming suspicious nature.
attack.
Unusual object 12 Additional material in Inspect the area around Do NOT remove the hardware or any
detected proximity to the the sensor for any suspicious object.
capacitive sensor. suspicious object.
Possible skimming
attack.
Penetration 16 Drill mat has been - Carefully replace the drill mat.
detected penetrated.
Drill mat has been
removed.
Door open 17 Door opened. - Close the door.
Note: After any repair activity - not just SPS - carry out instructions in the Configuration
section to Re-Baseline Sensor.
DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostic LEDs
LED’s are an indication of the general operation of the device. They do not report detailed
faults. Refer to the System Application Menu for detailed fault reporting.
Led’s
1
2
3
4
Condition LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4

USB CONNECTED ON - - -
USB DISCONNECTED RAPID FLASH FLASH - -
HEALTHY ON - FAST FLASH -
CAPACITIVE SENSOR DISCONNECTED - - SLOW FLASH -
Device Diagnostics
Note: Looping is allowed on all tests except on Transfer Logs.
Test Description
Identification Performs an identification command and displays the following:
Device Variant
Device Serial Number
Main Firmware Version
FPGA Firmware Version
Device Name.
Display The test will display the current sensors status.
Status When all sensors are healthy, then the status will be displayed in the following format:
Sensor State
Drill Mat No Alert
Door State Closed
When the drill mat sensor is affected and the door is opened, then the status will be displayed as:
Test Description
Sensor State
Drill Mat Alert
Door State Open
Transfer This test is available on the ATM only if ‘Allow Transfer Logs Diagnostic Applet’ is set to TRUE
Logs (configurable via Property Page).
NOTE: Some banks collect logs from the ATM remotely.
If the configuration is set to TRUE, then the test will perform the operations below in sequence:
1. The test will first display the menu which will contain all the removable media detected on the
system for user selection.
2. Create a directory under the root directory if not present and name it using the ATM serial
number and Site I.D. e.g. 12345678_XXXXXXXX where 12345678 is the ATM serial number and
xxxxxxxx is the actual Bank ATM ID.
3. The logs will be copied into newly created directory.
4. The user will be prompted about the success or failure of the activity.
This applet will copy the log files to the removable media. The user must not expect any device
related MStatus or error code on the execution of the applet.
This applet copies the device logs to the removable media and during this process it does not
communicate with the device.
The removable media must be loaded before executing this applet. If the media is inserted later
on, then, it will not be reflected in the media selection menu.
The logs will not be deleted from the disk after the successful execution of this applet because we
may need to transfer the logs again from the ATM later.
Display Cap The test will display the current sensors status.
Status When all sensors are healthy, then the status will be displayed in the following format:
Sensor State
Drill Mat No Alert
Door State Closed
Sensor State
Drill Mat Alert
Door State Open
Run This test performs the re-baselining of the sensors. See Configuration section for instructions
Sequence details of the Re-Baseline Sensor post repair test.
Test 1
Device Self Test

The following options are available via System Application.
Test Description
Device Self Test The device self test will execute the following command:
l This test executes the Determine state command.
l End of test.
Tallies
Tally Description
ATTEMPTS The total number of communication operations done on the device.
COM_FAIL The total number of communication failures reported by the device.
FAIL_ATT The total number of communication retries done on communication failures.
DEV_REM The total number of USB cable disconnections.
DEV_ARR The total number of USB cable connections.
CAP_COMM The total number of card reader interface capacitive sensor communication failures.
CAP_OBJ The total number of card reader interface capacitive sensor unusual object detected.
DRIL_PEN The total number of drill mat sensor penetrations detected.
DOOROPEN The total number of door state sensor open.
DOOR_CLS The total number of door state sensor close.
CONFIGURATION
Configuration options are available via the System Application.
Test Description
Device The test will display the following:
Information l Device Variant
l Device Name.
Display The test will display the current sensors status.
Status This test executes ‘Determine State’ command to get sensor status and when all sensors are
healthy, then the status will be displayed in the following format:
Sensor State
Drill Mat No Alert
Door State Closed
Sensor State
Drill Mat Alert
Door State Open
Re-Baseline This applet allows the user to reset the SPS device and clear all error counts and flags. The ‘Re-
Sensor baseline Sensor’ command will cause the SPS hardware to be reset to a new environment level for
all sensors. The environment level is the baseline for the sensors. The test will be performed in the
below sequence:
1. Perform a check of the SPS system sensors and confirm there are no foreign objects present
before executing the ‘Re-Baseline Sensor’ command.
2. Execute the ‘Re-Baseline Sensor’ command to reset the new environment level.
3. Display sensor information after this test.
Note: This applet will be visible when the user entered SysApp through the USB dongle key.
Note: Rebaseline must be performed from the front of the unit.
Drill Mat The test will display the status of the drill mat: either configured or not. If configured, it will display
Status any sensor alerts.
Configure The test will configure the drill mat, after which the ATM must be re-booted.
Drill Mat
Deconfigure The test will de- configure the drill mat, after which the ATM must be re-booted.
Drill Mat
Note: Configuration setting will be remotely viewable by default. They cannot be modified.
Post Repair Test: Re-Baseline Sensor/Run Sequence Test 1

The SPS sensor should be re-baselined after every repair, using the trigger test tool (part
number 445-0743656, or 445-0749153 for 6691 ATMs). Place the trigger test tool around
the bezel when prompted, ensuring that it does not move during re-baselining but do not
hold it in place with your hand as this will affect the result of the test.
Use only the correct trigger tool for the ATM:
Trigger tool for 66xx ATMs except 6691
Trigger tools for 6691 Cantilever and 6691 Head-on
Note: On rear access units, you must transfer the interface to the front of the ATM in order
to carry out this test.
1. Choose ‘Re-baseline Sensor’ from Device Configuration menu. ‘Run Sequence

Test 1’ from the Device Diagnostics menu.
2. Then choose option ‘Run Sequence Test 1’.
3. The status of the device will be displayed for information.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions. When prompted to ‘place insert 3’ place the
trigger test tool around the bezel.
5. A screen will be displayed to show the result of insert 3.

6. A final screen will display the test status.
7. Remove the trigger test tool at the end of the post repair sequence test exercise.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

The Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) within SPS are:
l SPS dip card reader bezel moulding assembly (containing capacitive sensor driver,
electrode PCBs, ASM shield ground harness and associated harnesses).
l SPS control box
l Control PCB
l Drill mat assembly (if fitted)
l Interconnecting harnesses
l SPS dip driver PCB to control PCB linker harness

l SPS dip top electrode harness
l SPS dip bottom electrode harness
l SPS replenishment harness
l Penetration mat harness
SPS Bezel and Driver Assembly

There are no serviceable parts within the bezel and driver assembly. If faulty, replace the
bezel and driver assembly - example shown below.
Interconnecting Harnessing
There are no serviceable parts on the harnessing. If faulty, replace the harness.
Drill Mat
The drill mat assembly comprising the drill mat and bracket is mandatory where the ATM
supports this functionality. There are different drill mat assemblies for different ATMs. The
one shown below is for illustration only.
CAUTION
Take care when replacing the drill mat assembly as the micro-
switch is easily damaged.
Drill Mat Connector
Mylar Strip Micro-switch
1. Remove and retain the four screws (three on the SelfServ 34) securing the drill mat
assembly.
2. Carefully position the replacement drill mat assembly, taking care not to damage the
delicate micro-switch.
Tip: if a spare protective strip is not available, use a piece of sticky tape to protect the
switch during installation, with a folded end to make it easy to remove afterwards.
3. Secure the assembly with the retained screws.
4. Carefully remove the protective Mylar strip over the micro-switch.
SPS Control Box

SPS Control PCB
1. Loosen the M4 nut and remove the control box cover plate from the SPS control
box.
2. Disconnect the USB cable and any other cable connections from the SPS control
PCB.
3. Remove the four M3 x 6 screws securing the control PCB to the metal frame.
4. Remove the control PCB.
CABLING
The following diagram shows the harness connections on the SPS.
Penetration Mat Drill

* MISCIF Switch Set Harness Mat
MINI MISC SPS Replenishment Long Short J1
MIDI MISC Harness
Note: Linkage to the MISCIF only when Auto-Supervisor is fitted.
Door Status - J6 Drill Mat In - J4
SPS Dip Card Bezel Low Power

24V In - J1 DC Dist.
USB - J7 USB Type A

to Mini-B
SPS Dip Driver PCB to Control PCB
Capacitive Sensor - PCB Electrode Linker Harness Cap Sensor - J9
Shield
SPS Control PCB

Earth Wire Harness
SPS DIP Driver PCB to Control PCB Linker Harness
USB Type A to Type Mini B High Speed Cable Assembly
Penetration Mat Harnesses

Short
DMAT_J1 DRILL_FEMALE
Long
IFD_J4
Drill_MALE
DMAT_M
SS ASM (SPS) Replenishment Harness

To IFD PCB
To MISC Board Supervisor To Supervisor Harness
Bezel Assembly
ASM Shield Ground Harness
SPS Dip Bottom Electrode Harness
SPS Dip Top Electrode Harness
CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT AND PINOUTS

SPS Control PCB Connectors
Penetration Mat Replenishment USB

Low Power DC (J4) (J6) (J7) Electrode Linker
(J1) (J9)
The trigger test tool must be used to perform repair exit tests at the conclusion of any repair
activity, not just on SPS:
SPS SelfServ Dip Trigger, NCR part number 445-0743656 or Moulding Assy - Dip
Trigger, NCR part number 445-0749153 for 6691 ATMs.
None.
2069 REVISION
REVISION

17. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT
Low Temperature Thermostat 2071
Product Environment Heaters 2073
LOW TEMPERATURE THERMOSTAT
DESCRIPTION
The low temperature thermostat is attached to a bracket fitted in the safe heater in exterior
terminals. It switches live ac supply line to the PC core. If the temperature within the
terminal falls below 10oC (50oF) the thermostat opens, preventing operation of the
terminal, except for the heater, until the temperature rises above 10oC again.
Low temperature thermostat
TROUBLESHOOTING
None.
DIAGNOSTICS
None.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

There are no field replaceable modules.
CABLING
PRODUCT ENVIRONMENT HEATERS
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the product environment heaters. The heater assembly is designed
to keep the internal temperature of an enclosure regulated above a minimum temperature
of 10° centigrade.
DESCRIPTION
A product environment heater consists of a fan heater assembly, a control thermostat plus
associated harnessing and connectors. Also included is a product mounting plate and a
thermostat mounting bracket.
Fan Heater Assembly
Control Thermostat
Thermostat
Mounting Bracket
Product
Mounting Bracket
IEC Connector
Product environment heaters are available in the following voltages:
l 240 V and 120 V ATMs - 200 W

l 240 V and 120 V ATMs - 300 W
l 240 V and 120 V ATMs - 400 W.
Temperature Control
The heater is thermostatically controlled to keep the temperature inside the ATM within
normal operating limits. When the temperature at the thermostat drops below 15°C ± 4°C,
the thermostat will close and switch on the heater. The heater heats the air being drawn
into the fan which then transfers the warm air throughout the ATM. The thermostat will
switch the heater off when the temperature rises above 24°C ± 3°C.
TROUBLESHOOTING
None.
DIAGNOSTICS
None.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

There are no field replaceable modules within the heater assembly.
CABLING
18. MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES AND

INTERFACES
Miscellaneous Interface and Remote Input/Output Boards 2076
Enhanced, Express Banking and MFR Miscellaneous Interfaces 2088
Remote Status 2101
Media Entry/Exit Indicators 2103
USB DVD RW Slimline Drive 2106
Slim DVD SATA Super Multi Drive 2113
Enhanced Audio 2127
Public/Private Audio with Volume Control 2132
MISCELLANEOUS INTERFACE AND

REMOTE INPUT/OUTPUT BOARDS
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the Miscellaneous Interface board (Misc I/F board) installed in the
facia, and the Remote Input/Output board (RI/O board) installed in the security enclosure.
These boards provide the following miscellaneous interfaces to NCR 663X ATMs:
The Misc I/F and RI/O boards carry out the following functions:
l Provide control and status circuitry for:

l Media entry/exit indicators
l Public and private audio
l Facia light
l Advert Light
l Function display keys (FDKs)
l Customer display and power control status
l Provide a USB 1.1 compliant interface to communicate to the PC core

l Provide control and status circuitry for security and remote device functions such as
remote indicators, remote relay, alarms status, and night deposit function
l Provide area of non-secure persistent memory to store information such as product
class and serial number
l Perform a watchdog function and provide a reset to the PC core.
The Misc I/F board provides the main functionality and the RI/O board provides the security
and remote device functionality.
DESCRIPTION
The Misc I/F board is a four-layer printed board with surface mounted components that
provide breakout connections for the link to the RI/O board and USB link to the PC core.
The RI/O board is a two-layer printed board providing a link to the Misc I/F board via a 20-
way connector.
Miscellaneous Interface Board

The board contains the following subsystems:
l MCF5272 processor
l Flash ROM
l SRAM
l EEPROM
l Power regulator
l Background debug mode (BDM) interface
l Debug interfaces
l Diagnostic LEDs
l Reset
l USB interface
l MEEI interface
l Audio interface
l FDK interface
l Auto supervisor
l Watchdog
l Power control
l Advert/facia light control.
Remote Input/Output (RI/O) Board

The RI/O board contains the following subsystems:
l Remote indicator
l Alarms
l Remote relay, deposit solenoid, night deposit 1 (bag) and night deposit 2 (door)
l Reserved I/O port (2 off).
Night Safe Service

The night safe depository service is responsible for the access and control of a Night Safe
Depository device situated next to the ATM. Three types of NSD device are supported:
l The night safe supports monitoring of the bag drop switch only during a deposit
l The ATM:
l Controls the door bolt
l Monitors the bag drop switch during a deposit
l The ATM:
l Controls the door bolt
l Monitors the bag drop switch during a deposit
l Senses that the door has been closed after the deposit.
Alarms Service
The alarms service senses and reports changes in the state of the four security enclosure
sensors. The service polls the input lines and returns an unsolicited response if a change of
state is detected which lasts for at least 200 ms.
Indicators Service
The indicators service is responsible for access and control of the following:
l Remote status monitor

l Remote relay
l In-service indicator
l Facia light
l Remote power on/off

l Watchdog reset.
l Media Entry/Exit Indicators Service
l The media entry/exit indicators service controls media entry/exit indicators as follows:
l Cash dispenser
l Statement printer
l Receipt printer
l Envelope dispenser
l Card reader
l Depository/DPM
l Passbook printer
l Spare.
Board Layouts
The main components on the Misc I/F board are identified in the following illustration:
J2 J1
J3 J5
D1
D2
D3 J4
D4
U37
J7
D8
Diagnostic LEDs Power Indicator LED
The main components on the RI/O board are identified in the following illustration:
J3 J4 J5
REMOTE I/O
SUPPLY
J2 J1
Power Requirement
Typical voltage and current requirements for the Misc I/F board are:
l +24V ± 2.4V @ 1.5A maximum

l +5V auxiliary ±0.5V @ 1.0A maximum
l 3.3V 0.33V @ 1.5A maximum (generated on board from the 5V auxiliary supply).
Typical voltage and current requirements for the RI/O board are:
l +24V ±2.4V @ 2A maximum

l +3.3V ±0.33V @ 100mA maximum (from the Misc I/F).
Note: The above currents do not include external loads.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error message: REPLACE_NOW or INSPECT_NOW Device fault or comms error None Replace
DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostic LEDs
Four diagnostic LEDs are fitted to the Misc I/F board.
J2
D1
D2
Diagnostic LEDs
D3
D4
During level 0 diagnostics after a power-up or hard reset (not after a soft reset) the test ID
is displayed on the programmable LEDs. Once the test is complete, if a failure has
occurred, the test result is displayed on the LEDs for one second followed by the test ID
again for one second. This sequence continues until the board is reset. If no failure occurs,
the next test in the sequence is performed until the entire start-up sequence is complete
and the LEDs are cleared. Once level 0 diagnostics are complete, usage of the LEDs is
device specific.
Note: There is no switch selectable or run-to-run tests provided.
The following table gives the status for the LED codes:
LEDs
Status
D1 D2 D3 D4
On Off On On Bootloader Checksum Fail
Off Off Off On Data Bus Error
On Off Off On Address Bus Error
Off On Off On Internal Data Error
Poly-Switches
The devices powered from the Misc I/F and RI/O boards are protected by resettable poly-
switches. There are no fuses on the boards.
Note: The poly-switches are reset after the fault is cleared and the power in the circuit is
removed. Normal operation is resumed after the device has cooled and the fault has been
cleared. No manual resetting or replacement is required.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

Information not available.
CABLING
Interconnect Diagram
Line Out Facia and Advert Light

MISC I/F Power Control and Status
PC CORE BOARD Public Audio
Private Audio (Headphone + Jack Detect)
USB
FDKs
MEEIs
Display Status
Auto Supervisor
REMOTE I/O Alarms Status

BOARD Remote Status Indicators
Optional Night Deposit
Remote Relay
RIO Enable Harness
RIO MISC_IF P7
RIO MISC_IF P7
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
2
1
2
1
5 5
6 6
3
4
3
4
7 7
8 8
5
6
5
6
9 9
10 10
7
8
7
8
11 11
10
10
9
9
12 12
13 13
12
11
12
11
14 14
15 15
14
13
14
13
16 16
17 17
15
16
15
16
18 18
17
18
17
18
19 19
20 20
20
20
19
19
RIO MISC_IF P7
Miscellaneous Interface Board Connectors
+24V DC Power Connector (J5)
This is a 2-way right angle connector:
Pin Signal
1 +24V DC
2 GND
USB Connector (J2)

This is a 5-way right angle USB mini B-type connector:
Pin Signal
1 BUS_PWR
2 USB_D-
3 USB_D+
4 N/C
5 GND
Audio Line I/P Connector (J1)

This is a 3-way 3.5 mm PCB mount audio jack socket:
Pin Signal
1 SCREEN
2 PC AUDIO RIGHT
3 N/C
4 N/C
5 PC AUDIO LEFT
Every Unit Item Connector (J3)

Signal Pin Pin Signal

+5V_AUX_RTN 1 2 +5V_AUX
FDK2_TOP 3 4 FDK_CONF1
FDK2_LW_MD 5 6 FDK2_UP_MD
FDK_CONF2 7 8 FDK2_BOT
FDK1_TOP 9 10 FDK2_GND
FDK1_LW_MD 11 12 FDK1_UP_MD
FDK_BOT 13 14 FDK1_GND
MEEI5 15 16 +24V
MEEI6 17 18 +24V
MEEI7 19 20 +24V
MEEI8 21 22 +24V
MEEI1 23 24 +24V
MEEI2 25 26 +24V
MEEI3 27 28 +24V

MEEI4 29 30 +24V
FACIA_LIGHT_CTL 31 32 FACIA_LIGHT_CTL_RTN
WDOG_RESET 33 34 WDOG_RESET_RTN
POWER_SHD2 35 36 POWER_SHD2_RTN
POWER_SHD1 37 38 POWER_SHD1_RTN
POWER_STAT_2 39 40 POWER_STAT_2_RTN
POWER_STAT_1 41 42 POWER_STAT_1_RTN
DISP_STAT_D1 43 44 DISP_STAT_D1_RTN
DISP_STAT_D0 45 46 DISP_STAT_D0_RTN
LEFT_OUT+ 47 48 LEFT_OUT-
RIGHT_OUT+ 49 50 RIGHT_OUT-
Feature Connector (J4)


HP_SPK_LEFT 1 2 HP_SPK_LEFT_RTN
HP_SPK_RIGHT 3 4 HP_SPK_RIGHT_RTN
HP_VOL_ADJUST 5 6 HP_VOL_ADJUST_RTN
HP_JACK_DET 7 8 HP_JACK_DET_RTN
AUD_FEAT_DET 9 10 AUD_FEAT_DET_RTN
MEEI9 11 12 +24V
MEEI10 13 14 +24V
MEEI11 15 16 +24V
MEEI12 17 18 +24V
MEEI13 19 20 +24V
MEEI14 21 22 +24V
MEEI15 23 24 +24V
MEEI16 25 26 +24V
ADVERT_LIGHT_CTL 27 28 ADVERT_LIGHT_CTL_RTN
AUTO_SUP_SW 29 30 AUTO_SUP_SW_RTN
AUTO_SUP_DET 31 32 AUTO_SUP_DET_RTN
RESERVED_OUT1 33 34 RESERVED_OUT1_RTN
Remote I/O Interface Connector (J7)


RS_PWR 1 2 CSTS
LED0 3 4 CSTS_RTN
LED1 5 6 DSTS
LED2 7 8 DSTS_RTN
REMOTE_RELAY 9 10 SSTS
DEP_SOLENOID 11 12 SSTS_RTN
ND_BAG 13 14 TSTS
ND_DOOR 15 16 TSTS_RTN
RESERVED_01_RTN 17 18 RESERVED_01
Remote Input/Output Board Connectors

+24VDC Power Connector (J1)
Pin Signal
1 +24V DC
2 GND
Miscellaneous I/O Connector (J2)


RS_PWR 1 2 CSTS
LED0 3 4 CSTS_RTN
LED1 5 6 DSTS
LED2 7 8 DSTS_RTN
REMOTE_RELAY 9 10 SSTS
DEP_SOLENOID 11 12 SSTS_RTN
ND_BAG 13 14 TSTS
ND_DOOR 15 16 TSTS_RTN
Alarms Status Connector (J3)

This is an 8-way right angle connector:
Pin Signal
1 CSTS
2 GND
3 DSTS
4 GND
5 SSTS
6 GND
7 TSTS
8 GND
Reserved I/O Connector (J4)

Pin Signal
1 RESERVED_01
2 RESERVED_01_RTN
3 RESERVED_02
4 RESERVED_02_RTN
Remote Relay and Remote Indicator Connector (J5)

Pin Signal
1 RS_PWR
2 LED 0
3 LED 1
4 LED 2
5 REMOTE RELAY 1A
6 REMOTE RELAY 1B
7 REMOTE RELAY 2A
8 REMOTE RELAY 2B
9 DEPOSIT SOLENOID PWR
10 DEPOSIT SOLENOID RTN
11 ND_BAG
12 NIGHT DEPOSIT BAG RTN
Pin Signal
13 ND_DOOR
14 NIGHT DEPOSIT DOOR RTN
No special tools are required to install the boards.
ENHANCED, EXPRESS BANKING AND MFR

MISCELLANEOUS INTERFACES
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the three analogous Miscellaneous Interfaces: Enhanced, Express
Banking and MFR.
CAUTION
DESCRIPTION
The Miscellaneous Interface consists of two boards, the Enhanced, Express Banking or
MFR Misc IF board and the Remote IO (RIO) board, and a connecting harness.
Enhanced Miscellaneous Interface Board

The board contains the following subsystems:
l Coldfire Core
l MCF5272 processor
l Flash ROM
l SRAM
l EEPROM
l +3.3V Power Regulator
l +12V Power Regulator
l Background Debug Mode (BDM) interface
l Debug interfaces
l Diagnostics LEDs
l Reset
l USB interface
l MEEI Interface
l Public & Private Audio Interface
l Private Handset Interface
l External Microphone Interface
l Microphone Output
l FDK Interface
l Auto Supervisor
l Display Status
l Watchdog
l Power Control
l Fascia Light Control
l Advert Light Control
l Remote Status Indicator
l Alarms
l Remote Relay Interface
l Night Deposit Interface.
Remote Input/Output (RIO) Board

The RIO board contains the following connections:
l Alarm Connector
l I/O Panel Connector
l Reserved Inputs.
Board Layout
Enhanced Miscellaneous Interface Board
J3
J9 J1 J5
DS1
DS2
Diagnostic LEDs
DS3
DS4 J4
J6
J7
J8
DS5
J10 J11 J12 J13 J14 J15

Power Indicator LED
Remote Input/Output (RIO) Board

J3 J4 J5
J1
J2
Public and Private Audio Interface

Enhanced Misc IF
The audio interface takes its audio source from the standard PC audio line output. The
three input signals, Left, Right and Ground, pass through ferrite beads to reduce conducted
emissions from the board. The filtered signals, PC_AUDIO_IN_LEFT, PC_AUDIO_IN_
RIGHT and AUDIO_RTN are AC coupled to the Public Audio (speakers) amplifier and to
the Private Audio (headphone) amplifier.
Express Banking and MFR Misc IF

These variants have 3 & 4 pole jack plug detection. The socket is on the board and detects
the insertion of a jack plug.
Power Requirements
The Enhanced and Express Banking Misc IF boards have the following DC voltages:
l +24V ± 10%
l +12V ± 5% will be generated on board from the +24V supply
l +5V auxiliary ±10% (the auxiliary supply is available whenever mains power is applied
to the ATM PSU)
l +3.3V ± 10% will be generated on board from the 5V auxiliary supply.
The Enhanced and Express Banking Misc I/F board current is:
l +24V supply = 1.5Amps (maximum rms - dependent on MEEI population)

l +12V supply = 300mA (maximum rms)
l +5V auxiliary = 1.0Amps (maximum rms)
l +3.3V supply = 1.5Amps (maximum rms).
The MFR Misc IF board has the following DC voltages:
l +24V ± 10%
l +12V ± 5% will be generated on board from the +24V supply
l +24V auxiliary ± 10% (the auxiliary supply is available whenever mains power is
applied to the ATM PSU)
l +3.3V ± 10% will be generated on board from the 24V auxiliary supply.
The MFR Misc I/F board current is:
l +24V supply = 1.5Amps (maximum rms - dependent on MEEI population)

l +12V supply = 300mA (maximum rms)
l +24V auxiliary = 1.5Amps (maximum rms)
l +3.3V supply = 1.5Amps (maximum rms).
The RIO board has the following DC voltages:
l +24V ± 10%
l +3.3V ± 10%.
The RIO board current is:
l +24V supply = 2 Amps (maximum rms - dependent on loads connected to board)

l +3.3V supply = 500mA (maximum rms).
TROUBLESHOOTING
The following error message is reported by the module. To de-code specific M_Status and
M_Data use the Status Code Translator Tool (available from http://www.infoprod.ncr.com)
or refer to Diagnostic Status Code Notebook (B006-6273).
Error Possible Root Cause Isolation Resolution

REPLACE_NOW Device Fault None Replace Device
INSPECT_DEVICE Comms Error None Connect Device
Replace Cable
Power Fault: None Connect Device
l Mains brownout Check/repair the power supply
l Faulty power supply Check/repair any other connected device(s)
l Persistent mains
power sag
DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostics LEDs
DS1
DS2
Diagnostic LEDs
DS3
DS4
DS5
Power Indicator LED
At board reset the LEDs are driven to the on state and will be turned off during the board
boot sequence. If the LEDs remain on, it is likely that there is a board failure. Once the
board boot sequence has completed, the use of these LEDs is device specific.
Polyswitches
The +3.3VDC to power the Remote Status Indicator is protected by a 300mA self-resetting
polyswitch fuse located on the Enhanced Misc I/F board.
The +24VDC to power the Night Deposit Lock Solenoid is protected by a 300mA self-
resetting polyswitch fuse on the RIO board.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

None.
CABLING
Interconnect Diagram
Audio Line Out Fascia & Advert Lights

Power Control & Status
USB Public Audio
PC CORE Private Audio
MISC IF
Microphone In MASTER BOARD FDKs
MEEIs
Display Status
Reset Auto Supervisor
Private Handset Hookswitch
Private Handset
External Microphone
Alarms Status
Remote Status Indicators
REMOTE IO
BOARD Night Deposit
Remote Relay
Alarms Status
RIO Enable Harness
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
P1 8 8 P2
19 1 9 9 19 1
10 10
11 11
20 2 12 12 20 2
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
20 20
RIO/Advert Light Enable Harness

Advert
1
2 2
1
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
RIO 8 8 MISC IF P7
19 1 9 9 19 1
10 10
11 11
20 2 12 12 20 2
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
20 20
Enhanced Misc IF Board Connectors
2-way right-angled connector.

1 +24V 2 GND
USB Connector (J2)

5-way right-angled USB mini B-type connector.

1 BUS_PW 2 USB_D-
3 USB_D+ 4 NC
5 GND
Audio Line I/P Connector (J1)

Black 3-way 3.5mm PCB mount Audio Jack socket.

1 Screen 2 PC Audio Right
3 Not Populated 4 Not Populated
5 PC Audio Left
Private Handset Microphone I/P Connector (J10)

Pink 3-way 3.5mm PCB mount Audio Jack socket.

1 GND 2 Handset Mic
5 Handset Mic
Private Handset Speaker O/P Connector (J11)

Orange 3-way 3.5mm PCB mount Audio Jack socket.

1 GND 2 Handset Speaker
5 Handset Speaker
Private Handset Hookswitch I/P Connector (J12)

Black 5-way 3.5mm PCB mount Audio Jack socket.

1 GND 2 Hook Switch
3 GND 4 GND
5 GND
Microphone O/P Connector (J13)

Lime 3-way 3.5mm PCB mount Audio Jack socket.

1 GND 2 Mic Output
5 Mic Output
External Microphone I/P Connector (J14)

Blue 3-way 3.5mm PCB mount Audio Jack socket.

1 GND 2 +12V (if populated)
5 External Mic
Every Unit Item (EUI) I/O Connector (J3)


1 GND 2 +5V AUX (+24V AUX for MFR only)
3 FDK2_TP 4 FDK_CONF1
5 FDK2_LW_MD 6 FDK2_UP_MD
7 FDK_CONF2 8 FDK2_BT
9 FDK1_TP 10 GND
11 FDK1_LW_MD 12 FDK1_UP_MD
13 FDK1_BT 14 GND
15 MEEI5 16 +24VDC
17 MEEI6 18 +24VDC
19 MEEI7 20 +24VDC
21 MEEI8 22 +24VDC
23 MEEI1 24 +24VDC
25 MEEI2 26 +24VDC
27 MEEI3 28 +24VDC
29 MEEI4 30 +24VDC
31 FASCIA_LIGHT_CTL 32 GND
33 WDOG_RESETb 34 GND
35 POWER_SHD2 36 GND
37 POWER_SHD1 38 GND
39 POWER_STAT2 40 GND
41 POWER_STAT1 42 GND
43 DISP_STAT_D1 44 GND
45 DISP_STAT_D0 46 GND
47 LEFT_OUT+ 48 LEFT_OUT-
49 RIGHT_OUT+ 50 RIGHT_OUT-
Featurised I/O Connector (J4)


1 HP_SPK_LEFT 2 GND
3 HP_SPK_RIGHT 4 GND
5 HP_VOL_ADJUST 6 GND
7 HP_JACK_DETECT 8 GND
9 AUD_FEAT_DET 10 GND
11 MEEI9 12 +24VDC
13 MEEI10 14 +24VDC
15 MEEI11 16 +24VDC
17 MEEI12 18 +24VDC
19 MEEI13 20 +24VDC
21 MEEI14 22 +24VDC
23 MEEI15 24 +24VDC
25 MEEI16 26 +24VDC
27 ADVERT_LIGHT_CTL 28 GND
29 AUTO_SUP_SW 30 GND
31 AUTO_SUP_DETECT 32 GND
33 RESERVED_OUT1 34 GND
Remote I/O Interface Connector (J7)


1 +3.3VDC 2 CSTS
3 LED0 4 GND
5 LED1 6 DSTS
7 LED2 8 GND
9 REMOTE_RELAY 10 SSTS
11 DEP_SOLENOID 12 GND
13 ND_BAG 14 TSTS
15 ND_DOOR 16 GND
17 GND 18 RESERVED_01
Remote I/O Board Connectors

2 way right angle connector.

1 +24V 2 GND
Miscellaneous I/F Connector (J2)


1 +3.3VDC 2 CSTS
3 LED0 4 GND
5 LED1 6 DSTS
7 LED2 8 GND
9 REMOTE_RELAY 10 SSTS
11 DEP_SOLENOID 12 GND
13 ND_BAG 14 TSTS
15 ND_DOOR 16 GND
Alarms Status Connector (J3)


1 CSTS 2 GND
3 DSTS 4 GND
5 SSTS 6 GND
7 TSTS 8 GND
9 NC 10 NC
Remote Status Indicators, Remote Relay & Night Deposit

Connector (J5)

1 RS_PWR (Protected 3v3) 2 LED 0
3 LED 1 4 LED 2
5 Remote Relay 1 contact A 6 Remote Relay 1 contact B
7 Remote Relay 2 contact A 8 Remote Relay 2 contact B
9 Deposit Solenoid 10 Deposit Solenoid RTN
11 Night Deposit Bag 12 Night Deposit Bag RTN
13 Night Deposit Door 14 Night Deposit Door RTN
Reserved Input Connector (J4)


1 Reserved 2 GND
3 Reserved 4 GND
None.
None.
REMOTE STATUS
INTRODUCTION
The Remote Status Indicator (RSI) gives a remote indication of the state of the ATM.
DESCRIPTION
The RSI is connected, through the I/O panel, to the Miscellaneous Interface board
(connector J8).
The LEDs on the RSI are labelled to suit NCR or IBM requirements as follows:
NCR Standard IBM Compatible

Red SERVICE REQUIRED INTERVENTION REQUIRED
Yellow SUPPLIES REQUIRED BUSY
Green IN SERVICE OPEN
A number may appear on the RSI stating the number of the ATM to which it is connected.
Power Supply
The module draws its power via a +5V fused supply to pin 1 of the connector block.
Resistors on the Miscellaneous interface board limit the current through the LEDs and the
+5 V supply is protected by a 200 mA fuse.
TROUBLESHOOTING
The 200 mA fuse for the +5 V supply is F2 on the Miscellaneous interface board.
DIAGNOSTICS
The control/indication of the three LEDs are as follows:
l Green LED - controlled only by the application to indicate that the terminal is “in-
service/open/available” to the customer
l Yellow LED - controlled only by Self Service System Software (S4) to indicate that a
State Of Health (SOH) condition exists, for example “low on supplies”, which,
although not critical, will require investigation
l Red LED - controlled only by S4 to indicate that a SOH condition exists, for example
“out of supplies”, which must be investigated immediately.
Critical Indication
If the ATM is closed down by the application, owing to a critical failure condition, the green
LED will be extinguished and the red LED will be illuminated.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

None.
CABLING
None.
Internal Connections
None.
MEDIA ENTRY/EXIT INDICATORS
INTRODUCTION
The Media Entry/Exit Indicators (MEEIs) are located next to media entry/exit slots on the
fascia of the ATM. They act as prompts to the customer during specific entry or exit
services.
DESCRIPTION
The MEEI comprises of a series of LEDs mounted on a PCB. Variants of the MEEI can be
linear strips or non-linear profiled boards. The MEEIs are controlled through the
Miscellaneous Interface.
For some entry/exit slots the MEEI may be mounted on a carrier moulding.
MEEI PCB
Carrier Moulding
TROUBLESHOOTING
None.
DIAGNOSTICS
Device Diagnostics
ID
1 Set Speed Input Blink Speed:
Test 1. Quarter Hz
2. Half Hz
3. One Hz
4. two Hz
5. Four Hz
6. Continuous.
2 Indicator This test will flash all of the installed MEEI together for verification then stop flashing for
Test verification.
For the 668X product range, the card slot MEEI has an earth connection which is vital to
prevent MEEI to Skimming Protection System (SPS) interference.
Two connectors are utilised depending on the product.
Male two way connector.
Pin Description
1 24V
2 GND
668X - Male 6 way connector.
Pin Description
1 24V
2 GND
3 NC
4 NC
5 NC
6 NC
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

None.
CABLING
None.
None.
USB DVD RW SLIMLINE DRIVE
INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides information on the USB DVD RW Slimline Drive.
The drive is a DVD-RW and CD-RW drive which has a USB 2.0 interface that supports
DVD video and CD audio playback capability. It reads any standard DVD-ROM and CD-
ROM disks complying with following ECMA standards:
l ECMA–130
l ECMA–267
l ECMA–279
l ECMA–337
l ECMA–338
l ECMA–349
l ECMA–359
l ECMA–371
The drive writes to any standard DVD-R/RW and CD-R/RW disks complying with the
same ECMA standards. The drive uses a tray mechanism which is spring loaded for disk
load and unload. Disks may be loaded or unloaded with the drive in either vertical or
horizontal orientation.
The drive is powered from the USB cable, but requires an additional 5V dc supply from the
product if the drive is used for writing to disks rather than just reading from them.
DESCRIPTION
Dimensions
The table below lists the physical properties of the drive.
Dimension Measurement (excluding the front bezel)

Height 12.7 mm
Width 128 mm
Length 126.1 mm
Mass 172 g or less
Mounting Orientation
The USB DVD RW Slimline drive can be mounted either vertically or horizontally.
Note: The mounting screws are M2, and should not exceed 5.0 mm from the surface of
both sides or the bottom of the drive.
30° or less 30° or less 30° or less 30° or less
Disk Clamp System

To secure and hold the disk, the drive uses a Ball Clamp as its disk clamp system.
Tray Ejecting
The drive uses a spring loaded tray mechanism for loading and unloading a disk.
The tray can be ejected through either of the following options:
l Manual Eject Button

l Emergency Eject Hole
l ATAPI command
Manual Eject Button

This button transmits an electrical signal to the eject mechanism. It is enabled at power on
and may be disabled by software commands.
Press the Manual Eject button located at the front bezel to eject the tray, and load or unload
a disk.
Manual Eject Button
Emergency Eject Hole

For emergencies, push a pin through the emergency eject hole located at the front bezel to
eject the tray.
ATAPI Command
A standard ATAPI command may also eject the tray.
Supported Disk Types

The table below lists the disk types that the DVD RW Slimline drive supports .
Readable Disks Recordable Disks

DVD–ROM DVD–R
DVD–R DVD–R DL
DVDR DL DVD–RW
DVD–RW DVD–RAM (4.7 gb)
DVD+R DVD+R
DVD+R DL DVD+R DL
DVD+RW DVD+RW
DVD–RAM CD–R
CD–DA CD–RW
CD–ROM
CD–R
CD–RW
Read and Write Speed

The table below lists the read and write speed of the drive.
Drive Read Speed Write Speed

DVD-RW 8x CAV 4, 680rpm 2 - 6x(ZCLV)
2 - 4x(ZCLV)
2x (CLV)
1x (CLV)
CD-RW 24x CAV 5, 160rpm 10–24x(ZCLV)
10–20x(ZCLV)
10–16x(ZCLV)
10x(CLV)
4x(CLV)
Power Requirements
The USB DVD RW Slimline drive powers up with an input voltage in the range of 5Vdc,
±5% (4.75 to 5.25V).
The table below lists the current consumption of the DVD RW drive.
Mode Average Current (A) Peak Current (A)

Standby 0.18 -
Sleep 0.17 -
USB Suspend 0.06 -
Write 24x (CD–R) 1.1 -
Active 1.0 -
Random access (Duty 100%) 1.2 1.3
During starting seek - 1.5
During eject - 1.0
ERROR MESSAGES
The DVD RW Slimline drive does not send out error messages. If the drive fails to operate,
perform the following:
1. Check the USB cable connection to the USB hub or Core.

2. Check the disk if it is damaged or scratched. Make sure the drive supports the disk
that is loaded.
3. If the drive fails to write, check the 5 V dc supply to the drive. The drive requires
additional 5 V supply when writing to disks.
4. If the drive still does not operate, replace the DVD drive with a new one.
DIAGNOSTICS
None.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

There are no field replaceable units in the drive.
CABLING
None.
The following illustration shows the rear view of the drive:
DC 5V IN CONNECTOR
USB MINI INTERFACE
PIN 1
USB Mini Interface

The table below lists the pin assignments for the USB mini interface.
Pin Type
1 VCC
2 D-
3 D+
4 ID
5 GND
DC 5 V In Connector
This connector is a 4.0 mm x 1.7 mm, EIAJ RC5320A TYPE2 connector.
The table below lists the pin assignments for the 5 Vdc In connector.
Pin Type
Inner +5 Vdc
Outer Ground
None.
PRESSURISATION FAN
INTRODUCTION
The pressurisation fan draws air into the terminal, pressuring the inside to prevent dust
ingress.
SLIM DVD SATA SUPER MULTI DRIVE
INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides information on the Slim DVD SATA Super Multi Drive.
The drive is a DVD–RW and CD–RW drive which has a Serial ATA interface that supports
DVD video and CD audio playback capability. It reads any standard DVD–ROM and CD–
ROM disks complying with the following ECMA standards:
l ECMA–130
l ECMA–267
l ECMA–279
l ECMA–337
l ECMA–338
l ECMA–349
l ECMA–359
l ECMA–371
The drive writes to any standard DVD–R/RW and CD–R/RW disks complying with the
same ECMA standards. The drive uses a tray mechanism which is spring loaded for disk
load and unload. To secure and hold the disk, the drive uses a Ball Clamp as its disk clamp
system.
DESCRIPTION
Dimensions
The table below lists the physical properties of the drive.
Dimension Measurement (excluding the front bezel)

Height 12.7 mm
Width 128 mm
Depth 129.4 mm
Mass 172 g or less
Tray Ejecting
The drive uses a spring loaded tray mechanism for loading and unloading a disk.
The tray can be ejected through the following options:
l Manual eject button

l Emergency eject hole
l ATAPI command
Manual Eject Button

The eject button transmits an electrical signal to the eject mechanism. It is enabled at
power on and may be disabled by software commands.
Press the Manual Eject button located at the front bezel to eject the tray, and load or unload
a disk.
Manual Eject Button

For emergencies, push a pin through the emergency eject hole located at the front bezel to
eject the tray.
ATAPI Command
A standard ATAPI command may also eject the tray.
Supported Disk Types

The table below lists the disk types that the DVD drive supports.
Readable Disks Recordable Disks

DVD–ROM DVD–R
DVD–R DVD–R DL
DVD–R DL DVD–RW
DVD–RW DVD–RAM (4.7 gb)
DVD+R DVD+R
DVD+R DL DVD+R DL
DVD+RW DVD+RW
DVD–RAM CD–R
CD–DA CD–RW
CD–ROM
CD–R
CD–RW
Read and Write Speed

The table below lists the read and write speed of the DVD drive.
Drive Read Speed Write Speed

DVD–RW 8 x CAV 4, 680 rpm 2 - 6x (ZCLV)
2 - 4x (ZCLV)
2x (CLV)
1x (CLV)
CD–RW 24x CAV 5, 160 rpm 10 - 24x (ZCLV)
10 - 20x (ZCLV)
10 - 16x (ZCLV)
10x (CLV)
4x (CLV)
Power Requirements
The DVD drive powers up with an input voltage in the range of 5 Vdc, ±5% (4.75 to 5.25 V).
The table below lists the current consumption the drive.
Mode Average Current (A) Peak Current (A)

Standby 0.049 -
Sleep 0.049 -
Write 24x (CD–R) 0.8 -
Active 0.7 -
Random access (Duty 100%) 1.0 1.3
During starting seek - 1.5
During eject - 0.7
ERROR MESSAGES
None.
DIAGNOSTICS
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

CABLING
The DVD Super Multi drive uses the following cables to connect to the terminal.
l Kiosk eSATA Core Breakout

l Kiosk DVD eSATA + Power to Slimline SATA
Kiosk eSATA Core Breakout
eSATA 7P
SATA 7P
1 Drain 1 1
2 2
3 3
eSATA 7P 4 Drain 2 4 SATA 7P
Drain 3
5 5
6 6
7 Drain 4 7
Kiosk DVD eSATA + Power to Slimline SATA
Slimline SATA 13P (7P + 6P) eSATA
5 V Power
1 Drain 1 1
2 2
3 3
Slimline SATA 7P 4 Drain 2 4 eSATA
Drain 3
5 5
6 6
7 Drain 4 7
Shield (screen)
1
2 +5 V 3
Slimline SATA 6P 3 (red) 1 5 V Power
4 4
5 GND (black) 2
6
The illustration below shows the rear view of the drive with the connector and pin
assignments.
Pitch Slimline Serial ATA
Pin P1 Pin S1
The DVD Super Multi drive uses a 1.00 mm, 1.27 mm Pitch Slimline Serial ATA Plug with
13 pins as its interface connector.
The table below lists the pin assignments of the Pitch Slimline Serial ATA Plug.
Pin Name Type Description

S1 GND
S2 A+ Differential Signal Pair A
S3 A-
S4 GND
S5 B- Differential Signal Pair B
S6 B+
S7 GND
P1 DP Device Present
P2 +5 V
P3
P4 MD/DA Manufacturing Diagnostic/Device Attention
P5 GND
P6
None.
SIGNATURE CAPTURE
INTRODUCTION
The Topaz SignatureGem LCD 1x5 (T-L462), a signature capture device, is used in
applications that require secure electronic signature of users.
This device includes a tablet (signature pad) where users can sign. It also includes an
active electromagnetic pen that is battery–powered and is tethered to the device.
CAUTION
DESCRIPTION
Functions
The following are the functions of the signature capture device:
l Captures signature for authentication purposes—to verify user identity, remote tellers
can cross–match the user signature against the image that is stored in the user
account details.
l Captures and saves signature for later use—to allow automation of branch activities,
authorized banking personnel can capture the user signature, store in the system, and
use it later to process the user request (for example, opening of a new bank account).
Features
l Interactive LCD screen: While users are signing, the screen displays the electronic ink
under the pen tip; therefore, users can see what they are writing on the signature pad.
l High resolution image: The device captures and stores high resolution images of the
signature.
Dimensions
l External Dimensions:
l Length: 152.4 mm (6.00 in.)
l Width: 3.8 mm (96.52 in.)
l Height: 17.78 mm (0.70 in.)
l Signing Area
l Horizontal: 111.8 mm (4.40 in.)
l Vertical: 33.0 mm (1.30 in.)
l Signature resolution: 10 true points per inch.
l Pen type: 393.7 mm (15.50 in.) tethered pen.
l Tether strap: 1.2 mm (0.5 in.) thick, nylon-coated.
l Software
l ActiveX control
l Java bean
l Biometric verification
l Encryption
l Database-compatible ASCII
l Wintab.
l Compatible with:
l Windows (98, ME, NT, 2000, XP)
l Microsoft Office (Word, Excel)
l Lotus (Notes, Domino)
l Adobe Acrobat
l VB, VC++, Delphi, ASP, EMF.
l Power: +5Vdc, 100mA max. Through PS/2 or USB port.

l Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF): more than 100,000 hours.
l Maximum ratings (non-condensing):
l Operating temperature 0 to 50 C
o
l Storage temperature -20 to 65 C

o
l Humidity 10 to 80%.
ERROR MESSAGES
Error Possible root causes Resolution
Fix The USB cable is Check the USB cable connection at the signature capture module,
communication disconnected at the PC core and at the powered hub. Reconnect the USB cable.
failure The USB cable is
faulty
The signature
capture module is
faulty
USBSIGN The signature Disconnect and reconnect the signature capture module. If this
conrol capture module is fails, replace the device.
electronics faulty
fault
Pen battery Number of Replace the pen battery. Use System Application Device Servicing
end of life estimated possible Menu USB Signature Scanner "Replace Pen Battery" menu to
signature captures confirm battery replacement. For instructions on how to replace
reached (about the batteries, refer to the “FRU Removal and Replacement”
100,000 section in this service chapter.
signatures)
DIAGNOSTICS
For general diagnostic information, see the Diagnostics Overview chapter in the
Device Diagnostics
Note: Looping is allowed on all tests, except on Applet ID 3

ID
Device Name
Device Variant
Tablet Serial Number
Tablet Model Number
Current Sig Library Version
Current Core Driver Version
2 Signature This test checks if the tablet (signature pad) is working properly. The test prompts
Capture Test the user to write on the tablet and checks if the signature capture is successfully
finished. Depending on the signature capture result, the test displays success or
error.
Logs Applet” configuration is set to TRUE (configurable via Property Page). Some banks
that remotely collect logs from the terminal prefer to set the option to FALSE.
1. Displays the menu, which contains all the removable media that is detected on
the system
2. Copies the logs into root directory of the selected drive
3. Prompts the user about the success or failure of the activity.
This applet copies the log files to the removable media even if the signature
capture module is not in a good state. During the process, this applet does not
communicate with the signature capture device; therefore, no device–related
Note:Load the removable media before executing this applet. If the media is
selection menu.
Device Self Test

ID
one.
1 Device Self The device self test executes the following commands in sequence:
Test 1. The Determine state command
2. Signature Capture test
3.End of test
Tallies
Tally Description
Mnemonic
SIGNCAPT Total number of signature scans
BADSCAPT Number of signature captures with invalid results
- Captures resulting in a DEVICE_FAULT
- Signature capture time–out reached (user or hardware problem)
- No or too few signature points after end of signing detected (pen–up threshold)
DEV_ Total device removals (unplug)
REMV
DEV_ARRV Total device arrival (plug-in)
FAILCOMM Total number of communication failures (command is not executed due to a
communication failure)
COMM_ Total number of retries for corrective communication failure (successful retry of failed
RTY command)
COMM_ Total number of commands sent to the device (API calls)
OPS
Strapping
None.
ADJUSTMENTS

ID
one.
Information Device Name
Device Variant
Tablet Serial Number
Tablet Model Number
Current Sig Library Version
Current Core Driver Version
2 SigLib Lob Enable This enables or disables Topaz SigPlus signature scanner library logging.

Replacing the Pen Batteries
Pen barrel Batteries Battery cap
Screw hole Screw hole
To replace the pen batteries, follow these steps:
1. Unlock the screw of the battery cap.

2. Rotate the battery cap counter–clockwise, and then remove it.
3. Remove the batteries.
4. Insert the new batteries with the flat end facing the top of the pen.
Note: Use two #393 batteries.
5. Replace the battery cap. Ensure that the screw holes on the battery cap and on the
pen barrel are properly aligned.
6. Replace the screw, and then lock it.
CABLING
The hard–wired USB cable of the signature capture unit terminates in USB connector Type
A.
Signature Capture Unit USB Type A
USB Interface
Connector Type: USB Type A
Pin Signal
1 VCC
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND
None.
ENHANCED AUDIO
INTRODUCTION
Refer to the following NCR intranet site for publications of Interactive Teller audio settings:
http://www.infoprod.ncr.com/software/BranchServices/InteractiveServices/InteractiveServices.ph
p
Also see the 'Special Procedures' section of the Interactive Teller service manuals for
troubleshooting advice.
CAUTION
DESCRIPTION
Refer to product cabling chapter for distribution diagrams.
DIAGNOSTICS
Tests
The following ‘Sound’ diagnostic tests are available under the ‘Device Diagnostics’ menu in
System Application.
Note: If volume settings are changed by the user during tests, they will revert to the original
settings when the test is complete.
Use the ‘Sound’ configurations available under the ‘Set Device Configuration’ menu to
permanently change the volume settings.
Master Volume Control

Follow all on-screen prompts.
This test enables the user to verify that audio can be heard and to choose the correct
volume setting.
Note: When the Enhanced Sound Hardware is present, supporting a private sound
channel, this test can be performed via the private sound channel. The Jack plug must be
inserted into the Jack socket prior to selecting the test.
The user selects the volume and then a short waveform audio test piece (‘beep’) is played
for no longer than 10 seconds. The volume range offered is from 0 (low) to 255 (high), with
the default being 50.
If the file containing the short test piece cannot be found or if the audio test piece fails to
finish within the 10 seconds then the test terminates and returns a Pass/Fail condition of 0
(Fail).
Looping is allowed for this test.
Microphone Volume Control

This test enables the user to verify that audio can be recorded and at the correct recording
volume setting.
This test can only be selected when the Enhanced Sound Hardware supporting a
Microphone is present, and the ‘Sound Hardware’ setting is set to either ‘Handset And
Microphone’ or ‘Microphone’.
An on-screen prompt will direct the user to set the Microphone recording volume.
An on-screen prompt will then direct the user to record their voice through the microphone
for 10 seconds.
The voice recording will be played back to the user.
Looping is allowed for this test.
When the test is complete, the volume will revert to the original setting.
Jack Sense
This test can only be selected when the Enhanced Sound Hardware, supporting a private
sound channel, is present.
An on-screen prompt will direct the user to insert or remove the Jack plug, and the new
state of the Jack socket will be displayed.
The Enhanced Sound Hardware is returned to automatic mode on test completion.
Self Test
The ‘Sound’ self-test is available under the ‘Device Self-Test’ menu in System Application.
Below are the tests executed as part of self-test based on the ‘Sound Hardware’
configuration setting:
SOUND HARDWARE SETTINGS TESTS

No Handset or Microphone Waveform Audio Public music piece
This is selected when there is no handset and (or) Waveform Audio Private music piece
microphone present and the terminal is not an MIDI sequence Public music piece
Interactive Teller. MIDI sequence Private music piece
Handset and Microphone Waveform Audio Public music piece

This is selected when there is a handset present and Waveform Audio Private music piece
the terminal is an Interactive Teller. Waveform Audio Handset music piece
MIDI sequence Public music piece
MIDI sequence Private music piece
MIDI sequence Handset music piece
Microphone Test
Microphone Waveform Audio Public music piece

This is selected when there is no handset present and Waveform Audio Private music piece
the terminal is an Interactive Teller. MIDI sequence Public music piece
MIDI sequence Private music piece
Microphone Test
A pair of headphones with a 3.5 mm jack are required to perform the private audio tests.
Waveform Audio Tests

For the ‘Waveform Audio’ tests, the you will hear a ‘beep’ sound for no longer than 10
seconds. You are required to verify that the audio is present and at the correct volume.
MIDI Sequence Tests

For the ‘MIDI sequence’ tests, you will hear a piece of music for no longer than 10 seconds.
You are required to verify that the audio is present and at the correct volume.
Microphone Test
For the microphone test (handset or fascia microphone) your voice will be recorded for 10
seconds and the recording will be played back.
If an audio file cannot be found or if the audio test piece fails to finish within the 10 seconds,
the test terminates and returns a condition of 0 (Fail).
If all tests are completed successfully, a condition of 1 (Pass) is returned.
STRAPPING
None.
CONFIGURATION
The following ‘Sound’ configurations are available under the ‘Set Device Configuration’
menu in System Application.
Master Volume Configuration

The volume range offered is 0 (low) to 255 (high), with the current volume setting being the
default.
Microphone Volume Configuration

The volume range offered is 0 (low) to 255 (high), with the current volume setting being the
default.
This configuration is enabled only when the ‘Sound Hardware’ is either set to “Handset
And Microphone” or “Microphone”.
Preserve Audio Level

The possible vales are 0 (Disabed) and 1 (Enabled). The default value is 0.
Private Audio Level
The volume range offered is from 0 (low) to 255 (high), with the current volume setting
being the default.
Public Audio Level

The volume range offered is from 0 (low) to 255 (high), with the current volume setting
being the default.
Sound Hardware
There are three options:
l No Handset or Microphone. Selected when there is no handset or microphone, and

the terminal is not an Interactive Teller.
l Handset And Microphone. Selected when there is a handset and the terminal is an
Interactive Teller.
l Microphone. Selected when there is no handset and the terminal is an Interactive
Teller.

None.
CABLING
Refer to the Enhanced Miscellaneous Interface chapter.
Refer to the Enhanced Miscellaneous Interface chapter.
A pair of suitable headphones with a 3.5 mm jack.
None.
PUBLIC/PRIVATE AUDIO WITH VOLUME

CONTROL
INTRODUCTION
Public/Private audio with volume control provides users of ATMs with access to
controllable audio via a headset.
DESCRIPTION
The main components of the feature are shown below:
Public
Loudspeaker(s)
Motherboard
On-Board sound Universal
or Misc I/F
Soundblaster Line
Level
Audio
Audio Volume
Control Button
Private Audio
Harness Headset Jack
Socket
The four levels of audio volume can be user adjusted using the audio volume control button
located on the facia adjacent to the headset jack socket. Pressing the button increases the
volume level in three steps up to its maximum and a fourth press returns it to its original
volume.
The volume level is reset to the lowest level each time a headset is inserted into the jack
socket. Overall volume level is set from within the application software.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
The volume of the audio line input signal is controlled via the Sound menu, from the Set
Device Configuration menu under Self Service Configuration in System Application.
TEST TOOLS
A pair of suitable headphones with a 3.5 mm jack.
CABLE INFORMATION
The cabling from the facia audio jack socket to the miscellaneous interface is shown below:
AudioAudio
J4 In Out
HP LEFT HP LEFT
Universal Misc Interface Board

1 1 1 1
Heaphone
SHIELD GND SHIELD GND
Socket
2 4 4 4
HP RIGHT HP RIGHT
3 2 2 2
GND DETECT
4 6 6 3
VOL ADJUST
5 5 5
JACK DETECT
Control Button
Audio Volume
7 3 3
9 AUDIO FEAT DETECT GND
10 SENSE
DIAGNOSTICS
The Sound menu is found under the Device Diagnostics menu of System Application. The
sound tests allow you to verify the operation of the enhanced audio system. The following
test are displayed:
l Master Volume Control Test

l Waveform Audio Volume Control Test
l MIDI Sequencer Volume Control Test.
If you select a sound test, enter the volume level and then OK, the selected test plays for
approximately 10 seconds.
The volume range offered is from 0 to 255. The default value is 127 for the master volume
and 255 for both the waveform and midi files.
Looping is allowed on these tests. The test plays repeatedly until cancelled.
The test returns a Fail if the file containing the test piece is not found.
Level 3 Diagnostics
The level 3 diagnostics returned for the digital audio are:
S_DATA
The S_DATA returned for the digital audio are:
S_DATA Meaning
00 GOOD (No error).
TROUBLESHOOTING
Ensure that the line out connector is connected correctly on the motherboard and the
miscellaneous interface board, and that the speaker and private audio connectors are
connected correctly on the miscellaneous interface board. Refer to the Terminal Core &
Comms and the Miscellaneous Devices and Interfaces sections of this manual.
19. SPECIAL PROCEDURES
Interactive Teller Troubleshooting 2136
S1 Currency Dispenser Removal and Replacement 2140
Tilting Display Removal and Replacement 2177
INTERACTIVE TELLER
TROUBLESHOOTING
INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides basic checks on key areas of the Interactive Teller which might affect
performance, and references to sources of further information.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Audio
l Check the audio balance between the unit and the call centre using the Audio Settings
documents at
http://www.infoprod.ncr.com/software/BranchServices/InteractiveServices/Interactiv
eServices.php
l Audio levels can be adjusted in SysApp or through supervisor only, not Windows or
any other means.
l SysApp adjustments: SysApp > 8 Self-Service Configuration > 3 Set Device

Configuration > Select Sound
l Supervisor adjustments: From supervisor > 5 Interactive Teller Diagnostics > 1
Device Tests > 1 Audio Settings and test.
l Optimal audio level for 80 series units are as follows:
Class Software Playback Recording Settings in Sys App

Sys App Audio Sys App Audio Echo Noise Equalizer
test.exe test.exe Cancellation Suppression Profile
6681 Adobe Public: 60 Playback:60 Public:3 Playback:30 Enabled Enabled N/A

Private:75 Private:10
Vidyo Public: 6 Playback:60 Public:30 Playback:30 Disabled Disabled N/A
6682 Adobe Public:27 Playback:27 Public:30 Playback:30 Enabled Enabled N/A
Vidyo Public:27 Playback:27 Public:30 Playback:30 Disabled Disabled N/A
6684 Adobe Public:27 Playback:27 Public:30 Playback:30 Enabled Enabled N/A
Vidyo Public:27 Playback:27 Public:30 Playback:30 Disabled Disabled N/A

6688 Adobe Public: 60 Playback:60 Public:30 Playback:30 Enabled Enabled Outdoor
Private:10
Vidyo Public: 60 Playback:60 Public:30 Playback:30 Disabled Disabled Outdoor
Private:10
l In general, the environment in which the unit is installed will determine the best default
setting for playback volume for that unit. Location, number of units installed, the type
of surfaces in the location and environmental noise such as wind, traffic etc will all
affect volume.
Situation Considerations Adjustments

Branch/vestibule - Quiet. Possibly with hard surfaces Low playback volume for privacy.
single unit which reflect sound. e.g. 20%
Branch/vestibule - Noisy. Possibly with hard surfaces Medium playback volume to
multiple units which reflect sound. cope with busy periods but retain
privacy. e.g 30-40%
Exterior - exposed to Noisy all the time, with extreme Playback up to 100%. If there is
traffic or wind noise peaks. constant noise, may need to
disable noise suppression so that
the system doesn’t cancel out the
customer’s voice.
Unit Position
l Is the unit installed in accordance with the Site Preparation Guide? (Available from
http://infocentral.daytonoh.ncr.com/sst_search).
l Is the unit positioned so that direct light does not fall onto the touchscreen, camera or
scanner, to avoid blinding or wash-out?
l Is the unit positioned so that light falls onto the consumer’s face when using the
camera, so that a quality image can be obtained?
l Is the unit positioned so that traffic and wind noise do not affect the audio performance
of the microphone, handset or speakers?
Power
l The unit must have a dedicated, isolated and properly grounded power supply.
l A power conditioner placed between the power source and the UPS is highly
recommended to prevent problems such as frequent re-boots or communication
errors between devices.
ID Scanner
l Does the scanner produce a clear image of the consumer’s proof of id document?
l Check the scanner firmware is up to date. Minimum firmware driver levels required
are:
l Mark I, part number 497-0473939 (6632 only): not applicable, uses
manufacturer’s driver
l Mark II, part number 445-0740408 (6632 only) or 445-0740717 (6634/8):
version 1.00.00
l Custom NCR part number 445-0750075 (6634/8): version 1.01.00
l When replacing the scanner, check if the cables need to be replaced too because
voltage differs between iterations of the scanner. Refer to the Parts Identification
Manual.
Interactive Teller Camera

l Does the camera produce a clear image of the consumer? If not, use Device
Configuration menu in Sys App to correct image quality.
Microphone
l On 6634 Drive-up only: Check the protective tape over the die cut out for the
microphone. It should look like the one shown below, if not replace it. Use the tab to
expose the adhesive and place the membrane on the inside of the plastic moulding to
protect the microphone.
Signature Capture
Initial troubleshooting for any problems with the signature capture scanner is to replace the
battery in the pen. Use a standard 393 button cell battery.
Handset
Initial troubleshooting for any problems with the handset is to check the board and replace if
necessary.
Coin Dispenser
Is the chuter properly fitted to the inner facia, to allow coins to roll smoothly from dispenser
to coin bowl?
Scalable Deposit Module

l Is the SDM clean and free from debris? For detailed cleaning instructions refer to the
SDM chapter in the Preventive Maintenance section of this manual.
l Has all packaging materials been removed?
l Refer to the Scalable Deposit Module chapter of this manual for detailed
Troubleshooting Procedures.
S1 CURRENCY DISPENSER REMOVAL

AND REPLACEMENT
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the removal and replacement of the Front and Rear Access
currency dispensers from the SelfServ range of ATMs.
As this type of dispenser has been developed and manufactured to meet EU RoHS
compliance guidelines it should only be serviced using appropriate RoHS compliant parts.
Presenter Options
The following variants of presenter are available:
l Rear Access (short transport)

l Rear Access (mid transport)
l Rear Access (long transport)
l Front Access.
Pick Modules
The Dispenser can use the Aria or the 56XX enhanced single and double pick modules.
The Aria pick modules are described in the Aria pick module chapter of the dispense
section of this manual. The description of the 56XX type is in the Aria Pick Module section
of the Dispense chapter of this manual.

The SelfServ range of ATMs can be configured with either Single or Dual Dispenser. The
removal instructions are the same for single and dual configurations.
It is advisable that prior to the removal of any pick module that the currency cassettes be
removed so as to reduce the weight of the module.
The currency dispenser is removed by dismantling it into manageable sections as

described below.
1. Removal of In Service Replenishment Covers.

2. Removal of Lower Pick Module.
3. Removing the Electronics Box (Rear Access).
4. Removing the ICS Module.
5. Removing the Control Board.
6. Removal of Upper Pick Module.
7. Removing the Presenter Module.
The dispenser replacement is described below.
1. Replacing the Presenter Module.

2. Replacing the Upper Pick Module.
3. Replacing the Electronics Box
4. Replacing the Lower Pick Module.
5. Replacing the Control Board.
6. Replacing the ICS Module.
7. Control Board Authentication.
8. Dispense Protection Configuration.
9. Replacing the In Service Replenishment Covers
10. Currency Evaluation Qualification Procedure.
11. Diagnostics.
12. Adjustments.
Removal of In Service Replenishment Covers

It may be necessary to remove in service replenishment covers as appropriate to gain
access to the various parts of the dispenser prior to removal. Any cover and fixing screws
removed should be retained for refitting after the dispenser has been reassembled.
Removal of Lower Pick Module

1. The lower pick module for either front or rear access presenters is removed by firstly
disconnecting the inter pick harness between the two pick modules as shown below.
2. Disconnect the vacuum tubing which supplies the lower pick unit by pushing the
upper vertical tube fully home and squeezing the yellow ring and then pulling the
vertical tube out of the tee connector.
3. Loosen the four toggle latches on the lower pick module by inserting a flat bladed
screw driver and lifting in the direction of the arrow to release the latches.
4. Carefully disengage both latches on one side and allow the pick module to swing
down and hang on the other two.
5. The next step is to carefully lift the pick module off the two remaining latches.
Replacing the Lower Pick Module

Fitting a replacement lower pick module is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Removing the Electronics Box (Rear Access)

On the rear access currency dispenser the electronics box contains the main motor and
pump assembly, solid state relay, and motor run capacitor. It also provides a mounting
place for the dispenser control board. Its removal gives access to these components and
also to the LVDT assembly.
Dispenser Motor
Dispenser Control
Board
Electronics Box
Remove the electronics box as follows:
1. Disconnect the cable at the bottom left-hand side of the control board.
2. Push out the cable ties holding the harness to the top and left-hand side of the
control board cover.
3. Loosen the two screws on the left-hand side of the control board cover.
Screw
Harness
Control Board
Cover
Screw
Cable
4. Unscrew and remove the screw at the bottom right-hand side of the control board
cover.
7. Disconnect the cables from the lower right-hand side of the electronics box.
the USB cable must be carefully released prior to removal.
Dispenser
Harness
Cables
Screw
9. Unscrew and remove the two screws securing the green turning wheel in position.
10. Remove the green turning wheel from the presenter drive wheel and then ease off
the timing belt.
Screws
Timing Belt
11. Remove and retain the two plastic rivets securing the timing disk sensor in position
by pushing the rivet centre on the timing disk side of sensor. Move the sensor clear
of the timing disk.
Plastic Timing Disk

Rivets Sensor
12. Loosen the four main motor mounting screws and ease the timing belt off the rear of
the timing disk gear towards the presenter side frame.
13. Lift the timing belt over the timing disk.
Timing Belt
Screws
(4 off)
14. At the upper left-hand side of the electronics box remove the screw attaching the
earth strap to the presenter.
Screw
Earth
Strap
15. Remove the air hose from the pump.
Air Hose
16. Remove the two top screws (1 each side) holding the electronics box to the
presenter.
17. Remove the two bottom screws (1 each side) holding the electronics box to the
upper pick module.
18. Lift the electronics box to release its hooks from the presenter tie shaft and lift it clear
of the dispenser.
Replacing the Electronics Box

Fitting a replacement electronics box is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Removing the Control Board

Dispenser Control Board - Rear Access
Screw
Harness
Control Board
Cover
Screw
Cable
3. Unscrew and remove the screw on the bottom right-hand side securing the control
board cover to the electronics box.
Dispenser
Harness
Cables
Screw
7. Unscrew and remove the two screws securing the IC heat sink to the mounting
bracket.
8. Unscrew and remove the four screws securing the control board to the electronics
box and then remove the control board.
Removal of Fluiditi Security Module

If the dispenser is fitted with a Fluiditi security system (also known as ICS) then it must be
decommissioned prior to its removal. The decommisioning information is contained in the
Fluiditi Replenishment Security and Fluiditi ATM Security chapters in the security sections
of these manuals.
The Fluiditi module should be removed and refitted as per agreed procedures.
The system should be commissioned at the appropriate time during the replacement of the
dispenser.
Dispenser Control Board - Front Access

3. Unscrew and remove the screw on the bottom right hand side securing the control
board cover to the pick module.
4. Remove the control board cover from the pick module.
5. Push out the cable ties holding the dispenser harness.
7. Unscrew and remove the two screws securing the IC heat sink to the mounting
bracket.
8. Unscrew and remove the four screws securing the control board to the mounting
bracket and then remove the control board.

Re-fitting the existing control board is the reversal of the removal procedure.
The only additional actions required to verify the new board are: Control Board
Authentication, Control Board Authorisation and Currency Evaluation Qualification
procedures.
Removal of Upper Pick Module

Rear Access
1. The upper pick module for the rear access presenter is removed by firstly
disconnecting the inter pick harness between the presenter and the pick module as
shown below.
2. Disconnect the vacuum tubing which connects the pick module to the presenter at
the first tee connector as shown below by pushing the pushing the yellow ring
towards the Tee-piece while pulling the filter in the opposite direction.
3. Loosen the four toggle latches on the upper pick module by inserting a flat bladed
screwdriver and lifting in the direction of the arrow to release the latches.
Front Access
On the front access ATM the control board is attached to the upper pick module.
1. The interpick harness and the vacuum tubing are disconnected in the same manner
as the rear access version.
2. Disconnect the harness connectors from the control board as described in the
Removing the Control Board section to release the control board from both the
harness and the presenter module. Remove the two fixing screws that hold the
control board mounting assembly to the upper pick module and then remove the
control board and mounting assembly.
3. Loosen the four toggle latches on the upper pick module by inserting a flat bladed
screwdriver and lifting in the direction of the arrow to release the latches.
Replacing the Upper Pick Module

Fitting a replacement upper pick module is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Removing the Presenter Module

Rear Access
The presenter module is removed as follows:
1. Remove the two securing screws that lock the presenter slides to the presenter
module as shown by the two arrows below.
2. Carefully slide the presenter module location studs off the slides and remove.
Front Access
The presenter module is removed as follows:
1. Remove the two securing screws that lock the presenter slides to the presenter
module as shown by the two arrows below.
2. Carefully slide the presenter module location studs off the slides and remove.
Replacing the Presenter Module

Fitting a replacement presenter module is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Control Board Authorisation

The following procedure must be carried out if the control board is replaced as part of the
dispenser unit or separately as an FRU item. The following steps require the Parts
Replacement Service Key for activation.
1. Select the DEVICE STATUS LIST option from the SYSTEM APPLICATION menu.
2. Select the device status reporting AUTHORISATION REQUIRED on the Cash
Dispenser option.
3. Select the required part to be authorised.
4. The system will display a screen confirming the test is being performed.
5. If the part is authorised the following screen is displayed.
6. Once authorisation is complete the DEVICE STATUS LIST screen is redisplayed.

7. If the part is not authorised the system will display a summary report screen stating
the test has failed.
8. If the authorisation fails then repeat steps 1 to 6 after ensuring that the service key
being used is correctly inserted and has appropriate authorisation security level.
Control Board Authentication

The dispenser has the following levels of dispense protection:
l USB
l Logical
l Physical.
To authenticate a control board when configuration is physical or command is accessed

through System Application via the Parts Replacement Service Key with a logical
configuration. The following procedure must be carried out if the control board is replaced
as part of the dispenser unit or separately as an FRU item. The procedure must also be
carried out if the PC Core and/or hard disk are replaced or if the hard disk has been
reformatted or ghosted.
Note: If configuration is logical use all steps except 5 and 6. If the configuration is physical
use all steps. If the configuration is USB no action is required.
1. Select the SELF-SERVICE CONFIGURATION option from the SYSTEM

APPLICATION menu.

3. Then select the USB CASH DISPENSER option.
4. Then select the AUTHENTICATE option.
5. The AUTHENTICATE option will display the following screen.
6. The user should change the state of the dispenser security toggle switch or
remove/replace the cassette located in the lowest configured and populated position
of the dispenser unit, or insert a cassette into the lowest possible configured position
of the dispenser unit within 1 minute to make the system attempt to authenticate the
board.
7. If the system fails to verify the control board the following screen is displayed.
8. The user should select the OK button which will return them back to the USB CASH
DISPENSER menu and repeat steps 4,5 and 6.
9. If the system verifies the board the following screen is displayed.
10. Once the board has been verified the user should return to the SYSTEM
APPLICATION menu and proceed with the Currency Evaluation Qualification
Procedure if required.

The following procedure must be carried out if the control board is replaced as part of the
dispenser unit or separately as an FRU item. The procedure must also be carried out if the
PC Core and/or hard disk are replaced, or if the hard disk has been reformatted or
ghosted.
Note: Dispense configuration comes in three versions ie: USB dispense, logical dispense
and physical dispense.
To change dispense configurations as listed below use all the following steps except 7:
l USB to logical
l logical to physical
l USB to physical
To change security configurations as listed below use all the following steps:
l physical to logical
l logical to USB
l physical to USB

APPLICATION menu.
3. Then select the USB CASH DISPENSER option.
4. Then select the DISPENSE PROTECTION CONFIGURATION option.
5. The system will display the following screen.
6. Use the toggle option to select the appropriate dispense protection level required.
Once the correct option has been selected use OK option to display the following
screen.
7. The user should change the state of the dispenser security toggle switch or remove
the cassette located in the lowest configured and populated position of the dispenser
unit, or insert a cassette into the lowest possible configured position of the dispenser
unit within 1 minute to change configuration.
8. If the system fails to verify the control board the following screen is displayed.
9. The user should select the OK button which will return them back to the USB CASH
DISPENSER menu and repeat steps 4 to 7 inclusive.
10. Once the configuration has been verified the user should return to the SYSTEM
APPLICATION menu and proceed with the Currency Evaluation Qualification
Procedure if required.
Currency Evaluation Qualification Procedure

Note: The currency dispenser is calibrated in the same way as the other dispensers in the
58XX and 56XX ranges of ATMs and singularity values previously calculated for these are
valid.
When the first dispenser is received in each country the local Field Engineering
organization must establish the singularity values for each type of currency to be
dispensed. These singularity values must then be entered to every ATM dispensing that
currency, upon initial installation or whenever the dispenser control board or the LVDT has
been changed or repaired.
The currency evaluation qualification procedure can only be performed on a calibrated

dispenser. Attempting the procedure on an uncalibrated or incorrectly calibrated dispenser
will give incorrect results.
Calibrating the Dispenser

Note: Dispensers are shipped pre-calibrated by the manufacturing plant. Calibration is
required if the LVDT or control board are replaced or NVRAM is corrupted or a new
version of firmware is down loaded.
The dispenser maintains an internal compensation factor in NVRAM on the dispenser

control board. This compensation factor allows for differences that exist between the
singularities calculated by different LVDT assemblies because of mechanical tolerances.
The dispenser adjusts the LVDT compensation factor automatically as bills of a known
singularity value are dispensed. While bills are dispensed the actual average of good single
bill singularities is measured over 255 bills. This average is compared to the singularity
figure typed in at installation time and the compensation factor is adjusted accordingly.
Initially the compensation factor is set to 80H (equivalent to 1.00) and this is changed
automatically by the dispenser and updated every 255 bills.
To achieve dispenser calibration at least 255 bills of a known singularity must be

dispensed. This may be local currency or test media.
The following procedure describes how to calibrate a dispenser on a terminal running on

the XP platform using SYSTEM APPLICATION. If configuring dual dispensers you will use
the SYSTEM APPLICATION on NT and should refer, for details to the publication B006-
6167-A000, “Self-Service Platform Software, Personas (PLATFORM For Windows XP),
System Application User Guide”.
Level 1 diagnostic tests are required to dispense cash and for this reason you need to insert
the field engineer’s Service key.
The procedure is as follows:
1. For each cassette type, adjust the cassette guides if necessary to accept the test
currency, and set the cassette magnets for the required cassette type. Refer to
currency cassette chapter in the dispense section of this manual for details.
2. Load the test currency into the cassettes.
APPLICATION MAIN MENU.
7. Then select the USB CASH DISPENSER option. The system will then instruct the
CE to wait while the dispenser transport is cleared.
8. The system with display the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu.
9. Then choose the SET option.
10. The system will then display the NOTE CONFIGURATION set up menu as shown
below. The menu is spread over two pages which is navigated using page up and
page down options.
11. To start changing the note configuration, select the Reset option.
12. Enter note size for type 1. This is repeated for types 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7.
13. Enter the singularity for type 1. This is repeated for types 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7.
14. To accept all the changes made, select OK.
YES.
17. Return to the SYSTEM APPLICATION main Menu and select the DEVICE
DIAGNOSTIC option.
18. Select the CASH HANDLER option from the DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC menu.
19. Operate the dispenser security switch.
20. Select SET NOTES option from the USB CASH DISPENSER menu. The number
of notes to be picked is 40 from cassette type 1
21. Change the Loop Off option to Loop On.

22. Select the DISPENSE option and allow the loop count to reach at least 7 before
stopping the command.
The dispenser is now calibrated and you can evaluate the currency to be dispensed as
described in the next section.
Establishing Singularity and Size

In this procedure you have to cause the ATM to calculate the singularity and size of 40
dispensed bills five times for each currency you wish to evaluate. Due to the nature of the
currency the singularity calculated may vary for each attempt. Add the five figures and take
the average (divide by five and round to the nearest whole number) and the answers are
the singularity and size values you enter to the ATM and to all ATMs using the same
currency.
To achieve a good singularity figure the currency loaded for this procedure should
up and upside down (see the following illustration). This makes sure that variations in inking
are allowed for.

dispensing from the ATMs. Refer to currency cassette chapter in the dispense
section of this manual for the method of adjusting cassettes to currency size.
2. Set the cassette magnets to indicate cassette types 1, 2, 3 and 4 as required. Refer
to currency cassette chapter in the dispense section of this manual for this setting
3. Load at least 200 bills of each denomination of the currency into the cassettes.
6. Select the SYSTEM APPLICATION option from the ATM opening menu.
APPLICATION menu.
8. Then choose the SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION option.
9. Then choose the USB CASH DISPENSER option from the SET DEVICE
CONFIGURATION menu. The system will display the following screen.
10. Select the NOTE CONFIGURATION option.

11. Then choose the LEARN option.
12. Select the SET NOTES option to change the number of bills to be dispensed during
the LEARN process.
13. The system will display the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu showing the types
available as shown below.
Note: The menus only show the cassette types present in the ATM.
14. Select Type 1 from the menu shown below and the system will display the menu
below which allows you to change the number of bills to be dispensed.
15. Return to NOTE CONFIGURATION menu and activate Type 1.

16. The system will perform a test and return the message shown below.
17. The system will return to the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu.

18. Make a note of the singularity and size figures on the screen against the cassette
and type selected or all cassette types if applicable.
20. Repeat steps 11 to 18 until you have five readings of singularity and size for each
cassette type loaded.
21. Add each set of five figures and divide the total by five to obtain an average
singularity and size for each cassette type.
22. Select the PARAMETER option from the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu.
23. Modify as appropriate the parameters you require to change.
24. To accept all the changes made select OK and the changes will be accepted.
YES.
27. Return the system to the SYSTEM APPLICATION MAIN menu.
The procedure is now complete. From the UTILITIES menu you can now enter level 1
A reject rate less than 1.5% must be achieved when dispensing an average of 2.5 notes
per transaction. If the reject rate is greater than this the singularity and size values should
be recalculated.

The reject rate is calculated using the following formula. The numbers for rejected bills and
total bills picked are taken from tallies.

Reject Rate = × 100%
Error Messages
Errors occurring during bill configuration procedures result in the error messages
described below.
Dispenser Clear Transport Error

When the DISPENSER BILL CONFIG option is selected from the CONFIGURATION
menu a CLEAR command is sent to clear the transport of any bills. If the clear operation
fails then the following error screens shown below are displayed. Each screen is displayed
for five seconds before the next one is displayed. You return to the CASH HANDLER

The currency parameters are checked for errors as they are entered. If an error is detected
then the error message shown below is displayed. The incorrect entry is highlighted and
you can re-enter a correct value in the error position.
The message is shown for five seconds and then you are prompted to enter the new
parameter value again. Once all the parameter values have been changed and checked,
the main dispenser screen reappears with the new parameter values. If a mistake
becomes apparent at this point then the user can select CHANGE again.
The dispenser parameter error messages are as follows:
l ERROR - VALID RANGE XX - XXX - Parameter value is outside the permissible

range. This applies to bill sizes and singularity values
l DUPLICATE VALUE IN SEQUENCE - A duplicate value has been entered in the

presentation order
l ERROR - INVALID SEQUENCE - The user has input fewer than four values for the
presentation order.
Learn Parameter Errors

Cassette Errors During Learn - If an attempt to learn the parameters from a particular
cassette type fails then, providing the error is not fatal, the operation will be tried repeatedly
until successful, or a fatal error occurs. Should a fatal error occur then the error screen
shown below appears, and after five seconds, you are returned to the NOTE
CONFIGURATION menu.
Dispenser Error During Learn - The following screen appears if a fatal dispenser error
occurs while learning parameters from the dispenser. Any changes made up to this point
can not be written to the dispenser therefore you are returned to the CASH HANDLER
Dispenser Read/Write Errors - If, while communicating with the dispenser, an error
occurs which is not fatal, then the operation is tried repeatedly until it is successful or until a
fatal error occurs. When a fatal error is encountered then a DISPENSER COMMS
ERROR screen showing one of the following messages is displayed. The CONFIG MENU
activator on the screen returns you to the configuration menu.
l UNABLE TO READ PARAMETERS - A fatal error has occurred while reading data
from the dispenser. Unable to read the currently configured dispenser parameters so
can not continue with configuration.
l CONFIGURATION NOT COMPLETED - Fatal error while writing data to the
dispenser. The configuration data is written to the dispenser NVRAM using three
separate dispenser calls. One sets the new bill sizes, one sets the new singularity
values and the third sets the new presentation order. Because the data is split into
three parts, if this type of error occurs then the dispenser configuration is incomplete.
Pick Module Timing

The dispenser does not require any timing relationship to be set between the action of the
pick modules and the presenter. The pick module to pick module relationship does,
however, still require to be set. The adjustment procedures are described in Aria pick
module chapter of the dispense section of this manual.
DIAGNOSTICS
None
STRAPPING
None
ADJUSTMENTS
Drive Belt Tension
Proceed as follows to adjust the tension of the drive belt from the main motor to the
intermediate pulley. Refer to the illustrations following the procedure for each type of
dispenser.
l Check for a deflection of 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) when a force of 1.0 N (0.21 lb.) is applied to
the mid span of the drive belt.
l If the tension is wrong, loosen the four motor mounting screws.
l Move the main motor to adjust the belt tension.
l Tighten the screws and check the tension again.
l Repeat the adjustment until the correct tension is achieved.
Drive Belt Arrangement - Rear Access
1.0 N (0.21 lb)
Motor Mounting Screws

(4 places)
Drive Belt Arrangement - Front Access
None.
TILTING DISPLAY REMOVAL AND

REPLACEMENT
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the removal and replacement of the Tilting Display Field
Replaceable Units (FRUs) from the following products:
l NCR SelfServ 34 Drive Up (6634)

l NCR SelfServ 38 (6638)
Refer to the Tilting Display chapter in this manual for device information.
WARNING
Disconnect power from the tilting display mechanism before
carrying out any FRU removal or replacement tasks.
Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)

l Motor Assembly
l Rain Gutter
l Touchscreen Assembly
l Home Position Flag
l Control PCB Assembly
l Core DC Hub Assembly
l Outer Bezel (6634 only)
l Interlock Plunger Assembly (6638 only)
REVISION
September 2014 A.1 New Publication
September 2014 A.2 Updated - Cash Acceptor Recycler
Updated - Scaleable Deposit Module
Updated - Alarms
December 214 A.3 Removed - Universal Misc I/F
Added - Enhanced Misc I/F
Added - Videology Camera
January 2015 A.4 Added - PM S2 Currency Dispenser
Updated - PM Safes
Updated - S1 Dispenser
Added - S2 Cassette
Updated - Alarms
March 2015 A.5 Merged 6634/AIT
February 2016 A.6 Updated - USB IMCRW
Updated - Dynamo Display
Updated - Page Turning Passbook Printer
Updated - ID Scanner
Added - AIT Troubleshooting
June 2015 A.7 Updated - Cash Acceptor Recycler
Updated - SPS Motorised
September 2016 A.8 Updated - Product Cabling
Updated - Product Cabling AIT
Updated - PC Core
Updated - USB IMCRW
Updated - BNA3
January 2017 A.9 Updated - S1 Dispenser
Updated - Enhanced Audio
April 2017 B.1 Publication Format Conversion
July 2017 B.2 Updated - Cash Acceptor Recycler
Updated - PC Core
Updated - SDM
Added - CCRII
September 2017 B.3 Updated - AIT Troubleshooting
Updated - Enhanced Audio
Updated - CCTV

December 2017 B.4 Updated - PC Core
Updated - Product Cabling
Updated - AIT Product Cabling
January 2018 B.5 Updated - Product Cabling
May 2018 B.6 Updated - UPS
November 2018 B.7 Updated - uEPP3-4
Updated - Statement Passbook
Updated - Diagnotics Overview
July 2019 B.8 Updated - PC Core
Updated - S2 Dispenser PM
Updated - Product Cabling
September 2020 B.9 Updated - PC Core
Updated - Analogue CCTV Camera

Manual Servicio NCR 6634

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Servicio NCR 6634

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Servicio NCR 6634

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NCR SelfServ 34 ATM/IAT

It is the policy of NCR Corporation to improve products as

All features, functions and operations described herein may not

Therefore, before using this document, consult with your NCR

NCR SelfServ34 AIT Reference Document and Safety

preventive maintenance overview 7

Security Enclosure Heaters 20

5285 business depository preventive maintenance 22

USB 2D Barcode Reader (UBAR) 24

Bunch Note Acceptor (UD-686 or BNA2) 25

Bunch note acceptor (BNA3) preventive maintenance 35

CArd readers preventive maintenance 46

Cash Acceptor & REcycler Preventive Maintenance 47

Coin Dispenser Preventive Maintenance 70

itran 1000 check processor (CPM4) Preventive maintenance 71

Envelope Depository and Dispenser Preventive Maintenance73

Open Statement Printer 77

USB Receipt Printer 88

Scalable Check Processing Module (SCPM) Preventive

Scalable Deposit Module 92

Pressurisation Fan 103

S1 Currency Dispenser 105

S2 Currency Dispenser 118

Diagnostics Overview 121

6634 Product Cabling 149

6634 Interactive Teller Product Cabling 221

Universal 24V Power supply (600W) 293

UNINTERUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 300

6. CORE AND COMMUNICATIONS

USB 7 Port Hub 312

Talladega PC Core 320

Pocono PC Core 369

card protection 539

USB Contactless Card Reader 547

USB Contactless Card Reader 2 556

USB IMCRW 567

USB Smart Dip Card Reader 568

USB Smart Dip Card Reader (Sankyo) 573

8. KEYBOARDS AND ENCRYPTORS

FDKs and Bezels 578

QWERTY Keyboard 591

China Encrypting Pin Pad (USBCPIN) 595

Universal Encrypting Pin Pad (III) and (IV) 605

Standard Brightness Colour Displays 617

Sunlight Readable Colour Displays 627

Backlight Displays 638

Universal 12.1” and 15” Touchscreens 643

15 Inch Dynamo Displays 653

15 inch Touchscreen 665

Graphical Operator Panel 674

Compact Operator panel 681

Surface Wave Touchscreen 692

Tilting Display 698

Colour Portrait Camera (USB) 713

DView Camera 717

Video Streaming Camera 725

USB Fanfold Statement Printer 734

USB Journal Printer 770

Page Turning Passbook Printer 785

USB Receipt Printer 860